OSN 8800 6800 3800 V100R007C02 Hardware Description 03

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
V100R007C02
Hardware Description
Issue 03
Date 2013-05-16
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2013. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com
Issue 03 (2013-05-16) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
i
About This Document
Related Versions
Product Name Version
OptiX OSN 8800 V100R007C02
iManager U2000 V100R008C00
iManager U2000 Web LCT V100R008C00

Intended Audience
This document describes the hardware feature of a cabinet and each subrack, in addition to
application, working principle, front panel, and specifications of each board.
This document is intended for:
l Network Planning Engineer
l Hardware Installation Engineer
l Installation and Commissioning Engineer
l Field Maintenance Engineer
l Network Monitoring Engineer
l Data Configuration Engineer
l System Maintenance Engineer
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Hardware Description About This Document
ii
Symbol Description
DANGER
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not
avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
WARNING
Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which
if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not
avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,
performance degradation, or unexpected results.
TIP
Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save
time.
NOTE
Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement
important points of the main text.

Diagram Conventions
The diagram conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention Description
Indicates the flow of optical signals.
Indicates the flow of electrical signals.
Indicates an optical module.
Indicates an electrical module.
All modules of a board are inside such a block in bold.

GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
iii
Convention Description
Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles
are in boldface. For example, click OK.
> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"
signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Change History
Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue contains
all updates made in previous issues.
Updates in Issue 03 (2013-05-16) Based on Product Version
V100R007C02
This issue is the third official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R007C02. Compared
with the manual for the previous version, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.
Update Description
LOA Functions and
Features
Deleted the InfiniBand 2.5G and InfiniBand 5G services.
FIU Panel Changed the description of the MON/OUT port power split ratio for
the TN13FIU02 board into the following sentence: The MON port
is a 0.1/99.9 tap of the total composite signal at the OUT port (30
dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pout
(dBm) - Pmon (dBm) = 10 x lg (99.9/0.1) = 30 dB).
TOA Functions and
Features
Deleted the FE electrical port feature for the TOA board.

V100R007C02
This issue is the second official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R007C02.
Compared with the manual for the issue 01, the manual of this issue contains the SPC100 and
SPC200 related information.
Update Description
Whole manual Changed the required U2000 version from V100R008C01 to
V100R008C00.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
iv
Update Description
1 Cabinet l Optimized the cabinet descriptions. The N63B and N66B
cabinets are described through comparison.
l Added requirements on subrack configurations inside a
cabinet.
LTX Application
ND2 Application
NO2 Application
NQ2 Application
NS3 Application
NS4 Application
Revised the description of relay mode of line boards as follows:
When optical-layer ASON and electrical-layer ASON are
enabled, it does not matter whether the Board Mode parameter
is set to Optical Relay Mode or Electrical Relay mode. The
parameter must be set to Optical Relay Mode for the line board
in a non-ASON system; otherwise, end-to-end management of
ASON services is not available.
14.22 TTX
14.20 TSC
Added information about latency measurement.
13.12 LOA Added information about InfiniBand 2.5G, InfiniBand 5G,
FC1200, FICON10G, and 10GE LAN services.
NPO2E Functions and
Features
NPO2 Functions and
Features
ENQ2 Functions and
Features
Added information about electrical-layer ASON.

V100R007C02
This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R007C02. Compared
Update Description
Whole manual Added information about the TN52NS2T04, TN52NS2T05,
TN52NS2T06, TN52NS201M01, TN52NS201M02,
TN52ND2T04, TN14LSX, TN54TTX, and TN54TSC boards.
Added information showing that the OptiX OSN 8800 platform
subrack supports the TN12LDM, TN12LOM, TN13LQM,
TN12LSX, TN14LSX, TN12LSXL, TN52TOM, TN12LWXS, and
TN11LWX2 boards.
21.12 TN16UXCM Added information explaining that the TN16UXCM board supports
centralized grooming of ODU4 signals.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
v
Update Description
14.7 NS4
14.3 NO2
Added information explaining that the NS4 and NO2 boards can be
used as line boards on the OptiX OSN 8800 T16.
14.11 TEM28 Added information explaining that the TEM28 board newly supports
the 10GE WAN service.

V100R007C00
This issue is the third official release for OptiX OSN 8800 V100R007C00. Compared with the
manual for the issue 02, the manual of this issue contains the SPC200 related information.
Update Description
Whole manual l Optimized the subrack ventilation system diagram.
l Changed the power consumption of the subrack in typical
configuration.
l Added descriptions of the mounting ear.
13.11 LEX4
13.10 LEM24
14.8 TBE
14.11 TEM28
Added the number of virtual bridges (VBs) supported by the board.
Revised the descriptions of the TBE board cross-connect capacity.
13.19 LSC
13.25 LTX
14.7 NS4
Changed the board power consumption.

V100R007C00
This issue is the second official release for OptiX OSN 8800 V100R007C00. Only the issue
number is updated.
Update Description
Whole manual Added information about the TN23SCC board.
Added information showing that the OptiX OSN 8800 platform
subrack supports the TN11LSQ, TN13LSX, TN11LOA, TN12LSC,
TN12LOG, TN12TMX, TN11LTX, and TN12LDX boards.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
vi
Update Description
13.19 LSC Deleted the OTU4 service type for the LSC board.
13.10 LEM24 Added information showing that the LEM24 board supports the
OptiX OSN 3800.
13.19 LSC
13.25 LTX
14.7 NS4
Added the SDFEC error correction mode and 55000ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC)-PIN optical
modules for these boards.
14.7 NS4
14.3 NO2
Deleted the information that shows the NS4 board supports OptiX
OSN 8800 T16 subracks, OptiX OSN 8800 platform subracks, and
OptiX OSN 6800 subracks.
Deleted the information that shows the NO2 board supports OptiX
OSN 8800 platform subracks and OptiX OSN 6800 subracks.

V100R007C00
Update Description
Whole manual Added descriptions of the enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subracks.
Added descriptions of PDU (DPD63-8-8).
Added descriptions of the TN52AUX, TN15AUX, TN15EFI,
TN54EG16, TN54EX2, TN54PND2, TN55NO2, TN54NS4,
TN12TD20, TN11TM20, TN55TOX, TN12OPM8, TN15PIU,
TN11RAU2, TNK2USXH, TN52UXCH, TN52UXCM,
TN16UXCM and TNK2UXCT boards.
Moved the loopback descriptions to the "Product Description".
13.19 LSC Added the OTU4 service type for the LSC board.
13.10 LEM24
13.11 LEX4
Added service-based LPT for the LEM24 and LEX4 boards.
20.8 RAU1 Added the following fiber types for the RAU1 board: TWPLUS,
SMFLS, G.656, G.654A, TERA_LIGHT, and G.654B.
14.11 TEM28 Added the ERPS function for the TEM28 board.
22.5 ST2 Added the 80-km OSC modules for the ST2 board.
23.3 OLP Added the TN12OLP04 board to the TN12OLP board series.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
vii
Update Description
24.2 MCA4
24.3 MCA8
Added the function to detect OSNR of 10 Gbit/s, 40 Gbit/s, and 100
Gbit/s signals for the TN11MCA402 and TN11MCA802 boards
when the boards work with the Optical Doctor Management System
Function Software.
14 Tributary Board
and Line Board
Added the standard mode for the TN54NS3, TN54THA, TN54TOA,
TN53TDX, and TN55TQX boards.

V100R006C03
This issue is the fifth official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C03. Compared
Update Description
Whole manual For the transport equipment, heat consumption (BTU/h) and power
consumption (W) are similar and can be taken as the same. 1 BTU/h =
0.2931 W.
13 Optical
Transponder
Unit
Limitations of the LDM, LDMS, LDMD, LQM, LQMS, and LQMD
boards are added, indicating that each of the boards can receive and
transmit only one 1.25 Gbit/s higher service and must use the RX1/TX1
port pair to receive/transmit the service.
23 Optical
Protection Board
A description is added, explaining that the OLP and DCP boards support
optical-layer ASON only when they are used to provide client 1+1
protection.
22 Optical
Supervisory
Channel Board
The maximum span loss supported by the SC1 and SC2 boards is
changed to 42 dB. The maximum span loss supported by the ST2 boards
is changed to 40.5 dB.
SCC Switch and
Jumper
The diagrams of the DIP switches and jumpers on the SCC board are
revised and optimized.
TBE Functions
and Features
The cross-connect capability of the TBE board is changed.

V100R006C03
This issue is the fourth official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C03.
Compared with the manual for the previous version, the manual of this issue provides the
following updates.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
viii
Update Description
13 Optical
Transponder
Unit
14 Tributary
Board and Line
Board
Adjusted the loopback descriptions to the "Product Description" part.
13 Optical
Transponder
Unit
Added information about the TN15LSXL board.
TOM Revised the TN11TOM board application 5 diagram.
14.6.6 Valid Slots Revised the slot limitations for the TN55NS3 board when it is used as
a regeneration board.
11.3 Fiber
Spooling Frame
Updated fiber management tray information.

V100R006C03
Update Description
Whole manual Added descriptions of the enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subracks.
14.13 TOA Added the HD-SDIRBR service for the TOA board.
13.21 LSX
13.9 LDX
Modified the function description for the LSX and LDX boards,
specifying that they do not support test frames.
13.10 LEM24
13.11 LEX4
Modified the function description for the LEM24 and LEX4 boards,
specifying that they do not support optical-layer ASON.
21.15 AUX Modified the jumper descriptions for the TN11AUX01 board.

V100R006C03
following updates.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
ix
Update Description
Whole manual Deleted the TN15LSXL board.
13.12 LOA
13.13 LOG
13.14 LOM
14.13 TOA
14.15 TOM
14.12 THA
Added the following optical modules for the TN11LOA, TN12LOG,
TN12LOM, TN54TOA, TN52TOM, and TN54THA boards:
1000BASE-BX10-U, 1000BASE-BX10-D, 1000BASE-BX-U, and
1000BASE-BX-D.
17.7 FIU
20.8 RAU1
Added the application in OptiX OSN 3800 systems for the TN14FIU
and TN11RAU1 boards.
A.4 Board
Indicators
Added the maintenance blinking mode for the STAT indicator.

V100R006C03
Update Description
Whole manual Added descriptions of the TN12LSC, TN11LTX, TN15LSXL,
TN54TEM28, TN55NS3, TN54TSXL, TN11RAU1, TN14FIU, and
TN13OAU106.
14.10 TDX
14.19 TQX
Deleted the following client-side colored optical module from the
specifications for the TN53TDX, TN53TQX, and TN55TQX boards:
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP.
21.15 AUX Revised the schematic diagram of the TN11AUX board jumpers in the
"Jumper" section for the AUX board by changing the dotted lines to
solid lines. Figure 21-74 shows the revised diagram. The solid lines
indicate that the jumpers must be capped.
14.13 TOA
14.12 THA
13.12 LOA
Modified the descriptions of the service timeslots for the TOA, THA,
and LOA boards in the "Application" and "Physical and Logical Ports"
sections.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
x
V100R006C01
following updates.
Update Description
Whole manual For the transport equipment, heat consumption (BTU/h) and power
consumption (W) are similar and can be taken as the same. 1 BTU/h =
0.2931 W.
13 Optical
Transponder
Unit
Limitations of the LDM, LDMS, LDMD, LQM, LQMS, and LQMD
boards are added, indicating that each of the boards can receive and
transmit only one 1.25 Gbit/s higher service and must use the RX1/TX1
port pair to receive/transmit the service.
23 Optical
Protection
Board
A description is added, explaining that the OLP and DCP boards support
optical-layer ASON only when they are used to provide client 1+1
protection.
22 Optical
Supervisory
Channel Board
The maximum span loss supported by the SC1 and SC2 boards is changed
to 42 dB. The maximum span loss supported by the ST2 boards is changed
to 40.5 dB.
SCC Switch and
Jumper
The diagrams of the DIP switches and jumpers on the SCC board are
revised and optimized.
XCS Functions
and Features
For the TN11XCS board, the cross-connect capacity description is
modified. For ODU1 and ODU2 signals, the board supports a maximum
cross-connect capacity of 280 Gbit/s. For GE services, the board supports
a maximum cross-connect capability of 140 Gbit/s.
TBE Functions
and Features
The cross-connect capability of the TBE board is changed.
SFIU Valid
Slots
The slots for the SFIU board inside an OptiX OSN 3800 chassis are
changed to IU2-IU5 and IU11.

V100R006C01
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
xi
Update Description
5 OptiX OSN
8800 Subrack
and Power
Requirement
Updated the maximum and typical power consumption specifications of
the OptiX OSN 8800.
Updated the power consumption specification of the FAN board for the
OptiX OSN 8800.
14.2 ND2 Explicitly specified that the TN12ND2 board does not support the 8800
ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP module.
13.12 LOA Updated the specifications of client-side FC400 and FC800 optical
modules.
20.4 HBA Revised the application diagram of the HBA board by deleting the HBA
board at the receiving site.
14.10 TDX
14.19 TQX
Deleted the following client-side colored optical module from the
specifications for the TN53TDX, TN53TQX, and TN55TQX boards:
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP.
21.15 AUX Revised the schematic diagram of the TN11AUX board jumpers in the
"Jumper" section for the AUX board by changing the dotted lines to solid
lines. Figure 21-74 shows the revised diagram. The solid lines indicate
that the jumpers must be capped.
14.13 TOA
14.12 THA
13.12 LOA
Modified the descriptions of the service timeslots for the TOA, THA,
and LOA boards in the "Application" and "Physical and Logical Ports"
sections.

V100R006C01
following updates.
Update Description
Whole manual l Added descriptions of the TN55NPO2S0A, TN55NPO2S0B,
TN55NPO2ES02, and TN55NPO2ES04 boards.
l Deleted descriptions of the TN55NPO2S05 and TN55NPO2S07
boards.
l Deleted slot IU22 from the valid slots for the TN16AUX board in an
OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
xii
V100R006C01
Update Description
Whole manual l Added descriptions of the TN11LOA, TN55TQX, TN53TDX,
TN13OAU1, TN53NS2, TN53ND2, TN53NQ2, TN55NPO2E,
TN12M40, TN12M40V, TN12D40, TN16SCC, TNK4SXH,
TNK4SXM, TNK4XCT, N3EAS2, TN11BMD4, TN11BMD8,
TN12ELQX, and TN12PTQX boards.
l Updated the descriptions of cabinets. Cabinets are described by the
cabinet model instead of device model. In addition, descriptions of
typical cabinet configurations and fiber management frames are
added.
l Added the mappings between the board and equipment to the
"Version Description" section.
13 Optical
Transponder
Unit
14 Tributary
Board and Line
Board
16 PID Board
l Described service configuration in two separate sections: "Physical
and Logical Ports" and "Configuration of Cross-Connection".
l Added the mappings between boards and optical modules to sections
that list board specifications, for example, "Specifications of the
ND2".
14.13 TOA l Added service mapping paths from FC400 and 3G-SDI to ODUflex.
l Added the descriptions of configuring service packages.
l Added the IEEE 1588v2 function to the "Functions and Features"
table.
14.12 THA l Added the descriptions of configuring service packages.
l Added the IEEE 1588v2 function to the "Functions and Features"
table.
Added the descriptions of configuring service packages.
14.15 TOM Added the descriptions of configuring service packages.

V100R006C00
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
xiii
Update Description
Whole manual l Added descriptions of the TN11BMD4, TN11BMD8, TN12ELQX,
and TN12PTQX boards.
l Updated the descriptions of cabinets. Cabinets are described by the
cabinet model instead of device model. In addition, descriptions of
typical cabinet configurations and fiber management frames are
added.
l Added the mappings between the board and equipment to the
"Version Description" section.
13 Optical
Transponder
Unit
14 Tributary
Board and Line
Board
16 PID Board
l Described service configuration in two separate sections: "Physical
and Logical Ports" and "Configuration of Cross-Connection".
l Added the mappings between boards and optical modules to sections
that list board specifications, for example, "Specifications of the
ND2".
14.15 TOM Revised the port working modes for the TN52TOM board. The details
are as follows:
l In cascading mode:
Changed "ODU0 tributary mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1])" to
"ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1])".
Changed "ODU1 tributary mode (Any->ODU1)" to "ODU1 mode
(OTU1/Any->ODU1)".
Changed "ODU1 tributary-line mode (Any->ODU1->OTU1)" to
"ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1)".
l In non-cascading mode:
Changed "ODU0 tributary mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1])" to
"ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1])".
Changed "ODU1 tributary mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1)" to
"ODU1 mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1)".
Changed "ODU1 tributary mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0-
>ODU1)" to "ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation
mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1)".
Changed "ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any-
>ODU0->ODU1->OTU1)" to "ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-
encapsulation tributary-line mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any-
>ODU0->ODU1->OTU1)".
Changed "ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1-
>OTU1)" to "ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1-
>OTU1)".
Changed "ODU1 tributary mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0)" to
"ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0)".
Changed "ODU1 tributary mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any-
>ODU0)" to "ODU1_ANY_ODU0 re-encapsulation mode
(OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0)".
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
xiv

V100R006C00
following updates.
Update Description
Whole manual l Added descriptions of the TN54TOA, TN54THA, TN53TQX,
TN12OBU1P1, and TNK2SXH boards.
l Deleted descriptions of the TN11BMD4, TN11BMD8, TN12ELQX,
and TN12PTQX boards.

V100R006C00
Update Description
Whole manual l Added descriptions of the OptiX OSN 8800 T16.
l Added descriptions of the TN11DAS1, TN11LSQ, and
TN11WSMD9 boards
l Added the "Optical-layer ASON" and "Electrical-layer ASON" rows
to the "Functions and Features" table.
13.14 LOM Added a description of the TN12LOM board's capability to support 3G-
SDI services.
16.7 NPO2 Added descriptions of the TN55NPO2 board.
21.7
TN52UXCM
Added descriptions of the TN52XCM02.

V100R005C00
Compared with the third official release, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
xv
Update Description
Whole manual Changed optical module names to ensure that the name of each optical
module is unique.
Added the mappings between the board and equipment to the "Version
Description" section.
Added the mappings between boards and optical modules to sections that
list board specifications, for example, "Specifications of the ND2".

V100R005C00
with the second official release, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.
Update Description
16 PID Board Deleted descriptions of the TN11BMD4, TN11BMD8, TN12ELQX, and
TN12PTQX board (specific only to OptiX OSN 8800).
21.7
TN52UXCM
Added information about the TN52XCM02.

V100R005C00
Compared with the first official release, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.
Update Description
13.22 LSXL Deleted information about the TN13LSXL.
C Quick
Reference Table
of the Units
13 Optical
Transponder
Unit
Added information about the LPT function and protocol or standard
compliance in Functions and Features.
14 Tributary
Board and Line
Board
16 PID Board
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
xvi
Update Description
21.10 TN52XCH Added information about the TN52XCH02.

V100R005C00
This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R005C00. In this
release, the manuals for OptiX OSN 8800 V100R002C02, OptiX OSN 6800 V100R004C04,
and OptiX OSN 3800 V100R004C04 are combined into one manual.
Update Description
Whole manual l This manual provides descriptions according to product series OptiX
OSN 8800, OptiX OSN 6800, and OptiX OSN 3800. Any difference
between the products is described in the manual.
l The equipment name is changed from OptiX OSN 8800 I to OptiX
OSN 8800 T32 or from OptiX OSN 8800 II to OptiX OSN 8800 T64.
l The descriptions of the following boards are added:
TN11LEM24, TN11LEX4, TN13LSXL, TN54NS3, TN53TSXL,
TN54ENQ2, TN54NPO2, TN11SFIU, TN11RMU902,
TN12WSMD4, TN11ST2, TN11OPM8, TNL1STI, N4BPA
30 Optical
Attenuator30.1
Fixed Optical
Attenuator
Introduction to fixed optical attenuators and mechanical variable optical
attenuators is added.
32 Filler Panels Introduction to filler panels is added.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
xvii
Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii
1 Cabinet.............................................................................................................................................1
1.1 Cabinet Introduction...........................................................................................................................................2
1.2 Space Requirements for Cabinets.......................................................................................................................3
1.3 Requirements on Configuring Subracks inside an N66B/N63B Cabinet...........................................................4
1.4 Typical Cabinet Configurations..........................................................................................................................6
2 Fiber Management Cabinet.........................................................................................................9
3 DC PDU.........................................................................................................................................14
3.1 TN16PDU/TN51PDU......................................................................................................................................15
3.2 TN11PDU.........................................................................................................................................................16
3.3 PDU (DPD63-8-8)............................................................................................................................................19
4 UPM................................................................................................................................................24
5 OptiX OSN 8800 Subrack and Power Requirement.............................................................33
5.1 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Subrack.........................................................................................................................34
5.1.1 Structure...................................................................................................................................................34
5.1.2 Slot Description.......................................................................................................................................35
5.1.3 Cross-Connect Capacities........................................................................................................................36
5.1.4 Fan and Heat Dissipation.........................................................................................................................38
5.1.5 Power Consumption................................................................................................................................44
5.1.6 Power Requirement.................................................................................................................................46
5.2.1 Structure...................................................................................................................................................50
5.3.1 Structure...................................................................................................................................................65
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Hardware Description Contents
xviii
5.4 OptiX OSN 8800 Platform Subrack.................................................................................................................78
5.4.1 Structure...................................................................................................................................................78
5.5 Data Communication and Equipment Maintenance Interfaces........................................................................88
5.5.1 ATE.........................................................................................................................................................91
5.5.1.1 Version Description........................................................................................................................92
5.5.1.2 Application.....................................................................................................................................92
5.5.1.3 Front Panel......................................................................................................................................92
5.5.1.4 Valid Slots......................................................................................................................................98
5.5.1.5 ATE Specifications.........................................................................................................................98
5.5.2 TN15EFI..................................................................................................................................................99
5.5.2.1 Version Description........................................................................................................................99
5.5.2.2 Application.....................................................................................................................................99
5.5.2.3 Front Panel......................................................................................................................................99
5.5.2.4 Valid Slots....................................................................................................................................105
5.5.2.5 EFI Specifications.........................................................................................................................106
5.5.3 TN16EFI................................................................................................................................................106
5.5.3.1 Version Description......................................................................................................................106
5.5.3.2 Application...................................................................................................................................106
5.5.3.3 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................106
5.5.3.4 Valid Slots....................................................................................................................................113
5.5.3.5 DIP Switches................................................................................................................................114
5.5.4 EFI1.......................................................................................................................................................115
5.5.4.2 Application...................................................................................................................................115
5.5.4.3 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................115
5.5.4.4 Valid Slots....................................................................................................................................118
5.5.4.5 DIP Switches................................................................................................................................118
5.5.4.6 EFI1 Specifications.......................................................................................................................119
5.5.5 EFI2.......................................................................................................................................................119
5.5.5.2 Application...................................................................................................................................119
5.5.5.3 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................120
5.5.5.4 Valid Slots....................................................................................................................................125
5.5.5.5 EFI2 Specifications.......................................................................................................................125
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
xix
5.5.6 STI.........................................................................................................................................................126
5.5.6.2 Application...................................................................................................................................126
5.5.6.3 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................126
5.5.6.4 Valid Slots....................................................................................................................................130
5.5.6.5 STI Specifications.........................................................................................................................130
5.5.7 Interfaces on the Front Panel of the AUX Board..................................................................................130
6 OptiX OSN 8800 Board Category............................................................................................136
7 OptiX OSN 6800 Subrack and Power Requirement...........................................................147
7.1 Structure..........................................................................................................................................................148
7.2 Slot Description..............................................................................................................................................149
7.3 Cross-Connect Capacities...............................................................................................................................150
7.4 Fan and Heat Dissipation................................................................................................................................151
7.5 Power Consumption.......................................................................................................................................156
7.6 Power Requirement........................................................................................................................................158
7.7 Data Communication and Equipment Maintenance Interfaces......................................................................160
7.7.1 TN11EFI................................................................................................................................................161
7.7.1.2 Application...................................................................................................................................161
7.7.1.3 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................161
7.7.1.4 Valid Slots....................................................................................................................................169
8 OptiX OSN 6800 Board Category............................................................................................175
9 OptiX OSN 3800 Chassis and Power Requirement............................................................182
9.1 Chassis Structure............................................................................................................................................183
9.2 Slot Description..............................................................................................................................................183
9.3 Fan and Heat Dissipation................................................................................................................................184
9.4 AC Power Consumption.................................................................................................................................188
9.5 AC Power Requirement..................................................................................................................................189
9.6 DC Power Consumption.................................................................................................................................191
9.7 DC Power Requirement..................................................................................................................................192
9.8 Data Communication and Equipment Maintenance Interfaces......................................................................194
9.8.2 PIN Assignment of Interfaces................................................................................................................196
10 OptiX OSN 3800 Board Category..........................................................................................202
11 Frames........................................................................................................................................207
11.1 DCM Frame and DCM Module....................................................................................................................208
11.2 CRPC Frame.................................................................................................................................................211
11.3 Fiber Spooling Frame...................................................................................................................................212
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
xx
12 Overview of Boards.................................................................................................................214
12.1 Board Appearance and Dimensions.............................................................................................................215
12.1.1 Appearance and Dimensions...............................................................................................................215
12.1.2 Symbols on Boards..............................................................................................................................217
12.2 Introduction to Working Modes of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards...........................................219
12.2.1 Convergence and Non-convergence Applications of Tributary Boards..............................................219
12.2.2 Convergent and Non-convergent OTUs..............................................................................................220
12.2.3 Standard Mode and Compatible Mode................................................................................................221
12.3 Bar Code Overview......................................................................................................................................229
13 Optical Transponder Unit......................................................................................................234
13.1 Overview......................................................................................................................................................236
13.2 ECOM...........................................................................................................................................................242
13.2.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................242
13.2.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................242
13.2.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................244
13.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................245
13.2.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................248
13.2.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................250
13.2.7 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................250
13.2.8 Configuration of Cross-connection.....................................................................................................252
13.2.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................253
13.2.10 ECOM Specifications........................................................................................................................254
13.3 L4G...............................................................................................................................................................258
13.3.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................259
13.3.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................264
13.3.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................266
13.3.7 Characteristic Code for the L4G..........................................................................................................266
13.3.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................269
13.3.11 L4G Specifications............................................................................................................................271
13.4 LDGD...........................................................................................................................................................275
13.4.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................276
13.4.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................281
13.4.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................283
13.4.7 Characteristic Code for the LDGD......................................................................................................283
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
xxi
13.4.11 LDGD Specifications........................................................................................................................288
13.5 LDGS............................................................................................................................................................294
13.5.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................295
13.5.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................301
13.5.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................303
13.5.7 Characteristic Code for the LDGS.......................................................................................................303
13.5.11 LDGS Specifications.........................................................................................................................308
13.6 LDM.............................................................................................................................................................315
13.6.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................315
13.6.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................323
13.6.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................324
13.6.7 Characteristic Code for the LDM........................................................................................................325
13.6.10 LDM Specifications...........................................................................................................................328
13.7 LDMD..........................................................................................................................................................337
13.7.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................337
13.7.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................344
13.7.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................345
13.7.7 Characteristic Code for the LDMD.....................................................................................................346
13.7.10 LDMD Specifications........................................................................................................................349
13.8 LDMS...........................................................................................................................................................357
13.8.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................357
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
xxii
13.8.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................364
13.8.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................366
13.8.7 Characteristic Code for the LDMS......................................................................................................366
13.8.10 LDMS Specifications........................................................................................................................370
13.9 LDX..............................................................................................................................................................377
13.9.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................377
13.9.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................383
13.9.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................385
13.9.7 Characteristic Code for the LDX.........................................................................................................385
13.9.10 LDX Specifications...........................................................................................................................389
13.10 LEM24........................................................................................................................................................395
13.10.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................395
13.10.2 Application........................................................................................................................................395
13.10.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................396
13.10.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................400
13.10.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................403
13.10.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................405
13.10.7 Characteristic Code for the LEM24 ..................................................................................................406
13.10.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................406
13.10.9 Configuration of Cross-connection...................................................................................................408
13.10.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................409
13.10.11 LEM24 Specifications.....................................................................................................................419
13.11 LEX4..........................................................................................................................................................426
13.11.2 Application........................................................................................................................................426
13.11.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................434
13.11.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................436
13.11.7 Characteristic Code for the LEX4 ....................................................................................................436
13.11.11 LEX4 Specifications........................................................................................................................448
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
xxiii
13.12 LOA............................................................................................................................................................453
13.12.2 Application Overview........................................................................................................................453
13.12.4 Characteristic Code for the LOA.......................................................................................................460
13.12.5 Physical Ports Displayed on NMS.....................................................................................................460
13.12.6 LOA Scenario 1: ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2)
........................................................................................................................................................................461
13.12.6.1 Application...............................................................................................................................461
13.12.6.2 Logical Ports.............................................................................................................................461
13.12.6.3 Configuring Cross-Connections...............................................................................................463
13.12.7 LOA Scenario 2: ODU1 non-convergence mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2)..............465
13.12.7.1 Application...............................................................................................................................465
13.12.7.2 Logical Ports.............................................................................................................................466
13.12.8 LOA Scenario 3: ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2)
........................................................................................................................................................................468
13.12.8.1 Application...............................................................................................................................468
13.12.8.2 Logical Ports.............................................................................................................................468
13.12.9 LOA Scenario 4: ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2).................472
13.12.9.1 Application...............................................................................................................................472
13.12.9.2 Logical Ports.............................................................................................................................473
13.12.10 LOA Scenario 5: ODU2 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU2->OTU2).....................................475
13.12.10.1 Application.............................................................................................................................475
13.12.10.2 Logical Ports...........................................................................................................................476
13.12.10.3 Configuring Cross-Connections.............................................................................................477
13.12.11 Working Principle and Signal Flow................................................................................................477
13.12.12 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................480
13.12.13 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................481
13.12.15 LOA Specifications.........................................................................................................................488
13.13 LOG............................................................................................................................................................504
13.13.2 Application........................................................................................................................................506
13.13.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................513
13.13.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................515
13.13.7 Characteristic Code for the LOG.......................................................................................................516
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
xxiv
13.13.11 LOG Specifications.........................................................................................................................522
13.14 LOM...........................................................................................................................................................534
13.14.2 Application........................................................................................................................................535
13.14.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................544
13.14.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................547
13.14.7 Characteristic Code for the LOM......................................................................................................548
13.14.10 LOM Specifications.........................................................................................................................555
13.15 LQG............................................................................................................................................................567
13.15.2 Application........................................................................................................................................568
13.15.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................574
13.15.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................575
13.15.7 Characteristic Code for the LQG.......................................................................................................576
13.15.11 LQG Specifications.........................................................................................................................581
13.16 LQM...........................................................................................................................................................586
13.16.2 Application........................................................................................................................................587
13.16.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................597
13.16.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................599
13.16.7 Characteristic Code for the LQM......................................................................................................599
13.16.11 LQM Specifications.........................................................................................................................606
13.17 LQMD........................................................................................................................................................615
13.17.2 Application........................................................................................................................................616
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
xxv
13.17.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................625
13.17.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................627
13.17.7 Characteristic Code for the LQMD...................................................................................................628
13.17.11 LQMD Specifications......................................................................................................................635
13.18 LQMS.........................................................................................................................................................645
13.18.2 Application........................................................................................................................................646
13.18.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................658
13.18.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................660
13.18.7 Characteristic Code for the LQMS....................................................................................................661
13.18.11 LQMS Specifications......................................................................................................................669
13.19 LSC.............................................................................................................................................................679
13.19.2 Application........................................................................................................................................680
13.19.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................684
13.19.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................686
13.19.9 LSC Specifications............................................................................................................................691
13.20 LSQ.............................................................................................................................................................699
13.20.2 Application........................................................................................................................................699
13.20.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................705
13.20.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................706
13.20.9 LSQ Specifications............................................................................................................................710
13.21 LSX.............................................................................................................................................................713
13.21.2 Application........................................................................................................................................717
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
xxvi
13.21.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................725
13.21.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................728
13.21.7 Characteristic Code for the LSX.......................................................................................................729
13.21.10 LSX Specifications..........................................................................................................................734
13.22 LSXL..........................................................................................................................................................745
13.22.2 Application........................................................................................................................................747
13.22.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................754
13.22.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................757
13.22.9 LSXL Specifications..........................................................................................................................763
13.23 LSXLR........................................................................................................................................................768
13.23.2 Application........................................................................................................................................769
13.23.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................773
13.23.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................776
13.23.9 LSXLR Specifications.......................................................................................................................780
13.24 LSXR..........................................................................................................................................................783
13.24.2 Application........................................................................................................................................783
13.24.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................788
13.24.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................790
13.24.7 Characteristic Code for the LSXR.....................................................................................................791
13.24.10 LSXR Specifications.......................................................................................................................794
13.25 LTX............................................................................................................................................................797
13.25.2 Application........................................................................................................................................798
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
xxvii
13.25.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................806
13.25.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................808
13.25.9 LTX Specifications............................................................................................................................814
13.26 LWX2.........................................................................................................................................................819
13.26.2 Application........................................................................................................................................819
13.26.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................825
13.26.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................826
13.26.7 Characteristic Code for the LWX2....................................................................................................827
13.26.10 LWX2 Specifications......................................................................................................................829
13.27 LWXD........................................................................................................................................................837
13.27.2 Application........................................................................................................................................837
13.27.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................843
13.27.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................844
13.27.7 Characteristic Code for the LWXD...................................................................................................844
13.27.10 LWXD Specifications......................................................................................................................847
13.28 LWXS.........................................................................................................................................................855
13.28.2 Application........................................................................................................................................856
13.28.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................862
13.28.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................863
13.28.7 Characteristic Code for the LWXS....................................................................................................864
13.28.10 LWXS Specifications......................................................................................................................867
13.29 TMX...........................................................................................................................................................874
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
xxviii
13.29.2 Application........................................................................................................................................876
13.29.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................881
13.29.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................882
13.29.7 Characteristic Code for the TMX......................................................................................................883
13.29.10 TMX Specifications.........................................................................................................................886
14 Tributary Board and Line Board...........................................................................................899
14.1 Overview......................................................................................................................................................901
14.2 ND2..............................................................................................................................................................908
14.2.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................911
14.2.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................926
14.2.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................929
14.2.7 Characteristic Code for the ND2.........................................................................................................930
14.2.11 ND2 Specifications............................................................................................................................950
14.3 NO2..............................................................................................................................................................958
14.3.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................959
14.3.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................972
14.3.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................974
14.3.7 Characteristic Code for the NO2.........................................................................................................974
14.3.11 NO2 Specifications............................................................................................................................985
14.4 NQ2..............................................................................................................................................................989
14.4.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................991
14.4.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1007
14.4.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1009
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
xxix
14.4.7 Characteristic Code for the NQ2.......................................................................................................1010
14.4.11 NQ2 Specifications..........................................................................................................................1037
14.5 NS2.............................................................................................................................................................1041
14.5.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1046
14.5.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1058
14.5.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1061
14.5.7 Characteristic Code for the NS2........................................................................................................1062
14.5.9 Configuring Cross-Connections........................................................................................................1068
14.5.11 NS2 Specifications..........................................................................................................................1082
14.6 NS3.............................................................................................................................................................1091
14.6.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1093
14.6.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1108
14.6.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1112
14.7 NS4.............................................................................................................................................................1144
14.7.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1145
14.7.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1160
14.7.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1162
14.8 TBE.............................................................................................................................................................1179
14.8.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1179
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
xxx
14.8.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1187
14.8.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1189
14.8.10 TBE Specifications..........................................................................................................................1193
14.9 TDG............................................................................................................................................................1198
14.9.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1199
14.9.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1203
14.9.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1205
14.9.10 TDG Specifications.........................................................................................................................1210
14.10 TDX..........................................................................................................................................................1213
14.10.1 Version Description.........................................................................................................................1213
14.10.2 Application......................................................................................................................................1214
14.10.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................................1216
14.10.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................1223
14.10.6 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................1226
14.10.7 Physical and Logical Ports..............................................................................................................1227
14.10.8 Configuration of Cross-connection.................................................................................................1230
14.10.10 TDX Specifications.......................................................................................................................1241
14.11 TEM28......................................................................................................................................................1244
14.11.2 Application......................................................................................................................................1244
14.11.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................1251
14.11.6 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................1253
14.11.10 TEM28 Specifications...................................................................................................................1268
14.12 THA..........................................................................................................................................................1271
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
xxxi
14.12.2 Application Overview......................................................................................................................1271
14.12.4 Physical Ports Displayed on NMS...................................................................................................1277
14.12.5 THA scenario 1: ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0)....................................................1278
14.12.5.1 Application.............................................................................................................................1278
14.12.5.2 Logical Ports...........................................................................................................................1278
14.12.5.3 Configuration of Cross-connection........................................................................................1280
14.12.6 THA scenario 2: ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1)....................................................1284
14.12.6.1 Application.............................................................................................................................1284
14.12.6.2 Logical Ports...........................................................................................................................1284
14.12.7 THA scenario 3: ODU1 convergence mode (n X Any->ODU1)....................................................1288
14.12.7.1 Application.............................................................................................................................1289
14.12.7.2 Logical Ports...........................................................................................................................1289
14.12.8 THA scenario 4: ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0)..................................................1294
14.12.8.1 Application.............................................................................................................................1294
14.12.8.2 Logical Ports...........................................................................................................................1295
14.12.10 Front Panel.....................................................................................................................................1301
14.12.11 Valid Slots.....................................................................................................................................1303
14.12.12 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS..................................................................................1303
14.12.13 THA Specifications.......................................................................................................................1308
14.13 TOA..........................................................................................................................................................1312
14.13.5 TOA scenario 1: ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0)....................................................1320
14.13.5.1 Application.............................................................................................................................1320
14.13.5.2 Logical Ports...........................................................................................................................1320
14.13.6 TOA scenario 2: ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1)....................................................1325
14.13.6.1 Application.............................................................................................................................1325
14.13.6.2 Logical Ports...........................................................................................................................1325
14.13.7 TOA scenario 3: ODU1 convergence mode (n * Any->ODU1).....................................................1329
14.13.7.1 Application.............................................................................................................................1330
14.13.7.2 Logical Ports...........................................................................................................................1330
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
xxxii
14.13.8 TOA scenario 4: ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0)..................................................1334
14.13.8.1 Application.............................................................................................................................1335
14.13.8.2 Logical Ports...........................................................................................................................1335
14.13.9 TOA scenario 5: ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex)...........................................1339
14.13.9.1 Application.............................................................................................................................1339
14.13.9.2 Logical Ports...........................................................................................................................1340
14.13.10 Working Principle and Signal Flow..............................................................................................1344
14.13.11 Front Panel.....................................................................................................................................1346
14.13.12 Valid Slots.....................................................................................................................................1348
14.13.14 TOA Specifications.......................................................................................................................1354
14.14 TOG..........................................................................................................................................................1364
14.14.2 Application......................................................................................................................................1365
14.14.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................1371
14.14.6 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................1372
14.14.10 TOG Specifications.......................................................................................................................1379
14.15 TOM.........................................................................................................................................................1382
14.15.2.1 Concept: Tributary Mode and Tributary-Line Mode..............................................................1383
14.15.2.2 Concept: Cascading Mode and Non-cascading Mode............................................................1384
14.15.2.3 Application Scenario Overview of TN52TOM......................................................................1384
14.15.2.4 Application Scenario Overview of TN11TOM......................................................................1391
14.15.3 Function and Feature.......................................................................................................................1393
14.15.5 TN52TOM Scenario 1: Any->ODU0[->ODU1] (Cascading).........................................................1401
14.15.5.1 Application.............................................................................................................................1401
14.15.5.2 Logical Ports...........................................................................................................................1402
14.15.6 TN52TOM Scenario 2: Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1 (Cascading).............................................1405
14.15.6.1 Application.............................................................................................................................1405
14.15.6.2 Logical Ports...........................................................................................................................1406
14.15.7 TN52TOM Scenario 3: Any->ODU1 (Cascading).........................................................................1409
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
xxxiii
14.15.7.1 Application.............................................................................................................................1409
14.15.7.2 Logical Ports...........................................................................................................................1409
14.15.8 TN52TOM Scenario 4: Any->ODU1->OTU1 (Cascading)............................................................1411
14.15.8.1 Application.............................................................................................................................1411
14.15.8.2 Logical Ports...........................................................................................................................1412
14.15.9 TN52TOM Scenario 5: Any->ODU0[->ODU1] (Non-Cascading)................................................1414
14.15.9.1 Application.............................................................................................................................1414
14.15.9.2 Logical Ports...........................................................................................................................1415
14.15.10 TN52TOM Scenario 6: Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1(Non-Cascading)....................................1420
14.15.10.1 Application...........................................................................................................................1420
14.15.10.2 Logical Ports.........................................................................................................................1422
14.15.10.3 Configuration of Cross-connection......................................................................................1423
14.15.11 TN52TOM Scenario 7: OTU1/Any->ODU1 (Non-Cascading)....................................................1424
14.15.11.1 Application...........................................................................................................................1424
14.15.11.2 Logical Ports.........................................................................................................................1425
14.15.12 TN52TOM Scenario 8: OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1 (Non-Cascading).....................1427
14.15.12.1 Application...........................................................................................................................1427
14.15.12.2 Logical Ports.........................................................................................................................1428
14.15.13 TN52TOM Scenario 9: OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1 (Non-Cascading)
......................................................................................................................................................................1430
14.15.13.1 Application...........................................................................................................................1430
14.15.13.2 Logical Ports.........................................................................................................................1431
14.15.14 TN52TOM scenario 10: OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1 (non-cascading).......................................1432
14.15.14.1 Application...........................................................................................................................1433
14.15.14.2 Logical Ports.........................................................................................................................1434
14.15.15 TN52TOM scenario 11: OTU1->ODU1->ODU0 (non-cascading)..............................................1437
14.15.15.1 Application...........................................................................................................................1437
14.15.15.2 Logical Ports.........................................................................................................................1438
14.15.16 TN52TOM Scenario 12: OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0 (Non-Cascading).................................1439
14.15.16.1 Application...........................................................................................................................1439
14.15.16.2 Logical Ports.........................................................................................................................1440
14.15.17 TN11TOM Scenario 1: Any->ODU1 (Cascading).......................................................................1442
14.15.17.1 Application...........................................................................................................................1442
14.15.17.2 Logical Ports.........................................................................................................................1443
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
xxxiv
14.15.18 TN11TOM Scenario 2: Any->ODU1->OTU1 (Cascading)..........................................................1444
14.15.18.1 Application...........................................................................................................................1444
14.15.18.2 Logical Ports.........................................................................................................................1445
14.15.19 TN11TOM Scenario 3: Any->ODU1 (Non-Cascading)...............................................................1447
14.15.19.1 Application...........................................................................................................................1447
14.15.19.2 Logical Ports.........................................................................................................................1448
14.15.20 TN11TOM Scenario 4: Any->ODU1->OTU1(Non-Cascading)..................................................1450
14.15.20.1 Application...........................................................................................................................1450
14.15.20.2 Logical Ports.........................................................................................................................1450
14.15.21 TN11TOM Scenario 5: OTU1->ODU1->OTU1 (electrical regeneration board).........................1452
14.15.21.1 Application...........................................................................................................................1452
14.15.21.2 Logical Ports.........................................................................................................................1453
14.15.22 Working Principle and Signal Flow..............................................................................................1454
14.15.23 Front Panel.....................................................................................................................................1459
14.15.24 Valid Slots.....................................................................................................................................1461
14.15.26 TOM Specifications.......................................................................................................................1467
14.16 TOX..........................................................................................................................................................1480
14.16.2 Application......................................................................................................................................1480
14.16.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................1486
14.16.6 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................1488
14.16.10 TOX Specifications.......................................................................................................................1494
14.17 TQM.........................................................................................................................................................1498
14.17.2 Application......................................................................................................................................1499
14.17.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................1507
14.17.6 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................1508
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
xxxv
14.17.10 TQM Specifications.......................................................................................................................1515
14.18 TQS...........................................................................................................................................................1522
14.18.2 Application......................................................................................................................................1523
14.18.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................1528
14.18.6 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................1529
14.18.10 TQS Specifications........................................................................................................................1534
14.19 TQX..........................................................................................................................................................1538
14.19.2 Application......................................................................................................................................1540
14.19.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................1546
14.19.6 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................1548
14.19.10 TQX Specifications.......................................................................................................................1560
14.20 TSC...........................................................................................................................................................1563
14.20.2 Application......................................................................................................................................1564
14.20.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................1568
14.20.6 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................1570
14.20.10 TSC Specifications........................................................................................................................1575
14.21 TSXL........................................................................................................................................................1580
14.21.2 Application......................................................................................................................................1581
14.21.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................1589
14.21.6 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................1593
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
xxxvi
14.21.10 TSXL Specifications......................................................................................................................1600
14.22 TTX..........................................................................................................................................................1604
14.22.2 Application......................................................................................................................................1605
14.22.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................1611
14.22.6 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................1612
14.22.10 TTX Specifications........................................................................................................................1618
15 Packet Service Unit................................................................................................................1623
15.1 Overview....................................................................................................................................................1624
15.2 EG16...........................................................................................................................................................1625
15.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1626
15.2.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1632
15.2.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1634
15.2.9 EG16 Specifications..........................................................................................................................1643
15.3 EX2.............................................................................................................................................................1646
15.3.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1647
15.3.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1653
15.3.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1654
15.3.9 EX2 Specifications............................................................................................................................1662
15.4 PND2..........................................................................................................................................................1664
15.4.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1665
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
xxxvii
15.4.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1672
15.4.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1674
15.4.9 PND2 Specifications..........................................................................................................................1683
16 PID Board................................................................................................................................1688
16.1 Overview....................................................................................................................................................1689
16.2 BMD4.........................................................................................................................................................1690
16.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1691
16.2.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1694
16.2.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1696
16.2.7 Characteristic Code of the BMD4.....................................................................................................1697
16.2.8 Optical Interfaces on the BMD4........................................................................................................1697
16.2.10 BMD4 Specifications......................................................................................................................1699
16.3 BMD8.........................................................................................................................................................1701
16.3.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1701
16.3.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1704
16.3.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1707
16.3.7 Characteristic Code of the BMD8.....................................................................................................1707
16.3.8 Optical Interfaces on the BMD8........................................................................................................1707
16.3.10 BMD8 Specifications......................................................................................................................1711
16.4 ELQX..........................................................................................................................................................1713
16.4.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1714
16.4.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1719
16.4.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1720
16.4.10 ELQX Specifications.......................................................................................................................1728
16.5 PTQX..........................................................................................................................................................1732
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
xxxviii
16.5.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1734
16.5.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1740
16.5.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1742
16.5.7 Characteristic Code of the PTQX......................................................................................................1742
16.5.11 PTQX Specifications.......................................................................................................................1751
16.6 ENQ2..........................................................................................................................................................1756
16.6.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1756
16.6.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1763
16.6.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1764
16.6.10 ENQ2 Specifications.......................................................................................................................1775
16.7 NPO2..........................................................................................................................................................1775
16.7.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1780
16.7.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1791
16.7.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1794
16.7.7 Characteristic Code of the NPO2......................................................................................................1795
16.7.11 NPO2 Specifications........................................................................................................................1810
16.8 NPO2E........................................................................................................................................................1812
16.8.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1816
16.8.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1824
16.8.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1826
16.8.7 Characteristic Code of the NPO2E....................................................................................................1827
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
xxxix
16.8.11 NPO2E Specifications.....................................................................................................................1836
17 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexing Board.............................................................1840
17.1 Overview....................................................................................................................................................1841
17.2 M40.............................................................................................................................................................1842
17.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1843
17.2.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1846
17.2.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1851
17.2.7 Characteristic Code for the M40.......................................................................................................1852
17.2.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1853
17.2.10 M40 Specifications..........................................................................................................................1854
17.3 M40V..........................................................................................................................................................1855
17.3.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1856
17.3.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1859
17.3.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1864
17.3.7 Characteristic Code for the M40V.....................................................................................................1865
17.3.10 M40V Specifications.......................................................................................................................1867
17.4 D40.............................................................................................................................................................1868
17.4.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1870
17.4.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1872
17.4.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1877
17.4.7 Characteristic Code for the D40........................................................................................................1878
17.4.10 D40 Specifications...........................................................................................................................1880
17.5 D40V..........................................................................................................................................................1881
17.5.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1882
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
xl
17.5.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1885
17.5.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1889
17.5.7 Characteristic Code for the D40V.....................................................................................................1889
17.5.10 D40V Specifications........................................................................................................................1891
17.6 DFIU...........................................................................................................................................................1892
17.6.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1893
17.6.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1895
17.6.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1897
17.6.7 Characteristic Code for the DFIU......................................................................................................1897
17.6.10 DFIU Specifications........................................................................................................................1899
17.7 FIU..............................................................................................................................................................1900
17.7.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1902
17.7.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1906
17.7.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1911
17.7.7 Characteristic Code for the FIU.........................................................................................................1913
17.7.10 FIU Specifications...........................................................................................................................1915
17.8 ITL..............................................................................................................................................................1916
17.8.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1918
17.8.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1921
17.8.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1924
17.8.7 Characteristic Code for the ITL.........................................................................................................1925
17.8.10 ITL Specifications...........................................................................................................................1927
17.9 SFIU............................................................................................................................................................1929
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
xli
17.9.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1929
17.9.3 Functions and Features...................................................................................................................... 1930
17.9.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................. 1930
17.9.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1932
17.9.6 Valid Slots......................................................................................................................................... 1934
17.9.7 Characteristic Code for the SFIU...................................................................................................... 1935
17.9.10 SFIU Specifications......................................................................................................................... 1937
18 Fixed Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Board..........................................................1939
18.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................... 1940
18.2 CMR1......................................................................................................................................................... 1941
18.2.1 Version Description........................................................................................................................... 1941
18.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 1942
18.2.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1944
18.2.6 Valid Slots......................................................................................................................................... 1945
18.2.7 Characteristic Code for the CMR1.................................................................................................... 1945
18.2.10 CMR1 Specifications.......................................................................................................................1947
18.3 CMR2......................................................................................................................................................... 1948
18.3.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 1949
18.3.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1951
18.3.6 Valid Slots......................................................................................................................................... 1954
18.4 CMR4......................................................................................................................................................... 1958
18.4.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 1959
18.4.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1961
18.4.6 Valid Slots......................................................................................................................................... 1964
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
xlii
18.5 DMR1.........................................................................................................................................................1968
18.5.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1969
18.5.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1972
18.5.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1975
18.5.7 Characteristic Code for the DMR1....................................................................................................1976
18.5.10 DMR1 Specifications......................................................................................................................1977
18.6 MR2............................................................................................................................................................1978
18.6.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1979
18.6.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1982
18.6.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1985
18.6.7 Characteristic Code for the MR2.......................................................................................................1986
18.6.10 MR2 Specifications.........................................................................................................................1987
18.7 MR4............................................................................................................................................................1989
18.7.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1989
18.7.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1992
18.7.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1995
18.8 MR8............................................................................................................................................................2002
18.8.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2002
18.8.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2005
18.8.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2007
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
xliii
18.9 MR8V.........................................................................................................................................................2012
18.9.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2013
18.9.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2015
18.9.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2017
18.9.7 Characteristic Code for the MR8V....................................................................................................2018
18.9.10 MR8V Specifications......................................................................................................................2020
18.10 SBM2........................................................................................................................................................2023
18.10.2 Application......................................................................................................................................2024
18.10.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................2026
18.10.6 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................2028
18.10.7 Optical Interfaces.............................................................................................................................2028
18.10.9 SBM2 Specifications.......................................................................................................................2030
19 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Board........................................2031
19.1 Overview....................................................................................................................................................2033
19.2 RDU9..........................................................................................................................................................2035
19.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2036
19.2.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2039
19.2.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2042
19.2.9 RDU9 Specifications.........................................................................................................................2043
19.3 RMU9.........................................................................................................................................................2044
19.3.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2045
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
xliv
19.3.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2048
19.3.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2050
19.3.9 RMU9 Specifications........................................................................................................................2053
19.4 ROAM........................................................................................................................................................2054
19.4.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2055
19.4.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2057
19.4.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2061
19.4.9 ROAM Specifications........................................................................................................................2063
19.5 TD20...........................................................................................................................................................2064
19.5.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2064
19.5.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2068
19.5.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2070
19.5.9 TD20 Specifications..........................................................................................................................2073
19.6 TM20..........................................................................................................................................................2074
19.6.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2075
19.6.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2078
19.6.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2080
19.6.9 TM20 Specifications..........................................................................................................................2082
19.7 WSD9.........................................................................................................................................................2083
19.7.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2084
19.7.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2088
19.7.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2090
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
xlv
19.7.9 WSD9 Specifications.........................................................................................................................2094
19.8 WSM9.........................................................................................................................................................2095
19.8.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2096
19.8.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2100
19.8.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2102
19.8.9 WSM9 Specifications........................................................................................................................2106
19.9 WSMD2......................................................................................................................................................2107
19.9.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2108
19.9.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2111
19.9.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2114
19.9.9 WSMD2 Specifications.....................................................................................................................2116
19.10 WSMD4....................................................................................................................................................2117
19.10.2 Application......................................................................................................................................2119
19.10.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................2122
19.10.6 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................2124
19.10.9 WSMD4 Specifications...................................................................................................................2128
19.11 WSMD9....................................................................................................................................................2129
19.11.2 Application......................................................................................................................................2130
19.11.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................2133
19.11.6 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................2136
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
xlvi
19.11.9 WSMD9 Specifications...................................................................................................................2138
20 Optical Amplifier Board......................................................................................................2140
20.1 Overview....................................................................................................................................................2141
20.2 CRPC..........................................................................................................................................................2143
20.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2144
20.2.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2148
20.2.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2151
20.2.7 Dip Switch and Jumper......................................................................................................................2151
20.2.8 Characteristic Code for the CRPC.....................................................................................................2153
20.2.11 CRPC Specifications.......................................................................................................................2155
20.3 DAS1..........................................................................................................................................................2157
20.3.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2157
20.3.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2163
20.3.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2166
20.3.9 DAS1 Specifications..........................................................................................................................2171
20.4 HBA............................................................................................................................................................2173
20.4.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2174
20.4.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2177
20.4.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2179
20.4.7 Characteristic Code for the HBA.......................................................................................................2180
20.4.10 HBA Specifications.........................................................................................................................2183
20.5 OAU1..........................................................................................................................................................2184
20.5.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2186
20.5.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2191
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
xlvii
20.5.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2196
20.5.7 Characteristic Code for the OAU1....................................................................................................2197
20.5.10 OAU1 Specifications.......................................................................................................................2202
20.6 OBU1..........................................................................................................................................................2211
20.6.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2212
20.6.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2216
20.6.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2219
20.6.7 Characteristic Code for the OBU1.....................................................................................................2220
20.6.10 OBU1 Specifications.......................................................................................................................2225
20.7 OBU2..........................................................................................................................................................2227
20.7.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2229
20.7.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2232
20.7.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2235
20.7.7 Characteristic Code for the OBU2.....................................................................................................2236
20.7.10 OBU2 Specifications.......................................................................................................................2241
20.8 RAU1..........................................................................................................................................................2243
20.8.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2243
20.8.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2248
20.8.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2250
20.8.9 RAU1 Specifications.........................................................................................................................2256
20.9 RAU2..........................................................................................................................................................2260
20.9.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2261
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
xlviii
20.9.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2266
20.9.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2269
20.9.9 RAU2 Specifications.........................................................................................................................2275
21 Cross-Connect Board and System and Communication Board....................................2280
21.1 Overview....................................................................................................................................................2282
21.2 USXH.........................................................................................................................................................2283
21.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2284
21.2.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2286
21.2.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2288
21.2.7 USXH Specifications.........................................................................................................................2288
21.3 UXCT.........................................................................................................................................................2289
21.3.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2289
21.3.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2291
21.3.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2293
21.3.7 UXCT Specifications.........................................................................................................................2293
21.4 SXM............................................................................................................................................................2294
21.4.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2295
21.4.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2297
21.4.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2299
21.4.7 SXM Specifications...........................................................................................................................2299
21.5 SXH............................................................................................................................................................2300
21.5.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2301
21.5.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2304
21.5.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2305
21.5.7 SXH Specifications............................................................................................................................2305
21.6 XCT............................................................................................................................................................2306
21.6.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2307
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
xlix
21.6.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2309
21.6.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2311
21.6.7 XCT Specifications............................................................................................................................2311
21.7 TN52UXCM...............................................................................................................................................2312
21.7.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2313
21.7.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2316
21.7.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2318
21.7.7 TN52UXCM Specifications..............................................................................................................2318
21.8 XCM...........................................................................................................................................................2319
21.8.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2319
21.8.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2322
21.8.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2324
21.8.7 XCM Board Specifications................................................................................................................2324
21.9 UXCH.........................................................................................................................................................2325
21.9.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2325
21.9.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2329
21.9.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2331
21.9.7 UXCH Specifications........................................................................................................................2331
21.10 TN52XCH................................................................................................................................................2332
21.10.2 Application......................................................................................................................................2332
21.10.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................2334
21.10.6 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................2336
21.10.7 TN52XCH Specifications................................................................................................................2336
21.11 TN16XCH................................................................................................................................................2337
21.11.2 Application......................................................................................................................................2337
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l
21.11.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................2341
21.11.6 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................2343
21.11.7 Switch and Jumper...........................................................................................................................2343
21.11.8 TN16XCH Specifications................................................................................................................2344
21.12 TN16UXCM.............................................................................................................................................2345
21.12.2 Application......................................................................................................................................2345
21.12.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................2349
21.12.6 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................2351
21.12.8 TN16UXCM Specifications............................................................................................................2353
21.13 XCS..........................................................................................................................................................2354
21.13.2 Application......................................................................................................................................2355
21.13.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................2357
21.13.6 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................2359
21.13.7 XCS Specifications..........................................................................................................................2359
21.14 SCC...........................................................................................................................................................2359
21.14.2 Application......................................................................................................................................2361
21.14.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................2366
21.14.6 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................2372
21.14.8 SCC Specifications..........................................................................................................................2378
21.15 AUX..........................................................................................................................................................2379
21.15.2 Application......................................................................................................................................2382
21.15.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................2386
21.15.6 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................2392
21.15.7 Jumper.............................................................................................................................................2394
21.15.8 AUX Specifications.........................................................................................................................2399
22 Optical Supervisory Channel Board..................................................................................2401
22.1 Overview....................................................................................................................................................2402
22.2 HSC1..........................................................................................................................................................2403
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
li
22.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2403
22.2.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2407
22.2.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2409
22.2.7 Characteristic Code for the HSC1.....................................................................................................2409
22.2.10 HSC1 Specifications........................................................................................................................2411
22.3 SC1.............................................................................................................................................................2412
22.3.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2413
22.3.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2417
22.3.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2419
22.3.7 Characteristic Code for the SC1........................................................................................................2420
22.3.10 SC1 Specifications...........................................................................................................................2421
22.4 SC2.............................................................................................................................................................2422
22.4.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2423
22.4.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2427
22.4.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2429
22.4.7 Characteristic Code for the SC2........................................................................................................2430
22.4.10 SC2 Specifications...........................................................................................................................2432
22.5 ST2..............................................................................................................................................................2432
22.5.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2433
22.5.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2437
22.5.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2439
22.5.7 Characteristic Code for the ST2........................................................................................................2440
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
lii
22.5.10 ST2 Specifications...........................................................................................................................2442
23 Optical Protection Board......................................................................................................2444
23.1 Overview....................................................................................................................................................2445
23.2 DCP............................................................................................................................................................2446
23.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2447
23.2.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2451
23.2.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2454
23.2.7 Characteristic Code for the DCP.......................................................................................................2455
23.2.10 DCP Specifications..........................................................................................................................2457
23.3 OLP.............................................................................................................................................................2459
23.3.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2460
23.3.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2464
23.3.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2467
23.3.7 Characteristic Code for the OLP.......................................................................................................2467
23.3.10 OLP Specifications..........................................................................................................................2469
23.4 SCS.............................................................................................................................................................2471
23.4.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2472
23.4.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2474
23.4.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2476
23.4.7 Characteristic Code for the SCS........................................................................................................2476
23.4.10 SCS Specifications..........................................................................................................................2478
24 Spectrum Analyzer Board....................................................................................................2480
24.1 Overview....................................................................................................................................................2481
24.2 MCA4.........................................................................................................................................................2482
24.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2483
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
liii
24.2.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2486
24.2.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2488
24.2.7 Characteristic Code for the MCA4....................................................................................................2488
24.2.10 MCA4 Specifications......................................................................................................................2490
24.3 MCA8.........................................................................................................................................................2491
24.3.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2492
24.3.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2496
24.3.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2497
24.3.7 Characteristic Code for the MCA8....................................................................................................2498
24.3.10 MCA8 Specifications......................................................................................................................2500
24.4 OPM8..........................................................................................................................................................2501
24.4.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2501
24.4.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2505
24.4.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2507
24.4.7 Characteristic Code for the OPM8....................................................................................................2507
24.4.9 OPM8 Specifications.........................................................................................................................2509
24.5 WMU..........................................................................................................................................................2510
24.5.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2510
24.5.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2513
24.5.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2514
24.5.9 WMU Specifications.........................................................................................................................2515
25 Variable Optical Attenuator Board.................................................................................... 2517
25.1 Overview....................................................................................................................................................2518
25.2 VA1............................................................................................................................................................2519
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
liv
25.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2520
25.2.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2522
25.2.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2524
25.2.7 Characteristic Code for the VA1.......................................................................................................2525
25.2.10 VA1 Specifications..........................................................................................................................2527
25.3 VA4............................................................................................................................................................2528
25.3.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2528
25.3.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2531
25.3.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2533
25.3.7 Characteristic Code for the VA4.......................................................................................................2534
25.3.10 VA4 Specifications..........................................................................................................................2536
26 Dispersion Equalizing Board..............................................................................................2538
26.1 Overview....................................................................................................................................................2539
26.2 DCU............................................................................................................................................................2540
26.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2540
26.2.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2543
26.2.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2544
26.2.7 Characteristic Code for the DCU.......................................................................................................2544
26.2.10 DCU Specifications.........................................................................................................................2546
26.3 TDC............................................................................................................................................................2547
26.3.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2548
26.3.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2551
26.3.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2552
26.3.7 Characteristic Code for the TDC.......................................................................................................2553
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
lv
26.3.10 TDC Specifications..........................................................................................................................2554
27 Clock Board.............................................................................................................................2556
27.1 STG.............................................................................................................................................................2557
27.1.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2557
27.1.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2561
27.1.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2564
27.1.7 Characteristic Code for the STG.......................................................................................................2564
27.1.9 STG Specifications............................................................................................................................2565
28 OCS System Unit................................................................................................................... 2566
28.1 BPA............................................................................................................................................................2567
28.1.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2567
28.1.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2569
28.1.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2571
28.1.7 Characteristic Code for the BPA.......................................................................................................2571
28.1.9 BPA Specifications............................................................................................................................2572
28.2 EAS2...........................................................................................................................................................2573
28.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2574
28.2.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2581
28.2.6 Jumpers and DIP Switches................................................................................................................2583
28.2.7 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2583
28.2.8 Feature Code......................................................................................................................................2583
28.2.11 EAS2 Specifications........................................................................................................................2593
28.3 EGSH..........................................................................................................................................................2596
28.3.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2597
28.3.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2604
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
lvi
28.3.6 DIP Switches and Fiber Jumpers.......................................................................................................2606
28.3.7 Valid Slots......................................................................................................................................... 2606
28.3.8 Characteristic Code for the EGSH.....................................................................................................2607
28.3.10 Board Protection.............................................................................................................................. 2608
28.3.12 EGSH Specifications....................................................................................................................... 2620
28.4 SF64............................................................................................................................................................2621
28.4.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 2621
28.4.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2626
28.4.6 Jumpers and DIP Switches................................................................................................................ 2628
28.4.7 Valid Slots......................................................................................................................................... 2628
28.4.8 Characteristic Code for the SF64.......................................................................................................2628
28.4.11 SF64 Specifications......................................................................................................................... 2630
28.5 SF64A......................................................................................................................................................... 2633
28.5.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 2634
28.5.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2639
28.5.7 Valid Slots......................................................................................................................................... 2640
28.5.8 Characteristic Code for the SF64A....................................................................................................2641
28.5.11 SF64A Specifications...................................................................................................................... 2642
28.6 SFD64......................................................................................................................................................... 2644
28.6.2 Application........................................................................................................................................ 2645
28.6.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2649
28.6.7 Valid Slots......................................................................................................................................... 2651
28.6.8 Characteristic Code for the SFD64....................................................................................................2651
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
lvii
28.6.11 SFD64 Specifications...................................................................................................................... 2653
28.7 SL64............................................................................................................................................................2656
28.7.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2657
28.7.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2661
28.7.7 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2663
28.7.8 Characteristic Code for the SL64......................................................................................................2663
28.7.11 SL64 Specifications.........................................................................................................................2665
28.8 SLD64.........................................................................................................................................................2667
28.8.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2668
28.8.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2672
28.8.7 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2674
28.8.8 Characteristic Code for the SLD64...................................................................................................2674
28.8.11 SLD64 Specifications......................................................................................................................2676
28.9 SLH41.........................................................................................................................................................2677
28.9.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2678
28.9.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2683
28.9.7 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2685
28.9.8 Characteristic Code for the SLH41...................................................................................................2686
28.9.11 SLH41 Specifications......................................................................................................................2688
28.10 SLO16.......................................................................................................................................................2690
28.10.2 Application......................................................................................................................................2690
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
lviii
28.10.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................2695
28.10.6 Jumpers and DIP Switches..............................................................................................................2697
28.10.7 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................2697
28.10.8 Characteristic Code for the SLO16.................................................................................................2697
28.10.11 SLO16 Specifications....................................................................................................................2699
28.11 SLQ16.......................................................................................................................................................2700
28.11.2 Application......................................................................................................................................2701
28.11.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................2706
28.11.7 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................2707
28.11.8 Characteristic Code for the SLQ16.................................................................................................2707
28.11.11 SLQ16 Specifications....................................................................................................................2709
28.12 SLQ64.......................................................................................................................................................2710
28.12.2 Application......................................................................................................................................2711
28.12.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................2715
28.12.7 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................2717
28.12.8 Characteristic Code for the SLQ64.................................................................................................2717
28.12.11 SLQ64 Specifications....................................................................................................................2719
29 Cables.......................................................................................................................................2721
29.1 PGND Cables.............................................................................................................................................2722
29.1.1 Cabinet PGND Power Cables............................................................................................................2722
29.1.2 Subrack PGND Cables......................................................................................................................2723
29.1.3 PDU PGND Cables...........................................................................................................................2724
29.1.4 Cabinet Door Ground Cables............................................................................................................2724
29.2 Power Cables..............................................................................................................................................2725
29.2.1 Cabinet -48 V/BGND Power Cables.................................................................................................2725
29.2.2 Subrack Power Cables.......................................................................................................................2729
29.3 Optical Fibers.............................................................................................................................................2731
29.3.1 Classification.....................................................................................................................................2731
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
lix
29.3.2 Connectors.........................................................................................................................................2732
29.4 Alarm Cables..............................................................................................................................................2736
29.4.1 Cabinet Indicator Cable.....................................................................................................................2736
29.4.2 Alarm Output Interface Cable...........................................................................................................2737
29.4.3 Alarm Input Interface Cable..............................................................................................................2739
29.5 Management Cables...................................................................................................................................2740
29.5.1 OAM Serial Port Cable......................................................................................................................2740
29.5.2 AUX Signal Cable.............................................................................................................................2742
29.5.3 Straight-Through Network Cable......................................................................................................2746
29.6 Clock/Time Cable.......................................................................................................................................2748
29.6.1 Cables for other equipment Connections...........................................................................................2748
29.6.1.1 Straight-Through Network Cable.............................................................................................2749
29.6.1.2 Special Cables...........................................................................................................................2749
29.6.1.3 SMB-SMB Coaxial Cables.......................................................................................................2752
29.6.2 Cables for Internal Connections........................................................................................................2754
29.6.2.1 Cascading Network Cables ......................................................................................................2754
29.6.3 Cables for Testing equipment Connections.......................................................................................2756
29.6.3.1 SMB-BNC Coaxial Cables.......................................................................................................2756
29.6.3.2 Time Signal Testing Cables......................................................................................................2757
30 Optical Attenuator.................................................................................................................2760
30.1 Fixed Optical Attenuator ...........................................................................................................................2761
30.2 Mechanical Variable Optical Attenuator....................................................................................................2761
31 Pluggable Optical Modules.................................................................................................2762
32 Filler Panels............................................................................................................................2764
32.1 Functions and Features...............................................................................................................................2765
32.2 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................2765
32.3 Valid Slots..................................................................................................................................................2766
32.4 Technical Specifications.............................................................................................................................2767
A Indicators..................................................................................................................................2768
A.1 Cabinet Indicators........................................................................................................................................2769
A.2 Subrack Indicator.........................................................................................................................................2769
A.3 Chassis Indicators........................................................................................................................................2770
A.4 Board Indicators...........................................................................................................................................2770
A.5 Fan Indicator................................................................................................................................................2774
A.6 PIU Indicator...............................................................................................................................................2775
B Bar Code for Boards................................................................................................................2776
B.1 Overview......................................................................................................................................................2778
B.2 Characteristic Code for OTUs.....................................................................................................................2781
B.2.1 Characteristic Code for DWDM OTUs..............................................................................................2782
B.2.2 Characteristic Code for DWDM Wavelength-Tunable OTUs............................................................2783
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
lx
B.2.3 Characteristic Code for CWDM OTUs...............................................................................................2784
B.3 Characteristic Code of a Line Unit..............................................................................................................2785
B.4 Characteristic Code of an FOADM.............................................................................................................2785
B.4.1 Characteristic Code for the CMR1.....................................................................................................2785
B.4.4 Characteristic Code for the DMR1.....................................................................................................2787
B.4.5 Characteristic Code for the MR2........................................................................................................2787
B.4.6 Characteristic Code for of MR4..........................................................................................................2788
B.4.7 Characteristic Code for the MR8........................................................................................................2789
B.4.8 Characteristic Code for the MR8V.....................................................................................................2789
B.5 Characteristic Code of an MCA...................................................................................................................2790
B.5.1 Characteristic Code for the MCA4.....................................................................................................2790
B.5.2 Characteristic Code for the MCA8.....................................................................................................2791
B.6 Characteristic Code of an OAU...................................................................................................................2791
B.6.1 Characteristic Code for the HBA........................................................................................................2791
B.6.2 Characteristic Code for the OAU1......................................................................................................2792
B.6.3 Characteristic Code for the OBU1......................................................................................................2792
B.6.4 Characteristic Code for the OBU2......................................................................................................2793
B.6.5 Characteristic Code for of CRPC........................................................................................................2793
B.7 Characteristic Code of an Optical MUX/DMUX Unit................................................................................2794
B.7.1 Characteristic Code for the D40.........................................................................................................2794
B.7.2 Characteristic Code for the D40V.......................................................................................................2794
B.7.3 Characteristic Code for the DFIU.......................................................................................................2795
B.7.4 Characteristic Code for the FIU..........................................................................................................2795
B.7.5 Characteristic Code for the ITL..........................................................................................................2796
B.7.6 Characteristic Code for the M40.........................................................................................................2796
B.7.7 Characteristic Code for the M40V......................................................................................................2797
B.8 Characteristic Code of a Protection Unit.....................................................................................................2797
B.8.1 Characteristic Code for the DCP.........................................................................................................2798
B.8.2 Characteristic Code for the OLP.........................................................................................................2798
B.8.3 Characteristic Code for the SCS.........................................................................................................2798
B.9 Characteristic Code of a VOA.....................................................................................................................2799
B.9.1 Characteristic Code for the VA1.........................................................................................................2799
B.9.2 Characteristic Code for the VA4.........................................................................................................2799
B.10 Characteristic Code of a PDE Unit............................................................................................................2800
B.10.1 Characteristic Code for the DCU......................................................................................................2800
B.10.2 Characteristic Code for the GFU......................................................................................................2800
B.10.3 Characteristic Code for the TDC......................................................................................................2801
C Quick Reference Table of the Units....................................................................................2802
C.1 Specification of OTUs, Tributary Boards, Line Boards and Packet Service Boards...................................2804
C.1.1 OTUs, Tributary Boards and Packet Service Boards Specification on the Client Side......................2804
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
lxi
C.1.2 OTUs, Line Boards and Packet Service Boards Specification on the WDM Side............................. 2843
C.2 Specification of Optical Amplifying Unit....................................................................................................2862
C.3 Insertion Loss Specifications of Boards...................................................................................................... 2864
C.4 MON Interface Optical Split Ratio.............................................................................................................. 2868
C.5 Basic Functions of OTUs, Tributary Boards, Line Boards and Packet Service Boards.............................. 2869
C.6 Loopback Function of OTUs, Tributary Boards, Line Boards and Packet Service Boards........................ 2876
C.7 Protection mode of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards .................................................................. 2880
C.8 Electrical cross-connection of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards.................................................. 2883
C.9 Common Parameters Specified for Optical Interfaces of OCS Boards....................................................... 2888
C.10 Quick Reference of OCS Board Functions................................................................................................ 2891
C.11 Loopback Capabilities of OCS Boards...................................................................................................... 2893
D Parameter Reference..............................................................................................................2895
D.1 Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode ..........................................................................................................2897
D.2 Board Mode (WDM Interface).................................................................................................................... 2898
D.3 Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold.................................................................................................... 2900
D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface)......................................................................................................... 2902
D.5 Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s) (WDM Interface)............................................................................... 2903
D.6 Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression .....................................................................................................2903
D.7 Ethernet Working Mode (WDM Interface)................................................................................................. 2904
D.8 FC Distance Extension (WDM Interface)................................................................................................... 2905
D.9 FEC Mode (WDM Interface)..................................................................................................................... 2906
D.10 FEC Working State (WDM Interface).......................................................................................................2906
D.11 Flow Monitor (Ethernet Interface Attributes)............................................................................................2907
D.12 Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface)............................................................................... 2908
D.13 Gain (dB) (WDM Interface)...................................................................................................................... 2908
D.14 Initial Variance Value Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) (WDM Interface)................ 2909
D.15 Laser Status (WDM Interface)...................................................................................................................2910
D.16 Line Rate....................................................................................................................................................2911
D.17 MAC Loopback ........................................................................................................................................ 2913
D.18 Maxmun Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface)................................................................ 2914
D.19 Minmun Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface).................................................................2915
D.20 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface)....................................................................................................2916
D.21 Maximum Frame Length .......................................................................................................................... 2916
D.22 Nominal Gain (dB) (WDM Interface)....................................................................................................... 2917
D.23 Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode.............................................................................................2919
D.24 Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)(WDM Interface)...................................................................... 2920
D.25 PHY Loopback ......................................................................................................................................... 2921
D.26 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface).................................................................................................... 2922
D.27 Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface)...............................2923
D.28 Port Mapping (WDM Interface)................................................................................................................ 2924
D.29 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface)..........................................................................................................2926
D.30 Rated Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface)..........................................................................................2927
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
lxii
D.31 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface)...................................................................................................2928
D.32 Service Mode (WDM Interface)................................................................................................................2929
D.33 Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) (WDM Interface).............................................................................2930
D.34 Variance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) (WDM Interface)....................2931
E Glossary....................................................................................................................................2933
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
lxiii
1 Cabinet
About This Chapter
1.1 Cabinet Introduction
Huawei provides two types of ETS 300-119-compliant cabinets: N66B and N63B.
1.2 Space Requirements for Cabinets
To ensure that cabinets are efficiently ventilated and can be easily maintained, observe the
requirements described in this topic when installing a cabinet.
1.3 Requirements on Configuring Subracks inside an N66B/N63B Cabinet
To ensure efficient heat dissipation, an appropriate quantity of subracks must be configured in
correct positions inside an N66B/N63B cabinet.
1.4 Typical Cabinet Configurations
Typical configuration of the cabinet involves settings of the following items: the subrack type,
the number of subracks, DCM and CRPC frames, and the PDU model.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Hardware Description 1 Cabinet
1
1.1 Cabinet Introduction
Huawei provides two types of ETS 300-119-compliant cabinets: N66B and N63B.
Parameter N66B (ETSI 600 mm Cabinet) N63B (ETSI 300 mm Cabinet)
Appearance
a
Height
extension
frame
(optional)
a
Doors/
Panels
Front and rear doors: They can be
disassembled. A key is provided for
unlocking each of the doors.
Side panels: They are secured with
screws and can be disassembled.
Front door: The door can be
disassembled. A key is provided for
unlocking the door.
Rear door and side panels: They are
secured with screws. Only the side
panels can be disassembled.
Door keys The door keys for all N66B cabinets and N64B cabinets are the same.
Dimensions
(H x W x D)
W
i
d
t
h
D
e
p
t
h
H
e
i
g
h
t
l Not equipped with a height
extension frame: 2200 mm (86.6
in.) x 600 mm (23.6 in.) x 600 mm
(23.6 in.)
l Equipped with a height extension
frame: 2600 mm (102.4 in.) x 600
mm (23.6 in.) x 600 mm (23.6 in.)
extension frame: 2200 mm (86.6
in.) x 600 mm (23.6 in.) x 300 mm
(11.8 in.)
frame: 2600 mm (102.4 in.) x 600
mm (23.6 in.) x 300 mm (11.8 in.)
Weight l Not equipped with a height
extension frame: 120 kg (264.6
lb.)
frame: 130 kg (286.6 lb.)
extension frame: 60 kg (132.3 lb.)
frame: 66 kg (145.5 lb.)
Standard
working
voltage
-48 V DC or -60 V DC
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2
Parameter N66B (ETSI 600 mm Cabinet) N63B (ETSI 300 mm Cabinet)
Working
voltage
range
-48 V DC power source: -40 V to -57.6 V
-60 V DC power source: -48 V to -72 V
a: A 400 mm height extension frame can be placed at the top of the cabinet, which increases
the height of the cabinet to 2600 mm.

1.2 Space Requirements for Cabinets
To ensure that cabinets are efficiently ventilated and can be easily maintained, observe the
requirements described in this topic when installing a cabinet.
The N63B cabinet is used as an example to describe the requirements for installing a cabinet in
equipment room. The requirements for installing an N66B cabinet are the same as those for
installing two N63B cabinets in back-to-back mode. (Two back-to-back N63B cabinets can be
regarded as one N66B cabinet.)
Cabinets are usually installed in a row inside equipment room. They are arranged in a face-to-
face or a back-to-back mode.
Figure 1-1 and Figure 1-2 illustrate the positions of cabinets.
To facilitate heat dissipation and maintenance of the cabinet, reserve sufficient space around the
cabinet according to the following requirements:
l The space in front of the cabinet must be greater than or equal to 1000 mm (39.4 in.).
l The space beside both sides of the cabinet must be greater than or equal to 800 mm (31.5
in.).
l The space behind the cabinet must be greater than or equal to 50 mm. (Ignore this
requirement when installing two N63B cabinets in back-to-back mode.)
Figure 1-1 Top view of cabinets in face-to-face mode
800
600
Front
Unit: mm
1000
Cabinet
600
50
50
Wall or any other
equivalent
300
150 150
Fiber management
frame
800
300
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
3

Figure 1-2 Top view of cabinets in back-to-back mode
1000
800
800
300
Unit: mm
1000
1000
300
600
300
300
Wall or any other
equivalent
Front
Front
Front
Cabinet
Fiber management
frame
150 150
600

NOTE
l If it is designed to ventilate the equipment from bottom to top, there must be vents on the ESD floor in front
of the cabinet so that the fan tray assemblies can draw air from the air conditioner into the equipment.
l A fiber management cabinet is installed on each side of the cabinet if excessive fibers are connected to the
cabinet. If no fiber management cabinet is installed, adhere to the preceding space requirements when
installing a cabinet. For details about the fiber management cabinet, see 2 Fiber Management Cabinet.
1.3 Requirements on Configuring Subracks inside an N66B/
N63B Cabinet
To ensure efficient heat dissipation, an appropriate quantity of subracks must be configured in
correct positions inside an N66B/N63B cabinet.
Requirements on the Subrack Quantity
l N66B cabinet: Only one OptiX 8800 T64 electrical subrack can be deployed inside the
cabinet. The other subracks, if required, must be optical subracks.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
4
l N63B cabinet:
When OptiX OSN 8800 T32 or T16 needs to be installed inside the cabinet, only one
OptiX OSN 8800 T32 electrical subrack or two OptiX OSN 8800 T16 electrical
subracks can be configured. The other subracks, if required, must be optical subracks.
When no OptiX OSN 8800 T32 or T16 electrical subracks need to be installed inside
the cabinet, the preceding restriction does not apply.
NOTE
l An electrical subrack is used to hold only cross-connect boards, OTU boards, tributary boards, line boards,
or protection boards.
l An optical subrack is used to hold OADM, multiplexer/demultiplexer, optical amplifier, OSC, optical
spectrum analyzer, OLP (for optical line protection only), regeneration board, or OTU boards.
l When an optical subrack is configured with regeneration or OTU boards and the average board power
consumption of the subrack exceeds 40 W (the maximum power consumed at 55C (77F)), the optical
subrack is considered as an electrical subrack in calculating the number of subracks.
Requirements on the Subrack Installation Position
l Configuration principles for initial network construction:
When electrical and optical subracks are to be configured inside a cabinet, install the
electrical subracks first from top to bottom, and install the optical subracks below the
bottom-most electrical subrack from top to bottom.
When only optical subracks are to be configured inside a cabinet, install the optical
subracks from bottom to top.
l Configuration principles for network expansion:
Install subracks from top to bottom or bottom to top in adjacent positions. No vacant
subrack position should be observed between any two subracks.
Optical subracks cannot be installed above two adjacent electrical subracks.
When multiple subracks need to be added, it is recommended that electrical subracks
be installed above optical subracks.
An N66B cabinet has the front and rear sides. Each side consists of four areas. OptiX OSN 8800
T64 subracks are installed in areas 1 and 2 on the front and rear sides. Each of the OptiX OSN
8800 T16 subrack, OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack, and OptiX OSN 6800 subrack occupies
one area, and the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack occupies two areas. An N66B is usually pre-
equipped with an OptiX OSN 8800 T64 electrical subrack. In other areas of the cabinet, only
optical subracks can be installed, from top to bottom and front to rear. Figure 1-3 shows the
subrack configurations inside an N66B cabinet.
Figure 1-3 Subrack installation positions inside an N66B cabinet
Optical subrack
Area 1
Area 2
Area 3
Area 4
Electrical subrack
Front Rear
Idle area
Front Rear Front Rear Front Rear Front Rear
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
5
An N63B cabinet is divided into four areas from top to bottom. Each of the OptiX OSN 8800
T16 subrack, OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack, and OptiX OSN 6800 subrack occupies one
area, and the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack occupies two areas (areas 1 and 2, or areas 3 and
4). Figure 1-4 shows the subrack configurations inside an N63B cabinet.
Figure 1-4 Subrack installation positions inside an N63B cabinet
Optical subrack
Area 1
Area 2
Area 3
Area 4
Electrical subrack Idle area
1.4 Typical Cabinet Configurations
Typical configuration of the cabinet involves settings of the following items: the subrack type,
the number of subracks, DCM and CRPC frames, and the PDU model.
Table 1-1 lists the typical configurations of the N66B cabinet.
Table 1-2 lists the typical configurations of the N63B cabinet.
NOTE
Electrical and optical subracks are installed in different positions inside a cabinet. For their installation positions,
see 1.3 Requirements on Configuring Subracks inside an N66B/N63B Cabinet.
NOTE
In the case of transmission equipment, power consumption is generally transformed into heat consumption.
Hence, heat consumption (BTU/h) and power consumption (W) can be converted to each other in the
formula: 1 BTU/h = 0.2931 W.
Power consumption for the typical configuration refers to the average power consumption of the device in
normal scenarios. The maximum power consumption refers to the maximum power consumption of the
device under extreme conditions.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
6
Table 1-1 Typical configurations of the N66B cabinet
Typ
ical
Con
figu
rati
on
8800 Number
of 6800
Subracks
Num
ber of
DCM
Frame
s
PDU
Mode
PDF
Circuit
Breaker
Maxim
um
Power
Consu
mption
of
Integra
ted
Equip
ment
b
Number
of T64
Subracks
a
Number
of T32
Subracks
a
Num
ber of
T16
Subra
cks
Num
ber of
Platfo
rm
Subra
cks
1 1 2 0 0 0 2 TN51 or
DPD63-
8-8
Sixteen
63 A
circuit
breakers
10800
W
2 1 0 0 0 4 4 TN51 or
DPD63-
8-8
Eight 63
A and
eight 32
A circuit
breakers
10800
W
3 1 0 0 4 0 4
4 1 0 4 0 0 2 TN16 or
DPD63-
8-8
Sixteen
63 A
circuit
breakers
10000
W
a: OptiX OSN 8800 T64 and OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subracks are classified into enhanced and general subracks.
The requirements on configuring enhanced and general subracks are the same.
b: The maximum power consumption of the integrated equipment refers to the maximum power consumption of
the cabinet or the maximum heat dissipation capacity of the integrated equipment. The power consumption of the
integrated equipment do not exceed the maximum power consumption.

Table 1-2 Typical configurations of the N63B cabinet
Typ
ical
Con
figu
rati
on
8800 Subracks Number
of 6800
Subracks
Num
ber
of
DC
M
Fram
es
Nu
mbe
r of
CRP
C
Fra
mes
PDU
Model
PDF
Circuit
Breaker
Maximu
m Power
Consum
ption of
Integrate
d
Equipme
nt
b
Number
of T32
Subracks
a
Numb
er of
T16
Subrac
ks
Numbe
r of
Platfor
m
Subrac
ks
1 2 0 0 0 0 0 TN51 or
DPD63-8
-8
Eight 63 A
circuit
breakers
5400 W
2 1 0 2 0 2 0 TN51 or
DPD63-8
-8
Four 63 A
and four
5400 W
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
7
Typ
ical
Con
figu
rati
on
8800 Subracks Number
of 6800
Subracks
Num
ber
of
DC
M
Fram
es
Nu
mbe
r of
CRP
C
Fra
mes
PDU
Model
PDF
Circuit
Breaker
Maximu
m Power
Consum
ption of
Integrate
d
Equipme
nt
b
Number
of T32
Subracks
a
Numb
er of
T16
Subrac
ks
Numbe
r of
Platfor
m
Subrac
ks
3 1 0 0 2 2 0 32 A
circuit
breakers
4 1 2 0 0 1 0 TN16 or
DPD63-8
-8
Eight 63 A
circuit
breakers
5000 W
5 0 4 0 0 1 0 TN16 or
DPD63-8
-8
Eight 63 A
circuit
breakers
5000 W
6 0 3 0 1 2 0 TN16 or
DPD63-8
-8
Six 63 A
and two 32
A circuit
breakers
5000 W
7 0 3 1 0 2 0
8 0 2 0 2 2 0 TN16 or
DPD63-8
-8
Four 63 A
and four
32 A
circuit
breakers
5000 W
9 0 2 2 0 2 0
10 0 1 0 3 2 0 TN16 or
DPD63-8
-8
Two 63 A
and six 32
A circuit
breakers
5000 W
11 0 1 3 0 2 0
12 0 0 0 4 1 0 TN11 or
DPD63-8
-8
Four 63 A
circuit
breakers
4800 W
13 0 0 4 0 1 0
14 0 0 0 3 3 2 TN11 or
DPD63-8
-8
Four 63 A
circuit
breakers
4800 W
15 0 0 3 0 3 2
a: OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack is classified into enhanced and general subracks. The requirements on configuring
enhanced and general subracks are the same.
b: The maximum power consumption of the integrated equipment refers to the maximum power consumption of
the cabinet or the maximum heat dissipation capacity of the integrated equipment. The power consumption of the
integrated equipment can not exceed the maximum power consumption.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
8
2 Fiber Management Cabinet
Used with an N63B or N66B cabinet, a fiber management cabinet can enhance the fiber capacity
of the N63B or N66B cabinet and make fiber installation and routing more flexible.
Appearance
There are two types of fiber management cabinets: left-side fiber management cabinet and right-
side fiber management cabinet. Fiber management cabinets are used together with N63B and
N66B cabinets, as shown in Figure 2-1 and Figure 2-2.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Hardware Description 2 Fiber Management Cabinet
9
Figure 2-1 Fiber management cabinets used with the N63B cabinet
3
1
2
1. Left-side fiber management cabinet 2. Right-side fiber management cabinet 3. Fiber spool unit

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
10
Figure 2-2 Fiber management cabinets used with the N66B cabinet
3
4
1
2
1,3. Left-side fiber management cabinet 2,4. Right-side fiber management cabinet

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
11
Functions and features
Table 2-1 lists the functions and features of a fiber management cabinet.
Table 2-1 Functions and features
Item Description
Structure feature l Fiber spool units in a fiber management cabinet can be adjusted based
on device position in the cabinet.
l A fiber management cabinet can protect fibers and meet the
requirement for a minimum of 30 mm bending radius.
l A fiber management cabinet makes fiber spooling more flexible.
Fiber capacity
Internal fiber capacity
a
Without a fiber management
cabinet
b
: 320 PCS
With a fiber management cabinet
c
: 640 PCS
External fiber capacity
a
Without a fiber management
cabinet
b
: 720 PCS
With a fiber management cabinet
c
: 1408 PCS
a: A fiber with a diameter of 2 mm is used as an example to calculate how many internal and
external fibers that can be configured at most. An internal fiber is a fiber used inside a subrack
or between subracks, and an external fiber is a fiber connecting one equipment cabinet to
other equipment.
b: Fibers in Overhead Cabling Mode can be configured at most.
c: An N63B cabinet configured with left-side and right-side fiber management cabinets is
used as an example to calculate how many internal and external fibers can be configured at
most.
Two routing fiber cabinets can be installed on the left and right sides of one N66B cabinet.
In this configuration, a maximum of 1280 internal and 2816 external fibers can configured.

Configuration Principle
Left-side and right-side fiber management cabinets are installed to the left and right of a cabinet
respectively. Fiber management cabinets can be used with N63B or N66B cabinet only. You
can determine whether to configure a fiber management cabinet based on the required fiber
capacity.
Observe the following rules when configuring an 80-channel system (fibers with 2 mm diameters
are used as an example):
l When N63B cabinets are used, fiber management cabinets must be used for overhead
cabling if more than 320 internal fibers and 720 external fibers are required.
l When N66B cabinets are used, fiber management cabinets must be used for overhead
cabling if more than 640 internal fibers and 1440 external fibers are required.
In addition, observe the following rules when configuring fiber management cabinets:
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
12
l For new network deployment or network expansion, or during network maintenance, fiber
management cabinets can be configured if the free space on the two sides of a cabinet is
large enough for users to flexibly and freely install and route fibers.
l For underfloor cabling, fiber management cabinets must be used to manage external fibers
because there is not much space left inside the cabinet after the external power cables are
arranged in the cabinet.
NOTE
l Left-side and right-side fiber management cabinets must be configured at the same time.
l During cabinet expansion, spool internal cascading fibers and external fibers in the fiber management
cabinets.
Mechanical Specifications
The mechanical specifications of a fiber management cabinet are as follows:
l Outline dimensions: 150 mm (W) x 300 mm (D) x 2200 mm (H) (5.9 in. (W) x 11.8 in. (D)
x 86.6 in. (H))
l Weight: 23 kg (50.7 lb)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
13
3 DC PDU
About This Chapter
There are four types of power distribution units (PDUs): TN16, TN51, TN11 and PDU
(DPD63-8-8). The availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the
boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office.
l The TN51PDU and TN16PDU use the same front panel and provide the same functions,
but they are different in height. The two boards apply to the same scenarios. This manual
uses the TN16PDU board as an example for illustration.
l The TN16PDU is used for a cabinet housing only OptiX OSN 8800 subracks or a cabinet
housing OptiX OSN 8800 and OptiX OSN 6800 subracks.
l The TN11PDU is used only for a cabinet housing OptiX OSN 6800 subracks or a cabinet
housing OptiX OSN 8800 platform subracks.
l The PDU (DPD63-8-8) is used for a cabinet housing only OptiX OSN 8800 subracks , a
cabinet housing only OptiX OSN 6800 subracks, or a cabinet housing OptiX OSN 8800
and OptiX OSN 6800 subracks.
3.1 TN16PDU/TN51PDU
The TN16PDU/TN51PDU is installed in the upper part of a cabinet to supply power to subracks
inside the cabinet.
3.2 TN11PDU
The TN11PDU is installed in the upper part of a cabinet to supply power to subracks inside the
cabinet.
3.3 PDU (DPD63-8-8)
The DPD63-8-8 PDU is installed at the top of a cabinet to power subracks inside the cabinet.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Hardware Description 3 DC PDU
14
3.1 TN16PDU/TN51PDU
The TN16PDU/TN51PDU is installed in the upper part of a cabinet to supply power to subracks
inside the cabinet.
NOTE
The TN51PDU and TN16PDU have the same functions but differ in height. The TN51PDU is 133.4 mm
high. When two OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subracks are installed on a cabinet, one more DCM frame can be
configured if the TN16PDU is used, compared with the TN51PDU.
TN51PDU can be substituted by the TN16PDU.This topic describes the TN16PDU.
The TN16PDU consists of two parts: A and B, which backs up each other. Both A and B receive
four -48V/-60V power supplies and output four power supplies for subracks in the cabinet.
Whether short-circuiting copper bars are required is determined by the current of power supplied
by the power supply equipment in the telecommunications room:
l When eight 63 A power supplies are provided, no short-circuiting copper bar is required.
l When four 125 A power supplies are provided, short-circuiting copper bars are required
for dividing one 125 A power supply into two 63 A power supplies.
For more information about short-circuiting copper bars, see Short-Circuiting Copper
Bar.
Figure 3-1 shows the front panel of the TN16PDU.
Figure 3-1 Front panel of the TN16PDU
1
+
-
2
+
-
3
+
-
4
+
-
1
+
-
2
+
-
3
+
-
4
+
-
Power supply
output area
B A
Power supply
switch area
Power supply
input area
Power supply
switch area
Power supply
output area
1 2 3
1. Output cable terminal block 2. Input cable terminal block 3. Power switch

l Panel dimensions: 535 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) (21.1 in. (W) x 3.9 in. (H))
l Output cable terminal block: Both A and B of the DC PDU have four output cable terminal
blocks for connecting power cables of subracks to supply power for subracks.
l Input cable terminal block: Both A and B of the DC PDU have four input cable terminal
blocks and receive four -48V/-60V DC power supplies, eight -48V/-60V DC power supplies
in total.
l Power switch: Both A and B of the DC PDU have four output power switches to control
power supplies for subracks inside the cabinet and provide overcurrent protection for each
other.
Figure 3-2 shows the internal pin assignments of the TN16PDU.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
15
Figure 3-2 TN16PDU internal pin assignments
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
-
+
- - -
2 1 3 4 2 1 3 4
INPUT A
+
INPUT B
+ + + + + + +
2 1 3 4 2 1 3 4
INPUT A
-
INPUT B
- - - - - - -
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
+
2 1 3 4
2 1 3 4
+ +
OUTPUT B
OUTPUT B
-
+
- - -
+
2 1 3 4
2 1 3 4
+ +
OUTPUT A
OUTPUT A

Short-Circuit Copper Bar
If a power supply is 125 A, both A and B need to receive two power supplies, four power supplies
in total. In this case, short-circuit copper bars are required for both A and B. Figure 3-3 shows
the appearance of the short-circuiting copper bar.
Figure 3-3 Appearance
Copper Plate

3.2 TN11PDU
The TN11PDU is installed in the upper part of a cabinet to supply power to subracks inside the
cabinet.
DC PDU
The TN11PDU consists of two parts: A and B, which backs up each other. Both A and B receive
two -48V/-60V power supplies and output six power supplies for subracks in the cabinet.
Whether junction boxes are required is determined by the current of power supplied by the power
supply equipment in the telecommunications room:
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
16
l If a power supply is 63 A, both A and B need to receive two power supplies, four power
supplies in total. In this case, no junction box is required.
l If a power supply is 125 A, both A and B need to receive one power supply, two power
supplies in total. In this case, junction boxes are required for dividing one 125 A current
into four 32 A currents.
For more information about junction boxes, see Junction Box.
Figure 3-4 shows the front panel of the TN11PDU.
Figure 3-4 Front panel of the TN11PDU
1 2 3 3 2 1
4 4
1. Output cable terminal block 2. Ground screw 3. Input cable terminal block 4. Power switch

l Panel dimensions: 535 mm (W) x 131 mm (H) (21.1 in. (W) x 5.2 in. (H))
l Output cable terminal block: Both A and B of the DC PDU have six output cable terminal
blocks for connecting power cables of subracks to supply power for subracks.
l Ground screw: used to connect (protection ground) PGND cables.
l Input cable terminal block: Both A and B of the DC PDU have two input cable terminal
blocks and receive two -48V/-60V DC power supplies, four -48V/-60V DC power supplies
in total.
l Power switch: Both A and B of the DC PDU have six power output switches (corresponding
to the six output cable terminal blocks) to control power supplies for subracks in the cabinet.
NOTE
For the OptiX OSN 6800, both A and B only use power switches SW2, SW3, SW4, and SW5 to
control power supplies for four subracks from bottom to top.
Figure 3-5 shows the internal pin assignments of the TN11PDU.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
17
Figure 3-5 TN11PDU internal pin assignments
INPUT
+ +
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OUTPUT
- -
INPUT
+ + - -
OUTPUT
- - - - - -
- - - - - - + + + + + + - - - - - - + + + + + +

Junction Box
If a power supply is 125 A, both A and B need to receive one power supply, two power supplies
in total. In this case, junction boxes are required for both A and B. Figure 3-6 shows the junction
box structure and Figure 3-7 shows the installation position of the junction box.
Figure 3-6 Structure

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
18
Figure 3-7 Installation position

3.3 PDU (DPD63-8-8)
The DPD63-8-8 PDU is installed at the top of a cabinet to power subracks inside the cabinet.
NOTE
The TN11PDU/TN16PDU/TN51PDU can be substituted by the DPD63-8-8 PDU.
DC PDU
The DPD63-8-8 PDU consists of two sections: A and B, which provide backup for each other.
Both A and B accept four -48V/-60V power inputs and produce four power outputs for subracks
in the cabinet.
According to the currents provided by the power source inside the equipment room, the
DPD63-8-8 PDU can have different configurations. Table 3-1 lists the typical configurations
of the PDU.
Table 3-1 Typical configurations of the DPD63-8-8 PDU
N
o.
Input
Current
Output
Current
Circuit
Breaker
Requirement
Copper Fitting Configuration
1 8 x 63A 8 x 63A 8 x 63A None
2 4 x 125A 8 x 63A 8 x 63A Two-in-one copper fittings in the left,
right, and middle of the PDU
3 4 x 63A 8 x 32A 8 x 32A Two-in-one copper fittings in the left,
4 2 x 125A 8 x 32A 8 x 32A l Four-in-one copper fittings in the
left, right, and middle of the PDU
l Two-in-one copper fittings in the
middle of the PDU
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
19
N
o.
Input
Current
Output
Current
Circuit
Breaker
Requirement
Copper Fitting Configuration
5 2 x 125A + 2
x 63A
4 x 63A + 4
x 32A
4 x 63A + 4 x
32A
Two-in-one copper fittings in the left,
When working at the ambient temperature of 65C (149F) of the air exhaust vent, the PDU
output current decreases from 63 A to 53.7 A or from 32 A to 29.1 A.

For more information about copper fitting configuration, see Copper Fittings.
Figure 3-8 shows the front panel of the PDU (DPD63-8-8).
Figure 3-8 Front panel of the DPD63-8-8 PDU
This device has more than one power input.
Disconnect all the power inputs to power off this
device.
!
CAUTION
Disconnect power before servicing. Also all metal
jewelry, such as watchs, rings, etc, should be
removed from hands and wrists.
!
CAUTION
PER INPUT -48V-60V; 63A MAX
A1 A2 A3 A4
NEG(-)
A1 A2 A3 A4
RTN(+)
B1 B2 B3 B4
NEG(-)
OUTPUT
RTN(+)
B1 B2 B3 B4

Figure 3-9 shows the terminals on the DPD63-8-8 PDU.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
20
Figure 3-9 Terminals on the DPD63-8-8 PDU
1
4 5
2
3
1. NEG(-) power input interface 2. RTN(+) power input interface 3. RTN(+) power output interface
4. NEG(-) power output interface 5. Power switch

l Panel dimensions (H x W x D): 110 mm (4.3 in.) x 442 mm (17.4 in.) x 89.2 mm (3.5 in.)
l Power output interfaces: Four power output interfaces are located in each of sections A and
B of the PDU. These interfaces connect to subrack power cables and distribute power to
the subracks inside a cabinet.
l Power input interfaces: Four power input interfaces are located in each of sections A and
B of the PDU. The four interfaces in each section accept four -48 or -60 V DC power inputs,
providing a total of eight -48 or -60 V DC power inputs in both sections.
l Power switches: Four power switches are located in each of sections A and B of the PDU.
They are in a one-to-one mapping relationship with power output interfaces and control
the power inputs to the subracks inside the cabinet.
Figure 3-10 shows the internal pin assignments of the DPD63-8-8 PDU.
Figure 3-10 DPD63-8-8 PDU internal pin assignments
2 1 3 4 2 1 3 4
INPUT A
+
INPUT B
+ + + + + + +
2 1 3 4 2 1 3 4
OUTPUT A
+
OUTPUT B
+ + + + + + +
INPUT A
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
- - - - - - - -
INPUT B
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OUTPUT A
- - - -
OUTPUT B
- - - -

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
21
Copper Fittings
When sections A and B each require two power inputs (four power inputs in total), two-in-one
copper fittings must be installed in both sections. Figure 3-11 shows the appearance of two-in-
one copper fittings and how they are installed on the DPD63-8-8 PDU.
Figure 3-11 Appearance of the two-in-one copper fittings (four power inputs and eight power outputs)
Two-in-one copper fittings
1
2
3
Two-in-one copper fittings (right)
3
2
Two-in-one copper fittings (left)
1

When sections A and B require one power input each (two power inputs in total), four-in-one
copper fittings must be installed on the left and right terminals and two-in-one copper fittings
must be installed on the middle terminals of the DPD63-8-8 PDU. Figure 3-12 shows the
appearance of four-in-one copper fittings and how they are installed on the DPD63-8-8 PDU.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
22
Figure 3-12 Appearance of the four-in-one copper fittings (two power inputs and eight power outputs)
Four-in-one copper fittings
3 1 3
2
3
1 2
Two-in-one
copper fittings
Four-in-one copper fittings

NOTE
Eight holes are located on the terminal block in the middle of the DPD63-8-8 PDU. Four two-in-one copper
fittings designated for the middle of the DPD63-8-8 PDU are installed to cover the first to eighth holes, as shown
in Figure 3-11 and Figure 3-12. In total, four two-in-one copper fittings are required to combine the RTN(+)
power inputs in the middle of the DPD63-8-8 PDU.
As shown in Figure 3-12, one four-in-one copper fittings are vertically installed on the RTN(+) power input
terminals in the middle of the DPD63-8-8 PDU.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
23
4 UPM
The UPM is an external uninterruptible power module. The UPM can directly convert 110 V/
220 V AC mains power into -48 V DC power required by the transmission equipment. The UPM
is suitable for the telecom carriers who cannot provide -48 V DC power supply or requires
batteries.
Application
Figure 4-1 shows the application of the UPM on the OptiX OSN 8800 T16/6800.
Figure 4-1 Application of the UPM on the OptiX OSN 8800 T16/6800
Board A
Board B
-48V
-48V
Backplane
UPM
110V/220V
OptiX OSN equipment
PIU
PIU
-48V

Appearance
The UPM is a special power supply system and EPS75-4815AF is one type of the UPM.
The output power of a single EPS75-4815AF power system is 2000 W. The EPS75-4815AF
power system is 3U high. Figure 4-2 shows the appearance of the EPS75-4815AF power system.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Hardware Description 4 UPM
24
Figure 4-2 Appearance of the EPS75-4815AF power system

Functions and Features
UPM can work with storage batteries . When the external AC power system supplies power
normally, the batteries store power. When the 110 V/220 V AC power supply is interrupted, the
batteries can supply power for 3 to 4 hours. To supply power to the OptiX OSN 8800 T16/
6800 equipment, only one power system is required to be connected to the batteries.
The standard maximum configuration of each EPS75-4815AF power system includes five
rectifier modules and one monitoring module.
NOTE
The batteries do not belong to the EPS75-4815AF. Therefore, the batteries need to be configured separately.
If the batteries are required, a battery cabinet is provided generally or a dedicated space in the equipment
cabinet is reserved for the batteries.
Table 4-1 provides the functions and features of the UPM.
Table 4-1 Functions and features of the EPS75-4815AF power system
Function and
Feature
EPS75-4815AF
Hot-swappable
function
The AC/DC rectifier module of the UPM is hot-swappable. When you
replace a faulty rectifier module, the other rectifier module can still
work normally. Therefore, the maintainability of the system is
improved.
Storage battery
protection function
The UPM provides the storage battery protection function. When the
mains supply is interrupted, the power system of the equipment
automatically switches to the storage battery, which ensures that the
equipment operates normally. The battery module provides a capacity
of 40 to 500 Ah. The default capacity is 65 Ah.
Loading capacity The loading capability of each rectifier module is 800 W.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
25
Function and
Feature
EPS75-4815AF
Lightning-proof
function
The rectifier module is embedded with the lightning-proof protector.
The rectifier module can bear the 1.2/50 us x 6 kV or 8/20 us x 3 kA
lightning surge. When the lightning current enters the rectifier module
along with the power cable, install category-C and category-B light
arresters before you connect the AC mains supply to the power system
to prevent the overvoltage caused by the direct lightning strike from
damaging the rectifier module.

Working Principle and Signal Flow
The UPM is fed by one 220 V AC mains power supply. The rectifier module converts the input
power into 48 V DC voltage to provide four DC branches and one battery branch.
When the UPM works normally, the monitoring module controls the rectifier module, storage
battery loop, and load loop, which work according to the preset parameters or user settings. The
monitoring module also monitors the status and data of the rectifier module, storage battery loop,
and load loop.
In the case of a mains supply failure, the equipment is fed by the storage battery group that is
connected to the UPM. The battery group must be connected to the UPM before the mains supply
fails. When the batteries start to discharge due to a mains supply failure, the monitoring module
reports the no-mains-supply alarm. With the discharge of the batteries, the battery voltage starts
to drop. When the battery voltage is lower than 45 V, the monitoring module reports the DC
undervoltage alarm. When the battery voltage reaches 43 V, the battery group enables the power-
off protection function to interrupt the connection between the battery group and the equipment.
As a result, the batteries are automatically protected.
When the mains supply is restored, the UPM resumes normal operations.
Interfaces and Indicators
Figure 4-3 shows the rear view of the EPS75-4815AF power system (subject to the UPM on
site).
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
26
Figure 4-3 Front panel of the EPS75-4815AF power system
1. Control circuit breaker of the AC
input (30 A)
2. Control circuit breaker of the
battery branch (80 A)
3. Control circuit breaker of load 1 (10
A)
A)
5. Control circuit breaker of
load 3 (40 A)
A)
7. AC phase line terminal 8. AC zero line terminal 9. Negative 48 V terminal of the battery
branch
10. Negative 48 V terminal of the load
branch
11. Positive 48 V terminal of
the battery branch
12. Positive 48 V terminal of the load
branch
13. Connecting terminal of the PGND
cable
14. DB44 signal interface 15. Communication interface (COM)
16. Communication test interface
(TEST)

Interfaces
The front panel of the EPS75-4815AF has seven interfaces. Table 4-2 describes the types and
usage of the interfaces of the EPS75-4815AF.
Table 4-2 Interfaces of the EPS75-4815AF power system
Interface Type of Interface Usage
Power
input
interface
Power interface "7" and "8" indicate the AC mains input terminals, which
access 110 V/220 V AC power.
Power
output
interface
Power interface The power output interfaces are in the lower left corner
on the front panel of the UPM. The terminals indicated
by "9" and "11" constitute a battery interface, through
which the power system is connected to the battery input
socket at the back of the storage battery box through a
battery cable. "10" and "12" indicate the output
interfaces of four loads. The output interfaces can supply
power to the OptiX OSN equipment by using power
cables.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
27
Connectin
g terminal
of the
PGND
cable
Power interface The UPM is grounded through the cabinet.
DB44
signal
interface
DB44 The backplane of the subrack can be connected to the
sensor transfer box (an optional device) through the
DB44 signal interface and to the monitoring module
through the 96-pin DIN connector. In addition, the
sensor transfer box can be connected to multiple sensors.
As a result, the monitoring function is extended.
Communi
cation
interface
(COM)
RJ45 Reserved
Communi
cation test
interface
(TEST)
RJ45 It is used for internal test.
Switch
button
Button The switch buttons are on the left of the UPM, as shown
in Figure 4-3. "1" indicates the control circuit breaker of
the AC input (30 A), which enables and disables the input
of the AC mains supply. "2", "3", "4", and "5" indicate
the load control switches, which enable and disable the
load output.

Definition of DB44 signal pins
Table 4-3 provides the definition of DB44 signal pins.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
28
Table 4-3 Definition of DB44 signal pins
Pin Diagram Pin Definiti
on
Function Pin Definit
ion
Function
1 24 V Auxiliary power
output
23 SMOK
E
Smoke sensor
output
24 WATE
R
Water damage detection
output
25 DOOR Door status switch (DSS)
signal detection
4 GND Signal ground 26 WIRE Distribution frame
connection
5 GND Signal ground 27 JK1+ Positive terminal of dry
contact 1
6 SIM1 Voltage
detection of the
first battery pack
28 JK1- Negative terminal of dry
contact 1
7 SIM2 Voltage
detection of the
second battery
pack
29 JK2+ Positive terminal of dry
contact 2
8 - - 30 JK2- Negative terminal of dry
contact 2
9 - - 31 CONT1
O+
Positive terminal for output
control of optical coupler 1
10 GND Signal ground 32 CONT1
O-
Negative terminal for output
11 VHUM Ambient
humidity
measurement
33 CONT2
O+
Positive terminal for output
12 VBTEM
1
Battery
temperature
measurement 1
34 CONT2
O-
Negative terminal for output
13 VBTEM
2
Battery
temperature
measurement 2
35 FANCT
R1+
Positive terminal for fan
rotation control
14 VTEM1 Ambient
temperature
measurement 1
36 FANCT
R1-
Negative terminal for fan
rotation control
15 VTEM2 Ambient
temperature
measurement 2
37 JKM1+ Positive terminal for a surge
protector failure alarm
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
29
Pin Diagram Pin Definiti
on
Function Pin Definit
ion
Function
16 JTD1 Backup 1 38 JKM1- Negative terminal for a surge
protector failure alarm
17 JTD2 Backup 2 39 JKM2+ Positive terminal for an AC
power-off alarm
18 JTD3 Backup 3 40 JKM2- Negative terminal for an AC
power-off alarm
19 JTD4 Backup 4 41 JKM3+ Positive terminal for a battery
undervoltage alarm
20 JTD5 Backup 5 42 JKM3- Negative terminal for a
battery undervoltage alarm
21 JTD6 Backup 6 43 JKM4+ Positive terminal for power
supply system failure
22 JTD7 Backup 7 44 JKM4- Negative terminal for power
supply system failure

Indicators
The front panel of each rectifier module has the following indicators:
l Running status indicator (RUN) one color (green)
l Alarm and protection indicator (ALM) one color (yellow)
l Faulty state indicator (FAULT) one color (red)
The front panel of the monitoring module has the following indicators:
l Power supply system fault indicator (ALM) one color (red)
l Power supply system status indicator (RUN) one color (green)
Valid Slots
The UPM is case shaped. Therefore, the UPM does not occupy a slot in the subrack.
Technical Specifications
A UPM consists of five power boxes and thus realizes the protected power supply. The output
power of each UPM is 5 x 800 W.
Table 4-4 lists the power parameters of the UPM.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
30
Table 4-4 Power parameters of the UPM
Parameter Value
Voltage range
of the AC input
90-290 V AC
AC input One single-phase three-wire system: 45-65 Hz
Rated input
current
28 A
Output
nominal
voltage
53.50.5 V
Rated output
current
DC output branches Load circuit breaker 1: 10 A
Load circuit breaker 2: 30 A
Battery circuit breaker: 80 A
Total output DC current 37.53 A to 753 A
Regulated
voltage
precision
1%
Non-balance of
load sharing
5% (50%-100% load)
Rated
efficiency of
the integrated
equipment
89%
Power factor 0.99 (nominal input or output)
Peak-to-peak
noise voltage
200 mV (within the range of 20 MHz)
Electrical
network
adjustment rate
0.1%
Lightning
protection
performance
When the UPM works alone, the input end can bear the simulated lightning
surge current whose waveform is 8/20s and amplitude is 5 kA for five
times in both directions. The interval between two surges must be at least
one minute. If the lightning surge current is higher than the preceding
indexes, the UPM may be damaged and cannot work normally.
Cooling
method
The fan that is embedded in the rectifier module cools the module.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
31
The mechanical specifications of the UPM are as follows:
l Dimensions of the UPM: 436 mm (W) x 255 mm (D) x 133 mm (H) (17.2 in. (W) x 10.0
in. (D) x 5.2 in. (H))
l Weight: 15 kg (33.1 lb.)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
32
5 OptiX OSN 8800 Subrack and Power
Requirement
About This Chapter
The OptiX OSN 8800 includes the following types of subracks: OptiX OSN 8800 T64, OptiX
OSN 8800 T32, OptiX OSN 8800 T16, and OptiX OSN 8800 platform subracks. The OptiX
OSN 8800 T64, OptiX OSN 8800 T32, and OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subracks support electrical
cross-connections, but the OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack does not. This section describes
the structure, slots, cross-connect capacities, FAN boards, power consumption, and power
supply requirements for each type of subrack.
5.1 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Subrack
There are two types of OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subracks: enhanced and general. Enhanced and
general subracks are the same in appearance except for the bandwidth of the backplane and
electrical cross-connect capacities.
5.4 OptiX OSN 8800 Platform Subrack
5.5 Data Communication and Equipment Maintenance Interfaces
The equipment provides abundant interfaces for data communication and equipment
maintenance.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Hardware Description 5 OptiX OSN 8800 Subrack and Power Requirement
33
In this document, "OptiX OSN 8800 T64" refers to both enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 and
general OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subracks unless otherwise specified.
5.1.1 Structure
Subracks are the basic working units of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64. Each subrack has independent
power supply.
Figure 5-1 shows the structure of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack.
Figure 5-1 Structure of OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack
1
2
3
4
5
6
3
OSN8800T64
OSN8800T64
or
1. Board area 2. Fiber cabling area 3. Fan tray assembly
4. Air filter 5. Fiber spool 6. Mounting ear
NOTE
A subrack identified by "Enhanced" is an enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack, and the one that is not
identified by "Enhanced" is an general OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack. These two types of subracks are displayed
as OSN8800 T64 Enhanced and OSN8800 T64 Standard respectively on the U2000.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
34

l Board area: All the boards are installed in this area. 93 slots are available.
l Fiber cabling area: Fiber jumpers from the ports on the front panel of each board are routed
to the fiber cabling area before being routed on a side of the open rack.
l Fan tray assembly: Four fan tray assemblies are available for this subrack. Each fan tray
assembly contains three fans that provide ventilation and heat dissipation for the subrack.
The front panel of the fan tray assembly has four indicators that indicate fan status and
related information.
NOTE
For detailed descriptions of the fan tray assembly, see 5.1.4 Fan and Heat Dissipation.
l Air filter: It protects the subrack from dust in the air and requires periodic cleaning.
l Fiber spool: Fixed fiber spools are on two sides of the subrack. Extra fibers are coiled in
the fiber spool on the open rack side before being routed to another subrack.
l Mounting ears: The mounting ears attach the subrack in the cabinet.
Table 5-1 Mechanical specifications of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64
Item Specification
Dimensions 498 mm (W) 580 mm (D) 900 mm (H)
(19.6 in. (W) 22.8 in. (D) 35.4 in. (H))
Weight (empty subrack
a
)
65 kg (143 lb.)
a: An empty subrack means no boards are installed in the board area, and no fan tray assembly
or air filter is installed.

5.1.2 Slot Description
The OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack provide 93 slots.
Slots of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack are shown in Figure 5-2.
Figure 5-2 Slots of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack
IU
1
IU
2
IU
3
IU
4
IU
5
IU
6
IU
7
IU
8
IU
9
C
r
o
s
s
-
c
o
n
n
e
c
t

b
o
a
r
d
IU
10
IU
11
IU
12
IU
13
IU
14
IU
15
IU
16
IU
17
IU
18
IU
19
IU
20
IU
21
IU
22
IU
23
IU
24
IU
25
IU
26
IU
27
IU
28
IU
29
IU
30
IU
31
IU
32
IU
33
IU
34
PIU
IU70
PIU
IU69 IU71
EFI2
STG
IU75 IU79
PIU
IU78 IU74
IU91
IU90
SCC
PIU
A
U
X
IU
72
IU
76
IU
77
EF
I1
IU
35
IU
36
IU
37
IU
38
IU
39
IU
40
IU
41
IU
42
IU
43
IU
44
IU
45
IU
46
IU
47
IU
48
IU
49
IU
50
IU
51
IU
52
IU
53
IU
54
IU
55
IU
56
IU
57
IU
58
IU
59
IU
60
IU
61
IU
62
IU
63
IU
64
IU
65
IU
66
IU
67
IU
68
PIU
IU81
PIU
IU80 IU82
STI
STG
IU86 IU89
PIU
IU88 IU85
IU93
IU92
SCC
PIU
A
U
X
IU
83
IU87
ATE
Front Back
C
r
o
s
s
-
c
o
n
n
e
c
t

b
o
a
r
d
C
r
o
s
s
-
c
o
n
n
e
c
t

b
o
a
r
d
C
r
o
s
s
-
c
o
n
n
e
c
t

b
o
a
r
d
A
U
X
IU
73
A
U
X
IU
84
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
35

l : houses service boards and supports service cross-connections.
l In a general OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack, IU73 and IU84 are reserved for future use, and
IU72 and IU83 are used to house AUX boards. In an enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64
subrack, IU72 and IU83 are used to house the active AUX boards, and IU73 and IU84 are
used to house the standby AUX boards.
NOTE
Only the TN52AUX board supports 1+1 backup.
l IU77 is reserved for future use.
l IU9 and IU43 are reserved for the cross-connect board.
Enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack: TNK2UXCT or TNK4XCT.
General OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack: TNK4XCT or TNK2XCT.
Enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack: TNK2USXH, TNK4SXH or TNK4SXM.
General OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack: TNK4SXH, TNK2SXH, TNK4SXM or
TNK2SXM.
l The following table provides the slots for housing active and standby boards of the subrack.
Board Slots for Active and Standby Boards
PIU l General OptiX 8800 T64: IU69 & IU78, IU70 & IU79, IU80 &
IU88, and IU81 & IU89
l Enhanced OptiX 8800 T64: IU69 & IU89, IU70 & IU88, IU78
& IU81, and IU79 & IU80
SCC IU74 & IU85
STG IU75 & IU86
SXM/SXH/
USXH
IU10 & IU44
XCT/UXCT IU9 & IU43
TN52AUX Enhanced OptiX 8800 T64: IU72 & IU73, IU83 & IU84

5.1.3 Cross-Connect Capacities
The cross-connect capacity of a slot in an OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack vary according to the
type of cross-connect board installed in the slot.
OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subracks can cross-connect ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, ODU2e, ODU3,
ODU4, ODUflex, VC-4, VC-3, and VC-12 granularities at the same time. Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-
IU42, and IU45-IU68 provide the same cross-connect capacity. As shown in Table 5-2.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
36
Table 5-2 Cross-connect capacity of OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack
Subrack
Type
Cross-
Connect
Board
Maximum Cross-Connect
Capacity of Each Slot
a
Capacity of Subrack
ODUk
b
VC-4 VC-3/
VC-12
e
ODUk
b
VC-4 VC-3/
VC-12
Enhance
d
USXH N/A 20 Gbit/
s
N/A N/A 1.28 Tbit/
s
N/A
Enhance
d
USXH
+UXCT
c
100
Gbit/s
20 Gbit/
s
N/A 6.4 Tbit/s 1.28 Tbit/
s
N/A
Enhance
d
SXH N/A 20 Gbit/
s
N/A N/A 1.28 Tbit/
s
N/A
Enhance
d
SXM N/A 20 Gbit/
s
20 Gbit/
s
N/A 1.28 Tbit/
s
80 Gbit/s
Enhance
d
SXH
+XCT
c
40 Gbit/
s
20 Gbit/
s
N/A 2.56 Tbit/
s
1.28 Tbit/
s
N/A
Enhance
d
SXM
+XCT
c
40 Gbit/
s
20 Gbit/
s
20 Gbit/
s
2.56 Tbit/
s
1.28 Tbit/
s
80 Gbit/s
General SXH N/A 20 Gbit/
s
N/A N/A 1.28 Tbit/
s
N/A
General SXM N/A 20 Gbit/
s
20 Gbit/
s
N/A 1.28 Tbit/
s
80 Gbit/s
General SXH
+XCT
d
40 Gbit/
s
20 Gbit/
s
N/A 2.56 Tbit/
s
1.28 Tbit/
s
N/A
General SXM
+XCT
d
40 Gbit/
s
20 Gbit/
s
20 Gbit/
s
2.56 Tbit/
s
1.28 Tbit/
s
80 Gbit/s
a: In OptiX OSN 8800 T64 enhanced subrack, the maximum cross-connect capacity of a single
slot can be smoothly increased from 40 Gbit/s to 100 Gbit/s by replacing the cross-connect
board.
b: k=0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 4 or flex. Only the USXH+UXCT supports ODU4 granularities.
c: Enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subracks must be configured with both the USXH and
UXCT boards, the SXH and XCT boards or the SXM and XCT boards to cross-connect ODUk
granularities.
d: General OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subracks must be configured with both the SXH and XCT
boards or the SXM and XCT boards to cross-connect ODUk granularities.
e: All service slots share a bandwidth of 80 Gbit/s.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
37
5.1.4 Fan and Heat Dissipation
Each OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack has four fan tray assemblies, each of which includes three
independent fans. In each subrack, the lower fan tray assembly has an air filter, but the upper
fan tray assembly does not. The user can withdraw, clean, and replace each air filter.
Version Description
Only one functional version of the fan tray assembly is available, that is, TN51.
Table 5-3 describes the functions of a fan tray assembly.
Table 5-3 Functions
Function Description
Basic function Dissipates the heat generated by a network element (NE), so that
the NE can operate normally within the designated temperature
range.
Commissioning control l Auto Speed Mode: Implements automatic fan speed
regulation, depending on the subrack temperature.
l Adjustable Speed Mode: You can manually adjust the fan
speed.
Section-dependent heat
dissipation
Each subrack is divided into six sections to provide efficient heat
dissipation. The fan speed in each section is independently
regulated.
Hot swapping Provides the hot swapping function for the fan tray assembly.
Alarming Reports alarms of the fans, and reports the in-service information.
Status checking Checks and reports on the fan status.

Working Principle
A fan tray assembly inside a subrack ventilates the subrack to ensure that the subrack works
effectively at an appropriate temperature. The fan tray assembly is located in the lower portion
of a subrack. It draws in air into the subrack, forming an air duct from bottom to top. Other
boards in the subrack are installed vertically. In other words, the boards are parallel to the air
duct. This design ensures reliable heat dissipation. Figure 5-3 shows how ventilation is
performed in the OptiX OSN 8800 T64.
Figure 5-3 shows how ventilation is performed in the OptiX OSN 8800 T64.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
38
Figure 5-3 Subrack heat dissipation and ventilation system
Air inlet
Air outlet
Front
Side view
Air filter
Air inlet
Air outlet
Back
Fan
Fan
Air filter
Fan
Fan

The OptiX OSN 8800 supports two fan speed modes, as described in Table 5-4. The section-
dependent speed regulating function is available in Auto Speed Mode. The Auto Speed Mode
is recommended.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
39
Table 5-4 FAN speed mode
FAN Speed
Mode
Description
Auto Speed Mode Fan speed in each section is regulated automatically according to the
temperature of the boards in the section that the fans are targeted for.
l Lower than 25C (77F): the fans run at low speed.
l Higher than 45C (113F): the fans run at high speed.
l 25C to 45C (77F to 113 F): The fans automatically adjust their
rotation speeds. This mode can reduce noise and is power-saving.
Fan speed in each section is independently regulated.
The fans run at full speed if the speed regulating signal is abnormal.
If one of the fans in one section fails, the other fans in this section run at
full speed.
When the user queries the fan speed using the NMS, the highest fan speed
among all sections is displayed. In other words, if the fans in one section
rotate at high speed, the NMS displays the fan speed as high speed in the
query result.
Adjustable Speed
Mode
Six fan speeds are supported: Stop, Low Speed, Medium-Low Speed,
Medium Speed, Medium-High Speed, and High Speed. In this mode,
the user manually sets the fan speed and fans in all sections run at the
same speed. The user cannot independently set the fan speed for a
specific section.

Each OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack has two sides. Each side has six sections. See Figure 5-4.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
40
Figure 5-4 Section-dependent heat dissipation of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack
IU1 IU2 IU3 IU4 IU5 IU6 IU7 IU8
IU9 IU10
IU11
IU19 IU20 IU21 IU22 IU23 IU24 IU25 IU26 IU27
IU71 IU70 IU69 IU72 IU73
IU74
IU50
IU75
FAN1 FAN2
FAN4 FAN5
IU90
IU91
IU12 IU13 IU14 IU15 IU16 IU17
IU28 IU29 IU30 IU31 IU32 IU33 IU34
IU18
IU79
FAN3
FAN6
IU76 IU77 IU78
Front
Partition 1 Partition 2 Partition 3
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
41
IU43 IU44
IU45
IU82 IU81 IU80
IU83 IU86 IU84 IU85
IU50
FAN7 FAN8
FAN10 FAN11
IU92
IU93
IU52
IU87 IU89 IU88
FAN9
FAN12
Back

NOTE
l If any one of the six fans in the two fan tray assemblies fails, the system can remain operational for a
short term in environments where temperatures range between 0C to 40C (32F to 104F). To ensure
long-term operation of the system, replace the fan tray assembly in a timely manner.
Short-term operation means that the continuous operating time does not exceed 96 hours and the
accumulated time per year does not exceed 15 days.
l Replace the fan tray assembly in either of the following two situations:
l Two or more fans fail in one of the two fan tray assemblies.
l One or more fans fail in each of the two fan tray assemblies.
l In a system that is operating normally, the two fans in the same section (such as FAN1 and FAN4) run
at the same speed.
The fan tray assembly consists of fans and fan control unit. Figure 5-5 shows the functional
blocks of the fan tray assembly.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
42
Figure 5-5 Functional block diagram of the fan tray assembly
Fan control unit
FAN
External power
supply 1
SCC
Status signal
Speed adjusting
signal
External power
supply 2
Status signal
Speed adjusting
signal

l FAN: dissipates heat generated by normal operation of the subrack. FAN is the core of the
fan tray assembly.
l Fan control board:
Controls the fan speed according to the fan speed regulating signals.
Detects faults. After a fault is detected, the fan control unit reports an alarm. In this case,
the SCC board issues commands to instruct the other fans to run at the full speed.
Monitors speed regulating signals, the fan status, and the online/offline state of the fan
tray assembly.
Receives and carries out commands from the SCC board to shut down the fans on the
fan tray assembly if necessary.
Appearance
Figure 5-6 shows a fan tray assembly.
Figure 5-6 Fan tray assembly
1
2
3
SYSTEM
1. Air filter 2. Operating status indicators 3. Fans (three in total)
NOTE
An air filter is installed on the lower fan tray assembly to prevent dust from entering the subrack.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
43

Valid Slots
The fan tray assembly occupies one slot. The valid slots for the fan tray assembly are IU90,
IU91, IU92 and IU93 in the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack.
Specifications of the Fan Tray Assembly
Table 5-5 lists the technical specifications of the fan tray assembly.
NOTE
For transport equipment, the heat consumption and power consumption are similar and can be considered
the same. Heat consumption is expressed in BTU/h and power consumption is expressed in W. The
conversion between the two units is as follows: 1 BTU/h = 0.2931 W.
Table 5-5 Technical specifications of the fan tray assembly
Item Specification
Dimensions (H x W x D) 64.0 mm (2.5 in.) x 493.7 mm (19.4 in.) x 280.5 mm (11.0 in.)
Weight 3.6 kg (7.9 lb.)
Power Consumption
a
l Low Speed: 70 W
l Medium-Low Speed: 95 W
l Medium Speed: 150 W
l Medium-High Speed: 225W
l High Speed: 270W
a: Rotating speed of fans is controlled intelligently. When the system is typically configured,
rotating speed of fans is automatically adjusted to a low level. When the system is fully
configured with boards of high power consumption, and the system is running in a high
ambient temperature, rotating speed of fans may be adjusted to a high level. When rotating
at the maximum speed, power consumption of fan tray assembly may reach 270 W.

5.1.5 Power Consumption
This section describes the maximum and typical subrack power consumption specifications.
Table 5-6 describes the power consumption of an OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack.
NOTE
Typical configuration power consumption indicates the average power consumption of the equipment with
the typical configuration and the equipment runs at the room temperature. Maximum power consumption
indicates the possible maximum power consumption when the equipment runs in an environment with
extreme conditions.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
44
Table 5-6 Power consumption of an OptiX OSN 8800 T64
Item Enhanced 8800 T64 General 8800 T64
Maximum subrack power
consumption
a
9600 W 6500 W
Typical configuration power
consumption (OTN)
6000 W 3700 W
Typical configuration power
consumption (OCS)
2135 W 1748 W
a: The maximum subrack power consumption refers to the theoretical power consumption
obtained when boards with the highest power consumption are installed in every slot on the
subrack.

Table 5-7 describes the power consumption of the subrack in typical configuration in an OptiX
OSN 8800 T64.
Table 5-7 Power consumption of the common units in an OptiX OSN 8800 T64
Unit Name Typical Power
Consumption
at 25C (77F)
(W)
a
Maximum
Power
Consumption
at 55C (131F)
(W)
a
Remarks
OTU subrack
1
1804.6 2827.9 32 x LDX, 1 x SCC, 8 x PIU, 2 x
AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE,
and 4 x fan tray assembly
OTU subrack
2
1421.7 2340.9 4 x LSC(SDFEC), 2 x SCC, 8 x PIU,
2 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x
ATE, and 4 x fan tray assembly
OTU
electrical
cross-
connect
subrack 1
(general
subrack)
2172.7 2822.9 2 x XCT, 2 x SXH, 8 x NS3, 2 x SCC,
2 x STG, 8 x PIU, 5 x TQX, 5 x TOA,
OTU
electrical
cross-
connect
subrack 2
(general
subrack)
1839.1 2776.7 2 x XCT, 2 x SXM, 20 x NQ2, 1 x
SCC, 8 x PIU, 5 x TOA, 5 x TQX, 2
x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE,
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
45
Consumption
at 25C (77F)
(W)
a
Maximum
Power
Consumption
at 55C (131F)
(W)
a
Remarks
OTU
electrical
cross-
connect
subrack
(enhanced
subrack)
5517.7 6932.4 2 x UXCT, 2 x USXH, 16 x NS4
(SDFEC), 8 x TSC, 4 x TTX, 5 x
TOX, 2 x SCC, 8 x PIU, 2 x AUX, 1
x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, 4 x fan
tray assembly
OTM
subrack 1
963.78 1860.3 1 x M40V, 1 x D40, 1 x OAU1, 1 x
OBU1, 12 x LDX, 1 x SCC, 1 x SC2,
8 x PIU, 2 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2,
1 x ATE, and 4 x fan tray assembly
OTM
subrack 2
1470.7 2406.9 1 x M40V, 1 x D40, 1 x OAU1, 1 x
OBU1, 4 x LSC(SDFEC), 2 x SCC,
OCS subrack
(general
subrack)
1748 2636 2 x SXM, 20 x SLD64, 8 x SLO16, 4
x SLQ16, 4 x SLH41, 4 x EGSH, 2 x
STG, 1 x STI, 2 x SCC, 8 x PIU, 2 x
OCS subrack
(enhanced
subrack)
2135 3076 2 x USXH, 20 x SLD64, 8 x SLO16,
4 x SLQ16, 4 x SLH41, 4 x EGSH, 2
x STG, 1 x STI, 2 x SCC, 8 x PIU, 2
a: Indicates that the power consumption of the subrack and cabinet is the value in a certain
configuration. The value is for reference only. The actual power consumed by the chassis and
cabinet is a calculation based on the power consumption of each module.

5.1.6 Power Requirement
This section describes the requirements on power supply.
Requirements on Voltage and Current
Table 5-8 provides the requirements on voltage and current of an OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
46
Table 5-8 Requirements on voltage and current of an OptiX OSN 8800 T64
Item Requirement
Rated working current 200 A (Independent power supplies to four
sections of each subrack, with 50 A for each
section)
Nominal working voltage -48V DC/-60V DC
Working voltage range -48V DC: -40V to -57.6V
-60V DC: -48V to -72V

PIU
The PIU board receives and provides DC power for equipment. For OptiX OSN 8800 T64/8800
T32, the PIU board can be TN16PIU or TN51PIU. For OptiX OSN 8800 T16, the PIU board
must be TN16PIU.
l Function
Accesses DC power in a range from -40 V to -72 V. Provides lightning protection and
power filtering functions. The TN16PIU supports intelligent ammeter function, which
enables the TN16PIU to detect the power consumption of the entire subrack and report the
power consumption to the system control unit.
NOTE
The overcurrent protection function for the access power supplies of each subrack is realized by the
magnetic circuit breaker of the PDU.
l Front Panel
As shown in the following figures, two types of front panel are available for The TN51PIU
board. The difference between the two types of front panel lies in the silkscreen.
Figure 5-7 Front panel of the TN51PIU board
PWR
RTN(+)
PIU
NEG(-)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
47
PWR
RTN
PIU
-48V

PWR
NEG(-) RTN(+)
PIU

There is only the power indicator (PWR), which is green.
l Valid Slots
Table 5-9 Valid slots for the TN51PIU board
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
subrack
IU69, IU70, IU78, IU79, IU80, IU81,IU88 and IU89
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
subrack
IU39, IU40, IU45, and IU46

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
48
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
subrack
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
subrack
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
subrack
IU20 and IU23

l Specifications
Performance Specifications
Table 5-11 Performance specifications of the PIU board
Item Unit Value
Number of DC input
power supplies
- 1
Input DC power voltage
range
V DC -48V DC: -40V to -57.6V
-60V DC: -48V to -72V
Input DC power current A 60

Dimensions of front panel: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 80 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7
in. (D) x 3.1 in. (H))
Weight:
TN51PIU: 0.5 kg (1.10 lb.)
TN16PIU: 0.65 kg (1.43 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
Consumption at 25C
(77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN51PIU 5 5
TN16PIU 3 3.6

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
49
In this document, "OptiX OSN 8800 T32" refers to both enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 and
general OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subracks unless otherwise specified.
5.2.1 Structure
power supply.
Figure 5-9 shows the structure of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack.
Figure 5-9 Structure of OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack
6
5
1
2
3
4
3
OSN 8800 T32
OSN 8800 T32
or
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
50
NOTE
A subrack identified by "Enhanced" is an enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, and the one that is not
identified by "Enhanced" is an general OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack. These two types of subracks are displayed
as OSN8800 T32 Enhanced and OSN8800 T32 Standard

l Fan tray assembly: Fan tray assembly contains three fans that provide ventilation and heat
dissipation for the subrack. The front panel of the fan tray assembly has four indicators that
indicate subrack status.
NOTE
Item Specification
(19.6 in. (W) 11.6 in. (D) 35.4 in. (H))
a
)
35 kg (77.1 lb.)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
51
IU9 IU10
IU11
IU28
SCC
IU19
IU43
PIU
IU39
EFI1
IU38
EFI2
IU37 IU40
PIU PIU
IU45 IU46
PIU
IU48 IU47
IU44 IU41 IU42
AUX STG STG
IU50
IU51
STI ATE
S
C
C

o
r

s
e
r
v
i
c
e

b
o
a
r
d
C
r
o
s
s
-
c
o
n
n
e
c
t

b
o
a
r
d
C
r
o
s
s
-
c
o
n
n
e
c
t

b
o
a
r
d
AUX

l Slot IU43 in a general OptiX OSN 8800 T32 is reserved for future use. Slot IU41 and slot
IU43 in an enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack are used to house the active and standby
AUX boards, respectively.
NOTE
Only the TN52AUX board supports 1+1 backup.
Enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack: UXCH, UXCM, XCH or XCM.
General OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack: XCH or XCM.
PIU IU39 & IU45 and IU40 & IU46
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
52
SCC IU28 & IU11
STG IU42 & IU44
XCH/XCM/
UXCH/UXCM
IU9 & IU10
TN52AUX Enhanced OptiX 8800 T32: IU41 & IU43

The cross-connect capacity of a slot in an OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack vary the type of cross-
connect board installed in the slot.
ODU4, ODUflex, VC-4, VC-3, VC-12 granularities and packet services at the same time. Slots
IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, and IU29-IU36 provide the same cross-connect capacity. As shown in
Table 5-13.
Subr
ack
Type
Cros
s-
Con
nect
Boar
d
a
Capacity of Subrack
c
ODU
k
b
VC-4 VC-3/
VC-12
d
Packe
t
c
ODU
k
b
VC-4 VC-3/
VC-12
Packe
t
c
Enha
nced
UXC
H
100
Gbit/s
40
Gbit/s
N/A 50
Gbit/s
3.2
Tbit/s
1.28
Tbit/s
N/A 1.6
Tbit/s
Enha
nced
UXC
M
100
Gbit/s
40
Gbit/s
40
Gbit/s
50
Gbit/s
3.2
Tbit/s
1.28
Tbit/s
80
Gbit/s
1.6
Tbit/s
Enha
nced
XCH 40
Gbit/s
40
Gbit/s
N/A N/A 1.28
Tbit/s
1.28
Tbit/s
N/A N/A
Enha
nced
XCM 40
Gbit/s
40
Gbit/s
40
Gbit/s
N/A 1.28
Tbit/s
1.28
Tbit/s
80
Gbit/s
N/A
Gene
ral
XCH 40
Gbit/s
40
Gbit/s
N/A N/A 1.28
Tbit/s
1.28
Tbit/s
N/A N/A
Gene
ral
XCM 40
Gbit/s
40
Gbit/s
40
Gbit/s
N/A 1.28
Tbit/s
1.28
Tbit/s
80
Gbit/s
N/A
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
53
Subr
ack
Type
Cros
s-
Con
nect
Boar
d
a
Capacity of Subrack
c
ODU
k
b
VC-4 VC-3/
VC-12
d
Packe
t
c
ODU
k
b
VC-4 VC-3/
VC-12
Packe
t
c
a: In enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, the maximum cross-connect capacity of a single
slot can be smoothly increased from 40 Gbit/s to 100 Gbit/s by replacing the cross-connect
board.
b: k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 4, or flex.
c: Theoretically, the subrack supports grooming of a maximum of 1.6 Tbit/s packet services.
In practice, however, the packet service grooming capability of the subrack is determined by
packet boards. The current version provides a packet service grooming capability up to 640
Gbit/s.
d: All service slots share a bandwidth of 80 Gbit/s.

Each OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack has two fan tray assemblies, each of which includes three
independent fans. In each subrack, the lower fan tray assembly has an air filter, but the upper
fan tray assembly does not have an air filter. The air filter can be drawn out, cleaned and replaced.
Version Description
Table 5-14 Functions of a fan tray assembly
range.
speed.
Partitioned heat
dissipation
Each subrack is divided into three partitions to help provide
efficient heat dissipation. The fan speed in each partition is
independently regulated.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
54

Working Principle
A fan tray assembly inside a subrack dissipates heat for the subrack to ensure that the subrack
works effectively at a specified temperature. The fan tray assembly is located on the lower part
of a subrack. It blows air into the subrack, forming an air duct from bottom to top. Other boards
in the subrack are installed vertically. In other words, the boards are parallel to the air duct. This
design ensures reliable heat dissipation. Figure 5-11 shows the heat dissipation and ventilation
system in the OptiX OSN 8800 T32.
Fan
Air inlet
Front
Side view
Air filter
Air outlet
Fan

The OptiX OSN 8800 supports two fan speed modes, as described in Table 5-15. The section-
dependent speed regulating function is available in Auto Speed Mode. The Auto Speed Mode
is recommended.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
55
FAN Speed
Mode
Description
Auto Speed Mode Fan speed in each section is regulated automatically according to the
temperature of the boards in the section that the fans are targeted for.
Fan speed in each section is independently regulated.
The fans run at full speed if the speed regulating signal is abnormal.
If one of the fans in one section fails, the other fans in this section run at
full speed.
When the user queries the fan speed using the NMS, the highest fan speed
among all sections is displayed. In other words, if the fans in one section
rotate at high speed, the NMS displays the fan speed as high speed in the
query result.
Adjustable Speed
Mode
Six fan speeds are supported: Stop, Low Speed, Medium-Low Speed,
Medium Speed, Medium-High Speed, and High Speed. In this mode,
the user manually sets the fan speed and fans in all sections run at the
same speed. The user cannot independently set the fan speed for a
specific section.

Each OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack is divided into three partitions in terms of heat dissipation.
The subrack adopts two fan tray assemblies to implement partitioned heat dissipation. See
Figure 5-12.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
56
Figure 5-12 Partitioned heat dissipation of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack
IU9 IU10
IU20 IU21 IU22 IU23 IU24 IU25 IU26 IU27 IU28 IU29 IU30 IU31 IU32 IU33 IU34 IU35 IU36
IU19
IU39 IU38 IU37 IU40 IU45 IU46 IU48 IU47 IU44 IU41 IU42
IU50
IU43
FAN1 FAN2 FAN3
FAN4 FAN5 FAN6
IU50
IU51

NOTE
l If any one of the six fans in the two fan tray assemblies fails, the system can remain operational for a
short term in environments where temperatures range between 0C to 40C (32F to 104F). To ensure
l Replace the fan tray assembly in either of the following two situations:
l Two or more fans fail in one of the two fan tray assemblies.
l One or more fans fail in each of the two fan tray assemblies.
l In a system that is operating normally, the two fans in the same partition (such as FAN1 and FAN4)
run at the same speed.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
57
Fan control unit
FAN
External power
supply 1
SCC
Status signal
Speed adjusting
signal
External power
supply 2
Status signal
Speed adjusting
signal

fan tray assembly.
tray assembly.
Appearance
1
2
3
SYSTEM
1. Air filter 2. Operating status indicators 3. Fans (three in total)
NOTE
An air filter is installed on the lower fan tray assembly to prevent dust from entering the subrack.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
58

Valid Slots
The fan tray assembly occupies one slot. The valid slots for the fan tray assembly are IU50 and
IU51 in the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack.
NOTE
Item Specification
Dimensions (H x W x D) 64.0 mm (2.5 in.) x 493.7 mm (19.4 in.) x 280.5 mm (11.0 in.)
Power Consumption
a
l Low Speed: 70 W
l Medium-Low Speed: 95 W
l Medium-High Speed: 225W
l High Speed: 270W

Table 5-17 describes the power consumption of an OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack.
NOTE
extreme conditions.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
59
Item Enhanced 8800 T32 General 8800 T32
Maximum subrack power
consumption
a
4800 W 3500 W
Recommended typical
configuration power
consumption (OTN)
3300 W 2000 W
Recommended typical
configuration power
consumption (OCS)
1791 W 1282 W
subrack.

Table 5-18 describes the power consumption of the subrack in typical configuration in an OptiX
OSN 8800 T32.
Table 5-18 Power consumption of the subrack in typical configuration in an OptiX OSN 8800
T32
Consumption
at 25C (77F)
(W)
a
Maximum
Power
Consumption
at 55C (131F)
(W)
a
Remarks
OTU
subrack 1
1633.4 2254.6 32 x LDX, 1 x SCC, 4 x PIU, 1 x
OTU
subrack 2
1229.3 1742.3 4 x LSC(SDFEC), 2 x SCC, 4 x PIU,
OTU
electrical
cross-
connect
subrack 1
(general
subrack)
1641.6 2166.5 2 x XCH, 20 x NQ2, 1 x SCC, 4 x
PIU, 5 x TQX, 5 x TOA, 1 x AUX, 1
x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 2 x
fan tray assembly
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
60
Consumption
at 25C (77F)
(W)
a
Maximum
Power
Consumption
at 55C (131F)
(W)
a
Remarks
OTU
electrical
cross-
connect
subrack 2
(general
subrack)
1958.3 2558.5 2 x XCH, 8 x 55NS3, 2 x SCC, 4 x
PIU, 2 x TQX, 5 x TOA, 2 x STG, 1
OTU
electrical
cross-
connect
subrack
(enhanced
subrack)
3338.7 4092.1 2 x UXCH, 10 x NS4(SDFEC), 2 x
TSC, 8 x TTX, 2 x SCC, 4 x PIU, 1
OTM
subrack 1
792.5 1287.1 1 x M40V, 1 x D40, 1 x OAU1, 1 x
OBU1, 12 x LDX, 1 x SCC, 4 x PIU,
OTM
subrack 2
1278.3 1808.3 1 x M40V, 1 x D40, 1 x OAU1, 1 x
OBU1, 4 x LSC(SDFEC), 2 x SCC,
OLA
subrack
290.3 706 4 x OBU1, 4 x VA1, 1 x SC2, 1 x
SCC, 4 x PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1
x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 2 x fan tray
assembly
OADM
subrack
974 1497.2 2 x OAU1, 2 x MR8V, 16 x LDX, 1
x SC2, 1 x SCC, 4 x PIU, 1 x AUX,
1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 2 x
fan tray assembly
378.2 811 2 x M40V, 2 x D40, 2 x FIU, 1 x SC2,
2 x RMU9, 2 x WSM9, 2 x OAU1, 2
x OBU1, 1 x SCC, 4 x PIU, 1 x AUX,
fan tray assembly
373.1 306.6 2 x M40, 2 x D40, 2 x WSMD9, 2 x
DAS1, 1 x SCC, 4 x PIU, 1 x AUX,
fan tray assembly
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
61
Consumption
at 25C (77F)
(W)
a
Maximum
Power
Consumption
at 55C (131F)
(W)
a
Remarks
OCS subrack
(general
subrack)
1281 1755 2 x XCM, 10 x SLQ64, 8 x SLO16,
2 x SLH41, 2 x EGSH, 2 x STG, 1 x
STI, 2 x SCC, 4 x PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x
EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 2 x fan
tray assembly
OCS subrack
(enhanced
subrack)
1791 2321 2 x UXCM, 10 x SLQ64, 8 x SLO16,
2 x SLH41, 2 x EGSH, 2 x STG, 1 x
STI, 2 x SCC, 4 x PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x
EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 2 x fan
tray assembly

Table 5-19 provides the requirements on voltage and current of an OptiX OSN 8800 T32.
Item Requirement
Rated working current 100 A (Independent power supplies to two
sections of each subrack, with 50A for each
section)
-60V DC: -48V to -72V

PIU
must be TN16PIU.
l Function
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
62
NOTE
l Front Panel
PWR
RTN(+)
PIU
NEG(-)
PWR
RTN
PIU
-48V

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
63
PWR
NEG(-) RTN(+)
PIU

l Valid Slots
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
subrack
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
subrack

Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
subrack
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
subrack
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
subrack
IU20 and IU23

l Specifications
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
64
Item Unit Value
Number of DC input
power supplies
- 1
range
V DC -48V DC: -40V to -57.6V
-60V DC: -48V to -72V

in. (D) x 3.1 in. (H))
Weight:
TN51PIU: 0.5 kg (1.10 lb.)
TN16PIU: 0.65 kg (1.43 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
Consumption at 25C
(77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN51PIU 5 5
TN16PIU 3 3.6

5.3.1 Structure
power supply.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
65
Figure 5-17 Structure of OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack (subrack door excluded)
1
2
3
4
6
5

l Fan tray assembly: Fan tray assembly contains ten fans that provide ventilation and heat
dissipation for the subrack. The front panel of the fan tray assembly has four indicators that
indicate fan status and related information.
NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
66
Item Specification
(19.6 in. (W) 11.6 in. (D) 17.7 in. (H))
a
)
18 kg (39.6 lb.)

IU25 FAN
IU19
EFI
IU20
PIU
IU21
AUX
IU22
AUX
IU24
ATE
IU23
PIU
IU10 IU9
IU
1
IU
2
IU
3
IU
4
IU
5
IU
6
IU
7
IU
8
IU
11
IU
12
IU
13
IU
14
IU
15
IU
16
IU
17
IU
18

l IU9 and IU10 are reserved for the TN16UXCM/TN16XCH/TN16SCC or for the other
service boards.
NOTE
Slots IU9 and IU10 can be used to house service boards only when the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 functions
as a slave subrack.
If slots IU9 and IU10 are used to house service boards or SCC boards, install a special filler panel in each
slot first
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
67
AUX IU21 & IU22
PIU IU20 & IU23
TN16UXCM/
TN16XCH/
TN16SCC
IU9 & IU10

Slots in an OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack provide the same cross-connect capacity.
ODU4, ODUflex, VC-4, VC-3, VC-12 granularities and packet services at the same time. Slots
IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU18 provide the same cross-connect capacity. As shown in Table 5-24.
Cross
-
Conn
ect
Boar
d
Maximum Cross-Connect Capacity of
Subrack
ODU
k
a
VC-4 VC-3/
VC-12
b
Pack
et
c
ODUk
a
VC-4 VC-3/
VC-12
Packet
c
TN16
XCH
40
Gbit/s
N/A N/A N/A 640 Gbit/
s
N/A N/A N/A
TN16
UXC
M
100
Gbit/s
40
Gbit/s
20 Gbit/
s
50
Gbit/s
1.6 T
Gbit/s
640
Gbit/s
20 Gbit/
s
800
Gbit/s
a: k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 4 or flex.
b: All service slots share a bandwidth of 20 Gbit/s.
c: Theoretically, the subrack supports grooming of a maximum of 800 Gbit/s packet services.
In practice, however, the packet service grooming capability of the subrack is determined by
packet boards. The current version provides a packet service grooming capability up to 320
Gbit/s.

Each OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack has one fan tray assembly, which includes ten independent
fans and an air filter. The air filter can be drawn out, cleaned and replaced.
Version Description
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
68
range.
speed.
Partitioned heat
dissipation
Each subrack is divided into five partitions to help provide

Working Principle
system in the OptiX OSN 8800 T16.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
69
Fan
Air inlet
Air outlet
Front
Side view
Air filter

The OptiX OSN 8800 T16 supports two fan speed modes, as described in Table 5-26. The
partitioned speed regulating function is available in Auto Speed Mode. It is recommended that
you operate fans in Auto Speed Mode by default.
FAN Speed
Mode
Description
Auto Speed Mode Fan speed in each partition is regulated automatically according to the
temperature of the boards in the partition where the fans are installed.
Fan speed in each partition is independently regulated.
The fans run at full speed if the speed regulating signals are abnormal.
If one of the fans fails, the other fans run at full speed.
Adjustable Speed
Mode
Five fan speed modes are available: Low Speed, Medium-Low
Speed, Medium Speed, Medium-High Speed, and High Speed. You
can set the fan speed manually. In Adjustable Speed Mode, the fans in
all partitions run at the same speed and do not support the partitioned
manual fan speed adjustment.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
70
Each OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack is divided into five partitions in terms of heat dissipation.
The subrack adopts one fan tray assembly to implement partitioned heat dissipation. See Figure
5-20.
Figure 5-20 Partitioned heat dissipation of the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack
IU19
EFI
IU20
PIU
IU21
AUX
IU22
IU24
ATE
IU23
PIU
IU10 IU9
IU
1
IU
2
IU
3
IU
4
IU
5
IU
6
IU
7
IU
8
IU
11
IU
12
IU
13
IU
14
IU
15
IU
16
IU
17
IU
18
A
Fan tray
assembly
B C D E

In the OptiX OSN 8800 T16, there are five partitions (A, B, C, D, and E) in each subrack. Two
fans in each partition dissipate heat generated by the boards in the partition where the fans reside.
NOTE
l If any one of the ten fans in the fan tray assembly fails, the system can remain operational for a short
term in environments where temperatures range between 0C to 40C (32F to 104F). To ensure long-
term operation of the system, replace the fan tray assembly in a timely manner.
l Replace the fan tray assembly immediately if two or more fans fail in the fan tray assemblies.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
71
Fan control unit
FAN
External power
supply 1
SCC
Status signal
Speed adjusting
signal
External power
supply 2
Status signal
Speed adjusting
signal

fan tray assembly.
tray assembly.
Appearance
SYSTEM
1
2
3
1. Air filter 2. Operating status indicators 3. Fans (ten in total)
NOTE
An air filter is installed on the fan tray assembly to prevent dust from entering the subrack.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
72

Valid Slots
The fan tray assembly occupies one slot. The valid slot for the fan tray assembly is IU25 in the
OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack.
NOTE
Item Specification
Dimensions 493.7 mm (W) x 266.6 mm (D) x 56.1 mm (H) (19.44 in. (W)
x 10.5 in. (D) x 2.21 in. (H))
Power Consumption
a
l Low Speed: 42.7 W
l Medium-Low Speed: 74.8 W
l Medium Speed: 106.8 W
l Medium-High Speed: 165.5 W
l High Speed: 215 W

Table 5-28 describes the power consumption of an OptiX OSN8800 T16 subrack.
NOTE
extreme conditions.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
73
Item Specification
Maximum subrack power consumption
a
1800 W
Typical configuration power consumption
(OTN)
700 W
Typical configuration power consumption
(OCS)
821 W
subrack.

Table 5-29 describes the power consumption of the subrack in typical configuration in an 8800
T16.
Table 5-29 Power consumption of the common units in an OptiX OSN 8800 T16
Unit Name Typical
Power
Consumptio
n at 25C (77
F) (W)
a
Maximum
Power
Consumptio
n at 55C
(131F) (W)
a
Remarks
OTU subrack 1 509.2 615.6 8 x LDX, 1 x XCH, 2 x PIU, 1 x AUX,
1 x EFI, 1 x ATE, and 1 x fan tray
assembly
OTU subrack 2 647.9 883.4 2 x LSC(SDFEC), 2 x SCC, 2 x PIU, 2
x AUX, 1 x EFI, 1 x ATE, and 1 x fan
tray assembly
OTU electrical
cross-connect
subrack 1
501 808 5 x NQ2, 2 x XCH, 2 x PIU, 1 x TQX,
2 x TOA, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI, 1 x ATE,
OTU electrical
cross-connect
subrack 2
923.9 1209 2 x XCH, 4 x 55NS3, 2 x PIU, 1 x TTX,
1 x TQX, 2 x TOA, 2 x AUX, 1 x EFI,
OTU electrical
cross-connect
subrack 3
1059.9 1359.4 2 x 16UXCM, 4 x 54NS4(SDFEC), 2
x 54TSC, 2 x 54TTX, 2 x AUX, 2 x
PIU, 1 x EFI, 1 x ATE, and 1 x fan tray
assembly
OTM subrack 1 468.7 569.7 1 x M40V, 1 x D40, 1 x OAU1, 1 x
OBU1, 6 x LDX, 1 x XCH, 2 x PIU, 1
x AUX, 1 x EFI, 1 x ATE, and 1 x fan
tray assembly
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
74
Unit Name Typical
Power
Consumptio
n at 25C (77
F) (W)
a
Maximum
Power
Consumptio
n at 55C
(131F) (W)
a
Remarks
OTM subrack 2 696.9 949.4 1 x M40V, 1 x D40, 1 x OAU1, 1 x
OBU1, 2 x LSC(SDFEC), 2 x SCC, 2
x PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI, 1 x ATE, and
1 x fan tray assembly
OLA subrack 228.1 294.3 4 x OBU1, 4 x VA1, 1 x SC2, 2 x FIU,
1 x XCH, 2 x PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI,
OADM subrack 449.5 561.5 2 x OAU1, 2 x MR8V, 2 x FIU, 8 x
LSX, 1 x SC2, 1 x XCH, 2 x PIU, 1 x
AUX, 1 x EFI, 1 x ATE, and 1 x fan
tray assembly
221 269.2 1 x M40, 1 x D40, 1 x WSMD9, 1 x
DAS1, 1 x XCH, 2 x PIU, 1 x AUX, 1
x EFI, 1 x ATE, and 1 x fan tray
assembly
OCS subrack 821 1109 2 x UXCM, 4 x 55NS3, 2PIU, 5 x
SLQ64, 4 x SLO16, 1 x SLH41, 1 x
EGSH, 2 x AUX, 1 x EFI, 1 x ATE,

Table 5-30 provides the requirements on voltage and current of an OptiX OSN 8800 T16
subrack.
Item Requirement
Rated working current 37.5 A
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
75
Item Requirement
-60V DC: -48V to -72V

PIU
must be TN16PIU.
l Function
NOTE
l Front Panel
PWR
RTN(+)
PIU
NEG(-)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
76
PWR
RTN
PIU
-48V

PWR
NEG(-) RTN(+)
PIU

l Valid Slots
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
subrack
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
subrack

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
77
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
subrack
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
subrack
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
subrack
IU20 and IU23

l Specifications
Item Unit Value
Number of DC input
power supplies
- 1
range
V DC -48V DC: -40V to -57.6V
-60V DC: -48V to -72V

in. (D) x 3.1 in. (H))
Weight:
TN51PIU: 0.5 kg (1.10 lb.)
TN16PIU: 0.65 kg (1.43 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
Consumption at 25C
(77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN51PIU 5 5
TN16PIU 3 3.6

5.4 OptiX OSN 8800 Platform Subrack
5.4.1 Structure
The OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack has an independent power supply.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
78
Figure 5-25 shows the structure of the subrack.
Figure 5-25 Structure of OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
8
9
1. Indicator and interface area 2. SubRack_ID LED indicator 3. LAMP TEST Button

NOTE
The interface area is behind the indicator panel in the upper part of the subrack. Remove the indicator panel
before you connect cables.
l Indicators: indicate the running status and alarm status of the subrack.
l Subrack ID LED: displays the master/slave relationships between subracks when multiple
subracks are cascaded. It has the same function as the subrack ID LED on the front panel
of the SCC board. "0" indicates that the subrack housing the SCC board is the master
subrack, "EE" indicates that the subrack ID is incorrect or the subrack ID fails to be
obtained, and other values indicate slave subracks. For the meanings of other values
displayed on the LED, see Figure 5-40.
l LAMP TEST button: tests whether the indicators on the subrack are normal. After you
press the button, all the indicators should be lit. It has the same function as the LAMP TEST
button on the SCC board.
l Board area: All service boards are installed in this area. 22 slots are available.
to the fiber cabling area before being routed on a side of the open rack. The mechanical
VOA is also installed in this area.
dissipation for the subrack.
NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
79
l The interface area provides functional interfaces, such as alarm output and cascading
interface, alarm input and output interface, and subrack alarm output and cascading
interface. It is behind the subrack indicator panel.
Table 5-34 Mechanical specifications of the OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack
Dimensions Specification
(19.6 in. (W) 11.7 in. (D) 15.7 in. (H))
Weight (empty subrack) 13 kg (28.66 lb.)

The OptiX OSN 8800 Platform subrack provides 23 slots.
Slots of the subrack are shown in Figure 5-26.
Figure 5-26 Slots of the subrack
IU1 IU2 IU3 IU4 IU5 IU6 IU7 IU8 IU11 IU12 IU13 IU14 IU15 IU16
IU17 IU18
S
C
C

o
r

s
e
r
v
i
c
e

b
o
a
r
d
IU20
PIU
IU19
PIU
Fan
Mutual backup
Fiber cabling area
IU21
AUX
IU22
IU9 IU10
S
C
C

o
r

s
e
r
v
i
c
e

b
o
a
r
d
IU23 EFI
PWR CRIT MAJ MIN

l : houses service boards.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
80
NOTE
When the OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack functions as a master subrack, slot IU18 is used to house the active
SCC board and slot IU17 is used to house the standby SCC board or a service board.
When the OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack functions as a slave subrack, it uses the TN15AUX board and the
SCC board is not required. In this case, slots IU17 and IU18 can be used to house service boards.
Each OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack has one fan tray assembly, which includes ten
independent fans and an air filter. The air filter can be drawn out and replaced.
Version Description
Basic function Dissipates the heat generated by an NE so that the NE can operate
normally within the designated temperature range.
Commissioning
control
l Auto Speed Mode: Implements automatic fan speed regulation,
depending on the subrack temperature.
l Adjustable Speed Mode: You can manually adjust the fan speed.
Partitioned heat
dissipation
Each subrack is divided into five partitions to help provide efficient
heat dissipation. The fan speed in each partition is independently
regulated.
Hot swapping Provides the hot swapping feature for the fan tray assembly.

Working Principle
system in the OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
81
Figure 5-27 Single-subrack heat dissipation and ventilation system
Fan
Air inlet
Air outlet
Front
Side view
Air filter

The OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack supports two fan speed modes, as shown in Table
5-36. The partitioned speed regulating function is available in Auto Speed Mode. It is
recommended that you set the speed mode to Auto Speed Mode.
FAN Speed
Mode
Description
Adjustable Speed
Mode
Four fan speed modes are available: Stop, Low Speed, Medium
Speed, and High Speed. You can set the fan speed manually. In
Adjustable Speed Mode, the fans in all partitions run at the same speed
and do not support the partitioned manual fan speed adjustment.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
82
Each OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack is divided into five partitions in terms of heat
dissipation. The subrack adopts one fan tray assembly to implement partitioned heat dissipation.
See Figure 5-28.
Figure 5-28 Partitioned heat dissipation of the OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack
I
U
5
I
U
4
I
U
6
I
U
7
I
U
8
I
U
1
2
I
U
1
3
I
U
1
4
I
U
1
5
I
U
1
6
I
U
3
I
U
2
I
U
1
I
U
1
1
I
U
I
U
9
1
0
1
7
1
8
I
U
I
U
IU22
1
9
I
U
2
0
I
U
2
1
I
U
A B C D E
Fan Tray
Assembly

There are five partitions (A, B, C, D, and E) in each subrack. Two fans in each partition dissipate
heat generated by the boards in the partition where the fans reside.
NOTE
term in environments where temperatures range between 0C to 40C (32F to 104F). To ensure
l If two or more fans fail in the fan tray assemblies, replace the fan tray assembly immediately.
The fan tray assembly consists of ten fans and one fan control unit. Figure 5-29 shows the
functional blocks of the fan tray assembly.
Fan control unit
FAN
External power
supply 1
SCC
Status signal
Speed adjusting
signal
External power
supply 2
Status signal
Speed adjusting
signal

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
83
fan tray assembly.
Controls the fan speed according to regulating signals.
the SCC board issues commands to instruct the other fan in the same partition to run at
full speed.
Monitors the fan speed regulating signals, the fan status, and the online/offline state of
the fan tray assembly.
Appearance
1
2
3
NOTE

Valid Slots
One slot houses one fan tray assembly. The valid slots for the fan tray assembly is IU22.
Table 5-37 lists the technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack fan tray
assembly.
NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
84
Item Specification
Dimensions 493.7 mm (W) x 276 mm (D) x 56.5 mm (H) (19.44 in. (W) x 10.87
in. (D) x 2.22 in. (H))
Weight 3 kg (6.6 lb)
Power Consumption
a
l Low Speed: 40 W
l High Speed: 120 W

This section describes the maximum and typical subrack power consumption specifications
Table 5-38 describes the power consumption of an OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack.
NOTE
extreme conditions.
Table 5-38 Power consumption of an OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack.
Item Value
Maximum subrack power consumption
a
1200W
subrack.

Table 5-39 lists the power consumption of the common units in an OptiX OSN 8800 platform
subrack.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
85
Table 5-39 Power consumption of the subrack in typical configuration in the OptiX OSN 8800
platform subrack
Unit Name
a
Typical
Power
Consumpt
ion at 25C
(77F)
b
Maximu
m Power
Consump
tion at 55
C (131F)
b
Remarks
Electr
ical
relay
subra
ck
Subrack
1
781 945 16 x TN53NQ2, 2 x PIU, 1 x AUX, and fan
tray assembly
Subrack
2
871 1045 8 x TN55NS3, 2 x PIU, 1 x AUX, and fan
tray assembly
OTM subrack 105 200 1 x M40V, 1 x D40, 1 x OAU101, 1 x
OBU103, 1 x FIU, 1 x SC1, 2 x PIU, 1 x
AUX, and fan tray assembly
OLA subrack 97 191 2 x OAU101, 2 x FIU, 1 x SC2, 2 x PIU, 1
x AUX, and fan tray assembly
ROA
DM
subra
ck (4
x
dime
nsion
s)
c
Subrack 115 215 1 x WSMD4, 1 x DAS1, 1 x M40, 1 x D40,
2 x PIU, 1 x AUX, and fan tray assembly
OTM cabinet 314 601 3 x OTM subrack
a: In this table, "subrack" refers to a slave subrack, which has no SCC board. If the subrack
must be used as a master subrack, it must use SCC boards. In this situation, the typical power
consumption of the subrack increases to 23 W and the maximum power consumption increases
to 25.1 W.
b: Indicates that the power consumption of the subrack and cabinet is the value in a certain
configuration. The value is for reference only. The actual power consumption of the chassis
and cabinet is calculation based on the power consumption of each module.
c: At the ROADM site, it is recommended to deploy one subrack per direction. This table
assumes that the four directions are configured identically and provides only the reference
configurations for one direction.

Table 5-40 provides the requirements on voltage and current of an OptiX OSN 8800 platform
subrack.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
86
Table 5-40 Requirements on voltage and current of an OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack
Item Requirement
Rated working current 25 A (-48 V)
Nominal working voltage -48 V DC/-60 V DC
-60V DC: -48V to -72V

PIU
The PIU board receives and provides DC power for equipment. For OptiX OSN 8800 platform
subrack, the PIU board can be TN15PIU
l Function
Accepts DC power in a range from -40 V to -72 V and provides surge protection and
power filtering functions.
Provides 3.6 V power supply in centralized manner, with the maximum power of 40 W.
l Front Panel
Appearance of the Front Panel
RUN
N
E
G
(
-
)
R
T
N
(
+
)
PIU

Indicators: Running status indicator (RUN) - green
l Valid Slots
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800
platform subrack
IU19 and IU20
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
87

l Specifications
Table 5-42 Performance specifications of the TN15PIU board
Item Unit Value
Number of DC input power supplies - 1
Input DC power voltage range V DC -48V DC: -40V to -57.6V
-60V DC: -48V to -72V

Dimensions of front panel: 28 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 65 mm (H) (1.1 in. (W) x
8.7 in. (D) x 2.6 in. (H))
Weight: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.)
Power Consumption
Table 5-43 Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption
at 25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C (131F)
(W)
TN15PIU 7 7.5

5.5 Data Communication and Equipment Maintenance
Interfaces
The equipment provides abundant interfaces for data communication and equipment
maintenance.
These OptiX OSN 8800 T64 interfaces are located in the interface area of the OptiX OSN 8800
T64 subrack and on the front panel of the EFI1, EFI2, ATE, and STI, as shown in Figure
5-32.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
88
Figure 5-32 Interfaces of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack
53A
PWR
-48V RTN
PIU
S
E
R
IA
L
N
M
_
E
T
H
2
EFI1
EFI2
E
T
H
1
E
T
H
2
E
T
H
3
L
A
M
P
1
L
A
M
P
2
N
M
_
E
T
H
1
53A
PWR
-48V RTN
PIU
ATE
A
L
M
I1
A
L
M
O
1
A
L
M
O
2
A
L
M
I2
A
L
M
O
3
A
L
M
O
4
STI
C
L
K
2
T
O
D
2
C
L
K
1
T
O
D
1

T32 subrack and on the front panel of the EFI1, EFI2, ATE, and STI, as shown in Figure
5-33.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
89
S
E
R
IA
L
N
M
_
E
T
H
2
EFI1 EFI2
E
T
H
1
E
T
H
2
E
T
H
3
L
A
M
P
1
L
A
M
P
2
N
M
_
E
T
H
1
53A
PWR
-48V RTN
PIU ATE
A
L
M
I1
A
L
M
O
1
A
L
M
O
2
A
L
M
I2
A
L
M
O
3
A
L
M
O
4
STI
C
L
K
2
T
O
D
2
C
L
K
1
T
O
D
1

T16 subrack and on the front panel of the EFI, and ATE, as shown in Figure 5-34.
E
T
H
1
E
T
H
2
E
T
H
3
L
A
M
P
1
L
A
M
P
2
N
M
_
E
T
H
1
S
E
R
IA
L
N
M
_
E
T
H
2
EFI PWR
RTN(+)
PIU
NEG(-) A
L
M
I1
A
L
M
O
1
A
L
M
O
2
A
L
M
I2
A
L
M
O
3
A
L
M
O
4
C
L
K
2
T
O
D
2
C
L
K
1
T
O
D
1
ATE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
90
These OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack interfaces are located in the interface area of the OptiX
OSN 8800 platform subrack and on the front panel of the EFI, and AUX, as shown in Figure
5-35.
Figure 5-35 Interfaces of the OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack
Fan
ALM01 ALM02 ALMI1 LAMP1 ALMP2
SCC
SCC
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
PWRA
PWRB
PWRC
ALMC
RESET
LAMP TEST
ALM CUT
SubRACK_ID
RUN
N
E
G
(
-
)
R
T
N
(
+
)
PIU
AUX
STAT
PROG
N
M
_
E
T
H
1
N
M
_
E
T
H
2
E
T
H
1
E
T
H
2
SubRACK_ID
LAMP
TEST

NOTE
before you connect cables. Interfaces in the Interface
5.5.1 ATE
ATE: Interface Board of Alarm & Timing & Expanding
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
91
5.5.1.1 Version Description
The functional versions of the ATE board are TN16 and TN51.
Table 5-44 lists the version description of the ATE board.
Table 5-44 Version description of the ATE board
Item Description
Functional
version
The available functional versions of the ATE board are TN16 and TN51.
The following provides the board(s) supported by the product. However,
the availability of the board(s) is subject to PCNs. For PCN information,
contact the product manager at your local Huawei office.
Difference l Appearance:
The number of interfaces varies according to the board version. For
details, see 5.5.1.3 Front Panel.
l Specification:
The specifications vary according to versions. For details, see "ATE
Specification"5.5.1.5 ATE Specifications.
Replacement The TN16ATE and TN51ATE cannot replace each other.

5.5.1.2 Application
The ATE provides alarm output/concatenation interface and alarm input interface. The ATE
provides interfaces for inputting and outputting clock signals.
Alarm outputs are sent to a centralized alarm management system through the output interface
and the cascading interface. You can configure it to be the other outputs to implement integrated
display of alarms.
External alarm signal input function is designed for requirements when the alarm signals of the
external systems (such as the environment monitory) need remote monitoring.
5.5.1.3 Front Panel
There are interfaces on the front panel of the ATE board.
Figure 5-36 shows the front panel of the TN51ATE board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
92
Figure 5-36 Front panel of the TN51ATE board
ATE
A
L
M
I
1
A
L
M
O
1
A
L
M
O
2
A
L
M
I
2
A
L
M
O
3
A
L
M
O
4

Figure 5-37 shows the front panel of the TN16ATE board.
Figure 5-37 Front panel of the TN16ATE board
A
L
M
I
1
A
L
M
O
1
A
L
M
O
2
A
L
M
I
2
A
L
M
O
3
A
L
M
O
4
C
L
K
2
T
O
D
2
C
L
K
1
T
O
D
1
ATE

Interfaces
Table 5-45 lists the types and functions of each interface.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
93
Table 5-45 Types and functions of the interfaces on the ATE board
Interface Type Function
ALMO1
ALMO4
RJ45 l Housekeeping alarm outputs can be sent to a central
alarm monitoring system for centralized
surveillance through the ALMO1ALMO4
interfaces. The alarm outputs are controlled by the
internal relay contact. When the relay contact is
closed, the resistance of each ALMO interface is
less than 1 ohm. When the relay contact is open, the
resistance of each ALMO interface is an infinite
number.
l The ALMO1 and ALMO2 interfaces have the same
pin usage and are a pair of housekeeping alarm
output/cascading interfaces. Similarly, the ALMO3
and ALMO4 interfaces also have the same pin
usage and are another pair of housekeeping output/
cascading interfaces. For example, when ALMO1
and ALMO3 are used to output housekeeping alarm
signals, ALMO2 and ALMO4 can be cascaded to
ALMO2 and ALM04 on another subrack.
l The OptiX OSN 8800 provides for eight alarm
outputs. By default, the first three alarm outputs are
defined as critical alarm, major alarm, and minor
alarm. The other five are reserved. Alarm outputs
can be cascaded.
ALMI1
ALMI2
RJ45 The OptiX OSN 8800 provides for eight housekeeping
alarm inputs. The user can manually configure the
severity of the eight alarms for remote monitoring of
external device alarms.
CLK1/CLK2 RJ45 CLK1/CLK2 interface can input or output time signals.
CLK1/CLK2 interface is bidirectional. That is, they
input and output signals at the same time.
TOD1/TOD2 RJ45 TOD1/TOD2 interface can input or output time signals.
At any time, a TOD1/TOD2 interface can either input
or output time signals.

Pin assignment of the RJ45 Connector
Figure 5-38 shows the pin assignment of the RJ45 connector.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
94
Figure 5-38 Pin assignment of the RJ45 connector
. 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2

Pin Assignment of the ALMO1 and the ALMO2 Interfaces
For the pin assignment of the ALMO1 and the ALMO2 interfaces, refer to Table 5-46.
Table 5-46 Pin assignment of the ALMO1 and ALMO2 interfaces
Pin Signal Function
1 CRIT_SWITCH_OUTP Critical housekeeping alarm
output, positive
2 CRIT_SWITCH_OUTN Critical housekeeping alarm
output, negative
3 MAJ_SWITCH_OUTP Major housekeeping alarm
output, positive
4 MIN_SWITCH_OUTP Minor housekeeping alarm
output, positive
5 MIN_SWITCH_OUTN Minor housekeeping alarm
output, negative
6 MAJ_SWITCH_OUTN Major housekeeping alarm
output, negative
7 ALM_SWITCH_OUT1P Reserved for housekeeping
alarm output 1, positive
8 ALM_SWITCH_OUT1N Reserved for housekeeping
alarm output 1, negative

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
95
Table 5-47 Pin assignment of the ALMO3 and the ALMO4 interfaces
Pin Signal Function
1 ALM_SWITCH_OUT2P Housekeeping alarm output
2, positive
2 ALM_SWITCH_OUT2N Housekeeping alarm output
2, negative
3, positive
4, positive
4, negative
3, negative
5, positive
5, negative

Pin Assignment of the ALMI1 Interface
For the pin assignment of the ALMI1 interface, refer to Table 5-48.
Table 5-48 Pin assignment of the ALMI1 interface
Pin Signal Function
1 SWITCHI_IN1 Housekeeping alarm input 1
2 GND Ground
3 SWITCHI_IN2 Housekeeping alarm 2
5 GND Ground
6 GND Ground
8 GND Ground

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
96
Table 5-49 Pin assignment of the ALMI2
Pin Signal Function
2 GND Ground
5 GND Ground
6 GND Ground
8 GND Ground

Pin Assignment of the CLK1/CLK2 Interface
For the pin assignment of the CLK1/CLK2 interface, refer to Table 5-50.
Table 5-50 Pin assignment of the CLK1/CLK2 interface
Pin Signal Function
1 RJ0_E1_RX_N 2MHz/2Mbit input negative
2 RJ0_E1_RX_P 2MHz/2Mbit input positive
3 N C Not connected
4 RJ0_E1_TX_N 2MHz/2Mbit output negative
5 RJ0_E1_TX_P 2MHz/2Mbit output positive
6 N C Not connected
7 N C Not connected
8 N C Not connected

Pin Assignment of the TOD1/TOD2 Interface
For the pin assignment of the TOD1/TOD2 interface, refer to Table 5-51.
Table 5-51 Pin assignment of the TOD1/TOD2 interface
Pin Signal Function
1 GND Ground
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
97
Pin Signal Function
2 GND Ground
3 DCLS_IN0_N 1PPS negative
4 GND Ground
5 GND Ground
6 DCLS_IN0_P 1PPS positive
7 DCLS_OUT0_N TOD negative
8 DCLS_OUT0_P TOD positive

5.5.1.4 Valid Slots
One slot houses one ATE board.
Table 5-52 shows the valid slots for the TN51ATE board.
Table 5-52 Valid slots for the TN51ATE board
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
subrack
IU87
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
subrack
IU48

Table 5-53 shows the valid slots for the TN16ATE board.
Table 5-53 Valid slots for the TN16ATE board
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
subrack
IU24

5.5.1.5 ATE Specifications
Specifications include dimensions, weight and power consumption.
l Dimensions of front panel:
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
98
TN51ATE: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 80 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 3.1
in. (H))
TN16ATE: 76.2 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 80 mm (H) (3.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 3.1
in. (H))
l Weight:
TN51ATE: 0.2 kg (0.44 lb.)
TN16ATE: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
Consumption at 25C (77
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN51ATE 0.3 0.3
TN16ATE 0.2 0.3

5.5.2 TN15EFI
EFI: EMI Filter Interface Board
The available functional version of the EFI board is TN15.
5.5.2.2 Application
EFI provides the subrack ID LED, LAMP TEST button, alarm output and cascading interfaces,
and alarm I/O interfaces.
5.5.2.3 Front Panel
There are interfaces on the front panel of the EFI board.
Figure 5-39 shows the front panel of the EFI board.
Figure 5-39 Front panel of the EFI board
ALMI1 LAMP1 LAMP2 SubRACK_ID
LAMP TEST
SubRACK_ID
ALM01 ALM02
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
99

CAUTION
The LAMP interfaces on the EFI board provide 5 V power, it is only used for the indicators on
a cabinet. It cannot connect to an RJ45 cable intended for the NM_ETH, ETH, ALMO, or CLK
interface; otherwise, the EFI board, the connected test instrument, or the equipment will be
damaged.
Indicators
Four indicators are present on the front panel:
l PWR: green indicator, which indicates whether the power cables are energized.
l CRIT: a subrack-level red indicator, which indicates whether a critical alarm is present on
the subrack.
l MAJ: a subrack-level orange indicator, which indicates whether a major alarm is present
on the subrack.
l MIN: a subrack-level yellow indicator, which indicates whether a minor alarm is present
on the subrack.
Interfaces and Buttons
Table 5-54 lists the type and function of each interface.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
100
Table 5-54 Description of interfaces in the interface area
Silk-screen Interface Connector Function
ALMO1
ALMO2
Alarm output
and cascading
interface
RJ45 l Alarm outputs are sent to the DC
power distribution cabinet
through the output interface and
the cascading interface. You can
configure it to be the other
outputs to implement integrated
display of alarms. The alarm
outputs are controlled by the
internal relay contact. When the
relay contact is closed, the
resistance of each ALMO
interface is less than 1 ohm.
When the relay contact is open,
the resistance of each ALMO
interface is an infinite number.
l The definitions for the pins of
the ALMO1 and ALMO2
interfaces are the same. The two
interfaces are used for output/
cascading, respectively. For
example, if ALMO1 is used to
output alarm signals, ALMO2
can be cascaded to ALMO1 on
another subrack.
l The OptiX OSN 8800 platform
subrack provides four alarm
outputs. Defaults of the first
three are critical alarm, major
alarm, and minor alarm. The
other one are reserved. Alarm
outputs can be cascaded.
ALMI1 Alarm input
interface
RJ45 External alarm signal input function
is designed for requirements when
the alarm signals of the external
systems (such as the environment
monitory) need remote monitoring.
The OptiX OSN 8800 platform
subrack provides four alarm inputs.
The severity of the four alarms can
be configured to cooperate with the
external system to implement
remote monitoring of external
alarms.
LAMP1
LAMP2
Subrack alarm
output and
cascading
interface
RJ45 This interface drives the running
indicators and alarm indicators of
the cabinet that holds the subrack.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
101
LAMP TEST LAMP TEST
button
- The LAMP TEST button is used for
testing the indicators on the
subrack. After you press the LAMP
TEST button, all indicators on the
subrack should be lit.
This button has the same function as
the LAMP TEST button on the SCC
board.
SubRACK_ID Subrack ID
LED
- The LED displays the master/slave
relationships between subracks. "0"
indicates that the subrack housing
the EFI board is the master subrack,
"EE" indicates that the subrack ID
is incorrect or the subrack ID fails
to be obtained, and other values
indicate slave subracks. For the
meanings of other values displayed
on the LED, see Figure 5-40.
This subrack ID LED has the same
function as that on front panel of the
SCC board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
102
Figure 5-40 LED
1 0 2 3 4 5
8 9 10 11 6 7
18 19 20 21 22 23
12 13 14 15 16 17
24 25 26 27 28 29
30 31 Error
Hexadecimal subrack ID displayed in the LED
Decimal subrack ID 0

. 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
103

Pin Signal Function
1 CRIT_SWITCH_OUTP Outputs the critical alarm
signal positive
2 CRIT_SWITCH_OUTN Outputs the critical alarm
signal negative
3 MAJ_SWITCH_OUTP Outputs the major alarm
signal positive
4 MIN_SWITCH_OUTP Outputs the minor alarm
signal positive
5 MIN_SWITCH_OUTN Outputs the minor alarm
signal negative
6 MAJ_SWITCH_OUTN Outputs the major alarm
signal negative
7 ALM_SWITCH_OUT1P Alarm signal output 1
positive
8 ALM_SWITCH_OUT1N Alarm signal output 1
negative

Pin Signal Function
1 SWITCHI_IN1 Alarm input 1
2 GND Ground
5 GND Ground
6 GND Ground
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
104
Pin Signal Function
8 GND Ground

Pin Assignment of the LAMP1 and the LAMP2 Interfaces
For the pin assignment of the LAMP1 and the LAMP2 interfaces, refer to Table 5-57.
Table 5-57 Pin assignment of the LAMP1 and the LAMP2 interfaces
Pin Signal Function
1 CRIT_ALMP Positive pole for critical
alarm signals
2 CRIT_ALMN Negative pole for critical
alarm signals
3 MAJ_ALMP Positive pole for major alarm
signals
4 RUNP Positive pole for power
indicating signals
5 RUNN Negative pole for power
indicating signals
6 MAJ_ALMN Negative pole for major
alarm signals
7 MIN_ALMP Positive pole for minor alarm
signals
8 MIN_ALMN Negative pole for minor
alarm signals

5.5.2.4 Valid Slots
One slot houses one EFI board.
Table 5-58 shows the valid slots for the EFI board.
Table 5-58 Valid slots for the EFI board
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800
platform subrack
IU23

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
105
5.5.2.5 EFI Specifications
l Dimensions of front panel: 320 mm (W) x 70.3 mm (D) x 20 mm (H) (12.6 in. (W) x 2.8
in. (D) x 0.8 in. (H))
l Weight: 0.1 kg (0.22 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
EFI 2.5 2.8

5.5.3 TN16EFI
5.5.3.2 Application
The EFI provides the alarm output/concatenation interface, network management interface,
subrack communication interface and OAM interfaces.
5.5.3.3 Front Panel
E
T
H
1
E
T
H
2
E
T
H
3
L
A
M
P
1
L
A
M
P
2
N
M
_
E
T
H
1
S
E
R
I
A
L
N
M
_
E
T
H
2
EFI
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
106

CAUTION
damaged.
Interfaces
Table 5-59 Types and functions of the interfaces on the EFI board
LAMP1
LAMP2
RJ45 Controls the PWR indicators and alarm indicators of
ETH1ETH3 RJ45 l Connects a network cable from the ETH1/ETH2/
ETH3 interface on one subrack to corresponding
interfaces on the other subracks to achieve the
communication between the master subrack and
slave subracks.
NOTE
When inter-subrack protection is configured, the ETH3
interface cannot be used for the communication between
the master and slave subracks.
l Connects a network cable to a CRPC or ROP board
to achieve communication with the CRPC or ROP
board.
NM_ETH1
NM_ETH2
RJ45 l Connects the network interface on the equipment
through a network cable to that on an NM server so
that the NM can manage the equipment.
l Connects the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 network
interface on one NE through a network cable to that
on another NE to achieve communication between
NEs.
SERIAL DB9 The interface provides serial NM and supports X.25
protocol.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
107
. 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2

Pin Assignment of the DB9 Connector
Figure 5-44 shows the pin assignment of the DB9 connector.
Figure 5-44 Pin assignment of the DB9 connector
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Pin Assignment of the ETH1 Interface
For the pin assignment of the ETH1 interface, refer to Table 5-60.
Table 5-60 Pin assignment of the ETH1 interface
Pin Signal Function
1 ETH1_TXP Positive pole for transmitting
the data for ordinary inter-
subrack communication
2 ETH1_TXN Negative pole for
transmitting the data for
ordinary inter-subrack
communication
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
108
Pin Signal Function
3 ETH1_RXP Positive pole for receiving
4 ETH1_CRIT_TXP Positive pole for transmitting
the data for emergent inter-
5 ETH1_CRIT_TXN Negative pole for
emergent inter-subrack
communication
6 ETH1_RXN Negative pole for receiving
7 ETH1_CRIT_RXP Positive pole for receiving
8 ETH1_CRIT_RXN Negative pole for receiving

Pin Signal Function
communication
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
109
Pin Signal Function
communication

Pin Signal Function
communication
communication
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
110
Pin Signal Function

Pin Signal Function
alarm signals
alarm signals
signals
indicating signals
indicating signals
alarm signals
signals
alarm signals

Pin Assignment of the NM_ETH1 Interface
For the pin assignment of the NM_ETH1 interface, refer to Table 5-64.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
111
Table 5-64 Pin assignment of the NM_ETH1 interface
Pin Signal Function
1 NM_ETNTXP Positive pole for transmitting
the data for communication
with the NM
2 NM_ETNTXN Negative pole for
communication with the NM
3 NM_ETNRXP Positive pole for receiving
with the NM
4 N C Not connected
5 N C Not connected
6 NM_ETNRXN Negative pole for receiving
with the NM
7 N C Not connected
8 N C Not connected

Pin Signal Function
1 NMJL_ETNTXP Positive pole for transmitting
the concatenated data for
communication with a
network management system
(NM)
2 NMJL_ETNTXN Negative pole for
transmitting the concatenated
data for communication with
an NM
3 NMJL_ETNRXP Positive pole for receiving
communication with an NM
4 N C Not connected
5 N C Not connected
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
112
Pin Signal Function
6 NMJL_ETNRXN Negative pole for receiving
7 N C Not connected
8 N C Not connected

Pin Assignment of the SERIAL Interface
For the pin assignment of the SERIAL interface, refer to Table 5-66.
Table 5-66 Pin assignment of the SERIAL interface
Pin Signal Function
1 N.C Not defined
2 RXD Receive end
3 TXD Transmit end
4 DTR Data terminal equipment
ready
5 GND Ground
6 - Reserved
7 - Reserved
8 GND Ground
9 N.C Not defined

5.5.3.4 Valid Slots
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
subrack
IU19

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
113
5.5.3.5 DIP Switches
There are DIP switches inside the EFI board.
The master and slave subracks are connected through the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 interface on the
EFI. The ID of each subrack is set by using two DIP switches on the EFI board. The value that
can be set by using each of the two DIP switches on the EFI board is a binary value 0 or 1.
ID1-ID4 correspond to bits 1-4 of SW2, and ID5-ID8 corresponding to bits 1-4 of SW1. Among
these ID values, only ID1-ID5 are valid. ID6-ID8 are reserved. The bits from high to low are
ID5-ID1, by which a maximum of 32 states can be set. The value is 00000 by default. "0"
indicates the master subrack. The other values indicate slave subracks.
Figure 5-45 shows the position of the DIP switches on the EFI board.
l The two DIP switches are numbered SW1 and SW2 and are located to the right of the T1.
l When the DIP switch is ON, the value of the corresponding bit is set to 0.
l As shown in Figure 5-45, the value represented by the ID5-ID1 is 000001, which is 1 in
decimal system. That is, the subrack ID is 1.
Figure 5-45 Position of the DIP switches on the EFI board
U8
SERIAL
NM_ETH2
T1
S
W
1
S
W
2
O
N
O
N
O
N
O
N
(
I
D
1
)
(
I
D
2
)
(
I
D
3
)
(
I
D
4
)
O
N
O
N
O
N
O
N
(
I
D
5
)
(
I
D
6
)
(
I
D
7
)
(
I
D
8
)
SW1 SW2
NOTE
Ensure that the ID6 to ID8 switches are turned on as shown in Figure 5-45.

l Dimensions of front panel: 76.2 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 80 mm (H) (3.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in.
(D) x 3.1 in. (H))
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
114
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
EFI 2 2.5

5.5.4 EFI1
EFI1: EMI Filter Interface Board
Only one functional version of the EFI1 board is available, that is, TN51.
5.5.4.2 Application
The EFI1 provides network management and OAM interfaces.
5.5.4.3 Front Panel
There are interfaces on the front panel of the EFI1 board.
Figure 5-46 shows the front panel of the EFI1 board.
Figure 5-46 Front panel of the EFI1 board
S
E
R
I
A
L
N
M
_
E
T
H
2
EFI1

Interfaces
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
115
Table 5-68 Types and functions of the interfaces on the EFI1 board
NM_ETH2 RJ45 l Connects the network interface on the equipment
through a network cable to that on an NM so that
the NM can manage the equipment.
NEs.
NM_ETH1 and NM_ETH2 have the same function.
SERIAL DB9 The interface provides serial NM and supports X.25
protocol.

. 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
116

Pin Signal Function
1 NMJL_ETNTXP Positive pole for transmitting
communication with a
network management system
(NM)
2 NMJL_ETNTXN Negative pole for
transmitting the concatenated
data for communication with
an NM
3 NMJL_ETNRXP Positive pole for receiving
4 N C Not connected
5 N C Not connected
6 NMJL_ETNRXN Negative pole for receiving
7 N C Not connected
8 N C Not connected

Pin Signal Function
1 N.C Not defined
2 RXD Receive end
3 TXD Transmit end
ready
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
117
Pin Signal Function
5 GND Ground
6 - Reserved
7 - Reserved
8 GND Ground
9 N.C Not defined

5.5.4.4 Valid Slots
One slot houses one EFI1 board.
Table 5-71 provides the valid slots for the EFI1 board.
Table 5-71 Valid slots for the EFI1 board
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
subrack
IU76
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
subrack
IU38

5.5.4.5 DIP Switches
There are DIP switches inside the EFI1 board.
The EFI2 board is connected to the master subrack through the ETH1, ETH2, or ETH3 interface.
The ID of each subrack is set by using two DIP switches on the EFI1 board. The value that can
be set by using each of the two DIP switches on the EFI1 board is a binary value 0 or 1. ID1-
ID4 correspond to bits 1-4 of SW2, and ID5-ID8 corresponding to bits 1-4 of SW1. Among these
ID values, only ID1-ID5 are valid. ID6-ID8 are reserved. The bits from high to low are ID5-
ID1, by which a maximum of 32 states can be set. The value is 00000 by default. "0" indicates
the master subrack. The other values indicate slave subracks. Figure 5-49 shows the position of
the DIP switches on the EFI1 board.
l The two DIP switches are numbered SW1 and SW2 and are located to the right of the
CPLD.
l When the DIP switch is ON, the value of the corresponding bit is set to 0.
l As shown in Figure 5-49, the value represented by the ID5-ID1 is 000001, which is 1 in
decimal system. That is, the subrack ID is 1.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
118
Figure 5-49 Position of the DIP switches on the EFI1 board
NM_ETH2
SERIAL
CPLD
ON
SW1
(ID5)
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW2
ON
ON
ON
(ID6)
(ID7)
(ID8)
(ID1)
(ID2)
(ID3)
(ID4)
NOTE
Ensure that the ID6 to ID8 switches are turned on as shown in Figure 5-49.

5.5.4.6 EFI1 Specifications
l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 (W) x 220 mm (D) x 80 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D)
x 3.1 in. (H))
l Weight: 0.2 kg (0.44 lb)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
EFI1 5 7

5.5.5 EFI2
EFI2: EMI Filter Interface Board
Only one functional version of the EFI2 board is available, that is, TN51.
5.5.5.2 Application
The EFI2 provides the alarm output/concatenation interface, network management interface and
subrack communication interface.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
119
5.5.5.3 Front Panel
There are interfaces on the front panel of the EFI2 board.
Figure 5-50 shows the front panel of the EFI2 board.
Figure 5-50 Front panel of the EFI2 board
EFI2
E
T
H
1
E
T
H
2
E
T
H
3
L
A
M
P
1
L
A
M
P
2
N
M
_
E
T
H
1

CAUTION
damaged.
Interfaces
Table 5-72 Types and functions of the interfaces on the EFI2 board
LAMP1
LAMP2
RJ45 Controls the PWR indicators and alarm indicators of
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
120
NM_ETH1 RJ45 l Connects the network interface on the equipment
through a network cable to that on an NM server so
that the NM can manage the equipment.
NEs.
NM_ETH1 and NM_ETH2 have the same function.
ETH1ETH3 RJ45 l Connects a network cable from the ETH1/ETH2/
ETH3 interface on one subrack to corresponding
interfaces on the other subracks to achieve the
communication between the master subrack and
slave subracks.
NOTE
When inter-subrack protection is configured, the ETH3
interface cannot be used for the communication between
the master and slave subracks.
board.

. 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
121
Pin Signal Function
communication
communication

Pin Signal Function
communication
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
122
Pin Signal Function
communication

Pin Signal Function
communication
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
123
Pin Signal Function
communication

Pin Signal Function
alarm signals
alarm signals
signals
indicating signals
indicating signals
alarm signals
signals
alarm signals

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
124
Pin Signal Function
1 NM_ETNTXP Positive pole for transmitting
with the NM
2 NM_ETNTXN Negative pole for
communication with the NM
3 NM_ETNRXP Positive pole for receiving
with the NM
4 N C Not connected
5 N C Not connected
6 NM_ETNRXN Negative pole for receiving
with the NM
7 N C Not connected
8 N C Not connected

5.5.5.4 Valid Slots
One slot houses one EFI2 board.
Table 5-78 shows the valid slots for the EFI2 board.
Table 5-78 Valid slots for the EFI2 board
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
subrack
IU71
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
subrack
IU37

5.5.5.5 EFI2 Specifications
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
125
(D) x 3.1 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
EFI2 13 15

5.5.6 STI
STI: Synchronous Timing Interface Board
The functional versions of the STI board are TN52 and TNL1.
In an OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, if the TNL1STI board is configured, the SCC board version
must be TN52.
5.5.6.2 Application
The STI, a clock interface unit, provides interfaces for input and output of clock signals.
5.5.6.3 Front Panel
There are interfaces on the front panel of the STI board.
Figure 5-52 and Figure 5-53 show the front panel of the STI board.
Figure 5-52 Front panel of the TN52STI board
STI
C
L
K
2
T
O
D
2
C
L
K
1
T
O
D
1
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
126

Figure 5-53 Front panel of the TNL1STI board
STI
C
L
K
2
T
O
D
2
C
L
K
1
T
O
D
1
P
H
O
N
E
F
1

NOTE
In an OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, if the TNL1STI board is configured, the SCC board version must be TN52.
Interfaces
Table 5-79 provides descriptions of the interfaces on the STI board.
Table 5-79 Interface description of the STI
Interfa
ce
Silk-
screen
Connector Function
CLK1/
CLK2
CLK1/
CLK2
RJ45 CLK1/CLK2 interface can input or output time signals.
CLK1/CLK2 interface is bidirectional. That is, they input
and output signals at the same time.
TOD1/
TOD2
TOD1/
TOD2
RJ45 TOD1/TOD2 interface can input or output time signals.
At any time, a TOD1/TOD2 interface can either input or
output time signals.
PHONE PHON
E
RJ45 Orderwire phone interface
F1 F1 RJ45 F1 interface

Figure 5-54 describes the pin assignment of the RJ45 connector.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
127
. 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2

Pin Assignment of the CLK1/CLK2 Interface
For the pin assignment of the CLK1/CLK2 interface, refer to Table 5-80.
Table 5-80 Pin assignment of the CLK1/CLK2 interface
Pin Signal Function
3 N C Not connected
6 N C Not connected
7 N C Not connected
8 N C Not connected

Pin Assignment of the TOD1/TOD2 Interface
For the pin assignment of the TOD1/TOD2 interface, refer to Table 5-81.
Table 5-81 Pin assignment of the TOD1/TOD2 interface
Pin Signal Function
1 GND Ground
2 GND Ground
4 GND Ground
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
128
Pin Signal Function
5 GND Ground

Pin Assignment of the PHONE Interface
For the pin assignment of the PHONE interface, refer to Table 5-82.
Table 5-82 Pin assignment of the PHONE interface
Pin Signal Function
1 N C Not connected
2 N C Not connected
3 N C Not connected
4 RING Signal 1
5 TIP Signal 2
6 N C Not connected
7 N C Not connected
8 N C Not connected

Pin Assignment of the F1 Interface
For the pin assignment of the F1 interface, refer to Table 5-83.
Table 5-83 Pin assignment of the F1 interface
Pin Signal Function
1 TX_P Transmitting (+)
2 TX_N Transmitting (-)
3 RX_P Receiving (+)
4 N C Not connected
5 N C Not connected
6 RX_N Receiving (-)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
129
Pin Signal Function
7 N C Not connected
8 N C Not connected

5.5.6.4 Valid Slots
One slot houses one STI board.
Table 5-84 shows the valid slots for the STI board.
Table 5-84 Valid slots for the STI board
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
subrack
IU82
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
subrack
IU47

5.5.6.5 STI Specifications
(D) x 3.1 in. (H))
l Weight of TN52STI: 0.3 kg (0.66 lb)
l Weight of TNL1STI: 0.4 kg (0.88 lb)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN52STI 1.5 1.5
TNL1STI 3 3

5.5.7 Interfaces on the Front Panel of the AUX Board
In an OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack. The TN15AUX board provides NM interface, NM
cascading interface, inter-subrack normal and emergent communication interface.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
130
Figure 5-55 shows the front panel of the AUX. Slot IU21 houses the AUX board.
Figure 5-55 Interfaces on the front panel of the AUX
AUX
STAT
PROG
N
M
_
E
T
H
1
N
M
_
E
T
H
2
E
T
H
1
E
T
H
2

Interfaces
Description of interfaces on the front panel of the AUX board is list in Table 5-85.
Table 5-85 Description of interfaces on the front panel of the AUX board
Interface Silk-screen Connector Function
NE
management
interface
NM_ETH1/
NM_ETH2
RJ45 l Connects the network interface
on the OptiX OSN 8800
platform through a network
cable to that on the U2000 server
to achieve the management of
the U2000 over the OptiX OSN
8800 platform.
l Connects to the external CRPC
or ROP board of a slave subrack
using a network cable so that the
slave subrack can communicate
with the CRPC or ROP board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
131
Inter-subrack
communication
interface
ETH1/ETH2 RJ45 l Connects the ETH1/ETH2/
ETH3 interface on one subrack
through a network cable to such
interfaces on the other subracks
to achieve the communication
between the master subrack and
slave subracks.
l Connects a network cable to a
CRPC or ROP board to achieve
communication with the CRPC
or ROP board.

. 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2

Pin Assignment of the NM-ETH1 Interface
For the pin assignment of the NM-ETH1 interface, refer to Table 5-86.
Table 5-86 Pin assignment of the NM-ETH1 interface
Pin Signal Function
1 NM_ETNTXP NM communications,
transmits the data positive
2 NM_ETNTXN NM communications,
transmits the data negative
3 NM_ETNRXP NM communications,
receives the data positive
4 N C Not connected.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
132
Pin Signal Function
6 NM_ETNRXN NM communications,
receives the data negative

Pin Signal Function
1 NMJL_ETNTXP Transmits the concatenated
data positive for NM
communications
2 NMJL_ETNTXN Transmits the concatenated
data negative for NM
communications
3 NMJL_ETNRXP Receives the concatenated
communications
4 N C Not connected
5 N C Not connected
6 NMJL_ETNRXN Receives the concatenated
communications
7 N C Not connected
8 N C Not connected

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
133
Pin Signal Function
1 ETH1_TXP Transmits the data positive
for inter-subrack ordinary
communications
2 ETH1_TXN Transmits the data negative
communications
3 ETH1_RXP Receives the data positive for
inter-subrack ordinary
communications
4 ETH1_CRIT_TXP Transmits the data positive
for inter-subrack emergent
communications
5 ETH1_CRIT_TXN Transmits the data negative
communications
6 ETH1_RXN Receives the data negative
communications
7 ETH1_CRIT_RXP Receives the data positive for
inter-subrack emergent
communications
8 ETH1_CRIT_RXN Receives the data negative
communications

Pin Signal Function
communications
communications
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
134
Pin Signal Function
communications
communications
communications
communications
communications
communications
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
135
6 OptiX OSN 8800 Board Category
The following types of boards are available for the system.
Table 6-1 lists the boards for the OptiX OSN 8800.
Table 6-1 Boards for the OptiX OSN 8800
Board
Catego
ry
Board
Name
Board Description Gene
ral
8800
T64
Subr
ack
Enha
nced
8800
T64
Subr
ack
Gener
al 8800
T32
Subra
ck
Enhan
ced
8800
T32
Subra
ck
8800
Platfo
rm
Subra
ck
8800
T16
Subra
ck
Optical
transpo
nder
unit
TN12LDM 2-channel multi-rate
(100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s)
wavelength conversion
board
Y Y Y Y Y N
TN11LDM
D
2-channel multi-rate
board, dual fed and
selective receiving
Y Y Y Y N N
TN11LDMS 2-channel multi-rate
board, single fed and single
receiving
Y Y Y Y N N
TN12LDX 2 x 10 Gbit/s wavelength
conversion unit
Y Y Y Y Y Y
TN11LEM2
4
22 x GE + 2 x 10GE and 2
x OTU2 Ethernet switch
board
Y Y Y Y N Y
TN11LEX4 4 x 10GE and 2 x OTU2
Ethernet switch board
Y Y Y Y N Y
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Hardware Description 6 OptiX OSN 8800 Board Category
136
Board
Catego
ry
Board
Name
ral
8800
T64
Subr
ack
Enha
nced
8800
T64
Subr
ack
Gener
al 8800
T32
Subra
ck
Enhan
ced
8800
T32
Subra
ck
8800
Platfo
rm
Subra
ck
8800
T16
Subra
ck
TN11LOA 8 x Any-rate MUX OTU2
Wavelength Conversion
Board
Y Y Y Y Y Y
TN11LOG 8 x Gigabit Ethernet unit Y Y Y Y N N
TN12LOG Y Y Y Y Y Y
TN11LOM 8-port multi-service
multiplexing & optical
board
Y Y Y Y N N
TN12LOM Y Y Y Y Y Y
TN13LQM 4-channel multi-rate
wavelength conversion unit
Y Y Y Y Y N
TN12LQM
D
4-channel multi-rate
unit, dual fed and selective
receiving
Y Y Y Y N N
TN12LQMS 4-channel multi-rate
unit, single fed and single
receiving
Y Y Y Y N N
TN12LSC 100Gbit/s wavelength
conversion board
Y Y Y Y Y Y
TN11LSQ 40 Gbit/s wavelength
conversion board
Y Y Y Y Y Y
TN12LSX 10 Gbit/s wavelength
conversion unit
Y Y Y Y Y N
TN13LSX Y Y Y Y Y Y
TN14LSX Y Y Y Y Y Y
TN12LSXL 40 Gbit/s wavelength
conversion board
Y Y Y Y Y N
TN15LSXL Y Y Y Y N N
TN12LSXL
R
40 Gbit/s wavelength
conversion relay unit
Y Y Y Y Y N
TN11LSXR 10 Gbit/s wavelength
conversion relay unit
Y Y Y Y Y N
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
137
Board
Catego
ry
Board
Name
ral
8800
T64
Subr
ack
Enha
nced
8800
T64
Subr
ack
Gener
al 8800
T32
Subra
ck
Enhan
ced
8800
T32
Subra
ck
8800
Platfo
rm
Subra
ck
8800
T16
Subra
ck
TN11LTX
e
10-Port 10Gbit/s Service
Multiplexing & Optical
Wavelength Conversion
Board
Y Y Y Y Y Y
TN11LWX2 arbitrary rate (16Mbit/
s-2.7Gbit/s) dual-
board
N N N N Y N
TN12LWXS arbitrary rate (16Mbit/
s-2.7Gbit/s) wavelength
conversion board (single
transmit)
Y Y Y Y Y Y
TN11TMX 4 channels STM-16/
OC-48/OTU1
asynchronism mux OTU-2
board
Y Y Y Y N N
TN12TMX Y Y Y Y Y Y
Tributar
y unit
TN52TDX 2 x 10G tributary service
processing board
Y Y Y Y N Y
TN53TDX Y Y Y Y N Y
TN54TEM2
8
24xGE+4x10GE Ethernet
tributary unit
Y Y Y Y N Y
TN54THA 16 Any-rate Ports Service
Processing Board
Y Y Y Y N Y
TN54TOA 8 Any-rate Ports Service
Processing Board
Y Y Y Y N Y
TN52TOG 8 x GE tributary service
processing board
Y Y Y Y N Y
TN52TOM
g
8 x multi-rate ports service
processing board
Y Y Y Y Y Y
TN55TOX 8 x 10 Gbit/s tributary
service processing board
N Y N Y N N
TN52TQX 4 x 10 Gbit/s tributary
Y Y Y Y N Y
TN53TQX Y Y Y Y N Y
TN55TQX Y Y Y Y N Y
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
138
Board
Catego
ry
Board
Name
ral
8800
T64
Subr
ack
Enha
nced
8800
T64
Subr
ack
Gener
al 8800
T32
Subra
ck
Enhan
ced
8800
T32
Subra
ck
8800
Platfo
rm
Subra
ck
8800
T16
Subra
ck
TN54TSC 100 Gbit/s tributary service
processing board
N Y N Y N Y
TN53TSXL 40 Gbit/s tributary service
processing board
Y Y Y Y N Y
TN54TSXL Y Y Y Y N Y
TN54TTX 10 x 10 Gbit/s tributary
N Y N Y N Y
Line
unit
TN12ND2
e
2 x 10G line service
processing board
N N N N Y N
TN52ND2
e
Y Y Y Y Y Y
TN53ND2
e
Y Y Y Y Y Y
TN52NQ2 4 x 10G Line Service
Processing Board
Y Y Y Y N N
TN53NQ2
e
Y Y Y Y Y Y
TN54NQ2 Y Y Y Y N Y
TN55NO2
f
8 x 10G Line Service
Processing Board
Y Y Y Y N Y
TN52NS2 10G Line Service
Processing Board
Y Y Y Y N N
TN53NS2 Y Y Y Y N Y
TN52NS3 40G line service processing
board
Y Y Y Y N Y
TN54NS3
e
Y Y Y Y Y Y
TN55NS3
e
Y Y Y Y Y Y
TN54NS4
f
100G line service
processing board
Y Y Y Y N Y
Packet
Service
Unit
TN54EG16 16-port gigabit ethernet
packet switch board
N N N Y N Y
TN54EX2 2 x 10GE ethernet packet
switch board
N N N Y N Y
TN54PND2 2 x 10G bit/s packet switch
line board
N N N Y N Y
PID
unit
TN54ENQ2 4 x 10G line service
processing board
Y Y Y Y N Y
TN54NPO2 12 x OTU2 PID board Y Y Y Y N Y
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
139
Board
Catego
ry
Board
Name
ral
8800
T64
Subr
ack
Enha
nced
8800
T64
Subr
ack
Gener
al 8800
T32
Subra
ck
Enhan
ced
8800
T32
Subra
ck
8800
Platfo
rm
Subra
ck
8800
T16
Subra
ck
TN55NPO2 Y Y Y Y N Y
TN55NPO2
E
10G PID line service
processing board, 20
channel extended
Y Y Y Y N Y
Cross-
connect
unit and
system
and
commu
nication
unit
TN16XCH High Cross-connection,
System Control and Clock
Processing Board
N N N N N Y
TNK2SXM OptiX OSN 8800 T64
centralized cross connect
board
Y N N N N N
TNK4SXM Y Y N N N N
TN52UXCH 3.2T Universal Cross
Connect Board
N N N Y N N
TN52XCH OptiX OSN 8800 T32
board
N N Y Y N N
TN52UXC
M
3.2T Universal Cross
Connect Board
N N N Y N N
TN52XCM Cross & connect process
board (Support high- cross
and low-cross)
N N Y Y N N
TNK2UXC
T
Connect Board
N Y N N N N
TNK2XCT OptiX OSN 8800 T64
board
Y N N N N N
TNK4XCT Y Y N N N N
TN16UXC
M
Connect,System Control
and Clock Processing
Board
N N N N N Y
TN16SCC system control and
communication unit
N N N N N Y
TN51SCC
d
N N Y N N N
TN52SCC N N Y Y Y N
TNK2SCC Y Y N N N N
TN15AUX system auxiliary interface
unit
N N N N Y N
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
140
Board
Catego
ry
Board
Name
ral
8800
T64
Subr
ack
Enha
nced
8800
T64
Subr
ack
Gener
al 8800
T32
Subra
ck
Enhan
ced
8800
T32
Subra
ck
8800
Platfo
rm
Subra
ck
8800
T16
Subra
ck
TN16AUX N N N N N Y
TN51AUX Y Y Y Y N N
TN52AUX Y Y Y Y N N
TNK2USX
H
Connect Board
N Y N N N N
TNK2SXH OptiX OSN 8800 T64
board
Y N N N N N
TNK4SXH Y Y N N N N
Optical
multipl
exer
and
demulti
plexer
unit
TN11M40 40-channel multiplexing
unit
Y Y Y Y Y Y
TN12M40 Y Y Y Y Y Y
TN11D40 40-channel demultiplexing
unit
Y Y Y Y Y Y
TN12D40 Y Y Y Y Y Y
TN11M40V 40-channel multiplexing
unit with VOA
Y Y Y Y Y Y
TN12M40V Y Y Y Y Y Y
TN11D40V 40-channel demultiplexing
unit with VOA
Y Y Y Y N N
TN12FIU fiber interface unit Y Y Y Y Y Y
TN13FIU Y Y Y Y Y Y
TN14FIU Y Y Y Y Y Y
TN11ITL interleaver board Y Y Y Y Y Y
TN12ITL Y Y Y Y Y Y
TN11SFIU fiber interface unit for sync
timing
Y Y Y Y Y Y
Fixed
optical
add and
drop
multipl
exing
unit
TN11CMR2 CWDM 2-channel optical
add/drop multiplexing unit
Y Y Y Y Y Y
TN11CMR4 CWDM 4-channel optical
add/drop multiplexing unit
Y Y Y Y Y Y
TN11DMR1 CWDM 1-channel
bidirectional optical add/
drop multiplexing board
Y Y Y Y N N
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
141
Board
Catego
ry
Board
Name
ral
8800
T64
Subr
ack
Enha
nced
8800
T64
Subr
ack
Gener
al 8800
T32
Subra
ck
Enhan
ced
8800
T32
Subra
ck
8800
Platfo
rm
Subra
ck
8800
T16
Subra
ck
TN11MR2 2-channel optical add/drop
multiplexing unit
Y Y Y Y Y Y
multiplexing unit
Y Y Y Y Y Y
multiplexing unit
Y Y Y Y Y N
TN11MR8V 8-channel optical add/drop
multiplexing unit with
VOA
Y Y Y Y Y Y
TN11SBM2 2-channel CWDM single-
fiber bidirectional add/drop
board
Y Y Y Y Y N
Reconfi
gurable
optical
add and
drop
multipl
exing
unit
TN11RDU9 9-port ROADM
demultiplexing board
Y Y Y Y Y Y
TN11RMU9
a
9-port ROADM
multiplexing board
Y Y Y Y Y Y
TN11ROA
M
reconfigurable optical
adding board
Y Y Y Y N N
TN12TD20 20-ports Tunable
Demultiplexing Board
Y Y Y Y Y Y
TN11TM20 20-ports Wavelength
Tunable Multiplexing
Board
Y Y Y Y Y Y
TN12WSD9 9-port wavelength selective
switching demultiplexing
board
Y Y Y Y Y Y
TN13WSD9 Y Y Y Y Y Y
TN12WSM
9
9-port wavelength selective
switching multiplexing
board
Y Y Y Y Y Y
TN13WSM
9
Y Y Y Y Y Y
TN11WSM
D2
switching multiplexer and
demultiplexer board
Y Y Y Y Y N
TN11WSM
D4
switching multiplexer and
demultiplexer board
Y Y Y Y Y N
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
142
Board
Catego
ry
Board
Name
ral
8800
T64
Subr
ack
Enha
nced
8800
T64
Subr
ack
Gener
al 8800
T32
Subra
ck
Enhan
ced
8800
T32
Subra
ck
8800
Platfo
rm
Subra
ck
8800
T16
Subra
ck
TN12WSM
D4
Y Y Y Y Y Y
TN11WSM
D9
multiplexing and
Y Y Y Y Y Y
Optical
amplifi
er unit
TN11CRPC case-shape Raman pump
amplifier unit for C-band
Y Y Y Y Y Y
TN11DAS1 optical amplifier unit Y Y Y Y Y Y
TN11HBA high-power booster
amplifier board
Y Y Y Y Y Y
TN11OAU1 optical amplifier unit Y Y Y Y N N
TN12OAU1 Y Y Y Y Y Y
TN13OAU1 Y Y Y Y Y Y
TN11OBU1 optical booster unit Y Y Y Y N N
TN12OBU1 Y Y Y Y Y Y
TN11OBU2 Y Y Y Y N N
TN12OBU2 Y Y Y Y Y Y
TN11RAU1 backward raman and
erbium doped fiber hybrid
optical amplifier unit
Y Y Y Y Y Y
TN11RAU2 Y Y Y Y Y Y
Optical
supervi
sory
channel
unit
TN11HSC1 high power unidirectional
optical supervisory channel
board
Y Y Y Y Y Y
TN12SC1 unidirectional optical
supervisory channel unit
Y Y Y Y Y Y
TN12SC2 bidirectional optical
supervisory channel unit
Y Y Y Y Y Y
TN11ST2 bidirectional optical
supervisory channel and
timing transmission unit
Y Y Y Y Y Y
Optical
protecti
on unit
TN11DCP 2-channel optical path
protection unit
Y Y Y Y Y N
TN12DCP Y Y Y Y Y Y
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
143
Board
Catego
ry
Board
Name
ral
8800
T64
Subr
ack
Enha
nced
8800
T64
Subr
ack
Gener
al 8800
T32
Subra
ck
Enhan
ced
8800
T32
Subra
ck
8800
Platfo
rm
Subra
ck
8800
T16
Subra
ck
TN11OLP optical line protection unit Y Y Y Y Y N
TN12OLP Y Y Y Y Y Y
TN11SCS sync optical channel
separator unit
Y Y Y Y Y Y
Spectru
m
analyze
r unit
TN11MCA4 4-channel spectrum
analyzer unit
Y Y Y Y Y Y
TN11MCA8 8-channel spectrum
analyzer unit
Y Y Y Y Y Y
TN11OPM8 8-channel optical power
monitoring board
Y Y Y Y Y Y
TN12OPM8 Y Y Y Y Y Y
TN11WMU wavelength monitoring
unit
Y Y Y Y Y Y
Variabl
e
optical
attenuat
or unit
TN12VA1 1-channel variable optical
attenuator unit
Y Y Y Y Y Y
TN12VA4 4-channel variable optical
attenuator unit
Y Y Y Y Y Y
Dispers
ion
equalizi
ng unit
TN11DCU dispersion compensation
board
Y Y Y Y Y Y
TN11TDC single-wavelength tunable-
dispersion compensation
board
Y Y Y Y Y Y
Clock
unit
TN52STG centralized clock board N N Y Y N N
TNK2STG Y Y N N N N
OCS
system
unit
SSN4BPA optical booster and pre-
amplifier board
Y Y Y Y N Y
SSN3EAS2 2-port 10xGE switching
and processing board
Y Y Y Y N Y
SSN1EGSH 16 x GE Ethernet switching
and processing board
Y Y Y Y N Y
SSN4SF64 1 x STM-64 optical
interface board with the
FEC function
Y Y Y Y N Y
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
144
Board
Catego
ry
Board
Name
ral
8800
T64
Subr
ack
Enha
nced
8800
T64
Subr
ack
Gener
al 8800
T32
Subra
ck
Enhan
ced
8800
T32
Subra
ck
8800
Platfo
rm
Subra
ck
8800
T16
Subra
ck
SSN1SF64A 1 x STM-64 optical
FEC function
Y Y Y Y N Y
SSN4SFD64 1 x STM-64 optical
FEC function
Y Y Y Y N Y
SSN4SL64 1 x STM-64 optical
interface board
Y Y Y Y N Y
SSN4SLD6
4
2 x STM-64 optical
interface board
Y Y Y Y N Y
SSN3SLH4
1
16 x STM-4/STM-1 optical
interface board
Y Y Y Y N Y
SSN4SLO1
6
8 x STM-16 optical
interface board
Y Y Y Y N Y
SSN4SLQ1
6
4xSTM-16 optical
interface board
Y Y Y Y N Y
SSN4SLQ6
4
4 x STM-64 line interface
board
N N Y Y N Y
ROPA
subsyst
em
unit
b
TN11GFU gain flatness unit Y Y Y Y Y Y
TN11RGU ROPA gain unit Y Y Y Y Y Y
TN11ROP ROPA pumping unit Y Y Y Y Y Y
Interfac
e area
unit
c
TN16ATE interface board of alarm &
timing & expanding
N N N N N Y
TN51ATE Y Y Y Y N N
TN15EFI EMI filter interface board N N N N Y N
TN16EFI N N N N N Y
TN51EFI1 Y Y Y Y N N
TN51EFI2 Y Y Y Y N N
TNL1STI synchronous timing
interface board
Y Y Y Y N N
TN52STI Y Y Y Y N N
TN51PIU power interface unit Y Y Y Y N N
TN15PIU N N N N Y N
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
145
Board
Catego
ry
Board
Name
ral
8800
T64
Subr
ack
Enha
nced
8800
T64
Subr
ack
Gener
al 8800
T32
Subra
ck
Enhan
ced
8800
T32
Subra
ck
8800
Platfo
rm
Subra
ck
8800
T16
Subra
ck
TN16PIU Y Y Y Y N Y
Fan TN51FAN Fan Y Y Y Y N N
TN16FAN Fan N N N N N Y
TN15FAN Fan N N N N Y N
a: For TN11RMU9: OptiX OSN 8800 T16 only supports the TN11RMU902.
b: For details of the ROPA subsystem unit refer to ROPA Subsystem User Guide.
c: For details of the interface area unit refer to 5.5 Data Communication and Equipment Maintenance
Interfaces.
d: TN51SCC only supports General OptiX OSN 8800 T32.
e: The board for the OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack only supports relay mode.
f: In a general OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack/general OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, the board can work only in
relay mode.
g: For the applications scenarios of the TN52TOM board installed in an OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack, see
14.15.2.3 Application Scenario Overview of TN52TOM.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
146
7 OptiX OSN 6800 Subrack and Power
Requirement
About This Chapter
7.1 Structure
Subracks are the basic working units of the OptiX OSN 6800. The subrack of the OptiX OSN
6800 has an independent power supply.
7.2 Slot Description
The board area of the subrack has 21 slots, labeled IU1 to IU21 from left to right.
7.3 Cross-Connect Capacities
The slots in an OptiX OSN 6800 subrack vary in cross-connect capacities.
7.4 Fan and Heat Dissipation
Each OptiX OSN 6800 subrack has one fan tray assembly, which includes ten independent fans
and an air filter. The air filter can be drawn out, cleaned and replaced.
7.5 Power Consumption
7.6 Power Requirement
The OptiX OSN 6800 provides abundant interfaces for data communication and equipment
maintenance.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
147
7.1 Structure
Subracks are the basic working units of the OptiX OSN 6800. The subrack of the OptiX OSN
6800 has an independent power supply.
Figure 7-1 shows the structure of the subrack.
Figure 7-1 OptiX OSN 6800 subrack structure diagram
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
1. Indicator and interface area 2. Board area 3. Fiber cabling area
4. Fan tray assembly 5. Air filter 6. Fiber spool
7. Mounting ear

NOTE
l Indicators: indicate the running status and alarm status of the subrack.
l Board area: All service boards are installed in this area. 21 slots are available.
to the fiber cabling area before being routed on a side of the open rack. The mechanical
VOA is also installed in this area.
dissipation for the subrack.
NOTE
For detailed descriptions of the fan tray assembly, see 7.4 Fan and Heat Dissipation.
l Air filter: The air filter protects the subrack from dust in the air and requires periodic
cleaning.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
148
l Interface area: The interface area provides functional interfaces, such as management
interface, inter-subrack communication interface, alarm output and cascading interface,
alarm input and output interface. It is behind the subrack indicator panel.
Table 7-1 Mechanical specifications of the OptiX OSN 6800
Item Specification
Dimensions 497 mm (W) x 295 mm (D) x 400 mm (H)
(19.6 in. (W) 11.6 in. (D) 15.7 in. (H))
a
)
13 kg (28.6 lb.)

The board area of the subrack has 21 slots, labeled IU1 to IU21 from left to right.
Slots of the subrack are shown in Figure 7-2.
Figure 7-2 Slots of the subrack
IU9
XCS XCS
IU17 IU18
SCC
S
C
C

o
r

s
e
r
v
i
c
e

b
o
a
r
d
IU10
IU20
PIU
IU19
PIU
Fan
Paired slots Mutual backup
VOA area
IU21
AUX

l IU15 and IU16 are also available for the STG.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
149
l Pair slots refer to a pair of slots whose resident boards' overhead can be processed by the
buses on the backplanes. OptiX OSN 6800 supports seven pair slots. The pair slots support
distributed grooming.
7.3 Cross-Connect Capacities
The slots in an OptiX OSN 6800 subrack vary in cross-connect capacities.
Integrated Grooming
When using the XCS board, an OptiX OSN 6800 subrack can cross-connect ODU1,
ODU2,ODU2e, 10GE, and GE services between any two slots among slots IU1-IU8 and slots
IU11-IU16. Figure 7-3 provides the cross-connect capacity for each slot.
Figure 7-3 Cross-connect capacities of slots
IU9
XCS XCS
IU17 IU18
SCC
S
C
C

o
r

s
e
r
v
i
c
e

b
o
a
r
d
IU10
IU20
PIU
IU19
PIU
Fan
VOA area
IU21
AUX

Table 7-2 Cross-connect capacity of OptiX OSN 6800 subrack
Cro
ss-
Con
nect
Boa
rd
Slot Maximum Cross-Connect Capacity
of Each Slot
Capacity of Subrack
ODU1/ODU2/
ODU2e/10GE
GE
TN1
2XC
S
40 Gbit/s 20 Gbit/s 180 Gbit/s GE
360 Gbit/s ODU1/ODU2/
ODU2e/10GE
Supports hybrid transmission of
the above-mentioned services
20 Gbit/s 10 Gbit/s
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
150
Cro
ss-
Con
nect
Boa
rd
Slot Maximum Cross-Connect Capacity
of Each Slot
Capacity of Subrack
ODU1/ODU2/
ODU2e/10GE
GE
Not supported Not supported
with the maximum cross-connect
capacity of 360 Gbit/s.
TN1
1XC
S
20 Gbit/s 10 Gbit/s 140 Gbit/s GE
280 Gbit/s ODU1/ODU2/
ODU2e/10GE
Supports hybrid transmission of
the above-mentioned services
with the maximum cross-connect
capacity of 280 Gbit/s.
Not supported Not supported

Distributed Grooming
An OptiX OSN 6800 subrack provides seven pairs of slots: IU1 and IU2, IU3 and IU4, IU5 and
IU6, IU7 and IU8, IU11 and IU12, IU13 and IU14, IU15 and IU16. GE/Any/ODU1/OTU1
services can be cross-connected between paired slots. No XCS board is required when paired
slots are used to cross-connect electrical services.
Each OptiX OSN 6800 subrack has one fan tray assembly, which includes ten independent fans
Version Description
Basic function Dissipates the heat generated by an NE so that the NE can operate
normally within the designated temperature range.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
151
speed.
Partitioned heat
dissipation
Each subrack is divided into five partitions to help provide
Hot swapping Provides the hot swapping feature for the fan tray assembly.

Working Principle
Air flow from the subrack is bottom intake top exhaust. Figure 7-4 and Figure 7-5 show the
heat dissipation and ventilation system in the OptiX OSN 6800.
Figure 7-4 Single-subrack heat dissipation and ventilation system
Fan
Air inlet
Air outlet
Front
Side view
Air filter

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
152
Figure 7-5 Multi-subrack heat dissipation and ventilation system
Fan
Air inlet
Air outlet
Front
Side view
Air filter

NOTE
If multiple subracks are used, an air duct deflector is required to help in heat dissipation.
The OptiX OSN 6800 supports two fan speed modes, as shown in Table 7-4. The partitioned
speed regulating function is available in Auto Speed Mode. It is recommended that you set the
speed mode to Auto Speed Mode.
FAN Speed
Mode
Description
Adjustable Speed
Mode
Speed, and High Speed. You can set the fan speed manually. In
Adjustable Speed Mode, the fans in all partitions run at the same speed
and do not support the partitioned manual fan speed adjustment.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
153

Each OptiX OSN 6800 subrack is divided into five partitions in terms of heat dissipation. The
subrack adopts one fan tray assembly to implement partitioned heat dissipation. See Figure
7-6.
Figure 7-6 Partitioned heat dissipation of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack
I
U
5
I
U
4
I
U
6
I
U
7
I
U
8
I
U
1
2
I
U
1
3
I
U
1
4
I
U
1
5
I
U
1
6
I
U
3
I
U
2
I
U
1
I
U
1
1
I
U
I
U
9
1
0
1
7
1
8
I
U
I
U
VOA
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A B C D E
Fan Tray
Assembly
1
9
I
U
2
0
I
U
2
1
I
U

There are five partitions (A, B, C, D, and E) in each subrack. Two fans in each partition dissipate
heat generated by the boards in the partition where the fans reside.
NOTE
l If two or more fans fail in the fan tray assemblies, replace the fan tray assembly immediately.
The fan tray assembly consists of ten fans and one fan control unit. Figure 7-7 shows the
functional blocks of the fan tray assembly.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
154
Fan control unit
FAN
External power
supply 1
SCC
Status signal
Speed adjusting
signal
External power
supply 2
Status signal
Speed adjusting
signal

fan tray assembly.
the SCC board issues commands to instruct the other fan in the same partition to run at
full speed.
Appearance
1
2
3
NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
155

Valid Slots
One slot houses one fan tray assembly. The valid slot for the fan tray assembly is IU22.
Table 7-5 lists the technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 6800 fan tray assembly.
NOTE
Table 7-5 Technical specifications of the fan tray assembly (OptiX OSN 6800)
Item Specification
Dimensions 493.7 mm (W) x 266.6 mm (D) x 56.1 mm
(H) (19.44 in. (W) x 10.5 in. (D) x 2.21 in.
(H))
Power Consumption
a
l Low Speed: 40 W
l High Speed: 120 W

7.5 Power Consumption
Table 7-6 describes the power consumption of an OptiX OSN 6800 subrack.
NOTE
extreme conditions.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
156
Table 7-6 Power consumption of an OptiX OSN 6800
Item Value
Maximum subrack power consumption 1350 W

Table 7-7 lists the power consumption of the common units in an OptiX OSN 6800.
Table 7-7 Power consumption of the subrack in typical configuration in an OptiX OSN 6800
Unit Name Typical
Power
Consumptio
n at 25C (77
F)
a
Maximum
Power
Consumptio
n at 55C
(131F)
a
Remarks
OTM
subra
ck
Subrack 1 566 722.2 17 x 10G OTU (LSX), 1 x SCC, 2 x
PIU, 1 x AUX, and 1 x fan tray
assembly
Subrack 2 168.7 281.6 1 x M40V, 1 x D40, 1 x OAU101, 1
x OBU103, 1 x FIU, 1 x SC1, 1 x
SCC, 2 x PIU, 1 x AUX, and 1 x fan
tray assembly
Subrack 3 691.6 850 10 x ND2, 2 x TQX, 2 x TOG, 2 x
XCS, 1 x SCC, 2 x PIU, 1 x AUX,
OLA subrack 144.9 253.9 2 x OAU101s, 2 x FIU, 1 x SC2, 1 x
SCC, 2 x PIU, 1 x AUX, and 1 x fan
tray assembly
FOADM subrack 292.3 418.3 2 x OAU101, 2 x VA4, 2 x OBU103,
2 x MR4, 4 x 10G OTU (LSX), 2 x
FIU, 1 x SC2, 1 x SCC, 2 x PIU, 1 x
AUX, and 1 x fan tray assembly
ROA
DM
subra
ck (2
x
dime
nsion
s)
Subrack 1 87.4 96.4 1 x M40, 1 x D40, 2 x WSMD2, 2 x
DAS1, 1 x SCC, 2 x PIU, 1 x AUX,
Subrack 2 566 722.2 17 x 10G OTU (LSX), 1 x SCC, 2 x
PIU, 1 x AUX, and 1 x fan tray
assembly
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
157
Unit Name Typical
Power
Consumptio
n at 25C (77
F)
a
Maximum
Power
Consumptio
n at 55C
(131F)
a
Remarks
ROA
DM
subra
ck (4
x
dime
nsion
s)
b
Subrack 160 268.8 1 x WSMD4, 1 x DAS1, 1 x M40, 1
x D40, 1 x SCC, 2 x PIU, 1 x AUX,
OTM cabinet
(40x10 Gbit/s)
1422.2 1951.1 2 x OTU subrack and 1 x OTM
subrack 2
configuration. The value is for reference only. The actual power consumption of the chassis
and cabinet is calculation based on the power consumption of each module.
c: At the ROADM site, it is recommended to deploy one subrack per direction. This table
assumes that the four directions are configured identically and provides only the reference
configurations for one direction.

7.6 Power Requirement
Table 7-8 provides the requirements on voltage and current of an OptiX OSN 6800 subrack.
Table 7-8 Requirements on voltage and current of an OptiX OSN 6800
Item Requirement
Rated working current 25 A (-48 V)
-60V DC: -48V to -72V

PIU
The PIU board receives and provides DC power for equipment. For OptiX OSN 6800, the PIU
board must be TN11PIU.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
158
l Function
NOTE
l Front Panel
RUN
N
E
G
(
-
)
R
T
N
(
+
)
PIU

Indicators: Running status indicator (RUN) - green
l Valid Slots
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
subrack
IU19 and IU20

l Specifications
Item Unit Value
Input DC power voltage range V DC -48V DC: -40V to -57.6V
-60V DC: -48V to -72V
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
159

Dimensions of front panel: 28 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 65 mm (H) (1.1 in. (W) x 8.7
in. (D) x 2.6 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
Consumption at 25C
(77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11PIU 24 38

Interfaces
maintenance.
These interfaces are located in the interface area of the subrack and on the front panel of the
AUX, as shown in Figure 7-10.
Figure 7-10 Interfaces of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack
Fan
ETH3 COM ALM02 ALM01 ALM03 ALM04 ALMI2 ALMI1 LAMP1 ALMP2 SERIAL
SCC
SCC
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
PWRA
PWRB
PWRC
ALMC
RESET
LAMP TEST
ALM CUT
SubRACK_ID
RUN
N
E
G
(
-
)
R
T
N
(
+
)
PIU
AUX
STAT
PROG
N
M
_
E
T
H
1
N
M
_
E
T
H
2
E
T
H
1
E
T
H
2
xcs
xcs
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
160
NOTE
7.7.1 TN11EFI
7.7.1.2 Application
EFI provides functional interfaces such as management interface, inter-subrack communication
interface, alarm output and cascading interface, alarm input and output interface.
7.7.1.3 Front Panel
ETH3 COM ALM02 ALM01 ALM03 ALM04 ALMI2 ALMI1 LAMP1 LAMP2
SERIAL

CAUTION
damaged.
Interfaces and Buttons
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
161
Table 7-11 Description of interfaces in the interface area
Commissioning
interface
COM RJ45 This interface is intended only for
Huawei engineers to commission
the equipment at the factory.
Inter-subrack
communication
interface
ETH3 RJ45 l Connects a network cable from
the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3
interface on one subrack to
corresponding interfaces on the
other subracks to achieve the
communication between the
master subrack and slave
subracks.
NOTE
When inter-subrack protection is
configured, the ETH3 interface
cannot be used for the
communication between the
master and slave subracks.
or ROP board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
162
Alarm output
and cascading
interface
ALMO1
ALMO2
ALMO3
ALMO4
RJ45 l Alarm outputs are sent to the DC
power distribution cabinet
through the output interface and
the cascading interface. You can
configure it to be the other
outputs to implement integrated
display of alarms. The alarm
outputs are controlled by the
internal relay contact. When the
relay contact is closed, the
resistance of each ALMO
interface is less than 1 ohm.
When the relay contact is open,
the resistance of each ALMO
l The definitions for the pins of
the ALMO1 and ALMO2
interfaces are the same. The two
interfaces are used for output/
cascading, respectively. The
definitions for the pins of the
ALMO3 and ALMO4 interfaces
are the same. The two interfaces
are used for output/cascading,
respectively. For example, if
ALMO1 is used to output alarm
signals, ALMO2 can be
cascaded to ALMO1 on another
subrack.
l The OptiX OSN 6800 provides
eight alarm outputs. Defaults of
the first three are critical alarm,
major alarm, and minor alarm.
The other five are reserved.
Alarm outputs can be cascaded.
OAM interface SERIAL DB9 The OAM interface is a serial NM
interface, providing functions of
serial NM and supporting X.25
protocol.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
163
Alarm input
interface
ALMI1 ALMI2 RJ45 External alarm signal input function
is designed for requirements when
the alarm signals of the external
systems (such as the environment
monitory) need remote monitoring.
The OptiX OSN 6800 provides
eight alarm inputs. The severity of
the eight alarms can be configured
to cooperate with the external
system to implement remote
monitoring of external alarms.
Subrack alarm
output and
cascading
interface
LAMP1
LAMP2
RJ45 This interface drives the running
indicators and alarm indicators of

. 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
164
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Pin Assignment of the COM Interface
For the pin assignment of the COM interface, refer to Table 7-12.
Table 7-12 Pin assignment of the COM interface
Pin Signal Function
1 ETNTX_P_1 Transmits the data positive
2 ETNTX_N_1 Transmits the data negative
3 ETNRX_P_1 Receives the data positive
4 NC Not connected
5 NC Not connected
6 ETNRX_N_1 Receives data negative
7 NC Not connected
8 NC Not connected

Pin Signal Function
communications
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
165
Pin Signal Function
communications
communications
communications
communications
communications
communications
communications

Pin Signal Function
1 CRIT_SWITCH_OUTP Outputs the critical alarm
signal positive
2 CRIT_SWITCH_OUTN Outputs the critical alarm
signal negative
3 MAJ_SWITCH_OUTP Outputs the major alarm
signal positive
4 MIN_SWITCH_OUTP Outputs the minor alarm
signal positive
5 MIN_SWITCH_OUTN Outputs the minor alarm
signal negative
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
166
Pin Signal Function
6 MAJ_SWITCH_OUTN Outputs the major alarm
signal negative
positive
negative

Table 7-15 Pin assignment of the ALMO3 and the ALMO4 interfaces
Pin Signal Function
positive
negative
positive
positive
negative
negative
positive
negative

Pin Signal Function
1 N.C Not defined
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
167
Pin Signal Function
2 RXD Receive end of data
3 TXD Transmit end of data
ready
5 GND Ground
6 - Reserved
7 - Reserved
8 GND GND
9 5VOADM Power supply for OADM

Pin Signal Function
2 GND Ground
5 GND Ground
6 GND Ground
8 GND Ground

Table 7-18 Pin assignment of the ALMI2
Pin Signal Function
2 GND Ground
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
168
Pin Signal Function
5 GND Ground
6 GND Ground
8 GND Ground

Pin Signal Function
1 CRIT_ALMP Critical alarm signal positive
2 CRIT_ALMN Critical alarm signal negative
3 MAJ_ALMP Major alarm signal positive
4 RUNP Power indicating signal
positive
5 RUNN Power indicating signal
negative
6 MAJ_ALMN Major alarm signal positive
7 MIN_ALMP Minor alarm signal positive
8 MIN_ALMN Minor alarm signal negative

7.7.1.4 Valid Slots
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 subrack IU23

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
169
l Dimensions of front panel: 320 mm (W) x 70.3 mm (D) x 20 mm (H) (12.6 in. (W) x 2.8
in. (D) x 0.8 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
EFI 8 8.8

The AUX board provides NM interface, NM cascading interface, inter-subrack normal and
emergent communication interface.
Figure 7-14 shows the front panel of the AUX. Slot IU21 houses the AUX board.
Figure 7-14 Interfaces on the front panel of the AUX
AUX
STAT
PROG
N
M
_
E
T
H
1
N
M
_
E
T
H
2
E
T
H
1
E
T
H
2

Description of interfaces on the front panel of the AUX board is list in Table 7-21.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
170
Table 7-21 Description of interfaces on the front panel of the AUX board
NE
management
interface
NM_ETH1/
NM_ETH2
on the OptiX OSN 6800 through
a network cable to that on the
U2000 server to achieve the
management of the U2000 over
the OptiX OSN 6800.
l Connects the NM_ETH1/
NM_ETH2 network interface
on one NE through a network
cable to that on another NE to
achieve communication
between NEs.
Inter-subrack
communication
interface
ETH1/ETH2 RJ45 l Connects the ETH1/ETH2
interface on one subrack
through a network cable to such
interfaces on the other subracks
to achieve the communication
between the master subrack and
slave subracks.
or ROP board.

. 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
171
Pin Signal Function
1 NM_ETNTXP NM communications,
transmits the data positive
2 NM_ETNTXN NM communications,
transmits the data negative
3 NM_ETNRXP NM communications,
receives the data positive
6 NM_ETNRXN NM communications,
receives the data negative

Pin Signal Function
1 NMJL_ETNTXP Transmits the concatenated
communications
2 NMJL_ETNTXN Transmits the concatenated
communications
3 NMJL_ETNRXP Receives the concatenated
communications
4 N C Not connected
5 N C Not connected
6 NMJL_ETNRXN Receives the concatenated
communications
7 N C Not connected
8 N C Not connected

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
172
Pin Signal Function
communications
communications
communications
communications
communications
communications
communications
communications

Pin Signal Function
communications
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
173
Pin Signal Function
communications
communications
communications
communications
communications
communications
communications
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
174
Board
Category
Board Name Board Description
Optical
transponder
unit
TN11ECOM Enhanced communication interface unit
TN11L4G Line wavelength conversion unit with 4 x Gigabit
Ethernet line capacity
TN11LDGS 2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, single fed and single receiving
TN11LDGD 2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, dual fed and selective receiving
TN12LDM 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength
conversion board
TN11LDMD 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength
conversion board, dual fed and selective receiving
TN11LDMS 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength
conversion board, single fed and single receiving
TN12LDX 2 x 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion unit
TN11LEM24 22GE + 210GE and 2OTU2 ethernet switch board
TN11LEX4 410GE and 2OTU2 ethernet switch board
TN11LOA 8 x Any-rate MUX OTU2 Wavelength Conversion Board
TN11LOG 8 x Gigabit Ethernet unit
TN12LOG
TN11LOM 8-port multi-service multiplexing & optical wavelength
conversion board
TN12LOM
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
175
Board
Category
TN11LQG 4 x GE-multiplex-optical wavelength conversion board
TN13LQM 4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength
conversion unit
TN11LQMD 4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength
conversion unit, dual fed and selective receiving
TN12LQMD
TN11LQMS 4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength
conversion unit, single fed and single receiving
TN12LQMS
TN12LSC 100Gbit/s wavelength conversion board
TN11LSQ 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion board
TN11LSX 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion unit
TN12LSX
TN13LSX
TN14LSX
TN11LSXL 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion board
TN12LSXL
TN15LSXL
TN11LSXLR 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay unit
TN12LSXLR
TN11LSXR 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay unit
TN11LTX 10-Port 10Gbit/s Service multiplexing & optical
wavelength conversion board
TN11LWX2 arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) dual-wavelength
conversion board
TN11LWXD arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) wavelength
conversion board (double transmit)
TN11LWXS arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) wavelength
conversion board (single transmit)
TN12LWXS
TN11TMX 4 channels STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 asynchronism mux
OTU-2 wavelength conversion board
TN12TMX
Tributary unit TN11TBE 10 Gigabit ethernet tributary board
TN11TDG 2 x GE tributary service processing board
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
176
Board
Category
TN11TDX 2 x 10G tributary service processing board
TN12TDX
TN52TDX
TN53TDX
TN52TOG 8 x GE tributary service processing board
TN11TOM 8 x multi-rate ports service processing board
TN52TOM
TN11TQM 4 x multi-rate tributary service processing board
TN12TQM
TN11TQS 4 x STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 tributary service processing
board
TN11TQX 4 x 10 Gbit/s tributary service processing board
TN52TQX
TN55TQX
TN11TSXL 40 Gbit/s tributary service processing board
Line unit TN11ND2 2 x 10G line service processing board
TN12ND2
TN52ND2
TN53ND2
TN51NQ2 4 x 10G Line Service Processing Board
TN52NQ2
TN53NQ2
TN11NS2 10G Line Service Processing Board
TN12NS2
TN52NS2
TN53NS2
TN11NS3 40G line service processing board
NOTE
The TN54NS3/TN55NS3 board for the OptiX OSN 6800 only
supports relay mode.
TN52NS3
TN54NS3
TN55NS3
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
177
Board
Category
PID unit TN11BMD4 PID Interleaver Board (C-band), 200/100 GHz
TN11BMD8 PID Interleaver Board (C_Band), 200/50 GHz
TN12ELQX 4Electrical OTU2 with 410G Tributary Board
TN12PTQX 12 OTU2 PID board with 410G Tributary
Cross-connect
unit and
system and
communicatio
n unit
TN11XCS centralized cross connect board
TN12XCS
TN11SCC system control and communication unit
TN51SCC
TN52SCC
TN11AUX system auxiliary interface unit
Optical
multiplexer
and
demultiplexer
unit
TN11M40 40-channel multiplexing unit
TN12M40
TN11D40 40-channel demultiplexing unit
TN12D40
TN11M40V 40-channel multiplexing unit with VOA
TN12M40V
TN11D40V 40-channel demultiplexing unit with VOA
TN11FIU fiber interface unit
TN12FIU
TN13FIU
TN14FIU
TN11ITL interleaver board
TN12ITL
TN11SFIU fiber interface unit for sync timing
Fixed optical
add and drop
multiplexing
unit
TN11CMR2 CWDM 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit
TN11DMR1 CWDM 1-channel bidirectional optical add/drop
multiplexing board
TN11MR2 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
178
Board
Category
TN11MR8V 8-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit with VOA
TN11SBM2 2-channel CWDM single-fiber bidirectional add/drop
board
Reconfigurabl
e optical add
and drop
multiplexing
unit
TN11RDU9 9-port ROADM demultiplexing board
TN11RMU9 9-port ROADM multiplexing board
TN11ROAM reconfigurable optical adding board
TN12TD20 20-ports Tunable Demultiplexing Board
TN11TM20 20-ports Wavelength Tunable Multiplexing Board
TN11WSD9 9-port wavelength selective switching demultiplexing
board
TN12WSD9
TN13WSD9
TN11WSM9 9-port wavelength selective switching multiplexing board
TN12WSM9
TN13WSM9
TN11WSMD2 2-port wavelength selective switching multiplexer and
demultiplexer board
TN11WSMD4 4-port wavelength selective switching multiplexer and
demultiplexer board
TN12WSMD4
TN11WSMD9 9-port wavelength selective multiplexing and
Optical
amplifier unit
TN11CRPC case-shape Raman pump amplifier unit for C-band
TN11DAS1 optical amplifier unit
TN11HBA high-power booster amplifier board
TN11OAU1 optical amplifier unit
TN12OAU1
TN13OAU1
TN11OBU1 optical booster unit
TN12OBU1
TN12OBU2
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
179
Board
Category
TN11RAU1 backward raman and erbium doped fiber hybrid optical
amplifier unit
TN11RAU2
Optical
supervisory
channel unit
TN11HSC1 high power unidirectional optical supervisory channel
board
TN11SC1 unidirectional optical supervisory channel unit
TN12SC1
TN11SC2 bidirectional optical supervisory channel unit
TN12SC2
TN11ST2 bidirectional optical supervisory channel and timing
transmission unit
Optical
protection unit
TN11DCP 2-channel optical path protection unit
TN12DCP
TN11OLP optical line protection unit
TN12OLP
TN11SCS sync optical channel separator unit
Spectrum
analyzer unit
TN11MCA4 4-channel spectrum analyzer unit
TN11OPM8 8-channel optical power monitoring board
TN12OPM8
TN11WMU wavelength monitoring unit
Variable
optical
attenuator unit
TN11VA1 1-channel variable optical attenuator unit
TN12VA1
TN12VA4
Dispersion
equalizing unit
TN11DCU dispersion compensation board
TN11TDC single-wavelength tunable-dispersion compensation
board
Clock unit TN11STG centralized clock board
ROPA
subsystem
unit
a
TN11GFU gain flatness unit
TN11RGU ROPA gain unit
TN11ROP ROPA pumping unit
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
180
Board
Category
Interface area
unit
b
TN11EFI EMI filter interface board
TN11PIU power interface unit
Fan TN11FAN Fan
a: For the details of the ROPA subsystem unit, refer to ROPA Subsystem User Guide.
b: For the details of the interface area unit, refer to 7.7 Data Communication and Equipment
Maintenance Interfaces.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
181
9 OptiX OSN 3800 Chassis and Power
Requirement
About This Chapter
9.1 Chassis Structure
The 3U-high, case-shaped chassis is the basic working unit of the OptiX OSN 3800 compact
intelligent optical transport platform (OptiX OSN 3800 for short).
The board area of the chassis has 11 slots, labeled IU1 to IU11 from left to right.
Each OptiX OSN 3800 chassis has one fan tray assembly, which includes six independent fans
9.4 AC Power Consumption
This section provides the maximum and typical power consumption specifications of OptiX
OSN 3800 when the equipment runs on AC power.
9.5 AC Power Requirement
This section describes the requirements on power supplywhen the equipment runs on AC power.
9.6 DC Power Consumption
OSN 3800 when the equipment runs on DC power.
9.7 DC Power Requirement
This section describes the requirements on power supply when the equipment runs on DC power.
maintenance.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Hardware Description 9 OptiX OSN 3800 Chassis and Power Requirement
182
9.1 Chassis Structure
The 3U-high, case-shaped chassis is the basic working unit of the OptiX OSN 3800 compact
intelligent optical transport platform (OptiX OSN 3800 for short).
The chassis of the OptiX OSN 3800 can operate with an independent DC or AC power supply
and can be installed in an ETSI 300 mm rear-column cabinet, a standard ETSI 300 mm cabinet,
or a 19 and 23-inch open rack.
Figure 9-1 shows appearance of the OptiX OSN 3800 chassis.
Table 9-1 describes the mechanical specifications of the OptiX OSN 3800 chassis.
Figure 9-1 OptiX OSN 3800 chassis
5
4
2
1
3
1. Grounding connector 2. Fiber frame 3. Board area 4. Antistatic jack 5. Fan indicator
l Ground connector: Access the ground cables.
l Fiber frame: Fiber jumpers in the service board area are routed through the fiber frame.
l Board area: All service boards are installed in this area. In total, 11 slots are available.
l Antistatic jack: The ESD strap is in this area.
l Fan indicator: The fan indicator indicates the status of the fans.
Table 9-1 Mechanical specifications of the OptiX OSN 3800
Item Specification
Dimensions 436 mm (W) x 295 mm (D) x 134
mm (H) or 17.17 in. (W) x 11.61 in.
(D) x 5.28 in. (H)
Weight of an empty chassis (with backplane) 6 kg (13.23 lb.)

The board area of the chassis has 11 slots, labeled IU1 to IU11 from left to right.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
183
Slots of the chassis are shown in Figure 9-2 and Figure 9-3.
Figure 9-2 Slots of the chassis (DC power)
FAN
IU2
IU3
IU4
IU5
IU9/SCC
IU10/AUX
IU1 IU11
IU7/PIU
IU8/SCC
IU6/PIU
Mutual backup Mesh group Paired slots

Figure 9-3 Slots of the chassis (AC power)
FAN
IU2
IU3
IU4
IU5
IU7/APIU
IU9/SCC
IU10/AUX
IU6/APIU
IU1 IU11
Mutual backup Mesh group Paired slots

NOTE
l : service boards.
l Slots IU1 and IU11 can be used as two independent slots, each for housing an FOADM board with a height
of 118.9 mm (4.7 in.). They can be also used as one slot for housing a service board with a height of 264.6
mm (10.4 in.). When the two slots are used as one slot, the slot ID is represented as IU11.
l Pair slots refer to a pair of slots whose resident boards' overhead can be processed by the buses on the
backplanes.
l A mesh group refers to a group of slots housing the boards whose overhead can be processed by the buses
on the backplane.
Each OptiX OSN 3800 chassis has one fan tray assembly, which includes six independent fans
Version Description
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
184
Table 9-2 shows the functions of a fan tray assembly.
Basic function Dissipates heat generated by the equipment
so that the equipment can operate normally
within the designated temperature range.
Commissioning control l Auto Speed Mode: Implements automatic
fan speed regulation, depending on the
subrack temperature.
l Adjustable Speed Mode: You can
manually adjust the fan speed.
NOTE
Only when the chassis accesses DC power, Fan
speed control is available.
Hot swapping Provides the hot swapping function for the
fan tray assembly.
Alarming Reports alarms of the fans and reports the in-
service information.
Status checking Checks the fan status.

Working Principle
Air flow from the subrack is left intake right exhaust.Figure 9-4 shows the heat dissipation and
ventilation system in the OptiX OSN 3800.
Figure 9-4 Front view of the heat dissipation and ventilation system
Fan
Air inlet
Air outlet
Front
Planform

The OptiX OSN 3800 supports two fan speed modes, as shown in Table 9-3. It is recommended
that you set the speed mode to Auto Speed Mode.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
185
FAN Speed
Mode
Description
Auto Speed Mode The fan speed depends on the temperature.
l 45C (113F) to 65C (149F): the fans run at medium speed.
Adjustable Speed
Mode
Speed, and High Speed. You can set the fan speed manually.

NOTE
l If any one of the six fans in the fan tray assembly fails, the system can remain operational for a short
l If two or more fans fail in the fan tray assembly, replace the fan tray assembly immediately.
The fan tray assembly consists of six fans and one fan control unit. Figure 9-5 shows the
functional block of the fan tray assembly.
Fan control unit
Status signal
Speed adjusting signal
FAN
External power
supply 2
External power
supply 1
Status signal
Speed adjusting signal

l FAN: dissipates heat generated by normal operation of the chassis. FAN is the core of the
fan tray assembly.
Detects faults. After a fault is detected, the fan control unit reports an alarm.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
186
Appearance
1
2
1. Fans (6 in total) 2. Operating status indicator

Valid Slots
One slot houses one fan tray assembly. The valid slot for the fan tray assembly is IU12.
Table 9-4 list the technical specifications of the fan tray assembly for the OptiX OSN 3800
system.
NOTE
Table 9-4 Technical specifications of the fan tray assembly (OptiX OSN 3800)
Item Specification
Dimensions 41.0 mm (W) x 262.6 mm (D) x 126.5 mm (H) (1.61 in. (W) x
10.34 in. (D) x 4.98 in. (H))
Weight 0.81 kg (1.79 lb)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
187
Item Specification
Power Consumption
a
l Low Speed: 9 W
l High Speed: 32.7 W
at the maximum speed, power consumption of fan tray assembly may reach 32.7 W.

9.4 AC Power Consumption
OSN 3800 when the equipment runs on AC power.
Table 9-5 describes the AC power consumption of an OptiX OSN 3800 chassis.
NOTE
extreme conditions.
Table 9-5 AC Power consumption of an OptiX OSN 3800
Item Value
Maximum power consumption 350 W

Table 9-6 AC Power consumption of the chassis in typical configuration in an OptiX OSN 3800
Unit Name Typical
Power
Consump
tion at 25
C (77F)
Maximum
Power
Consumpti
on at 55C
(131F)
Remarks
OADM
chassis
(Using the
APIU)
Chassis 1 162.2 207.5 2 x TN21MR2, 4 x 2.5 Gbit/s
OTU, 1 x SCC, 2 x APIU, 1 x
AUX, and 1 x fan tray assembly.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
188
Unit Name Typical
Power
Consump
tion at 25
C (77F)
Maximum
Power
Consumpti
on at 55C
(131F)
Remarks
Chassis 2 117.7 154.5 1 x DFIU, 1 x SC2, 2 x OAU101,
1 x SCC, 2 x APIU, 1 x AUX, and
1 x fan tray assembly.
OLA chassis (Using the
APIU)
119.7 156.7 1 x DFIU, 1 x SC2, 2 x OBU103,
1 x SCC, 2 x APIU, 1 x AUX, and
a: Indicates that the power consumption of the chassis is the value in a certain configuration.
The value is for reference only. The actual power consumption of the chassis is calculated
based on the power consumption of each module.

9.5 AC Power Requirement
This section describes the requirements on power supplywhen the equipment runs on AC power.
Requirements on AC Voltage and Current
Table 9-7 provides the requirements on AC voltage and current of an OptiX OSN 3800 chassis.
Table 9-7 Requirements on AC voltage and current of an OptiX OSN 3800
Item Requirement
Rated working current 1.7 A
Nominal working voltage 220 V AC
Working voltage range 90 V AC to 285 V AC

APIU
The APIU board receives and provides AC power for equipment. For OptiX OSN 3800, the
APIU board must be TN21APIU.
l Function:
Accesses AC power in a range from 90 V to 285 V. Provides lightning protection and power
filtering functions.
l Front Panel:
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
189
Figure 9-7 Front panel of the APIU board
S
1
S
1
1
S
2
S
3
S
4
S
5
A
U
X
S
C
C
A
P
I
U
A
P
I
U
~
1
0
0
-
2
4
0
V
O
N
O
F
F
R
U
N
APIU

Indicator: Running status indicator (RUN) - green
l Valid Slots:
IU6, IU7 and IU8 together house two APIU boards. That is, each APIU requires 1.5 slots.
l Specifications:
Table 9-8 Performance specifications of the APIU
Item Unit Value
Input power voltage range V
(AC)
90 to 285
Input frequency Hz 50
Input power current A
(AC)
4
Output rated voltage V
(DC)
-48
Output rated current A
(DC)
6.3
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
190
Item Unit Value
Output power W 300

Dimensions of front panel: 37.5 mm (H) x 100 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) or 1.5 in. (H) x
3.9 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D)
Weight: 0.8 kg (1.8lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
Consumption at 25C
(77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN21APIU 50 55

9.6 DC Power Consumption
OSN 3800 when the equipment runs on DC power.
Table 9-9 describes the DC power consumption of an OptiX OSN 3800 chassis.
NOTE
extreme conditions.
Table 9-9 DC Power consumption of an OptiX OSN 3800
Item Value
Maximum power consumption 350 W

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
191
Table 9-10 DC Power consumption of the chassis in typical configuration in an OptiX OSN
3800
Unit Name Typical
Power
Consump
tion at 25
C (77F)
Maximum
Power
Consumpti
on at 55C
(131F)
Remarks
OADM
chassis
(Using the
PIU)
Chassis 1 99.4 135.3 2 x TN21MR2, 4 x 2.5 Gbit/s
OTU, 1 x SCC, 2 x DPIU, 1 x
AUX, and 1 x fan tray assembly.
Chassis 2 77.7 111.5 1 x DFIU, 1 x SC2, 2 x OAU101,
1 x SCC, 2 x DPIU, 1 x AUX, and
OLA chassis (Using the
PIU)
79.7 113.7 1 x DFIU, 1 x SC2, 2 x OBU103,
1 x SCC, 2 x DPIU, 1 x AUX, and
a: Indicates that the power consumption of the chassis is the value in a certain configuration.
The value is for reference only. The actual power consumption of the chassis is calculated
based on the power consumption of each module.

9.7 DC Power Requirement
This section describes the requirements on power supply when the equipment runs on DC power.
Requirements on DC Voltage and Current
Table 9-11 provides the requirements on DC voltage and current of an OptiX OSN 3800 chassis.
Table 9-11 Requirements on DC voltage and current of an OptiX OSN 3800
Item Requirement
Rated working current 8 A
-60V DC: -48V to -72V

PIU
The PIU board receives and provides DC power for equipment. For OptiX OSN 3800, the PIU
board must be TN21PIU.
l Function:
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
192
l Front Panel:
Figure 9-8 Front panel of the PIU board
PIU
RUN
S
2
S
1
S
1
1
P
I
U
P
I
U
S
C
C
S
C
C
A
U
X
S
6
S
5
S
4
DO not hot
plug this unit
N
E
G
(
-
)
R
T
N
(
+
)

Indicator: Running status indicator (RUN) - green
l Valid Slots:
IU6 and IU7
l Specifications:
Table 9-12 Performance specifications of the PIU
Item Unit Value
Input DC power voltage range V -40 to -72

Dimensions of front panel: 218.50 mm (H) x 107.76 mm (W) or 8.6 in. (H) x 4.2 in.
(W)
Power Consumption
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
193
Board Typical Power
Consumption at 25C
(77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN21PIU 10 12

Interfaces
maintenance.
The AUX board provides NM interfaces and extended auxiliary interfaces.
Figure 9-9 shows the front panel of the AUX board. The AUX board is housed in slot IU10.
Figure 9-9 Interfaces on the front panel of the AUX board
AUX
STAT
PROG
E
X
T
N
M
_
E
T
H
1
N
M
_
E
T
H
2

Table 9-13 describes the functions of each interface on the front panel of the AUX board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
194
Table 9-13 Functions of each interface on the front panel of the AUX board
Interface Silk-Screen Connector Function
NM interface NM_ETH1/
NM_ETH2
on the OptiX OSN 3800 through
a network cable to that on the
U2000 server so that the
U2000 over the OptiX OSN
3800.
l Connects the NM_ETH1/
NM_ETH2 network interface
on one NE through a network
cable to that on another NE to
achieve communication
between NEs.
Extended
auxiliary
interfaces
EXT DB9, RJ45 Accesses and outputs each kind of
external signals.

EXT interfaces include ALMO, LAMP1, LAMP2, ETH, SERIAL, ALMI1, and ALMI2. Table
9-14 lists the functions of the interfaces.
Table 9-14 Description of interfaces
Interface Interface
Description
Function
ALMO Alarm output and
cascading interface
l Alarm outputs are sent to the DC power
distribution cabinet through the output
interface. You can configure it to be the
other outputs to implement integrated
display of alarms. The alarm outputs are
controlled by the internal relay contact.
When the relay contact is closed, the
resistance of each ALMO interface is less
than 1 ohm. When the relay contact is
open, the resistance of each ALMO
l Provides two alarm outputs and
cascading.
SERIAL OAM interface The OAM interface is a serial NM interface,
providing functions of serial NM and
supporting X.25 protocol.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
195
Interface Interface
Description
Function
ALMI1 ALMI2 Alarm input interface l External alarm signal input function is
designed for requirements when the alarm
signals of the external systems (such as the
environment monitory) need remote
monitoring.
l Provides six alarm inputs. The severity of
the six alarms can be configured to
cooperate with the external system to
implement remote monitoring of external
alarms.
LAMP1 LAMP2 Subrack alarm output
and cascading
interface
This interface drives the running indicators
and alarm indicators of the cabinet that holds
the subrack.
ETH3 Inter-subrack
communication
interface
Reserved

9.8.2 PIN Assignment of Interfaces
The OptiX OSN 3800 provides RJ45 and the DB9 ports to enable data communication and
equipment maintenance. This section shows the pin assignments of the RJ45 and DB9 connectors
and describes the pins of each connector.
. 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
196
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Pin Assignment of the ETH Interface
For the pin assignment of the ETH interface, refer to Table 9-15.
Table 9-15 Pin assignment of the ETH interface
Pin Signal Function
1 ETNTX_P_1 Positive pole for transmitting
the data
2 ETNTX_N_1 Negative pole for
transmitting the data
3 ETNRX_P_1 Positive pole for receiving
the data
4 NC Not defined
5 NC Not defined
6 ETNRX_N_1 Negative pole for receiving
the data
7 NC Not defined
8 NC Not defined

Pin Assignment of the ALMO Interface
For the pin assignment of the ALMO interface, refer to Table 9-16.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
197
Table 9-16 Pin assignment of the ALMO interface
Pin Signal Function
1 SWCRIT_OUT1+ Alarm output signal 1
positive
2 SWCRIT_OUT1- Alarm output signal 1
negative
3 SWCRIT_OUT2+ Alarm output signal 2
positive
4 SWCRIT_OUT1+ Cascaded alarm output signal
1 positive
5 SWCRIT_OUT1- Cascaded alarm output signal
1 negative
6 SWCRIT_OUT2- Alarm output signal 2
negative
7 SWCRIT_OUT2+ Cascaded alarm output signal
2 positive
8 SWCRIT_OUT2- Cascaded alarm output signal
2 negative

NOTE
The alarm outputs are controlled by the internal relay contact. When the relay contact is closed, the resistance
of each ALMO interface is less than 1 ohm. When the relay contact is open, the resistance of each ALMO
Pin Signal Function
1 N.C Not defined
2 RXD Receive end
3 TXD Transmit end
ready
5 GND Ground
6 Reserved
7 Reserved
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
198
Pin Signal Function
8 GND Ground
9 V5_OADM Power supply for OADM

Pin Signal Function
1 SW_IN1P Alarm input signal 1
2 GND Ground
5 GND Ground
6 GND Ground
8 GND Ground

Pin Signal Function
2 GND Ground
4 N C Not defined
5 N C Not defined
6 GND Ground
7 N C Not defined
8 N C Not defined

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
199
Pin Signal Function
1 RED+ Positive pole for critical
alarm signals
2 RED- Negative pole for critical
alarm signals
3 YELLOW+ Positive pole for major alarm
signals
4 GREEN+ Positive pole for power
indicating signals
5 GND Negative pole for power
indicating signals
6 YELLOW- Negative pole for major
alarm signals
7 ORG+ Positive pole for minor alarm
signals
8 ORG- Negative pole for minor
alarm signals

Pin Assignment of the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 Interfaces
For the pin assignment of the NM-ETH1/NM_ETH2 interface, refer to Table 9-21.
Table 9-21 Pin assignment of the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 interfaces
Pin Signal Function
1 ETNTX12P Positive pole for transmitting
with an NM
2 ETNTX12N Negative pole for
3 ETNRX12P Positive pole for receiving
with an NM
4 N C Not defined
5 N C Not defined
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
200
Pin Signal Function
6 ETNRX12N Negative pole for receiving
with an NM
7 N C Not defined
8 N C Not defined
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
201
Board
Category
Optical
transponder
unit
TN11ECOM Enhanced communication interface unit
TN11L4G Line wavelength conversion unit with 4 x Gigabit Ethernet
line capacity
TN11LDGS 2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, single fed and single receiving
TN11LDGD 2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, dual fed and selective receiving
TN12LDM 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength
conversion board
TN11LDMD 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength
conversion board, dual fed and selective receiving
TN11LDMS 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength
conversion board, single fed and single receiving
TN12LDX 2 x 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion unit
TN11LEM24 22 x GE + 2 x 10GE and 2 x OTU2 Ethernet Switch board
TN11LOA 8 x Any-rate MUX OTU2 Wavelength Conversion Board
TN11LOG 8 x Gigabit Ethernet unit
TN12LOG
TN11LOM 8-port multi-service multiplexing & optical wavelength
conversion board
TN12LOM
TN11LQG 4 x GE-multiplex-optical wavelength conversion board
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
202
Board
Category
TN13LQM 4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength
conversion unit
TN11LQMD 4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength
conversion unit, dual fed and selective receiving
TN12LQMD
TN11LQMS 4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength
conversion unit, single fed and single receiving
TN12LQMS
TN11LSX 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion unit
TN12LSX
TN13LSX
TN14LSX
TN11LSXR 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay unit
TN11LWX2 arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) dual-wavelength
conversion board
TN11LWXD arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) wavelength
conversion board (double transmit)
TN11LWXS arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) wavelength
conversion board (single transmit)
TN12LWXS
TN11TMX 4 channels STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 asynchronism mux
OTU-2 wavelength conversion board
TN12TMX
Tributary unit TN11TBE 10 Gigabit ethernet tributary board
TN11TDG 2 x GE tributary service processing board
TN11TDX 2 x 10G tributary service processing board
TN52TOG 8 x GE tributary service processing board
TN11TOM 8 x multi-rate ports service processing board
TN52TOM
TN11TQM 4 x multi-rate tributary service processing board
TN12TQM
TN11TQS 4 x STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 tributary service processing
board
Line unit TN11NS2 10G Line Service Processing Board
TN12NS2
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
203
Board
Category
TN52NS2
TN53NS2
Optical
multiplexer
and
demultiplexer
unit
TN21DFIU bidirectional fiber interface board
TN13FIU
a
fiber interface unit
TN14FIU
TN21FIU
TN11SFIU fiber interface unit for sync timing
Optical add
and drop
multiplexing
unit
TN21CMR2
TN21CMR4
TN11DMR1 CWDM 1-channel bidirectional optical add/drop
multiplexing board
TN21DMR1
TN21MR2
TN21MR4
TN11SBM2 2-channel CWDM single-fiber bidirectional add/drop
board
Optical
amplifier unit
TN11DAS1 optical amplifier unit
TN11OAU1 optical amplifier unit
TN12OAU1
TN13OAU1
TN12OBU1
TN12OBU2
TN11RAU1 backward raman and erbium doped fiber hybrid optical
amplifier unit
TN11RAU2
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
204
Board
Category
Cross-connect
unit and
system and
communicatio
n unit
TN21SCC system control and communication unit
TN22SCC
TN23SCC
TN21AUX system auxiliary interface unit
TN22AUX
Optical
supervisory
channel unit
TN11HSC1 high power unidirectional optical supervisory channel
board
TN11SC1 unidirectional optical supervisory channel unit
TN12SC1
TN11SC2 bidirectional optical supervisory channel unit
TN12SC2
TN11ST2 bidirectional optical supervisory channel and timing
transmission unit
Optical
protection unit
TN11DCP 2-channel optical path protection unit
TN12DCP
TN11OLP optical line protection unit
TN12OLP
TN11SCS sync optical channel separator unit
Spectrum
analyzer unit
TN11OPM8 8-channel optical power monitoring board
TN12OPM8
Variable
optical
attenuator unit
TN12VA1
TN12VA4
Dispersion
equalizing unit
TN11DCU dispersion compensation board
Interface area
unit
b
TN21PIU power interface unit
TN21APIU AC Power Interface Unit
Fan TN21FAN Fan
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
205
Board
Category
a: For TN13FIU: OptiX OSN 3800 only supports the TN13FIU01.
b: For the details of the interface area unit, refer to 9.8 Data Communication and Equipment
Maintenance Interfaces.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
206
11 Frames
About This Chapter
11.1 DCM Frame and DCM Module
DCM modules are installed in DCM frames and are used to compensate for the positive
dispersion of transmission fibers to help maintain the shape of a propagated signal.
11.2 CRPC Frame
The CRPC frame holds a CRPC board, a fan tray assembly, and a power distribution unit. The
frame is installed in an open rack.
11.3 Fiber Spooling Frame
The fiber spooling frame is used to store fiber jumpers in a coil.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Hardware Description 11 Frames
207
11.1 DCM Frame and DCM Module
DCM modules are installed in DCM frames and are used to compensate for the positive
dispersion of transmission fibers to help maintain the shape of a propagated signal.
After an optical signal is transmitted over a certain distance, the optical signal pulse expands
because of the accumulation of positive dispersion. This pulse expansion has a negative impact
on system transmission performance. Therefore, dispersion compensation modules (DCMs),
which are passive devices, are required to compensate for the positive dispersion. DCMs use
the inherent negative dispersion of a dispersion compensating fiber to offset the positive
dispersion of transmission fibers to prevent pulse expansion.
Depending on the technology that DCMs use, two types of DCMs are available: dispersion
compensating fiber (DCF)-DCMs and fiber Bragg grating (FBG)-DCMs.
These DCMs can compensate for the following transmission distances: 5 km (3.1 mi.), 10 km
(6.2 mi.), 20 km (12.4 mi.), 40 km (24.8 mi.), 60 km (37.3 mi.), 80 km (49.7 mi.), 100 km (62.1
mi.), 120 km (74.6 mi.), 160 km (99.4 mi.), 200 km (124.2 mi.), and 240 km (149.1 mi.).
Each DCM frame can hold up to two DCM modules. The left- and right-side mounting ears
attach the DCM frame to the columns of a cabinet. For the appearance of the DCM, see Figure
11-1.
Figure 11-1 Appearance of the DCM frame
2 1
1. DCM frame 2. DCMs

Table 11-1, Table 11-2, Table 11-3 and Table 11-4 describes the performance requirements
for C-band dispersion compensation in different fibers. Each DCM supports a dispersion slope
compensation rate (DSCR) within the range of 90% to 110% and an operating wavelength within
the range of 1528 nm to 1568 nm.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
208
Table 11-1 Performance requirements for C-band DCMs (G.652 fibers)
DCM Module Transmission
Distance (mi./
km)
Max.
Insertion
Loss (dB)
PMD
(ps)
PDL
(dB)
Max.
Allowable
Power
a
(dBm)
DCM(S) 3.1/5 2.3 0.3 0.1 20
DCM(T) 6.2/10 2.8 0.3 0.1 20
DCM(A) 12.4/20 3.3 0.4 0.1 20
DCM(B) 24.8/40 4.7 0.5 0.1 20
DCM(C) 37.3/60 6.4 0.6 0.1 20
DCM(D) 49.7/80 8 0.7 0.1 20
DCM(E) 62.1/100 9 0.8 0.1 20
DCM(F) 74.5/120 9.8 0.8 0.1 20
FBG-DCM(80) 49.7/80 4 1.0 0.2 23
FBG-DCM(100) 62.1/100 4 1.0 0.2 23
FBG-DCM(120) 74.5/120 4 1.0 0.2 23
FBG-DCM(160) 99.4/160 8 1.6 0.4 23
FBG-DCM(200) 124.2/200 8 1.6 0.4 23
FBG-DCM(240) 149.1/240 8 1.6 0.4 23
a: The Max. Allowable Power refers to the maximum input optical power allowed into the
optical module without causing damage.

Table 11-2 Performance requirements for C-band DCMs (G.655 LEAF fibers)
Distance (mi./
km)
Max.
Insertion
Loss (dB)
PMD
(ps)
PDL
(dB)
Max.
Allowable
Power
a
(dBm)
DCM(A) 12.4/20 4 0.4 0.3 20
DCM(B) 24.8/40 5 0.5 0.3 20
DCM(C) 37.3/60 5.9 0.7 0.3 20
DCM(D) 49.7/80 6.9 0.8 0.3 20
DCM(E) 62.1/100 7.8 0.9 0.3 20
DCM(F) 74.5/120 8.8 1.0 0.3 20
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
209
Distance (mi./
km)
Max.
Insertion
Loss (dB)
PMD
(ps)
PDL
(dB)
Max.
Allowable
Power
a
(dBm)
FBG-DCM(120) 74.5/120 3.7 1.0 0.2 23
FBG-DCM(160) 99.4/160 3.7 1.0 0.2 23
FBG-DCM(200) 124.2/200 3.7 1.0 0.2 23
FBG-DCM(240) 149.1/240 3.7 1.0 0.2 23

Table 11-3 Performance requirements for C-band DCMs (G.653 fibers)
DCM
Module
Transmission
Distance (mi./
km)
Max.
Insertion
Loss (dB)
PMD
(ps)
PDL
(dB)
Max.
Allowable
Power
a
(dBm)
DCM(S) 3.1/5 2 0.2 0.1 20
DCM(T) 6.2/10 3 0.3 0.1 20
DCM(A) 12.4/20 5 0.5 0.1 20

Table 11-4 Performance requirements for C-band DCMs (TW-RS fibers)
DCM
Module
Transmission
Distance (mi./
km)
Max.
Insertion
Loss (dB)
PMD
(ps)
PDL
(dB)
Max.
Allowable
Power
a
(dBm)
DCM(A) 12.4/20 2.3 0.3 0.1 20
DCM(B) 24.8/40 2.8 0.3 0.1 20
DCM(C) 37.3/60 3.3 0.4 0.1 20
DCM(D) 49.7/80 3.8 0.4 0.1 20
DCM(E) 62.1/100 4.2 0.5 0.1 20
DCM(F) 74.5/120 4.7 0.5 0.1 20

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
210
Table 11-5 Mechanical specifications of the DCM frame
Parameter Specifications
Dimensions (H x
W x D)
48 mm (1.9 in.) x 484 mm (19.1 in.) x 270.5 mm (10.6 in.)

11.2 CRPC Frame
The CRPC frame holds a CRPC board, a fan tray assembly, and a power distribution unit. The
frame is installed in an open rack.
Figure 11-2 shows the appearance of the CRPC frame. Situated in the middle of the frame is a
CRPC board. On the left of the frame is a fan tray assembly, and on the right is a power source
with two power inputs in mutual backup.
Figure 11-2 CRPC frame appearance
1
2
3
1: Fan tray assembly 2: CRPC board 3: Power distribution box

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
211
Table 11-6 Mechanical specifications of the CRPC frame
Parameter Value
Dimensions (H x W x D) 86 mm (3.4 in.) x 535 mm (21.1 in.) x 257 mm (10.1
in.)
Weight 3 kg (6.6 lb)

Table 11-7 Voltage and current requirements for the CRPC frame
Parameter Specifications
Rated working current 10 A
Working voltage range -48V DC: -40V DC to -57.6V DC
-60V DC: -48V DC to -72V DC

11.3 Fiber Spooling Frame
The fiber spooling frame is used to store fiber jumpers in a coil.
Appearance
The fiber spool box is installed at the bottom of the cabinet, more than 50 mm away from the
chassis. Figure 11-3 shows a fiber spooling frame.
Figure 11-3 Fiber spooling frame
1
2
6
5
4
3
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
212

1. Attenuator holder 2. Mechanical VOA pen 3. Captive screw 4. Fiber holder
5. Mounting ear 6. Fiber spool
Specifications of the Fiber Spooling Frame
l Dimensions: 101.6 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (4.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4
in. (H))
l Maximum Capacity: A maximum of 40 fibers can be threaded into an fiber spooling frame
from each side, and the maximum total fiber length is 50 m.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
213
12 Overview of Boards
About This Chapter
12.1 Board Appearance and Dimensions
The board appearance and dimensions include the board appearance, dimensions, and the laser
hazard level label.
12.2 Introduction to Working Modes of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards
12.3 Bar Code Overview
There is a bar code on the front panel of each board, from which the basic information about the
board can be obtained, such as the BOM code, delivery information, board version, board name,
and board model number. The bar code of some of such boards also include a characteristic code.
The board characteristic code comprises information about frequency of signals, type of the
optical module, wavelength, and so on.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Hardware Description 12 Overview of Boards
214
12.1 Board Appearance and Dimensions
The board appearance and dimensions include the board appearance, dimensions, and the laser
hazard level label.
12.1.1 Appearance and Dimensions
This section describes the appearance and dimensions of the board.
CAUTION
Always wear a properly grounded ESD wrist strap when holding a board to prevent static from
damaging the board.
Table 12-1 shows the appearance and dimensions of the different board types.
Table 12-1 Board appearance and dimensions
Board Appearance Board Name Numbe
r of
Slots
Per
Board
Heig
ht
(mm
/in.)
Wi
dt
h
(m
m/
in.
)
Dep
th
(m
m/
in.)
Depth
Height
Width TN11L4G 1 264.6
/10.4
25.
4/1
.0
220.
0/8.
7
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
215
r of
Slots
Per
Board
Heig
ht
(mm
/in.)
Wi
dt
h
(m
m/
in.
)
Dep
th
(m
m/
in.)
Depth
Height
Width
TN11OAU1 2 264.6
/10.4
50.
8
220.
0/8.
7
Depth
Height
Width
TN11M40 3 264.6
/10.4
76.
2
220.
0/8.
7
Depth
Height
Width TN11AUX 1 107.6
/4.2
25.
4/1
.0
220.
0/8.
7
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
216
r of
Slots
Per
Board
Heig
ht
(mm
/in.)
Wi
dt
h
(m
m/
in.
)
Dep
th
(m
m/
in.)
Depth
Height
Width TN11LSXL 4 264.6
/10.4
10
1.6
/
4.0
220.
0/8.
7
Depth
Height
Width TN21MR4 1 118.9
/4.7
25.
4/1
.0
220.
0/8.
7

12.1.2 Symbols on Boards
This section describes the symbols on boards.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
217
Table 12-2 Symbols on Boards
Label Type Description
HAZARD LEVEL 1MINVISIBLE
LASER RADIATION
DO NOT VIEWDIRECTLY WITH
NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS
CAUTION
Laser safety
class label
Indicates that the laser
safety class of boards
is HAZARD LEVEL
1M and there may be
laser radiation. It
warns users not to
directly look into fiber
connectors without
taking any protection
measures; instead an
optical instrument
that can attenuate
optical power must be
used.
G.657A2 FIBERONLY
G.657A2
Fiber type
label
Applies to
TN15LSXL/
TN11LTX/
TN12LSC/
TN55NS3/TN54NS4
boards. It specifies the
fiber type for the
boards.
NOTE
To prevent the cabinet
door from squeezing
fibers, the board can
only use G.657A2
fibers.
SM SFP WORK WITH
G.657A2 FIBER ONLY
G.657A2
Fiber type
label
Applies to TN54THA
boards. It specifies the
fiber type for the
boards.
NOTE
To prevent the cabinet
door from squeezing
fibers, the board can
only use G.657A2
fibers.
:
WARNING: FIBERS MUST
BE CONNECTED BEFORE
POWER UP
!
Warning
label
Applies to CRPC
boards. It provides
precautions for the
boards.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
218
Label Type Description
Heat hazard
label
Indicates that the
board surface
temperature is high
and it may cause body
injury.

12.2 Introduction to Working Modes of OTUs, Tributary
Boards and Line Boards
12.2.1 Convergence and Non-convergence Applications of
Tributary Boards
This section introduces the concepts of convergence and non-convergence applications of
tributary boards.
Convergence Application
Convergence application means multiple client services are aggregated into one ODUk signal
to improve the bandwidth utilization.
Figure 12-1 uses the TOM board as an example to illustrate the convergence application.
Figure 12-1 Convergence application
Line
board
TOM board
STM-1
GE
ESCON
FC100
STM-1
GE
ESCON
FC100
ODU1
ODU1
Aggregation
WDM-side
Client-side
OTUk

Non-convergence Application
Non-convergence application means that each client service is directly mapped into an ODUk
signal that matches the client service. In this application, flexible service grooming is achieved.
Figure 12-2 uses the TQX board as an example to illustrate the non-convergence application.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
219
Figure 12-2 Non-convergence application
10GE-LAN ODU2
STM-64
ODU2
ODU2
FC800 ODU2
10GE-WAN
OTUk
TQX board
Line board
10GE-LAN
STM-64
FC800
10GE-WAN
Directly-Mapped
10Gbit/s Service

Client-side
WDM-side
OTUk
Line board

12.2.2 Convergent and Non-convergent OTUs
This section introduces the concepts of convergent and non-convergent OTUs.
Convergent OTUs
a convergent OTU board aggregates multiple client services into one ODUk signals, or
aggregates multiplex multiple lower order ODUk signals into one higher order ODUk signals.
Figure 12-3 uses the LQM board as an example to illustrate mapping client services into an
ODU1 signals. Figure 12-4 uses the LOA board as an example to illustrate multiplexing lower
order ODUk into higher order ODUk.
Figure 12-3 Convergent OTU (mapping client services into an ODU1 signals)
WDM-side
LQM board
STM-1
GE
ESCON
FC100
STM-1
GE
ESCON
FC100
ODU1
Aggregation
Client-side
OTU1
OTU1
ODU1

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
220
Figure 12-4 Convergent OTU (multiplexing lower order ODUk into higher order ODUk)
LOA board
HD-SDI
FC200
STM-16/OC-48
OTU1
OTU2
ODU1
ODU2
WDM-side
STM-16/OC-48
HD-SDI
OTU1
FC200
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
Client-side
OTU2
Four channels of ODU1
multiplex to one channel of
ODU2.

Non-convergent OTUs
A non-convergent OTU board maps one client services directly into an ODUk signals with a
rate matching the client service, and maps one ODUk signals directly into one OTUk signals.
Figure 12-5 uses the LDX board as an example to illustrate non-convergent OTUs.
Figure 12-5 Non-convergence application (mapping one client services directly into an ODUk
signals)
10GE-LAN ODU2
ODU2 STM-64
10GE-LAN
STM-64
OTU2
OTU2 OTU2
OTU2
Client-side WDM-side
Directly-Mapped
ODU2
LDX board

12.2.3 Standard Mode and Compatible Mode
Starting from V100R006C01, some boards support new board models. To distinguish new
models from existing models, the new board models are marked as standard mode and the
existing board models are marked as compatible mode. For boards in standard mode, only
channels or physical ports are presented in the models and NMS, with service mapping paths
displayed for the channels or physical ports. All ODU layers are allocated to the physical ports.
When configuring cross-connections, users do not need to know the internal ports on the boards.
Compared with the compatible mode, the standard mode makes operations easier and has fewer
end-to-end trail layers, reducing maintenance costs.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
221
Boards Supporting Standard Mode
Table 12-3 lists the boards that support standard mode, the names of the boards on the NMS.
Table 12-3 Names displayed on the NMS
Name in Standard Mode
(Standard Mode, adding
logical board)
Name in Compatible
Mode (Compatible
Mode, adding logical
board)
Name in Compatible
Mode (NE Panel)
TN53TDX(STND) 53TDX 53TDX
TN54THA(STND) TN54THA 54THA
TN54TOA(STND) TN54TOA 54TOA
TN55TOX - 55TOX
TN55TQX(STND) TN55TQX 55TQX
TN54TSC - 54TSC
TN54TSXL - 54TSXL
TN54TTX - 54TTX
TN52ND2(STND) TN52ND2 52ND2
TN53ND2 TN53ND2(COMP) 53ND2
TN55NO2 - 55NO2
TN53NQ2 TN53NQ2(COMP) 53NQ2
TN52NS2(STND) TN52NS2 52NS2
TN53NS2 TN53NS2(COMP) 53NS2
TN54NS3(STND) 54NS3 54NS3
TN55NS3 - 55NS3
TN54NS4 - 54NS4
TN54ENQ2(STND) TN54ENQ2 54ENQ2
TN55NPO2(STND) TN55NPO2 55NPO2
TN55NPO2E - 55NPO2E

NOTE
TN55TOX/TN54TSC/TN54TSXL/TN54TTX/TN52ND2T04/TN55NO2/TN52NS2T04/TN52NS2T05/
TN52NS2T06/TN52NS201M01/TN52NS201M02/TN55NS3/TN54NS4/TN55NPO2E support only the
standard mode.
The following uses the TN53NS2 board as an example to introduces the standard and compatible
modes of a line board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
222
Standard mode
Figure 12-6 shows the board model of the TN53NS2 board in standard mode.
Figure 12-6 Board model of the TN53NS2 board in standard mode

8 xODU0
4 xODU1
1 xODU2/
1xODU2e
ODU1:1
ODU1:4
ODU1:4
ODU0:2
ODU0:2
ODU0:1
ODU0:1
OCh:1
2XODUflex
IN/OUT
IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1~2)
ODUflex:1
ODUflex:2
IN/OUT-OCh:1
IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4)-ODU0:(1~2)
IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4)
ODU1:1
ODU2:1
ODU0: 8
ODU0:1
ODU2:1
8 xODU0
Backplane

ODU2:1
ODU2:1
OCh :1
OCh 1 :
OCh :1
OCh :1
O
t
h
e
r

t
r
i
b
u
t
a
r
y
/
l
i
n
e
/
P
I
D

b
o
a
r
d
Cross-connect module ODU1 mapping path
Multiplexing module ODU2 mapping path
Service processing module ODUflex mapping path
ODU0 mapping path (ODU0>ODU1
>ODU2)
Cross-connection that must be
configured on the NMS to receive
ODUk signals from other boards
ODU0 mapping path (ODU0>ODU2)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
223
Table 12-4 Meaning of ports of the TN53NS2 board
Port Name Meaning
IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1-
ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2)
Mapping path for ODU0 signals received from the
backplane (ODU0->ODU1->ODU2)
ODU0:(1-8)
backplane (ODU0->ODU2)
ODU1:(1-4)
backplane
IN/OUT-OCh:1 Mapping path for ODU2/ODU2e signals received from
the backplane
ODUflex:(1-2)
Mapping path for ODUflex signals received from the
backplane
IN/OUT WDM-side optical ports

Compatible mode
Figure 12-7 shows the board model of the TN53NS2 board in compatible mode.
Figure 12-7 Board model of the TN53NS2 board in compatible mode
1
(IN1/OUT1)-1
1 x ODU2/ODU2e 8 x ODU0 4 x ODU1
71
(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1
161
(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1
164
(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1
164
(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2
51
(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4
ODU1
ODU1
ODU2
51
(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1
161
(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2
Other tributary/
line/PID board
Other tributary/
line/PID board
Other tributary/
line/PID board
Backplane

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
224
Service processing module Automatic cross-connection, which
does not need to be configured on the
NMS. For example, if ODU0 signals
are required, users only need to
configure cross-connections from
other boards to the ODU0LP port on
the board using the NMS. The board's
internal structure enables
transmission of the multiplexed signal
to the ODU2LP port. Users do not
need to configure a cross-connection
for transmitting the multiplexed
signal.
ODU0 mapping path Cross-connection that must be
Table 12-5 Meaning of ports of the TN53NS2 board
Port Name Description Automatic Cross-Connection
ODU0LP1-
ODU0LP4
Internal logical ports of the board.
Each of the ports provides optical
channels 1 and 2.
Automatic cross-connections are
established between these ports and
the ODU1LP port.
ODU1LP1 Internal logical ports. Each of the
port provides optical channels 1, 2,
3, and 4.
the ODU2LP port
ODU2LP1 Internal logical ports of the board.
channel 1.
the IN/OUT port
IN/OUT WDM-side optical ports. -
Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the
board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections.

Comparison of NMS GUIs for Different Modes
Service creation operations on the NMS vary according to board models. Table 12-6 uses the
TN53NS2 board as an example to illustrate the differences in the board operation GUIs.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
225
Table 12-6 GUIs on the NMS
GUI on the
NMS
Navigation Path Compatible
Mode
Standard Mode
Path View In the NE panel, select a
board, double-click the board
icon or right-click and choose
Path View from the shortcut
menu.
See Figure 12-8. See Figure 12-9.
WDM
Interface
In the NE Explorer, select the
required board and choose
Configuration > WDM
Interface from the Function
Tree. tab.
Create Cross-
Connection
Service
In the NE Explorer, select the
required NE and choose
Configuration > WDM
Service Management from
the Function Tree.

Figure 12-8 Path View (compatible mode)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
226
Figure 12-9 Path View (standard mode)

Figure 12-10 WDM Interface (compatible mode)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
227

Figure 12-11 WDM Interface (standard mode)

Figure 12-12 Create Cross-Connection Service (compatible mode)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
228
Figure 12-13 Create Cross-Connection Service (standard mode)

12.3 Bar Code Overview
NOTE
Such information as frequency of signals queried on the U2000 is a commissioning value, different from
that on the bar code.
Figure 12-14 and Figure 12-15 show the bar codes of boards installed with optical modules.
Figure 12-16 and Figure 12-17 show the bar codes of boards not installed with optical modules.
Figure 12-14 Description of the bar code (example 1)
2102314840107A000090 19210AG
BOM
Delivery
information
Board version
(TN12)
Board
name
Characteristic
code
TN1M2
LSX
Y
01
Board model
number
Environmental
friendliness flag
(Y: Environmentally
friendly)
V
e
n
d
o
r
M
a
n
u
f
a
c
t
u
r
e

y
e
a
r
M
a
n
u
f
a
c
t
u
r
e

m
o
n
t
h
S
e
r
i
a
l

n
u
m
b
e
r
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
229

2102315653108A000199
BOM
Delivery
information
Board version
(TN12)
Board
name
Characteristic
code
TN1M2 LSX Y T01
Board model
number
Environmental
friendliness flag
(Y: Environmentally
friendly)
TPT
Tunable
V
e
n
d
o
r
M
a
n
u
f
a
c
t
u
r
e

y
e
a
r
M
a
n
u
f
a
c
t
u
r
e

m
o
n
t
h
S
e
r
i
a
l

n
u
m
b
e
r
T01

2103070768107A000090
BOM
TN1M2LSX Y
01
Delivery
information
Board version
(TN12)
Board model
number
Board
name
Environmental
friendliness flag
(Y: Environmentally
friendly)
V
e
n
d
o
r
M
a
n
u
f
a
c
t
u
r
e

y
e
a
r
M
a
n
u
f
a
c
t
u
r
e

m
o
n
t
h
S
e
r
i
a
l

n
u
m
b
e
r

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
230
030HFY 108A000199
Third and fourth
numbers of the BOM
TN12 LSX Y T01
Board model
number
Environmental
friendliness flag
(Y: Environmentally
friendly)
Delivery
information
Board version
(TN12)
Board
name
The complete BOM
should be 0303OHFY.
"03" are taken out in the
BOM above.
V
e
n
d
o
r
M
a
n
u
f
a
c
t
u
r
e

y
e
a
r
M
a
n
u
f
a
c
t
u
r
e

m
o
n
t
h
S
e
r
i
a
l

n
u
m
b
e
r

The first four numbers in the board BOM indicate whether the board is installed with an optical
module. Table 12-7 provides the meanings of the first four numbers in the board BOM.
Table 12-7 Meanings of the first four numbers in the BOMs for OTN boards
Board
Configuration
First Four
Numbers in
the board
BOM
Description First Four Numbers
in the BOM of the
Required Optical
Module
Board not installed
with optical modules
0303 The board is installed
with a wavelength
tunable optical module
on its WDM side.
Client-side optical
modules need to be
selected as required for
the board.
3406 or 0303 (client
side)
0303 The board is not
installed with any
optical module. WDM-
and client-side optical
modules need to be
selected for the board as
required.
3406 or 0303 (client side
and WDM side)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
231
Board
Configuration
First Four
Numbers in
the board
BOM
in the BOM of the
Required Optical
Module
with a fixed optical
module on its WDM
side. Client-side optical
modules need to be
required.
side)
installed with any
modules need to be
required.
and WDM side)
Board installed with
optical modules
0231 Optical modules are
installed on the client
and WDM sides of the
board.
N/A

Of the OCS boards, the SSN1SF64A and SSN3SLH41 boards are delivered as follows:
l For the SSN1SF64A board, the first four numbers in the BOM are 0303, indicating that the
board is delivered with optical modules installed.
l For the SSN3SLH41 board,
The first four numbers are 0303 when the board is delivered with optical modules not
installed. The first four numbers in the BOMs of the optical modules required by the
board are 3406.
When the board is delivered with optical modules installed, the first four numbers in
the BOM are 0305.
Table 12-8 provides the meanings of the first four numbers in the BOMs for of other OCS
boards.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
232
Table 12-8 Meanings of the first four numbers in the BOM for an OCS board (excluding
SSN1SF64A and SSN3SLH41)
Board
Configuration
First Four
Numbers in
the board
BOM
in the BOM of the
Required Optical
Module
Board not installed
installed with any
optical module. Optical
modules need to be
required.
3406
optical modules
optical modules.
N/A

Table 12-9 provides the description of the delivery information.
Table 12-9 Description of the delivery information of a board
Item Description
Vendor Indicates the vendor of a board. "10" indicates Huawei.
Manufacture Year Indicates the last digit of the year when a board is manufactured.
For example, "4" indicates 2004. From 2010 onwards, a letter is
used to indicate the manufacture year. For example, the letter A
indicates 2010, the letter B indicates 2011, and so on.
Manufacture Month Indicates the month when a board is manufactured. The value is
expressed in hexadecimal format. For example, the letter B
indicates November.
Serial Number Indicates the production serial number of a board. The value ranges
from 000001 to 999999.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
233
13 Optical Transponder Unit
About This Chapter
13.1 Overview
An OTU (Optical Transponder Unit) board converts client-side services into standard optical
signals after performing mapping, convergence, and other procedures. The board also performs
the reverse process.
13.2 ECOM
ECOM: enhanced communication interface unit
13.3 L4G
L4G: line wavelength conversion unit with 4 x GE line capacity
13.4 LDGD
LDGD: 2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, dual fed and selective receiving
13.5 LDGS
LDGS: 2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, single fed and single receiving
13.6 LDM
LDM: 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board
13.7 LDMD
LDMD: 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board, dual fed and
selective receiving
13.8 LDMS
LDMS: 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board, single fed and
single receiving
13.9 LDX
LDX: 2 x 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion unit
13.10 LEM24
LEM24: 22 x GE + 2 x 10GE and 2 x OTU2 Ethernet Switch board
13.11 LEX4
LEX4: 4 x 10GE and 2 x OTU2 Ethernet Switch Board
13.12 LOA
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Hardware Description 13 Optical Transponder Unit
234
LOA: 8 x Any-rate MUX OTU2 wavelength conversion board.
13.13 LOG
LOG: 8 x Gigabit Ethernet unit
13.14 LOM
LOM: 8-port multi-service multiplexing & optical wavelength conversion board
13.15 LQG
LQG: 4 x GE-multiplex-optical wavelength conversion board
13.16 LQM
LQM: 4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) OTU1 wavelength conversion board
13.17 LQMD
LQMD: 4-channel multi-rate (100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s) OTU1 wavelength conversion unit, dual
fed and selective receiving
13.18 LQMS
LQMS: 4-channel multi-rate (100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s) OTU1 wavelength conversion unit, single
fed and single receiving
13.19 LSC
LSC: 100Gbit/s wavelength conversion board
13.20 LSQ
LSQ: 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion board
13.21 LSX
LSX: 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion board
13.22 LSXL
LSXL: 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion board
13.23 LSXLR
LSXLR: 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay board
13.24 LSXR
LSXR: 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay board
13.25 LTX
LTX: 10-Port 10Gbit/s Service Multiplexing & Optical Wavelength Conversion Board
13.26 LWX2
LWX2: arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) dual-wavelength conversion board
13.27 LWXD
LWXD: arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board (double transmit)
13.28 LWXS
LWXS: arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board (single transmit)
13.29 TMX
TMX: 4-channel STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 asynchronous mux OTU2 wavelength conversion
board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
235
13.1 Overview
An OTU (Optical Transponder Unit) board converts client-side services into standard optical
signals after performing mapping, convergence, and other procedures. The board also performs
the reverse process.
Positions of OTU Boards in a WDM System
Figure 13-1 shows the positions of OTU boards in a WDM system.
Figure 13-1 Positions of OTU boards in a WDM system
O
M
O
A
F
I
U SC1
OTU
C
l
i
e
n
t
-
s
i
d
e

e
q
u
i
p
m
e
n
t
OTU
O
D
OTU
OTU
O
A
W
D
M
-
s
i
d
e

O
D
F
Client-side
services
WDM-side
services
Types of OTU Boards
OTU boards are classified into the following types according to the WDM-side rates and
functions:
l 2.5G OTU boards: For the main functions of these OTU boards, see Table 13-1.
l 10G OTU boards: For the main functions of these OTU boards, see Table 13-2.
l Ethernet over WDM (EoW) boards: These OTU boards support Layer 2 processing of
Ethernet services. For the main functions of these OTU boards, see Table 13-5.
l Transparent transmission OTU boards: These OTU boards do not support OTN processing.
They only convert client services into ITU-T G.694-compliant optical signals. For the main
functions of these OTU boards, see Table 13-6.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
236
Table 13-1 Main functions of 2.5G OTU boards
Boar
d
Type Client-Side Service Pluggable Optical
Module
WDM
Specificatio
ns
Type Max.
Num
ber
Client
Side
WDM
Side
DW
DM
CW
DM
TN11
LDG
D
Conver
gence
GE 2 Y N Y Y
TN11
LDG
S
Conver
gence
GE 2 Y N Y Y
TN12
LDM
Conver
gence
STM-4, STM-1, OC-12, OC-3, FICON,
FC100, GE, FE, DVB-ASI, SDI,
ESCON, FDDI
2 Y Y Y Y
OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, HD-SDI,
FC200, FICON Express,
1
TN11
LDM
D
Conver
gence
ESCON, FDDI
2 Y N Y N
1
TN11
LDM
S
Conver
gence
ESCON, FDDI
2 Y N Y N
1
TN13
LQM
Conver
gence
STM-4, STM-1, OC-12, OC-3, FE,
ESCON, DVB-ASI, SDI, FDDI
4 Y Y Y Y
GE, FC100, FICON, 2
FC200, FICON Express, STM-16,
OC-48, OTU1, HD-SDI,
1
TN11
LQM
D
Conver
gence
ESCON, DVB-ASI
4 Y N Y Y
GE, FC100, FICON, 2
OC-48
1
TN12
LQM
D
Conver
gence
4 Y N Y Y
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
237
Boar
d
Module
WDM
Specificatio
ns
Type Max.
Num
ber
Client
Side
WDM
Side
DW
DM
CW
DM
GE, FC100, FICON, 2
1
TN11
LQM
S
Conver
gence
ESCON, DVB-ASI
4 Y N Y Y
GE, FC100, FICON, 2
OC-48
1
TN12
LQM
S
Conver
gence
4 Y N Y Y
GE, FC100, FICON, 2
1

Table 13-2 Main functions of 10G OTU boards
Boar
d
Module
WDM
Specificatio
ns
Type Max.
Num
ber
Client
Side
WDM
Side
DW
DM
CW
DM
TN1
1LS
X
Non-
converg
ence
STM-64, OC-192, 10GE LAN, 10GE
WAN, OTU2
1 Y N Y N
TN1
2LS
X
Non-
converg
ence
STM-64, OC-192, FC1200, 10GE
LAN, 10GE WAN, OTU2
1 Y N Y N
TN1
3LS
X
Non-
converg
ence
STM-64, OC-192, FC1200, 10GE
LAN, 10GE WAN, OTU2, OTU2e
1 Y Y Y N
TN1
4LS
X
Non-
converg
ence
STM-64, OC-192, FC1200, 10GE
LAN, 10GE WAN, OTU2, OTU2e
1 Y N Y N
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
238
Boar
d
Module
WDM
Specificatio
ns
Type Max.
Num
ber
Client
Side
WDM
Side
DW
DM
CW
DM
TN1
2LD
X
Non-
converg
ence
10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64,
OC-192, OTU2, OTU2e
2 Y Y Y N
TN1
1LO
A
Converg
ence
FE, FDDI, GE, STM-1, STM-4, OC-3,
OC-12, FC100, FICON, DVB-ASI,
ESCON, SDI
8 Y Y Y N
HD-SDI, HD-SDIRBR, STM16,
OC-48, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1
4
3G-SDI, 3G-SDIRBR, FC400,
FICON4G
2
FC800, FICON8G, 10GE LAN 1
TN1
1LO
G
Converg
ence
GE 8 Y N Y N
TN1
2LO
G
Converg
ence
GE 8 Y Y Y N
TN1
1LO
M
Converg
ence
GE, FC100, FICON, ISC 1G 8 Y N Y N
FC200, FICON EXPRESS, ISC 2G 4
FC400, FICON4G 2
TN1
2LO
M
Converg
ence
GE, FC100, FICON, ISC 1G 8 Y Y Y N
FC200, FICON EXPRESS, ISC 2G,
InfiniBand 2.5G,
4
FC400, FICON4G, InfiniBand 5G, 3G-
SDI
2
TN1
1LS
XR
Relay N/A 1 N N Y N
TN1
1TM
X
Converg
ence
STM-16, OC-48, OTU1 4 Y N Y Y
TN1
2TM
X
Converg
ence
STM-16, OC-48, OTU1 4 Y Y Y Y
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
239

Board Type Client-Side Service Pluggable Optical
Module
WDM
Specificati
ons
Type Max.
Number
Client
Side
WDM
Side
DW
DM
CW
DM
TN11LSQ Non-
convergence
STM-256, OC-768,
OTU3
1 N N Y N
TN11LSXL Non-
convergence
STM-256, OC-768 1 N N Y N
TN12LSXL Non-
convergence
STM-256, OC-768,
OTU3
1 N N Y N
TN15LSXL Non-
convergence
STM-256, OC-768,
OTU3
1 N N Y N
TN11LSXLR
TN12LSXLR
a
Relay N/A N/A N N Y N
a: Only TN12LSXLR supports OTU3e.

Board Type Client-Side Service Pluggable
Optical Module
WDM Specifications
Type Max.
Number
Client
Side
WDM
Side
DWDM CWDM
TN12
LSC
Non-
convergence
100GE 1 Y N Y N
TN11
LTX
Convergenc
e
10GE LAN, 10GE
WAN, STM-64,
OC-192
10 Y N Y N

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
240
Table 13-5 Main functions of EoW boards
Module
WDM
Specifications
Type Max.
Number
Client
Side
WDM
Side
DWDM CWDM
TN11
LEM2
4
Convergenc
e, L2 service
processing
FE, GE 22 Y Y Y N
10GE-LAN, 10GE-
WAN
2
TN11
LEX4
Convergenc
e, L2 service
processing
10GE-LAN, 10GE-
WAN
4 Y Y Y N

Table 13-6 Main functions of transparent transmission OTU boards
Module
WDM
Specifications
Type Max.
Number
Client
Side
WDM
Side
DWDM CWDM
TN11
LWX2
Transparent
transmissio
n
STM-16, STM-4,
STM-1, OC-48, OC-12,
OC-3, FC200, FC100,
GE, FE, FDDI, ESCON,
DVB-ASI, SDI, FICON,
FICON Express, HD-
SDI
2 N N Y Y
TN11
LWX
D
Transparent
transmissio
n
STM-16, STM-4,
STM-1, OC-48, OC-12,
OC-3, FC200, FC100,
FICON Express, HD-
SDI
1 N N Y Y
TN11
LWXS
Transparent
transmissio
n
STM-16, STM-4,
STM-1, OC-48, OC-12,
OC-3, FC200, FC100,
FICON Express, HD-
SDI
1 N N Y Y
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
241
Module
WDM
Specifications
Type Max.
Number
Client
Side
WDM
Side
DWDM CWDM
TN12
LWXS
Transparent
transmissio
n
STM-16, STM-4,
STM-1, OC-48, OC-12,
OC-3, FC200, FC100,
FICON Express, HD-
SDI, ISC 1G, ISC 2G,
ETR, CLO
1 N N Y Y

13.2 ECOM
ECOM: enhanced communication interface unit
13.2.1 Version Description
The available functional version of the ECOM board is TN11.
Mappings Between the Board and Equipment
The following provides the board(s) supported by the product. However, the availability of the
board(s) is subject to PCNs. For PCN information, contact the product manager at your local
Huawei office.
Boar
d
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800 Subrack 3800 Chassis
TN11
ECO
M
N N N N Y Y

13.2.2 Application
The ECOM board is used to achieve the DCN communication between the OptiX OSN 6800/
3800 and the OptiX OSN 900A, and to converge/deconverge 8xFE services to/from 1xGE
service.
Application Scenario 1: Achieving DCN Communication between the OptiX OSN
6800/3800 and the OptiX OSN 900A
The management signal and service signal of the OptiX OSN 900A are together transmitted to
the OptiX OSN 6800/3800 over the line. The FIU board of the OptiX OSN 6800/3800 separates
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
242
the signal received into management signal and service signal. The service signal is processed
by the OTU board. The management signal is accessed by the ECOM board through the FE port
and then is transmitted to the SCC board through the backplane.
For the position of the ECOM in the network built with the OptiX OSN 6800/3800 and OptiX
OSN 900A, see Figure 13-2.
Figure 13-2 Position of the ECOM board in the network built with the OptiX OSN 6800/3800
and OptiX OSN 900A
ECOM
OptiX OSN
900A
Service
signal
OTU
OTU
SCC
ETH
8
OptiX OSN
900A
OptiX OSN
6800/OptiX
OSN 3800
8
F
I
U
F
I
U
signal
Management
Service signal
signal
Management

NOTE
Each FIU board of the OptiX OSN 6800/3800 accesses the signals from only one OptiX OSN 900A.
Application Scenario 2: Converging/Deconverging 8xFE Services to/from 1xGE
Service
When used for convergence or deconvergence, the ECOM board can be used only in the CWDM
system. For the position of the ECOM in the WDM system, see Figure 13-3.
Figure 13-3 Position of the ECOM board in the WDM system
MUX
DMUX
ECOM ECOM
1
8
1
8
FE
Client side
GE GE
FE
GE GE
Client side
DMUX
MUX

NOTE
For the OptiX OSN 3800, the MUX and DMUX boards shown in the figure are the OADM boards used
in the CWDM system.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
243
13.2.3 Functions and Features
The ECOM board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer and loopback
on the client side.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 13-7.
Table 13-7 Functions and features of the ECOM board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function l Achieves the DCN communication between the OptiX OSN 6800/
3800 and the OptiX OSN 900A.
l Converges/deconverges 8xFE services to/from 1xGE service.
Client-side service
type
FE: Ethernet service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s
WDM
specification
Supports the CWDM specifications.
Cross-connect
capabilities
OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the transmission of one GE signal each to
working/protection cross-connection boards respectively through the
backplane. Supports the transmission of one GE signal to the paired slots
through the backplane.
OptiX OSN 3800: Supports the grooming of one GE signal from one
board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three
boards belonging to the mesh group.
Tunable
wavelength
function
Not Supported
PRBS function Not Supported
Protection scheme Not Supported
Alarms and
performance
events monitoring
l Supports the remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services.
l Detects the optical power and reports the alarms and performance
events for the board.
ALS function Not Supported
Test frame Not Supported
Optical-layer
ASON
Not Supported
Electrical-layer
ASON
Not Supported
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
244
Function and
Feature
Description
eSFP Supports enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical modules on the
client side.
Supports enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical modules on the
WDM side.
Loopback WDM side Inloop Supported
Outloop Not Supported
Client side Inloop Supported
Outloop Supported

13.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The ECOM board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, L2
switching module, cross-connect module, control and communication module, and power supply
module.
Figure 13-4 and Figure 13-5 show the functional modules and signal flow of the ECOM board.
Figure 13-4 Functional modules and signal flow of the ECOM board
Client side
SCC
WDM side
WDM-side
optical
module
Client-side
optical
module
L2 switching
module
Cross-connect
module
OUT
IN
RX1
RX2
RX8
TX8
TX1
TX2
FE Backplane(management signal transmission)
O/E
E/O O/E
E/O
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
245
Signal Flow (Achieving DCN Communication between the OptiX OSN 6800/3800
and the OptiX OSN 900A)
The client side of the ECOM board accesses FE optical signals.
In the signal flow of the ECOM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the ECOM to the SCC board,
and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives one channel of FE signals (management signals)
from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion.
After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the L2 switching module, and
groomed by the backplane to the SCC board through the ETH interface.
l Receive direction
The L2 switching module receives FE signals from the SCC board, and then sends them to
the client-side optical module.
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the FE electrical signals, and
then outputs the optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.
Figure 13-5 Functional modules and signal flow of the ECOM
Client side
SCC
WDM side
WDM-side
optical
module
Client-side
optical
module
L2 switching
module
Cross-connect
module
OUT
IN
RX1
RX2
RX8
TX8
TX1
TX2
GE Backplane(service cross-connection)
O/E
E/O O/E
E/O
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse

Signal Flow (Converging/Deconverging 8xFE Services to/from 1xGE Service)
The client side of the ECOM board accesses FE optical signals.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
246
In the signal flow of the ECOM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the ECOM to the WDM side
of the ECOM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
The client-side optical module receives eight channels of optical signals from client
equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion.
After O/E conversion, the eight channels of electrical signals are sent to the L2 switching
module. The module performs operations such as converging eight channels of FE signals
into one channel of GE signals. Then, the module outputs one channel of GE signals to the
cross-connect module.
The cross-connect module performs operations such as service cross-connection of the GE
signals.
The GE signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O
conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard
wavelengths GE optical signals through the OUT optical interface.
l Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant GE optical signals
at CWDM standard wavelengths from the WDM side through the IN optical interface.
Then, the module performs O/E conversion.
After the O/E conversion, the GE signals are sent to the cross-connect module. The module
performs operations such as service cross-connection. Then, the module outputs one
channel of GE signals.
The L2 switching module deconverges the GE signals and sends a maximum of eight
channels of FE signals to the client-side optical module.
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the eight channels of electrical
signals, and then outputs eight channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8
optical interfaces.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module
The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter.
Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of eight channels of FE optical signals.
Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from eight channels of internal
electrical signals to FE optical signals.
Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface.
Reports the working state of the client-side laser.
l WDM-side optical module
The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter.
WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of GE optical signals.
WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to
GE optical signals.
Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface.
Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.
l L2 switching module
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
247
Forwards service signals.
Implements the convergence/deconvergence of the service signals.
l Cross-connect module
OptiX OSN 6800: Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the
client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. Grooms the electrical signals
between the ECOM and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through
the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals.
client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. Grooms the electrical signals
from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards
belonging to the mesh group through the backplane. The grooming service signals are
GE signals.
l Control and communication module
Controls operations on the board.
Controls operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection from each functional module on the board.
Communicates with the system control and communication board.
l Power supply module
Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each
module on the board.
13.2.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the ECOM board.
Figure 13-6 shows the front panel of the ECOM board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
248
Figure 13-6 Front panel of the ECOM board
ECOM
ECOM
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
T
X
2
R
X
2
T
X
3
R
X
3
T
X
4
R
X
4
T
X
5
R
X
5
T
X
6
R
X
6
T
X
1
R
X
1
I
N
O
U
T
T
X
7
R
X
7
T
X
8
R
X
8

Indicators
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
l Service active status indicator (ACT) - green
l Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green)
l Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
For details about these indicators, see A.4 Board Indicators.
Interfaces
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
249
Table 13-8 Types and functions of the interfaces on the ECOM board
IN LC Receive single-wavelength signals from the associated
optical demultiplexer board or optical add/drop
multiplexer board.
OUT LC Transmit single-wavelength signals to the associated
optical multiplexer board or optical add/drop
multiplexer board.
TX1-TX8 LC Transmit service signals to client equipment.
RX1-RX8 LC Receive service signals from client equipment.

Laser Hazard Level
The laser hazard level of the board is HAZARD LEVEL 1, indicating that the maximum power
launched by the board is less than 10 dBm (10 mW).
13.2.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one ECOM board.
Table 13-9 shows the valid slots for the ECOM board.
Table 13-9 Valid slots for ECOM board
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800 subrack IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
OptiX OSN 3800 chassis IU2-IU5

13.2.7 Physical and Logical Ports
This section describes the logical ports displayed on the NMS and the physical ports of the board.
Display of Physical Ports
Table 13-10lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers
displayed on the NMS.
Table 13-10 Mapping between the physical ports on the ECOM board and the port numbers
displayed on the NMS
Physical Port Port Number on the NMS
IN/OUT 1
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
250
TX1/RX1 3
TX2/RX2 4
TX3/RX3 5
TX4/RX4 6
TX5/RX5 7
TX6/RX6 8
TX7/RX7 9
TX8/RX8 10

NOTE
The port number displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical ports. One transmits signals
and the other receives signals.
Logical Ports
board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, AP1 is a
logical port of the board.
Figure 13-7 shows the application model of the ECOM board. Table 13-11 describes the
meaning of each port.
Figure 13-7 Port diagram of the ECOM board
PORT10
PORT3
PORT4
PORT5
PORT6
PORT7
PORT8
PORT9
1(IN/OUT)-1
Client side WDM side
VCTRUNK1
101( AP1/AP1)-1
WDM-side optical
module
L2 switching module
Cross-connect
module

Table 13-11 Description of NM port of the ECOM board
Port Name Description
PORT3-PORT10 These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces RX1/TX1-
RX8/TX8.
VCTRUNK1 Internal virtual port.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
251
AP1 Internal convergence port.
IN/OUT Corresponding to the WDM-side optical interfaces.

13.2.8 Configuration of Cross-connection
This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS.
If the ECOM board is used to transmit services, set Board Mode in Configuration > WDM
interfaces on the U2000. The valid values of the board mode field are Service Mode and HUB
Mode.
NOTE
If the HUB mode need be configured, there must be one-to-one connection between ports, which need not
be set on the U2000.
If the service mode need be configured, the following items must be created on the U2000:
l During creation of the Ethernet services on the U2000, create the cross-connection between
the PORT and VCTRUNK ports. The cross-connect convergence between the eight
channels of FE optical signals and one channel of GE electrical signals accessed from the
client-side ports is implemented through the L2 switching module.
l Between the VCTRUNK ports and the AP ports of the cross-connect module are one-to-
one port connections, which need not be set on the U2000.
l During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the cross-
connection between the AP of the ECOM board and AP port of other boards (The GE
services accessed from the client side of the ECOM board are cross-connected to the client
side of other boards for the inter-board services deconvergence), as shown in Figure
13-8.
connection between the AP of the ECOM board and LP port of other boards (The GE
services accessed from the client side of the ECOM board are cross-connected to the WDM
side of other boards for the inter-board services convergence), as shown in Figure
13-8.
connections of GE level between the AP port and the IN/OUT port of the ECOM, realizing
the cross-connect grooming of GE services.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
252
Figure 13-8 Cross-connection diagram of the ECOM
Client side
WDM side
Client side
WDM side
101(AP1/AP1)-1
Other board
ECOM
201(LP/LP)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
201(LP/LP)-3
201(LP/LP)-4 104(AP4/AP4)-1
101(AP1/AP1)-1
102(AP2/AP2)-1
103(AP3/AP3)-1
The client side of the ECOM board are cross-connected to the client side of
other boards
The client side of the ECOM board are cross-connected to theWDM side of
other boards
2
1
2
1

13.2.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS
This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS.
For parameters of ECOM, refer to Table 13-12.
Table 13-12 ECOM parameters
Field Value Description
Optical Interface/
Channel
- Displays the position of the optical
interface.
Optical Interface
Name
- Sets and queries the optical interface name.
An optical interface name contains a
maximum of 64 characters. Any characters
are supported.
Channel Use Status Used, Unused
Default: Used
The Channel Use Status parameter sets the
occupancy status of the current channel of
a board.
See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM
Interface) for more information.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
253
Optical Interface
Loopback
Non-Loopback, Inloop,
Outloop
Default: Non-
Loopback
Specifies the loopback mode for the optical
interface on a board.
Laser Status Off, On
Default: On
The Laser Status parameter sets the laser
status of a board.
See D.15 Laser Status (WDM Interface)
for more information.
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
- Queries the operating wavelength at the
WDM-side optical interface of a board.
Band Type - Queries the band type.
Tunable
Wavelength Range
- Displays the tunable wavelength range
supported by the WDM-side optical
interface on the board.
Planned
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.100
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.170
to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /
The Planned Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
parameter sets the wavelength number,
wavelength and frequency of the current
optical interface on the WDM side of a
board.
See D.27 Planned Wavelength No./
(WDM Interface) for more information.
Planned Band
Type
C, CWDM
Default: C
The Planned Band Type parameter sets
the band type of the current working
wavelength.
See D.26 Planned Band Type (WDM
Board Mode HUB Mode, Service
Mode
Default: HUB Mode
Used to configure the working mode of the
board.

13.2.10 ECOM Specifications
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
254
Bo
ard
Client-Side
Fixed Optical
Module
Client-Side
Pluggable
Optical Module
WDM-Side
Fixed Optical
Module
WDM-Side
Pluggable
Optical Module
TN
11E
CO
M
N/A 100 BASE-FX-10
km
100 BASE-FX-40
km
100 BASE-FX-80
km
1.25 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-40 km
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
N/A 1.25 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-40 km
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km

NOTE
Margins exist between the default input power low threshold and the receiver sensitivity and between the
default input power high threshold and the overload point. These margins ensure that the system can report
an input power low or high alarm before the actual input power reaches the receiver sensitivity or overload
point.
Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module
Table 13-13 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (FE services)
Parameter Unit Value
Optical
Module Type
100 BASE-
FX-10 km
100 BASE-
FX-40 km
100 BASE-
FX-80 km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ
Target
transmission
distance
- 10 km (6.2 mi.) 40 km (24.9 mi.) 80 km (49.7 mi.)
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm -3 0 5
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm -11.5 -4.5 -2
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB 9 9 9
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
255
Optical
Module Type
100 BASE-
FX-10 km
100 BASE-
FX-40 km
100 BASE-
FX-80 km
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Eye pattern
mask
- IEEE802.3z-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - PIN PIN PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
(EOL)
dBm -19 -20 -22
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm -3 -3 -3

Table 13-14 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (colored wavelengths)
Optical Module
Type
1.25 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-40 km
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
Line code format - NRZ NRZ
Target transmission
distance
- 40 km (24.9 mi.) 80 km (49.7 mi.)
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 5 5
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm 0 0
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB 9 8.2
Operating
wavelength range
nm 1471 to 1611 1471 to 1611
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
256
Optical Module
Type
1.25 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-40 km
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
Central wavelength
deviation
nm 6.5 6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 1.0 1.0
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30 30
Eye pattern mask - IEEE802.3z-compliant
Receiver type - PIN APD
Operating
wavelength range
nm 1270 to 1620 1270 to 1620
Receiver sensitivity dBm -19 -28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm -3 -9
Maximum
reflectance
dB -27 -27

WDM-Side Pluggable Optical Module
Table 13-15 CWDM-side pluggable optical module specifications (fixed wavelengths)
Optical Module Type 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km
2.67 Gbit/s Multirate
(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Target transmission
distance
- 40 km (24.9 mi.) 80 km (49.7 mi.)
Operating wavelength
range
nm 1471 to 1611 1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 5 5
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
257
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km
(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Minimum mean launched
power
dBm 0 0
Minimum extinction ratio dB 9 8.2
Central wavelength
deviation
nm 6.5 6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 1 1
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30 30
range
nm 1270 to 1620 1270 to 1620
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm -3 -9
Maximum reflectance dB -27 -27

l Dimensions of front panel (H x W x D): 264.6 mm (10.4 in.) x 25.4 mm (1.0 in.) x 220 mm
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Board Optical Module
Type
Typical Power
Consumption at
25C (77F)
Maximum Power
Consumption at
55C (131F)
TN11ECOM 19.6 21.6

13.3 L4G
L4G: line wavelength conversion unit with 4 x GE line capacity
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
258
The available functional version of the L4G board is TN11.
Huawei office.
Boar
d
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
TN11
L4G
N N N N Y Y

13.3.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the L4G board implements the conversion between six
channels of GE signals and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations.
For the position of the L4G board in the WDM system, see Figure 13-9.
Figure 13-9 Position of the L4G board in the WDM system
TX1
RX6
L4G
GE GE
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
L4G
L2
1
O
D
U
5
G
4
x
G
E
L2
1
O
D
U
5
G
GE
1
O
T
U
5
G
/
F
E
C
5
G
1
O
T
U
5
G
/
F
E
C
5
G
GE
4
G
E
TX6
TX1
RX1
TX6
RX6
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
RX1
OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot or cross-connect board
OptiX OSN 3800: From/To mesh group slot

NOTE
The client-side six pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 5 Gbit/s.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
259
The L4G is mainly used to achieve tunable wavelength and cross-connection at the electrical
layer, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC.
Table 13-16 Functions and features of the L4G board
Function
and Feature
Description
Basic
function
Converges up to six non-full bandwidth GE service signals into four GE
service signals and multiplexes these four signals into an OTU 5G/FEC 5G
signal. Converts the signals into standard DWDM wavelength compliant with
ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar.
Client-side
service type
GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s
Cross-
connect
capabilities
l OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the grooming of four channels of GE services
each to working/protection cross-connection boards respectively through
the backplane. Supports the transmission of four GE signals to the paired
slots through the backplane.
l OptiX OSN 3800: Supports the grooming of four GE signals from one
OTN
function
l Provides the OTU5G/FEC5G interface on WDM-side.
l Supports TCM and PM functions for ODU5G.
l Supports SM function for OTU5G.
Layer 2
switching
Supports the MAC address learning and aging.
Supports one VB.
WDM
specification
Supports the DWDM specifications.
Tunable
wavelength
function
Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module,
the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range
of the 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz.
ESC
function
Supported
PRBS test
function
Not supported
LPT function Supported
NOTE
The LPT function cannot be configured for EVPL services but only for bidirectional
EPL services. When the LPT function is enabled, Source C-VLAN and Sink C-
VLAN of an EPL service must be left empty.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
260
Function
and Feature
Description
FEC
encoding
Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the
WDM side.
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Poisson mode) to help locate line failures.
l Monitors B1 bytes to help locate faults.
l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events.
l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical
power of the laser.
ALS
function
Supports the ALS function on the client side.
Test frame Supported
Optical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Electrical-
layer ASON
Not supported
Protection
scheme
l Supports SW SNCP.
l Supports VLAN SNCP.
l Supports client 1+1 protection.
l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection.
l Supports OWSP protection.
l Supports MS SNCP protection.
Outloop Supported
Client side MAC Supported
PHY Supported
Protocols or
standards
compliance
Protocols or standards for
transparent transmission (non-
performance monitoring)
IEEE 802.1q VLAN
All L2 protocols including xSTP,
LACP, EthOAM, DHCP, and PPP
MPLS protocols
All L3 protocols including ARP, IGMP,
OSPF, and IGRP
Protocols or standards for service
processing (performance
monitoring)
IEEE 802.3x pause frame
IEEE 802.3ad LACP
IEEE 802.1p priority
IEEE 802.1q VLAN

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
261
The L4G board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, L2
switching module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power
supply module.
Figure 13-10 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the L4G board.
Figure 13-10 Functional modules and signal flow of the L4G board
SCC
WDM side Client side
WDM-side
optical
module
Client-side
optical
module
L2
switching
module
4GE
4GE
OUT
IN
RX1
RX2
RX6
TX6
TX1
TX2
6GE
6GE
Backplane(service cross-connection)
GE
GE
encapsulation
and mapping
module
Cross-
connect
module
Signal processing module
OTN
processing
module
O/E
E/O
E/O
O/E
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse

Signal Flow
In the signal flow of the L4G board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the L4G to the WDM side
of the L4G, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
The client-side optical module receives a maximum of six channels of flat-rate GE optical
signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX6 interfaces, and performs O/E
conversion.
After O/E conversion, the six channels of electrical signals are sent to the L2 switching
module. The module performs operations such as convergence. Then, the module outputs
a maximum of four channels of GE signals to the signal processing module.
The signal processing module performs operations such as the service cross-connection,
encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the
module outputs one channel of OTU 5G/FEC 5G signals.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
262
The OTU 5G/FEC 5G signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing
E/O conversion, the module sends out OTU 5G/FEC 5G optical signals at DWDM
wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT optical interface.
l Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives OTU 5G/FEC 5G optical signals at DWDM
wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN optical interface. Then, the
module performs O/E conversion.
After O/E conversion, the OTU 5G/FEC 5G signals are sent to the signal processing
module. The module performs operations such as OTU 5G/FEC 5G framing, decoding of
FEC, demapping, decapsulation processing and service cross-connection. Then, the module
outputs four channels of GE signals.
The L2 switching module deconverges the GE signals and sends six channels of the signals
with corresponding rates to the client-side optical module.
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the six channels of electrical
signals, and then outputs six channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX6
optical interfaces.
Module Function
Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of six channels of GE optical signals.
Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from six channels of internal electrical
signals to GE optical signals.
WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU 5G/FEC 5G optical signals.
OTU 5G/FEC 5G optical signals.
l Signal processing module
The module consists of the cross-connect module, GE encapsulation and mapping module,
and OTN processing module.
Cross-connect module
client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. Grooms the electrical
signals between the L4G and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board
through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
263
signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other
three boards belonging to the mesh group through the backplane. The grooming
service signals are GE signals.
GE encapsulation and mapping module
Encapsulates multiple channels of GE signals and maps the signals into the OTU 5G/
FEC 5G payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors GE
performance.
OTN processing module
Frames OTU 5G/FEC 5G signals, processes overheads in OTU 5G/FEC 5G signals,
and performs FEC encoding and decoding.
13.3.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the L4G board.
Figure 13-11 shows the front panel of the L4G board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
264
Figure 13-11 Front panel of the L4G board
L4G
L4G
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
T
X
2
R
X
2
T
X
3
R
X
3
T
X
4
R
X
4
T
X
5
R
X
5
T
X
6
R
X
6
O
U
T
I
N
T
X
1
R
X
1

Indicators
Interfaces
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
265
Table 13-17 Types and functions of the interfaces on the L4G board
multiplexer board.
multiplexer board.

Laser Hazard Level
13.3.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one L4G board.
Table 13-18 shows the valid slots for the L4G board.
Table 13-18 Valid slots for the L4G board
Product Valid Slots

13.3.7 Characteristic Code for the L4G
The board characteristic code indicates the information about frequency of signals, type of the
For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.2 Characteristic
Code for OTUs.
This section describes how the physical ports of the board are displayed on the NMS and the
logical ports of the board.
Table 13-19 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers
displayed on the NMS. .
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
266
Table 13-19 Mapping between the physical ports on the L4G board and the port numbers
IN/OUT 1
TX1/RX1 3
TX2/RX2 4
TX3/RX3 5
TX4/RX4 6
TX5/RX5 7
TX6/RX6 8

NOTE
Logical Ports
board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, LP is a
Figure 13-12 describes the application model of the L4G board. Table 13-20 describes the
Figure 13-12 Port diagram of the L4G board
PORT3
PORT4
PORT5
PORT6
PORT7
PORT8
1(IN/OUT)-1
VCTRUNK1
101( AP1/AP1)-1
VCTRUNK2
VCTRUNK3
VCTRUNK4
102( AP2/AP2)-1
103( AP3/AP3)-1
104( AP4/AP4)-1
201(LP/LP)-1
WDM-side
optical
module
L2 swithing module
201(LP/LP)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
201(LP/LP)-3
201(LP/LP)-4
Cross-connect
module
Service processing
module

Table 13-20 Description of NM port of the L4G board
PORT3-PORT8 These ports correspond to the client-side
optical interfaces RX1/TX1-RX6/TX6
respectively.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
267
VCTRUNK1-VCTRUNK4 Internal virtual ports.
AP1-AP4 Internal convergence ports.
LP Internal logical port. The optical paths are
numbered 1, 2, 3 and 4.
IN/OUT Corresponding to the WDM-side optical
interfaces.

If the L4G board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the
U2000:
the PORT and VCTRUNK ports. The cross-connect convergence between the six channels
of GE optical signals and the four channels of GE electrical signals accessed from the client-
side ports is realized through the L2 switching module.
NOTE
One VCTRUNK port can be connected to multiple PORT ports.
The maximum bandwidth of each VCTRUNK port is 1.25 Gbit/s.
l There are one-to-one port connections between the VCTRUNK ports and the AP ports of
the cross-connect module. These connections do not need to be set on the U2000.
connection between the AP and LP ports. The cross-connect grooming of GE services is
implemented through the cross-connect module. The following three cross-connections can
be created:
Create the cross-connection between the internal AP and LP ports of the L4G board
(create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown by
and in Figure 13-13.
Create the cross-connection between the AP port of the L4G board and the LP port of
other boards, as shown by
3
in Figure 13-13. (The GE services accessed from the
client side of the L4G board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for
protection and inter-board service convergence.)
Create the cross-connection between the AP port or RX/TX port of other boards and
the LP port of the L4G board, as shown by
4
in Figure 13-13. (The GE services
accessed from the client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of
the L4G board for protection and inter-board service convergence.)
l Create the cross-connection between the LP port of the L4G board and the LP port of other
board, as shown by
5
in Figure 13-13. (This cross-connection enables the passing-through
of the broadcast services.)
l Create the cross-connection between the AP port of the L4G board and the AP port of other
boards, as shown by
6
in Figure 13-13. (The GE services accessed from the client side
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
268
of the L4G board are cross-connected to the client side of other boards for protection and
the inter-board service deconvergence.)
l The four paths of the LP port are converged into one channel, which is connected to the
IN/OUT port. This connection does not need to be configured on the U2000.
Figure 13-13 Cross-connection diagram of the L4G board
Client side
WDM side
Client side
WDM side
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the L4G board
The straight-through of the board
The internal cross-connection of the board
The client side of the L4G board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards
3
4
1
2
6
The client side of the L4G board are cross-connected to the client side of other boards
Other board
L4G
1
2
3 4
104(AP4/AP4)-1
101(AP1/AP1)-1
102(AP2/AP2)-1
103(AP3/AP3)-1
201(LP/LP)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
201(LP/LP)-3
201(LP/LP)-4
201(LP/LP)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
201(LP/LP)-3
201(LP/LP)-4
104(AP4/AP4)-1/6(RX4/TX4)-1
101(AP1/AP1)-1/3(RX1/TX1)-1
102(AP2/AP2)-1/4(RX2/TX2)-1
103(AP3/AP3)-1/5(RX3/TX3)-1
5 6
5
The WDM side of the L4G board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards
Other board TN11L4G / TN11LDGD / TN11LDGS / TN11LOG / TN12LOG / TN11LQG / TN13LQM /
TN11LQMD / TN12LQMD / TN11LQMS / TN12LQMS / TN11TBE / TN11TDG /
TN11TOM / TN11TQM / TN12TQM

For parameters of L4G, refer to Table 13-21.
Table 13-21 L4G parameters
Optical
Interface/
Channel
- Displays the position of the optical interface.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
269
Optical
Interface Name
An optical interface name contains a maximum of 64
characters. Any characters are supported.
Channel Use
Status
Used, Unused
Default: Used
occupancy status of the current channel of a board.
See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for
more information.
Optical
Interface
Loopback
Non-Loopback,
Inloop, Outloop
Default: Non-
Loopback
Specifies the loopback mode for the optical interface
on a board.
Default:
l WDM side:
On
l Client side:
Off
The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a
board.
See D.15 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more
information.
Automatic
Laser
Shutdown
Disabled,
Enabled
Default: Enabled
The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter
determines whether to automatically shut down the
laser after the signals received by a board are lost.
Service Mode OTN, SDH
Default: OTN
Specifies the service mode for a board.
See D.32 Service Mode (WDM Interface) for more
information.
LPT Enabled Disabled,
Enabled
Default: Disabled
Determines whether to enable the link pass-through
(LPT) function.
FEC Working
State
Disabled,
Enabled
Default: Enabled
Determines whether to enable or disable the forward
error correction (FEC) function for an optical
interface.
See D.10 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for
more information.
Band Type/
Wavelength
No./
Wavelength
(nm)/
Frequency
(THz)
- Queries the operating wavelength at the WDM-side
optical interface of a board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
270
Tunable
Wavelength
Range
- Displays the tunable wavelength range supported by
the WDM-side optical interface on the board.
Planned
Wavelength
No./
Wavelength
(nm)/
Frequency
(THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196
.050 to
80/1560.61/19
2.100
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/20
8.170 to
18/1611.00/18
8.780
Default: /
The Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength
number, wavelength and frequency of the current
optical interface on the WDM side of a board.
See D.27 Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength
(nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more
information.
Planned Band
Type
C, CWDM
Default: C
The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band
type of the current working wavelength.
See D.26 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for
more information.
SD Trigger
Condition
None, B1_SD,
OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DE
G
Default: None
The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the
relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or
channels of a board as SD switching trigger
conditions of the protection group in which this OTU
board resides.
See D.31 SD Trigger Condition (WDM

13.3.11 L4G Specifications
Bo
ard
Client-Side
Fixed
Optical
Module
Client-Side
Pluggable Optical
Module
WDM-Side Fixed
Optical Module
WDM-Side
Pluggable
Optical
Module
TN
11L
4G
N/A 2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.5 km
1000 BASE-LX-10 km
1000 BASE-LX-40 km
1000 BASE-ZX-80 km
(eSFP CWDM)-40 km
(eSFP CWDM)-80 km
3400 ps/nm-C Band-
Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
3400 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
N/A

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
271
NOTE
point.
Table 13-22 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (GE services)
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.
5 km
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Target
transmission
distance
- 0.5 km (0.3
mi.)
10 km (6.2
mi.)
40 km (24.9
mi.)
80 km (49.7
mi.)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -2.5 -3 0 5
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -9.5 -9 -5 -2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 9 9 9 9
Eye pattern
mask
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN PIN PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
272
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.
5 km
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -17 -20 -20 -23
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm 0 -3 -3 -3

Table 13-23 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (CWDM colored wavelengths)
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km
(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Target transmission
distance
- 40 km (24.9 mi.) 80 km (49.7 mi.)
range
nm 1471 to 1611 1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 5 5
power
dBm 0 0
Central wavelength
deviation
nm 6.5 6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 1.0 1.0
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30 30
Eye pattern mask - IEEE802.3z-compliant G.957-compliant
G.959.1-compliant
IEEE802.3z-compliant
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
273
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km
(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
range
nm 1270 to 1620 1270 to 1620
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm -3 -9

WDM-Side Fixed Optical Module
Table 13-24 WDM-side fixed optical module specifications
Optical Module
Type
3400 ps/nm-C Band-
Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
3400 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable
Wavelength-NRZ-
APD
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 2 2
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm -2 -3
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB 10 10
Center frequency THz 192.10 to 196.00
Center frequency
deviation
GHz 10
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 0.3 0.3
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35 35
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 3400 3400
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
274
Optical Module
Type
3400 ps/nm-C Band-
Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
3400 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable
Wavelength-NRZ-
APD
Receiver type - APD APD
range
nm 1200 to 1650
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm -9 -9

(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Board WDM-Side Optical
Module
Typical Power
Consumption at 25
C ( 77F ) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55
C ( 131F ) (W)
TN11L4
G
3400 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
50.0 55.0
3400 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-
APD
53.0 58.0

13.4 LDGD
LDGD: 2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, dual fed and selective receiving
The available functional version of the LDGD board is TN11.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
275
Huawei office.
Boar
d
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
TN11
LDG
D
N N N N Y Y

13.4.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LDGD board implements the conversion between two
channels of GE signals and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendation, and dually
feeds and selectively receives signals on the WDM side.
For the position of the LDGD board in the WDM system, see Figure 13-14.
Figure 13-14 Position of the LDGD board in the WDM system
GE
LDGD
1
O
D
U
1
1
O
T
U
1
LDGD
1
O
T
U
1
1
O
D
U
1
GE
TX1
MUX/
DMUX
MUX/
DMUX
MUX/
DMUX
MUX/
DMUX
GE GE
RX1
TX2
RX2
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
IN1
IN2
OUT1
OUT2
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
OptiX OSN 6800: From/To cross-connect board or paired slot

The LDGD board is mainly used to achieve tunable wavelength and cross-connection at the
electrical layer, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
276
Table 13-25 Functions and features of the LDGD board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function LDGD converts signals: 2 x GE <-> 1 x OTU1/STM-16
Implements the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM
side.
Client-side
service type
Cross-connect
capabilities
l OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the grooming of two channels of GE
services each to working/protection cross-connection boards
respectively through the backplane. Supports the transmission of two
GE signals to the paired slots through the backplane.
l OptiX OSN 3800: Supports the grooming of two GE signals from one
OTN function l Provides the OTU1 interface on WDM-side.
l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring
to the ITU-T G.709.
l Supports PM and TCM functions for ODU1.
l Supports SM function for OTU1.
WDM
specification
l Supports ITU-T G.694.1-compliant DWDM specifications.
l Supports ITU-T G.694.2-compliant CWDM specifications.
Tunable
wavelength
function
Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this
module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side
within the range of the 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing
of 100 GHz.
ESC function Supported
PRBS test
function
Not supported.
FEC encoding Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the
WDM side.
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
power of the laser.
ALS function Supports the ALS function on the client side.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
277
Function and
Feature
Description
Optical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Electrical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Port MTU Supports transmission of packets containing 15189600 bytes.
Protection
scheme
l Supports SW SNCP.
Outloop Supported
Outloop Supported
Protocols or
standards
compliance
Protocols or
standards for
transparent
transmission
(non-
performance
monitoring)
IEEE 802.3z
Protocols or
standards for
service
processing
(performance
monitoring)
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1
ITU-T G.694.2

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
278
The LDGD board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
Figure 13-15 show the functional modules and signal flow of the LDGD board.
Figure 13-15 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDGD board
Client side
SCC
WDM side
RX1
RX2
TX1
TX2
Backplane (service cross-connection)
GE
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
Client side
Optical
module
O/E
E/O
GE
encapsulation
and mapping
module
OTN
Processing
module
E/O
O/E
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
Splitter
WDM side
Optical
module
Cross-
connect
module

Signal Flow
The client side of the LDGD board accesses GE optical signals.
In the signal flow of the LDGD board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LDGD to the WDM side
of the LDGD, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
The client-side optical module receives two channels of GE optical signals from client
After O/E conversion, the two channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing
module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation
and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs
one channel of OTU1 signals.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
279
The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O
conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard
wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths OTU1
optical signals. An optical splitter converts the OTU1 optical signals into two channels of
identical optical signals, and then the two channels signals are output through the OUT1-
OUT2 optical interfaces.
l Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives two channels of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at
DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard
wavelengths OTU1 optical signals from the WDM side through the IN1-IN2 optical
interfaces. Then, the module performs O/E conversion.
After O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The
module performs operations such as received signal selection, OTU1 framing, decoding of
FEC, demapping, decapsulation processing and service cross-connection. Then, the module
outputs two channels of GE signals.
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the two channels of electrical
signals, and then outputs two channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX2
optical interfaces.
Module Function
Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of two channels of GE optical signals.
Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from two channels of the internal
electrical signals to GE optical signals.
WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU1 optical signals.
OTU1 optical signals.
signals between the LDGD and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
280
Encapsulates multiple channels of GE signals and maps the signals into the OTU1
payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors GE
performance.
Frames OTU1 signals, processes overheads in OTU1 signals, and performs FEC
encoding and decoding.
13.4.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LDGD board.
Figure 13-16 shows the front panel of the LDGD board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
281
Figure 13-16 Front panel of the LDGD board
LDGD
LDGD
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
O
U
T
1
I
N
1
O
U
T
2
I
N
2
T
X
1
R
X
1
T
X
2
R
X
2

Indicators
Interfaces
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
282
Table 13-26 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LDGD board
IN1-IN2 LC Receive single-wavelength signals from the associated
multiplexer board.
OUT1-OUT2 LC Transmit single-wavelength signals to the associated
multiplexer board.

Laser Hazard Level
13.4.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one LDGD board.
Table 13-27 shows the valid slots for the LDGD board.
Table 13-27 Valid slots for LDGD board
Product Valid Slots

13.4.7 Characteristic Code for the LDGD
The characteristic code for the LDGD board contains eight digits, respectively indicating the
frequency values of two channels of optical signals on the WDM side.
The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 13-28.
Table 13-28 Characteristic code for the LDGD board
Code Description Description
First four digits The frequency of forth
optical signal
The last four digits of the
frequency value of the first
channel of signals on the
WDM side.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
283
Last four digits The frequency of forth
optical signal
frequency value of the
second channel of signals on
the WDM side.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11LDGD board is 92109210.
l "92109210" indicates the frequency of the two channels of optical signals on the WDM
side both are 192.10 THz.
Table 13-29 Mapping between the physical ports on the LDGD board and the port numbers
IN1/OUT1 1
IN2/OUT2 2
TX1/RX1 3
TX2/RX2 4

NOTE
Logical Ports
Figure 13-17 shows the application model of the LDGD board. Table 13-30 describes the
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
284
Figure 13-17 Port diagram of the LDGD board
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
1(IN1/OUT1)-1
201(LP/LP)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
201(LP/LP)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
2(IN2/OUT2)-1
WDM-si de
opti cal module
Cross-connect
module
Servi ce
processing
module

Table 13-30 Description of NM port of the LDGD board
RX1/TX1-RX2/TX2 These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces.
LP Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1 and
2.
IN1/OUT1-IN2/OUT2 These ports correspond to the WDM-side optical
interfaces.

If the LDGD board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the
U2000:
l During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the GE cross-
connection between the RX/TX and LP ports. The cross-connect grooming of GE services
is implemented through the cross-connect module. The following three cross-connections
can be created.
Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and LP ports of the LDGD
board (Create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown
Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the LDGD board and the LP
port of other boards (The GE services accessed from the client side of the LDGD board
are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and the inter-board
service convergence), as shown
3
in Figure 13-18.
Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of other boards and the LP port
of the LDGD board (The GE services accessed from the client side of other boards are
cross-connected to the WDM side of the LDGD board for protection and the inter-board
4
in Figure 13-18.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
285
NOTE
One RX/TX port can be connected to only one optical path of the LP port.
l Create the cross-connection between the LP port of the LDGD board and the LP port of
other boards (The GE services accessed from the WDM side of the LDGD board are cross-
connected to the WDM side of other board for the grooming of the WDM-side services),
as shown
5
in Figure 13-18.
l The two paths of the LP port are respectively connected to the IN1/OUT1 and IN2/OUT2
ports. There is no need for configuration on the U2000.
Figure 13-18 Cross-connection diagram of the LDGD board
Client side
WDM side
Client side
WDM side
Other board
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
201(LP/LP)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
201(LP/LP)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
1
2
3 4
5
3
4
1
2
5
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the
LDGD board
The client side of the LDGD board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
The WDM side of the LDGD board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
LDGD

For parameters of LDGD, refer to Table 13-31.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
286
Table 13-31 LDGD parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
Optical Interface
Name
An optical interface name contains a maximum
of 64 characters. Any characters are supported.
Channel Use
Status
Used, Unused
Default: Used
occupancy status of the current channel of a
board.
Optical Interface
Loopback
Non-Loopback,
Inloop, Outloop
Default: Non-
Loopback
Default:
l WDM side: On
l Client side: Off
The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status
of a board.
See D.15 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for
more information.
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
determines whether to automatically shut down
the laser after the signals received by a board are
lost.
Default: OTN
See D.32 Service Mode (WDM Interface) for
more information.
LPT Enabled Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
Determines whether to enable the link pass-
through (LPT) function.
FEC Working
State
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
Determines whether to enable or disable the
forward error correction (FEC) function for an
optical interface.
See D.10 FEC Working State (WDM
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
- Queries the operating wavelength at the WDM-
side optical interface of a board.
Tunable
Wavelength
Range
supported by the WDM-side optical interface on
the board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
287
Planned
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.
050 to
80/1560.61/192
.100
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208
.170 to
18/1611.00/188
.780
Default: /
The Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength
(nm)/Frequency (THz) parameter sets the
wavelength number, wavelength and frequency
of the current optical interface on the WDM side
of a board.
Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM
Planned Band
Type
C, CWDM
Default: C
The Planned Band Type parameter sets the
band type of the current working wavelength.
Max. Packet
Length
1518 to 9600
Default: 9600
The Max. Packet Length parameter sets and
queries the maximum packet length supported by
a board and is applicable to the boards supporting
Ethernet services.
See D.20 Max. Packet Length (WDM
Ethernet Working
Mode
Auto-Negotiation,
1000M Full-
Duplex
Default: Auto-
Negotiation
The Ethernet Working Mode parameter sets
and queries the working mode of the Ethernet.
See D.7 Ethernet Working Mode (WDM
SD Trigger
Condition
None, B1_SD,
OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None
conditions of the protection group in which this
OTU board resides.

13.4.11 LDGD Specifications
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
288
Bo
ard
Client-Side
Fixed Optical
Module
Client-Side
Pluggable Optical
Module
WDM-Side Fixed
Optical Module
WDM-Side
Pluggable
Optical
Module
TN
11L
DG
D
N/A 2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.5 km
1000 BASE-LX-10
km
1000 BASE-LX-40
km
1000 BASE-ZX-80
km
(eSFP CWDM)-40 km
(eSFP CWDM)-80 km
12800 ps/nm-C Band-
Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
12800 ps/nm-C Band-
Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
6500 ps/nm-C Band-
Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
3200 ps/nm-C Band-
Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
12800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
6400 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD (Four
Channels-Tunable)
1600 ps/nm-CWDM
Band-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZ-
APD
N/A

NOTE
point.
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.
5 km
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
289
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.
5 km
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
Target
transmission
distance
- 0.5 km (0.3
mi.)
10 km (6.2
mi.)
40 km (24.9
mi.)
80 km (49.7
mi.)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -2.5 -3 0 5
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -9.5 -9 -5 -2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 9 9 9 9
Eye pattern
mask
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN PIN PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -17 -20 -20 -23
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm 0 -3 -3 -3

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
290
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km
(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Target transmission
distance
- 40 km (24.9 mi.) 80 km (49.7 mi.)
range
nm 1471 to 1611 1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 5 5
power
dBm 0 0
Central wavelength
deviation
nm 6.5 6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 1.0 1.0
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30 30
G.959.1-compliant
range
nm 1270 to 1620 1270 to 1620
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm -3 -9

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
291
Optical Module
Type
12800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Fixed
Wavelen
gth-NRZ-
PIN
12800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Fixed
Wavelen
gth-NRZ-
APD
6500 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Fixed
Wavelen
gth-NRZ-
PIN
3200 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Fixed
Wavelen
gth-NRZ-
APD
12800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-NRZ-
APD
6400 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-NRZ-
APD
(Four
Channels
-
Tunable)
Line code format - NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm -4 -4 0 0 0 0
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm -8 -8 -5 -5 -5 -5
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB 10 10 8.2 8.2 10 8.2
Center frequency
deviation
GHz 10
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 0.2 0.2 0.5 0.5 0.2 0.5
Minimum side
mode suppression
ratio
dB 35 35 30 30 35 35
Dispersion
tolerance
ps/nm 12800 12800 6500 3200 12800 6400
Eye pattern mask - G.959.1 - compliant
Receiver type - PIN APD PIN APD APD APD
Operating
wavelength range
nm 1200 to 1650 1300 to
1575
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -18 -28 -18 -28 -28 -28
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
292
Optical Module
Type
12800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Fixed
Wavelen
gth-NRZ-
PIN
12800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Fixed
Wavelen
gth-NRZ-
APD
6500 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Fixed
Wavelen
gth-NRZ-
PIN
3200 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Fixed
Wavelen
gth-NRZ-
APD
12800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-NRZ-
APD
6400 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-NRZ-
APD
(Four
Channels
-
Tunable)
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm 0 -9 0 -9 -9 -9
Maximum
reflectance
dB -27 -27 -27 -27 -27 -27

Table 13-35 WDM-side fixed optical module specifications (fixed wavelengths)
Optical Module Type 1600 ps/nm-CWDM
Band-Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
Line code format - NRZ
Maximum mean launched
power
dBm 2
power
dBm 0.5
Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.2
Central wavelength nm 1271 to 1611
Central wavelength deviation nm 6.5
Maximum -20 dB spectral
width
nm 1
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 1600
Eye pattern mask - G.959.1-compliant
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
293
NRZ-APD
Receiver type - APD
Operating wavelength range nm 1200 to 1650
Receiver sensitivity dBm -28
Minimum receiver overload dBm -9
Maximum reflectance dB -27

(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Bo
ard
WDM-Side Optical Module Typical Power
Consumption
at 25C (77F)
Maximum
Power
Consumption
at 55C (131F)
TN
11L
DG
D
12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
NRZ-APD
NRZ-PIN
NRZ-APD
1600 ps/nm-CWDM Band-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
34.0 37.4
12800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
NRZ-APD (Four Channels-Tunable)
38.0 41.8

13.5 LDGS
LDGS: 2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, single fed and single receiving
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
294
The available functional version of the LDGS board is TN11.
Huawei office.
Boar
d
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
TN11
LDG
S
N N N N Y Y

13.5.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LDGS implements the conversion between two
For the position of the LDGS board in the WDM system, see Figure 13-19.
Figure 13-19 Position of the LDGS board in the WDM system
GE
LDGS
1
O
D
U
1
1
O
T
U
1
LDGS
1
O
T
U
1
1
O
D
U
1
GE
TX1
TX2
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
GE GE
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
RX1
RX2
RX1
TX1
RX2
TX2
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
OptiX OSN 6800: From/To cross-connect board or paired slot

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
295
The LDGS board is mainly used to achieve tunable wavelength and cross-connection at the
Table 13-36 Functions and features of the LDGS board
Function
and
Feature
Description
Basic
function
LDGS converts signals: 2 x GE <-> 1 x OTU1/STM-16
Client-side
service type
Cross-
connect
capabilities
l OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the grooming of two channels of GE services
the backplane. Supports the transmission of two GE signals to the paired
slots through the backplane.
l OptiX OSN 3800: Supports the grooming of two GE signals from one
OTN
function
l Provides the OTU1 interface on WDM-side.
l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to
the ITU-T G.709.
WDM
specification
Tunable
wavelength
function
ESC
function
Supported
FEC
encoding
WDM side.
PRBS test
function
Not supported
LPT
function
Supported
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
296
Function
and
Feature
Description
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
power of the laser.
ALS
function
Optical-
layer ASON
Not supported
Electrical-
layer ASON
Not supported
Protection
scheme
l Supports SW SNCP.
Outloop Supported
Outloop Supported
Protocols or
standards
compliance
Protocols or
standards for
transparent
transmission
(non-
performance
monitoring)
IEEE 802.3z
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
297
Function
and
Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards for
service
processing
(performance
monitoring)
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1
ITU-T G.694.2

The LDGS board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
Figure 13-20 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LDGS board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
298
Figure 13-20 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDGS board
Client side
SCC
WDM side
WDM-side
optical
module
Client-side
optical
module
OUT
IN
RX1
RX2
TX1
TX2
GE
O/E
E/O
E/O
O/E
GE
encapsulation
and mapping
module
OTN
processing
module
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
Cross-
connect
module

Signal Flow
The client side of the LDGS board accesses GE optical signals.
In the signal flow of the LDGS board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LDGS to the WDM side
of the LDGS, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
optical signals through the OUT optical interface.
l Receive direction
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
299
The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at
wavelengths OTU1 optical signals from the WDM side through the IN optical interface.
module performs operations such as OTU1 framing, decoding of FEC, demapping,
decapsulation processing and service cross-connection. Then, the module outputs two
channels of GE signals.
optical interfaces.
Module Function
signals between the LDGS and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board
performance.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
300
13.5.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LDGS board.
Figure 13-21 shows the front panel of the LDGS board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
301
Figure 13-21 Front panel of the LDGS board
LDGS
LDGS
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
T
X
1
R
X
1
T
X
2
R
X
2
O
U
T
I
N

Indicators
Interfaces
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
302
Table 13-37 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LDGS board
multiplexer board.
multiplexer board.

Laser Hazard Level
13.5.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one LDGS board.
Table 13-38 shows the valid slots for the LDGS board.
Table 13-38 Valid slots for LDGS board
Product Valid Slots

13.5.7 Characteristic Code for the LDGS
Code for OTUs.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
303
Table 13-39 Mapping between the physical ports on the LDGS board and the port numbers
IN/OUT 1
TX1/RX1 3
TX2/RX2 4

NOTE
Logical Ports
Figure 13-22 shows the application model of the LDGS board. Table 13-40 describes the
Figure 13-22 Port diagram of the LDGS board
1(IN/OUT)-1
WDM side
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
201(LP/LP)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
201(LP/LP)-1
Client side
WDM-side
optical module
Cross-connect
module
Service
processing
module

Table 13-40 Description of NM port of the LDGS board
LP Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1 and
2.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
304
his section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS.
If the LDGS board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the
U2000:
can be created.
Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and LP ports of the LDGS
board (Create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown
Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the LDGS board and the LP
port of other boards (The GE services accessed from the client side of the LDGS board
are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and the inter-board
3
in Figure 13-23.
of the LDGS board (The GE services accessed from the client side of other boards are
cross-connected to the WDM side of the LDGS board for protection and the inter-board
4
in Figure 13-23.
NOTE
l Create the cross-connection between the LP port of the LDGS board and the LP port of
other boards (The GE services accessed from the WDM side of the LDGS board are cross-
as shown
5
in Figure 13-23.
l The two paths of the LP port are converged into one channel, which is connected to the IN/
OUT port. There is no need for configuration on the U2000
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
305
Figure 13-23 Cross-connection diagram of the LDGS board
Client side
WDM side
Client side
WDM side
Other board
LDGS
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
201(LP/LP)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
201(LP/LP)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
1
2
3 4
5
3
4
1
2
5
LDGS board
The client side of the LDGS board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
The WDM side of the LDGS board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards

For parameters of LDGS, refer to Table 13-41.
Table 13-41 LDGS parameters
Optical
Interface/
Channel
Optical
Interface
Name
An optical interface name contains a maximum of 64
characters. Any characters are supported.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
306
Channel Use
Status
Used, Unused
Default: Used
occupancy status of the current channel of a board.
See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for
more information.
Optical
Interface
Loopback
Non-Loopback,
Inloop, Outloop
Default: Non-
Loopback
Specifies the loopback mode for the optical interface
on a board.
Default:
l WDM side:
On
l Client side:
Off
The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a
board.
See D.15 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more
information.
Automatic
Laser
Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
determines whether to automatically shut down the
laser after the signals received by a board are lost.
Default: OTN
See D.32 Service Mode (WDM Interface) for more
information.
Default: Disabled
Determines whether to enable the link pass-through
(LPT) function.
FEC Working
State
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
Determines whether to enable or disable the forward
error correction (FEC) function for an optical
interface.
See D.10 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for
more information.
Band Type/
Wavelength
No./
Wavelength
(nm)/
Frequency
(THz)
- Queries the operating wavelength at the WDM-side
Tunable
Wavelength
Range
- Displays the tunable wavelength range supported by
the WDM-side optical interface on the board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
307
Max. Packet
Length
1518 to 9600
Default: 9600
The Max. Packet Length parameter sets and queries
the maximum packet length supported by a board and
is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet
services.
See D.20 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface) for
more information.
Planned
Wavelength
No./
Wavelength
(nm)/
Frequency
(THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196
.050 to
80/1560.61/19
2.100
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/20
8.170 to
18/1611.00/18
8.780
Default: /
The Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength
number, wavelength and frequency of the current
optical interface on the WDM side of a board.
See D.27 Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength
(nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more
information.
Planned Band
Type
C, CWDM
Default: C
The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type
of the current working wavelength.
See D.26 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for
more information.
Ethernet
Working
Mode
Auto-
Negotiation,
1000M Full-
Duplex
Default: Auto-
Negotiation
The Ethernet Working Mode parameter sets and
queries the working mode of the Ethernet.
SD Trigger
Condition
None, B1_SD,
OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None
channels of a board as SD switching trigger conditions
of the protection group in which this OTU board
resides.
See D.31 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface)

13.5.11 LDGS Specifications
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
308
Bo
ard
Client-Side
Fixed Optical
Module
Client-Side
Pluggable
Optical Module
WDM-Side Fixed
Optical Module
WDM-Side
Pluggable
Optical
Module
TN
11L
DG
S
N/A 2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.5 km
1000 BASE-LX-10
km
1000 BASE-LX-40
km
1000 BASE-ZX-80
km
1.25 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-40 km
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
12800 ps/nm-C Band-
Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN
12800 ps/nm-C Band-
APD
6500 ps/nm-C Band-
PIN
3200 ps/nm-C Band-
APD
12800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
6400 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD (Four
Channels-Tunable)
1600 ps/nm-CWDM
NRZ-APD
N/A

NOTE
point.
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.
5 km
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
309
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.
5 km
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
Target
transmission
distance
- 0.5 km (0.3
mi.)
10 km (6.2
mi.)
40 km (24.9
mi.)
80 km (49.7
mi.)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -2.5 -3 0 5
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -9.5 -9 -5 -2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 9 9 9 9
Eye pattern
mask
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN PIN PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -17 -20 -20 -23
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm 0 -3 -3 -3

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
310
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km
(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Target transmission
distance
- 40 km (24.9 mi.) 80 km (49.7 mi.)
range
nm 1471 to 1611 1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 5 5
power
dBm 0 0
Central wavelength
deviation
nm 6.5 6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 1.0 1.0
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30 30
G.959.1-compliant
range
nm 1270 to 1620 1270 to 1620
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm -3 -9

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
311
Optical
Module Type
12800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Fixed
Waveleng
th-NRZ-
PIN
12800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Fixed
Waveleng
th-NRZ-
APD
6500 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Fixed
Waveleng
th-NRZ-
PIN
3200 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Fixed
Waveleng
th-NRZ-
APD
12800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Waveleng
th-NRZ-
APD
6400 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Waveleng
th-NRZ-
APD
(Four
Channels
-Tunable)
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm -1 -1 3 3 3 3
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm -5 -5 -2 -2 -2 -2
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB 10 10 8.2 8.2 10 8.2
Center
frequency
THz 192.10 to 196.00
Center
frequency
deviation
GHz 10
Maximum -20
dB spectral
width
nm 0.2 0.2 0.5 0.5 0.2 0.5
Minimum side
mode
suppression ratio
dB 35 35 30 30 35 35
Dispersion
tolerance
ps/nm 12800 12800 6500 3200 12800 6400
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1200 to 1650 1300 to
1575
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
312
Optical
Module Type
12800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Fixed
Waveleng
th-NRZ-
PIN
12800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Fixed
Waveleng
th-NRZ-
APD
6500 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Fixed
Waveleng
th-NRZ-
PIN
3200 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Fixed
Waveleng
th-NRZ-
APD
12800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Waveleng
th-NRZ-
APD
6400 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Waveleng
th-NRZ-
APD
(Four
Channels
-Tunable)
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -18 -28 -18 -28 -28 -28
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm 0 -9 0 -9 -9 -9
Maximum
reflectance
dB -27 -27 -27 -27 -27 -27

Optical Module Type 1600 ps/nm-CWDM Band-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
power
dBm 5
power
dBm 2.5
Central wavelength
deviation
nm 6.5
width
nm 1
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
313
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
Receiver type - APD

(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Bo
ard
Consumption at
25C (77F)
Maximum Power
Consumption at
55C (131F)
TN
11L
DG
S
NRZ-PIN
NRZ-APD
NRZ-PIN
NRZ-APD
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
32.0 35.2
12800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
Wavelength-NRZ-APD (Four Channels-
Tunable)
36.0 39.6

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
314
13.6 LDM
LDM: 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board
Only one functional version of the LDM board is available, that is, TN12.
Huawei office.
Boar
d
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
TN12
LDM
Y Y N Y Y Y

Type
The system provides two types of the LDM board: One has a pair of input and output optical
interfaces, and the other has two pairs of input and output optical interfaces. Table 13-46 lists
the types of the LDM board.
Table 13-46 Type description of the LDM board
Board Type Description
LDM One type is the single transmitting and
single receiving board.
The WDM-side interfaces are
IN1/OUT1.
Other type is the dual-fed selectively
receiving board.
The WDM-side interfaces are
IN1/OUT1 and IN2/OUT2.

NOTE
The WDM-side interfaces of LDM board are dynamic optical interfaces. Before configuring dual fed and
selective receiving, make sure the optical interfaces have been uploaded manually on the U2000.
13.6.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LDM board converts between signals at the rate of 100
Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations.
For the position of the LDM board in the WDM system, see Figure 13-24 and Figure 13-25.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
315
Figure 13-24 Position of the LDM board in the WDM system (single fed and single receiving)
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
100Mbit/s~2.5Gbit/s
LDM
1
O
D
U
1
1
O
T
U
1
LDM
1
O
T
U
1
1
O
D
U
1
100Mbit/s~2.5Gbit/s
TX1
RX2
RX1
TX2
RX1
TX1
RX2
TX2
OUT1
IN1
IN1
OUT1

Figure 13-25 Position of the LDM board in the WDM system (dual fed and selective receiving)
100Mbit/s~2.5Gbit/s
LDM
1
O
D
U
1
1
O
T
U
1
LDM
1
O
T
U
1
1
O
D
U
1
100Mbit/s~2.5Gbit/s
TX1
MUX/
DMUX
MUX/
DMUX
MUX/
DMUX
MUX/
DMUX
RX1
TX2
RX2
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
OUT1
OUT2
IN1
IN2
IN1
OUT1
IN2
OUT2

NOTE
The total rate of two channels of services at the client side cannot exceed 2.5 Gbit/s.
The LDM board can receive and transmit only one client service at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48,
STM-16, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, and HD-SDI) using its RX1/TX1 port pair.
The LDM board is mainly used to provide OTN interfaces and ESC.
Table 13-47 Functions and features of the LDM board
Function
and Feature
Description
Basic
function
LDM converts signals: 2 x (100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s signals) <-> 1 x OTU1
Implements the dual fed and selective receiving function or single fed and
single receiving function on the WDM side according to the application
scenario.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
316
Function
and Feature
Description
Client-side
service type
OTU1: OTN service at a rate of 2.67 Gbit/s
STM-1/OC-3: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 155.52 Mbit/s
STM-16/OC-48: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 2.5 Gbit/s
FC100: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s
FICON: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s
FICON Express: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s
HD-SDI: Bit-serial digital interface for high-definition television systems at
a rate of 1.49 Gbit/s
DVB-ASI: Video service at a rate of 270 Mbit/s
SDI: Serial digital interface at a rate of 270 Mbit/s
ESCON: SAN service at a rate of 200 Mbit/s
FDDI: SAN service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s
OTN
function
the ITU-T G.709.
WDM
specification
Tunable
wavelength
function
Not supported
ESC
function
Supported
PRBS test
function
Supports the PRBS function on the client and WDM sides.
NOTE
The PRBS function on the client side is supported only when the client-side service type
is STM-1/OC3, STM-4/OC-12, or STM-16/OC-48.
LPT function The board supports the LPT function only when the client-side service type
is FE or GE.
FEC
encoding
WDM side.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
317
Function
and Feature
Description
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Poisson mode or Bursty mode) to help locate line
failures.
power of the laser.
ALS
function
Test frame The board supports the test frame function only when the client-side service
type is FE or GE.
Optical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Electrical-
layer ASON
Not supported
Protection
scheme
Ethernet
service
mapping
mode
Supports encapsulation of GE services in GE(GFP-F) (displayed as GE on
the NMS) and GE(GFP-T) modes.
Outloop Supported
Outloop Supported
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
318
Function
and Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards
compliance
Protocols or
standards for
transparent
transmission
(non-
performance
monitoring)
IEEE 802.3u
IEEE 802.3z
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET)
Transport Systems: Common Generic
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES
(FC-PI)
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS)
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND
SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2)
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-BB-3)
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FC-
SW-3)
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND
SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH)
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE
COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL
(FC-SB-2)
SMPTE 292M Bit-Serial Digital Interface for High-
Definition Television Systems
ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for
the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous
Serial Interface (ASI)
SMPTE 259M 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc
Composite Digital Signals - Serial Digital Interface
NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets
CONnection architecture (SBCON)
ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed
Data Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access
Control (MAC)
Data Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer
Protocol (PHY)
Data Interface (FDDI) Physical Layer Medium
Dependent (PDM)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
319
Function
and Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards for
service
processing
(performance
monitoring)
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1
ITU-T G.694.2

The LDM board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
Figure 13-26 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LDM board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
320
Figure 13-26 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDM board
Client side
WDM side
RX1
RX2
TX1
TX2
Service
encapsulation
and mapping
module
Signal processing
module
OTN
processing
module
O/E
E/O
E/O
O/E
Client-side
optical
module
WDM-side
optical
module
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
SCC
Backplane
( controlled by SCC)
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2

Signal Flow
The client side of the LDM board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate
ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s).
In the signal flow of the LDM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LDM to the WDM side
of the LDM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
The client-side optical module receives two channels of the Any optical signals from client
module. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing,
OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU1
signals.
optical signals. A laser converts the OTU1 optical signals into two channels of identical
optical signals, and then the two channels signals are output through the OUT1-OUT2
optical interfaces.
l Receive direction
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
321
wavelengths OTU1 optical signals from the WDM side through the IN1-IN2 optical
FEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs two channels of
Any signals.
optical interfaces.
NOTE
Only one pair of WDM-side optical interfaces is used, the board implements the single fed and single
receiving function on the WDM side.
Module Function
Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of two channels of Any optical signals.
electrical signals to Any optical signals.
The module consists of the service encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN
processing module.
Service encapsulation and mapping module
Encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps the signals into the OTU1
payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the Any
performance monitoring function.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
322
13.6.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LDM board.
Figure 13-27 shows the front panel of the LDM board.
Figure 13-27 Front panel of the LDM board
LDM
LDM
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
O
U
T
1
I
N
1
O
U
T
2
I
N
2
T
X
1
R
X
1
T
X
2
R
X
2

Indicators
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
323
Interfaces
Table 13-48 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TN12LDM board
multiplexer board.
multiplexer board.

Laser Hazard Level
13.6.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one LDM board.
Table 13-49 shows the valid slots for the LDM board.
Table 13-49 Valid slots for the LDM board
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
subrack
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
subrack
OptiX OSN 8800
platform subrack
IU1-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800 subrack IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
324
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 3800 chassis IU2-IU5, IU11

13.6.7 Characteristic Code for the LDM
The board characteristic code indicates information about frequency of signals, type of the
Code for OTUs.
Table 13-50 Mapping between the physical ports on the LDM board and the port numbers
IN1/OUT1 1
IN2/OUT2 2
TX1/RX1 3
TX2/RX2 4

NOTE
For parameters of LDM, refer to Table 13-51.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
325
Table 13-51 LDM parameters
Optical
Interface/
Channel
interface.
Optical Interface
Name
- Sets and queries the optical interface
name.
maximum of 64 characters. Any
characters are supported.
Channel Use
Status
Used, Unused
Default: Used
The Channel Use Status parameter sets
the occupancy status of the current
channel of a board.
Optical Interface
Loopback
Outloop
Default: Non-Loopback
Specifies the loopback mode for the
optical interface on a board.
Service Type None, Any, FE, GE, GE
(GFP-T), OTU-1, STM-1,
STM-4, STM-16, OC-3,
OC-12, OC-48, FC-100,
FC-200, FICON, FICON
Express, HD-SDI, DVB-
ASI, SDI, ESCON, FDDI
Default: None
The Service Type parameter sets the
type of the service accessed at the optical
interface on the client side.
NOTE
GE services can be encapsulated in two
formats. When Service Type is GE, the
encapsulation format is GFP-F; when
Service Type is GE(GFP-T), the
encapsulation format is GFP-T. The value
GE(GFP-T) is recommended.
The GE services at the transmit and receive
ends must be encapsulated in the same
format.
Client Service
Bearer Rate
(Mbit/s)
100 to 2200
Default: 0
sets the rate of the accessed service at the
optical interface on the client side of a
board.
See D.5 Client Service Bearer Rate
(Mbit/s) (WDM Interface) for more
information.
Default:
l WDM side: On
l Client side: Off
The Laser Status parameter sets the
laser status of a board.
See D.15 Laser Status (WDM
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
The Automatic Laser Shutdown
parameter determines whether to
automatically shut down the laser after
the signals received by a board are lost.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
326
Default: Disabled
Determines whether to enable the link
pass-through (LPT) function.
FEC Working
State
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
Determines whether to enable or disable
the forward error correction (FEC)
function for an optical interface.
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength
(nm)/Frequency
(THz)
Tunable
Wavelength
Range
Planned
Wavelength No./
Wavelength
(nm)/Frequency
(THz)
l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to
80/1560.61/192.100
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.170 to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /
board.
(WDM Interface) for more
information.
Planned Band
Type
C, CWDM
Default: C
wavelength.
Max. Packet
Length
1518 to 9600
Default: 9600
The Max. Packet Length parameter
sets and queries the maximum packet
length supported by a board and is
applicable to the boards supporting
Ethernet services.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
327
SD Trigger
Condition
None, B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None
The SD Trigger Condition parameter
sets the relevant alarms of certain optical
interfaces or channels of a board as SD
switching trigger conditions of the
protection group in which this OTU
board resides.
See D.31 SD Trigger Condition
information.
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
Determines whether to process GCC1
and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the
processing is not required, set this
parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it
to Disabled.
NOTE
This parameter is valid only when the client
side accesses OTN services.
PRBS Test
Status
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
The PRBS Test Status parameter sets
the pseudo-random binary sequence
(PRBS) test status of a board.
See D.29 PRBS Test Status (WDM
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
Determines whether to enable the
special frame test before deployment.
When this parameter is set to Enabled,
the board sends the test frame where the
payload consists of only 0. This
parameter is used in the deployment
commissioning.

13.6.10 LDM Specifications
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
328
Bo
ard
Client-Side
Fixed
Optical
Module
Client-Side
Pluggable Optical
Module
WDM-Side
Fixed Optical
Module
WDM-Side
Pluggable Optical
Module
TN
12L
DM
N/A I-16-2 km
S-16.1-15 km
L-16.1-40 km
L-16.2-80 km
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.5 km
1000 BASE-LX-10 km
1000 BASE-LX-40 km
1000 BASE-ZX-80 km
(eSFP CWDM)-40 km
(eSFP CWDM)-80 km
(eSFP DWDM)-120 km
N/A 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate
(eSFP CWDM)-80 km
(eSFP DWDM)-120
km

NOTE
point.
NOTE
I-16 module, S-16.1 module, L-16.1 module and L-16.2 module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48,
FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, and DVB-ASI signals.
Only the S-16.1-15km optical module supports FE services, and it can only connect to a 100BASE-LX10 optical
module.
Table 13-52 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (SDH services)
Optical
Module
Type
I-16-2 km S-16.1-15
km
L-16.1-40
km
L-16.2-80
km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Optical
source type
- MLM SLM SLM SLM
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
329
Optical
Module
Type
I-16-2 km S-16.1-15
km
L-16.1-40
km
L-16.2-80
km
Target
transmission
distance
- 2 km (1.2 mi.) 15 km (9.3
mi.)
40 km (24.9
mi.)
80 km (49.7
mi.)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -3 0 3 3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -10 -5 -2 -2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm N/A 1 1 1
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB N/A 30 30 30
Eye pattern
mask
- G.957-compliant
G.959.1-compliant
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN APD APD
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1270 to 1580 1270 to 1580 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -18 -18 -27 -28
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
330
Optical
Module
Type
I-16-2 km S-16.1-15
km
L-16.1-40
km
L-16.2-80
km
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm -3 0 -9 -9
Maximum
reflectance
dB -27 -27 -27 -27

NOTE
The 2.125 Gbit/s multirate module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, and FE signals.
NOTE
The 1000 BASE-LX-10 km module, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km module, or 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km module can be
used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE and DVB-ASI signals.
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.
5 km
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Target
transmission
distance
- 0.5 km (0.3
mi.)
10 km (6.2
mi.)
40 km (24.9
mi.)
80 km (49.7
mi.)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -2.5 -3 0 5
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -9.5 -9 -5 -2
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
331
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.
5 km
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 9 9 9 9
Eye pattern
mask
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN PIN PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -17 -20 -20 -23
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm 0 -3 -3 -3

NOTE
The 1.25 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1,
FE, DVB-ASI signals.
NOTE
The 2.67 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE,
STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals.
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km
(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Target transmission
distance
- 40 km (24.9 mi.) 80 km (49.7 mi.)
range
nm 1471 to 1611 1471 to 1611
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
332
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km
(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 5 5
power
dBm 0 0
Central wavelength
deviation
nm 6.5 6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 1.0 1.0
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30 30
G.959.1-compliant
range
nm 1270 to 1620 1270 to 1620
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm -3 -9

NOTE
The 2.67 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP DWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE,
Table 13-55 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (DWDM colored wavelengths)
Optical Module Type 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120
km
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
333
km
Target transmission
distance
- 120 km (74.6 mi.)
Center frequency deviation GHz 12.5
power
dBm 4
power
dBm 0
width
nm 1
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30
Eye pattern mask - G.957-compliant (a 5% margin is required for
the eye pattern of STM-16 services and
equivalent OTU1 services)
G.959.1-compliant (a 5% margin is required
for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and
Receiver type - APD
range
nm N/A

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
334
(eSFP CWDM)-80 km
Target transmission distance - 80 km (49.7 mi.)
power
dBm 5
power
dBm 0
Central wavelength
deviation
nm 6.5
width
nm 1
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30
Receiver type - APD

Table 13-57 DWDM-side pluggable optical module specifications (fixed wavelengths)
(eSFP DWDM)-120 km
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
335
(eSFP DWDM)-120 km
power
dBm 3
power
dBm 0
Center frequency deviation nm 12.5
width
nm 1
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30
Eye pattern mask - G.957-compliant (5% margin
are required for the eye pattern
of STM-16 services and
Receiver type - APD
Operating wavelength range nm N/A

(8.7 in.)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
336
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F)
TN12LDM 22.6 24.8

13.7 LDMD
LDMD: 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board, dual fed and
selective receiving
Only one functional version of the LDMD board is available, that is, TN11.
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
1LD
MD
Y Y N N Y Y

13.7.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LDMD converts between signals at the rate of 100
Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations, and dually
feeds and selectively receives signals on the WDM side.
For the position of the LDMD board in the WDM system, see Figure 13-28.
Figure 13-28 Position of the LDMD board in the WDM system
100Mbit/s~2.5Gbit/s
LDMD
1
O
D
U
1
1
O
T
U
1
LDMD
1
O
T
U
1
1
O
D
U
1
100Mbit/s~2.5Gbit/s
RX1
MUX/
DMUX
MUX/
DMUX
MUX/
DMUX
MUX/
DMUX
TX1
RX2
TX2
RX1
TX1
RX2
TX2
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
IN1
OUT1
OUT2
IN2
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
337

NOTE
The LDMD board can receive and transmit only one client service at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s
(OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, and HD-SDI) using its RX1/TX1 port pair.
The LDMD board is mainly used to achieve tunable wavelength, and to provide OTN interfaces
and ESC.
Table 13-58 Functions and features of the LDMD board
Function
and Feature
Description
Basic
function
LDMD converts signals: 2 x (100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s) <-> 1 x OTU1
Implements the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side.
Client-side
service type
OTN
function
the ITU-T G.709.
WDM
specification
Supports ITU-T G.694.1-compliant DWDM specifications.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
338
Function
and Feature
Description
Tunable
wavelength
function
PRBS test
function
NOTE
is FE or GE.
FEC
encoding
Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the client
side, only when the client side service type is OTU1.
Supports forward error correction (FEC) on the WDM side that complies with
ITU-T G.709.
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
failures.
power of the laser.
ALS
function
type is FE or GE.
Optical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Electrical-
layer ASON
Not supported
Protection
scheme
Ethernet
service
mapping
mode
Outloop Supported
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
339
Function
and Feature
Description
Outloop Supported
Protocols or
standards
compliance
Protocols or
standards for
transparent
transmission
(non-
performance
monitoring)
IEEE 802.3u
IEEE 802.3z
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network
(SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic
(FC-PI)
SW-3)
(FC-SB-2)
Control (MAC)
Protocol (PHY)
Dependent (PDM)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
340
Function
and Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards for
service
processing
(performance
monitoring)
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1

The LDMD board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
Figure 13-29 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LDMD board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
341
Figure 13-29 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDMD board
Client side
WDM side
RX1
RX2
TX1
TX2
Service
encapsulation
and mapping
module
Signal processing
module
OTN
processing
module
O/E
E/O
E/O
O/E
Client-side
optical
module
WDM-side
optical
module
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
Splitter

Signal Flow
The client side of the LDMD board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate
In the signal flow of the LDMD board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LDMD to the WDM side
of the LDMD, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
signals.
wavelengths OTU1 optical signals. An optical splitter converts the OTU1 optical signals
into two channels of identical optical signals, and then the two channels signals are output
through the OUT1-OUT2 optical interfaces.
l Receive direction
DWDM standard wavelengths OTU1 optical signals from the WDM side through the IN1-
IN2 optical interfaces. Then, the module performs O/E conversion.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
342
FEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs two channels of
Any signals.
optical interfaces.
Module Function
processing module.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
343
13.7.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LDMD board.
Figure 13-30 shows the front panel of the LDMD board.
Figure 13-30 Front panel of the LDMD board
LDMD
LDMD
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
O
U
T
1
I
N
1
O
U
T
2
I
N
2
T
X
1
R
X
1
T
X
2
R
X
2

Indicators
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
344
Interfaces
Table 13-59 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LDMD board
multiplexer board.
multiplexer board.

Laser Hazard Level
13.7.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one LDMD board.
Table 13-60 shows the valid slots for the LDMD board.
Table 13-60 Valid slots for the LDMD board
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
subrack
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
subrack

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
345
13.7.7 Characteristic Code for the LDMD
The characteristic code for the LDMD board contains eight digits, respectively indicating the
Table 13-61 Characteristic code for the LDMD board
optical signal
WDM side.
optical signal
the WDM side.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11LDMD board is 92109210.
Table 13-62 Mapping between the physical ports on the LDMD board and the port numbers
IN1/OUT1 1
IN2/OUT2 2
TX1/RX1 3
TX2/RX2 4

NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
346
For the parameters of LDMD, refer to Table 13-63.
Table 13-63 LDMD Parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
Optical Interface
Name
name.
Channel Use
Status
Used, Unused
Default: Used
channel of a board.
Optical Interface
Loopback
Outloop
OC-12, OC-48, FC-100,
Default: None
NOTE
format.
Client Service
Bearer Rate (Mbit/
s)
100 to 2200
Default: 0
board.
information.
Default:
l WDM side: On
l Client side: Off
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
347
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
Default: Disabled
FEC Working
State
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
- Used to query the operating wavelength
at the WDM-side optical interface of a
board.
Band Type - Used to query the band type.
Tunable
Wavelength Range
Planned
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
l C: 1/1529.16/196.050
to 80/1560.61/192.100
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.170 to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /
board.
information.
Planned Band
Type
C, CWDM
Default: C
wavelength.
Max. Packet
Length
1518 to 9600
Default: 9600
Ethernet services.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
348
SD Trigger
Condition
None, B1_SD,
OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None
board resides.
information.
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
to Disabled.
NOTE
PRBS Test Status Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
commissioning.

13.7.10 LDMD Specifications
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
349
Bo
ard
Client-Side
Fixed Optical
Module
Client-Side
Pluggable Optical
Module
WDM-Side Fixed
Optical Module
WDM-Side
Pluggable
Optical
Module
TN
11L
DM
D
N/A I-16-2 km
S-16.1-15 km
L-16.1-40 km
L-16.2-80 km
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.5 km
1000 BASE-LX-10 km
1000 BASE-LX-40 km
1000 BASE-ZX-80 km
(eSFP CWDM)-40 km
(eSFP CWDM)-80 km
(eSFP DWDM)-120 km
12800 ps/nm-C Band-
Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
12800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
6400 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD (Four
Channels-Tunable)
N/A

NOTE
point.
NOTE
module.
Optical
Module
Type
I-16-2 km S-16.1-15
km
L-16.1-40
km
L-16.2-80
km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Optical
source type
- MLM SLM SLM SLM
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
350
Optical
Module
Type
I-16-2 km S-16.1-15
km
L-16.1-40
km
L-16.2-80
km
Target
transmission
distance
- 2 km (1.2 mi.) 15 km (9.3
mi.)
40 km (24.9
mi.)
80 km (49.7
mi.)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -3 0 3 3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -10 -5 -2 -2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm N/A 1 1 1
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB N/A 30 30 30
Eye pattern
mask
- G.957-compliant
G.959.1-compliant
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN APD APD
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1270 to 1580 1270 to 1580 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -18 -18 -27 -28
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
351
Optical
Module
Type
I-16-2 km S-16.1-15
km
L-16.1-40
km
L-16.2-80
km
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm -3 0 -9 -9
Maximum
reflectance
dB -27 -27 -27 -27

NOTE
The 2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, and FE signals.
NOTE
The 1000 BASE-LX-10 km module, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km module and 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km module can
be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE and DVB-ASI signals.
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.
5 km
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Target
transmission
distance
- 0.5 km (0.3
mi.)
10 km (6.2
mi.)
40 km (24.9
mi.)
80 km (49.7
mi.)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -2.5 -3 0 5
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -9.5 -9 -5 -2
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
352
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.
5 km
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 9 9 9 9
Eye pattern
mask
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN PIN PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -17 -20 -20 -23
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm 0 -3 -3 -3

NOTE
The 1.25 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1,
NOTE
The 2.67 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE,
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km
(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Target transmission
distance
- 40 km (24.9 mi.) 80 km (49.7 mi.)
range
nm 1471 to 1611 1471 to 1611
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
353
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km
(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 5 5
power
dBm 0 0
Central wavelength
deviation
nm 6.5 6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 1.0 1.0
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30 30
G.959.1-compliant
range
nm 1270 to 1620 1270 to 1620
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm -3 -9

NOTE
The 2.67 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP DWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE,
km
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
354
km
Target transmission
distance
- 120 km (74.6 mi.)
power
dBm 4
power
dBm 0
width
nm 1
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30
Receiver type - APD
range
nm N/A

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
355
Optical Module
Type
12800 ps/nm-
C Band-Fixed
Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
12800 ps/nm-
C Band-
Tunable
Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
6400 ps/nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
(Four
Channels-
Tunable)
Line code format - NRZ NRZ NRZ
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm -4 0 0
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm -8 -5 -5
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB 10 10 8.2
Center frequency
deviation
GHz 10
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 0.2 0.2 0.5
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35 35 35
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 12800 12800 6400
Receiver type - APD APD APD
range
nm 1200 to 1650 1300 to 1575
Receiver sensitivity dBm -28 -28 -28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm -9 -9 -9
Maximum reflectance dB -27 -27 -27

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
356
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F)
TN11LDMD 26.9 29.6

13.8 LDMS
LDMS: 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board, single fed and
single receiving
Only one functional version of the LDMS board is available, that is, TN11.
Huawei office.
Board 8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800 Chassis
TN11L
DMS
Y Y N N Y Y

13.8.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LDMS board converts between signals at the rate of
100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations.
For the position of the LDMS board in the WDM system, see Figure 13-31.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
357
Figure 13-31 Position of the LDMS board in the WDM system
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
100Mbit/s~2.5Gbit/s
LDMS
1
O
D
U
1
1
O
T
U
1
LDMS
1
O
T
U
1
1
O
D
U
1
100Mbit/s~2.5Gbit/s
RX1
RX2
OUT
TX2
RX1
TX1
RX2
TX2
TX1
IN
IN
OUT

NOTE
The LDMS board can receive and transmit only one client service at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s
The LDMS board is mainly used to achieve tunable wavelength, and to provide OTN interfaces
and ESC.
Table 13-69 Functions and features of the LDMS board
Function
and Feature
Description
Basic
function
LDMS converts signals: 2 x (100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s) <-> 1 x OTU1
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
358
Function
and Feature
Description
Client-side
service type
OTN
function
the ITU-T G.709.
l Supports PM, and TCM functions for ODU1.
WDM
specification
Tunable
wavelength
function
ESC
function
Supported
PRBS test
function
NOTE
is FE or GE.
FEC
encoding
Supports forward error correction (FEC) on the WDM side that complies with
ITU-T G.709.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
359
Function
and Feature
Description
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
failures.
power of the laser.
ALS
function
type is FE or GE.
Optical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Electrical-
layer ASON
Not supported
Protection
scheme
Ethernet
service
mapping
mode
Outloop Supported
Outloop Supported
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
360
Function
and Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards
compliance
Protocols or
standards for
transparent
transmission
(non-
performance
monitoring)
IEEE 802.3u
IEEE 802.3z
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
(FC-PI)
SW-3)
(FC-SB-2)
Control (MAC)
Protocol (PHY)
Dependent (PDM)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
361
Function
and Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards for
service
processing
(performance
monitoring)
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1

The LDMS board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
Figure 13-32 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LDMS board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
362
Figure 13-32 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDMS board
Client side
WDM side
OUT
IN
RX1
RX2
TX1
TX2
Service
encapsulation
and mapping
module
Signal processing
module
OTN
processing
module
O/E
E/O
E/O
O/E
Client-side
optical
module
WDM-side
optical
module
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)

Signal Flow
The client side of the LDMS board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate
In the signal flow of the LDMS board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LDMS to the WDM side
of the LDMS, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
signals.
wavelengths OTU1 optical signals through the OUT optical interface.
l Receive direction
DWDM standard wavelengths OTU1 optical signals from the WDM side through the IN
optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
363
module performs operations such as OTU1 framing, decoding of FEC, demapping, and
decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs two channels of Any signals.
optical interfaces.
Module Function
processing module.
13.8.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LDMS board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
364
Figure 13-33 shows the front panel of the LDMS board.
Figure 13-33 Front panel of the LDMS board
LDMS
LDMS
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
T
X
1
R
X
1
T
X
2
R
X
2
O
U
T
I
N

Indicators
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
365
Interfaces
Table 13-70 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LDMS board
multiplexer board.
multiplexer board.

Laser Hazard Level
13.8.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one LDMS board.
Table 13-71 shows the valid slots for the LDMS board.
Table 13-71 Valid slots for the LDMS board
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
subrack
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
subrack

13.8.7 Characteristic Code for the LDMS
Code for OTUs.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
366
Table 13-72 Mapping between the physical ports on the LDMS board and the port numbers
IN1/OUT1 1
TX1/RX1 3
TX2/RX2 4

NOTE
For the parameters of LDMS, refer to Table 13-73.
Table 13-73 LDMS Parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
Optical Interface
Name
name.
Default: Used
channel of a board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
367
Optical Interface
Loopback
Outloop
OC-12, OC-48, FC-100,
Default: None
NOTE
format.
Client Service
Bearer Rate (Mbit/
s)
100 to 2200
Default: 0
board.
information.
Default:
l WDM side: On
l Client side: Off
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
Default: Disabled
FEC Working
State
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
368
Tunable
Wavelength Range
Planned
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
l C: 1/1529.16/196.050
to 80/1560.61/192.100
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.170 to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /
board.
information.
Planned Band
Type
C, CWDM
Default: C
wavelength.
Max. Packet
Length
1518 to 9600
Default: 9600
Ethernet services.
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
to Disabled.
NOTE
SD Trigger
Condition
None, B1_SD,
OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None
board resides.
information.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
369
Default: Disabled
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
commissioning.

13.8.10 LDMS Specifications
Bo
ard
Client-Side
Fixed Optical
Module
Client-Side
Pluggable Optical
Module
WDM-Side Fixed
Optical Module
WDM-Side
Pluggable
Optical
Module
TN
11L
DM
S
N/A I-16-2 km
S-16.1-15 km
L-16.1-40 km
L-16.2-80 km
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.5 km
1000 BASE-LX-10 km
1000 BASE-LX-40 km
1000 BASE-ZX-80 km
(eSFP CWDM)-40 km
(eSFP CWDM)-80 km
(eSFP DWDM)-120 km
12800 ps/nm-C Band-
Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
12800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
6400 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD (Four
Channels-Tunable)
N/A

NOTE
point.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
370
NOTE
module.
Optical
Module
Type
I-16-2 km S-16.1-15
km
L-16.1-40
km
L-16.2-80
km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Optical
source type
- MLM SLM SLM SLM
Target
transmission
distance
- 2 km (1.2 mi.) 15 km (9.3
mi.)
40 km (24.9
mi.)
80 km (49.7
mi.)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -3 0 3 3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -10 -5 -2 -2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm N/A 1 1 1
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB N/A 30 30 30
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
371
Optical
Module
Type
I-16-2 km S-16.1-15
km
L-16.1-40
km
L-16.2-80
km
Eye pattern
mask
- G.957-compliant
G.959.1-compliant
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN APD APD
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1270 to 1580 1270 to 1580 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -18 -18 -27 -28
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm -3 0 -9 -9
Maximum
reflectance
dB -27 -27 -27 -27

NOTE
NOTE
be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE and DVB-ASI signals.
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.
5 km
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Target
transmission
distance
- 0.5 km (0.3
mi.)
10 km (6.2
mi.)
40 km (24.9
mi.)
80 km (49.7
mi.)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
372
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.
5 km
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -2.5 -3 0 5
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -9.5 -9 -5 -2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 9 9 9 9
Eye pattern
mask
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN PIN PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -17 -20 -20 -23
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm 0 -3 -3 -3

NOTE
NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
373
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km
(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Target transmission
distance
- 40 km (24.9 mi.) 80 km (49.7 mi.)
range
nm 1471 to 1611 1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 5 5
power
dBm 0 0
Central wavelength
deviation
nm 6.5 6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 1.0 1.0
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30 30
G.959.1-compliant
range
nm 1270 to 1620 1270 to 1620
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm -3 -9

NOTE
The 2.67 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP DWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE,
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
374
km
Target transmission
distance
- 120 km (74.6 mi.)
power
dBm 4
power
dBm 0
width
nm 1
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30
Receiver type - APD
range
nm N/A

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
375
Table 13-78 WDM-side fixed optical module specificaitons
Optical Module
Type
12800 ps/nm-
C Band-Fixed
Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
12800 ps/nm-
C Band-
Tunable
Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
6400 ps/nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
(Four
Channels-
Tunable)
Line code format - NRZ NRZ NRZ
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm -1 3 3
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm -5 -2 -2
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB 10 10 8.2
Center frequency
deviation
GHz 10
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 0.2 0.2 0.5
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35 35 35
Receiver type - APD APD APD
range
nm 1200 to 1650 1300 to 1575
Receiver sensitivity dBm -28 -28 -28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm -9 -9 -9
Maximum reflectance dB -27 -27 -27

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
376
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F)
TN11LDMS 26.9 29.6

13.9 LDX
LDX: 2 x 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion unit
Only one functional version of the LDX board is available, that is, TN12.
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
2LD
X
Y Y Y Y Y Y

Variants
The TN12LDX board has only one variant: TN12LDX01.
13.9.2 Application
The LDX board is an optical transponder unit that converts two channels of 10 Gbit/s service
signals into OTU2 or OTU2e signals and performs conversion between the 10 Gbit/s service
signals and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations.
For the position of the LDX board in the WDM system, see Figure 13-34.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
377
Figure 13-34 Position of the LDX board in the WDM system
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
10GE LAN/
10GE WAN/
STM-64/
OC-192/
OTU2/
OTU2e
10GE LAN/
10GE WAN/
STM-64/
OC-192/
OTU2/
OTU2e
LDX
2
O
D
U
2
/
O
D
U
2
e
2
O
T
U
2
/
O
T
U
2
e
LDX
2
O
T
U
2
/
O
T
U
2
e
2
O
D
U
2
/
O
D
U
2
e
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
RX1
TX1
RX2
TX2
OUT1
OUT2
IN1
IN2
IN1
OUT1
IN2
OUT2

The LDX board provides OTN interfaces and electrical supervisory channels (ESCs).
Table 13-79 Functions and features of the LDX board
Function
and
Feature
Description
Basic
function
LDX converts signals as follows:
l 2 x 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2 <-> 2 x OTU2
l 2 x 10GE LAN/OTU2e <-> 2 x OTU2e
Client-side
service type
10GE LAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 10.31 Gbit/s
10GE WAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 9.95 Gbit/s
OTU2e: OTN service at a rate of 11.1 Gbit/s
OTN
function
l Provides the OTU2/OTU2e interface on the WDM side.
the ITU-T G.709.
l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU2.
WDM
specification
Tunable
wavelength
function
of: 80 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 50 GHz.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
378
Function
and
Feature
Description
ESC
function
Supported
PRBS test
function
NOTE
is STM-64/OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e.
LPT
function
The board supports the LPT function only when the client-side service type
is 10GE LAN.
FEC
encoding
l Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the
client side, only when the client side service type is OTU2/OTU2e.
l Supports forward error correction (FEC) on the WDM side that complies
with ITU-T G.709.
l Supports ITU-T G.975.1-compliant AFEC-2 on the WDM side.
NOTE
Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interconnect with each other.
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Bursty mode) to help locate line failures.
power of the laser.
l Supports the remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services (10GE
LAN).
Regeneratio
n board
TN12ND2, TN52ND2, TN53ND2, TN55NO2, TN53NQ2, TN54NQ2
ALS
function
Test frame Not supported
Optical-
layer ASON
Supported
Electrical-
layer ASON
Not supported
Protection
scheme
Ethernet
service
mapping
mode
Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), MAC Transparent Mapping(10.7G)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
379
Function
and
Feature
Description
Outloop Supported
Outloop Supported
Protocols or
standards
compliance
Protocols or
standards for
transparent
transmission
(non-
performance
monitoring)
IEEE 802.3ae
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
Protocols or
standards for
service
processing
(performance
monitoring)
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1

The LDX board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
Figure 13-35 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LDX board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
380
Figure 13-35 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDX board
OUT2 RX2
TX2 IN2
Client-side
optical
10GE LAN
encapsulation and
mapping module
SDH/SONET
encapsulation and
mapping module
Client-side OTN
processing module
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
OTN
processing
module
O/E
E/O
1
0
10GE LAN
encapsulation and
mapping module
SDH/SONET
encapsulation and
mapping module
Client-side OTN
processing module
OTN
processing
module
Client side
RX1
TX1
WDM side
OUT1
IN1
E/O
O/E
O/E
O/E
E/O
E/O
module
WDM-side
optical
module

Signal Flow
The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the LDX board. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LDX to the WDM side
of the LDX. The receive direction is defined as the direction from the WDM side of the LDX
to the client side of the LDX.
The RX1/TX1 and RX2/TX2 ports independently process signals. The RX1/TX1 port
corresponds to the OUT1/IN1 port, and the RX2/TX2 port corresponds to the OUT2/IN2 port.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
381
The client-side optical module receives two channel of the optical signals from client
equipment through the RX1/RX2 optical interface and performs O/E conversion.
After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. OTU2/
OTU2e signals are sent to the client-side OTN processing module for performance
monitoring. Other types of signals are sent to different encapsulation and mapping modules
for encapsulation and mapping. In the end, operations such as the OTN framing and FEC/
AFEC encoding processing are performed. Finally, the module outputs two channels of
OTU2 /OTU2e electrical signals.
The OTU2/OTU2e signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After E/O conversion,
the module transmits OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply
with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT1 and OUT2 optical interfaces.
l Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives two channel of OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at
DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN1 and IN2 optical
After O/E conversion, the OTU2/OTU2e signals are sent to the signal processing module.
The module performs operations such as OTU2/OTU2e framing, decoding of FEC/AFEC,
demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs two channels of
OC-192, STM-64, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, or OTU2/OTU2e electrical signals.
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of OC-192, STM-64, 10GE LAN,
10GE WAN, or OTU2/OTU2e electrical signals, and then outputs client-side optical signals
through the TX1 and TX2 optical interfaces.
Module Function
Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OC-192/STM-64/10GE LAN/10GE
WAN/OTU2/OTU2e optical signals.
Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to
OC-192/STM-64/10GE LAN/10GE WAN/OTU2/OTU2e optical signals.
WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU2/OTU2e optical signals.
OTU2/OTU2e optical signals.
The module consists of the SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, 10GE LAN
encapsulation and mapping module, client-side OTN processing module, and OTN
processing module.
SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
382
Encapsulates one channel of SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the OTU2
payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/SONET
10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module
Encapsulates one channel of 10GE LAN signals and maps the signals into the OTU2/
OTU2e payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the 10GE
LAN performance monitoring function.
Client-side OTN processing module
Implements the OTN performance monitoring function.
Frames OTU2/OTU2e signals, processes overheads in OTU2/OTU2e signals, and
performs the FEC/AFEC encoding and decoding.
13.9.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LDX board.
Figure 13-36 shows the front panel of the LDX board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
383
Figure 13-36 Front panel of the LDX board

Indicators
Interfaces
Table 13-80 describes the type and function of each interface.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
384
Table 13-80 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LDX board
IN1-IN2 LC Receives a wavelength from the optical demultiplexing
unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit.
OUT1-OUT2 LC Transmits a wavelength to the optical multiplexing unit
or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit.
TX1-TX2 LC Transmits service signals to the client-side equipment.
RX1-RX2 LC Receives service signals from the client-side
equipment.

Laser Hazard Level
13.9.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one LDX board.
Table 13-81 shows the valid slots for the LDX board.
Table 13-81 Valid slots for the LDX board
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68
OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack IU1-IU18
OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack IU1-IU18

13.9.7 Characteristic Code for the LDX
The board characteristic code provides information about signal frequency, optical module type,
wavelength, and so on.
Code for OTUs.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
385
Table 13-82 Mapping between the physical ports on the LDX board and the port numbers
IN1/OUT1 1
IN2/OUT2 3
RX1/TX1 5
RX2/TX2 6

NOTE
For the parameters of the LDX, refer to Table 13-83.
Table 13-83 LDX Parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
Optical Interface
Name
are supported.
Default: Used
a board.
Optical Interface
Loopback
Outloop
Default: Non-
Loopback
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
386
Service Type None, 10GE LAN,
10GE WAN,FC-1200,
OC-192, OTU-2,
OTU-2e, STM-64
Default: 10GE LAN
The Service Type parameter sets the type
of the service accessed at the optical
Port Mapping Bit Transparent
Mapping(11.1G),
MAC Transparent
Mapping(10.7G)
Default: Bit
Transparent Mapping
(11.1G)
The Port Mapping parameter sets and
queries the mapping mode of a port service.
See D.28 Port Mapping (WDM
Default:
l WDM side: On
l Client side: Off
status of a board.
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
automatically shut down the laser after the
signals received by a board are lost.
Hold-off Time of
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
0s, 100ms, 200ms,
300ms, 400ms, 500ms,
600ms, 700ms, 800ms,
900ms, 1s, 1100ms,
1200ms, 1300ms,
1400ms, 1500ms,
1600ms, 1700ms,
1800ms, 1900ms, 2s
Default: 0s
Specifies the hold-off time for
automatically disabling lasers. With ALS
enabled, the hold-off time is a time period
from the point when the system detects
service interruption to the point when ALS
automatically shuts down the related lasers.
Hold-off Time of
Automatic Laser
Turn-On
0s, 100ms, 200ms,
300ms, 400ms, 500ms,
600ms, 700ms, 800ms,
900ms, 1s, 1100ms,
1200ms, 1300ms,
1400ms, 1500ms,
1600ms, 1700ms,
1800ms, 1900ms, 2s
Default: 0s
automatically enabling lasers. With ALS
service recovery to the point when ALS
automatically enables the related lasers.
Default: Disabled
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
387
FEC Working State Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
forward error correction (FEC) function for
an optical interface.
FEC Mode FEC, AFEC
Default: FEC
The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC
mode of the current optical interface.
See D.9 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for
more information.
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
- Used to query the operating wavelength at
the WDM-side optical interface of a board.
Tunable
Wavelength Range
Planned
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.10
0
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.17
0 to
18/1611.00/188.78
0
Default: /
board.
NOTE
Only support C band.
Planned Band Type C, CWDM
Default: C
wavelength.
NOTE
SD Trigger
Condition
None, B1_SD,
OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None
The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets
the relevant alarms of certain optical
protection group in which this OTU board
resides.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
388
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
Determines whether to process GCC1 and
GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing
is not required, set this parameter to
Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled.
NOTE
This parameter is valid only when the client side
accesses OTN services.
Default: Disabled
The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the
pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS)
test status of a board.
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
Determines whether to enable the special
frame test before deployment. When this
parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends
the test frame where the payload consists of
only 0. This parameter is used in the
deployment commissioning.

13.9.10 LDX Specifications
Bo
ard
Client-Side
Fixed Optical
Module
Client-Side
Pluggable Optical
Module
WDM-Side
Fixed
Optical
Module
WDM-Side
Pluggable Optical
Module
TN
12L
DX
N/A 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10
km
10 Gbit/s Multirate-40
km
km
10 Gbit/s Single Rate
-0.3 km
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd
& Even Wavelengths)-
Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
N/A 800 ps/nm-C Band
(Odd & Even
Wavelengths)-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN-XFP
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
389
NOTE
point.
NOTE
The 10 Gbit/s multi-rate 10 km module, 10 Gbit/s multi-rate 40 km, and 10 Gbit/s multi-rate 80 km module
can be used to access OC-192, STM-64, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, and OTU2/OTU2e signals.
The 10Gbit/s single rate -0.3km module can be used only to access 10GE LAN signals.
Table 13-84 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (10 Gbit/s services)
Optical
Module
Type
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80
km
10 Gbit/s
Single-
Rate-0.3 km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Optical
source type
- SLM SLM SLM MLM
Target
transmissio
n distance
- 10 km (6.2 mi.) 40 km (24.9
mi.)
80 km (49.7
mi.)
0.3 km (0.2
mi.)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565 840 to 860
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -1 2 4 -1.3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -6 -4.7 0 -7.3
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 6 8.2 9 3
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm N/A N/A N/A N/A
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
390
Optical
Module
Type
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80
km
10 Gbit/s
Single-
Rate-0.3 km
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB 30 30 30 30
Eye pattern
mask
- G.691-compliant
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN APD PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1260 to 1565 1260 to 1605 1270 to 1600 840 to 860
Receiver
sensitivity
(multirate)
dBm -11 -14 -24 -7.5
Receiver
sensitivity
(10GE
LAN)
dBm -14.4 -15.8 -24 -7.5
Minimum
receiver
overload
(10GE
LAN)
dBm 0.5 -1 -7 -1
Minimum
receiver
overload
(STM-64)
dBm -1 -1 -7 -1
Maximum
reflectance
dB -27 -27 -27 -12

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
391
Optical Module Type 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd
PIN-XFP
power
dBm 2
power
dBm -3
Minimum extinction ratio dB 9
Operating frequency range THz 192.10 to 196.05
Center frequency deviation GHz 10
width
nm 0.3
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35
Receiver type - PIN
Receiver sensitivity, EOL
(FEC on)
dBm -16
Minimum receiver overload
(FEC on)
dBm 0

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
392
Table 13-86 WDM-side pluggable optical module specifications (fixed wavelengths)
PIN-XFP
power
dBm 2
power
dBm -3
width
nm 0.3
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35
Receiver type - PIN
(FEC on)
dBm -16
(FEC on)
dBm 0

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
393
Table 13-87 WDM-side pluggable optical module specifications (tunable wavelengths)
Optical Module Type 800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
power
dBm 2
power
dBm -1
width
nm 0.3
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35
Receiver type - PIN
(FEC on)
dBm -16
(FEC on)
dBm 0

(8.7 in.)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
394
Power Consumption
Bo
ard
Consumption at 25
C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55
C (131F) (W)
LD
X
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even
Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
44.5 51.2
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP
45.5 52.2

13.10 LEM24
LEM24: 22 x GE + 2 x 10GE and 2 x OTU2 Ethernet Switch board
The available functional version of the LEM24 board is TN11.
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
1LE
M24
Y Y Y N Y Y

13.10.2 Application
The LEM24 board is an optical transponder unit.
As an OTU, the LEM24 board converts 22 channels of GE/FE services and two channels of
10GE WAN/10GE LAN services received directly on the client side, and two channels of 10GE
services cross-connected from the backplane into two channels of standard WDM wavelength
OTU2 signals. The LEM24 board also performs the reverse process. The LEM24 board supports
convergence of multiple flat-rate GE or 10GE WAN/10GE LAN services into one channel of
10GE service. Further, the board supports transparent transmission of 16 channels of GE or two
channels of 10GE WAN/10GE LAN services.
Figure 13-37 shows the application of the LEM24 board in a WDM system.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
395
Figure 13-37 Application of the TN11LEM24 board in a WDM system
RX5
RX28
LEM24
FE
GE
10GE LAN
10GE WAN
LEM24
L2 L2
10GE
FE
GE
10GE LAN
10GE WAN
10GE
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
2
X
1
0
G
E
2
O
T
U
2
2
O
D
U
2
2
O
D
U
2
2
O
T
U
2
2
X
1
0
G
E
TX5
TX28
RX5
TX5
TX28
RX28
OUT3
OUT3
OUT4
IN3
IN4
IN3
IN4
OUT4
OptiX OSN 8800: N/A
OptiX OSN 6800: From/To cross-connect board
OptiX OSN 3800: N/A
NOTE
The RX5/TX5 and RX6/TX6 optical ports are capable of processing 10GE LAN and 10GE WAN services. The
other optical ports on the board are capable of processing GE and FE services.
The LEM24 board supports electrical cross-connections, OTN interfaces, and the ESC function.
Table 13-88 and Table 13-89 list the functions and features of the LEM24 board.
NOTE
The 10GE cross-connections are supported only by OptiX OSN 6800.
Table 13-88 OTN Functions and features of the LEM24 board
Function and
Feature Description
Basic function l Converts 22 channels of GE/FE services and two channels of 10GE
WAN/10GE LAN services received directly on the client side, and two
channels of 10GE services cross-connected from the backplane into
two channels of standard WDM wavelength OTU2 signals and
performs the reverse process.
l Converges multiple flat-rate GE or 10GE services into one channel of
10GE service.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
396
Function and
Feature Description
Client-side
service type
NOTE
l The LEM24 board supports both FE/GE electrical signals and FE/GE optical
signal.
l When the LEM24 board transmits GE or FE electrical signals, to facilitate fiber
routing, you are advised to install electrical modules at the RX21/TX21 and
RX22/TX22 ports.
Cross-connect
capabilities
OptiX OSN 8800: N/A.
OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the cross-connection of two channels of 10GE
electrical signals between the LEM24 board and the cross-connect board.
OTN function l Provides OTU2 interfaces on the WDM side.
WDM
specification
LPT l Supports port-based LPT.
l Supports service-based LPT.
WDM side.
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
power of the laser.
l Supports monitoring of performance events and alarms associated with
FE, GE, 10GE WAN, and 10GE LAN services.
Regeneration
board
TN12ND2, TN52ND2, TN53ND2, TN55NO2, TN53NQ2, TN54NQ2,
TN11LSXR
IEEE 1588v2 Supported in the WDM side.
Physical clock Supported in the Client side and WDM side.
PRBS test
function
Supports the PRBS function on the WDM side
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
397
Function and
Feature Description
Optical-layer
ASON
Supported
Electrical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Protection
scheme
Loopback 10GE optical
interface
MAC Inloop Supported
Outloop Supported
PHY Inloop Supported
Outloop Supported
GE optical
interface
Outloop Not supported
GE electric
interface
Outloop Supported
FE optical
interface
FE electric
interface
Outloop Supported
WDM side
optical interface
Inloop Supported
Outloop Supported

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
398
Table 13-89 Data features of the LEM24 board
Function
and Feature
Description
Interface
characteristi
cs
Port working
mode
10GE optical port: 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN
GE optical port: 1000MFULL, auto-negotiation
GE electrical port: auto-negotiation
FE optical port: 100MFULL
FE electrical port: 10MHALF, 10MFULL, 100MHALF,
100MFULL, auto-negotiation
MTU Supports a maximum of 9600 bytes frames.
Multicast VLAN
multicast
Supported
IGMP
snooping V2
Supported
Layer 2
switching
Supports IEEE802.1Q, IEEE802.1ad, and IEEE 802.1D.
Supports one VB.
Supports MAC address learning and aging.
Supports STP/RSTP and MSTP.
Supports 32k MAC addresses.
Ethernet
service
EPL
EVPL(VLAN)
EVPL(QinQ)
EPLAN(IEEE 802.1D)
EVPLAN(IEEE 802.1Q)
EVPLAN(IEEE 802.1ad)
NOTE
"EVPL (VLAN)" is displayed as "EPL" on the NMS.
Protection
schemes
VLAN
SNCP
Supported
DBPS Supported
ERPS Supported
LAG l Supports the IEEE802.3ad-compliant LAG protocol
running at IP and trunk ports.
l Supports manual and static LAGs.
l Supports load-sharing and non-load-sharing LAGs.
Maintenance
features
ETH-OAM Supports ETH OAM protocols defined by IEEE802.1ag and
IEEE802.3ah.
RMON Supported
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
399
Function
and Feature
Description
QoS Supports committed access rate (CAR) and class of service (CoS).
Supports IEEE802.1p.
Supports DSCP.
Flow control Supports IEEE802.3X-compliant Ethernet flow control protocol and flow
control termination.
Protocols or
standards
compliance
Protocols or
standards for
transparent
transmission
(non-
performance
monitoring)
IEEE 802.1q VLAN
All L2 protocols including xSTP, LACP, EthOAM, DHCP,
PPP, etc.
MPLS protocols
All L3 protocols including ARP, IGMP, OSPF, IGRP etc.
Protocols or
standards for
service
processing
(performanc
e
monitoring)
IEEE 802.3ad LACP
IEEE 802.1q VLAN
IEEE 802.1ag OAM
IEEE 802.3ah OAM
IEEE IGMP
STP, RSTP, MSTP
R-APS

The LEM24 board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, L2
switching module, OTN processing module, 1588v2 module, control and communication
module, and power supply module.
Figure 13-38 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LEM24 board in the OptiX
OSN 8800.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
400
Figure 13-38 Functional modules and signal flow of the LEM24 board

RX5
RX6
RX28
TX28
TX5
TX6
Power supply
module
Fuse
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
OTN processing
module
E/O
O/E
O/E
E/O
10GE
10GE
OUT3
OUT4
IN4
IN3
WDM side
Client
side
Client-side
optical
module
WDM-side
optical
module
SCC
Required voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
L2 switching
module
1588v2 module
10GE

NOTE
The 10GE cross-connections are supported only by OptiX OSN 6800.
Signal Flow
The backplane supports cross-connection of only 10GE signals from/to the LEM24 board.
The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the LEM24 board. The
transmit direction is the direction from the client side of the LEM24 to the WDM side of the
LEM24. The receive direction is from the WDM side of the LEM24 to the client side of the
LEM24.
The RX5 to RX28 optical interfaces on the client side receive optical signals from client
equipment and perform O/E conversion.
After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the L2 switching module. The module
performs operations, such as convergence. After convergence, the module outputs a
maximum of two channels of 10GE signals to the OTN processing module.
The OTN processing module then encapsulates and maps the two channels of 10GE signals
into OTN frames, performs FEC for the OTN frames, and then outputs two channels of
OTU2 signals compliant with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT3 and OUT4 optical ports.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
401
l Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives two channels of OTU2 optical signals at DWDM
standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN3-IN4 optical
interfaces. After receiving the signals, the module performs O/E conversion.
After O/E conversion, the OTU2 signals are sent to the OTN processing module. The
module performs operations such as OTU2 framing, decoding of FEC. After performing
the operation, the module sends out two channels of 10GE signals to the L2 switching
module for service cross-connection.
The L2 switching module deconverges the 10GE signals and sends 24 channels of the
signals with corresponding rates to the client-side optical module.
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the 24 channels of electrical
signals, and then outputs 24 channels of client-side optical signals through the TX5-TX28
optical interfaces.
NOTE
The RX5/TX5 and RX6/TX6 optical ports can process 10GE LAN and 10GE WAN services. The other optical
ports on the board can process GE and FE services.
The LEM24 board processes clock signals in two directions.
l Receives clock signals from a service board and sends the clock signals to the clock
processing board through the communication module.
l Receives clock signals from the clock processing module and sends the clock signals to the
downstream NE through a service board.
NOTE
10GE WAN and 10GE LAN signals are processed differently. Each 10GE WAN signal contains an SDH header,
which is stripped off before the signal enters the Layer 2 module.
Module Function
Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of the FE/GE/10GE LAN/10GE WAN
signals.
Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion of the FE/GE/10GE LAN/10GE
WAN signals.
Learns, forwards or deletes MAC addresses.
Maps and demaps Ethernet packets.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
402
l OTN processing module
Frames OTU2 signals, processes overheads in OTU2 signals, and performs FEC encoding
and decoding.
l 1588v2 module
The 1588v2 module can send the clock signal of the STG board to the next NE according
to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol, or extract the clock signal from the service signals that come
from a service board according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol and then send the clock signal
to the STG board.
13.10.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LEM24 board.
Figure 13-39 shows the front panel of the LEM24 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
403
Figure 13-39 Front panel of the LEM24 board

Indicators
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
404
Interfaces
Table 13-90 describes the type and function of each interface.
Table 13-90 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LEM24 board
RX5-RX28
a
LC Receive service signals from client equipment.
TX5-TX28
a
LC Transmit service signals to client equipment.
multiplexer board.
multiplexer board.
a: The RX5/TX5 and RX6/TX6 optical ports are 10GE optical ports that can process 10GE
LAN and 10GE WAN services. The other optical ports on the board are GE optical ports that
can process GE and FE services.

Laser Hazard Level
13.10.6 Valid Slots
Two slots house one TN11LEM24 board.
Table 13-91 shows the valid slots for the TN11LEM24 board.
Table 13-91 Valid slots for the LEM24 board
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
subrack
IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17, IU19-IU25, IU27-IU33, IU35-IU41,
IU45-IU51, IU53-IU59, IU61-IU67
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
subrack
IU1-IU7, IU12-IU18, IU20-IU26, IU29-IU35
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
subrack
IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
405
The rear connector of the LEM24 board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot of the
two occupied slots in the subrack. The slot number of the LEM24 board displayed on the NM
is the number of the left slot.
For example, if you install the LEM24 board in slots IU1 and IU2, the slot number of the LEM24
board displayed on the NM is IU1.
13.10.7 Characteristic Code for the LEM24
For detailed descriptions of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.2 Characteristic
Code for OTUs.
This section describes how the physical interfaces of the board are displayed on the NMS and
the logical ports of the board.
Table 13-92 Mapping between the physical ports on the LEM24 board and the port numbers
IN3/OUT3 3
IN4/OUT4 4
TX5/RX5 5
TX6/RX6 6
TX7/RX7 7
TX8/RX8 8
TX9/RX9 9
TX10/RX10 10
TX11/RX11 11
TX12/RX12 12
TX13/RX13 13
TX14/RX14 14
TX15/RX15 15
TX16/RX16 16
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
406
TX17/RX17 17
TX18/RX18 18
TX19/RX19 19
TX20/RX20 20
TX21/RX21 21
TX22/RX22 22
TX23/RX23 23
TX24/RX24 24
TX25/RX25 25
TX26/RX26 26
TX27/RX27 27
TX28/RX28 28

NOTE
Logical Ports
board. They also can be used as source or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ODU2LP is
a logical port of the board.
Figure 13-40 shows the application model of the LEM24 board. Table 13-93 describes the
Figure 13-40 Port diagram of the LEM24 board
3(IN3/OUT3)-1
VCTRUNK1
101(AP1/AP1)-1
VCTRUNK2
102(AP2/AP2)-1
WDM side
optical
module
L2 switching
module
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
Cross-connect
module
PORT5
PORT6
PORT28
71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1
4(IN4/OUT4)-1
VCTRUNK3
VCTRUNK4
103(AP3/AP3)-1
104(AP4/AP4)-1
Backplane
Service
processing
module
Service processing
module

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
407
Table 13-93 Definition of NM port of the LEM24 board
Port Name Definition
PORT5 - PORT28 Respectively corresponds to the client-side optical
interfaces: RX5/TX5 - RX28/TX28.
VCTRUNK1 - VCTRUNK4 Internal virtual ports.
AP1 - AP4 Internal convergence ports.
ClientLP1 - ClientLP2 Internal logical ports. The optical paths are numbered 1
ODU2LP1 - ODU2LP2 Internal logical ports.
IN3/OUT3 - IN4/OUT4 Corresponds to the WDM-side optical interfaces.

If the LEM24 board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the
U2000:
l During creation of the Ethernet services on the U2000, create cross-connections between
the PORT and VCTRUNK ports. After the cross-connections between the PORT and
VCTRUNK ports are created, the L2 switching module can perform cross-connections
between the PORT and VCTRUNK ports, or converge optical signals received by the client-
side optical modules into two channels of 10GE electrical signals.
NOTE
l One VCTRUNK port can be connected to multiple PORT ports.
l The maximum bandwidth of each VCTRUNK port is 10 Gbit/s.
l One-to-one port connections are between the VCTRUNK ports and the AP ports of the
cross-connect module. You are not required to set one-to-one port connections on the
U2000.
l Create a cross-connection between the AP port of the LEM24 board and the AP port of
other boards, as shown in Figure 13-41.
NOTE
Only the OptiX OSN 6800 supports this operation.
l The AP port connects to the ClientLP ports, the ClientLP port connects to the ODU2LP
port, and the ODU2LP port connects to the IN/OUT port. There is no need for configuration
of these connections on the U2000.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
408
Figure 13-41 Cross-connection diagram of the LEM24 board
Client
side
WDM
side
WDM
side
Other board
LEM24
103(AP3/AP3)-1
104(AP4/AP4)-1
103(AP3/AP3)-1
104(AP4/AP4)-1
Client
side
Other board TN11LEM24 / TN11LEX4

This section lists the LEM24 board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS.
Parameters for WDM Interfaces
Table 13-94 Parameters for WDM Interfaces
Optical Interface/Channel - Displays the position of the
optical interface.
Optical Interface Name - Sets and queries the optical
interface name.
An optical interface name
contains a maximum of 64
characters. Any characters
are supported.
Default: Used
The Channel Use Status
parameter sets the occupancy
status of the current channel
of a board.
See D.4 Channel Use Status
information.
Optical Interface
Loopback
Outloop
Specifies the loopback mode
for the optical interface on a
board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
409
Default:
l WDM side: On
l Client side: Off
The Laser Status parameter
sets the laser status of a
board.
See D.15 Laser Status
information.
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
The Automatic Laser
Shutdown parameter
determines whether to
automatically shut down the
laser after the signals
received by a board are lost.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
410
ALS Auxiliary Condition FW_Defect,
BW_Client_R_LOS,
BW_WDM_Defect,
FW_OPUk_CSF
Default: FW_Defect
Specifies auxiliary
conditions for triggering
ALS.
l If a fault occurs on the
client-side receiver of the
upstream board or the
WDM-side receiver of the
local board, the laser on
the client-side transmitter
of the local board must be
shut down. For this
situation, set this
parameter to FW_Defect.
client-side receiver of the
of the local board must be
shut down. For this
situation, set this
parameter to
BW_Client_R_LOS.
WDM-side receiver of the
of the upstream board
must be shut down. For
this situation, set this
parameter to
BW_WDM_Defect.
l If an OPUk_CSF alarm is
detected on the WDM-
side port of the local
board, the laser on the
client-side transmitter of
the local board must be
shut down. For this
situation, set this
parameter to
FW_OPUk_CSF.
LPT Enabled Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
Determines whether to
enable the link pass-through
(LPT) function.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
411
FEC Working State Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
enable or disable the forward
error correction (FEC)
function for an optical
interface.
See D.10 FEC Working
State (WDM Interface) for
more information.
FEC Mode FEC
Default: FEC
The FEC Mode parameter
sets the FEC mode of the
current optical interface.
See D.9 FEC Mode (WDM
Interface) for more
information.
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
- Used to query the operating
wavelength at the WDM-side
Actual Band Type - Used to query the band type.
Tunable Wavelength
Range
- Displays the tunable
wavelength range supported
by the WDM-side optical
Planned Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to
80/1560.61/192.100
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.170 to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /
The Planned Wavelength
No./Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz) parameter
sets the wavelength number,
wavelength and frequency of
the current optical interface
on the WDM side of a board.
See D.27 Planned
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz) (WDM
Interface) for more
information.
Default: C
The Planned Band Type
parameter sets the band type
of the current working
wavelength.
See D.26 Planned Band
Type (WDM Interface) for
more information.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
412
OTN Overhead
Transparent Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
process GCC1 and GCC2 in
OTN overheads. If the
processing is not required, set
this parameter to Enabled;
otherwise, set it to Disabled.
SD Trigger Condition None, B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None
The SD Trigger Condition
parameter sets the relevant
alarms of certain optical
interfaces or channels of a
board as SD switching trigger
conditions of the protection
group in which this OTU
board resides.
See D.31 SD Trigger
Condition (WDM
Interface) for more
information.
PRBS Test Status Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
The PRBS Test Status
parameter sets the pseudo-
random binary sequence
See D.29 PRBS Test Status
information.

Parameters for Ethernet interfaces
Table 13-95 TAG Attributes(Internal Port/External Port)
Port - OptiX OSN 8800: Internal
ports are VCTRUNK1 to
VCTRUNK2.
OptiX OSN 6800: Internal
VCTRUNK4.
External ports are PORT5 to
PORT28.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
413
TAG Tag Aware, Access, Hybrid
Default: Tag Aware
Indicates the type of packets
that can be processed by a
port.
Tag Aware: The port
transparently transmits the
packets with VLAN IDs
(Tag) and discards packets
without VLAN IDs (Untag).
If TAG is set to Tag Aware,
VLAN priority and Default
VLAN ID are invalid.
Access: The port labels the
default VLAN IDs to packets
without VLAN IDs (Untag)
and discards the packets that
already have VLAN IDs
(Tag).
Hybrid: The port labels the
and transparently transmits
the packets that already have
VLAN IDs (Tag).
This parameter is valid only
for UNI ports.
NOTE
This parameter is invalid for C-
Aware and S-Aware ports.
Default VLAN ID 1 to 4095
Default: 1
The Default VLAN ID
parameter specifies a default
VLAN ID for a port that
transmits untagged packets.
NOTE
when the value of TAG is
Access or Hybrid.
VLAN Priority 0 to 7
Default: 0
The VLAN Priority
parameter specifies the
priority of the default VLAN
ID of a port.
NOTE
Access or Hybrid.
Entry Detection Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
The Entry Detection
parameter determines
whether a port detects
packets by tag identifier.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
414

Table 13-96 Network Attributes (Internal Port/External Port)
VCTRUNK2.
VCTRUNK4.
PORT28.
Port Attributes UNI, NNI, C-Aware, S-
Aware
Default: UNI
A UNI port processes the
TAG attributes of the
802.1Q-compliant packets.
The port attributes include
Tag Aware, Access, and
Hybrid.
An S-Aware port does not
process the tag attributes of
the 802.1Q-compliant
packets. In this case, the port
determines that the packets
do not carry C-VLAN tags
and processes only the
packets that have S-VLAN
tags.
A C-Aware port does not
do not carry S-VLAN tags
packets that have C-VLAN
tags.
NNI is a reserved port type
and is not supported at
present.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
415
Table 13-97 Advanced attributes (Internal ports)
VCTRUNK2.
VCTRUNK4.
Broadcast Packet
Suppression
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
Indicates whether to enable
broadcast packet
suppression.
Click D.6 Enabling
Broadcast Packet
Suppression to view the
details.
Broadcast Packet
Suppression Threshold
10% to 100%, with a step of
10%
Default: 30%
If broadcast packet
suppression is enabled,
broadcast packets are
suppressed when the
bandwidth occupied by
broadcast packets exceeds
specified times (suppression
threshold) the total
bandwidth.
Click D.3 Broadcast Packet
Suppression Threshold to
view the details.

Table 13-98 Advanced Attributes (External Port)
Port - External ports are PORT5 to
PORT28.
Broadcast Packet
Suppression
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
broadcast packet
suppression.
Click D.6 Enabling
Broadcast Packet
details.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
416
Broadcast Packet
10%
Default: 30%
If broadcast packet
suppressed when the
bandwidth.
view the details.
Loop Detection Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
Sets whether to enable loop
detection, which is used to
check whether a loop exists at
the port.
Loop Port Shutdown Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
Sets whether to enable
shutdown of a loop port,
which is used to set blocking
for a loop port.
Threshold of Port
Receiving Rates (Mbps)
PORT5 to PORT6:
l 0 to 10000
l Default: 10000
PORT7 to PORT28:
l 0 to 1000
l Default: 1000
Indicates the rate threshold
for an external port to receive
traffic.
Port Rates Time Slice (m) 0 to 30
Default: 0
Indicates the traffic rate time
window of an external port.

Table 13-99 Basic Attributes (External Port)
PORT28.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
417
Enabled/Disabled Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
When the parameter value is
set to Enabled for a port, the
port is enabled and services
are provisioned. When the
parameter value is set to
Disabled for a port, the
services on the port are not
processed. Therefore, you
must enable a port when you
configure services on the
port.
Working Mode PORT5 to PORT6:
l 10G FULL_Duplex
LAN, 10G
FULL_Duplex WAN
l Default: 10G
FULL_Duplex LAN
PORT7 to PORT28:
l 1000M FULL_Duplex,
Auto-Negotiation
l Default: Auto-
Negotiation
Indicates the working modes
of an Ethernet port. Auto-
negotiation can
automatically determine the
optimal working modes of
the connected ports. This
mode is easy to maintain and
is recommended.
NOTE
In the configuration process,
ensure that working modes of
the connected ports are
consistent; otherwise, services
are unavailable.
Maximum Frame Length 1518 to 9600
Default: 1522
Specifies the maximum
frame length supported by an
Ethernet port.
Click D.21 Maximum
Frame Length to view the
details.
Port Physical Parameters - Indicates the physical
parameters of a port.
MAC LoopBack Inloop, Outloop, Non-
Loopback
TheMAC Loopback
parameter specifies the MAC
loopback state at an Ethernet
port. With this parameter,
users can test whether
equipment runs normally by
creating a looped path at the
MAC layer and then sending
and receiving signals over the
path.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
418
PHY LoopBack Inloop, Outloop, Non-
Loopback
The PHY Loopback
parameter specifies the PHY
PHY layer and then sending
path.

Table 13-100 Flow Control (External Port)
PORT28.
Non-Autonegotiation Flow
Control Mode
Disabled, Enable Symmetric
Flow Control, Send Only,
Receive Only
Default: Disable
Specifies the flow control
mode adopted when an
Ethernet port does not work
in auto-negotiation mode.
Click D.23 Non-
Autonegotiation Flow
Control Mode to view the
details.
Control Mode
Disabled, Enable
Dissymmetric Flow Control,
Enable Symmetric Flow
Control, Enable Symmetric/
Dissymmetric Flow Control
Default: Disable
Ethernet port works in auto-
negotiation mode.
Click D.1 Autonegotiation
Flow Control Mode to view
the details.

13.10.11 LEM24 Specifications
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
419
Bo
ard
Client-Side
Fixed Optical
Module
Client-Side
Pluggable Optical
Module
WDM-Side
Fixed
Optical
Module
WDM-Side
Pluggable Optical
Module
TN
11L
EM
24
N/A 1000 BASE-SX-0.5 km
(I-850-LC)
1000 BASE-LX-10 km
(I-1310-LC)
10G BASE-SR-0.3 km
(SFP+)
10G BASE-LR-10 km
(SFP+)
(Odd & Even
Wavelengths)-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN-XFP
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
km
km
km

NOTE
point.
Optical Module
Type
1000 BASE-SX-0.5
km (I-850-LC)
1000 BASE-LX-10
km (I-1310-LC)
Optical source type - MLM SLM
Target transmission
distance
- 0.5 km (0.3 mi.) 10 km (6.2 mi.)
Operating
wavelength range
nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm -2.5 -3
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
420
Optical Module
Type
1000 BASE-SX-0.5
km (I-850-LC)
1000 BASE-LX-10
km (I-1310-LC)
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm -9.5 -9.5
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB 9 9
Eye pattern mask - IEEE802.3z compliant
Receiver type - PIN PIN
Operating
wavelength range
nm 770 to 860 1260 to 1620
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm 0 -3

NOTE
The electrical interface specifications comply with IEEE Std 802.3 when receiving 1000 BASE-T services.
Table 13-102 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (10GE services)
Optical Module
Type
10G BASE-SR-0.3
km (SFP+)
10G BASE-LR-10
km (SFP+)
Optical interface
service rate
Gbit/s 10.3125 10.3125
Target transmission
distance
- 0.3 km (0.2 mi.) 10 km (6.2 mi.)
Operating
wavelength range
nm 840 to 860 1260 to 1355
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm -1 0.5
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm -7.3 -8.2
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
421
Optical Module
Type
10G BASE-SR-0.3
km (SFP+)
10G BASE-LR-10
km (SFP+)
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB 3 3.5
Output optical power
in case of laser
shutdown
dBm -30 -30
Eye pattern mask - IEEE802.3zcompliant
Operating
wavelength range
nm 840 to 860 1260 to 1355
Receiver sensitivity dBm -11.1 (OMA) -12.6 (OMA)
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm -1 0.5
Maximum
reflectance
dB -12 -12

PIN-XFP
power
dBm 2
power
dBm -3
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
422
PIN-XFP
width
nm 0.3
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35
Receiver type - PIN
(FEC on)
dBm -16
(FEC on)
dBm 0

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
power
dBm 2
power
dBm -1
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
423
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
width
nm 0.3
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35
Receiver type - PIN
(FEC on)
dBm -16
(FEC on)
dBm 0

Table 13-105 WDM-side pluggable optical module specifications (gray light)
Optical
Module Type
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80 km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ
Optical source
type
- SLM SLM SLM
Target
transmission
distance
- 10 km (6.2 mi.) 40 km (24.9 mi.) 80 km (49.7 mi.)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565
Maximum
mean launched
power
dBm -1 2 4
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
424
Optical
Module Type
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80 km
Minimum
mean launched
power
dBm -6 -1 0
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB 6 8.2 9
Maximum -20
dB spectral
width
nm N/A N/A N/A
Minimum side
mode
suppression
ratio
dB 30 30 30
Eye pattern
mask
- G.959.1-compliant
Receiver type - PIN PIN APD
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1290 to 1565 1260 to 1605 1270 to 1600
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -11 -14 -24
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm -1 -1 -7

(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F)
TN11LEM24 81 83

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
425
13.11 LEX4
LEX4: 4 x 10GE and 2 x OTU2 Ethernet Switch Board
The available functional version of the LEX4 board is TN11.
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
1LE
X4
Y Y Y N Y N

13.11.2 Application
The LEX4 board is an optical transponder unit.
The LEX4 board converts four channels of 10GE WAN or 10GE LAN services received directly
on the client side, or two channels of 10GE services cross-connected from the backplane, into
two channels of standard WDM wavelength OTU2 signals. The LEX4 board also performs the
reverse process. The LEX4 board supports convergence of multiple flat-rate 10GE services into
one channel of 10GE service. The board also supports transparent transmission of two channels
of 10GE services.
Figure 13-42 shows the application of the LEX4 board in a WDM system.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
426
Figure 13-42 Application of the TN11LEX4 board in a WDM system
TX1
TX4
LEX4
10GE LAN
10GE WAN
LEX4
L2 L2
2
O
D
U
2
2
O
T
U
2
10GE
10GE LAN
10GE WAN
10GE
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
2
X
1
0
G
E
2
O
D
U
2
2
O
T
U
2
2
X
1
0
G
E
RX1
RX4
TX1
RX1
TX4
RX4
OUT1 IN1
OUT2
IN2
OUT2
IN2
IN1 OUT1
OptiX OSN 8800: N/A
OptiX OSN 6800: From/To cross-connect board

The LEX4 board provides electrical cross-connections, OTN interfaces, and the ESC function.
Table 13-106 and Table 13-107 list the functions and features of the LEX4 board.
NOTE
The 10GE cross-connections are only supported by the OptiX OSN 6800.
Table 13-106 OTN Functions and features of the LEX4 board
Function and
Feature Description
Basic function l Converts four channels of 10GE WAN or 10GE LAN services received
directly on the client side, or two channels of 10GE services cross-
connected from the backplane, into two channels of standard WDM
wavelength OTU2 signals and performs the reverse process.
l Converges multiple flat-rate 10GE services into one channel of 10GE
service.
Client-side
service type
Cross-connect
capabilities
OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the cross-connection of two channels of 10GE
electrical signals between the LEX4 board and the cross-connect board.
OTN function l Provides OTU2 interfaces on the WDM side.
l Supports TCM and PM functions for ODU2.
WDM
specification
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
427
Function and
Feature Description
LPT l Supports port-based LPT.
l Supports service-based LPT.
WDM side.
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
power of the laser.
l Supports monitoring of performance events and alarms associated with
FE, GE, 10GE WAN, and 10GE LAN services.
Regeneration
board
TN11LSXR
IEEE 1588v2 Supported in the WDM side.
Physical clock Supported in the Client side and WDM side.
PRBS test
function
Supports the PRBS function on the WDM side
Optical-layer
ASON
Supported
Electrical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Protection
scheme
interface
Outloop Supported
Outloop Supported
WDM side
optical interface
Inloop Supported
Outloop Supported

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
428
Table 13-107 Data features of the LEX4 board
Function
and Feature
Description
Interface
characteristi
cs
Port working
mode
10GE optical port: 10GE LAN full duplex , 10GE WAN full
duplex
Multicast VLAN
multicast
Supported
IGMP
snooping V2
Supported
Layer 2
switching
Supports IEEE802.1Q, IEEE802.1ad, and IEEE 802.1D.
Supports one VB.
Supports MAC address learning and aging.
Supports STP/RSTP and MSTP.
Supports 32k MAC addresses.
Ethernet
service
EPL
EVPL(VLAN)
EVPL(QinQ)
EPLAN(IEEE 802.1D)
EVPLAN(IEEE 802.1Q)
NOTE
Protection
schemes
VLAN
SNCP
Supported
DBPS Supported
ERPS Supported
running at IP and trunk ports.
Maintenance
features
ETH-OAM Supports ETH OAM protocols defined by IEEE802.1ag and
IEEE802.3ah.
RMON Supported
QoS Supports committed access rate (CAR) and class of service (CoS).
Supports IEEE802.1p.
Supports DSCP.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
429
Function
and Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards
compliance
Protocols or
standards for
transparent
transmission
(non-
performance
monitoring)
IEEE 802.1q VLAN
All L2 protocols including xSTP, LACP, EthOAM, DHCP,
PPP, etc.
MPLS protocols
Protocols or
standards for
service
processing
(performanc
e
monitoring)
IEEE 802.3ad LACP
IEEE 802.1q VLAN
IEEE 802.1ag OAM
IEEE 802.3ah OAM
IEEE IGMP
STP, RSTP, MSTP
R-APS

The LEX4 board consists of client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, L2 switching
module, OTN processing module, 1588v2 module, control and communication module, and a
power supply module.
Figure 13-43 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LEX4 board in the OptiX
OSN 8800.
Figure 13-44 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LEX4 board in the OptiX
OSN 6800.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
430
Figure 13-43 Functional modules and signal flow of the LEX4 board (OptiX OSN 8800)

RX1
RX2
RX4
TX4
TX1
TX2
Power supply
module
Fuse
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
OTN processing
module
E/O
O/E
O/E
E/O
10GE
10GE
OUT1
OUT2
IN2
IN1
WDM side
Client
side
Client-side
optical
module
WDM-side
optical
module
SCC
Required voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
L2 switching
module
1588v2 module

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
431
Figure 13-44 Functional modules and signal flow of the LEX4 board (OptiX OSN 6800)

RX1
RX2
RX4
TX4
TX1
TX2
Power supply
module
Fuse
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
OTN processing
module
E/O
O/E
O/E
E/O
10GE
10GE
OUT1
OUT2
IN2
IN1
WDM side
Client
side
Client-side
optical
module
WDM-side
optical
module
SCC
Required voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
L2 switching
module
10GE
1588v2 module

Signal Flow
The backplane supports cross-connection of only 10GE signals from/to the LEX4 board.
In the signal flow of the LEX4 board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LEX4 to the WDM side
of the LEX4, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
performs operations such as convergence. Then, the module outputs a maximum of two
channels of 10GE signals to the OTN processing module.
The OTN processing module then encapsulates and maps the two channels of 10GE signals
into OTN frames, performs FEC for the OTN frames, and then outputs two channels of
OTU2 signals compliant with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT1 and OUT2 optical ports.
l Receive direction
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
432
wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN1-IN2 optical interfaces. Then,
the module performs O/E conversion.
module performs operations such as OTU2 framing, decoding of FEC. Then, the module
sends out two channels of 10GE signals to the L2 switching module for service cross-
connection.
The L2 switching module deconverges the 10GE signals and sends four channels of the
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the four channels of electrical
signals, and then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX4
optical interfaces.
The LEX4 board processes clock signals in two directions.
NOTE
Module Function
Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of the 10GE LAN/10GE WAN signals.
Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion of the 10GE LAN/10GE WAN
signals.
Frames OTU2 signals, processes overheads in OTU2 signals, and performs FEC encoding
and decoding.
l 1588v2 module
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
433
to the STG board.
13.11.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LEX4 board.
Figure 13-45 shows the front panel of the LEX4 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
434
Figure 13-45 Front panel of the LEX4 board

Indicators
Interfaces
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
435
Table 13-108 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LEX4 board
multiplexer board.
multiplexer board.

Laser Hazard Level
13.11.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one TN11LEX4 board.
Table 13-109 shows the valid slots for the TN11LEX4 board.
Table 13-109 Valid slots for the LEX4 board
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
subrack
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
subrack
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
subrack
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18

13.11.7 Characteristic Code for the LEX4
Code for OTUs.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
436
Table 13-110 Mapping between the physical ports on the LEX4 board and the port numbers
IN1/OUT1 3
IN2/OUT2 4
TX1/RX1 5
TX2/RX2 6
TX3/RX3 7
TX4/RX4 8

NOTE
Logical Ports
board. They also can be used as source or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ODU2LP is
Figure 13-46 shows the application model of the LEX4 board. Table 13-111 describes the
Figure 13-46 Port diagram of the LEX4 board
VCTRUNK1
101(AP1/AP1)-1
VCTRUNK2
102(AP2/AP2)-1
WDM side
optical
module
L2 switching
module
Cross-connect
module
VCTRUNK3
VCTRUNK4
103(AP3/AP3)-1
104(AP4/AP4)-1
Backplane
Service
processing
module
Service processing
module
PORT5
PORT6
PORT8
PORT7
3(IN1/OUT1)-1
4(IN2/OUT2)-1

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
437
Table 13-111 Description of NM port of the LEX4 board
PORT5 - PORT8 These ports correspond to the client-side optical
VCTRUNK1 - VCTRUNK4 Internal virtual ports.
AP1 - AP4 Internal convergence ports.
ClientLP1 - ClientLP2 Internal logical ports. The optical paths are numbered 1
ODU2LP1 - ODU2LP2 Internal logical ports.
IN1/OUT1 - IN2/OUT2 Corresponding to the WDM-side optical interfaces.

If the LEX4 board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the
U2000:
the PORT and VCTRUNK ports. After the cross-connections between the PORT and
VCTRUNK ports are created, the L2 switching module can perform cross-connections
between the PORT and VCTRUNK ports or converge the optical signals received by the
client-side optical modules into two channels of 10GE electrical signals.
NOTE
l The maximum bandwidth of each VCTRUNK port is 10 Gbit/s.
one port connections, which need not be set on the U2000.
l Create the cross-connection between the AP port of the LEX4 board and the AP port of
other boards, as shown in Figure 13-47.
NOTE
Only the OptiX OSN 6800 supports this operation.
l The AP port connects to the ClientLP ports, the ClientLP port is connected to the ODU2LP
port, and the ODU2LP port is connected to the IN/OUT port. There is no need for
configuration on the U2000.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
438
Figure 13-47 Cross-connection diagram of the LEX4 board
Client
side
WDM
side
WDM
side
Other board
LEX4
103(AP3/AP3)-1
104(AP4/AP4)-1
103(AP3/AP3)-1
104(AP4/AP4)-1
Client
side
Other board TN11LEM24 / TN11LEX4

This section lists the LEX4 board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS.
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
Optical Interface
Name
name.
Default: Used
channel of a board.
Optical Interface
Loopback
Outloop
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
439
Default:
l WDM side: On
l Client side: Off
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
ALS Auxiliary
Condition
FW_Defect,
BW_Client_R_LOS,
BW_WDM_Defect,
FW_OPUk_CSF
Default: FW_Defect
Specifies auxiliary conditions for
triggering ALS.
l If a fault occurs on the client-side
receiver of the upstream board or the
WDM-side receiver of the local
board, the laser on the client-side
transmitter of the local board must be
shut down. For this situation, set this
receiver of the local board, the laser
on the client-side transmitter of the
local board must be shut down. For
this situation, set this parameter to
BW_Client_R_LOS.
l If a fault occurs on the WDM-side
upstream board must be shut down.
For this situation, set this parameter
to BW_WDM_Defect.
l If an OPUk_CSF alarm is detected on
the WDM-side port of the local
parameter to FW_OPUk_CSF.
Default: Disabled
Default: Enabled
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
440
FEC Mode FEC
Default: FEC
See D.9 FEC Mode (WDM Interface)
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
board.
Tunable Wavelength
Range
Planned Wavelength
No./Wavelength
(nm)/Frequency
(THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.100
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.170
to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /
board.
information.
Default: C
wavelength.
SD Trigger Condition None, B1_SD,
OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None
board resides.
information.
Default: Disabled

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
441
Parameters for Ethernet interfaces
Table 13-113 TAG Attributes (Internal Port/External Port)
VCTRUNK2.
VCTRUNK4.
PORT8.
Default: Tag Aware
port.
Tag Aware: The port
(Tag).
VLAN IDs (Tag).
for UNI ports.
NOTE
Default: 1
The Default VLAN ID
NOTE
Access or Hybrid.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
442
Default: 0
The VLAN Priority
ID of a port.
NOTE
Access or Hybrid.
Default: Enabled
The Entry Detection

VCTRUNK2.
VCTRUNK4.
PORT8.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
443
Aware
Default: UNI
A UNI port processes the
TAG attributes of the
802.1Q-compliant packets.
The port attributes include
Tag Aware, Access, and
Hybrid.
An S-Aware port does not
do not carry C-VLAN tags
packets that have S-VLAN
tags.
A C-Aware port does not
do not carry S-VLAN tags
packets that have C-VLAN
tags.
present.

Table 13-115 Advanced Attributes (Internal Port)
VCTRUNK2.
VCTRUNK4.
Broadcast Packet
Suppression
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
broadcast packet
suppression.
Click D.6 Enabling
Broadcast Packet
details.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
444
Broadcast Packet
10%
Default: 30%
If broadcast packet
suppressed when the
bandwidth.
view the details.

PORT8.
Broadcast Packet
Suppression
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
broadcast packet
suppression.
Click D.6 Enabling
Broadcast Packet
details.
Broadcast Packet
10%
Default: 30%
If broadcast packet
suppressed when the
bandwidth.
view the details.
Default: Disabled
the port.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
445
Default: Enabled
for a loop port.
Threshold of Port
PORT5 to PORT8:
l 0 to 10000
l Default: 10000
traffic.
Default: 0

PORT8.
Default: Disabled
port.
Click D.6 Enabling
Broadcast Packet
details.
l 10G FULL_Duplex
LAN, 10G
FULL_Duplex WAN
l Default: 10G
FULL_Duplex LAN
negotiation can
is recommended.
NOTE
are unavailable.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
446
Default: 1522
Ethernet port.
Click D.21 Maximum
details.
Loopback
TheMAC Loopback
path.
Loopback
The PHY Loopback
path.

PORT8.
Control Mode
Receive Only
Default: Disable
Click D.23 Non-
details.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
447
Control Mode
Disabled, Enable
Default: Disable
negotiation mode.
the details.

13.11.11 LEX4 Specifications
Bo
ard
Client-Side
Fixed Optical
Module
Client-Side
Pluggable Optical
Module
WDM-Side
Fixed
Optical
Module
WDM-Side
Pluggable Optical
Module
TN
11L
EX
4
N/A 10G BASE-SR-0.3 km
(SFP+)
10G BASE-LR-10 km
(SFP+)
(Odd & Even
Wavelengths)-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN-XFP
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
km
km
km

NOTE
point.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
448
Optical Module
Type
10G BASE-SR-0.3
km (SFP+)
10G BASE-LR-10
km (SFP+)
Optical interface
service rate
Gbit/s 10.3125 10.3125
Target transmission
distance
- 0.3 km (0.2 mi.) 10 km (6.2 mi.)
Operating
wavelength range
nm 840 to 860 1260 to 1355
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm -1 0.5
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm -7.3 -8.2
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB 3 3.5
in case of laser
shutdown
dBm -30 -30
Operating
wavelength range
nm 840 to 860 1260 to 1355
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm -1 0.5
Maximum
reflectance
dB -12 -12

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
449
PIN-XFP
power
dBm 2
power
dBm -3
width
nm 0.3
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35
Receiver type - PIN
(FEC on)
dBm -16
(FEC on)
dBm 0

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
450
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
power
dBm 2
power
dBm -1
width
nm 0.3
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35
Receiver type - PIN
(FEC on)
dBm -16
(FEC on)
dBm 0

Optical
Module Type
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80 km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
451
Optical
Module Type
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80 km
Optical source
type
- SLM SLM SLM
Target
transmission
distance
- 10 km (6.2 mi.) 40 km (24.9 mi.) 80 km (49.7 mi.)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565
Maximum
mean launched
power
dBm -1 2 4
Minimum
mean launched
power
dBm -6 -1 0
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB 6 8.2 9
Maximum -20
dB spectral
width
nm N/A N/A N/A
Minimum side
mode
suppression
ratio
dB 30 30 30
Eye pattern
mask
- G.959.1-compliant
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1290 to 1565 1260 to 1605 1270 to 1600
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -11 -14 -24
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm -1 -1 -7

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
452
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F)
TN11LEX4 64 67

13.12 LOA
LOA: 8 x Any-rate MUX OTU2 wavelength conversion board.
The available functional version of the LOA board is TN11.
Huawei office.
Boar
d
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
TN11
LOA
Y Y Y Y Y Y

13.12.2 Application Overview
The LOA board converges a maximum of 8 x Any service signals at a rate ranging from 125
Mbit/s to 4.25 Gbit/sor 1 x FC800/FC1200/FICON10G/10GE LAN/FICON8G service signals
into 1 x OTU2 optical signals, and then converts the signals into standard DWDM wavelengths
that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The LOA board also performs the reverse process.
Table 13-123 provides the application scenarios for the LOA board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
453
Table 13-123 Application scenarios for the LOA board
Applica
tion
Scenari
o
Maximum Input
Capacity (Client
Side)
Mapping
Path
Maxi
mum
Outp
ut
Capac
ity
(WD
M
Side)
Port Working
Mode
Remarks
Scenario
1
8 x FE/FDDI/GE/
STM-1/STM-4/
OC-3/OC-12/FC100/
FICON/DVB-ASI/
ESCON/SDI
Any
a
-
>ODU0-
>ODU1-
>ODU2-
>OTU2 or
Any->ODU0-
>ODU2-
>OTU2
1 x
OTU2
ODU0 non-
convergence
mode (Any-
>ODU0[-
>ODU1]-
>ODU2-
>OTU2)
-
Scenario
2
4 x HD-SDI/HD-
SDIRBR/STM16/
OC-48/FC200/
FICON Express/
OTU1
OTU1/Any
a
-
>ODU1-
>ODU2-
>OTU2
ODU1 non-
convergence
mode (OTU1/
Any->ODU1-
>ODU2-
>OTU2)
-
Scenario
3
4 x OTU1 OTU1-
>ODU1-
>ODU0-
>ODU1-
>ODU2-
>OTU2 or
OTU1-
>ODU1-
>ODU0-
>ODU2-
>OTU2
ODU1_ODU0
mode (OTU1-
>ODU1-
>ODU0[-
>ODU1]-
>ODU2-
>OTU2)
-
Scenario
4
l 2 x 3G-SDI/3G-
SDIRBR/FC400/
FICON4G
l 1 x FC800/
FICON8G
Any
a
-
>ODUflex-
>ODU2-
>OTU2
ODUflex non-
convergence
mode (Any-
>ODUflex-
>ODU2-
>OTU2)
l Any two of the RX1/TX1 to
RX8/TX8 ports receive and
transmit 3G-SDI/FC400/
FICON4G services.
l Only the RX1/TX1 port
receives and transmits
FC800/FICON8G services
Scenario
5
1 x FC800/
FICON8G/FC1200/
FICON10G/10GE
LAN
Any
a
-
>ODU2-
>OTU2
ODU2 non-
convergence
mode (Any-
>ODU2-
>OTU2)
Only the RX1/TX1 port
receives and transmits FC800/
FICON8G/FC1200/
FICON10G/10GE
LANservices.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
454
Applica
tion
Scenari
o
Maximum Input
Capacity (Client
Side)
Mapping
Path
Maxi
mum
Outp
ut
Capac
ity
(WD
M
Side)
Port Working
Mode
Remarks
a: "Any" in the table indicates the client-side service supported in the corresponding application scenario.
Two service mapping paths are supported in scenarios 1 and 3. The service mapping path is ODU0->ODU2
mapping path when the ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode parameter is set to Assign random for the IN/OUT
port while it is ODU0->ODU1->ODU2 when the parameter is set to Assign consecutive for the IN/OUT port.
In application scenario 4, the board supports only the Any->ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2 service path and ODU
Timeslot Configuration Mode must be set to Assign random for the IN/OUT port on the board.
When the LOA board receives an FC800/FICON8G service from client equipment, the board cannot receive other
types of services, because the board does not support hybrid transmission of FC800/FICON8G services and other
types of services.
In all the preceding scenarios, the LOA board supports hybrid transmission of any services except FC800/
FICON8G services. The LOA board provides a maximum of 10 Gbit/s total bandwidth.

The LOA board supports functions and features such as wavelength tunable, OTN functions,
and ESC.
Table 13-124 Functions and features of the LOA board
Function
and Feature
Description
Basic
function
LOA converts signals as follows:
l 8 x (125 Mbit/s to 1.25 Gbit/s signals) <-> 1 x OTU2
l 4 x (1.49 Gbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s signals)<-> 1 x OTU2
l 4 x OTU1 <-> 1 x OTU2
l 2 x 3G-SDI/3G-SDIRBR/FC400/FICON4G <-> 1 x OTU2
l 1 x FC800/FC1200/FICON10G/10GE LAN/FICON8G <-> 1 x OTU2
Supports hybrid transmission of signals at a rate of 4.25 Gibt/s or lower, but
does not support hybrid transmission of FC800/FICON8G signals. The total
rate of signals received at the client side cannot exceed 10 Gbit/s.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
455
Function
and Feature
Description
Client-side
service type
FICON4G: SAN service at a rate of 4.25 Gbit/s
HD-SDIRBR: Bit-serial digital interface for high-definition television
systems at a rate of 1.49/1.001 Gbit/s
3G-SDI: Video service at a rate of 2.97 Gbit/s
3G-SDIRBR: Video service at a rate of 2.97/1.001 Gbit/s
NOTE
The LOA board supports both GE electrical signal and GE optical signal.
The LOA board supports access of SDI, HD-SDI, HD-SDIRBR, 3G-SDI, 3G-SDIRBR,
and DVB-ASI electrical signals. When the board is used to accept these electrical
signals, a digital video O/E converter must be used for O/E or E/O conversion and the
optical module of the converter must agree with the board optical module specifications.
The digital video O/E converter is a third-party device. Customers can purchase a digital
video O/E converter by themselves.
The FICON4G service and the FC400 service are processed identically. For the
FICON4G service, you can configure it as the FC400 service on the U2000.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
456
Function
and Feature
Description
OTN
function
the ITU-T G.709.
l Supports PM function for ODU0.
l Supports PM functions for ODUflex.
l Supports PM non-intrusive monitoring for ODUflex.
l Supports SM functions for OTU1.
WDM
specification
Tunable
wavelength
function
Supports tunable wavelength optical modules that provide for 80 wavelengths
tunable in the C band with 50 GHz channel spacing.
ESC
function
Supported
PRBS test
function
NOTE
The PRBS function on the client side is only supported when the client-side service type
is STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, or OTU1.
is GE/FE/10GE LAN.
FEC
encoding
l Supports forward error correction (FEC) on the client side that complies
with ITU-T G.709, only when the client side service type is OTU1.
with ITU-T G.709.
l Supports advanced forward error correction (AFEC-2) on the WDM side
that complies with ITU-T G.975.1.
NOTE
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
power of the laser.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
457
Function
and Feature
Description
Regeneratio
n board
ALS
function
type is GE or FE.
Optical-layer
ASON
Supported
Electrical-
layer ASON
Not supported
Protection
scheme
Ethernet
service
mapping
mode
Supports encapsulation of GE services in GE(GFP-T) and GE(TTT-GMP)
modes.
Supports encapsulation of 10GE LAN services in Bit Transparent Mapping
(11.1G).
Ethernet port
working
mode
l FE: 100M Full-Duplex
l GE(TTT-GMP): 1000M Full-Duplex, Auto-Negotiation
Loopback Channel
Loopback
Inloop Supported
NOTE
For FC800/FICON8G services, Inloop is not
supported only in ODUflex non-convergence
mode (Any->ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2).
Outloop
WDM side Inloop Not supported
Outloop Supported
NOTE
It is supported only in FC800/FC1200/
FICON10G/10GE LAN/FICON8G services in
ODU2 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU2-
>OTU2).
NOTE
It is not supported in FC800/FC1200/FICON10G/
10GE LAN/FICON8G services.
Outloop
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
458
Function
and Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards
compliance
Protocols or
standards for
transparent
transmission
(non-
performance
monitoring)
IEEE 802.3u
IEEE 802.3z
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FC-
PI)
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FC-SW-3)
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND
CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2)
ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the
implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial
Interface (ASI)
SMPTE 259M 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc Composite
Digital Signals - Serial Digital Interface
ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data
Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control (MAC)
Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol
(PHY)
Interface (FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent (PDM)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
459
Function
and Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards for
service
processing
(performanc
e
monitoring)
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1

13.12.4 Characteristic Code for the LOA
Code for OTUs.
13.12.5 Physical Ports Displayed on NMS
This section describes the physical ports displayed on the NMS.
Table 13-125 Mapping between the physical ports on the LOA board and the port numbers
IN/OUT 1
TX1/RX1 3
TX2/RX2 4
TX3/RX3 5
TX4/RX4 6
TX5/RX5 7
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
460
TX6/RX6 8
TX7/RX7 9
TX8/RX8 10

NOTE
13.12.6 LOA Scenario 1: ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any-
>ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2)
13.12.6.1 Application
The LOA board converges a maximum of eight channels of service at a rate ranging from 125
Mbit/s to 1.25 Gbit/s into 1 x OTU2 optical signals, and then converts the signals into standard
DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The LOA board also performs the
reverse process. Figure 13-48 shows the details.
Figure 13-48 Application of the LOA board in ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0[-
>ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2)
1xOTU2
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
1xOTU2
TX1
RX8
LOA
8
O
D
U
0
8
O
D
U
0
FE/FDDI/GE/STM-1/
STM-4/OC-3/OC-12/
FC100/FICON/DVB-
ASI/ESCON/SDI 8
O
D
U
0
4
O
D
U
1
1
O
T
U
2
FE/FDDI/GE/STM-1/
STM-4/OC-3/OC-12/
FC100/FICON/DVB-
ASI/ESCON/SDI 8
O
D
U
0
1
O
D
U
2
LOA
8
O
D
U
0
8
O
D
U
0
8
O
D
U
0
4
O
D
U
1
1
O
T
U
2
8
O
D
U
0
1
O
D
U
2
RX1
TX8
TX1
RX1
TX8
RX8
OUT IN
OUT
IN

NOTE
In the figure, the ODU1 procedure is optional in the service mapping path, When ODU Timeslot
Configuration Mode is set to Assign random, the service mapping path is Any->ODU0->ODU2->OTU2.
When the parameter is set to Assign consecutive, the service mapping path is Any->ODU0->ODU1-
>ODU2->OTU2.
13.12.6.2 Logical Ports
board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, 201
(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 is a logical port of the board.
When the LOA board works in ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]-
>ODU2->OTU2), two port models are available. The mapping paths for the two port models
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
461
vary according to the ODU timeslot configuration mode. Figure 13-49 shows the port diagram
when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign random. Figure 13-50 shows the port
diagram when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign consecutive.
Figure 13-49 Port diagram 1 of the LOA board in the ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0->ODU2->OTU2)
OCH:1 ODU2:1
IN/OUT
WDM Side
ODU0:1
ODU0:2
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1 to 8)
4(RX2/TX2)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
Client Side
10(RX8/TX8)-1
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1/
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 to
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
ODU0:8

Figure 13-50 Port diagram 2 of the LOA board in the ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1-
>ODU2->OTU2)
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1 to 4)-ODU0:(1 to 2)
ODU0:1
ODU0:2
207(ClientLP7/
ClientLP7)-1
207(ClientLP7/
ClientLP7)-2
OCH:1 ODU2:1 IN/OUT
201(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1)-1
201(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1)-2
4(RX2/TX2)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
Client Side
10(RX8/TX8)-1
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 to
202(ClientLP2/
ClientLP2)-1
202(ClientLP2/
ClientLP2)-2
208(ClientLP8/
ClientLP8)-1
208(ClientLP8/
ClientLP8)-2
9(RX7/TX7)-1
ODU1:1
ODU0:1
ODU0:2
ODU1:4
WDM Side
Cross-connect
module
Cross-connection that must be configured on the NMS.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
462
Service
processing
module

NOTE
When the LOA board connects to a TOM board that uses 20x(ClientLPx/ClientLPx)-2, a client-side optical
port on the LOA board must be cross-connected to 20x(ClientLPx/ClientLPx)-2 of the LOA board. In other
cases, configure cross-connections from 20x(ClientLPx/ClientLPx)-1 port of the TOM board to the client-
side ports on the LOA board.
Table 13-126 Description of NM port of the LOA board
RX1/TX1RX8/TX8 These ports correspond to the client-side optical
interfaces.
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1/2 to 208
(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1/2
Internal logical port. The paths are numbered 1
to 2.
IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODU0:(18) Indicates mapping path when the board works in
>ODU2->OTU2)
IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODU1:(1
4)ODU0:(12)
Indicates mapping path when the board works in
>ODU1->ODU2->OTU2)

13.12.6.3 Configuring Cross-Connections
l On the U2000, set the Port Working Mode to ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any-
>ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2).
l For the IN/OUT port, set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode to Assign random or
Assign consecutive. When the parameter is set to Assign random, the board supports the
Any->ODU0->ODU2->OTU2 service mapping path, as shown in Figure 13-51. When the
parameter is set to Assign consecutive, the board supports the Any->ODU0->ODU1-
>ODU2->OTU2 service mapping path, as shown in Figure 13-52.
l Specify required services types for the board.
l On the U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the internal RX/TX and
ClientLP ports. For details, see in Figure 13-51, Figure 13-52. The electrical cross-
connections between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports are fixed. The RX1/TX1 port is cross-
connected to the ClientLP1 port, the RX2/TX2 port is cross-connected to the ClientLP2
port, and so on.
l On the U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the internal ClientLP and ODU0
ports. For details, see in Figure 13-51, Figure 13-52. The electrical cross-connections
between the ClientLP and ODU0 ports are random but channel 1 on each ClientLP port is
used in the cross-connections.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
463
NOTE
If all client-side ports on the LOA board always work in ODU0 non-convergence mode with mapping path
Any->ODU0->ODU2->OTU2, and GE(TTT-GMP) services are supported on the client side of the LOA
board accordingly. users can apply the 8*GE->8*ODU0 service package to the board on the NMS. This
simultaneously sets the Port Working Mode to ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]-
>ODU2->OTU2) and the Service Type to GE(TTT-GMP) for the 8 ports.
When the LOA board connects to a TOM board that uses optical channel 2 on the ClientLP port, a client-
side optical port on the LOA board must be cross-connected to optical channel 2 on the ClientLP port of
the LOA board. In other cases, configure cross-connections from optical channel 1 on the ClientLP port
of the TOM board to the client-side ports on the LOA board.
Figure 13-51 Cross-connections of the LOA board (Any->ODU0->ODU2->OTU2)
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
7(RX5/TX5)-1
8(RX6/TX6)-1
9(RX7/TX7)-1
10(RX8/TX8)-1
IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODU0:1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
11
2
The internal cross-connection of the board,
which needs to be configured on the NMS

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
464
Figure 13-52 Cross-connections of the LOA board (Any->ODU0->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2)
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
7(RX5/TX5)-1
8(RX6/TX6)-1
9(RX7/TX7)-1
10(RX8/TX8)-1
IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODU1:1ODU0:1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
11
2

13.12.7 LOA Scenario 2: ODU1 non-convergence mode (OTU1/Any-
>ODU1->ODU2->OTU2)
The LOA board converges a maximum of four channels of service signals at a rate ranging from
1.49 Gbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s into 1 x OTU2 optical signals, and then converts the signals into
standard DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The LOA board also performs
the reverse process. Figure 13-53 shows the details.
Figure 13-53 Application of the LOA board in ODU1 non-convergence mode (OTU1/Any-
>ODU1->ODU2->OTU2)
1xOTU2
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
1xOTU2
RX1
4
LOA
8
O
D
U
0
4
O
D
U
1
1
O
T
U
2
8
O
D
U
0
1
O
D
U
2
LOA
8
O
D
U
0
4
O
D
U
1
1
O
T
U
2
8
O
D
U
0
1
O
D
U
2
HD-SDI/HD-SDIRBR/
STM16/OC-48/
FC200/FICON
Express/OTU1
HD-SDI/HD-SDIRBR/
STM16/OC-48/
FC200/FICON
Express/OTU1
TX1
RX8
TX8
RX1
TX1
RX8
TX8
4 IN
OUT
OUT
IN
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
465

NOTE
In this scenario, any four of the RX1/TX1RX8/TX8 ports can receive and transmit services.
Figure 13-54 shows the port diagrams for the LOA.
Figure 13-54 Port diagram of the LOA board (ODU1 non-convergence mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->ODU2-
>OTU2))
WDM Side Client Side
OCH:1 ODU2:1
IN/OUT
ODU1:1
ODU1:2
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4)
4(RX2/TX2)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
10(RX8/TX8)-1
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1~
ODU1:4
9(RX7/TX7)-1
207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-1 ODU1:3
Cross-connect module Service processing module
configured on the NMS.

NOTE
Table 13-127 Description of the LOA board's ports on the NMS
interfaces.
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 to 208
(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1
Internal logical port. The paths are numbered 1.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
466
IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODU1:
(14)
Indicates the mapping path when the board works in
ODU1 non-convergence mode (OTU1/Any-
>ODU1->ODU2->OTU2).

l On the U2000, set the Port Working Mode to ODU1 non-convergence mode (OTU1/
Any->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2).
l On the U2000 create electrical cross-connections between the internal ClientLP and ODU1
ports. For details, see in Figure 13-55. The cross-connections between the ClientLP
and ODU1 ports are random and at most four cross-connections between them can be used.
Figure 13-55 Cross-connections of the LOA board (OTU1/Any->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2)
Client side
WDM side
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
7(RX5/TX5)-1
8(RX6/TX6)-1
9(RX7/TX7)-1
10(RX8/TX8)-1
1
Cross-connect module Cross-connect module
which does not need to be configured on the
NMS

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
467
13.12.8 LOA Scenario 3: ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1-
>ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2)
The LOA board converges a maximum of 4 x OTU1 service signals into 1 x OTU2 optical
signals, and then converts the signals into standard DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-
T G.694.1. The LOA board also performs the reverse process. Figure 13-56 shows the details.
Figure 13-56 Application of the LOA board in ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0
[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2)
1xOTU2
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
1xOTU2
4 4
LOA
8
O
D
U
0
4
O
D
U
1
1
O
T
U
2
8
O
D
U
0
1
O
D
U
2
OTU1 OTU1
8
O
D
U
0
4
O
D
U
1
8
O
D
U
0
8
O
D
U
0
LOA
8
O
D
U
0
4
O
D
U
1
1
O
T
U
2
8
O
D
U
0
1
O
D
U
2
8
O
D
U
0
4
O
D
U
1
8
O
D
U
0
8
O
D
U
0
RX1
TX1
RX8
TX8
RX1
TX1
RX8
TX8
IN
OUT
OUT
IN

NOTE
When the LOA board works in ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0[->ODU1]-
>ODU2->OTU2), two port models are available. The mapping paths for the two port models
vary according to the ODU timeslot configuration mode. Figure 13-57 shows the port diagram
when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign random. Figure 13-58 shows the port
diagram when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign consecutive.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
468
Figure 13-57 Port diagram of the LOA board in the ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1-
>ODU0->ODU2->OTU2)
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)~
208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0(1~8)
ODU0:1
ODU0:2
208(ClientLP8
/ClientLP8)-1
OCH:1 ODU2:1 IN/OUT
201(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
Client side
10(RX8/TX8)-1
ODU0:7
ODU0:8
WDM side
202(ClientLP2/
ClientLP2)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
201(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1)-2
208(ClientLP8
/ClientLP8)-2
202(ClientLP2/
ClientLP2)-2
ODU0:3
ODU0:4

Figure 13-58 Port diagram of the LOA board in the ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1-
>ODU0->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2)
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)~
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1(1~4)-ODU0(1~2)
ODU0:1
ODU0:2
208(ClientLP8
/ClientLP8)-1
ODU2:1
ODU1:1
IN/OUT
201(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
Client side
10(RX8/TX8)-1
ODU0:1
ODU0:2
WDM side
202(ClientLP2/
ClientLP2)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
201(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1)-2
208(ClientLP8
/ClientLP8)-2
202(ClientLP2/
ClientLP2)-2
ODU0:1
ODU0:2
ODU1:2
ODU1:4
OCH:1
Cross-connect module Cross-connection that must be configured on the
NMS.
Service processing module

NOTE
In this mode, any four of the RX1/TX1RX8/TX8 ports can receive services.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
469
interfaces.
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1/2 to 208
(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1/2
Internal logical port. The paths are numbered 1
to 2.
IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODU0:(18) Indicates mapping path when the board works in
ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0-
>ODU2->OTU2).
IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODU1:(1
4)ODU0:(12)
Indicates mapping path when the board works in
ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0-
>ODU1->ODU2->OTU2).

l On the U2000, set Port Working Mode to ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0
[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2).
l For the IN/OUT port, set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode to Assign random or
Assign consecutive. When the parameter is set to Assign random, the service mapping
path is OTU1->ODU1->ODU0->ODU2->OTU2. For details, see Figure 13-59. When the
parameter is set to Assign consecutive, the service mapping path is OTU1->ODU1-
>ODU0->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2. For details, see Figure 13-60.
ports. For details, see in Figure 13-59, Figure 13-60. The cross-connections between
the ClientLP and ODU0 ports are random and at most 8 cross-connections between the
ports can be used.
NOTE
A maximum of four cross-connections between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports can be used. The 3(RX1/TX1)-1
port are cross-connected to the 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1/)-1 and 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1/)-2 ports, the 4
(RX2/TX2)-1 port are cross-connected to the 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2/)-1 and 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2/)-2
ports, and so on.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
470
Figure 13-59 Cross-connections of the LOA board (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0->ODU2->OTU2)
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
7(RX5/TX5)-1
8(RX6/TX6)-1
9(RX7/TX7)-1
10(RX8/TX8)-1
1
Client side
WDM side
NMS

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
471
Figure 13-60 Cross-connections of the LOA board (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2)
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
7(RX5/TX5)-1
8(RX6/TX6)-1
9(RX7/TX7)-1
10(RX8/TX8)-1
1
Client side
WDM side
NMS

13.12.9 LOA Scenario 4: ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any-
>ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2)
The LOA board converges a maximum of 2 x 3G-SDI/3G-SDIRBR, 2 x FC400/FICON4G, or
1 x FC800/FICON8G service signals into 1 x OTU2 optical signals, and then converts the signals
into standard DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The LOA board also
performs the reverse process. Figure 13-61 shows the details.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
472
Figure 13-61 Application of the LOA board in ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any-
3G-SDI/3G-SDIRBR/
FC400/
FICON4/FC800/
FICON8G
1xOTU2
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
1xOTU2
1
2
LOA
8
O
D
U
0
1
O
T
U
2
8
O
D
U
0
1
O
D
U
2
1
2
LOA
8
O
D
U
0
2
O
D
U
f
l
e
x
1
O
T
U
2
8
O
D
U
0
1
O
D
U
2
2
O
D
U
f
l
e
x
3G-SDI/3G-SDIRBR/
FC400/
FICON4/FC800/
FICON8G

NOTE
In this scenario, any two of the RX1/TX1 to RX8/TX8 ports receive and transmit 3G-SDI/3G-SDIRBRI/
FC400/FICON4G services, and only the RX1/TX1 port receives and transmits FC800/FICON8G services.
Figure 13-62 Port diagram of the LOA board in the ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any-
10(RX8/TX8)-1
IN/OUT
201(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
Client Side
OCH:1
ODUflex:1
ODU2:1
WDM Side
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1 to 2)
ODUflex:2
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1) to
208(ClientLP8/
ClientLP8)-1
NMS.

NOTE
l Any two of the RX1/TX1 to RX8/TX8 ports can receive 3G-SDI/FC400/FICON4G services as shown
in the figure (the RX1/TX1 ports are used as an example).
l Only the RX1/TX1 port can receive FC800/FICON8G services.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
473
interfaces.
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 to 208
Internal logical port. The paths is numbered 1.
IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODUflex:(1
2)
Indicates the mapping path when the board
works in ODUflex non-convergence mode
(Any->ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2).

l On the U2000, set the Port Working Mode to ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any-
>ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2).
NOTE
The board supports only the Any->ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2 service path and ODU Timeslot
Configuration Mode must be set to Assign random for the IN/OUT port on the board.
l U2000 Create electrical cross-connections between the internal ClientLP and ODUflex
ports. For details, see in Figure 13-63. The cross-connections between the ClientLP
and ODUflex ports are random.
NOTE
When configuring cross-connections, specify the number of ODUflex timeslots. Table 13-130 provides the
number of ODUflex timeslots required by a client service.
The cross-connections between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports are fixed. For example, the 3(RX1/TX1)-1 port
is cross-connected to the 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1/)-1, the 4(RX2/TX2)-1 port is cross-connected to the 202
(ClientLP2/ClientLP)-1 port, and son on. For the FC400/FICON4G service, only two cross-connections are
allowed between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports. For the FC800/FICON8G service, only one cross-connection
is allowed between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports.
Table 13-130 ODUflex timeslot
Client service type ODUflex Timeslot
3G-SDI 3
3G-SDIRBR 3
FC400/FICON4G 4
FC800/FICON8G 7

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
474
Figure 13-63 Cross-connections of the LOA board (Any->ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2)
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
7(RX5/TX5)-1
8(RX6/TX6)-1
9(RX7/TX7)-1
10(RX8/TX8)-1
1
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1
Client side
WDM side
NMS

13.12.10 LOA Scenario 5: ODU2 non-convergence mode (Any-
>ODU2->OTU2)
The LOA board converges 1 x FC800/FICON8G service signals into 1 x OTU2 optical signals,
and then converts the signals into standard DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.
694.1. The LOA board also performs the reverse process. Figure 13-64 shows the details.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
475
Figure 13-64 Application of the LOA board in ODU2 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU2-
>OTU2)
FC800/
FC1200/FICON
8G/FICON10G/
10GE LAN
1xOTU2
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
1xOTU2
LOA
1
O
T
U
2
8
O
D
U
0
1
O
D
U
2
LOA
1
O
T
U
2
8
O
D
U
0
1
O
D
U
2
FC800/
FC1200/FICON
8G/FICON10G/
10GE LAN
NOTE
In this scenario, only the RX1/TX1 can receive and transmit FC800/FC1200/FICON8G/FICON10G/10GE
LAN services.
When the LOA board receives an FC800/FICON8G service from client equipment, the board cannot receive
other types of services, because the board does not support hybrid transmission of FC800/FICON8G services
and other types of services.

Figure 13-65 Port diagram of the LOA board in the ODU2 non-convergence mode (Any-
>ODU2->OTU2)
IN/OUT
3(RX1/TX1)-1
Client Side
OCH:1 ODU2:1
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1
WDM Side
NMS.

NOTE
In this scenario, Olny RX1/TX1 ports can receive and transmit services.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
476
Table 13-131 Description of the LOA board's ports on the NMS
RX1/TX1 These ports correspond to the client-side optical
interfaces.
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 Internal logical port. The paths are numbered 1.
IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1 Indicates the mapping path when the board
works in ODU2 non-convergence mode (Any-
>ODU2->OTU2).

>ODU2->OTU2).
ports. For details, see in Figure 13-66
NOTE
In this scenario, Olny RX1/TX1 ports can receive and transmit services.
Figure 13-66 Cross-connections of the LOA board (Any->ODU2->OTU2)
3(RX1/TX1)-1
1
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1
The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be
configured on the NMS
The internal cross-connection of the board, which does not need
to be configured on the NMS
Client side
WDM side

The LOA board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM side optical module, signal
Figure 13-67 shows the block diagram of the functions of the LOA board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
477
Figure 13-67 Functional modules and signal flow of the LOA board
SCC
WDM side
IN
OUT
Client side
RX1
RX2
RX8
TX8
TX1
TX2
Client-side
optical
module
O/E
E/O
OTN
processing
module
WDM-side
optical
module
E/O
O/E
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
Service
encapsulation
and mapping
module

Signal flow
The LOA board can receive Any optical signals on the client side (signals at a rate ranging from
125 Mbit/s to 4.25 Gibt/s or FC800//FC1200/FICON8G/FICON10G/10GE LAN signals).
NOTE
The LOA board supports hybrid transmission of signals at a rate of 4.25 Gibt/s or lower, but does not
support hybrid transmission of FC800/FICON8G signals and low-rate signals.
The total rate of signals received at the client side cannot exceed 10 Gbit/s. For details on the signal types,
see 13.12.3 Functions and Features.
In the signal flow of the LOA board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LOA to the WDM side
of the LOA, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
The client-side optical module receives eight channels of any optical signals from client
equipment through the RX1-RX8 ports, and performs O/E conversion.
After O/E conversion, the eight channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal
processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection,
encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC/AFEC. Then,
the module outputs one channel of OTU2 signals.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
478
conversion, the module sends out OTU2 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply
with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT optical port.
l Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of OTU2 optical signals at DWDM
wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN optical port. Then, the module
performs O/E conversion.
module performs operations such as OTU2 framing, decoding of FEC/AFEC, demapping,
decapsulation processing and service cross-connection. Then, the module outputs eight
channels of any signals.
optical ports.
Module Function
Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of eight channels of any optical signals.
Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from eight channels of the internal
electrical signals to any optical signals.
The module consists of service encapsulation and mapping module and OTN processing
module.
The module encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps them into OTU2
payload. It also performs the reversion operations. The module also monitors
performance of Any signals.
Frames OTU2 signals, processes overheads in OTU2 signals, and performs the FEC/
AFEC encoding and decoding.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
479
13.12.12 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LOA board.
Figure 13-68 shows the front panel of the LOA board.
Figure 13-68 Front panel of the LOA board
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
480
NOTE
To prevent the cabinet door from squeezing fibers, IN and OUT interface can only use G.657A2 fibers.
Indicators
Interfaces
Table 13-132 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LOA board
multiplexer board.
multiplexer board.

Laser Hazard Level
13.12.13 Valid Slots
One slot houses one LOA board.
Table 13-133 shows the valid slots for the LOA board.
Table 13-133 Valid slots for the LOA board
Product Valid slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack IU1IU8, IU11IU42, IU45IU68
OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack IU1IU8, IU12IU27, IU29IU36
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
481
Product Valid slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack IU1IU8, IU11IU18
OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack IU1IU16
OptiX OSN 6800 subrack IU1IU8, IU11IU16
OptiX OSN 3800 chassis IU2IU5

For parameters of LOA, refer to Table 13-134.
Table 13-134 LOA parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
Optical Interface
Name
name.
Default: Used
channel of a board.
Optical Interface
Loopback
Outloop
Default: Non-
Loopback
Channel Loopback Non-Loopback, Inloop,
Outloop
Default: Non-
Loopback
Query or set the Channel Loopback.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
482
Service Type None, DVB-ASI,
ESCON, FC100,
FC200, FC400, FC800,
FC1200, FICON10G,
FDDI, FE, FICON,
FICON Express, SDI,
GE(TTT-GMP), GE
(GFP-T), HDSDI,
10GE LAN,
HDSDIRBR, OC-3,
OC-12, OC-48,
OTU-1, STM-1,
STM-4, STM-16, 3G-
SDI, 3GSDIRBR
Default: None
NOTE
formats. When Service Type is GE(TTT-
GMP), the encapsulation format is TTT-
GMP; when Service Type is GE(GFP-T), the
encapsulation format is GFP-T. The value GE
(TTT-GMP) is recommended.
ends must be encapsulated in the same format.
NOTE
The LOA board's ports may work in any of
five working modes and the type of the client-
side services received by the ports varies with
the working modes.
l ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any-
>ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2):
Supports FE, GE, STM-1, OC-3, STM-4,
OC-12, FC100, ESCON, FICON, FDDI,
SDI, and DVB-ASI services.
>ODU1->ODU2->OTU2): Supports HD-
SDI, HDSDIRBR, FC200, FICON
Express, OTU1, STM-16, and OC-48
services.
l ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1-
>ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2):
Supports OTU1 service.
l ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any-
>ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2): Supports
3G-SDI, 3GSDIRBR, FC400, FC800
services.
>ODU2->OTU2): Supports FC800,
FC1200, FICON10G, and 10GE
LANservice.
NOTE
The FICON4G service and the FC400 service
are processed identically. For the FICON4G
service, you can configure it as the FC400
service on the U2000.
The FICON8G service and the FC800 service
are processed identically. For the FICON8G
service, you can configure it as the FC800
service on the U2000.
Default:
l WDM side: On
l Client side: Off
status of a board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
483
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
ALS Auxiliary
Condition
FW_Defect,
BW_Client_R_LOS,
BW_WDM_Defect,
FW_OPUk_CSF
Default: FW_Defect
triggering ALS.
WDM-side receiver of the local board,
the laser on the client-side transmitter
of the local board must be shut down.
For this situation, set this parameter to
FW_Defect.
receiver of the local board, the laser on
the client-side transmitter of the local
board must be shut down. For this
situation, set this parameter to
BW_Client_R_LOS.
the client-side transmitter of the
BW_WDM_Defect.
the WDM-side port of the local board,
FW_OPUk_CSF.
Hold-off Time of
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
0s, 100ms, 200ms,
300ms, 400ms, 500ms,
600ms, 700ms, 800ms,
900ms, 1s, 1100ms,
1200ms, 1300ms,
1400ms, 1500ms,
1600ms, 1700ms,
1800ms, 1900ms, 2s
Default: 0s
service interruption to the point when
ALS automatically shuts down the related
lasers.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
484
Hold-off Time of
Automatic Laser
Turn-On
0s, 100ms, 200ms,
300ms, 400ms, 500ms,
600ms, 700ms, 800ms,
900ms, 1s, 1100ms,
1200ms, 1300ms,
1400ms, 1500ms,
1600ms, 1700ms,
1800ms, 1900ms, 2s
Default: 0s
Default: Disabled
Service Mode Client Mode, OTN
Mode
Default: Client Mode
See D.32 Service Mode (WDM
Default: Enabled
FEC Mode FEC, AFEC
Default: FEC
AFEC Grade 1, 2, 3
Default: 3
A larger value of this parameter means a
stronger error correction capability and a
longer signal transmission delay.
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
Tunable Wavelength
Range
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
485
Planned Wavelength
No./Wavelength
(nm)/Frequency
(THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.10
0
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.17
0 to
18/1611.00/188.78
0
Default: /
board.
NOTE
Default: C
wavelength.
NOTE
Max. Packet Length 1518 to 9600
Default: 9600
The Max. Packet Length parameter sets
and queries the maximum packet length
supported by a board and is applicable to
the boards supporting Ethernet services.
Ethernet Working
Mode
Auto-Negotiation,
1000M Full-Duplex
Default: 1000M Full-
Duplex
The Ethernet Working Mode parameter
sets and queries the working mode of the
Ethernet.
See D.7 Ethernet Working Mode
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the
parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to
Disabled.
NOTE
SD Trigger
Condition
None, B1_SD,
OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None
resides.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
486
Default: Disabled
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
parameter is set to Enabled, the board
sends the test frame where the payload
consists of only 0. This parameter is used
in the deployment commissioning.
ODUflex Tolerance
(ppm)
0 to 100
Default: 100
Specifies the tolerance of deviation
between the actual client-side service rate
and the specified rate when the service
type is ODUflex.
NOTE
When the LOA board receives 3G-SDI
services from client equipment, set this
parameter to 10. If the LOA board receives
other services, set it to 100.
ODU Timeslot
Configuration Mode
Assign random, Assign
consecutive
Default: Assign
random
When the ODU timeslot configuration
mode is Assign consecutive, the internal
ODU0 mapping path is: ODU0>ODU1
>ODU2. When the mode is set to Assign
random, the internal ODU0 mapping
path is: ODU0>ODU2.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
487
Port Working Mode ODU0 non-
convergence mode
(Any->ODU0[-
>ODU1]->ODU2-
>OTU2), ODU1 non-
convergence mode
(OTU1/Any->ODU1-
>ODU2->OTU2),
ODU1_ODU0 mode
(OTU1->ODU1-
>ODU0[->ODU1]-
>ODU2->OTU2),
ODUflex non-
convergence mode
(Any->ODUflex-
>ODU2->OTU2), and
ODU2 non-
convergence mode
(Any->ODU2-
>OTU2).
Default: ODU0 non-
convergence mode
(Any->ODU0[-
>ODU1]->ODU2-
>OTU2)
This parameter is used to set the working
mode of the interface on the board
according to the actual application
scenario and service mapping trail.

13.12.15 LOA Specifications
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
488
Bo
ard
Client-Side
Fixed Optical
Module
Client-Side Pluggable
Optical Module
WDM-Side
Fixed
Optical
Module
WDM-Side
Pluggable Optical
Module
TN
11L
OA
N/A I-16-2 km
S-16.1-15 km
L-16.1-40 km
L-16.2-80 km
1000 BASE-BX10-U
1000 BASE-BX10-D
1000 BASE-BX-U
1000 BASE-BX-D
2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5
km
1000 BASE-LX-10 km
1000 BASE-LX-40 km
1000 BASE-ZX-80 km
270 Mbit/s to 3 Gbit/s
multirate (Video eSFP)-10
km
4.25 Gbit/s Multirate-0.3
km
4.25 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km
1600-M5E-SN-I-0.3 km
(SFP+)
1600-SM-LC-L-10 km
(SFP+)
1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-40 km
CWDM)-80 km
DWDM)-120 km
10G BASE-SR-0.3km(SFP
+)
10G BASE-LR-10km(SFP
+)
10G BASE-LR(SFP+)
10G BASE-ER(SFP+)
(Odd & Even
Wavelengths)-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN-XFP
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable
Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN-XFP
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40 km

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
489
NOTE
point.
NOTE
I-16-2 km module, S-16.1-15 km module, L-16.1-40 km module and L-16.2-80 km module can be used to access
OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1,
OC-3, and DVB-ASI signals.
Only the S-16.1-15 km optical module supports FE services, and it can only connect to a 100BASE-LX10 optical
module.
Optical
Module
Type
I-16-2 km S-16.1-15
km
L-16.1-40
km
L-16.2-80
km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Optical
source type
- MLM SLM SLM SLM
Target
transmission
distance
- 2 km (1.2 mi.) 15 km (9.3
mi.)
40 km (24.9
mi.)
80 km (49.7
mi.)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -3 0 3 3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -10 -5 -2 -2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
490
Optical
Module
Type
I-16-2 km S-16.1-15
km
L-16.1-40
km
L-16.2-80
km
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm N/A 1 1 1
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB N/A 30 30 30
Eye pattern
mask
- G.957-compliant
G.959.1-compliant
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN APD APD
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1270 to 1580 1270 to 1580 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -18 -18 -27 -28
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm -3 0 -9 -9
Maximum
reflectance
dB -27 -27 -27 -27

NOTE
1000 BASE-BX10-U module, 1000 BASE-BX10-D module, 1000 BASE-BX-U module, and 1000 BASE-BX-
D module can be used to access GE signals.
Table 13-136 Client-side pluggable GE optical module specifications (single-fiber bidirectional
transmissions)
Optical
Module Type
1000 BASE-
BX10-U
1000 BASE-
BX10-D
1000 BASE-
BX-U
1000 BASE-
BX-D
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
491
Optical
Module Type
1000 BASE-
BX10-U
1000 BASE-
BX10-D
1000 BASE-
BX-U
1000 BASE-
BX-D
Optical source
type
- SLM SLM SLM SLM
Target
transmission
distance
km 10 10 40 40
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1260 to 1360 1480 to 1500 1260 to 1360 1480 to 1500
Maximum
mean launched
power
dBm -3 -3 3 3
Minimum
mean launched
power
dBm -9 -9 -2 -2
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB 6 6 6 6
Eye pattern
mask
- IEEE802.3ah-compliant
Receiver type - PIN PIN PIN PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1480 to 1500 1260 to 1360 1480 to 1500 1260 to 1360
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -19.5 -19.5 -23 -23
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm -3 -3 -3 -3
Maximum
reflectance
dB -12 -12 -12 -12

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
492
NOTE
2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, and
FE signals.
1000 BASE-LX-10 km module, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km module and 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km module can be used
to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FDDI, FICON, FE, and DVB-ASI signals.
When accessing 1000 BASE-T services, the specifications of the electrical interface comply with the IEEE Std
802.3.
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.
5 km
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Target
transmission
distance
- 0.5 km (0.3
mi.)
10 km (6.2
mi.)
40 km (24.9
mi.)
80 km (49.7
mi.)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -2.5 -3 0 5
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -9.5 -9 -5 -2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 9 9 9 9
Eye pattern
mask
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN PIN PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
493
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.
5 km
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -17 -20 -20 -23
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm 0 -3 -3 -3

NOTE
SDI module can be used to access SDI, HD-SDI, HD-SDIRBR, 3G-SDI, and 3G-SDIRBR signals.
Table 13-138 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (SDI services)
Optical Module Type 270 Mbit/s to 3 Gbit/s
Multirate (Video
eSFP)-10 km
Service rate Gbit/s 3
power
dBm 0
power
dBm -7
width
nm 3.0
Receiver type - PIN
Minimum receiver overload dBm 0
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
494
Multirate (Video
eSFP)-10 km

NOTE
4.25 Gbit/s Multirate-0.3 km, 4.25 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km module can be used to access FC400, and FICON4G
signals.
Table 13-139 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (FC services)
Optical Module Type 4.25 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.3 km
4.25 Gbit/s
Multirate-10 km
Target transmission
distance
- 0.3 km (0.2 mi.) 10 km (6.2 mi.)
Transmitter parameter
specifications at point S
nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm -1.1 -1
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm -9 -8.4
Eye pattern mask - Compliant with Fiber Channel-physical interface
(FC-PI-2) parameter template
range
nm 770 to 860 1260 to 1600
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm 0 0

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
495
Table 13-140 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (FC800/FICON8G services)
Optical Module
Type
1600-M5E-SN-
I-0.3 km (SFP+)
1600-SM-LC-L-10
km (SFP+)
Optical interface
service rate
Gbit/s 8.5 8.5
Target transmission
distance
- 0.3 km (0.2 mi.) 10 km (6.2 mi.)
Operating
wavelength range
nm 840 to 860 1260 to 1355
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm -1 -0.5
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm -7.3 -8.2
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB 3 3.5
Operating
wavelength range
nm 840 to 860 1260 to 1355
Receiver sensitivity dBm -11.1 -12.6
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm -1 0.5
Maximum
reflectance
dB -12 -12

NOTE
1.25 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON,
STM-1, OC-3, FDDI, FICON, FE, and DVB-ASI signals.
2.67 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100,
FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
496
Table 13-141 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (CWDM colored
wavelengths)
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km
(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Target transmission
distance
- 40 km (24.9 mi.) 80 km (49.7 mi.)
range
nm 1471 to 1611 1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 5 5
power
dBm 0 0
Central wavelength
deviation
nm 6.5 6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 1.0 1.0
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30 30
G.959.1-compliant
range
nm 1270 to 1620 1270 to 1620
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm -3 -9

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
497
NOTE
2.67 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP DWDM) module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200,
FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE
signals.
Table 13-142 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (DWDM colored
wavelengths)
km
Target transmission
distance
- 120 km (74.6 mi.)
power
dBm 4
power
dBm 0
width
nm 1
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30
Receiver type - APD
range
nm N/A
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
498
km

NOTE
10G BASE-LR(SFP+) and 10G BASE-ER(SFP+) module can be used to access 10GE LAN, FC800, FICON8G,
FC1200, and FICON10G signals.
Optical Module
Type
10G BASE-LR(SFP+) 10G BASE-ER(SFP+)
Optical source type - SLM SLM
Target transmission
distance
- 10 km (6.2 mi.) 40 km (24.9 mi.)
Operating
wavelength range
nm 1260 to 1355 1530 to 1565
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm -1 3
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm -6 -2
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB 3.5 8.2
in case of laser
shutdown
dBm -30 -30
Operating
wavelength range
nm 1260 to 1355 1260 to 1605
Receiver sensitivity dBm -14.4 -14 (11.1G)
-15.8 (10.3125G)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
499
Optical Module
Type
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm 0.5 -1
reflectance dB -12 -27

NOTE
10G BASE-SR-0.3 km (SFP+) and 10G BASE-LR-10 km (SFP+) module can be used to access FC800/
FICON8G/10GE LAN signals
Optical Module
Type
10G BASE-SR-0.3
km (SFP+)
10G BASE-LR-10
km (SFP+)
Optical interface
service rate
Gbit/s 10.3125 10.3125
Target transmission
distance
- 0.3 km (0.2 mi.) 10 km (6.2 mi.)
Operating
wavelength range
nm 840 to 860 1260 to 1355
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm -1 0.5
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm -7.3 -8.2
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB 3 3.5
in case of laser
shutdown
dBm -30 -30
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
500
Optical Module
Type
10G BASE-SR-0.3
km (SFP+)
10G BASE-LR-10
km (SFP+)
Operating
wavelength range
nm 840 to 860 1260 to 1355
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm -1 0.5
Maximum
reflectance
dB -12 -12

PIN-XFP
power
dBm 2
power
dBm -3
width
nm 0.3
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35
Receiver type - PIN
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
501
PIN-XFP
(FEC on)
dBm -16
(FEC on)
dBm 0

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
power
dBm 2
power
dBm -1
width
nm 0.3
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35
Receiver type - PIN
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
502
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
(FEC on)
dBm -16
(FEC on)
dBm 0

Optical Module
Type
km
km
Target transmission
distance
- 10 km (6.2 mi.) 40 km (24.9 mi.)
Operating
wavelength range
nm 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm -1 2
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm -6 -1
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB 6 8.2
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm N/A N/A
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30 30
Operating
wavelength range
nm 1290 to 1565 1260 to 1605
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
503
Optical Module
Type
km
km
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm -1 -1

(8.7 in.)
l Weight: 1.19 kg (2.64b.)
Power Consumption
Board WDM-Side
Optical Module
Typical Power
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at
55C (131F) (W)
TN11LOA 800 ps/nm-C Band
(Odd & Even
Wavelengths)-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN-XFP
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40 km
31.8 36
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable
Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN-XFP
32.8 37

13.13 LOG
LOG: 8 x Gigabit Ethernet unit
The available functional versions of the LOG board are TN11 and TN12.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
504
Huawei office.
Boar
d
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
TN11
LOG
Y Y N N Y Y
TN12
LOG
Y Y Y Y Y Y

Differences Between Versions
l Function:
The TN11LOG supports AFEC, and the TN12LOG supports AFEC-2. Boards that use
different FEC modes cannot interoperate with each other.
The TN12LOG supports both GE electrical signal and GE optical signal, while the
TN11LOG supports only the GE optical signal.
The TN12LOG board supports pluggable optical modules on the WDM side, whereas
the TN11LOG does not.
For details, see 13.13.3 Functions and Features.
l Specification:
For the power consumption and specification of each version, see 13.13.11 LOG
Specifications.
Substitution Relationship
Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11LOG TN12LOG The TN12LOG can be created as TN11LOG on the NMS. The
former can substitute for the latter, without any software
upgrade. After substitution, the TN12LOG functions as the
TN11LOG.
NOTE
l When both the receive and transmit boards employ FEC, the
substitution applies; when both the receive board and transmit
board employs AFEC, the substitution does not apply.
l A board equipped with a PIN receiver cannot substitute for a board
equipped with an APD receiver, because the two types of receives
support different input power ranges.
TN12LOG None -

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
505
13.13.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LOG board implements conversion between eight
channels of GE optical signals and OTU2 optical signals that comply with ITU-T
Recommendations.
For the position of the LOG board in the WDM system, see Figure 13-69.
Figure 13-69 Position of the LOG board in the WDM system
1
8
1
8
LOG
GE GE
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
LOG
1
O
D
U
2
GE
1
O
T
U
2
GE
1
O
T
U
2
1
O
D
U
2
OptiX OSN 6800 subrack: from paired slot or cross-connect board
OptiX OSN 3800 subrack: from mesh group slot
OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack: N/A

The LOG board is mainly used to achieve tunable wavelengths, and to provide OTN interfaces
and ESC.
Table 13-148 Functions and features of the LOG board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function LOG converts signals: 8 x GE <->1 x OTU2
Client-side
service type
NOTE
The TN12LOG board supports both GE electrical signal and GE optical signal.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
506
Function and
Feature
Description
Cross-connect
capabilities
OptiX OSN 8800 subrack: N/A.
OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack: N/A.
OptiX OSN 6800 subrack: Supports grooming of eight channels of GE
services each to working/protection cross-connect boards respectively
through the backplane. Supports the transmission of eight GE signals to
the paired slots through the backplane.
OptiX OSN 3800 subrack: Supports grooming of eight GE signals from
one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three
to the ITU-T G.709.
WDM
specification
Tunable
wavelength
function
Supports tunable wavelength optical modules that provide for:
l 40 wavelengths tunable in the C band with 100 GHz channel spacing
PRBS test
function
Supports the PRBS function on the WDM side.
FEC encoding TN11LOG:
l Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on
the WDM side.
l Supports ITU-T G.975.1-compliant advanced forward error
correction (AFEC) on the WDM side.
TN12LOG:
the WDM side.
NOTE
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
power of the laser.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
507
Function and
Feature
Description
Regeneration
board
l TN11LOG:
TN11LSXR
l TN12LOG:
TN12ND2, TN52ND2, TN53ND2, TN55NO2, TN53NQ2,
TN54NQ2
Optical-layer
ASON
Supported by the TN12LOG
Electrical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Protection
scheme
l Supports SW SNCP.
NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800 only supports client-side 1+1 protection, intra-board 1+1
protection and the OWSP protection.
Ethernet service
mapping mode
Supports encapsulation of GE services in GE(GFP-F) (displayed as GE
on the NMS) and GE(GFP-T) modes.
Ethernet port
working mode
GE(GFP-F): 1000M Full-Duplex, Auto-Negotiation
Outloop Supported
Outloop Supported
Protocols or
standards
compliance
Protocols or
standards for
transparent
transmission
(non-
performance
monitoring)
IEEE 802.3z
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
508
Function and
Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards for
service
processing
(performance
monitoring)
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1

The LOG board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
Figure 13-70 and Figure 13-71 show the functional modules and signal flow of the LOG board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
509
Figure 13-70 Functional modules and signal flow of the LOG board (OptiX OSN 6800/3800)
SCC
WDM side
IN
OUT
Client side
RX1
RX2
RX8
TX8
TX1
TX2
Client-side
optical
module
O/E
E/O
GE
encapsulation
and mapping
module
OTN
processing
module
GE
WDM-side
optical
module
E/O
O/E
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
Cross-
connect
module
8

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
510
Figure 13-71 Functional modules and signal flow of the LOG board (OptiX OSN 8800)
SCC
WDM side
IN
OUT
Client side
RX1
RX2
RX8
TX8
TX1
TX2
Client-side
optical
module
O/E
E/O
GE
encapsulation
and mapping
module
OTN
processing
module
WDM-side
optical
module
E/O
O/E
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse

Signal Flow
NOTE
The client-side GE optical module can be replaced with the electrical module to access the corresponding
electrical signals on the TN12LOG.
It is recommended to change RX1/TX1, RX2/TX2 optical interfaces to electrical interfaces only.
The processing of electrical signals is similar to that of optical signals. The processing of optical signals
is considered as an example.
The client side of the LOG board accesses GE optical signals.
In the signal flow of the LOG board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LOG to the WDM side
of the LOG, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
The client-side optical module receives eight channels of GE optical signals from client
encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC/AFEC. Then,
the module outputs one channel of OTU2 signals.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
511
with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT optical interface.
l Receive direction
decapsulation processing and service cross-connection. Then, the module outputs eight
channels of GE signals.
optical interfaces.
Module Function
Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of eight channels of GE optical signals.
OptiX OSN 6800: Implements the cross-connection and pass through between the
client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. And also grooms the
electrical signals between the LOG and the board in the paired slot or the cross-
connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals.
OptiX OSN 3800: Implements the cross-connection and pass through between the
electrical signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to
the other three boards belonging to the mesh group through the backplane. The
grooming service signals are GE signals.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
512
performance.
13.13.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LOG board.
Figure 13-72 shows the front panel of the LOG board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
513
Figure 13-72 Font panel of the LOG board
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
T
X
2
R
X
2
T
X
3
R
X
3
T
X
4
R
X
4
T
X
5
R
X
5
T
X
6
R
X
6
T
X
1
R
X
1
T
X
7
R
X
7
T
X
8
R
X
8
O
U
T
I
N
LOG
LOG

Indicators
Interfaces
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
514
Table 13-149 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LOG board
IN
a
LC Receive single-wavelength signals from the associated
multiplexer board.
OUT
a
LC Transmit single-wavelength signals to the associated
multiplexer board.
a: Only the G.657A2 fiber can be used in "IN" and "OUT" interface of TN12LOG.

Laser Hazard Level
13.13.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one LOG board.
Table 13-150 shows the valid slots for the TN11LOG board.
Table 13-150 Valid slots for TN11LOG board
Product Valid Slots

Table 13-151 shows the valid slots for the TN12LOG board.
Table 13-151 Valid slots for TN12LOG board
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
515
Product Valid Slots

13.13.7 Characteristic Code for the LOG
Code for OTUs.
Table 13-152 Mapping between the physical ports on the LOG board and the port numbers
IN/OUT 1
TX1/RX1 3
TX2/RX2 4
TX3/RX3 5
TX4/RX4 6
TX5/RX5 7
TX6/RX6 8
TX7/RX7 9
TX8/RX8 10

NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
516
Logical Ports
board. They also can be used as source or sinks of cross-connections. For example, LP is a logical
port of the board.
Figure 13-73 shows the application model of the LOG board. Table 13-153 describes the
Figure 13-73 Port diagram of the LOG board
10(RX8/TX8)
3(RX1/TX1)
4(RX2/TX2)
5(RX3/TX3)
6(RX4/TX4)
7(RX5/TX5)
8(RX6/TX6)
1(IN/OUT)-1
201(LP/LP)-1
WDM-side
opticalmodule
201(LP/LP)-1
Cross-connect
module
Service
processing
module
9(RX7/TX7)
201(LP/LP)-2
201(LP/LP)-4
201(LP/LP)-3
201(LP/LP)-7
201(LP/LP)-8
201(LP/LP)-6
201(LP/LP)-5

Table 13-153 Description of NM port of the LOG board
LP Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1, 2, 3,
4, 5, 6, 7 and 8.
IN/OUT These ports correspond to the WDM-side optical interfaces.

This section describes how to configure cross-connections between LOG boards and other
boards on the NMS.
If the LOG board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the
U2000:
can be created.
Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and LP ports of the LOG board
(create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown by
Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the LOG board and the LP port
of other boards, as shown by
3
in Figure 13-74. (The GE services accessed from the
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
517
client side of the LQG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for
protection and the inter-board service convergence.)
of the LOG board, as shown by
4
in Figure 13-74. (The GE services accessed from
the client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LOG board
for protection and the inter-board service convergence.)
NOTE
One optical path of the LP port can be created with a connection to only one RX/TX port.
There should be no more than eight cross-connections between the RX/TX ports of the local
board or other boards and the LP port of the local board.
l Create the cross-connection between the LP port of the LOG board and the LP port of other
boards, as shown by
5
in Figure 13-74. (The GE services accessed from the WDM side
of the LOG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other board for the grooming
of the WDM-side services.)
l The eight paths of the LP port are converged into one channel, which is connected to the
IN/OUT port. There is no need for configuration on the U2000.
NOTE
The OptiX OSN 8800 only supports the cross-connections shown by and in Figure 13-74.
Figure 13-74 Cross-connection diagram of the LOG board
Client side
WDM side
Client side
WDM side
Other board
LOG
201(LP/LP)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
201(LP/LP)-4
201(LP/LP)-3
201(LP/LP)-7
201(LP/LP)-8
201(LP/LP)-6
201(LP/LP)-5
201(LP/LP)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
201(LP/LP)-4
201(LP/LP)-3
201(LP/LP)-7
201(LP/LP)-8
201(LP/LP)-6
201(LP/LP)-5
10(TX8/RX8)-1
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
3
4
1
2
LOG board
The client side of the LOG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
2
3 4
1
5
The WDM side of the LOG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
5
TN11LQMD / TN12LQMD / TN11LQMS / TN12LQMS / TN11TBE / TN11TDG / TN11TOM /
TN11TQM / TN12TQM

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
518
For the parameters of LOG, refer to Table 13-154.
Table 13-154 LOG Parameters
Optical
Interface/
Channel
Optical Interface
Name
maximum of 64 characters. Any characters are
supported.
Channel Use
Status
Used, Unused
Default: Used
board.
Optical Interface
Loopback
Non-Loopback,
Inloop, Outloop
Default: Non-
Loopback
Service Type GE, GE(GFP-T)
Default: GE
The Service Type parameter sets the type of
the service accessed at the optical interface on
the client side.
NOTE
GE services can be encapsulated in two formats.
When Service Type is GE, the encapsulation
format is GFP-F; when Service Type is GE(GFP-
T), the encapsulation format is GFP-T. The value
The GE services at the transmit and receive ends
must be encapsulated in the same format.
Default:
l WDM side: On
l Client side: Off
status of a board.
more information.
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
determines whether to automatically shut
down the laser after the signals received by a
board are lost.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
519
ALS Auxiliary
Condition
FW_Defect,
BW_Client_R_LOS,
BW_WDM_Defect,
FW_OPUk_CSF
Default: FW_Defect
Specifies auxiliary conditions for triggering
ALS.
l If a fault occurs on the client-side receiver
of the upstream board or the WDM-side
receiver of the local board, the laser on the
client-side transmitter of the local board
must be shut down. For this situation, set
this parameter to FW_Defect.
of the local board, the laser on the client-
side transmitter of the local board must be
parameter to BW_Client_R_LOS.
l If a fault occurs on the WDM-side receiver
side transmitter of the upstream board must
be shut down. For this situation, set this
parameter to BW_WDM_Defect.
l If an OPUk_CSF alarm is detected on the
WDM-side port of the local board, the
laser on the client-side transmitter of the
local board must be shut down. For this
FW_OPUk_CSF.
NOTE
Only the TN12LOG supports this parameter.
Hold-off Time of
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
0s, 100ms, 200ms,
300ms, 400ms, 500ms,
600ms, 700ms, 800ms,
900ms, 1s, 1100ms,
1200ms, 1300ms,
1400ms, 1500ms,
1600ms, 1700ms,
1800ms, 1900ms, 2s
Default: 0s
Specifies the hold-off time for automatically
disabling lasers. With ALS enabled, the hold-
off time is a time period from the point when
the system detects service interruption to the
point when ALS automatically shuts down the
related lasers.
NOTE
Hold-off Time of
Automatic Laser
Turn-On
0s, 100ms, 200ms,
300ms, 400ms, 500ms,
600ms, 700ms, 800ms,
900ms, 1s, 1100ms,
1200ms, 1300ms,
1400ms, 1500ms,
1600ms, 1700ms,
1800ms, 1900ms, 2s
Default: 0s
enabling lasers. With ALS enabled, the hold-
the system detects service recovery to the
point when ALS automatically enables the
related lasers.
NOTE
Default: Disabled
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
520
FEC Working
State
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
optical interface.
FEC Mode FEC, AFEC
Default: FEC
The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode
of the current optical interface.
more information.
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength
(nm)/Frequency
(THz)
- Used to query the operating wavelength at the
Tunable
Wavelength
Range
supported by the WDM-side optical interface
on the board.
Planned
Wavelength No./
Wavelength
(nm)/Frequency
(THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.10
0
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.17
0 to
18/1611.00/188.78
0
Default: /
wavelength number, wavelength and
frequency of the current optical interface on
the WDM side of a board.
Planned Band
Type
C, CWDM
Default: C
Max. Packet
Length
1518 to 9600
Default: 9600
queries the maximum packet length supported
by a board and is applicable to the boards
supporting Ethernet services.
Ethernet
Working Mode
Auto-Negotiation,
1000M Full-Duplex
Duplex
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
521
SD Trigger
Condition
None, B1_SD,
OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None
conditions of the protection group in which
this OTU board resides.
Default: Disabled
pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test
status of a board.
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
NOTE
Only TN12LOG supports this parameter.

13.13.11 LOG Specifications
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
522
Bo
ard
Client-Side
Fixed
Optical
Module
Client-Side
Pluggable Optical
Module
WDM-Side Fixed
Optical Module
WDM-Side
Pluggable
Optical Module
TN
11L
OG
N/A 2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.5 km
1000 BASE-LX-10
km
1000 BASE-LX-40
km
1000 BASE-ZX-80
km
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km
(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
800 ps/nm-C Band
(odd & even
wavelengths)-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
1200 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
1200 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
4800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
ODB-APD
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
(D)RZ-PIN
N/A
TN
12L
OG
N/A 2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.5 km
1000 BASE-LX-10
km
1000 BASE-LX-40
km
1000 BASE-ZX-80
km
1000 BASE-BX10-U
1000 BASE-BX10-D
1000 BASE-BX-U
1000 BASE-BX-D
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km
(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
(D)RZ-PIN
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
800 ps/nm-C Band
(Odd & Even
Wavelengths)-
Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable
Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN-XFP
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80 km

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
523
NOTE
(D)RZ means DRZ or RZ. These two types of optical modules have the same optical performance and can be
interconnected. The availability of the two type of optical module is subject to PCNs. For PCN information,
consult with the product manager at the local representative office.
NOTE
point.
NOTE
When accessing 1000 BASE-T services, the specifications of the electrical interface comply with the IEEE
Std 802.3.
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.
5 km
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Target
transmission
distance
- 0.5 km (0.3
mi.)
10 km (6.2
mi.)
40 km (24.9
mi.)
80 km (49.7
mi.)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -2.5 -3 0 5
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -9.5 -9 -5 -2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 9 9 9 9
Eye pattern
mask
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
524
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.
5 km
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN PIN PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -17 -20 -20 -23
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm 0 -3 -3 -3

NOTE
transmissions)
Optical
Module Type
1000 BASE-
BX10-U
1000 BASE-
BX10-D
1000 BASE-
BX-U
1000 BASE-
BX-D
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Optical source
type
- SLM SLM SLM SLM
Target
transmission
distance
km 10 10 40 40
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1260 to 1360 1480 to 1500 1260 to 1360 1480 to 1500
Maximum
mean launched
power
dBm -3 -3 3 3
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
525
Optical
Module Type
1000 BASE-
BX10-U
1000 BASE-
BX10-D
1000 BASE-
BX-U
1000 BASE-
BX-D
Minimum
mean launched
power
dBm -9 -9 -2 -2
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB 6 6 6 6
Eye pattern
mask
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1480 to 1500 1260 to 1360 1480 to 1500 1260 to 1360
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -19.5 -19.5 -23 -23
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm -3 -3 -3 -3
Maximum
reflectance
dB -12 -12 -12 -12

wavelengths)
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km
(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Target transmission
distance
- 40 km (24.9 mi.) 80 km (49.7 mi.)
range
nm 1471 to 1611 1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 5 5
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
526
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km
(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
power
dBm 0 0
Central wavelength
deviation
nm 6.5 6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 1.0 1.0
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30 30
G.959.1-compliant
range
nm 1270 to 1620 1270 to 1620
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm -3 -9

Optical Module Type 800 ps/nm-C Band
(odd & even
wavelengths)-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
527
(odd & even
wavelengths)-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
power
dBm 2 2
power
dBm -3 -3
Minimum extinction ratio dB 10 10
Center frequency THz 192.10 to 196.05 192.10 to 196.05
Center frequency deviation GHz 10 5
width
nm 0.3 0.3
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35 35
(FEC on)
dBm -16 -16
Minimum receiver overload dBm 0 0

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
528
Table 13-159 WDM-side fixed optical module specifications (tunable wavelengths)
Optical
Module Type
1200 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
NRZ-
PIN
1200 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
APD
4800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
ODB-
APD
800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Waveleng
th-DRZ-
PIN
800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Waveleng
th-NRZ-
PIN
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ ODB DRZ NRZ
Maximum
mean launched
power
dBm 2 2 2 2 2
Minimum
mean launched
power
dBm -3 -3 -3 -3 -3
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB 10 10
N/A
a
10 10
Center
frequency
THz 192.10 to 196.05
Center
frequency
deviation
GHz 5 5 5 5 5
Maximum -20
dB spectral
width
nm 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
Minimum side
mode
suppression
ratio
dB 35 35 35 35 35
Dispersion
tolerance
ps/
nm
1200 1200 4800 800 800
Receiver type - PIN APD APD PIN PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1200 to 1650
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
529
Optical
Module Type
1200 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
NRZ-
PIN
1200 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
APD
4800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
ODB-
APD
800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Waveleng
th-DRZ-
PIN
800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Waveleng
th-NRZ-
PIN
Receiver
sensitivity,
EOL (FEC on)
dBm -16 -26 -26 -16 -16
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm 0 -9 -9 0 0
Maximum
reflectance
dB -27 -27 -27 -27 -27
a: The ODB code pattern has three levels, and thus extinction ratio is not needed.

PIN-XFP
power
dBm 2
power
dBm -3
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
530
PIN-XFP
width
nm 0.3
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35
Receiver type - PIN
(FEC on)
dBm -16
(FEC on)
dBm 0

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
power
dBm 2
power
dBm -1
width
nm 0.3
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
531
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35
Receiver type - PIN
(FEC on)
dBm -16
(FEC on)
dBm 0

Optical
Module Type
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80 km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ
Optical source
type
- SLM SLM SLM
Target
transmission
distance
- 10 km (6.2 mi.) 40 km (24.9 mi.) 80 km (49.7 mi.)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565
Maximum
mean launched
power
dBm -1 2 4
Minimum
mean launched
power
dBm -6 -1 0
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
532
Optical
Module Type
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80 km
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB 6 8.2 9
Maximum -20
dB spectral
width
nm N/A N/A N/A
Minimum side
mode
suppression
ratio
dB 30 30 30
Eye pattern
mask
- G.959.1-compliant
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1290 to 1565 1260 to 1605 1270 to 1600
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -11 -14 -24
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm -1 -1 -7

(8.7 in.)
l Weight:
TN11LOG: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.)
TN12LOG: 1.1 kg (2.4 lb.)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
533
Power Consumption
Boar
d
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at
55C (131F) (W)
TN1
1LO
G
800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even
wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN
NRZ-PIN
40 45
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
43 48
Wavelength-(D)RZ-PIN
43.5 48.5
Wavelength-ODB-APD
55.0 60.5
TN1
2LO
G
Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN-XFP
10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km
37.0 41.44
38.0 42.44
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
41.61 46.6
43.04 48.0

13.14 LOM
LOM: 8-port multi-service multiplexing & optical wavelength conversion board
The available functional versions of the LOM board are TN11 and TN12.
Huawei office.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
534
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
1LO
M
Y Y N N Y Y
TN1
2LO
M
Y Y Y Y Y Y

l Function:
The TN11LOM supports AFEC, and the TN12LOM supports AFEC-2. Boards using
different FEC codes cannot interconnect with each other. For details, see 13.14.3
Functions and Features.
Only the TN12LOM supports 3G-SDI, InfiniBand 2.5G and InfiniBand 5G. For details,
l Appearance:
The TN11LOM and TN12LOM versions use different front panels. For details, see
13.14.5 Front Panel.
l Specification:
For the specification of each version, see 13.14.10 LOM Specifications.
Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11LOM TN12LOM The TN12LOM can be created as TN11LOM on the NMS. The
upgrade. After substitution, the TN12LOM functions as the
TN11LOM.
NOTE
TN12LOM None -

13.14.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LOM board multiplexes a maximum of eight channels
of GE/FC100/FICON/ISC 1G, four channels of FC200/FICON Express/ISC 2G/InfiniBand
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
535
2.5G, or two channels of 3G-SDI/FC400/FICON4G/InfiniBand 5G signals into one channel of
OTU2 signals. It also implements conversion between these signals and WDM signals that
comply with ITU-T Recommendations. The LOM board supports FC extension and ensures that
the signal width does not decrease during long-haul transmission of FC services. The LOM board
also supports hybrid transmission of the services mentioned above.
For the position of the LOM board in the WDM system, see Figure 13-75 and Figure 13-76.
Figure 13-75 Position of the TN11LOM board in the WDM system
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
LOM
1
O
D
U
2
1
O
T
U
2
LOM
1
O
T
U
2
1
O
D
U
2
GE
ISC 1G
ISC 2G
FC100
FC200
FC400
FICON
FICON4G
FICON Express
GE
ISC 1G
ISC 2G
FC100
FC200
FC400
FICON
FICON4G
FICON Express
1
8
1
8
Figure 13-76 Position of the TN12LOM board in the WDM system
GE
ISC 1G
ISC 2G
FC100
FC200
FC400
FICON
FICON4G
FICON Express
InfiniBand 2.5G
InfiniBand 5G
3G-SDI
GE
ISC 1G
ISC 2G
FC100
FC200
FC400
FICON
FICON4G
FICON Express
InfiniBand 2.5G
InfiniBand 5G
3G-SDI
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
LOM
1
O
D
U
2
1
O
T
U
2
LOM
1
O
T
U
2
1
O
D
U
2
1
8
1
8
NOTE
For ISC 1G, GE, FC100, and FICON services, the eight pairs of optical interfaces on the client side are all
available.
For FICON Express, ISC 2G, InfiniBand 2.5G and FC200 services, the client-side TX1/RX1, TX3/RX3,
TX5/RX5 and TX7/RX7 are available.
For 3G-SDI, FC400, InfiniBand 5G and FICON4G services, the client-side TX1/RX1 and TX5/RX5 are
available.
The total rate of eight channels of services at the client side cannot exceed 10 Gbit/s.
The client-side interfaces are divided into two groups: RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4 and RX5/TX5-RX8/TX8. Each
group of these optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 5 Gbit/s.
The LOM board is mainly used to achieve tunable wavelength, and to provide OTN interfaces
and ESC.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
536
Table 13-163 Functions and features of the LOM board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function LOM converts signals as follows:
l 8 x GE/FC100/FICON/ISC 1G <->1 x OTU2
l 4 x FC200/FICON Express/ISC 2G/InfiniBand 2.5G <->1 x OTU2
l 2 x 3G-SDI/FC400/FICON4G/InfiniBand 5G <->1 x OTU2
Supports hybrid transmission of the services mentioned above. The
overall bandwidth of the first and last four optical interfaces should be
equal to or less than 5 Gbit/s, respectively.
Supports FC extension and ensures that the data width does not decrease
during long-haul transmission of FC services. For FC100/FC200/FC400
services, the maximum transmission distance of the WDM side is 3000
km.
Client-side
service type
ISC 1G: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s
ISC 2G: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s
InfiniBand 2.5G: SAN service at a rate of 2.5 Gbit/s
InfiniBand 5G: SAN service at a rate of 5 Gbit/s
NOTE
The LOM board supports both GE electrical signal and GE optical signal.
Only the TN12LOM supports InfiniBand 2.5G, InfiniBand 5G and 3G-SDI.
to the ITU-T G.709.
WDM
specification
Tunable
wavelength
function
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
537
Function and
Feature
Description
PRBS test
function
LPT function The board supports the LPT function only when the client-side service
type is GE.
FEC encoding TN11LOM:
the WDM side.
TN12LOM:
the WDM side.
NOTE
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
power of the laser.
Regeneration
board
l TN11LOM:
TN11LSXR
l TN12LOM:
TN12ND2, TN52ND2, TN53ND2, TN55NO2, TN53NQ2,
TN54NQ2
Test frame The board supports the test frame function only when the client-side
service type is GE.
Optical-layer
ASON
Supported by the TN12LOM
Electrical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Protection
scheme
Ethernet service
mapping mode
Supports encapsulation of GE services in GE(GFP-F) (displayed as GE
on the NMS) and GE(GFP-T) modes.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
538
Function and
Feature
Description
Ethernet port
working mode
Outloop Supported
Outloop Supported
Protocols or
standards
compliance
Protocols or
standards for
transparent
transmission
(non-
performance
monitoring)
IEEE 802.3z
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL
INTERFACES (FC-PI)
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-
LS)
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-
BB-3)
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3
(FC-SW-3)
COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING
PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2)
IBM GDPS( Geographically Dispersed Parallel
Sysplex) Protocol
IBM Private Protocol
NOTE
Only the TN12LOM supports IBM Private Protocol.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
539
Function and
Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards for
service
processing
(performance
monitoring)
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1

The LOM board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
Figure 13-77 and Figure 13-78 show the functional modules and signal flow of the LOM board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
540
Figure 13-77 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11LOM board
SCC
WDM side
IN
OUT
Client side
RX1
RX2
RX8
TX8
TX1
TX2
GE
encapsulation and
mapping module
FC
encapsulation and
mapping module
FICON
encapsulation and
mapping module
Client-side
optical
module
O/E
E/O
WDM-side
optical
module
E/O
O/E
OTN
processing
module
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
ISC
encapsulation and
mapping module

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
541
Figure 13-78 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12LOM board
SCC
IN
CPU
OUT
RX1
RX2
RX8
TX8
TX1
GE
OTN
processing
module
FC
FICON
O/E
E/O O/E
E/O
ISC
InfiniBand
Any
Client side
WDM side
encapsulation and
mapping module
encapsulation and
mapping module
encapsulation and
mapping module
encapsulation and
mapping module
encapsulation and
mapping module
encapsulation and
mapping module
optical
module
Client-side WDM-side
optical
module
Control
Memory Communication
Required
voltage
Fuse
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
TX2

Signal Flow
NOTE
electrical signals.
Suggest change RX1/TX1, RX2/TX2 optical interfaces to electrical interfaces only.
In the signal flow of the LOM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LOM to the WDM side
of the LOM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
The client-side optical module receives eight channels or four channels or two channels of
the optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs
O/E conversion.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
542
After O/E conversion, different types of signals are sent to the corresponding encapsulation
and mapping modules. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping
processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC/AFEC. Then, the module outputs one
channel of OTU2 signals.
conversion, the module sends out OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM wavelengths
that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT optical interface.
l Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at
DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN optical interface.
module performs operations such as OTU2/OTU2e framing, decoding of FEC/AFEC,
demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs eight channels or four
channels or two channels of the electrical signals.
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the eight channels or four
channels or two channels of the electrical signals, and then outputs client-side optical
signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.
Module Function
Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of eight channels or four channels or two
channels of the optical signals.
Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from eight or four or two channels of
the internal electrical signals to the corresponding optical signals.
The module consists of the GE encapsulation and mapping module, ISC encapsulation and
mapping module, FC encapsulation and mapping module, FICON encapsulation and
mapping module, and OTN processing module.
performance.
ISC encapsulation and mapping module
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
543
Encapsulates multiple channels of ISC signals and maps the signals into the OTU2
payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors ISC
performance.
FC encapsulation and mapping module
Encapsulates multiple channels of FC signals and maps the signals into the OTU2e
payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors FC
performance.
FICON encapsulation and mapping module
Encapsulates multiple channels of FICON signals and maps the signals into the OTU2
payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors FICON
performance.
InfiniBand encapsulation and mapping module
Encapsulates multiple channels of InfiniBand signals and maps the signals into the
OTU2e payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors
InfiniBand performance.
Any encapsulation and mapping module
payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors Any
performance.
performs FEC/AFEC encoding and decoding.
13.14.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LOM board.
Figure 13-79 and Figure 13-80 show the front panel of the LOM board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
544
Figure 13-79 Front panel of the TN11LOM board
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
LOM
LOM
R
X
2
T
X
3
R
X
3
T
X
4
R
X
4
T
X
1
R
X
1
T
X
2
T
X
5
R
X
5
T
X
6
R
X
6
T
X
7
R
X
7
T
X
8
R
X
8
O
U
T
I
N
LINK/ACT1
LINK/ACT2
LINK/ACT3
LINK/ACT4
LINK/ACT5
LINK/ACT6
LINK/ACT7
LINK/ACT8

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
545
Figure 13-80 Front panel of the TN12LOM board
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
LOM
LOM
R
X
2
T
X
3
R
X
3
T
X
4
R
X
4
T
X
1
R
X
1
T
X
2
T
X
5
R
X
5
T
X
6
R
X
6
T
X
7
R
X
7
T
X
8
R
X
8
O
U
T
I
N

Indicators
Twelve indicators are present on the front panel:
l Data port connection/data transceiver indicator (LINK/ACTn) - green
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
546
NOTE
Only the TN11LOM board has the data port connection/data transceiver indicator (LINK/ACTn).
Interfaces
Table 13-164 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LOM board
IN
a
LC Receive single-wavelength signals from the associated
multiplexer board.
OUT
a
LC Transmit single-wavelength signals to the associated
multiplexer board.
Transmits the optical service signal to the client-side
equipment when the optical module is used.
Transmits the electrical service signal to the client-side
equipment when the electrical module is used.
Receives the optical service signal from the client-side
Receives the electrical service signal from the client-
side equipment when the electrical module is used.
a: Only the G.657A2 fiber can be used in "IN" and "OUT" interface of TN12LOM.

Laser Hazard Level
13.14.6 Valid Slots
Two slots house one TN11LOM board. One slot houses one TN12LOM board.
Table 13-165 and Table 13-166 show the valid slots for the LOM board.
Table 13-165 Valid slots for the TN11LOM board
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17, IU19-IU25, IU27-
IU33, IU35-IU41, IU45-IU51, IU53-IU59,
IU61-IU67
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
547
Product Valid Slots
IU35
NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800/OptiX OSN 6800: The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along
the left slot of the two occupied slots in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN11LOM board
displayed on the NM is the number of the left slot. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN11LOM
board, the slot number of the TN11LOM board displayed on the NM is IU1.
OptiX OSN 3800: The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the bottom slot of
the two occupied slots in the chassis. Therefore, the slot number of the TN11LOM board displayed on the
NM is the number of the bottom slot. For example, if slots IU2 and IU3 house the TN11LOM board, the
slot number of the TN11LOM board displayed on the NM is IU3.

Table 13-166 Valid slots for TN12LOM board
Product Valid Slots

13.14.7 Characteristic Code for the LOM
Code for OTUs.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
548
Table 13-167 Mapping between the physical ports on the LOM board and the port numbers
IN/OUT 1
TX1/RX1 3
TX2/RX2 4
TX3/RX3 5
TX4/RX4 6
TX5/RX5 7
TX6/RX6 8
TX7/RX7 9
TX8/RX8 10

NOTE
l The LOM board maps a client service into an STM-64 signal and then multiplexes the
STM-64 signal into an OTU2. The STM-64 signal contains eight timeslots, each having a
bandwidth of 1.24 Gbit/s. Different client service requires different number of timeslots.
The number of timeslots required by each type of client service is listed below.
Service Type Number of Timeslots
GE 1
FC100 1
FC200 2
FC400 4
FICON 1
FICON4G 4
FICON Express 2
ISC 1G 1
ISC 2G 2
3G-SDI 4
InfiniBand 2.5G 2
InfiniBand 5G 4
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
549

For the parameters of LOM, refer to Table 13-168.
Table 13-168 LOM Parameters
Optical
Interface/
Channel
Optical Interface
Name
supported.
Channel Use
Status
Used, Unused
Default: Used
board.
Optical Interface
Loopback
Non-Loopback,
Inloop, Outloop
Default: Non-
Loopback
Service Type l TN11LOM: None,
FC-100, FC-200,
FC-400, FICON,
FICON Express,
FICON4G, GE, GE
(GFP-T), ISC 1G,
ISC 2G
l TN12LOM: None,
Any, FC-100,
FC-200, FC-400,
FICON, FICON
Express,
FICON4G, GE, GE
(GFP-T), ISC 1G,
ISC 2G, InfiniBand
2.5G, InfiniBand
5G, 3G-SDI
Default: None
the client side.
NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
550
Client Service
Bearer Rate
(Mbit/s)
270 to 5000
Default: 622
optical interface on the client side of a board.
NOTE
This parameter is supported only by the
TN12LOM.
See D.5 Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s)
Default:
l WDM side: On
l Client side: Off
status of a board.
more information.
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
board are lost.
ALS Auxiliary
Condition
FW_Defect,
BW_Client_R_LOS,
BW_WDM_Defect,
FW_OPUk_CSF
Default: FW_Defect
ALS.
WDM-side port of the local board, the laser
on the client-side transmitter of the local
FW_OPUk_CSF.
NOTE
Only the TN12LOM supports this parameter.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
551
Hold-off Time of
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
0s, 100ms, 200ms,
300ms, 400ms, 500ms,
600ms, 700ms, 800ms,
900ms, 1s, 1100ms,
1200ms, 1300ms,
1400ms, 1500ms,
1600ms, 1700ms,
1800ms, 1900ms, 2s
Default: 0s
related lasers.
NOTE
Hold-off Time of
Automatic Laser
Turn-On
0s, 100ms, 200ms,
300ms, 400ms, 500ms,
600ms, 700ms, 800ms,
900ms, 1s, 1100ms,
1200ms, 1300ms,
1400ms, 1500ms,
1600ms, 1700ms,
1800ms, 1900ms, 2s
Default: 0s
related lasers.
NOTE
Default: Disabled
FC Internal
Working Mode
Normal Mode, Special
Mode
Default: Normal Mode
In different internal working mode, the board
can work with the FC storage equipment of
different vendors.
l Normal mode: In this mode, the board can
work with the mainstream FC switch
storage equipment (such as the Brocade
switch). Such equipment inserts the
10B_ERR alarm after detecting a link
failure.
l Special mode: In this mode, the board can
work with the switch storage equipment
(such as the McData switch) that uses
special processing standard. Such
equipment inserts the NOS alarm after
detecting a link failure.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
552
OFC Enabled Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
The open fiber control (OFC) function
controls the transmit power of the laser when
the fiber is disconnected. When the OFC
function is enabled, the laser sends short pulse,
rather than remains in the enabled state, to
check whether the fiber is connected. In this
way, the output optical power of the laser is
cut, which prevents eye injury.
NOTE
l Set the LPT and ALS functions to Disabled
after the OFC function is enabled.
l The OFC function cannot coexist with
protection.
l This parameter is valid only when the Service
Type parameter is set to ISC 1G or ISC 2G.
FEC Working
State
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
optical interface.
FEC Mode FEC, AFEC
Default: FEC
more information.
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength
(nm)/Frequency
(THz)
Tunable
Wavelength
Range
on the board.
Planned
Wavelength No./
Wavelength
(nm)/Frequency
(THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.10
0
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.17
0 to
18/1611.00/188.78
0
Default: /
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
553
Planned Band
Type
C, CWDM
Default: C
Max. Packet
Length
1518 to 9600
Default: 9600
Ethernet
Working Mode
Auto-Negotiation,
1000M Full-Duplex
Duplex
FC Distance
Extension
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
A flow control mechanism is applied between
FC service client-side equipment and between
two FCE boards to provide the far-reaching
function of FC services, which ensures that the
bandwidth does not decrease during long haul
transmission of FC services.
See D.8 FC Distance Extension (WDM
SD Trigger
Condition
None, B1_SD,
OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None
Default: Disabled
status of a board.
NOTE
Only TN11LOM supports this parameter.
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
deployment commissioning
NOTE
Only TN12LOM supports this parameter.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
554
13.14.10 LOM Specifications
Bo
ard
Client-Side
Fixed
Optical
Module
Client-Side
Pluggable Optical
Module
WDM-Side Fixed
Optical Module
WDM-Side
Pluggable
Optical Module
TN
11L
OM
N/A 2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.5 km
1000 BASE-LX-10
km
1000 BASE-LX-40
km
1000 BASE-ZX-80
km
FC400/FICON4G
Module-0.3 km
(Multimode)
FC400/FICON4G
Module-10 km
(Single mode)
FC100/FC200/
FICON/FICON
Express Module-0.5
km (Multimode)
FC100/FC200/
FICON/FICON
Express Module-2 km
(Single mode)
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km
(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
800 ps/nm-C Band
(odd & even
wavelengths)-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
1200 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
1200 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
4800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
ODB-APD
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
(D)RZ-PIN
N/A
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
555
Bo
ard
Client-Side
Fixed
Optical
Module
Client-Side
Pluggable Optical
Module
WDM-Side Fixed
Optical Module
WDM-Side
Pluggable
Optical Module
TN
12L
OM
N/A 2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.5 km
1000 BASE-LX-10
km
1000 BASE-LX-40
km
1000 BASE-ZX-80
km
1000 BASE-BX10-U
1000 BASE-BX10-D
1000 BASE-BX-U
1000 BASE-BX-D
FC400/FICON4G
Module-0.3 km
(Multimode)
FC400/FICON4G
Module-10 km
(Single mode)
FC100/FC200/
FICON/FICON
Express Module-0.5
km (Multimode)
FC100/FC200/
FICON/FICON
Express Module-2 km
(Single mode)
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km
(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
(D)RZ-PIN
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
800 ps/nm-C Band
(Odd & Even
Wavelengths)-
Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable
Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN-XFP

NOTE
NOTE
point.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
556
NOTE
Std 802.3.
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.
5 km
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Target
transmission
distance
- 0.5 km (0.3
mi.)
10 km (6.2
mi.)
40 km (24.9
mi.)
80 km (49.7
mi.)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -2.5 -3 0 5
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -9.5 -9 -5 -2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 9 9 9 9
Eye pattern
mask
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN PIN PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -17 -20 -20 -23
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
557
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.
5 km
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm 0 -3 -3 -3

NOTE
transmissions)
Optical
Module Type
1000 BASE-
BX10-U
1000 BASE-
BX10-D
1000 BASE-
BX-U
1000 BASE-
BX-D
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Optical source
type
- SLM SLM SLM SLM
Target
transmission
distance
km 10 10 40 40
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1260 to 1360 1480 to 1500 1260 to 1360 1480 to 1500
Maximum
mean launched
power
dBm -3 -3 3 3
Minimum
mean launched
power
dBm -9 -9 -2 -2
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB 6 6 6 6
Eye pattern
mask
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
558
Optical
Module Type
1000 BASE-
BX10-U
1000 BASE-
BX10-D
1000 BASE-
BX-U
1000 BASE-
BX-D
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1480 to 1500 1260 to 1360 1480 to 1500 1260 to 1360
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -19.5 -19.5 -23 -23
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm -3 -3 -3 -3
Maximum
reflectance
dB -12 -12 -12 -12

Optical
Module
Type
FC400/
FICON4G
Module-0.3
km (Multi
mode)
FC400/
FICON4G
Module-10
km (Single
mode)
FC100/
FC200/
FICON/
FICON
Express
Module-0.5
km
(Multimode)
FC100/
FC200/
FICON/
FICON
Express
Module-2
km (Single
mode)
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Target
transmission
distance
- 0.3 km (0.2
mi.)
10 km (6.2
mi.)
0.5 km (0.3
mi.)
2 km (1.2 mi.)
Transmitter
parameter
specifications
at point S
nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355 830 to 860 1266 to 1360
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -1.1 -1 -2.5 -3
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
559
Optical
Module
Type
FC400/
FICON4G
Module-0.3
km (Multi
mode)
FC400/
FICON4G
Module-10
km (Single
mode)
FC100/
FC200/
FICON/
FICON
Express
Module-0.5
km
(Multimode)
FC100/
FC200/
FICON/
FICON
Express
Module-2
km (Single
mode)
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -9 -8.4 -9.5 -10
Eye pattern
mask
- Compliant with Fiber Channel-physical interface (FC-PI-2)
parameter template
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 770 to 860 1260 to 1600 770 to 860 1270 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -15 -18 -17 -18
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm 0 0 0 0
Maximum
reflectance
dB -12 -12 -12 -27

wavelengths)
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km
(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Target transmission
distance
- 40 km (24.9 mi.) 80 km (49.7 mi.)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
560
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km
(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
range
nm 1471 to 1611 1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 5 5
power
dBm 0 0
Central wavelength
deviation
nm 6.5 6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 1.0 1.0
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30 30
G.959.1-compliant
range
nm 1270 to 1620 1270 to 1620
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm -3 -9

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
561
(odd & even
wavelengths)-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
power
dBm 2 2
power
dBm -3 -3
width
nm 0.3 0.3
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35 35
(FEC on)
dBm -16 -16

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
562
Optical
Module Type
1200 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
NRZ-
PIN
1200 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
APD
4800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
ODB-
APD
800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Waveleng
th-DRZ-
PIN
800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Waveleng
th-NRZ-
PIN
Line code
format
Maximum
mean launched
power
dBm 2 2 2 2 2
Minimum
mean launched
power
dBm -3 -3 -3 -3 -3
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB 10 10
N/A
a
10 10
Center
frequency
THz 192.10 to 196.05
Center
frequency
deviation
GHz 5 5 5 5 5
Maximum -20
dB spectral
width
nm 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
Minimum side
mode
suppression
ratio
dB 35 35 35 35 35
Dispersion
tolerance
ps/
nm
1200 1200 4800 800 800
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1200 to 1650
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
563
Optical
Module Type
1200 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
NRZ-
PIN
1200 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
APD
4800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
ODB-
APD
800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Waveleng
th-DRZ-
PIN
800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Waveleng
th-NRZ-
PIN
Receiver
sensitivity,
EOL (FEC on)
dBm -16 -26 -26 -16 -16
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm 0 -9 -9 0 0
Maximum
reflectance
dB -27 -27 -27 -27 -27

PIN-XFP
power
dBm 2
power
dBm -3
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
564
PIN-XFP
width
nm 0.3
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35
Receiver type - PIN
(FEC on)
dBm -16
(FEC on)
dBm 0

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
power
dBm 2
power
dBm -1
width
nm 0.3
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
565
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35
Receiver type - PIN
(FEC on)
dBm -16
(FEC on)
dBm 0

TN11LOM:
(8.7 in.)
TN12LOM:
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Boar
d
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at
55C (131F) (W)
TN1
1LO
M
wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
92.7 101.7
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
566
Boar
d
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at
55C (131F) (W)
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
92.9 101.9
93.4 102.7
Wavelength-ODB-APD
98.2 108.0
TN1
2LO
M
NRZ-PIN-XFP
61.8 69.2
62.8 70.2
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
64.8 72.6
66.7 75.0
NOTE
When the FC extension function of the TN12LOM board is used, the power consumption of the board
increases by another 2 W.

13.15 LQG
LQG: 4 x GE-multiplex-optical wavelength conversion board
The available functional version of the LQG board is TN11.
Huawei office.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
567
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
1LQ
G
N N N N Y Y

13.15.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LQG board implements the conversion between four
For the position of the LQG board in the WDM system, see Figure 13-81.
Figure 13-81 Position of the LQG board in the WDM system
1
4
1
4
LQG
GE GE
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
LQG
1
O
D
U
5
G
1
O
D
U
5
G
GE
1
O
T
U
5
G
/
F
E
C
5
G
1
O
T
U
5
G
/
F
E
C
5
G
GE

The LQG board is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and cross-connect at the electrical
layer, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC.
Table 13-177 Functions and features of the LQG board
Function
and Feature
Description
Basic
function
LQG converts signals: 4 x GE <-> 1 x OTU5G/FEC5G
Client-side
service type
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
568
Function
and Feature
Description
Cross-
connect
capabilities
l OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the grooming of four channels of GE services
the backplane, and supports the transmission of four GE signals to the
paired slots through the backplane.
l OptiX OSN 3800: Supports the grooming of four GE signals from one
OTN function l Provides the OTU5G/FEC5G interface on WDM-side.
l Supports PM and TCM function for ODU5G.
l Supports SM functions for OTU5G.
WDM
specification
Tunable
wavelength
function
PRBS test
function
FEC
encoding
WDM side.
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
power of the laser.
Optical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Electrical-
layer ASON
Not supported
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
569
Function
and Feature
Description
Protection
scheme
l Supports SW SNCP.
Ethernet
service
mapping
mode
Ethernet port
working
mode
Outloop Supported
Outloop Supported
Protocols or
standards
compliance
Protocols or
standards for
transparent
transmission
(non-
performance
monitoring)
IEEE 802.3z
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
570
Function
and Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards for
service
processing
(performance
monitoring)
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1
ITU-T G.694.2

The LQG board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
Figure 13-82 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LQG board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
571
Figure 13-82 Functional modules and signal flow of the LQG board
SCC
IN
OUT
Client side
Client-side
optical
module
O/E
E/O
GE
encapsulation
and mapping
module
OTN
processing
module
Signal processing
module
GE
WDM-side
optical
module
E/O
O/E
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
RX1
RX2
RX4
TX4
TX1
TX2
RX3
TX3
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
WDM side
Cross-
connect
module
Backplane (service corss-connection)

Signal Flow
The client side of the LQG board accesses GE optical signals.
In the signal flow of the LQG board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LQG to the WDM side
of the LQG, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
The client-side optical module receives four channels of GE optical signals from client
After O/E conversion, the four channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing
one channel of OTU5G/FEC5G signals.
The OTU5G/FEC5G signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing
E/O conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard
wavelengths OTU5G/FEC5G optical signals through the OUT optical interface.
l Receive direction
DWDM standard wavelengths OTU5G/FEC5G optical signals from the WDM side through
the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
572
After O/E conversion, the OTU5G/FEC5G signals are sent to the signal processing module.
The module performs operations such as OTU5G/FEC5G framing, decoding of FEC,
demapping, decapsulation processing and service cross-connection. Then, the module
outputs four channels of GE signals.
optical interfaces.
Module Function
Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of four channels of GE optical signals.
Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from four channels of the internal
WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU5G/FEC5G optical signals.
OTU5G/FEC5G optical signals.
electrical signals between the LQG and the board in the paired slot or the cross-
connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals.
electrical signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to
the other three boards belonging to the mesh group through the backplane. The
grooming service signals are GE signals.
Encapsulates multiple channels of GE signals and maps the signals into the OTU5G/
FEC5G payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors GE
performance.
Frames OTU5G/FEC5G signals, processes overheads in OTU5G/FEC5G signals, and
performs FEC encoding and decoding.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
573
13.15.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LQG board.
Figure 13-83 shows the front panel of the LQG board.
Figure 13-83 Front panel of the LQG board
LQG
LQG
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
R
X
2
T
X
3
R
X
3
T
X
4
R
X
4
T
X
1
R
X
1
T
X
2
O
U
T
I
N
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
574

Indicators
Interfaces
Table 13-178 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LQG board
multiplexer board.
multiplexer board.

Laser Hazard Level
13.15.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one LQG board.
Valid Slots
Table 13-179 shows the valid slots for the LQG board.
Table 13-179 Valid slots for the LQG board
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
575
Product Valid Slots

13.15.7 Characteristic Code for the LQG
Code for OTUs.
Table 13-180 Mapping between the physical ports on the LQG board and the port numbers
IN/OUT 1
TX1/RX1 3
TX2/RX2 4
TX3/RX3 5
TX4/RX4 6

NOTE
Logical Ports
board. They also can be used as source or sinks of cross-connections. For example, LP is a logical
port of the board.
Figure 13-84 shows the application model of the LQG board. Table 13-181 describes the
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
576
Figure 13-84 Port diagram of the LQG board
4(RX2/TX2)-1
Client side
WDM side
1(IN/OUT)-1
201(LP/LP)-1
Cross-connect
module
Service
processing
module
WDM-side
optical
module
5(RX3/TX3)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
201(LP/LP)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
201(LP/LP)-3
201(LP/LP)-4
3(RX1/TX1)-1

Table 13-181 Description of NM port of the LQG board
LP Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1, 2,
3 and 4.

If the LQG board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the
U2000:
can be created.
Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and LP ports of the LQG board
(Create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown
Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the LQG board and the LP port
of other boards (The GE services accessed from the client side of the LQG board are
cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and the inter-board
3
in Figure 13-85.
of the LQG board (The GE services accessed from the client side of other boards are
cross-connected to the WDM side of the LQG board for protection and the inter-board
4
in Figure 13-85.
NOTE
One optical path of the LP port can be created with a connection to only one RX/TX port.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
577
l Create the cross-connection between the LP port of the LQG board and the LP port of other
boards (The GE services accessed from the WDM side of the LQG board are cross-
as shown
5
in Figure 13-85.
l The four paths of the LP port are converged into one channel, which is connected to the
IN/OUT port. There is no need for configuration on the U2000.
Figure 13-85 Cross-connection diagram of the LQG board
Other board
LQG
3
4
1
2
3(RX1/TX1)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
201(LP/LP)-1
201(LP/LP)-4
201(LP/LP)-2
201(LP/LP)-3
2
3 4
1
5
3(RX1/TX1)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
201(LP/LP)-1
201(LP/LP)-4
201(LP/LP)-2
201(LP/LP)-3
5
Client side
WDM side
Client side
WDM side
LQG board
The client side of the LQG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
The WDM side of the LQG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
TN11TQM / TN12TQM

For the parameters of LQG, refer to Table 13-182.
Table 13-182 LQG Parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
578
Optical Interface
Name
name.
Default: Used
channel of a board.
Optical Interface
Loopback
Outloop
Service Type GE, GE(GFP-T)
Default: GE
NOTE
format.
Default:
l WDM side: On
l Client side: Off
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
Default: OTN
Default: Disabled
FEC Working
State
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
579
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
board.
Tunable
Wavelength Range
Planned
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
l C: 1/1529.16/196.050
to 80/1560.61/192.100
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.170 to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /
board.
information.
Default: C
wavelength.
Max. Packet
Length
1518 to 9600
Default: 9600
Ethernet services.
Ethernet Working
Mode
Auto-Negotiation, 1000M
Full-Duplex
Duplex
The Ethernet Working Mode
parameter sets and queries the working
mode of the Ethernet.
information.
SD Trigger
Condition
None, B1_SD,
OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None
board resides.
Click D.31 SD Trigger Condition
information.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
580
Default: Disabled
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
commissioning.

13.15.11 LQG Specifications
Bo
ard
Client-Side
Fixed
Optical
Module
Client-Side
Pluggable Optical
Module
WDM-Side Fixed
Optical Module
WDM-Side
Pluggable
Optical Module
TN
11L
QG
N/A 2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.5 km
1000 BASE-LX-10
km
1000 BASE-LX-40
km
1000 BASE-ZX-80
km
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km
(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
3400 ps/nm-C Band-
Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
3400 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
5 Gbit/s Multirate
(eSFP CWDM)-50
km
5 Gbit/s Multirate
(eSFP CWDM)-70
km

NOTE
point.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
581
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.
5 km
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Target
transmission
distance
- 0.5 km (0.3
mi.)
10 km (6.2
mi.)
40 km (24.9
mi.)
80 km (49.7
mi.)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -2.5 -3 0 5
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -9.5 -9 -5 -2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 9 9 9 9
Eye pattern
mask
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN PIN PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -17 -20 -20 -23
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm 0 -3 -3 -3

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
582
wavelengths)
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km
(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Target transmission
distance
- 40 km (24.9 mi.) 80 km (49.7 mi.)
range
nm 1471 to 1611 1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 5 5
power
dBm 0 0
Central wavelength
deviation
nm 6.5 6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 1.0 1.0
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30 30
G.959.1-compliant
range
nm 1270 to 1620 1270 to 1620
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm -3 -9

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
583
Optical Module
Type
3400 ps/nm-C Band-
Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
3400 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable
Wavelength-NRZ-
APD
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 2 2
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm -2 -3
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB 10 10
Center frequency
deviation
GHz 10
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 0.3 0.3
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35 35
Receiver type - APD APD
range
nm 1200 to 1650
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm -9 -9

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
584
Optical Module Type 5 Gbit/s Multirate
(eSFP CWDM)-50
km
5 Gbit/s Multirate
(eSFP CWDM)-70
km
Target transmission
distance
- 50 km (31.1 mi.) 70 km (43.5 mi.)
range
nm 1471 to 1611 1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 5 5
power
dBm 2 2
Central wavelength
deviation
nm 6.5 6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 1.0 1.0
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30 30
range
nm 1450 to 1620 1450 to 1620
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm 0 -9

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
585
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Board WDM-Side
Optical Module
Typical Power
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at
55C (131F) (W)
TN11LQG 3400 ps/nm-C Band-
Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
28.4 32
3400 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable
Wavelength-NRZ-
APD
31.0 34.4
5 Gbit/s Multirate
(eSFP CWDM)-50
km
5 Gbit/s Multirate
(eSFP CWDM)-70
km
23.18 26

13.16 LQM
LQM: 4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) OTU1 wavelength conversion board
The available functional version of the LQM board is TN13.
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
3LQ
M
Y Y N Y Y Y

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
586
Type
The system provides two types of the LQM: One has a pair of input and output optical interfaces,
and the other has two pairs of input and output optical interfaces. Table 13-187 lists the types
of the LQM.
Table 13-187 LQM type description
LQM Single transmitting and single
receiving board
The WDM-side interfaces are IN1/
OUT1.
Dual-fed selective receiving board The WDM-side interfaces are IN1/
OUT1 and IN2/OUT2.

NOTE
The WDM-side interfaces of the LQM board are dynamic optical interfaces. Before configuring dual fed
and selective receiving, make sure the optical interfaces have been uploaded manually on the U2000.
13.16.2 Application
The LQM is a type of optical transponder unit. The LQM converts between signals at the rate
between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals.
For the position of the LQM in the WDM system, see Figure 13-86 and Figure 13-87.
Figure 13-86 Position of the LQM in the WDM system (single fed and single receiving)
TX1
LQM
100Mbit/s

2.5Gbit/s
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
LQM
1
O
D
U
1
1
O
D
U
1
1
O
T
U
1
1
O
T
U
1
100Mbit/s

2.5Gbit/s
100Mbit/s

2.5Gbit/s
100Mbit/s

2.5Gbit/s
RX1
TX4
RX4
TX1
RX1
TX4
RX4
OUT1
IN1 OUT1
IN1
OptiX OSN 8800: N/A
OptiX OSN 6800:
l GE: From/To cross-connect board
l 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s signals: From/To paired slot

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
587
Figure 13-87 Position of the LQM in the WDM system (dual fed and selective receiving)
TX1
LQM
100Mbit/s

2.5Gbit/s
LQM
1
O
D
U
1
1
O
D
U
1
1
O
T
U
1
1
O
T
U
1
100Mbit/s

2.5Gbit/s
100Mbit/s

2.5Gbit/s
100Mbit/s

2.5Gbit/s
MUX/
DMUX
MUX/
DMUX
MUX/
DMUX
MUX/
DMUX
RX1
TX4
RX4
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
TX1
RX1
TX4
RX4
IN1
OUT1
IN2
OUT2
OptiX OSN 8800: N/A
OptiX OSN 6800:

NOTE
The total rate of four channels of services at the client side cannot exceed 2.5 Gbit/s.
The LQM board can receive and transmit only one client service at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48,
STM-16, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, and HD-SDI) using its RX1/TX1 port pair.
The main functions and features supported by the LQM are cross-connection at the electrical
layer, OTN interfaces and ESC.
Table 13-188 Functions and features of the LQM
Function
and Feature
Description
Basic
function
LQM converts signals:
l 4 x (100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s) signals<-> 1 x OTU1.
l Implements the dual fed and selective receiving function or single fed and
single receiving function on the WDM side according to the application
scenario.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
588
Function
and Feature
Description
Client-side
service type
Cross-
connect
capabilities
OptiX OSN 6800:
l Supports the grooming of four channels of GE services each to working/
protection cross-connection boards respectively through the backplane.
l Supports the transmission of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s
and 2.5 Gbit/s to the paired slots through the backplane.
OptiX OSN 3800:
l Supports the grooming of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and
2.5 Gbit/s from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards)
to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group.
l Supports the grooming of four GE signals from one board of the mesh
group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to
the mesh group.
OTN
function
l The encapsulation and mapping process is compliant with GDPS, ITU-T
G.709.
WDM
specification
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
589
Function
and Feature
Description
PRBS test
function
Supports the PRBS function on the client side and WDM side.
NOTE
is FE or GE.
FEC
encoding
WDM side.
NOTE
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
failures.
power of the laser.
ALS
function
type is FE or GE.
Optical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Electrical-
layer ASON
Not supported
Protection
scheme
l Supports SW SNCP.
NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800 supports client-side 1+1 protection, intra-board 1+1 protection and
the OWSP protection.
Ethernet
service
mapping
mode
Ethernet port
working
mode
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
590
Function
and Feature
Description
Outloop Supported
Outloop Supported
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
591
Function
and Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards
compliance
Protocols or
standards for
transparent
transmission
(non-
performance
monitoring)
IEEE 802.3u
IEEE 802.3z
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
(FC-PI)
SW-3)
(FC-SB-2)
Control (MAC)
Protocol (PHY)
Dependent (PDM)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
592
Function
and Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards for
service
processing
(performance
monitoring)
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1
ITU-T G.694.2

The LQM board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
Figure 13-88 and Figure 13-89 show the functional modules and signal flow of the LQM.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
593
Figure 13-88 Functional modules and signal flow of the LQM (OptiX OSN 8800)
SCC
RX1
RX2
RX4
TX4
TX1
TX2
RX3
TX3
Client-side
optical
module
O/E
E/O
WDM-side
optical
module
E/O
O/E
Service
encapsulation
and mapping
module
OTN
processing
module
Signal processing
module
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
594
Figure 13-89 Functional modules and signal flow of the LQM (OptiX OSN 6800/3800)
SCC
WDM side
Client side
RX1
RX2
RX4
TX4
TX1
TX2
RX3
TX3
100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s
Client-side
optical
module
O/E
E/O
WDM-side
optical
module
E/O
O/E
Service
encapsulation
and mapping
module
OTN
processing
module
Signal processing
module
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
Cross-
connect
module

Signal Flow
The client side of the LQM board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate
In the signal flow of the LQM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LQM to the WDM side
of the LQM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
The client-side optical module receives four channels of the Any optical signals from client
signals.
with ITU-T G.694.1 or CWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2. A laser
converts the OTU1 optical signals into two channels of identical optical signals, and then
the two channels signals are output through the OUT1-OUT2 optical interfaces.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
595
l Receive direction
wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or CWDM wavelengths that comply with
ITU-T G.694.2 through the IN1-IN2 optical interfaces. Then, the module performs O/E
conversion.
FEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs four channels
of Any signals.
optical interfaces.
NOTE
Only one pair of WDM-side optical interfaces is used, the board implements the single fed and single
receiving function on the WDM side.
Module Function
Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of four channels of Any optical signals.
The module consists of the cross-connect module, service encapsulation and mapping
module, and OTN processing module.
electrical signals between the LQM and the board in the paired slot or the cross-
connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are Any signals.
client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. The signaling module
also grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of
four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group through the
backplane. The grooming service signals are Any signals.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
596
13.16.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LQM board.
Figure 13-90 shows the front panel of the LQM board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
597
Figure 13-90 Front panel of the LQM board
LQM
LQM
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
T
X
2
R
X
2
T
X
3
R
X
3
T
X
4
R
X
4
O
U
T
1
I
N
1
O
U
T
2
I
N
2
T
X
1
R
X
1

Indicators
Interfaces
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
598
Table 13-189 Types and functions of the LQM interfaces
IN1-IN2 LC Receive single-wavelength signals from the
associated optical demultiplexer board or optical
add/drop multiplexer board.
OUT1-OUT2 LC Transmit single-wavelength signals to the
associated optical multiplexer board or optical
add/drop multiplexer board.

Laser Hazard Level
13.16.6 Valid Slots
The LQM occupies one slot.
Table 13-190 shows the valid slots for the LQM board.
Table 13-190 Valid slots for the LQM board
Product Valid Slots

13.16.7 Characteristic Code for the LQM
The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the
Code for OTUs.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
599
Table 13-191 Mapping between the physical ports on the LQM board and the port numbers
IN1/OUT1 1
IN2/OUT2 2
TX1/RX1 3
TX2/RX2 4
TX3/RX3 5
TX4/RX4 6

NOTE
Logical Ports
board. They also can be used as source or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ClientLP is
Figure 13-91 shows the application model of the LQM board. Table 13-192 describes the
Figure 13-91 Port diagram of the LQM
Cross-connect
module
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1
1(IN1/OUT1)-1
2(IN2/OUT2)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
Service
processing
module
WDM-side
optical
module

Table 13-192 Description of NM port of the LQM
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
600
ClientLP Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1, 2,
3 and 4.
interfaces.

Configuration Principle of Timeslots :
l The transmit and receive timeslots should be specified for each board. In one direction, a
timeslot cannot be shared by multiple services.
l In one direction of one service, the timeslot of the receive end must be the same as that of
the transmit end.
l For each LQM board, the number of timeslots occupied by all services should not exceed
16.
l For FC200, FICON Express, OC-48, STM-16, OTU1 and HD-SDI services, timeslots can
be configured only in channel 1 of the LQM board.
l Different service requires different number of timeslots. The number of timeslots required
by each type of service is listed below.
GE 7
FE 1
OTU1 16
STM-1 1
STM-4 4
STM-16 16
OC-3 1
OC-12 4
OC-48 16
FC100 6
FC200 12
FICON 6
FICON Express 12
HD-SDI 11
DVB-ASI 2
SDI 3
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
601
ESCON 2
FDDI 1

If the LQM board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the
U2000:
connection between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports according to the actual service level
(GE/Any/OTU1) and service type. The cross-connect grooming of GE/Any/OTU1 services
can be created.
Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the LQM
board (create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown
by and in Figure 13-92.
Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the LQM board and the
ClientLP port of other boards, as shown by
3
in Figure 13-92. (The GE/Any/OTU1
services accessed from the client side of the LQM board are cross-connected to the
WDM side of other boards for protection and inter-board service convergence.)
Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of other boards and the ClientLP
port of the LQM board, as shown by
4
in Figure 13-92. (The GE/Any/OTU1 services
the LQM board for protection and inter-board service convergence.)
NOTE
One RX/TX port can be connected to only one optical path of the ClientLP port.
Only the first optical path of ClientLP ports supports OTU1 services.
l Create the cross-connection between the ClientLP port of the LQM board and the ClientLP
port of other boards, as shown by
5
accessed from the WDM side of the LQM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other board for the grooming of the WDM-side services.)
l The two paths of the ClientLP port are respectively connected to the IN1/OUT1 and IN2/
OUT2 ports. There is no need for configuration on the U2000.
l According to the service type configured on the ClientLP port, configure the transmit and
receive timeslots. For details, see 13.16.8 Physical and Logical Ports.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
602
Figure 13-92 Cross-connection diagram of the LQM
3
4
1
2
3(RX1/TX1)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
2
3 4
1
5
3(RX1/TX1)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
Client side
WDM side
Client side
WDM side
Other board
LQM
LQM board
The client side of the LQM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
The WDM side of the LQM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
5
TN11TQM / TN12TQM

NOTE
The OptiX OSN 8800 supports only the cross-connections shown by (1) and (2) in Figure 13-92.
For the parameters of the LQM, refer to Table 13-193.
Table 13-193 LQM Parameters
Optical
Interface/
Channel
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
603
Optical Interface
Name
supported.
Channel Use
Status
Used, Unused
Default: Used
board.
Optical Interface
Loopback
Non-Loopback,
Inloop, Outloop
Default: Non-
Loopback
Service Type None, Any, FE, GE,
GE(GFP-T), OTU-1,
STM-1, STM-4,
STM-16, OC-3,
OC-12, OC-48,
FC-100, FC-200,
FICON, FICON
Express, HD-SDI,
DVB-ASI, SDI,
ESCON, FDDI
Default: None
the client side.
NOTE
Client Service
Bearer Rate
(Mbit/s)
100 to 2200
Default: 0
Default:
l WDM side: On
l Client side: Off
status of a board.
more information.
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
board are lost.
Default: Disabled
Mode
Used to set the service mode of the board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
604
FEC Working
State
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
optical interface.
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength
(nm)/Frequency
(THz)
Tunable
Wavelength
Range
on the board.
Planned
Wavelength No./
Wavelength
(nm)/Frequency
(THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.10
0
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.17
0 to
18/1611.00/188.78
0
Default: /
Planned Band
Type
C, CWDM
Default: C
Max. Packet
Length
1518 to 9600
Default: 9600
Ethernet
Working Mode
Auto-Negotiation,
1000M Full-Duplex
Duplex
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
605
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is
not required, set this parameter to Enabled;
NOTE
SD Trigger
Condition
None, B1_SD,
OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None
PRBS Test
Status
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
status of a board.
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

13.16.11 LQM Specifications
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
606
Bo
ard
Client-Side
Fixed
Optical
Module
Client-Side
Pluggable Optical
Module
WDM-Side
Fixed Optical
Module
WDM-Side
Pluggable Optical
Module
TN
13L
QM
N/A I-16-2 km
S-16.1-15 km
L-16.1-40 km
L-16.2-80 km
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.5 km
1000 BASE-LX-10 km
1000 BASE-LX-40 km
1000 BASE-ZX-80 km
(eSFP CWDM)-40 km
(eSFP CWDM)-80 km
(eSFP DWDM)-120 km
(eSFP CWDM)-80 km
(eSFP DWDM)-120
km

NOTE
point.
NOTE
The I-16/SR-1 OC-48 module, S-16.1/IR-1 OC-48 module, L-16.1/LR-1 OC-48 module and L-16.2/LR-2
OC-48 module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON,
STM-1, OC-3, and DVB-ASI signals.
module.
Optical
Module
Type
I-16-2 km S-16.1-15
km
L-16.1-40
km
L-16.2-80
km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
607
Optical
Module
Type
I-16-2 km S-16.1-15
km
L-16.1-40
km
L-16.2-80
km
Optical
source type
- MLM SLM SLM SLM
Target
transmission
distance
- 2 km (1.2 mi.) 15 km (9.3
mi.)
40 km (24.9
mi.)
80 km (49.7
mi.)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -3 0 3 3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -10 -5 -2 -2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm N/A 1 1 1
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB N/A 30 30 30
Eye pattern
mask
- G.957-compliant
G.959.1-compliant
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN APD APD
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1270 to 1580 1270 to 1580 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
608
Optical
Module
Type
I-16-2 km S-16.1-15
km
L-16.1-40
km
L-16.2-80
km
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -18 -18 -27 -28
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm -3 0 -9 -9
Maximum
reflectance
dB -27 -27 -27 -27

NOTE
NOTE
be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE and DVB-ASI signals.
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.
5 km
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Target
transmission
distance
- 0.5 km (0.3
mi.)
10 km (6.2
mi.)
40 km (24.9
mi.)
80 km (49.7
mi.)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -2.5 -3 0 5
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -9.5 -9 -5 -2
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
609
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.
5 km
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 9 9 9 9
Eye pattern
mask
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN PIN PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -17 -20 -20 -23
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm 0 -3 -3 -3

NOTE
The 1.25 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON,
STM-1, OC-3, FE, DVB-ASI signals.
NOTE
The 2.67 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100,
GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals.
wavelengths)
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km
(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Target transmission
distance
- 40 km (24.9 mi.) 80 km (49.7 mi.)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
610
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km
(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
range
nm 1471 to 1611 1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 5 5
power
dBm 0 0
Central wavelength
deviation
nm 6.5 6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 1.0 1.0
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30 30
G.959.1-compliant
range
nm 1270 to 1620 1270 to 1620
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm -3 -9

NOTE
The 2.67 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP DWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200,
FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
611
wavelengths)
km
Target transmission
distance
- 120 km (74.6 mi.)
power
dBm 4
power
dBm 0
width
nm 1
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30
Receiver type - APD
range
nm N/A

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
612
(eSFP CWDM)-80 km
power
dBm 5
power
dBm 0
Central wavelength
deviation
nm 6.5
width
nm 1
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30
Receiver type - APD

(eSFP DWDM)-120 km
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
613
(eSFP DWDM)-120 km
power
dBm 3
power
dBm 0
width
nm 1
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30
Receiver type - APD

(8.7 in.)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
614
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN13LQM 32.6 35.9

13.17 LQMD
LQMD: 4-channel multi-rate (100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s) OTU1 wavelength conversion unit, dual
fed and selective receiving
The available functional versions of the LQMD board are TN11 and TN12.
Huawei office.
Boar
d
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
TN11
LQM
D
N N N N Y Y
TN12
LQM
D
Y Y N N Y Y

l Function:
Board OTU1/HD-SDI/
SDI/FDDI
services
WDM
Specification
PRBS function
TN11LQMD N CWDM/DWDM N Y
TN12LQMD Y DWDM Y Y

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
615
l Specification:
For the specification of each version, see 13.17.11 LQMD Specifications.
Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11LQMD TN12LQMD The TN12LQMD can be created as TN11LQMD on the NMS. The former
can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution,
the TN12LQMD functions as the TN11LQMD.
NOTE
A board equipped with a PIN receiver cannot substitute for a board equipped with an
APD receiver, because the two types of receives support different input power ranges.
TN12LQMD None -

13.17.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LQMD board converts between signals at the rate of
100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations, and
dually feeds and selectively receives signals on the WDM side.
For the position of the LQMD board in the WDM system, see Figure 13-93.
Figure 13-93 Position of the LQMD board in the WDM system
TX1
TX4
LQMD
100Mbit/s

2.5Gbit/s
LQMD
1
O
D
U
1
1
O
D
U
1
1
O
T
U
1
1
O
T
U
1
100Mbit/s

2.5Gbit/s
100Mbit/s

2.5Gbit/s
100Mbit/s

2.5Gbit/s
MUX/
DMUX
MUX/
DMUX
MUX/
DMUX
MUX/
DMUX
RX1
RX4
TX1
RX1
TX4
RX4
OUT1
OUT2
IN1
IN2
IN1
OUT1
OUT2
IN2
OptiX OSN 8800: N/A
OptiX OSN 6800:
NOTE
The LQMD board can receive and transmit only one client service at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
616
The LQMD board is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and cross-connection at the
Table 13-200 Functions and features of the LQMD board
Function
and Feature
Description
Basic
function
LQMD converts signals as follows:
l 4 x (100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s)<-> 1 x OTU1.
l Implements the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM
side.
Client-side
service type
NOTE
Only TN12LQMD supports OTU1, HD-SDI, SDI and FDDI services.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
617
Function
and Feature
Description
Cross-
connect
capabilities
OptiX OSN 6800:
l Supports the grooming of four channels of GE services each to working/
protection cross-connection boards respectively through the backplane.
l Supports the transmission of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s
and 2.5 Gbit/s to the paired slots through the backplane.
OptiX OSN 3800
2.5 Gbit/s from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards)
l Supports the grooming of four GE signals from one board of the mesh
group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to
the mesh group.
OTN
function
l The encapsulation and mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.709.
WDM
specification
TN11LQMD:
TN12LQMD:
Tunable
wavelength
function
ESC
function
Supported
PRBS test
function
TN11LQMD: supports the PRBS function on the WDM side.
TN12LQMD: supports the PRBS function on the client side and WDM side.
NOTE
is FE or GE.
FEC
encoding
WDM side.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
618
Function
and Feature
Description
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
failures.
power of the laser.
NOTE
TN11LQMD only supports Poisson mode.
ALS
function
Test frame TN11LQMD: not supported
TN12LQMD: The board supports the test frame only when the client-side
service type is FE or GE.
Optical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Electrical-
layer ASON
Not supported
Protection
scheme
l Supports SW SNCP.
NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800 supports client-side 1+1 protection, intra-board 1+1 protection and
the OWSP protection.
Ethernet
service
mapping
mode
Ethernet port
working
mode
FE: 100M Full-Duplex
Outloop Supported
Outloop Supported
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
619
Function
and Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards
compliance
Protocols or
standards for
transparent
transmission
(non-performance
monitoring)
IEEE 802.3u
IEEE 802.3z
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
(FC-PI)
SW-3)
(FC-SB-2)
the implementation and usage of the DVB
Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI)
Control (MAC)
Protocol (PHY)
Dependent (PDM)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
620
Function
and Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards for
service processing
(performance
monitoring)
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1
ITU-T G.694.2

The LQMD board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
Figure 13-95 and Figure 13-94 show the functional modules and signal flow of the LQMD
board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
621
Figure 13-94 Functional modules and signal flow of the LQMD board (OptiX OSN 8800)
SCC
RX1
RX2
RX4
TX4
TX1
TX2
RX3
TX3
Client-side
optical
module
O/E
E/O
WDM-side
optical
module
E/O
O/E
Service
encapsulation
and mapping
module
OTN
processing
module
Signal processing
module
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
Splitter

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
622
Figure 13-95 Functional modules and signal flow of the LQMD board (OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX
OSN 3800)
SCC
WDM side
Client side
RX1
RX2
RX4
TX4
TX1
TX2
RX3
TX3
100Mbit/s - 2.5Gbit/s
Client-side
optical
module
O/E
E/O
WDM-side
optical
module
E/O
O/E
Service
encapsulation
and mapping
module
OTN
processing
module
Signal processing
module
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
Splitter Cross-
connect
module

Signal Flow
The client side of the LQMD board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate
In the signal flow of the LQMD board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LQMD to the WDM side
of the LQMD, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
with ITU-T G.694.1 or CWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2. An optical
splitter converts the OTU1 optical signals into two channels of identical optical signals,
and then the two channels signals are output through the OUT1-OUT2 optical interfaces.
l Receive direction
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
623
ITU-T G.694.2. Then, the module performs O/E conversion.
FEC, demapping, cross-connection and service decapsulation processing. Then, the module
outputs four channels of Any signals.
optical interfaces.
Module Function
OptiX OSN 8800: not applicable.
client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. The cross-connect
module also grooms the electrical signals between the LQMD and the board in the
paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service
signals are Any signals.
module also grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group
(consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group
through the backplane. The grooming service signals are Any signals.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
624
13.17.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LQMD board.
Figure 13-96 shows the front panel of the LQMD board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
625
Figure 13-96 Front panel of the LQMD board
LQMD
LQMD
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
T
X
2
R
X
2
T
X
3
R
X
3
T
X
4
R
X
4
O
U
T
1
I
N
1
O
U
T
2
I
N
2
T
X
1
R
X
1

Indicators
Interfaces
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
626
Table 13-201 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LQMD board
multiplexer board.
multiplexer board.

Laser Hazard Level
13.17.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one LQMD board.
Table 13-202 shows the valid slots for the TN11LQMD board.
Table 13-202 Valid slots for TN11LQMD board
Product Valid Slots

Table 13-203 shows the valid slots for the TN12LQMD board.
Table 13-203 Valid slots for TN12LQMD board
Product Valid Slots

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
627
13.17.7 Characteristic Code for the LQMD
The characteristic code for the LQMD board contains eight digits, respectively indicating the
Table 13-204 Characteristic code for the LQMD board
First four digits Frequency of the forth optical
signal
WDM side.
Last four digits Frequency of the forth optical
signal
the WDM side.

For example, the characteristic code for the LQMD board is 92109210.
"92109210" indicates the frequency of the two channels of optical signals on the WDM side is
192.10 THz.
Table 13-205 Mapping between the physical ports on the LQMD board and the port numbers
IN1/OUT1 1
IN2/OUT2 2
TX1/RX1 3
TX2/RX2 4
TX3/RX3 5
TX4/RX4 6

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
628
NOTE
Logical Ports
Figure 13-97 shows the application model of the LQMD board. Table 13-206 describes the
Figure 13-97 Port diagram of the LQMD board
Cross-connect
module
1(IN1/OUT1)-1
2(IN2/OUT2)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
Service
processing
module
WDM-side
optical
module

NOTE
TN11LQMD: The optical paths of internal logical port are 201 (LP/LP)-1 to 201 (LP/LP)-4.
TN12LQMD: The optical paths of internal logical port are 201 (ClientLP/ClientLP)-1 to 201 (ClientLP/
ClientLP)-4.
Table 13-206 Description of NM port of the LQMD board
ClientLP Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1, 2,
3 and 4.
interfaces.

the transmit end.
l For each LQMD board, the number of timeslots occupied by all services should not exceed
16.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
629
l For FC200, FICON Express, OC-48, STM-16, OTU1, HD-SDI services, timeslots can be
configured only in channel 1 of the LQMD board.
GE 7
FE 1
OTU1 16
STM-1 1
STM-4 4
STM-16 16
OC-3 1
OC-12 4
OC-48 16
FC100 6
FC200 12
FICON 6
FICON Express 12
HD-SDI 11
DVB-ASI 2
SDI 3
ESCON 2
FDDI 1

If the LQMD board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the
U2000:
can be created.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
630
Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the
LQMD board (create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board),
as shown by and in Figure 13-98.
Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the LQMD board and the
3
services accessed from the client side of the LQMD board are cross-connected to the
port of the LQMD board, as shown by
4
the LQMD board for protection and inter-board service convergence.)
NOTE
Only the first optical path of ClientLP port supports OTU1 services.
l Create the cross-connection between the ClientLP port of the LQMD board and the
ClientLP port of other boards (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the WDM side
of the LQMD board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other board for the grooming
of the WDM-side services), as shown by
5
in Figure 13-98.
l The two paths of the ClientLP port are respectively connected to the IN1/OUT1 and IN2/
OUT2 ports. There is no need for configuration on the U2000.
NOTE
The OptiX OSN 8800 only supports the cross-connections shown by and in Figure 13-98.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
631
Figure 13-98 Cross-connection diagram of the LQMD board
3
4
1
2
3(RX1/TX1)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
2
3 4
1
5
3(RX1/TX1)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
Client side
WDM side
Client side
WDM side
Other board
LQMD
LQMD board
The client side of the LQMD board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
The WDM side of the LQMD board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
5
TN11TQM / TN12TQM

For parameters of LQMD, refer to Table 13-207.
Table 13-207 LQMD parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
Optical Interface
Name
supported.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
632
Channel Use
Status
Used, Unused
Default: Used
board.
Optical Interface
Loopback
Non-Loopback,
Inloop, Outloop
Default: Non-
Loopback
Service Type None, Any, DVB-
ASI, SDI, ESCON,
FC-100, FC-200,
FDDI, FE, FICON,
FICON Express, GE,
GE(GFP-T), HD-SDI,
OC-3, OC-12, OC-48,
OTU-1, STM-1,
STM-4, STM-16
Default: None
the client side.
NOTE
Only the TN12LQMD supports Any, SDI, FDDI,
HD-SDI, and OTU-1 services.
NOTE
Client Service
Bearer Rate
(Mbit/s)
100 to 2200
Default: 0
NOTE
Only TN12LQMD supports this parameter.
Default:
l WDM side: On
l Client side: Off
status of a board.
more information.
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
board are lost.
Default: Disabled
Mode
NOTE
Only TN12LQMD supports this parameter.
See D.32 Service Mode (WDM Interface) for
more information.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
633
FEC Working
State
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
optical interface.
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength
(nm)/Frequency
(THz)
Tunable
Wavelength
Range
on the board.
Planned
Wavelength No./
Wavelength
(nm)/Frequency
(THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.05
0 to
80/1560.61/192.1
00
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.1
70 to
18/1611.00/188.7
80
Default: /
Planned Band
Type
C, CWDM
Default: C
Max. Packet
Length
1518 to 9600
Default: 9600
Ethernet
Working Mode
Auto-Negotiation,
1000M Full-Duplex
Duplex
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
634
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
NOTE
Only the TN12LQMD supports this parameter.
SD Trigger
Condition
None, B1_SD,
OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None
Default: Disabled
status of a board.
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
NOTE
Only the TN12LQMD supports this parameter.

13.17.11 LQMD Specifications
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
635
Bo
ard
Client-Side
Fixed
Optical
Module
Client-Side
Pluggable Optical
Module
WDM-Side Fixed
Optical Module
WDM-Side
Pluggable
Optical
Module
TN
11L
QM
D
N/A I-16-2 km
S-16.1-15 km
L-16.1-40 km
L-16.2-80 km
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.5 km
1000 BASE-LX-10 km
1000 BASE-LX-40 km
1000 BASE-ZX-80 km
(eSFP CWDM)-40 km
(eSFP CWDM)-80 km
12800 ps/nm-C Band-
Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
12800 ps/nm-C Band-
Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
6500 ps/nm-C Band-
Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
3200 ps/nm-C Band-
Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
12800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
6400 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD (Four
Channels-Tunable)
1600 ps/nm-CWDM
Band-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
N/A
TN
12L
QM
D
N/A I-16-2 km
S-16.1-15 km
L-16.1-40 km
L-16.2-80 km
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.5 km
1000 BASE-LX-10 km
1000 BASE-LX-40 km
1000 BASE-ZX-80 km
(eSFP CWDM)-40 km
(eSFP CWDM)-80 km
(eSFP DWDM)-120 km
12800 ps/nm-C Band-
Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
12800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
6400 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD (Four
Channels-Tunable)
N/A

NOTE
For information about the boards supported by the equipment, see Mappings Between the Board and
Equipment in the Hardware Description.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
636
NOTE
point.
NOTE
module.
Optical
Module
Type
I-16-2 km S-16.1-15
km
L-16.1-40
km
L-16.2-80
km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Optical
source type
- MLM SLM SLM SLM
Target
transmission
distance
- 2 km (1.2 mi.) 15 km (9.3
mi.)
40 km (24.9
mi.)
80 km (49.7
mi.)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -3 0 3 3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -10 -5 -2 -2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
637
Optical
Module
Type
I-16-2 km S-16.1-15
km
L-16.1-40
km
L-16.2-80
km
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm N/A 1 1 1
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB N/A 30 30 30
Eye pattern
mask
- G.957-compliant
G.959.1-compliant
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN APD APD
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1270 to 1580 1270 to 1580 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -18 -18 -27 -28
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm -3 0 -9 -9
Maximum
reflectance
dB -27 -27 -27 -27

NOTE
NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
638
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.
5 km
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Target
transmission
distance
- 0.5 km (0.3
mi.)
10 km (6.2
mi.)
40 km (24.9
mi.)
80 km (49.7
mi.)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -2.5 -3 0 5
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -9.5 -9 -5 -2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 9 9 9 9
Eye pattern
mask
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN PIN PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -17 -20 -20 -23
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm 0 -3 -3 -3

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
639
NOTE
The 1.25 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON,
NOTE
The 2.67 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100,
wavelengths)
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km
(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Target transmission
distance
- 40 km (24.9 mi.) 80 km (49.7 mi.)
range
nm 1471 to 1611 1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 5 5
power
dBm 0 0
Central wavelength
deviation
nm 6.5 6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 1.0 1.0
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30 30
G.959.1-compliant
range
nm 1270 to 1620 1270 to 1620
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
640
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km
(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm -3 -9

NOTE
The 2.67 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP DWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100,
wavelengths)
km
Target transmission
distance
- 120 km (74.6 mi.)
power
dBm 4
power
dBm 0
width
nm 1
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
641
km
Receiver type - APD
range
nm N/A

Optical Module
Type
12800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Fixed
Wavelen
gth-NRZ-
PIN
12800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Fixed
Wavelen
gth-NRZ-
APD
6500 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Fixed
Wavelen
gth-NRZ-
PIN
3200 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Fixed
Wavelen
gth-NRZ-
APD
12800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-NRZ-
APD
6400 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-NRZ-
APD
(Four
Channels
-
Tunable)
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm -4 -4 0 0 0 0
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm -8 -8 -5 -5 -5 -5
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
642
Optical Module
Type
12800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Fixed
Wavelen
gth-NRZ-
PIN
12800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Fixed
Wavelen
gth-NRZ-
APD
6500 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Fixed
Wavelen
gth-NRZ-
PIN
3200 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Fixed
Wavelen
gth-NRZ-
APD
12800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-NRZ-
APD
6400 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-NRZ-
APD
(Four
Channels
-
Tunable)
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB 10 10 8.2 8.2 10 8.2
Center frequency
deviation
GHz 10
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 0.2 0.2 0.5 0.5 0.2 0.5
Minimum side
mode suppression
ratio
dB 35 35 30 30 35 35
Dispersion
tolerance
ps/nm 12800 12800 6500 3200 12800 6400
Operating
wavelength range
nm 1200 to 1650 1300 to
1575
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -18 -28 -18 -28 -28 -28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm 0 -9 0 -9 -9 -9
Maximum
reflectance
dB -27 -27 -27 -27 -27 -27

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
643
NRZ-APD
power
dBm 2
power
dBm 0.5
width
nm 1
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30
Receiver type - APD

(8.7 in.)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
644
Power Consumption
Board WDM-Side Optical Module Typical Power
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum
Power
Consumption at
55C (131F) (W)
TN11
LQM
D
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
57.1 65.7
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
Wavelength-NRZ-APD (Four
Channels-Tunable)
61.1 67.2
TN12
LQM
D
- 31.1 34.3

13.18 LQMS
LQMS: 4-channel multi-rate (100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s) OTU1 wavelength conversion unit, single
fed and single receiving
The available functional versions of the LQMS board are TN11 and TN12.
Huawei office.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
645
Boar
d
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
TN11
LQM
S
N N N N Y Y
TN12
LQM
S
Y Y N N Y Y

l Function:
Board OTU1/HD-SDI/SDI/
FDDI services on
client-side
WDM Specification Grooming of ODU1
signal
TN11LQMS N CWDM/DWDM N
TN12LQMS Y DWDM Y

l Specification:
For the specification of each version, see 13.18.11 LQMS Specifications.
Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11LQMS TN12LQMS The TN12LQMS can be created as TN11LQMS on the NMS. The former can
substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the
TN12LQMS functions as the TN11LQMS.
NOTE
A board equipped with a PIN receiver cannot substitute for a board equipped with an
APD receiver, because the two types of receives support different input power ranges.
TN12LQMS None -

13.18.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LQMS board converts between signals at the rate of
100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations or
between ODU1 signals and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
646
Application Scenario 1 for the TN11LQMS and TN12LQMS: Conversion Between
Signals at the Rate of 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and ITU-T Recommendation-
Compliant WDM Signals
Figure 13-99 Position of the LQMS board in the WDM system (LQM Mode)
TX1
LQMS
100Mbit/s

2.5Gbit/s
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
LQMS
1
O
D
U
1
1
O
D
U
1
1
O
T
U
1
1
O
T
U
1
100Mbit/s

2.5Gbit/s
100Mbit/s

2.5Gbit/s
100Mbit/s

2.5Gbit/s
OUT
IN OUT
IN
RX1
TX4
RX4
TX1
RX1
TX4
RX4
OptiX OSN 8800: N/A
OptiX OSN 6800:

NOTE
The LQMS board can receive and transmit only one client service at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s
Application Scenario 2 for the TN12LQMS: Conversion Between ODU1 Electrical
Signals and ITU-T Recommendation-Compliant WDM Signals
Figure 13-100 Position of the LQMS board in the WDM system (NS1 Mode)
1
8
TOM
1
8
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
TOM
LQMS LQMS
Client
services
1xODU1 1xODU1
Client
services
1
O
T
U
1
1
O
D
U
1
1
O
D
U
1
1
O
T
U
1
1
O
D
U
1
1
O
D
U
1
OUT
IN OUT
IN

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
647
NOTE
Scenario 2 is supported on the OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800.
The LQMS board is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and cross-connection at the
Table 13-214 Functions and features of the LQMS board
Function
and
Feature
Description
Basic
function
LQMS converts signals as follows:
l 4 x (100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s)<-> 1 x OTU1.
l Maps ODU1 signal into OTU1 optical signal and converts it into the
standard DWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse
process is similar.
Client-side
service type
NOTE
Only TN12LQMS supports OTU1,HD-SDI,SDI and FDDI services.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
648
Function
and
Feature
Description
Cross-
connect
capabilities
OptiX OSN 6800:
l TN11LQMS:
Supports the grooming of four channels of GE services each to
backplane.
Supports the transmission of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/
s and 2.5 Gbit/s to the paired slots through the backplane.
l TN12LQMS:
Supports the grooming of four GE signals or one ODU1 signal each to
backplane.
Supports the transmission of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/
s and 2.5 Gbit/s to the paired slots through the backplane.
OptiX OSN 3800
l TN11LQMS:
Supports the grooming of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s
and 2.5 Gbit/s from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four
boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group.
Supports the grooming of four GE signals from one board of the mesh
group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging
to the mesh group.
l TN12LQMS:
Supports the grooming of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s
and 2.5 Gbit/s from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four
Supports the grooming of four GE signals or one ODU1 signal from
one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other
three boards belonging to the mesh group.
OTN
function
l The encapsulation and mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.709.
WDM
specification
TN11LQMS:
TN12LQMS:
Tunable
wavelength
function
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
649
Function
and
Feature
Description
ESC
function
Supported.
PRBS test
function
TN11LQMS: supports the PRBS function on the WDM side.
TN12LQMS: supports the PRBS function on the client side and WDM side.
NOTE
LPT
function
is FE or GE.
FEC
encoding
WDM side.
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
failures.
power of the laser.
NOTE
TN11LQMS only supports Poisson mode.
ALS
function
Test frame TN11LQMS: not supported
TN12LQMS: the board supports the test frame function only when the client-
side service type is FE or GE.
Optical-
layer ASON
Not supported
Electrical-
layer ASON
Not supported
Protection
scheme
l Supports SW SNCP.
l Supports the tributary SNCP protection (NS1 Mode).
l Supports the ODUk SNCP (NS1 Mode).
NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800 supports client-side 1+1 protection and the OWSP protection.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
650
Function
and
Feature
Description
Ethernet
service
mapping
mode
Supports encapsulation of GE services in GE(GFP-F) (displayed as GE on the
NMS) and GE(GFP-T) modes.
Ethernet port
working
mode
Outloop Supported
Outloop Supported
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
651
Function
and
Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards
compliance
Protocols or
standards for
transparent
transmission
(non-
performance
monitoring)
IEEE 802.3u
IEEE 802.3z
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
(FC-PI)
SW-3)
(FC-SB-2)
Control (MAC)
Protocol (PHY)
Dependent (PDM)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
652
Function
and
Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards for
service
processing
(performance
monitoring)
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.873.1
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1
ITU-T G.694.2

The LQMS board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
Figure 13-101, Figure 13-102 and Figure 13-103 show the functional modules and signal flow
of the LQMS board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
653
Figure 13-101 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12LQMS board (OptiX OSN 8800)
WDM side
IN
Client side
RX1
RX2
RX4
TX4
TX1
TX2
RX3
TX3
OUT
Client-side
optical
module
O/E
E/O
WDM-side
optical
module
E/O
O/E
Service
encapsulation
and mapping
module
OTN
processing
module
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
654
Figure 13-102 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11LQMS and TN12 LQMS board
(LQM mode) (OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800)
WDM side
IN
Client side
RX1
RX2
RX4
TX4
TX1
TX2
RX3
TX3
OUT
100Mbit/s - 2.5Gbit/s
Client-side
optical
module
O/E
E/O
WDM-side
optical
module
E/O
O/E
Service
encapsulation
and mapping
module
OTN
processing
module
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
Cross-
connect
module

Signal Flow (Conversion Between Signals at the Rate of 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s
and ITU-T Recommendation-Compliant WDM Signals)
The client side of the LQMS board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate
In the signal flow of the LQMS board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LQMS to the WDM side
of the LQMS, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
655
with ITU-T G.694.1 or CWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2 through the
OUT optical interface.
l Receive direction
ITU-T G.694.2 through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E
conversion.
module performs operations such as OTU1 framing, decoding of FEC, demapping,
decapsulation processing and service cross-connection. Then, the module outputs four
channels of Any signals.
optical interfaces.
Figure 13-103 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12LQMS board (NS1 mode)(OptiX
OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800)
IN
OUT
Cross-
connect
module
OTN
processing
module
ODU1
E/O
O/E
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
WDM side
WDM-side
optical
module

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
656
Signal Flow (Conversion Between ODU1 Electrical Signals and ITU-T
Recommendation-Compliant WDM Signals)
In the signal flow of the LQMS board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LQMS to the backplane
of the LQMS, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
The signal processing module receives ODU1 electrical signals sent from the backplane.
The module performs operations such as OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the
module outputs one channel of OTU1 signals.
l Receive direction
module performs operations such as OTU1 framing and decoding of FEC. Then, the module
sends out one channel of ODU1 signals to the backplane for service cross-connection.
Module Function
module also grooms the electrical signals between the LQMS and the board in the
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
657
paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service
signals are Any/ODU1 signals.
module also grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group
through the backplane. The grooming service signals are Any/ODU1 signals.
payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors Any
performance.
13.18.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LQMS board.
Figure 13-104 shows the front panel of the LQMS board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
658
Figure 13-104 Front panel of the LQMS board
LQMS
LQMS
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
R
X
2
T
X
3
R
X
3
T
X
4
R
X
4
O
U
T
I
N
T
X
1
R
X
1
T
X
2

Indicators
Interfaces
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
659
Table 13-215 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LQMS board
multiplexer board.
multiplexer board.

Laser Hazard Level
13.18.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one LQMS board.
Table 13-216 shows the valid slots for the TN11LQMS board.
Table 13-216 Valid slots for TN11LQMS board
Product Valid Slots

Table 13-217 shows the valid slots for the TN12LQMS board.
Table 13-217 Valid slots for TN12LQMS board
Product Valid Slots

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
660
13.18.7 Characteristic Code for the LQMS
Code for OTUs.
Table 13-218 Mapping between the physical ports on the LQMS board and the port numbers
IN/OUT 1
TX1/RX1 3
TX2/RX2 4
TX3/RX3 5
TX4/RX4 6

NOTE
Logical Ports
Figure 13-105 and Figure 13-106 show the application model of the LQMS board. Table
13-219 describes the meaning of each port.
Figure 13-105 Port diagram of the TN11LQMS/TN12LQMS board (LQM Mode)
1(IN1/OUT1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
WDM-side
optical module
Cross-connect
module
Service
processing
module
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
661

NOTE
TN11LQMS: The optical paths of internal logical port are 201 (LP/LP)-1 to 201 (LP/LP)-4.
TN12LQMS (LQM Mode): The optical paths of internal logical port are 201 (ClientLP/ClientLP)-1 to 201
(ClientLP/ClientLP)-4.
Figure 13-106 Port diagram of the TN12LQMS board (NS1 Mode)
WDM side
51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-1
51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-1
1(IN1/OUT1)-1
WDM-side
optical module
Cross-connect
module
Service
processing
module

Table 13-219 Description of NM port of the LQMS board
RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4 These ports correspond to the client-side optical
interfaces.
ClientLP Internal logical port. The optical paths are
ODU1LP Internal logical port.
IN/OUT These ports correspond to the WDM-side optical
interfaces.

the transmit end.
l For each LQMS board, the number of timeslots occupied by all services should not exceed
16.
l For FC200, FICON Express, OC-48, STM-16, OTU1, and HD-SDI services, timeslots can
be configured only in channel 1 of the LQMS board.
GE 7
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
662
FE 1
OTU1 16
STM-1 1
STM-4 4
STM-16 16
OC-3 1
OC-12 4
OC-48 16
FC100 6
FC200 12
FICON 6
FICON Express 12
HD-SDI 11
DVB-ASI 2
SDI 3
ESCON 2
FDDI 1

If the LQMS board is used to transmit services, set Board Mode in Configuration > WDM
interfaces on the U2000. The valid values of the board mode field are LQM Mode and NS1
Mode.
NOTE
The TN11LQMS board does not require the configuration of the board mode. The electrical cross-connect
services of the TN11LQMS are created in the same way as the electrical cross-connect services of the
TN12LQMS in the LQM mode.
LQM Mode:
can be created.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
663
Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the
LQMS board (create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board),
as shown by and in Figure 13-107.
Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the LQMS board and the
3
services accessed from the client side of the LQMS board are cross-connected to the
port of the LQMS board, as shown by
4
services accessed from the client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM
side of the LQMS board for protection and inter-board service convergence.)
NOTE
Only the first optical path of ClientLP ports supports OTU1 services.
l Create the cross-connection between the ClientLP port of the LQMS board and the ClientLP
port of other boards, as shown by
5
accessed from the WDM side of the LQMS board are cross-connected to the WDM side
of other board for the grooming of the WDM-side services.)
l The two paths of the ClientLP port are respectively connected to the IN/OUT ports. There
is no need for configuration on the U2000.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
664
Figure 13-107 Cross-connection diagram of the LQMS board
3
4
1
2
2
3 4
1
5
3(RX1/TX1)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
5
3(RX1/TX1)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
Client side
WDM side
Client side
WDM side
Other board
LQMS
LQMS board
The client side of the LQMS board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
The WDM side of the LQMS board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
TN11TQM / TN12TQM

NOTE
The OptiX OSN 8800 supports only the cross-connections shown by and in Figure 13-107.
NS1 Mode (Supported only by the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800):
l Create the cross-connection between the ODU1LP port of the LQMS board and the
ClientLP port of other boards shown in Figure 13-108.
l The four paths of the ODU1LP port are respectively connected to the IN/OUT ports. There
is no need for configuration on the U2000.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
665
Figure 13-108 Cross-connection diagram of the LQMS board
51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
Client side
WDM side
WDM side
Other board
LQMS
The WDM side of the LQMS board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
Other board TN11ND2 / TN12ND2 / TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN51NQ2 / TN52NQ2 /
TN54NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN11NS2 / TN12NS2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 /
TN12LQMS (NS1 Mode) / TN54NPO2 / TN55NPO2 / TN54ENQ2 / TN12ELQX / TN12PTQX

For parameters of LQMS, refer to Table 13-220.
Table 13-220 LQMS parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
Optical Interface
Name
- Sets and queryies the optical interface
name.
are supported.
Default: Used
the occupancy status of the current channel
of a board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
666
Optical Interface
Loopback
Outloop
Service Type None, Any, DVB-ASI,
SDI, ESCON, FC-100,
FC-200, FDDI, FE,
FICON, FICON
Express, GE, GE(GFP-
T), HD-SDI, OC-3,
OC-12, OC-48, OTU-1,
STM-1, STM-4,
STM-16
Default: None
NOTE
Only the TN12LQMS supports Any, SDI,
FDDI, HD-SDI, and OTU-1 services.
NOTE
encapsulation format is GFP-F; when Service
Type is GE(GFP-T), the encapsulation format
is GFP-T. The value GE(GFP-T) is
recommended.
ends must be encapsulated in the same format.
Client Service
Bearer Rate (Mbit/
s)
100 to 2200
Default: 0
board.
NOTE
Only TN12LQMS supports this parameter.
information.
Default:
l WDM side: On
l Client side: Off
status of a board.
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
Default: Disabled
Mode
NOTE
Only TN12LQMS supports this parameter.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
667
Default: Enabled
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
Tunable
Wavelength Range
Planned
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.100
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.170
to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /
board.
Default: C
wavelength.
Max. Packet
Length
1518 to 9600
Default: 9600
Ethernet Working
Mode
Auto-Negotiation,
1000M Full-Duplex
Duplex
The Ethernet Working Mode parameter
sets and queries the working mode of the
Ethernet.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
668
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
Disabled.
NOTE
Only the TN12LQMS supports this parameter.
SD Trigger
Condition
None, B1_SD,
OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None
resides.
Default: Disabled
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
Board Mode LQM Mode, NS1 Mode
Default: LQM Mode
Specifies the board mode depending on the
service application scenario.
NOTE
This parameter is only available for
TN12LQMS.
See D.2 Board Mode (WDM Interface)

13.18.11 LQMS Specifications
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
669
Bo
ard
Client-Side
Fixed
Optical
Module
Client-Side
Pluggable Optical
Module
WDM-Side Fixed
Optical Module
WDM-Side
Pluggable
Optical
Module
TN
11L
QM
S
N/A I-16-2 km
S-16.1-15 km
L-16.1-40 km
L-16.2-80 km
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.5 km
1000 BASE-LX-10 km
1000 BASE-LX-40 km
1000 BASE-ZX-80 km
(eSFP CWDM)-40 km
(eSFP CWDM)-80 km
12800 ps/nm-C Band-
Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
12800 ps/nm-C Band-
Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
6500 ps/nm-C Band-
Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
3200 ps/nm-C Band-
Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
12800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
6400 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD (Four
Channels-Tunable)
1600 ps/nm-CWDM
Band-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
N/A
TN
12L
QM
S
N/A I-16-2 km
S-16.1-15 km
L-16.1-40 km
L-16.2-80 km
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.5 km
1000 BASE-LX-10 km
1000 BASE-LX-40 km
1000 BASE-ZX-80 km
(eSFP CWDM)-40 km
(eSFP CWDM)-80 km
(eSFP DWDM)-120 km
12800 ps/nm-C Band-
Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
12800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
6400 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD (Four
Channels-Tunable)
N/A

NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
670
NOTE
point.
NOTE
module.
Optical
Module
Type
I-16-2 km S-16.1-15
km
L-16.1-40
km
L-16.2-80
km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Optical
source type
- MLM SLM SLM SLM
Target
transmission
distance
- 2 km (1.2 mi.) 15 km (9.3
mi.)
40 km (24.9
mi.)
80 km (49.7
mi.)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -3 0 3 3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -10 -5 -2 -2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
671
Optical
Module
Type
I-16-2 km S-16.1-15
km
L-16.1-40
km
L-16.2-80
km
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm N/A 1 1 1
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB N/A 30 30 30
Eye pattern
mask
- G.957-compliant
G.959.1-compliant
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN APD APD
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1270 to 1580 1270 to 1580 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -18 -18 -27 -28
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm -3 0 -9 -9
Maximum
reflectance
dB -27 -27 -27 -27

NOTE
NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
672
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.
5 km
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Target
transmission
distance
- 0.5 km (0.3
mi.)
10 km (6.2
mi.)
40 km (24.9
mi.)
80 km (49.7
mi.)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -2.5 -3 0 5
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -9.5 -9 -5 -2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 9 9 9 9
Eye pattern
mask
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN PIN PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -17 -20 -20 -23
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm 0 -3 -3 -3

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
673
NOTE
STM-1, OC-3, FE, or DVB-ASI signals.
GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
wavelengths)
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km
(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Target transmission
distance
- 40 km (24.9 mi.) 80 km (49.7 mi.)
range
nm 1471 to 1611 1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 5 5
power
dBm 0 0
Central wavelength
deviation
nm 6.5 6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 1.0 1.0
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30 30
G.959.1-compliant
range
nm 1270 to 1620 1270 to 1620
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm -3 -9
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
674
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km
(eSFP CWDM)-80
km

NOTE
wavelengths)
km
Target transmission
distance
- 120 km (74.6 mi.)
power
dBm 4
power
dBm 0
width
nm 1
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
675
km
Receiver type - APD
range
nm N/A

Optical
Module Type
12800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Fixed
Waveleng
th-NRZ-
PIN
12800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Fixed
Waveleng
th-NRZ-
APD
6500 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Fixed
Waveleng
th-NRZ-
PIN
3200 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Fixed
Waveleng
th-NRZ-
APD
12800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Waveleng
th-NRZ-
APD
6400 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Waveleng
th-NRZ-
APD
(Four
Channels
-Tunable)
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm -1 -1 3 3 3 3
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm -5 -5 -2 -2 -2 -2
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB 10 10 8.2 8.2 10 8.2
Center
frequency
THz 192.10 to 196.00
Center
frequency
deviation
GHz 10
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
676
Optical
Module Type
12800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Fixed
Waveleng
th-NRZ-
PIN
12800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Fixed
Waveleng
th-NRZ-
APD
6500 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Fixed
Waveleng
th-NRZ-
PIN
3200 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Fixed
Waveleng
th-NRZ-
APD
12800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Waveleng
th-NRZ-
APD
6400 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Waveleng
th-NRZ-
APD
(Four
Channels
-Tunable)
Maximum -20
dB spectral
width
nm 0.2 0.2 0.5 0.5 0.2 0.5
Minimum side
mode
suppression ratio
dB 35 35 30 30 35 35
Dispersion
tolerance
ps/nm 12800 12800 6500 3200 12800 6400
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1200 to 1650 1300 to
1575
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -18 -28 -18 -28 -28 -28
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm 0 -9 0 -9 -9 -9
Maximum
reflectance
dB -27 -27 -27 -27 -27 -27

Wavelength-NRZ-APD
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
677
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
power
dBm 5
power
dBm 2.5
Central wavelength
deviation
nm 6.5
width
nm 1
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30
Receiver type - APD

(8.7 in.)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
678
Power Consumption
Boar
d
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at
55C (131F) (W)
TN1
1LQ
MS
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
56.3 64.5
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
Wavelength-NRZ-APD (Four
Channels-Tunable)
60.4 66.4
TN1
2LQ
MS
- 29 32.3

13.19 LSC
LSC: 100Gbit/s wavelength conversion board
The available functional version of the LSC board is TN12.
Huawei office.
Boar
d
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
TN12
LSC
Y Y Y Y Y N

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
679
Variants
Table 13-227 Available variants of the TN12LSC board
Variant WDM-Side Fixed Optical Module FEC Encoding
T01 40000 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK(HFEC, RZ)-PIN
HFEC
ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC. RZ)-PIN
SDFEC

13.19.2 Application
The LSC board is a wavelength conversion board and applies to coherent systems. In the receive
direction, the board receives one 100GE optical signal from the client equipment, maps the
optical signal into an OTU4 signal, and converts the OTU4 signal into a standard WDM
wavelength.
For the position of the LSC board in the WDM system, see Figure 13-109.
Figure 13-109 Position of the LSC board in the WDM system
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
100GE
LSC
1
O
D
U
4
1
O
T
U
4
LSC
1
O
T
U
4
1
O
D
U
4
100GE

The LSC board is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and to provide OTN interfaces
and ESC.
For detailed functions and features, see Table 13-228.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
680
Table 13-228 Functions and features of the LSC board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function LSC converts signal as follows:
l 1x 100GE<->1x OTU4
Client-side
service type
100GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 103.125 Gbit/s.
l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing compliant with
ITU-T G.709.
l Supports TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU4.
WDM
specification
Tunable
wavelength
function
The board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the
range of 80 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 50 GHz.
PRBS test
function
LPT function Not supported
FEC encoding Supports HFEC and SDFEC on the WDM side.
NOTE
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
power of the laser.
l Supports the monitoring of CD and PMD performance.
Regeneration
board
WDM-side signals from this board can be regenerated by another
TN11LTX or TN54NS4
Optical-layer
ASON
Supported
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
681
Function and
Feature
Description
Electrical-
layer ASON
Not supported
Protection
scheme
Loopback Client side Inloop Supported
Outloop
WDM side Inloop Supported
Outloop
Protocols or
standards
compliance
Protocols or standards
for transparent
transmission (non-
performance
monitoring)
IEEE 802.3ba
for service processing
(performance
monitoring)
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1

The LSC board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
Figure 13-110 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LSC.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
682
Figure 13-110 Functional modules and signal flow of the LSC board
SCC
WDM side

Client-
side
optical
module
CPU
Control
Client side
RX
TX

O/E
E/O
E/O
O/E
Backplane
(controlled by the
SCC)
OUT
IN
WDM-side
optical
module Signal processing module
Communication Memory
Fuse
Required
voltage
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from the backplane
100GE
Service
encapsulation
and mapping
module
OTN
processing
module

Signal Flow
In the signal flow of the LSC board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LSC to the WDM side
of the LSC, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
The client-side optical module receives one channel of the optical signal from client
equipment through the RX interface, and performs O/E conversion.
After performing the O/E conversion, the client-side optical module sends the electrical
signal to the signal processing module. Then, the signal processing module performs
encapsulation, OTN framing, and HFEC/SDFEC coding and outputs one channel of OTU4
signal to the WDM-side optical module.
After receiving the OTU4 signal, the WDM-side optical module performs E/O conversion,
generates OTU4 signal at DWDM wavelength that complies with ITU-T G.694.1, and then
outputs the OTU4 signal through the OUT optical interfaces.
l Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of standard DWDM optical signal
compliant with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN optical interface. The WDM-side optical
module then converts the OTU4 optical signal into electrical signal.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
683
After the O/E conversion, the electrical signal is sent to the signal processing module, which
performs OTU4 framing, HFEC/SDFEC decoding, demapping, and decapsulation for the
signal and then outputs one channel of the client-side electrical signal.
The channel of the client-side electrical signal is sent to the client-side optical module,
which converts the electrical signal into optical signal and then outputs the optical signal
through the TX optical interface.
Module Function
Client-side receiver: performs O/E conversion for one channel of 100GE optical signal.
Client-side transmitter: converts one channel of electrical signal into one channel of
100GE optical signal.
WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of the OTU4 optical signal.
WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signal to
OTU4 optical signal.
The module consists of a service encapsulation and mapping module and an OTN
processing module.
Encapsulates one channel of 100GE signal, maps the signal into the payload of an OTU4
frame, and performs the reverse process. The service encapsulation and mapping
module supports monitoring of 100GE signal performance.
Frames OTU4 signal, processes overheads in OTU4 signal, and performs the HFEC/
SDFEC encoding and decoding.
13.19.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LSC board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
684
Figure 13-111 show the front panel of the TN12LSC board.
Figure 13-111 Front panel of the TN12LSC board
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
O
U
T
I
N
LSC
T
X
R
X
LSC
G.657A2 FIBER ONLY
G.657A2
G.657A2 FIBER ONLY
G.657A2

NOTE
To prevent the cabinet door from squeezing fibers, the board can only use G.657A2 fibers.
Indicators
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
685
Interfaces
Table 13-229 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LSC board
multiplexer board.
multiplexer board.
TX LC Transmit service signals to client equipment.
RX LC Receive service signals from client equipment.

Laser Hazard Level
13.19.6 Valid Slots
Four slots house one TN12LSC board.
Table 13-230 shows the valid slots for the TN12LSC board.
Table 13-230 Valid slots for the TN12LSC board
Product Valid Slots
IU31, IU35-IU39, IU45-IU49, IU53-IU57,
IU61-IU65
IU33
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
686
Product Valid Slots

NOTE
The LSC board occupies four slots. The rear connector for connecting the LSC board to the backplane is
located in the left slot of the four slots. Therefore, the slot number for the LSC board is displayed as the
left slot of the four slots on the NMS.
For example, if the LSC board is housed in the slots IU1, IU2, IU3, and IU4, then the slot number for the
LSC board is displayed as IU1 on the NMS.
This section describes how the physical ports of the board are displayed on the NMS.
Table 13-231 Mapping between the physical ports on the LSC board and the port numbers
IN/OUT 1
TX/RX 3

NOTE
For parameters of LSC, refer to Table 13-232.
Table 13-232 LSC parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
687
Optical Interface
Name
are supported.
Default: Used
board.
Service Type 100GE
Default: 100GE
the client side.
Optical Interface
Loopback
Non-Loopback,
Inloop, Outloop
Default: Non-
Loopback
Default:
l WDM side: On
l Client side: Off
status of a board.
more information.
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
board are lost.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
688
ALS Auxiliary
Condition
FW_Defect,
BW_Client_R_LOS
,
BW_WDM_Defect,
FW_OPUk_CSF
Default: FW_Defect
ALS.
side transmitter of the upstream board
this parameter to BW_WDM_Defect.
FW_OPUk_CSF.
Hold-off Time of
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
0s, 100ms, 200ms,
300ms, 400ms,
500ms, 600ms,
700ms, 800ms,
900ms, 1s, 1100ms,
1200ms, 1300ms,
1400ms, 1500ms,
1600ms, 1700ms,
1800ms, 1900ms, 2s
Default: 0s
related lasers.
Hold-off Time of
Automatic Laser
Turn-On
0s, 100ms, 200ms,
300ms, 400ms,
500ms, 600ms,
700ms, 800ms,
900ms, 1s, 1100ms,
1200ms, 1300ms,
1400ms, 1500ms,
1600ms, 1700ms,
1800ms, 1900ms, 2s
Default: 0s
related lasers.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
689
Default: Enabled
optical interface.
FEC Mode HFEC, SDFEC Queries the FEC mode of the current optical
interface.
Receive
Wavelength
l C:
1/1529.16/196.0
50 to
80/1560.61/192.
100
Default: /
Set Receive Wavelength of a board. The
value of the Receive Wavelength is as
follows:
l When the receive wavelength of the board
is the same as the transmit wavelength of
the local board, use the default value,
which indicates keeping the receive
wavelength the same as the transmit
wavelength of the local board
automatically.
is different from the transmit wavelength
of the local board, the value of this
parameter must be the same as the transmit
wavelength of the peer board; otherwise,
services are affected.
NOTE
In the case of ASON services, this parameter must
be set to the default value.
Receive Band Type C
Default: C
The Receive Band Typeparameter sets the
receive band type of a board.
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
Tunable
Wavelength Range
on the board.
Planned
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.0
50 to
80/1560.61/192.
100
Default: /
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
690
Planned Band Type C
Default: C
Default: Disabled
status of a board.
Dispersion
Compensation
Value
- Queries the dispersion compensation value of
the board.
PMD Threshold
(ps)
- Queries the PMD threshold of the board.
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
This parameter is reserved for future use.

13.19.9 LSC Specifications
Bo
ard
Client-Side
Fixed
Optical
Module
Client-Side
Pluggable Optical
Module
WDM-Side Fixed
Optical Module
WDM-Side
Pluggable
Optical
Module
TN
12L
SC
N/A 100GBASE-1010G-
10 km(CFP)
100GBASE-LR4-10
km(CFP)
40000 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK(HFEC, RZ)-
PIN
55000 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC,
RZ)-PIN
N/A

NOTE
A 100GBASE-1010G-10km optical module cannot connect to an IEEE 100GBASE-SR10 module.
NOTE
point.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
691
Optical Module Type 100G BASE-LR4-10 km
(CFP)
Signaling Speed per Lane Gbit/s 25.78125
Signaling Speed Accuracy ppm -100 to 100
Minimum Lane Center
Wavelength
nm 1294.53
1299.02
1303.54
1308.09
Maximum Lane Center
Wavelength
nm 1296.59
1301.09
1305.63
1310.19
Total Average Launch Power
(Min)
dBm 1.7
(Max)
dBm 10.5
Transmit OMA per Lane
(Min)
dBm -1.3
(Max)
dBm 4.5
Average Launch Power per
Lane (Min)
dBm -4.3
Lane (Max)
dBm 4.5
Optical Extinction Ratio
(Min)
dB 4
Side Mode Suppression
Ratio (Min)
dB 30
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
692
(CFP)
Receiver type - PIN
Minimum Lane Center
Wavelength
nm 1294.53
1299.02
1303.54
1308.09
Maximum Lane Center
Wavelength
nm 1296.59
1301.09
1305.63
1310.19
Average Receiver Power per
Lane (Min)
dBm -10.6
Lane (Max)
dBm 4.5
(OMA) per Lane
dBm 4.5
Receiver Sensitivity (OMA)
per Lane
dBm -8.6
NOTE
The OMA values are designed to ensure normal equipment operation. They are not provided for equipment
commissioning. In practical, equipment commissioning is performed based on the average receiver power
per lane and total average launched power. It is recommended that the total average launched power be
used as the reference for equipment commissioning.

Optical Module Type 100G BASE-1010G-10
km (CFP)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
693
km (CFP)
Minimum Lane Center
Wavelength
nm 1521
1529
1537
1545
1553
1561
1569
1577
1585
1593
Maximum Lane Center
Wavelength
nm 1525
1533
1541
1549
1557
1565
1573
1581
1589
1597
(Min)
dBm 4.2
(Max)
dBm 13.5
Lane (Min)
dBm -5.8
Lane (Max)
dBm 3.5
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
694
km (CFP)
(Min)
dBm -2.8
(Typ)
dBm -0.8
(Max)
dBm 3.5
(Min)
dB 2.5
Ratio (Min)
dB 30
Receiver type - PIN
Minimum Lane Center
Wavelength
nm 1521
1529
1537
1545
1553
1561
1569
1577
1585
1593
Maximum Lane Center
Wavelength
nm 1525
1533
1541
1549
1557
1565
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
695
km (CFP)
1573
1581
1589
1597
Receiver Power per Lane
(Min)
dBm -10.8
(Max)
dBm 3.5
(OMA) per Lane
dBm 3.5
per Lane
dBm -8.8
NOTE

Table 13-235 WDM-side fixed optical module specifications (tunable wavelengths, HFEC, RZ)
Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK(HFEC,
RZ)-PIN
Line code format - ePDM-QPSK(HFEC, RZ)
power
dBm 0
power
dBm -5
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
696
Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK(HFEC,
RZ)-PIN
Minimum extinction ratio dB N/A
width
nm 0.35
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35
Dispersion tolerance (back-
to-back)
ps/nm 40000
Receiver type - PIN

Table 13-236 WDM-side fixed optical module specifications (tunable wavelengths, SDFEC,
RZ)
Optical Module Type 55000ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC,
RZ)-PIN
Line code format - ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC, RZ)
power
dBm 0
power
dBm -5
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
697
Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC,
RZ)-PIN
width
nm 0.4
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35
to-back)
ps/nm 55000
Receiver type - PIN

l Dimensions of front panel (H x W x D): 264.6 mm (10.4 in.) x 101.6 mm (4.0 in.) x 220
mm (8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Board WDM-Side
Module
Typical Power
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at
55C (131F) (W)
TN12LSC 40000 ps/nm-C
Band-Tunable
Wavelength-ePDM-
QPSK(HFEC, RZ)-
PIN
240 265
55000 ps/nm-C
Band-Tunable
Wavelength-ePDM-
QPSK(SDFEC, RZ)-
PIN
255 285

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
698
13.20 LSQ
LSQ: 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion board
Only one functional version of the LSQ board is available, that is, TN11.
Huawei office.
Boar
d
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
TN11
LSQ
Y Y Y Y Y N

Variants
Table 13-237 Available variants of the TN11LSQ board
Variant WDM-Side Fixed Optical Module
T01 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DQPSK-PIN
T02 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODB-PIN

13.20.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LSQ board converts between one channel of STM-256/
OC-768/OTU3 signals and OTU3 signals that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 Recommendations.
For the position of the LSQ board in the WDM system, see Figure 13-112.
Figure 13-112 Position of the LSQ board in the WDM system
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
STM-256/
OC-768/
OTU3
LSQ
1
O
D
U
3
1
O
T
U
3
LSQ
1
O
T
U
3
1
O
D
U
3
STM-256/
OC-768/
OTU3
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
RX
TX RX
TX
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
699

The LSQ board is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and to provide OTN interfaces
and ESC.
Table 13-238 Functions and features of the LSQ board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function LSQ converts signals as follows:
l 1x STM-256/OC-768/OTU3<->1x OTU3
Client-side
service type
to the ITU-T G.709.
WDM
specification
Tunable
wavelength
function
PRBS test
function
Supports the PRBS function on the client side.
NOTE
The PRBS function of LSQ on the client side is supported only when the client-side
service type is STM-256/OC-768.
FEC encoding l Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on
the client side, only when the client side service type is OTU3.
the WDM side.
NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
700
Function and
Feature
Description
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Poisson mode or Bursty mode) to help locate
line failures.
power of the laser.
Regeneration
board
TN54NS3
Optical-layer
ASON
Supported
Electrical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Protection
scheme
Outloop
Outloop
Protocols or
standards
compliance
Protocols or
standards for
transparent
transmission
(non-performance
monitoring)
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
701
Function and
Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards for
service
processing
(performance
monitoring)
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1

The LSQ board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
Figure 13-113 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LSQ.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
702
Figure 13-113 Functional modules and signal flow of the LSQ board
WDM side
Client-side
optical
module
OUT
Client side
RX
TX IN
WDM-side
optical
module
SDH/SONET
encapsulation and
mapping module
O/E
E/O
E/O
O/E
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
SCC
OTN
processing
module
Client-side OTN
processing module

Signal Flow
In the signal flow of the LSQ board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LSQ to the WDM side
of the LSQ, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
The client-side optical module receives one channel of the optical signals from client
After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. OTU3
signals are sent to the client-side OTN processing module for performance monitoring.
Other types of signals are sent to different encapsulation and mapping modules for
encapsulation and mapping. In the end, operations such as the OTN framing and FEC/
AFEC encoding processing are performed. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU3
electrical signals.
l Receive direction
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
703
and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs one channel of STM-256/OC-768/
OTU3 electrical signals.
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the one channel of electrical
signals, and then outputs one channel of client-side optical signals through the TX optical
interface.
Module Function
Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of STM-256/OC-768/OTU3 optical
signals.
STM-256/OC-768/OTU3 optical signals.
The module consists of an SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, a client-side
OTN processing module, and an OTN processing module.
Monitors OTN performance.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
704
13.20.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LSQ board.
Figure 13-114 shows the front panel of the LSQ board.
Figure 13-114 Front panel of the LSQ board

Indicators
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
705
Interfaces
Table 13-239 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LSQ board
multiplexer board.
multiplexer board.

Laser Hazard Level
13.20.6 Valid Slots
Two slots houses one LSQ board.
Table 13-240 shows the valid slots for the LSQ board.
Table 13-240 Valid slots for the LSQ board
Product Valid Slots
IU34, IU36-IU42, IU46-IU52, IU54-IU60,
IU62-IU68
IU36

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
706
The rear connector of the LSQ is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack.
Therefore, the slot number of the LSQ board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one
of the two slots.
For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the LSQ board, the slot number of the LSQ board
displayed on the NM is IU2.
Table 13-241 Mapping between the physical ports on the LSQ board and the port numbers
IN/OUT 1
TX/RX 3

NOTE
For parameters of LSQ, refer to Table 13-242.
Table 13-242 LSQ parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
Optical Interface
Name
name.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
707
Default: Used
channel of a board.
Optical Interface
Loopback
Outloop
Service Type None, OC-768, OTU-3,
STM-256
Default: STM-256
Default:
l WDM side: On
l Client side: Off
status of a board.
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
Default: Enabled
FEC Mode FEC, AFEC
Default: AFEC
AFEC Grade 1, 2, 3
Default: 3
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
708
Receive Wavelength l C:
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.100
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.170
to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /
follows:
l When the receive wavelength of the
board is the same as the transmit
wavelength of the local board, use the
default value, which indicates keeping
the receive wavelength the same as the
transmit wavelength of the local board
automatically.
board is different from the transmit
wavelength of the local board, the
value of this parameter must be the
same as the transmit wavelength of the
peer board; otherwise, services are
affected.
NOTE
In the case of ASON services, this parameter
must be set to the default value.
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
Tunable
Wavelength Range
Planned
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.100
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.170
to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /
board.
NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
709
Default: C
wavelength.
NOTE
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
Disabled.
SD Trigger
Condition
None, B1_SD,
OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None
resides.
Default: Disabled
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

13.20.9 LSQ Specifications
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
710
Bo
ard
Client-Side Fixed
Optical Module
Client-Side
Pluggable Optical
Module
WDM-Side Fixed
Optical Module
WDM-Side
Pluggable
Optical
Module
TN
11L
SQ
40G Transponder N/A 800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
ODB-PIN
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
DQPSK-PIN
N/A

NOTE
point.
Client-Side Fixed Optical Module
Table 13-243 Client-side fixed optical module specifications
Optical Module Type 40G Transponder
Maximum mean launched power dBm 3
Minimum mean launched power dBm 0
Minimum side mode suppression ratio dB 35
Receiver type - PIN

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
711
Optical Module
Type
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
ODB-PIN
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
DQPSK-PIN
Line code format - ODB DQPSK
Operating frequency
range
THz 192.10 to 196.05 192.10 to 196.05
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 0 0
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm -5 -5
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB 8.2 N/A
Center frequency
deviation
GHz 2.5 2.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 0.6 N/A
Maximum -3 dB
spectral width
nm N/A 0.3
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35 35
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm -800 to 800 -800 to 800
Operating
wavelength range
nm 1529 to 1561 1529 to 1561
Receiver sensitivity,
EOL (FEC on)
dBm -16 -16
Minimum receiver
overload (FEC on)
dBm 0 0
Maximum
reflectance
dB -27 -27

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
712
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at
55C (131F) (W)
TN11LS
Q
Wavelength-ODB-PIN
75.0 82.0
Wavelength-DQPSK-PIN
82.0 89.0

13.21 LSX
LSX: 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion board
The available functional versions of the LSX board are TN11, TN12, TN13, and TN14.
Huawei office.
Boar
d
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
TN11
LSX
N N N N Y Y
TN12
LSX
Y Y N Y Y Y
TN13
LSX
Y Y Y Y Y Y
TN14
LSX
Y Y Y Y Y Y

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
713
Variants
The difference between the LSX board variants lies in the WDM-side optical module.
Table 13-245 Available variants of the TN11LSX board
Variants WDM-Side Fixed Optical Module
01M02 800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN (01M02 for even
wavelengths and 01M03 for odd wavelengths)
01M03
01M04 800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
T02 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
T03 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD
T04 4800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODB-APD
T05 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-(D)RZ-PIN

01M03

Variants WDM-Side Optical Module
T01 Fixed Optical Module: 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
T02 Fixed Optical Module: 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-(D)RZ-PIN
B The variant is equipped with pluggable optical modules. For details 13.21.10 LSX
Specifications.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
714
01M02

l Function:
Board FEC Encoding Client-side services Ethernet
Service
Mapping
Mode
WDM-Side
Pluggable
Optical
Module
OTU2e FC1200
TN11LSX FEC/AFEC N N l Bit
Transparent
Mapping
(11.1G)
l MAC
Transparent
Mapping
(10.7G)
l Bit
Transparent
Mapping
(10.7G)
N
TN12LSX FEC/AFEC N Y l Bit
Transparent
Mapping
(11.1G)
l Bit
Transparent
Mapping
(10.7G)
N
TN13LSX FEC/AFEC-2 Y Y l Bit
Transparent
Mapping
(11.1G)
l MAC
Transparent
Mapping
(10.7G)
Y
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
715
Board FEC Encoding Client-side services Ethernet
Service
Mapping
Mode
WDM-Side
Pluggable
Optical
Module
OTU2e FC1200
TN14LSX FEC/AFEC-2 Y Y l Bit
Transparent
Mapping
(11.1G)
l MAC
Transparent
Mapping
(10.7G)
N

l Specification:
For the specification of each version, see 13.21.10 LSX Specifications.
Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11LSX TN12LSX The TN12LSX can be created as TN11LSX on the NMS. The former can
TN12LSX functions as the TN11LSX.
NOTE
After the substitution, the TN12LSX board supports only Bit Transparent Mapping
(11.1G) for 10GE LAN services.
A board with PIN as the receiver type cannot substitute for a board with APD as the
receiver type, because their ranges of received optical power are different.
TN13LSX The TN13LSX can be created as TN11LSX on the NMS. The former can
NOTE
When both the receive board and transmit board adopt the FEC code pattern, the
substitution applies; when both the receive board and transmit board adopt the AFEC
code pattern, the substitution does not apply.
receiver type, because their ranges of receive optical power are different.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
716
Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
NOTE
TN12LSX TN13LSX The TN13LSX can be created as TN12LSX on the NMS. The former can
NOTE
NOTE
TN13LSX/
TN14LSX
None -

13.21.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LSX board maps one channel of 10 Gbit/s service
signals into OTU2 or OTU2e signals and performs conversion between the 10 Gbit/s service
signal and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations.
For the position of the LSX board in the WDM system, see Figure 13-115.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
717
Figure 13-115 Position of the LSX board in the WDM system
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
10GE LAN/
10GE WAN/
STM-64/
OC-192/
OTU2/
OTU2e/
FC1200
10GE LAN/
10GE WAN/
STM-64/
OC-192/
OTU2/
OTU2e/
FC1200
LSX
1
O
D
U
2
/
O
D
U
2
e
1
O
T
U
2
/
O
T
U
2
e
LSX
1
O
T
U
2
/
O
T
U
2
e
1
O
D
U
2
/
O
D
U
2
e
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
RX
TX RX
TX

NOTE
The FC1200 service is only supported by the TN12LSX /TN13LSX/TN14LSX.
When an XFP module is used as a WDM-side module on the TN13LSX board, the TN13LSX board does
not support FC1200.
The OTU2e service is only supported by the TN13LSX/TN14LSX.
The LSX board is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and to provide OTN interfaces
and ESC.
Table 13-249 Functions and features of the LSX board
Function
and
Feature
Description
Basic
function
LSX converts signals as follows:
l 1 x 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2 <-> 1 x OTU2
l 1 x FC1200/10GE LAN/OTU2e <-> 1 x OTU2e
Client-side
service type
NOTE
The FC1200 service is only supported by the TN12LSX /TN13LSX/TN14LSX.
When an XFP module is used as a WDM-side module on the TN13LSX board, the
TN13LSX board does not support FC1200.
The OTU2e service is only supported by the TN13LSX/TN14LSX.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
718
Function
and
Feature
Description
OTN
function
l Provides the OTU2/OTU2e interface on WDM-side.
the ITU-T G.709.
WDM
specification
Tunable
wavelength
function
ESC
function
Supported
PRBS test
function
NOTE
The PRBS function on the client side is only supported when the client-side service type
is STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e.
LPT
function
is 10GE LAN.
FEC
encoding
TN11LSX/TN12LSX:
client side, only when the client side service type is OTU2.
with ITU-T G.709.
l Supports advanced forward error correction (AFEC) on the WDM side
TN13LSX/TN14LSX:
client side, only when the client side service type is OTU2/OTU2e.
with ITU-T G.709.
l Supports advanced forward error correction (AFEC-2) on the WDM side
NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
719
Function
and
Feature
Description
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
power of the laser.
LAN).
Regeneratio
n board
l TN11LSX/TN12LSX:
TN11LSXR
l TN13LSX/TN14LSX:
ALS
function
IEEE
1588v2
Not supported
Physical
clock
When the board receives 10GE LAN services and the port mapping is Bit
Transparent Mapping (11.1 G) or is Bit Transparent Mapping (10.7 G) on its
client side, the board can support synchronous Ethernet transparent
transmission instead of synchronous Ethernet processing.
Optical-
layer ASON
Supported by the TN12LSX/TN13LSX/TN14LSX
Electrical-
layer ASON
Not supported
Protection
scheme
Ethernet
service
mapping
mode
l TN11LSX: Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), MAC Transparent Mapping
(10.7G), Bit Transparent Mapping(10.7G)
l TN12LSX: Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), Bit Transparent Mapping
(10.7G)
l TN13LSX/TN14LSX: Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), MAC
Transparent Mapping(10.7G)
Port MTU 9600 bytes.
Outloop Supported
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
720
Function
and
Feature
Description
Outloop Supported
Protocols or
standards
compliance
Protocols or
standards for
transparent
transmission
(non-
performance
monitoring)
IEEE 802.3ae
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
(FC-PI)
SW-3)
Protocols or
standards for
service
processing
(performance
monitoring)
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1

The LSX board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
721
Figure 13-116 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN11LSX.
Figure 13-117 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN12LSX/TN13LSX/
TN14LSX.
Figure 13-116 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11LSX board
WDM side
OUT
Client side
RX
TX IN
O/E
E/O
E/O
O/E
10GE LAN
encapsulation and
mapping module
SDH/SONET
encapsulation and
mapping module
Client-side OTN
processing module
Client-side
optical
module
WDM-side
optical
module
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
OTN
processing
module

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
722
Figure 13-117 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12LSX/TN13LSX/TN14LSX
board
WDM side
OUT
Client side
RX
TX IN
O/E
E/O
Client-side
optical
module
E/O
O/E
WDM-side
optical
module
10GE LAN
encapsulation and
mapping module
FC
encapsulation and
mapping module
SDH/SONET
encapsulation and
mapping module
Client-side OTN
processing module
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
OTN
processing
module

Signal Flow
In the signal flow of the LSX board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LSX to the WDM side
of the LSX, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
equipment through the RX optical interface, and performs O/E conversion.
After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. OTU2/
OTU2e signals are sent to the client-side OTN processing module for performance
monitoring. Other types of signals are sent to different encapsulation and mapping modules
for encapsulation and mapping. In the end, operations such as the OTN framing and FEC/
AFEC encoding processing are performed. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU2/
OTU2e electrical signals.
The OTU2/OTU2e signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/
O conversion, the module sends out OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM wavelengths
l Receive direction
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
723
DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN optical interface.
The module performs operations such as OTU2/OTU2e framing, decoding of FEC/AFEC,
demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs one channel of
OC-192/STM-64/10GE LAN/10GE WAN/OTU2/OTU2e/FC1200 electrical signals.
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of OC-192/STM-64/10GE LAN/
10GE WAN/OTU2/OTU2e/FC1200 electrical signals, and then outputs client-side optical
signals through the TX optical interface.
Module Function
Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OC-192/STM-64/10GE LAN/10GE
WAN/OTU2/OTU2e/FC1200 optical signals.
OC-192/STM-64/10GE LAN/10GE WAN/OTU2/OTU2e/FC1200 optical signals.
encapsulation and mapping module, client-side OTN processing module, FC encapsulation
and mapping module, and OTN processing module.
Encapsulates one channel of SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the OTU2/
OTU2e payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/
SONET performance monitoring function.
Encapsulates one channel of 10GE LAN signals and maps the signals into the OTU2/
OTU2e payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the 10GE
LAN performance monitoring function.
Encapsulates one channel of FC signals and maps the signals into the OTU2/OTU2e
payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the FC performance
monitoring function.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
724
13.21.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the LSX front panel.
Figure 13-118 and Figure 13-119 show the LSX front panel.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
725
Figure 13-118 Front panel of the TN11LSX/TN12LSX/TN13LSXT01/TN13LSXT02/
TN14LSX board

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
726
Figure 13-119 Front panel of the TN13LSXB board

Indicators
Interfaces
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
727
Table 13-250 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LSX board
multiplexer board.
multiplexer board.

Laser Hazard Level
13.21.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one LSX board.
Valid Slots
Table 13-251 shows the valid slots for the TN11LSX board.
Table 13-251 Valid slots for the TN11LSX board
Product Valid Slots

Table 13-252 shows the valid slots for the TN12LSX board.
Table 13-252 Valid slots for the TN12LSX board
Product Valid Slots

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
728
Table 13-253 shows the valid slots for the TN13LSX/TN14LSX board.
Table 13-253 Valid slots for the TN13LSX/TN14LSX board
Product Valid Slots

13.21.7 Characteristic Code for the LSX
Code for OTUs.
Table 13-254 Mapping between the physical ports on the LSX board and the port numbers
IN/OUT 1
TX/RX 3

NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
729
For parameters of LSX, refer to Table 13-255.
Table 13-255 LSX parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
Optical Interface
Name
are supported.
Default: Used
a board.
Optical Interface
Loopback
Outloop
Default: Non-
Loopback
10GE WAN,FC-1200,
OC-192, OTU-2,
OTU-2E, STM-64
Default: 10GE LAN
NOTE
Only TN12LSX/TN13LSX/TN14LSX support
the FC-1200 service.
Only TN 13LSX/TN14LSX support the
OTU-2E service.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
730
Port Mapping l TN11LSX: Bit
Transparent
Mapping(11.1G),
MAC Transparent
Mapping(10.7G),
Bit Transparent
Mapping(10.7G)
l TN12LSX: Bit
Transparent
Mapping(11.1G),
Bit Transparent
Mapping(10.7G)
l TN13LSX/
TN14LSX: Bit
Transparent
Mapping(11.1G),
MAC Transparent
Mapping(10.7G)
Default: Bit
Transparent Mapping
(11.1G)
queries the mapping mode of a port service.
Default:
l WDM side: On
l Client side: Off
status of a board.
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
Hold-off Time of
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
0s, 100ms, 200ms,
300ms, 400ms, 500ms,
600ms, 700ms, 800ms,
900ms, 1s, 1100ms,
1200ms, 1300ms,
1400ms, 1500ms,
1600ms, 1700ms,
1800ms, 1900ms, 2s
Default: 0s
service interruption to the point when ALS
automatically shuts down the related lasers.
NOTE
Only the TN13LSX/TN14LSX supports this
parameter.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
731
Hold-off Time of
Automatic Laser
Turn-On
0s, 100ms, 200ms,
300ms, 400ms, 500ms,
600ms, 700ms, 800ms,
900ms, 1s, 1100ms,
1200ms, 1300ms,
1400ms, 1500ms,
1600ms, 1700ms,
1800ms, 1900ms, 2s
Default: 0s
NOTE
parameter.
ALS Auxiliary
Condition
FW_Defect,
BW_Client_R_LOS,
BW_WDM_Defect,
FW_ODUk_CSF
Default: FW_Defect
triggering ALS.
the laser on the client-side transmitter of
the local board must be shut down. For
FW_Defect.
BW_Client_R_LOS.
upstream board must be shut down. For
BW_WDM_Defect.
the laser on the client-side transmitter of
the local board must be shut down. For
FW_OPUk_CSF.
Default: Disabled
Default: Enabled
forward error correction (FEC) function for
an optical interface.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
732
FEC Mode FEC, AFEC
Default: FEC
more information.
AFEC Grade 1, 2, 3
Default: 3
NOTE
parameter.
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
Tunable
Wavelength Range
Planned
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.10
0
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.17
0 to
18/1611.00/188.78
0
Default: /
board.
NOTE
Default: C
wavelength.
NOTE
SD Trigger
Condition
None, B1_SD,
OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None
resides.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
733
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing
is not required, set this parameter to
Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled.
NOTE
Default: Disabled
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
NOTE
Only TN13LSX/TN14LSX supports this
parameter.

13.21.10 LSX Specifications
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
734
Bo
ard
Client-
Side
Fixed
Optical
Module
Client-Side
Pluggable Optical
Module
WDM-Side Fixed
Optical Module
WDM-Side
Pluggable Optical
Module
TN
11L
SX
N/A 10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80 km
-0.3 km
800 ps/nm-C Band (odd
& even wavelengths)-
Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
1200 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
1200 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
4800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
ODB-APD
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
(D)RZ-PIN
N/A
TN
12L
SX
N/A 10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80 km
-0.3 km
Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
1200 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
1200 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
4800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
ODB-APD
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
(D)RZ-PIN
N/A
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
735
Bo
ard
Client-
Side
Fixed
Optical
Module
Client-Side
Pluggable Optical
Module
WDM-Side Fixed
Optical Module
WDM-Side
Pluggable Optical
Module
TN
13L
SX
N/A 10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80 km
-0.3 km
800 ps/nm-C Band
(Odd & Even
Wavelengths)-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN-XFP
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
(D)RZ-PIN
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
800 ps/nm-C Band
(Odd & Even
Wavelengths)-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN-XFP
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable
Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN-XFP
TN
14L
SX
N/A 10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80 km
-0.3 km
Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
(D)RZ-PIN
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
N/A

NOTE
NOTE
point.
NOTE
The 10 Gbit/s multirate 10 km module, 10 Gbit/s multirate 40 km module, and 10 Gbit/s multirate 80 km
module can be used to access OC-192, STM-64, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, FC1200, and OTU2/OTU2e
signals.
The 10 Gbit/s single-rate 0.3 km module can be used to access 10GE LAN and FC1200 signals.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
736
Optical
Module
Type
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80
km
10 Gbit/s
Single-
Rate-0.3 km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Optical
source type
- SLM SLM SLM MLM
Target
transmissio
n distance
- 10 km (6.2 mi.) 40 km (24.9
mi.)
80 km (49.7
mi.)
0.3 km (0.2
mi.)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565 840 to 860
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -1 2 4 -1.3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -6 -4.7 0 -7.3
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 6 8.2 9 3
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm N/A N/A N/A N/A
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB 30 30 30 30
Eye pattern
mask
- G.691-compliant
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN APD PIN
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
737
Optical
Module
Type
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80
km
10 Gbit/s
Single-
Rate-0.3 km
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1260 to 1565 1260 to 1605 1270 to 1600 840 to 860
Receiver
sensitivity
(multirate)
dBm -11 -14 -24 -7.5
Receiver
sensitivity
(10GE
LAN)
dBm -14.4 -15.8 -24 -7.5
Minimum
receiver
overload
(10GE
LAN)
dBm 0.5 -1 -7 -1
Minimum
receiver
overload
(STM-64)
dBm -1 -1 -7 -1
Maximum
reflectance
dB -27 -27 -27 -12

wavelengths)
PIN-XFP
power
dBm 2
power
dBm -3
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
738
PIN-XFP
width
nm 0.3
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35
Receiver type - PIN
(FEC on)
dBm -16
(FEC on)
dBm 0

(odd & even
wavelengths)-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
power
dBm 2 2
power
dBm -3 -3
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
739
(odd & even
wavelengths)-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
width
nm 0.3 0.3
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35 35
(FEC on)
dBm -16 -16

Optical
Module Type
1200 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
NRZ-
PIN
1200 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
APD
4800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
ODB-
APD
800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Waveleng
th-DRZ-
PIN
800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Waveleng
th-NRZ-
PIN
Line code
format
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
740
Optical
Module Type
1200 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
NRZ-
PIN
1200 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
APD
4800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
ODB-
APD
800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Waveleng
th-DRZ-
PIN
800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Waveleng
th-NRZ-
PIN
Maximum
mean launched
power
dBm 2 2 2 2 2
Minimum
mean launched
power
dBm -3 -3 -3 -3 -3
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB 10 10
N/A
a
10 10
Center
frequency
THz 192.10 to 196.05
Center
frequency
deviation
GHz 5 5 5 5 5
Maximum -20
dB spectral
width
nm 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
Minimum side
mode
suppression
ratio
dB 35 35 35 35 35
Dispersion
tolerance
ps/
nm
1200 1200 4800 800 800
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1200 to 1650
Receiver
sensitivity,
EOL (FEC on)
dBm -16 -26 -26 -16 -16
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm 0 -9 -9 0 0
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
741
Optical
Module Type
1200 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
NRZ-
PIN
1200 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
APD
4800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
ODB-
APD
800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Waveleng
th-DRZ-
PIN
800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Waveleng
th-NRZ-
PIN
Maximum
reflectance
dB -27 -27 -27 -27 -27

PIN-XFP
power
dBm 2
power
dBm -3
width
nm 0.3
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
742
PIN-XFP
Receiver type - PIN
(FEC on)
dBm -16
(FEC on)
dBm 0

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
power
dBm 2
power
dBm -1
width
nm 0.3
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35
Receiver type - PIN
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
743
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
(FEC on)
dBm -16
(FEC on)
dBm 0

(8.7 in.)
l Weight:
TN11LSX: 1.3 kg (2.9 lb.)
TN12LSX: 1.4 kg (3.1 lb.)
TN13LSX: 1.1 kg (2.4 lb.)
TN14LSX: 1.2 kg (2.6 lb.)
Power Consumption
Boar
d
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at
55C (131F) (W)
TN1
1LS
X
NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
47.7 50.1
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
47.9 50.9
49.7 52.7
Wavelength-ODB-APD
52.7 55.7
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
744
Boar
d
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at
55C (131F) (W)
TN1
2LS
X
NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
30.5 36.6
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
30.7 36.8
32.5 39
Wavelength-ODB-APD
35.5 42.6
TN1
3LS
X
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
29.4 32.8
29.5 33.9
NRZ-PIN-XFP
27 30.4
28 31.4
TN1
4LS
X
NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
27 30

13.22 LSXL
LSXL: 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion board
The available functional versions of the LSXL board are TN11, TN12, and TN15.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
745
Huawei office.
Boar
d
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
TN11
LSXL
N N N N Y N
TN12
LSXL
Y Y N Y Y N
TN15
LSXL
Y Y N N Y N

Variants
The difference between the LSXL board variants lies in the WDM-side optical module.
Table 13-262 Available variants of the TN12LSXL board
Variant WDM-Side Optical Module

Table 13-263 Available variants of the TN15LSXL board
T01 60000 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ePDM-BPSK-PIN

l Function:
Board Coherent System FEC Encoding OTU3 services on
client-side
TN11LSXL N FEC/AFEC N
TN12LSXL N FEC/AFEC Y
TN15LSXL Y HFEC Y

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
746
For details, see 13.22.2 Application.
l Appearance:
The LSXL boards of TN11, TN12 , and TN15 versions use different front panels. For
details, see 13.22.5 Front Panel.
l Specification:
For the specification of each version, see 13.22.9 LSXL Specifications.
The LSXL boards of different versions cannot replace each other.
13.22.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LSXL board converts between one channel of
STM-256/OC-768/OTU3 signals and OTU3 signals that comply with ITU-T G.694.1
Recommendations. The TN15LSXL board uses coherent receive technology. Therefore, the
board is intended for coherent systems.
For the position of the LSXL board in the WDM system, see Figure 13-120.
Figure 13-120 Position of the LSXL board in the WDM system
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
STM-256/
OC-768/
OTU3
STM-256/
OC-768/
OTU3
LSXL
1
O
D
U
3
1
O
T
U
3
LSXL
1
O
T
U
3
1
O
D
U
3
RX
TX
TX
RX
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
NOTE
l Client-side service types of the TN11LSXL board are STM-256 and OC-768.
l Client-side service types of the TN12LSXL/TN15LSXL board are STM-256, OC-768, and OTU3.

The LSXL board is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and to provide OTN interfaces
and ESC.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
747
Table 13-264 Functions and features of the LSXL board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function LSXL converts signals as follows:
Client-side
service type
NOTE
Only TN12LSXL/TN15LSXL support OTU3 services.
to the ITU-T G.709.
WDM
specification
Tunable
wavelength
function
l 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz
l 80 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 50 GHz
PRBS test
function
l TN11LSXL:
Not supported.
l TN12LSXL:
l TN15LSXL:
NOTE
The PRBS function of TN12LSXL on the client side is supported only when the
client-side service type is STM-256/OC-768.
FEC encoding TN11LSXL/TN12LSXL:
l Supports forward error correction (FEC) on the WDM side that
complies with ITU-T G.709.
l Supports advanced forward error correction (AFEC) on the WDM
side that complies with ITU-T G.975.1.
TN15LSXL: Supports HFEC on the WDM side.
NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
748
Function and
Feature
Description
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
power of the laser.
Regeneration
board
TN11LSXL: TN11LSXLR
TN12LSXL: TN12LSXLR
TN15LSXL: TN55NS3
Optical-layer
ASON
Supported by the TN12LSXL/TN15LSXL.
Electrical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Protection
scheme
TN11LSXL:
TN12LSXL:
TN15LSXL:
Loopback Client
side
Inloop l Not supported by the TN11LSXL
l Supported by the TN12LSXL/
TN15LSXL
Outloop
WDM
side
Inloop Supported
Outloop Supported
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
749
Function and
Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards
compliance
Protoc
ols or
standar
ds for
transpa
rent
transmi
ssion
(non-
perfor
mance
monito
ring)
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
Protoc
ols or
standar
ds for
service
process
ing
(perfor
mance
monito
ring)
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1

The LSXL board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
Figure 13-121 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN11LSXL.
Figure 13-122 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN12LSXL and
TN15LSXL.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
750
Figure 13-121 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11LSXL board
WDM side
Client-side
optical
module
OUT
Client side
RX
TX IN
WDM-side
optical
module
SDH/SONET
encapsulation
and mapping
module
O/E
E/O
E/O
O/E
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
SCC
OTN
processing
module

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
751
Figure 13-122 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12LSXL/TN15LSXL board
WDM side
Client-side
optical
module
OUT
Client side
RX
TX IN
WDM-side
optical
module
SDH/SONET
encapsulation and
mapping module
O/E
E/O
E/O
O/E
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
SCC
OTN
processing
module
Client-side OTN
processing module

Signal Flow
In the signal flow of the LSXL board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LSXL to the WDM side
of the LSXL, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. OTU3
signals are sent to the client-side OTN processing module for performance monitoring.
Other types of signals are sent to different encapsulation and mapping modules for
encapsulation and mapping. In the end, operations such as the OTN framing and FEC/
AFEC/HFEC encoding processing are performed. Then, the module outputs one channel
of OTU3 electrical signals.
l Receive direction
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
752
module performs operations such as OTU3 framing, decoding of FEC/AFEC/HFEC,
demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs one channel of
STM-256/OC-768/OTU3 electrical signals.
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the one channel of electrical
signals, and then outputs one channel of client-side optical signals through the TX optical
interface.
Module Function
Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of STM-256/OC-768/OTU3 optical
signals.
STM-256/OC-768/OTU3 optical signals.
The module consists of an SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, a client-side
OTN processing module, and an OTN processing module.
AFEC/HFEC encoding and decoding.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
753
13.22.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LSXL board.
Figure 13-123, Figure 13-124 and Figure 13-125 show the front panel of the LSXL board.
Figure 13-123 Front panel of the TN11LSXL board

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
754

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
755
NOTE

Indicators
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
756
Interfaces
Table 13-265 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LSXL board
multiplexer board.
multiplexer board.

Laser Hazard Level
13.22.6 Valid Slots
Four slots house one TN11LSXL board. Three slots house one TN12LSXL/TN15LSXL board.
Table 13-266 shows the valid slots for the TN11LSXL board.
Table 13-266 Valid slots for the TN11LSXL board
Product Valid Slots

NOTE
The rear connector of the TN11LSXL is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack.
Therefore, the slot number of the TN11LSXL board displayed on the NMS is the number of the left one
of the four slots.
For example, if slots IU1, IU2, IU3, and IU4 house the TN11LSXL board, the slot number of the
TN11LSXL board displayed on the NMS is IU1.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
757
Product Valid Slots
IU34, IU37-IU42, IU47-IU52, IU55-IU60,
IU63-IU68
IU36

NOTE
The rear connector of the TN12LSXL is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack.
Therefore, the slot number of the TN12LSXL board displayed on the NMS is the number of the right one
of the three slots.
For example, if slots IU1, IU2, and IU3 house the TN12LSXL board, the slot number of the TN12LSXL
board displayed on the NMS is IU3.
Product Valid Slots
IU33, IU36-IU41, IU46-IU51, IU54-IU59,
IU62-IU67
IU35

NOTE
The rear connector of the TN15LSXL is mounted to the backplane along the middle slot in the subrack.
Therefore, the slot number of the TN15LSXL board displayed on the NMS is the number of the middle
one of the three slots.
For example, if slots IU1, IU2, and IU3 house the TN15LSXL board, the slot number of the TN15LSXL
board displayed on the NMS is IU2.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
758
Table 13-269 Mapping between the physical ports on the LSXL board and the port numbers
IN/OUT 1
TX/RX 3

NOTE
For parameters of LSXL, refer to Table 13-270.
Table 13-270 LSXL parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
Optical Interface
Name
name.
Default: Used
channel of a board.
Optical Interface
Loopback
Outloop
STM-256
Default: STM-256
NOTE
Only the TN12LSXL/TN15LSXL supports
the OTU-3 services.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
759
Default:
l WDM side: On
l Client side: Off
status of a board.
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
ALS Auxiliary
Condition
FW_Defect,
BW_Client_R_LOS,
BW_WDM_Defect,
FW_ODUk_CSF
Default: FW_Defect
triggering ALS.
FW_Defect.
BW_Client_R_LOS.
BW_WDM_Defect.
FW_OPUk_CSF.
NOTE
Only TN15LSXL supports this parameter.
Hold-off Time of
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
0s, 100ms, 200ms,
300ms, 400ms, 500ms,
600ms, 700ms, 800ms,
900ms, 1s, 1100ms,
1200ms, 1300ms,
1400ms, 1500ms,
1600ms, 1700ms,
1800ms, 1900ms, 2s
Default: 0s
service interruption to the point when
ALS automatically shuts down the related
lasers.
NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
760
Hold-off Time of
Automatic Laser
Turn-On
0s, 100ms, 200ms,
300ms, 400ms, 500ms,
600ms, 700ms, 800ms,
900ms, 1s, 1100ms,
1200ms, 1300ms,
1400ms, 1500ms,
1600ms, 1700ms,
1800ms, 1900ms, 2s
Default: 0s
NOTE
Default: Enabled
FEC Mode TN11LSXL/
TN12LSXL:
l FEC, AFEC
l Default: AFEC
TN15LSXL:
l HFEC
l Default: HFEC
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.100
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.170
to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /
follows:
automatically.
affected.
NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
761
Receive Band Type C, CWDM
Default: C
The Receive Band Type parameter sets
the receive band type of a board.
NOTE
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
Tunable
Wavelength Range
Planned
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.100
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.170
to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /
board.
NOTE
Default: C
wavelength.
NOTE
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
l TN12LSXL:
Enabled,
Disabled
Default:
Disabled
l TN15LSXL:
Disabled, GC1C
+GCC2 Enabled,
Only GCC1
Enabled, Only
GCC2 Enabled
Default:
Disabled
Disabled.
NOTE
Only TN12LSXL/TN15LSXL supports this
parameter.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
762
SD Trigger
Condition
B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None
resides.
NOTE
Default: Disabled
NOTE
Only TN12LSXL/TN15LSXL supports this
parameter.
Dispersion
Compensation
Value
- Queries the dispersion compensation
value of the board.
NOTE
PMD Threshold(ps) - Queries the PMD threshold of the board.
NOTE
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

13.22.9 LSXL Specifications
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
763
Bo
ard
Client-Side
Fixed Optical
Module
Client-Side
Pluggable
Optical
Module
WDM-Side Fixed
Optical Module
WDM-Side
Pluggable
Optical
Module
TN
11L
SX
L
Tunable Wavelength-
ODB-PIN
400 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-(D)
RZ-PIN
N/A
TN
12L
SX
L
Tunable Wavelength-
DQPSK-PIN
500 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
ODB-PIN
N/A
TN
15L
SX
L
Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-BPSK-PIN
N/A

NOTE
NOTE
point.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
764
Receiver type - PIN

Optical Module
Type
500 ps/nm-C
Band-Tunable
Wavelength-
DQPSK-PIN
500 ps/nm-C
Band-Tunable
Wavelength-
ODB-PIN
400 ps/nm-C
Band-Tunable
Wavelength-
DRZ-PIN
Line code format - DQPSK ODB DRZ
Operating frequency
range
THz 192.10 to 196.05 192.10 to 196.05 192.10 to 196.00
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 0 0 0
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm -5 -5 -5
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB N/A 8.2 8.2
Center frequency
deviation
GHz 2.5 2.5 5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm N/A 0.6 1
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
765
Optical Module
Type
500 ps/nm-C
Band-Tunable
Wavelength-
DQPSK-PIN
500 ps/nm-C
Band-Tunable
Wavelength-
ODB-PIN
400 ps/nm-C
Band-Tunable
Wavelength-
DRZ-PIN
Maximum -3 dB
spectral width
nm 0.3 N/A N/A
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35 35 35
Operating
wavelength range
nm 1529 to 1561 1529 to 1561 1529 to 1561
EOL (FEC on)
dBm -16 -16 -16
Minimum receiver
overload (FEC on)
dBm 0 0 0
Maximum
reflectance
dB -27 -27 -27

Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-BPSK-PIN
Line code format - ePDM-BPSK
power
dBm 0
power
dBm -5
width
nm 0.35
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
766
Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-BPSK-PIN
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35
to-back)
ps/nm 60000
Receiver type - PIN

TN11LSXL
mm (8.7 in.)
TN12LSXL
(8.7 in.)
TN15LSXL
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum
Power
Consumption at
55C (131F) (W)
TN11LS
XL
103.0 110.0
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
767
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum
Power
Consumption at
55C (131F) (W)
Wavelength-ODB-PIN
98.0 101.0
TN12LS
XL
Wavelength-ODB-PIN
74.0 81.0
84.0 94.0
TN15LS
XL
Wavelength-ePDM-BPSK-PIN
140.0 155.0

13.23 LSXLR
LSXLR: 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay board
The available functional version of the LSXLR board are TN11 and TN12.
Huawei office.
Board 8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800 Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800 Chassis
TN11L
SXLR
N N N N Y N
TN12L
SXLR
Y Y N Y Y N

Variants
Table 13-274 Available variants of the TN12LSXLR board
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
768

l Function:
Board OTU3e services
TN11LSXLR N
TN12LSXLR Y

l Appearance:
The TN11LSXLR and TN12LSXLR versions use different front panels. For details, see
13.23.5 Front Panel.
l Specification:
For the specification of each version, see 13.23.9 LSXLR Specifications.
The LSXLR boards of different versions cannot replace each other.
13.23.2 Application
The LSXLR board is used in an electrical REG station in the system to implement electrical
regeneration of OTU3/OTU3e optical signals.
For the position of the LSXLR board in the WDM system, see Figure 13-126.
Figure 13-126 Position of the LSXLR board in the WDM system
MUX DMUX
MUX DMUX
1
O
T
U
3
/
O
T
U
3
e
LSXLR
1
O
T
U
3
/
O
T
U
3
e
1
O
T
U
3
/
O
T
U
3
e
LSXLR
1
O
T
U
3
/
O
T
U
3
e
IN
IN
OUT
OUT
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
769

The LSXLR board is used to achieve wavelength tunable, and to provide OTN interfaces and
ESC.
Table 13-275 Functions and features of the LSXLR board
Function
and
Feature
Description
Basic
function
The board is used in an electrical REG station in the system to implement
electrical regeneration of optical signals.
Regenerati
ng rate
NOTE
Only TN12LSXLR supports OTU3e service.
OTN
function
l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by complying with
the ITU-T G.709.
WDM
specificati
on
Tunable
wavelengt
h function
ESC
function
Supported
PRBS test
function
Not supported
LPT
function
Not supported
FEC
encoding
WDM side.
l Supports ITU-T G.975.1-compliant advanced forward error correction
(AFEC) on the WDM side.
NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
770
Function
and
Feature
Description
Alarms
and
performan
ce events
monitorin
g
l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power
of the laser.
ALS
function
Not supported
Optical-
layer
ASON
Supported by the TN12LSXLR
Electrical-
layer
ASON
Not supported
Protection
scheme
Not supported
Protocols
or
standards
complianc
e
Protocols or standards for transparent
transmission (non-performance
monitoring)
-
processing (performance monitoring)
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
771
The LSXLR board consists of the optical receiving module, optical transmitting module, signal
Figure 13-127 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LSXLR board.
Figure 13-127 Functional modules and signal flow of the LSXLR board
WDM side
Optical
receiving
module
IN OUT
Optical
transmitting
module
O/E E/O
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
Decoding
module
Encoding
module
Overhead
module
WDM side

Signal Flow
The LSXLR board implements the regeneration of one channel of unidirectional optical signals.
The wavelengths at the receive and transmit ends of the board are OTU3/OTU3e optical signals
at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1.
The optical receiving module receives the optical signals to be regenerated through the IN
interface, and performs O/E conversion.
The signal processing module performs decoding, overhead processing and encoding of signals.
During the process, the reshaping, regenerating and retiming based on electrical signals are
performed, and the signals are encapsulated into OTN frames.
After encoding, the signals are sent to an optical transmitting module. After performing E/O
conversion, the module transmits OTU3/OTU3e signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that
comply with ITU-T G.694.1.
The optical signals are output through the OUT interface.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
772
Module Function
l Optical receiving module
Performs O/E conversion of OTU3/OTU3e optical signals at DWDM standard
wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1.
l Optical transmitting module
Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU3/OTU3e optical
signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1.
l The signal processing module
The module consists of the decoding module, overhead module, and encoding module.
Decoding module
Performs the FEC/AFEC decoding of OTU3/OTU3e signals, and monitors the
performance of WDM-side services.
Encoding module
Performs the FEC/AFEC encoding of OTU3/OTU3e signals.
Overhead module
Performs overhead processing of OTU3/OTU3e signals, and monitors the performance
of WDM-side services.
13.23.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, and interfaces on the front panel of the LSXLR board.
Figure 13-128 and Figure 13-129 show the front panel of the LSXLR board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
773
Figure 13-128 Front panel of the TN11LSXLR board

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
774
Figure 13-129 Front panel of the TN12LSXLR board

Indicators
Interfaces
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
775
Table 13-276 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LSXLR board
multiplexer board.
multiplexer board.

Laser Hazard Level
13.23.6 Valid Slots
Four slots house one TN11LSXLR board. Two slots house one TN12LSXLR board.
Table 13-277 shows the valid slots for the TN11LSXLR board.
Table 13-277 Valid slots for the TN11LSXLR board
Product Valid Slots

The rear connector of the TN11LSXLR is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the
subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN11LSXLR board displayed on the NM is the
number of the left one of the four slots.
For example, if slots IU1, IU2, IU3, and IU4 house the TN11LSXLR board, the slot number of
the TN11LSXLR board displayed on the NM is IU1.
When the TN11LSXLR boards serve as regeneration boards, follow the principles below to
install them in the case of ESC communication; otherwise, install them in any valid slots.
The TN11LSXLR boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed
in slots IU1 and IU5, IU9 and IU13.
Table 13-278 shows the valid slots for the TN12LSXLR board.
Table 13-278 Valid slots for the TN12LSXLR board
Product Valid Slots
IU34, IU36-IU42, IU46-IU52, IU54-IU60,
IU62-IU68
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
776
Product Valid Slots
IU36

The rear connector of the TN12LSXLR board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot
in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN12LSXLR board displayed on the NM is
the number of the right one of the two slots.
For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN12LSXLR board, the slot number of the
TN12LSXLR board displayed on the NM is IU2.
When the TN12LSXLR boards serve as regeneration boards, follow the principles below to
install them in the case of ESC communication; otherwise, install them in any valid slots.
l OptiX OSN 8800 T64: The TN12LSXLR boards for transmitting and receiving the same
wavelength must be installed in slots IU2 and IU4, IU6 and IU8, IU12 and IU14, IU16 and
IU18, IU20 and IU22, IU24 and IU26, IU28 and IU30, IU32 and IU34, IU36 and IU38,
IU40 and IU42, IU46 and IU48, IU50 and IU52, IU54 and IU56, IU58 and IU60, IU62 and
IU64, or IU66 and IU68.
l OptiX OSN 8800 T32: The TN12LSXLR boards for transmitting and receiving the same
IU19, IU21 and IU23, IU25 and IU27, IU30 and IU32, or IU34 and IU36.
l OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack: The TN12LSXLR boards for transmitting and
receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU2 and IU4, IU6 and IU8, IU10
and IU12, or IU14 and IU16.
l OptiX OSN 6800: The TN12LSXLR boards for transmitting and receiving the same
wavelength must be installed in slots IU2 and IU4, IU6 and IU8, IU10 and IU12, or IU14
and IU16.
Table 13-279 Mapping between the physical ports on the LSXLR board and the port numbers
IN/OUT 1

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
777
NOTE
For parameters of the LSXLR, refer to Table 13-280.
Table 13-280 LSXLR parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
Optical Interface
Name
name.
Default: Used
channel of a board.
Default:
l WDM side: On
l Client side: Off
status of a board.
Enable Auto-
Sensing
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
Set the Enable Auto-Sensing function of
the board to Enabled or Disabled.
l When it is set to Enabled, the board
supports Line Rate of the received
signals in auto-sensing mode, and thus
no manual setting is required.
l When it is set to Disabled, Line
Rate of the board must be set
manually and the values of the
previous two parameters must be the
same as that of the received signals.
Otherwise, the services are
unavailable.
NOTE
must be set to Enabled.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
778
FEC Working
State
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
FEC Mode FEC, AFEC
Default: FEC
Receive
Wavelength
l C: 1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.100
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.170
to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /
follows:
automatically.
affected.
NOTE
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
Tunable
Wavelength Range
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
779
Planned
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
l C: 1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.100
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.170
to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /
board.
NOTE
Default: C
wavelength.
NOTE
PMD Threshold
(ps)
Board Mode Electrical Relay Mode,
Optical Relay Mode
Default: Electrical Relay
Mode
Specifies the board mode depending on
the service application scenario.
See D.2 Board Mode (WDM

13.23.9 LSXLR Specifications
Board WDM-Side Fixed Optical Module WDM-Side Pluggable
Optical Module
TN11LS
XLR
500 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODB-
PIN
400 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-(D)RZ-
PIN
N/A
TN12LS
XLR
DQPSK-PIN
500 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODB-
PIN
N/A

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
780
NOTE
NOTE
Equipment.
NOTE
point.
Optical Module
Type
500 ps/nm-C
Band-Tunable
Wavelength-
DQPSK-PIN
500 ps/nm-C
Band-Tunable
Wavelength-
ODB-PIN
400 ps/nm-C
Band-Tunable
Wavelength-
DRZ-PIN
Line code format - DQPSK ODB DRZ
Operating frequency
range
THz 192.10 to 196.05 192.10 to 196.05 192.10 to 196.00
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 0 0 0
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm -5 -5 -5
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB N/A 8.2 8.2
Center frequency
deviation
GHz 2.5 2.5 5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm N/A 0.6 1
Maximum -3 dB
spectral width
nm 0.3 N/A N/A
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35 35 35
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
781
Optical Module
Type
500 ps/nm-C
Band-Tunable
Wavelength-
DQPSK-PIN
500 ps/nm-C
Band-Tunable
Wavelength-
ODB-PIN
400 ps/nm-C
Band-Tunable
Wavelength-
DRZ-PIN
Operating
wavelength range
nm 1529 to 1561 1529 to 1561 1529 to 1561
EOL (FEC on)
dBm -16 -16 -16
Minimum receiver
overload (FEC on)
dBm 0 0 0
Maximum
reflectance
dB -27 -27 -27

TN11LSXLR
mm (8.7 in.)
TN12LSXLR
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at
55C (131F) (W)
TN11
LSXL
R
87.0 90.0
Wavelength-ODB-PIN
82.0 85.0
TN12
LSXL
R
75.0 79.0
Wavelength-ODB-PIN
67.0 70.0

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
782
13.24 LSXR
LSXR: 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay board
The available functional version of the LSXR board is TN11.
Huawei office.
Boar
d
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
TN11
LSXR
Y Y N Y Y Y

Variants
Table 13-282 Available variants of the TN11LSXR board
01M03

13.24.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LSXR board is used in an electrical REG station in the
system to implement electrical regeneration of OTU2/OTU2e optical signals.
For the position of the LSXR board in the WDM system, see Figure 13-130.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
783
Figure 13-130 Position of the LSXR board in the WDM system
MUX DMUX
MUX DMUX
1
O
T
U
2
/
O
T
U
2
e
LSXR
1
O
T
U
2
/
O
T
U
2
e
1
O
T
U
2
/
O
T
U
2
e
LSXR
1
O
T
U
2
/
O
T
U
2
e
IN
IN
OUT
OUT

The LSXR is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable, and to provide OTN interfaces and
ESC.
Table 13-283 Functions and features of the LSXR board
Function
and
Feature
Description
Basic
function
Regenerati
ng rate
OTN
function
l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the
ITU-T G.709.
WDM
specificati
on
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
784
Function
and
Feature
Description
Tunable
wavelengt
h function
ESC
function
Supported
PRBS test
function
Not supported
LPT
function
Not supported
FEC
encoding
WDM side.
l Supports ITU-T G.975.1-compliant advanced forward error correction
(AFEC) on the WDM side.
NOTE
Alarms
and
performan
ce events
monitorin
g
of the laser.
ALS
function
Not supported
Optical-
layer
ASON
Supported
Electrical-
layer
ASON
Not supported
Protection
scheme
Not supported
Protocols
or
standards
complianc
e
monitoring)
-
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
785
Function
and
Feature
Description
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1

The LSXR board consists of the optical receiving module, optical transmitting module, signal
Figure 13-131 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LSXR board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
786
Figure 13-131 Functional modules and signal flow of the LSXR board
WDM side
Optical
receiving
module
IN OUT
WDM side
Optical
transmitting
module
O/E E/O
Decoding
module
Encoding
module
Overhead
module
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse

Signal Flow
The LSXR board implements the regeneration of one channel of unidirectional optical signals.
The signals at the receive and transmit ends of the board are OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at
DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1.
After being encoded, the signals are sent to the optical transmitting module. After performing
E/O conversion, the module sends out OTU2/OTU2e signals at DWDM wavelengths that
Module Function
Performs O/E conversion of OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
787
Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU2/OTU2e optical
signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1.
l The signal processing module
The module consists of the decoding module, overhead module, and encoding module.
Decoding module
Performs the FEC/AFEC decoding of OTU2/OTU2e signals, and monitors the
performance of WDM-side services.
Encoding module
Performs the FEC/AFEC encoding of OTU2/OTU2e signals.
Overhead module
Performs overhead processing of OTU2/OTU2e signals, and monitors the performance
of WDM-side services.
13.24.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LSXR.
Figure 13-132 shows the front panel of the LSXR.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
788
Figure 13-132 Front panel of the LSXR

Indicators
Interfaces
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
789
Table 13-284 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LSXR board
multiplexer board.
multiplexer board.

Laser Hazard Level
13.24.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one LSXR board.
Table 13-285 shows the valid slots for the LSXR board.
Table 13-285 Valid slots for LSXR board
Product Valid Slots

When the LSXR boards serve as regeneration boards, follow the principles below to install them
in the case of ESC communication; otherwise, install them in any valid slots.
l OptiX OSN 8800 T64: The LSXR boards for transmitting and receiving the same
IU8, IU11 and IU12, IU13 and IU14, IU15 and IU16, IU17 and IU18, IU19 and IU20, IU21
and IU22, IU23 and IU24, IU25 and IU26, IU27 and IU28, IU29 and IU30, IU31 and IU32,
IU57 and IU58, IU59 and IU60, IU61 and IU62, IU63 and IU64, IU65 and IU66, or IU67
and IU68.
l OptiX OSN 8800 T32: The LSXR boards for transmitting and receiving the same
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
790
or IU35 and IU36.
l OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack: The LSXR boards for transmitting and receiving the
same wavelength must be installed in slots IU1 and IU2, IU3 and IU4, IU5 and IU6, IU7
and IU8, IU9 and IU10, IU11 and IU12, IU13 and IU14, IU15 and IU16, or IU17 and IU18.
l OptiX OSN 6800: The LSXR boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength
must be installed in slots IU1 and IU2, IU3 and IU4, IU5 and IU6, IU7 and IU8, IU9 and
IU10, IU11 and IU12, IU13 and IU14, or IU15 and IU16.
13.24.7 Characteristic Code for the LSXR
Code for OTUs.
Table 13-286 Mapping between the physical ports on the LSXR board and the port numbers
IN/OUT 1

NOTE
For parameters of the LSXR, refer to Table 13-287.
Table 13-287 LSXR parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
791
Optical Interface
Name
name.
Default: Used
channel of a board.
Default: On
status of a board.
Enable Auto-
Sensing
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
Set the Enable Auto-Sensing function of
the board to Enabled or Disabled.
supports FEC Type and Line Rate of
the received signals in auto-sensing
mode, and thus no manual setting is
required.
l When it is set to Disabled, FEC
Type and Line Rate of the board must
be set manually and the values of the
unavailable.
NOTE
FEC Working
State
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
FEC Mode FEC, AFEC
Default: FEC
NOTE
This parameter can be set only when Enable
Auto-Sensing is set to Disabled
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
792
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
Tunable
Wavelength Range
Planned
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050 to
80/1560.61/192.100
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.170
to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /
board.
NOTE
Default: C
wavelength.
NOTE
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
Disabled.
NOTE
Line Rate Standard Mode, Speedup
Mode
Default: Standard Mode
The Line Rate parameter provides an
option to set the OTN line rate.
NOTE
This parameter can be set only when Enable
Auto-Sensing is set to Disabled
See D.16 Line Rate for more information.
Optical Relay Mode
Default: Electrical Relay
Mode
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
793

13.24.10 LSXR Specifications
Board WDM-Side Fixed Optical Module WDM-Side Pluggable Optical
Module
TN11L
SXR
wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN
NRZ-PIN
NRZ-PIN
NRZ-APD
ODB-APD
(D)RZ-PIN
N/A

NOTE
NOTE
point.
(odd & even
wavelengths)-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
794
(odd & even
wavelengths)-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
power
dBm 2 2
power
dBm -3 -3
width
nm 0.3 0.3
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35 35
(FEC on)
dBm -16 -16

Optical Module
Type
1200 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelengt
h-NRZ-
PIN
1200 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelengt
h-NRZ-
APD
4800 ps/nm-
C Band-
Tunable
Wavelengt
h-ODB-
APD
800 ps/nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelength-
DRZ-PIN
Line code format - NRZ NRZ ODB DRZ
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
795
Optical Module
Type
1200 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelengt
h-NRZ-
PIN
1200 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelengt
h-NRZ-
APD
4800 ps/nm-
C Band-
Tunable
Wavelengt
h-ODB-
APD
800 ps/nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelength-
DRZ-PIN
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 2 2 2 2
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm -3 -3 -3 -3
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB 10 10
N/A
a
10
Center frequency
deviation
GHz 5 5 5 5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
Minimum side
mode suppression
ratio
dB 35 35 35 35
Dispersion
tolerance
ps/nm 1200 1200 4800 800
Receiver type - PIN APD APD PIN
Operating
wavelength range
nm 1200 to 1650
Receiver
sensitivity, EOL
(FEC on)
dBm -16 -26 -26 -16
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm 0 -9 -9 0
Maximum
reflectance
dB -27 -27 -27 -27

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
796
(8.7 in.)
l Weight: 1.2 kg. (2.6 lb)
Power Consumption
Boar
d
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at
55C (131F) (W)
TN1
1LS
XR
NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
34.8 37.8
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
35.0 38.0
36.8 39.8
Wavelength-ODB-APD
39.8 42.8

13.25 LTX
LTX: 10-Port 10Gbit/s Service Multiplexing & Optical Wavelength Conversion Board
The available functional version of the LTX board is TN11.
Huawei office.
Boar
d
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
TN11
LTX
Y Y Y Y Y N

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
797
Variants
Table 13-290 Available variants of the TN11LTX board
Variant WDM-Side Fixed Optical Module FEC Encoding
HFEC
ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC, RZ)-PIN
SDFEC

13.25.2 Application
The LTX board is a wavelength conversion board and applies to coherent systems. In the receive
direction, the board can receive ten 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, or OC-192 signals from
client equipment, maps the optical signals into an OTU4 signal, and converts the OTU4 signal
into a standard DWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. In the transmit direction,
the process is reverse. The LTX board can also apply to electrical regeneration sites to perform
electrical regeneration of OTU4 optical signals.
The WDM-side service rate for the LTX board is 100 Gbit/s. Therefore, the board is intended
for 100G transmission systems.
For the position of the LTX board in the WDM system, see Figure 13-133 and Figure
13-134.
Figure 13-133 Position of the LTX board in the WDM system (OTU mode)
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
10GE LAN/
10GE WAN/
STM-64/OC-192
LTX
1
O
D
U
4
1
O
T
U
4
LTX
1
O
T
U
4
1
O
D
U
4
10GE LAN/
10GE WAN/
STM-64/OC-192
TX1
TX10
1
0
O
D
U
2
/
O
D
U
2
e
1
0
O
D
U
2
/
O
D
U
2
e
OUT IN
IN OUT
RX1
RX10
TX1
RX1
TX10
RX10
NOTE
In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the LTX board must be set to Line Mode.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
798
Figure 13-134 Position of the LTX board in the WDM system (regeneration mode)
MUX DMUX
MUX DMUX
1
O
T
U
4
LTX
1
O
T
U
4
1
O
T
U
4
LTX
1
O
T
U
4
IN OUT
IN OUT
NOTE
In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the LTX board must be set to Electrical Relay
Mode or Optical Relay Mode. When optical-layer and electrical-layer ASON are enabled, it does not matter
whether the Board Mode parameter is set to Optical Relay Mode or Electrical Relay mode. The parameter
must be set to Optical Relay Mode for the line board in a non-ASON system; otherwise, end-to-end management
of ASON services is not available.
The input and output wavelengths can be different.

The LTX board is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and to provide OTN interfaces
and ESC.
For detailed functions and features, see Table 13-291 and Table 13-292.
Table 13-291 Functions and features of the LTX board (OTU mode)
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function LTX converts signal as follows:
l 10x10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192<->1xOTU4
Client-side
service type
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
799
Function and
Feature
Description
l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing compliant
with ITU-T G.709.
l Supports PM functions for ODU2.
WDM
specification
Tunable
wavelength
function
PRBS test
function
NOTE
The PRBS function on the client side is supported only when the client-side service
type is STM-64/OC-192.
type is 10GE LAN.
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
power of the laser.
LAN).
l Supports the monitoring of CD and PMD performance.
Regeneration
board
TN11LTX, TN54NS4
Optical-layer
ASON
Supported
Electrical-layer
ASON
Not supported
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
800
Function and
Feature
Description
Protection
scheme
Ethernet service
mapping mode
Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G)
Outloop
Outloop
Protocols or
standards
compliance
for transparent
transmission (non-
performance
monitoring)
IEEE 802.3ae
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
(performance
monitoring)
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1

Table 13-292 Functions and features of the LTX board (regeneration mode)
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function The board is used in an electrical REG station in the system to implement
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
801
Function and
Feature
Description
Regenerating
rate
l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing compliant
with ITU-T G.709.
WDM
specification
Tunable
wavelength
function
PRBS test
function
Not supported
NOTE
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
power of the laser.
ALS function Not supported
Optical-layer
ASON
Supported
Electrical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Protection
scheme
Not supported
Protocols or
standards
compliance
for transparent
transmission (non-
performance
monitoring)
-
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
802
Function and
Feature
Description
(performance
monitoring)
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1

The LTX board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
Functional Modules and Signal Flow (OTU mode)
Figure 13-135 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LTX.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
803
Figure 13-135 Functional modules and signal flow of the LTX board (OTU mode)
SCC
WDM side

Client side
RX10
TX1
IN
O/E
E/O
E/O
O/E
OUT
TX10
RX1
Client-side
optical
module
CPU
Control
Backplane
(controlled by the
SCC)
WDM-side
optical
module
Communication Memory
Fuse
Required
voltage
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from the backplane
SDH/SONET
encapsulation and
mapping module
OTN
processing
module
10GE LAN
encapsulation and
mapping module

In the signal flow of the LTX board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LTX to the WDM side
of the LTX, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
The client-side optical module receives 10 channels of the optical signals from client
After performing the O/E conversion, the client-side optical module sends the electrical
signals to the signal processing module. Then, the signal processing module performs
encapsulation, OTN framing, and HFEC/SDFEC coding and outputs one channel of OTU4
signals to the WDM-side optical module.
After receiving the OTU4 signals, the WDM-side optical module performs E/O conversion,
generates OTU4 signals over a DWDM wavelength that complies with ITU-T G.694.1,
and then outputs the OTU4 signals through the OUT optical interfaces.
l Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of standard DWDM optical signals
compliant with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN optical interfaces. The WDM-side optical
module then converts the optical signals into electrical signals.
After the O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module,
which performs OTU4 framing, HFEC/SDFEC decoding, demapping, and decapsulation
for the signals and then outputs 10 channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192
electrical signals.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
804
The 10 channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192 signals are sent to the client-
side optical module, which converts the electrical signals into optical signals and then
outputs the optical signals through the TX optical interface.
Functional Modules and Signal Flow (regeneration mode)
Figure 13-136 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LTX.
Figure 13-136 Functional modules and signal flow of the LTX board (regeneration mode)
WDM side
Optical
receiving
module
IN OUT
Optical
transmitting
module
O/E E/O
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(controlled by
SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power
supply
from a
backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
OTN processing
module
WDM side

The LTX board implements the regeneration of one channel of unidirectional optical signals.
The wavelengths at the receive and transmit ends of the board are OTU4 optical signals at
DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1.
After encoding, the signals are sent to an optical transmitting module. After performing E/O
conversion, the module transmits OTU4 signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply
with ITU-T G.694.1.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
805
Module Function
Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion for 10 channels of 10GE LAN/10GE
WAN/STM-64/OC-192 optical signals.
Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion for 10 channels of 10GE LAN/10GE
WAN/STM-64/OC-192 optical signals.
WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of the OTU4 optical signal.
encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module.
SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module:
Encapsulates ten channels of SDH/SONET and 10GE WAN signals and maps the
signals into the OTU4 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and
has the SDH/SONET performance monitoring function.
10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module:
Encapsulates ten channels of 10GE LAN signals and maps the signals into the OTU4
payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the 10GE LAN
Frames OTU4 signals, processes overheads in OTU4 signals, and performs the
HFEC/SDFEC encoding and decoding.
13.25.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LTX board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
806
Figure 13-137 shows the front panel of the LTX board.
Figure 13-137 Font panel of the LTX board
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
O
U
T
I
N
LTX
LTX
T
X
2

R
X
2
T
X
4

R
X
4
T
X
6

R
X
6
T
X
8

R
X
8
T
X
1
0

R
X
1
0
R
X
1

T
X
1
R
X
3

T
X
3
R
X
5

T
X
5
R
X
7

T
X
7
R
X
9

T
X
9
G.657A2 FIBER ONLY
G.657A2
G.657A2 FIBER ONLY
G.657A2
NOTE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
807
Indicators
Interfaces
Table 13-293 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LTX board
multiplexer board.
multiplexer board.

Laser Hazard Level
13.25.6 Valid Slots
Four slots house one LTX board.
Table 13-294 shows the valid slots for the LTX board.
Table 13-294 Valid slots for the LTX board
Product Valid Slots
IU32, IU36-IU40, IU46-IU50, IU54-IU58,
IU62-IU66
IU34
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
808
Product Valid Slots

NOTE
The rear connector of the LTX is mounted to the backplane along the second slot from the left in the subrack.
Therefore, the slot number of the LTX board displayed on the NM is the number of the second one of the
four slots from left.
For example, if slots IU1, IU2, IU3 and IU4 house the LTX board, the slot number of the LTX board
When the LTX boards serve as regeneration boards, follow the principles below to install them
l OptiX OSN 8800 T64: The LTX boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength
must be installed in slots IU2 and IU6, IU12 and IU16, IU20 and IU24, IU36 and IU40,
IU46 and IU50, IU54 and IU58, IU62 and IU66.
must be installed in slots IU2 and IU6, IU13 and IU17, IU21 and IU25, IU30 and IU34.
must be installed in slots IU2 and IU6, IU12 and IU16.
l OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack: The LTX boards for transmitting and receiving the
same wavelength must be installed in slots IU2 and IU6, IU10 and IU14.
l OptiX OSN 6800: The LTX boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength
must be installed in slots IU2 and IU6, IU10 and IU14.
Table 13-295 Mapping between the physical ports on the LTX board and the port numbers
IN/OUT 1
TX1/RX1 3
TX2/RX2 4
TX3/RX3 5
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
809
TX4/RX4 6
TX5/RX5 7
TX6/RX6 8
TX7/RX7 9
TX8/RX8 10
TX9/RX9 11
TX10/RX10 12

NOTE
For parameters of LTX, refer to Table 13-296.
Table 13-296 LTX parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
Optical Interface
Name
are supported.
Default: Used
board.
Optical Interface
Loopback
Non-Loopback,
Inloop, Outloop
Default: Non-
Loopback
Service Type 10GE LAN, 10GE
WAN, OC-192,
STM-64
Default: 10GE LAN
the client side.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
810
Default:
l WDM side: On
l Client side: Off
status of a board.
more information.
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
board are lost.
ALS Auxiliary
Condition
FW_Defect,
BW_Client_R_LOS
,
BW_WDM_Defect,
FW_OPUk_CSF
Default: FW_Defect
ALS.
FW_OPUk_CSF.
Hold-off Time of
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
0s, 100ms, 200ms,
300ms, 400ms,
500ms, 600ms,
700ms, 800ms,
900ms, 1s, 1100ms,
1200ms, 1300ms,
1400ms, 1500ms,
1600ms, 1700ms,
1800ms, 1900ms, 2s
Default: 0s
related lasers.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
811
Hold-off Time of
Automatic Laser
Turn-On
0s, 100ms, 200ms,
300ms, 400ms,
500ms, 600ms,
700ms, 800ms,
900ms, 1s, 1100ms,
1200ms, 1300ms,
1400ms, 1500ms,
1600ms, 1700ms,
1800ms, 1900ms, 2s
Default: 0s
related lasers.
Default: Disabled
Default: Enabled
optical interface.
FEC Mode HFEC, SDFEC Queries the FEC mode of the current optical
interface.
more information.
Receive
Wavelength
C:
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.100
Default: /
follows:
is the same as the transmit wavelength of
the local board, use the default value,
which indicates keeping the receive
wavelength the same as the transmit
wavelength of the local board
automatically.
is different from the transmit wavelength
of the local board, the value of this
parameter must be the same as the transmit
wavelength of the peer board; otherwise,
services are affected.
NOTE
In the case of ASON services, this parameter must
Receive Band Type C
Default: C
The Receive Band Typeparameter sets the
receive band type of a board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
812
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
Tunable
Wavelength Range
on the board.
Planned
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
C:
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.100
Default: /
NOTE
Planned Band Type C
Default: C
Default: Disabled
status of a board.
Dispersion
Compensation
Value
- Queries the dispersion compensation value of
the board.
PMD Threshold
(ps)
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
813
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
l Disabled, GCC1
+GCC2 Enabled,
Only GCC1
Enabled, Only
GC2 Enabled
l Default:
Disabled
NOTE
This parameter is only valid when the Board
Mode is set to Electrical Relay Mode or Optical
Relay Mode.
Board Mode Line Mode,
Electrical Relay
Mode, Optical Relay
Mode
Default: Electrical
Relay Mode
Specifies the board mode depending on the
service application scenario.
See D.2 Board Mode (WDM Interface) for
more information.

13.25.9 LTX Specifications
Bo
ard
Client-Side
Fixed
Optical
Module
Client-Side
Pluggable Optical
Module
WDM-Side Fixed
Optical Module
WDM-Side
Pluggable
Optical
Module
TN
11L
TX
km
km
km
10 Gbit/s Single Rate-0.3
km
40000 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK(HFEC,
RZ)-PIN
55000 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC,
RZ)-PIN
N/A

NOTE
point.
Specifications of optical modules on the client side
NOTE
The 10 Gbit/s multi-rate 10 km module, 10 Gbit/s multi-rate 40 km, and 10 Gbit/s multi-rate 80 km module
can be used to access OC-192, STM-64, 10GE LAN and 10GE WAN signals.
The 10Gbit/s single rate -0.3km module can be used only to access 10GE LAN signals.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
814
Optical
Module
Type
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80
km
10 Gbit/s
Single-
Rate-0.3 km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Optical
source type
- SLM SLM SLM MLM
Target
transmissio
n distance
- 10 km (6.2 mi.) 40 km (24.9
mi.)
80 km (49.7
mi.)
0.3 km (0.2
mi.)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565 840 to 860
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -1 2 4 -1.3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -6 -4.7 0 -7.3
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 6 8.2 9 3
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm N/A N/A N/A N/A
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB 30 30 30 30
Eye pattern
mask
- G.691-compliant
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN APD PIN
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
815
Optical
Module
Type
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80
km
10 Gbit/s
Single-
Rate-0.3 km
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1260 to 1565 1260 to 1605 1270 to 1600 840 to 860
Receiver
sensitivity
(multirate)
dBm -11 -14 -24 -7.5
Receiver
sensitivity
(10GE
LAN)
dBm -14.4 -15.8 -24 -7.5
Minimum
receiver
overload
(10GE
LAN)
dBm 0.5 -1 -7 -1
Minimum
receiver
overload
(STM-64)
dBm -1 -1 -7 -1
Maximum
reflectance
dB -27 -27 -27 -12

Specifications of optical modules on the DWDM side
Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK(HFEC,
RZ)-PIN
power
dBm 0
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
816
Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK(HFEC,
RZ)-PIN
power
dBm -5
width
nm 0.35
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35
to-back)
ps/nm 40000
Receiver type - PIN

RZ)
Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC,
RZ)-PIN
power
dBm 0
power
dBm -5
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
817
Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC,
RZ)-PIN
width
nm 0.4
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35
to-back)
ps/nm 55000
Receiver type - PIN

mm (8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Board WDM-Side
Module
Typical Power
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at
55C (131F) (W)
TN11LTX (OTU
mode)
40000 ps/nm-C
Band-Tunable
Wavelength-ePDM-
QPSK(HFEC, RZ)-
PIN
248 273
TN11LTX
(regeneration mode)
235 247
TN11LTX (OTU
mode)
55000 ps/nm-C
Band-Tunable
Wavelength-ePDM-
270 300
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
818
Board WDM-Side
Module
Typical Power
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at
55C (131F) (W)
TN11LTX
(regeneration mode)
QPSK(SDFEC, RZ)-
PIN
250 275

13.26 LWX2
LWX2: arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) dual-wavelength conversion board
Only one functional version of the LWX2 board is available, that is, TN11.
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
1L
WX
2
N N N Y Y Y

13.26.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LWX2 board implements the conversion between two
channels of optical signals at the rate in the range of 16 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s and WDM signals
that comply with ITU-T Recommendations.
For the position of the LWX2 board in the WDM system, see Figure 13-138.
Figure 13-138 Position of the LWX2 board in the WDM system
LWX2
MUX/
DMUX
MUX/
DMUX
MUX/
DMUX
MUX/
DMUX
T
r
a
n
s
p
a
r
e
n
t

t
r
a
n
s
m
i
s
s
i
o
n
T
r
a
n
s
p
a
r
e
n
t

t
r
a
n
s
m
i
s
s
i
o
n
16Mbit/s

2.7Gbit/s
LWX2
16Mbit/s

2.7Gbit/s
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
819
The LWX2 is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and provide ESC.
Table 13-300 Functions and features of the LWX2 board
Function
and Feature
Description
Basic
function
LWX2 converts signals as follows:
l 2 x (16 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s signals)<->2 x (16 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s signals)
Client-side
service type
WDM
specification
Tunable
wavelength
function
Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. In the case of configuring
four-wavelength tunable optical module, configure every four continuous
wavelengths (first group started with the 1st wavelength) in the C band with
100 GHz channel spacing as one group. In this way, the optical signal output
on the WDM side are tunable within the four wavelengths of every group.
ESC
function
Supported
PRBS test
function
Not supported
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well
as the optical power.
ALS
function
Supports the ALS function on the client and WDM sides.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
820
Function
and Feature
Description
Optical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Electrical-
layer ASON
Not supported
Protection
scheme
Outloop Supported
Outloop Supported
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
821
Function
and Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards
compliance
Protocols or
standards for
transparent
transmission
(non-performance
monitoring)
IEEE 802.3u
IEEE 802.3z
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
(FC-PI)
SW-3)
(FC-SB-2)
Control (MAC)
Protocol (PHY)
Dependent (PDM)
Protocols or
standards for
service processing
(performance
monitoring)
-

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
822
The LWX2 board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, service
Figure 13-139 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LWX2 board.
Figure 13-139 Functional modules and signal flow of the LWX2 board
WDM side
IN1
OUT1
Client side
RX1
RX2
TX1
TX2
OUT2
IN2
O/E
E/O O/E
E/O
Client-side
optical
module
WDM-side
optical
module
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse

Signal Flow
The client side of the LWX2 board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate
NOTE
For the types of the signals that the client side accesses, refer to 13.26.3 Functions and Features.
In the signal flow of the LWX2 board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LWX2 to the WDM side
of the LWX2, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
The client-side optical module receives two channels of the optical signals from client
After the O/E conversion, the two channels of electrical signals are sent to the service
processing module. The module performs operations such as the regeneration of Any
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
823
signals and the performance monitoring of SDH and GE signals. Then, the module sends
the signals to the WDM-side optical module.
After performing E/O conversion, the WDM-side optical module sends out two channels
of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-
compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths Any optical signals through the OUT1-OTU2
optical interfaces.
l Receive direction
wavelengths Any optical signals from the WDM side through the IN1-IN2 optical
After O/E conversion, the Any electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module.
The module performs operations such as the regeneration of Any signals and the
performance monitoring of SDH and GE signals. Then, the module outputs two channels
of Any signals.
optical interfaces.
Module Function
WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of Any optical signals.
Any optical signals.
l Service processing module
Regenerates Any signals in two directions.
Monitors the performance of SDH and GE signals in two directions.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
824
13.26.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LWX2 board.
Figure 13-140 shows the front panel of the LWX2 board.
Figure 13-140 Front panel of the LWX2 board
LWX2
LWX2
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
T
X
1
R
X
1
T
X
2
R
X
2
O
U
T
1
I
N
1
O
U
T
2
I
N
2

NOTE
The WDM-side optical modules must be inserted in the IN1/OUT1 and IN2/OUT2 interfaces in an
ascending order of signal frequencies supported by these WDM-side optical modules.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
825
Indicators
Interfaces
Table 13-301 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LWX2 board
multiplexer board.
multiplexer board.

Laser Hazard Level
13.26.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one LWX2 board.
Table 13-302 shows the valid slots for the LWX2 board.
Table 13-302 Valid slots for the LWX2 board
Product Valid Slots

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
826
13.26.7 Characteristic Code for the LWX2
The characteristic code for the LWX2 board contains eight digits, respectively indicating the
Table 13-303 Characteristic code for the LWX2 board
optical signal
WDM side.
optical signal
the WDM side.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11LWX2 board is 92109220.
l "9210" indicates the frequency of the first channel of optical signals on the WDM side is
192.10 THz.
l "9220" indicates the frequency of the second channel of optical signals on the WDM side
is 192.20 THz.
Table 13-304 Mapping between the physical ports on the LWX2 board and the port numbers
IN1/OUT1 1
IN2/OUT2 3
TX1/RX1 5
TX2/RX2 6

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
827
NOTE
For parameters of LWX2, refer to Table 13-305
Table 13-305 LWX2 parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
Optical Interface
Name
name.
Default: Used
channel of a board.
Optical Interface
Loopback
Outloop
ESCON, FC-100,
FC-200, FDDI, FE,
FICON, FICON
Express, GE, OC-3,
OC-12, OC-48, STM-1,
STM-4, STM-16
Default: Any
Client Service
Bearer Rate (Mbit/s)
16 to 2500
Default: 2500
board.
information.
Default:
l WDM side: On
l Client side: Off
status of a board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
828
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled
Default:
l WDM side: Disabled
l Client side: Enabled
Current Bearer Rate
(M)
- parameter provides an option to query the
rate of services accessed at the optical
interface on the client side for the OTUs
at any rate.
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
Tunable
Wavelength Range
Planned Wavelength
No./Wavelength
(nm)/Frequency
(THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.100
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.170
to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /
board.
Default: C
wavelength.
SD Trigger
Condition
None, B1_SD,
OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None
resides.

13.26.10 LWX2 Specifications
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
829
Bo
ard
Client-Side
Fixed
Optical
Module
Client-Side
Pluggable Optical
Module
WDM-Side Fixed
Optical Module
WDM-Side
Pluggable
Optical
Module
TN
11L
WX
2
N/A 2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.5 km
I-16-2 km
S-16.1-15 km
L-16.2-80 km
(eSFP CWDM)-40 km
(eSFP CWDM)-80 km
(eSFP DWDM)-120 km
12800 ps/nm-C Band-
Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
12800 ps/nm-C Band-
Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
6500 ps/nm-C Band-
Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
3200 ps/nm-C Band-
Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
6400 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD (Four
Channels-Tunable)
1600 ps/nm-CWDM
Band-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
N/A

NOTE
point.
NOTE
The I-16 module, S-16.1 module, and L-16.2 module can be used to access STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4,
ESCON, STM-1, and DVB-ASI signals.
module.
NOTE
The 2.125 Gbit/s multirate module is used to access FC200, GE, FC100 and FE signals.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
830
Table 13-306 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.
5 km
I-16-2 km S-16.1-15 km L-16.2-80 km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Optical
source type
- MLM MLM SLM SLM
Target
transmission
distance
- 0.5 km (0.3
mi.)
2 km (1.2 mi.) 15 km (9.3
mi.)
80 km (49.7
mi.)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 830 to 860 1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -2.5 -3 0 3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -9.5 -10 -5 -2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 9 8.2 8.2 8.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm N/A N/A 1 1
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB N/A N/A 30 30
Eye pattern
mask
- IEEE802.3z-
compliant
G.957-compliant
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN PIN APD
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
831
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.
5 km
I-16-2 km S-16.1-15 km L-16.2-80 km
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1580 1270 to 1580 1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -17 -18 -18 -28
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm 0 -3 0 -9
Maximum
reflectance
dB N/A -27 -27 -27

NOTE
NOTE
The 2.5 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4,
ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals.
wavelengths)
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km
(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Target transmission
distance
- 40 km (24.9 mi.) 80 km (49.7 mi.)
range
nm 1471 to 1611 1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 5 5
power
dBm 0 0
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
832
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km
(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Central wavelength
deviation
nm 6.5 6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 1.0 1.0
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30 30
G.959.1-compliant
range
nm 1270 to 1620 1270 to 1620
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm -3 -9

wavelengths)
km
Target transmission
distance
- 120 km (74.6 mi.)
power
dBm 4
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
833
km
power
dBm 0
width
nm 1
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30
Receiver type - APD
range
nm N/A

Optical
Module Type
12800 ps/
nm-C Band-
Fixed
Wavelength
-NRZ-PIN
a
12800 ps/
nm-C Band-
Fixed
Wavelength
-NRZ-APD
a
6500 ps/nm-
C Band-
Fixed
Wavelength
-NRZ-PIN
3200 ps/nm-
C Band-
Fixed
Wavelength
-NRZ-PIN
6400 ps/nm-
C Band-
Tunable
Wavelength
-NRZ-APD
(Four
Channels-
Tunable)
Line code format - NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
834
Optical
Module Type
12800 ps/
nm-C Band-
Fixed
Wavelength
-NRZ-PIN
a
12800 ps/
nm-C Band-
Fixed
Wavelength
-NRZ-APD
a
6500 ps/nm-
C Band-
Fixed
Wavelength
-NRZ-PIN
3200 ps/nm-
C Band-
Fixed
Wavelength
-NRZ-PIN
6400 ps/nm-
C Band-
Tunable
Wavelength
-NRZ-APD
(Four
Channels-
Tunable)
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm -1 -1 3 3 3
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm -5 -5 -2 -2 -2
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB 10 10 8.2 8.2 8.2
Center frequency
deviation
GHz 10
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 0.2 0.2 0.5 0.5 0.5
Minimum side
mode
suppression ratio
dB 35 35 30 30 35
Dispersion
tolerance
ps/nm 12800 12800 6500 3200 6400
Receiver type - PIN APD PIN APD APD
Operating
wavelength range
nm 1200 to 1650 1300 to 1575
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -18 -28 -18 -26 -28
Minimum
receiver overload
dBm 0 -9 0 -10 -9
Maximum
reflectance
dB -27 -27 -27 -27 -27
a: The 12800ps/nm-PIN and 12800ps/nm-APD modules do not support pilot tone modulation mode.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
835
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
power
dBm 5
power
dBm 2.5
Central wavelength
deviation
nm 6.5
width
nm 1
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30
Receiver type - APD

NOTE
l When SDH or OTN services are provisioned on the WDM side, the line code on the WDM side must
be NRZ.
l When SDH or OTN services are provisioned on the WDM side, the eye pattern on the WDM side
complies with the template defined in ITU-T G.957.
(8.7 in.)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
836
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
(W)
Maximum Power
F) (W)
LWX2 38.5 42.4

13.27 LWXD
LWXD: arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board (double transmit)
Only one functional version of the LWXD board is available, that is, TN11.
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
1L
WX
D
N N N N Y Y

13.27.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LWXD board implements the conversion between the
optical signal at the rate between 16 Mbit/s and 2.7 Gbit/s and WDM signals that comply with
ITU-T Recommendations, and dually feeds and selectively receives signals on the WDM side.
For the position of the LWXD board in the WDM system, see Figure 13-141.
Figure 13-141 Position of the LWXD board in the WDM system
LWXD
16Mbit/s

2.7Gbit/s
MUX/
DMUX
MUX/
DMUX
MUX/
DMUX
MUX/
DMUX
T
r
a
n
s
p
a
r
e
n
t

t
r
a
n
s
m
i
s
s
i
o
n
T
r
a
n
s
p
a
r
e
n
t

t
r
a
n
s
m
i
s
s
i
o
n
16Mbit/s

2.7Gbit/s
LWXD
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
837
The LWXD board is used to achieve wavelength tunable and to provide ESC.
Table 13-311 Functions and features of the LWXD board
Function
and Feature
Description
Basic
function
LWXD converts signals as follows:
l Implements the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM
side.
Client-side
service type
WDM
specification
Tunable
wavelength
function
ESC
function
Supported
PRBS test
function
Not supported
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
ALS
function
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
838
Function
and Feature
Description
Optical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Electrical-
layer ASON
Not supported
Protection
scheme
Outloop Supported
Outloop Supported
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
839
Function
and Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards
compliance
Protocols or
standards for
transparent
transmission
(non-performance
monitoring)
IEEE 802.3u
IEEE 802.3z
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
(FC-PI)
SW-3)
(FC-SB-2)
Control (MAC)
Protocol (PHY)
Dependent (PDM)
Protocols or
standards for
service processing
(performance
monitoring)
-

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
840
The LWXD board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, service
Figure 13-142 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LWXD board.
Figure 13-142 Functional modules and signal flow of the LWXD board
WDM side
Client side
RX
TX
O/E
E/O O/E
E/O
Client-side
optical
module
WDM-side
optical
module
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
Splitter

Signal Flow
The client side of the LWXD board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate
NOTE
For the types of the signals that the client side accesses, refer to 13.27.3 Functions and Features.
In the signal flow of the LWXD board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LWXD to the WDM side
of the LWXD, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the service processing module. The
module performs operations such as the regeneration of Any signals and the performance
monitoring of SDH and GE signals. Then, the module sends the signals to the WDM-side
optical module.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
841
After performing the E/O conversion, the WDM-side optical module sends out the ITU-T
G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at
CWDM standard wavelengths Any optical signals. An optical splitter converts the OTU1
optical signals into two channels of identical optical signals, and then the two channels
signals are output through the OUT1-OUT2 optical interfaces.
l Receive direction
wavelengths Any optical signals from the WDM side through the IN1-IN2 optical
The module performs operations such as received signal selection, the regeneration of Any
signals and the performance monitoring of SDH and GE signals. Then, the module outputs
one channel of Any signals.
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the electrical signals, and then
outputs one channel of client-side optical signals through the TX optical interface.
Module Function
Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of Any optical signals.
Monitors the performance of SDH and GE signals in two directions.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
842
13.27.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LWXD board.
Figure 13-143 shows the front panel of the LWXD board.
Figure 13-143 Front panel of the LWXD board
LWXD
LWXD
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
T
X
1
R
X
1
O
U
T
1
I
N
1
O
U
T
2
I
N
2

Indicators
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
843
Interfaces
Table 13-312 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LWXD board
multiplexer board.
multiplexer board.

Laser Hazard Level
13.27.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one LWXD board.
Table 13-313 shows the valid slots for the LWXD board.
Table 13-313 Valid slots for the LWXD board
Product Valid Slots

13.27.7 Characteristic Code for the LWXD
The characteristic code for the LWXD board contains eight digits, respectively indicating the
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
844
Table 13-314 Characteristic code for the LWXD board
optical signal
WDM side.
optical signal
the WDM side.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11LWXD is 92109210.
Table 13-315 Mapping between the physical ports on the LWXD board and the port numbers
IN1/OUT1 1
IN2/OUT2 2
TX/RX 3

NOTE
For parameters of LWXD, refer to Table 13-316
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
845
Table 13-316 LWXD parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
Optical Interface
Name
- Sets and querses the optical interface
name.
Default: Used
channel of a board.
Optical Interface
Loopback
Outloop
ESCON, FC-100,
FC-200, FDDI, FE,
FICON, FICON Express,
GE, OC-3, OC-12,
OC-48, STM-1, STM-4,
STM-16
Default: Any
type of the service accessed at the
optical interface on the client side.
Client Service
Bearer Rate (Mbit/s)
16 to 2500
Default: 2500
sets the rate of the accessed service at
the optical interface on the client side of
a board.
information.
Default:
l WDM side: On
l Client side: Off
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled
Default:
l WDM side: Disabled
Current Bearer Rate
(M)
- parameter provides an option to query
the rate of services accessed at the
optical interface on the client side for the
OTUs at any rate.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
846
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
Tunable
Wavelength Range
Planned Wavelength
No./Wavelength
(nm)/Frequency
(THz)
l C: 1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.100
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.170
to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /
board.
information.
Default: C
wavelength.
SD Trigger
Condition
None, B1_SD,
OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None
board resides.
information.

13.27.10 LWXD Specifications
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
847
Bo
ard
Client-Side
Fixed
Optical
Module
Client-Side
Pluggable Optical
Module
WDM-Side Fixed
Optical Module
WDM-Side
Pluggable
Optical
Module
TN
11L
WX
D
N/A 2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.5 km
I-16-2 km
S-16.1-15 km
L-16.2-80 km
(eSFP CWDM)-40 km
(eSFP CWDM)-80 km
(eSFP DWDM)-120 km
12800 ps/nm-C Band-
Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
12800 ps/nm-C Band-
Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
6500 ps/nm-C Band-
Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
3200 ps/nm-C Band-
Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
12800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
6400 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD (Four
Channels-Tunable)
1600 ps/nm-CWDM
Band-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
N/A

NOTE
point.
NOTE
The I-16 module, S-16.1 module, and L-16.2 module can be used to access STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4,
ESCON, STM-1, and DVB-ASI signals.
module.
NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
848
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.
5 km
I-16-2 km S-16.1-15 km L-16.2-80 km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Optical
source type
- MLM MLM SLM SLM
Target
transmission
distance
- 0.5 km (0.3
mi.)
2 km (1.2 mi.) 15 km (9.3
mi.)
80 km (49.7
mi.)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 830 to 860 1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -2.5 -3 0 3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -9.5 -10 -5 -2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 9 8.2 8.2 8.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm N/A N/A 1 1
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB N/A N/A 30 30
Eye pattern
mask
- IEEE802.3z-
compliant
G.957-compliant
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN PIN APD
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
849
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.
5 km
I-16-2 km S-16.1-15 km L-16.2-80 km
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1580 1270 to 1580 1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -17 -18 -18 -28
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm 0 -3 0 -9
Maximum
reflectance
dB N/A -27 -27 -27

NOTE
NOTE
The 2.5 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4,
ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals.
wavelengths)
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km
(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Target transmission
distance
- 40 km (24.9 mi.) 80 km (49.7 mi.)
range
nm 1471 to 1611 1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 5 5
power
dBm 0 0
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
850
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km
(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Central wavelength
deviation
nm 6.5 6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 1.0 1.0
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30 30
G.959.1-compliant
range
nm 1270 to 1620 1270 to 1620
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm -3 -9

wavelengths)
km
Target transmission
distance
- 120 km (74.6 mi.)
power
dBm 4
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
851
km
power
dBm 0
width
nm 1
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30
Receiver type - APD
range
nm N/A

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
852
Optical Module
Type
12800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Fixed
Wavelen
gth-NRZ-
PIN
a
12800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Fixed
Wavelen
gth-NRZ-
APD
a
6500 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Fixed
Wavelen
gth-NRZ-
PIN
3200 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Fixed
Wavelen
gth-NRZ-
APD
12800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
NRZ-
APD
6400 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-NRZ-
APD
(Four
Channels
-Tunable)
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm -4 -4 0 0 0 0
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm -8 -8 -5 -5 -5 -5
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB 10 10 8.2 8.2 10 8.2
Center frequency
deviation
GHz 10
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 0.2 0.2 0.5 0.5 0.2 0.5
Minimum side
mode suppression
ratio
dB 35 35 30 30 35 35
Dispersion
tolerance
ps/nm 12800 12800 6500 3200 12800 6400
Operating
wavelength range
nm 1200 to 1650 1300 to
1575
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -18 -28 -18 -26 -28 -28
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
853
Optical Module
Type
12800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Fixed
Wavelen
gth-NRZ-
PIN
a
12800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Fixed
Wavelen
gth-NRZ-
APD
a
6500 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Fixed
Wavelen
gth-NRZ-
PIN
3200 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Fixed
Wavelen
gth-NRZ-
APD
12800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
NRZ-
APD
6400 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-NRZ-
APD
(Four
Channels
-Tunable)
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm 0 -9 0 -10 -9 -9
Maximum
reflectance
dB -27 -27 -27 -27 -27 -27

NRZ-APD
power
dBm 2
power
dBm 0.5
width
nm 1
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
854
NRZ-APD
Receiver type - APD

NOTE
be NRZ.
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
(W)
Maximum Power
F) (W)
LWXD 35.8 39.4

13.28 LWXS
LWXS: arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board (single transmit)
The available functional versions of the LWXS board are TN11 and TN12.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
855
Huawei office.
Boar
d
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
TN11
LWX
S
N N N N Y Y
TN12
LWX
S
Y Y Y Y Y Y

l Functions:
The TN11LWXS board does not support access ETR/CLO services, whereas the
TN12LWXS board supports, see 13.28.3 Functions and Features.
The LWXS boards of different versions cannot replace each other.
13.28.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LWXS board implements the conversion between the
optical signals at the rate of 16 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T
Recommendations.
For the position of the LWXS board in the WDM system, see Figure 13-144.
Figure 13-144 Position of the LWXS board rate in the WDM system
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
16 Mbit/s
2.7 Gbit/s
16 Mbit/s
2.7 Gbit/s
LWXS LWXS
T
r
a
n
s
p
a
r
e
n
t

t
r
a
n
s
m
i
s
s
i
o
n
T
r
a
n
s
p
a
r
e
n
t

t
r
a
n
s
m
i
s
s
i
o
n

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
856
The LWXS board is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and to provide ESC.
Table 13-322 Functions and features of the LWXS board
Function
and Feature
Description
Basic
function
LWXS converts signals as follows:
Client-side
service type
ETR: SAN service at a rate of 16 Mbit/s
CLO: SAN service at a rate of 16 Mbit/s
NOTE
Only TN12LWXS supports ETR and CLO services.
WDM
specification
Tunable
wavelength
function
ESC
function
Supported
PRBS test
function
Not supported
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
857
Function
and Feature
Description
ALS
function
Optical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Electrical-
layer ASON
Not supported
Protection
scheme
Outloop Supported
Outloop Supported
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
858
Function
and Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards
compliance
Protocols or
standards for
transparent
transmission
(non-
performance
monitoring)
IEEE 802.3u
IEEE 802.3z
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
(FC-PI)
SW-3)
(FC-SB-2)
Control (MAC)
Protocol (PHY)
Dependent (PDM)
IBM GDPS( Geographically Dispersed Parallel Sysplex)
Protocol
NOTE
Only TN12LWXS supports IBM GDPS( Geographically
Dispersed Parallel Sysplex) Protocol.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
859
Function
and Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards for
service
processing
(performance
monitoring)
-

The LWXS board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, service
Figure 13-145 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LWXS board.
Figure 13-145 Functional modules and signal flow of the LWXS board
WDM side
OUT
Client side
RX
TX
IN
O/E
E/O O/E
E/O
Client-side
optical
module
WDM-side
optical
module
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse

Signal Flow
In the signal flow of the LWXS board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LWXS to the WDM side
of the LWXS, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
860
After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the service processing module. The
module performs operations such as the regeneration of Any signals and the performance
monitoring of SDH/SONET and GE signals. Then, the module sends the signals to the
WDM-side optical module.
After performing E/O conversion, the WDM-side optical module sends out Any optical
signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or CWDM wavelengths
l Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of Any optical signals at DWDM
ITU-T G.694.2 through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E
conversion.
The module performs operations such as the regeneration of Any signals and the
performance monitoring of SDH/SONET and GE signals. Then, the module outputs one
channel of Any electrical signals.
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the electrical signals, and then
outputs one channel of client-side optical signals through the TX optical interface.
Module Function
Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of Any optical signals.
Monitors the performance of SDH/SONET and GE signals in two directions.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
861
13.28.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LWXS board.
Figure 13-146 shows the front panel of the LWXS board.
Figure 13-146 Front panel of the LWXS board
LWXS
LWXS
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
O
U
T
I
N
T
X
1
R
X
1

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
862
Indicators
Interfaces
Table 13-323 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LWXS board
multiplexer board.
multiplexer board.

Laser Hazard Level
13.28.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one LWXS board.
Table 13-324 shows the valid slots for the TN11LWXS board.
Table 13-324 Valid slots for theTN11LWXS board
Product Valid Slots

Table 13-325 shows the valid slots for the TN12LWXS board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
863
Table 13-325 Valid slots for theTN12LWXS board
Product Valid Slots

13.28.7 Characteristic Code for the LWXS
Code for OTUs.
Table 13-326 Mapping between the physical ports on the LWXS board and the port numbers
IN/OUT 1
TX/RX 3

NOTE
For parameters of the LWXS, refer to Table 13-327
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
864
Table 13-327 LWXS parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
Optical Interface
Name
are supported.
Default: Used
a board.
Optical Interface
Loopback
Outloop
Default: Non-
Loopback
ESCON, FC-100,
FC-200, FDDI, FE,
FICON, FICON
Express, GE, OC-3,
OC-12, OC-48,
STM-1, STM-4,
STM-16, ETR, CLO
Default: Any
NOTE
Only TN12LWXS supports ETR, and CLO
services.
Client Service
Bearer Rate (Mbit/
s)
16 to 2500
Default: 2500
board.
information.
Default:
l WDM side: On
l Client side: Off
status of a board.
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled
Default:
l WDM side:
Disabled
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
865
Current Bearer
Rate(Mbit/s)
- parameter provides an option to query the
rate of services accessed at the optical
interface on the client side for the OTUs at
any rate.
OFC Enabled Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
The open fiber control (OFC) function
controls the transmit power of the laser
when the fiber is disconnected. When the
OFC function is enabled, the laser sends
short pulse, rather than remains in the
enabled state, to check whether the fiber is
connected. In this way, the output optical
power of the laser is cut, which prevents eye
injury.
NOTE
l Set the LPT and ALS functions to Disabled
after the OFC function is enabled.
l The OFC function cannot coexist with
protection.
l Only the TN12LWXS supports this
parameter.
l This parameter is valid only when the
Service Type parameter is set to ISC 1G or
ISC 2G.
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
Tunable
Wavelength Range
Planned
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.10
0
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.17
0 to
18/1611.00/188.78
0
Default: /
board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
866
Planned Band
Type
C, CWDM
Default: C
band type of the current working
wavelength.
SD Trigger
Condition
None, B1_SD,
OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None
resides.

13.28.10 LWXS Specifications
Bo
ard
Client-Side
Fixed
Optical
Module
Client-Side
Pluggable Optical
Module
WDM-Side Fixed
Optical Module
WDM-Side
Pluggable
Optical
Module
TN
11L
WX
S
TN
12L
WX
S
N/A 2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.5 km
I-16-2 km
S-16.1-15 km
L-16.2-80 km
(eSFP CWDM)-40 km
(eSFP CWDM)-80 km
(eSFP DWDM)-120 km
12800 ps/nm-C Band-
Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
12800 ps/nm-C Band-
Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
6500 ps/nm-C Band-
Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
3200 ps/nm-C Band-
Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
12800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
6400 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD (Four
Channels-Tunable)
1600 ps/nm-CWDM
Band-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
N/A

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
867
NOTE
NOTE
point.
NOTE
The I-16/SR-1 OC-48 module, S-16.1/IR-1 OC-48 module, and L-16.2/LR-2 OC-48 can be used to access ETR,
CLO, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, and DVB-ASI signals.
module.
NOTE
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.
5 km
I-16-2 km S-16.1-15 km L-16.2-80 km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Optical
source type
- MLM MLM SLM SLM
Target
transmission
distance
- 0.5 km (0.3
mi.)
2 km (1.2 mi.) 15 km (9.3
mi.)
80 km (49.7
mi.)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 830 to 860 1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -2.5 -3 0 3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -9.5 -10 -5 -2
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
868
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.
5 km
I-16-2 km S-16.1-15 km L-16.2-80 km
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 9 8.2 8.2 8.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm N/A N/A 1 1
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB N/A N/A 30 30
Eye pattern
mask
- IEEE802.3z-
compliant
G.957-compliant
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN PIN APD
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1580 1270 to 1580 1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -17 -18 -18 -28
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm 0 -3 0 -9
Maximum
reflectance
dB N/A -27 -27 -27

NOTE
The 1.25 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access ETR, CLO, GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12,
ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, or DVB-ASI signals.
NOTE
The 2.67 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access ETR, CLO, STM-16, OC-48, FC200,
FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
869
wavelengths)
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km
(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Target transmission
distance
- 40 km (24.9 mi.) 80 km (49.7 mi.)
range
nm 1471 to 1611 1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 5 5
power
dBm 0 0
Central wavelength
deviation
nm 6.5 6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 1.0 1.0
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30 30
G.959.1-compliant
range
nm 1270 to 1620 1270 to 1620
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm -3 -9

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
870
wavelengths)
km
Target transmission
distance
- 120 km (74.6 mi.)
power
dBm 4
power
dBm 0
width
nm 1
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30
Receiver type - APD
range
nm N/A

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
871
Optical
Module Type
12800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Fixed
Waveleng
th-NRZ-
PIN
a
12800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Fixed
Waveleng
th-NRZ-
APD
a
6500 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Fixed
Wavelen
gth-NRZ-
PIN
3200 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Fixed
Waveleng
th-NRZ-
APD
12800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-NRZ-
APD
6400 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Waveleng
th-NRZ-
APD
(Four
Channels-
Tunable)
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Maximum
mean launched
power
dBm -1 -1 3 3 3 3
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm -5 -5 -2 -2 -2 -2
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB 10 10 8.2 8.2 10 8.2
Center
frequency
THz 192.10 to 196.00
Center
frequency
deviation
GHz 10
Maximum -20
dB spectral
width
nm 0.2 0.2 0.5 0.5 0.2 0.5
Minimum side
mode
suppression
ratio
dB 35 35 30 30 35 35
Dispersion
tolerance
ps/nm 12800 12800 6500 3200 12800 6400
Eye pattern
mask
- G.959.1-compliant
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
872
Optical
Module Type
12800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Fixed
Waveleng
th-NRZ-
PIN
a
12800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Fixed
Waveleng
th-NRZ-
APD
a
6500 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Fixed
Wavelen
gth-NRZ-
PIN
3200 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Fixed
Waveleng
th-NRZ-
APD
12800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-NRZ-
APD
6400 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Waveleng
th-NRZ-
APD
(Four
Channels-
Tunable)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1200 to 1650 1300 to
1575
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -18 -28 -18 -26 -28 -28
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm 0 -9 0 -10 -9 -9
Maximum
reflectance
dB -27 -27 -27 -27 -27 -27

Wavelength-NRZ-APD
power
dBm 5
power
dBm 2.5
Central wavelength
deviation
nm 6.5
width
nm 1
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
873
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30
Receiver type - APD

NOTE
be NRZ.
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
(W)
Maximum Power
F) (W)
LWXS 33.9 37.3

13.29 TMX
TMX: 4-channel STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 asynchronous mux OTU2 wavelength conversion
board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
874
The available functional versions of the TMX board are TN11 and TN12.
Huawei office.
Boar
d
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
TN11
TMX
Y Y N N Y Y
TN12
TMX
Y Y Y Y Y Y

l Function:
TN11TMX supports AFEC, and the TN12TMX supports AFEC-2. Boards that use
different FEC modes cannot interoperate with each other. For details, see 13.29.3
l Specification:
The TN11TMX board supports fixed optical module and tunable optical module on the
WDM side. The TN12TMX board supports fixed optical module, tunable optical
module, XFP module and gray optical module on the WDM side. For specifications of
each version, see 13.29.10 TMX Specifications.
Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11TMX TN12TMX The TN12TMX can be created as TN11TMX on the NMS. The
upgrade. After substitution, the TN12TMX functions as the
TN11TMX.
NOTE
TN12TMX None -

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
875
13.29.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the TMX board multiplexes four channels of STM-16/
OC-48/OTU1 service signals into one channel of OTU2 signals, and implements conversion
between these service signals and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations.
For the position of the TMX board in the WDM system, see Figure 13-147.
Figure 13-147 Position of the TMX board in the WDM system
1
4
1
4
TMX
STM-16
OC-48
OTU1
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
1
O
D
U
2
1
O
T
U
2
STM-16
OC-48
OTU1
4
O
D
U
1
TMX
1
O
D
U
2
1
O
T
U
2
4
O
D
U
1
The TMX board is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and to provide OTN interfaces
and ESC.
Table 13-333 Functions and features of the TMX board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function TMX converts signals as follows:
Client-side
service type
to the ITU-T G.709.
WDM
specification
Tunable
wavelength
function
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
876
Function and
Feature
Description
PRBS test
function
client side, only when the client side service type is OTU1.
TN11TMX:
the WDM side.
TN12TMX:
the WDM side.
NOTE
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
power of the laser.
Regeneration
board
TN11TMX:
TN11LSXR
TN12TMX:
Optical-layer
ASON
Supported
Electrical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Protection
scheme
Outloop Supported
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
877
Function and
Feature
Description
Outloop Supported
Protocols or
standards
compliance
Protocols or
standards for
transparent
transmission
(non-
performance
monitoring)
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
Protocols or
standards for
service
processing
(performance
monitoring)
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1

The TMX board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
Figure 13-148 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TMX board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
878
Figure 13-148 Functional modules and signal flow of the TMX board
WDM side
IN
Client side
RX1
RX2
RX4
TX4
TX1
TX2
RX3
TX3
OUT O/E
E/O O/E
E/O
SDH/SONET
encapsulation and
mapping module
Client-side OTN
processing module
Client-side
optical
module
WDM-side
optical
module
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
OTN
processing
module

Signal Flow
In the signal flow of the TMX board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TMX to the WDM side
of the TMX, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
The client-side optical module receives four channels of the optical signals from client
After the O/E conversion, the four channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal
processing module. OTU1 signals are sent to the client-side OTN processing module for
performance monitoring. Other types of signals are sent to the SDH/SONET encapsulation
and mapping modules for encapsulation and mapping. In the end, operations such as the
OTN framing and FEC/AFEC encoding processing are performed. Then, the module
outputs one channel of OTU2 electrical signals.
l Receive direction
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
879
and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs four channels of STM-16/OC-48/
OTU1 electrical signals.
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of STM-16/OC-48/OTU1
electrical signals, and then outputs client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX4 optical
interfaces.
Module Function
Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of four channels of STM-16/OC-48/
electrical signals to STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 optical signals.
The module consists of the SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, client-side
OTN processing module, and OTN processing module.
Encapsulates multiples channel of SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the
OTU2 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
880
13.29.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TMX board.
Figure 13-149 shows the front panel of the TMX board.
Figure 13-149 Front panel of the TMX board
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
T
X
1
R
X
1
T
X
2
R
X
2
T
X
3
R
X
3
T
X
4
R
X
4
O
U
T
I
N
TMX
TMX

Indicators
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
881
Interfaces
Table 13-334 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TMX board
multiplexer board.
multiplexer board.

Laser Hazard Level
13.29.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one TMX board.
Table 13-335 shows the valid slots for the TN11TMX board.
Table 13-335 Valid slots for TN11TMX board
Product Valid Slots

Table 13-336 shows the valid slots for the TN12TMX board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
882
Table 13-336 Valid slots for TN12TMX board
Product Valid Slots

13.29.7 Characteristic Code for the TMX
Code for OTUs.
Table 13-337 Mapping between the physical ports on the TMX board and the port numbers
IN/OUT 1
TX1/RX1 3
TX2/RX2 4
TX3/RX3 5
TX4/RX4 6

NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
883
For parameters of the TMX, refer to Table 13-338.
Table 13-338 TMX parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
Optical Interface
Name
name.
Default: Used
channel of a board.
Optical Interface
Loopback
Outloop
Service Type None, OTU-1, OC-48,
STM-16
Default: OTU-1
Default:
l WDM side: On
l Client side: Off
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
Hold-off Time of
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
0s, 100ms, 200ms,
300ms, 400ms, 500ms,
600ms, 700ms, 800ms,
900ms, 1s, 1100ms,
1200ms, 1300ms,
1400ms, 1500ms,
1600ms, 1700ms,
1800ms, 1900ms, 2s
Default: 0s
automatically disabling lasers. With
ALS enabled, the hold-off time is a time
period from the point when the system
detects service interruption to the point
when ALS automatically shuts down the
related lasers.
NOTE
Only the TN12TMX supports this parameter.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
884
Hold-off Time of
Automatic Laser
Turn-On
0s, 100ms, 200ms,
300ms, 400ms, 500ms,
600ms, 700ms, 800ms,
900ms, 1s, 1100ms,
1200ms, 1300ms,
1400ms, 1500ms,
1600ms, 1700ms,
1800ms, 1900ms, 2s
Default: 0s
enabled, the hold-off time is a time
detects service recovery to the point
when ALS automatically enables the
related lasers.
NOTE
Only the TN12TMX supports this parameter.
Default: Enabled
FEC Mode FEC, AFEC
Default: FEC
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
Planned
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
l C: 1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.100
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.170
to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /
board.
NOTE
Default: C
wavelength.
NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
885
SD Trigger
Condition
None, B1_SD,
OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None
board resides.
NOTE
Only TN11TMX supports this parameter.
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
to Disabled.
NOTE
Only TN12TMX supports this parameter.
Default: Disabled
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
NOTE
Only TN12TMX supports the parameter.

13.29.10 TMX Specifications
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
886
Bo
ard
Client-Side
Fixed
Optical
Module
Client-Side
Pluggable Optical
Module
WDM-Side Fixed
Optical Module
WDM-Side
Pluggable
Optical Module
TN
11T
MX
N/A I-16-2 km
S-16.1-15 km
L-16.1-40 km
L-16.2-80 km
(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
(eSFP DWDM)-120
km
800 ps/nm-C Band
(odd & even
wavelengths)-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
1200 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
1200 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
4800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
ODB-APD
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
(D)RZ-PIN
N/A
TN
12T
MX
N/A I-16-2 km
S-16.1-15 km
L-16.1-40 km
L-16.2-80 km
(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
(eSFP DWDM)-120
km
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
(D)RZ-PIN
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
800 ps/nm-C Band
(Odd & Even
Wavelengths)-
Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable
Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN-XFP
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80 km

NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
887
NOTE
point.
NOTE
FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals.
Optical
Module
Type
I-16-2 km S-16.1-15
km
L-16.1-40
km
L-16.2-80
km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Optical
source type
- MLM SLM SLM SLM
Target
transmission
distance
- 2 km (1.2 mi.) 15 km (9.3
mi.)
40 km (24.9
mi.)
80 km (49.7
mi.)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -3 0 3 3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -10 -5 -2 -2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm N/A 1 1 1
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
888
Optical
Module
Type
I-16-2 km S-16.1-15
km
L-16.1-40
km
L-16.2-80
km
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB N/A 30 30 30
Eye pattern
mask
- G.957-compliant
G.959.1-compliant
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN APD APD
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1270 to 1580 1270 to 1580 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -18 -18 -27 -28
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm -3 0 -9 -9
Maximum
reflectance
dB -27 -27 -27 -27

NOTE
wavelengths)
Optical Module Type 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
889
CWDM)-80 km
Maximum -20 dB spectral width nm 1.0
Minimum side mode suppression
ratio
dB 30
Eye pattern mask - G.957-compliant
G.959.1-compliant
Receiver type - APD

NOTE
wavelengths)
km
Target transmission
distance
- 120 km (74.6 mi.)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
890
km
power
dBm 4
power
dBm 0
width
nm 1
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30
Receiver type - APD
range
nm N/A

(odd & even
wavelengths)-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
891
(odd & even
wavelengths)-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
power
dBm 2 2
power
dBm -3 -3
width
nm 0.3 0.3
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35 35
(FEC on)
dBm -16 -16

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
892
Optical
Module Type
1200 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
NRZ-
PIN
1200 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
APD
4800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
ODB-
APD
800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Waveleng
th-DRZ-
PIN
800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Waveleng
th-NRZ-
PIN
Line code
format
Maximum
mean launched
power
dBm 2 2 2 2 2
Minimum
mean launched
power
dBm -3 -3 -3 -3 -3
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB 10 10
N/A
a
10 10
Center
frequency
THz 192.10 to 196.05
Center
frequency
deviation
GHz 5 5 5 5 5
Maximum -20
dB spectral
width
nm 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
Minimum side
mode
suppression
ratio
dB 35 35 35 35 35
Dispersion
tolerance
ps/
nm
1200 1200 4800 800 800
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1200 to 1650
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
893
Optical
Module Type
1200 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
NRZ-
PIN
1200 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
APD
4800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
ODB-
APD
800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Waveleng
th-DRZ-
PIN
800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Waveleng
th-NRZ-
PIN
Receiver
sensitivity,
EOL (FEC on)
dBm -16 -26 -26 -16 -16
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm 0 -9 -9 0 0
Maximum
reflectance
dB -27 -27 -27 -27 -27

PIN-XFP
power
dBm 2
power
dBm -3
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
894
PIN-XFP
width
nm 0.3
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35
Receiver type - PIN
(FEC on)
dBm -16
(FEC on)
dBm 0

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
power
dBm 2
power
dBm -1
width
nm 0.3
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
895
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35
Receiver type - PIN
(FEC on)
dBm -16
(FEC on)
dBm 0

Optical
Module Type
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80 km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ
Optical source
type
- SLM SLM SLM
Target
transmission
distance
- 10 km (6.2 mi.) 40 km (24.9 mi.) 80 km (49.7 mi.)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565
Maximum
mean launched
power
dBm -1 2 4
Minimum
mean launched
power
dBm -6 -1 0
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
896
Optical
Module Type
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80 km
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB 6 8.2 9
Maximum -20
dB spectral
width
nm N/A N/A N/A
Minimum side
mode
suppression
ratio
dB 30 30 30
Eye pattern
mask
- G.959.1-compliant
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1290 to 1565 1260 to 1605 1270 to 1600
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -11 -14 -24
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm -1 -1 -7

(8.7 in.)
l Weight:
TN11TMX: 1.4 kg (3.1 lb.)
TN12TMX: 1.1 kg (2.4 lb.)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
897
Power Consumption
Boar
d
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at
55C (131F) (W)
TN1
1TM
X
NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
40.3 44.3
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
42.1 46.4
44.5 51.2
Wavelength-ODB-APD
48.4 55.7
TN1
2TM
X
NRZ-PIN-XFP
31.4 36.1
32.4 37.1
41 45.5
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
39 43.7
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
898
14 Tributary Board and Line Board
About This Chapter
14.1 Overview
A tributary board receives client-side services, performs O-E conversion, maps the services into
ODUk containers, and lastly sends the ODUk electrical signals to cross-connect board for
centralized cross-connection. A line board multiplexes and maps ODUk electrical signals cross-
connected from cross-connect board and performs conversion between OTUk optical signals
and standard wavelengths.
14.2 ND2
ND2: 2 x 10G line service processing board
14.3 NO2
NO2: 8 x 10G Line Service Processing Board
14.4 NQ2
NQ2: 4 x 10G Line Service Processing Board
14.5 NS2
NS2: 10G Line Service Processing Board
14.6 NS3
NS3: 40G line service processing board
14.7 NS4
14.8 TBE
TBE: 10 Gigabit Ethernet tributary board
14.9 TDG
TDG: 2 x GE tributary service processing board
14.10 TDX
TDX: 2 x 10G tributary service processing board
14.11 TEM28
TEM28: 24xGE+4x10GE Ethernet tributary unit
14.12 THA
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Hardware Description 14 Tributary Board and Line Board
899
THA: 16 Any-rate Ports Service Processing Board
14.13 TOA
TOA: 8 Any-rate Ports Service Processing Board
14.14 TOG
TOG: 8 x GE tributary service processing board
14.15 TOM
TOM: 8 x multi-rate ports service processing board
14.16 TOX
TOX: 8 x 10 Gbit/s tributary service processing board
14.17 TQM
TQM: 4 x multi-rate tributary service processing board
14.18 TQS
TQS: 4 x STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 tributary service processing board
14.19 TQX
TQX: 4 x 10 Gbit/s tributary service processing board
14.20 TSC
TSC: 100G tributary service processing board
14.21 TSXL
TSXL: 40 Gbit/s tributary service processing board
14.22 TTX
TTX: 10 x 10G tributary service processing board
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
900
14.1 Overview
Positions of Tributary and Line Boards in a WDM System
Figure 14-1 shows the positions of tributary and line boards in a WDM system.
Figure 14-1 Positions of tributary and line boards in a WDM system
O
M
O
A
F
I
U SC1
Tributary
board
O
D
O
A
Line
Board
Tributary
board
Tributary
board
Tributary
board
Line
Board
Line
Board
Line
Board
ODUk ODUk
C
l
i
e
n
t
-
s
i
d
e

e
q
u
i
p
m
e
n
t
W
D
M
-
s
i
d
e

O
D
F
Client-side
services
WDM-side
services
Types of Tributary Boards
The differences between different types of tributary boards lie in the type and number of client-
side signals, and the type and number of electrical signals sent to the cross-connect board. Table
14-1 provides the main functions of the tributary boards. The THA, TOA, and TOM tributary
boards can apply to multiple scenarios. For details on these scenarios, see 14.12 THA, 14.13
TOA, and 14.15 TOM. The TEM28 tributary board supports Layer 2 processing of Ethernet
services.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
901
Table 14-1 Main functions of tributary boards
Board Client-Side Service Backplane-Side Signal Pluggable Optical
Module
Type Max.
Number
Type Max. Number
TN11TDG GE 2 GE 2 Y
ODU1 1
TN11TDX 10GE LAN,
10GE WAN,
STM-64, OC-192
2 ODU1 8 Y
TN12TDX 10GE LAN,
10GE WAN,
STM-64, OC-192
2 ODU2, ODU2e 2 Y
TN52TDX 10GE LAN,
10GE WAN,
STM-64,
OC-192, OTU2,
OTU2e
2 ODU2, ODU2e 2 Y
TN53TDX 10GE LAN,
10GE WAN,
STM-64,
OC-192, OTU2,
OTU2e, FC800,
FC1200
2 ODU2, ODU2e 2 Y
FC800 2 ODUflex 2 Y
TN54THA FE, FDDI, GE,
STM-1, STM-4,
OC-3, OC-12,
FC100, FICON,
DVB-ASI,
ESCON, OTU1
See
14.12.2
Applicati
on
Overview
.
ODU0 See 14.12.2
Application
Overview.
Y
FE, GE, OTU1,
STM-1, OC-3,
STM-4, OC-12,
STM-16, OC-48,
FC100, FC200,
FICON, FICON
Express, DVB-
ASI, ESCON,
FDDI
ODU1
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
902
Module
Type Max.
Number
Type Max. Number
TN54TOA FE, FDDI, GE,
STM-1, STM-4,
OC-3, OC-12,
FC100, FICON,
DVB-ASI,
ESCON, SDI,
OTU1
See
14.13.2
Applicati
on
Overview
.
ODU0 See 14.13.2
Application
Overview.
Y
FE, FDDI,
STM-1, OC-3,
DVB-ASI, SDI,
ESCON, STM-4,
OC-12, GE,
FC100, FICON,
STM-16, FC200,
FICON Express,
HD-SDI, HD-
SDIRBR, OTU1
ODU1
3G-SDI, 3G-
SDIRBR, FC400,
FICON4G
ODUflex
TN52TOG GE 8 ODU0 8 Y
ODU1 4
TN11TOM FC100, FICON,
GE, STM-4,
OC-12, DVB-
ASI, ESCON,
FDDI, FE, SDI,
STM-1, OC-3,
FC200, FICON
Express, HD-
SDI, STM-16,
OC-48, OTU1
See
14.15.2.4
Applicati
on
Scenario
Overview
of
TN11TO
M.
ODU1 See 14.15.2.4
Application
Scenario
Overview of
TN11TOM.
Y
TN52TOM FE, FDDI, DVB-
ASI, SDI,
ESCON, GE,
FC100, FICON,
OTU1
See
14.15.2.3
Applicati
on
Scenario
Overview
of
TN52TO
M.
ODU0 See 14.15.2.3
Application
Scenario
Overview of
TN52TOM.
Y
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
903
Module
Type Max.
Number
Type Max. Number
FE, FDDI,
STM-1, OC-3,
DVB-ASI, SDI,
ESCON, STM-4,
OC-12, GE,
FC100, FICON,
STM-16, OC-48,
FC200, FICON
Express, HD-
SDI, OTU1
ODU1
TN55TOX STM-64,
OC-192, 10GE
LAN, 10GE
WAN, OTU2,
OTU2e,
8 ODU2, ODU2e 8 Y
TN11TQM STM-4, STM-1,
OC-12, OC-3,
FE, ESCON,
DVB-ASI, SDI,
ESCON
4 ODU1 1 Y
GE, FC100,
FICON
2
FC200, FICON
Express,
STM-16, OC-48
1
TN12TQM STM-4, STM-1,
OC-12, OC-3,
FE, ESCON,
DVB-ASI, SDI,
ESCON, FDDI
4 ODU1 1 Y
GE, FC100,
FICON
2
FC200, FICON
Express,
STM-16, OC-48,
OTU1, HD-SDI
1
TN11TQS STM-16, OC-48,
OTU1
4 ODU1 4 Y
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
904
Module
Type Max.
Number
Type Max. Number
TN11TQX STM-64,
OC-192, 10GE
LAN, 10GE
WAN
4 ODU2 4 Y
TN52TQX STM-64,
OC-192, 10GE
LAN, 10GE
WAN, OTU2,
OTU2e,
4 ODU2, ODU2e 4 Y
TN53TQX STM-64,
OC-192, 10GE
LAN, 10GE
WAN, OTU2,
OTU2e, FC800,
FC1200
4 ODU2, ODU2e 4 Y
TN55TQX STM-64,
OC-192, 10GE
LAN, 10GE
WAN, OTU2,
OTU2e, FC800,
FC1200
4 ODU2, ODU2e 4 Y
FC800 4 ODUflex 4
TN54TSC 100GE 1 ODU4 1 Y
TN11TSX
L
STM-256,
OC-768
1 ODU2 4 N
TN53TSX
L
STM-256,
OC-768, OTU3
1 ODU3 1 N
TN54TSX
L
40GE 1 ODU3 1 Y
TN54TTX 10GE LAN,
10GE WAN,
STM-64,
OC-192, OTU2,
OTU2e
10 ODU2, ODU2e 10 Y
TN54TEM
28
FE, GE 24 16 x ODU0, 8 x ODU1, 2 x ODU2, 8 x
ODUflex. The total bandwidth is 20G
bit/s.
Y
10GE LAN,
10GE WAN
4

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
905
Line Boards
The differences between different types of line boards lie in the rate and number of line-side
signals and the type and number of electrical signals from the cross-connect board. Table
14-2 provides the main functions of line boards.
Table 14-2 Main functions of line boards
Board Backplane-Side Signal WDM-Side Signal Pluggabl
e Optical
Module
WDM Specifications
Type Max.
Number
Type Max.
Number
DWDM CWDM
TN11ND2 ODU1 8 OTU2,
OTU2e
2 N Y N
ODU2, ODU2e 2
OTU2e
2 Y Y N
ODU2, ODU2e 2
OTU2e
2 N Y N
ODU1 8
ODU2, ODU2e 2
ODUflex 4
OTU2e
2 Y Y N
ODU1 8
ODU2, ODU2e 2
ODUflex 4
TN55NO2 ODU0 64 OTU2,
OTU2e
8 Y Y N
ODU1 32
ODU2, ODU2e 8
TN51NQ2 ODU1 16 OTU2,
OTU2e
4 Y Y N
ODU2, ODU2e 4
TN52NQ2
TN54NQ2
ODU0 32
ODU1 16
ODU2, ODU2e 4
TN53NQ2 ODU0 32
ODU1 16
ODU2, ODU2e 4
8xODUflex 4
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
906
Board Backplane-Side Signal WDM-Side Signal Pluggabl
e Optical
Module
WDM Specifications
Type Max.
Number
Type Max.
Number
DWDM CWDM
TN11NS2 ODU1 4 OTU2 1 N Y N
TN12NS2 ODU1 4 OTU2,
OTU2e
1 Y Y N
ODU2, ODU2e 1
OTU2e
1 N Y N
ODU1 4
ODU2, ODU2e 1
ODUflex 2
OTU2e
1 Y Y N
ODU1 4
ODU2, ODU2e 1
ODUflex 2
TN11NS3 ODU2, ODU2e 4 OTU3,
OTU3e
1 N Y N
OTU3e
1 N
ODU1 16
ODU2, ODU2e 4
TN54NS3
TN55NS3
ODU0 32 OTU3,
OTU3e
1 N
ODU1 16
ODU2, ODU2e 4
ODU3 1
TN54NS4 ODU0 80 OTU4 1 N Y N
ODUflex 80
ODU1 40
ODU2, ODU2e 10
ODU3 2
ODU4 1

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
907
14.2 ND2
ND2: 2 x 10G line service processing board
The available functional versions of the ND2 board are TN11, TN12, TN52, and TN53.
Huawei office.
Boar
d
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
TN11
ND2
N N N N Y N
TN12
ND2
N N N Y Y N
TN52
ND2
Y Y Y Y Y N
TN53
ND2
Y Y Y Y Y N

NOTE
The TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board for the OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack only supports relay
mode.
Variants
The difference between the ND2 board variants lies in the WDM-side optical module.
Table 14-3 Available variants of the TN11ND2 board
01M01 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelength)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
908
B The WDM-side optical modules are pluggable. For details, see 14.2.11 ND2 Specifications.

Variant WDM-Side Fixed
Optical Module
ODUflex Direct Mapping of
ODU0 to ODU2
IEEE 1588v2 Physic
al-
Layer
Clock
T01 800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
(D)RZ-PIN
N N Y Y
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
N N Y Y
Tunable Wavelength-
(D)RZ-PIN
Y Y N N

Variant Description
01 The WDM-side optical modules are pluggable. For details, see 14.2.11 ND2 Specifications.

Function:
Board Cross-
Connet
Granulari
ty
FEC
Encodin
g
IEEE 1588v2 Physical
Clock
Relay
Mode
WDM-Side Pluggable
Optical Module
Fixed
-
Wave
lengt
h
Tuna
ble-
Wavel
ength
Gray
Light
TN11N
D2
ODU1 and
ODU2
FEC/
AFEC
N N N N N N
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
909
Board Cross-
Connet
Granulari
ty
FEC
Encodin
g
Clock
Relay
Mode
WDM-Side Pluggable
Optical Module
Fixed
-
Wave
lengt
h
Tuna
ble-
Wavel
ength
Gray
Light
TN12N
D2
ODU1 and
ODU2
FEC/
AFEC-2
Y Y Y Y N Y
TN52N
D2T01
TN52N
D2T02
ODU0,
ODU1 and
ODU2
FEC/
AFEC-2
Y Y Y N N N
TN52N
D2T04
ODU0,
ODU1,
ODU2 and
ODUflex
FEC/
AFEC-2
N N Y N N N
TN53N
D2
ODU0,
ODU1,
ODU2 and
ODUflex
FEC/
AFEC-2
Y Y Y Y Y Y

Specification:
l The specifications vary according to the version of board that you use. For details, see
14.2.11 ND2 Specifications.
Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11ND2 TN12ND2/
TN52ND2
The TN12ND2/TN52ND2 can be created as TN11ND2 on the NMS. The
former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After
substitution, the TN12ND2/TN52ND2 functions as the TN11ND2.
NOTE
The TN52ND2 board can substitute for the TN11ND2 board only when they use 800ps/
nm-C-band-tunable wavelength-(D)RZ-PIN optical modules.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
910
Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN12ND2 TN52ND2/
TN53ND2
The TN52ND2/TN53ND2 can be created as TN12ND2 on the NMS. The
substitution, the TN52ND2/TN53ND2 functions as the TN12ND2.
NOTE
The TN53ND2 does not support OTU2e services at rate 11.3 Gbit/s on the WDM side
and it cannot substitute for the TN12ND2 in relay mode at rate 11.3 Gbit/s.
The TN52ND2 board can substitute for the TN12ND2 board only when they use 800ps/
nm-C-band-tunable wavelength-(D)RZ-PIN optical modules.
TN52ND2 TN53ND2 The TN53ND2 can be created as TN52ND2 on the NMS. The former can
TN53ND2 functions as the TN52ND2.
NOTE
The TN53ND2 does not support OTU2e services at rate 11.3 Gbit/s on the WDM side
and it cannot substitute for the TN52ND2 in relay mode at rate 11.3 Gbit/s.
TN53ND2 None -

14.2.2 Application
As a type of line board, the ND2 board converts 16 ODU0, eight ODU1, four ODUflex, or two
ODU2 into two ITU-T G.694.1 OTU2 signals or converts two ODU2e signals into two ITU-T
G.694.1 OTU2e signals. The board supports hybrid transmission of the ODU0 service, ODU1
service, ODUflex service and the ODU2/ODU2e service.
Application scenario 1 of the TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2:
conversion between eight channels of ODU1 signals and two channels of OTU2
signals
Figure 14-2 Position of the ND2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 1)
1
8
1
8
TOM
1
4
1
8
TOM
1
4
1
8
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
1
O
T
U
2
1
O
D
U
2
4
O
D
U
1
1
O
T
U
2
1
O
D
U
2
4
O
D
U
1
1
4
1
4
1
4
1
4
1
4
1
4
TOM
TOM
1
O
T
U
2
1
O
D
U
2
4
O
D
U
1
1
O
T
U
2
1
O
D
U
2
4
O
D
U
1
ND2
ND2
8xODU1 8xODU1
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
IN1
OUT1
OUT2
IN2
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
911

NOTE
In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board
must be set to Line Mode.
Application scenario 2 of the TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2:
conversion between two channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals and two channels of
OTU2/OTU2e signals
TDX
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
1
O
T
U
2
/
O
T
U
2
e
1
O
D
U
2
/
O
D
U
2
e
1
O
T
U
2
/
O
T
U
2
e
1
O
D
U
2
/
O
D
U
2
e
TDX
1
O
T
U
2
/
O
T
U
2
e
1
O
D
U
2
/
O
D
U
2
e
1
O
T
U
2
/
O
D
U
2
e
1
O
D
U
2
/
O
D
U
2
e
ND2
ND2
2xODU2/ODU2e 2xODU2/ODU2e
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2

NOTE
In the application scenario with the TN11TDX board, the ND2 board receives eight channels of ODU1 signals.
In the application scenario with the TN12TDX/TN52TDX/TN53TDX board, the ND2 board receives two
channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals.
In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board must be
set to Line Mode.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
912
Application scenario 3 of the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2: regeneration of
OTU2/OTU2e optical signals
1
O
T
U
2
/
O
T
U
2
e
1
O
T
U
2
/
O
T
U
2
e
ND2
MUX DMUX
MUX DMUX
1
O
T
U
2
/
O
T
U
2
e
1
O
T
U
2
/
O
T
U
2
e
IN1 OUT1
IN2 OUT2
NOTE
The TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board for the OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack only supports relay
mode.
In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board
must be set to Electrical Relay Mode or Optical Relay Mode. When optical-layer and electrical-layer
ASON are enabled, it does not matter whether the Board Mode parameter is set to Optical Relay Mode
or Electrical Relay mode. The parameter must be set to Optical Relay Mode for the line board in a non-
ASON system; otherwise, end-to-end management of ASON services is not available.
Only the TN12ND2/TN52ND2 board equipped with an 800 ps/nm (D)RZ tunable optical module supports
regeneration of 11.3 Gbit/s OTU2e.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
913
Application scenario 4 of the TN52ND2/TN53ND2: conversion between 16
channels of ODU0 signals and two channels of OTU2 signals (only for OptiX OSN
8800)
1
8
1
8
TOM
1
8
1
8
TOM
1
8
1
8
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
1
8
1
8
1
8
1
8
1
8
1
8
TOM
TOM
ND2
16xODU0 16xODU0
1
O
T
U
2
1
O
D
U
2
4
x
O
D
U
1
1
O
T
U
2
1
O
D
U
2
4
x
O
D
U
1
ND2
1
O
T
U
2
1
O
D
U
2
1
O
T
U
2
1
O
D
U
2
4
x
O
D
U
1
4
x
O
D
U
1
8
x
O
D
U
0
8
x
O
D
U
0
8
x
O
D
U
0
8
x
O
D
U
0
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2

NOTE
In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board must be set to
Line Mode.
For the TN52ND2T04/TN53ND2 board:
l When the board works in standard mode and ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is set to Assign
consecutive, the board supports the ODU0>ODU1>ODU2 service mapping path.
random, the board supports the ODU0>ODU2 service mapping path.
l When the board works in compatible mode, the board does not support the configuration of the timeslot
allocation mode, and it only supports the ODU0>ODU1>ODU2 service mapping path.
Application scenario 5 of the TN52ND2/TN53ND2: conversion between four
channels of ODUflex signals and two channels of OTU2 signals (only for OptiX
OSN 8800)
1
4
TQX
1
4
1
4
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
1
4
1
4
1
4
TQX
4xODUflex
ND2
1
O
T
U
2
1
O
D
U
2
2
x
O
D
U
f
l
e
x
ND2
4xODUflex
1
O
T
U
2
1
O
D
U
2
2
x
O
D
U
f
l
e
x
1
O
T
U
2
1
O
D
U
2
2
x
O
D
U
f
l
e
x
1
O
T
U
2
1
O
D
U
2
2
x
O
D
U
f
l
e
x
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
914

NOTE
In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN52ND2T04/TN53ND2 board must be set to
Line Mode.
The total bandwidth of two channels of ODUflex signals corresponding to one channel of OTU2 signals cannot
exceed 10 Gbit/s.
TN52ND2T04/TN53ND2 supports ODUflex only when it works in standard mode.
The line boards at the two add/drop sites must have the same ODU timeslot allocation mode. When a TN53ND2
board is connected to a board that does not support ODU timeslot allocation, set ODU Timeslot Configuration
Mode to Assign consecutive for the TN53ND2 board. For example, when a TN53ND2 board is connected to
a TN52ND2T01 board, which does not support ODU timeslot allocation, set ODU Timeslot Configuration
Mode to Assign consecutive for the TN53ND2 board.
Only the TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN53NS2 board supports the ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode parameter.
Application scenario 6: hybrid transmission scenario
ND2
TOM
ODU0
ODU0
TOM
ODU1
TDX/
ND2
ODU2/
NS2
ODUflex
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
ND2
TOM
ODU0
ODU0
TOM
ODU1
TDX/
ND2
ODU2/
NS2
ODUflex
ODU2e ODU2e
OUT2
IN2 OUT2
IN2
OUT1
IN1 OUT1
IN1
2xOTU2/
2xOTU2e

NOTE
The same IN/OUT port can transmit a mixture of ODU0, ODU1, and ODUflex signals, the total bandwidth
cannot exceed 10 Gbit/s.
The same board can transmit a mixture of ODU0, ODU1, ODU2/ODU2e and ODUflex signals.
Different IN/OUT ports can work in different service modes. For the TN11ND2 board, changing the service
mode for one IN/OUT port will cause the board to reset, which in return leads to service interruption. Therefore,
before changing the service mode for one IN/OUT port, delete all service cross-connections for the other IN/
OUT port.
Only TN52ND2/TN53ND2 supports ODU0. TN52ND2T04/TN53ND2 supports ODUflex only when it works
in standard mode.
The ND2 board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer, and to provide
OTN interfaces and ESC.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
915
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 14-7 and Table 14-8.
NOTE
Only the OptiX OSN 8800 supports ODU0/ODUflex.
The relay mode is supported only by the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2.
Table 14-7 Functions and features of the ND2 board (Line Mode)
Functio
n and
feature
Description
Basic
function
The ND2 board converts signals as follows:
l TN11ND2/TN12ND2:
8 x ODU1/2 x ODU2<->2 x OTU2
2 x ODU2e<->2 x OTU2e
l TN52ND2T01/TN52ND2T02:
16 x ODU0/8 x ODU1/2 x ODU2<->2 x OTU2
l TN52ND2T04/TN53ND2:
16 x ODU0/8 x ODU1/2 x ODU2/4 x ODUflex<->2 x OTU2
Supports hybrid transmission of the ODU0 signals, ODU1 signals , ODUflex signals and the ODU2/
ODU2e signals.
Cross-
connect
capabilit
ies
Supports cross-connections with cross-connect boards.
l TN11ND2/TN12ND2: 8 x ODU1/2 x ODU2/2 x ODU2e
l TN52ND2T01/TN52ND2T02: 16 x ODU0/8 x ODU1/4 x ODUflex/2 x ODU2/2 x ODU2e
l TN52ND2T04/TN53ND2: 16 x ODU0/8 x ODU1/4 x ODUflex/2 x ODU2/2 x ODU2e
OTN
function
l Supports the OTU2/OTU2e interface on the WDM side.
l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709.
l OTU2 layer: supports the SM function.
l ODU2 layer: supports the PM and TCM function, and PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring
functions.
functions.
functions.
l ODUflex layer: supports the PM function and PM non-intrusive monitoring functions.
NOTE
Only the TN52ND2T04/TN53ND2 supports TCM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU0.
WDM
specific
ation
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
916
Functio
n and
feature
Description
Tunable
wavelen
gth
function
ESC
function
Supported
PRBS
function
NOTE
If the TN52ND2T04/TN53ND2 board interconnects with another line board, PRBS must be enabled for the
TN52ND2T04/TN53ND2 board and the connected line board. In addition, the PRBS function can take effect on the
boards only when the following condition is met:
The TN52ND2T04/TN53ND2 board works in standard mode and ODU0, ODU1, or ODUflex cross-connections are
configured for the TN52ND2T04/TN53ND2 board, or the TN52ND2T04/TN53ND2 board works in compatible
mode but no cross-connection is configured for it.
LPT
function
Not supported
FEC
encodin
g
TN11ND2:
l Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the WDM side.
l Supports ITU-T G.975.1-compliant advanced forward error correction (AFEC) on the WDM side.
TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2:
NOTE
Alarm
and
perform
ance
event
monitori
ng
l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser.
Regener
ation
board
l TN11ND2:
TN11LSXR
l TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2:
ALS
function
Not supported
Test
frame
Not supported
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
917
Functio
n and
feature
Description
IEEE
1588v2
The TN12ND2/TN52ND2T01/TN52ND2T02/TN53ND2 board supports the BC and OC modes; it
does not support the TC or TC+OC mode.
Physical
clock
The TN12ND2 board supports this feature only when ODU1 signals are cross-connected from the
backplane.
The TN52ND2T01/TN52ND2T02 board supports this feature only when ODU0 or ODU1 signals are
cross-connected from the backplane.
The TN53ND2 board supports this feature only when ODU0, ODU1, ODUflex signals are cross-
connected from the backplane.
Optical-
layer
ASON
Supported
Electric
al-layer
ASON
Supported by the TN52ND2/TN53ND2
Protecti
on
scheme
l Supports ODUk SNCP.
l Supports ODUk SPRing protection.
l Supports tributary SNCP protection.
NOTE
When the cross-connect granularity is ODUflex, the board does not support tributary SNCP protection.
Loopbac
k
Board WDM Side ODU0
Channel
Loopback
ODU1 Channel
Loopback
ODUflex Channel
Loopback
TN11ND2 Supported Not
supported
Supported Not supported
TN12ND2 Supported Not
supported
Supported Not supported
TN52ND2T01
TN52ND2T02
Supported Supported Supported Not supported
TN52ND2T04
TN53ND2
Supported
only when
ODU2/
ODU2e
signals are
received
from the
backplane.
Supported Supported only when
ODU1 signals are
received from the
backplane.
Supported
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
918
Functio
n and
feature
Description
Protocol
s or
standard
s
complia
nce
Protocols or
standards for
transparent
transmission
(non-
performance
monitoring)
IEEE 802.3u
IEEE 802.3z
IEEE 802.3ae
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems:
Common Generic
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FC-PI)
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2)
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-
PH)
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2
MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2)
SMPTE 292M Bit-Serial Digital Interface for High-Definition Television Systems
ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and
usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI)
SMPTE 259M 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc Composite Digital Signals - Serial
Digital Interface
NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture
(SBCON)
ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) -
Token Ring Media Access Control (MAC)
ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) -
Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol (PHY)
ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI)
Physical Layer Medium Dependent (PDM)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
919
Functio
n and
feature
Description
Protocols or
standards for
service
processing
(performance
monitoring)
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.873.1
ITU-T G.694.1

Table 14-8 Functions and features of the ND2 board (Relay Mode)
Function and feature Description
Basic function The board is used in an electrical REG station in the system to implement electrical
regeneration of optical signals.
Regenerating rate OTU2: OTN service at a rate of 10.71 Gbit/s
OTU2e: OTN service at a rate of 11.1 Gbit/s or 11.3Gbit/s
NOTE
Only the TN12ND2/TN52ND2 board equipped with an 800 ps/nm (D)RZ tunable optical module
supports regeneration of 11.3 Gbit/s OTU2e.
OTN function l Provides the OTU2/OTU2e interface on the WDM side.
l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T
G.709.
l ODU2 layer: supports the PM and TCM function, and PM and TCM non-intrusive
monitoring functions.
WDM specification Supports ITU-T G.694.1-compliant DWDM specifications.
Tunable wavelength
function
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
920
ESC function Supports the ESC function, which enables the transmission of a supervisory signal inside
a service signal.
PRBS test function Not supported
FEC encoding TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2:
NOTE
Alarm and performance
event monitoring
l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the
laser.
IEEE 1588v2 Not supported
Physical clock Not supported
Optical-layer ASON Supported
Electrical-layer ASON Not supported
Protection scheme Not supported
Loopback Not supported
compliance
Protocols or
standards for
transparent
transmission (non-
performance
monitoring)
-
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
921
Protocols or
standards for service
processing
(performance
monitoring)
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1

The ND2 board consists of the WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, 1588v2
module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
Functional Modules and Signal Flow (Line Mode)
Figure 14-8 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the ND2 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
922
Figure 14-8 Functional modules and signal flow (Line Mode)
WDM side
Signal processing
module
OTN
processing
module
E/O
O/E
WDM-side
optical
module
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
OUT1
OUT2

IN1
OTN
processing
module
Cross-
connect
module
E/O
O/E
WDM-side
optical
module
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Fuse
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)

IN2
n X ODUk
1588v2
module
NOTE
Only the TN12ND2 /TN52ND2T01/TN52ND2T02/TN53ND2 board supports the IEEE 1588v2 module.

In Figure 14-8. n x ODUk indicates the service cross-connections from the ND2 board to the
backplane. "n" represents the maximum number of cross-connections and "k" represents the
service granularity.
Table 14-9 Service cross-connections from the ND2 board to the backplane
Board Service Cross-connection
TN11N
D2/
TN12N
D2
A maximum of 8xODU1/2xODU2/2xODU2e
TN52N
D2T01/
TN52N
D2T02
A maximum of 16xODU0/8xODU1/2xODU2/2xODU2e
TN52N
D2T04/
TN53N
D2
A maximum of 16xODU0/8xODU1/4xODUflex/2xODU2/2xODU2e

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
923
The signal processing module of the ND2 board can access the following optical signals:
The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the ND2 board. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the backplane of the ND2 to the WDM side
of the ND2. The receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
The cross-connect module can receive ODUk signals from the cross-connection board
through the backplane. The OTN processing module performs operations such as OTN
framing, and encoding of FEC. After processing, the signal processing module outputs two
channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals.
The OTU2/OTU2e signals are transmitted to the WDM-side optical module. After
performing E/O conversion, the module sends out OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM
standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT1-OUT2 optical
interfaces.
l Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives two channels of the OTU2/OTU2e optical signals
at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN1-IN2
optical interfaces. The module performs O/E conversion.
The OTN processing module module performs operations such as OTU2 framing and
decoding of FEC. Then, the cross-connect module sends out ODUk signals to the backplane
for service cross-connection.
The TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board processes clock signals in two directions.
Functional Modules and Signal Flow (Relay Mode)
Figure 14-9 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the ND2 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
924
Figure 14-9 Functional modules and signal flow of the ND2 (Relay Mode)
WDM
side
IN1
OTN
processing
module
E/O
O/E
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
WDM-side
optical
module
O/E
E/O
WDM-side
optical
module
WDM
side
OUT1
IN2 OUT2
NOTE
The relay mode is only supported by the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board.

The ND2 board regenerates two channels of optical signals. The signals at the receive and
transmit ends of the board are OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths
that comply with ITU-T G.694.1.
The optical receiving module receives the optical signals to be regenerated through the IN1-IN2
optical interfaces and performs O/E conversion.
The signal processing module performs decoding, overhead processing, and signal encoding.
After encoding, the signals are sent to the optical transmitting module. After performing E/O
conversion, the module transmits OTU2/OTU2e signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that
The optical signals are output through the OUT1-OUT2 optical interfaces.
Module Function
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
925
The module consists of an OTN processing modulea and cross-connect module.
Grooms electrical signals between the ND2 and the cross-connect board through the
backplane.
l 1588v2 module
The 1588v2 module sends the clock signal of the STG board to the next NE according to
the IEEE 1588v2 protocol, or extract the clock signal from the service signals that come
to the STG board.
NOTE
The IEEE 1588v2 function is not supported if the working mode of the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/
TN53ND2 board is Optical Relay Mode or Electrical Relay Mode.
14.2.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the ND2 board.
Figure 14-10 and Figure 14-11 show the front panel of the ND2 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
926
Figure 14-10 Front panel of the TN11ND2/TN12ND2T01/TN12ND2T02/TN52ND2 board

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
927
Figure 14-11 Front panel of the TN12ND2B/TN53ND2 board

NOTE
You are advised to insert the WDM-side optical modules in the IN1/OUT1 and IN2/OUT2 interfaces in
ascending order of signal frequencies supported by these WDM-side optical modules.
Indicators
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
928
Interfaces
Table 14-10 Types and functions of the interfaces on the ND2 board
multiplexer board.
multiplexer board.

Laser Hazard Level
14.2.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one ND2 board.
Table 14-11 shows the valid slots for the TN11ND2 board.
Table 14-11 Valid slots for the TN11ND2 board
Product Valid Slots

Table 14-12 shows the valid slots for the TN12ND2 board.
Table 14-12 Valid slots for the TN12ND2 board
Product Valid Slots

Table 14-13 shows the valid slots for the TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
929
Table 14-13 Valid slots for the TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board
Product Valid Slots

14.2.7 Characteristic Code for the ND2
Code of a Line Unit.
Table 14-14 Mapping between the physical ports on the ND2 board and the port numbers
IN1/OUT1 1
IN2/OUT2 2

NOTE
Logical Ports
board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ODUkLP
is a logical port of the board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
930
The ND2 board can work in standard or compatible mode. For details about the standard and
compatible modes, see 12.2.3 Standard Mode and Compatible Mode.
Table 14-15 Port diagram and port description
Board Mode Port Diagram Port
Descripti
on
Board Name
Displayed on the
NMS
TN53N
D2
Standard mode Figure 14-12 Table
14-16
53ND2
Compatible
mode
Figure 14-13 Table
14-17
53ND2(COMP)
TN52N
D2
a
14-16
52ND2(STND)
Compatible
mode
Figure 14-13 Table
14-17
52ND2
TN12N
D2
Compatible
mode
Figure 14-14 Table
14-17
12ND2
TN11N
D2
Compatible
mode
Figure 14-14 Table
14-17
ND2
a: The TN52ND2T01/TN52ND2T02 board can work only in compatible mode.

NOTE
For the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2: ODUk cross-connections through the backplane are only supported
when Board Mode is set to Line Mode.
For the TN52ND2/TN53ND2: The OptiX OSN 6800 only supports signal grooming at the ODU1 and ODU2
levels from the backplane.
The cross-connection granularities supported by the board in a subrack is consistent with the cross-connection
granularities supported by the cross-connect board in the subrack. For details on the cross-connect board, see
21 Cross-Connect Board and System and Communication Board.
NOTE
When the ND2 board works in compatible mode, or when the board works in standard mode and ODU Timeslot
Configuration Mode is Assign consecutive, observe the following points:
l If any of the ODU2 channels has been configured with a service, the corresponding ODU1 and ODU0
channels cannot be configured with other services. On the opposite, if the ODU1 and ODU0 channels have
been configured with services, the corresponding ODU2 channel cannot be configured with other services.
l If any of the ODU1 channels has been configured with a service, the corresponding ODU0 channels cannot
be configured with other services. On the opposite, if the ODU0 channels have been configured with services,
the corresponding ODU1 channel cannot be configured with other services.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
931
Figure 14-12 TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board model (standard mode)

16xODU0
8xODU1
2 xODU2/
2xODU2e
OCh :1
ODU1:1
ODU1:4
ODU1:1
ODU1:4
ODU2:1
ODU1:4
ODU1:1
ODU1:4
ODU0:2
ODU0:2
ODU0:2
ODU0:2
ODU0:1
ODU0:1
ODU0:1
ODU0:1
OCh :1
OCh :1
OCh :1
OCh :1
OCh :1
OCh:1
OCh:1
4XODUflex
1(N1/OUT1)
ODU2:1
IN(1-2)/OUT(1-2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1~2)
ODUflex:1
ODUflex:2
ODUflex:1
ODUflex:2
IN(1-2)/OUT(1-2)-OCh:1
IN(1-2)/OUT(1-2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2)
IN(1-2)/OUT(1-2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)
ODU1:1
ODU2:
ODU2:
ODU2:1
ODU2:1
ODU2:1
ODU 2:1
OCh :1
ODU0: 8
OCh:1
ODU0:1
IN(1-2)/OUT(1-2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1-8)
ODU0: 8
ODU0:1
ODU2:1
ODU2:1
16xODU0
O
t
h
e
r

t
r
i
b
u
t
a
r
y
/
l
i
n
e
/
P
I
D

b
o
a
r
d
2(N2/OUT2)
Baclplane
1
1
Cross-connect
module
ODU1 mapping path
Multiplexing
module
ODU2 mapping path
Service
processing
module
ODUflex mapping path
ODU0 mapping
path (ODU0
>ODU1
>ODU2)
Cross-connection that must be configured on the
NMS to receive ODUk signals from other boards
ODU0 mapping
path (ODU0
>ODU2)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
932
NOTE
When ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign random, the service rate can be ODU0, ODU1, ODU2,
or ODUflex and the mapping paths are ODU0>ODU2, ODU1>ODU2, and ODUflex->ODU2.
When ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign consecutive, the service rate can be ODU0, ODU1, or
ODU2 and the mapping paths are ODU0>ODU1>ODU2 and ODU1->ODU2.
Figure 14-13 Port diagram for the TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board (compatible mode)
161
(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1
1
(IN1/OUT1)-1
161
(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2
164
(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1
164
(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2
165
(ODU0LP5/ODU0LP5)-1
165
(ODU0LP5/ODU0LP5)-2
168
(ODU0LP8/ODU0LP8)-1
168
(ODU0LP8/ODU0LP8)-2
51
(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1
51
(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4
52
(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-1
52
(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-4
71
(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1
2 x ODU2/ODU2e
72
(ODU2LP2/ODU2LP2)-1
2
(IN2/OUT2)-1
16 x ODU0 8 x ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU2
ODU2
Backplane
Other tributary/
line/PID board
Other tributary/
line/PID board
Other tributary/
line/PID board
Cross-
connect
module
ODU1 mapping path
Multiplexin
g module
ODU2 mapping path
Service
processing
module
Automatic cross-connection, which does not need to
be configured on the NMS. For example, if ODU0
signals are required, users only need to configure
cross-connections from other boards to the
ODU0LP port on the board using the NMS. The
board's internal structure enables transmission of the
multiplexed signal to the ODU2LP port. Users do
not need to configure a cross-connection for
transmitting the multiplexed signal.
ODU0
mapping
path

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
933
Figure 14-14 Port diagram for the TN11ND2/TN12ND2 board (compatible mode)
1
(IN1/OUT1)-1
51
(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1
51
(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4
52
(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-1
52
(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-4
71
(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1
2 x ODU2/ODU2e
72
(ODU2LP2/ODU2LP2)-1
2
(IN2/OUT2)-1
8 x ODU1
ODU2
ODU2
Other tributary/line/PID board
Backplane
Service processing
module
Automatic cross-connection, which does not need
to be configured on the NMS. For example, if ODU1
signals are required, users only need to configure a
cross-connection from another board to the
Cross-connection that
must be configured on
the NMS to receive
ODUk signals from
other boards

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
934
Table 14-16 Descriptions of the ports on the TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board (standard mode)
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:
(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2)
(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2)
backplane (ODU0->ODU1->ODU2)
(1-8)
(1-8)
backplane (ODU0->ODU2)
(1-4)
(1-4)
backplane
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1
2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1
backplane
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-
ODUflex:(1-2)
2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-
ODUflex:(1-2)
Mapping path for ODUflex signals received from
the backplane
1(IN1/OUT1)
2(IN2/OUT2)
WDM-side optical ports

Table 14-17 Descriptions of the ports on the ND2 board (compatible mode)
ODU0LP1-
ODU0LP8
channels 1 and 2.
established between these ports and the
ODU1LP ports.
ODU1LP1-
ODU1LP2
Internal logical ports. Each of the
3, and 4.
ODU2LP ports.
ODU2LP1-
ODU2LP2
channel 1.
IN/OUT ports.
1(IN1/
OUT1)
2(IN2/
OUT2)
WDM-side optical ports. -

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
935
This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. After the
required cross-connections are configured, services can be added to or dropped from the WDM
side, or can be passed through on the WDM side at the local site.
l The cross-connection is used to locally add services to or drop services from the WDM
side.
l The cross-connection is used to locally pass through services on the WDM side.
NOTE
When the system uses electrical-layer ASON, the boards in standard mode cannot interconnect with those in
compatible mode on the WDM side.
The ND2 board can work in the standard or compatible mode. For information about the standard and compatible
modes, see 12.2.3 Standard Mode and Compatible Mode.
In the cross-connection diagram, "ClientLP" and "ODUkLP" are internal logical ports on the board in compatible
mode, and "IN1/OUT1-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2)" is the signal mapping path of the board in
standard mode.
ODU0 Cross-Connections
Figure 14-15 and Figure 14-16 show the created ODU0 cross-connections.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
936
Figure 14-15 TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board cross-connections (ODU0 level: ODU0->ODU1->ODU2)
Client side
WDM side
ND2
2
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1
1
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1
The client side of tributary boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the ND2
The WDM side of line boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the ND2
Line board c
(compatible
mode)
Line board d
(standard
mode)
compatible
mode
standard
mode
WDM side
Line board e
(standard
mode)
Tributary board a
Tributary board b
(compatible mode)
(standard mode)
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
937
NOTE
The IN/OUT optical port supports ODU0->ODU1->ODU2 mapping when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign
consecutive.
The IN/OUT optical port supports ODU0->ODU2 mapping when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign random.
Tributary board a TN54TEM28 / TN52TOG / TN52TOM / TN54THA / TN54TOA
Tributary board b TN54THA / TN54TOA
Line board c TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 /
TN54NPO2 / TN55NPO2 / TN54ENQ2
Line board d TN52ND2T04 / TN53ND2 / TN55NO2 / TN52NS2T04 / TN52NS2T05 / TN52NS2T06 / TN52NS201M01 /
TN52NS201M02 / TN53NS2 / TN54NS3 / TN55NS3 / TN54NS4 / TN53NQ2 / TN55NPO2 / TN55NPO2E /
TN54ENQ2
Line board e TN52NS2T04 / TN52NS2T05 / TN52NS2T06 / TN52NS201M01 / TN52NS201M02 / TN53NS2 /
TN52ND2T04 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
938
Figure 14-16 TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board cross-connections (ODU0 level: ODU0->ODU2)
ND2
2
1
Client side
WDM side
Line board c
(standard
mode)
WDM side
Line board d
(standard
mode)
Line board e
(compatible
mode)
(standard mode)
Tributary board a
Tributary board b
(compatible mode)
(standard mode)
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
NOTE
consecutive.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
939
Line board c TN52NS2T04 / TN52NS2T05 / TN52NS2T06 / TN52NS201M01 / TN52NS201M02 / TN53NS2 /
TN54ENQ2
Line board e TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 /

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
940
Figure 14-17 TN11ND2/TN12ND2 board cross-connections (ODU1 level)
WDM side
ND2
2
WDM side
1
Client side
The client side of tributary boards are cross-connected to the WDM
side of the ND2
The WDM side of line boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of
the ND2
(compatible mode)
(compatible mode)
(standard mode)
Line board b
Line board c
Tributary board a
(compatible mode)
Tributary board a TN11TDG / TN11TDX / TN52TOG / TN11TOM / TN52TOM / TN11TQM / TN12TQM / TN11TQS
Line board b TN11ND2 / TN12ND2 / TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN51NQ2 / TN52NQ2 / TN53NS2 /
TN11NS2 / TN12NS2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN12LQMS(NS1 Mode) / TN12ELQX / TN12PTQX
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
941

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
942
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1
ND2
2
1
WDM side
Client side
Line board c
(compatible mode)
Line board d
WDM side
compatible mode
standard mode
(standard mode)
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
Tributary board a
Tributary board b
(compatible mode)
(standard mode)
Tributary board a TN11TDG / TN11TDX /TN54TEM28 / TN52TOG / TN11TOM / TN52TOM / TN11TQM / TN12TQM /
TN11TQS / TN54THA / TN54TOA
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
943
Line board c TN11ND2 / TN12ND2 / TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN51NQ2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN53NS2 /
TN11NS2 / TN12NS2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 / TN12LQMS (NS1 Mode) / TN54NPO2 /
TN55NPO2 / TN54ENQ2 / TN12ELQX / TN12PTQX
TN54ENQ2

ND2
2
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1
2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1
1
WDM side
Client side
Line board b
(compatible mode)
Line board c
(compatible mode)
(standard mode)
WDM side
The client side of tributary boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of
the ND2
The WDM side of line boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the
ND2
Tributary board a
(compatible mode)
Tributary board a TN12TDX / TN52TDX / TN53TDX / TN55TQX / TN11TQX / TN52TQX / TN11TSXL
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
944
Line board b TN11ND2 / TN12ND2 / TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN51NQ2 / TN52NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN12NS2 /
TN52NS2 / TN11NS3 / TN52NS3 / TN12ELQX / TN12PTQX
Line board c TN52ND2T04 / TN53ND2 / TN55NO2 / TN52NS2T04 / TN52NS2T05 / TN52NS2T06 / TN52NS201M01 /
TN54ENQ2

Client side
ND2
2
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1
2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1
1
Line board c
(compatible mode)
Line board d
(standard mode)
WDM side
the ND2
ND2
WDM side
compatible mode
standard mode
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX1/RX1)-1
Tributary board a
Tributary board b
(compatible mode)
(standard mode)
Tributary board a TN12TDX / TN52TDX / TN53TDX / TN54TEM28 / TN11TQX / TN52TQX /
TN53TQX / TN55TQX / TN11TSXL / TN54TTX
Tributary board b TN53TDX / TN55TOX / TN55TQX
Line board c TN11ND2 / TN12ND2 / TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN51NQ2 / TN52NQ2 /
TN54NPO2 / TN55NPO2 / TN54ENQ2 / TN12ELQX / TN12PTQX
Line board d TN52ND2T04 / TN53ND2 / TN55NO2 / TN52NS2T04 / TN52NS2T05 /
TN52NS2T06 / TN52NS201M01 / TN52NS201M02 / TN53NS2 / TN54NS3 /
TN55NS3 / TN54NS4 / TN53NQ2 / TN55NPO2 / TN55NPO2E / TN54ENQ2
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
945

ODUflex Cross-Connections
Figure 14-21 shows the created ODUflex cross-connections.
Figure 14-21 TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board cross-connections (ODUflex level)
ND2
1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1
2
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:2
the ND2 board
The WDM side of the ND2 board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
line boards
Client side
WDM side
Line board c
WDM side
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
Tributary board a
Tributary board b
(compatible mode)
(standard mode)
NOTE
The IN/OUT optical port supports ODUflex when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign
randomRANDOM.
Tributary board a TN53TDX / TN54TEM28 / TN55TQX / TN54THA / TN54TOA
Tributary board b TN53TDX / TN54TOA / TN55TQX
Line board c TN52ND2T04 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN52NS2T04 / TN52NS2T05 / TN52NS2T06 /
TN52NS201M01 / TN52NS201M02 / TN53NS2 / TN54NS4

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
946
For parameters of the ND2, refer to Table 14-18.
Table 14-18 ND2 parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
Optical Interface
Name
- Sets the optical interface name.
Default: Used
channel of a board.
Optical Interface
Loopback
Outloop
Default: Non-
Loopback
Outloop
Default: Non-
Loopback
Sets the channel loopback.
Service Mode l TN11ND2: ODU1,
ODU2
Default: ODU1
l TN12ND2:
Automatic, ODU1,
ODU2
Default: Automatic
l TN52ND2/
TN53ND2:
Automatic, ODU0,
ODU1, ODU2
Default: Automatic
NOTE
The parameter is supported by the
TN52ND2/TN53ND2 only in the
compatible mode.
Default: On
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
947
Enable Auto-Sensing Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
Sets the Enable Auto-Sensing function
of the board to Enabled or Disabled.
supports FEC Type and Line Rate
of the received signals in auto-
sensing mode, and thus no manual
setting is required.
Type and Line Rate of the board
must be set manually and the values
of the previous two parameters must
be the same as that of the received
signals. Otherwise, the services are
unavailable.
NOTE
Mode is set to Electrical Relay Mode or
Optical Relay Mode.
TN12ND2 /TN52ND2//TN53ND2.
Default: Enabled
FEC Mode FEC, AFEC
Default: FEC
AFEC Grade 1, 2, 3
Default: 3
stronger error correction capability and
a longer signal transmission delay.
NOTE
Only the TN52ND2/TN53ND2 support this
parameter.
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
Tunable Wavelength
Range
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
948
Planned Wavelength
Frequency (THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.10
0
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.17
0 to
18/1611.00/188.78
0
Default: /
board.
NOTE
CBAND is the only band now supported.
information.
Default: C
wavelength.
NOTE
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
to Disabled.
Enable Line Rate Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
Determines whether to automatically
switch between the standard mode and
speedup mode for the line rate upon a
rerouting event in ASON scenarios.
NOTE
The parameter is supported only by the
TN52ND2/TN53ND2 in the standard mode.
Line Rate Standard Mode,
Speedup Mode
Default: Standard
Mode
See D.16 Line Rate for more
information.
Default: Disabled
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
949
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
commissioning.
ODUflex Tolerance
(ppm)
0 to 100
Default: 100
between the actual client-side service
rate and the specified rate when the
client-side service type is ODUflex.
NOTE
When the tributary board that connects to the
ND2 board receives 3G-SDI services from
client equipment, set this parameter to 10. If
the tributary board receives other services,
set it to 100.
NOTE
ODU Timeslot
Configuration Mode
consecutive
Default: Assign
random
Sets ODU Timeslot Configuration
Mode of the board.
Assign random: The service rate can be
ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, or ODUflex and
the mapping path is ODU0>ODU2,
ODU1>ODU2, and ODUflex->ODU2.
Assign consecutive: The service rate can
be ODU0, ODU1, or ODU2 and the
mapping path is ODU0>ODU1
>ODU2, or ODU1->ODU2.
NOTE
For the TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board in an
OptiX OSN 6800 NE, this parameter must be
set to Assign consecutive.
Board Mode Line Mode, Electrical
Relay Mode, Optical
Relay Mode
Default: Line Mode
NOTE
TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2.

14.2.11 ND2 Specifications
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
950
Module
TN11ND
2
Wavelength)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
N/A
TN12ND
2
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
NRZ-PIN-XFP
TN52ND
2
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
N/A
TN53ND
2
N/A 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even
NRZ-PIN-XFP

NOTE
NOTE
point.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
951
Optical Module Type 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even
PIN
power
dBm 2
power
dBm -3
width
nm 0.3
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35
Receiver type - PIN
(FEC on)
dBm -16

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
952
Tunable
Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
DRZ-PIN
Line code format - NRZ DRZ
power
dBm 2 2
power
dBm -3 -3
width
nm 0.3 0.3
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35 35
range
nm 1200 to 1650
(FEC on)
dBm -16 -16
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm 0 0

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
953
PIN-XFP
power
dBm 2
power
dBm -3
width
nm 0.3
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35
Receiver type - PIN
(FEC on)
dBm -16
(FEC on)
dBm 0

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
954
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
power
dBm 2
power
dBm -1
width
nm 0.3
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35
Receiver type - PIN
(FEC on)
dBm -16
(FEC on)
dBm 0

Optical
Module Type
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80 km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
955
Optical
Module Type
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80 km
Optical source
type
- SLM SLM SLM
Target
transmission
distance
- 10 km (6.2 mi.) 40 km (24.9 mi.) 80 km (49.7 mi.)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565
Maximum
mean launched
power
dBm -1 2 4
Minimum
mean launched
power
dBm -6 -1 0
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB 6 8.2 9
Maximum -20
dB spectral
width
nm N/A N/A N/A
Minimum side
mode
suppression
ratio
dB 30 30 30
Eye pattern
mask
- G.959.1-compliant
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1290 to 1565 1260 to 1605 1270 to 1600
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -11 -14 -24
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm -1 -1 -7

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
956
(8.7 in.)
l Weight:
TN11ND2/TN12ND2: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb. )
TN52ND2: 1.4 kg (3.1 lb.)
TN53ND2: 1.2 kg (2.7 lb.)
Power Consumption
Boar
d
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum
Power
Consumption at
55C (131F) (W)
TN1
1ND
2
PIN
61.1 68.4
NRZ-PIN
62.7 70.2
(D)RZ-PIN
68.4 76.6
TN1
2ND
2
NRZ-PIN
57.2 64
(D)RZ-PIN
62 69
PIN-XFP
46 52
TN5
2ND
2
NRZ-PIN
70.5 77.5
(D)RZ-PIN
TN52ND2T01:
67.8
TN52ND2T04: 35
TN52ND2T01:
74.6
TN52ND2T04: 37
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
957
Boar
d
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum
Power
Consumption at
55C (131F) (W)
TN5
3ND
2
PIN-XFP
NRZ-PIN-XFP
25 28

14.3 NO2
NO2: 8 x 10G Line Service Processing Board
The available functional version of the NO2 board is TN55.
Huawei office.
Boar
d
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
TN55
NO2
Y Y Y N N N

NOTE
In the enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack, enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack , and OptiX OSN 8800
T16 subrack, the NO2 board can work either in line mode or relay mode.
When the NO2 board works in line mode, the enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack must use the TNK2USXH
+TNK2UXCT boards and the enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack must use the TN52UXCH/
TN52UXCM board and the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack must use the TN16UXCM board.
In the general OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack, and general OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, the NO2 board can
work only in relay mode.
Variants
The TN55NO2 board has only one variant: TN55NO201.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
958
14.3.2 Application
As a type of line board, the NO2 board converts 64 ODU0, 32 ODU1, or eight ODU2 into eight
ITU-T G.694.1 OTU2 signals or converts eight ODU2e signals into eight ITU-T G.694.1 OTU2e
signals. The board supports hybrid transmission of the ODU0 service, ODU1 service and the
ODU2/ODU2e service.
Application scenario 1 of the NO2: conversion between 64 channels of ODU0 and
eight channels of OTU2 signals
Figure 14-22 Position of the NO2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 1)
1
8
1
8
TOA
1
8
1
8
TOA
1
8
1
8
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
1
8
1
8
1
8
1
8
1
8
1
8
TOA
TOA
NO2
64xODU0 64xODU0
1
O
T
U
2
1
O
D
U
2
4
x
O
D
U
1
1
O
T
U
2
1
O
D
U
2
4
x
O
D
U
1
NO2
1
O
T
U
2
1
O
D
U
2
1
O
T
U
2
1
O
D
U
2
4
x
O
D
U
1
4
x
O
D
U
1
8
x
O
D
U
0
8
x
O
D
U
0
8
x
O
D
U
0
8
x
O
D
U
0
8 8 8 8
OUT1
IN1
OUT8
IN8
OUT1
IN1
OUT8
IN8
NOTE
This application scenario is supported only when the 55NO2 board is added on the NMS.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
959
Application scenario 2 of the NO2: conversion between 32 channels of ODU1 and
eight channels of OTU2 signals
1
8
1
8
TOA
1
8
1
8
TOA
1
8
1
8
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
1
O
T
U
2
1
O
D
U
2
4
O
D
U
1
1
O
T
U
2
1
O
D
U
2
4
O
D
U
1
1
8
1
8
1
8
1
8
1
8
1
8
TOA
TOA
1
O
T
U
2
1
O
D
U
2
4
O
D
U
1
1
O
T
U
2
1
O
D
U
2
4
O
D
U
1
NO2 NO2
32xODU1 32xODU1
4 8 4 8
OUT1
IN1
OUT8
IN8
OUT1
IN1
OUT8
IN8

NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
960
Application scenario 3 of the NO2: conversion between eight channels of ODU2/
ODU2e signals and eight channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals
1
4
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
1
O
T
U
2
/
O
T
U
2
e
1
O
D
U
2
/
O
D
U
2
e
1
O
T
U
2
/
O
T
U
2
e
1
O
D
U
2
/
O
D
U
2
e
TQX
1
O
T
U
2
/
O
T
U
2
e
1
O
D
U
2
/
O
D
U
2
e
1
O
T
U
2
/
O
D
U
2
e
1
O
D
U
2
/
O
D
U
2
e
NO2
NO2
1
4
1
8
1
8
8 8
1
4
TQX
1
4
1
4
1
4
TQX
TQX
1
4
1
4
OUT1
IN1
OUT8
IN8
OUT1
IN1
OUT8
IN8
NOTE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
961
Application scenario 4 of the NO2: implements the electrical regeneration of OTU2/
OTU2e optical signals
1
O
T
U
2
/
O
T
U
2
e
NO2
1
O
T
U
2
/
O
T
U
2
e
IN1 OUT1
IN2 OUT2
1
O
T
U
2
/
O
T
U
2
e
1
O
T
U
2
/
O
T
U
2
e
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
1
O
T
U
2
/
O
T
U
2
e
1
O
T
U
2
/
O
T
U
2
e
IN7 OUT7
IN8 OUT8
1
O
T
U
2
/
O
T
U
2
e
1
O
T
U
2
/
O
T
U
2
e
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
D
M
U
X
M
U
X

NOTE
This application scenario is supported only when the 55NO2(REG) board is added on the NMS.
In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter must be set to Electrical Relay Mode or Optical Relay
Mode. When optical-layer and electrical-layer ASON are enabled, it does not matter whether the Board
Mode parameter is set to Optical Relay Mode or Electrical Relay mode. The parameter must be set to Optical
Relay Mode for the line board in a non-ASON system; otherwise, end-to-end management of ASON services
is not available.
The IN and OUT ports for the same regenerated signal must be configured as follows; otherwise, the ESC
communication is not available.
l "IN1>OUT1" and "IN2>OUT2"
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
962
Application scenario 5 of the NO2: hybrid transmission scenario
NO2
NO2
TOM
ODU0
ODU0
TOM
ODU1
NS2
ODU1
ODU1
TDX
ODU2/
ND2
ODU2/
ODU2/
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
TOM
ODU0
ODU0
TOM
ODU1
NS2
ODU1
ODU1
TDX
ND2
OUT6
IN6
OUT7
IN7
OUT8
IN8
ODU2e
ODU2e
ODU2e
ODU2/
ODU2/
ODU2/
ODU2e
ODU2e
ODU2e
OUT1
IN1 OUT1
IN1
OUT6
IN6
OUT7
IN7
OUT8
IN8
8xOTU2/
8xOTU2e

NOTE
The same IN/OUT port can transmit a mixture of ODU0 and ODU1 signals, the total bandwidth cannot exceed
10 Gbit/s.
The NO2 board carries out cross-connection at the electrical layer, and provides the OTN
interfaces and ESC.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
963
Table 14-24 Functions and features of the NO2 board (Line Mode)
Functi
on and
feature
Description
Basic
function
NO2 converts signals as follows:
l 64xODU0/32xODU1/8xODU2<->8xOTU2
l 8xODU2e<->8xOTU2e
Supports hybrid transmission of the services mentioned above.
Cross-
connect
capabili
ties
Supports the cross-connection of 64 channels of ODU0 signals or 32 channels of
ODU1 signals or eight channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals between the NO2 board
and the cross-connect board.
OTN
function
ITU-T G.709.
l ODU2 layer: supports the PM and TCM function, and PM and TCM non-
intrusive monitoring functions.
WDM
specific
ation
ESC
function
Supported
PRBS
function
LPT
function
Not supported
FEC
encodin
g
l Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the WDM
side.
NOTE
Alarms
and
perform
ance
events
monitor
ing
of the laser.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
964
Functi
on and
feature
Description
Regener
ation
board
TN12ND2, TN52ND2, TN53ND2, TN53NQ2, TN54NQ2, and TN55NO2
ALS
function
Not supported
Test
frame
Not supported
IEEE
1588v2
Not supported
Physical
clock
Not supported
Optical-
layer
ASON
Supported
Electric
al-layer
ASON
Supported
Protecti
on
scheme
Loopba
ck
WDM Side Loopback ODU0 Channel
Loopback
ODU1 Channel
Loopback
Supported Supported Supported
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
965
Functi
on and
feature
Description
Protocol
s or
standard
s
complia
nce
Protocol
s or
standard
s for
transpar
ent
transmis
sion
(non-
perform
ance
monitor
ing)
IEEE 802.3u
IEEE 802.3z
IEEE 802.3ae
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport
Systems: Common Generic
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-
FS-2)
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING
INTERFACE (FC-PH)
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE
SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2)
SMPTE 292M Bit-Serial Digital Interface for High-Definition
Television Systems
implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface
(ASI)
SMPTE 259M 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc Composite Digital
Signals - Serial Digital Interface
NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection
architecture (SBCON)
ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface
(FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control (MAC)
(FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol (PHY)
(FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent (PDM)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
966
Functi
on and
feature
Description
Protocol
s or
standard
s for
service
processi
ng
(perfor
mance
monitor
ing)
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.873.1
ITU-T G.694.1

Table 14-25 Functions and features of the NO2 board (Relay Mode)
Function
and feature
Description
Basic
function
Regeneratin
g rate
WDM
specification
OTN
function
l Provides the OTU2/OTU2e interface on the WDM side.
the ITU-T G.709.
Tunable
wavelength
function
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
967
Function
and feature
Description
ESC
function
Supports the ESC function, which enables the transmission of a supervisory
signal inside a service signal.
PRBS
function
Not supported
FEC
encoding
WDM side.
NOTE
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
power of the laser.
ALS
function
Not supported
PTP clock
(1588 V2)
Not supported
Physical
clock
Not supported
Optical-layer
ASON
Supported
Electrical-
layer ASON
Not supported
Protection
scheme
Not supported
Protocols or
standards
compliance
-
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
968
Function
and feature
Description
monitoring)
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1

The NO2 board consists of the WDM-side optical module, OTN processing module, control and
communication module, and power supply module.
Figure 14-27 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the NO2 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
969
Figure 14-27 Functional modules and signal flow of the NO2 (Line Mode)
WDM side
E/O
O/E
WDM-side
Optical
module
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
OUT1
OUT2
64XODU0/32XODU1/
8XODU2/8XODU2e
OUT7
OUT8
IN1
IN2
IN7
IN8
OTN
processing
module
Cross-connect
module

The signal processing module of the NO2 board can access the following optical signals:
l ODU0 electrical signals
l ODU2e electrical signals
The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the NO2 board. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the backplane of the NO2 to the WDM side
of the NO2. The receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
The signal processing module can receive 64 channels of ODU0 signals, 32 channels of
ODU1 signals, or eight channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals from the cross-connection board
through the backplane. The module performs operations such as OTN framing, and
encoding of FEC/AFEC. After processing, the module outputs eight channels of OTU2/
OTU2e signals.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
970
interfaces.
l Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives eight channels of the OTU2/OTU2e optical signals
The module performs operations such as OTU2 framing and decoding of FEC/AFEC. Then,
the module sends out 64 channels of ODU0 signals, 32 channels of ODU1 signals, or eight
channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals to the backplane for service cross-connection.
Figure 14-28 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the NO2 board.
Figure 14-28 Functional modules and signal flow of the NO2 (Relay Mode)
WDM side
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)

O/E
IN1 OUT1
OUT2 IN2
E/O
E/O
O/E
O/E
IN7 OUT7
OUT8 IN8
E/O
E/O
O/E
WDM side
WDM-side
Optical
module
WDM-side
Optical
module
OTN
processing
module

The NO2 board regenerates eight channels of optical signals. The wavelengths at the receive
and transmit ends of the board are OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
971
The signals are sent to the optical transmitting module after they are decoded. After performing
E/O conversion, the module transmits OTU2/OTU2e signals at DWDM standard wavelengths
Module Function
Grooms electrical signals between the NO2 and the cross-connect board through the
backplane.
14.3.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the NO2 board.
Figure 14-29 shows the front panel of the NO2 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
972
Figure 14-29 Front panel of the NO2 board

NOTE
You are advised to insert the WDM-side optical modules in the IN1/OUT1 to IN8/OUT8 interfaces in
descending order of signal frequencies supported by these WDM-side optical modules.
Indicators
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
973
Interfaces
Table 14-26 Types and functions of the interfaces on the NO2 board
multiplexer board.
multiplexer board.

Laser Hazard Level
14.3.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one NO2 board.
Table 14-27 shows the valid slots for the NO2 board.
Table 14-27 Valid slots for the NO2 board
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
subrack
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
subrack
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
subrack
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18

14.3.7 Characteristic Code for the NO2
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
974
Table 14-28 Mapping between the physical ports on the NO2 board and the port numbers
IN1/OUT1 1
IN2/OUT2 2
IN3/OUT3 3
IN4/OUT4 4
IN5/OUT5 5
IN6/OUT6 6
IN7/OUT7 7
IN8/OUT8 8

NOTE
Logical Ports
board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, IN1/OUT1-
OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 is a logical port of the board.
Figure 14-30 shows the port diagrams of the TN55NO2 board. Table 14-29 lists the port
descriptions
NOTE
ODUk cross-connections through the backplane are supported only when the 55NO2 board is selected on the
NMS.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
975
Figure 14-30 Port diagram of the NO2

64xODU0
32xODU1
8xODU2/
8xODU2e
OCh :1
ODU1:1
ODU1:4
ODU1:1
ODU1:4
ODU2:1
ODU1:4
ODU1:1
ODU1:4
ODU0:2
ODU0:2
ODU0:2
ODU0:2
ODU0:1
ODU0:1
ODU0:1
ODU0:1
OCh :1
OCh :1
OCh :1
OCh :1
OCh :1
1(N1/OUT1)
ODU2:1
IN(1~8)/OUT(1~8)-OCh:1
IN(1~8)/OUT(1~8)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4)-ODU0:(1~2)
IN(1~8)/OUT(1~8)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4)
ODU1:1
ODU2:
ODU2:
ODU2:1
ODU 2:1
O
t
h
e
r

t
r
i
b
u
t
a
r
y
/
l
i
n
e
/
P
I
D

b
o
a
r
d
8(IN8/OUT8)
Backplane
1
1
Cross-connect
module
ODU1 mapping path
Multiplexing
module
ODU2 mapping path
Service processing
module
ODU0 mapping
path

Table 14-29 Description of ports on the NO2
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2)
......
Indicates the mapping path
for the ODU0 signals that are
received through the
backplane.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
976
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)
......
backplane.
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1
2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1
......
7(IN7/OUT7)-OCh:1
8(IN8/OUT8)-OCh:1
backplane.
1(IN1/OUT1)
2(IN2/OUT2)
......
7(IN7/OUT7)
8(IN8/OUT8)
Indicates the WDM-side port.

side.
NOTE
The NO2 board can work in the standard mode. For information about the standard modes, see 12.2.3 Standard
Mode and Compatible Mode.
mode, and "IN1/OUT1-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2)" is the signal mapping path of the board in
standard mode.
Figure 14-31 shows the created ODU0 cross-connections.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
977
Figure 14-31 Cross-connection diagram of the NO2 (ODU0 level)
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NO2
The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NO2
2
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1
WDM side
NO2
WDM side
Line board d
(standard
mode)
Line board c
(compatible
mode)
Line board e
(standard
mode)
Line board f
(standard
mode)
Client side
1
Tributary
board a
(compatible
mode)
Tributary
board b
(compatible
mode) 6(RX4/TX4)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
Line board c TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN52NS2 /
TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 / TN54NPO2 / TN55NPO2 / TN54ENQ2
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
978
Line board d TN52ND2T04 / TN53ND2 / TN55NO2 / TN52NS2T04 / TN52NS2T05 / TN52NS2T06 /
TN52NS201M01 / TN52NS201M02 / TN53NS2 / TN54NS3 / TN55NS3 / TN54NS4 /
TN53NQ2 / TN55NPO2 / TN55NPO2E / TN54ENQ2
Line board e TN52NS2T04 / TN52NS2T05 / TN52NS2T06 / TN52NS201M01 / TN52NS201M02 /
TN53NS2 / TN52ND2T04 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2
Line board f TN54NS4

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
979
WDM side
NO2
WDM side
2
Line board c
(compatible mode)
Line board d
(standard mode)
Line board e
(standard mode)
Client side
1
Tributary
board a
(compatible
mode)
Tributary
board b
(compatible
mode) 6(RX4/TX4)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
Line board e TN54NS4

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
980
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1
8(IN8/OUT8)-OCh:1
8(IN8/OUT8)-OCh:1
WDM side
NO2
WDM side
2
Line board c
(compatible mode)
Line board d
(standard mode)
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1
2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1
3(IN3/OUT3)-OCh:1
4(IN4/OUT4)-OCh:1
Line board e
(standard mode)
Client side
1
Tributary
board a
(compatible
mode)
Tributary
board b
(compatible
mode) 6(RX4/TX4)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
Tributary board a TN52TDX / TN54TEM28 / TN53TDX / TN55TQX / TN52TQX / TN53TQX / TN54TTX
Line board e TN54NS4

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
981
For parameters of the NO2, refer to Table 14-30.
Table 14-30 NO2 parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
Optical Interface
Name
name.
Default: Used
channel of a board.
Optical Interface
Loopback
Outloop
Default: Non-
Loopback
Outloop
Default: Non-
Loopback
Sets the path loopback.
Default: On
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
982
Default: Enabled
Set the Enable Auto-Sensing function
unavailable.
NOTE
This parameter is only valid when the board
work in line mode.
For ASON services, this parameter must be
set to Enabled.
Default: Enabled
FEC Mode FEC, AFEC
Default: FEC
AFEC Grade 1, 2, 3
Default: 3
A larger value of this parameter means
a stronger error correction capability and
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
Tunable Wavelength
Range
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
983
Planned Wavelength
Frequency (THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.100
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.170
to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /
board.
NOTE
information.
Default: C
wavelength.
NOTE
Speedup Mode
Default: Standard
Mode
Used to configure the line rate of OTN.
information.
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
to Disabled.
OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None
board resides.
information.
Default: Disabled
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
984
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
commissioning.
Optical Relay Mode
Default: Electrical
Relay Mode

14.3.11 NO2 Specifications
Board WDM-Side Fixed
Optical Module
TN55NO
2
N/A 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed
800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-
XFP

NOTE
point.
PIN-XFP
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
985
PIN-XFP
power
dBm 2
power
dBm -3
width
nm 0.3
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35
Receiver type - PIN
(FEC on)
dBm -16
(FEC on)
dBm 0

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
986
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
power
dBm 2
power
dBm -1
width
nm 0.3
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35
Receiver type - PIN
(FEC on)
dBm -16
(FEC on)
dBm 0

Optical Module
Type
km
km
Target transmission
distance
- 10 km (6.2 mi.) 40 km (24.9 mi.)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
987
Optical Module
Type
km
km
Operating
wavelength range
nm 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm -1 2
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm -6 -1
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB 6 8.2
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm N/A N/A
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30 30
Operating
wavelength range
nm 1290 to 1565 1260 to 1605
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm -1 -1

(8.7 in.)
l Weight: 1.66 kg (3.66 lb.)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
988
Power Consumption
Boar
d
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum
Power
Consumption at
55C (131F) (W)
TN55
NO2
PIN-XFP
NRZ-PIN-XFP
83.6 87

14.4 NQ2
NQ2: 4 x 10G Line Service Processing Board
The available functional versions of the NQ2 board are TN51, TN52 , TN53, and TN54.
Huawei office.
Boar
d
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
TN51
NQ2
N N N N Y N
TN52
NQ2
Y Y N N Y N
TN53
NQ2
Y Y Y Y Y N
TN54
NQ2
Y Y Y N N N

NOTE
The TN53NQ2 board for the OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack only supports relay mode.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
989
Variants
Each NQ2 board version except the TN54NQ2 board has only one variant identified by 01 (for
example, TN51NQ201). The TN54NQ2 board variant is the board itself.
l Function:
Board Cross-Connet
Granularity
FEC Encoding IEEE 1588v2 Physical
Clock
Relay Mode
TN51NQ2 ODU1 and
ODU2
FEC N N N
TN52NQ2 ODU0, ODU1
and ODU2
FEC/AFEC-2 N N N
TN53NQ2 ODU0, ODU1,
ODU2 and
ODUflex
FEC/AFEC-2 Y Y Y
TN54NQ2 ODU0, ODU1
and ODU2
FEC/AFEC-2 Y Y Y

l Specification:
The specifications vary according to the version of board that you use. For details, see
14.4.11 NQ2 Specifications.
Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN51NQ2 TN52NQ2/
TN53NQ2
The TN52NQ2 /TN53NQ2 board can be created as TN51NQ2 on the NMS
to function as a TN51NQ2 board. In this scenario, the TN52NQ2 /
TN53NQ2 only provides the functions of the TN51NQ2 board, and the board
software does not need to be upgraded.
NOTE
When both the receive and transmit boards employ FEC, the substitution applies; when
both the receive and transmit boards employ AFEC, the substitution does not apply.
TN52NQ2 TN53NQ2/
TN54NQ2
The TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 can be created as TN52NQ2 on the NMS. The
substitution, the TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 functions as the TN52NQ2.
NOTE
Only OptiX OSN 8800 supports the TN54NQ2.
TN54NQ2 TN53NQ2 The TN53NQ2 board can be created as TN54NQ2 on the NMS to function
as a TN54NQ2 board. In this scenario, the TN53NQ2 board only provides
the functions of the TN54NQ2 board, and the board software does not need
to be upgraded.
TN53NQ2 None -

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
990
14.4.2 Application
As a type of line board, the NQ2 board converts 32 ODU0, 16 ODU1, eight ODUflex, or four
ODU2 into four ITU-T G.694.1 OTU2 signals or converts four ODU2e signals into four ITU-
T G.694.1 OTU2e signals. The board supports hybrid transmission of the ODU0 service, ODU1
service, ODUflex service and the ODU2/ODU2e service.
Application scenario 1 of the TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2:
conversion between 16 channels of ODU1 and four channels of OTU2 signals
Figure 14-34 Position of the NQ2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 1)
1
8
1
8
TOM
1
4
1
8
TOM
1
4
1
8
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
1
O
T
U
2
1
O
D
U
2
4
O
D
U
1
1
O
T
U
2
1
O
D
U
2
4
O
D
U
1
1
4
1
4
1
4
1
4
1
4
1
4
TOM
TOM
1
O
T
U
2
1
O
D
U
2
4
O
D
U
1
1
O
T
U
2
1
O
D
U
2
4
O
D
U
1
NQ2 NQ2
16xODU1 16xODU1
4 4 4 4
OUT1
IN1
OUT4
IN4
OUT1
IN1
OUT4
IN4

NOTE
In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 board must be set to
Line Mode.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
991
Application scenario 2 of the TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2:
conversion between four channels of ODU2/ODU2e and four channels of OTU2/
OTU2e signals
1
4
TQX
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
1
O
T
U
2
/
O
T
U
2
e
1
O
D
U
2
/
O
D
U
2
e
1
O
T
U
2
/
O
T
U
2
e
1
O
D
U
2
/
O
D
U
2
e
TQX
1
O
T
U
2
/
O
T
U
2
e
1
O
D
U
2
/
O
D
U
2
e
1
O
T
U
2
/
O
D
U
2
e
1
O
D
U
2
/
O
D
U
2
e
NQ2 NQ2
1
4
1
4
1
4
1
4
1
4
4 4
OUT1
IN1
OUT4
IN4
OUT1
IN1
OUT4
IN4

NOTE
Line Mode.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
992
Application scenario 3 of the TN52NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2: conversion between
32 channels of ODU0 signals and four channels of OTU2 signals (Only for OptiX
OSN 8800)
1
8
1
8
TOM
1
8
1
8
TOM
1
8
1
8
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
1
8
1
8
1
8
1
8
1
8
1
8
TOM
TOM
NQ2
32xODU0 32xODU0
1
O
T
U
2
1
O
D
U
2
4
x
O
D
U
1
1
O
T
U
2
1
O
D
U
2
4
x
O
D
U
1
NQ2
1
O
T
U
2
1
O
D
U
2
1
O
T
U
2
1
O
D
U
2
4
x
O
D
U
1
4
x
O
D
U
1
8
x
O
D
U
0
8
x
O
D
U
0
8
x
O
D
U
0
8
x
O
D
U
0
4 4 4 4
OUT1
IN1
OUT4
IN4
OUT1
IN1
OUT4
IN4

NOTE
Line Mode.
For the TN53NQ2 board:
consecutive, the board supports the ODU0>ODU1>ODU2 service mapping path.
random, the board supports the ODU0>ODU2 service mapping path.
l When the board works in compatible mode, the board does not support the configuration of the timeslot
allocation mode, and it only supports the ODU0>ODU1>ODU2 service mapping path.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
993
Application scenario 4 of the TN53NQ2 board: conversion between eight channels
of ODUflex signals and four channels of OTU2 signals (Only for OptiX OSN 8800)
TQX
1
4
TQX
1
4
1
4
1
4
TQX
1
4
TQX
1
4
1
4
1
4
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
8xODUflex
NQ2
1
O
T
U
2
1
O
D
U
2
2
x
O
D
U
f
l
e
x
1
O
T
U
2
1
O
D
U
2
2
x
O
D
U
f
l
e
x
4 4
NQ2
1
O
T
U
2
1
O
D
U
2
2
x
O
D
U
f
l
e
x
1
4
1
4
4xOTU2 4xOTU2
1
4
1
4
8xODUflex
1
O
T
U
2
1
O
D
U
2
2
x
O
D
U
f
l
e
x
OUT1
IN1
OUT4
IN4
IN4
OUT4
OUT1
IN1

NOTE
In this application scenario, Only the TN55TQX board supports ODUflex.
The total bandwidth of two channels of ODUflex signals corresponding to one channel of OTU2 signals
In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN53NQ2 board must be set to Line
Mode.
TN53NQ2 supports ODUflex only when it works in standard mode.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
994
Application scenario 5 of the TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2: implements the electrical
regeneration of OTU2/OTU2e optical signals
1
O
T
U
2
/
O
T
U
2
e
NQ2
1
O
T
U
2
/
O
T
U
2
e
IN1 OUT1
IN2 OUT2
1
O
T
U
2
/
O
T
U
2
e
1
O
T
U
2
/
O
T
U
2
e
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
1
O
T
U
2
/
O
T
U
2
e
1
O
T
U
2
/
O
T
U
2
e
IN3 OUT3
IN4 OUT4
1
O
T
U
2
/
O
T
U
2
e
1
O
T
U
2
/
O
T
U
2
e
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
D
M
U
X
M
U
X

NOTE
The TN53NQ2 board for the OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack only supports relay mode.
Electrical Relay Mode or Optical Relay Mode. When optical-layer and electrical-layer ASON are
enabled, it does not matter whether the Board Mode parameter is set to Optical Relay Mode or Electrical
Relay mode. The parameter must be set to Optical Relay Mode for the line board in a non-ASON system;
otherwise, end-to-end management of ASON services is not available.
The IN and OUT ports for the same regenerated signal must be configured as follows; otherwise, the ESC
communication is not available.
The line boards at the two add/drop sites must have the same ODU timeslot allocation mode. When a
TN53NQ2 board is connected to a board that does not support ODU timeslot allocation, set ODU Timeslot
Configuration Mode to Assign consecutive for the TN53NQ2 board. For example, when a TN53NQ2
board is connected to a TN52NQ2 board, which does not support ODU timeslot allocation, set ODU
Timeslot Configuration Mode to Assign consecutive for the TN53NQ2 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
995
NQ2
TOM
ODU0
ODU0
TOM
ODU1
NS2
ODU1
ODU1
TDX
ODUflex
ND2
ODUflex
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
OUT2
IN2
OUT2
IN2
OUT4
IN4
OUT4
IN4
NQ2
TOM
ODU0
ODU0
TOM
ODU1
NS2
ODU1
ODU1
TDX
ODUflex
ND2
ODUflex
ODU2/
ODU2e
ODU2/
ODU2e
ODU2/
ODU2e
ODU2/
ODU2e
OUT3
IN3 OUT3
IN3
4xOTU2/
4xOTU2e
OUT1
IN1
OUT1
IN1

NOTE
The same IN/OUT port can transmit a mixture of ODU0, ODU1, and ODUflex signals, the total bandwidth
Only TN52NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 supports ODU0.
TN53NQ2supports ODUflex only when it works in standard mode.
The NQ2 board carries out cross-connection at the electrical layer, and provides the OTN
interfaces and ESC.
NOTE
The relay mode is supported only by the TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
996
Table 14-34 Functions and features of the NQ2 board (Line Mode)
Functi
on and
featur
e
Description
Basic
functio
n
NQ2 converts signals as follows:
l TN51NQ2:
16xODU1/4xODU2<->4xOTU2
4xODU2e<->4xOTU2e
l TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2:
32xODU0/16xODU1/4xODU2<->4xOTU2
4xODU2e<->4xOTU2e
l TN53NQ2:
32xODU0/16xODU1/4xODU2/8xODUflex<->4xOTU2
4xODU2e<->4xOTU2e
Supports hybrid transmission of the services mentioned above.
Cross-
connect
capabil
ities
l TN51NQ2: 16xODU1/4xODU2/4xODU2e
l TN53NQ2: 32xODU0/16xODU1/4xODU2/4xODU2e/8xODUflex
l TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2: 32xODU0/16xODU1/4xODU2/4xODU2e
OTN
functio
n
functions.
functions.
functions.
l ODUflex layer: supports the PM function and PM non-intrusive monitoring functions.
NOTE
l Only the TN53NQ2 boards support TCM function and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU0 signals.
l Only the TN53NQ2 boards support PM function and PM non-intrusive monitoring for ODUflex signals.
WDM
specific
ation
ESC
functio
n
Supported
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
997
Functi
on and
featur
e
Description
PRBS
test
functio
n
NOTE
If the TN53NQ2 board interconnects with another line board, PRBS must be enabled for the TN53NQ2 board and the
connected line board. In addition, the PRBS function can take effect on the boards only when the following condition
is met:
The TN53NQ2 board works in standard mode and ODU0, ODU1, or ODUflex cross-connections are configured for
the TN53NQ2 board, or the TN53NQ2 board works in compatible mode but no cross-connection is configured for it.
LPT
functio
n
Not supported
FEC
encodi
ng
TN51NQ2:
TN52NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2:
NOTE
Alarms
and
perfor
mance
events
monito
ring
Regene
ration
board
l TN51NQ2:
TN12ND2, TN52ND2, TN53ND2, TN55NO2, TN53NQ2, TN54NQ2, TN11LSXR
l TN52NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2:
ALS
functio
n
Not supported
Test
frame
Not supported
IEEE
1588v2
The TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 board supports BC and OC mode, do not support TC and TC+OC mode.
Physica
l clock
Supported only when the TN53NQ2 board receives ODU0/ODU1/ODUflex signals cross-connected
from the backplane
Supported only when the TN54NQ2 board receives ODU0/ODU1 signals cross-connected from the
backplane
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
998
Functi
on and
featur
e
Description
Optical
-layer
ASON
Supported
Electric
al-layer
ASON
Supported by the TN52NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2
Protecti
on
scheme
NOTE
The ODU0 SPRing protection is not supported by the TN54NQ2.
NOTE
When the cross-connect granularity is ODUflex, the board does not support tributary SNCP protection.
Loopba
ck
Board WDM Side ODU0 Channel
Loopback
ODU1 Channel
Loopback
ODUflex Channel
Loopback
TN51N
Q2
Supported Not supported Supported Not supported
TN52N
Q2
TN53N
Q2
Supported
only when
ODU2/
ODU2e
signals are
received
from the
backplane.
Supported Supported only when
ODU1 signals are
received from the
backplane.
Supported
TN54N
Q2
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
999
Functi
on and
featur
e
Description
Protoco
ls or
standar
ds
compli
ance
for transparent
transmission (non-
performance
monitoring)
IEEE 802.3u
IEEE 802.3z
IEEE 802.3ae
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2)
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE
(FC-PH)
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2
MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2)
SMPTE 292M Bit-Serial Digital Interface for High-Definition Television
Systems
ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation
and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI)
SMPTE 259M 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc Composite Digital Signals
- Serial Digital Interface
NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture
(SBCON)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1000
Functi
on and
featur
e
Description
(performance
monitoring)
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.873.1
ITU-T G.694.1

Table 14-35 Functions and features of the NQ2 board (Relay Mode)
Function and
feature
Description
Basic function The board is used in an electrical REG station in the system to implement electrical regeneration
of optical signals.
Regenerating
rate
WDM
specification
OTN function l Supports the OTU2/OTU2e interface on the WDM side.
l ODU2 layer: supports the PM and TCM function, and PM and TCM non-intrusive
Tunable
wavelength
function
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1001
Function and
feature
Description
PRBS function Not supported
FEC encoding TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2:
NOTE
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
PTP clock (1588
V2)
Not supported
Physical clock Not supported
Optical-layer
ASON
Supported
Electrical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Protection
scheme
Not supported
Protocols or
standards
compliance
monitoring)
-
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1002
Function and
feature
Description
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1

The NQ2 board consists of the WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, 1588v2
Figure 14-40 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the NQ2 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1003
Figure 14-40 Functional modules and signal flow of the NQ2 (Line Mode)
WDM side
Signal processing
module
OTN
processing
module
Cross-
connect
module
E/O
O/E
WDM-side
optical
module
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
OUT1
OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
1588v2
module
n X ODUk

NOTE
Only the TN53NQ2 /TN54NQ2 board supports the IEEE 1588v2 module.
In Figure 14-40, n x ODUk indicates the service cross-connections from the NQ2 board to the backplane. "n"
represents the maximum number of cross-connections and "k" represents the service granularity.
Table 14-36 shows the service cross-connections from the NQ2 board to the backplane.
Table 14-36 Service cross-connections from the NQ2 board to the backplane
TN51N
Q2
TN52N
Q2/
TN54N
Q2
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1004
TN53N
Q2
A maximum of 32xODU0/16xODU1/4xODU2/8xODUflex/4xODU2e

The signal processing module of the NQ2 board can access the following optical signals:
The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the NQ2 board. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the backplane of the NQ2 to the WDM side
of the NQ2. The receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
The cross-connect module can receive ODUk signals from the cross-connection board
through the backplane. The OTN processing module performs operations such as OTN
framing, and encoding of FEC. After processing, the signal processing module outputs 4
channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals.
interfaces.
l Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives four channels of the OTU2/OTU2e optical signals
The OTN processing module module performs operations such as OTU2 framing and
decoding of FEC. Then, the cross-connect module sends out ODUk signals to the backplane
for service cross-connection.
The board processes clock signals in two directions.
Figure 14-41 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the NQ2 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1005
Figure 14-41 Functional modules and signal flow of the NQ2 (Relay Mode)
WDM side
IN1
OTN
processing
module
OUT3
E/O
O/E
IN4 OUT4
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
Backplane
WDM-side
optical
module
O/E
E/O
WDM-side
optical
module
WDM side
IN3
OUT1
IN2 OUT2

NOTE
The relay mode is only supported by the TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2.
The NQ2 board regenerates four channels of optical signals. The wavelengths at the receive and
transmit ends of the board are OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths
The signals are sent to the optical transmitting module after they are decoded. After performing
E/O conversion, the module transmits OTU2/OTU2e signals at DWDM standard wavelengths
Module Function
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1006
The module consists of an OTN processing modulea and cross-connect module .
Grooms electrical signals between the NQ2 and the cross-connect board through the
backplane.
l 1588v2 module
to the STG board.
14.4.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the NQ2 board.
Figure 14-42 shows the front panel of the NQ2 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1007
Figure 14-42 Front panel of the NQ2 board

NOTE
You are advised to insert the WDM-side optical modules in the IN1/OUT1 to IN4/OUT4 interfaces in ascending
order of signal frequencies supported by these WDM-side optical modules.
Indicators
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1008
Interfaces
Table 14-37 Types and functions of the interfaces on the NQ2 board
multiplexer board.
multiplexer board.

Laser Hazard Level
14.4.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one NQ2 board.
NOTE
For the OptiX OSN 6800:
l If the TN12XCS board is used, the NQ2 board supports a service capacity of 40 Gbit/s when it is installed
in slot 1, 4, 11, or 14; only optical ports IN1/OUT1 and IN2/OUT2 of the NQ2 board are available and
therefore the board supports a service capacity of 20 Gbit/s when it is installed in any of the other slots.
l If the TN11XCS board is used, only optical ports IN1/OUT1 and IN2/OUT2 of the NQ2 board are available
and therefore the board supports a service capacity of 20 Gbit/s regardless of which slot the board is
installed.
For the OptiX OSN 8800: The NQ2 board supports a maximum service capacity of 40 Gbit/s in any slot.
Table 14-38 shows the valid slots for the TN51NQ2 board.
Table 14-38 Valid slots for the TN51NQ2 board
Product Valid Slots

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1009
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
subrack
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
subrack

Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
subrack
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
subrack
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
subrack
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18
OptiX OSN 8800
platform subrack
IU1-IU16
OptiX OSN 6800 subrack IU1-IU8, U11-IU16

Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
subrack
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
subrack
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
subrack
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18

14.4.7 Characteristic Code for the NQ2
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1010
Table 14-42 Mapping between the physical ports on the NQ2 board and the port numbers
IN1/OUT1 1
IN2/OUT2 2
IN3/OUT3 3
IN4/OUT4 4

NOTE
Logical Ports
The NQ2 board can work in standard or compatible mode. For details about the standard and
Descriptio
n
Board Name Displayed
on the NMS
TN54N
Q2
Compati
ble mode
Figure 14-44 Table 14-45 54NQ2
TN53N
Q2
Compati
ble mode
Figure 14-44 Table 14-45 53NQ2(COMP)
Standard
mode
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1011
Descriptio
n
on the NMS
TN52N
Q2
Compati
ble mode
TN51N
Q2
Compati
ble mode

NOTE
For the TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2: ODUk cross-connections through the backplane are supported only when Board
Mode is set to Line Mode.
For the TN52NQ2: The OptiX OSN 6800 supports grooming of signals only at the ODU1 and ODU2 levels
from the backplane.
NOTE
When the NQ2 board works in compatible mode, or when the board works in standard mode and Assign
consecutive, observe the following points:
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1012
Figure 14-43 Port diagram of the TN53NQ2 (standard mode)

32xODU0
16xODU1
4xODU2/
4xODU2e
OCh :1
ODU1:1
ODU1:4
ODU1:1
ODU1:4
ODU2:1
ODU1:4
ODU1:1
ODU1:4
ODU0:2
ODU0:2
ODU0:2
ODU0:2
ODU0:1
ODU0:1
ODU0:1
ODU0:1
OCh :1
OCh :1
OCh :1
OCh :1
OCh :1
OCh:1
OCh:1
8xODUflex
1(N1/OUT1)
ODU2:1
IN(1-4)/OUT(1-4)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1-2)
ODUflex:1
ODUflex:2
ODUflex:1
ODUflex:2
IN(1-4)/OUT(1-4)-OCh:1
IN(1-2)/OUT(1-2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2)
IN(1-4)/OUT(1-4)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)
ODU1:1
ODU2:
ODU2:
ODU2:1
ODU2:1
ODU2:1
ODU 2:1
OCh :1
ODU0: 8
OCh:1
ODU0:1
IN(1-4)/OUT(1-4)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1-8)
ODU0: 8
ODU0:1
ODU2:1
ODU2:1
32xODU0
O
t
h
e
r

t
r
i
b
u
t
a
r
y
/
l
i
n
e
/
P
I
D

b
o
a
r
d
4(IN4/OUT4)
Backplane
1
1
Cross-connect
module
ODU1 mapping path
Multiplexing
module
ODU2 mapping path
Service
processing
module
ODU0 mapping
path (ODU0
>ODU1
>ODU2)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1013
ODU0 mapping
path (ODU0
>ODU2)

NOTE
Figure 14-44 Port diagram of the TN53NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2 (compatible mode)
161
(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1
1
(IN1/OUT1)-1
161
(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2
164
(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1
164
(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2
173
(ODU0LP13/ODU0LP13)-1
173
176
176
51
(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1
51
(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4
54
(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-1
54
(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-4
71
(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)
-1
4 x ODU2/ODU2e
74
(ODU2LP4/ODU2LP4)
-1
4
(IN4/OUT4)-1
32 x ODU0 16x ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU2
ODU2
Backplane
Other tributary/
line/PID board
Other tributary/
line/PID board
Other tributary/
line/PID board
Cross-connect
module
ODU1 mapping path
Multiplexing
module
ODU2 mapping path
Service processing
module
ODU0 mapping
path

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1014
Figure 14-45 Port diagram of the TN51NQ2
1
(IN1/OUT1)-1
51
(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1
51
(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4
54
(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-1
54
(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-4
71
(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1
4 x ODU2/ODU2e
74
(ODU2LP4/ODU2LP4)-1
4
(IN4/OUT4)-1
16 x ODU1
ODU2
ODU2
Other tributary/
line/PID board
Backplane
Other tributary/
line/PID board
Cross-connect
module
ODU2 mapping path
Multiplexing
module
multiplexed signal to the ODU2LP port. Users do not
need to configure a cross-connection for transmitting
the multiplexed signal.
Service processing
module
ODU1 mapping
path

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1015
Table 14-44 Description of ports on the TN53NQ2 (standard mode)
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-
ODU0:(1-2)
2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-
ODU0:(1-2)
3(IN3/OUT3)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-
ODU0:(1-2)
4(IN4/OUT4)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-
ODU0:(1-2)
Indicates the mapping path for the
ODU0 signals that are received through
the backplane. (ODU0->ODU1-
>ODU2)
the backplane. (ODU0->ODU2)
the backplane.
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1
2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1
3(IN3/OUT3)-OCh:1
4(IN4/OUT4)-OCh:1
the backplane.
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1-2)
ODUflex signals that are received
1(IN1/OUT1)
2(IN2/OUT2)
3(IN3/OUT3)
4(IN4/OUT4)
Indicates the WDM-side port.

Table 14-45 Description of NM port of the NQ2 board (compatible mode)
ODU0LP1-
ODU0LP16
Internal logical port. The optical
paths are numbered 1, 2.
Automatic cross-connections between
the ports and the ODU1LP port
ODU1LP1-
ODU1LP4
paths are numbered 1, 2, 3 and 4.
the ports and the ODU2LP port
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1016
ODU2LP1-
ODU2LP4
Internal logical ports. The optical
paths are numbered 1.
the ports and the IN/OUT port
IN1/OUT1-
IN4/OUT4
Corresponding to the WDM-side
optical interfaces.
-

side.
NOTE
The NQ2 board can work in the standard or compatible mode. For information about the standard and compatible
modes, see 12.2.3 Standard Mode and Compatible Mode.
mode, and "IN1/OUT1-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2)" is the signal mapping path of the board in
standard mode.
Figure 14-46, Figure 14-47 and Figure 14-48 show the created ODU0 cross-connections.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1017
Figure 14-46 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2 (ODU0 level)
1
2
Client side
WDM side
WDM side
NQ2 board
Line board c
(compatible mode)
Line board d
(standard mode)
The client side of tributary boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NQ2
The WDM side of line boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NQ2
Compatible mode
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1
Tributary board a
Tributary board b
(compatible mode)
(standard mode)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1018
Line board c TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 /
TN54NS3 / TN54NPO2 / TN55NPO2 / TN54ENQ2
TN54ENQ2

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1019
Figure 14-47 Cross-connection diagram of the TN53NQ2 (ODU0 level: ODU0->ODU1-
>ODU2)
Client side
1
2
WDM side
Compatible
mode
Standard
mode
NQ2 board
WDM side
Line board d
(standard
mode)
Line board c
(compatible
mode)
Line board e
(standard
mode)
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1
Tributary board a
Tributary board b
(compatible mode)
(standard mode)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1020
NOTE
The IN/OUT optical port supports ODU0->ODU2 mapping when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is
Assign randomRANDOM.
The IN/OUT optical port supports ODU0->ODU1->ODU2 mapping when ODU Timeslot Configuration
Mode is Assign consecutiveFIX.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1021
Figure 14-48 Cross-connection diagram of the TN53NQ2 (ODU0 level: ODU0->ODU2)
Client side
1
2
WDM side
Line board c
(standard
mode)
Line board d
(standard
mode)
Line board e
(compatible
mode)
NQ2 board
standard
mode
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1
Tributary board a
Tributary board b
(compatible mode)
(standard mode)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1022
NOTE
The IN/OUT optical port supports ODU0->ODU2 mapping when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign
randomRANDOM.
consecutiveFIX.
TN54ENQ2
Line board e TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 /

Figure 14-49 and Figure 14-50show the created ODU1 cross-connections.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1023
Figure 14-49 Cross-connection diagram of the TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2 (ODU1 level)
NQ2
1
2
Line board c
(compatible mode)
Line board d
(standard mode)
Client side
WDM side
WDM side
Compatible mode
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
Tributary board a
Tributary board b
(compatible mode)
(standard mode)
Tributary board a TN51NQ2:
TN11TDG / TN11TDX / TN52TOG / TN11TOM / TN52TOM / TN11TQM / TN12TQM / TN11TQS
TN52NQ2:
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1024
TN11TDG / TN11TDX /TN54TEM28 / TN52TOG / TN11TOM / TN52TOM / TN11TQM / TN12TQM /
TN54NQ2:
TN54TEM28 / TN52TOG / TN52TOM / TN54THA / TN54TOA
Tributary board b TN51NQ2:
N/A
TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2:
TN54THA / TN54TOA
Line board c TN51NQ2:
TN11ND2 / TN12ND2 / TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN51NQ2 / TN52NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN11NS2 /
TN12NS2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN12LQMS(NS1 Mode) / TN12ELQX / TN12PTQX
TN52NQ2:
TN11ND2 / TN12ND2 / TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN51NQ2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN53NS2 /
TN54NQ2:
TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 /
TN54ENQ2

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1025
Figure 14-50 Cross-connection diagram of the TN53NQ2 (ODU1 level)
1
2
Compatible mode
Line board c
(compatible mode)
Line board d
(standard mode)
Standard mode
NQ2 board
Client side
WDM side
WDM side
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
Tributary board a
Tributary board b
(compatible mode)
(standard mode)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1026
TN54ENQ2
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1027
Figure 14-51 Cross-connection diagram of the TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2 (ODU2 level)
2
1
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1
2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1
3(IN3/OUT3)-OCH:1
4(IN4/OUT4)-OCH:1
Client side
WDM side
WDM side
Compatible mode
Line board c
(compatible mode)
Line board d
(standard mode)
NQ2 board
Cross-connect
module
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
Tributary board a
Tributary board b
(compatible mode)
(standard mode)
Tributary board a TN51NQ2:
TN12TDX / TN52TDX / TN53TDX / TN55TQX / TN11TQX / TN52TQX / TN11TSXL
TN52NQ2:
TN12TDX / TN52TDX / TN53TDX / TN54TEM28 / TN11TQX / TN52TQX /
TN53TQX / TN55TQX / TN11TSXL / TN54TTX
TN54NQ2:
TN52TDX / TN54TEM28 / TN53TDX / TN55TQX / TN52TQX / TN53TQX / TN54TTX
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1028
Tributary board b TN51NQ2:
TN53TDX / TN55TQX
TN52NQ2:
TN53TDX / TN55TOX / TN55TQX
TN54NQ2:
Line board c TN51NQ2:
TN11ND2 / TN12ND2 / TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN51NQ2 / TN52NQ2 /
TN53NS2 / TN12NS2 /TN52NS2 / TN11NS3 / TN52NS3 / TN12ELQX / TN12PTQX
TN52NQ2:
TN54NQ2:
TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN52NS2 /
Line board d TN51NQ2:
TN52NS2T04 / TN52NS2T05 / TN52NS2T06 / TN52NS201M01 / TN52NS201M02 /
TN52NQ2:
TN52ND2T04 / TN53ND2 / TN55NO2 / TN52NS2T04 / TN52NS2T05 / TN52NS2T06 /
TN54NQ2:
TN52NS201M01 / TN52NS201M02 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN54NS3 / TN55NS3 /
TN54NS4 / TN55NPO2 / TN55NPO2E / TN54ENQ2

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1029
Figure 14-52 Cross-connection diagram of the TN53NQ2 (ODU2 level)
1
2
IN1/OUT1-OCH:1
IN2/OUT2-OCH:1
IN3/OUT3-OCH:1
IN4/OUT4-OCH:1
IN1/OUT1-OCH:1
IN2/OUT2-OCH:1
IN3/OUT3-OCH:1
IN4/OUT4-OCH:1
Client side
WDM side
WDM side
NQ2 board
compatible mode
Line board c
(compatible mode)
(standard mode)
Line board d
standard mode
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
Tributary board a
Tributary board b
(compatible mode)
(standard mode)
Tributary board a TN12TDX / TN52TDX / TN53TDX / TN54TEM28 / TN11TQX / TN52TQX / TN53TQX / TN55TQX /
TN11TSXL / TN54TTX
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1030
Line board c TN11ND2 / TN12ND2 / TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN51NQ2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 /
TN53NS2 / TN12NS2 / TN52NS2 / TN11NS3 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 / TN54NPO2 / TN55NPO2 /
TN54ENQ2 / TN12ELQX / TN12PTQX
TN54ENQ2
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1031
Figure 14-53 Cross-connection diagram of the TN53NQ2 (ODUflex level)
2
IN1/OUT1-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1
Client side
NQ2 board
Line board c
WDM side
WDM side
the NQ2
NQ2
1
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
Tributary board a
Tributary board b
(compatible mode)
(standard mode)
NOTE
The IN/OUT optical port supports ODUflex when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign
randomRANDOM.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1032
For parameters of the NQ2, refer to Table 14-46.
Table 14-46 NQ2 parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
Optical Interface
Name
name.
Default: Used
channel of a board.
Optical Interface
Loopback
Outloop
Default: Non-
Loopback
Outloop
Default: Non-
Loopback
Service Mode l TN51NQ2: ODU1,
ODU2
Default: ODU1
l TN52NQ2/
TN54NQ2:
Automatic, ODU0,
ODU1, ODU2
Default: Automatic
l TN53NQ2:
Automatic, ODU0,
ODU1, ODU2
Default: Automatic
NOTE
TN53NQ2 only in the compatible mode.
Default: On
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1033
Default: Enabled
unavailable.
NOTE
Optical Relay Mode.
This parameter is only supported by the
TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2.
set to Enabled.
Default: Enabled
FEC Mode FEC, AFEC
Default: FEC
NOTE
Only TN52NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2
supports AFEC.
AFEC Grade 1, 2, 3
Default: 3
NOTE
Only the TN52NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2
support this parameter.
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1034
Tunable Wavelength
Range
Planned Wavelength
Frequency (THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.100
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.170
to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /
board.
NOTE
information.
Default: C
wavelength.
NOTE
Default: Enabled
NOTE
This parameter is supported by the
TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2, and supported by the
TN53NQ2 only in standard mode.
Speedup Mode
Default: Standard
Mode
information.
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
to Disabled.
NOTE
This parameter is supported only by
TN52NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1035
Default: Disabled
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
commissioning.
ODUflex Tolerance
(ppm)
0 to 100
Default: 100
NOTE
NQ2 board receives 3G-SDI services from
set it to 100.
TN53NQ2 in the standard mode.
ODU Timeslot
Configuration Mode
consecutive
Default: Assign random
Sets ODU Timeslot Configuration
Mode of the board.
ODU1>ODU2, and ODUflex-
>ODU2.
NOTE
TN53NQ2 in the standard mode. For the
TN53NQ2 board in an OptiX OSN 6800 NE,
this parameter must be set to Assign
consecutive.
Relay Mode, Optical
Relay Mode
Default: Line Mode
NOTE
TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1036

14.4.11 NQ2 Specifications
Optical Module
TN51NQ2 N/A 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-
Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP
800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN-XFP
TN52NQ2/
TN53NQ2/
TN54NQ2
N/A 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-
PIN-XFP

NOTE
point.
PIN-XFP
power
dBm 2
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1037
PIN-XFP
power
dBm -3
width
nm 0.3
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35
Receiver type - PIN
(FEC on)
dBm -16
(FEC on)
dBm 0

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
power
dBm 2
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1038
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
power
dBm -1
width
nm 0.3
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35
Receiver type - PIN
(FEC on)
dBm -16
(FEC on)
dBm 0

Optical
Module Type
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80 km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ
Optical source
type
- SLM SLM SLM
Target
transmission
distance
- 10 km (6.2 mi.) 40 km (24.9 mi.) 80 km (49.7 mi.)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1039
Optical
Module Type
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80 km
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565
Maximum
mean launched
power
dBm -1 2 4
Minimum
mean launched
power
dBm -6 -1 0
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB 6 8.2 9
Maximum -20
dB spectral
width
nm N/A N/A N/A
Minimum side
mode
suppression
ratio
dB 30 30 30
Eye pattern
mask
- G.959.1-compliant
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1290 to 1565 1260 to 1605 1270 to 1600
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -11 -14 -24
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm -1 -1 -7

(8.7 in.)
l Weight:
TN51NQ2: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.)
TN52NQ2: 2.0 kg (4.4 lb.)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1040
TN53NQ2: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.)
TN54NQ2: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.)
Power Consumption
Boar
d
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum
Power
Consumption at
55C (131F) (W)
TN51
NQ2
PIN-XFP
NRZ-PIN-XFP
88 95
TN52
NQ2
PIN-XFP
NRZ-PIN-XFP
88 97
TN53
NQ2
PIN-XFP
NRZ-PIN-XFP
46.5 50
TN54
NQ2
PIN-XFP
NRZ-PIN-XFP
53 58.3

14.5 NS2
NS2: 10G Line Service Processing Board
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1041
The available functional versions of the NS2 board are TN11, TN12, TN52, and TN53.
Huawei office.
Boar
d
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
TN11
NS2
N N N N Y Y
TN12
NS2
N N N N Y Y
TN52
NS2
Y Y T02/T03: N
01M01/01M0
2/T04/T05/
T06: Y
N Y Y
TN53
NS2
Y Y Y N Y Y

Variants
The difference between the NS2 board variants lies in the WDM-side optical module.
Table 14-50 Available variants of the TN11NS2 board
01M02 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelength)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN (01M02 for even
01M03

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1042
Variant WDM-Side Optical Module FEC Encoding
01M02 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even
Wavelength)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
(01M02 for even wavelengths and 01M03 for
odd wavelengths)
FEC/AFEC
01M03
NRZ-APD
NRZ-PIN
ODB-APD
T05 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-(D)
RZ-PIN
A 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-(D)
RZ-PIN
FEC/AFEC-2
B The WDM-side optical modules are
pluggable. For details, see 14.5.11 NS2
Specifications.

Variant WDM-Side Fixed Optical
Module
ODUflex Direct Mapping of
ODU0 to ODU2
FEC
Encoding
01M01 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even
Wavelength)-Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN (01M01 for even
wavelengths and 01M02 for odd
wavelengths)
Y Y AFEC
01M02
T02 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
N N AFEC-2
N N AFEC-2
Y Y AFEC-2
Y Y AFEC
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
Y Y AFEC

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1043
Variant Description
01 The WDM-side optical modules are pluggable. For details, see 14.5.11 NS2 Specifications.

Function:
Boar
d
Cross-
Connet
Granularit
y
FEC
Encoding
IEEE
1588v2
Physical
Clock
Fixed-
Wavelengt
h
Tunable-
Wavelengt
h
Gray Light
TN11
NS2
ODU1 FEC/AFEC N N N N N
TN12
NS20
1M02
TN12
NS20
1M03
TN12
NS2T
02
TN12
NS2T
03
TN12
NS2T
04
TN12
NS2T
05
ODU1,
ODU2 and
ODU2e
FEC/AFEC N N N N N
TN12
NS2A
ODU1,
ODU2 and
ODU2e
FEC/
AFEC-2
N N N N N
TN12
NS2B
ODU1,
ODU2 and
ODU2e
FEC/
AFEC-2
N N Y N N
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1044
Boar
d
Cross-
Connet
Granularit
y
FEC
Encoding
IEEE
1588v2
Physical
Clock
Fixed-
Wavelengt
h
Tunable-
Wavelengt
h
Gray Light
TN52
NS2T
02
TN52
NS2T
03
ODU0,
ODU1,
ODU2 and
ODU2e
FEC/
AFEC-2
N N N N N
TN52
NS2T
04
ODU0,
ODU1,
ODUflex,
ODU2 and
ODU2e
FEC/
AFEC-2
N N N N N
TN52
NS2T
05
TN52
NS2T
06
TN52
NS20
1M01
TN52
NS20
1M02
ODU0,
ODU1,
ODUflex,
ODU2 and
ODU2e
FEC/AFEC N N N N N
TN53
NS2
ODU0,
ODU1,
ODUflex,
ODU2 and
ODU2e
FEC/
AFEC-2
Y Y Y Y Y
NOTE
l OptiX OSN 6800: The TN11NS2 supports cross-connection of paired slots while the TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2 does
not.
l OptiX OSN 3800: The TN11NS2 supports the cross-connection of ODU1 signals between any slots of the four-slot mesh
group. The TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2 supports the cross-connection of ODU1 signals between any two boards in the
non-paired slots of the four-slot mesh group.

Specification:
l The specifications vary according to the version of the board that you use. For details, see
14.5.11 NS2 Specifications.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1045
Table 14-54 Substitution rules of the NS2 board
Original
Board
Substit
ute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11NS2 None -
TN12NS2 TN52NS
2
The TN52NS2 can be created as TN12NS2 on the NMS. The former can substitute for
the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN52NS2 functions as
the TN12NS2.
TN53NS
2
the TN12NS2.
NOTE
When both the receive and transmit boards employ FEC, the substitution applies; when both the
receive and transmit boards employ AFEC, the substitution does not apply.
TN52NS2 TN53NS
2
the TN52NS2.
TN53NS2 None -

14.5.2 Application
As a type of line board, the NS2 board converts 8 ODU0, 4 ODU1, 2 ODUflex, or one ODU2
into one ITU-T G.694.1 OTU2 signal or converts one ODU2e signal into one ITU-T G.694.1
OTU2e signal. The board supports hybrid transmission of the ODU0 service, ODUflex
service and ODU1 service.
Application scenario 1 of the TN11NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2: conversion
between four channels of ODU1 and one channel of OTU2 signals
Figure 14-54 Position of the NS2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 1)
TOM
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
TOM
NS2
4xODU1 4xODU1
1
O
T
U
2
1
O
D
U
2
4
x
O
D
U
1
NS2
1
O
T
U
2
1
O
D
U
2
4
x
O
D
U
1
1
4
1
4
1
4
1
4
1
4
1
4
OUT
IN
IN
OUT

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1046
Application scenario 2 of the TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2: conversion between
one channel of ODU2/ODU2e and one channel of OTU2/OTU2e signals
TDX
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
NS2
1
O
T
U
2
/
O
T
U
2
e
1
O
D
U
2
/
O
D
U
2
e
NS2
1
O
T
U
2
/
O
T
U
2
e
1
O
D
U
2
/
O
D
U
2
e
TDX
NS2
1
O
T
U
2
/
O
T
U
2
e
1
O
D
U
2
/
O
D
U
2
e
NS2
1
O
T
U
2
/
O
T
U
2
e
1
O
D
U
2
/
O
D
U
2
e
OUT
IN OUT
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN

Application scenario 3 of the TN52NS2/TN53NS2: conversion between eight
channels of ODU0 and one channel of OTU2 signals (Only for OptiX OSN 8800)
TOM
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
TOM
NS2
8xODU0 8xODU0
1
O
T
U
2
1
O
D
U
2
4
x
O
D
U
1
NS2
1
O
T
U
2
1
O
D
U
2
4
x
O
D
U
1
8
x
O
D
U
0
8
x
O
D
U
0
1
8
1
8
1
8
1
8
1
8
1
8
OUT
IN OUT
IN

For the TN52NS2T04/TN52NS2T05/TN52NS2T06/TN52NS201M01/TN52NS201M02/
TN53NS2 board:
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1047
l When the board works in standard mode and ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is set
to Assign consecutive, the board supports the ODU0>ODU1>ODU2 service mapping
path.
l When the board works in standard mode and ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is set
to Assign random, the board supports the ODU0>ODU2 service mapping path.
l When the board works in compatible mode, the board does not support the configuration
of the timeslot allocation mode, and it only supports the ODU0>ODU1>ODU2 service
mapping path.
Application scenario 4 of the TN52NS2/TN53NS2: conversion between two
channels of ODUflex and one channel of OTU2 signals (Only for OptiX OSN 8800)
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
2xODUflex
NS2
1
O
T
U
2
1
O
D
U
2
2
x
O
D
U
f
l
e
x
NS2
2xODUflex 1xOTU2
1
O
T
U
2
1
O
D
U
2
2
x
O
D
U
f
l
e
x
1xOTU2
TDX TDX
OUT
IN OUT
IN

NOTE
The total bandwidth of two channels of ODUflex signals corresponding to one channel of OTU2 signals cannot
exceed 10 Gbit/s.
TN52NS2T04/TN52NS2T05/TN52NS2T06/TN52NS201M01/TN52NS201M02/TN53NS2 supports ODUflex
only when it works in standard mode.
The line boards at the two add/drop sites must have the same ODU timeslot allocation mode. When a TN53NS2
board is connected to a board that does not support ODU timeslot allocation, set ODU Timeslot Configuration
Mode to Assign consecutive for the TN53NS2 board. For example, when a TN53NS2 board is connected to a
TN52NS2T02 board, which does not support ODU timeslot allocation, set ODU Timeslot Configuration
Mode to Assign consecutive for the TN53NS2 board.
NS2
TOM
ODU0
TEM
28
ND2
ODU1
ODUflex
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
NS2
TOM
ODU0
TEM
28
ND2
ODU1
ODUflex
1xOTU2
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1048

NOTE
The IN/OUT port can transmit a mixture of ODU0, ODU1, and ODUflex signals, the total bandwidth cannot
exceed 10 Gbit/s.
TN52NS2T04/TN52NS2T05/TN52NS2T06/TN52NS201M01/TN52NS201M02/TN53NS2 supports ODUflex
only when it works in standard mode.
The NS2 board is used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer, and to provide OTN
interfaces and ESC.
NOTE
Only the OptiX OSN 8800 and OptiX OSN 6800 support ODU2/ODU2e.
Table 14-55 Functions and features of the NS2 board
Funct
ion
and
featur
e
Description
Basic
functi
on
NS2 converts signals as follows:
l TN11NS2:
4xODU1<->1xOTU2
l TN12NS2:
1xODU2e<->1xOTU2e
l TN52NS2T02/TN52NS2T03:
1xODU2e<->1xOTU2e
l TN52NS2T04/TN52NS2T05/TN52NS2T06/TN52NS201M01/
TN52NS201M02:
1xODU2e<->1xOTU2e
l TN53NS2:
1xODU2e<->1xOTU2e
Supports hybrid transmission of the ODU0 signals, ODU1 signals, and ODUflex
signals.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1049
Funct
ion
and
featur
e
Description
Cross-
conne
ct
capabi
lities
OptiX OSN 8800:
l TN52NS2T02/TN52NS2T03: Supports the cross-connection of eight channels
of ODU0 signals, four channels of ODU1 signals or one channel of ODU2/
ODU2e signals between the NS2 board and the cross-connect board.
l TN52NS2T04/TN52NS2T05/TN52NS2T06/TN52NS201M01/
TN52NS201M02/TN53NS2: Supports the cross-connection of eight channels of
ODU0 signals, four channels of ODU1 signals or two channels of ODUflex
signals or one channel of ODU2/ODU2e signals between the NS2 board and the
cross-connect board.
OptiX OSN 6800:
l TN11NS2: Supports the cross-connection of four channels of ODU1 signals
between the NS2 board and the cross-connect board or the board in the paired
slot.
l TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2: Supports the cross-connection of four channels
of ODU1 signals or one channel of ODU2/ODU2e signals between the NS2
board and the cross-connect board.
OptiX OSN 3800:
l TN11NS2: Supports the grooming of four channels of ODU1 signals from one
board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards
belonging to the mesh group.
l TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2: Supports grooming of four channels of ODU1
signals to any two boards in the non-paired slots of the four-slot mesh group,
that is, supports an ODU1 cross-connection between slots IU2 and IU4, slots
IU2 and IU5, slots IU3 and IU4, and slots IU3 and IU5.
OTN
functi
on
l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-
T G.709.
l ODU0 layer:supports the PM and TCM function, and PM and TCM non-
l ODUflex layer: supports the PM and PM non-intrusive monitoring functions.
NOTE
l Only the TN52NS2T04/TN52NS2T05/TN52NS2T06/TN52NS201M01/
TN52NS201M02/TN53NS2 supports TCM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU0.
l Only the TN52NS2T04/TN52NS2T05/TN52NS2T06/TN52NS201M01/
TN52NS201M02/TN53NS2 supports PM and PM non-intrusive monitoring for ODUflex.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1050
Funct
ion
and
featur
e
Description
WDM
specifi
cation
Tunab
le
wavel
ength
functi
on
ESC
functi
on
Supported
PRBS
test
functi
on
NOTE
If the TN52NS2T04/TN52NS2T05/TN52NS2T06/TN52NS201M01/TN52NS201M02/
TN53NS2 board interconnects with another line board, PRBS must be enabled for the board
and the connected line board. In addition, the PRBS function can take effect on the boards only
when the following condition is met:
The TN52NS2T04/TN52NS2T05/TN52NS2T06/TN52NS201M01/TN52NS201M02/
TN53NS2 board works in standard mode and ODU0, ODU1, or ODUflex cross-connections
are configured for the board, or the board works in compatible mode but no cross-connection
is configured for it.
LPT
functi
on
Not supported
FEC
encodi
ng
TN11NS2/TN12NS201M02/TN12NS201M03/TN12NS2T02/TN12NS2T03/
TN12NS2T04/TN12NS2T05/TN52NS2T05/TN52NS2T06/TN52NS201M01/
TN52NS201M02:
side.
l Supports ITU-T G.975.1-compliant advanced forward error correction (AFEC)
on the WDM side.
TN12NS2A/TN12NS2B/TN52NS2T02/TN52NS2T03/TN52NS2T04/TN53NS2:
side.
NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1051
Funct
ion
and
featur
e
Description
Alarm
s and
perfor
mance
events
monit
oring
l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of
the laser.
Regen
eratio
n
board
l TN11NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2T05/TN52NS2T06/TN52NS201M01/
TN52NS201M02:
TN11LSXR
l TN52NS2/TN52NS2T02/TN52NS2T03/TN52NS2T04/TN53NS2:
ALS
functi
on
Not supported
Test
frame
Not supported
IEEE
1588v
2
The TN53NS2 board supports BC and OC mode, do not support TC and TC+OC
mode.
Physic
al
clock
Supported only when the TN53NS2 board receives ODU0/ODU1/ODUflex signals
cross-connected from the backplane
Optica
l-layer
ASON
Supported
Electri
cal-
layer
ASON
Supported by the TN52NS2.
Protec
tion
schem
e
NOTE
When the cross-connect granularity is ODUflex, the board does not support tributary SNCP
protection.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1052
Funct
ion
and
featur
e
Description
Loopb
ack
Board WDM
Side
ODU0 Channel
Loopback
ODU1 Channel
Loopback
ODUflex
Channel
Loopback
TN11N
S2
TN12N
S2
TN52N
S2T02
TN52N
S2T03
TN52N
S2T04
TN52N
S2T05
TN52N
S2T06
TN52N
S201M
01
TN52N
S201M
02
TN53N
S2
Supported
only when
the signals
is ODU2/
ODU2e
from the
backplane.
Supported Supported only
when ODU1
signals are
received from the
backplane.
Supported
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1053
Funct
ion
and
featur
e
Description
Protoc
ols or
standa
rds
compl
iance
Protocols or
standards for
transparent
transmission (non-
performance
monitoring)
IEEE 802.3u
IEEE 802.3z
IEEE 802.3ae
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
(FC-PI)
SW-3)
Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control
(MAC)
(PHY)
Interface (FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent
(PDM)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1054
Funct
ion
and
featur
e
Description
Protocols or
processing
(performance
monitoring)
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.873.1
ITU-T G.694.1

The NS2 board consists of the WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, 1588v2
Functional Modules and Signal Flow
Figure 14-59 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the NS2 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1055
Figure 14-59 Functional modules and signal flow of the NS2 board
SCC
WDM
IN
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Fuse
Signal processing
module
OUT
E/O
O/E
OTN
side
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
processing
module
Power supply
module
WDM-side
optical
module
n X ODUk
Cross-connect
module
1588v2
module

NOTE
Only the TN53NS2 board supports the IEEE 1588v2 module.
In Figure 14-59, n x ODUk indicates the service cross-connections from the NS2 board to the backplane. "n"
Table 14-56 shows the service cross-connections from the NS2 board to the backplane.
Table 14-56 Service cross-connections from the NS2 board to the backplane
TN11N
S2
A maximum of 4xODU1
TN12N
S2
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1056
TN52N
S2T02/
TN52N
S2T03
TN52N
S2T04/
TN52N
S2T05/
TN52N
S2T06/
TN52N
S201M0
1/
TN52N
S201M0
2/
TN53N
S2
A maximum of 8xODU0/4xODU1/1xODU2/2xODUflex/1xODU2e

The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the NS2 board. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the backplane to the WDM side of the NS2,
The cross-connect module receives ODUk signals sent from the backplane. The OTN
processing module performs operations such as OTN framing, and encoding of FEC/AFEC.
Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU2 signals. The OTU2 signals are sent to the
WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the signal processing module
sends out the OTU2 optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-
T G.694.1 through the OUT optical interface.
l Receive direction
standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 from the WDM side through the
IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion.
After O/E conversion, the OTU2 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The OTN
processing module performs operations such as OTU2 framing, decoding of FEC/AFEC.
Then, the cross-connect module sends out ODUk signals to the backplane for service cross-
connection.
Module Function
WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals.
WDM-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals
to OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1057
The module consists of an OTN processing module and a cross-connect module.
Frames OTU2 or OTU2e signals, processes overheads in OTU2 or OTU2e signals, and
Grooms electrical signals between the NS2 and the other board through the backplane.
l 1588v2 module
to the STG board.
14.5.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the NS2 board.
Figure 14-60 and Figure 14-61 show the front panel of the NS2 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1058
Figure 14-60 Front panel of the TN11NS2/TN12NS201M02/TN12NS201M03/TN12NS2T02/
TN12NS2T03/TN12NS2T04/TN12NS2T05/TN12NS2A/TN52NS2 board

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1059
Figure 14-61 Front panel of the TN12NS2B/TN53NS2

Indicators
Interfaces
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1060
Table 14-57 Types and functions of the interfaces on the NS2 board
multiplexer board.
multiplexer board.

Laser Hazard Level
14.5.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one NS2 board.
Table 14-58 shows the valid slots for the TN11NS2/TN12NS2 board.
Table 14-58 Valid slots for the TN11NS2/TN12NS2 board
Product Valid slots

Table 14-59 shows the valid slots for the TN52NS2 board.
Table 14-59 Valid slots for the TN52NS2 board
Product Valid slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack
a
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18
a: Only the TN52NS201M01/TN52NS201M02/TN52NS2T04/TN52NS2T05/TN52NS2T06
supports the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1061
Product Valid slots

14.5.7 Characteristic Code for the NS2
Table 14-61 lists the mapping between the logical ports on the board and the port numbers
Table 14-61 Mapping between the physical ports on the NS2 board and the port numbers
IN/OUT 1

NOTE
Logical Ports
The NS2 board can work in standard or compatible mode. For details about the standard and
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1062
Descriptio
n
on the NMS
TN53N
S2
Standard
mode
Figure 14-62 Table 14-63 53NS2
Compati
ble mode
Figure 14-63 Table 14-64 53NS2(COMP)
TN52N
S2
Standard
mode
Figure 14-62 Table 14-63 52NS2(STND)
Compati
ble mode
TN12N
S2
Compati
ble mode
TN11N
S2
Compati
ble mode
Figure 14-65 Table 14-64 NS2
a: TN52NS2T02/TN52NS2T03 board can work only in compatible mode.

NOTE
When used in OptiX OSN 6800, the TN52NS2 board can only cross-connect ODU1 and ODU2 signals from
the backplane.
When used in OptiX OSN 3800, the TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2 board can only cross-connect ODU1
signals from the backplane.
The cross-connect granularity supported by the board is determined by that supported by the cross-connect board
in the same subrack. For information about cross-connect boards, see 21 Cross-Connect Board and System
and Communication Board.
NOTE
When the NS2 board works in compatible mode, or when the board works in standard mode and ODU Timeslot
Configuration Mode is Assign consecutive, observe the following points:
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1063
Figure 14-62 Port diagram of the TN52NS2/TN53NS2 (standard mode)

8 xODU0
4 xODU1
1 xODU2/
1xODU2e
ODU1:1
ODU1:4
ODU1:4
ODU0:2
ODU0:2
ODU0:1
ODU0:1
OCh:1
2XODUflex
IN/OUT
IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1~2)
ODUflex:1
ODUflex:2
IN/OUT-OCh:1
IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4)-ODU0:(1~2)
ODU1:1
ODU2:1
ODU0: 8
ODU0:1
ODU2:1
8 xODU0
Backplane

ODU2:1
ODU2:1
OCh :1
OCh 1 :
OCh :1
OCh :1
O
t
h
e
r

t
r
i
b
u
t
a
r
y
/
l
i
n
e
/
P
I
D

b
o
a
r
d
Cross-connect
module
ODU1 mapping path
Multiplexing
module
ODU2 mapping path
Service
processing
module
ODU0 mapping
path (ODU0
>ODU1
>ODU2)
ODU0 mapping
path (ODU0
>ODU2)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1064
NOTE
Figure 14-63 Port diagram of the TN52NS2/TN53NS2 board (compatible mode)
1
(IN1/OUT1)-1
1 x ODU2/ODU2e 8 x ODU0 4 x ODU1
71
(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1
161
(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1
164
(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1
164
(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2
51
(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4
ODU1
ODU1
ODU2
51
(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1
161
(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2
Other tributary/
line/PID board
Other tributary/
line/PID board
Other tributary/
line/PID board
Backplane
Cross-
connect
module
ODU1 mapping path
Multiplexin
g module
ODU2 mapping path
Service
processing
module
ODU0
mapping
path

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1065
Figure 14-64 Port diagram of the TN12NS2 board
1
(IN1/OUT1)-1
51
(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1
51
(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4
71
(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1
1 x ODU2/ODU2e 4 x ODU1
ODU2
Other tributary/
line/PID board
Other tributary/
line/PID board
Backplane
Cross-
connect
module
ODU2 mapping path
Multiplexin
g module
Service
processing
module
ODU1
mapping
path

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1066
Figure 14-65 Port diagram of the TN11NS2 board
1
(IN1/OUT1)-1
4 x ODU1
1(IN/OUT)-1
1(IN/OUT)-4
Other tributary/
line/PID board
Backplane
Cross-
connect
module
ODU1 mapping path
Multiplexin
g module
Service
processing
module

Table 14-63 Description of NM port of the TN52NS2/TN53NS2 board (standard mode)
Port Name Definition
IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2) Mapping path for ODU0 signals
received from the backplane
(ODU0->ODU1->ODU2)
IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1-8) Mapping path for ODU0 signals
(ODU0->ODU2)
IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4) Mapping path for ODU1 signals
IN/OUT-OCh:1 Mapping path for ODU2/ODU2e
signals received from the backplane
IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1-2) Mapping path for ODUflex signals
IN/OUT WDM-side optical ports

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1067
Table 14-64 Description of NM port of the TN11NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2 board
(compatible mode)
ODU0LP1-
ODU0LP4
channels 1 and 2.
the ODU1LP port.
ODU1LP1 Internal logical ports. Each of the
3, and 4.
the ODU2LP port
ODU2LP1 Internal logical ports of the board.
channel 1.
the IN/OUT port
IN/OUT
a
Internal logical ports. Each of the
3, and 4.
-
IN/OUT WDM-side optical ports. -
a: The port is available only on the TN11NS2 board.

14.5.9 Configuring Cross-Connections
side.
NOTE
standard mode.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1068
Figure 14-66 TN52NS2/TN53NS2 board cross-connections (ODU0 level: ODU0->ODU1-
>ODU2)
Client side
WDM side
NS2
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1
WDM side
2
1
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1
Line board d
(standard mode)
Line board c
(compatible
mode)
The client side of tributary boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NS2
board
The WDM side of the NS2 board are cross-connected to the WDM side of line boards
compatible mode
standard mode
Line board e
(standard mode)
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
Tributary board a
Tributary board b
(compatible mode)
(standard mode)
NOTE
The IN/OUT optical port supports ODU0->ODU2 mapping when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is
Assign random.
The IN/OUT optical port supports ODU0->ODU1->ODU2 mapping when ODU Timeslot Configuration
Mode is Assign consecutive.
Tributary
board a
TN54TEM28 / TN52TOG / TN52TOM / TN54THA / TN54TOA
Tributary
board b
TN54THA / TN54TOA
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1069
Line board e TN52ND2T04 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN52NS2T04 / TN52NS2T05 / TN52NS2T06 /
TN52NS201M01 / TN52NS201M02 / TN53NS2

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1070
Figure 14-67 TN52NS2/TN53NS2 board cross-connections (ODU0 level: ODU0->ODU2)
Client side
NS2
WDM side
2
1
Line board d
(standard mode)
Line board e
(compatible
mode)
board
The WDM side of the NS2 board are cross-connected to the WDM side of line boards
Line board c
(standard mode)
Standard mode
WDM side
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
Tributary board a
Tributary board b
(compatible mode)
(standard mode)
NOTE
consecutive.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1071
Line board c TN52ND2T04 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN52NS2T04 / TN52NS2T05 / TN52NS2T06 / TN52NS201M01 /
TN52NS201M02 / TN53NS2
TN54ENQ2
Line board e TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 /

Figure 14-68, Figure 14-69 and Figure 14-70 show the created ODU1 cross-connections.
Figure 14-68 TN12NS2 board cross-connections (ODU1 level)
NS2
2
1
Client side
WDM side
WDM side
The client side of tributary boards are cross-connected to the WDM side
of the NS2 board
The WDM side of the NS2 board are cross-connected to the WDM side
of line boards
Line board c
(standard mode)
Line board b
(compatible mode)
Tributary board a
(compatible mode)
Tributary board a TN11TDG / TN11TDX / TN52TOG / TN11TOM / TN52TOM / TN11TQM / TN12TQM / TN11TQS
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1072
Line board b TN11ND2 / TN12ND2 / TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN51NQ2 / TN52NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN11NS2 /
TN12NS2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN12LQMS(NS1 Mode) / TN12ELQX / TN12PTQX
Line board c TN52ND2T04 / TN53ND2 / TN55NO2 / TN52NS2T04 / TN52NS2T05 / TN52NS2T06 / TN52NS201M01 /
TN54ENQ2

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1073
Figure 14-69 TN52NS2/TN53NS2 board cross-connections (ODU1 level)
NS2
2
1
Client side
WDM side
WDM side
compatible
mode
standard
mode
Line board d
(standard
mode)
Line board c
(compatible
mode)
the NS2 board
The WDM side of the NS2 board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
line boards
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
Tributary board a
Tributary board b
(compatible mode)
(standard mode)
Tributary
board a
TN11TDG / TN11TDX /TN54TEM28 / TN52TOG / TN11TOM / TN52TOM / TN11TQM /
TN12TQM / TN11TQS / TN54THA / TN54TOA
Tributary
board b
TN54THA / TN54TOA
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1074

WDM side
NS2
1(IN/OUT)-1
1(IN/OUT)-2
1(IN/OUT)-3
1(IN/OUT)-4
WDM side
2
1
Tributary board a
(compatible mode)
Line board b
(compatible mode)
Line board c
(standard mode)
The client side of tributary boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the
NS2 board
The WDM side of the NS2 board are cross-connected to the WDM side of line
boards
Client side
Tributary
board a
TN11TDG / TN11TDX / TN52TOG / TN11TOM / TN52TOM / TN11TQM / TN12TQM /
TN11TQS
Line board b TN11ND2 / TN12ND2 / TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN51NQ2 / TN52NQ2 /
TN53NS2 / TN11NS2 / TN12NS2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN12LQMS(NS1 Mode) /
TN12ELQX / TN12PTQX
Line board c TN52NS2T04 / TN52NS2T05 / TN52NS2T06 / TN52NS201M01 / TN52NS201M02 /
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1075

NS2
IN/OUT-OCH:1
2
1
Client side
WDM side
WDM side
The client side of tributary boards are cross-connected to
the WDM side of the NS2 board
The WDM side of the NS2 board are cross-connected to the
WDM side of line boards
Line board c
(standard mode)
Line board b
(compatible mode)
Tributary board a
(compatible mode)
Tributary
board a
Line board b TN11ND2 / TN12ND2 / TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN51NQ2 / TN52NQ2 /
Line board c TN52ND2T04 / TN53ND2 / TN55NO2 / TN52NS2T04 / TN52NS2T05 / TN52NS2T06 /

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1076
Figure 14-72 TN52NS2/TN53NS2 board cross-connections (ODU2 level)
NS2
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1
2
1
Client side
WDM side
WDM side
compatible mode
standard mode
Line board d
(standard mode)
Line board c
(compatible mode)
Tributary board a
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX1/RX1)-1
(compatible mode)
Tributary board b
(standard mode)
Tributary
board a
TN12TDX / TN52TDX / TN53TDX / TN54TEM28 / TN11TQX / TN52TQX / TN53TQX /
TN55TQX / TN11TSXL / TN54TTX
Tributary
board b

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1077
Figure 14-73 TN52NS2/TN53NS2 board cross-connections (ODUflex level)
NS2
2
1
Client side
Lin board c
WDM side
WDM side
Tributary board a
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX1/RX1)-1
(compatible mode)
Tributary board b
(standard mode)
NOTE
The IN/OUT optical port supports ODUflex when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is .
Tributary
board a
TN53TDX / TN54TEM28 / TN55TQX / TN54THA / TN54TOA
Tributary
board b
TN53TDX / TN54TOA / TN55TQX

For parameters of NS2, refer to Table 14-65.
Table 14-65 NS2 parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1078
Optical Interface
Name
name.
Default: Used
channel of a board.
Optical Interface
Loopback
Outloop
Default: Non-
Loopback
OutloopS
Default: Non-
Loopback
Service Mode l TN11NS2: N/A
l TN12NS2: ODU1,
ODU2
Default: ODU1
l TN52NS2:
Automatic, ODU0,
ODU1, ODU2
Default: Automatic
l TN53NS2:
Automatic, ODU1,
ODU2
Default: Automatic
NOTE
TN52NS2/TN53NS2 only in the compatible
mode.
Default: On
Default: Enabled
FEC Mode FEC, AFEC
Default: FEC
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1079
AFEC Grade 1, 2, 3
Default: 3
NOTE
Only the TN52NS2/TN53NS2 support this
parameter.
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
Tunable Wavelength
Range
Planned Wavelength
Frequency (THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.100
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.170
to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /
board.
NOTE
information.
Default: C
wavelength.
NOTE
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
to Disabled.
NOTE
The parameter is only supported by the
TN12NS2 /TN52NS2/TN53NS2.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1080
OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None
board resides.
information.
NOTE
TN11NS2 board.
Default: Enabled
NOTE
TN52NS2/TN53NS2 in the standard mode.
Speedup Mode
Default: Standard
Mode
NOTE
TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2.
information.
Default: Disabled
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
commissioning.
NOTE
TN12NS2/TN52NS2 /TN53NS2.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1081
ODUflex Tolerance
(ppm)
0 to 100
Default: 100
NOTE
NS2 board receives 3G-SDI services from
set it to 100.
NOTE
ODU Timeslot
Configuration Mode
consecutive
Default: Assign random
The ODU Timeslot Configuration
Mode parameter sets and queries the
timeslot configuration mode of a board.
ODU1>ODU2, and ODUflex-
>ODU2.
NOTE
For the TN52NS2/TN53NS2 board in an
OptiX OSN 6800 NE, this parameter must
be set to Assign consecutive.

14.5.11 NS2 Specifications
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1082
Module
TN11NS
2
PIN
NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
Wavelength-ODB-APD
N/A
TN12NS
2
PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
Wavelength-ODB-APD
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
NRZ-PIN-XFP
TN52NS
2
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
PIN
N/A
TN53NS
2
N/A 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even
NRZ-PIN-XFP

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1083
NOTE
NOTE
point.
(odd & even
wavelengths)-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
power
dBm 2 2
power
dBm -3 -3
width
nm 0.3 0.3
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35 35
(FEC on)
dBm -16 -16
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1084

Optical
Module Type
1200 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
NRZ-
PIN
1200 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
APD
4800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
ODB-
APD
800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Waveleng
th-DRZ-
PIN
800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Waveleng
th-NRZ-
PIN
Line code
format
Maximum
mean launched
power
dBm 2 2 2 2 2
Minimum
mean launched
power
dBm -3 -3 -3 -3 -3
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB 10 10
N/A
a
10 10
Center
frequency
THz 192.10 to 196.05
Center
frequency
deviation
GHz 5 5 5 5 5
Maximum -20
dB spectral
width
nm 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
Minimum side
mode
suppression
ratio
dB 35 35 35 35 35
Dispersion
tolerance
ps/
nm
1200 1200 4800 800 800
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1085
Optical
Module Type
1200 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
NRZ-
PIN
1200 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
APD
4800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelen
gth-
ODB-
APD
800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Waveleng
th-DRZ-
PIN
800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Waveleng
th-NRZ-
PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1200 to 1650
Receiver
sensitivity,
EOL (FEC on)
dBm -16 -26 -26 -16 -16
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm 0 -9 -9 0 0
Maximum
reflectance
dB -27 -27 -27 -27 -27

PIN-XFP
power
dBm 2
power
dBm -3
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1086
PIN-XFP
width
nm 0.3
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35
Receiver type - PIN
(FEC on)
dBm -16
(FEC on)
dBm 0

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
power
dBm 2
power
dBm -1
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1087
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
width
nm 0.3
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35
Receiver type - PIN
(FEC on)
dBm -16
(FEC on)
dBm 0

Optical Module
Type
km
km
Target transmission
distance
- 10 km (6.2 mi.) 40 km (24.9 mi.)
Operating
wavelength range
nm 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm -1 2
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm -6 -1
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB 6 8.2
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1088
Optical Module
Type
km
km
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm N/A N/A
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30 30
Operating
wavelength range
nm 1290 to 1565 1260 to 1605
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm -1 -1

(8.7 in.)
l Weight:
TN11NS2/TN12NS2: 1.2 kg (2.64 lb)
TN52NS2: 1.3 kg (2.86 lb.)
TN53NS2: 1 kg (2.2 lb.)
Power Consumption
Consumption
at 25C (77F)
(W)
Maximum
Power
Consumption
at 55C (131F)
(W)
TN11NS
2
PIN
NRZ-PIN
38.0 41.8
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
39.0 42.9
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1089
Consumption
at 25C (77F)
(W)
Maximum
Power
Consumption
at 55C (131F)
(W)
41.0 45.1
Wavelength-ODB-APD
44.0 48.4
TN12NS
2
PIN
38.8 43.40
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
39.40 44.10
39.70 44.46
Wavelength-ODB-APD
42.50 47.60
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
30.32 34
NRZ-PIN-XFP
25.35 28.39
TN52NS
2
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
TN52NS2T02:
46.5
TN52NS2T06: 28
TN52NS2T02:
51.1
TN52NS2T06: 31
TN52NS2T03:
49.1
TN52NS2T04: 26
TN52NS2T05: 28
TN52NS2T03:
51.7
TN52NS2T04: 28
TN52NS2T05: 31
PIN
28 31
TN53NS
2
NRZ-PIN-XFP
20 24
21 25
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1090

14.6 NS3
The available functional versions of the NS3 board are TN11, TN52, TN54, TN55.
Huawei office.
Boar
d
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
TN11
NS3
N N N N Y N
TN52
NS3
Y Y Y N Y N
TN54
NS3
Y Y Y Y Y N
TN55
NS3
Y Y Y Y Y N

NOTE
The TN54NS3/TN55NS3 board for the OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack only supports relay
mode .
Variants
The difference between the NS3 board variants lies in the WDM-side optical module.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1091

05 40G Transponder

T01 60000 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ePDM-BPSK-PIN

l Function:
Board Cross-
Connet
Granulari
ty
FEC
Encoding
IEEE
1588v2
Physical
clock
Relay
Mode
Coherent
System
WDM-
side Gray
Optical
Module
TN11NS3 ODU2 and
ODU2e
FEC/AFEC N N N N N
TN52NS3 ODU0,
ODU1,
ODU2 and
ODU2e
FEC/AFEC N N N N N
TN54NS3 ODU0,
ODU1,
ODU2,
ODU2e and
ODU3
FEC/
AFEC-2
Y Y Y N Y
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1092
Board Cross-
Connet
Granulari
ty
FEC
Encoding
IEEE
1588v2
Physical
clock
Relay
Mode
Coherent
System
WDM-
side Gray
Optical
Module
TN55NS3 ODU0,
ODU1,
ODU2,
ODU2e and
ODU3
HFEC N N Y Y N

l Appearance:
The TN11NS3 board and the TN52NS3 board use the same front panel. The TN54NS3
board and the TN55NS3 board use a different front panel from the preceding boards.
For details, see 14.6.5 Front Panel and 14.6.10 NS3 Specifications.
l Specification:
The specifications vary according to the version of the board that you use. For details,
see 14.6.10 NS3 Specifications.
Table 14-75 Substitution rules of the NS3 board
Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11NS3 TN52NS3 The TN52NS3 can be created as TN11NS3 on the NMS. The former can
TN52NS3 functions as the TN11NS3.
TN52NS3 None -
TN54NS3 None -
TN55NS3 None -

14.6.2 Application
As a type of line board, the NS3 board converts 32 ODU0, 16 ODU1, four ODU2, or one ODU3
into one ITU-T G.694.1 OTU3 signal or converts four ODU2e into one ITU-T G.694.1 OTU3e
signal. The TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN55NS3 board supports hybrid transmission of the ODU0
service, ODU1 service, and the ODU2/ODU2e service. The TN55NS3 board uses coherent
receive technology. Therefore, the board is intended for coherent systems.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1093
Application scenario 1 of the TN11NS3/TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN55NS3 board:
conversion between four channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals and one channel of
OTU3/OTU3e signals
1
4
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
1
O
T
U
3
/
O
T
U
3
e
1
O
D
U
3
/
O
D
U
3
e
4
O
D
U
2
/
O
D
U
2
e
1
4
1
4
TQX
NS3
4xODU2/ODU2e
1
O
T
U
3
/
O
T
U
3
e
1
O
D
U
3
/
O
D
U
3
e
4
O
D
U
2
/
O
D
U
2
e
NS3
1
4
1
4
1
4
TQX
4xODU2/ODU2e
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
OUT
IN
IN
OUT

NOTE
In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN54NS3/TN55NS3 board must be set to
Line Mode.
Application scenario 2 of the TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN55NS3 board: conversion
between 16 channels of ODU1 signals and one channel of OTU3 signals
1
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
1 1
TOM
16xODU1
NS3
1
O
T
U
3
1
O
D
U
3
4
x
O
D
U
2
1
6
x
O
D
U
1
8 4 4
1
1 1
TOM
8 4 4
4
1
1 1
TOM
16xODU1
NS3
1
O
T
U
3
1
O
D
U
3
4
x
O
D
U
2
1
6
x
O
D
U
1
8 4 4
1
1 1
TOM
8 4 4
4
OUT
IN
IN
OUT

NOTE
l In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN54NS3/TN55NS3 board must be set
to Line Mode.
l For the TN52NS3 board, the service mapping path is ODU1->ODU2->ODU3.
l For the TN54NS3/TN55NS3 board, the service mapping path is ODU1->ODU3.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1094
Application scenario 3 of the TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN55NS3 board: conversion
between 32 channels of ODU0 signals and one channel of OTU3 signals
1
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
1 1
TOM
32xODU0
NS3
1
O
T
U
3
1
O
D
U
3
4
x
O
D
U
2
1
6
x
O
D
U
1
8 8 8
1
1 1
TOM
8 8 8
4
3
2
x
O
D
U
0
1
1 1
TOM
32xODU0
NS3
1
O
T
U
3
1
O
D
U
3
4
x
O
D
U
2
1
6
x
O
D
U
1
8 8 8
1
1 1
TOM
8 8 8
3
2
x
O
D
U
0
4

NOTE
l The TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN55NS3 board supports this application scenario only when used in the
OptiX OSN 8800.
l In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN54NS3/TN55NS3 board must be set
to Line Mode.
l For the TN52NS3 board, the service mapping path is ODU0->ODU1->ODU2->ODU3.
l For the TN54NS3/TN55NS3 board, the service mapping path is ODU0->ODU1->ODU3.
Application scenario 4 of the TN54NS3/TN55NS3 board: conversion between one
channel of ODU3 signals and one channel of OTU3 signals
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
1xODU3
NS3
1
O
T
U
3
1
O
D
U
3
T
S
X
L
1xODU3
NS3
1
O
T
U
3
1
O
D
U
3
T
S
X
L
OUT
IN
IN
OUT

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1095
NOTE
Line Mode . With the TSXL board, the Line Rate parameter of the TN54NS3/TN55NS3 board must be
set to Standard Mode.
Application scenario 5 of the TN54NS3/TN55NS3 board: implement the electrical
regeneration of one channel of OTU3/OTU3e signal
1
O
T
U
3
/
O
T
U
3
e
NS3
MUX DMUX
MUX DMUX
1
O
T
U
3
/
O
T
U
3
e
IN OUT
IN OUT
1
O
T
U
3
/
O
T
U
3
e
NS3
1
O
T
U
3
/
O
T
U
3
e

NOTE
The TN54NS3/TN55NS3 board for the OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack only supports
relay mode.
Electrical Relay Mode or Optical Relay Mode. When optical-layer and electrical-layer ASON are
enabled, it does not matter whether the Board Mode parameter is set to Optical Relay Mode or Electrical
Relay mode. The parameter must be set to Optical Relay Mode for the line board in a non-ASON system;
otherwise, end-to-end management of ASON services is not available.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1096
NS3
TOM
ODU0
ODU0
TOM
ODU1
ND2
ODU2/
ODU2/
TDX
ODU2/
ODU2e
ODU2e
ODU2e
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
NS3
TOM
ODU0
ODU0
TOM
ODU1
ND2
ODU2/
ODU2/
TDX
ODU2/
ODU2e
ODU2e
ODU2e
1xOTU3/
1xOTU3e

NOTE
The IN/OUT port can transmit a mixture of ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, and ODU2e signals, the total bandwidth
The NS3 board achieves cross-connection at the electrical layer, and to provide OTN interfaces
and ESC.
The NS3 board can work in either line mode or relay mode. Table 14-76 describes the functions
and features of the board working in line board, and Table 14-77 describes the functions and
features of the board working in relay board.
NOTE
l Only the OptiX OSN 8800 supports ODU0/ODU3.
l The relay mode is only supported by the TN54NS3/TN55NS3.
l When using the NRZ module, the TN54NS3 board maps 32 ODU0, 16 ODU1, four ODU2, or one
ODU3 signals into one OTU3 service. When using ODB or DQPSK optical module, the TN54NS3
maps 32 ODU0, or 16 ODU1, four ODU2, or one ODU3 signals into one OTU3 signals, and also maps
four ODU2e into one OTU3e signals.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1097
Table 14-76 Functions and features of the NS3 board (Line Mode)
Function and
feature
Description
Basic function NS3 converts signals as follows:
l TN11NS3:
4xODU2<->1xOTU3
4xODU2e<->1xOTU3e
l TN52NS3:
4xODU2e<->1xOTU3e
l TN54NS3/TN55NS3:
32xODU0/16xODU1/4xODU2/1xODU3<->1xOTU3
4xODU2e<->1xOTU3e
The TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN55NS3 board supports hybrid transmission
of ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e signals. When the mixed signals
contain an ODU2e signal, they must be mapped into an OTU3e signal.
Cross-connect
capabilities
TN11NS3: 4xODU2/4xODU2e
TN52NS3: 32xODU0/16xODU1/4xODU2/4xODU2e
TN54NS3/TN55NS3: 32xODU0/16xODU1/4xODU2/4xODU2e/
1xODU3
OTN function l Supports the OTU3/OTU3e interface on the WDM side.
to the ITU-T G.709.
l ODU3 layer: supports the PM and TCM function, and PM and TCM
non-intrusive monitoring functions.
l ODU0 layer: supports the PM function, and PM non-intrusive
WDM
specification
Tunable
wavelength
function
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1098
Function and
feature
Description
PRBS test
function
FEC encoding TN11NS3/TN52NS3:
the WDM side.
TN54NS3:
the WDM side.
TN55NS3:
l Supports HFEC.
NOTE
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
line failures.
power of the laser.
l Supports CD and PMD performance monitoring.
NOTE
Only the TN54NS3 supports Poisson mode.
Only the TN55NS3 board supports CD and PMD performance monitoring.
Regeneration
board
l The WDM-side signals of the TN11NS3/TN52NS3 board can be
regenerated by a TN12LSXLR board.
l The WDM-side signals of the TN54NS3 board can be regenerated
using another TN54NS3 board.
l The WDM-side signals of the TN55NS3 board can be regenerated
using another TN55NS3 board.
IEEE 1588v2 The TN54NS3 board supports BC and OC mode, do not support TC and
TC+OC mode.
Physical clock The TN54NS3 board supports this feature only when ODU0, ODU1 or
ODU2/ODU2e signals are cross-connected from the backplane.
Optical-layer
ASON
Supported
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1099
Function and
feature
Description
Electrical-layer
ASON
Supported by the TN52NS3, TN54NS3, and TN55NS3.
Protection
scheme
Loopback Boa
rd
WD
M
side
ODU0 Channel
Loopback
ODU1 Channel
Loopback
ODU2 Channel
Loopback
TN1
1NS
3
Supp
orted
Not supported Not supported Supported
TN5
2NS
3
Supp
orted
TN5
4NS
3
Supp
orted
TN5
5NS
3
Supp
orted
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1100
Function and
feature
Description
Protocols or
standards
compliance
Prot
ocol
s or
stan
dard
s for
tran
spar
ent
tran
smis
sion
(non
-
perf
orm
ance
mon
itori
ng)
IEEE 802.3u
IEEE 802.3z
IEEE 802.3ae
IEEE 802.3ba
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2
(FC-FS-2)
INTERFACE (FC-PH)
Television Systems
Interface (ASI)
SMPTE 297-2006 Serial Digital Fiber Transmission System for
SMPTE 259M, SMPTE 344M, SMPTE 292 and SMPTE 424M
Signals
Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol (PHY)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1101
Function and
feature
Description
Prot
ocol
s or
stan
dard
s for
serv
ice
proc
essi
ng
(per
for
man
ce
mon
itori
ng)
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.873.1
ITU-T G.694.1

Table 14-77 Functions and features of the NS3 board (Relay Mode)
Function
and feature
Description
Basic
function
Regeneratin
g rate
OTN
function
the ITU-T G.709.
l ODU3 layer: supports the PM, TCM, PM and TCM non-intrusive
WDM
specification
Tunable
wavelength
function
ESC
function
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1102
Function
and feature
Description
PRBS test
function
Not supported
FEC
encoding
TN54NS3:
WDM side.
TN55NS3:
l Supports HFEC.
NOTE
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
failures.
power of the laser.
NOTE
Only the TN54NS3 supports Poisson mode.
ALS
function
Not supported
IEEE
1588v2
Not supported
Physical
clock
Not supported
Optical-layer
ASON
Supported
Electrical-
layer ASON
Not supported
Protection
scheme
Not supported
Protocols or
standards
compliance
-
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1103
Function
and feature
Description
monitoring)
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1

The NS3 board consists of the WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, 1588v2
Figure 14-80 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1104
Figure 14-80 Functional modules and signal flow of the NS3 board (Line Mode)
WDM side
IN
OUT E/O
O/E
WDM-side
optical
module
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
1588v2
module
processing
OTN
module
Cross-connect
module
n X ODUk
Signal processing
module

NOTE
Only the TN54NS3 board supports the IEEE 1588v2 module.
In Figure 14-80, n x ODUk indicates the service cross-connections from the NS3 board to the backplane. "n"
Table 14-78 shows the service cross-connections from the NS3 board to the backplane.
Table 14-78 Service cross-connections from the NS3 board to the backplane
TN11N
S3
A maximum of 4xODU2/4xODU2e
TN52N
S3
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1105
TN54N
S3/
TN55N
S3
A maximum of 32xODU0/16xODU1/4xODU2/4xODU2e/1xODU3

transmit direction is defined as the direction from the backplane of the NS3 to the WDM side
of the NS3, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
The cross-connect module receives ODUk electrical signals sent from the cross-connection
board through the backplane. The OTN processing module performs operations such as
OTN framing and encoding of FEC/AFEC/HFEC. Then, the signal processing module
outputs one channel of OTU3/OTU3e signals.
The OTU3/OTU3e signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/
O conversion, the module sends out the OTU3/OTU3e optical signals at DWDM standard
l Receive direction
DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN optical
interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion.
The OTN processing module performs operations such as OTU3/OTU3e framing and
decoding of FEC/AFEC/HFEC. Then, the cross-connect module sends out ODUk electrical
signals to the backplane for service cross-connection.
The board processes clock signals in two directions.
Figure 14-81 show the functional modules and signal flow of the NS3 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1106
Figure 14-81 Functional modules and signal flow of the NS3 board (Relay Mode)
WDM side
IN
OTN
processing
module
OUT
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
Backplane
O/E
WDM-side
optical
module
WDM side
E/O
WDM-side
optical
module

NOTE
The relay mode is supported only by the TN54NS3/TN55NS3.
The NS3 board implements the regeneration of one channel of optical signals. The wavelengths
at the receive and transmit ends of the board are the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant DWDM
wavelengths that carry OTU3/OTU3e optical signals.
The optical receiving module receives the optical signals to be regenerated through the IN optical
conversion, the module sends out the OTU3/OTU3e signals at DWDM standard wavelengths
The optical signals are output through the OUT optical interface.
Module Function
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1107
The module consists of an OTN processing module and a cross-connect module.
Grooms electrical signals between the NS3 and the cross-connect board through the
backplane.
l 1588v2 module
to the STG board.
14.6.5 Front Panel
Figure 14-82, Figure 14-83, and Figure 14-84 show the front panel of the NS3 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1108
Figure 14-82 Front panel of the TN11NS3/TN52NS3 board

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1109
Figure 14-83 Front panel of the TN54NS3 board

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1110
Figure 14-84 Front panel of the TN55NS3 board
NOTE

Indicators
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1111
Interfaces
multiplexer board.
multiplexer board.

Laser Hazard Level
14.6.6 Valid Slots
Two slots house one TN11NS3 board, TN52NS3 board or TN55NS3 board, and one slot houses
one TN54NS3 board.
Product Valid Slots

NOTE
The online signal bus on the TN11NS3 board connects to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack. The
slot number of the TN11NS3 board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two slots.
For example, if you install the board in slots IU1 and IU2, the slot number of the TN11NS3 board displayed on
the NM is IU2.
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
subrack
IU46-IU52, IU54-IU60, IU62-IU68
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1112
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
subrack
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
subrack
IU2-IU8, IU12-IU18

NOTE
The online signal bus on the TN52NS3 board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack.
Therefore, the slot number of the TN52NS3 board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the
two slots.
For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN52NS3 board, the slot number of the TN52NS3 board displayed
on the NM is IU2.
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
subrack
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
subrack
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
subrack
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18
OptiX OSN 8800
platform subrack
IU1-IU16

When the TN54NS3 boards serve as regeneration boards, follow the principles below to install
them in the case of ESC communication; otherwise, install them in any valid slots.
l OptiX OSN 8800 T64: The TN54NS3 boards for transmitting and receiving the same
IU57 and IU58, IU59 and IU60, IU61 and IU62, IU63 and IU64, IU65 and IU66, or IU67
and IU68.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1113
or IU35 and IU36.
wavelength must be installed in IU1 and IU2, IU3 and IU4, IU5 and IU6, IU7 and IU8,
IU11 and IU12, IU13 and IU14, IU15 and IU16, IU17 and IU18.
l OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack: The TN54NS3 boards for transmitting and receiving
the same wavelength must be installed in IU1 and IU2, IU3 and IU4, IU5 and IU6, IU7 and
l OptiX OSN 6800: The TN54NS3 boards for transmitting and receiving the same
wavelength must be installed in IU1 and IU2, IU3 and IU4, IU5 and IU6, IU7 and IU8,
IU11 and IU12, IU13 and IU14, or IU15 and IU16.
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
subrack
IU46-IU52, IU54-IU60, IU62-IU68
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
subrack
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
subrack
IU2-IU8, IU12-IU18
OptiX OSN 8800
platform subrack subrack
IU2-IU16

When the TN55NS3 boards serve as regeneration boards, follow the principles below to install
them in the case of ESC communication; otherwise, install them in any valid slots.
l OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack: The TN55NS3 boards for transmitting and receiving the
same wavelength must be installed in slots IU2 and IU4, IU6 and IU8, IU12 and IU14,
IU62 and IU64, IU66 and IU68.
same wavelength must be installed in slots IU2 and IU4, IU6 and IU8, IU13 and IU15,
IU17 and IU19, IU21 and IU23, IU25 and IU27, IU30 and IU32, IU34 and IU36.
same wavelength must be installed in IU2 and IU4, IU6 and IU8, IU12 and IU14, IU16
and IU18.
l OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack: The TN55NS3 boards for transmitting and receiving
the same wavelength must be installed in IU2 and IU4, IU6 and IU8, IU12 and IU14.
l OptiX OSN 6800 subrack: The TN55NS3 boards for transmitting and receiving the same
wavelength must be installed in IU2 and IU4, IU6 and IU8, IU14 and IU16.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1114
NOTE
The online signal bus on the TN55NS3 board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack.
Therefore, the slot number of the TN55NS3 board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the
two slots.
For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN55NS3 board, the slot number of the TN55NS3 board displayed
on the NM is IU2.
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NMS
IN/OUT 1

NOTE
Logical Ports
The NS3 board can work in standard or compatible mode. For details about the standard and
Descripti
on
Board Name
Displayed on the
NMS
TN55N
S3
14-86
55NS3
TN54N
S3
14-86
54NS3(STND)
Compatible
mode
Figure 14-86 Table
14-87
54NS3
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1115
Descripti
on
Board Name
Displayed on the
NMS
TN52N
S3
Compatible
mode
Figure 14-87 Table
14-87
52NS3
TN11N
S3
Compatible
mode
Figure 14-88 Table
14-87
NS3

NOTE
For TN54NS3/TN55NS3:
l ODUk cross-connections through the backplane are supported only when Board Mode is set to Line
Mode.
l When used with a TN53TSXL/TN54TSXL board, Line Rate must be set to Standard Mode for the board.
For TN52NS3: The OptiX OSN 6800 supports grooming of signals at the ODU1 and ODU2 levels only from
the backplane.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1116
Figure 14-85 Port diagram of the TN55NS3/TN54NS3 board (standard mode)

32xODU0
16xODU1
4 xODU2/
4xODU2e
OCh :1
ODU1:1
ODU2:4
ODU1:16
ODU0:2
ODU0:1
OCh :1
OCh :1
OCh:1
1XODU3
IN1/OUT1
ODU2:1
IN1/OUT1-OCh:1-ODU3:1
IN1/OUT1-OCh:1-ODU3:1-ODU2:(1~4)
IN1/OUT1-OCh:1-ODU3:1-ODU1:(1~16)-ODU0:(1~2)
IN1/OUT1-OCh:1-ODU3:1-ODU1:(1~16)
ODU1:1
ODU3:
ODU3:1
ODU 3:1
1
ODU1:16
ODU0:2
ODU0:1
ODU3:1
O
t
h
e
r

t
r
i
b
u
t
a
r
y
/
l
i
n
e
/
P
I
D

b
o
a
r
d
Backplane
Service processing module ODU3 mapping path

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1117
Figure 14-86 Port diagram of the TN54NS3 board (compatible mode)
1(IN1/OUT1)-1
4xODU2/
ODU2e
81(ODU3LP1/
ODU3LP1)-1
ODU3
161(ODU0LP1/
ODU0LP1)-1
161(ODU0LP1/
ODU0LP1)-2
164(ODU0LP4/
ODU0LP4)-1
164(ODU0LP4/
ODU0LP4)-2
173(ODU0LP13/
ODU0LP13)-1
173(ODU0LP13/
ODU0LP13)-2
176(ODU0LP16/
ODU0LP16)-1
176(ODU0LP16/
ODU0LP16)-2
71(ODU2LP1/O
DU2LP1)-1001
71(ODU2LP1/O
DU2LP1)-1004
71(ODU2LP1/O
DU2LP1)-1013
71(ODU2LP1/O
DU2LP1)-1016
32 x ODU0 16 x ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
Other
tributary/line/
PID board
Other
tributary/line/
PID board
Other
tributary/line/
PID board
Other
tributary/line/
PID board
Backplane
ODU3
Cross-connect
module
ODU2 mapping path
Multiplexing
module
ODU3 mapping path
Service
processing
module
Automatic cross-connection, which does not need to be
configured on the NMS. For example, if ODU0 signals are
required, users only need to configure cross-connections from
other boards to the ODU0LP port on the board using the NMS.
The board's internal structure enables transmission of the
multiplexed signal to the ODU3LP port. Users do not need to
configure a cross-connection for transmitting the multiplexed
signal.
ODU0
mapping path
Cross-connection that must be configured on the NMS to
receive ODUk signals from other boards
ODU1
mapping path
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1118
NOTE
The ODU1 and ODU2 ports in each of the following combinations cannot be used to configure cross-connections at the same time
because they share the same ODU2 timeslot:
l 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1001 to 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1004 ODU1 ports and 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 ODU2 port
l 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1013 to 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1016 ODU ports and 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-4 ODU2 port

161
(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1
1
(IN1/OUT1)-1
173
176
176
54
(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-1
54
(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-4
4 x ODU2/ODU2e
71
(ODU2LP1/
ODU2LP1)-4
32 x ODU0
Backplane
16 x ODU1
ODU1
ODU2
ODU1
161
(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2
164
(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1
164
(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2
173
51
(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4
ODU1
ODU2
71
(ODU2LP1/
ODU2LP1)-1
51
(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 ODU1
Other
tributary/line/
PID board
Other
tributary/line/
PID board
Other
tributary/line/
PID board
must be configured on the
NMS to receive ODUk
signals from other boards

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1119
1(IN1/OUT1)-1
Backplane
4 x ODU2/ODU2e
Multiplexing module Cross-connection that must be
configured on the NMS to
receive ODUk signals from
other boards

Table 14-86 Description of NM port on the NS3 board (standard mode)
IN1/OUT1-OCh:1-ODU3:1-ODU1:(1 to 16)-
ODU0:(1 to 2)
Mapping path for ODU0 signals
IN1/OUT1-OCh:1-ODU3:1-ODU1:(1 to 16) Mapping path for ODU1 signals
IN1/OUT1-OCh:1-ODU3:1 Mapping path for ODU3 signals
IN1/OUT1 WDM-side optical ports

Table 14-87 Description of NM port of the NS3 board (compatible mode)
ODU0LP1-
ODU0LP16
paths are numbered 1-2.
Automatic cross-connections
between the ports and the ODU1LP
port
ODU1LP1-
ODU1LP4
port
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1120
ODU2LP1 Internal logical port. The optical
NOTE
This port is used for cross-
connections at the ODU1 level.
port
TN11NS3/TN52NS3: Automatic
cross-connections between the ports
and the IN/OUT port
TN54NS3: Automatic cross-
connections between the ports and the
ODU3LP port
ODU3LP1 Internal logical port. The optical
path is numbered 1.
between the ports and the IN/OUT
port
IN/OUT Corresponding to the WDM-side
optical interfaces.
-

side.
NOTE
compatible mode on the WDM side. For information about the standard and compatible modes, see 12.2.3
Standard Mode and Compatible Mode.
standard mode.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1121
Figure 14-89 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52NS3/TN54NS3(compatible mode) board (ODU0 level)

Client side
NS3
(compatible
mode)
2
Line board c
Line board d
WDM side
The WDM side of line boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NS3
(compatible mode)
(standard
mode)
WDM side
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
Tributary board a
Tributary board b
(compatible mode)
(standard mode)
1
TN52NS201M02 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN54NS3 / TN55NS3 / TN54NS4 / TN55NPO2 / TN55NPO2E /
TN54ENQ2
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1122

Figure 14-90 Cross-connection diagram of the TN55NS3/TN54NS3(standard mode) board (ODU0 level)

NS3
(standard mode)
2
Client side
WDM side
WDM side
Line board c
Line board d
(compatible mode)
(standard
mode)
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
Tributary board a
Tributary board b
(compatible mode)
(standard mode)
TN54ENQ2
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1123

Figure 14-91 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52NS3(compatible mode) board (ODU1 level)
1
2
Client side
NS3
(compatible
mode)
Line board d
WDM side
WDM side
(standard mode)
(compatible mode)
Line board c
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
Tributary board a
Tributary board b
(compatible mode)
(standard mode)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1124
TN54ENQ2

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1125
Figure 14-92 Cross-connection diagram of the TN54NS3(compatible mode) board (ODU1 level)

1
2
(standard mode)
Client side
NS3
(compatible mode)
WDM side
WDM side
Line board c
(compatible mode)
Line board d
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
Tributary board a
Tributary board b
(compatible mode)
(standard mode)
TN54ENQ2
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1126

Figure 14-93 Cross-connection diagram of the TN55NS3/TN54NS3(standard mode) board (ODU1 level)

1
2
NS3
(standard mode)
Client side
WDM side
Line board c
Line board d
(compatible
mode)
(standard
mode)
WDM side
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
Tributary board a
Tributary board b
(compatible mode)
(standard mode)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1127
TN54ENQ2

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1128
Figure 14-94 Cross-connection diagram of the TN11NS3/TN52NS3/TN54NS3(compatible
mode) board (ODU2 level)
1
2
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1
2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1
3(IN3/OUT3)-OCH:1
4(IN4/OUT4)-OCH:1

Client side
NS3
(compatible mode)
Line board c
WDM side
(compatible mode)
WDM side

Line board d
(standard mode)
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
Tributary board a
Tributary board b
(compatible mode)
(standard mode)
Tributary
board a
TN11NS3:
TN52NS3:
TN12TDX / TN52TDX / TN53TDX / TN54TEM28 / TN11TQX / TN52TQX / TN53TQX /
TN55TQX / TN11TSXL / TN54TTX
TN54NS3:
Tributary
board b
TN55TQX/TN53TDX
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1129
Line board c TN11NS3:
TN52NS3:
TN54NS3:

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1130
Figure 14-95 Cross-connection diagram of the TN55NS3/TN54NS3(standard mode) board
(ODU2 level)
1
2
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1
2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1
3(IN3/OUT3)-OCH:1
4(IN4/OUT4)-OCH:1

Client side
WDM side
WDM side
Line board c
(compatible
mode)
Line board d
(standard
mode)
NS3
(standard mode)
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
Tributary board a
Tributary board b
(compatible mode)
(standard mode)
Tributary
board a
Tributary
board b
TN55TQX / TN53TDX

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1131
Figure 14-96 Cross-connection diagram of the TN54NS3(compatible mode) board (ODU3
level)
RX1/TX1

WDM side
1
WDM side
2
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU3:1
Client side
NS3
(compatible mode)
Line board c
Line board d
(compatible
mode)
(standard
mode)
Tributary board a
(compatible mode)
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NS3
The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NS3
Tributary board b
(standard mode)
Tributary board a TN53TSXL
Tributary board b TN54TSXL
Line board c TN54NS3
Line board d TN54NS3 / TN55NS3 / TN54NS4

NOTE
When cross-connections are configured between the TN54NS3 and TN54TSXL boards, Line Rate of the
TN54NS3 board must be set to Standard Mode.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1132
Figure 14-97 Cross-connection diagram of the TN55NS3/TN54NS3(standard mode) board
(ODU3 level)
RX1/TX1
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU3:1

WDM side
1
WDM side
2
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU3:1
Client side
NS3
(standard mode)
Line board c
Line board d
(compatible
mode)
(standard
mode)
Tributary board a
(compatible mode)
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NS3
The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NS3
Tributary board b
(standard mode)
Line board d TN54NS3 / TN55NS3 / TN54NS4

For parameters of the NS3, refer to Table 14-88.
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1133
Optical Interface
Name
- Set and query the optical interface
name.
Default: Used
channel of a board.
Optical Interface
Loopback
Outloop
Outloop
Query or set the path Loopback.
Default: On
Service Mode l TN11NS3: not
supported
l TN52NS3:
Automatic, ODU0,
ODU1, ODU2
Default: Automatic
l TN54NS3:
Automatic, ODU0,
ODU1, ODU2,
ODU3, Mix
Default: Automatic
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1134
Default: Enabled
supports Line Rate of the received
signals in auto-sensing mode, and
thus no manual setting is required.
l When it is set to Disabled, Line
Rate of the board must be set
manually and the values of the
unavailable.
NOTE
Optical Relay Mode.
TN54NS3/TN55NS3.
Default: Enabled
FEC Mode TN11NS3, TN52NS3,
TN54NS3:
l FEC, AFEC
l Default: AFEC
TN55NS3:
l HFEC
l Default: HFEC
AFEC Grade 1, 2, 3
Default: 3
a stronger error correction capability
and a longer signal transmission delay.
NOTE
Only the TN54NS3 supports this parameter.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1135
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.100
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.170
to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /
Set Receive Wavelength of a board.
The value of the Receive Wavelength
is as follows:
wavelength of the local board, use
the default value, which indicates
keeping the receive wavelength the
same as the transmit wavelength of
the local board automatically.
the peer board; otherwise, services
are affected.
NOTE
set to the default value.
Receive Band Type C, CWDM
Default: C
Sets Receive Band Type of a board.
NOTE
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
Tunable Wavelength
Range
Planned Wavelength
No./Wavelength
(nm)/Frequency
(THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.100
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.170
to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /
board.
NOTE
information.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1136
Default: C
The Planned Band Type parameter
sets the band type of the current working
wavelength.
NOTE
Default: Enabled
NOTE
TN54NS3 in the standard mode.
Speedup Mode
Default:
l ODU2LP channel:
Standard Mode
l ODU3LP channel:
Speedup Mode
l For ODU2LP channel,
This parameter needs to be set to
Speedup Mode when ODU2e
signals are cross-connected.
Standard Mode when ODU2
l For ODU3LP channel,
This parameter could be set to
Standard Mode or Speedup
Mode when ODU2/ODU3
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
l TN52NS3/
TN54NS3:
Enabled,
Disabled
Default: Disabled
l TN55NS3:
Disabled, GC1C
+GCC2 Enabled,
Only GCC1
Enabled, Only
GCC2 Enabled
Default: Disabled
to Disabled.
NOTE
Only TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN55NS3
support this parameter.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1137
Default: Disabled
Dispersion
Compensation Value
(ps/nm)
- Queries the dispersion compensation
value of the board.
NOTE
Only TN55NS3 supports this parameter.
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
commissioning.
NOTE
Only TN52NS3/54NS3/TN55NS3 support
this parameter.
Relay Mode, Optical
Relay Mode
Default: Electrical
Relay Mode
NOTE
Only the TN54NS3/TN55NS3 support this
parameter.

Module
TN11NS
3
Wavelength-ODB-PIN
N/A
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1138
Module
TN52NS
3
Wavelength-ODB-PIN
N/A
TN54NS
3
Wavelength-ODB-PIN
40G Transponder
N/A
TN55NS
3
Wavelength-ePDM-BPSK-PIN
N/A

NOTE
point.
When using the NRZ module, the TN54NS3 board maps 32 ODU0, 16 ODU1, four ODU2, or one ODU3
signals into one OTU3 service.
When using ODB or DQPSK optical module, the TN54NS3 maps 32 ODU0, or 16 ODU1, four ODU2, or
one ODU3 signals into one OTU3 signals, and also maps four ODU2e into one OTU3e signals.
Optical Module
Type
500 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
ODB-PIN
500 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
DQPSK-PIN
Operating frequency
range
THz 192.10 to 196.05 192.10 to 196.05
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 0 0
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm -5 -5
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1139
Optical Module
Type
500 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
ODB-PIN
500 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
DQPSK-PIN
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB 8.2 N/A
Center frequency
deviation
GHz 2.5 2.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 0.6 N/A
Maximum -3 dB
spectral width
nm N/A 0.3
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35 35
Operating
wavelength range
nm 1529 to 1561 1529 to 1561
EOL (FEC on)
dBm -16 -16
Minimum receiver
overload (FEC on)
dBm 0 0
Maximum
reflectance
dB -27 -27

Optical Module
Type
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
ODB-PIN
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
DQPSK-PIN
Operating frequency
range
THz 192.10 to 196.05 192.10 to 196.05
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 0 0
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1140
Optical Module
Type
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
ODB-PIN
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
DQPSK-PIN
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm -5 -5
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB 8.2 N/A
Center frequency
deviation
GHz 2.5 2.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 0.6 N/A
Maximum -3 dB
spectral width
nm N/A 0.3
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35 35
Operating
wavelength range
nm 1529 to 1561 1529 to 1561
EOL (FEC on)
dBm -16 -16
Minimum receiver
overload (FEC on)
dBm 0 0
Maximum
reflectance
dB -27 -27

Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-BPSK-PIN
Line code format - ePDM-BPSK
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1141
Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-BPSK-PIN
power
dBm 0
power
dBm -5
width
nm 0.35
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35
to-back)
ps/nm 60000
Receiver type - PIN

Table 14-92 WDM-side fixed optical module specifications (gray light)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1142
Receiver type - PIN

TN11NS3:
(8.7 in.)
TN52NS3:
(8.7 in.)
TN54NS3:
(8.7 in.)
TN55NS3:
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Module
Typical Power
Consumption
at 25C (77F)
(W)
Maximum
Power
Consumption
at 55C (131F)
(W)
TN11NS3 500 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable
92 101.2
Wavelength-ODB-PIN
67 75
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1143
Module
Typical Power
Consumption
at 25C (77F)
(W)
Maximum
Power
Consumption
at 55C (131F)
(W)
118 130
Wavelength-ODB-PIN
110 118
118 130
73 80
Wavelength-ODB-PIN
60 65
40G Transponder 62 69
TN55NS3 60000ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-ePDM-
BPSK-PIN
135 150

14.7 NS4
The available functional versions of the NS4 board is TN54.
Huawei office.
Boar
d
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
TN54
NS4
Y Y Y N N N

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1144
NOTE
In the enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack, enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, and OptiX OSN 8800
T16 subrack, the NS4 board can work either in line mode or relay mode. When the NS4 board works in line
mode, the enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack must use the TNK2USXH+TNK2UXCT boards and the
enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack must use the TN52UXCH/TN52UXCM board and the OptiX OSN
8800 T16 subrack must use the TN16UXCM board.
In the general OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack and general OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, the NS4 board can
work only in relay mode.
Variants
Varia
nt
WDM-Side Fixed Optical Module FEC Encoding
HFEC
ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC, RZ)-PIN
SDFEC

14.7.2 Application
As a type of line board, the NS4 board converts 80 ODU0, 40 ODU1, ten ODU2, ten ODU2e,
two ODU3, one ODU4, or 80 ODUflex into one ITU-T G.694.1 OTU4 signal. The board
supports hybrid transmission of the ODU0 service, ODU1 service, ODU2/ODU2e service,
ODU3 service and the ODUflex service. The NS4 board uses coherent receive technology.
Therefore, the board is intended for coherent systems.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1145
Application scenario 1 of the NS4 board: conversion between 80 channels of ODU0
signals and one channel of OTU4 signals
1
8
1
8
TOA
1
8
1
8
TOA
1
8
1
8
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
1
8
1
8
1
8
1
8
1
8
1
8
TOA
TOA
80xODU0 80xODU0
1
O
T
U
4
1
O
D
U
4
10 10
8
0
x
O
D
U
0
NS4
1
O
T
U
4
1
O
D
U
4
NS4
8
0
x
O
D
U
0
OUT
IN OUT
IN

NOTE
This application scenario is supported only when the 54NS4 board is added on the NMS.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1146
Application scenario 2 of the NS4 board: conversion between 80 channels of
ODUflex signals and one channel of OTU4 signals
1
8
1
8
TEM28
1
8
1
8
TEM28
1
8
1
8
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
1
8
1
8
1
8
1
8
1
8
1
8
TEM28
TEM28
80xODUflex 80xODUflex
1
O
T
U
4
1
O
D
U
4
10 10
NS4
1
O
T
U
4
1
O
D
U
4
NS4
8
0
x
O
D
U
f
l
e
x
8
0
x
O
D
U
f
l
e
x
OUT
IN
IN
OUT

NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1147
Application scenario 3 of the NS4 board: conversion between 40 channels of ODU1
1
8
1
8
TOA
1
8
1
8
TOA
1
8
1
8
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
1
8
1
8
1
8
1
8
1
8
1
8
TOA
TOA
40xODU1 40xODU1
1
O
T
U
4
1
O
D
U
4
5 5
NS4
1
O
T
U
4
1
O
D
U
4
NS4
4
0
x
O
D
U
1
4
0
x
O
D
U
1
OUT
IN
OUT
IN

NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1148
Application scenario 4 of the NS4 board: conversion between ten channels of
ODU2/ODU2e signals and one channel of OTU4 signals
TQX
1
4
1
4
TQX
1
4
1
4
TDX
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
1
O
T
U
4
1
O
D
U
4
NS4
1
O
T
U
4
1
O
D
U
4
NS4
1
0
x
O
D
U
2
/
O
D
U
2
e
1
4
1
4
1
4
1
4
1
4
1
4
TQX
1
4
TQX
1
4
TDX
1
0
x
O
D
U
2
/
O
D
U
2
e
OUT
IN OUT
IN

NOTE
Application scenario 5 of the NS4 board: conversion between two channels of
ODU3 signals and one channel of OTU4 signals
TSXL
TSXL
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
2xODU3 2xODU3
1
O
T
U
4
1
O
D
U
4
NS4
1
O
T
U
4
1
O
D
U
4
NS4
TSXL
TSXL
2
x
O
D
U
3
2
x
O
D
U
3
OUT
IN
OUT
IN

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1149
NOTE
Application scenario 6 of the NS4 board: conversion between one channel of ODU4
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
1xODU4 1xODU4
1
O
T
U
4
1
O
D
U
4
NS4 NS4
1
O
T
U
4
1
O
D
U
4
TSC TSC
OUT
IN
IN
OUT

NOTE
Application scenario 7 of the NS4 board: implement the electrical regeneration of
one channel of OTU4 signal
1
O
T
U
4
NS4
MUX DMUX
MUX DMUX
1
O
T
U
4
IN OUT
IN OUT
1
O
T
U
4
NS4
1
O
T
U
4

NOTE
This application scenario is supported only when the 54NS4(REG) board is added on the NMS.
In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter must be set to Electrical Relay Mode or Optical
Relay Mode. When optical-layer and electrical-layer ASON are enabled, it does not matter whether the
Board Mode parameter is set to Optical Relay Mode or Electrical Relay mode. The parameter must be
set to Optical Relay Mode for the line board in a non-ASON system; otherwise, end-to-end management
of ASON services is not available.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1150
NS4
TOM
ODU0
ODU1
TEM
28
ODUflex
ND2
TDX
TSXL
ODU3
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
1xOTU4
NS4
TOM
ODU0
ODU1
TEM
28
ODUflex
ND2
TDX
ODU2/
TSXL
ODU3
ODU2e
ODU2/
ODU2e
ODU2/
ODU2e
ODU2/
ODU2e
ODU2/
ODU2e
ODU2/
ODU2e

NOTE
The IN/OUT port can transmit a mixture of ODU0, ODU1, ODU2/ODU2e, ODUflex, and ODU3 signals, the
total bandwidth cannot exceed 100 Gbit/s.
The NS4 board achieves cross-connection at the electrical layer, and to provide OTN interfaces
and ESC.
Table 14-94 Functions and features of the NS4 board (Line Mode)
Function and
feature
Description
Basic function NS4 converts signals as follows:
80xODU0/80xODUflex/40xODU1/10xODU2/10xODU2e/
Supports mixed transmission of ODU0, ODU1, ODUflex, ODU2, ODU2e,
and ODU3 signals.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1151
Function and
feature
Description
Cross-connect
capabilities
Supports the cross-connection of 80 channels of ODU0/ODUflex signals
or 40 channels of ODU1 signals or ten channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals
or two channels of ODU3 signals or one channel of ODU4 signals between
the NS4 and the cross-connect board.
OTN function l Supports the OTU4 interface on the WDM side.
to the ITU-T G.709.
l ODUflex layer: supports the PM function, and PM non-intrusive
monitoring function.
WDM
specification
Tunable
wavelength
function
ESC function Supports the ESC function, which enables the transmission of a supervisory
PRBS function Supports the PRBS function on the WDM side.
NOTE
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
power of the laser.
Regeneration
board
TN54NS4, TN11LTX
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1152
Function and
feature
Description
Optical-layer
ASON
Supported
Electrical-layer
ASON
Supported
Protection
scheme
NOTE
When the cross-connect granularity is ODUflex, the board does not support tributary
SNCP protection.
Loopback WDM side
Loopback
ODU0
Channel
Loopbac
k
ODU1
Channel
Loopbac
k
ODU2
Channel
Loopba
ck
ODU3
Channel
Loopbac
k
ODUfle
x
Channel
Loopba
ck
Supported Supporte
d
Support
ed
Support
ed
Support
ed
Support
ed
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1153
Function and
feature
Description
Protocols or
standards
compliance
Protocols or
standards for
transparent
transmission
(non-
performance
monitoring)
IEEE 802.3u
IEEE 802.3z
IEEE 802.3ae
IEEE 802.3ba
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
INTERFACES (FC-PI)
LS)
BB-3)
SW-3)
(FC-SB-2)
ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines
for the implementation and usage of the DVB
SMPTE 297-2006 Serial Digital Fiber Transmission
System for SMPTE 259M, SMPTE 344M, SMPTE 292
and SMPTE 424M Signals
Control (MAC)
Protocol (PHY)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1154
Function and
feature
Description
Dependent (PDM)
Protocols or
standards for
service
processing
(performance
monitoring)
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.873.1
ITU-T G.694.1

Table 14-95 Functions and features of the NS4 board (Relay Mode)
Function
and feature
Description
Basic
function
Regeneratin
g rate
OTN
function
the ITU-T G.709.
WDM
specification
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1155
Function
and feature
Description
Tunable
wavelength
function
ESC
function
PRBS
function
Not supported
FEC
encoding
Supports HFEC and SDFEC.
NOTE
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
power of the laser.
ALS
function
Not supported
Optical-layer
ASON
Supported
Electrical-
layer ASON
Not supported
Protection
scheme
Not supported
Protocols or
standards
compliance
-
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1156
Function
and feature
Description
monitoring)
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1

The NS4 board consists of the WDM-side optical module, OTN processing module, control and
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1157
Figure 14-106 Functional modules and signal flow of the NS4 board (Line Mode)
80xODU0/80xODUflex/40xODU1/
10xODU2/10xODU2e/2xODU3/1xODU4
WDM side
E/O
O/E
WDM-side
Optical
module
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
OUT
IN
Signal processing
module
OTN
processing
module
Cross-connect
module
Signal processing
module
OTN
processing
module
Cross-connect
module

transmit direction is defined as the direction from the backplane of the NS4 to the WDM side
of the NS4, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
The OTN processing module receives 80 channels of ODU0/ODUflex or 40 channels of
ODU1 or ten channels of ODU2/ODU2e or two channels of ODU3 or one channel of ODU4
electrical signals sent from the cross-connection board through the backplane. The module
performs operations such as OTN framing and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs
conversion, the module sends out the OTU4 optical signals at DWDM standard
l Receive direction
standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN optical interface.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1158
module performs operations such as OTU4 framing and decoding of FEC. Then, the module
sends out 80 channels of ODU0/ODUflex or 40 channels of ODU1 or ten channels of
ODU2/ODU2e or two channels of ODU3 or one channel of ODU4 electrical signals to the
backplane for service cross-connection.
Figure 14-107 Functional modules and signal flow of the NS4 board (Relay Mode)
WDM side
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)

WDM-side
Optical
module
O/E IN OUT E/O
WDM-side
Optical
module
WDM side

The NS4 board implements the regeneration of one channel of optical signals. The wavelengths
at the receive and transmit ends of the board are the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant DWDM
wavelengths that carry OTU4 optical signals.
The optical receiving module receives the optical signals to be regenerated through the IN optical
conversion, the module sends out the OTU4 signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply
with ITU-T G.694.1.
The optical signals are output through the OUT optical interface.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1159
Module Function
Grooms electrical signals between the NS4 and the cross-connect board through the
backplane.
14.7.5 Front Panel
Figure 14-108 shows the front panel of the NS4 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1160
Figure 14-108 Front panel of the NS4 board

NOTE
Indicators
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1161
Interfaces
multiplexer board.
multiplexer board.

Laser Hazard Level
14.7.6 Valid Slots
Two slots house one NS4 board.
Table 14-97 shows the valid slots for the NS4 board.
Table 14-97 Valid slots for the NS4 board
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
subrack
IU46-IU52, IU54-IU60, IU62-IU68
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
subrack
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
subrack
IU2-IU8, IU12-IU18

NOTE
The online signal bus on the NS4 board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack. Therefore,
the slot number of the NS4 board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two slots. For
example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the NS4 board, the slot number of the NS4 board displayed on the NM is
IU2.
When the NS4 boards serve as regeneration boards, follow the principles below to install them
l OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack: The NS4 boards for transmitting and receiving the same
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1162
IU64, or IU66 and IU68.
wavelength must be installed in IU2 and IU4, IU6 and IU8, IU12 and IU14, or IU16 and
IU18.
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NMS
IN/OUT 1

NOTE
Logical Ports
board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, IN1/OUT1-
OCh:1-ODU4:1 is a logical port of the board.
Figure 14-109 shows the logical Ports of the NS4 board. Table 14-99 describes the meaning of
each port.
NOTE
ODUk cross-connections through the backplane are supported only when the 54NS4 board is selected on the
NMS.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1163
Figure 14-109 Port diagram of the NS4 board

40xODU1
10xODU2/
10xODU2e
2xODU3
1(IN/OUT)
IN/OUT-OCh:1
80xODU0
80xODUflex
ODUflex:80
ODUflex:1

1xODU4 ODU4
IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU4:1-ODU3:(1-2)
IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU4:1-ODUflex:(1-80)
OCh:1
OCh:1
ODU4:1
OCh:1 ODU4:1
ODU0:80
ODU0:1
OCh:1 ODU4:1
ODU1:40
ODU1:1
OCh:1 ODU4:1
ODU2:10
ODU2:1
OCh:1 ODU4:1
ODU3:2
ODU3:1
O
t
h
e
r

t
r
i
b
u
t
a
r
y
/
l
i
n
e
/
P
I
D

b
o
a
r
d
Backplane
ODU4 mapping path ODUflex mapping path
ODU2 mapping path

Table 14-99 Descriptions of the ports on the NS4 board
IN1/OUT1 WDM-side optical ports
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1164
IN1/OUT1-OCh:1 Mapping path for ODU4 signals
IN1/OUT1-OCh:1-ODU4:1-ODUflex:(1 to 80) Mapping path for ODUflex signals

side.
NOTE
compatible mode on the WDM side. For information about the standard and compatible modes, see 12.2.3
mode, and "IN1/OUT1-OCH:1-ODU4:1-ODU0:(1-80)" is the signal mapping path of the board in standard
mode.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1165
Figure 14-110 Cross-connection diagram of the NS4 board (ODU0 level)
The client side of other boards are cross-connected
to the WDM side of the NS4
2
The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected
Line board d
(standard mode)
NS4
WDM side
WDM side
Line board e
(standard mode)
Line board f
(compatible mode)
Line board c
(standard mode)
Client side
1
Tributary
board a
(compatible
mode)
Tributary
board b
(compatible
mode) 6(RX4/TX4)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1166
Line board f TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN53NS2 /
TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 / TN54NPO2 / TN55NPO2 / TN54ENQ2

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1167
NS4
2
WDM side
WDM side
Line board d
(standard
mode)
Line board c
(standard
mode)
Line board e
(compatible
mode)
Client side
1
Tributary
board a
(compatible
mode)
Tributary
board b
(compatible
mode)
6(RX4/TX4)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
Line board e TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN53NS2 /

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1168
NS4
2
WDM side
WDM side
Line board e
(compatible mode)
Line board c
(standard mode)
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1
2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1
3(IN4/OUT4)-OCH:1
4(IN4/OUT4)-OCH:1
Line board d
(standard mode)
Client side
1
Tributary
board a
(compatible
mode)
Tributary
board b
(compatible
mode)
6(RX4/TX4)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
Tributary board a TN52TDX / TN54TEM28 / TN53TDX / TN55TQX / TN52TQX / TN53TQX / TN54TTX
Line board e TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN52NS2 /

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1169
Client side
NS4
2
WDM side
1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
Tributary board a
(compatible mode)
Line board c
(standard mode)
Line board d
(compatible mode)
Tributary board b
(standard mode)
WDM side
Line board d TN54NS3

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1170
NS4
2
WDM side
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
1
Client side
Line board
Tributary board
WDM side
Tributary board TN54TSC
Line board TN54NS4

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1171
Figure 14-115 Cross-connection diagram of the NS4 board (ODUflex level)
NS4
2
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU4:1-ODUflex:1
1
Client side
Line board a
Tributary board a
Tributary board b
(compatible mode)
(standard mode)
WDM side
Line board a TN52ND2T04 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN52NS2T04 / TN52NS2T05 / TN52NS2T06 /

For parameters of the NS4, refer to Table 14-100.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1172
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
Default: Used
channel of a board.
Optical Interface
Loopback
Outloop
Default: Non-
Loopback
Outloop
Default: Non-
Loopback
Default: On
Default: Enabled
FEC Mode HFEC, SDFEC Queries the FEC mode of the current
optical interface.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1173
Receive Wavelength 1/1529.16/196.050 to
80/1560.61/192.100
Default: /
follows:
default value, which indicates
keeping the receive wavelength the
the local board automatically.
the peer board; otherwise, services
are affected.
NOTE
set to the default value.
Receive Band Type C
Default: C
Sets Receive Band Type of a board.
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
Tunable Wavelength
Range
Planned Wavelength
No./Wavelength
(nm)/Frequency
(THz)
1/1529.16/196.050 to
80/1560.61/192.100
Default: /
board.
information.
Planned Band Type C
Default: C
wavelength.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1174
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
l Disabled, GCC1
+GCC2 Enabled,
Only GCC1
Enabled, Only
GCC2 Enabled
l Default: Disabled
and GCC2 in OTN overheads.
When the parameter is set to Enabled for
a byte, the system will not process the
byte in OTN overheads. For example,
when the parameter is set to Only GCC1
Enabled, the system will not process the
GCC1 byte in OTN overheads.
If the processing is required, set this
parameter to Disabled.
Speedup Mode
Default: Standard
Mode
l This parameter needs to be set to
Standard Mode when ODU2
l This parameter needs to be set to
ODUflex Tolerance
(ppm)
0 to 100
Default: 100
NOTE
NS4 board receives 3GSDI services from
set it to 100.
Default: Disabled
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
Optical Relay Mode
Default: Electrical
Relay Mode

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1175
Module
TN54NS
4
Wavelength-ePDM-QPSK(HFEC, RZ)-
PIN
Wavelength-ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC,
RZ)-PIN
N/A

NOTE
point.
Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK(HFEC,
RZ)-PIN
power
dBm 0
power
dBm -5
width
nm 0.35
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1176
Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK(HFEC,
RZ)-PIN
to-back)
ps/nm 40000
Receiver type - PIN

RZ)
Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC,
RZ)-PIN
power
dBm 0
power
dBm -5
width
nm 0.4
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35
to-back)
ps/nm 55000
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1177
Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC,
RZ)-PIN
Receiver type - PIN

(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Board WDM-Side Module Typical Power
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at
55C (131F) (W)
TN54NS4 (line
application)
40000 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK(HFEC,
RZ)-PIN
168 182
55000 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC,
RZ)-PIN
180 200
TN54NS4
(regeneration
application)
40000 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK(HFEC,
RZ)-PIN
155 167
55000 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC,
RZ)-PIN
167 185

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1178
14.8 TBE
TBE: 10 Gigabit Ethernet tributary board
The available functional version of the TBE board is TN11.
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
1TB
E
N N N N Y Y

Variants
The TN11TBE board has only one variant: TN11TBE01.
14.8.2 Application
As a type of tributary board, the TBE board converges eight channels of GE services and a
maximum of 16 channels of cross-connect GE services into one channel of 10GE services and
deconverges one channel of 10GE services into multiple GE services, converges multiple flat-
rate GE services into one full-rate GE service, and implements transparent transmission of GE-
GE services.
Application Scenario 1: Converging/Deconverging 8xGE Services and a Maximum
of 16 Cross-Connect GE Services to/from One 10GE Service
For the position of the TBE board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-116.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1179
Figure 14-116 Position of the TBE board in the WDM system
L4G
L4G
4
4
4
1
8
Local
Client
Side: GE
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
L2
GE
L4G
L4G
4
4
4
L2
GE
1
8
TBE TBE
10GE 10GE
Local
Client
Side: GE

Application Scenario 2: Transparent Transmission of GE-GE Services
For the position of the TBE board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-117.
Figure 14-117 Position of the TBE board in the WDM system
L4G
L4G
4
4
4
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
L2
GE
L4G
L4G
4
4
4
L2
GE
TBE
TBE
1
8
1
8
The TBE board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer and ALS.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1180
Table 14-103 Functions and features of the TBE board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function l Converges eight channels of GE services and a maximum of 16
channels of cross-connect GE services into one channel of 10GE
services and deconverges one channel of 10GE services into multiple
GE services.
l Converges multiple flat-rate GE services into one full-rate GE
service.
l Implements transparent transmission of GE-GE services.
The reverse process is similar.
Client-side
service type
NOTE
The TBE board supports both FE/GE electrical signal and FE/GE optical signal.
Cross-connect
capabilities
OptiX OSN 6800:
l Supports backplane cross-connections of 16 GE services from/to the
active/standby cross-connect board when the TBE board is installed
in slot IU1/IU4/IU11/IU14.
l Supports backplane cross-connections of 8 GE services from/to the
active/standby cross-connect board when the TBE board is installed
in any of slots IU2/IU3, IU5-IU8, IU12/IU13, and IU15/IU16. Each
of the VCTRUNK1-VCTRUNK8 and VCTRUNK9-VCTRUNK16
ports on the board supports a maximum of 4 GE services.
OptiX OSN 3800:
l Supports backplane cross-connections of 16 GE services from/to
another service board when the TBE board and the other service board
are installed in non-paired slots.
l Supports backplane cross-connections of 8 GE services from/to
another service board when the TBE board and the other service board
are installed in paired slots. Each of the VCTRUNK1-VCTRUNK8
and VCTRUNK9-VCTRUNK16 ports on the board supports a
maximum of 4 GE services.
Alarms and
performance
events monitoring
l Supports the monitoring of the alarms and performance events of the
FE, GE, 10GE WAN and 10GE LAN.
QinQ supported
QoS (Quality of
Service)
Supports CAR (Committed Access Rate) and CoS (Class of Service).
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1181
Function and
Feature
Description
ETH OAM Supports IEEE802.1ag and IEEE802.3ah-compliant ETH OAM
protocol.
LAG (Link
Aggregation
Group)
l Supports the aggregation group protocol to aggregate services from
IP port to Trunk port.
l Supports manual and static link aggregation.
l Supports payload equalization and non-payload equalization
VLAN broadcast Supports VLAN-based service group broadcast.
CVLAN group
port
Supports a group of CVLAN to be used as one VLAN.
Layer 2 switching Supports the MAC address learning and aging.
Supports one VB.
Flow control Supports IEEE802.3X-compliant Ethernet flow control protocol and
flow control termination.
EPL (Ethernet
Private Line)
Provides point-to-point EPL dedicated line.
EVPL (Ethernet
Virtual Private
Line)
Provides point-to-multipoint EVPL dedicated line and supports VLAN-
based switching.
Port working
mode
10GE optical interface: 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN
GE optical interface: 1000MFULL, auto-negotiation
GE electric interface: auto-negotiation
FE optical interface: 100MFULL
FE electric interface: 10MHALF, 10MFULL, 100MHALF, 100MFULL,
auto-negotiation
Protection
schemes
Supports VLAN SNCP.
Supports DBPS protection.
Supports LAG protection.
Supports DLAG protection.
Supports ERPS protection.
PRBS test
function
Not supported
NOTE
The LPT function cannot be configured for EVPL services but only for
bidirectional EPL services. When the LPT function is enabled, Source C-
VLAN and Sink C-VLAN of an EPL service must be left empty.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1182
Function and
Feature
Description
Electrical-layer
ASON
Not supported
interface
Outloop Supported
Outloop Supported
GE optical
interface
Outloop Not
supported
Outloop Not
supported
GE electric
interface
Outloop Not
supported
Outloop Supported
FE optical
interface
Outloop Not
supported
Outloop Not
supported
FE electric
interface
Outloop Not
supported
Outloop Supported
Protocols or
standards
compliance
IEEE 802.1q VLAN
All L2 protocols including xSTP,
LACP, EthOAM, DHCP, PPP, etc.
MPLS protocols
All L3 protocols including ARP,
IGMP, OSPF, IGRP etc.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1183
Function and
Feature
Description
monitoring)
IEEE 802.3ad LACP
IEEE 802.1q VLAN
IEEE 802.1ag OAM
IEEE 802.3ah OAM
IEEE IGMP
STP, RSTP, MSTP
R-APS

The TBE board consists of the client-side GE optical module, client-side 10GE optical module,
L2 switching module, cross-connect module, control and communication module, and power
supply module.
Figure 14-118 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TBE board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1184
Figure 14-118 Functional modules and signal flow of the TBE board
Client side
L2
switching
module
Cross-connect
module
RX1
RX2
RX8
TX8
TX1
TX2
GE
Client-side
GE optical
module
Client-side
10GE optical
module
RX
TX
8
8
16
16
O/E
E/O
O/E
E/O
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
16

NOTE
electrical signals.
Suggest change RX1/TX1, RX2/TX2 optical interfaces to electrical interfaces only.
Convergence of Multiple GE Services into 10GE Services
l Positive process:
The client-side GE optical module receives eight channels of GE optical signals from
client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion.
After O/E conversion, the eight channels of GE electrical signals are sent to the L2
switching module. The eight channels of GE electrical signals are converged with a
maximum of sixteen channels of GE electrical signals groomed from the cross-connect
module into one channel of 10GE electrical signals.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1185
The 10GE electrical signals are sent to the client-side 10GE optical module. After
performing the E/O conversion, the module sends out 10GE optical signals through the
TX optical interface.
l Negative process:
The client-side 10GE optical module receives 10GE optical signals from client
After O/E conversion, 10GE electrical signals are sent to the L2 switching module. This
module deconverges the one channel of 10GE electrical signals into multiple channels
of GE electrical signals.
A maximum of eight channels of GE electrical signals are sent to the client-side GE
optical module. After performing the E/O conversion, the module sends out GE optical
signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.
A maximum of 16 channels of GE electrical signals are sent to other boards by the cross-
connect module through the backplane.
Convergence or Transparent Transmission of GE-to-GE Services
l Positive process:
The client-side GE optical module receives eight channels of GE optical signals from
client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion.
After O/E conversion, the eight channels of GE electrical signals are sent to the L2
switching module. Based on the service requirement, the L2 switching module either
transparently transmits the received GE signals or converges the received multiple
channels of flat-rate GE signals into one channel of GE signals.
The GE signals are sent to other boards by the cross-connect module through the
backplane.
l Negative process:
The cross-connect module receives the GE electrical signals groomed from other boards
GE electrical signals are sent to the L2 switching module. The L2 switching module
either transparently transmits the received GE signals or deconverges the received GE
signals into multiple channels of flat-rate GE signals.
The client-side GE optical module performs the E/O conversion of GE electrical signals,
and then outputs the optical signals through the TX optical interface.
Module Function
Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of GE/10GE optical signals.
Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals
to GE/10GE optical signals.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1186
Implements cross-connecting 16 GE signals to the other boards through the backplane.
The grooming service signals are GE signals.
OptiX OSN 6800: Supports cross-connecting 16 channels of GE signals to the central
working/protection cross-connect board.
OptiX OSN 3800: Supports the grooming of 16 channels of GE signals from one board
of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the
mesh group.
14.8.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TBE board.
Figure 14-119 shows the front panel of the TBE board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1187
Figure 14-119 Front panel of the TBE board
TBE
TBE
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
R
X
2
T
X
3
R
X
3
T
X
4
R
X
4
T
X
1
R
X
1
T
X
2
R
X
6
T
X
7
R
X
7
T
X
8
R
X
8
T
X
5
R
X
5
T
X
6
T
X
R
X

Indicators
Interfaces
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1188
Table 14-104 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TBE board
TX1-TX8 LC Transmits the optical service signal to the client-side
TX LC Transmits the 10 GE service signal to the client-side
equipment.
RX1-RX8 LC Receives the optical service signal from the client-side
RX LC Receives the 10 GE service signal from the client-side
equipment.

NOTE
It is recommended to change RX1/TX1 and RX2/TX2 optical interfaces to electrical interfaces only.
Laser Hazard Level
14.8.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one TBE board.
Table 14-105 shows the valid slots for the TBE board.
Table 14-105 Valid slots for the TBE board
Product Valid Slots

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1189
Table 14-106 Mapping between the physical ports on the TBE board and the port numbers
TX/RX 3
TX1/RX1 4
TX2/RX2 5
TX3/RX3 6
TX4/RX4 7
TX5/RX5 8
TX6/RX6 9
TX7/RX7 10
TX8/RX8 11

NOTE
Logical Ports
Figure 14-120 describes the application model of the TBE board. Table 14-107 describes the
Figure 14-120 Port diagram of the TBE board
Backplane
Client side
VCTRUNK1
101(AP1/AP1)-1
VCTRUNK9
PORT4
116(AP16/AP16)-1
PORT3
PORT11
8 x GE
108(AP8/AP8)-1
VCTRUNK8
VCTRUNK16
109(AP9/AP9)-1
8 x GE
Cross-connect
model
L2 switching
model
Cross-connection that must be configured on the NMS to receive ODUk signals from other
boards

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1190
NOTE
l When the TBE board is installed in any of slots IU2/IU3, IU5-IU8, IU12/IU13, and IU15/IU16 in an OptiX
OSN 6800 subrack, it supports backplane cross-connections of up to 8 GE services from/to the active/standby
cross-connect board. Each of the VCTRUNK1-VCTRUNK8 and VCTRUNK9-VCTRUNK16 ports on the
board supports a maximum of 4 GE services.
l When the TBE and another service board are installed in paired slots in an OptiX OSN 3800 subrack, it
supports backplane cross-connections of 8 GE services from/to the other three boards. Each of the
VCTRUNK1-VCTRUNK8 and VCTRUNK9-VCTRUNK16 ports on the board supports a maximum of 4
GE services.
Table 14-107 Description of NM port of the TBE board
PORT3 The port corresponds to the client side optical interface RX/
TX.
PORT4-PORT11 These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces
RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8.
VCTRUNK1-
VCTRUNK16
Internal virtual ports.

If the TBE board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the
U2000:
the PORT and VCTRUNK ports. The deconvergence of the 10GE services that are accessed
from the client-side PORT3 port is implemented through the L2 switching module.
one port connections, which do not need to be set on the U2000.
connection between the AP port of the TBE board and the AP port of other boards, as shown
by in Figure 14-121. (The GE services accessed from the client side of the TBE board
are cross-connected to the client side of other boards for protection and the inter-board
service deconvergence.)
connection between the AP port of the TBE board and the LP port of other boards, as shown
by in Figure 14-121. (The GE services accessed from the client side of the TBE board
are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and inter-board service
convergence.)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1191
Figure 14-121 Cross-connection diagram of the TBE board
Client side
101(AP1/AP1)-1
Other board
TBE
201(LP/LP)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
201(LP/LP)-3
201(LP/LP)-4 104(AP4/AP4)-1
101(AP1/AP1)-1
102(AP2/AP2)-1
103(AP3/AP3)-1
1
2
102(AP2/AP2)-1
103(AP3/AP3)-1
116(AP16/AP16)-1
The client side of the TBE board are cross-connected to the
WDM side of other boards
The client side of the TBE board are cross-connected to the
client side of other boards
1
2
TN11TQM / TN12TQM

For parameters of the TBE, refer to Table 14-108.
Table 14-108 TBE parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
Optical Interface
Name
- Set and query the optical interface name.
are supported.
Default: Off
status of a board.
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1192
Default: Disabled

14.8.10 TBE Specifications
Board Client-Side Fixed Optical
Module
Client-Side Pluggable Optical
Module
TN11TB
E
N/A 100 BASE-FX-10 km
100 BASE-FX-80 km
2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km
1000 BASE-LX-10 km
1000 BASE-LX-40 km
1000 BASE-ZX-80 km
1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40
km
km
10 Gbit/s Single Rate-0.3 km

NOTE
point.
Table 14-109 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (FE services)
Optical Module
Type
100 BASE-FX-10 km 100 BASE-FX-80 km
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1193
Optical Module
Type
100 BASE-FX-10 km 100 BASE-FX-80 km
Target transmission
distance
- 10 km (6.2 mi.) 80 km (49.7 mi.)
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm -3 5
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm -11.5 -2
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB 9 9
Center frequency nm 1310 1550
Eye pattern mask - IEEE802.3z-
compliant
IEEE802.3z-
compliant
Receiver sensitivity
(EOL)
dBm -19 -22
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm -3 -3

Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.
5 km
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Target
transmission
distance
- 0.5 km (0.3
mi.)
10 km (6.2
mi.)
40 km (24.9
mi.)
80 km (49.7
mi.)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1194
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.
5 km
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -2.5 -3 0 5
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -9.5 -9 -5 -2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 9 9 9 9
Eye pattern
mask
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN PIN PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -17 -20 -20 -23
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm 0 -3 -3 -3

NOTE
Std 802.3.
wavelengths)
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km
(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1195
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km
(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Target transmission
distance
- 40 km (24.9 mi.) 80 km (49.7 mi.)
range
nm 1471 to 1611 1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 5 5
power
dBm 0 0
Central wavelength
deviation
nm 6.5 6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 1.0 1.0
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30 30
G.959.1-compliant
range
nm 1270 to 1620 1270 to 1620
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm -3 -9

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1196
Optical
Module
Type
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80
km
10 Gbit/s
Single-
Rate-0.3 km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Optical
source type
- SLM SLM SLM MLM
Target
transmissio
n distance
- 10 km (6.2 mi.) 40 km (24.9
mi.)
80 km (49.7
mi.)
0.3 km (0.2
mi.)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565 840 to 860
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -1 2 4 -1.3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -6 -4.7 0 -7.3
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 6 8.2 9 3
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm N/A N/A N/A N/A
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB 30 30 30 30
Eye pattern
mask
- G.691-compliant
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN APD PIN
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1197
Optical
Module
Type
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80
km
10 Gbit/s
Single-
Rate-0.3 km
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1260 to 1565 1260 to 1605 1270 to 1600 840 to 860
Receiver
sensitivity
(multirate)
dBm -11 -14 -24 -7.5
Receiver
sensitivity
(10GE
LAN)
dBm -14.4 -15.8 -24 -7.5
Minimum
receiver
overload
(10GE
LAN)
dBm 0.5 -1 -7 -1
Minimum
receiver
overload
(STM-64)
dBm -1 -1 -7 -1
Maximum
reflectance
dB -27 -27 -27 -12

(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11TBE 40.7 44.8

14.9 TDG
TDG: 2 x GE tributary service processing board
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1198
Only one functional version of the TDG board is available, that is, TN11.
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
1TD
G
N N N N Y Y

Variants
The TN11TDG board has only one variant: TN11TDG01.
14.9.2 Application
As a type of tributary board, the TDG board implements conversion between two channels of
GE optical signals and two channels of GE electrical signals or one channel of ODU1 electrical
signals through cross-connection.
For the position of the TDG board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-122.
Figure 14-122 Position of the TDG board in the WDM system
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
TDG
GE
N
S
2
N
S
2
TDG
GE
1xODU1
1xODU1
1
x
O
D
U
1
1
x
O
D
U
1
GE/ODU1
GE/ODU1
OptiX OSN 3800: From/To slot of the mesh group
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1199
The TDG board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer.
Table 14-113 Functions and features of the TDG board
Function
and Feature
Description
Basic
function
Converts between two channels of GE optical signals and two channels of GE
electrical signals or one channel of ODU1 electrical signals through the cross-
connect board or with the board in the paired slot.
Client-side
service type
Cross-
connect
capabilities
l OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the cross-connection of an ODU1 signal and
two GE signals between the TDG and the cross-connect board or the board
in the paired slot through the backplane.
l OptiX OSN 3800: Supports the grooming of one ODU1 signal and two
GE signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards)
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
power of the laser.
ALS
function
PRBS test
function
Not supported
Electrical-
layer ASON
Not supported
Protection
scheme
l Supports SW SNCP.
Loopback WDM side -
Outloop Supported
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1200
Function
and Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards
compliance
Protocols or
standards for
transparent
transmission
(non-
performance
monitoring)
IEEE 802.3z
Protocols or
standards for
service
processing
(performance
monitoring)
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.873.1
ITU-T G.694.1

The TDG board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control
and communication module, and power supply module.
Figure 14-123 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TDG board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1201
Figure 14-123 Functional modules and signal flow of the TDG board
Client side
RX1
RX2
TX1
TX2
O/E
E/O
Client-side
optical
module
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
GE
Encapsulation
and mapping
module
OTN
processing
module
Cross-
connect
module
2 X GE/ 1 X ODU1

The client side of the TDG board accesses GE optical signals.
In the signal flow of the TDG board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TDG to the backplane,
and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out two channels of
GE signals or one channel of ODU1 signals to the backplane.
l Receive direction
The signal processing module receives the electrical signals sent from the backplane. Then,
If the signals are GE signals, they are sent to the client-side optical module.
If the signals are ODU1 signals, the module performs operations such as ODU1 framing,
demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out two channels of
GE signals to the client-side optical module.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1202
The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of GE electrical signals, and
then outputs two channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX2 optical
interfaces.
Module Function
Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from two channels of the internal
Implements the grooming of electrical signals between the TDG and the board in
the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming
service signals are GE and ODU1 signals.
Grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four
boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group through the backplane.
The grooming service signals are GE and ODU1 signals.
Encapsulates multiple channels of GE signals and maps the signals into the ODU1
performance.
Frames ODU1 signals and processes overheads in ODU1 signals.
14.9.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TDG board.
Figure 14-124 shows the front panel of the TDG board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1203
Figure 14-124 Front panel of the TDG board
TDG
TDG
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
T
X
1
R
X
1
T
X
2
R
X
2

Indicators
Interfaces
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1204
Table 14-114 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TDG board

Laser Hazard Level
14.9.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one TDG board.
Table 14-115 shows the valid slots for the TDG board.
Table 14-115 Valid slots for the TDG board
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800 subrack IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16.

Table 14-116 Mapping between the physical ports on the TDG board and the port numbers
TX1/RX1 3
TX2/RX2 4

NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1205
Logical Ports
Figure 14-125 describes the application model of the TDG board. Table 14-117 describes the
Figure 14-125 Port diagram of the TDG board
3
(RX1/TX1)-1
4
(RX2/TX2)-1
Client Side
201
(LP/LP)-1
201
(LP/LP)-2
201
(LP/LP)-1
2 x GE
Backplane
ODU1
Other line/
OTU board
Other line/
PID board
Cross-
connect
module
Multiplexin
g module

Table 14-117 Description of NM port of the TDG board
LP Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1and
2.

If the TDG board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the
U2000:
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1206
connection between the RX/TX and LP ports to implement the cross-connect grooming of
GE services. The following three cross-connections can be created.
Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and LP ports of the TDG board
(Create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown
Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the TDG board and the LP port
of other boards (The GE services accessed from the client side of the TDG board are
cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and the inter-board
3
in Figure 14-126.
of the TDG board (The GE services accessed from the client side of other boards are
cross-connected to the client side of the TDG board for protection and the inter-board
4
in Figure 14-126.
NOTE
Figure 14-126 Cross-connection diagram of the TDG board
Client side
WDM side
Client side
Other board
TDG
1
2 3
4
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
201(LP/LP)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
201(LP/LP)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
3
4
1
2
TDG board
The straight-through of the TDGboard
The internal cross-connection of the TDG board
The client side of the TDG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards

l During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the ODU1
cross-connection between the LP port and ODU1LP port of other boards (or IN/OUT port
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1207
of the TN11NS2 board) to implement the cross-connect grooming of ODU1 services, as
shown in Figure 14-127.
Figure 14-127 Cross-connection diagram of the TDG board
WDM side
TDG
201(LP/LP)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
The client side of the TDG board are cross-connected to the WDM
side of other boards
Other board b
(standard
mode)
Other board a
(compatible
mode)
Client side
Other board a TN11ND2 / TN12ND2 / TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN51NQ2 / TN52NQ2 /
TN12ELQX / TN12PTQX
Other board b TN52ND2T04 / TN53ND2 / TN55NO2 / TN52NS2T04 / TN52NS2T05 / TN52NS2T06 /

For parameters of TDG, refer to Table 14-118.
Table 14-118 TDG parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
Optical Interface
Name
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1208
Default: Used
channel of a board.
Optical Interface
Loopback
Outloop
Default: Non-
Loopback
Default: Off
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
Default: Disabled
Default: 9600
Ethernet services.
Ethernet Working
Mode
Auto-Negotiation,
1000M Full-Duplex
Default: Auto-
Negotiation
information.
OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None
board resides.
information.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1209
14.9.10 TDG Specifications
Module
Module
TN11TD
G
N/A 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km
1000 BASE-LX-10 km
1000 BASE-LX-40 km
1000 BASE-ZX-80 km
km
km

NOTE
point.
Specifications of Optical Module at the Client Side
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.
5 km
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Target
transmission
distance
- 0.5 km (0.3
mi.)
10 km (6.2
mi.)
40 km (24.9
mi.)
80 km (49.7
mi.)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -2.5 -3 0 5
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1210
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.
5 km
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -9.5 -9 -5 -2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 9 9 9 9
Eye pattern
mask
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN PIN PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -17 -20 -20 -23
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm 0 -3 -3 -3

wavelengths)
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km
(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Target transmission
distance
- 40 km (24.9 mi.) 80 km (49.7 mi.)
range
nm 1471 to 1611 1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 5 5
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1211
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km
(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
power
dBm 0 0
Central wavelength
deviation
nm 6.5 6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 1.0 1.0
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30 30
G.959.1-compliant
range
nm 1270 to 1620 1270 to 1620
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm -3 -9

(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11TDG 30 33

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1212
14.10 TDX
TDX: 2 x 10G tributary service processing board
The available functional versions of the TDX board are TN11, TN12, TN52, and TN53.
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
1TD
X
N N N N Y Y
TN1
2TD
X
N N N N Y N
TN5
2TD
X
Y Y Y N Y N
TN5
3TD
X
Y Y Y N Y N

Variants
Each of the TN11TDX, TN12TDX, TN52TDX, and TN53TDX boards has only one variant
identified by the suffix 01 in the board name, for example, TN11TDX01.
Function:
Boar
d
Cross-
Connet
Granularity
Clock
Client-side Services
OTU2/
OTU2e
FC800/
FC1200
TN11
TDX
ODU1 N N N N
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1213
Boar
d
Cross-
Connet
Granularity
Clock
OTU2/
OTU2e
FC800/
FC1200
TN12
TDX
ODU2/
ODU2e
N N N N
TN52
TDX
ODU2/
ODU2e
N N Y N
TN53
TDX
ODU2/
ODU2e/
ODUflex
Y Y Y Y

Specification:
l The specifications vary according to versions. For details, see 14.10.10 TDX
Specifications.
Table 14-121 Substitution rules of the TDX board
Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11TDX None -
TN12TDX TN53TDX The TN53TDX can be created as TN12TDX on the NMS. The
upgrade. After substitution, the TN53TDX functions as the
TN12TDX.
TN52TDX TN53TDX The TN53TDX can be created as TN52TDX on the NMS. The
upgrade. After substitution, the TN53TDX functions as the
TN52TDX.
TN53TDX None -

14.10.2 Application
As a type of tributary board, the TDX board implements conversion between two channels of
10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/FC1200 optical signals and
eight channels of ODU1 virtual concatenation electrical signals or two ODU2/ODU2e/
ODUflex electrical signals using cross-connections.
For the position of the TDX board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-128 and Figure
14-129.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1214
Figure 14-128 Position of the TN11TDX board in the WDM system
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
TDX
10GE LAN
10GE WAN
STM-64
OC-192
N
D
2
N
D
2
TDX
10GE LAN
10GE WAN
STM-64
OC-192
8xODU1 8xODU1
8
O
D
U
1
8
O
D
U
1
RX1
TX1
RX2
TX2
RX1
TX1
RX2
TX2

Figure 14-129 Position of the TN12TDX/TN52TDX/TN53TDX board in the WDM system
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
TDX
2
x
O
D
U
2
/
O
D
U
2
e
/
O
D
U
f
l
e
x
10GE LAN
10GE WAN
STM-64
OC-192
OTU2
OTU2e
FC800
FC1200
N
D
2
N
D
2
TDX
2xODU2/ODU2e/
ODUflex
2xODU2/ODU2e/
ODUflex
2
x
O
D
U
2
/
O
D
U
2
e
/
O
D
U
f
l
e
x
10GE LAN
10GE WAN
STM-64
OC-192
OTU2
OTU2e
FC800
FC1200
RX1
TX1
RX2
TX2
RX1
TX1
RX2
TX2

Table 14-122 Client-side service mapping path supported by the board
Board Client-Side Service Backplane-Side Service
TN11TD
X
10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/
OC-192
ODU1
TN12TD
X
OC-192
ODU2/ODU2e
TN52TD
X
OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e
ODU2/ODU2e
TN53TD
X
a
OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/
FC1200
ODU2/ODU2e
FC800 ODUflex
a: For FC800 services, the TN53TDX board supports two mapping paths: FC800->ODU2
and FC800->ODUflex. The mapping paths for the TN53TDX boards at the service adding
and dropping sites must be the same.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1215
The TDX board is mainly used to achieve cross-connections at the electrical layer.
For detailed functions and features, see Table 14-123.
Table 14-123 Functions and features of the TDX board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function TDX converts signals as follows:
l TN11TDX: 2x10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192<-
>8xODU1 virtual concatenation electrical signals
l TN12TDX: 2x10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192<-
>2xODU2/ODU2e
l TN52TDX: 2x10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/
OTU2e<->2xODU2/ODU2e
l TN53TDX: 2x10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/
OTU2e/FC800/FC1200<->2xODU2/ODU2e, 2xFC800<-
>2xODUflex
Client-side
service type
NOTE
Only the TN52TDX/TN53TDX supports OTU2 and OTU2e services.
Only the TN53TDX board supports FC800 and FC1200 services.
The processing of the 10GE WAN service and the STM-64 service is the same.
Therefore, For TN11TDX/TN12TDX/TN52TDX board, when the 10GE WAN
service is transmitted, you can configure it as the STM-64 service on the U2000.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1216
Function and
Feature
Description
Cross-connect
capabilities
OptiX OSN 8800:
l TN52TDX: Supports the cross-connection of two channels of ODU2/
ODU2e signals between the TDX board and the cross-connect board
using the backplane.
l TN53TDX: Supports the cross-connection of two channels of ODU2/
ODU2e/ODUflex signals between the TDX board and the cross-
connect board using the backplane.
OptiX OSN 6800:
l TN11TDX: Supports the cross-connection of eight channels of
ODU1 signals between the TDX board and the cross-connect board
or the board in the paired slot using the backplane.
l TN12TDX/TN52TDX/TN53TDX: Supports the cross-connection of
two channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals between the TDX board and
the cross-connect board using the backplane.
OptiX OSN 3800:
l TN11TDX: Supports the grooming of eight channels of ODU1
signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards)
OTN function l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring
to the ITU-T G.709. The mapping process is compliant with ITU-T
G.709 and G.Sup43.
ESC function Supported by the TN52TDX/TN53TDX when the client-side service
type is OTU2 or OTU2e.
PRBS test
function
NOTE
type is STM-64/OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e.
type is 10GE LAN.
client side, only when the service type is OTU2/OTU2e.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1217
Function and
Feature
Description
Alarms and
performance
events monitoring
line failures.
l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and
optical power of the laser.
LAN).
NOTE
TN11TDX only supports Poisson mode.
TN12TDX/TN52TDX/TN53TDX only supports Bursty mode.
Test frame Supports the test frame function when the client-side service type is
10GE LAN and the Port mapping is MAC Transparent Mapping
(10.7 G).
Latency
measurement
The TN53TDX board supports latency measurement. The bidirectional
latency at the ODUk layer between two tributary boards supporting the
latency measurement function can be measured, and the latency data is
displayed on the U2000.
NOTE
This function is not supported when the client-side service type is OTU2/OTU2e.
IEEE 1588v2 The TN53TDX board supports the TC, TC+OC, BC, and OC modes
when the client-side service type is 10GE LAN and the Port mapping
is MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G).
Physical clock TN53TDX:
l When the board receives 10GE LAN services and the port mapping
is Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G) on its client side, the board
can support synchronous Ethernet transparent transmission instead
of synchronous Ethernet processing.
l When the board receives 10GE LAN services and the port mapping
is MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G). on its client side, the board
can support synchronous Ethernet processing instead of synchronous
Ethernet transparent transmission.
TN52TDX:
When the board receives 10GE LAN services and the port mapping is
Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G) on its client side, the board can
support synchronous Ethernet transparent transmission instead of
synchronous Ethernet processing.
Electrical-layer
ASON
Supported by the TN52TDX/TN53TDX.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1218
Function and
Feature
Description
Protection
scheme
l Supports tributary SNCP protection (TN12TDX/TN52TDX/
TN53TDX).
NOTE
When the cross-connect granularity is ODUflex, the board does not support
tributary SNCP protection.
NOTE
When the board receives OTN services, SDH/SONET services, and 10GE WAN
services the board supports tributary SNCP protection.
Ethernet service
mapping mode
l TN11TDX: doesn't support this parameter
l TN12TDX/TN52TDX/TN53TDX: Bit Transparent Mapping
(11.1G), MAC transparent mapping (10.7G)
l TN53TDX: Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), MAC transparent
mapping (10.7G), MAC Transparent Mapping(10.7G) support 1588
Loopback WDM side -
Outloop Supported
Protocols or
standards
compliance
Protocols or
standards for
transparent
transmission
(non-
performance
monitoring)
IEEE 802.3ae
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1219
Function and
Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards for
service
processing
(performance
monitoring)
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.873.1
ITU-T G.694.1

The TDX board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, 1588v2
Figure 14-130 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TDX board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1220
Figure 14-130 Functional modules and signal flow of the TDX board
Client side
RX1
RX2
TX1
TX2
OTN
processing
module
O/E
E/O
Client-side
optical
module
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
SDH/SONET
encapsulation and
mapping module
10GE-LAN
encapsulation and
mapping module
FC
encapsulation and
mapping module
Cross-connect
module
n X ODUk
1588v2
module

NOTE
Only the TN53TDX board supports FC encapsulation and mapping module.
Only the TN53TDX board supports the IEEE 1588v2 module.
In Figure 14-130, n x ODUk indicates the service cross-connections from the TDX board to the backplane. "n"
Table 14-124 shows the service cross-connections from the TDX board to the backplane.
Table 14-124 Service cross-connections from the TDX board to the backplane
TN11T
DX
A maximum of 8xODU1
TN12T
DX/
TN52T
DX
A maximum of 2xODU2/ODU2e
TN53T
DX
A maximum of 2xODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1221
In the signal flow of the TDX board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TDX to the backplane,
The client-side optical module receives two channels of the optical signals from client
processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out ODUk signals to the backplane
for grooming.
l Receive direction
The signal processing module receives ODUk signals sent from the backplane. The module
performs operations such as ODUk framing, demapping and decapsulation processing.
Then, the module sends out two channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/
OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/FC1200 signals to the client-side optical module.
The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/
STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/FC1200 electrical signals, and then outputs two
channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX2 ports.
Module Function
Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of two channels of 10GE LAN/10GE
WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/FC1200 optical signals.
Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from two channels of the internal
electrical signals to 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/
FC1200 optical signals.
encapsulation and mapping module, FC encapsulation and mapping module, OTN
processing module and cross-connect module.
Encapsulates multiple channels of SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the
ODUk payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors SDH/
SONET performance.
Encapsulates multiple channels of 10GE LAN signals and maps the signals into the
ODUk payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors 10GE
LAN performance.
Encapsulates multiple channels of FC signals and maps the signals into the ODU1/
ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex payload area. The module also performs the reverse process
and has the FC performance monitoring function.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1222
NOTE
FC800 services can be mapped into ODU2/ODUflex payload area and FC1200 services can be mapped
into ODU2e payload area.
Frames signals and processes overheads in ODUk signals.
Grooms electrical signals between the TDX and the cross-connect board through the
backplane.
l 1588v2 module
According to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol, the module transmits the clock information of the
clock board to the next NE or extracts the clock information from the service board and
then transmits the clock information to the clock board.
14.10.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TDX board.
Figure 14-131 and Figure 14-132 show the front panel of the TDX board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1223
Figure 14-131 Front panel of the TN11TDX board

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1224
Figure 14-132 Front panel of the TN12TDX/TN52TDX/TN53TDX board

Indicators
Interfaces
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1225
Table 14-125 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TDX board

Laser Hazard Level
14.10.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one TDX board.
Table 14-126 shows the valid slots for the TN11TDX board.
Table 14-126 Valid slots for the TN11TDX board
Product Valid slots

Table 14-127 shows the valid slots for the TN12TDX board.
Table 14-127 Valid slots for the TN12TDX board
Product Valid slots

Table 14-128 shows the valid slots for the TN52TDX and TN53TDX board.
Table 14-128 Valid slots for the TN52TDX/TN53TDX board
Product Valid slots

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1226
Table 14-129 Mapping between the physical ports on the TDX board and the port numbers
TX1/RX1 3
TX2/RX2 4

NOTE
Logical Ports
board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ClientLP/
151(imp1/imp1)-1 is a logical port of the board.
The TDX board can work in standard or compatible mode. For details about the standard and
Description
Board Name Displayed on the
NMS
TN11T
DX
Compat
ible
mode
Figure 14-133 Table 14-131 TDX
TN12T
DX
Compat
ible
mode
Figure 14-134 Table 14-131 12TDX
TN52T
DX
Compat
ible
mode
TN53T
DX
Compat
ible
mode
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1227
Description
Board Name Displayed on the
NMS
Standar
d mode
Figure 14-136 Table 14-131 53TDX(STND)

Figure 14-133 Port diagram of the TN11TDX(compatible mode)
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
151(imp1/imp1)-1
151(imp1/imp1)-2
151(imp1/imp1)-3
151(imp1/imp1)-4
152(imp2/imp2)-1
152(imp2/imp2)-4
152(imp2/imp2)-3
152(imp2/imp2)-2
8 x ODU1
Backplane
Other line/PID board

Figure 14-134 Port diagram of the TN12TDX/TN52TDX(compatible mode)
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
2 x ODU2/ODU2e
Backplane

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1228
Figure 14-135 Port diagram of the TN53TDX (compatible mode)
2 x ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
Backplane
Other line/
PID board

Figure 14-136 Port diagram of the TN53TDX (standard mode)
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
2x ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex
Backplane

Cross-connect module Cross-connection that must be
Table 14-131 Description of NMS port of the TDX board
imp1-imp2 Inverse multiplexing ports. The optical channels are numbered
1, 2, 3 and 4.
ClientLP1-ClientLP2 Internal logical ports. The optical paths are numbered 1.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1229
If the TDX board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the
U2000:
l TN11TDX: Configuration of cross-connection
Set the service type. Ensure that the service type is the same as the actual service type.
During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, configure the
bandwidth binding of the imp port.
NOTE
The bandwidth of each imp port that accesses 10GE must be bound with 4 ODU1s.
For bandwidth binding, each 10GE signal must be bound in order. For example, when the
TN11TDX board works with the TN12NS2 board, imp1.1 must be bound to ODU1LP1.1, imp1.2
must be bound to ODU1LP1.2, and so on.
During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the ODU1
level cross-connections between the imp port and the IN/OUT port of the TN11NS2
board (or the ODU1LP port of other board), realizing the cross-connect grooming of
ODU1 services, as shown in Figure 14-137.
l TN12TDX/TN52TDX: Configuration of cross-connection
level cross-connections between the ClientLP port and the ODU2LP port of other board,
as shown in Figure 14-138.
l TN53TDX: Configuration of cross-connection
Create ODU2 cross-connections between this board and other boards to support service
pass-through.
Set the Port Working Mode to ODU2 non-convergence mode (OTU2/Any-
>ODU2->OTU2)
Set the service type. Ensure that the service type is the same as the actual service
type.
During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the
ODU2 level cross-connections between the ClientLP or RX/TX port and the
ODU2LP port of other board, as shown in Figure 14-138 and Figure 14-139.
Create ODUflex cross-connections between this board and other boards to support
service pass-through.
Set the Port Working Mode to ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any-
>ODUflex)
type.
ODUflex level cross-connections between the ClientLP or RX/TX port and the
ODUflex port of other board, as shown in Figure 14-140 and Figure 14-141.
NOTE
The TN53TDX board supports mapping of FC800 into ODUflex on the client side. When configuring
cross-connections for the board, ODUflex Timeslot is 7.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1230
Figure 14-137 Cross-connection diagram of the TN11TDX (compatible mode ODU1 level)
151(imp1/imp1)-1
151(imp1/imp1)-2
151(imp1/imp1)-3
151(imp1/imp1)-4
152(imp2/imp2)-1
152(imp2/imp2)-4
152(imp2/imp2)-3
152(imp2/imp2)-2
Other board a
TDX
(standard
mode)
Client side
The client side of the TDX board are cross-
connected to the WDM side of other boards
Cross-connect
module
Cross-connect
module
Other board b
(compatible
mode)
WDM side
Other board a TN52NS2T04 / TN52NS2T05 / TN52NS2T06 / TN52NS201M01 / TN52NS201M02 /
Other board b TN11ND2 / TN12ND2 / TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN51NQ2 / TN52NQ2 /
TN12ELQX / TN12PTQX

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1231
Figure 14-138 Cross-connection diagram of the TN12TDX/TN52TDX/TN53TDX (compatible
mode ODU2 level)
Client side
TDX
WDM side
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1
2(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1
Cross-connect
module
Cross-connect
module
Other board a
(standard
mode)
Other board b
(compatible
mode)
Other board a TN52ND2T04 / TN53ND2 / TN55NO2 / TN52NS2T04 / TN52NS2T05 / TN52NS2T06 /
Other board b TN12TDX:
TN52TDX:
TN53TDX:

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1232
Figure 14-139 Cross-connection diagram of the TN53TDX (standard mode ODU2 level)
TDX
3(RX1/TX1)-1
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1
2(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
Other board
The client side of the TDX board are cross-connected to the WDM
side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS
Client side
Other board a
(standard
mode)
Other board b
(compatible
mode)
WDM side

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1233
Figure 14-140 Cross-connection diagram of the TN53TDX (compatible mode ODUflex level)
TDX
Other board
Cross-connect mode
Client side
WDM side
Cross-connect mode
Other board TN52ND2T04 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN52NS2T04 / TN52NS2T05 / TN52NS2T06 /

Figure 14-141 Cross-connection diagram of the TN53TDX (standard mode ODUflex level)
TDX
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
Other board
The client side of the TDX board are cross-connected to the WDM
Client side
WDM side

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1234
For parameters of the TDX, refer to Table 14-132.
Table 14-132 TDX parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
Optical Interface
Name
- Set and query the optical interface
name.
Default: Used
The Channel Use Status parameter
sets the occupancy status of the
current channel of a board.
See D.4 Channel Use Status
information.
Optical Interface
Loopback
Outloop
Service Type l TN11TDX: 10GE
LAN, OC-192, STM-64
Default: 10GE LAN
l TN12TDX: None,
10GE LAN, OC-192,
STM-64
Default: None
l TN52TDX: None,
10GE LAN, OC-192,
OTU-2, OTU-2E,
STM-64
Default: None
l TN53TDX: None,
10GE LAN, 10GE
WAN, OC-192,
OTU-2, OTU-2E,
STM-64, CBR_10G,
FC800, FC1200
Default: None
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1235
Client Service Bearer
Rate (Mbit/s)
9953.28 to 10312.50
Default: /
sets the rate of the accessed service
at the optical interface on the client
side of a board.
NOTE
This parameter can be set only when
Service Type is set to CBR_10G.
(Mbit/s) (WDM Interface) for
more information.
Port Mapping l TN11TDX: doesn't
support this parameter
l TN12TDX/TN52TDX:
Bit Transparent
Mapping(11.1G), MAC
transparent mapping
(10.7G)
l TN53TDX: Bit
Transparent Mapping
(11.1G), MAC
transparent mapping
(10.7G)
Default: Bit Transparent
Mapping(11.1G)
NOTE
For the TN12TDX: only the
ClientLP1 port supports
MAC transparent mapping
(10.7G).
The Port Mapping parameter sets
and queries the mapping mode of a
port service.
NOTE
The TN53TDX board supports the TC,
TC+OC, BC, and OC modes when the
client-side service type is 10GE LAN
and the Port mapping is MAC
Transparent Mapping (10.7 G).
Default: Off
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
automatically shut down the laser
after the signals received by a board
are lost.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1236
ALS Auxiliary
Condition
FW_Defect,
BW_Client_R_LOS,
BW_WDM_Defect,
FW_ODUk_CSF
Default: FW_Defect
triggering ALS.
receiver of the upstream board or
the WDM-side receiver of the
local board, the laser on the
client-side transmitter of the
local board must be shut down.
For this situation, set this
receiver of the local board, the
laser on the client-side
transmitter of the local board
must be shut down. For this
BW_Client_R_LOS.
l If a fault occurs on the WDM-
side receiver of the local board,
the laser on the client-side
transmitter of the upstream board
must be shut down. For this
BW_WDM_Defect.
l If an OPUk_CSF alarm is
detected on the WDM-side port
of the local board, the laser on the
client-side transmitter of the
local board must be shut down.
For this situation, set this
NOTE
Only the TN52TDX/TN53TDX
supports this parameter.
Hold-off Time of
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
0s, 100ms, 200ms, 300ms,
400ms, 500ms, 600ms,
700ms, 800ms, 900ms, 1s,
1100ms, 1200ms, 1300ms,
1400ms, 1500ms, 1600ms,
1700ms, 1800ms, 1900ms,
2s
Default: 0s
ALS enabled, the hold-off time is a
time period from the point when the
system detects service interruption
to the point when ALS automatically
shuts down the related lasers.
NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1237
Hold-off Time of
Automatic Laser
Turn-On
0s, 100ms, 200ms, 300ms,
400ms, 500ms, 600ms,
700ms, 800ms, 900ms, 1s,
1100ms, 1200ms, 1300ms,
1400ms, 1500ms, 1600ms,
1700ms, 1800ms, 1900ms,
2s
Default: 0s
automatically enabling lasers. With
ALS enabled, the hold-off time is a
time period from the point when the
system detects service recovery to
the point when ALS automatically
enables the related lasers.
NOTE
Default: Disabled
link pass-through (LPT) function.
Service Mode Client Mode, OTN Mode
Specifies the service mode for a
board.
NOTE
Only TN52TDX/TN53TDX supports
this parameter.
PAUSE Frame Flow
Control
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
switch of the flow control.
NOTE
Only TN11TDX supports this
parameter.
Default: 9600
sets and queries the maximum
packet length supported by a board
and is applicable to the boards
NOTE
For the TN52TDX and
TN53TDXboard, when Port Mapping
is set to Bit Transparent Mapping
(11.1G), Maximum Packet Length is
unavailable on the U2000.
See D.20 Max. Packet Length
information.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1238
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
Determines whether to process
GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN
overheads. If the processing is not
required, set this parameter to
Enabled; otherwise, set it to
Disabled.
NOTE
This parameter is valid only when the
client side accesses OTN services.
Only TN52TDX/TN53TDX supports
this parameter.
Default: Enabled
Determines whether to enable or
disable the forward error correction
(FEC) function for an optical
interface.
NOTE
Service Type is set to OTU2 or
OTU-2E.
See D.10 FEC Working State
information.
FEC Mode FEC
Default: FEC
The FEC Mode parameter sets the
FEC mode of the current optical
interface.
NOTE
Service Type is set to OTU2 or
OTU-2E.
OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None
The SD Trigger Condition
parameter sets the relevant alarms of
certain optical interfaces or channels
of a board as SD switching trigger
conditions of the protection group in
which this OTU board resides.
information.
Default: Disabled
The PRBS Test Status parameter
sets the pseudo-random binary
sequence (PRBS) test status of a
board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1239
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
special frame test before
deployment. When this parameter is
set to Enabled, the board sends the
test frame where the payload
consists of only 0. This parameter is
used in the deployment
commissioning.
NOTE
TN53TDX.
Insert Code Type l When Service Type is
STM-64 or OC-192:
PN11, MS_AIS
Default: PN11
l When Service Type is
10GE LAN and port
mapping mode is MAC
transparent mapping
(10.7G):
Quick insert,
Delayed insert
Default: Quick
insert
Applies to fault detection and
location when the service type is
STM-64 or OC-192. When the
tributary or line board at the
upstream site is faulty or when the
line board at the downstream site is
faulty, users can specify the output
code type for the tributary board at
the downstream site using this
parameter.
When the service type is 10GE-
LAN, the value Quick insert applies
to a scenario in which no protection
is configured on the WDM
equipment while protection is
configured for the router that
connects to the WDM equipment. In
this scenario, quick protection
switching can be achieved on the
router. The value Delayed insert
applies to a scenario in which
protection is configured for the
WDM equipment and the router
connected to the WDM equipment.
In this scenario, the WDM
equipment preferentially performs
protection switching in case of a
fault. If the fault is rectified, the
router does not perform protection
switching. If the fault persists, then
the router performs protection
switching.
NOTE
TN53TDX.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1240
Port Working Mode ODU2 non-convergence
mode (OTU2/Any-
>ODU2->OTU2),
ODUflex non-convergence
mode (Any->ODUflex),
NONE Mode(Not for port)
Default: ODU2 non-
convergence mode (OTU2/
Any->ODU2->OTU2)
This parameter is used to set the
working mode of the interface on the
board according to the actual
application scenario and service
mapping trail.
NOTE
TN53TDX.

14.10.10 TDX Specifications
Board Client-Side Fixed
Optical Module
Module
TN11TDX/
TN12TDX/
TN52TDX/
TN53TDX
N/A 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km

NOTE
point.
NOTE
The 10 Gbit/s multirate 10 km module, 10 Gbit/s multirate 40 km module, and 10 Gbit/s multirate 80 km module
can be used to access OC-192, STM-64, 10GE WAN, FC1200, and OTU2/OTU2e signals.
The 10 Gbit/s multirate 10 km module can be used to access FC800 signals.
Optical
Module
Type
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80
km
10 Gbit/s
Single-
Rate-0.3 km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1241
Optical
Module
Type
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80
km
10 Gbit/s
Single-
Rate-0.3 km
Optical
source type
- SLM SLM SLM MLM
Target
transmissio
n distance
- 10 km (6.2 mi.) 40 km (24.9
mi.)
80 km (49.7
mi.)
0.3 km (0.2
mi.)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565 840 to 860
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -1 2 4 -1.3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -6 -4.7 0 -7.3
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 6 8.2 9 3
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm N/A N/A N/A N/A
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB 30 30 30 30
Eye pattern
mask
- G.691-compliant
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN APD PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1260 to 1565 1260 to 1605 1270 to 1600 840 to 860
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1242
Optical
Module
Type
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80
km
10 Gbit/s
Single-
Rate-0.3 km
Receiver
sensitivity
(multirate)
dBm -11 -14 -24 -7.5
Receiver
sensitivity
(10GE
LAN)
dBm -14.4 -15.8 -24 -7.5
Minimum
receiver
overload
(10GE
LAN)
dBm 0.5 -1 -7 -1
Minimum
receiver
overload
(STM-64)
dBm -1 -1 -7 -1
Maximum
reflectance
dB -27 -27 -27 -12

(8.7 in.)
l Weight:
TN11TDX: 1.3 kg (2.8 lb.)
TN12TDX: 1.4 kg (3.1 lb.)
TN52TDX: 1.4 kg (3.1 lb.)
TN53TDX: 1.5 kg (3.3 lb)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11TDX 78.0 80.0
TN12TDX 37.4 40.7
TN52TDX 57.3 63.0
TN53TDX 25.0 27.5
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1243

14.11 TEM28
TEM28: 24xGE+4x10GE Ethernet tributary unit
The available functional version of the TEM28 board is TN54.
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN5
4TE
M28
Y Y Y N N N

Variants
The TN54TEM28 board has only one variant: TN54TEM28. The TN54TEM28 board variant
is the board itself.
14.11.2 Application
The TEM28 board is a tributary board. It implements conversion between 24 channels of GE
optical signals, GE electrical signals, or FE electrical signals, with four channels of 10GE
LAN/10GE WAN optical signals and ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, or ODUflex electrical signals with
bandwidth not greater than 20 Gbit/s.
For the position of the TEM28 board in the WDM system, seeFigure 14-142.
Figure 14-142 Position of the TN54TEM28 board in the WDM system
TX1
TEM28
2xOTU2
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
N
D
2
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
N
D
2
2xOTU2
TEM28
10 GE LAN/
10GE WAN
GE/FE
L2
GE/FE
L2
1
6
O
D
U
0
/
8
O
D
U
f
l
e
x
/
8
O
D
U
1
/
2
O
D
U
2
1
6
O
D
U
0
/
8
O
D
U
f
l
e
x
/
8
O
D
U
1
/
2
O
D
U
2
RX1
TX4
TX5
RX5
TX28
RX28
RX4
TX1
RX1
TX4
TX5
RX5
TX28
RX28
RX4
10 GE LAN/
10GE WAN
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1244
NOTE
The RX1/TX1 - RX4/TX4 optical ports are 10GE optical ports and are capable of processing 10GE
LAN/10GE WAN services. The other ports on the board are GE optical ports or GE/FE electrical ports,
that are capable of processing GE and FE services.
The TEM28 board supports electrical cross-connections, L2 layer switching and the QinQ
function.
Table 14-134 and Table 14-135 list the functions and features of the TEM28 board.
Table 14-134 OTN Functions and features of the TEM28 board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function l Coverts 24 channels of GE optical signals, GE electrical signals, or FE
electrical signals, and four channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN optical
signals to ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, or ODUflex electrical signals with
bandwidth not greater than 20 Gbit/s.
l The reverse process is similar.
Client-side
service type
NOTE
The TEM28 board transmits FE or GE electrical signals, GE optical signals, or 10GE
optical signals on the client side.
When the TEM28 board transmits GE or FE electrical signals, to facilitate fiber
routing, you are advised to install electrical modules at the RX27/TX27 and RX28/
TX28 ports.
Cross-connect
capabilities
Supports the cross-connection of a maximum of 16 channels of ODU0
signals, or 8 channels of ODUflex signals, or 8 channels of ODU1 signals,
or 2 channels of ODU2 signals between the TEM28 board and a cross-
connect board by using the backplane.
to the ITU-T G.709. The mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.
709 and ITU-T G.7041.
l Supports PM function for ODUflex.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1245
Function and
Feature
Description
NOTE
The LPT function cannot be configured for EVPL services but only for bidirectional
EPL services. When the LPT function is enabled, Source C-VLAN andSink C-
VLAN of an EPL service must be left empty.
FE/GE electrical ports of the TEM28 board do not support the LPT function.
FEC encoding Not supported.
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
line failures.
power of the laser.
l Provides remote monitoring (RMON) of the Ethernet service.
PRBS Not supported
Physical clock Supported
NOTE
FE/GE electrical ports of the TEM28 board do not support the physical clock
function.
The board does not support the physical clock when it is provisioned with 10G WAN
services.
Electrical-layer
ASONbug
Supported
Protection
scheme
interface
Outloop Supported
Outloop Supported
GE optical
interface
GE electrical
port
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1246
Function and
Feature
Description
Outloop Supported
FE electrical
port
Outloop Supported
Protocols or
standards
compliance
IEEE 802.3
IEEE 802.3z
monitoring)
ITU-T G.703
ITU-T G.652
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.873.1
G.709 ITU-T
ITU-T G.655(1996)
ITU-T G.671
ITU-T G.7041
IEEE 802.3
IEEE 802.3z
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.692

Table 14-135 Data features of the TEM28 board
Function
and Feature
Description
Interface
characteristi
cs
Port working
mode
10GE optical port: 10G FULL LAN, 10G FULL WAN
(SONET)
GE optical port: 1000M FUL, auto-negotiation
GE electrical port: auto-negotiation
FE electrical port: auto-negotiation
Multicast VLAN
multicast
Supported
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1247
Function
and Feature
Description
IGMP
snooping V2
Supported
Layer 2
switching
l Supports IEEE802.1Q, IEEE802.1ad, and IEEE 802.1D.
l Supports one VB.
l Supports MAC address learning and aging.
l Supports STP/RSTP.
l Supports 128k MAC addresses.
Ethernet
service
EPL
EVPL(VLAN)
EVPL(QinQ)
EPLAN(IEEE 802.1D)
EVPLAN(IEEE 802.1Q)
NOTE
Protection
schemes
ERPS Supported
running at IP ports.
DLAG Supported
MC-LAG Supported
Maintenance
features
ETH-OAM Supports ETH OAM protocols defined by IEEE802.3ah.
RMON Supported
QoS l Supports committed access rate (CAR) and class of service (CoS).
l Supports IEEE802.1p.
l Supports DSCP.
Protocols or
standards
compliance
Protocols or
standards for
transparent
transmission
(non-
performance
monitoring)
IEEE 802.1q VLAN
All Layer 2 protocols such as xSTP, LACP, EthOAM, DHCP,
and PPP etc.
MPLS protocols
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1248
Function
and Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards for
service
processing
(performanc
e
monitoring)
ITU-T Recommendation G.8032/Y.1344
IEEE 802.3ad LACP
IEEE 802.1q VLAN
IEEE 802.1ag OAM
IEEE 802.3ah OAM
RFC 4541 IGMP Snooping
IEEE 802.1ad
IEEE 802.1d
IEEE 802.1s
IEEE 802.1w
IEEE 802.3z
IEEE 802.3u
IEEE 802.3ab
IEEE 802.3ae
ITU-T G.8261/Y.1361
ITU-T G.8262

The TEM28 board consists of the client-side optical module, L2 switching module, OTN
Figure 14-143 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TEM28 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1249
Figure 14-143 Functional modules and signal flow of the TEM28 board
SCC

L2 switching
module
RX1
RX2
RX28
TX28
TX1
TX2
CPU
16ODU0/8ODU1/
2ODU2/8ODUflex
OTN processing
module
O/E
E/O
Memory
Control
Communication
Power supply
module
DC power supply
Fuse
Required
voltage
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Client-side
optical
module
Client side
Backplane(service
cross-connection)
NOTE
When used to receive GE or FE electrical signals, the board must use a client-side electrical module to perform
power level conversion, and then sends the signals to L2 switching for processing.

The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the TEM28 board. The
transmit direction is the direction from the client side of the TEM28 to the backplane, and the
receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
performs operations, such as convergence. After convergence, the module outputs a
maximum of 16 channels of electrical signals to the OTN processing module.
The OTN processing module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping
processing, and OTN framing. After processing, and then outputs a maximum of 16
channels of ODU0 signals or eight channels of ODU1 signals or eight channels of ODUflex
signals or two channels of ODU2 signals to the backplane.
l Receive direction
The OTN processing module receives a maximum of 16 channels of ODU0 signals or eight
channels of ODU1 signals or eight channels of ODUflex signals or two channels of ODU2
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1250
signals sent from the cross-connection board through the backplane. The module performs
operations such as ODU2/ODU2e/ODU1/ODU0/ODUflex framing, demapping and
decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends the electrical signal to the L2 switching
module.
The L2 switching module deconverges the electrical signals and sends 28 channels of the
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the 28 channels of electrical
signals, and then outputs 28 channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX28
optical interfaces.
NOTE
The RX1/TX1 to RX4/TX4 optical ports are 10GE optical ports that can process 10GE LAN/10GE
WAN services. The other optical ports on the board are GE optical ports, GE electrical ports and FE
electrical ports, that can process GE and FE services.
NOTE
Module Function
Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of 28 channels of FE/GE/10GE LAN/
10GE WAN optical signals.
Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from 28 channels of the internal
electrical signals to FE/GE/10GE LAN/10GE WAN optical signals.
Frames ODUk signals, processes overheads in ODUk signals.
14.11.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TEM28 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1251
Figure 14-144 shows the front panel of the TEM28 board.
Figure 14-144 Front panel of the TEM28 board
TEM28
TEM28
2
1
2
2
2
3
2
4
2
5
2
6
2
7
2
8
5
6
7
8
9
1
0
1
1
1
2
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
1~4: 10GE
5~28: GE
1
2
3
4
20
13
-
TXRX TX
TX RX RX
RX
RX TX
TX

Indicators
Interfaces
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1252
Table 14-136 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TEM28 board
RX1-RX28
a
LC Receive service signals from client equipment.
TX1-TX28
a
LC Transmit service signals to client equipment.
a: The RX1/TX1 to RX4/TX4 optical ports are 10GE optical interfaces. The other optical
interfaces on the board are GE optical interfaces, GE electrical interfaces and FE electrical
interfaces.

Laser Hazard Level
14.11.6 Valid Slots
Two slots house one TEM28 board.
Table 14-137 shows the valid slots for the TEM28 board.
Table 14-137 Valid slots for the TN54TEM28 board
Product Valid slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
subrack
IU45-IU51, IU53-IU59, IU61-IU67
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
subrack
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
subrack
IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17

The online signal bus on the TEM28 board connects to the backplane along the left slot in the
subrack. The slot number of the TEM28 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left
one of the two slots.
For example, if you install the board in slots IU1 and IU2, the slot number of the TEM28 board
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1253
Table 14-138 Mapping between the physical ports on the TEM28 board and the port numbers
TX1/RX1 to TX28/RX28 3 to 30

NOTE
Logical Ports
Figure 14-145 shows the application model of the TEM28 board. Table 14-139 describes the
Figure 14-145 Port diagram of the TEM28 board
Other line/
PID board
Backplane
Other line/
PID board
201(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
30(RX28/TX28)-1
7(RX5/TX5)-1
8xODU0/8xODU1/
2xODU2/8xODUflex
TRUNK1
TRUNK8
TRUNK9
PORT3
101(AP1/AP1)-1
108(AP8/AP8)-1
109(AP9/AP9)-1
116(AP16/AP16)-1
208(ClientLP8/
ClientLP8)-1
209(ClientLP9/
ClientLP9)-1
216(ClientLP16/
ClientLP16)-1
8xODU0
PORT6
PORT30
PORT7
TRUNK16
Cross-connect module L2 swiching module
Service processing module Cross-connection that must be configured on the

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1254
Table 14-139 Descriptions of the ports on the TEM28 board
RX1/TX1-RX28/TX28 Client-side ports. The RX1/TX1 to RX4/TX4 ports
are used as 10GE optical ports to process 10GE
LAN/10GE WAN services. The remaining ports are
used as GE optical ports, GE electrical ports, or FE
electrical ports to process GE or FE services.
PORT3-PORT30 Respectively corresponds to the client-side optical
VCTRUNK1-VCTRUNK16 Internal virtual ports. The total bandwidth for these
ports is 20 Gbit/s. The maximum bandwidth for the
VCTRUNK1-VCTRUNK8 ports is 10 Gbit/s, with
each port allocated a maximum of 1.25 Gbit/s
bandwidth. The maximum bandwidth for the
VCTRUNK9-VCTRUNK16 ports is 20 Gbit/s, with
each port allocated a maximum of 10 Gbit/s
bandwidth.
ClientLP1-ClientLP16 Internal logical ports. Each of the ports provides only
one optical channel (identified as optical channel 1).
The ClientLP1-ClientLP8 ports can map the signals
cross-connected from the L2 switching module into
a maximum of eight ODU0 signals, and the
ClientLP9-ClientLP16 can map the signals into a
maximum of eight ODU0 signals, eight ODU1
signals, two ODU2 signals, or eight ODUflex
signals.

If the TEM28 board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the
U2000:
l When creating Ethernet services on the U2000, create cross-connections between the PORT
and VCTRUNK ports, implementing cross-connections and convergence of signals
received from the client-side ports using the Layer 2 switching module.
NOTE
l VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK8 : The maximum bandwidth for the TRUNK1-TRUNK8 ports is 10 Gbit/
s, with each port allocated a maximum of 1.25 Gbit/s bandwidth.
l VCTRUNK9 to VCTRUNK16: The maximum bandwidth for the TRUNK9-TRUNK16 ports is 20
Gbit/s, with each port allocated a maximum of 10 Gbit/s bandwidth.
l VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK16: The total bandwidth for these ports is 20 Gbit/s.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1255
l There are mappings between the RX/TX and PORT ports, between the VCTRUNK and
AP ports, and between the AP and ClientLP ports. You do not need to set the mappings on
the U2000.
l Create cross-connections from the local board to the line or PID board.
level cross-connections between the ClientLP port and the ODU0 port of other board,
Figure 14-146 ODU0 Cross-Connections
TEM28
Client side
The client side of the TEM28 board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other
boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS
WDM side
Other
board a
Other
board b
(standard
mode)
(compatible
mode)
Other
board a
Other
board b
TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 /
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1256
TEM28
Client side
WDM side
Other
board a
Other
board b
(standard
mode)
(compatible
mode)
Cross-connect
module
Other
board a
Other
board b
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1257
TEM28
WDM side
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1
2(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1
Client side
The client side of the TEM28 board are cross-connected to the WDM
WDM side
Other board a
Other board b
(standard mode)
(compatible mode)
Other board b TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN52NS2 /
ODUflex level cross-connections between the ClientLP port and the ODUflex port of
other board, as shown in Figure 14-149.
NOTE
When creating ODUflex cross-connections, specify the number of ODUflex timeslots based on the
service rate. The number of ODUflex timeslots ranges from 1 to 8 and the rate of each timeslot is 1.25
Gbit/s.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1258
Figure 14-149 ODUflex Cross-Connections
Other
board
TEM28
Client side
WDM side
NOTE
Ports 201(ClienLP1/ClienLP1)-1 to 208(ClienLP8/ClienLP8)-1 support a maximum of eight ODU0 cross-
connections with the maximum bandwidth of 10 Gbit/s. Ports 209(ClienLP9/ClienLP9)-1 to 216
(ClienLP16/ClienLP16)-1 support a maximum of eight ODU0, eight ODU1, two ODU2, or eight ODUflex
cross-connections with the maximum bandwidth of 20 Gbit/s.
The TEM28 board supports simultaneous transmission of ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, and ODUflex signals
with the maximum bandwidth of 20 Gbit/s.
Optical Interface/
Channel
Optical Interface
Name
are supported.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1259
Default: Off
status of a board.
more information.
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
board are lost.
ALS Auxiliary
Condition
FW_Defect,
BW_Client_R_LOS
,
BW_WDM_Defect,
FW_ODUk_CSF
Default: FW_Defect
ALS.
FW_OPUk_CSF.
Hold-off Time of
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
0s, 100ms, 200ms,
300ms, 400ms,
500ms, 600ms,
700ms, 800ms,
900ms, 1s, 1100ms,
1200ms, 1300ms,
1400ms, 1500ms,
1600ms, 1700ms,
1800ms, 1900ms, 2s
Default: 0s
related lasers.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1260
Hold-off Time of
Automatic Laser
Turn-On
0s, 100ms, 200ms,
300ms, 400ms,
500ms, 600ms,
700ms, 800ms,
900ms, 1s, 1100ms,
1200ms, 1300ms,
1400ms, 1500ms,
1600ms, 1700ms,
1800ms, 1900ms, 2s
Default: 0s
related lasers.
Default: Disabled
The LPT Enabled parameter determines
whether to enable the link pass-through
(LPT).

Parameters for Ethernet Interfaces
Table 14-141 TAG Attributes (Internal Port/External Port)
Port - Internal ports are
VCTRUNK1 to
VCTRUNK16.
PORT30.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1261
Default: Tag Aware
port.
Tag Aware: The port
(Tag).
VLAN IDs (Tag).
for UNI ports.
NOTE
Default: 1
The Default VLAN ID
NOTE
Access or Hybrid.
Default: 0
The VLAN Priority
ID of a port.
NOTE
Access or Hybrid.
Default: Enabled
The Entry Detection
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1262

VCTRUNK1 to
VCTRUNK16.
PORT30.
Aware
Default: UNI
A UNI port supports Tag
Aware, Access, and Hybrid.
An S-Aware port determines
that the packets do not carry
C-VLAN tags and processes
only the packets that have S-
VLAN tags.
A C-Aware port determines
that the packets do not carry
S-VLAN tags and processes
only the packets that have C-
VLAN tags.
present.

PORT30.
Default: Disabled
port.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1263
l 10G FULL_Duplex
LAN, 10G
FULL_Duplex LAN,
10G FULL_Duplex LAN
(SONET)
l Default: 10G
FULL_Duplex LAN
PORT7 to PORT30:
l 1000M FULL_Duplex
l Default: Auto-
Negotiation
negotiation can
is recommended.
NOTE
are unavailable.
Default: 1522
Ethernet port.
Unit: Byte.
Click D.21 Maximum
details.
Loopback
The MAC Loopback
path.
Loopback
The PHY Loopback
path.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1264
PORT30.
Control Mode
Receive Only
Default: Disable
Click D.23 Non-
details.
Control Mode
Disabled, Enable
Default: Disable
negotiation mode.
the details.

PORT30.
Broadcast Packet
Suppression
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
broadcast packet
suppression.
Click D.6 Enabling
Broadcast Packet
details.
Broadcast Packet
10%
Default: 30%
If broadcast packet
suppressed when the
bandwidth.
view the details.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1265
Default: Disabled
the port.
Default: Enabled
for a loop port.
Threshold of Port
PORT3 to PORT6:
l 010000
l Default: 10000
PORT7 to PORT30:
l 01000
l Default: 1000
traffic.
Default: 0
Flow Monitor Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
Indicates whether to monitor
zero traffic.
Click D.11 Flow Monitor
(Ethernet Interface
Attributes) to view the
details.
Flow Monitor Interval
(min)
1 to 30
Default: 15
Indicates the interval for
monitoring zero traffic.

Table 14-146 Encapsulation/Mapping (Internal Port)
VCTRUNK1 to
VCTRUNK16.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1266
Encapsulation/Mapping GFP-F, GFP-T
Default: GFP-F
Indicates the mapping
protocol for encapsulation of
VCTRUNK port data.
NOTE
GFP-F: indicates that the upper-
layer PDUs of Ethernet MAC
frames and the GFP PDUs are
mapped in one-to-one manner.
GFP-T: indicates that 8B/10B
payloads are mapped to GFP in
transparent mapping mode to
achieve low-delay
transmission.
When services are encapsulated
into ODU0, GFP-T and GFP-F
are supported. When services
are encapsulated into ODU1,
ODU2, and ODUflex, only
GFP-F is supported. The
mapping protocols for GE
services on the transmit end and
receive end must be the same.
Scramble Scrambling Mode[X43+1]
Default: Scrambling Mode
[X43+1]
Indicates whether to
scramble the payload area of
the encapsulation protocol.
ExtensionHeader Option No
Default: No
Displays the extension
header option.
Check Field Length FCS32, No
Default: FCS32
Indicates the length of the
CRC field of the mapping
protocol.
FCS Calculated Bit
Sequence
Big endian
Default: Big endian
Indicates the sequence of
storing the bits in the CRC
field in the FCS frame of the
mapping protocol.

Table 14-147 Advanced attributes (Internal Port)
VCTRUNK1 to
VCTRUNK16.
Default: Disabled
the port.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1267
Default: Enabled
for a loop port.
Flow Monitor Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
Indicates whether to monitor
zero traffic.
Click D.11 Flow Monitor
(Ethernet Interface
Attributes) to view the
details.
Flow Monitor Interval
(min)
1 to 30
Default: 15
Indicates the interval for
monitoring zero traffic.

14.11.10 TEM28 Specifications
Optical Module
TN54TE
M28
N/A 1000 BASE-SX-0.5 km (I-850-LC)
1000 BASE-LX-10 km (I-1310-LC)
10G BASE-SR-0.3 km (SFP+)
10G BASE-LR-10 km (SFP+)

NOTE
point.
Optical Module
Type
1000 BASE-SX-0.5
km (I-850-LC)
1000 BASE-LX-10
km (I-1310-LC)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1268
Optical Module
Type
1000 BASE-SX-0.5
km (I-850-LC)
1000 BASE-LX-10
km (I-1310-LC)
Target transmission
distance
- 0.5 km (0.3 mi.) 10 km (6.2 mi.)
Operating
wavelength range
nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm -2.5 -3
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm -9.5 -9.5
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB 9 9
Operating
wavelength range
nm 770 to 860 1260 to 1620
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm 0 -3

NOTE
The electrical interface specifications comply with IEEE Std 802.3 when receiving 1000 BASE-T services.
Optical Module
Type
10G BASE-SR-0.3
km (SFP+)
10G BASE-LR-10
km (SFP+)
Optical interface
service rate
Gbit/s 10.3125 10.3125
Target transmission
distance
- 0.3 km (0.2 mi.) 10 km (6.2 mi.)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1269
Optical Module
Type
10G BASE-SR-0.3
km (SFP+)
10G BASE-LR-10
km (SFP+)
Operating
wavelength range
nm 840 to 860 1260 to 1355
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm -1 0.5
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm -7.3 -8.2
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB 3 3.5
in case of laser
shutdown
dBm -30 -30
Operating
wavelength range
nm 840 to 860 1260 to 1355
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm -1 0.5
Maximum
reflectance
dB -12 -12

(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F)
TN54TEM28 110 120

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1270
14.12 THA
THA: 16 Any-rate Ports Service Processing Board
The available functional version of the THA board is TN54.
Huawei office.
Boar
d
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
TN54
THA
Y Y Y N N N

Variants
The TN54THA board has only one variant: TN54THA01.
As a type of tributary board, The maximum access capacity of the THA at the client side is 40
Gbit/s.
Table 14-150 provides the application scenarios for the THA board.
Table 14-150 Application scenarios for the THA board
Scenario Maximum Input Capacity
(Client Side)
Mapping
Path
Maximum
Output
Capacity
(Backplane
Side)
Port
Working
Mode
Scenario
1
16 x FE/FDDI/GE/STM-1/
STM-4/OC-3/OC-12/FC100/
FICON/DVB-ASI/ESCON
Any
a
-
>ODU0
16 x ODU0 ODU0 non-
convergence
mode (Any-
>ODU0)
Scenario
2
16 x STM16/OC-48/FC200/
FICON Express/OTU1
Any
a
-
>ODU1
16 x ODU1 ODU1 non-
convergence
mode (Any-
>ODU1)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1271
Scenario Maximum Input Capacity
(Client Side)
Mapping
Path
Maximum
Output
Capacity
(Backplane
Side)
Port
Working
Mode
Scenario
3
16 x FE/FDDI/GE/STM-1/
OC-3/DVB-ASI/SDI/
ESCON/STM-4/OC-12/GE/
FC100/FICON/STM-16/
FC200/FICON Express
NOTE
Each of the RX1/TX1RX8/TX8
and RX9/TX9RX16/TX16 port
groups supports mutual
conversion between a maximum
of 8 channels of optical signals at
any rate in the range of 125 Mbit/
s to 2.2 Gbit/s and one to eight
channels of ODU1 electrical
signals. Each port in each group
either converges multiple client-
side services into one channel of
ODU1 electrical signals or maps
one client-side service into one
channel of ODU1 electrical
signals
n x Any
a
-
>ODU1
(2 to 16) x
ODU1
ODU1
convergence
mode (n X
Any-
>ODU1)
Scenario
4
16 x OTU1 OTU1-
>ODU1-
>ODU0
32x ODU0 ODU1_ODU
0 mode
(OTU1-
>ODU1-
>ODU0)
a: "Any" in the table indicates the client-side service supported in the corresponding
application scenario.

The THA board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer, and to provide
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1272
Table 14-151 Functions and features of the THA board
Function
and Feature
Description
Basic
function
THA converts signals as follows:
l 16 x (125 Mbit/s to 1.25 Gbit/s) <-> 16 x ODU0.
l 16 x (1.49 Gbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s) <-> 16 x ODU1.
l 16 x (125Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s)<->2 to 16 x ODU1.
l 16 x OTU1<->32 x ODU0.
Client-side
service type
NOTE
The THA board supports access of DVB-ASI electrical signals. When the board is used
to accept these electrical signals, a digital video O/E converter must be used for O/E or
E/O conversion and the optical module of the converter must agree with the board optical
module specifications. The digital video O/E converter is a third-party device.
Customers can purchase a digital video O/E converter by themselves.
Cross-
connect
capabilities
Cross-connects a maximum of 32 channels of ODU0 signals or 16 channels
of ODU1 signals through the backplane bus and cross-connect board.
OTN
function
l The mapping process complies with ITU-T G.7041 and ITU-T G.709. The
board supports the frame format and overhead processing by referring to
the ITU-T G.709.
l Supports the PM function for ODU0.
l Supports PM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU0.
l Supports the SM, TCM and PM functions for OTU1.
ESC
function
Supported
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1273
Function
and Feature
Description
PRBS test
function
NOTE
is STM-1/OC-3, STM-4/OC-12, STM-16/OC-48, or OTU1
LPT function This function is supported only when the THA board receives FE or GE
services on its client side.
FEC
encoding
Supports forward error correction (FEC) on the client side that complies with
ITU-T G.709, only when the service type is OTU1.
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
power of the laser.
ALS
function
NOTE
The board supports the Test frame function only when the Service Type is GE(GFP-
T).
Latency
measuremen
t
The board supports latency measurement. The bidirectional latency at the
ODUk layer between two tributary boards supporting the latency
measurement function can be measured, and the latency data is displayed on
the U2000.
NOTE
This function is not supported when the client-side service type is OTU1.
IEEE
1588v2
Supports the TC, TC+OC, BC, and OC modes when the client-side service
type is GE (GFP-T).
NOTE
The TX8/RX8 and TX16/RX16 optical ports cannot process IEEE 1588v2 clock signals.
Physical
clock
When receiving GE(GFP-T) services on the client side, the board can support
synchronous Ethernet processing instead of synchronous Ethernet transparent
transmission.
When receiving GE(TTT-GMP) services on the client side, the board can
Electrical-
layer ASON
Supported.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1274
Function
and Feature
Description
Protection
scheme
NOTE
When the board receives OTN services, SDH/SONET services the board supports
ODU0 tributary SNCP protection is supported only in ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1-
>ODU1->ODU0).
Ethernet
service
mapping
mode
Supports encapsulation of GE services in GE(TTT-GMP) or GE(GFP-T).
Ethernet port
working
mode
Auto-Negotiation
1000M Full-Duplex
Loopback Channel
Loopback
Inloop Supported
NOTE
The Channel Loopback is supported only when
port working mode is ODU1_ODU0 mode
(OTU1->ODU1->ODU0).
Outloop
Outloop Supported
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1275
Function
and Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards
compliance
Protocols or
standards for
transparent
transmission
(non-
performance
monitoring)
IEEE 802.3u
IEEE 802.3z
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
PI)
Interface (ASI)
(PHY)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1276
Function
and Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards for
service
processing
(performanc
e
monitoring)
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.873.1
ITU-T G.694.1

Table 14-152 Mapping between the physical ports on the THA board and the port numbers
TX1/RX1 3
TX2/RX2 4
TX3/RX3 5
TX4/RX4 6
TX5/RX5 7
TX6/RX6 8
TX7/RX7 9
TX8/RX8 10
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1277
TX9/RX9 11
TX10/RX10 12
TX11/RX11 13
TX12/RX12 14
TX13/RX13 15
TX14/RX14 16
TX15/RX15 17
TX16/RX16 18

NOTE
14.12.5 THA scenario 1: ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any-
>ODU0)
The THA board performs conversion between 16 channels of optical signals at a rate in the range
of 125 Mbit/s to 1.25 Gbit/s and 16 channels of ODU0 electrical signals, see Figure 14-150.
Figure 14-150 Position of the THA in a WDM system (Scenario 1)
16xODU0 2xOTU2
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
N
D
2
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
N
D
2
2xOTU2
1
16
1
16
1
16
1
16
16xODU0
RX1
RX16
THA
8
O
D
U
0
1
6
A
n
y
1
6
O
D
U
0
FE/FDDI/GE/STM-1/
STM-4/OC-3/OC-12/
FC100/FICON/DVB-
ASI/ESCON
FE/FDDI/GE/STM-1/
STM-4/OC-3/OC-12/
FC100/FICON/DVB-
ASI/ESCON
THA
8
O
D
U
0
1
6
A
n
y
1
6
O
D
U
0
TX1
TX16
RX1
RX16
TX1
TX16

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1278
The THA board can work in standard or compatible mode. For details about the standard and
Mode Port Diagram Port Description Board
Name
Displayed
on the
NMS
Compatible
mode
Figure 14-151 Table 14-154 THA
Standard
mode
(STND)

Figure 14-151 Port diagram of the THA board (ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0))
(compatible mode)
4(RX2/TX2)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
18(RX16/TX16)-1
16xODU0
Backplane
NOTE
When creating electrical cross-connections between the ClientLP port of the THA board and other boards's
ODU0LP ports, the source optical channel must be set to 1.

Cross-connect
module
Service processing
module
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1279
Table 14-154 Description of NM port of the THA board (ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any-
>ODU0))
RX1/TX1 to RX16/TX16 These ports correspond to the client-side optical
interfaces.
ClientLP1 to ClientLP16 Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered
1 to 2.

(standard mode)
4(RX2/TX2)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
18(RX16/TX16)-1
16xODU0
Backplane
Cross-connect module Automatic cross-connection, which does not need
to be configured on the NMS.
Service processing module Cross-connection that must be configured on the
NMS.

>ODU0))
interfaces.

14.12.5.3 Configuration of Cross-connection
>ODU0).
l Set the service type. Ensure that the service type is the same as the actual service type.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1280
NOTE
If all the 16 clientside ports are used to receive and transmit GE(TTT-GMP) services, users can configure
the 16*GE for 16*ODU0 service package for the board on the NMS. This simultaneously sets the Port
Working Mode to ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0) and the Service Type to GE(TTT-
GMP) for the 16 ports.
l When the THA board works in compatible mode:
On the U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the internal RX/TX and
ClientLP ports. For details, see
1
in Figure 14-153.
On the U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the local ClientLP port and
other boards's ODU0LP ports. For details, see
2
in Figure 14-153.
l When the THA board works in standard mode:
On the U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the local RX/TX port and
1
in Figure 14-154.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1281
Figure 14-153 Cross-connection diagram of the THA board (ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0))
(compatible mode)
16(TX14/RX14)-1
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
THA
18(TX16/RX16)-1
17(TX15/RX15)-1 216(ClientLP16/ClientLP16)-1
1
2
WDM side
Other board a
Other board b
(standard mode)
(compatible mode)
Other board
Client side
The client side of the THA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards,
The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS
Other board
a
TN52ND2T04 / TN53ND2 / TN55NO2 / TN52NS2T04 / TN52NS2T05 / TN52NS2T06 / TN52NS201M01 /
TN52NS201M02 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN54NS3 / TN55NS3 / TN54NS4 / TN55NPO2 / TN55NPO2E / TN54ENQ2
Other board
b
TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 /

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1282
Figure 14-154 Cross-connection diagram of the TOA board (ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0))
(standard mode)
THA
1
Client side
WDM side
Other
board b
(compatible
mode)
Other
board a
(standard
mode)
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
18(TX16/RX16)-1
17(TX15/RX15)-1
Other board
a
Other board
b

NOTE
When the THA board connects to a TOM board that uses optical channel 2 on the ClientLP port, a client-side
optical port on the THA board must be cross-connected to optical channel 2 on the ClientLP port of the THA
board. In other cases, configure cross-connections from optical channel 1 on the ClientLP port of the TOM board
to the client-side ports on the THA board.
When creating electrical cross-connections between the ClientLP port of the THA board and other boards's
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1283
14.12.6 THA scenario 2: ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any-
>ODU1)
The THA board performs conversion between 16 channels of optical signals at a rate in the range
of 1.49 Gbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s and 16 channels of ODU1 electrical signals, see Figure 14-155.
16xODU1 4xOTU2
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
N
Q
2
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
N
Q
2
4xOTU2
THA
8
O
D
U
0
1
6
A
n
y
1
16
1
16
1
16
1
16
16xODU1
1
6
O
D
U
1
RX1
THA
8
O
D
U
0
1
6
A
n
y
1
6
O
D
U
1
STM-16/
OC-48/FC200/FICON
Express/OTU1
STM-16/
OC-48/FC200/FICON
Express/OTU1
TX1
RX16
TX16
RX1
TX1
RX16
TX16

Name
Displayed
on the
NMS
Compatible
mode
Standard
mode
(STND)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1284
(compatible mode)
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
18(RX16/TX16)-1
17(RX15/TX15)-1
16(RX14/TX14)-1
16xODU1
Backplane

Cross-connect
module
Service processing
module
Automatic cross-connection, which does
not need to be configured on the NMS.
>ODU1))
interfaces.
ClientLP1ClientLP16 Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered
1.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1285
(standard mode)
4(RX2/TX2)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
18(RX16/TX16)-1
16xODU1
Backplane

Cross-connect
module
Cross-connection that must be configured
on the NMS.
Service processing
module
Table 14-158 Description of NM port of the TOA board (ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any-
>ODU1))
interfaces.

>ODU1).
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1286
NOTE
If all the 16 client-side ports are used to receive and transmit STM-16 services, users can configure the
16 * STM-16/OC-48>ODU1 service package for the board. This simultaneously sets the Port Working
Mode to ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1) and Service Type to STM-16 for the 16 ports.
1
in Figure 14-158.
1
in Figure 14-159.
(compatible mode)
1
16(TX14/RX14)-1
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
THA
18(TX16/RX16)-1
Client side
WDM side
Other board a
Other board b
(standard mode)
(compatible mode)
The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS
Other board
a
Other board
b
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1287

(standard mode)
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
THA
18(TX16/RX16)-1
17(TX15/RX15)-1
1
Client side
WDM side
Other
board b
(compatible
mode)
Other
board a
(standard
mode)
Other board
a
Other board
b

14.12.7 THA scenario 3: ODU1 convergence mode (n X Any->ODU1)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1288
Each of the RX1/TX1RX8/TX8 and RX9/TX9RX16/TX16 port groups supports mutual
conversion between a maximum of 8 channels of optical signals at any rate in the range of 125
Mbit/s to 2.2 Gbit/s and one to eight channels of ODU1 electrical signals, as shown in Figure
14-160.
(2~16)xODU1 4xOTU2
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
N
Q
2
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
N
Q
2
4xOTU2 (2~16)xODU1
RX1
THA
FE/FDDI/GE /FC100/
FC200/DVB-
ASI/ESCON/STM-
1/STM-4/STM-16/OC-
3/OC-12/FICON/FICON
Express
THA
FE/FDDI/GE /FC100/
FC200/DVB-
ASI/ESCON/STM-
1/STM-4/STM-16/OC-
3/OC-12/FICON/FICON
Express
8
A
n
y
(
1
~
8
)
O
D
U
1
8
A
n
y
(
1
~
8
)
O
D
U
1
8
A
n
y
(
1
~
8
)
O
D
U
1
8
A
n
y
(
1
~
8
)
O
D
U
1
TX1
RX16
TX16
RX1
TX1
RX16
TX16

NOTE
The client signals received by the RX1/TX1RX8/TX8 ports cannot be encapsulated together with the client
signals received by the RX9/TX9RX16/TX16 ports.
Name
Displayed
on the
NMS
Compatible
mode
Figure 14-161 Table 14-160 54THA
Standard
mode
(STND)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1289
Figure 14-161 Port diagram of the THA board (ODU1 convergence mode (n * Any->ODU1))
(compatible mode)
2-16xODU1
Backplane
4(RX2/TX2)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
18(RX16/TX16)-1
17(RX15/TX15)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1

Cross-connect
module
Multiplexing module Cross-connection that must be configured
on the NMS
Table 14-160 Description of NM port of the THA board (ODU1 convergence mode (n * Any-
>ODU1))
interfaces.
ClientLP1ClientLP16 Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered
1 to 16.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1290
Figure 14-162 Port diagram of the THA board (ODU1 convergence mode (n * Any->ODU1))
(standard mode)
18(RX16/TX16)-1
17(RX15/TX15)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
201(ConvGroup1/ConvGroup1)-1
2~16xODU1
216(ConvGroup16/
ConvGroup16)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
216(ConvGroup16/
ConvGroup16)-1
216(ConvGroup16/
ConvGroup16)-8
Backplane

Cross-connect
module
on the NMS
Table 14-161 Description of NM port of the THA board (ODU1 convergence mode (n * Any-
>ODU1))
interfaces.
ConvGroup1ConvGroup8 Internal logical port. The paths are numbered 1 to 8.

l On the U2000, set the Port Working Mode to ODU1 convergence mode (n * Any-
>ODU1).
On the U2000, create cross-connections between the local RX/TX port and ClientLP
port. For details, see
1
in Figure 14-163.
Create cross-connections between the local ClientLP port and other boards' ODU1LP
ports. For details, see
2
in Figure 14-163.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1291
On the U2000, create cross-connections between the local RX/TX port and ConvGroup
1
in Figure 14-164.
Create cross-connections between the local ConvGroup port and other boards' ODU1LP
2
in Figure 14-164.
NOTE
When the rate of services received on the client side is greater than 1.25 Gbit/s, these services must be configured
on the first optical channel of each ClientLP.
The first eight client-side ports on the THA board can be configured with cross-connections only to the first
eight LP ports; the last eight client-side ports on the THA board can be configured with cross-connections only
to the last eight LP ports.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1292
Figure 14-163 Cross-connection diagram of the THA board (ODU1 convergence mode (n * Any->ODU1))
(compatible mode)
1
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
THA
18(TX16/RX16)-1
17(TX15/RX15)-1
Cross-connect module Multiplexing module
2
Client side
The client side of the THA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which
needs to be configured on the NMS
WDM side
Other board a
Other board b
(standard mode)
(compatible mode)
The virtual path of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS
Other board
a
Other board
b

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1293
Figure 14-164 Cross-connection diagram of the THA board (ODU1 convergence mode (n * Any->ODU1)) (standard
mode)
2
1
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
18(TX16/RX16)-1
THA
201(ConvGroup1/Conv
Group1)-1
201(ConvGroup1/Conv
Group1)-8
201(ConvGroup1/Conv
Group1)-1
202(ConvGroup2/Conv
Group2)-8
202(ConvGroup2/Conv
Group2)-1
216(ConvGroup16/Conv
Group16)-1
Group16)-8
202(ConvGroup2/Conv
Group2)-1
Group16)-1
Client side
The client side of the THA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which
WDM side
Other board a
Other board b
(standard mode)
(compatible mode)
Other board
a
Other board
b

14.12.8 THA scenario 4: ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1-
>ODU0)
The THA board performs conversion between 16 OTU1 optical signals and 32 ODU0 electrical
signals, see Figure 14-165.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1294
OTU1
4xOTU2
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
N
Q
2
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
N
Q
2
4xOTU2
1
32
THA
8
O
D
U
0
1
6
O
D
U
1
32xODU0
1
6
O
T
U
1
32xODU0
THA
8
O
D
U
0
3
2
O
D
U
0
3
2
O
D
U
0
OTU1
1
32
1
32
1
32
1
6
O
D
U
1
1
6
O
T
U
1
TX16
TX1
RX1
RX16
TX16
TX1
RX1
RX16

Mode Port Diagram Port Description Board Name
Displayed on the
NMS
Compatible
mode
Standard
mode
Figure 14-167 Table 14-164 54THA(STND)

Figure 14-166 Port diagram of the THA board (ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0))
(compatible mode)
4(RX2/TX2)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
18(RX16/TX16)-1
17(RX15/TX15)-1
32xODU0
Backplane
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1295

Cross-connect
module
on the NMS.
Service processing
module
Table 14-163 Description of NM port of the THA board (ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1-
>ODU0))
interfaces.
ClientLP1 to ClientLP16 Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered
1.
ODU0LP1 to ODU0LP16 Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered
1 to 2.

Figure 14-167 Port diagram of the THA board (ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0))
(standard mode)
4(RX2/TX2)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
18(RX16/TX16)-1
17(RX15/TX15)-1
32xODU0
3(RX1/TX1)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-2
4(RX2/TX2)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-2
17(RX15/TX15)-1
17(RX15/TX15)-2
18(RX16/TX16)-2
18(RX16/TX16)-1
Backplane

Cross-connect
module
on the NMS.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1296
Multiplexing module
Table 14-164 Description of NM port of the THA board (ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1-
>ODU0))
interfaces. The paths are numbered 1 to 2.

l On the U2000, set the Port Working Mode to ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1-
>ODU0).
On the U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the local ODU0LP port and
other boards' ODU0LP ports. For details, see
1
in Figure 14-168.
On the U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the local RX/TX-1, RX/
TX-2 port and other boards' ODU0LP ports. For details, see
1
in Figure 14-169.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1297
Figure 14-168 Cross-connection diagram of the THA board (ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0))
(compatible mode)
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
THA
18(TX16/RX16)-1
1
Client side
WDM side
Cross-connect module Multiplexing module Cross-connect module
Other board a
Other board b
(standard mode)
(compatible mode)
Other board
a
Other board
b

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1298
Figure 14-169 Cross-connection diagram of the THA board (ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0))
(standard mode)
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
THA
18(TX16/RX16)-1
17(TX15/RX15)-1
3(TX1/RX1)-1
3(TX1/RX1)-2
4(TX2/RX2)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-2
1
WDM side
18(TX16/RX16)-1
17(TX15/RX15)-1
17(TX15/RX15)-2
18(TX16/RX16)-2
Client side
Other board a
Other board b
(standard mode)
(compatible mode)
Other board
a
Other board
b

The THA board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control
Figure 14-170 shows the block diagram of the functions of the THA board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1299
Figure 14-170 Functional modules and signal flow of the THA board
SCC

O/E
E/O
RX9
RX10
RX16
TX16
TX9
TX10
16X ODU0/8X ODU1
O/E
E/O
RX1
RX2
RX8
TX8
TX1
TX2
16X ODU0/8X ODU1
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Client side
Service
encapsulation
and mapping
module
Service
encapsulation
and mapping
module
Client-side
optical
module
1588v2
module
OTN
processing
module
Cross-
connect
module
OTN
processing
module
Cross-
connect
module

NOTE
For more information regarding the type of signals received on the client side, see section 14.12.3 Functions
and Features.
In the signal flow of the THA board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the THA to the backplane
of the THA, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
The client-side optical module receives 16 channels of optical signals from client equipment
through the RX1-RX16 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion.
After O/E conversion, the 16 channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing
and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out a maximum of 32
channels of ODU0 signals or 16 channels of ODU1 signals to the backplane.
l Receive direction
The signal processing module receives the electrical signals sent from the backplane. The
module performs operations such as ODU0 or ODU1 framing, demapping and
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1300
decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out 16 channels of Any signals to the
client-side optical module.
The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of Any electrical signals, and
then outputs 16 channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX16 optical
interfaces.
Module Function
Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of the standard optical signals.
to standard optical signals.
module, OTN processing module.
Implements the grooming of electrical signals between the THA and the cross-connect
board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are ODU1 or ODU0 signals.
Encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps the signals into the ODU0/
ODU1 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the Any
Processes overheads in OTN signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding.
l 1588v2 module
to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol, or extract the clock signal from the service signals that
come from a service board according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol and then send the
clock signal to the STG board.
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the THA board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1301
Figure 14-171 shows the front panel of the THA board.
Figure 14-171 Front panel of the THA board
THA
SMSFP WORK WITH
G.657B FIBER ONLY
G.657A2
2 TX
16 RX
RX 1
TX 15
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
RX 1
2 TX
16 RX TX 15
SM SFP WORK WITH
G.657B FIBER ONLY
G.657B

NOTE
To prevent the cabinet door from squeezing fibers, the board can only use G.657B fibers.
Indicators
Interfaces
Table 14-165 lists the type and function of each optical interface.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1302
Table 14-165 Types and functions of the interfaces on the THA board
RX1-RX16 LC Receives optical signals.
TX1-TX16 LC Transmits optical signals.

Laser Hazard Level
One slot houses one THA board.
Table 14-166 shows the valid slots for the THA board.
NOTE
Two THA boards cannot be housed in adjacent slots.
To easy maintenance of fibers, do not house the THA board in the most left or right slot.
Table 14-166 Valid slots for the THA board
Product Valid slots
IU42, IU45-IU51, IU54-IU67
IU35

For parameters of the THA, refer to.
Table 14-167 THA parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1303
Optical Interface
Name
Default: Used
channel of a board.
Optical Interface
Loopback
Outloop
Default: Non-
Loopback
Outloop
Default: Non-
Loopback
NOTE
This parameter can be set only when Port
Working Mode is set to ODU1_ODU0
mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1304
ESCON, FC-100,
FC-200, FDDI, FE,
FICON, FICON
Express, GE(TTT-
GMP), GE(GFP-T),
OC-3, OC-12, OC-48,
OTU-1, STM-1,
STM-4, STM-16
Default: None
NOTE
GMP; when Service Type is GE(GFP-T),
the encapsulation format is GFP-T. The
value GE(TTT-GMP) is recommended.
format.
The THA board's ports may work in any
of four working modes and the type of
the client-side services received by the
ports varies with the working modes.
NOTE
>ODU0): Supports DVB-ASI, ESCON,
FC-100, FDDI, FE, FICON, GE(GFP-
T), GE(TTT-GMP), OC-3, OC-12,
STM-1, and STM-4 services.
l ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any-
>ODU1): Supports Any, DVB-ASI,
ESCON, FC-100, FC-200, FDDI, FE,
FICON, FICON Express, STM-1,
STM-4, STM-16, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48,
and GE(GFP-T) services.
>ODU1): Supports FC-200, FICON-
Express, OC-48, OTU-1, and STM-16
services.
>ODU0): Supports OTU1 services.
Rate (Mbit/s)
l Channel 1 at each of
ports 201
(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1) to 216
(ClientLP16/
ClientLP16): 125 to
2200
l Channels 2 to 8 at
each of ports 201
(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1) to 216
(ClientLP16/
ClientLP16): 125 to
1250
Default: /
a board.
NOTE
This parameter can be set only when Service
Type is set to Any.
information.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1305
Default: Off
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
ALS Auxiliary
Condition
FW_Defect,
BW_Client_R_LOS,
BW_WDM_Defect,
FW_OPUk_CSF
Default: FW_Defect
triggering ALS.
BW_Client_R_LOS.
to BW_WDM_Defect.
l If an OPUk_CSF alarm is detected
on the WDM-side port of the local
Hold-off Time of
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
0s, 100ms, 200ms,
300ms, 400ms, 500ms,
600ms, 700ms, 800ms,
900ms, 1s, 1100ms,
1200ms, 1300ms,
1400ms, 1500ms,
1600ms, 1700ms,
1800ms, 1900ms, 2s
Default: 0s
related lasers.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1306
Hold-off Time of
Automatic Laser
Turn-On
0s, 100ms, 200ms,
300ms, 400ms, 500ms,
600ms, 700ms, 800ms,
900ms, 1s, 1100ms,
1200ms, 1300ms,
1400ms, 1500ms,
1600ms, 1700ms,
1800ms, 1900ms, 2s
Default: 0s
related lasers.
Default: Disabled
Mode
Default: Enabled
Default: 9600
Ethernet services.
Ethernet Working
Mode
Auto-Negotiation,
1000M Full-Duplex
Duplex
information.
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
to Disabled.
NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1307
OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None
board resides.
information.
Default: Disabled
convergence mode
(Any->ODU0), ODU1
non-convergence mode
(Any->ODU1), ODU1
convergence mode
(n*Any->ODU1),
ODU1_ODU0 mode
(OTU1->ODU1-
>ODU0), NONE Mode
(Not for port)
Default: ODU0 non-
convergence mode
(Any->ODU0)

14.12.13 THA Specifications
Optical Module
TN54TH
A
N/A S-16.1-15 km
1000 BASE-BX10-U
1000 BASE-BX10-D
1000 BASE-BX-U
1000 BASE-BX-D
1000 BASE-LX-10 km (I-1310-LC)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1308
NOTE
point.
NOTE
S-16.1 module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON,
STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals.
Optical Module Type S-16.1
-15 km
power
dBm 0
power
dBm -5
width
nm 1
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30
Eye pattern mask - G.959.1compliant
Receiver type - PIN

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1309
NOTE
transmissions)
Optical
Module Type
1000 BASE-
BX10-U
1000 BASE-
BX10-D
1000 BASE-
BX-U
1000 BASE-
BX-D
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Optical source
type
- SLM SLM SLM SLM
Target
transmission
distance
km 10 10 40 40
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1260 to 1360 1480 to 1500 1260 to 1360 1480 to 1500
Maximum
mean launched
power
dBm -3 -3 3 3
Minimum
mean launched
power
dBm -9 -9 -2 -2
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB 6 6 6 6
Eye pattern
mask
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1480 to 1500 1260 to 1360 1480 to 1500 1260 to 1360
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -19.5 -19.5 -23 -23
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm -3 -3 -3 -3
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1310
Optical
Module Type
1000 BASE-
BX10-U
1000 BASE-
BX10-D
1000 BASE-
BX-U
1000 BASE-
BX-D
Maximum
reflectance
dB -12 -12 -12 -12

NOTE
1000 BASE-LX-10 km module can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE and DVB-ASI
signals. The specifications listed below apply to GE signals. The actual values might be slightly different from
these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE, or DVB-ASI signals.
Optical Module Type 1000 BASE-LX-10 km
(I-1310-LC)
Optical source type - SLM
power
dBm -3
power
dBm -9.5
Receiver type - PIN

(8.7 in.)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1311
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN54THA 35 40

14.13 TOA
TOA: 8 Any-rate Ports Service Processing Board
The available functional version of the TOA board is TN54.
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN5
4TO
A
Y Y Y N N N

Variants
The TN54TOA board has only one variant: TN54TOA01.
As a type of tributary board, The maximum access capacity of the TOA at the client side is 20
Gbit/s.
Table 14-171 provides the application scenarios for the TOA board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1312
Table 14-171 Application scenarios for the TOA board
Applicat
ion
Scenario
Maximum
Input Capacity
(Client Side)
Mapping Path Maximum
Output
Capacity
(Backplane
Side)
Port Working
Mode
Scenario
1
8 x FE/FDDI/GE/
STM-1/STM-4/
OC-3/OC-12/
FC100/FICON/
DVB-ASI/
ESCON/SDI
Any
a
<->ODU0
8 x ODU0 ODU0 non-
convergence
mode (Any-
>ODU0)
Scenario
2
8 x HD-SDI/
STM16/OC-48/
FC200/FICON
Express/OTU1
Any
a
<->ODU1
8 x ODU1 ODU1 non-
convergence
mode (Any-
>ODU1)
Scenario
3
8 x FE/FDDI/
STM-1/OC-3/
DVB-ASI/SDI/
ESCON/STM-4/
OC-12/GE/
FC100/FICON/
STM-16/FC200/
FICON Express/
HD-SDI/HD-
SDIRBR
Any
a
<->ODU1
(1 to 8) x ODU1 ODU1
convergence
mode (n*Any-
>ODU1)
Scenario
4
8 x OTU1 OTU1<-
>ODU1<-
>ODU0
16 x ODU0 ODU1_ODU0
mode (OTU1-
>ODU1-
>ODU0)
Scenario
5
5 x 3G-SDI/3G-
SDIRBR
3G-SDI/3G-
SDIRBR<-
>ODUflex
5 x ODUflex ODUflex non-
convergence
mode (Any-
>ODUflex)
4 x FC400/
FICON4G
FC400/
FICON4G<-
>ODUflex
4 x ODUflex
a:"Any" in the table indicates the client-side service supported in the corresponding
application scenario.

The TOA board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer, and to provide
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1313
Table 14-172 Functions and features of the TOA board
Function
and
Feature
Description
Basic
function
TOA converts signals as follows:
l 8 x (125 Mbit/s to 1.25 Gbit/s signals) <-> 8 x ODU0.
l 8 x (1.49 Gbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s signals) <-> 8 x ODU1.
l 8 x (125 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s signals) <-> 1 to 8 x ODU1.
l 8 x OTU1 <-> 16 x ODU0.
l 5 x 3G-SDI/3G-SDIRBR <-> 5 x ODUflex.
l 4 x FC400/FICON4G <-> 4 x ODUflex.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1314
Function
and
Feature
Description
Client-side
service type
HD-SDI: Bit-serial digital interface for high-definition television systems at a
rate of 1.49 Gbit/s
HD-SDIRBR: Bit-serial digital interface for high-definition television systems
at a rate of 1.49/1.001 Gbit/s
3G-SDIRBR: Video service at a rate of 2.97/1.001 Gbit/s
NOTE
The TOA board supports both GE electrical signal and GE optical signal.
The TOA board supports access of SDI, HD-SDI, HD-SDIRBR, 3G-SDI, 3G-SDIRBR,
and DVB-ASI electrical signals. When the board is used to accept these electrical signals,
a digital video O/E converter must be used for O/E or E/O conversion and the optical
module of the converter must agree with the board optical module specifications. The
digital video O/E converter is a third-party device. Customers can purchase a digital video
O/E converter by themselves.
NOTE
Cross-
connect
capabilities
Cross-connects a maximum of 16 channels of ODU0 signals or 8 channels of
ODU1 signals through the backplane bus and cross-connect board.
Cross-connects a maximum of five channels of ODUflex signals by using buses
on the backplane and the cross-connect board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1315
Function
and
Feature
Description
OTN
function
l The mapping process complies with ITU-T G.7041 and ITU-T G.709. The
board supports the frame format and overhead processing by referring to
the ITU-T G.709.
l Supports PM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU0.
l Supports TCM and PM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU1.
l Supports PM function for ODUflex.
l Supports PM non-intrusive monitoring for ODUflex.
l Supports the SM, TCM and PM functions for OTU1.
ESC
function
Supported
PRBS test
function
NOTE
is STM-1/OC3, STM-4/OC-12, STM-16/OC-48, or OTU1.
LPT
function
This function is supported only when the TOA board receives FE or GE
services on its client side.
FEC
encoding
Supports forward error correction (FEC) on the client side that complies with
ITU-T G.709, only when the service type is OTU1.
Alarms and
performanc
e events
monitoring
power of the laser.
ALS
function
NOTE
The board supports the Test frame function only when the Service Type is GE(GFP-
T).
Latency
measureme
nt
ODUk layer between two tributary boards supporting the latency measurement
function can be measured, and the latency data is displayed on the U2000.
NOTE
This function is not supported when the client-side service type is OTU1.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1316
Function
and
Feature
Description
IEEE
1588v2
Supports the TC, TC+OC, BC, and OC modes when the client-side service type
is GE (GFP-T).
Supports the BC and OC modes when the client-side service type is OTU1.
NOTE
When receiving GE (GFP-T) services, the TX8/RX8 optical port cannot process IEEE
1588v2 clock signals.
When receiving OTU1 services, the board only supports frequency synchronization using
the receiving and transmitting timestamps in Sync messages of the IEEE 1588v2 protocol.
It does not support frequency synchronization using the physical clock.
Physical
clock
When receiving GE(GFP-T) services on the client side, the board can support
synchronous Ethernet processing instead of synchronous Ethernet transparent
transmission.
support synchronous Ethernet transparent transmission instead of synchronous
Ethernet processing.
In ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0), when the client-side
service type is OTU1, synchronous Ethernet processing is supported but
synchronous Ethernet transparent transmission is not supported.
Electrical-
layer
ASON
Supported
Protection
scheme
NOTE
SNCP protection.
ODU0 tributary SNCP protection is supported only in ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1-
>ODU1->ODU0).
Ethernet
service
mapping
mode
Supports encapsulation of GE services in GE(TTT-GMP) or GE(GFP-T).
Ethernet
port
working
mode
GE(TTT-GMP):
Auto-Negotiation
1000M Full-Duplex
Loopback Channel
Loopback
Inloop Supported
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1317
Function
and
Feature
Description
Outloop
NOTE
The Channel Loopback is supported only when port
working mode is ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1-
>ODU1->ODU0).
Outloop
Protocols or
standards
compliance
Protocols or
standards for
transparent
transmission
(non-
performance
monitoring)
IEEE 802.3u
IEEE 802.3z
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
PI)
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2
(FC-FS-2)
INTERFACE (FC-PH)
Television Systems
Interface (ASI)
Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol (PHY)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1318
Function
and
Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards for
service
processing
(performanc
e
monitoring)
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.873.1
ITU-T G.694.1

This section describes the physical ports displayed on the NMS.
Table 14-173 Mapping between the physical ports on the TOA board and the port numbers
TX1/RX1 3
TX2/RX2 4
TX3/RX3 5
TX4/RX4 6
TX5/RX5 7
TX6/RX6 8
TX7/RX7 9
TX8/RX8 10

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1319
NOTE
14.13.5 TOA scenario 1: ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any-
>ODU0)
The TOA board performs conversion between eight channels of optical signals at a rate in the
range of 125 Mbit/s to 1.25 Gbit/s and eight channels of ODU0 electrical signals, see Figure
14-172.
Figure 14-172 Position of the TOA in a WDM system (Scenario 1)
8xODU0 1xOTU2
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
N
S
2
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
N
S
2
1xOTU2
TOA
8
O
D
U
0
8
A
n
y
1
8
1
8
1
8
1
8
8xODU0
8
O
D
U
0
RX1
TOA
8
O
D
U
0
8
A
n
y
8
O
D
U
0
FE/FDDI/GE/STM-1/
STM-4/OC-3/OC-12/
FC100/FICON/DVB-
ASI/ESCON/SDI
FE/FDDI/GE/STM-1/
STM-4/OC-3/OC-12/
FC100/FICON/DVB-
ASI/ESCON/SDI
TX1
RX8
TX8
RX1
TX1
RX8
TX8

The TOA board can work in the standard or compatible mode. For information about the standard
and compatible modes, see 12.2.3 Standard Mode and Compatible Mode.
Displayed
on the NMS
Compatible
mode
Figure 14-173 Table 14-175 54TOA
Standard
mode
(STND)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1320
Figure 14-173 Port diagram of the TOA board (ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0))
(compatible mode)
4(RX2/TX2)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
10(RX8/TX8)-1
8xODU0
Backplane

Cross-connect module Service processing module
on the NMS.
>ODU0))
interfaces.
ClientLP1ClientLP8 Internal logical port. The paths are numbered 1 to 2.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1321
(standard mode)
4(RX2/TX2)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
10(RX8/TX8)-1
8xODU0
Backplane
NMS.

>ODU0))
interfaces.

>ODU0).
NOTE
If all the eight clientside ports are used to receive and transmit GE(TTT-GMP) services, users can
configure the 8 * GE->8 * ODU0 service package for the board on the NMS. This simultaneously sets
the Port Working Mode to ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0) and the Service Type to GE
(TTT-GMP) for the eight ports.
l When the TOA board works in compatible mode:
On the U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the internal RX/TX and
ClientLP ports. For details, see
1
in Figure 14-175.
2
in Figure 14-175.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1322
l When the TOA board works in standard mode:
On the U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the RX/TX port and other
boards's ODU0LP ports. For details, see
1
in Figure 14-176.
(compatible mode)
8(TX6/RX6)-1
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
TOA
10(TX8/RX8)-1
1
2
Client side
The client side of the TOA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards,
WDM side
Other board a
Other board b
(standard mode)
(compatible mode)
Other board
a
Other board
b

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1323
(standard mode)
8(TX6/RX6)-1
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1 TOA
10(TX8/RX8)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
1
Client side
WDM side
Other
board b
(compatible
mode)
Other
board a
(standard
mode)
Other board
a
Other board
b

NOTE
When the TOA board connects to a TOM board that uses channel 2 on the ClientLP port, a client-side optical
port on the TOA board must be cross-connected to channel 2 on the ClientLP port of the TOA board. In other
cases, configure cross-connections from channel 1 on the ClientLP port of the TOM board to the client-side
ports on the TOA board.
When creating electrical cross-connections between the ClientLP port of the TOA board and other boards's
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1324
14.13.6 TOA scenario 2: ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any-
>ODU1)
range of 1.49 Gbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s and eight channels of ODU1 electrical signals, see Figure
14-177.
8xODU1 2xOTU2
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
N
D
2
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
N
D
2
2xOTU2
TOA
8
O
D
U
0
8
A
n
y
1
8
1
8
1
8
1
8
8xODU1
8
O
D
U
1
RX1
TOA
8
O
D
U
0
8
A
n
y
8
O
D
U
1
HD-SDI/STM16/
OC-48/FC200/FICON
Express/OTU1
HD-SDI/STM16/
OC-48/FC200/FICON
Express/OTU1
TX1
RX8
TX8
RX1
TX1
RX8
TX8

board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ClientLP
Displayed
on the NMS
Compatible
mode
Figure 14-178 Table 14-178 TOA
Standard
mode
Figure 14-179 Table 14-179 TOA(STND)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1325
(compatible mode)
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
10(RX8/TX8)-1
9(RX7/TX7)-1
8(RX6/TX6)-1
8xODU1
Backplane

Cross-connect
module
Service processing
module
on the NMS.
>ODU1))
interfaces.
ClientLP1ClientLP8 Internal logical port. The paths are numbered 1.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1326
(standard mode)
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
10(RX8/TX8)-1
9(RX7/TX7)-1
8(RX6/TX6)-1
8xODU1
Backplane

Cross-connect
module
on the NMS.
Service processing
module
>ODU1))
interfaces.

>ODU1).
NOTE
If all the eight client-side ports are used to receive and transmit STM-16 services, users can configure the
8 * STM-16/OC-48->8 * ODU1 service package for the board. This simultaneously sets the Port
Working Mode to ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1) and Service Type to STM-16 for the
eight ports.
l On the U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the local ClientLP port and other
boards's ODU1LP ports. For details, see
1
in Figure 14-180.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1327
1
in Figure 14-180.
1
in Figure 14-181.
(compatible mode)
1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
TOA
10(TX8/RX8)-1
Client side
WDM side
Other board a
Other board b
(standard mode)
(compatible mode)
Other board
a
Other board
b

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1328
(standard mode)
Client side
WDM side
8(TX6/RX6)-1
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
TOA
10(TX8/RX8)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
1
Other
board a
Other
board b
(standard
mode)
(compatible
mode)
Other board
a
Other board
b

14.13.7 TOA scenario 3: ODU1 convergence mode (n * Any->ODU1)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1329
range of 125 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and one to eight channels of ODU1 electrical signals, as shown
in Figure 14-182.
(1~8)xODU1 2xOTU2
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
N
D
2
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
N
D
2
2xOTU2
TOA
8
O
D
U
0
8
A
n
y
(1~8)xODU1
TOA
8
O
D
U
0
8
A
n
y
(
1
~
8
)
O
D
U
1
FE/FDDI/STM-1/OC-
3/STM-16/
DVB-ASI/SDI/ESCON/
STM-4/OC-
12/GE/FC100/
FICON/FC200/
FICON Express/
HD-SDI/HD-SDIRBR
(
1
~
8
)
O
D
U
1
FE/FDDI/STM-1/OC-
3/STM-16/
DVB-ASI/SDI/ESCON/
STM-4/OC-
12/GE/FC100/
FICON/FC200/
FICON Express/
HD-SDI/HD-SDIRBR
RX1
TX1
RX8
TX8
RX1
TX1
RX8
TX8

Displayed
on the NMS
Compatible
mode
Standard
mode
(STND)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1330
Figure 14-183 Port diagram of the TOA board (ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1))
(compatible mode)
4(RX2/TX2)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
10(RX8/TX8)-1
9(RX7/TX7)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
7(RX5/TX5)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
8(RX6/TX6)-1
1-8xODU1
Backplane

Cross-connect
module
on the NMS.
Table 14-181 Description of NM port of the TOA board
interfaces.
ClientLP1ClientLP8 Internal logical port. The paths are numbered 1 to 8.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1331
Figure 14-184 Port diagram of the TOA board (ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1))
(standard mode)
4(RX2/TX2)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
10(RX8/TX8)-1
9(RX7/TX7)-1
1~8xODU1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
7(RX5/TX5)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
8(RX6/TX6)-1
Backplane

Cross-connect
module
on the NMS.
Table 14-182 Description of NM port of the TOA board
interfaces.
ConvGroup1ConvGroup8 Internal logical port. The paths are numbered 1 to 8.

l On the U2000, set the Port Working Mode to ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any-
>ODU1).
On the U2000, create cross-connections between the local RX/TX port and ClientLP
1
in Figure 14-185.
Create cross-connections between the local ClientLP port and other boards' ODU1LP
2
in Figure 14-185.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1332
On the U2000, create cross-connections between the local RX/TX port and ConvGroup
1
in Figure 14-185.
Create cross-connections between the local ConvGroup port and other boards' ODU1LP
2
in Figure 14-185.
NOTE
When the rate of services received on the client side is greater than 1.25 Gbit/s, these services must be configured
on the first optical channel of each ClientLP.
Figure 14-185 Cross-connection diagram of the TOA board (ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1))
(compatible mode)
1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
TOA
10(TX8/RX8)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
2
Client side
The client side of the TOA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which
WDM side
Other board a
Other board b
(standard
mode)
(compatible
mode)
Other board
a
Other board
b
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1333

Figure 14-186 Cross-connection diagram of the TOA board (ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1)) (standard
mode)
201(ConvGroup1/Conv
Group1)-8
201(ConvGroup1/Conv
Group1)-1
1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
TOA
10(TX8/RX8)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
208(ConvGroup8/Conv
Group8)-1
202(ConvGroup2/Conv
Group2)-1
202(ConvGroup2/Conv
Group2)-8
208(ConvGroup8/Conv
Group8)-8
201(ConvGroup1/Conv
Group1)-1
202(ConvGroup2/Conv
Group2)-1
208(ConvGroup8/Conv
Group8)-1
WDM side
2
Multiplexing module
Client side
Other board a
Other board b
(standard
mode)
(compatible
mode)
Other board
a
Other board
b

14.13.8 TOA scenario 4: ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1-
>ODU0)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1334
The TOA board performs conversion between eight OTU1 optical signals and 16 ODU0
electrical signals, see Figure 14-187.
OTU1
2xOTU2
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
N
D
2
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
N
D
2
2xOTU2
1
16
TOA
8
O
D
U
0
8
O
D
U
1
16xODU0
8
O
T
U
1
16xODU0
TOA
8
O
D
U
0
8
O
D
U
1
8
O
T
U
1
1
6
O
D
U
0
1
6
O
D
U
0
OTU1
1
16
1
16
1
16
TX1
RX1
TX8
RX8
TX1
RX1
TX8
RX8

Displayed
on the NMS
Compatible
mode
Standard
mode
(STND)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1335
Figure 14-188 Port diagram of the TOA board (ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0))
(compatible mode)
4(RX2/TX2)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
10(RX8/TX8)-1
9(RX7/TX7)-1
16xODU0
Backplane

Cross-connect
module
on the NMS.
Service processing
module
Table 14-184 Description of NM port of the TOA board (ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1-
>ODU0))
interfaces.
ODU0LP1ODU0LP8 Internal logical port. The paths are numbered 1 to 2.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1336
Figure 14-189 Port diagram of the TOA board (ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0))
(standard mode)
4(RX2/TX2)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
10(RX8/TX8)-1
9(RX7/TX7)-1
16xODU0
3(RX1/TX1)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-2
4(RX2/TX2)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-2
9(RX7/TX7)-1
9(RX7/TX7)-2
10(RX8/TX8)-1
10(RX8/TX8)-2
Backplane

Cross-connect
module
Multiplexing module
must be configured on
the NMS.
Table 14-185 Description of NM port of the TOA board (ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1-
>ODU0))
interfaces. The paths are numbered 1 to 2.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1337
l On the U2000, set the Port Working Mode to ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1-
>ODU0).
U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the local ODU0LP port and other
boards' ODU0LP ports. For details, see
1
in Figure 14-190.
U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the local RX/TX-1, RX/TX-2 port
and other boards' ODU0LP ports. For details, see
1
in Figure 14-191.
Figure 14-190 Cross-connection diagram of the TOA board (ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0))
(compatible mode)
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
TOA
10(TX10/RX10)-1
1
Client side
WDM side
Cross-connect module Multiplexing module Cross-connect module
Other board a
Other board b
(standard mode)
(compatible mode)
Other board
a
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1338
Other board
b

Figure 14-191 Cross-connection diagram of the TOA board (ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0))
(standard mode)
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
3(TX1/RX1)-1
3(TX1/RX1)-2
4(TX2/RX2)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-2
9(TX7/RX7)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-2
10(TX8/RX8)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-2
1
TOA
WDM side
Multiplexing module
Other board a
Other board b
(standard
mode)
(compatible
mode)
Client side
Other board
a
Other board
b

14.13.9 TOA scenario 5: ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any-
>ODUflex)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1339
The TOA board performs conversion between five 3G-SDI/3G-SDIRBR optical signals and five
ODUflex electrical signals, see Figure 14-192.
Figure 14-192 Position of the TOA in a WDM system (3G-SDI/3G-SDIRBR<->ODUflex)
5
4xOTU2
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
N
Q
2
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
N
Q
2
4xOTU2
TOA
1
5
1
5
1
5
1
5
5xODUflex
5
TOA
3G-SDI
3G-SDIRBR
5
x
3
G
-
S
D
I
/
3
G
-
S
D
I
R
B
R
5
x
O
D
U
f
l
e
x
5xODUflex
5
x
O
D
U
f
l
e
x
3G-SDI
3G-SDIRBR
5
x
3
G
-
S
D
I
/
3
G
-
S
D
I
R
B
R
RX1
TX1
RX8
TX8
RX1
TX1
RX8
TX8
NOTE
Each 3G-SDI/3G-SDIRBR service uses three timeslots of an ODUflex, requiring the total bandwidth of 3.75
Gbit/s.

The TOA board performs conversion between four FC400/FICON4G optical signals and four
ODUflex electrical signals, see Figure 14-193.
Figure 14-193 Position of the TOA in a WDM system (FC400<->ODUflex)
4
4xOTU2
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
N
Q
2
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
N
Q
2
4xOTU2
TOA
1
4
1
4
1
4
1
4
4xODUflex
4
TOA
4xFC400/
FICON4G
4
x
F
C
4
0
0
/
F
I
C
O
N
4
G
4
x
O
D
U
f
l
e
x
4
x
F
C
4
0
0
/
F
I
C
O
N
4
G
4
x
O
D
U
f
l
e
x
4xODUflex
4xFC400/
FICON4G
RX1
TX1
RX8
TX8
RX1
TX1
RX8
TX8

NOTE
Only the TN53NQ2 board supports ODUflex.
Each FC400/FICON4G service uses four timeslots of an ODUflex, requiring the total bandwidth of 5 Gbit/s.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1340
Displayed
on the NMS
Compatible
mode
Standard
mode
(STND)

Figure 14-194 Port diagram of the TOA board (ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any-
>ODUflex)) (compatible mode)
5xODUflex
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
10(RX8/TX8)-1
9(RX7/TX7)-1
8(RX6/TX6)-1
Other line board
Backplane

Cross-connect
module
Service processing
module
on the NMS.
Table 14-187 Description of NM port of the TOA board (ODUflex non-convergence mode
(Any->ODUflex))
interfaces.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1341

Figure 14-195 Port diagram of the TOA board (ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any-
>ODUflex)) (standard mode)
4(RX2/TX2)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
10(RX8/TX8)-1
5xODUflex
Backplane
Other line board

Cross-connect
module
on the NMS.
Service processing
module
Table 14-188 Description of NM port of the TOA board (ODUflex non-convergence mode
(Any->ODUflex))
interfaces.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1342
l On the U2000, set the Port Working Mode to ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any-
>ODUflex).
other boards' ODUflex ports. For details, see
2
in Figure 14-196.
other boards' ODUflex ports. For details, see
1
in Figure 14-197.
NOTE
When configuring a cross-connection, ODUflex Timeslot is 3 if the client service type is 3G-SDI/3G-
SDIRBR, and ODUflex Timeslot is 4 if the client service type is FC400/FICON4G.
Figure 14-196 ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex) (compatible mode)
WDM side
Other board
Client side
2
8(TX6/RX6)-1
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
TOA
10(TX8/RX8)-1
1

Other
board
TN52ND2T04 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN52NS2T04 / TN52NS2T05 /
TN52NS2T06 / TN52NS201M01 / TN52NS201M02 / TN53NS2 / TN54NS4
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1343
Figure 14-197 ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex) (standard mode)
1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
TOA
10(TX8/RX8)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
WDM side
Other board
The client side of the TOA board are cross-connected to the WDM
Client side

Other
board
TN52ND2T04 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN52NS2T04 / TN52NS2T05 /
The TOA board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control
and communication module, 1588v2 module, and power supply module.
Figure 14-198 shows the block diagram of the functions of the TOA board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1344
Figure 14-198 Functional modules and signal flow of the TOA board
Client side

Backplane (service cross-
connection)
O/E
E/O
RX1
RX2
RX8
TX8
TX1
TX2
Service
encapsulation
and mapping
module
OTN
processing
module
Cross-
connect
module
Client-side
optical
module
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
16xODU0/8xODU1/5xODUflex
1588 v2
module

NOTE
When used to receive GE electrical signals, the board must use a client-side electrical module to perform
power level conversion, and then sends the signals to the service encapsulation and mapping module for
processing.
In the signal flow of the TOA board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TOA to the backplane
of the TOA, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
The client-side optical module receives 8 channels of optical signals from client equipment
through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion.
After O/E conversion, the 8 channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing
and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out a maximum of 16
channels of ODU0 signals, or 8 channels of ODU1 or 5 channels of ODUflex signals to
the backplane.
l Receive direction
The signal processing module receives the electrical signals sent from the backplane. The
module performs operations such as ODU0, or ODU1, or ODUflex framing, demapping
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1345
and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out 8 channels of Any signals to the
client-side optical module.
interfaces.
Module Function
to standard optical signals.
module, OTN processing module.
Implements the grooming of electrical signals between the TOA and the cross-connect
board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are ODU1, or ODU0, or
ODUflex signals.
Encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps the signals into the ODU0/
ODU1/ODUflex payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has
the Any performance monitoring function.
Processes overheads in OTN signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding.
l 1588v2 module
to the STG board
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TOA board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1346
Figure 14-199 shows the front panel of the TOA board.
Figure 14-199 Front panel of the TOA board

Indicators
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1347
Interfaces
Table 14-189 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TOA board
TX1-TX8 LC Transmits the service signal.
RX1-RX8 LC Receives the service signal.

Laser Hazard Level
One slot houses one TOA board.
Table 14-190 shows the valid slots for the TOA board.
Table 14-190 Valid slots for the TOA board
Product Valid slots

For parameters of the TOA, refer toTable 14-191.
Table 14-191 TOA parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
Optical Interface
Name
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1348
Default: Used
channel of a board.
Optical Interface
Loopback
Outloop
Default: Non-
Loopback
Outloop
Default: Non-
Loopback
NOTE
This parameter can be set only when Port
Working Mode is set to ODU1_ODU0
mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1349
SDI, ESCON, FC-100,
FC-200, FC-400,
FDDI, FE, FICON,
FICON Express, GE
(TTT-GMP), GE(GFP-
T), HD-SDI, HD-
SDIRBR, OC-3,
OC-12, OC-48, OTU-1,
STM-1, STM-4,
STM-16, 3G-SDI, 3G-
SDIRBR
Default: None
NOTE
GMP; when Service Type is GE(GFP-T),
the encapsulation format is GFP-T. The
value GE(TTT-GMP) is recommended.
format.
NOTE
The TOA board's ports may work in any of
five working modes and the type of the
client-side services received by the ports
varies with the working modes.
>ODU0): Supports DVB-ASI, ESCON,
FC-100, FDDI, FE, FICON, GE(GFP-
T), GE(TTT-GMP), OC-3, OC-12, SDI,
STM-1, and STM-4 services.
l ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any-
>ODU1): Supports Any, DVB-ASI,
ESCON, FC-100, FC-200, FDDI, FE,
FICON, FICON Express, STM-1,
STM-4, STM-16, OC-3, OC-12 , SDI,
HDSDI, HD-SDIRBR, and GE(GFP-T)
services.
>ODU1): Supports FC-200, FICON-
Express, HDSDI, HD-SDIRBR, OC-48,
OTU-1, and STM-16 services.
>ODU0): Supports OTU1 services.
l ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any-
>ODUflex): Supports FC400, 3G-SDI,
3G-SDIRBR services.
NOTE
The FICON4G service and the FC400
service are processed identically. For the
FICON4G service, you can configure it as
the FC400 service on the U2000.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1350
Rate (Mbit/s)
l Channel 1 at each of
ports 201
(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1) to 208
(ClientLP8/
ClientLP8): 125 to
2200
l Channels 2 to 8 at
each of ports 201
(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1) to 208
(ClientLP8/
ClientLP8): 125 to
1250
Default: /
board.
NOTE
Type is set to Any.
information.
Default: Off
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1351
ALS Auxiliary
Condition
FW_Defect,
BW_Client_R_LOS,
BW_WDM_Defect,
FW_ODUk_CSF
Default: FW_Defect
triggering ALS.
BW_Client_R_LOS.
to BW_WDM_Defect.
Hold-off Time of
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
0s, 100ms, 200ms,
300ms, 400ms, 500ms,
600ms, 700ms, 800ms,
900ms, 1s, 1100ms,
1200ms, 1300ms,
1400ms, 1500ms,
1600ms, 1700ms,
1800ms, 1900ms, 2s
Default: 0s
related lasers.
Hold-off Time of
Automatic Laser
Turn-On
0s, 100ms, 200ms,
300ms, 400ms, 500ms,
600ms, 700ms, 800ms,
900ms, 1s, 1100ms,
1200ms, 1300ms,
1400ms, 1500ms,
1600ms, 1700ms,
1800ms, 1900ms, 2s
Default: 0s
related lasers.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1352
Default: Disabled
Mode
Default: Enabled
Default: 9600
Ethernet services.
Ethernet Working
Mode
Auto-Negotiation,
1000M Full-Duplex
Duplex
information.
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
to Disabled.
NOTE
OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None
board resides.
information.
Default: Disabled
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1353
convergence mode
(Any->ODU0), ODU1
(Any->ODU1), ODU1
convergence mode
(n*Any->ODU1),
ODU1_ODU0 mode
(OTU1->ODU1-
>ODU0), ODUflex
(Any->ODUflex),
NONE Mode(Not for
port)
Default: ODU0 non-
convergence mode
(Any->ODU0)

14.13.14 TOA Specifications
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1354
Optical Module
TN54TO
A
N/A I-16-2 km
S-16.1-15 km
L-16.1-40 km
L-16.2-80 km
1000 BASE-BX10-U
1000 BASE-BX10-D
1000 BASE-BX-U
1000 BASE-BX-D
1000 BASE-LX-10 km
1000 BASE-LX-40 km
1000 BASE-ZX-80 km
1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km
2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km
270 Mbit/s to 3 Gbit/s multirate (Video eSFP)-10
km
4.25 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km

NOTE
point.
NOTE
OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, and DVB-ASI signals.
module.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1355
Optical
Module
Type
I-16-2 km S-16.1-15
km
L-16.1-40
km
L-16.2-80
km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Optical
source type
- MLM SLM SLM SLM
Target
transmission
distance
- 2 km (1.2 mi.) 15 km (9.3
mi.)
40 km (24.9
mi.)
80 km (49.7
mi.)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -3 0 3 3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -10 -5 -2 -2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm N/A 1 1 1
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB N/A 30 30 30
Eye pattern
mask
- G.957-compliant
G.959.1-compliant
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN APD APD
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1356
Optical
Module
Type
I-16-2 km S-16.1-15
km
L-16.1-40
km
L-16.2-80
km
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1270 to 1580 1270 to 1580 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -18 -18 -27 -28
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm -3 0 -9 -9
Maximum
reflectance
dB -27 -27 -27 -27

NOTE
transmissions)
Optical
Module Type
1000 BASE-
BX10-U
1000 BASE-
BX10-D
1000 BASE-
BX-U
1000 BASE-
BX-D
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Optical source
type
- SLM SLM SLM SLM
Target
transmission
distance
km 10 10 40 40
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1260 to 1360 1480 to 1500 1260 to 1360 1480 to 1500
Maximum
mean launched
power
dBm -3 -3 3 3
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1357
Optical
Module Type
1000 BASE-
BX10-U
1000 BASE-
BX10-D
1000 BASE-
BX-U
1000 BASE-
BX-D
Minimum
mean launched
power
dBm -9 -9 -2 -2
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB 6 6 6 6
Eye pattern
mask
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1480 to 1500 1260 to 1360 1480 to 1500 1260 to 1360
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -19.5 -19.5 -23 -23
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm -3 -3 -3 -3
Maximum
reflectance
dB -12 -12 -12 -12

NOTE
2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, and
FE signals.
to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FDDI, FICON, FE and DVB-ASI signals.
NOTE
802.3.
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.
5 km
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1358
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.
5 km
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
Target
transmission
distance
- 0.5 km (0.3
mi.)
10 km (6.2
mi.)
40 km (24.9
mi.)
80 km (49.7
mi.)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -2.5 -3 0 5
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -9.5 -9 -5 -2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 9 9 9 9
Eye pattern
mask
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN PIN PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -17 -20 -20 -23
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm 0 -3 -3 -3

NOTE
STM-1, OC-3, FDDI, FICON, FE, DVB-ASI signals.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1359
NOTE
FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The
specifications listed below apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals.
wavelengths)
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km
(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Target transmission
distance
- 40 km (24.9 mi.) 80 km (49.7 mi.)
range
nm 1471 to 1611 1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 5 5
power
dBm 0 0
Central wavelength
deviation
nm 6.5 6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 1.0 1.0
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30 30
G.959.1-compliant
range
nm 1270 to 1620 1270 to 1620
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm -3 -9
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1360
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km
(eSFP CWDM)-80
km

NOTE
2.67 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP DWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100,
FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, and DVB-ASI signals.
module.
wavelengths)
km
Target transmission
distance
- 120 km (74.6 mi.)
power
dBm 4
power
dBm 0
width
nm 1
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1361
km
Receiver type - APD
range
nm N/A

NOTE
SDI module can be used to access SDI, HD-SDI, HD-SDIRBR, 3G-SDI, and 3G-SDIRBR signals.
Multirate (Video
eSFP)-10 km
Service rate Gbit/s 3
power
dBm 0
power
dBm -7
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1362
Multirate (Video
eSFP)-10 km
width
nm 3.0
Receiver type - PIN

NOTE
4.25 Gbit/s Multirate-0.3 km, 4.25 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km module can be used to access FC400, and FICON4G
signals.
Multirate-0.3 km
4.25 Gbit/s
Multirate-10 km
Target transmission
distance
- 0.3 km (0.2 mi.) 10 km (6.2 mi.)
Transmitter parameter
specifications at point S
nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm -1.1 -1
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm -9 -8.4
Eye pattern mask - Compliant with Fiber Channel-physical interface
(FC-PI-2) parameter template
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1363
Multirate-0.3 km
4.25 Gbit/s
Multirate-10 km
range
nm 770 to 860 1260 to 1600
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm 0 0

(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN54TOA 23 25

14.14 TOG
TOG: 8 x GE tributary service processing board
The available functional version of the TOG board is TN52.
Huawei office.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1364
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN5
2TO
G
Y Y Y N Y Y

Variants
The TN52TOG board has only one variant: TN52TOG01.
14.14.2 Application
As a type of tributary board, the TOG board implements conversion between 8 channels of GE
optical signals or GE electrical signals and 4 channels of ODU1 electrical signals or 8 channels
of ODU0 electrical signals through cross-connection.
For the position of the TOG board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-200 and Figure
14-201.
Figure 14-200 Position of the TOG board in the WDM system (OptiX OSN 8800)
TX1
TX8
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
TOG
GE
N
S
2
N
S
2
TOG
GE
8xODU0 8xODU0
1 1 1 1
8 8 8 8
8
x
O
D
U
0
8
x
O
D
U
0
RX1
RX8
TX1
RX1
TX1
RX1

Figure 14-201 Position of the TOG board in the WDM system (OptiX OSN 6800/3800)
TX1
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
TOG
GE
N
S
2
N
S
2
TOG
GE
4xODU1 4xODU1
1 1 1 1
8 8 8 8
8
x
O
D
U
0
8
x
O
D
U
0
4
x
O
D
U
1
4
x
O
D
U
1
RX1
TX8
RX8
TX1
RX1
TX8
RX8
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1365

The TOG board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer.
NOTE
Only the OptiX OSN 8800 supports ODU0.
Table 14-199 Functions and features of the TOG board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function TOG converts signals as follows:
l 8 x GE<->8 x ODU0
l 8 x GE<->4 x ODU1
Client-side
service type
NOTE
The TOG board supports both GE electrical signal and GE optical signal.
The TOG board supports GE services that can be mapped using the TTT-GMP or
GFP-T procedure.
Cross-connect
capabilities
OptiX OSN 8800: Supports the cross-connection of eight channels of
ODU0 signals between the TOG board and the cross-connect board
OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the cross-connection of four channels of
ODU1 signals between the TOG board and the cross-connect board
OptiX OSN 3800: Supports the grooming of four ODU1 signals from one
OTN function l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing defined in
the ITU-T G.709. The mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.
709.
l Supports PM functions for ODU1/ODU0.
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
power of the laser.
NOTE
The TOG board supports remote monitoring (RMON) only at the receive end .
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1366
Function and
Feature
Description
PRBS test
function
Not supported.
Test frame Not supported.
IEEE 1588v2 Supports the TC, TC+OC, BC, and OC modes only when the client-side
service type is GE (GFP-T).
NOTE
The TOG board supports only two channels IEEE 1588v2 signals.
Physical clock When receiving GE(GFP-T) services on the client side, the board can
support synchronous Ethernet processing instead of synchronous
Ethernet transparent transmission.
Electrical-layer
ASON
Supported
Protection
scheme
Ethernet service
mapping mode
Supports encapsulation of GE services in GE(GFP-T) or GE(TTT-GMP).
Ethernet port
working mode
1000M Full-Duplex
Loopback WDM side -
Outloop Supported
Protocols or
standards
compliance
Protocols or
standards for
transparent
transmission
(non-
performance
monitoring)
IEEE 802.3z
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1367
Function and
Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards for
service
processing
(performance
monitoring)
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.873.1
ITU-T G.694.1

The TOG board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, 1588v2
Figure 14-202 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TOG board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1368
Figure 14-202 Functional modules and signal flow of the TOG board
Client side
O/E
E/O
RX1
RX2
RX8
TX8
TX1
TX2
8
8
Backplane controlled by SCC ( )
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Power supply
module
DC power supply from
a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
SCC
Client-side
optical
module
GE Service
encapsulation
and mapping
module
OTN
processing
module
Cross-
connect
module
1588v2
module
Backplane (service cross-connection) n X ODUk

NOTE
When used to receive GE electrical signals, the board must use a client-side electrical module to perform power
level conversion, and then sends the signals to the service encapsulation and mapping module for processing.
In Figure 14-202, n x ODUk indicates the service cross-connections from the TOG board to the backplane. "n"
Table 14-200 shows the service cross-connections from the TOG board to the backplane.
Table 14-200 Service cross-connections from the TOG board to the backplane
TN52T
OG
A maximum of 8xODU0/4xODU1

Signal Flow
In the signal flow of the TOG board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TOG to the backplane,
The client-side optical module receives 8 channels of the optical signals from client
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1369
After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the corresponding encapsulation and
mapping modules. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping
processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out ODUk signals to the backplane
for grooming.
l Receive direction
The signal processing module receives ODUk electrical signals sent from the cross-
connection board through the backplane. The module performs operations such as ODUk
framing, demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out 8 channels
of GE signals to the client-side optical module.
The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of GE electrical signals, and
interfaces.
Module Function
Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of 8 channels of GE optical signals.
Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from 8 channels of the internal
The module consists of a GE service encapsulation and mapping module, an OTN
processing module and a cross-connect module,.
GE service encapsulation and mapping module
It encapsulates multiple GE signals and maps the GE signals to the ODUk payload area
and performs the reverse of the preceding process. It supports the function of GE
performance monitoring.
Frames ODUk signals and processes overheads in ODUk signals.
Implements the grooming of electrical signals between the TOG and the cross-connect
board through the backplane.
l 1588v2 module
to the STG board.
NOTE
Two channels IEEE 1588v2 signals are supported by the TOG.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1370
14.14.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TOG board.
Figure 14-203 shows the TOG front panel.
Figure 14-203 Front panel of the TOG board
TOG
TOG
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
R
X
2
T
X
3
R
X
3
T
X
4
R
X
4
T
X
1
R
X
1
T
X
2
R
X
6
T
X
7
R
X
7
T
X
8
R
X
8
T
X
5
R
X
5
T
X
6

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1371
Indicators
Interfaces
Table 14-201 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TOG board

Laser Hazard Level
14.14.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one TOG board.
Table 14-202 shows the valid slots for the TOG board.
Table 14-202 Valid slots for TOG board
Product Valid Slots

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1372
Table 14-203 Mapping between the physical ports on the TOG board and the port numbers
TX1/RX1 3
TX2/RX2 4
TX3/RX3 5
TX4/RX4 6
TX5/RX5 7
TX6/RX6 8
TX7/RX7 9
TX8/RX8 10

NOTE
Logical Ports
Figure 14-204 and Figure 14-205 shows the application model of the TOG board.Table
14-204 describes the meaning of each port.
Figure 14-204 Port diagram of the TOG board (OptiX OSN 8800)
10(RX8/TX8)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
Client Side
4(RX2/TX2)-1
Backplane
Other line/
PID board
8xODU0
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1373

Figure 14-205 Port diagram of the TOG board (OptiX OSN 6800)
10(RX8/TX8)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
201(ClientLP1
/ClientLP1)-1
208(ClientLP8/C
lientLP8)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
202(ClientLP2/Cl
ientLP2)-1
4xODU1
Backplane
9(RX7/TX7)-1
207(ClientLP7/C
lientLP7)-1
161(ODU0LP1/
ODU0LP1)-1
164(ODU0LP4/
ODU0LP4)-1
Client Side
Other line/
PID board

Cross-
connect
module
on the NMS to receive ODUk signals from
other boards
Service
processi
ng
module
Multiplexing module
Table 14-204 Description of NM port of the TOG board
ODU0LP1-ODU0LP4 Internal logical ports. The optical paths are numbered 1.

If the TOG board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the
U2000:
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1374
level cross-connections between the ClientLP port and the ODU0LP port of the other
boards, as shown in Figure 14-206.
level cross-connections between the ClientLP port and the ODU1LP port of the other
boards, as shown in Figure 14-207.
Figure 14-206 Cross-connection diagram of the TOG (ODU0 level)
WDM side
TOG
Client side
Other board b
(standard mode)
Other board a
(compatible mode)
The client side of the TOG board are cross-connected to the WDM
Other board a TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN53NQ2 /
TN53NS2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 / TN54NPO2 /
TN55NPO2 / TN54ENQ2
Other board b TN52ND2T04 / TN53ND2 / TN55NO2 / TN52NS2T04 /
TN52NS2T05 / TN52NS2T06 / TN52NS201M01 /
TN52NS201M02 / TN53NS2 / TN54NS3 / TN55NS3 /
TN54NS4 / TN53NQ2 / TN55NPO2 / TN55NPO2E / TN54ENQ2

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1375
Figure 14-207 Cross-connection diagram of the TOG (ODU1 level)

TOG
IN/OUT-OCH:1--ODU2:1-ODU1:1
The client side of the TOG board are cross-connected to the WDM
Client side
WDM side
Other board b
(standard mode)
Other board a
(compatible mode)

For parameters of the TOG, refer to Table 14-205.
Table 14-205 TOG parameters
Optical
Interface/
Channel
Optical Interface
Name
supported.
Channel Use
Status
Used, Unused
Default: Used
board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1376
Optical Interface
Loopback
Non-Loopback,
Inloop, Outloop
Default: Non-
Loopback
Service Type GE(GFP-T), GE(TTT-
GMP)
Default: GE(GFP-T)
the client side.
NOTE
When Service Type is GE(TTT-GMP), the
encapsulation format is TTT-GMP; when Service
Type is GE(GFP-T), the encapsulation format is
GFP-T. The value GE(TTT-GMP) is
recommended.
Default: Off
status of a board.
more information.
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
board are lost.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1377
ALS Auxiliary
Condition
FW_Defect,
BW_Client_R_LOS,
BW_WDM_Defect,
FW_ODUk_CSF
Default: FW_Defect
ALS.
FW_OPUk_CSF.
Hold-off Time of
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
0s, 100ms, 200ms,
300ms, 400ms, 500ms,
600ms, 700ms, 800ms,
900ms, 1s, 1100ms,
1200ms, 1300ms,
1400ms, 1500ms,
1600ms, 1700ms,
1800ms, 1900ms, 2s
Default: 0s
related lasers.
Hold-off Time of
Automatic Laser
Turn-On
0s, 100ms, 200ms,
300ms, 400ms, 500ms,
600ms, 700ms, 800ms,
900ms, 1s, 1100ms,
1200ms, 1300ms,
1400ms, 1500ms,
1600ms, 1700ms,
1800ms, 1900ms, 2s
Default: 0s
related lasers.
Default: Disabled
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1378
Max. Packet
Length
1518 to 9600
Default: 9600
Ethernet
Working Mode
1000M Full-Duplex
Duplex
SD Trigger
Condition
None, B1_SD,
OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None
NOTE
Only TN52TOG supports this parameter.

14.14.10 TOG Specifications
Optical Module
TN52TO
G
1000 BASE-LX-10 km
1000 BASE-LX-40 km
1000 BASE-ZX-80 km

NOTE
point.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1379
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.
5 km
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Target
transmission
distance
- 0.5 km (0.3
mi.)
10 km (6.2
mi.)
40 km (24.9
mi.)
80 km (49.7
mi.)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -2.5 -3 0 5
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -9.5 -9 -5 -2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 9 9 9 9
Eye pattern
mask
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN PIN PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -17 -20 -20 -23
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm 0 -3 -3 -3

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1380
NOTE
Std 802.3.
wavelengths)
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km
(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Target transmission
distance
- 40 km (24.9 mi.) 80 km (49.7 mi.)
range
nm 1471 to 1611 1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 5 5
power
dBm 0 0
Central wavelength
deviation
nm 6.5 6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 1.0 1.0
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30 30
G.959.1-compliant
range
nm 1270 to 1620 1270 to 1620
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm -3 -9
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1381

(8.7 in.)
l Weight: 0.85 kg (1.87 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN52TOG 41.8 46.0

14.15 TOM
TOM: 8 x multi-rate ports service processing board
The available functional versions of the TOM board are TN11 and TN52.
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
1TO
M
N N N N Y Y
TN5
2TO
M
Y Y Y Y Y Y

Variants
The TN11TOM/TN52TOM board has only one variant: TN11TOM01/TN52TOM01.
Function:
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1382
Board Cross-Connet
Granularity
Application Scenario
TN11TOM ODU1 The TN52TOM and TN11TOM support different
application scenario. For details, see 14.15.2
Application Overview.
TN52TOM ODU0/ODU1

Specification:
l The specifications vary according to the version of board that you use. For details, see
14.15.26 TOM Specifications.
The TOM boards of different versions cannot replace each other.
14.15.2.1 Concept: Tributary Mode and Tributary-Line Mode
A TOM board can be used as a tributary board or a tributary-line board. In different application
scenarios, eight pairs of optical interfaces of the TOM can be used as client-side interfaces or
WDM-side interfaces.
Figure 14-208 shows the signal flow of the tributary TOM board and Figure 14-209 shows the
signal flow of the tributary-line TOM board.
Figure 14-208 Signal flow of the tributary TOM board
Client-side cross-
connection
AnyLP cross-
connection
Input
(Client services)
Encapsulation and mapping
Output
(ODU0/ODU1 electrical
signals)
Figure 14-209 Signal flow of the tributary-line TOM board
Input
(Client services)
Encapsulation and mapping
Output
(OTU1 optical
signals)
Client-side cross-
connection
AnyLP cross-
connection
WDM-side cross-
connection
NOTE
AnyLP cross-connections are supported only in application scenarios 8, 9, and 12 of TN52TOM.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1383
14.15.2.2 Concept: Cascading Mode and Non-cascading Mode
TOM boards can work either in cascading or non-cascading mode. In cascading mode, the total
client service rate for each TOM board must be less than or equal to 2.5 Gbit/s. In non-cascading
mode, the total client service rate for each TOM board must be less than or equal to 10 Gbit/s.
When working in cascading mode, each TOM board can map a maximum of eight client services
into one ODU0/ODU1 signal. When working in non-cascading mode, it can map a maximum
of four client services into one ODU0/ODU1 signal.
l The cascading mode is recommended if more than four client services have to be mapped
into one ODU1 or ODU0 signal.
l The non-cascading mode is recommended if four or less client services have to be mapped
into one ODU1 or ODU0 signal.
14.15.2.3 Application Scenario Overview of TN52TOM
The TN52TOM board can be used in different application scenarios. The total service access
rate of the eight pairs of client-side optical ports cannot exceed 10 Gbit/s.
NOTE
The OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack supports TN52TOM scenario 2, TN52TOM scenario 4, TN52TOM
scenario 6, and TN52TOM scenario 10.
Table 14-208 TN52TOM board in cascading mode
App
licat
ion
Sce
nari
o
Tribu
tary or
Tribu
tary-
Line
Board
Maximum Input
Capacity (Client Side)
Mapping
Path
Maxi
mum
Outp
ut
Capa
city
Port
Working
Mode
a
Port
Working
Mode
b
Remarks
TN5
2TO
M
scen
ario
1
Tribut
ary
board
l 8 x FE/FDDI/DVB-
ASI/SDI/ESCON
l 2 x GE/FC100/
FICON
NOTE
The board can receive the
services in each preceding
row at the same time but
the total rate of the services
must be less than or equal
to 2.5 Gbit/s.
Any
c
-
>ODU0
2 x
ODU0
ODU0
mode (Any-
>ODU0[-
>ODU1])
ODU0
tributary
mode (Any-
>ODU0[-
>ODU1])
Supported
only by the
OptiX OSN
8800.
Any
c
-
>ODU0-
>ODU1
1 x
ODU1
Supported
only by the
OptiX OSN
6800 and
3800.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1384
App
licat
ion
Sce
nari
o
Tribu
tary or
Tribu
tary-
Line
Board
Maximum Input
Mapping
Path
Maxi
mum
Outp
ut
Capa
city
Port
Working
Mode
a
Port
Working
Mode
b
Remarks
TN5
2TO
M
scen
ario
2
Tribut
ary-
line
board
l 7 x FE/FDDI/DVB-
ASI/SDI/ESCON
l 2 x GE/FC100/
FICON
NOTE
to 2.5 Gbit/s.
Any
c
-
>ODU0-
>ODU1-
>OTU1
1 x
OTU1
ODU0
tributary-
line mode
(Any-
>ODU0-
>ODU1-
>OTU1)
ODU0
tributary-
line mode
(Any-
>ODU0-
>ODU1-
>OTU1)
The board
uses only
one
transmitter
and one
receiver on
the WDM
side.
Only the
RX7/TX7
and RX8/
TX8 optical
ports can be
used as
WDM-side
optical
ports.
l 6 x FE/FDDI/DVB-
ASI/SDI/ESCON
l 2 x GE/FC100/
FICON
NOTE
to 2.5 Gbit/s.
The board
uses two
transmitters
and one
receiver on
the WDM
side.
Only the
RX7/TX7
and RX8/
TX8 optical
ports can be
used as
WDM-side
optical
ports.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1385
App
licat
ion
Sce
nari
o
Tribu
tary or
Tribu
tary-
Line
Board
Maximum Input
Mapping
Path
Maxi
mum
Outp
ut
Capa
city
Port
Working
Mode
a
Port
Working
Mode
b
Remarks
TN5
2TO
M
scen
ario
3
Tribut
ary
board
l 8 x FE/FDDI/STM-1/
OC-3/DVB-ASI/
SDI/ESCON
l 4 x STM-4/OC-12
l 2 x GE/FC100/
FICON
l 1 x STM-16/OC-48/
FC200/FICON
Express/HD-SDI
NOTE
to 2.5 Gbit/s.
Any
c
-
>ODU1
1 x
ODU1
ODU1
mode
(OTU1/
Any-
>ODU1)
ODU1
tributary
mode (Any-
>ODU1)
-
TN5
2TO
M
scen
ario
4
Tribut
ary-
line
board
OC-3/DVB-ASI/
SDI/ESCON
l 4 x STM-4/OC-12
l 2 x GE/FC100/
FICON
l 1 x STM-16/OC-48/
FC200/FICON
Express/HD-SDI
NOTE
to 2.5 Gbit/s.
Any
c
-
>ODU1-
>OTU1
1 x
OTU1
ODU1
tributary-
line mode
(OTU1/
Any-
>ODU1-
>OTU1)
ODU1
tributary-
line mode
(Any-
>ODU1-
>OTU1)
The board
uses only
one
transmitter
and one
receiver on
the WDM
side.
Only the
RX7/TX7
and RX8/
TX8 optical
ports can be
used as
WDM-side
optical
ports.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1386
App
licat
ion
Sce
nari
o
Tribu
tary or
Tribu
tary-
Line
Board
Maximum Input
Mapping
Path
Maxi
mum
Outp
ut
Capa
city
Port
Working
Mode
a
Port
Working
Mode
b
Remarks
OC-3/DVB-ASI/
SDI/ESCON
l 4 x STM-4/OC-12
l 2 x GE/FC100/
FICON
l 1 x STM-16/OC-48/
FC200/FICON
Express/HD-SDI/
OTU1
NOTE
to 2.5 Gbit/s.
The board
uses two
transmitters
and one
receiver on
the WDM
side.
Only the
RX7/TX7
and RX8/
TX8 optical
ports can be
used as
WDM-side
optical
ports.
a: This parameter must be set on the NMS and the parameter values apply to V100R006C00 and later versions.
b: This parameter must be set on the NMS and the parameter values apply to versions earlier than V100R006C00.
c: "Any" in the table indicates the client-side service supported in the corresponding application scenario.

Table 14-209 TN52TOM board in non-cascading mode
App
licat
ion
Sce
nari
o
Tribut
ary or
Tribut
ary-
Line
Board
Maximum Input
Mapping
Path
Maxi
mum
Outp
ut
Capa
city
Port
Working
Mode
a
Port
Working
Mode
b
Remarks
TN5
2TO
M
scen
ario
5
Tributa
ry
board
l 8 x FE/FDDI/DVB-
ASI/SDI/ESCON/
GE/FC100/FICON
NOTE
services in the preceding
to 10 Gbit/s.
Any
c
-
>ODU0
8 x
ODU0
ODU0
mode (Any-
>ODU0[-
>ODU1])
ODU0
tributary
mode (Any-
>ODU0[-
>ODU1])
Supported
only by the
OptiX OSN
8800.
Any
c
-
>ODU0-
>ODU1
4 x
ODU1
Supported
only by the
OptiX OSN
6800 and
3800.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1387
App
licat
ion
Sce
nari
o
Tribut
ary or
Tribut
ary-
Line
Board
Maximum Input
Mapping
Path
Maxi
mum
Outp
ut
Capa
city
Port
Working
Mode
a
Port
Working
Mode
b
Remarks
TN5
2TO
M
scen
ario
6
Tributa
ry-line
board
l 6 x FE/FDDI/DVB-
ASI/SDI/ESCON/
GE/FC100/FICON
NOTE
to 5 Gbit/s.
Any
c
-
>ODU0-
>ODU1-
>OTU1
2 x
OTU1
ODU0
tributary-
line mode
(Any-
>ODU0-
>ODU1-
>OTU1)
ODU0
tributary-
line mode
(Any-
>ODU0-
>ODU1-
>OTU1)
The board
uses only
one
transmitter
and one
receiver on
the WDM
side.
All RX/TX
optical
ports can be
used as
WDM-side
optical
ports.
l 4 x FE/FDDI/DVB-
ASI/SDI/ESCON/
GE/FC100/FICON
NOTE
to 5 Gbit/s.
The board
uses two
transmitters
and one
receiver on
the WDM
side.
All RX/TX
optical
ports can be
used as
WDM-side
optical
ports.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1388
App
licat
ion
Sce
nari
o
Tribut
ary or
Tribut
ary-
Line
Board
Maximum Input
Mapping
Path
Maxi
mum
Outp
ut
Capa
city
Port
Working
Mode
a
Port
Working
Mode
b
Remarks
TN5
2TO
M
scen
ario
7
Tributa
ry
board
l 8 x FC100/FICON/
GE/STM-4/OC-12/
DVB-ASI/ESCON/
FDDI/FE/SDI/
STM-1/OC-3
l 4 x FC200/FICON
Express/HD-SDI/
OTU1/STM-16/
OC-48
NOTE
to 10 Gbit/s.
OTU1/Any
c
-
>ODU1
4 x
ODU1
ODU1
mode
(OTU1/
Any-
>ODU1)
ODU1
tributary
mode
(OTU1/
Any-
>ODU1)
-
TN5
2TO
M
scen
ario
8
Tributa
ry
board
l 4 x OTU1 OTU1-
>ODU1-
>Any-
>ODU0-
>ODU1
4 x
ODU1
ODU1_AN
Y_ODU0_
ODU1 re-
encapsulati
on mode
(OTU1-
>ODU1-
>Any-
>ODU0-
>ODU1)
ODU1
tributary
mode
(OTU1-
>ODU1-
>Any-
>ODU0-
>ODU1)
Supported
only by the
OptiX OSN
6800 and
3800.
TN5
2TO
M
scen
ario
9
Tributa
ry-line
board
l 2 x OTU1 OTU1-
>ODU1-
>Any-
>ODU0-
>ODU1-
>OTU1
2 x
OTU1
ODU1_AN
Y_ODU0_
ODU1 re-
encapsulati
on
tributary-
line mode
(OTU1-
>ODU1-
>Any-
>ODU0-
>ODU1-
>OTU1)
ODU1
tributary-
line mode
(OTU1-
>ODU1-
>Any-
>ODU0-
>ODU1-
>OTU1)
The board
uses two
transmitters
and one
receiver on
the WDM
side.
All RX/TX
optical
ports can be
used as
WDM-side
optical
ports.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1389
App
licat
ion
Sce
nari
o
Tribut
ary or
Tribut
ary-
Line
Board
Maximum Input
Mapping
Path
Maxi
mum
Outp
ut
Capa
city
Port
Working
Mode
a
Port
Working
Mode
b
Remarks
TN5
2TO
M
scen
ario
10
Tributa
ry-line
board
l 4 x OTU1 OTU1-
>ODU1-
>OTU1
4 x
OTU1
ODU1
tributary-
line mode
(OTU1/
Any-
>ODU1-
>OTU1)
ODU1
tributary-
line mode
(OTU1/
Any-
>ODU1-
>OTU1)
The board
performs
electrical
regeneratio
n for OTU1
signals.
l 6 x FC100/FICON/
GE/STM-4/OC-12/
DVB-ASI/ESCON/
FDDI/FE/SDI/
STM-1/OC-3
l 4 x FC200/FICON
Express/HD-SDI/
STM-16/OC-48
NOTE
to 10 Gbit/s.
Any
c
-
>ODU1-
>OTU1
2 x
OTU1
The board
uses only
one
transmitter
and one
receiver on
the WDM
side.
All RX/TX
optical
ports can be
used as
WDM-side
optical
ports.
l 4 x FC200/FICON
Express/HD-SDI/
STM-16/OC-48/
FC100/FICON/GE/
STM-4/OC-12/
DVB-ASI/ESCON/
FDDI/FE/SDI/
STM-1/OC-3
NOTE
to 10 Gbit/s.
The board
uses two
transmitters
and one
receiver on
the WDM
side.
All RX/TX
optical
ports can be
used as
WDM-side
optical
ports.
TN5
2TO
M
scen
ario
11
Tributa
ry
board
l 4 x OTU1 OTU1-
>ODU1-
>ODU0
8 x
ODU0
ODU1_OD
U0 mode
(OTU1-
>ODU1-
>ODU0)
ODU1
tributary
mode
(OTU1-
>ODU1-
>ODU0)
Supported
only by the
OptiX OSN
8800.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1390
App
licat
ion
Sce
nari
o
Tribut
ary or
Tribut
ary-
Line
Board
Maximum Input
Mapping
Path
Maxi
mum
Outp
ut
Capa
city
Port
Working
Mode
a
Port
Working
Mode
b
Remarks
TN5
2TO
M
scen
ario
12
Tributa
ry
board
l 4 x OTU1 OTU1-
>ODU1-
>Any-
>ODU0
8 x
ODU0
ODU1_AN
Y_ODU0
re-
encapsulati
on mode
(OTU1-
>ODU1-
>Any-
>ODU0)
ODU1
tributary
mode
(OTU1-
>ODU1-
>Any-
>ODU0)
Supported
only by the
OptiX OSN
8800.
a: This parameter must be set on the NMS and the parameter values apply to V100R006C00 and later versions.
b: This parameter must be set on the NMS and the parameter values apply to versions earlier than V100R006C00.
c: "Any" in the table indicates the client-side service supported in the corresponding application scenario.

14.15.2.4 Application Scenario Overview of TN11TOM
The TN11TOM can be used in different application scenarios. The total service access rate of
the eight pairs of client-side optical ports cannot exceed 10 Gbit/s.
Table 14-210 TN11TOM board in cascading mode
Appl
icatio
n
Scen
ario
Tributa
ry or
Tributa
ry-Line
Board
Maximum Input Capacity
(Client Side)
Mapping
Path
Maxim
um
Outpu
t
Capaci
ty
Port
Working
Mode (Must
Be Set on
the NMS)
Remarks
TN11
TOM
Scena
rio 1
Tributar
y board
OC-3/DVB-ASI/SDI/
ESCON
l 4 x STM-4/OC-12
l 2 x GE/FC100/FICON
l 1 x STM-16/OC-48/
FC200/FICON Express/
HD-SDI/OTU1
NOTE
services in each preceding row
at the same time but the total
rate of the services must be less
than or equal to 2.5 Gbit/s.
OTU1/Any
a
-
>ODU1
1 x
ODU1
N/A -
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1391
Appl
icatio
n
Scen
ario
Tributa
ry or
Tributa
ry-Line
Board
Maximum Input Capacity
(Client Side)
Mapping
Path
Maxim
um
Outpu
t
Capaci
ty
Port
Working
Mode (Must
Be Set on
the NMS)
Remarks
TN11
TOM
scena
rio 2
Tributar
y-line
board
OC-3/DVB-ASI/SDI/
ESCON
l 4 x STM-4/OC-12
l 1 x STM-16/OC-48/
HD-SDI/OTU1
NOTE
OTU1/Any
a
-
>ODU1-
>OTU1
1 x
OTU1
N/A The board
uses only one
transmitter
and one
receiver on the
WDM side.
Only the RX7/
TX7 and RX8/
TX8 optical
ports can be
used as
WDM-side
optical ports.
OC-3/DVB-ASI/SDI/
ESCON
l 4 x STM-4/OC-12
l 1 x STM-16/OC-48/
HD-SDI/OTU1
NOTE
The board
uses two
transmitters
and one
receiver on the
WDM side.
Only the RX7/
TX7 and RX8/
TX8 optical
ports can be
used as
WDM-side
optical ports.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1392
Table 14-211 TN11TOM board in non-cascading mode
Appl
icatio
n
Scen
ario
Tributa
ry or
Tributa
ry-Line
Board
Maximum Input
Mapping
Path
Maxi
mum
Outpu
t
Capaci
ty
Port
Working
Mode (Must
Be Set on the
NMS)
Remarks
TN11
TOM
scena
rio 3
Tributar
y board
l 8 x FC100/FICON/GE/
STM-4/OC-12/DVB-
ASI/ESCON/FDDI/FE/
SDI/STM-1/OC-3
l 4 x FC200/FICON
Express/HD-SDI/OTU1/
STM-16/OC-48
NOTE
than or equal to 10 Gbit/s.
OTU1/Any
a
-
>ODU1
4 x
ODU1
N/A -
TN11
TOM
scena
rio 4
Tributar
y-line
board
l 4 x FC200/FICON
Express/HD-SDI/
STM-16/OC-48/FC100/
FICON/GE/STM-4/
OC-12/DVB-ASI/
ESCON/FDDI/FE/SDI/
STM-1/OC-3
NOTE
than or equal to 10 Gbit/s.
Any
a
->ODU1-
>OTU1
4 x
OTU1
N/A All RX/TX
optical ports
can be used as
WDM-side
optical ports.
TN11
TOM
scena
rio 5
Tributar
y-line
board
l 4 x OTU1 OTU1-
>ODU1-
>OTU1
4 x
OTU1
N/A The board
performs
electrical
regeneration
for OTU1
signals.

14.15.3 Function and Feature
The TOM board achieves cross-connection at the electrical layer, and to provide OTN interfaces
and ESC.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1393
NOTE
ODU0 is only supported by the TN52TOM in the OptiX OSN 8800.
Table 14-212 Functions and features of the TOM board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function l Performs conversion between client services at rates within the
range of 100 Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s and ODU0 or ODU1 signals
when functioning as a tributary board.
l Performs conversion between client services at rates within the
range of 100 Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s and OTU1 signals when
functioning as a tributary-line board.
l Supports convergence of multiple services into one ODU0 or
ODU1 signal.
The TOM board supports multiple application scenarios. For details,
see 14.15.2 Application Overview.
Client-side service
type
HD-SDI: Bit-serial digital interface for high-definition television
systems at a rate of 1.49 Gbit/s
NOTE
When the TOM board transmits GE electrical signals, to facilitate fiber routing,
you are advised to install electrical modules at the RX1/TX1 and RX2/TX2
ports.
The TOM board supports access of SDI, HD-SDI, and DVB-ASI electrical
signals. When the board is used to accept these electrical signals, a digital video
O/E converter must be used for O/E or E/O conversion and the optical module
of the converter must agree with the board optical module specifications. The
digital video O/E converter is a third-party device. Customers can purchase a
digital video O/E converter by themselves.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1394
Function and
Feature
Description
Cross-connect
capabilities
OptiX OSN 8800:
l TN52TOM
Supports the cross-connection of four ODU1 signals or eight
ODU0 signals through the cross-connect bus on the backplane
OptiX OSN 6800:
l TN11TOM
Supports the cross-connection of four ODU1 signals between
the TOM and the cross-connect board. Supports the cross-
connection of four ODU1 signals to the paired slots through the
backplane.
Supports the cross-connection of a maximum of eight channels
of GE signals between the TOM and the cross-connect board.
of GE signals to the paired slots through the backplane.
Supports the transmission of maximum of eight signals at the
rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s to the paired slots
l TN52TOM
Supports the cross-connection of four ODU1 signals between
the TOM and the cross-connect board.
Supports the cross-connection of six channels of GE signals to
the paired slots through the backplane.
Supports the transmission of six signals at the rate between 100
Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s to the paired slots through the backplane.
OptiX OSN 3800:
l TN11TOM
Supports the cross-connection of four channels of ODU1
signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four
of GE signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of
four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh
group.
Supports the cross-connection of a maximum of eight signals
at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s from one board
of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three
l TN52TOM
Supports the cross-connection of four channels of ODU1
signals between one board of the mesh group (consisting of four
boards) and any two boards in the non-paired slots of the four-
slot mesh group, that is, supports the ODU1 cross-connection
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1395
Function and
Feature
Description
between slots IU2 and IU4, slots IU2 and IU5, slots IU3 and
IU4, and slots IU3 and IU5.
Supports the cross-connection of six channels of GE signals
between one board of the mesh group (consisting of four
boards) and the paired slot of the four-slot mesh group, that is,
supports the GE cross-connection between slots IU2 and IU3
and slots IU4 and IU5.
Supports the cross-connection of six signals at the rate between
100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s, except ODU1 signals, between one
board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) and the
paired slot of the four-slot mesh group, that is, supports the
cross-connection of six signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s
and 2.5 Gbit/s, except ODU1 signals, between slots IU2 and
IU3 and slots IU4 and IU5.
OTN function l The mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.7041 and ITU-T
G.709. Supports the frame format and overhead processing by
referring to the ITU-T G.709.
l Supports the SM and TCM functions at the OTU1 and ODU1
layers on the WDM side.
l Supports the PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring functions at
the ODU1 layer.
l Supports the PM functions at the ODU1 layers.
l TN52TOM supports the PM function at the ODU0 layer.
WDM specification Supports ITU-T G.694.1-compliant DWDM specifications.
Supports ITU-T G.694.2-compliant CWDM specifications.
ESC function Supported.
FEC encoding Supports forward error correction (FEC) on the client side that
complies with ITU-T G.709, only when the service type is OTU1.
Alarm and
performance event
monitoring
l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Poisson mode or Bursty mode) to help
locate line failures.
l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and
optical power of the laser.
NOTE
Only the TN11TOM supports Poisson mode.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1396
Function and
Feature
Description
PRBS test function Supports the PRBS function on the client side and WDM side.
NOTE
The PRBS function on the client side is supported only when the client-side
service type is STM-1/OC-3, STM-4/OC-12, or STM-16/OC-48.
type is FE or GE.
Test frame The board supports the test frame function only when the client-side
Optical-layer ASON Not supported
Electrical-layer
ASON
Supported by the TN52TOM.
Protection scheme OptiX OSN 3800/OptiX OSN 6800:
l Supports SW SNCP.
OptiX OSN 8800:
l Supports SW SNCP.
NOTE
When the board receives OTN services, SDH/SONET services the board
supports tributary SNCP protection.
For the TN52TOM board, ODU0 tributary SNCP protection is supported only
in ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0).
Ethernet service
mapping mode
Supports encapsulation of GE services in GE(GFP-F) (displayed as
GE on the NMS) and GE(GFP-T) modes.
Ethernet port
working mode
l Auto-Negotiation
l 1000M Full-Duplex
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1397
Function and
Feature
Description
Outloop Supported
NOTE
When being used as tributary & line
board, the TOM board only
supports the loopback between
ClientLP1-ClientLP4.
Outloop Supported
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1398
Function and
Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards
compliance
Protocols
or
standards
for
transparent
transmissio
n (non-
performanc
e
monitoring
)
IEEE 802.3u
IEEE 802.3z
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
INTERFACES (FC-PI)
BB-3)
SW-3)
(FC-SB-2)
Control (MAC)
Protocol (PHY)
Dependent (PDM)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1399
Function and
Feature
Description
Protocols
or
standards
for service
processing
(performan
ce
monitoring
)
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.873.1
ITU-T G.694.1
ITU-T G.694.2

Table 14-213 Mapping between the physical ports on the TOM board and the port numbers
TX1/RX1 3
TX2/RX2 4
TX3/RX3 5
TX4/RX4 6
TX5/RX5 7
TX6/RX6 8
TX7/RX7 9
TX8/RX8 10

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1400
NOTE
14.15.5 TN52TOM Scenario 1: Any->ODU0[->ODU1] (Cascading)
Implements conversion between eight signals at a rate in the range of 100 Mbit/s to 1.25 Gbit/
s and two ODU0 signals or one ODU1 signal.
Figure 14-210 shows the position of a TOM board in a WDM system when it is used on an
OptiX OSN 8800. Figure 14-211 shows the position of the TOM board in a WDM system when
it is used on an OptiX OSN 6800/3800.
Figure 14-210 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 1: Any->ODU0) (OptiX
OSN 8800)
TOM
FE, GE,
FC100, FICON,
DVB-ASI, SDI,
ESCON, FDDI
2xODU0 1xOTU2
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
N
S
2
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
N
S
2
1xOTU2
2
O
D
U
0
TOM
8
A
n
y
2
O
D
U
0
8
A
n
y
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
2xODU0
FE, GE,
FC100, FICON,
DVB-ASI, SDI,
ESCON, FDDI
TX1
RX1
TX8
RX8
TX1
RX1
TX8
RX8

Figure 14-211 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 1: Any->ODU0->ODU1)
(OptiX OSN 6800/3800)
TOM
1xODU1 1xOTU2
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
N
S
2
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
N
S
2
1xOTU2
8
A
n
y
1xODU1
ODU1 Any
FE, GE,
FC100, FICON,
DVB-ASI, SDI,
ESCON, FDDI
1
O
D
U
1
TOM
8
A
n
y
ODU1 Any
FE, GE,
FC100, FICON,
DVB-ASI, SDI,
ESCON, FDDI
1
O
D
U
1
2
O
D
U
0
2
O
D
U
0
TX1
RX1
TX8
RX8
TX1
RX1
TX8
RX8
OptiX OSN 8800: N/A
OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot
OptiX OSN 3800: From/To paired slot of the mesh group
OptiX OSN 8800: N/A
OptiX OSN 6800: N/A
OptiX OSN 3800: From/To non-paired slots of the mesh group
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1401
NOTE
On the client side, eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.

Figure 14-212 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (scenario 1: in cascading mode)
OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800: Any->ODU0->ODU1
: Client-side services
: WDM-side services
: Virtual channel, which does not need to be configured on the NMS
: Service cross-connection, which needs to be configured on the NMS
52TOM
52NS2
1(IN/OUT)
3(RX1/TX1)
4(RX2/TX2)
5(RX3/TX3)
6(RX4/TX4)
7(RX5/TX5)
8(RX6/TX6)
9(RX7/TX7)
10(RX8/TX8)
OptiX OSN 8800: Any->ODU0
: WDM-side services
52TOM
3(RX1/TX1)
4(RX2/TX2)
5(RX3/TX3)
6(RX4/TX4)
7(RX5/TX5)
8(RX6/TX6)
9(RX7/TX7)
10(RX8/TX8)
52NS2
1(IN/OUT)
NOTE
When the number of a route of the ClientLP1 port is the same as that of a route of the ClientLP2 port, the
two routes cannot be configured with cross-connections at the same time. That is, when the cross-connection
from RX/TX to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 is configured, the cross-connection from RX/TX to 202
(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 is not supported at the same time.

Table 14-214 Description of NM port of the TOM board (Cascading mode)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1402
ClientLP1/ClientLP2 Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1 to 8.
ODU0LP1 Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1 to 2.

On the U2000, set the Board working Mode to Cascading.
During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000. Set the mode of the
ClientLP port to ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]). Create the cross-connection between
the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the TOM board. Then, create the following cross-
connections:
l Create the ODU0 cross-connection between the ClientLP port of the TOM board and
ODU0LP port of the other boards to achieve grooming of ODU0 services in OptiX OSN
8800, as shown in Figure 14-213.
l Create the ODU1 cross-connection between the ODU0LP port of the TOM board and
6800/3800, as shown in Figure 14-213.
NOTE
When creating the internal cross-connection of ODU0 signal, only the first route can be selected. For
Example: 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1.
Two channels with the same type of services at the ClientLP1 and ClientLP2 ports respectively must not
be used at the same time. For example, if the 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 service type is configured, the
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 service type must not be configured.
Figure 14-213 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board (scenario 1)
OptiX OSN 8800
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1403
WDM side
1
2
10(TX8/RX8)-1
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
TOM
Compatible
mode
Standard
mode
Cross-connect
module
Other board
Other board
(Compatible mode)
Other board (Standard
mode)
TN52ND2T04 / TN53ND2 / TN55NO2 / TN52NS2T04 / TN52NS2T05 /
TN52NS2T06 / TN52NS201M01 / TN52NS201M02 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2 /
TN54NS3 / TN55NS3 / TN54NS4 / TN55NPO2 / TN55NPO2E / TN54ENQ2
OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1404
WDM side
The client side of the TOM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards,
1 3
10(TX8/RX8)-1
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
TOM
161(ODU0LP1
/ODU0LP1)-1
161(ODU0LP1
/ODU0LP1)-2
2
Compatible
mode
Standard
mode
Cross-connect module Cross-connect module Cross-connect module
Other board
Cross-connect
module
Other board
(Compatible
mode)
Other board
(Standard mode)

14.15.6 TN52TOM Scenario 2: Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1
(Cascading)
Implements conversion between six signals at a rate in the range of 100 Mbit/s to 1.25 Gbit/s
and one OTU1 signal, and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side, or
implements conversion between seven Any signals and one OTU1 signal.
For the position of the TOM in a WDM system, see Figure 14-214.
Figure 14-214 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 2: Any->ODU0->ODU1-
>OTU1)
The single transmitting and single receiving on the WDM side:
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1405
TOM
FE, GE,
FC100, FICON,
DVB-ASI, SDI,
ESCON, FDDI
FE, GE,
FC100, FICON,
DVB-ASI, SDI,
ESCON, FDDI
1xOTU1
MUX/
DMUX
2
O
D
U
0
1
O
D
U
1
TOM
2
O
D
U
0
1
O
D
U
1
7
A
n
y
1
O
T
U
1
7
A
n
y
1
O
T
U
1
1xOTU1
MUX/
DMUX
Any Any
TX1
RX1
TX7
RX7
TX8
RX8
TX1
RX1
TX7
RX7
TX8
RX8
The dual-fed selectively receiving on the WDM side:
TOM
FE, GE,
FC100, FICON,
DVB-ASI, SDI,
ESCON, FDDI
1xOTU1
MUX/
DMUX
2
O
D
U
0
1
O
D
U
1
1
O
T
U
1
6
A
n
y
1xOTU1
MUX/
DMUX
MUX/
DMUX
MUX/
DMUX
Any
TOM
FE, GE,
FC100, FICON,
DVB-ASI, SDI,
ESCON, FDDI
2
O
D
U
0
1
O
D
U
1
1
O
T
U
1
6
A
n
y
Any
TX1
RX1
TX6
RX6
TX8
RX8
TX7
RX7
TX1
RX1
TX6
RX6
TX7
RX7
TX8
RX8
OptiX OSN 8800: N/A
NOTE
On the client side, six or seven pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5
Gbit/s.
In cascading mode, only RX7/TX7 or RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical interfaces.

Figure 14-215 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (scenario 2: ODU0 tributary-line mode (Any-
>ODU0->ODU1->OTU1) in cascading mode)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1406
: WDM-side services
52TOM
3(RX1/TX1)
4(RX2/TX2)
5(RX3/TX3)
6(RX4/TX4)
7(RX5/TX5)
8(RX6/TX6)
161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1
161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1
10(RX8/TX8)
9(RX7/TX7)
: WDM-side services
52TOM
3(RX1/TX1)
4(RX2/TX2)
5(RX3/TX3)
6(RX4/TX4)
8(RX6/TX6)
161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1
161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 10(RX8/TX8)
7(RX5/TX5)
9(RX7/TX7)
NOTE
When the number of a route of the ClientLP1 port is the same as that of a route of the ClientLP2 port, the
two routes cannot be configured with cross-connections at the same time. That is, when the cross-connection
from RX/TX to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 is configured, the cross-connection from RX/TX to 202
(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 is not supported at the same time.

RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8
a
These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces.
ClientLP1/ClientLP2 Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1 to 8.
ODU1LP1 Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1.
ODU0LP1 Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1 to 2.
a: In different application scenarios, RX7/TX7 or RX8/TX8 of the TOM can be used as client-
side interfaces or WDM-side interfaces.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1407
ClientLP port to ODU0 Tributary-Line mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1). Then, create
the following cross-connections:
l Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the TOM
board, as shown in Figure 14-216.
l Create OTU1 cross-connection between the internal ODU1LP1 and 9(RX7/TX7) or 10
(RX8/TX8) of the TOM board, as shown in Figure 14-216.
NOTE
If only seven FE services are received from client equipment, specify the service package as Tributary line
7*FE->ODU0. This service package automatically completes the following settings:
l Board Working mode is set to Cascading.
l Port Working Mode is set to ODU0 tributary-line (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1) for the ClientLP1
port.
l Service Type is to FE for channels 1-4 on the ClientLP1 port and channels 5-7 on the ClientLP2 port.
l Port Type is set to Line Side Color Optical Port for the RX8/TX8 port.
l Bidirectional Any-level cross-connections are created between the RX1/TX1-RX7/TX7 ports and
channels 1-4 on the ClientLP1 port and channels 5-7 on the ClientLP2 port.
l Bidirectional OTU1-level cross-connections are created between the RX8/TX8 port and channel 1 on the
ODU1LP1 port.
Client side
10(TX8/RX8)-1
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
TOM
1
161(ODU0LP1
/ODU0LP1)-1
161(ODU0LP1
/ODU0LP1)-2
51(ODU1LP1/
ODU1LP1)-1
WDM side
2 3 3
Cross-connect module Cross-connect module Cross-connect module Cross-connect module
Client side
10(TX8/RX8)-1 3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
TOM
1
161(ODU0LP1
/ODU0LP1)-1
161(ODU0LP1
/ODU0LP1)-2
51(ODU1LP1/
ODU1LP1)-1
WDM side
2
3 3

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1408
14.15.7 TN52TOM Scenario 3: Any->ODU1 (Cascading)
Implements conversion between eight signals at a rate in the range of 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s
and one ODU1 signal.
Figure 14-217 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 3: Any->ODU1)
TX1
TOM
1xODU1 1xOTU2
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
N
S
2
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
N
S
2
1xOTU2
1
O
D
U
1
TOM
8
A
n
y
1
O
D
U
1
8
A
n
y
1xODU1
ODU1 Any ODU1 Any
FE, STM-1, STM-4,
STM-16, OC-3, OC-
12, OC-48, FC100,
GE, FC200, FICON,
FICON Express,
HD-SDI, DVB-ASI,
SDI, ESCON, FDDI
FE, STM-1, STM-4,
STM-16, OC-3, OC-
12, OC-48, FC100,
GE, FC200, FICON,
FICON Express,
HD-SDI, DVB-ASI,
SDI, ESCON, FDDI
RX1
TX8
RX8
TX1
RX1
TX8
RX8
OptiX OSN 8800: N/A
OptiX OSN 8800: N/A
OptiX OSN 6800: N/A
NOTE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1409
Figure 14-218 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (scenario 3: ODU1 mode (OTU1/Any-
>ODU1) in cascading mode)
52TOM
3(RX1/TX1)
4(RX2/TX2)
5(RX3/TX3)
6(RX4/TX4)
7(RX5/TX5)
8(RX6/TX6)
9(RX7/TX7)
10(RX8/TX8)
52NS2
1(IN/OUT)
: WDM-side services

ClientLP1 Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1 to 8.

ClientLP port to ODU1 mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1). Create the cross-connection between the
internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the TOM board. Then, create the following cross-
connections:
ODU1LP port of the other boards to implement the cross-connect grooming of ODU1
services, as shown in Figure 14-219.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1410
Client side
WDM side
WDM side
10(TX8/RX8)-1
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
TOM
2
1
Compatible
mode
Standard
mode
Other board
Cross-connect
module
Other board
(Compatible
mode)
Other board
(Standard mode)

14.15.8 TN52TOM Scenario 4: Any->ODU1->OTU1 (Cascading)
Implements conversion between six signals at a rate in the range of 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and
one OTU1 signal, and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side, or
implements conversion between seven Any signals at any rate in the range of 100 Mbit/s to 2.5
Gbit/s and one OTU1.
Figure 14-220 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 4: Any->ODU1->OTU1)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1411
TOM
1xOTU1
MUX/
DMUX
1
O
D
U
1
TOM
1
O
D
U
1
7
A
n
y
1
O
T
U
1
7
A
n
y
1
O
T
U
1
1xOTU1
MUX/
DMUX
FE, GE, STM-1,
STM-4, STM-16,
OC-3, OC-12, OC-
48, FC100, FC200,
FICON, FICON
Express, HD-SDI,
DVB-ASI, SDI,
ESCON, FDDI
FE, GE, STM-1,
STM-4, STM-16,
OC-3, OC-12, OC-
48, FC100, FC200,
FICON, FICON
Express, HD-SDI,
DVB-ASI, SDI,
ESCON, FDDI
Any Any
TX1
RX1
TX7
RX7
TX8
RX8
TX1
RX1
TX7
RX7
TX8
RX8
1xOTU1
MUX/
DMUX
1xOTU1
MUX/
DMUX
1
O
T
U
1
TOM
FE, GE, STM-1,
STM-4, STM-16,
OC-3, OC-12, OC-
48, FC100, FC200,
FICON, FICON
Express, HD-SDI,
DVB-ASI, SDI,
ESCON, FDDI
FE, GE, STM-1,
STM-4, STM-16,
OC-3, OC-12, OC-
48, FC100, FC200,
FICON, FICON
Express, HD-SDI,
DVB-ASI, SDI,
ESCON, FDDI
1
O
D
U
1
1
O
T
U
1
TOM
6
A
n
y
1
O
D
U
1
MUX/
DMUX
MUX/
DMUX
Any Any
6
A
n
y
6
A
n
y
6
A
n
y
TX1
RX1
TX6
RX6
TX8
RX8
TX7
RX7
TX1
RX1
TX6
RX6
TX7
RX7
TX8
RX8
OptiX OSN 8800: N/A
NOTE
On the client side, six or seven pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5
Gbit/s.
In this scenario, mapping of ODU0 services is not supported. This is different than the TN52TOM scenario
2.

>ODU1->OTU1) in cascading mode)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1412
: WDM-side services
52TOM
3(RX1/TX1)
4(RX2/TX2)
5(RX3/TX3)
6(RX4/TX4)
7(RX5/TX5)
8(RX6/TX6)
9(RX7/TX7)
10(RX8/TX8)
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)
52TOM
3(RX1/TX1)
4(RX2/TX2)
5(RX3/TX3)
6(RX4/TX4)
7(RX5/TX5)
8(RX6/TX6)
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 10(RX8/TX8) 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)
: WDM-side services
9(RX7/TX7)
NOTE

RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8
a
a: RX7/TX7 or RX8/TX8 of the TOM can be used as client-side interfaces or WDM-side
interfaces.

ClientLP port to ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1).
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1413
l Create the cross-connection between the internal ODU1LP1 and RX7/TX7 or RX8/TX8
of the TOM board, as shown in Figure 14-222.
NOTE
If only seven STM-1 services are received from client equipment, specify the service package as Tributary line
7*STM-1/OC3->ODU1. This service package automatically completes the following settings:
l Board Working mode is set to Cascading.
l Port Working Mode is set to ODU1 tributary-line (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1) for the ClientLP1
port.
l Service Type is set to STM-1 for channels 1-7 on the ClientLP1 port.
l Port Type is set to Line Side Color Optical Port for the RX8/TX8 port.
l Bidirectional Any-level cross-connections are created between the RX1/TX1-RX7/TX7 ports and
channels 1-7 on the ClientLP1 port.
ODU1LP1 port.
Client side
WDM side
9(TX7/RX7)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1
2
1
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
3
TOM
Client side
WDM side
9(TX7/RX7)-1
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 10(TX8/RX8)-1
2
1
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
3
TOM

14.15.9 TN52TOM Scenario 5: Any->ODU0[->ODU1] (Non-
Cascading)
Implements conversion between eight signals at a rate in the range of 100 Mbit/s to 1.25 Gbit/
s and eight ODU0 signals or four ODU1 signals.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1414
Figure 14-223 shows the position of a TOM board in a WDM system when it is used on an
OptiX OSN 8800. Figure 14-224 shows the position of the TOM board in a WDM system when
it is used on an OptiX OSN 6800/3800.
Figure 14-223 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 5: Any->ODU0) (OptiX
OSN 8800)
TOM
FE, GE,
FC100, FICON,
DVB-ASI, SDI,
ESCON, FDDI
FE, GE,
FC100, FICON,
DVB-ASI, SDI,
ESCON, FDDI
8xODU0 1xOTU2
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
N
S
2
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
N
S
2
1xOTU2
TOM
8
A
n
y
8
O
D
U
0
8
A
n
y
8xODU0
8
O
D
U
0
8
O
D
U
0
1 1
8 8
1
8 8
1
TX1
RX1
TX8
RX8
TX1
RX1
TX8
RX8
NOTE
On the client side, eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 10 Gbit/s.

Figure 14-224 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 5: Any->ODU0->ODU1)
(OptiX OSN 6800/3800)
FE, GE,
FC100, FICON,
DVB-ASI, SDI,
ESCON, FDDI
FE, GE,
FC100, FICON,
DVB-ASI, SDI,
ESCON, FDDI
4xODU1 1xOTU2
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
N
S
2
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
N
S
2
1xOTU2
TOM
8
A
n
y
4xODU1
ODU1 Any
8
O
D
U
0
4
O
D
U
1
TOM
8
A
n
y
8
O
D
U
0
4
O
D
U
1
1 1
4 4
1
4
1
4
ODU1 Any
TX1
RX1
TX8
RX8
TX1
RX1
TX8
RX8
OptiX OSN 6800: N/A
NOTE
On the client side, eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 10 Gbit/s.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1415
Figure 14-225 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (scenario 5: ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[-
>ODU1]) in non-cascading mode)
OptiX OSN 8800: Any->ODU0
52TOM
3(RX1/TX1)
4(RX2/TX2)
5(RX3/TX3)
6(RX4/TX4)
7(RX5/TX5)
8(RX6/TX6)
9(RX7/TX7)
10(RX8/TX8)
52NS2
1(IN/OUT
)
: WDM-side services
OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800: Any->ODU0->ODU1
52TOM
3(RX1/TX1)
4(RX2/TX2)
5(RX3/TX3)
6(RX4/TX4)
7(RX5/TX5)
8(RX6/TX6)
9(RX7/TX7)
52NS2
1(IN/OUT)
: WDM-side services
10(RX8/TX8)
208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2
NOTE
When the number of a route of the ClientLP1, ClientLP3, ClientLP5, or ClientLP7 port is the same as that
of a route of the ClientLP2, ClientLP4, ClientLP6, or ClientLP8 port, the two routes cannot be configured
with cross-connections at the same time. That is, when the cross-connection from RX/TX to 201(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1)-1 is configured, the cross-connection from RX/TX to 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 is not
supported at the same time; when the cross-connection from RX/TX to 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 is
configured, the cross-connection from RX/TX to 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 is not supported at the same
time. For other port groups, that is, ClientLP5&ClientLP6 and ClientLP7&ClientLP8, the same rule
applies.

Table 14-218 Description of NM port of the TOM board (Non-cascading mode)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1416
l ClientLP1
l ClientLP2
l ClientLP5
l ClientLP6
Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1 to 4.
l ClientLP3
l ClientLP4
l ClientLP7
l ClientLP8
ODU0LP1-ODU0LP4 Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1 to 2.

On the U2000, set the Board working Mode to Non-cascading.
ClientLP port to ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]).
board. Then, create the following cross-connections, as shown in Figure 14-226.
8800, as shown in Figure 14-226.
l Create the ODU1 cross-connection between the ODU0LP port of the TOM board and
6800/3800, as shown in Figure 14-226.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1417
NOTE
The total rate of services that are input at each group of ClientLP ports, such as 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP)-4, cannot be higher than 1.25 Gbit/s.
Only one GE service can be input at each group of ClientLP ports.
The client-side eight pairs of optical ports can access services at a maximum rate of 10 Gbit/s.
If a channel of the ClientLP1 port and a channel of the ClientLP2 port are identified by the same number,
these two channels cannot be used at the same time. For example, if the 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
channel is configured with a service type, you cannot configure a service type for the 202(ClientLP2/
ClientLP2)-1 channel. Service configurations at the ClentLP3 and ClientLP4, ClientLP5 and ClientLP6,
and ClientLP7 and ClientLP8 ports must also comply with this restriction.
If only eight GE (GFP-T) services are received from client equipment, specify the service package as
Tributary 8*GE->8*ODU0. This service package automatically completes the following settings:
l Board Working mode is set to Non-cascading.
l Port Working Mode is set to ODU0 Mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]) for the ClientLP1 port.
l Service Type is set to GE(GFP-T) for channel 1 on the ClientLP1-ClientLP8 ports.
l Bidirectional GE-level cross-connections are created between the RX1/TX1 port and channel 1 on
the ClientLP1 port, the RX3/TX3 port and channel 1 on the ClientLP3 port, the RX5/TX5 port and
channel 1 on the ClientLP5 port, and the RX7/TX7 port and channel 1on the ClientLP7 port.
l Bidirectional GE-level cross-connections are created between the RX2/TX2 port and channel 2 on
the ClientLP2 port, the RX4/TX4 port and channel 2 on the ClientLP4 port, the RX6/TX6 port and
channel 2 on the ClientLP6 port, and the RX8/TX8 port and channel 2 on the ClientLP8 port.
OptiX OSN 8800
WDM side
1
2
10(TX8/RX8)-1
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
TOM
Compatible
mode
Standard
mode
Cross-connect
module
Other board
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1418
Other board
(Compatible
mode)
Other board
(Standard mode)
OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800
WDM side
Other board
1 3
10(TX8/RX8)-1
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
TOM
161(ODU0LP1
/ODU0LP1)-1
162(ODU0LP2
/ODU0LP2)-1
2
163(ODU0LP3
/ODU0LP3)-1
164(ODU0LP4
/ODU0LP4)-1
Cross-connect
module
Other board TN11ND2 / TN12ND2 / TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN51NQ2 / TN52NQ2 /
TN12LQMS (NS1 Mode) / TN54NPO2 / TN55NPO2 / TN54ENQ2 / TN12ELQX /
TN12PTQX
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1419
WDM side
1 3
10(TX8/RX8)-1
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
TOM
161(ODU0LP1
/ODU0LP1)-1
162(ODU0LP2
/ODU0LP2)-1
2
163(ODU0LP3
/ODU0LP3)-1
164(ODU0LP4
/ODU0LP4)-1
Compatible
mode
Standard
mode
Cross-connect
module
Other board
Other board
(Compatible
mode)
Other board
(Standard mode)

14.15.10 TN52TOM Scenario 6: Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1(Non-
Cascading)
Implements conversion between six signals at a rate in the range of 100 Mbit/s to 1.25 Gbit/s
and two OTU1 signals, or implements conversion between four signals and two OTU1 signals
and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side.
For the position of the TOM in a WDM system, see Figure 14-227 or Figure 14-228.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1420
Figure 14-227 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 6: A)
TX1
FE, GE,
FC100, FICON,
DVB-ASI, SDI,
ESCON, FDDI
FE, GE,
FC100, FICON,
DVB-ASI, SDI,
ESCON, FDDI
2xOTU1
MUX/
DMUX
2
O
D
U
1
2
O
T
U
1
6
A
n
y
2xOTU1
MUX/
DMUX
TOM
2
O
D
U
1
2
O
T
U
1
6
A
n
y
TOM
Any Any
4
O
D
U
0
4
O
D
U
0
RX1
TX6
RX6
TX8
RX8
TX7
RX7
TX1
RX1
TX6
RX6
TX7
RX7
TX8
RX8
The conversion between six Any signals and two OTU1 signals.
OptiX OSN 8800: N/A

Figure 14-228 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 6: B)
FE, GE,
FC100, FICON,
DVB-ASI, SDI,
ESCON, FDDI
2xOTU1
MUX/
DMUX
2
O
D
U
1
2
O
T
U
1
4
A
n
y
2xOTU1
MUX/
DMUX
MUX/
DMUX
MUX/
DMUX
TOM
4
O
D
U
0
Any
FE, GE,
FC100, FICON,
DVB-ASI, SDI,
ESCON, FDDI
2
O
D
U
1
2
O
T
U
1
4
A
n
y
TOM
4
O
D
U
0
Any
TX1
RX1
TX4
RX4
TX5
RX5
TX6
RX6
TX7
RX7
TX8
RX8
TX1
RX1
TX4
RX4
RX5
TX5
RX6
TX6
RX7
TX7
RX8
TX8
Implements conversion between four Any signals and two OTU1 signals and the dual fed and
selective receiving function on the WDM side.
OptiX OSN 8800: N/A
NOTE
On the client side, four pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 5 Gbit/s.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1421
Logical Ports
>ODU0->ODU1->OTU1) in non-cascading mode)
52TOM
3(RX1/TX1)
4(RX2/TX2)
5(RX3/TX3)
6(RX4/TX4)
7(RX5/TX5)
8(RX6/TX6)
9(RX7/TX7)
10(RX8/TX8)
: WDM-side services
52TOM
3(RX1/TX1)
4(RX2/TX2)
5(RX3/TX3)
6(RX4/TX4)
9(RX7/TX7)
10(RX8/TX8)
: WDM-side services
7(RX5/TX5)
8(RX6/TX6)
NOTE
When the number of a route of the ClientLP1, ClientLP3 port is the same as that of a route of the ClientLP2,
ClientLP4 port, the two routes cannot be configured with cross-connections at the same time. That is, when
the cross-connection from RX/TX to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 is configured, the cross-connection from
RX/TX to 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 is not supported at the same time; when the cross-connection from
RX/TX to 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 is configured, the cross-connection from RX/TX to 204(ClientLP4/
ClientLP4)-1 is not supported at the same time. For other port groups, that is, ClientLP5&ClientLP6 and
ClientLP7&ClientLP8, the same rule applies.
The client-side optical interfaces and WDM-side optical interfaces can be chosen as required.

RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8
a
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1422
l ClientLP1
l ClientLP2
l ClientLP3
l ClientLP4
a: Eight pairs of optical interfaces of the TOM can be used as client-side interfaces or WDM-
side interfaces.

ClientLP port to ODU0 Tributary-Line Mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1). Then, create
the following cross-connections:
l Create the cross-connection between the internal ODU1LP1 and RX/TX of the TOM board,
NOTE
In this scenario, all the eight pairs of the optical interfaces on the TOM board can function as either the
client-side or the WDM-side interfaces. If six Any services are input, two OTU1 services are output. If
four Any services are input, two OTU1 services are output for dual transmitting and selective receiving.
Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
WDM side
TOM
161(ODU0LP1/
ODU0LP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2
161(ODU0LP1/
ODU0LP1)-2
162(ODU0LP1/
ODU0LP1)-1
162(ODU0LP1/
ODU0LP1)-2
51(ODU1LP1/
ODU1LP1)-1
52(ODU1LP2/
ODU1LP2)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1 1
3
2
3
Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
WDM side
TOM
161(ODU0LP1/
ODU0LP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2
161(ODU0LP1/
ODU0LP1)-2
162(ODU0LP1/
ODU0LP1)-1
162(ODU0LP1/
ODU0LP1)-2
51(ODU1LP1/
ODU1LP1)-1
52(ODU1LP2/
ODU1LP2)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
1
3
2
3
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1423

14.15.11 TN52TOM Scenario 7: OTU1/Any->ODU1 (Non-
Cascading)
and four ODU1 signals, or implements conversion between four OTU1 signals and four ODU1
signals.
For the position of the TOM in a WDM system, see Figure 14-231 or Figure 14-232.
The conversion between eight signals and four ODU1 signals.
Figure 14-231 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 7: A)
NS2
1
4
TX8
TOM
1xOTU2
MUX/
DMUX
8
A
n
y
1xOTU2
MUX/
DMUX
FE, GE, STM-1,
STM-4, STM-16,
OC-3, OC-12, OC-
48, FC100, FC200,
FICON, FICON
Express, HD-SDI,
DVB-ASI, SDI,
ESCON, FDDI
FE, GE, STM-1,
STM-4, STM-16,
OC-3, OC-12, OC-
48, FC100, FC200,
FICON, FICON
Express, HD-SDI,
DVB-ASI, SDI,
ESCON, FDDI
NS2
1
4
Any Any
TOM
4
O
D
U
1
8
A
n
y
4
O
D
U
1
ODU1 ODU1
4xODU1
4xODU1
RX8
TX1
RX1
TX8
RX8
TX1
RX1
The conversion between four OTU1 signals and four ODU1 signals.
OptiX OSN 8800: N/A
OptiX OSN 8800: N/A
OptiX OSN 6800: N/A

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1424
Figure 14-232 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 7: B)
4
1xOTU2
MUX/
DMUX
1xOTU2
MUX/
DMUX
TOM
OTU1
NS2 4
OTU1
1
4
NS2
4
O
D
U
1
4xODU1
1
4
4xODU1
TOM
4
O
D
U
1
ODU1 ODU1
4
O
T
U
1
4
O
T
U
1
TX1
RX1
TX8
RX8
TX1
RX1
TX8
RX8
OptiX OSN 8800: N/A
OptiX OSN 6800: N/A
NOTE
In this scenario, mapping of Any services is not supported. This is different than TN52TOM scenario 8.

Figure 14-233 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (scenario 7: ODU1 mode (OTU1/Any-
>ODU1) in non-cascading mode)
OptiX OSN 8800/OptiX OSN 6800:
52TOM
3(RX1/TX1)
4(RX2/TX2)
5(RX3/TX3)
6(RX4/TX4)
A
7(RX5/TX5)
8(RX6/TX6)
9(RX7/TX7)
10(RX8/TX8)
A
52NS2
1(IN/OUT)
: WDM-side services
: Virtual channel
: Working service direction
OptiX OSN 3800:
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1425
52TOM
3(RX1/TX1)
4(RX2/TX2)
5(RX3/TX3)
6(RX4/TX4)
7(RX5/TX5)
8(RX6/TX6)
9(RX7/TX7)
10(RX8/TX8)
52NS2
1(IN/OUT)
: WDM-side services
NOTE
Particularly, in the OptiX OSN 3800, inter-board ODU1 cross-connections between the 52TOM and 52NS2
boards, if required, should be configured in such a manner that the ClientLP3-1 port on the 52TOM board
is cross-connected to the ODU1LP1-3 port on the 52NS2 board, the ClientLP5-1 port on the 52TOM board
is cross-connected to the ODU1LP1-2 port on the 52NS2 board.

l ClientLP1
l ClientLP5
l ClientLP3
l ClientLP7

ClientLP port to ODU1 mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1).
l create the ODU1 cross-connection between the ClientLP port on the TOM board and the
ODU1LP port on the TN52NS2 boards to implement grooming of ODU1 services, defined
as in Figure 14-234.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1426
NOTE
When the internal cross-connection of ODU1 signal is configured, only the first route can be selected. For
example: 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1. Only ClientLP1/ClientLP3/ClientLP5/ClientLP7 can be used.
Each ClientLP logical port can access a maximum of 2.5 Gbit/s signals.
If only four STM-16 services are received from client equipment, specify the service package as Tributary
4*STM-16/OC48->4*ODU1. This service package automatically completes the following settings:
l Board Working mode is set to Non-Cascading.
l Port Working Mode is set to ODU1 Mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1) for the ClientLP1, ClientLP3,
ClientLP5 and ClientLP7 ports.
l Service Type is set to STM-16 for channel 1 on the ClientLP1-ClientLP8 ports.
l Bidirectional Any-level cross-connections are created between the RX1/TX1 port and channel 1 on
the ClientLP1 port, the RX2/TX2 port and channel 1 on the ClientLP3 port, the RX3TX3 port and
channel 1 on the ClientLP5 port, and the RX4/TX4 port and channel 1 on the ClientLP7 port.
WDM side
WDM side
10(TX8/RX8)-1
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
TOM
2 1
Client side
Other board
Compatible
mode
Standard
mode
Cross-connect
module
Other board
(Compatible mode)
TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN53NS2 /
mode)

14.15.12 TN52TOM Scenario 8: OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0-
>ODU1 (Non-Cascading)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1427
Implements conversion between four OTU1 signals and four ODU1 signals through Any re-
encapsulation.
Figure 14-235 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 8: OTU1->ODU1->Any-
>ODU0->ODU1)
4 OTU1
4
O
T
U
1
3
2
A
n
y
Any
4
O
D
U
1
8
A
n
y
TOM
6
4
A
n
y
8
A
n
y
8
O
D
U
0
4
O
D
U
1
4xODU1 1xOTU2
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
N
S
2
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
N
S
2
1xOTU2
1
4
1
4
4xODU1
1
4
1
4
OTU1
Any ODU1 ODU1
4
O
T
U
1
3
2
A
n
y
4
O
D
U
1
8
A
n
y
TOM
6
4
A
n
y 8
A
n
y
8
O
D
U
0
4
O
D
U
1
TX1
RX1
TX8
RX8
TX1
RX1
TX8
RX8
4
OptiX OSN 6800: N/A
NOTE
When the Any service is mapped into the ODU0 service, the TOM board supports de-encapsulation and
then re-encapsulation of only 10 Any services.

Figure 14-236 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (scenario 8: ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-
encapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1) in non-cascading mode)
52TOM
52NS2
1(IN/OUT)
201(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1)-1
203(ClientLP3/
ClientLP3)-1
205(ClientLP5/
ClientLP5)-1
207(ClientLP7/
ClientLP7)-1
233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-1
: WDM-side services
3(RX1/TX1)
5(RX3/TX3)
9(RX7/TX7)
4(RX2/TX2)
7(RX5/TX5)
8(RX6/TX6)
6(RX4/TX4)
10(RX8/TX8)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1428
NOTE
Any four of the client-side optical interfaces can be used for service transmission.

l ClientLP1
l ClientLP3
l ClientLP5
l ClientLP7
Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1
AnyLP1-AnyLP12 Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1 to 8.

ClientLP port to ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1-
>Any->ODU0->ODU1).
l Create the internal cross-connections of the Any service on the TN52TOM board, as shown
3
in Figure 14-237.
l create the ODU1 cross-connection between the ODU0LP port of the TOM board and
services, as shown
4
in Figure 14-237.
NOTE
You can also set the service package to Tributary 4*OTU1->ODU1 (re-encapsulated into ODU0) on the
U2000. This service package automatically completes the following settings:
l Port Working Mode is set to ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation tributary-line mode
(OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1) for the ClientLP1, ClientLP3, ClientLP5 and
ClientLP7 ports.
l Service Type is set to OTU1 for the ClientLP1, ClientLP3, ClientLP5, and ClientLP7 ports.
ClientLP1 port, the RX2/TX2 port and channel 1 on the ClientLP3 port, the RX3TX3 port and channel 1
on the ClientLP5 port, and the RX4/TX4 port and channel 1 on the ClientLP7 port.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1429
Client
side
WDM
side
TOM
201(ClientLP1
/ClientLP1)-1
203(ClientLP3
/ClientLP3)-1
161(ODU0LP1
/ODU0LP1)-1
162(ODU0LP2
/ODU0LP2)-1
WDM
side
2 1
2 3
205(ClientLP5
/ClientLP5)-1
203(ClientLP7
/ClientLP7)-1
163(ODU0LP3
/ODU0LP3)-1
164(ODU0LP4
/ODU0LP4)-1
4
Cross-connect
module
Cross-connect
module
Cross-connect
module
Cross-connect
module
Cross-connect
module
Other board
Compatible
mode
Standard
mode
Cross-connect
module
3(TX1/RX1)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
Other board
(Compatible mode)
mode)

14.15.13 TN52TOM Scenario 9: OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0-
>ODU1->OTU1 (Non-Cascading)
Implements conversion between two OTU1 signals and two OTU1 signals through Any re-
encapsulation, and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1430
Figure 14-238 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 9)
OTU1
TOM
2
O
T
U
1
2
O
D
U
1
1
6
A
n
y
3
2
A
n
y
4
O
D
U
0
2
O
T
U
1
2
O
D
U
1
OTU1
TOM
2
O
T
U
1
2
O
D
U
1
1
6
A
n
y
3
2
A
n
y
4
O
D
U
0
2
O
T
U
1
2
O
D
U
1
2xOTU1
MUX/
DMUX
2xOTU1
MUX/
DMUX
MUX/
DMUX
MUX/
DMUX
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
TX3
RX3
TX4
RX4
TX5
RX5
TX6
RX6
RX3
TX3
RX4
TX4
RX5
TX5
RX6
TX6
NOTE

Figure 14-239 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (scenario 9: ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-
encapsulation tributary-line mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1) in non-
cascading mode)
52TOM
201(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1)-1
203(ClientLP3/
ClientLP3)-1
: WDM-side services
7(RX5/TX5)
9(RX7/TX7)
8(RX6/TX6)
10(RX8/TX8)
3(RX1/TX1)
6(RX4/TX4)
4(RX2/TX2)
5(RX3/TX3)
NOTE
The client-side optical interfaces and WDM-side optical interfaces can be chosen according to the system
plan.
Any two of the client-side optical interfaces can be used for service transmission.

RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8
a
l ClientLP1
l ClientLP3
Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1431
ODU1LP1-ODU1LP2 Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1.
side interfaces.

ClientLP port to ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation tributary-line mode (OTU1-
>ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1).
l Create the internal cross-connections of the Any service on the TOM board, as shown
3
in Figure 14-240.
as shown
4
in Figure 14-240.
NOTE
In this scenario, all the eight pairs of optical interfaces on the TOM board can function as either the client-
side or the WDM-side interfaces.
TOM
201(ClientLP1
/ClientLP1)-1
203(ClientLP3
/ClientLP3)-1
161(ODU0LP1
/ODU0LP1)-1
162(ODU0LP2
/ODU0LP2)-1
2 1
2
205(ClientLP5
/ClientLP5)-1
207(ClientLP7
/ClientLP7)-1
2
51(ODU1LP1
/ODU1LP1)-1
52(ODU1LP2
/ODU1LP2)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
4
8(TX6/RX6)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1
Cross-connect
module
Cross-connect
module
Cross-connect
module
Cross-connect
module
Cross-connect
module
Cross-connect
module
3
3(TX1/RX1)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1

14.15.14 TN52TOM scenario 10: OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1 (non-
cascading)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1432
Implements the electrical regeneration of four OTU1 optical signals, or implements conversion
between six signals at a rate in the range of 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and two OTU1 signals, or
implements conversion between four signals and two OTU1 signals and the dual fed and
selective receiving function on the WDM side.
A: OTU1->ODU1->OTU1 mode.
Implements the electrical regeneration of four OTU1 optical signals.
4xOTU1
TOM
TOM
M
U
X
D
M
U
X
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
4xOTU1
4
O
T
U
1
4
O
D
U
1
4
O
T
U
1
4
O
T
U
1
4
O
D
U
1
4
O
T
U
1
RX1
RX4
TX1
TX4
TX1
TX4
RX1
RX4
B: Any->ODU1->OTU1 mode.
two OTU1 signals, or implements conversion between four signals and two OTU1 signals and
the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1433
FE, GE, FC100,
FICON, STM-4,
OC-12, DVB-
ASI, ESCON,
FDDI, SDI,
STM-1, OC-3
, FC200,
FICON
Express, HD-
SDI, STM-16,
OC-48
2xOTU1
2xOTU1
2
O
D
U
1
2
O
T
U
1
6
A
n
y
TOM
Any
FE, GE, FC100,
FICON, STM-4,
OC-12, DVB-
ASI, ESCON,
FDDI, SDI,
STM-1, OC-3
, FC200,
FICON
Express, HD-
SDI, STM-16,
OC-48
2
O
D
U
1
2
O
T
U
1
6
A
n
y
TOM
Any
MUX/
DMUX
MUX/
DMUX
TX1
RX1
TX6
RX6
RX6
TX6
TX1
RX1
TX7
RX7
TX8
RX8
RX7
TX7
RX8
TX8
OptiX OSN 8800: N/A
2xOTU1
MUX/
DMUX
2xOTU1
MUX/
DMUX
MUX/
DMUX
MUX/
DMUX
TX1
Any
2
O
D
U
1
2
O
T
U
1 4
A
n
y
TOM
FE, GE, FC100,
FICON, STM-4,
OC-12, DVB-
ASI, ESCON,
FDDI, SDI,
STM-1, OC-3
, FC200,
FICON
Express, HD-
SDI, STM-16,
OC-48
Any
2
O
D
U
1
2
O
T
U
1 4
A
n
y
TOM
FE, GE, FC100,
FICON, STM-4,
OC-12, DVB-
ASI, ESCON,
FDDI, SDI,
STM-1, OC-3
, FC200,
FICON
Express, HD-
SDI, STM-16,
OC-48
RX1
TX4
RX4
TX1
RX1
TX4
RX4
TX5
RX5
TX6
RX6
TX7
RX7
TX8
RX8
TX5
RX5
TX6
RX6
RX7
TX7
TX8
RX8
OptiX OSN 8800: N/A
NOTE
plan.

Figure 14-242 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (scenario 10: ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1/
Any->ODU1->OTU1) in non-cascading mode)
OTU1->ODU1->OTU1 mode.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1434
TOM
5(RX3/TX3) 9(RX7/TX7) 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-1 53(ODU1LP3/ODU1LP3)-1
: WDM-side services
Any->ODU1->OTU1 mode. The single transmitting and single receiving on the WDM side.
TOM
5(RX3/TX3)
9(RX7/TX7)
4(RX2/TX2)
8(RX6/TX6) 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1
3(RX1/TX1)
7(RX5/TX5)
6(RX4/TX4)
10(RX8/TX8) 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-1
: WDM-side services
Any->ODU1->OTU1 mode. The dual-fed selectively receiving on the WDM side.
TOM
5(RX3/TX3)
9(RX7/TX7)
4(RX2/TX2)
8(RX6/TX6)
3(RX1/TX1)
7(RX5/TX5)
6(RX4/TX4)
10(RX8/TX8)
: WDM-side services
NOTE
plan.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1435
RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8
a
l ClientLP1
l ClientLP3
l ClientLP5
l ClientLP7
side interfaces.

ClientLP port to ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1).
as shown
3
in Figure 14-243.
NOTE
If only four OTU1 services are received from client equipment, you can also specify the service package as
4*OTU1 REG to automatically complete the following settings:
l Port Working Mode is set to ODU1 tributary-line (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1) for the ClientLP1,
ClientLP3, ClientLP5, and ClientLP7 ports.
l Service Type is set to OTU1 for the ClientLP1, ClientLP3, ClientLP5, and ClientLP7 ports.
l Port Type is set to Line Side Color Optical Port for the RX5/TX5-RX8/TX8 ports.
ClientLP1 port, the RX2/TX2 port and channel 1 on the ClientLP3 port, the RX3TX3 port and channel 1
on the ClientLP5 port, and the RX4/TX4 port and channel 1 on the ClientLP7 port.
ODU1LP1 port, the RX6/TX6 port and channel 1 on the ODU1LP2 port, the RX7/TX7 port and channel
1 on the ODU1LP3 port, and the RX8/TX8 port and channel 1 on the ODU1LP4 port.
OTU1->ODU1->OTU1 mode.
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
TOM
1
3 2
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1436
Any->ODU1->OTU1 mode. The single transmitting and single receiving on the WDM side.
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
TOM
1
3 2
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
Any->ODU1->OTU1 mode. The dual-fed selectively receiving on the WDM side.
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
TOM
1 3 2
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1

14.15.15 TN52TOM scenario 11: OTU1->ODU1->ODU0 (non-
cascading)
Implements conversion between four OTU1 signals and eight ODU0 signals.
8xODU0 1xOTU2
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
N
S
2
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
N
S
2
1xOTU2
1
8
1
8
8xODU0
1
8
1
8
OTU1
8
A
n
y
TOM
4 OTU1
8
A
n
y
TOM
4
O
D
U
1
8
O
D
U
0
4
O
T
U
1
4
O
D
U
1
8
O
D
U
0
4
O
T
U
1
TX1
RX1
TX8
RX8
TX1
RX1
TX8
RX8
4

NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1437
Figure 14-245 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (scenario 11: ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1-
>ODU1->ODU0) in non-cascading mode)
52TOM
3(RX1/TX1)
5(RX3/TX3)
9(RX7/TX7)
52NS2
1(IN/OUT)
: WDM-side services
4(RX2/TX2)
7(RX5/TX5)
8(RX6/TX6)
6(RX4/TX4)
10(RX8/TX8)
NOTE
The client-side optical interfaces can be chosen according to the system plan.

l ClientLP1
l ClientLP3
l ClientLP5
l ClientLP7

ClientLP port to ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0).
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1438
services, as shown in Figure 14-246.
1
3
TOM
2
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1
WDM
side
Other board
Compatible
mode
Standard
mode
Cross-connect
module
Other board
(Compatible mode)
mode)

14.15.16 TN52TOM Scenario 12: OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0
(Non-Cascading)
Implements conversion between four OTU1 signals and eight ODU0 signals through Any re-
encapsulation.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1439
8xODU0 1xOTU2
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
N
S
2
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
N
S
2
1xOTU2
1
8
1
8
8xODU0
1
8
1
8
4 OTU1
8
A
n
y
TOM
OTU1
8
A
n
y
TOM
8
O
D
U
0
3
2
A
n
y
4
O
T
U
1
4
O
D
U
1
6
4
A
n
y
8
O
D
U
0
3
2
A
n
y
4
O
T
U
1
4
O
D
U
1
6
4
A
n
y
RX8
TX1
TX8
RX1
TX1
RX1
RX8
TX8
4
NOTE
Any service is FE, GE, FC100, FICON, DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON, or FDDI.

Figure 14-248 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (scenario 12: ODU1_ANY_ODU0 re-
encapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0) in non-cascading mode)
52TOM
201(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1)-1
203(ClientLP3/
ClientLP3)-1
205(ClientLP5/
ClientLP5)-1
207(ClientLP7/
ClientLP7)-1
52NS2
1(IN/OUT)
: WDM-side services
3(RX1/TX1)
5(RX3/TX3)
9(RX7/TX7)
4(RX2/TX2)
7(RX5/TX5)
8(RX6/TX6)
6(RX4/TX4)
10(RX8/TX8)
NOTE
The client-side optical interfaces can be chosen according to the system plan.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1440
RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8
a
l ClientLP1
l ClientLP3
l ClientLP5
l ClientLP7

On the U2000, set the Board working Mode to non-cascading mode.
ClientLP port to ODU1_ANY_ODU0 re-encapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any-
>ODU0).
l Create the internal cross-connections of the Any service on the TOM board, as shown
3
in Figure 14-249.
l Create the ODU0 cross-connection between the AnyLP port of the TOM board and
services, as shown
4
in Figure 14-249.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1441
TOM
2
WDM
side
Client
side
4
Cross-connect
module
Cross-connect
module
Cross-connect
module
Cross-connect
module
WDM
side
Other board
Compatible
mode
Standard
mode
Cross-connect
module
3
1
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1
Other board
(Compatible mode)
mode)

14.15.17 TN11TOM Scenario 1: Any->ODU1 (Cascading)
and one ODU1 signal.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1442
TOM
1xODU1 1xOTU2
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
N
S
2
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
N
S
2
1xOTU2
8
A
n
y
1xODU1
ODU1 Any
FE, GE, FDDI,
STM-1, OC-3,
DVB-ASI, SDI,
STM-16, OC-
48, ESCON,
STM-4, OC-12,
FC100, FICON,
FC200, FICON
Express, HD-
SDI, OTU1
1
O
D
U
1
FE, GE, FDDI,
STM-1, OC-3,
DVB-ASI, SDI,
STM-16, OC-
48, ESCON,
STM-4, OC-12,
FC100, FICON,
FC200, FICON
Express, HD-
SDI, OTU1
TOM
8
A
n
y
ODU1 Any
1
O
D
U
1
TX1
RX1
TX8
RX8
TX1
RX1
TX8
RX8
OptiX OSN 3800: From/To the mesh group slots
OptiX OSN 6800: N/A
NOTE

Figure 14-251 Port diagram of the TN11TOM (scenario 1: ODU1 tributary mode (Any->ODU1)
in cascading mode)
: WDM-side services
11TOM
3(RX1/TX1)
4(RX2/TX2)
5(RX3/TX3)
6(RX4/TX4)
7(RX5/TX5)
8(RX6/TX6)
9(RX7/TX7)
10(RX8/TX8)
52NS2
1(IN/OUT)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1443

On the U2000, set the Board working Mode to Cascading mode.
During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the Any cross-
connection between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports. The cross-connect grooming of ODU1
service is implemented through the cross-connect module in cascading mode, as shown and
in Figure 14-252
Client side
WDM side
WDM side
10(TX8/RX8)-1
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
TOM
2
1
Compatible
mode
Standard
mode
Other board
Cross-connect
module
Other board
(Compatible mode)
mode)

14.15.18 TN11TOM Scenario 2: Any->ODU1->OTU1 (Cascading)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1444
one OTU1 signal, and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side, or
implements conversion between seven signals at a rate in the range of 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s
and one OTU1 signal.
Figure 14-253 Position of the TN11TOM in a WDM system
TOM
Any
1
O
D
U
1
TOM
Any
1
O
D
U
1
7
A
n
y
1
O
T
U
1
1
O
T
U
1
1xOTU1
MUX/
DMUX
MUX/
DMUX
1xOTU1
7
A
n
y
FE, GE, FDDI, STM-
1, OC-3, STM-4, OC-
12, STM-16, OC-
48,ESCON,
FC100, FICON,
FC200, FICON
Express, HD-SDI,
DVB-ASI, SDI, OTU1
FE, GE, FDDI, STM-
1, OC-3, STM-4, OC-
12, STM-16, OC-
48,ESCON,
FC100, FICON,
FC200, FICON
Express, HD-SDI,
DVB-ASI, SDI, OTU1
TX1
RX1
TX7
RX7
TX1
RX1
TX8
RX8
TX8
RX8
TX7
RX7
RX1
TOM
Any
1
O
D
U
1
TOM
Any
1
O
D
U
1
6
A
n
y
6
A
n
y
1
O
T
U
1
1
O
T
U
1
1xOTU1
MUX/
DMUX
MUX/
DMUX
MUX/
DMUX
MUX/
DMUX
1xOTU1
FE, GE, FDDI, STM-
1, OC-3, STM-4, OC-
12, STM-16, OC-
48,ESCON,
FC100, FICON,
FC200, FICON
Express, HD-SDI,
DVB-ASI, SDI, OTU1
FE, GE, FDDI, STM-
1, OC-3, STM-4, OC-
12, STM-16, OC-
48,ESCON,
FC100, FICON,
FC200, FICON
Express, HD-SDI,
DVB-ASI, SDI, OTU1
TX1
RX6
TX6
RX7
TX7
RX8
TX8
RX1
TX1
RX6
TX6
RX7
TX7
TX8
RX8
NOTE
In cascade mode, only RX7/TX7 or RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical interfaces.

>ODU1->OTU1) in cascading mode)
Converts between six Any signals and one OTU1 signal and the dual fed and selective receiving
function on the WDM side.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1445
11TOM
3(RX1/TX1)
4(RX2/TX2)
5(RX3/TX3)
6(RX4/TX4)
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)
10(RX8/TX8)
7(RX5/TX5)
8(RX6/TX6)
9(RX7/TX7)
: WDM-side services
Converts between seven Any signals and one OTU1 signal.
11TOM
3(RX1/TX1)
4(RX2/TX2)
5(RX3/TX3)
6(RX4/TX4) 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1) 10(RX8/TX8)
7(RX5/TX5)
8(RX6/TX6)
9(RX7/TX7)
: WDM-side services

NOTE
In cascading mode, the TOM implements the electrical regeneration of one channel of OTU1 signal. Only
RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 can be used as WDM-side optical interfaces.
RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8
a
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1446
a: RX7/TX7 or RX8/TX8 of the TOM can be used as client-side interfaces or WDM-side
interfaces.

On the U2000, set the Board working Mode to Non-cascading mode.
Creating electrical cross-connections for the TOM board on the U2000 is a process of
establishing cross-connections inside the board. For details, see Figure 14-255.
Client side
WDM side
9(TX7/RX7)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1
2
1
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
3
TOM
Client side
WDM side
9(TX7/RX7)-1
2
1
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
3
TOM

14.15.19 TN11TOM Scenario 3: Any->ODU1 (Non-Cascading)
and four ODU1 signals.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1447
NS2
1
4
TOM
1xOTU2
MUX/
DMUX
8
A
n
y
1xOTU2
MUX/
DMUX
FC100, FICON, FE,
GE, STM-1, OC-3,
STM-4, OC-12,
STM-16, OC-48
, FC200, FICON
Express, DVB-ASI,
ESCON, FDDI, SDI,
HD-SDI, OTU1
NS2
1
4
Any Any
TOM
4
O
D
U
1
8
A
n
y
4
O
D
U
1
ODU1 ODU1
4xODU1
4xODU1
FC100, FICON, FE,
GE, STM-1, OC-3,
STM-4, OC-12,
STM-16, OC-48
, FC200, FICON
Express, DVB-ASI,
ESCON, FDDI, SDI,
HD-SDI, OTU1
TX1
RX1
TX8
RX8
TX1
RX1
TX8
RX8
OptiX OSN 6800: N/A

Figure 14-257 Port diagram of the TN11TOM (scenario 3: ODU1 tributary mode (Any->ODU1)
in non-cascading mode)
: WDM-side services
11TOM
3(RX1/TX1)
4(RX2/TX2)
5(RX3/TX3)
6(RX4/TX4)
7(RX5/TX5)
8(RX6/TX6)
9(RX7/TX7)
10(RX8/TX8)
52NS2
1(IN/OUT)
NOTE
In this case, the 201 (ClientLP1/ ClientLP1) and 203 (ClientLP3/ ClientLP3) ports can access a maximum
of four services, and the 202 (ClientLP2/ ClientLP2) and 204 (ClientLP4/ ClientLP4) ports can access a
maximum of two services.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1448
l ClientLP1
l ClientLP3
l ClientLP2
l ClientLP4

On the U2000, set the Board working Mode to Non-cascading mode.
During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the Any cross-
connection between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports. The cross-connect grooming of ODU1
service is implemented through the cross-connect module in non-cascading mode, as shown
WDM side
10(TX8/RX8)-1
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
TOM
2 1
Client side
Other board
Compatible
mode
Standard
mode
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 Cross-connect
module
WDM side
Other board
(Compatible mode)
TN53NS2 / TN11NS2 / TN12NS2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN12LQMS(NS1
Mode) / TN12ELQX / TN12PTQX
mode)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1449
14.15.20 TN11TOM Scenario 4: Any->ODU1->OTU1(Non-
Cascading)
Implements conversion between four optical signals at a rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and
four ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals.
TOM
4xOTU1
MUX/
DMUX
4
A
n
y
MUX/
DMUX
FC100, FICON, FE,
GE, STM-1, OC-3
, STM-4, OC-12,
DVB-ASI, ESCON,
FDDI, FC200,
FICON Express,
SDI, HD-SDI, STM-
16, OC-48
Any
4
O
D
U
1
4
O
T
U
1
4xOTU1
FC100, FICON, FE,
GE, STM-1, OC-3
, STM-4, OC-12,
DVB-ASI, ESCON,
FDDI, FC200,
FICON Express,
SDI, HD-SDI, STM-
16, OC-48
TOM
4
A
n
y
Any
4
O
D
U
1
4
O
T
U
1
TX1
RX1
TX4
RX4
TX5
RX5
TX8
RX8
RX5
TX5
RX8
TX8
TX1
RX1
TX4
RX4
NOTE
The client-side optical interfaces and WDM-side optical interfaces can be chosen as described in the system
plan.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1450
>ODU1->OTU1) in non-cascading mode)
: WDM-side services
11TOM
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)
52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)
54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)
53(ODU1LP3/ODU1LP3)
7(RX5/TX5)
8(RX6/TX6)
9(RX7/TX7)
10(RX8/TX8)
3(RX1/TX1)
4(RX2/TX2)
5(RX3/TX3)
6(RX4/TX4)

RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8
a
l ClientLP1
l ClientLP3
l ClientLP2
l ClientLP4
side interfaces.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1451
WDM side
9(TX7/RX7)-1
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)
10(TX8/RX8)-1
2
1
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
3
TOM
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)
53(ODU1LP3/ODU1LP3)
54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)
Cross-connect
module
Cross-connect
module
Cross-connect
module
Client side

14.15.21 TN11TOM Scenario 5: OTU1->ODU1->OTU1 (electrical
regeneration board)
Implements the electrical regeneration of four OTU1 optical signals.
TOM
4xOTU1
4
O
T
U
1
4
O
D
U
1
4
O
T
U
1
MUX DMUX
MUX
DMUX
TOM
4
O
T
U
1
4
O
D
U
1
4
O
T
U
1
4xOTU1
4xOTU1 4xOTU1
TX1 RX1
TX4 RX4
RX1
RX4
TX1
TX4

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1452
NOTE
In non-cascading mode, the TOM implements the electrical regeneration of four channels of OTU1 signal.
Any four of RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8 can be configured as WDM-side optical interfaces.
Figure 14-263 Port diagram of the TN11TOM (scenario 5: ODU1 tributary-line mode (electrical
regeneration board))
: WDM-side services
11TOM
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)
52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)
54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)
53(ODU1LP3/ODU1LP3)
7(RX5/TX5)
8(RX6/TX6)
9(RX7/TX7)
10(RX8/TX8)
3(RX1/TX1)
4(RX2/TX2)
5(RX3/TX3)
6(RX4/TX4)
NOTE
In non-cascading mode, the TOM implements the electrical regeneration of four channels of OTU1 signal.
Any four of RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8 can be configured as WDM-side optical interfaces.

RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8
a
ClientLP1ClientLP4 Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1
side interfaces.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1453
WDM side
9(TX7/RX7)-1
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)
10(TX8/RX8)-1
2
1
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
3
TOM
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)
53(ODU1LP3/ODU1LP3)
54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)
Cross-connect
module
Cross-connect
module
Cross-connect
module
Client side

The TOM board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
Functional Modules and Signal Flow (When Used as a Tributary Board)
Figure 14-265 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TOM board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1454
Figure 14-265 Functional modules and signal flow of the TOM board (when used as a tributary
board)
Client
side
O/E
E/O
RX 1
RX 2
RX 8
TX 8
TX 1
TX 2
100 Mbit/s - 2.5 Gbit/s Any
services/ n x ODUk Backplane (service cross-connection)
8
8
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
SCC
Client-side
optical
module
Service
encapsulation
and mapping
module
OTN
processing
module
Cross-
connect
module

NOTE
In Figure 14-265, n x ODUk indicates the service cross-connections from the TOM board to
the backplane. "n" represents the maximum number of cross-connections and "k" represents the
service granularity.
Table 14-231 shows the service cross-connections from the TOM board to the backplane.
Table 14-231 Functional modules and signal flow of the TOM
Boar
d
Board
Working
Mode
Port Working Mode Application
Scenario
Service Cross-connection
TN5
2TO
M
cascading ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[-
>ODU1])
TN52TOM
scenario 1
A maximum of 2 x ODU0/1 x
ODU1/6 x (100Mbit/s to 1.25Gbit/
s) Any services
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1455
Boar
d
Board
Working
Mode
Port Working Mode Application
Scenario
Service Cross-connection
ODU1 mode (OTU1/Any-
>ODU1)
TN52TOM
scenario 3
(100Mbit/s to 2.5Gbit/s) Any
services
non-
cascading
ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[-
>ODU1])
TN52TOM
scenario 5
ODU1/6 x (100Mbit/s to 1.25Gbit/
s) Any services
ODU1 mode (OTU1/Any-
>ODU1)
TN52TOM
scenario 7
services
ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1
re-encapsulation mode
(OTU1->ODU1->Any-
>ODU0->ODU1)
TN52TOM
scenario 8
services
ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1-
>ODU1->ODU0)
TN52TOM
scenario 11
A maximum of 8 x ODU0
ODU1_ANY_ODU0 re-
encapsulation mode (OTU1-
>ODU1->Any->ODU0)
TN52TOM
scenario 12
A maximum of 8 x ODU0
TN1
1TO
M
cascading N/A TN11TOM
Scenario 1
services
non-
cascading
N/A TN11TOM
scenario 3
services

NOTE
The TN52TOM board supports cross-connections of Any services only when it is used in the OptiX OSN 8800
or OptiX OSN 6800.
The TN52TOM board supports ODU0 cross-connections only when it is used in the OptiX OSN 8800.
The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the TOM board. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TOM to the backplane
of the TOM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
The client-side optical module receives eight channels of optical signals from client
encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out
ODUk signals or Any signals to the backplane.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1456
l Receive direction
The signal processing module receives the electrical signals sent from the backplane.
For Any signals, the module sends the signals to the client-side optical module.
For ODUk signals, the module performs operations such as ODUk framing, demapping
and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out client-side electrical signals
to the client-side optical module.
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of client-side electrical signals,
and then outputs eight channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical
interfaces.
Functional Modules and Signal Flow (When Used as a Tributary-Line Board)
Figure 14-266 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TOM board.
Figure 14-266 Functional modules and signal flow of the TOM board (when used as a tributary-
line board)
TX7
E/O
O/E
RX8
TX8
RX7
RX1
RX2
RX6
TX6
TX1
TX2
O/E
E/O
Client-side
optical
module
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
WDM-side
optical
module
OTN
processing
module
Cross-
connect
module
Service
encapsulation
and mapping
module
Service
regeneration
module

NOTE
In cascading mode, only the RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 ports on the board can be used as WDM-side ports. Figure
14-266 shows an example in which the RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 ports are used as the WDM-side ports to
implement dual-fed and selective receiving. When a service is to be transmitted and received singly, one of the
RX/TX7 and RX8/TX8 ports can be used as a WDM-side and the other port can be used as a client-side port.
In non-cascading mode, any four of the RX/TX ports can be used as WDM-side ports.
The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the TOM board. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TOM to the WDM side
of the TOM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1457
The client-side optical module receives optical signals from client equipment through the
RX interfaces, and performs O/E conversion.
After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The
module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing,
and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs OTU1 signals.
conversion, the module sends out the OTU1 optical signals at DWDM standard
wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or at CWDM standard wavelengths that
comply with ITU-T G.694.2. The optical signals are split into two channels of identical
optical signals, and then are output through the TX optical interfaces.
l Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives the OTU1 optical signals at DWDM standard
wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or at CWDM standard wavelengths that
comply with ITU-T G.694.2 through the RX optical interfaces. Then, the module performs
O/E conversion.
FEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs the client
signals.
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the client-side electrical signals,
and then outputs the client-side optical signals through the TX optical interfaces.
Module Function
standard optical signals.
WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of standard optical signals.
standard optical signals.
module, OTN processing module, service processing module, and service regeneration
module.
Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and
the WDM-side signals of the board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1458
Regenerates Any signals and monitors SDH and Any signals in two directions.
Service regeneration module
Implements the FEC decoding/encoding and overhead processing of OTU1 signals.
Monitors the performance of WDM-side services.
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TOM board.
Figure 14-267 shows the front panel of the TOM board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1459
Figure 14-267 Front panel of the TOM board

Indicators
Interfaces
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1460
Table 14-232 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TOM board
TX1-TX8 LC Transmits the service signal.
RX1-RX8 LC Receives the service signal.

Laser Hazard Level
One slot houses one TOM board.
Table 14-233 shows the valid slots for the TN11TOM board.
Table 14-234 shows the valid slots for the TN52TOM board.
Table 14-233 Valid slots for the TN11TOM board
Product Valid Slots

Table 14-234 Valid slots for the TN52TOM board
Product Valid Slots

For parameters of TOM, refer to Table 14-235.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1461
Table 14-235 TOM parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
Optical Interface
Name
Default: Used
channel of a board.
Optical Interface
Loopback
Outloop
Default: Non-
Loopback
Outloop
Default: Non-
Loopback
NOTE
Only the TN52TOM supports this
parameter.
SDI, ESCON, FC-100,
FC-200, FDDI, FE,
FICON, FICON
Express, GE, GE(GFP-
T), HD-SDI, OC-3,
0C-12, OC-48, OTU-1,
STM-1, STM-4,
STM-16
Default: None
NOTE
format.
Rate (Mbit/s)
100 to 2200
Default: /
board.
NOTE
parameter.
information.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1462
Default:
l WDM side: On
l Client side: Off
ALS Auxiliary
Condition
FW_Defect,
BW_Client_R_LOS,
BW_WDM_Defect,
FW_ODUk_CSF
Default: FW_Defect
triggering ALS.
BW_Client_R_LOS.
to BW_WDM_Defect.
NOTE
parameter.
Hold-off Time of
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
0s, 100ms, 200ms,
300ms, 400ms, 500ms,
600ms, 700ms, 800ms,
900ms, 1s, 1100ms,
1200ms, 1300ms,
1400ms, 1500ms,
1600ms, 1700ms,
1800ms, 1900ms, 2s
Default: 0s
related lasers.
NOTE
parameter.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1463
Hold-off Time of
Automatic Laser
Turn-On
0s, 100ms, 200ms,
300ms, 400ms, 500ms,
600ms, 700ms, 800ms,
900ms, 1s, 1100ms,
1200ms, 1300ms,
1400ms, 1500ms,
1600ms, 1700ms,
1800ms, 1900ms, 2s
Default: 0s
related lasers.
NOTE
parameter.
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
Default: Disabled
Mode
Default: Enabled
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
Tunable Wavelength
Range
Planned Wavelength
Frequency (THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.10
0
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.17
0 to
18/1611.00/188.78
0
Default: /
board.
information.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1464
Default: C
wavelength.
Default: 9600
Ethernet services.
Ethernet Working
Mode
Auto-Negotiation,
1000M Full-Duplex
Duplex
information.
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
to Disabled.
NOTE
OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None
board resides.
information.
Default: Disabled
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1465
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
commissioning.
Board Mode Cascading Mode, Non-
cascading Mode
Default: Non-
cascading Mode
NOTE
parameter.
Board Working mode Cascading, Non-
Cascading
Default: Non-
Cascading
The Board Working Mode parameter
is used to set the board mode of a board
depending on the service application
scenario.
NOTE
parameter.
Port Working Mode In Non-Cascading
mode, nine working
modes are supported.
a
In Cascading mode,
five working modes are
supported.
b
scenario and service mapping trail. For
the configuration methods of different
application scenarios of the TOM board,
see the Configuration Guide.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1466
a: Working modes supported in Non-Cascading mode are as follows:
l ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1])
l ODU0 Tributary-Line Mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1)
l ODU1 mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1)
l ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0)
l ODU1_ANY_ODU0 re-encapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0)
l ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0-
>ODU1)
l ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation tributary-line mode (OTU1->ODU1-
>Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1)
l ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1)
l NONE Mode (Not for Port)
b: Working modes supported in Cascading mode are as follows:
l ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1])
l ODU0 Tributary-Line Mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1)
l ODU1 mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1)
l ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1)
l NONE Mode (Not for Port)

14.15.26 TOM Specifications
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1467
Bo
ard
Client-Side
Fixed
Optical
Module
Client-Side
Pluggable Optical
Module
WDM-Side
Fixed
Optical
Module
WDM-Side
Pluggable Optical
Module
TN
11T
OM
N/A I-16-2 km
S-16.1-15 km
L-16.1-40 km
L-16.2-80 km
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.5 km
1000 BASE-LX-10 km
1000 BASE-LX-40 km
1000 BASE-ZX-80 km
(eSFP CWDM)-40 km
(eSFP CWDM)-80 km
(eSFP DWDM)-120 km
(Video eSFP)-20 km
(eSFP CWDM)-80 km
(eSFP DWDM)-120 km
I-16-2 km
S-16.1-15 km
L-16.1-40 km
L-16.2-80 km
TN
52T
OM
N/A I-16-2 km
S-16.1-15 km
L-16.1-40 km
L-16.2-80 km
1000 BASE-BX10-U
1000 BASE-BX10-D
1000 BASE-BX-U
1000 BASE-BX-D
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.5 km
1000 BASE-LX-10 km
1000 BASE-LX-40 km
1000 BASE-ZX-80 km
(eSFP CWDM)-40 km
(eSFP CWDM)-80 km
(eSFP DWDM)-120 km
(Video eSFP)-20 km
(eSFP CWDM)-80 km
(eSFP DWDM)-120 km
I-16-2 km
S-16.1-15 km
L-16.1-40 km
L-16.2-80 km
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1468

NOTE
point.
NOTE
OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, and DVB-ASI signals.
module.
Optical
Module
Type
I-16-2 km S-16.1-15
km
L-16.1-40
km
L-16.2-80
km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Optical
source type
- MLM SLM SLM SLM
Target
transmission
distance
- 2 km (1.2 mi.) 15 km (9.3
mi.)
40 km (24.9
mi.)
80 km (49.7
mi.)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -3 0 3 3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -10 -5 -2 -2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1469
Optical
Module
Type
I-16-2 km S-16.1-15
km
L-16.1-40
km
L-16.2-80
km
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm N/A 1 1 1
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB N/A 30 30 30
Eye pattern
mask
- G.957-compliant
G.959.1-compliant
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN APD APD
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1270 to 1580 1270 to 1580 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -18 -18 -27 -28
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm -3 0 -9 -9
Maximum
reflectance
dB -27 -27 -27 -27

NOTE
transmissions)
Optical
Module Type
1000 BASE-
BX10-U
1000 BASE-
BX10-D
1000 BASE-
BX-U
1000 BASE-
BX-D
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1470
Optical
Module Type
1000 BASE-
BX10-U
1000 BASE-
BX10-D
1000 BASE-
BX-U
1000 BASE-
BX-D
Optical source
type
- SLM SLM SLM SLM
Target
transmission
distance
km 10 10 40 40
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1260 to 1360 1480 to 1500 1260 to 1360 1480 to 1500
Maximum
mean launched
power
dBm -3 -3 3 3
Minimum
mean launched
power
dBm -9 -9 -2 -2
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB 6 6 6 6
Eye pattern
mask
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1480 to 1500 1260 to 1360 1480 to 1500 1260 to 1360
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -19.5 -19.5 -23 -23
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm -3 -3 -3 -3
Maximum
reflectance
dB -12 -12 -12 -12

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1471
NOTE
2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, and FE signals.
to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE and DVB-ASI signals.
802.3.
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.
5 km
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Target
transmission
distance
- 0.5 km (0.3
mi.)
10 km (6.2
mi.)
40 km (24.9
mi.)
80 km (49.7
mi.)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -2.5 -3 0 5
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -9.5 -9 -5 -2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 9 9 9 9
Eye pattern
mask
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN PIN PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -17 -20 -20 -23
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1472
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.
5 km
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm 0 -3 -3 -3

NOTE
wavelengths)
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km
(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Target transmission
distance
- 40 km (24.9 mi.) 80 km (49.7 mi.)
range
nm 1471 to 1611 1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 5 5
power
dBm 0 0
Central wavelength
deviation
nm 6.5 6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 1.0 1.0
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30 30
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1473
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km
(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
G.959.1-compliant
range
nm 1270 to 1620 1270 to 1620
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm -3 -9

NOTE
2.67 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP DWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100,
wavelengths)
km
Target transmission
distance
- 120 km (74.6 mi.)
power
dBm 4
power
dBm 0
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1474
km
width
nm 1
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30
Receiver type - APD
range
nm N/A

Optical Module Type 1.5 Gbit/s Multirate (Video
eSFP)-20 km
Service rate Gbit/s 1.5
Operating frequency range nm 1290 to 1330
Minimum mean launched power dBm -7
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1475
Optical Module Type 1.5 Gbit/s Multirate (Video
eSFP)-20 km
Maximum -20 dB spectral width nm 3

(eSFP CWDM)-80 km
power
dBm 5
power
dBm 0
Central wavelength
deviation
nm 6.5
width
nm 1
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30
Receiver type - APD
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1476
(eSFP CWDM)-80 km

(eSFP DWDM)-120 km
power
dBm 3
power
dBm 0
width
nm 1
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30
Receiver type - APD
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1477
(eSFP DWDM)-120 km

Table 14-244 WDM-side pluggable optical specifications (SDH services)
Optical
Module
Type
I-16-2 km S-16.1-15
km
L-16.1-40
km
L-16.2-80
km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Optical
source type
- MLM SLM SLM SLM
Target
transmission
distance
- 2 km (1.2 mi.) 15 km (9.3
mi.)
40 km (24.9
mi.)
80 km (49.7
mi.)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -3 0 3 3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -10 -5 -2 -2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm N/A 1 1 1
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1478
Optical
Module
Type
I-16-2 km S-16.1-15
km
L-16.1-40
km
L-16.2-80
km
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB N/A 30 30 30
Eye pattern
mask
- G.957-compliant
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN APD APD
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1270 to 1580 1270 to 1580 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -18 -18 -27 -28
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm -3 0 -9 -9
Maximum
reflectance
dB -27 -27 -27 -27

(8.7 in.)
l Weight:
TN11TOM: 1.4 kg (3.1 lb.)
TN52TOM: 1.5 kg (3.3 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11TOM 55 60
TN52TOM 81 89.1

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1479
14.16 TOX
TOX: 8 x 10 Gbit/s tributary service processing board
The available functional version of the TOX board is TN55.
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
General
8800 T64
Subrack
Enhanc
ed 8800
T64
Subrack
General
8800 T32
Subrack
Enhanc
ed 8800
T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN
55T
OX
N Y N Y Y N N N

NOTE
When the TN55TOX board is used in an enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack, the TNK2USXH and
TNK2UXCT cross-connect boards must be used. When it is used in an enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack,
the TN52UXCH or TN52UXCM cross-connect board must be configured. When it is used in an OptiX OSN
8800 T16 subrack, the TN16UXCM cross-connect board must be configured.
Variants
The TN55TOX board has only one variant: TN55TOX01.
14.16.2 Application
As a type of tributary board, the TOX board converts between eight 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/
STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e optical signals and eight ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals
through cross-connection.
For the position of the TOX board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-268.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1480
Figure 14-268 Position of the TOX board in the WDM system
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
TOX
10GE LAN
10GE WAN
STM-64
OC-192
OTU2
OTU2e
N
O
2
N
O
2
TOX
10GE LAN
10GE WAN
STM-64
OC-192
OTU2
OTU2e
TX1
TX8
1
8
1
8
1
8
1
8
1
8
1
8
8
x
O
D
U
2
/
O
D
U
2
e
8
x
O
D
U
2
/
O
D
U
2
e
RX1
RX8
TX1
TX8
RX1
RX8

The TOX board enables cross-connections at the electrical layer.
Table 14-245 Functions and features of the TOX board
Function
and Feature
Description
Basic
function
TOX converts signals as follows:
l 8 x 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2<->8 x ODU2.
l 8 x 10GE LAN/OTU2e<->8 x ODU2e.
Client-side
service type
Cross-
connect
capabilities
Supports the cross-connection of eight ODU2/ODU2e signals between the
TOX and the cross-connect board through the backplane.
OTN
function
l Supports mapping each channel of 10G signals into the ODU2/ODU2e
signals at the ODU2/ODU2e interface of the backplane.
l Supports overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. The
mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.709 and G.Sup43.
l Supports SM and TCM function when the TOX receives OTN services.
ESC
function
Supported by the TOX when the client-side service type is OTU2 or OTU2e.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1481
Function
and Feature
Description
FEC
encoding
side, only when the service type is OTU2/OTU2e.
Alarm and
performance
event
monitoring
power of the laser.
LAN).
ALS
function
PRBS
function
NOTE
is STM-64, OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e.
is 10GE LAN.
Test frame Supports the test frame of 10GE LAN services.
Latency
measuremen
t
measurement function can be measured, and the latency data is displayed on
the U2000.
NOTE
IEEE
1588v2
The TOX board supports the TC, TC+OC, BC, and OC modes when the client-
side service type is 10GE LAN and the Port Mapping is MAC Transparent
Mapping (10.7 G).
NOTE
Only the RX1/TX1 and RX2/TX2 optical port can process IEEE 1588v2 clock signals.
Physical
clock
l When the TOX board receives 10GE LAN services and the port mapping
is Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G) on its client side, the board can
l When the TOX board receives 10GE LAN services and the port mapping
is MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G) on its client side, the board can
support synchronous Ethernet processing instead of synchronous Ethernet
transparent transmission.
Electrical-
layer ASON
Supported
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1482
Function
and Feature
Description
Ethernet
service
mapping
mode
Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), MAC Transparent Mapping(10.7G)
NOTE
when Port Mapping is set to Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), Maximum Packet
Length is unavailable on the U2000.
Protection
scheme
NOTE
Loopback WDM side -
Outloop Supported
Protocols or
standards
compliance
Protocols or
standards for
transparent
transmission
(non-performance
monitoring)
IEEE 802.3ae
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
Protocols or
standards for
service processing
(performance
monitoring)
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.873.1
ITU-T G.694.1
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1483

The TOX board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control
and communication module, 1588v2 module, and power supply module.
Figure 14-269 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TOX.
Figure 14-269 Functional modules and signal flow of the TOX
Client side
RX1
8xODU2/ODU2e
Client-side
optical
module
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
RX8
TX1
TX8
SDH/SONET
encapsulation and
mapping module
10GE LAN
encapsulation and
mapping module
E/O
O/E
OTN
processing
module
1588v2
module
Cross-
connect
module

The client side of the TOX board can access the following optical signals:
l 10GE LAN optical signals
l 10GE WAN optical signals
l STM-64 optical signals
l OC-192 optical signals
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1484
l OTU2 optical signals
l OTU2e optical signals
The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the TOX board. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TOX to the backplane,
The client-side optical module receives eight channels of the optical signals from client
processing, and OTN framing. After processing, the module sends out eight channels of
ODU2/ODU2e signals to the backplane for grooming.
l Receive direction
The signal processing module receives ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals sent from the
cross-connection board through the backplane. The module performs operations such as
ODU2/ODU2e framing, demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends
out eight channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e signals to
the client-side optical module.
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/
STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e electrical signals, and then outputs eight channels of
client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.
Module Function
Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of eight channels of 10GE LAN/10GE
WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e optical signals.
electrical signals to 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e optical
signals.
encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module.
Encapsulates multiple channels of SDH/SONET/10GE WAN signals and maps the
signals into the ODU2 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and
has the SDH/SONET performance monitoring function.
ODU2/ODU2e payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the
10GE LAN performance monitoring function.
Frames ODU2/ODU2e signals and processes overheads in ODU2/ODU2e signals.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1485
l 1588v2 module
14.16.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TOX board.
Figure 14-270 shows the front panel of the TOX board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1486
Figure 14-270 Front panel of the TOX board

Indicators
Interfaces
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1487
Table 14-246 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TOX board

Laser Hazard Level
14.16.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one TOX board.
Table 14-247 shows the valid slots for the TOX board.
Table 14-247 Valid slots for the TOX board
Product Valid Slots
Enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68

Table 14-248 Mapping between the physical ports on the TOX board and the port numbers
TX1/RX1 3
TX2/RX2 4
TX3/RX3 5
TX4/RX4 6
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1488
TX5/RX5 7
TX6/RX6 8
TX7/RX7 9
TX8/RX8 10

NOTE
Logical Ports
Figure 14-271 shows the port diagrams of the TOX board. Table 14-249 describes the meaning
of each port.
Figure 14-271 Port diagram of the TOX
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
8 x ODU2/ODU2e
Backplane
7(RX5/TX5)-1
8(RX6/TX6)-1
9(RX7/TX7)-1
10(RX8/TX8)-1

Table 14-249 Description of NMS port of the TOX board

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1489
If the TOX board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the
U2000:
l Create the cross-connections of ODU2 level between the RX/TX port and the ODU2LP of
the other boards, as shown in Figure 14-272.
Figure 14-272 Cross-connection diagram of the TOX board
TOX
3(RX1/TX1)-1
Cross connect mode
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1
2(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1
Client side
The client side of the TOX board are cross-
Line/PID board a
(standard mode)
Line/PID board b
(compatible mode)
WDM side
Cross connect mode
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
7(RX5/TX5)-1
8(RX6/TX6)-1
9(RX7/TX7)-1
10(RX8/TX8)-1
Line/PID board a TN52ND2T04 / TN53ND2 / TN55NO2 / TN52NS2T04 / TN52NS2T05 /
Line/PID board b TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN53NS2 /

For parameters of the TOX, refer to Table 14-250.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1490
Table 14-250 TOX parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
Optical Interface
Name
name.
Default: Used
channel of a board.
Optical Interface
Loopback
Non-Loopback,
Inloop, Outloop
Default: Non-
Loopback
10GE WAN, OC-192,
OTU-2, OTU-2E,
STM-64
Default: None
Mapping(11.1G),
MAC Transparent
Mapping(10.7G)
Default: Bit
Transparent Mapping
(11.1G)
queries the mapping mode of a port
service.
NOTE
The TOX board supports the TC, TC+OC,
BC, and OC modes when the client-side
service type is 10GE LAN and the Port
Mapping is MAC Transparent Mapping
(10.7 G).
Default: Off
Mode
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1491
ALS Auxiliary
Condition
FW_Defect,
BW_Client_R_LOS,
BW_WDM_Defect,
FW_ODUk_CSF
Default: FW_Defect
triggering ALS.
BW_Client_R_LOS.
to BW_WDM_Defect.
Hold-off Time of
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
0s, 100ms, 200ms,
300ms, 400ms, 500ms,
600ms, 700ms, 800ms,
900ms, 1s, 1100ms,
1200ms, 1300ms,
1400ms, 1500ms,
1600ms, 1700ms,
1800ms, 1900ms, 2s
Default: 0s
related lasers.
Hold-off Time of
Automatic Laser
Turn-On
0s, 100ms, 200ms,
300ms, 400ms, 500ms,
600ms, 700ms, 800ms,
900ms, 1s, 1100ms,
1200ms, 1300ms,
1400ms, 1500ms,
1600ms, 1700ms,
1800ms, 1900ms, 2s
Default: 0s
related lasers.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1492
Default: 9600
NOTE
when Port Mapping is set to Bit
Transparent Mapping(11.1G), Maximum
Packet Length is unavailable on the U2000.
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
to Disabled.
NOTE
Default: Enabled
NOTE
Type is set to OTU2 or OTU-2E.
FEC Mode FEC
Default: FEC
NOTE
OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None
board resides.
information.
Default: Disabled
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1493
Default: Disabled
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
Insert Code Type l When Service
Type is STM-64 or
OC-192:
PN11, MS_AIS
Default: PN11
l When Service
Type is 10GE
LAN and port
mapping mode is
MAC transparent
mapping (10.7G):
Quick insert,
Delayed insert
Default: Quick
insert
Applies to fault detection and location
when the service type is STM-64 or
OC-192. When the tributary or line
board at the upstream site is faulty or
when the line board at the downstream
site is faulty, users can specify the output
code type for the tributary board at the
downstream site using this parameter.
When the service type is 10GE-LAN, the
value Quick insert applies to a scenario
in which no protection is configured on
the WDM equipment while protection is
configured for the router that connects to
the WDM equipment. In this scenario,
quick protection switching can be
achieved on the router.
The value Delayed insert applies to a
scenario in which protection is
configured for the WDM equipment and
the router connected to the WDM
equipment. In this scenario, the WDM
equipment preferentially performs
protection switching in case of a fault. If
the fault is rectified, the router does not
perform protection switching. If the fault
persists, then the router performs
protection switching.

14.16.10 TOX Specifications
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1494
Optical Module
TN55TO
X
N/A 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km (SFP+)
10G BASE-ZR-80 km (SFP+)
10G BASE-ER/EW-40 km (SFP+)

NOTE
A margin of the lower threshold of input optical power compared with the receiver sensitivity of the board
and a margin of the upper threshold of output optical power compared with the overload point of the board
are reserved on the U2000 as a precaution.
NOTE
10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km (SFP+) module can be used to access OC-192, STM-64, 10GE WAN, 10GE LAN,
OTU2, and OTU2e signals.
Optical Module Type 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km (SFP+)
Optical source type - SLM
power
dBm -1
power
dBm -6
Output optical power in case of
laser shutdown
dBm -30
Receiver type - PIN
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1495
Optical Module Type 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km (SFP+)
Receiver sensitivity dBm -14.4
Minimum receiver overload dBm 0.5
reflectance dB -12

NOTE
10 Gbit/s BASE-SR-0.3 km (SFP+) module, 10 Gbit/s BASE-LR-10 km (SFP+) module, 10 Gbit/s BASE-ER/
EW-40 km (SFP+), and 10 Gbit/s BASE-ZR-80 km (SFP+) can be used to access 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN
signals.
Optical
Module
Type
10G BASE-
SR-0.3 km
(SFP+)
10G BASE-
LR-10 km
(SFP+)
10G BASE-
ER/EW-40
km (SFP+)
10G BASE-
ZR-80 km
(SFP+)
Optical
interface
service rate
Gbit/s 10.3125 10.3125 10.3125 10.3125
Optical
source type
- MLM SLM SLM SLM
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Target
transmission
distance
- 0.3 km (0.2
mi.)
10 km (6.2
mi.)
40 km (24.8
mi.)
80 km (49.7
mi.)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 840 to 860 1260 to 1355 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -1 0.5 4 4
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -7.3 -8.2 -4.7 0
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1496
Optical
Module
Type
10G BASE-
SR-0.3 km
(SFP+)
10G BASE-
LR-10 km
(SFP+)
10G BASE-
ER/EW-40
km (SFP+)
10G BASE-
ZR-80 km
(SFP+)
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 3 3.5 3 9
Output
optical
power in
case of laser
shutdown
dBm -30 -30 -30 -30
Eye pattern
mask
- IEEE802.3z compliant
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN PIN PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 840 to 860 1260 to 1355 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -11.1 (OMA) -12.6 (OMA) -14.1 (OMA) -24
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm -1 0.5 -1 -7
Maximum
reflectance
dB -12 -12 -26 -27

(8.7 in.)
l Weight: 1.42 kg (3.13 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN55TOX 75.3 80.6

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1497
14.17 TQM
TQM: 4 x multi-rate tributary service processing board
The available functional versions of the TQM board are TN11 and TN12.
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
1TQ
M
N N N N Y Y
TN1
2TQ
M
N N N N Y Y

Variants
The TN11TQM/TN12TQM board has only one variant: TN11TQM01/TN12TQM01.
l Function:
Only the TN12TQM supports the OTU1/HD-SDI/SDI/FDDI services, PRBS function,
Test frame and Tributary SNCP protection. For details, see 14.17.3 Functions and
Features.
l Specification:
The specifications vary according to versions. For details, see 14.17.10 TQM
Specifications.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1498
Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11TQM TN12TQM The TN12TQM can be created as TN11TQM on the NMS. The
upgrade. After substitution, the TN12TQM functions as the
TN11TQM.
TN12TQM None -

14.17.2 Application
As a type of tributary board, the TQM board converts between four optical signals at the rate
between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s and four client-side electrical signals or one ODU1 electrical
signal through cross-connection.
For the position of the TQM board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-273.
Figure 14-273 Position of the TQM board in the WDM system
1
4
1
4
TQM
100Mbit/s

2.5Gbit/s
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
TQM
1
O
D
U
1
1
O
D
U
1
100Mbit/s

2.5Gbit/s
100Mbit/s

2.5Gbit/s
100Mbit/s

2.5Gbit/s
N
S
2
1xODU1
N
S
2
1xODU1
OptiX OSN 6800: from paired slot or cross-connect board
OptiX OSN 3800: from mesh group slot
NOTE
The client-side four pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.
For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express,
OTU1, and HD-SDI), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel.
The TQM board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1499
Table 14-253 Functions and features of the TQM board
Function
and
Feature
Description
Basic
function
TQM converts signals as follows: 4 x (100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s)<-> 1 x ODU1.
Client-side
service type
NOTE
Only the TN12TQM supports SDI, HD-SDI, OTU1 and FDDI services.
The TQM supports both GE electrical signal and GE optical signal.
Cross-
connect
capabilities
OptiX OSN 6800:
l Supports the cross-connection of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/
s and 2.5 Gbit/s between the boards in paired slots.
l Supports the cross-connection of one ODU1 signal or two GE signals
between the TQM and the cross-connect board or the board in the paired
slot.
OptiX OSN 3800:
2.5 Gbit/s or one ODU1 signals from one board of the mesh group
(consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh
group.
OTN
function
the ITU-T G.709.
l Supports TCM function for ODU1.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1500
Function
and
Feature
Description
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
failures.
power of the laser.
NOTE
Only the TN12TQM supports Bursty mode.
ALS
function
PRBS test
function
TN11TQM: not supported.
TN12TQM: supports the PRBS function on the client side.
NOTE
is STM-1/OC-3, STM-4/OC-12, or STM-16/OC-48.
FEC
encoding
NOTE
LPT
function
is FE or GE.
Test frame TN11TQM: not supported
TN12TQM: The board supports test frame function only when the client-side
Electrical-
layer ASON
Not supported
Protection
scheme
l Supports SW SNCP.
l Supports the Tributary SNCP protection (TN12TQM).
NOTE
Ethernet
service
mapping
mode
Supports encapsulation of GE services in GE(GFP-F) (displayed as GE on the
NMS) and GE(GFP-T) modes.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1501
Function
and
Feature
Description
Ethernet port
working
mode
GE:
l Auto-Negotiation
l 1000M Full-Duplex
Loopback WDM side -
Outloop Supported
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1502
Function
and
Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards
compliance
Protocols or
standards for
transparent
transmission
(non-
performance
monitoring)
IEEE 802.3u
IEEE 802.3z
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
(FC-PI)
SW-3)
(FC-SB-2)
NOTE
Only the TN12TQM supports the following standards and
protocols.
Control (MAC)
Protocol (PHY)
Dependent (PDM)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1503
Function
and
Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards for
service
processing
(performance
monitoring)
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.873.1
ITU-T G.694.1

The TQM board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control
Figure 14-274 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TQM.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1504
Figure 14-274 Functional modules and signal flow of the TQM
RX1
RX2
RX4
TX4
TX1
TX2
Service
encapsulation and
mapping module
Cross-connect
module
OTN
Processing
module
RX3
TX3
O/E
E/O
Client side
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
Client-side
optical
module
4 X 100 Mbit/s -2.5 Gbit/s / 1X ODU1
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)

NOTE
The client side of the TQM board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate
ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s) and GE electrical signals.
NOTE
electrical signals.
It is recommended to change RX1/TX1, RX2/TX2 optical interfaces to electrical interfaces only.
In the signal flow of the TQM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TQM to the backplane,
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1505
and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out four channels of
Any signals or one channel of ODU1 signals to the backplane.
l Receive direction
The signal processing module receives the electrical signals sent from the backplane. Then,
If the signals are Any signals, they are sent to the client-side optical module.
If the signals are ODU1 signals, the module performs operations such as ODU1 framing,
demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out four channels of
Any signals to the client-side optical module.
then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX4 optical
interfaces.
Module Function
Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from four channels of the internal
OptiX OSN 6800: Implements the grooming of electrical signals between the TQM
and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane.
The grooming service signals are Any and ODU1 signals.
OptiX OSN 3800: Grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group
through the backplane. The grooming service signals are Any and ODU1 signals.
Encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps the signals into the ODU1
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1506
14.17.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TQM board.
Figure 14-275 shows the front panel of the TQM board.
Figure 14-275 Front panel of the TQM board
TQM
TQM
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
R
X
2
T
X
3
R
X
3
T
X
4
R
X
4
T
X
1
R
X
1
T
X
2

Indicators
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1507
Interfaces
Table 14-254 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TQM board
TX1-TX4 LC Transmits the optical service signal to the client-side
RX1-RX4 LC Receives the optical service signal from the client-side

NOTE
The client-side four pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.
For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express,
OTU1, and HD-SDI), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel.
It is recommended to change RX1/TX1 and RX2/TX2 optical interfaces to electrical interfaces only.
Laser Hazard Level
14.17.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one TQM board.
Table 14-255 shows the valid slots for the TQM board.
Table 14-255 Valid slots for the TQM board
Product Valid Slots

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1508
Table 14-256 Mapping between the physical ports on the TQM board and the port numbers
TX1/RX1 3
TX2/RX2 4
TX3/RX3 5
TX4/RX4 6

NOTE
Logical Ports
Figure 14-276 shows the application model of the TQM board. Table 14-257 describes the
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1509
Figure 14-276 Port diagram of the TQM board
201
201
201
201
201
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
Client Side
4 x GE/Any/OTU1
Backplane
ODU1
Other OTU board Other line board
Cross-
connect
module
NMS to receive GE/Any/OTU1/ODU1 signals from
other boards
Service
processing
module

NOTE
TN11TQM: The optical paths of internal logical port are 201 (LP/LP)-1 to 201 (LP/LP)-4.
TN12TQM: The optical paths of internal logical port are 201 (ClientLP/ClientLP)-1 to 201 (ClientLP/
ClientLP)-4.
Table 14-257 Description of NM port of the TQM board
interfaces.
ClientLP Internal logical port. The optical paths are

Configuration Principle
the transmit end.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1510
l For each TQM board, the number of timeslots occupied by all services should not exceed
16.
l For FC200, FICON Express, OC-48, STM-16, OTU1, and HD-SDI services, timeslots can
be configured only in channel 1 of the TQM board.
GE 7
FE 1
OTU1 16
STM-1 1
STM-4 4
STM-16 16
OC-3 1
OC-12 4
OC-48 16
FC100 6
FC200 12
FICON 6
FICON Express 12
HD-SDI 11
DVB-ASI 2
SDI 3
ESCON 2
FDDI 1

If the TQM board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the
U2000:
can be created.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1511
Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the TQM
board (create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown
by and in Figure 14-277.
Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the TQM board and the
3
services accessed from the client side of the TQM board are cross-connected to the
port of the TQM board, as shown by
4
accessed from the client side of other boards are cross-connected to the client side of
the TQM board for protection and inter-board service convergence.)
NOTE
Only the first optical path of ClientLP port supports OTU1 services.
Figure 14-277 Cross-connection diagram of the TQM board
3(RX1/TX1)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
2
3
1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
Client side
WDM side
Client side
Other board
TQM
3
4
1
2
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the client side of the
TQM board
The client side of the TQM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
4
TN11TQM / TN12TQM

cross-connection between the ClientLP port of the board and ODU1LP port of other boards
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1512
(or IN/OUT port of the TN11NS2 board) to implement the cross-connect grooming of
ODU1 services, as shown in Figure 14-278.
Figure 14-278 Cross-connection diagram of the TQM board
TQM
IN/OUT-OCh:1--ODU2:1-ODU1:1
IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2
The client side of the TQM board are cross-connected to the WDM
Client side
WDM side
Other board b
(standard mode)
Other board a
(compatible mode)
Other board a TN11ND2 / TN12ND2 / TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN51NQ2 /
TN52NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN11NS2 / TN12NS2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 /
TN12LQMS(NS1 Mode) / TN12ELQX / TN12PTQX
Other board b TN52ND2T04 / TN53ND2 / TN55NO2 / TN52NS2T04 / TN52NS2T05 /

receive timeslots.
For parameters of the TQM, refer to Table 14-258.
Table 14-258 TQM parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
Optical Interface
Name
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1513
Default: Used
channel of a board.
Optical Interface
Loopback
Outloop
Default: Non-
Loopback
Service Type None, Any, DVB-
ASI,SDI, ESCON,
FC-100, FC-200,
FDDI, FE, FICON,
FICON Express, GE,
GE(GFP-T), HD-SDI,
OC-3, OC-12, OC-48,
STM-1, STM-4,
STM-16, OTU-1
Default: None
NOTE
Only the TN12TQM supports Any, SDI,
FDDI, HD-SDI, and OTU-1 services.
NOTE
format.
Rate (Mbit/s)
100 to 2200
Default: 0
a board.
NOTE
Only TN12TQM supports this parameter.
information.
Default: Off
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
Default: Disabled
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1514
Mode
Default: 9600
Ethernet services.
Ethernet Working
Mode
Auto-Negotiation,
1000M Full-Duplex
Duplex
information.
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
to Disabled.
NOTE
Only available for TN12TQM.
OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None
board resides.
information.
Default: Disabled
NOTE
Only available for the TN12TQM.

14.17.10 TQM Specifications
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1515
Module
TN11TQ
M
N/A I-16-2 km
S-16.1-15 km
L-16.1-40 km
L-16.2-80 km
1000 BASE-LX-10 km
1000 BASE-LX-40 km
1000 BASE-ZX-80 km
TN12TQ
M
N/A I-16-2 km
S-16.1-15 km
L-16.1-40 km
L-16.2-80 km
1000 BASE-LX-10 km
1000 BASE-LX-40 km
1000 BASE-ZX-80 km

NOTE
point.
NOTE
module.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1516
Optical
Module
Type
I-16-2 km S-16.1-15
km
L-16.1-40
km
L-16.2-80
km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Optical
source type
- MLM SLM SLM SLM
Target
transmission
distance
- 2 km (1.2 mi.) 15 km (9.3
mi.)
40 km (24.9
mi.)
80 km (49.7
mi.)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -3 0 3 3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -10 -5 -2 -2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm N/A 1 1 1
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB N/A 30 30 30
Eye pattern
mask
- G.957-compliant
G.959.1-compliant
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN APD APD
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1517
Optical
Module
Type
I-16-2 km S-16.1-15
km
L-16.1-40
km
L-16.2-80
km
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1270 to 1580 1270 to 1580 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -18 -18 -27 -28
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm -3 0 -9 -9
Maximum
reflectance
dB -27 -27 -27 -27

NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
Std 802.3.
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.
5 km
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Target
transmission
distance
- 0.5 km (0.3
mi.)
10 km (6.2
mi.)
40 km (24.9
mi.)
80 km (49.7
mi.)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1518
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.
5 km
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -2.5 -3 0 5
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -9.5 -9 -5 -2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 9 9 9 9
Eye pattern
mask
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN PIN PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -17 -20 -20 -23
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm 0 -3 -3 -3

NOTE
STM-1, OC-3, FE, or DVB-ASI signals.
NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1519
wavelengths)
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km
(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Target transmission
distance
- 40 km (24.9 mi.) 80 km (49.7 mi.)
range
nm 1471 to 1611 1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 5 5
power
dBm 0 0
Central wavelength
deviation
nm 6.5 6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 1.0 1.0
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30 30
G.959.1-compliant
range
nm 1270 to 1620 1270 to 1620
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm -3 -9

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1520
NOTE
wavelengths)
km
Target transmission
distance
- 120 km (74.6 mi.)
power
dBm 4
power
dBm 0
width
nm 1
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30
Receiver type - APD
range
nm N/A
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1521

(8.7 in.)
Weight
l TN11TQM: 1.2 kg (2.64 lb.)
l TN12TQM: 1.1 kg (2.43 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11TQM 50.3 57.6
TN12TQM 25 27.5

14.18 TQS
TQS: 4 x STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 tributary service processing board
Only one functional version of the TQS board is available, that is, TN11.
Huawei office.
Boar
d
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
TN11
TQS
N N N N Y Y

Variants
The TN11TQS board has only one variant: TN11TQS01.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1522
14.18.2 Application
As a type of tributary board, the TQS board implements conversion between four STM-16/
OC-48/OTU1 optical signals and four ODU1 electrical signals.
For the position of the TQS board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-279.
Figure 14-279 Position of the TQS board in the WDM system
1
4
1
4
TQS
STM-16/
OC-48/OTU1
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
TQS
4
O
D
U
1
N
S
2
4xODU1
N
S
2
4xODU1
1
4
1
4
1 1
4 4
4
O
D
U
1
STM-16/
OC-48/OTU1
The TQS board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer, and to provide
Table 14-263 Functions and features of the TQS board
Function
and Feature
Description
Basic
function
TQS converts signals as follows:
4 x (STM-16/OC-48/OTU1)<->4 x ODU1
Client-side
service type
Cross-
connect
capabilities
OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the cross-connection of four ODU1 signals
between the TQS and the cross-connect board or the board in the paired slot.
OptiX OSN 3800: Supports the grooming of four ODU1 signals from one
board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards
belonging to the mesh group.
OTN
function
the ITU-T G.709. The mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.709.
ESC
function
Supported
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1523
Function
and Feature
Description
FEC
encoding
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
power of the laser.
ALS
function
PRBS test
function
Not supported
Electrical-
layer ASON
Not supported
Protection
scheme
NOTE
Loopback WDM side -
Outloop Supported
Protocols or
standards
compliance
Protocols or
standards for
transparent
transmission
(non-performance
monitoring)
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1524
Function
and Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards for
service processing
(performance
monitoring)
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.873.1
ITU-T G.694.1

The TQS board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control and
Figure 14-280 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TQS.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1525
Figure 14-280 Functional modules and signal flow of the TQS
RX1
RX2
RX4
TX4
TX1
TX2
ODU1
RX3
TX3
Cross-connect
module
O/E
E/O
SDH/SONET
encapsulation and
mapping module
Client-side OTN
procssing module
OTN
Processing
module
Client side
Client-side
Optical
module
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse

The client side of the TQS board can access the following optical signals:
In the signal flow of the TQS board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TQS to the backplane,
module performs operations such as OTU1 framing and FEC decoding with OTU1 signals,
and performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing
with STM-16/OC-48 signals. Then, the module sends out four channels of ODU1 signals
to the backplane for grooming.
l Receive direction
The signal processing module receives ODU1 electrical signals sent from the backplane.
The module performs operations such as ODU1 framing, framing of OTU1 signals,
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1526
encoding of FEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out
four channels of STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 signals to the client-side optical module.
The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of STM-16/OC-48/OTU1
electrical signals, and then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the
TX1-TX4 optical interfaces.
Module Function
Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of four channels of STM-16/OC-48/
Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from four channels of the internal
electrical signals to STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 optical signals.
The module consists of the cross-connect module, SDH/SONET encapsulation and
mapping module, client-side OTN processing module, and OTN processing module.
OptiX OSN 6800: Implements the grooming of electrical signals between the TQS
and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane.
Grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four
boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group through the
backplane. The grooming service signals are ODU1 signals.
OptiX OSN 3800: Grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group
through the backplane. The grooming service signals are ODU1 signals.
ODU1 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/
Frames ODU1/OTU1 signals, processes overheads in ODU1/OTU1 signals, and
performs FEC encoding and decoding of the OTU1 signals.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1527
14.18.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TQS board.
Figure 14-281 shows the front panel of the TQS board.
Figure 14-281 Front panel of the TQS board
TQS
TQS
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
R
X
2
T
X
3
R
X
3
T
X
4
R
X
4
T
X
1
R
X
1
T
X
2

Indicators
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1528
Interfaces
Table 14-264 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TQS board

Laser Hazard Level
14.18.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one TQS board.
Table 14-265 shows the valid slots for the TQS board.
Table 14-265 Valid slots for the TQS board
Product Valid Slots

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1529
Table 14-266 Mapping between the physical ports on the TQS board and the port numbers
TX1/RX1 3
TX2/RX2 4
TX3/RX3 5
TX4/RX4 6

NOTE
Logical Ports
Figure 14-282 shows the application model of the TQS board. Table 14-267 describes the
Figure 14-282 Port diagram of the TQS board
Backplane
4
(RX2/TX2)-1
5
(RX3/TX3)-1
6
(RX4/TX4)-1
3
(RX1/TX1)-1
Client Side
201
(LP1/LP1)-1
202
(LP2/LP2)-1
203
(LP3/LP3)-1
204
(LP4/LP4)-1
4 x ODU1
Other line/
PID board
Cross-
connect
module
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1530
Service
processing
module

Table 14-267 Description of NM port of the TQS board
LP1-LP4 Internal logical ports. All optical paths are numbered 1.

If the TQS board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the
U2000:
l The corresponding channels of the four LP ports are respectively connected to the RX1/
TX1-RX4/TX4. There is no need for configuration on the U2000.
cross-connection between the LP port of the TQS board and the optical channels of the
ODU1LP port of other boards (or the IN/OUT port on the NS2 board) to implement the
cross-connect grooming of ODU1 services, as shown Figure 14-283.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1531
Figure 14-283 Cross-connection diagram of the TQS board
TQS
201(LP1/LP1)-1
201(LP1/LP1)-2
201(LP1/LP1)-3
201(LP1/LP1)-4
WDM side
Other board b
(standard
mode)
Other board a
(compatible
mode)
The client side of the TQS board are cross-connected to the
WDM side of other boards
Client side
TN12ELQX / TN12PTQX

For parameters of TQS, refer to Table 14-268.
Table 14-268 TQS parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
Optical Interface
Name
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1532
Default: Used
channel of a board.
Optical Interface
Loopback
Outloop
Default: Non-
Loopback
STM-16
Default: OTU-1
Default: Off
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
Default: Enabled
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
to Disabled.
NOTE
OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None
board resides.
information.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1533
14.18.10 TQS Specifications
Module
TN11TQ
S
N/A I-16-2 km
S-16.1-15 km
L-16.1-40 km
L-16.2-80 km

NOTE
point.
NOTE
This module is used to access STM-16 and OTU1 signals.
Optical
Module
Type
I-16-2 km S-16.1-15
km
L-16.1-40
km
L-16.2-80
km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Optical
source type
- MLM SLM SLM SLM
Target
transmission
distance
- 2 km (1.2 mi.) 15 km (9.3
mi.)
40 km (24.9
mi.)
80 km (49.7
mi.)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1534
Optical
Module
Type
I-16-2 km S-16.1-15
km
L-16.1-40
km
L-16.2-80
km
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -3 0 3 3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -10 -5 -2 -2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm N/A 1 1 1
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB N/A 30 30 30
Eye pattern
mask
- G.957-compliant
G.959.1-compliant
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN APD APD
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1270 to 1580 1270 to 1580 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -18 -18 -27 -28
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm -3 0 -9 -9
Maximum
reflectance
dB -27 -27 -27 -27

NOTE
2.67 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access STM-16, OC-48, OTU1 signals.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1535
wavelengths)
CWDM)-80 km
Minimum side mode suppression
ratio
dB 30
Eye pattern mask - G.957-compliant
G.959.1-compliant
Receiver type - APD

wavelengths)
km
Target transmission
distance
- 120 km (74.6 mi.)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1536
km
power
dBm 4
power
dBm 0
width
nm 1
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30
Receiver type - APD
range
nm N/A

(8.7 in.)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1537
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11TQS 43 47.3

14.19 TQX
TQX: 4 x 10 Gbit/s tributary service processing board
The available functional versions of the TQX board are TN11, TN52, TN53, and TN55.
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
1TQ
X
N N N N Y N
TN5
2TQ
X
Y Y Y N Y N
TN5
3TQ
X
Y Y Y N N N
TN5
5TQ
X
Y Y Y N Y N

Variants
Each of the TN11TQX, TN52TQX, TN53TQX, and TN55TQX boards has only one variant
identified by the suffix 01 in the board name, for example, TN11TQX01.
Function:
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1538
Board Cross-
Connet
Granularit
y
IEEE
1588v2
Physical
Clock
OTU2/
OTU2e
FC800/
FC1200
TN11TQX ODU2/
ODU2e
N N N N
TN52TQX ODU2/
ODU2e
N N Y N
TN53TQX ODU2/
ODU2e
N N Y Y
TN55TQX ODU2/
ODU2e/
ODUflex
Y Y Y Y

Specification:
l The specifications vary with the version of the board that you use. For details, see 14.19.10
TQX Specifications.
Table 14-272 Substitution rules of the TQX board
Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11TQX TN55TQX The TN55TQX can be created as TN11TQX on the NMS. The
upgrade. After substitution, the TN55TQX functions as the
TN11TQX.
TN52TQX.
TN53TQX.
TN55TQX None -

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1539
14.19.2 Application
As a type of tributary board, the TQX board converts between four FC800/FC1200/10GE LAN/
10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e optical signals and four ODU2/ODU2e/
ODUflex electrical signals through cross-connection.
For the position of the TQX board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-284.
Figure 14-284 Position of the TQX board in the WDM system
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
TQX
10GE LAN
10GE WAN
STM-64
OC-192
OTU2
OTU2e
FC800
FC1200
N
Q
2
N
Q
2
TQX
10GE LAN
10GE WAN
STM-64
OC-192
OTU2
OTU2e
FC800
FC1200
4xODU2/ODU2e/
ODUflex
TX1 1
4
1
4
1
4
1
4
1
4
1
4
4
x
O
D
U
2
/
O
D
U
2
e
/
O
D
U
f
l
e
x
4xODU2/ODU2e/
ODUflex
4
x
O
D
U
2
/
O
D
U
2
e
/
O
D
U
f
l
e
x
RX1
TX4
RX4
TX1
RX1
TX4
RX4

Table 14-273 Client-side service mapping path supported by the board
Board Client-Side Service Backplane-Side Service
TN11TQ
X
OC-192
ODU2/ODU2e
TN52TQ
X
OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e
ODU2/ODU2e
TN53TQ
X
FC1200
ODU2/ODU2e
TN55TQ
X
a
FC1200
ODU2/ODU2e
FC800 ODUflex
a: For FC800 services, the TN55TQX board supports two mapping paths: FC800->ODU2
and FC800->ODUflex. The mapping paths for the TN53TDX boards at the service adding
and dropping sites must be the same.

The TQX board enables cross-connections at the electrical layer.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1540
Table 14-274 Functions and features of the TQX board
Function
and Feature
Description
Basic
function
TQX converts signals as follows:
l 4xFC800/FC1200/10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/
OTU2e<->4xODU2/ODU2e.
l 4xFC800<->4xODUflex
Client-side
service type
NOTE
Only the TN53TQX/TN55TQX supports FC800 and FC1200 services.
Only the TN52TQX/TN53TQX/TN55TQX supports OTU2 and OTU2e services.
The processing of the 10GE WAN service and the STM-64 service is the same.
Therefore, For the TN11TQX/ TN52TQX, when the 10GE WAN service is transmitted,
you can configure it as the STM-64 service on the U2000.
Cross-
connect
capabilities
Supports the cross-connection of four ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex signals
between the TQX and the cross-connect board through the backplane.
NOTE
The cross-connection of ODUflex signals is supported only by the TN55TQX board.
OTN
function
l Supports overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. The
mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.709 and G.Sup43.
l Supports SM and TCM function when the TN52TQX , TN53TQXand
TN55TQX receives OTN services.
ESC
function
Supported by the TN52TQX/TN53TQX/TN55TQX when the client-side
service type is OTU2 or OTU2e.
FEC
encoding
side, only when the service type is OTU2/OTU2e.
NOTE
Alarm and
performance
event
monitoring
power of the laser.
LAN).
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1541
Function
and Feature
Description
ALS
function
PRBS test
function
NOTE
is STM-64/OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e.
is 10GE LAN.
Test frame Supports the test frame function when the client-side service type is 10GE
LAN and the Port mapping is MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G).
Latency
measuremen
t
The TN53TQX/TN55TQX (standard mode) board supports latency
measurement. The bidirectional latency at the ODUk layer between two
tributary boards supporting the latency measurement function can be
measured, and the latency data is displayed on the U2000.
NOTE
IEEE
1588v2
The TN55TQX board supports the TC, TC+OC, BC, and OC modes when
the client-side service type is 10GE LAN and the Port Mapping is MAC
Physical
clock
l When the TN55TQX board receives 10GE LAN services and the port
mapping is Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G) on its client side, the
board can support synchronous Ethernet transparent transmission instead
of synchronous Ethernet processing.
l When the TN55TQX board receives 10GE LAN services and the port
mapping is MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G) on its client side, the
board can support synchronous Ethernet processing instead of
synchronous Ethernet transparent transmission.
Electrical-
layer ASON
Supported by the TN52TQX/TN53TQX/TN55TQX
Protection
scheme
NOTE
SNCP protection.
NOTE
Ethernet
service
mapping
mode
l TN11TQX/TN12TQX/TN53TQX: Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G),
MAC Transparent Mapping(10.7G)
l TN55TQX: Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), MAC Transparent
Mapping(10.7G)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1542
Function
and Feature
Description
Loopback WDM side -
Outloop Supported
Protocols or
standards
compliance
Protocols or
standards for
transparent
transmission
(non-performance
monitoring)
IEEE 802.3ae
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
Protocols or
standards for
service processing
(performance
monitoring)
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.873.1
ITU-T G.694.1

The TQX board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, 1588v2
Figure 14-285 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TQX.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1543
Figure 14-285 Functional modules and signal flow of the TQX
Client side
RX1
RX2
Client-side
optical
module
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
RX3
RX4
TX1
TX2
TX3
TX4
SDH/SONET
encapsulation and
mapping module
10GE-LAN
encapsulation and
mapping module
FC
encapsulation and
mapping module
E/O
O/E
OTN
processing
module

module
1588v2
Cross-
connect
module
n X ODUk

NOTE
Only the TN53TQX/TN55TQX board supports FC encapsulation and mapping module.
Only the TN55TQX board supports the IEEE 1588v2 module.
In Figure 14-285, n x ODUk indicates the service cross-connections from the TQX board to the backplane. "n"
Table 14-275 shows the service cross-connections from the TQX board to the backplane.
Table 14-275 Service cross-connections from the TQX board to the backplane
TN11TQX/
TN52TQX/
TN53TQX
A maximum of 4xODU2/ODU2e
TN55TQX A maximum of 4xODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex

The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the TQX board. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TQX to the backplane,
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1544
processing, and OTN framing. After processing, the module sends out four channels of
ODU2/ODU2e signals to the backplane for grooming.
l Receive direction
The signal processing module receives ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals sent from the
ODU2/ODU2e framing, demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends
out four channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/
FC1200 signals to the client-side optical module.
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/
STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/FC1200 electrical signals, and then outputs four
channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX4 optical interfaces.
Module Function
Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of four channels of 10GE LAN/10GE
WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/FC1200 optical signals.
electrical signals to 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/
FC1200 optical signals.
encapsulation and mapping module, FC encapsulation and mapping module, OTN
processing module, and cross-connect module.
ODU2 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/
Encapsulates multiple channels of FC signals and maps the signals into the ODU2/
ODU2e/ODUflex payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has
the FC performance monitoring function.
NOTE
FC800 services can be mapped into ODU2/ODUflex payload area and FC1200 services can be mapped
into ODU2e payload area.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1545
Frames ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex signals and processes overheads in ODU2/ODU2e/
ODUflex signals.
Grooms electrical signals between the TQX and the cross-connect board through the
backplane.
l 1588v2 module
14.19.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TQX board.
Figure 14-286 shows the front panel of the TQX board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1546
Figure 14-286 Front panel of the TQX board

Indicators
Interfaces
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1547
Table 14-276 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TQX board

Laser Hazard Level
14.19.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one TQX board.
For the OptiX OSN 6800:
l If the TN12XCS board is used, the TQX board supports a service capacity of 40 Gbit/s
when it is installed in slot 1, 4, 11, or 14; only optical ports RX1/TX1 and RX2/TX2 of the
TQX board are available and therefore the board supports a service capacity of 20 Gbit/s
when it is installed in any of the other slots.
l If the TN11XCS board is used, only optical ports RX1/TX1 and RX2/TX2 of the TQX
board are available and therefore the board supports a service capacity of 20 Gbit/s
regardless of which slot the board is installed.
For the OptiX OSN 8800: The TQX board supports a maximum service capacity of 40 Gbit/s
in any slot.
Table 14-277 shows the valid slots for the TN11TQX board.
Table 14-277 Valid slots for the TN11TQX board
Product Valid Slots

Table 14-278 shows the valid slots for the TN52TQX/TN55TQX board.
Table 14-278 Valid slots for the TN52TQX/TN55TQX board
Product Valid Slots

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1548
Table 14-279 shows the valid slots for the TN53TQX board.
Table 14-279 Valid slots for the TN53TQX board
Product Valid Slots

Table 14-280 Mapping between the physical ports on the TQX board and the port numbers
TX1/RX1 3
TX2/RX2 4
TX3/RX3 5
TX4/RX4 6

NOTE
Logical Ports
The TQX board can work in standard or compatible mode. For details about the standard and
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1549
Descriptio
n
on the NMS
TN11T
QX
Compat
ible
mode
Figure 14-287 Table
14-282
TQX
TN52T
QX
Compat
ible
mode
Figure 14-287 Table
14-282
52TQX
TN53T
QX
Compat
ible
mode
Figure 14-287 Table
14-282
53TQX
TN55T
QX
Compat
ible
mode
Figure 14-287 Table
14-282
55TQX
Standar
d mode
Figure 14-288 Table
14-282
55TQX(STND)

Figure 14-287 Port diagram of the TN11TQX/TN52TQX/TN53TQX/TN55TQX (compatible
mode)
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
Backplane
NOTE
Only the TN55TQX board supports ODUflex.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1550
Figure 14-288 Port diagram of the TN55TQX (standard mode)
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
Backplane

Table 14-282 Description of NMS port of the TQX board
ClientLP1-ClientLP4 Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1.

If the TQX board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the
U2000:
l TN11TQX/TN52TQX/TN53TQX: Configuration of cross-connection
pass-through.
Create the cross-connections of ODU2 level between the ClientLP port and the
ODU2LP of the other boards, as shown in Figure 14-289.
l TN55TQX: Configuration of cross-connection
pass-through.
Set the Port Working Mode to ODU2 non-convergence mode (OTU2/Any-
>ODU2->OTU2)
type.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1551
Create the cross-connections of ODU2 level between the ClientLP or RX/TX port
and the ODU2LP of the other boards, as shown in Figure 14-289 and Figure
14-290.
Create ODUflex cross-connections between this board and other boards to support
service pass-through.
Set the Port Working Mode to ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any-
>ODUflex).
type.
Create the cross-connections of ODUflex level between the ClientLP port and the
ODUflex port of the other boards, as shown in Figure 14-291 and Figure 14-292.
NOTE
The TN55TQX board supports mapping of FC800 into ODUflex on the client side. When configuring
cross-connections for the board, ODUflex Timeslot is 7.
Figure 14-289 Cross-connection diagram of the TQX board (compatible mode ODU2 level)
TQX
Cross connect mode
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1
2(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1
Client side
The client side of the TQX board are cross-
Other board a
(standard
mode)
Other board b
(compatible
mode)
WDM side
Cross connect mode
Other board a TN52ND2T04 / TN53ND2 / TN55NO2 / TN52NS2T04 / TN52NS2T05 /
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1552
Other board b TN11TQX:
TN52TQX:
TN53TQX:
TN55TQX:

Figure 14-290 Cross-connection diagram of the TQX board (standard mode ODU2 level)
TQX
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1
2(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
Other board
Client side
Other board a
(standard
mode)
Other board b
(compatible
mode)
WDM side
NOTE
Only the TN55TQX board supports standard mode.
Other board a TN52ND2T04 / TN53ND2 / TN55NO2 / TN52NS2T04 / TN52NS2T05 /

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1553
Figure 14-291 Cross-connection diagram of the TQX board (compatible mode ODUflex level)
Client side
TQX
WDM side
Other board
The client side of the TQX board are cross-
Cross connect mode
Cross connect mode
Other board TN52ND2T04 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN52NS2T04 / TN52NS2T05 /

Figure 14-292 Cross-connection diagram of the TQX board (standard mode ODUflex level)
TQX
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
WDM side
Other board
Client side
NOTE
Only the TN55TQX board supports standard mode.
Other board TN52ND2T04 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN52NS2T04 / TN52NS2T05 /

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1554
For parameters of the TQX, refer to Table 14-283.
Table 14-283 TQX parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
Optical Interface
Name
name.
Default: Used
channel of a board.
Optical Interface
Loopback
Outloop
Default: Non-
Loopback
Service Type l TN11TQX: None,
10GE LAN,
OC-192, STM-64
Default: None
l TN52TQX: None,
10GE LAN,
OC-192, OTU-2,
OTU-2E, STM-64
Default: None
l TN53TQX/
TN55TQX: None,
10GE LAN, 10GE
WAN, OC-192,
OTU-2, OTU-2E,
STM-64,
CBR_10G, FC800,
FC1200
Default: None
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1555
Port Mapping TN11TQX/TN12TQX/
TN53TQX:
l Bit Transparent
Mapping(11.1G),
MAC Transparent
Mapping(10.7G)
l Default: Bit
Transparent
Mapping(11.1G)
TN55TQX:
l Bit Transparent
Mapping(11.1G),
MAC Transparent
Mapping(10.7G)
l Default: Bit
Transparent
Mapping(11.1G)
NOTE
For the TN11TQX: only
the ClientLP1 and
ClientLP3 ports support
MAC transparent
mapping (10.7G).
service.
NOTE
The TN55TQX board supports the TC, TC
+OC, BC, and OC modes when the client-
side service type is 10GE LAN and the Port
Mapping is MAC Transparent Mapping
(10.7 G).
Default: Off
Mode
NOTE
Only the TN52TQX/TN53TQX/TN55TQX
Rate (Mbit/s)
9953.28 to 10312.50
Default: /
board.
NOTE
NOTE
Service Type is set to CBR_10G.
information.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1556
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
ALS Auxiliary
Condition
FW_Defect,
BW_Client_R_LOS,
BW_WDM_Defect,
FW_ODUk_CSF
Default: FW_Defect
triggering ALS.
BW_Client_R_LOS.
to BW_WDM_Defect.
NOTE
Only the TN52TQX/TN53TQXTN55TQX
Hold-off Time of
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
0s, 100ms, 200ms,
300ms, 400ms, 500ms,
600ms, 700ms, 800ms,
900ms, 1s, 1100ms,
1200ms, 1300ms,
1400ms, 1500ms,
1600ms, 1700ms,
1800ms, 1900ms, 2s
Default: 0s
related lasers.
NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1557
Hold-off Time of
Automatic Laser
Turn-On
0s, 100ms, 200ms,
300ms, 400ms, 500ms,
600ms, 700ms, 800ms,
900ms, 1s, 1100ms,
1200ms, 1300ms,
1400ms, 1500ms,
1600ms, 1700ms,
1800ms, 1900ms, 2s
Default: 0s
related lasers.
NOTE
Default: 9600
NOTE
For the TN52TQX/TN53TQX/TN55TQX,
when Port Mapping is set to Bit
Transparent Mapping(11.1G), Maximum
Packet Length is unavailable on the U2000.
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
to Disabled.
NOTE
Only the TN52TQX/TN53TQX/TN55TQX
Default: Enabled
NOTE
FEC Mode FEC
Default: FEC
NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1558
OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None
board resides.
Default: Disabled
Default: Disabled
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
NOTE
TN53TQX/TN55TQX.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1559
Insert Code Type l When Service
Type is STM-64 or
OC-192:
PN11, MS_AIS
Default: PN11
l When Service
Type is 10GE
LAN and port
mapping mode is
MAC transparent
mapping (10.7G):
Quick insert,
Delayed insert
Default: Quick
insert
OC-192. When the tributary or line board
at the upstream site is faulty or when the
line board at the downstream site is
faulty, users can specify the output code
type for the tributary board at the
When the service type is 10GE-LAN, the
value Quick insert applies to a scenario
in which no protection is configured on
the WDM equipment while protection is
configured for the router that connects to
the WDM equipment. In this scenario,
quick protection switching can be
achieved on the router. The value
Delayed insert applies to a scenario in
which protection is configured for the
WDM equipment and the router
connected to the WDM equipment. In
this scenario, the WDM equipment
preferentially performs protection
switching in case of a fault. If the fault is
rectified, the router does not perform
protection switching. If the fault persists,
then the router performs protection
switching.
NOTE
TN55TQX.
convergence mode
(OTU2/Any->ODU2-
>OTU2), ODUflex
(Any->ODUflex),
NONE Mode(Not for
port)
Default: ODU2 non-
convergence mode
(OTU2/Any->ODU2-
>OTU2)
NOTE
TN55TQX

14.19.10 TQX Specifications
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1560
Optical Module
TN11TQX/
TN52TQX/
TN53TQX/
TN55TQX

NOTE
point.
NOTE
The 10 Gbit/s multirate 10 km module, 10 Gbit/s multirate 40 km module, and 10 Gbit/s multirate 80 km module
can be used to access OC-192, STM-64, 10GE WAN, FC1200, and OTU2/OTU2e signals.
The 10 Gbit/s multirate 10 km module can be used to access FC800 signals.
Optical
Module
Type
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80
km
10 Gbit/s
Single-
Rate-0.3 km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Optical
source type
- SLM SLM SLM MLM
Target
transmissio
n distance
- 10 km (6.2 mi.) 40 km (24.9
mi.)
80 km (49.7
mi.)
0.3 km (0.2
mi.)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565 840 to 860
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -1 2 4 -1.3
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1561
Optical
Module
Type
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80
km
10 Gbit/s
Single-
Rate-0.3 km
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -6 -4.7 0 -7.3
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 6 8.2 9 3
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm N/A N/A N/A N/A
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB 30 30 30 30
Eye pattern
mask
- G.691-compliant
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN APD PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1260 to 1565 1260 to 1605 1270 to 1600 840 to 860
Receiver
sensitivity
(multirate)
dBm -11 -14 -24 -7.5
Receiver
sensitivity
(10GE
LAN)
dBm -14.4 -15.8 -24 -7.5
Minimum
receiver
overload
(10GE
LAN)
dBm 0.5 -1 -7 -1
Minimum
receiver
overload
(STM-64)
dBm -1 -1 -7 -1
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1562
Optical
Module
Type
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80
km
10 Gbit/s
Single-
Rate-0.3 km
Maximum
reflectance
dB -27 -27 -27 -12

(8.7 in.)
l Weight:
TN11TQX: 1.5 kg (3.3 lb.)
TN52TQX: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.)
TN53TQX: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.)
TN55TQX: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11TQX 65.0 71.2
TN52TQX 91.5 100
TN53TQX 45 50
TN55TQX 45 50

14.20 TSC
TSC: 100G tributary service processing board
The available functional version of the TSC board is TN54.
Huawei office.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1563
Board General
8800
T64
Subrac
k
Enhan
ced
8800
T64
Subrac
k
Gener
al 8800
T32
Subrac
k
Enha
nced
8800
T32
Subra
ck
8800
T16
Subra
ck
8800
Platfo
rm
Subra
ck
6800
Subra
ck
3800
Chass
is
TN54TS
C
N Y N Y Y N N N

NOTE
l For an enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack, the TSC board must work with TNK2USXH+TNK2UXCT
boards
l For an enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, the TSC board must work with the TN52UXCH or
TN52UXCM board.
l For an OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack, the TSC board must work with the TN16UXCM board.
Variants
The TN54TSC board has only one variant: TN54TSC. The TN54TSC board variant is the board
itself.
14.20.2 Application
As a type of tributary board, the TSC board converts between one channel of 100GE optical
signals and one channel of ODU4 electrical signals through cross-connection.
For the position of the TSC board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-293.
Figure 14-293 Position of the TSC board in the WDM system
1xODU4 1xOTU4
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
N
S
4
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
N
S
4
1xOTU4
TSC
1xODU4
TSC
8
O
D
U
0
1
O
D
U
4
100GE
1
O
D
U
4
100GE
RX
TX
TX
RX

The TSC board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1564
Table 14-285 Functions and features of the TSC board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function TSC converts signals as follows:
1 x 100GE<->1 x ODU4
Client-side
service type
100GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 103.125 Gbit/s
Cross-connect
capabilities
Supports the cross-connection of one channel of ODU4 signals between
the TSC and the cross-connect board.
to the ITU-T G.709.
l ODU4 layer: supports the PM function, and PM non-intrusive
ESC function Not supported
PRBS function Not supported
FEC encoding Not supported
Alarm and
performance
event monitoring
power of the laser.
l Provides remote monitoring (RMON) of the Ethernet service.
Latency
measurement
measurement function can be measured, and the latency data is displayed
on the U2000.
Electrical-layer
ASON
Supported
Protection
scheme
Outloop Supported
Channel
Loopback
Not supported
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1565
Function and
Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards
compliance
Protocols or
standards for
transparent
transmission
(non-
performance
monitoring)
IEEE 802.3ba
Protocols or
standards for
service
processing
(performance
monitoring)
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.873.1
ITU-T G.694.1

The TSC consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control and
Figure 14-294 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TSC.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1566
Figure 14-294 Functional modules and signal flow of the TSC
SCC
Client-side
optical
module
RX
TX
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Fuse
Required
voltage
OTN
Processing
module
1 x ODU4
O/E
E/O
Client side
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Cross-connect
module
100GE Service
encapsulation and
mapping module

Signal Flow
The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the TSC board. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TSC to the backplane,
The client-side optical module receives one channel of 100GE service signals through the
RX interface, and performs the O/E conversion.
module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing,
and encoding of FEC. Then, the module sends out one channel of ODU4 electrical signals
to the backplane for grooming.
l Receive direction
The signal processing module receives one channel of ODU4 electrical signals from the
ODU4 framing, demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out one
channel of 100GE signals to the client-side optical module.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1567
The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of one channel of 100GE
signals, and then outputs one channel of client-side optical signal through the TX optical
interface.
Module Function
Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of one channel of 100GE optical signals.
Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion of one channel of 100GE optical
signals.
The module consists of a 100GE service encapsulation and mapping module and an OTN
processing module.
Encapsulates one channel of 100GE signals, maps the signals into the payload of an
ODU4 frame, and performs the reverse process. The service encapsulation and mapping
module supports monitoring of 100GE signal performance.
14.20.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TSC board.
Figure 14-295 shows the front panel of the TSC board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1568
Figure 14-295 Front panel of the TSC board
TSC
TSC
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
G.657A2
FIBER
ONLY
G.657A2
G.657A2 FIBER ONLY

G.657A2
T
X
R
X
NOTE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1569
Indicators
Interfaces
Table 14-286 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TSC board
RX LC/PC Receive service signals from client equipment.
TX LC/PC Transmit service signals to client equipment.

Laser Hazard Level
14.20.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one TSC board.
Table 14-287 shows the valid slots for the TSC board.
Table 14-287 Valid slots for TSC board
Product Valid Slots

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1570
Table 14-288 Mapping between the physical ports on the TSC board and the port numbers
TX/RX 3

NOTE
Logical Ports
Figure 14-296 shows the port diagrams of the TSC board. Table 14-289 describes the meaning
of each port.
Figure 14-296 Port diagram of the TSC
3(RX/TX)-1
1 x ODU4
Backplane
Other line board

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1571
Table 14-289 Description of NMS port of the TSC board
RX/TX These ports correspond to the client-side optical
interfaces.

If the TSC board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the
U2000:
l Create the cross-connections of ODU4 level between the RX/TX port and the ODU4 logical
port of the other boards, as shown in Figure 14-297.
Figure 14-297 Cross-connection diagram of the TSC board
TSC
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
The client side of the TSC board are cross-
Cross connect mode
Client side
WDM side
Cross connect mode
Line board
Line board NS4

For parameters of TSC, refer to Table 14-290.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1572
Table 14-290 TSC parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
Optical Interface
Name
are supported.
Default: Used
board.
Optical Interface
Loopback
Non-Loopback,
Inloop, Outloop
Default: Non-
Loopback
Default: Off
status of a board.
more information.
Service Type 100GE
Default: 100GE
the client side.
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
board are lost.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1573
ALS Auxiliary
Condition
FW_Defect,
BW_Client_R_LOS
,
BW_WDM_Defect,
FW_OPUk_CSF
Default: FW_Defect
ALS.
FW_OPUk_CSF.
Hold-off Time of
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
0s, 100ms, 200ms,
300ms, 400ms,
500ms, 600ms,
700ms, 800ms,
900ms, 1s, 1100ms,
1200ms, 1300ms,
1400ms, 1500ms,
1600ms, 1700ms,
1800ms, 1900ms, 2s
Default: 0s
related lasers.
Hold-off Time of
Automatic Laser
Turn-On
0s, 100ms, 200ms,
300ms, 400ms,
500ms, 600ms,
700ms, 800ms,
900ms, 1s, 1100ms,
1200ms, 1300ms,
1400ms, 1500ms,
1600ms, 1700ms,
1800ms, 1900ms, 2s
Default: 0s
related lasers.
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1574

14.20.10 TSC Specifications
Optical Module
TN54TS
C
N/A 100GBASE-LR4-10 km (CFP)
100GBASE-1010G-10 km (CFP)

NOTE
point.
(CFP)
Minimum Lane Center
Wavelength
nm 1294.53
1299.02
1303.54
1308.09
Maximum Lane Center
Wavelength
nm 1296.59
1301.09
1305.63
1310.19
(Min)
dBm 1.7
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1575
(CFP)
(Max)
dBm 10.5
(Min)
dBm -1.3
(Max)
dBm 4.5
Lane (Min)
dBm -4.3
Lane (Max)
dBm 4.5
(Min)
dB 4
Ratio (Min)
dB 30
Receiver type - PIN
Minimum Lane Center
Wavelength
nm 1294.53
1299.02
1303.54
1308.09
Maximum Lane Center
Wavelength
nm 1296.59
1301.09
1305.63
1310.19
Lane (Min)
dBm -10.6
Lane (Max)
dBm 4.5
(OMA) per Lane
dBm 4.5
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1576
(CFP)
per Lane
dBm -8.6
NOTE

km (CFP)
Minimum Lane Center
Wavelength
nm 1521
1529
1537
1545
1553
1561
1569
1577
1585
1593
Maximum Lane Center
Wavelength
nm 1525
1533
1541
1549
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1577
km (CFP)
1557
1565
1573
1581
1589
1597
(Min)
dBm 4.2
(Max)
dBm 13.5
Lane (Min)
dBm -5.8
Lane (Max)
dBm 3.5
(Min)
dBm -2.8
(Typ)
dBm -0.8
(Max)
dBm 3.5
(Min)
dB 2.5
Ratio (Min)
dB 30
Receiver type - PIN
Minimum Lane Center
Wavelength
nm 1521
1529
1537
1545
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1578
km (CFP)
1553
1561
1569
1577
1585
1593
Maximum Lane Center
Wavelength
nm 1525
1533
1541
1549
1557
1565
1573
1581
1589
1597
(Min)
dBm -10.8
(Max)
dBm 3.5
(OMA) per Lane
dBm 3.5
per Lane
dBm -8.8
NOTE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1579
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN54TSC 65.0 80.0

14.21 TSXL
TSXL: 40 Gbit/s tributary service processing board
The available functional versions of the TSXL board are TN11, TN53, and TN54.
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
1TS
XL
N N N N Y N
TN5
3TS
XL
Y Y Y N N N
TN5
4TS
XL
Y Y Y N N N

Variants
The TN11TSXL, TN53TSXL, and TN54TSXL board has only one variant: TN11TSXL01,
TN53TSXL01, and TN54TSXL01.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1580
l Function:
Board Cross-Connet Granularity Client-side service type
TN11TSXL ODU2 STM-256/OC-768
TN53TSXL ODU3 STM-256/OC-768/OTU3
TN54TSXL ODU3 40GE

For details, see 14.21.2 Application and 14.21.3 Functions and Features.
l Appearance:
The TN11TSXL, TN53TSXL, and TN54TSXL use different front panels with different
dimensions. For details, see 14.21.5 Front Panel and 14.21.10 TSXL Specifications.
l Specification:
The specifications vary with the version of the board that you use. For details, see 14.21.10
TSXL Specifications.
The TSXL boards of different versions cannot replace each other.
14.21.2 Application
As a type of tributary board, the TN11TSXL board converts between one channel of STM-256/
OC-768 optical signals and four channels of ODU2 electrical signals through cross-connection.
The TN53TSXL board converts between one channel of STM-256/OC-768/OTU3 optical
signals and one channel of ODU3 electrical signals through cross-connection. The TN54TSXL
board converts between one channel of 40GE optical signals and one channel of ODU3 electrical
signals through cross-connection.
For the position of the TSXL board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-298, Figure 14-299 and
Figure 14-300.
Figure 14-298 Position of the TN11TSXL board in the WDM system
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
TSXL
STM-256
OC-768
N
Q
2
N
Q
2
TSXL
STM-256
OC-768
4xODU2 4xODU2
1
4
1
4
1
4
1
4
1
4
1
4
4
x
O
D
U
2
4
x
O
D
U
2
RX
TX RX
TX

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1581
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
TSXL
STM-256
OC-768
OTU3
N
S
3
N
S
3
TSXL
STM-256
OC-768
OTU3
1xODU3 1xODU3
1
x
O
D
U
3
1
x
O
D
U
3
RX
TX
RX
TX
NOTE
In this application scenario, the Line Rate parameter of the TN54NS3/TN55NS3 board must be set to
Standard Mode.

M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
TSXL
40GE
N
S
3
N
S
3
TSXL
40GE
1xODU3 1xODU3
1
x
O
D
U
3
1
x
O
D
U
3
RX
TX RX
TX
NOTE
In this application scenario, the Line Rate parameter of the TN54NS3/TN55NS3 board must be set to
Standard Mode.

The TSXL board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1582
Table 14-293 Functions and features of the TSXL board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function TSXL converts signals as follows:
l TN11TSXL:
1 x (STM-256/OC-768)<-> 4 x ODU2
Implements the transparent transmission of 40 Gbit/s services in
a 10 Gbit/s WDM network.
l TN53TSXL:
1 x (STM-256/OC-768/OTU3) <-> 1 x ODU3
l TN54TSXL:
1 x 40GE<->1 x ODU3
Client-side
service type
l TN11TSXL:
l TN53TSXL:
l TN54TSXL:
40GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 41.25 Gbit/s
Cross-connect
capabilities
Supports the cross-connection of four channels of ODU2 signals between
the TN11TSXL and the cross-connect board.
Supports the cross-connection of one channel of ODU3 signals between
the TN53TSXL/TN54TSXL and the cross-connect board.
to the ITU-T G.709. The mapping process is compliant with ITU-T
G.709.
l Supports PM, TCM functions for ODU3.
client side only when the service on the client side is OTU3.
PRBS test
function
TN11TSXL/TN54TSXL: Not supported
TN53TSXL: Supports the PRBS function on the client side.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1583
Function and
Feature
Description
Alarm and
performance
event monitoring
line failures.
power of the laser.
NOTE
Only TN54TSXL provides remote monitoring (RMON) of the Ethernet service.
Only the TN11TSXL/TN53TSXL supports Poisson Mode.
Only the TN11TSXL/TN53TSXL board supports laser temperature monitoring.
Only the TN11TSXL/TN53TSXL board supports B1 bytes monitoring.
Test frame Supported by the TN54TSXL
Electrical-layer
ASON
Supported by the TN53TSXL/TN54TSXL.
Protection
scheme
NOTE
TN54TSXL only supports client-side 1+1 protection and ODUk SNCP protection.
NOTE
Loopback WDM side -
Outloop Supported
Protocols or
standards
compliance
Protocols or
standards for
transparent
transmission
(non-
performance
monitoring)
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1584
Function and
Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards for
service
processing
(performance
monitoring)
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.873.1
ITU-T G.694.1

The TSXL consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control and
Figure 14-301 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN11TSXL.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1585
Figure 14-301 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11TSXL
SCC
Client-side
optical
module
RX
TX
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Fuse
Required
voltage
OTN
processing
module
4XODU2
O/E
E/O
Client side
Backplane(service
cross-connection)
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SDH/SONET
encapsulation and
mapping module
Cross-connect
module

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1586
SCC
Client-side
optical
module
RX
TX
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Fuse
Required
voltage
OTN
Processing
module
ODU3
O/E
E/O
Client side
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SDH/SONET
encapsulation and
mapping module
Cross-connect
module
Client-side OTN
processing module

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1587
SCC
Client-side
optical
module
RX
TX
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Fuse
Required
voltage
OTN
processing
module
ODU3
O/E
E/O
Client side
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
40GE
encapsulation and
mapping module
Cross-connect
module

The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the TSXL board. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TSXL to the backplane,
The client-side optical module receives one 40 Gbit/s service signal through the RX
interface, and performs the O/E conversion.
module performs operations such as OTN framing. Then, the module sends out four
channels of ODU2 electrical signals or one channel of ODU3 electrical signals to the
backplane for grooming.
l Receive direction
The signal processing module receives four channels of ODU2 electrical signals or one
channel of ODU3 electrical signals sent from the cross-connection board through the
backplane. The module performs operations such as ODUk virtual concatenation. Then,
the module sends out one channel of 40 Gbit/s service signal to the client-side optical
module.
The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of one 40 Gbit/s service signal,
and then outputs one channel of client-side optical signal through the TX optical interface.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1588
Module Function
Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of one channel of STM-256/OC-768/
OTU3/40GE optical signal.
Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion of one channel of STM-256/
OC-768/OTU3/40GE optical signal.
The module consists of the SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, Client-side
OTN processing module, , 40GE encapsulation and mapping module and OTN processing
module.
ODUk payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/
40GE encapsulation and mapping module
Encapsulates one channel of 40GE signals and maps the signals into the ODU3 payload
area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors 40GE performance.
Frames ODU2, ODU3 signals.
Grooms electrical signals between the TSXL and the cross-connect board through the
backplane.
14.21.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TSXL board.
Figure 14-304 shows the front panel of the TN11TSXL board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1589
Figure 14-304 Front panel of the TN11TSXL board
TSXL
TSXL
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
T
X
R
X

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1590
TSXL
TSXL
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
T
X
R
X

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1591
TSXL
TSXL
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
T
X
R
X
G.657A2
FIBER
ONLY
G.657A2
G.657A2 FIBER ONLY

G.657A2

Indicators
Interfaces
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1592
Table 14-294 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TSXL board

Laser Hazard Level
14.21.6 Valid Slots
Two slots house one TN11TSXL board. One slot houses one TN53TSXL/TN54TSXL.
Table 14-295 shows the valid slots for the TN11TSXL board.
Table 14-295 Valid slots for the TN11TSXL board
Product Valid Slots

NOTE
The rear connector of the TN11TSXL board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack.
Therefore, the slot number of the TN11TSXL board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the
two slots.
For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN11TSXL board, the slot number of the TN11TSXL board
Table 14-296 shows the valid slots for the TN53TSXL/TN54TSXL board.
Table 14-296 Valid slots for the TN53TSXL/TN54TSXL board
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
subrack
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
subrack
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
subrack
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1593
Table 14-297 Mapping between the physical ports on the TSXL board and the port numbers
RX/TX 3

Logical Ports
Figure 14-307 shows the application model of the TN11TSXL board.
Table 14-298 describes the meaning of each port.
Figure 14-307 Port diagram of the TN11TSXL board
3
(RX1/TX1)-1
Client Side
151
(imp/imp)-1
151
(imp/imp)-2
151
(imp/imp)-3
151
(imp/imp)-4
4 x ODU2
Backplane
Other line/
PID board

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1594
3
(RX1/TX1)-1
Client Side
201
ODU3
Backplane
Other line board
Cross-connect module Cross-connection that must be configured on the NMS to

3(RX1/TX1)-1
ODU3
Client Side
Backplane
Other line board
Cross-connect module Cross-connection that must be configured on the NMS to

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1595
Table 14-298 Description of NM port of the TSXL board
RX1/TX1 Corresponding to the client-side optical
interfaces.
imp (inverse multiplexing port) The optical channels are numbered 1, 2, 3 and 4.
ClientLP1 Internal logical port. The optical paths are
numbered 1.

If the TSXL board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the
U2000:
l TN11TSXL:
During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the cross-
connections of ODU2 level between the imp port and the ODU2LP port of the other boards
to achieve grooming of ODU2 services, as shown in Figure 14-310.
Figure 14-310 Cross-connection diagram of the TN11TSXL board
TSXL
72(ODU2/LP2/ODU2LP2)-1
151(imp/imp)-1
151(imp/imp)-2
151(imp/imp)-3
151(imp/imp)-4
IN1/OUT1-OCH:1
IN2/OUT2-OCH:2
Client side
The client side of the TSXL board are cross-connected to the WDM
WDM side
Other board b
(standard mode)
Other board a
(compatible mode)
Other board b TN52NS2T04 / TN52NS2T05 / TN52NS2T06 / TN52NS201M01 / TN52NS201M02 /

l TN53TSXL:
connections of ODU3 level between the ClientLP port and the ODU3LP port of the other
boards to achieve grooming of ODU3 services, as shown in Figure 14-311.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1596
Client side
WDM side
Other board
TSXL
The client side of the TSXL board is cross-connected to the WDM
Other board c
(standard mode)
Other board b
(compatible mode)
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU3:1
Other board b TN54NS3
Other board c TN55NS3

l TN54TSXL:
connections of ODU3 level between the RX1/TX1 port and the ODU3LP port of the other
boards to achieve grooming of ODU3 services, as shown inFigure 14-312.
TSXL
RX1/TX1
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU3:1
WDM side
Client side
Other board c
(standard mode)
Other board b
(compatible mode)
The client side of the TSXL board is cross-connected to the WDM
Other board b TN54NS3
Other board c TN55NS3

For parameters of TSXL, refer to Table 14-299.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1597
Table 14-299 TSXL parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
Optical Interface
Name
Default: Used
channel of a board.
Optical Interface
Loopback
Outloop
Service Type None, OC-768,
STM-256, OTU-3
Default: STM-256
NOTE
Only the TN53TSXL supports OTU-3
services.
Only the TN11TSXL/TN53TSXL supports
this parameter.
Default: Off
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
Hold-off Time of
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
0s, 100ms, 200ms,
300ms, 400ms, 500ms,
600ms, 700ms, 800ms,
900ms, 1s, 1100ms,
1200ms, 1300ms,
1400ms, 1500ms,
1600ms, 1700ms,
1800ms, 1900ms, 2s
Default: 0s
related lasers.
NOTE
this parameter.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1598
ALS Auxiliary
Condition
FW_Defect,
BW_Client_R_LOS,
BW_WDM_Defect,
FW_OPUk_CSF
Default: FW_Defect
triggering ALS.
BW_Client_R_LOS.
to BW_WDM_Defect.
Hold-off Time of
Automatic Laser
Turn-On
0s, 100ms, 200ms,
300ms, 400ms, 500ms,
600ms, 700ms, 800ms,
900ms, 1s, 1100ms,
1200ms, 1300ms,
1400ms, 1500ms,
1600ms, 1700ms,
1800ms, 1900ms, 2s
Default: 0s
related lasers.
NOTE
this parameter.
Default: Enabled
NOTE
Type is set to OTU3.
NOTE
this parameter.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1599
FEC Mode FEC
Default: FEC
NOTE
Type is set to OTU3.
NOTE
this parameter.
OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None
board resides.
information.
NOTE
this parameter.
Default: Disabled
NOTE
this parameter.
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
commissioning.
NOTE
Only the TN53TSXL supports this
parameter.

14.21.10 TSXL Specifications
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1600
Module
Module
TN11TS
XL/
TN53TS
XL
40G Transponder N/A
TN54TS
XL
N/A 40GBASE-LR4-10km (CFP)

NOTE
point.
Receiver type - PIN

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1601
Optical Module Type 40G BASE-LR4-10km
(CFP)
Signaling speed per Lane Gbit/s 10.3125
Signaling speed accuracy ppm -100 to 100
Minimum Lane Center
Wavelength
nm 1264.5
1284.5
1304.5
1324.5
Maximum Lane Center
Wavelength
nm 1277.5
1297.5
1317.5
1337.5
(Max)
dBm 8.3
(Min)
dBm -1
(Min)
dBm -4
(Max)
dBm 3.5
Lane (Min)
dBm -7
Lane (Max)
dBm 2.3
(Min)
dB 3.5
Ratio (Min)
dB 30
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1602
Optical Module Type 40G BASE-LR4-10km
(CFP)
Receiver type - PIN
Minimum Lane Center
Wavelength
nm 1264.5
1284.5
1304.5
1324.5
Maximum Lane Center
Wavelength
nm 1277.5
1297.5
1317.5
1337.5
Lane (Min)
dBm -13.7
Lane (Max)
dBm 2.3
(OMA) per Lane
dBm 3.5
per Lane
dBm -11.5
NOTE

TN11TSXL:
(8.7 in.)
TN53TSXL:
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1603
(8.7 in.)
TN54TSXL:
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11TSXL 90.2 96
TN53TSXL 75 83
TN54TSXL 58 64

14.22 TTX
TTX: 10 x 10G tributary service processing board
The available functional version of the TTX board is TN54.
Huawei office.
Board General
8800
T64
Subrac
k
Enhan
ced
8800
T64
Subrac
k
Gener
al 8800
T32
Subrac
k
Enha
nced
8800
T32
Subra
ck
8800
T16
Subra
ck
8800
Platfo
rm
Subra
ck
6800
Subra
ck
3800
Chass
is
TN54TT
X
N Y N Y Y N N N

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1604
NOTE
l For an enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack, the TTX board must work with TNK2USXH
+TNK2UXCT boards
l For an enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, the TTX board must work with the TN52UXCH or
TN52UXCM board.
l For an OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack, the TTX board must work with the TN16UXCM board.
Variants
The TN54TTX board has only one variant: TN54TTX. The TN54TTX board variant is the board
itself.
14.22.2 Application
As a type of tributary board, the TTX board converts between ten channels of 10GE LAN/10GE
WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e optical signals and ten channels of ODU2/ODU2e
electrical signals through cross-connection.
For the position of the TTX board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-313.
Figure 14-313 Position of the TTX board in the WDM system
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
TTX
N
S
4
N
S
4
TTX
10xODU2/ODU2e
1
0
x
D
U
2
/
O
D
U
2
e
1
0
x
D
U
2
/
O
D
U
2
e
10xODU2/ODU2e
10GE LAN
10GE WAN
STM-64
OC-192
OTU2
OTU2e
TX1
10GE LAN
10GE WAN
STM-64
OC-192
OTU2
OTU2e
RX1
TX10
RX10
TX1
RX1
TX10
RX10

The TTX board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer.
Table 14-302 Functions and features of the TTX board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function TTX converts signals as follows:
10x10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e<-
>10xODU2/ODU2e
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1605
Function and
Feature
Description
Client-side
service type
Cross-connect
capabilities
Supports the cross-connection of ten channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals
between the TTX board and the cross-connect board through the
backplane.
to the ITU-T G.709. The mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.
709.
ESC function Supported when the client-side service type is OTU2 or OTU2e.
NOTE
A maximum of eight ports support the ESC function.
PRBS function Supports the PRBS function on the client side.
NOTE
is 10GE LAN.
FEC Not supported.
Alarm and
performance
event
monitoring
power of the laser.
LAN).
Latency
measurement
measurement function can be measured, and the latency data is displayed
on the U2000.
NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1606
Function and
Feature
Description
Physical clock When the board receives 10GE LAN services and the port mapping is Bit
Transparent Mapping (11.1 G) on its client side, the board can support
synchronous Ethernet transparent transmission instead of synchronous
Ethernet processing.
Electrical-layer
ASON
Supported
Protection
scheme
l Supports tributary ODUk SNCP protection
NOTE
Ethernet service
mapping mode
Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G)
Outloop Supported
Channel
Loopback
Not supported
Protocols or
standards
compliance
Protocols or
standards for
transparent
transmission
(non-
performance
monitoring)
IEEE 802.3ae
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1607
Function and
Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards for
service
processing
(performance
monitoring)
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.873.1
ITU-T G.694.1

The TTX consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control and
Figure 14-314 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TTX.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1608
Figure 14-314 Functional modules and signal flow of the TTX
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Fuse
Required
voltage
OTN
Processing
module
10 x ODU2/ODU2e
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Cross-connect
module
Client side

RX10
TX1
O/E
E/O
TX10
RX1
Client-side
optical
module
SDH/SONET
encapsulation and
mapping module
10GE LAN
encapsulation and
mapping module
Client-side OTN
processing module

Signal Flow
The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the TTX board. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TTX to the backplane,
The client-side optical module receives ten channels of the optical signals through the RX1-
RX10 interface, and performs the O/E conversion.
processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out ten channels of ODU2/ODU2e
signals to the backplane for grooming.
l Receive direction
The signal processing module receives ten channels of ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals
from the cross-connection board through the backplane. The module performs operations
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1609
such as ODU2/ODU2e framing, demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the
module sends out ten channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/
OTU2e signals to the client-side optical module.
The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of ten channels of 10GE LAN/
10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e electrical signals, and then outputs ten
channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX10 ports.
Module Function
Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of ten channels of 10GE LAN/10GE
WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e optical signals.
Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion of ten channels of 10GE LAN/
10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e optical signals.
encapsulation and mapping module, OTN processing module, and cross-connect module.
Encapsulates multiple channels of SDH/SONET/10GE LAN signals and maps the
signals into the ODU2/ODU2e payload area. The module also performs the reverse
process and has the SDH/SONET performance monitoring function.
Frames ODU2/ODU2e signals and processes overheads in ODU2/ODU2e signals.
Grooms electrical signals between the TTX and the cross-connect board through the
backplane.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1610
14.22.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TTX board.
Figure 14-315 shows the front panel of the TTX board.
Figure 14-315 Front panel of the TTX board

Indicators
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1611
Interfaces
Table 14-303 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TTX board
TX1-TX10 LC Receive service signals from client equipment.
RX1-RX10 LC Transmit service signals to client equipment.

Laser Hazard Level
14.22.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one TTX board.
Table 14-304 shows the valid slots for the TTX board.
Table 14-304 Valid slots for TTX board
Product Valid Slots

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1612
Table 14-305 Mapping between the physical ports on the TTX board and the port numbers
TX1/RX1 3
TX2/RX2 4
TX3/RX3 5
TX4/RX4 6
TX5/RX5 7
TX6/RX6 8
TX7/RX7 9
TX8/RX8 10
TX9/RX9 11
TX10/RX10 12

NOTE
Logical Ports
Figure 14-316 shows the port diagrams of the TTX board. Table 14-306 describes the meaning
of each port.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1613
Figure 14-316 Port diagram of the TTX
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
10 x ODU2/ODU2e
Backplane
7(RX5/TX5)-1
8(RX6/TX6)-1
9(RX7/TX7)-1
10(RX8/TX8)-1
11(RX9/TX9)-1
12(RX10/TX10)-1

Table 14-306 Description of NMS port of the TTX board
interfaces.

If the TTX board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the
U2000:
l Create the cross-connections of ODU2 level between the RX/TX port and the ODU2LP of
the other boards, as shown in Figure 14-317.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1614
Figure 14-317 Cross-connection diagram of the TTX board
TTX
3(RX1/TX1)-1
Cross connect mode
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1
2(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1
Client side
The client side of the TTX board are cross-
Line/PID board a
(standard mode)
Line/PID board b
(compatible mode)
WDM side
Cross connect mode
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
7(RX5/TX5)-1
8(RX6/TX6)-1
9(RX7/TX7)-1
10(RX8/TX8)-1
11(RX9/TX9)-1
12(RX10/TX10)-1
Line/PID board a TN52ND2T04 / TN53ND2 / TN55NO2 / TN52NS2T04 / TN52NS2T05 /
Line/PID board b TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN53NS2 /

For parameters of the TTX, refer to Table 14-307.
Table 14-307 TTX parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
Optical Interface
Name
name.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1615
Default: Used
channel of a board.
Optical Interface
Loopback
Non-Loopback,
Inloop, Outloop
Default: Non-
Loopback
10GE WAN, OC-192,
OTU-2, OTU-2E,
STM-64
Default: None
Mapping(11.1G)
Default: Bit
Transparent Mapping
(11.1G)
service.
Default: Off
Mode
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1616
ALS Auxiliary
Condition
FW_Defect,
BW_Client_R_LOS,
BW_WDM_Defect,
FW_ODUk_CSF
Default: FW_Defect
triggering ALS.
BW_Client_R_LOS.
to BW_WDM_Defect.
Hold-off Time of
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
0s, 100ms, 200ms,
300ms, 400ms, 500ms,
600ms, 700ms, 800ms,
900ms, 1s, 1100ms,
1200ms, 1300ms,
1400ms, 1500ms,
1600ms, 1700ms,
1800ms, 1900ms, 2s
Default: 0s
related lasers.
Hold-off Time of
Automatic Laser
Turn-On
0s, 100ms, 200ms,
300ms, 400ms, 500ms,
600ms, 700ms, 800ms,
900ms, 1s, 1100ms,
1200ms, 1300ms,
1400ms, 1500ms,
1600ms, 1700ms,
1800ms, 1900ms, 2s
Default: 0s
related lasers.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1617
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
to Disabled.
NOTE
OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None
board resides.
information.
Default: Disabled
Default: Disabled
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
Insert Code Type PN11, MS_AIS
Default: PN11
OC-192. When the tributary or line
board at the upstream site is faulty or
when the line board at the downstream
site is faulty, users can specify the output
code type for the tributary board at the

14.22.10 TTX Specifications
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1618
Optical Module
TN54TT
X
N/A 10G BASE-LR(SFP+)
10G BASE-ER(SFP+)
10G BASE-ZR-80 km (SFP+)

NOTE
point.
NOTE
10 Gbit/s Multi-rate optical module can be used to access OC-192, STM-64, 10GE WAN, 10GE LAN, OTU2,
and OTU2e signals.
Optical Module
Type
Target transmission
distance
- 10 km (6.2 mi.) 40 km (24.9 mi.)
Operating
wavelength range
nm 1260 to 1355 1530 to 1565
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm -1 3
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm -6 -2
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB 3.5 8.2
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1619
Optical Module
Type
in case of laser
shutdown
dBm -30 -30
Operating
wavelength range
nm 1260 to 1355 1260 to 1605
Receiver sensitivity dBm -14.4 -14 (11.1G)
-15.8 (10.3125G)
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm 0.5 -1
reflectance dB -12 -27

NOTE
10 Gbit/s BASE-SR-0.3 km (SFP+) module, 10 Gbit/s BASE-LR-10 km (SFP+) module, 10 Gbit/s BASE-ER/
EW-40 km (SFP+), and 10Gbit/s BASE-ZR-80 km (SFP+) can be used to access 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN
signals.
Optical
Module
Type
10G BASE-
SR-0.3 km
(SFP+)
10G BASE-
LR-10 km
(SFP+)
10G BASE-
ER/EW-40
km (SFP+)
10G BASE-
ZR-80 km
(SFP+)
Optical
interface
service rate
Gbit/s 10.3125 10.3125 10.3125 10.3125
Optical
source type
- MLM SLM SLM SLM
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Target
transmission
distance
- 0.3 km (0.2
mi.)
10 km (6.2
mi.)
40 km (24.8
mi.)
80 km (49.7
mi.)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1620
Optical
Module
Type
10G BASE-
SR-0.3 km
(SFP+)
10G BASE-
LR-10 km
(SFP+)
10G BASE-
ER/EW-40
km (SFP+)
10G BASE-
ZR-80 km
(SFP+)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 840 to 860 1260 to 1355 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -1 0.5 4 4
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -7.3 -8.2 -4.7 0
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 3 3.5 3 9
Output
optical
power in
case of laser
shutdown
dBm -30 -30 -30 -30
Eye pattern
mask
- IEEE802.3z compliant
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN PIN PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 840 to 860 1260 to 1355 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -11.1 (OMA) -12.6 (OMA) -14.1 (OMA) -24
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm -1 0.5 -1 -7
Maximum
reflectance
dB -12 -12 -26 -27

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1621
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN54TTX 63.0 68.0
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1622
15 Packet Service Unit
About This Chapter
15.1 Overview
Packet service boards process received data packets based on MPLS switching and provide
flexible LSP transmission pipes. They provide carrier-class protection for services using MPLS-
TP APS, support MPLS-TP OAM and ETH-OAM, and manage bandwidth using the QoS
function.
15.2 EG16
EG16: 16-port gigabit ethernet switch board
15.3 EX2
EX2: 2 x 10GE ethernet packet switch board
15.4 PND2
PND2: 2 x 10G bit/s packet line board
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Hardware Description 15 Packet Service Unit
1623
15.1 Overview
Packet service boards process received data packets based on MPLS switching and provide
flexible LSP transmission pipes. They provide carrier-class protection for services using MPLS-
TP APS, support MPLS-TP OAM and ETH-OAM, and manage bandwidth using the QoS
function.
Positions of Packet Service Boards in a WDM System
The EG16 board receives and processes GE/FE services, and the EX2 board receives and
processes 10GE LAN services at Layer 2. The processed services are transmitted as packets to
centralized cross-connect boards for grooming. Then the PND2 board processes and converts
these packets into OTU2 optical signals, therefore achieving transmission of packet services
over a WDM network.
Figure 15-1 shows the positions of packet service boards in a WDM system.
Figure 15-1 Positions of packet service boards in a WDM system
O
M
O
A
F
I
U SC1
EG16
C
l
i
e
n
t
-
s
i
d
e

e
q
u
i
p
m
e
n
t
O
D
O
A
W
D
M
-
s
i
d
e

O
D
F
OTU2
Client-side
services
PND2
EX2
EG16
EX2
PND2
Packets

Main Functions
Table 15-1 lists the main functions of packet service boards.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1624
Table 15-1 Main functions of packet service boards
Board Client-Side Service/
WDM-Side Signal
Backplane-Side Signal Layer 2 Function
Type Max.
Numbe
r of
Service
s
Type Maximum
Bandwidt
h
EG16 l Client-side
service: GE/
FE
l WDM-side
signal: N/A
16 Packets 20 Gbit/s l Supports E-Line and E-LAN
services based on MPLS, QinQ, and
physical ports.
l Supports ETH-OAM and MPLS-TP
OAM.
l Supports MPLS-TP Tunnel APS,
MPLS-TP PW APS, LAG, MC-
LAG, and MSTP.
l Supports QoS.
EX2 l Client-side
service:
10GE LAN
l WDM-side
signal: N/A
2 Packets 20 Gbit/s
PND2 l Client-side
service: N/A
l WDM-side
signal:
OTU2
2 Packets 20 Gbit/s

15.2 EG16
EG16: 16-port gigabit ethernet switch board
The available functional version of the EG16 board is TN54.
Huawei office.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1625
Bo
ard
8800 T64
Subrack
General
8800 T32
Subrack
Enhanc
ed 8800
T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN
54
EG
16
N N Y Y N N N

NOTE
When the EG16 board is used in an OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, the TN52UXCH or TN52UXCM cross-
connect boards and the TN52SCC system control board must be used. When the EG16 board is used in an OptiX
OSN 8800 T16 subrack, the TN16UXCM board must be used.
Variants
The TN54EG16 board has only one variant: TN54EG16. The TN54EG16 board variant is the
board itself.
15.2.2 Application
As a packet service board, the EG16 board receives and transmits a maximum of 16 GE/FE
services, processes packet services, and transmits packets to the cross-connect board for
centralized cross-connections. When the EG16 board is used, the PND2 board must be used on
the WDM side to implement the transmission of packet services on a WDM network.
For the position of the EG16 board in the WDM system, see Figure 15-2.
Figure 15-2 Position of the EG16 board in the WDM system
16xGE/FE
2x
10 GE LAN
2xOTU2
16xGE/FE
2x
10 GE LAN
Packets
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
Packets 2xOTU2
EG16
EX2
EG16
EX2
PND2 PND2
RX1
TX1
IN2
RX16
TX16
RX1
TX1
RX2
TX2
RX1
TX1
RX2
TX2
TX1
RX16
TX16
OUT1
OUT2
IN1
OUT1
IN1
IN2
OUT2
RX1
NOTE
When used to receive optical services, the board can receive a maximum of 16 GE or FE services. When used
to receive electrical services, the board can receive a maximum of 2 GE or FE services.
The EG16 board cannot be used in a subrack that works in master/slave mode. It can only be used in a separate
subrack.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1626
The EG16 board supports functions and features such as Layer 2 switching, QinQ, and
Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS).
Table 15-2 describes the service functions of the EG16 board, Table 15-3 provides the service
specifications of the EG16 board, Table 15-4 describes the features supported by the EG16
board.
Table 15-2 Service function of the EG16 board
Basic function Receives and transmits a maximum of 16 GE/FE services,
processes the GE/FE packet services.
Working mode l GE optical port: 1000M Full-Duplex, Auto-Negotiation
l GE electrical port: 10M Full-Duplex, 100M Full-Duplex,
1000M Full-Duplex, AutoNegotiation
l FE optical port: 100M Full-Duplex, Auto-Negotiation
Flow control at ports Supported
Comply with IEEE802.3x.
Ethernet data frame
format
IEEE 802.3, Ethernet II, IEEE 802.1q, IEEE 802.1p
Service type E-Line (VPWS), E-LAN (VPLS)
Service bearing medium Port, QinQ link, PW
E-Line PW-based
service
models
Port<->PW
CVLAN<->PW
SVLAN<->PW
CVLAN + CVLAN Pri<->PW
SVLAN + SVLAN Pri<->PW
QinQ link-
based
service
models
Port<->QinQ
CVLAN<->QinQ
Port-based
service
models
Port<->Port
CVLAN<->Port
SVLAN<->Port
UNI-UNI
service
models
Port<->Port
CVLAN<->CVLAN, VLAN translation supported
SVLAN<->SVLAN, VLAN translation supported
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1627
E-LAN Bridge
type
IEEE 802.1d, IEEE 802.1q
Bridge
learning
mode
SVL
VSI tag
type
C-Aware, S-Aware, T-Aware

Table 15-3 Service specifications of the EG16 board
Service
Parameter
Specifications
Supported
service
16 x GE/FE
Backplane
bandwidth
20Gbit/s
MTU Supports transmission of packets containing 15189600 bytes.
Supports Jumbo frames containing a maximum of 9600 bytes.
VLAN 4094
QinQ 4094
E-Line 8192
E-LAN 1024
MAC address 256 x 1024 (The total number of the blacklists and static MAC addresses
cannot exceed 2048.)
Number of
MAC
addresses
supported by
each VSI
64 x 1024
Split horizon One split horizon for each E-LAN
PW SS-
PW
16384 (max.)
MS-
PW
8192 (max.)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1628
Service
Parameter
Specifications
Static
tunne
l
Unid
irecti
onal
tunne
l
16 x 1024 (equipment level), 8 x 1024 (board level)
Bidir
ectio
nal
tunne
l

Table 15-4 Features supported by the EG16 board
Feature Description
Protectio
n scheme
MPLS-TP
Tunnel APS
Supports the 1+1 and 1:1 protection modes defined in ITU-T Y.
1720.
MPLS-TP
PW APS
Supports the 1+1 and 1:1 protection modes defined in ITU-T G.
8131, ITU-T Y.1731.
LAG Supported.
Comply with IEEE 802.1ax.
MC-LAG Supported.
MSTP Supported.
Comply with IEEE 802.1s.
QoS Diffserv Supported, compliant with RFC 2474 and RFC 2475.
Traffic
classification
Complex traffic classification. The ACL rules are customized
based on packet information.
Traffic
policing
Committed access rate (CAR), two rate three color marker
(trTCM) compliant with RFC 4115.
Congestion
management
Class of service (CoS), supporting SP/WRR scheduling
algorithms.
Congestion
avoidance
WRED, tail dropping.
Traffic
shaping
Port-based traffic shaping, queue-based traffic shaping.
IGMP
Snoopin
g
Not supported
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1629
Feature Description
Mainten
ance
Ethernet
OAM
Supported, compliant with IEEE 802.1ag and ITU-T Y.1731/G.
8013
Ethernet port
OAM
Supported, compliant with IEEE 802.3ah
MPLS-TP
OAM
Supported, compliant with ITU-T Y.1731/G.8013
RMON Supported
Port
mirroring
Supported
Loopback GE/FE optical interface PHY Inloop
MAC Inloop
GE/FE electric interface PHY Outloop
MAC Inloop
Synchro
nization
Physical
clock
Supports synchronous Ethernet.
NOTE
Electrical ports do not support synchronous Ethernet.
Inband
DCN
Supported

NOTE
In addition to the preceding features, the board supports performance monitoring and service processing
compliant with related standards and protocols defined by IEEE, ITU-T, IETF, and MEF.
The EG16 board consists of the client-side optical module, packet processing module,
transmission management module, switch buffer module, control and communication module,
and power supply module.
Figure 15-3 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the EG16 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1630
Figure 15-3 Functional modules and signal flow of the EG16 board
Client side

Packet
processing
module
RX1
RX16
TX16
TX1
O/E
E/O
Packets
Transmission
management
module
switch
buffer
module
Backplane(service
cross-connection)
Client-side
optical
module
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)

NOTE
When used to receive GE or FE electrical signals, the board must use a client-side electrical module to perform
power level conversion, and then sends the signals to the packet processing module for processing.
Signal Flow
In the signal flow of the EG16 board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the EG16 to the backplane,
1. The client-side optical module receives 16 channels of optical signals from client
2. After receiving the electrical signals, the packet processing module decodes the
signals, performs serial/parallel conversion, searches for routes and matches addresses
for data services, implements L2 functions such as protection, OAM, and QoS for the
data services, and sends the data services to the transmission management module.
3. The transmission management module buffers and schedules the data servies, slices
the data servies into packets for the switching network, and sends the packets to the
switch buffer module.
4. After buffering the packets, the switch buffer module sends the packets to the cross-
connect board through the backplane.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1631
l Receive direction
1. The switch buffer module processes the packets from the cross-connect board and
then sends the packets to the transmission management module.
2. The transmission management module rearranges the packets to recover data servies,
buffers the data servies, and finally sends the data servies to the packet processing
module.
3. The packet processing module implements L2 functions such as protection, OAM,
and QoS for the data services, performs parallel/serial conversion, and generates GE/
FE electrical signals.
4. The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of GE/FE electrical
signals, and then outputs two channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-
TX16 ports.
Module Function
Client-side receiver: performs O/E conversion of GE/FE optical signals.
Client-side transmitter: performs E/O conversion of GE/FE optical signals.
l Packet processing module
Searches routes, performs address matching, switches labels for data services, and
implements L2 functions such as protection, OAM, and QoS for the data services.
l Transmission management module
Segments data services into packets and provides large traffic buffer functions.
l Switching buffer module
Buffers packets, manages and schedules data queues. This module and the cross-connect
board in the same subrack form a switching network to switch packets.
15.2.5 Front Panel
There are four indicators, optical interfaces.
Figure 15-4 shows the front panel of the EG16.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1632
Figure 15-4 Front panel of the EG16
EG16
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
T
X
1
EG16
R
X
1
T
X
2
R
X
2
T
X
3
R
X
3
T
X
9
R
X
9
T
X
1
0
R
X
1
0
T
X
1
1
R
X
1
1
T
X
4
R
X
4
T
X
1
2
R
X
1
2
T
X
5
R
X
5
T
X
6
R
X
6
T
X
7
R
X
7
T
X
1
3
R
X
1
3
T
X
1
4
R
X
1
4
T
X
1
5
R
X
1
5
T
X
8
R
X
8
T
X
1
6
R
X
1
6

Indicators
Interfaces
Table 15-5 Types and functions of the EG16 interfaces
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1633

Laser Hazard Level
15.2.6 Valid Slots
Two slots house one EG16 board.
Table 15-6 shows the valid slots for the EG16 board.
Table 15-6 Valid slots for the EG16 board
Product Valid slots
Enhanced OptiX OSN
8800 T32 subrack
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
subrack
IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17

The online signal bus on the EG16 board connects to the backplane along the left slot in the
subrack. The slot number of the EG16 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one
of the two slots.
For example, if you install the board in slots IU1 and IU2, the slot number of the EG16 board
Table 15-7 Mapping between the physical ports on the EG16 board and the port numbers
RX1/TX1RX16/TX16 116

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1634
NOTE
Logical Ports
board. They also can be used as source or sinks of cross-connections.
Figure 15-5 shows the application model of the EG16 board. Table 15-8 describes the meaning
of each port.
Figure 15-5 Port diagram of the EG16 board
2(RX2/TX2)
1(RX1/TX1)
16(RX16/TX16)
Other packet board
PORT1
Packets
Backplane
PORT2
PORT16
L2 swiching module

Table 15-8 Descriptions of the ports on the EG16 board
RX1/TX1-RX16/TX16 Client-side ports.
PORT1-PORT16 Respectively corresponds to the client-side optical

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1635
This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried using the NMS.
Table 15-9 Basic Attributes of EG16 Board
Port - External ports are PORT1 to PORT16.
Name - Enters the self-defined port name.
Enable Port Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
When the port is enabled, it indicates that the
user uses the port and the port has services.
When the port is disabled, it indicates that the
port does not process services.
When no service is configured, it is
recommended to disable the involved ports.
Port Mode Layer 2, Layer 3
Default: Layer 2
Specifies the working mode of the Ethernet
port.
l This parameter is set to Layer 2 when the
Ethernet port carries port-based or QinQ-
link-based Ethernet services.
l This parameter is set to Layer 3 when the
port carries tunnel services.
Encapsulation Type 802.1Q, QinQ, Null
Default: 802.1Q
Selects the means of processing the accessed
packets.
l This parameter is set to Null when the port
needs to transparently transmit packets.
l This parameter is set to 802.1Q when the
port needs to identify 802.1Q standard
packets.
l This parameter is set to QinQ when the
port needs to identify QinQ standard
packets.
NOTE
The Encapsulation Type is always 802.1Q when
you set Port Mode to Layer 3.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1636
Working Mode l GE optical port:
1000M Full-
Duplex, Auto
Negotiation
l GE electrical port:
10M Full-Duplex,
100M Full-
Duplex, 1000M
Full-Duplex,
AutoNegotiation
l FE optical port:
100M Full-
Duplex, Auto
Negotiation
Default: Auto
Negotiation
Set the Working Mode parameter to set the
working mode of the Ethernet port on the
board.
Auto-negotiation can automatically
determine the optimal working modes of the
connected ports. This mode is easy to
maintain and is recommended.
NOTE
Ensure that the working modes of the
interconnected ports are the same, Otherwise, the
services are not available.
Max Frame Length
(bytes)
1518 to 9600
Default: 1522
This parameter specifies the maximum
length of a frame traversing a port. When the
length of a frame exceeds the specified
maximum frame length, the frame will be
discarded or the service will be interrupted.
Logical Port
Attribute
Optical Port,
Electrical Port
Default: Optical Port
Displays the attributes of a logical port,
which is set based on the attributes of the
corresponding physical port.
Physical Port
Attribute
No interface, Single-
mode optical port,
Multi-mode optical
port, Electrical port
Displays the physical port attribute.
ARP Aging Time
(min.)
1 to 1440
Default: 720
Indicates the ARP aging time of the port.
After the ARP aging time expires, the
equipment automatically updates dynamic
ARP entries to prevent incorrect address
resolution.
NOTE
This parameter is valid only when Port Mode is
set to Layer 3.
Running Status - This parameter is unavailable for the EG16
board.
Optical Module
Status
In-Position, Not-in-
Position
Displays the optical module status.
Laser Interface
Status
On, Off Specifies the on/off status of the laser.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1637
Laser Transmission
Distance
- Displays the laser transmission distance.
Traffic Policing
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
Enables or disables traffic monitoring on the
port.
When you need to monitor the traffic on a
port, enable the traffic monitoring function to
monitor the traffic on a port in the period
specified by Traffic Policing Period.
Traffic Policing
Period (min.)
1 to 30
Default: 15
Specifies the traffic monitoring period.

Table 15-10 Flow Control of EG16 Board
Non-
Autonegotiation
Flow Control Mode
Disabled, Enable
Symmetric Flow
Control, Send Only,
Receive Only
Default: Disabled
Specifies the flow control mode adopted
when an Ethernet port does not work in auto-
negotiation mode.
l Enable Symmetric Flow Control: The
port can both transmit and receive the
PAUSE frame.
l Send Only: The port can only send the
PAUSE frame.
l Receive Only: The port can only receive
the PAUSE frame.
When the buffer usage of the receiver
exceeds the threshold, the pause frame
enables the transmitter to temporarily stop
sending services.
NOTE
In general, flow control is implemented using the
QoS function and port-based flow control is
seldom used. It is recommended that the default
value Disabled be used.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1638
Auto-Negotiation
Flow Control Mode
Disabled, Enable
Dissymmetric Flow
Control, Enable
Symmetric Flow
Control, Enable
Symmetric/
Dissymmetric Flow
Control
Default: Disabled
when an Ethernet port works in auto-
negotiation mode.
l Enable Dissymmetric Flow Control:
The port sends the PAUSE frame only,
and cannot receive the PAUSE frame.
port sends and receives the PAUSE
frame.
l Enable Symmetric/Dissymmetric Flow
Control: Enables either symmetric or
dissymmetric flow control, which is
determined in the autonegotiation
process.
sending services.
NOTE

Table 15-11 Layer 2 Attributes of EG16 Board
Tag Tag Aware, Access,
Hybrid
Indicates the data packet processing mode.
For details, see Table 15-12.
This parameter is unavailable when you set
Encapsulation Type in Basic Attributes to
QinQ or Null.
Default: 1
Indicates the VLAN ID of packets.
NOTE
Packets with their VLAN IDs being set to 0 are
usually considered untagged packets. The VLAN
ID of 4095 is reserved.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1639
Default: 0
Specifies the class of service (CoS) when
TAG is set to Access or Hybrid.
0 indicates the lowest priority and 7 the
highest. When the network is busy, data
packets of higher VLAN priority are
processed first and those of lower VLAN
priority may be discarded.

Table 15-12 Processing modes of data packets
Tag Processing Mode Remarks
Data Packets with
VLAN IDs
Data Packets
Without VLAN
IDs
Tag Aware Transparently
packets
Dropping the data
packets
Parameters Default
VLAN ID and
VLAN Priority are
not used.
Access Dropping the data
packets
Adding the VLAN
IDs that are set
-
Hybrid Transparently
packets
Adding the VLAN
IDs that are set
-

Table 15-13 Layer 3 Attributes of EG16 Board
Enable Tunnel Enabled, Disabled After this parameter is set to Enabled for a
port, the port can identify and process MPLS
labels.
NOTE
The parameter value Disabled is invalid.
Therefore, this parameter can be set only to
Enabled.
Specify IP Address Manually,
Unspecified
When a port carries tunnel services, or when
Port Mode is set to Layer 3, set this
parameter to Manually. For other scenarios,
set this parameter to Unspecified.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1640
IP Address - Specifies the port IP address.
This parameter is valid only when Specify IP
Address is set to Manually.
NOTE
When setting the IP address for a port, ensure that
the IP address is in a different network segment
from the IP address of other service ports and the
NE IP address, preventing service interruption
from occurring or the NE from being unreachable
by the NMS.
For example, the IP address and subnet mask of an
NE are 129.9.0.22 and 255.255.0.0, respectively.
This means that the NE IP address is in the 129.9
network segment. The IP address and subnet mask
of a service-present port on the NE are 10.0.1.1
and 255.255.255.0, respectively. This means the
port IP address is in the 10.0.1 network segment.
In this situation, you cannot assign IP addresses in
the 129.9 and 10.0.1 network segments to other
ports on the NE. In other words, you cannot set the
IP addresses to 129.9.x.x or 10.0.1.x for other ports
on the NE.
IP Mask - Specifies the port subnet mask.

Table 15-14 Advanced Attributes of EG16 Board
Port Physical
Parameters
- Displays physical parameters of the port.
MAC Loopback Non-Loopback,
Inloop, Outloop
Default: Non-
Loopback
The MAC Loopback parameter specifies the
MAC loopback state at an Ethernet port.
PHY Loopback Non-Loopback,
Inloop, Outloop
Default: Non-
Loopback
The PHY Loopback parameter specifies the
PHY loopback state at an Ethernet port.
MAC Address - Displays the MAC address of the port.
Transmission Rate
(kbit/s)
- Displays the rate for transmitting data
packets.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1641
Receiving Rate (kbit/
s)
- Displays the rate for receiving data packets.
Loopback Check Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
Enables or disables the loopback check
function. When enabled, the function checks
whether the loopback check packet
transmitted from a port is received by the port
itself, therefore determining whether there is
a loop on the network. This parameter is
usually used for fault location.
After this parameter is set to Enabled, the
board automatically checks for loops on the
link and reports an alarm if there is any.
Loopback Port Block Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
Specifies whether to block a port.
When Loopback Check and Loopback
Port Block are both set to Enabled, the board
automatically checks for loops on the link. If
a loop is found at a port, the port is
automatically blocked to clear the loop.
Egress PIR
Bandwidth (kbit/s)
64 to 1000000 Specifies the egress PIR bandwidth.
Broadcast Packet
Suppression
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
Indicates whether to enable broadcast packet
suppression.
After suppression of broadcast packets is
enabled, the traffic of broadcast packets will
be limited according to the specified
threshold. If the traffic of the broadcast
packets exceeds the specified threshold, the
excess broadcast packets will be discarded.
Broadcast Packet
Suppression
Threshold (%)
0% to 100%, with a
step of 10%
Default: 30%
If Broadcast Packet Suppression is set to
Enabled, broadcast packets are suppressed
when the bandwidth occupied by broadcast
packets exceeds specified times (suppression
threshold) the total bandwidth.
If the traffic of the broadcast packets exceeds
the specified threshold, the excess broadcast
packets will be discarded.
Network Cable Mode - This parameter is unavailable for the EG16
board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1642
Optical Module Type Unknown, Two-
Fiber Bidirectional
Displays whether an optical module is
inserted and the module type of an inserted
optical module.
l Unknown: No optical module is inserted
to the port.
l Two-Fiber Bidirectional: A two-fiber
bidirectional optical module is inserted to
the port.
Synchronous Clock
Enabled
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
Determines whether to enable clock
synchronization. Set this parameter to
Enabled if clock synchronization is required.
service clocks are synchronized with NE
clocks. When this parameter is set to
Disabled, service clocks will not be
synchronized with NE clocks.

15.2.9 EG16 Specifications
Board Client-Side Fixed Optical Module Client-Side Pluggable Optical
Module
TN54EG
16
1000 BASE-LX-10 km
1000 BASE-LX-40 km
1000 BASE-ZX-80 km
CWDM)-40 km
CWDM)-80 km

NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1643
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.
5 km
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Target
transmission
distance
- 0.5 km (0.3
mi.)
10 km (6.2
mi.)
40 km (24.9
mi.)
80 km (49.7
mi.)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -2.5 -3 0 5
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -9.5 -9 -5 -2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 9 9 9 9
Eye pattern
mask
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN PIN PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -17 -20 -20 -23
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm 0 -3 -3 -3

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1644
NOTE
Std 802.3.
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km
(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Target transmission
distance
- 40 km (24.9 mi.) 80 km (49.7 mi.)
range
nm 1471 to 1611 1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm 5 5
power
dBm 0 0
Central wavelength
deviation
nm 6.5 6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 1.0 1.0
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30 30
G.959.1-compliant
range
nm 1270 to 1620 1270 to 1620
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm -3 -9

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1645
(8.7 in.)
l Weight: 2 kg (4.4 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN54EG16 93 101

15.3 EX2
EX2: 2 x 10GE ethernet packet switch board
The available functional version of the EX2 board is TN54.
Huawei office.
Bo
ard
8800 T64
Subrack
General
8800 T32
Subrack
Enhanc
ed 8800
T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN
54
EX
2
N N Y Y N N N

NOTE
When the EX2 board is used in an OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, the TN52UXCH or TN52UXCM cross-
connect boards and the TN52SCC system control board must be used. When the EX2 board is used in an OptiX
Variants
The TN54EX2 board has only one variant: TN54EX2. The TN54EX2 board variant is the board
itself.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1646
15.3.2 Application
As a packet service board, the EX2 board receives and transmits a maximum of two 10GE LAN
services, processes packet services, and transmits packets to the cross-connect board for
centralized cross-connections. When the EX2 board is used, the PND2 board must be used on
the WDM side to implement the transmission of packet services on a WDM network.
For the position of the EX2 board in a WDM system, see Figure 15-6.
Figure 15-6 Position of the EX2 board in a WDM system
16xGE/FE
2x
10 GE LAN
2xOTU2
16xGE/FE
2x
10 GE LAN
Packets
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
Packets 2xOTU2
EG16
EX2
EG16
EX2
PND2 PND2
RX1
TX1
IN2
RX16
TX16
RX1
TX1
RX2
TX2
RX1
TX1
RX2
TX2
RX1
TX1
RX16
TX16
OUT1
OUT2
IN1
OUT1
IN1
IN2
OUT2
NOTE
The EX2 board cannot be used in a subrack that works in master/slave mode. It can only be used in a separate
subrack.
The EX2 board supports functions and features such as Layer 2 switching, QinQ, and
Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS).
Table 15-17 describes the service functions of the EX2 board, Table 15-18 provides the service
specifications of the EX2 board, Table 15-19 describes the features supported by the EX2 board.
Table 15-17 Service function of the EX2 board
Basic function Receives and transmits two 10GE LAN services, processes the
10GE LAN packet services.
Working mode Supports the full-duplex mode for ports.
Port flow control Supports non-auto-negotiation for service rates.
Comply with IEEE802.3x.
Ethernet data frame
format
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1647
E-Line PW-based
service
models
Port<->PW
CVLAN<->PW
SVLAN<->PW
QinQ link-
based
service
models
Port<->QinQ
CVLAN<->QinQ
Port-based
service
models
Port<->Port
CVLAN<->Port
SVLAN<->Port
UNI-UNI
service
models
Port<->Port
E-LAN Bridge
type
Bridge
learning
mode
SVL
VSI tag
type

Table 15-18 Service specifications of the EX2 board
Service
Parameter
Specifications
Supported
service
2 x 10GE LAN
Backplane
bandwidth
20Gbit/s
MTU Supports transmission of packets containing 15189600 bytes.
VLAN 4094
QinQ 4096
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1648
Service
Parameter
Specifications
E-Line 8192
E-LAN 1024
Number of
MAC
addresses
supported by
each VSI
64 x 1024
PW SS-
PW
16384 (max.)
MS-
PW
8192 (max.)
Static
tunne
l
Unid
irecti
onal
tunne
l
Bidir
ectio
nal
tunne
l

Table 15-19 Features supported by the EX2 board
Feature Description
Protectio
n scheme
MPLS-TP
Tunnel APS
1720.
MPLS-TP
PW APS
8131, ITU-T Y.1731.
LAG Supported.
MC-LAG Supported.
MSTP Supported.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1649
Feature Description
Traffic
classification
Traffic
policing
Congestion
management
algorithms.
Congestion
avoidance
Traffic
shaping
IGMP
Snoopin
g
Not supported
Mainten
ance
Ethernet
OAM
8013
Ethernet port
OAM
MPLS-TP
OAM
RMON Supported
Port
mirroring
Supported
Loopback client-side optical ports MAC Outloop
MAC Inloop
PHY Outloop
PHY Inloop
Synchro
nization
Physical
clock
Supports synchronous Ethernet.
Inband
DCN
Supported

NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1650
The EX2 board consists of the client-side optical module, packet processing module,
transmission management module, switching buffer module, control and communication
Figure 15-7 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the EX2 board.
Figure 15-7 Functional modules and signal flow of the EX2 board
Client side

Packet
processing
module
RX1
RX2
TX2
TX1
O/E
E/O
Packets
Transmission
management
module
switch
buffer
module
Backplane(service
cross-connection)
Client-side
optical
module
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)

Signal Flow
In the signal flow of the EX2 board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the EX2 to the backplane,
1. The client-side optical module receives two channels of optical signals from client
2. After receiving the electrical signals, the packet processing module decodes the
signals, performs serial/parallel conversion, searches for routes and matches addresses
for data services, implements L2 functions such as protection, OAM, and QoS for the
data services, and sends the data services to the transmission management module.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1651
3. The transmission management module buffers and schedules the data services,
segments the data services into packets for the switching network, and sends the
packets to the switch buffer module.
l Receive direction
1. The switch buffer module processes the packets from the cross-connect board and
then sends the packets to the transmission management module.
2. The transmission management module rearranges the packets to recover data services,
buffers the data services, and finally sends the data services to the packet processing
module.
and QoS for the data services, performs parallel/serial conversion, and generates 10GE
LAN electrical signals.
4. The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of 10GE LAN electrical
signals, and then outputs two channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-
TX2 ports.
Module Function
Client-side receiver: performs O/E conversion of 10GE LAN optical signals.
Client-side transmitter: performs E/O conversion of 10GE LAN optical signals.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1652
15.3.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the EX2 board.
Figure 15-8 shows the front panel of the EX2 board.
Figure 15-8 Front panel of the EX2 board
EX2
EX2
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
T
X
1
R
X
1
T
X
2
R
X
2
L/A1
L/A2

Indicators
Six indicators are present on the front panel:
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1653
l Data port connection/data transceive indicator (L/A1) - dual-colored (green, yellow)
l Data port connection/data transceive indicator (L/A2) dual-colored (green, yellow)
Interfaces
Table 15-20 Types and functions of the interfaces on the EX2 board

Laser Hazard Level
15.3.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one EX2 board.
Table 15-21 shows the valid slots for the EX2 board.
Table 15-21 Valid slots for EX2 board
Product Valid Slots

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1654
Table 15-22 Mapping between the physical ports on the EX2 board and the port numbers
TX1/RX1 1
TX2/RX2 2

NOTE
Logical Ports
Figure 15-9 shows the application model of the EX2 board. Table 15-23 describes the meaning
of each port.
Figure 15-9 Port diagram of the EX2 board
2(RX2/TX2)
1(RX1/TX1)
PORT1
Packets
Backplane
PORT2
Other packet board
L2 swiching module

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1655
Table 15-23 Descriptions of the ports on the EX2 board
RX1/TX1 to RX2/TX2 Client-side ports.
PORT1 to PORT2 Respectively corresponds to the client-side optical

Table 15-24 Basic Attributes of EX2 Board
Port - Internal ports are PORT1 to PORT2.
Default: Enabled
When the port is enabled, it indicates that the
user uses the port and the port has services.
When the port is disabled, it indicates that the
port does not process services.
When no service is configured, it is
recommended to disable the involved ports.
Default: Layer 2
port.
l Layer 2: The port can access the user-side
equipment, carry Ethernet services that
are based on the ports and use the port
exclusively or QinQ Link.
l Layer 3: The port can carry tunnels.
Default: 802.1Q
packets.
l Null: The port transparently transmits the
accessed packets.
l 802.1Q: The port identifies the 802.1Q
standard packets.
l QinQ: The port identifies the QinQ
standard packets.
NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1656
Working Mode 10G Full-Duplex
LAN
Default: 10G Full-
Duplex LAN
Set the Working Mode parameter to set the
working mode of the Ethernet port on the
board.
NOTE
l When setting this parameter, ensure that the
working modes of the interconnected ports are
the same. Otherwise, the services are not
available.
Max Frame Length
(bytes)
1518 to 9600
Default: 1522
Logical Port
Attribute
Optical Port,
Electrical Port
Default: Optical Port
Specifies the logical port attribute.
NOTE
The EX2 board does not support electrical ports.
Optical Port.
Physical Port
Attribute
No interface, Single-
mode optical port,
Multi-mode optical
port, Electrical port
Displays the physical port attribute.
ARP Aging Time
(min.)
1 to 1440
Default: 720
NOTE
set to Layer 3.
Running Status - This parameter is unavailable for the EX2
board.
Optical Module
Status
In-Position, Not-in-
Position
Displays the optical module status.
Laser Interface
Status
On, Off Specifies the on/off status of the laser.
Laser Transmission
Distance
- Displays the laser transmission distance.
Traffic Policing
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
Enables or disables traffic monitoring on the
port.
Traffic Policing
Period (min.)
1 to 30
Default: 15
Specifies the traffic monitoring period.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1657
Table 15-25 Flow Control of EX2 Board
Non-
Autonegotiation
Flow Control Mode
Disabled, Enable
Symmetric Flow
Control, Send Only,
Receive Only
Default: Disabled
when an Ethernet port does not work in auto-
negotiation mode.
port can both transmit and receive
PAUSE frames.
l Send Only: The port can only send
PAUSE frames.
l Receive Only: The port can only receive
PAUSE frames.
sending services.
NOTE
Auto-Negotiation
Flow Control Mode
- This parameter is unavailable for the EX2
board.

Table 15-26 Layer2 Attributes of EX2 Board
Hybrid
QinQ or Null.
Default: 1
The Default VLAN ID parameter specifies a
default VLAN ID for a port that transmits
untagged packets.
NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1658
Default: 0
The VLAN Priority parameter specifies the
priority of the default VLAN ID of a port.
When the network is busy, data packets of
higher VLAN priority are processed first and
those of lower VLAN priority may be
discarded. 0 indicates the lowest priority and
7 the highest.

Data Packets with
VLAN IDs
Data Packets
Without VLAN
IDs
packets
Dropping the data
packets
Parameters Default
VLAN ID and
VLAN Priority are
not used.
packets
Adding the VLAN
IDs that are set
-
packets
Adding the VLAN
IDs that are set
-

Table 15-28 Layer 3 Attributes of EX2 Board
Field Vaule Description
labels.
NOTE
The parameter value Disabled is invalid.
Enabled.
Unspecified
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1659
NOTE
by the NMS.
on the NE.

Table 15-29 Advanced Attributes of EX2 Board
Port Physical
Parameters
- Displays physical parameters of the port.
MAC Loopback Non-Loopback,
Inloop, Outloop
Default: Non-
Loopback
The MAC Loopback parameter specifies the
MAC loopback state at an Ethernet port.
PHY Loopback Non-Loopback,
Inloop, Outloop
Default: Non-
Loopback
The PHY Loopback parameter specifies the
PHY loopback state at an Ethernet port.
Transmission Rate
(kbit/s)
packets.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1660
s)
Default: Disabled
Default: Disabled
Egress PIR
Bandwidth (kbit/s)
64 to 10000000 Displays the egress PIR bandwidth.
Broadcast Packet
Suppression
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
suppression.
Broadcast Packet
Suppression
Threshold (%)
0% to 100%, with a
step of 10%
Default: 30%
Network Cable Mode - This parameter is unavailable for the EX2
board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1661
Optical Module Type known, Two-Fiber
Bidirectional
Displays whether an optical module is
inserted and the module type of an inserted
optical module.
l Unknown: No optical module is inserted
to the port.
l Two-Fiber Bidirectional: A two-fiber
bidirectional optical module is inserted to
the port.
Synchronous Clock
Enabled
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
Determines whether to enable clock
synchronization. Set this parameter to
clocks. When this parameter is set to

15.3.9 EX2 Specifications
Board Client-Side
Fixed Optical
Module
TN54EX
2
N/A 10G BASE-SR-0.3 km (SFP+)

NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1662
Optical
Module Type
10G BASE-
SR-0.3 km
(SFP+)
10G BASE-
LR-10 km
(SFP+)
10G BASE-
ER/EW-40 km
(SFP+)
Optical
interface service
rate
Gbit/s 10.3125 10.3125 10.3125
Optical source
type
- MLM SLM SLM
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ
Target
transmission
distance
- 0.3 km (0.2 mi.) 10 km (6.2 mi.) 40 km (24.9 mi.)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 840 to 860 1260 to 1355 1530 to 1565
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm -1 0.5 4
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm -7.3 -8.2 -4.7
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB 3 3.5 3
Output optical
power in case of
laser shutdown
dBm -30 -30 -30
Eye pattern
mask
- IEEE802.3zcompliant
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 840 to 860 1260 to 1355 1530 to 1565
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -11.1 (OMA) -12.6 (OMA) -14.1 (OMA)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1663
Optical
Module Type
10G BASE-
SR-0.3 km
(SFP+)
10G BASE-
LR-10 km
(SFP+)
10G BASE-
ER/EW-40 km
(SFP+)
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm -1 0.5 -1
Maximum
reflectance
dB -12 -12 -26

(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F)
TN54EX2 84 91

15.4 PND2
PND2: 2 x 10G bit/s packet line board
The available functional version of the PND2 board is TN54.
Huawei office.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1664
Bo
ard
8800 T64
Subrack
General
8800 T32
Subrack
Enhanc
ed 8800
T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN
54P
ND
2
N N Y Y N N N

NOTE
When the PND2 board is used in an OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, the TN52UXCH or TN52UXCM cross-
connect board and TN52SCC system control board must be used. When the PND2 board is used in an OptiX
Variants
The TN54PND2 board has only one variant: TN54PND2. The TN54PND2 board variant is the
board itself.
15.4.2 Application
The PND2 board is a packet service board. It converts packets with total bandwidth of 20 Gbit/
s from the cross-connect board into two 10GE LAN electrical signals. Then the board converts
the two 10GE LAN electrical signals into two standard OTU2 optical signals compliant with
WDM system requirements.
For the position of the PND2 board in a WDM system, see Figure 15-10.
Figure 15-10 Position of the PND2 board in a WDM system
16xGE/FE
2x
10 GE LAN
2xOTU2
16xGE/FE
2x
10 GE LAN
Packets
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
/
D
M
U
X
Packets 2xOTU2
EG16
EX2
EG16
EX2
PND2 PND2
RX1
TX1
IN2
RX16
TX16
RX1
TX1
RX2
TX2
RX1
TX1
RX2
TX2
RX1
TX1
RX16
TX16
OUT1
OUT2
IN1
OUT1
IN1
IN2
OUT2
NOTE
The PND2 board cannot be used in a subrack that works in master/slave mode. It can only be used in a separate
subrack.
The PND2 board supports functions and features such as Layer 2 switching, QinQ, and
Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS), OTN interfaces.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1665
Table 15-31 describes the OTN functions and features of the PND2 board, Table 15-32 and
Table 15-33 describe the ethernet service functions and specifications.
Table 15-31 OTN functions and features of the PND2 board
Functio
n Description
Basic
function
Converts packets with total bandwidth of 20 Gbit/s from the cross-connect board
into two 10GE LAN electrical signals. Then the board converts the two 10GE
LAN electrical signals into two standard OTU2 optical signals compliant with
WDM system requirements.
OTN
function
l Supports ODU2 mapping into OTU2.
ITU-T G.709.
l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU2 and ODU2.
WDM
specificat
ion
Tunable
waveleng
th
function
ESC Supported
PRBS
function
FEC
encoding
WDM side.
Alarm
and
performa
nce event
monitori
ng
of the laser.
Loopbac
k
Supported on the WDM side
Physical
clock
Supported
IEEE
1588v2
Not supported
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1666
Functio
n Description
Optical-
layer
ASON
Supported
Electrical
-layer
ASON
Not supported

Table 15-32 Ethernet service functions of the PND2 board
Protection
scheme
MPLS-TP
Tunnel
APS
1720.
MPLS-TP
PW APS
8131, ITU-T Y.1731.
LAG Supported.
MC-LAG Supported.
MSTP Supported.
Traffic
classificati
on
Traffic
policing
Congestio
n
manageme
nt
algorithms.
Congestio
n
avoidance
Traffic
shaping
IGMP Snooping Not supported
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1667
Maintenan
ce
Ethernet
OAM
8013
Ethernet
port OAM
MPLS-TP
OAM
RMON Supported
Port
mirroring
Supported
Synchronous Ethernet Supported
Inband DCN Not supported
Ethernet data frame
format
E-Line PW-based
service
models
Port<->PW
CVLAN<->PW
SVLAN<->PW
QinQ link-
based
service
models
Port<->QinQ
CVLAN<->QinQ
Port-based
service
models
Port<->Port
CVLAN<->Port
SVLAN<->Port
UNI-UNI
service
models
Port<->Port
E-LAN Bridge
type
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1668
Bridge
learning
mode
SVL
VSI tag
type

Table 15-33 provides the service specifications of the PND2 board.
Table 15-33 Service specifications of the PND2 board
Service
Parameter
Specifications
MTU Supports transmission of packets containing 1518-9600 bytes.
VLAN 4094
QinQ 4096
E-Line 8192
E-LAN 1024
Number of
MAC
addresses
supported by
each VSI
64 x 1024
PW SS-
PW
16384 (max.)
MS-
PW
8192 (max.)
Static
tunne
l
Unid
irect
ional
tunn
el
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1669
Service
Parameter
Specifications
Bidi
recti
onal
tunn
el

NOTE
The PND2 board consists of the WDM-side optical module, packet processing module,
transmission management module, switch buffer module, OTN module, control and
Figure 15-11 show the functional modules and signal flow of the PND2 board.
Figure 15-11 Functional modules and signal flow of the PND2 board
WDM-side

OTN
module
IN1
IN2
OUT2
OUT1
Power supply
module
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
WDM-side
optical
module
O/E
E/O
Backplane(service
cross-connection)
Packets
Transmi-
ssion
manage-
ment
module
switch
buffer
module
Packet
process-
ing
module
Required
voltage
SCC
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Fuse
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1670

Signal Flow
In the signal flow of the PND2 board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the backplane to the WDM side of the PND2,
1. The switch buffer module processes the data services from the cross-connect board
and then sends the data services to the transmission management module.
2. The transmission management module rearranges the packets to recover data services,
buffers the data services, and finally sends the data services to the packet processing
module.
and QoS for the data services, performs parallel/serial conversion, and generates 10GE
LAN electrical signals.
4. After processing the two 10GE LAN electrical signals, the OTN processing module
outputs two OTU2 electrical signals.
5. After performing the E/O conversion, the client-side optical module outputs two
OTU2 optical signals through the OUT1 and OUT2 ports.
l Receive direction
1. The WDM-side optical module receives the two OTU2 optical signals from the IN1
and IN2 ports, performs O/E conversion, and outputs two OTU2 electrical signals.
2. After processing the two OTU2 electrical signals, the OTN processing module outputs
two 10GE LAN electrical signals.
3. After receiving the two 10GE LAN electrical signals, the packet processing module
performs decoding, serial/parallel conversion, and address matching for the data
services, implements L2 functions such as protection, OAM, and QoS for the data
services, and then sends the matched data services to the transmission management
module.
4. The transmission management module buffers and schedules the data services, slices
the data services into packets for the switching network, and sends the packets to the
switch buffer module.
Module Function
The OTN processing module frames OTU2 signals, processes overheads in OTU2 signals,
and performs the FEC/AFEC-2 encoding and decoding.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1671
15.4.5 Front Panel
There are four indicators, optical interfaces.
Figure 15-12 shows the front panel of the PND2.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1672
Figure 15-12 Front panel of the PND2
PND2
PND2
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
O
U
T
1
I
N
1
O
U
T
2
I
N
2

Indicators
Interfaces
Table 15-34 Types and functions of the PND2 interfaces
IN1T-IN2 LC Receive single-wavelength signals from the associated
multiplexer board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1673
multiplexer board.

Laser Hazard Level
15.4.6 Valid Slots
Two slots house one PND2 board.
Table 15-35 shows the valid slots for the PND2 board.
Table 15-35 Valid slots for the PND2 board
Product Valid slots
Enhanced OptiX OSN
8800 T32 subrack
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
subrack
IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17

The online signal bus on the PND2 board connects to the backplane along the left slot in the
subrack. The slot number of the PND2 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one
of the two slots.
For example, if you install the board in slots IU1 and IU2, the slot number of the PND2 board
Table 15-36 Mapping between the physical ports on the PND2 board and the port numbers
IN1/OUT1 1
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1674
IN2/OUT2 2

NOTE
Logical Ports
Figure 15-13 shows the application model of the PND2 board. Table 15-37 describes the
Figure 15-13 Port diagram of the PND2 board
2(IN2/OUT2)
1(IN1/OUT1)
Other packet board
Backplane
PORT1
PORT2
Packets
Ethernet
services
Ethernet
services
OTU2
OTU2
NOTE
Port PORT1 is always bound to port IN1 or OUT1, and port PORT2 is always bound to port IN2 or OUT2.
L2 swiching module
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1675

Table 15-37 Descriptions of the ports on the PND2 board
IN1/OUT1 to IN2/OUT2 WDM-side optical ports.
PORT1 to PORT2 Internal logical ports of the L2 swiching module.

Optical Interface/
Channel
Optical Interface
Name
Default: Used
board.
Optical Interface
Loopback
Non-Loopback,
Inloop, Outloop
Default: Non-
Loopback
Laser Status Enabled, Disabled
Default:
l WDM side:
Enabled
l Client side:
Disabled
status of a board.
more information.
Default: Enabled
optical interface.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1676
FEC Mode FEC, AFEC
Default: FEC
more information.
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
Actual Band Type - Used to query the band type.
Tunable
Wavelength Range
- Used to query the tunable wavelength range
at the WDM-side optical interface of a board.
Planned
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.0
50 to
80/1560.61/192.
100
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.
170 to
18/1611.00/188.
780
Default: /
Default: C

Table 15-39 Basic Attributes of PND2 Board
Enable Port - This parameter is unavailable for the PND2
board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1677
Default: Layer 2
port.
l Layer 2: The port can access the user-side
equipment, carry Ethernet services that
are based on the ports and use the port
exclusively or QinQ Link.
l Layer 3: The port can carry tunnels.
Default: 802.1Q
packets.
l Null: The port transparently transmits the
accessed packets.
l 802.1Q: The port identifies the 802.1Q
standard packets.
l QinQ: The port identifies the QinQ
standard packets.
NOTE
Working Mode - This parameter is unavailable for the PND2
board.
Max Frame Length
(bytes)
1518 to 9600
Default: 1522
Logical Port
Attribute
- This parameter is unavailable for the PND2
board.
Physical Port
Attribute
board.
ARP Aging Time
(min)
1 to 1440
Default: 720
NOTE
set to Layer 3.
Running Status - This parameter is unavailable for the PND2
board.
Optical Module
Status
board.
Laser Interface
Status
board.
Laser Transmission
Distance
board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1678
Traffic Policing
Status
board.
Traffic Policing
Period (min)
board.

Table 15-40 Flow Control of PND2 Board
Non-
Autonegotiation
Flow Control Mode
board.
Auto-Negotiation
Flow Control Mode
board.

Table 15-41 Layer2 Attributes of PND2 Board
Hybrid
QinQ or Null.
Default: 1
The Default VLAN ID parameter specifies a
default VLAN ID for a port that transmits
untagged packets.
NOTE
Default: 0
The VLAN Priority parameter specifies the
priority of the default VLAN ID of a port.
When the network is busy, data packets of
higher VLAN priority are processed first and
those of lower VLAN priority may be
discarded. 0 indicates the lowest priority and
7 the highest.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1679
Data Packets with
VLAN IDs
Data Packets
Without VLAN
IDs
packets
Dropping the data
packets
Parameters Default
VLAN ID and
VLAN Priority are
not used.
packets
Adding the VLAN
IDs that are set
-
packets
Adding the VLAN
IDs that are set
-

Table 15-43 Layer 3 Attributes of PND2 Board
labels.
Unspecified
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1680
NOTE
by the NMS.
on the NE.

Table 15-44 Advanced Attributes of PND2 Board
Port Physical
Parameters
board.
MAC Loopback - This parameter is unavailable for the PND2
board.
PHY Loopback - This parameter is unavailable for the PND2
board.
Transmission Rate
(kbit/s)
packets.
s)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1681
Default: Disabled
Default: Disabled
Egress PIR
Bandwidth (kbit/s)
64 to 10000000 Displays the egress PIR bandwidth.
Broadcast Packet
Suppression
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
suppression.
Broadcast Packet
Suppression
Threshold (%)
0% to 100%, with a
step of 10%
Default: 30%
Network Cable Mode - This parameter is unavailable for the PND2
board.
Optical Module Type - This parameter is unavailable for the PND2
board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1682
Synchronous Clock
Enabled
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
Determines whether to enable lock
synchronization. Set the parameter to
clocks. When the parameter is set to

15.4.9 PND2 Specifications
Optical Module
TN54PN
D2
N/A 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-
PIN-XFP

NOTE
PIN-XFP
power
dBm 2
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1683
PIN-XFP
power
dBm -3
width
nm 0.3
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35
Receiver type - PIN
(FEC on)
dBm -16
(FEC on)
dBm 0

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
power
dBm 2
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1684
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
power
dBm -1
width
nm 0.3
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35
Receiver type - PIN
(FEC on)
dBm -16
(FEC on)
dBm 0

Optical
Module Type
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80 km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ
Optical source
type
- SLM SLM SLM
Target
transmission
distance
- 10 km (6.2 mi.) 40 km (24.9 mi.) 80 km (49.7 mi.)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1685
Optical
Module Type
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80 km
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565
Maximum
mean launched
power
dBm -1 2 4
Minimum
mean launched
power
dBm -6 -1 0
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB 6 8.2 9
Maximum -20
dB spectral
width
nm N/A N/A N/A
Minimum side
mode
suppression
ratio
dB 30 30 30
Eye pattern
mask
- G.959.1-compliant
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1290 to 1565 1260 to 1605 1270 to 1600
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm -11 -14 -24
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm -1 -1 -7

(8.7 in.)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1686
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power Consumption
at 55C (131F) (W)
TN54PND2 100 108
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1687
16 PID Board
About This Chapter
16.1 Overview
PID boards integrate the functions of traditional optical transponder boards and multiplexer/
demultiplexer boards. OTN processing and output of multiplexed optical signals are
implemented on one PID board, featuring large capacity, high integration, high reliability, and
flexible access of various services.
16.2 BMD4
BMD4: PID Interleaver Board (C-band), 200/100 GHz
16.3 BMD8
BMD8: PID Interleaver Board (C_Band), 200/50 GHz
16.4 ELQX
ELQX: 4 x Electrical OTU2 with 4 x 10G Tributary Board
16.5 PTQX
PTQX: 12 x OTU2 PID board with 4 x 10G tributary
16.6 ENQ2
ENQ2: 4 x 10G Line Service Processing Board
16.7 NPO2
NPO2: 12 x OTU2 PID Board
16.8 NPO2E
NPO2E: 10G PID line service processing board, 20channel extended
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Hardware Description 16 PID Board
1688
16.1 Overview
PID boards integrate the functions of traditional optical transponder boards and multiplexer/
demultiplexer boards. OTN processing and output of multiplexed optical signals are
implemented on one PID board, featuring large capacity, high integration, high reliability, and
flexible access of various services.
Positions of PID Boards in a WDM System
Figure 16-1 shows the positions of PID boards in a WDM system.
Figure 16-1 Positions of PID boards in a WDM system
W
D
M
-
s
i
d
e

O
D
F
Max.: 20 x multiplexed
OTU2/OTU2e optical
signals
Client-side
services
Tributary
board
ODUk
ODUk
TN54
ENQ2
TN55
NPO2E
+
TN54
PQ2
TN55
NPO2
+
TN54
PQ2
ODUk ODUk
ODUk OTUk
Tributary
board
Client-side
services
Line
/PID
board
OTUk optical
signals in
other
directions
ODUk
ODUk
200G PID group
TN54
PQ2
: subboard
l NPO2E: receives ODUk electrical signals from the backplane, OTU2/OTU2e electrical
signals from the ENQ2 board, and OTU2/OTU2e optical signals from the NPO2 board,
and finally outputs 20 channels of multiplexed OTU2/OTU2e optical signals.
l NPO2: receives ODUk electrical signals from the backplane, OTU2/OTU2e electrical
signals from the ENQ2 board, and outputs 12 channels of multiplexed OTU2/OTU2e
optical signals. Or outputs eight channels of OTU2/OTU2e optical signals to the NPO2E
board which outputs 20 channels of multiplexed OTU2/OTU2e optical signals.
l ENQ2: receives ODUk electrical signals from the backplane, converts the signals into four
channels of OTU2/OTU2e electrical signals, and finally outputs the signals to the NPO2
or NPO2E board for processing.
l PQ2 subboard: processes ODUk signals on the TN55NPO2 or TN55NPO2E board after
being installed on the board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1689
Main Functions of PID Boards
Table 16-1 lists the main functions of PID boards.
Table 16-1 Main functions of PID boards
Board Signal Input Signal Output
TN55NPO2E
a
64 x ODU0, 32 x ODU1, or 8 x ODU2/ODU2e
electrical signals from other line boards or PID
boards
20 x multiplexed OTU2/OTU2e optical
signals
4 x ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals from the
ENQ2 board
8 x OTU2/OTU2e optical signals from the NPO2
board
TN54NPO2/
TN55NPO2
a
64 x ODU0, 32 x ODU1, or 8 x ODU2/ODU2e
boards
12 x multiplexed OTU2/OTU2e optical
signals
4 x ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals from the
ENQ2 board
TN54ENQ2 32 x ODU0, 16 x ODU1, or 4 x ODU2/ODU2e
boards
4 x OTU2/OTU2e electrical boards to the
NPO2E or NPO2 board
a: The access capability listed in the table is for the TN55NPO2E/TN55NPO2 board equipped with the TN54PQ2
subboard. The TN54PQ2 subboard helps the TN55NPO2E/TN55NPO2 board to provide an extra capability of
conversion between 32 x ODU0/16 x ODU1/4 x ODU2 and 4 x OTU2, and conversion between 4 x ODU2e and
4 x OTU2e. Without the TN54PQ2 subboard, the TN55NPO2E/TN55NPO2 board can process only 32 x ODU0,
16 x ODU1, or 4 x ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals.
NOTE
The TN55NPO2E/TN55NPO2 board supports a maximum of 80 km DCM-free transmission while the TN54NPO2 board must
be equipped with the DCM.

16.2 BMD4
BMD4: PID Interleaver Board (C-band), 200/100 GHz
The available functional version of the BMD4 board is TN11.
Huawei office.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1690
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
1B
MD
4
N N N Y Y N

16.2.2 Application
The BMD4 is an optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit. It multiplexes and demultiplexes
signals.
Figure 16-2 shows the position of the BMD4 in a WDM system.
Figure 16-2 Position of the BMD4 in a WDM system
OA
OA OA
OA
BMD4
BMD4
PTQX
4
ELQX
4
ELQX
4
4
4
PTQX
4
ELQX
4
ELQX
4
4
4
4
PTQX
4
4
4
ELQX
ELQX
4
4
PTQX
4
4
4
ELQX
ELQX
4
4
4

The BMD4 provides functions and features such as multiplexing, demultiplexing, and in-service
spectrum detection.
Table 16-2 provides the details about the functions and features of the BMD4.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1691
Table 16-2 Functions and features of the BMD4
Function or
Feature
Description
Basic function In a 40-channel system, the BMD4 board multiplexes and
demultiplexes the optical signals.
Demultiplexes one channel of input 40-wavelength multiplexed
signals with a spacing of 100 GHz to four channels of signals with a
spacing of 200 GHz, that is, two channels of 12-wavelength
multiplexed signals and two channels of 8-wavelength multiplexed
signals. The reverse process is similar.
In-service detection
and monitoring of the
spectrum
Provides an in-service monitoring interface. A small number of
optical signals can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum
analyzer unit through the interface to monitor the spectrum and optical
performance of the multichannel signals without interrupting the
services.

The BMD4 board consists of the optical module, the control and communication module, and
the power supply module.
Figure 16-3 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the BMD4.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1692
Figure 16-3 Functional modules and signal flow of the BMD4
SCC
Interleaver
R03
R04
Optical module
Splitter
Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
T01
T02
T03
T04
R01
R02
IN
OUT
MON
Coupler

Signal Flow
The multiplexed signals with a spacing of 100 GHz are accessed through the IN optical interface
and transmitted to the interleaver. Then, the interleaver splits the multiplexed signals into four
channels of multiplexed signals with a spacing of 200 GHz, that is, two channels of 12-
wavelength multiplexed signals and two channels of 8-wavelength multiplexed signals. Finally,
the four channels of multiplexed signals are output through the T01-T04 optical interfaces.
The four channels of multiplexed signals are received through the R01-R04 optical interfaces
and are transmitted to the coupler. Then, the coupler couples the four channels of multiplexed
signals into one channel of multiplexed signals with a spacing of 100 GHz. Finally, the signals
are output through the OUT optical interface.
Module Function
l Optical module
Demultiplexes one channel of input 40-wavelength multiplexed signals with a spacing
of 100 GHz into four channels of multiplexed signals with a spacing of 200 GHz, that
is, two channels of 12-wavelength multiplexed signals and two channels of 8-
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1693
wavelength multiplexed signals, and uses the coupler to couple the signals with a
spacing of 200 GHz into one channel of 40-wavelength multiplexed signals with a
spacing of 100 GHz.
The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to
the MON interface for detection.
Controls board operations.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to the instructions from
the CPU.
Collects information about alarms, performance events, working status, and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module
on the board.
16.2.5 Front Panel
There is one indicator and laser level label on the front panel of the BMD4.
Figure 16-4 shows the front panel of the BMD4.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1694
Figure 16-4 Front panel of the BMD4
BMD4
BMD4
STAT
M
O
N
O
U
T
I
N
T
0
1
R
0
1
T
0
2
R
0
2
T
0
4
R
0
4
T
0
3
R
0
3
HAZARDLEVEL1MINVISIBLE
LASERRADIATION
DONOTVIEWDIRECTLYWITH
NON-ATTENUATINGOPTICALINSTRUMENTS
CAUTION
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION
NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

Indicators
One indicator is present on the front panel:
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - green
For details about this indicator, see A.4 Board Indicators.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1695
Interfaces
Table 16-3 Types and functions of the interfaces on the BMD4
IN LC Accesses the optical signals at 100 GHz channel
spacing (C_EVEN multiplexed signals).
OUT LC Outputs the optical signals at 100 GHz channel spacing
(C_EVEN multiplexed signals).
MON LC Connects to the input port on the MCA4 or the MCA8
board so that the MCA4 or the MCA8 board can detect
the optical spectrum in service.
The optical power at the MON interface is 10/90 of the
optical power at the OUT interface, that is, the optical
power at the MON interface is 10 dB lower than the
optical power at the OUT interface, calculation
formula: Pout(dBm) - Pmon(dBm) = 10 x lg(90/10) =
10 dB.
T01/R01 LC Transmits/Receives 12 wavelengths (193.80 THz to
196.00 THz) of optical signals with a 200 GHz channel
spacing.
T02/R02 LC Transmits/Receives 12 wavelengths (193.70 THz to
spacing.
T03/R03 LC Transmits/Receives eight wavelengths (192.20 THz to
spacing.
spacing.

Laser Hazard Level
The laser hazard level of the board is HAZARD LEVEL 1M, indicating that the maximum power
launched by the board ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 21.3 dBm (136 mW).
16.2.6 Valid Slots
The BMD4 occupies one slot.
Table 16-4 shows the valid slots for the BMD4 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1696
Table 16-4 Valid slots for the BMD4 board
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800
platform subrack
IU1-IU18

16.2.7 Characteristic Code of the BMD4
The characteristic code of the BMD4 consists of one character, indicating the band adopted by
the board.
Table 16-5 provides the details about the characteristic code of the BMD4.
Table 16-5 Characteristic code of the BMD4
Code Indication Description
The first character Band Indicates the multiplexing
scheme adopted by the board.
The value C represents the C
band. The value L represents
the L band.

For example, if the characteristic code of the BMD4 is C, it indicates that the optical signals are
in the C band.
16.2.8 Optical Interfaces on the BMD4
Each optical interface on the BMD4 accesses certain fixed wavelengths.
Table 16-6 lists the optical interfaces on the BMD4 and the relationships between the frequencies
and wavelengths.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1697
Table 16-6 Optical interfaces on the BMD4 and relationships between the frequencies and
wavelengths
Interface Number of
Wavelengths
Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm)
T01/R01 12 193.8
194.0
194.2
194.4
194.6
194.8
195.0
195.2
195.4
195.6
195.8
196.0
1546.917
1545.322
1543.730
1542.142
1540.557
1538.976
1537.397
1535.822
1534.250
1532.681
1531.116
1529.553
T02/R02 12 193.7
193.9
194.1
194.3
194.5
194.7
194.9
195.1
195.3
195.5
195.7
195.9
1547.715
1546.119
1544.526
1542.936
1541.349
1539.766
1538.186
1536.609
1535.036
1533.465
1531.898
1530.334
T03/R03 8 192.2
192.4
192.6
192.8
193.0
193.2
193.4
193.6
1559.794
1558.173
1556.555
1554.940
1553.329
1551.721
1550.116
1548.515
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1698
Interface Number of
Wavelengths
T04/R04 8 192.1
192.3
192.5
192.7
192.9
193.1
193.3
193.5
1560.606
1558.983
1557.363
1555.747
1554.134
1552.524
1550.918
1549.315

For BMD4 parameters, refer to Table 16-7.
Table 16-7 BMD4 parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
Optical Interface Name - Sets and queries the optical interface
name. It is recommended to use the
default value.
Configure Band C
Default: C
Used to configure type of the
working band of a board.
Actual Band - Queries the actual working band of
the board.
Actual Working Band
Parity
- Queries the parity of the actual
working band of the board.
Configure Working
Band Parity
All, Odd, Even
Default: All
Used to select the desired parity of
the working band.

16.2.10 BMD4 Specifications
The specifications include the optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power
consumption.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1699
Optical Specifications
Table 16-8 Optical specifications of the BMD4
Item Unit Value
Operating wavelength range nm 1529 - 1561
T0x/R0x channel spacing
a
GHz 200
IN/OUT channel spacing GHz 100
Insertion loss IN-T01
IN-T02
IN-T03
IN-T04
dB 5
R01-OUT
R02-OUT
R03-OUT
R04-OUT
dB 6
Isolation
b
IN->T01/T03@T02/T04
IN->T02/T04@T01/T03
dB 25
IN->T01@T03
IN->T03@T01
IN->T02@T04
IN->T04@T02
R01->OUT@R03
R03->OUT@R01
R02->OUT@R04
R04->OUT@R02
13
Optical return loss dB 40
Directivity dB 45
PMD dB 0.5
Polarization dependent loss dB 0.5
Input optical power range dB 23
a: T0x represents T01 to T04 ports. R0x represents R01 to R04 ports.
b: In the case of T01/T03@T02/T04, this parameter refers to the isolation between any one
of T01/T03 ports and any one of T02/T04 ports. It is the same case for other isolation item.
T01/T02 ports are intended for blue band signals. T03/T04 ports are intended for red band
signals.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1700
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11BMD4 0.2 0.3

16.3 BMD8
BMD8: PID Interleaver Board (C_Band), 200/50 GHz
Only one functional version of the BMD8 board is available, that is, TN11.
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
1B
MD
8
N N N Y Y N

16.3.2 Application
The BMD8 is an optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit. It multiplexes and demultiplexes
signals.
Figure 16-5 shows the position of the BMD8 in a WDM system.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1701
Figure 16-5 Position of the BMD8 in a WDM system
OA
OA OA
OA
BMD8
BMD8
PTQX
4
ELQX
4
ELQX
4
4
4
PTQX
4
ELQX
4
ELQX
4
4
4
8
PTQX
4
4
4
ELQX
ELQX
4
4
PTQX
4
4
4
ELQX
ELQX
4
4
8

The BMD8 provides functions and features such as multiplexing, demultiplexing, and in-service
spectrum detection.
Table 16-9 provides the details about the functions and features of the BMD8.
Table 16-9 Functions and features of the BMD8
Function or
Feature
Description
Basic function In an 80-channel system, the BMD8 board multiplexes and
demultiplexes optical signals.
Demultiplexes one channel of input 80-wavelength multiplexed
signals with a spacing of 50 GHz into four channels of odd-
wavelength signals and four channels of even-wavelength
multiplexed signals with a spacing of 200 GHz, that is, four channels
of 12-wavelength multiplexed signals and four channels of 8-
wavelength multiplexed signals. The reverse process is similar.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1702
Function or
Feature
Description
Detection and
monitoring of the
online spectrum
Provides an in-service monitoring interface. A small number of
optical signals can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum
analyzer unit through the interface to monitor the spectrum and optical
performance of the multichannel signals without interrupting the
services.

The BMD8 board consists of the optical module, the control and communication module, and
the power supply module.
Figure 16-6 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the BMD8.
Figure 16-6 Functional modules and signal flow of the BMD8
SCC
R03
R04
Optical module
Splitter
Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
DC power supply
from a backplane
T01
T02
T03
T04
R01
R02
IN
OUT
MON
T05
T06
T07
T08
R07
R08
R05
R06
Interleaver
Interleaver
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1703

Signal Flow
The multiplexed signals with a spacing of 50 GHz are accessed through the IN optical interface
and transmitted to the interleaver. Then, the interleaver splits the multiplexed signals into eight
channels of multiplexed signals with a spacing of 200 GHz, that is, four channels of 12-
wavelength multiplexed signals and four channels of 8-wavelength multiplexed signals. Finally,
the eight channels of multiplexed signals are output through the T01 to T08 optical interfaces.
The eight channels of multiplexed signals are received through the R01 to R08 optical interfaces
and are transmitted to the coupler. Then, the coupler couples the eight channels of multiplexed
signals into one channel of multiplexed signals with a spacing of 50 GHz. that is, four channels
of 12-wavelength multiplexed signals and four channels of 8-wavelength multiplexed signals.
Finally, the signals are output through the OUT optical interface.
Module Function
l Optical module
Demultiplexes one channel of input 80-wavelength multiplexed signals with a spacing
of 50 GHz into eight channels of multiplexed signals with a spacing of 200 GHz and
uses the interleaver to couple the signals into one channel of 80-wavelength multiplexed
signals with a spacing of 50 GHz.
the CPU.
on the board.
16.3.5 Front Panel
There is one indicator and laser level label on the front panel of the BMD8.
Figure 16-7 shows the front panel of the BMD8.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1704
Figure 16-7 Front panel of the BMD8
BMD8
BMD8
STAT
M
O
N
T
0
1
R
0
1
T
0
2
R
0
2
T
0
4
R
0
4
T
0
3
R
0
3
T
0
5
R
0
5
T
0
6
R
0
6
T
0
8
R
0
8
T
0
7
R
0
7
O
U
T
I
N
LASERRADIATION
CAUTION
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION

Indicators
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1705
Interfaces
Table 16-10 Types and functions of the interfaces on the BMD8
IN LC Accesses the optical signals at 50 GHz channel spacing
(C_ODD and C_EVEN multiplexed signals).
MON LC Connects to the input port on the MCA4 or the MCA8 board
so that the MCA4 or the MCA8 board can detect the optical
spectrum in service.
The optical power at the MON interface is 10/90 of the optical
power at the OUT interface, that is, the optical power at the
MON interface is 10 dB lower than the optical power at the
OUT interface, calculation formula: Pout(dBm) - Pmon(dBm)
= 10 x lg(90/10) = 10 dB.
T01/R01 LC Transmits/Receives 12 wavelengths (193.850 THz to 196.050
THz) of optical signals with a 200 GHz channel spacing.
spacing.
spacing.
spacing.
spacing.

Laser Hazard Level
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1706
16.3.6 Valid Slots
The BMD8 occupies two slots.
Table 16-11 shows the valid slots for the BMD8 board.
Table 16-11 Valid slots for the BMD8 board
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800
platform subrack
IU1-IU17

The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot on the subrack.
Therefore, the slot number of the BMD8 displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of
the two occupied slots. For example, if the BMD8 occupies IU1 and IU2, the slot number of the
BMD8 displayed on the NM is IU1.
16.3.7 Characteristic Code of the BMD8
The characteristic code of the BMD8 consists of one character, indicating the band adopted by
the board.
Table 16-12 provides the details about the characteristic code of the BMD8.
Table 16-12 Characteristic code of the BMD8
Code Indication Description
The first character Band Indicates the multiplexing
scheme adopted by the board.
The value C represents the C
band.

For example, if the characteristic code of the BMD8 is C, it indicates that the optical signals are
in the C band.
16.3.8 Optical Interfaces on the BMD8
Each optical interface on the BMD8 accesses certain fixed wavelengths.
Table 16-13 lists the optical interfaces on the BMD8 and the relationships between the
frequencies and wavelengths.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1707
Table 16-13 Optical interfaces on the BMD8 and the relationships between the frequencies and
wavelengths
Interface Number of
Wavelengths
T01/R01 12 193.85
194.05
194.25
194.45
194.65
194.85
195.05
195.25
195.45
195.65
195.85
196.05
1546.52
1544.92
1543.33
1541.75
1540.16
1538.58
1537.00
1535.43
1533.86
1532.29
1530.72
1529.16
T02/R02 12 193.8
194.0
194.2
194.4
194.6
194.8
195.0
195.2
195.4
195.6
195.8
196.0
1546.917
1545.322
1543.730
1542.142
1540.557
1538.976
1537.397
1535.822
1534.250
1532.681
1531.116
1529.553
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1708
Interface Number of
Wavelengths
T03/R03 12 193.75
193.95
194.15
194.35
194.55
194.75
194.95
195.15
195.35
195.55
195.75
195.95
1547.32
1545.72
1544.13
1542.54
1540.95
1539.37
1537.79
1536.22
1534.64
1533.07
1531.51
1529.94
T04/R04 12 193.7
193.9
194.1
194.3
194.5
194.7
194.9
195.1
195.3
195.5
195.7
195.9
1547.715
1546.119
1544.526
1542.936
1541.349
1539.766
1538.186
1536.609
1535.036
1533.465
1531.898
1530.334
T05/R05 8 192.25
192.45
192.65
192.85
193.05
193.25
193.45
193.65
1559.39
1557.77
1556.15
1554.54
1552.93
1551.32
1549.72
1548.11
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1709
Interface Number of
Wavelengths
T06/R06 8 192.2
192.4
192.6
192.8
193.0
193.2
193.4
193.6
1559.794
1558.173
1556.555
1554.940
1553.329
1551.721
1550.116
1548.515
T07/R07 8 192.15
192.35
192.55
192.75
192.95
193.15
193.35
193.55
1560.20
1558.58
1556.96
1555.34
1553.73
1552.12
1550.52
1548.91
T08/R08 8 192.1
192.3
192.5
192.7
192.9
193.1
193.3
193.5
1560.606
1558.983
1557.363
1555.747
1554.134
1552.524
1550.918
1549.315

For BMD8 parameters, refer to Table 16-14.
Table 16-14 BMD8 parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1710
default value.
Configure Band C
Default: C
Used to configure type of the
working band of a board.
Actual Band - Queries the actual working band of
the board.
Actual Working Band
Parity
- Queries the parity of the actual
working band of the board.
Configure Working
Band Parity
All, Odd, Even
Default: All
Used to select the desired parity of
the working band.

16.3.10 BMD8 Specifications
consumption.
Table 16-15 Optical specifications of the BMD8
Item Unit Value
T0x/R0x channel spacing
a
GHz 200
IN/OUT channel spacing GHz 50
Insertion loss IN-T01
IN-T02
IN-T03
IN-T04
IN-T05
IN-T06
IN-T07
IN-T08
dB 8
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1711
Item Unit Value
R01-OUT
R02-OUT
R03-OUT
R04-OUT
R05-OUT
R06-OUT
R07-OUT
R08-OUT
dB 9.5
Isolation
b
IN->T01/T05 @T02/T06/
T03/T07/T04/T08
IN->T02/T06 @T01/T05/
T03/T07/T04/T08
IN->T03/T07 @T01/T05/
T02/T06/T04/T08
IN->T04/T08 @T01/T05/
T02/T06/T03/T07
dB 25
IN->T01@T05
IN->T05@T01
IN->T02@T06
IN->T06@T02
IN->T03@T07
IN->T07@T03
IN->T04@T08
IN->T08@T04
13
R01->OUT@R05
R05->OUT@R01
R02->OUT@R06
R06->OUT@R02
R03->OUT@R07
R07->OUT@R03
R04->OUT@R08
R08->OUT@R04
Optical return loss dB 40
Directivity dB 45
PMD dB 0.5
Input optical power range dB 23
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1712
Item Unit Value
a: T0x represents T01 to T08 ports. R0x represents R01 to R08 ports.
b: In the case of T01/T05@T02/T06/T03/T07/T04/T08, this parameter refers to the isolation
between any one of T01/T05 ports and any one of T02/T06/T03/T07/T04/T08 ports. It is the
same case for other isolation item. T01 to T04 ports are intended for blue band signals; the
T05 to T08 ports are intended for red band signals.

(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11BMD8 0.2 0.3

16.4 ELQX
ELQX: 4 x Electrical OTU2 with 4 x 10G Tributary Board
The available functional version of the ELQX board is TN12.
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
2EL
QX
N N N N Y N

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1713
16.4.2 Application
The ELQX board converts four 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e
signals into four OTU2/OTU2e electrical signals or converts four ODU2/ODU2e signals or 16
ODU1 signals from the backplane into four OTU2/OTU2e signals. The reverse process is
similar.
Figure 16-8 shows the position of the ELQX in a WDM system.
Figure 16-8 Position of the ELQX in a WDM system
OA
OA OA
OA
BMD4 BMD4
PTQX
4 ELQX
4 ELQX PTQX
4
4
ELQX
ELQX
10GE LAN/
10GE WAN/
STM-64/
OC-192/
OTU2/
OTU2e
4
4
4
4
4
10GE LAN/
10GE WAN/
STM-64/
OC-192/
OTU2/
OTU2e
4

The ELQX supports functions and features such as OTN interfaces, ESC, and ALS.
Table 16-16 provides the details about the functions and features of the ELQX.
Table 16-16 Functions and features of the ELQX
Function or
Feature
Description
Basic function ELQX converts signals as follows:
l 4 x 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e<->4 x
OTU2/OTU2e
l 16 x ODU1/4 x ODU2/ODU2e<->4 x OTU2/OTU2e
l Supports hybrid transmission of the ODU1 and ODU2/ODU2e services.
Client-side
service type
OTN function l The encapsulation and mapping comply with ITU-T G.7041, ITU-T G.
709, and GDPS.
l Supports SM, PM and TCM function for ODU2.
l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU2 .
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1714
Function or
Feature
Description
WDM
specification
ESC function Supported.
PRBS test
function
NOTE
is 10GE LAN.
FEC encoding l Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the
WDM side.
NOTE
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
power of the laser.
Optical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Electrical-
layer ASON
Not supported
Protection
scheme
l Supports client-side 1+1 protection.
l Supports the ODUk SNCP.
Ethernet
service
mapping mode
l Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G)
l MAC Transparent Mapping(10.7G)
Ethernet port
working mode
l 10GE LAN FULL_Duplex
l 10GE WAN FULL_Duplex
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1715
Function or
Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards
compliance
Protocols or
standards for
transparent
transmission
(non-
performance
monitoring)
IEEE 802.3ae
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
Protocols or
standards for
service
processing
(performance
monitoring)
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.873.1
ITU-T G.694.1

The ELQX board consists of the client-side optical module, the signal processing module, the
control and communication module, and the power supply module.
Figure 16-9 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the ELQX in the OptiX OSN 6800.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1716
Signal Flow
Figure 16-9 Functional modules and signal flow of the ELQX in the OptiX OSN 6800
Client side
Client-side
optical
module
RX1
RX2
TX1
TX2
SDH/SONET
encapsulation and
mapping module
OTN
processing
module
10GE-LAN
encapsulation and
mapping module
O/E
E/O
RX3
RX4
TX3
TX4
4OTU2/4OTU2e
4ODU2/4ODU2e
/16ODU1
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
Backplane
(service cross-connection)
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)

The client side of the ELQX board can access the following optical signals:
In the signal flow of the ELQX board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the ELQX to the WDM side
of the PTQX, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
The client-side optical module receives four optical signals from client equipment through
the RX1-RX4 interfaces, and converts the optical signals into electrical signals. The client-
side optical module can also receive four ODU2/ODU2e signals or 16 ODU1 signals from
the backplane.
The electrical signals converted from the client optical signals or the ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e
signals from the backplane are transmitted to the signal processing module. The signals of
different types are transmitted to different encapsulation and mapping modules. Then, the
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1717
encapsulation and mapping modules perform encapsulation, mapping, and OTN framing
for the signals. Finally, four OTU2/OTU2e signals are transmitted to the PTQX board
l Receive direction
The signal processing module receives four OTU2/OTU2e electrical signals from the
PTQX board through the backplane, performs OTU2/OTU2e framing, demapping, and
decapsulation for the signals, and finally outputs four ODU2/ODU2e signals, 16 ODU1
signals, or four 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e electrical
signals.
The four ODU2/ODU2e signals or 16 ODU1 signals are cross-connected to other boards
through the backplane, or the four 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2 or
OTU2e electrical signals are transmitted to the client-side optical module. The optical
signals are converted into electrical signals, and then are output through the TX1-TX4
optical interfaces.
NOTE
The ELQX board can receive service signals from the client side or from other boards through the backplane.
One ODU2LP port can only receive one channel of signals either from the client side or from the backplane.
Module Function
Client-side receiver: converts four channels of 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64,
OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals into electrical signals.
Client-side transmitter: converts four channels of internal electrical signals into 10GE
LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals.
Reports the working status of the client-side laser.
mapping module, 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing
module.
NOTE
The signal processing module on the ELQX board has fixed cross-connections to the PTQX board.
OTU2 payload area. This module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/
OTU2/OTU2e payload area. This module also performs the reverse process and has the
Frames OTU2 signals and processes overheads in OTU2 signals.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1718
the CPU.
detection of each functional module on the board.
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
16.4.5 Front Panel
There are four indicators on the front panel of the ELQX.
Figure 16-10 shows the front panel of the ELQX.
Figure 16-10 Front panel of the ELQX
ELQX
ELQX
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
R
X
2
T
X
3
R
X
3
T
X
4
R
X
4
T
X
1
R
X
1
T
X
2
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1719

Indicators
Interfaces
Table 16-17 Types and functions of the ELQX interfaces
TX1 - TX4 LC Transmits the optical service signal to the client-side
equipment.
RX1 - RX4 LC Receives the optical service signal from the client-side
equipment.

Laser Hazard Level
16.4.6 Valid Slots
The ELQX occupies one slot.
Table 16-18 shows the valid slots for the ELQX board.
Table 16-18 Valid slots for the ELQX board
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800 subrack IU1, IU4, IU5, IU8, IU11, IU14

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1720
Table 16-19 Mapping between the physical ports on the ELQX board and the port numbers
TX1/RX1 3
TX2/RX2 4
TX3/RX3 5
TX4/RX4 6

NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces, of which
one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.
Logical Ports
Figure 16-11, Figure 16-12 and Figure 16-13 describes the NM ports of the ELQX board.
Table 16-20 lists the indication of each port.
Figure 16-11 Diagram of ports on the ELQX (cross-connections of client-side services)
3(RX1/TX1)
4(RX2/TX2)
5(RX3/TX3)
6(RX4/TX4)
Client side
Service
Processing
Module
Service
Processing
Module
Service
Processing
Module

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1721
Figure 16-12 Diagram of ports on the ELQX (backplane-side ODU1-level cross-connections)
Backplane
Cross-
connect
module
Service
processing
module
Service
processing
module

Figure 16-13 Diagram of ports on the ELQX (backplane-side ODU2-level cross-connections)
Cross-connect
module
Service
processing
module
Backplane

Table 16-20 Description of NM ports of the ELQX
interfaces
ODU1LP1-ODU1LP4 Internal logical ports. The optical paths are numbered 1,
2, 3, 4.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1722
If the ELQX board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the
U2000:
cross-connection between the ClientLP port and the ODU2LP port on the ELQX board, as
shown by (1) in Figure 16-14.
l If the ODU1 signals of other boards are cross-connected to the ELQX board, you need to
create cross-connections from the ClientLP ports on other boards to the ODU1LP port on
the ELQX board on the U2000, as shown Figure 16-15.
l If the ODU2 signals of other boards are cross-connected to the ELQX board, you need to
create cross-connections from the ClientLP ports on other boards to the ODU2LP port on
the ELQX board on the U2000, as shown by (2) Figure 16-14.
l The ODU2LP ports on the ELQX board and the OCHLP ports on the PTQX board are of
one-to-one cross-connections. Therefore, the cross-connections do not need to be created
on the U2000. For details, see Figure 16-16.
Figure 16-14 Diagram of cross-connections of the ELQX (ODU2 level)
ELQX board
Client side
Cross-connection
module
Other board
1
2
1
2
Client side
Cross-connection
module
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of
the PTQX board

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1723
Figure 16-15 Diagram of cross-connections of the ELQX (ODU1 level)
ELQX board
Client side
Other board
1
1
Client side
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the PTQX board

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1724
Figure 16-16 Diagram of cross-connections between the PTQX and ELQX
WDM side
PTQX baord
ELQX board
141(OCHLP9/OCHLP9)-1
1
2
2
1
ELQX board
Client side
Client side
Fixed cross-connection between the first ELQX board and the
PTQX board in a PID group
Fixed cross-connection between the second ELQX board and the

For parameters of the ELQX, refer toTable 16-21.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1725
Table 16-21 ELQX parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
Optical Interface
Name
name.
Default: Used
channel of a board.
Optical Interface
Loopback
Outloop
Outloop
Queries or sets the path Loopback.
Service Type 10GE LAN, 10GE
WAN, OTU-2, OTU2
2E, STM-64, OC-192
Default: 10GE LAN
Mapping(11.1G), MAC
Transparent Mapping
(10.7G), Bit
Transparent Mapping
(10.7G)
Default: Bit
Transparent Mapping
(11.1G)
service.
Default:
l WDM side: On
l Client side: Off
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Enabled, Disabled
Default:
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1726
Default: Disabled
Service Mode Automatic, ODU1,
ODU2
Default: Automatic
Default: Enabled
FEC Mode FEC, AFEC
Default: AFEC
Actual Wavelength
No./Wavelength
(nm)/Frequency
(THz)
Actual Band Type - Queries the band type.
Planned Wavelength
No./Wavelength
(nm)/Frequency
(THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.100
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.170
to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /
board.
information.
Default: C
wavelength.
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
to Disabled.
NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1727
Speedup Mode
information.
OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None
board resides.
information.
Default: Disabled
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
commissioning.

16.4.10 ELQX Specifications
consumption.
Optical Module
TN12EL
QX
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1728
NOTE
point.
Optical
Module
Type
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80
km
10 Gbit/s
Single-
Rate-0.3 km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Optical
source type
- SLM SLM SLM MLM
Target
transmissio
n distance
- 10 km (6.2 mi.) 40 km (24.9
mi.)
80 km (49.7
mi.)
0.3 km (0.2
mi.)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565 840 to 860
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -1 2 4 -1.3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -6 -4.7 0 -7.3
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 6 8.2 9 3
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm N/A N/A N/A N/A
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB 30 30 30 30
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1729
Optical
Module
Type
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80
km
10 Gbit/s
Single-
Rate-0.3 km
Eye pattern
mask
- G.691-compliant
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN APD PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1260 to 1565 1260 to 1605 1270 to 1600 840 to 860
Receiver
sensitivity
(multirate)
dBm -11 -14 -24 -7.5
Receiver
sensitivity
(10GE
LAN)
dBm -14.4 -15.8 -24 -7.5
Minimum
receiver
overload
(10GE
LAN)
dBm 0.5 -1 -7 -1
Minimum
receiver
overload
(STM-64)
dBm -1 -1 -7 -1
Maximum
reflectance
dB -27 -27 -27 -12

PIN-XFP
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1730
PIN-XFP
power
dBm 2
power
dBm -3
width
nm 0.3
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35
Receiver type - PIN
(FEC on)
dBm -16
(FEC on)
dBm 0

(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
at 25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
(W)
TN12ELQX 86.2 99.1

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1731
16.5 PTQX
PTQX: 12 x OTU2 PID board with 4 x 10G tributary
The available functional version of the PTQX board is TN12.
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
2PT
QX
N N N N Y N

Type
One PID can use only certain wavelengths, as listed in Table 16-24. Table 16-25 lists the
wavelength numbers and the relations between the wavelengths and frequencies.
Table 16-24 Wavelength allocation table of a PID (ELQX+PTQX)
Serial
No.
Wavelength No.
of the ELQX (on
the Left)
Wavelength No.
of the PTQX
Wavelength No.
of the ELQX (on
the Right)
PTQX Type
1 33, 37, 41, 45 1, 5, 9, 13 17, 21, 25, 29 TN12PTQX01
2 34, 38, 42, 46 2, 6, 10, 14 18, 22, 26, 30 TN12PTQX02
3 35, 39, 43, 47 3, 7, 11, 15 19, 23, 27, 31 TN12PTQX03
4 36, 40, 44, 48 4, 8, 12, 16 20, 24, 28, 32 TN12PTQX04
5 - 49, 53, 57, 61 65, 69, 73, 77 TN12PTQX05
6 - 50, 54, 58, 62 66, 70, 74, 78 TN12PTQX06
7 - 51, 55, 59, 63 67, 71, 75, 79 TN12PTQX07
8 - 52, 56, 60, 64 68, 72, 76, 80 TN12PTQX08
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1732
Serial
No.
Wavelength No.
of the ELQX (on
the Left)
Wavelength No.
of the PTQX
Wavelength No.
of the ELQX (on
the Right)
PTQX Type
NOTE
For the wavelength groups indicated by serial numbers 5-8, only one PTQX board and one ELQX board
are required and the ELQX board should be housed on the right of the PTQX board.

Table 16-25 Frequencies and wavelengths of a C-band 80-channel (50 GHz-spaced) system
Wavelengt
h No.
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Wavelengt
h No.
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
1 196.05 1529.16 41 194.05 1544.92
2 196.00 1529.55 42 194.00 1545.32
3 195.95 1529.94 43 193.95 1545.72
4 195.90 1530.33 44 193.90 1546.12
5 195.85 1530.72 45 193.85 1546.52
6 195.80 1531.12 46 193.80 1546.92
7 195.75 1531.51 47 193.75 1547.32
8 195.70 1531.90 48 193.70 1547.72
9 195.65 1532.29 49 193.65 1548.11
10 195.60 1532.68 50 193.60 1548.51
11 195.55 1533.07 51 193.55 1548.91
12 195.50 1533.47 52 193.50 1549.32
13 195.45 1533.86 53 193.45 1549.72
14 195.40 1534.25 54 193.40 1550.12
15 195.35 1534.64 55 193.35 1550.52
16 195.30 1535.04 56 193.30 1550.92
17 195.25 1535.43 57 193.25 1551.32
18 195.20 1535.82 58 193.20 1551.72
19 195.15 1536.22 59 193.15 1552.12
20 195.10 1536.61 60 193.10 1552.52
21 195.05 1537.00 61 193.05 1552.93
22 195.00 1537.40 62 193.00 1553.33
23 194.95 1537.79 63 192.95 1553.73
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1733
Wavelengt
h No.
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Wavelengt
h No.
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
24 194.90 1538.19 64 192.90 1554.13
25 194.85 1538.58 65 192.85 1554.54
26 194.80 1538.98 66 192.80 1554.94
27 194.75 1539.37 67 192.75 1555.34
28 194.70 1539.77 68 192.70 1555.75
29 194.65 1540.16 69 192.65 1556.15
30 194.60 1540.56 70 192.60 1556.55
31 194.55 1540.95 71 192.55 1556.96
32 194.50 1541.35 72 192.50 1557.36
33 194.45 1541.75 73 192.45 1557.77
34 194.40 1542.14 74 192.40 1558.17
35 194.35 1542.54 75 192.35 1558.58
36 194.30 1542.94 76 192.30 1558.98
37 194.25 1543.33 77 192.25 1559.39
38 194.20 1543.73 78 192.20 1559.79
39 194.15 1544.13 79 192.15 1560.20
40 194.10 1544.53 80 192.10 1560.61

16.5.2 Application
The PTQX is an PID unit. The PTQX board can map four 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/
OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e signals into four OTU2(e) signals, or map four ODU2(e) signals or 16
ODU1 signals from another board into four OTU2(e) signals. The PTQX also receives eight
OTU2(e) signals from the ELQX board and integrates the 12 OTU2(e) signals into one channel
of optical signals for output. The reverse process is similar.
For the position of the PTQX in a WDM system, see Figure 16-17.
Figure 16-17 Position of the PTQX in a WDM system
OA
OA OA
OA
BMD4 BMD4
PTQX
4 ELQX
4 ELQX PTQX
4
4
ELQX
ELQX
10GE LAN/
10GE WAN/
STM-64/
OC-192/
OTU2/
OTU2e
4
4
4
4
4
10GE LAN/
10GE WAN/
STM-64/
OC-192/
OTU2/
OTU2e
4
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1734

The PTQX provides functions and features such as OTN interfaces, ESC, and ALS.
Table 16-26 provides the details about the functions and features of the PTQX.
Table 16-26 Functions and features of the PTQX
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function PTQX converts signals as follows:
l 4 x 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2<->4 x OTU2
l 4 x 10GE LAN/OTU2e<->4 x OTU2e
l 16 x ODU1/4 x ODU2<->4 x OTU2
l 4 x ODU2e<->OTU2e
l Supports hybrid transmission of the ODU1 and ODU2/ODU2e services.
Client-side
service type
OTN function l The encapsulation and mapping comply with ITU-T G.7041, ITU-T G.
709, and GDPS.
l Supports PM and TCM function for ODU2.
l Supports SM functions for OTU2 .
WDM
specification
PRBS test Supports the PRBS function on the client and WDM sides.
NOTE
is 10GE LAN.
WDM side.
NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1735
Function and
Feature
Description
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
power of the laser.
Optical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Electrical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Protection
scheme
l Supports client-side 1+1 protection.
Ethernet
service
mapping mode
l MAC Transparent Mapping(10.7G)
Ethernet port
working mode
l 10GE LAN FULL_Duplex
l 10GE WAN FULL_Duplex
Protocols or
standards
compliance
Protocols or
standards for
transparent
transmission
(non-performance
monitoring)
IEEE 802.3ae
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1736
Function and
Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards for
service
processing
(performance
monitoring)
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.873.1
ITU-T G.694.1

The PTQX board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, PID
Figure 16-18 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the PTQX in the OptiX OSN
6800.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1737
Figure 16-18 Functional modules and signal flow of the PTQX in the OptiX OSN 6800
Client side
RX1
RX2
TX1
TX2
RX3
RX4
TX3
TX4
IN
OUT
PID
Module
4
4
Client-side
optical
module
O/E
E/O
SDH/SONET
encapsulation and
mapping module
OTN
processing
module
10GE-LAN
encapsulation and
mapping module
4xODU2/4xODU2e
/16xODU1
8OTU2/8OTU2e
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
Backplane
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)

Signal Flow
The client side of the PTQX board can access the following optical signals:
In the signal flow of the PTQX board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the PTQX to the WDM side
of the PTQX, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
equipment through the RX1-RX4 interfaces, and converts the optical signals into electrical
signals. The PTQX can also receive four ODU2/ODU2e signals or 16 ODU1 signals from
the backbone.
The electrical signals converted from client optical signals or 16 x ODU1 or 4 x ODU2/
ODU2e signals are transmitted to the signal processing module. Different types of signals
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1738
are sent to the corresponding encapsulation and mapping modules. The module performs
operations such as encapsulation, mapping, OTN framing, and FEC/AFEC encoding. Then,
the module sends out four channels of OTU2(e) signals to the PID module.
The four OTU2(e) signals and the eight OTU2(e) signals cross-connected through the
backplane from the ELQX board are integrated into one channel of optical signals, which
are finally output through the OUT optical interface.
l Receive direction
The PID module receives one optical signal from the WDM side through the IN optical
interfaces. Then, the module converts the optical signal into an electrical signal, and
demultiplexes the signal into 12 OTU2(e) signals.
Eight of the 12 OTU2(e) signals are cross-connected through the backplane to the ELQX
board, and the remaining four OTU2(e) signals are transmitted to the signal processing
module. Then, the signal processing module performs OTU2(e) framing, FEC/AFEC
decoding, demapping, and decapsulation for the signals. Finally, the signal processing
module outputs four channels of electrical signals.
The four channels of electrical signals are cross-connected to other boards through the
backplane or transmitted to the client-side optical modules. Then, the four channels of
electrical signals are converted into four channels of optical signals that are output through
the TX1-TX4 optical interfaces.
NOTE
The PTQX board can receive service signals from the client side or from other boards through the backplane.
One ODU2LP port can only receive one channel of signals either from the client side or from the backplane.
Module Function
Client-side receiver: converts four channels of 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64,
OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals into electrical signals.
Client-side transmitter: converts four channels of internal electrical signals into 10GE
LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals.
Reports the working status of the client-side laser.
l PID module
WDM-side receiver: demultiplexes the WDM-side multiplexed optical signals into 12
channels of optical signals, and then converts the optical signals to electrical signals.
WDM-side transmitter: converts the internal electrical signals into OTU2 optical
signals, and integrates 12 channels of signals into one channel of multiplexed signals.
Reports the working status of the WDM-side laser.
mapping module, 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing
module.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1739
Encapsulates SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the OTU2 payload area.
This module also performs the reverse process and monitors SDH/SONET performance.
OTU2/OTU2e payload area. This module also performs the reverse process and
monitors 10GE LAN performance.
Frames OTU2 signals, processes overheads in OTU2 signals, and performs FEC/AFEC
coding and decoding.
the CPU.
on the board.
16.5.5 Front Panel
There are four indicators and laser level label on the front panel of the PTQX.
Figure 16-19 shows the front panel of the PTQX.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1740
Figure 16-19 Front panel of the PTQX
PTQX
PTQX
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
O
U
T
I
N
R
X
2
T
X
3
R
X
3
T
X
4
R
X
4
T
X
1
R
X
1
T
X
2
LASERRADIATION
CAUTION
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION

Indicators
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1741
Interfaces
Table 16-27 Types and functions of the PTQX interfaces
IN LC Receives the line signal.
OUT LC Transmits the line signal.
TX1-TX4 LC Transmits the service signal to the client-side
equipment.
RX1-RX4 LC Receives the service signal from the client-side
equipment.

Laser Hazard Level
16.5.6 Valid Slots
The PTQX occupies two slots.
Table 16-28 shows the valid slots for the PTQX board.
Table 16-28 Valid slots for the PTQX board
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800 subrack IU3, IU7, IU13

NOTE
The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot on the subrack. Therefore, the
slot number of the PTQX board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two occupied slots.
For example, if the PTQX occupies slots IU2 and IU3, the slot number of the PTQX displayed on the NM is
IU3.
16.5.7 Characteristic Code of the PTQX
The characteristic code for the PTQX consists of six digits, respectively indicating the frequency
values of the first channel and the last channel of optical signals on the WDM side.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1742
Table 16-29 Characteristic code for the PTQX
The first three digits The frequency of optical
signal
The last three digits of the
WDM side.
The last three digits The frequency of optical
signal
frequency value of the last
WDM side.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN12PTQX is 605385.
l "605385" indicates the frequency of the first channel of optical signals on the WDM side
is 196.05 THz, and the frequency of the last channel of optical signals on the WDM side
is 193.85 THz.
Table 16-30 Mapping between the physical ports on the PTQX board and the port numbers
IN/OUT 1
TX1/RX1 3
TX2/RX2 4
TX3/RX3 5
TX4/RX4 6

NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1743
Logical Ports
Figure 16-20, Figure 16-21, and Figure 16-22 show the NM ports on the PTQX board. Table
16-31 lists the indication of each port.
Figure 16-20 Diagram of ports on the PTQX (cross-connections of client-side services)
Cross-connect
module
Service
processing
module
WDM side
1(IN/OUT)
3(RX1/TX1)
4(RX2/TX2)
5(RX3/TX3)
6(RX4/TX4)
Client side
Service
processing
module
Service
processing
module

Figure 16-21 Diagram of ports on the PTQX (backplane-side ODU1-level cross-connections)
1(IN/OUT)
Cross-connect
module
Cross-connect
module
Service
processing
module
WDM side
Backplane

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1744
Figure 16-22 Diagram of ports on the PTQX (backplane-side ODU2-level cross-connections)
1(IN/OUT)
Service
processing
module
Cross-connect
module
WDM side
Backplane
Cross-connect
module

Table 16-31 Description of ports on the PTQX
interfaces.
2, 3 and 4.
OCHLP1-OCHLP12 Internal logical ports. The optical paths are numbered 1.
IN/OUT This port corresponds to the WDM-side optical interface.

If the PTQX board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the
U2000:
connection between the ClientLP port and the ODU2LP port on the PTQX board, as shown
by (1) in Figure 16-23.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1745
l If the ODU1 signals of other boards are cross-connected to the PTQX board, create cross-
connections from the ClientLP ports on other boards to the ODU1LP port on the PTQX
board on the U2000, as shown in Figure 16-24.
l If the ODU2 signals of other boards are cross-connected to the PTQX board, create cross-
connections from the ClientLP ports on other boards to the ODU2LP port on the PTQX
board on the U2000, as shown by (2) in Figure 16-23.
l The ODU2LP ports on the ELQX and the OCHLP ports on the PTQX board are of one-to-
one cross-connections. Therefore, the cross-connections do not need to be created on the
U2000. For details, see Figure 16-25.
Figure 16-23 Diagram of cross-connections of the PTQX (ODU2 level)
PTQX board
Other board
except ELQX
1
2
1
2
WDM side
Client side
Client side
the PTQX board

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1746
Figure 16-24 Diagram of cross-connections of the PTQX (ODU1 level)
PTQX board
1
1
WDM side
the PTQX board
Client side
Other board
except ELQX

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1747
Figure 16-25 Diagram of cross-connections between the PTQX and ELQX
PTQX board
ELQX board
ELQX board
1
2
2
1
WDM side
Client side
Client side
Fixed cross-connection between the first ELQX board and the
Fixed cross-connection between the second ELQX board and the

For parameters of the PTQX, refer toTable 16-32.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1748
Table 16-32 PTQX parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
Optical Interface
Name
name.
Default: Used
channel of a board.
Optical Interface
Loopback
Outloop
Outloop
Service Type 10GE LAN, OC-192,
OTU-2, OTU-2E,
STM-64
Default: 10GE LAN
Mapping(11.1G), MAC
Transparent Mapping
(10.7G), Bit
Transparent Mapping
(10.7G)
Default: Bit
Transparent Mapping
(11.1G)
service.
Default:
l WDM side: On
l Client side: Off
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Enabled, Disabled
Default:
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1749
Default: Disabled
ODU2
Default: Automatic
Default: Enabled
FEC Mode FEC, AFEC
Default: AFEC
Actual Wavelength
No./Wavelength
(nm)/Frequency
(THz)
Tunable Wavelength
Range
Planned Wavelength
No./Wavelength
(nm)/Frequency
(THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.100
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.170
to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /
board.
information.
Default: C
wavelength.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1750
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
to Disabled.
NOTE
Speedup Mode
information.
OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None
board resides.
information.
Default: Disabled
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
commissioning.

16.5.11 PTQX Specifications
consumption.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1751
Bo
ard
Client-Side
Fixed Optical
Module
Client-Side
Pluggable Optical
Module
WDM-Side Fixed
Optical Module
WDM-Side
Pluggable
Optical
Module
TN
12P
TQ
X
km
km
km
10 Gbit/s Single
Rate-0.3 km
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd
Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
200 ps/nm-PID-
NRZ-PIN
N/A

NOTE
point.
Optical
Module
Type
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80
km
10 Gbit/s
Single-
Rate-0.3 km
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Optical
source type
- SLM SLM SLM MLM
Target
transmissio
n distance
- 10 km (6.2 mi.) 40 km (24.9
mi.)
80 km (49.7
mi.)
0.3 km (0.2
mi.)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565 840 to 860
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1752
Optical
Module
Type
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80
km
10 Gbit/s
Single-
Rate-0.3 km
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm -1 2 4 -1.3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm -6 -4.7 0 -7.3
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB 6 8.2 9 3
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm N/A N/A N/A N/A
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB 30 30 30 30
Eye pattern
mask
- G.691-compliant
Receiver
type
- PIN PIN APD PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1260 to 1565 1260 to 1605 1270 to 1600 840 to 860
Receiver
sensitivity
(multirate)
dBm -11 -14 -24 -7.5
Receiver
sensitivity
(10GE
LAN)
dBm -14.4 -15.8 -24 -7.5
Minimum
receiver
overload
(10GE
LAN)
dBm 0.5 -1 -7 -1
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1753
Optical
Module
Type
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80
km
10 Gbit/s
Single-
Rate-0.3 km
Minimum
receiver
overload
(STM-64)
dBm -1 -1 -7 -1
Maximum
reflectance
dB -27 -27 -27 -12

PIN-XFP
power
dBm 2
power
dBm -3
width
nm 0.3
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 35
Receiver type - PIN
(FEC on)
dBm -16
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1754
PIN-XFP
(FEC on)
dBm 0

Table 16-35 PID optical module specifications
Optical Module Type 200 ps/nm-PID-NRZ-PIN
power (single wavelength)
dBm +1
power (single wavelength)
dBm -7
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30
Receiver type - PIN
Receiver sensitivity (FEC
enabled) EOL
dBm -10.5

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1755
(8.7 in.)
l Weight: 3 kg (7 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN12PTQX 93.6 107.6

16.6 ENQ2
ENQ2: 4 x 10G Line Service Processing Board
The available functional version of the ENQ2 board is TN54.
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN5
4EN
Q2
Y Y Y N N N

16.6.2 Application
The ENQ2 board converts 32 channels of ODU0 signals or 16 channels of ODU1 signals or four
channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals from the backplane into four OTU2/OTU2e signals. The
reverse process is similar.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1756
Application Scenario 1: 200G system Built with the ENQ2 Board
Figure 16-26 200G system built with the ENQ2 board
TN55
NPO2E
4xOTU2/
OTU2e
64xODU0/
32xODU1/
8xODU2/
8xODU2e
OBU
1P1
OBU
1P1
8xOTU2/
OTU2e
32xODU0/
16xODU1/
4xODU2/
4xODU2e
64xODU0/
32xODU1/
8xODU2/
8xODU2e
TN55
NPO2E
4xOTU2/
OTU2e
64xODU0/
32xODU1/
8xODU2/
8xODU2e
TN54
ENQ2
TN55
NPO2
8xOTU2/
OTU2e
Client-side
service
Client-side
service
Tributary
board
TN54
ENQ2
TN55
NPO2
Tributary
board
Tributary
board
Tributary
board
Client-
side
service
Client-
side
service
32xODU0/
16xODU1/
4xODU2/
4xODU2e
64xODU0/
32xODU1/
8xODU2/
8xODU2e
Tributary
board
Tributary
board
Client-
side
service
Client-
side
service

Application Scenario 2: 120G system Built with the ENQ2 Board
Figure 16-27 120G system built with the ENQ2 board (TN55NPO2)
TN55
NPO2
4xOTU2/
OTU2e
64xODU0/
32xODU1/
8xODU2/
8xODU2e
TN54
ENQ2
OBU
1P1
OBU
1P1
Client-
side
service
32xODU0/
16xODU1/
4xODU2/
4xODU2e
TN55
NPO2
4xOTU2/
OTU2e
64xODU0/
32xODU1/
8xODU2/
8xODU2e
32xODU0/
16xODU1/
4xODU2/
4xODU2e
Tributary
board
Client-
side
service
TN54
ENQ2
Tributary
board
Client-
side
service
Tributary
board
Client-
side
service
Tributary
board

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1757
Figure 16-28 120G system built with the ENQ2 board (TN54NPO2)
TN54
NPO2
4xOTU2/
OTU2e
64xODU0/
32xODU1/
8xODU2/
8xODU2e
TN54
ENQ2
OA
32xODU0/
16xODU1/
4xODU2/
4xODU2e
TN54
NPO2
4xOTU2/
OTU2e
64xODU0/
32xODU1/
8xODU2/
8xODU2e
32xODU0/
16xODU1/
4xODU2/
4xODU2e
OA
OA OA
Client-
side
service
Tributary
board
TN54
ENQ2
Tributary
board
Client-
side
service
Tributary
board
Client-
side
service
Tributary
board
Client-
side
service

NOTE
In the preceding application scenarios, the TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E board is configured with the TN54PQ2
board.
If the TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E board is not configured with the TN54PQ2 board, the TN55NPO2/
TN55NPO2E board can process a maximum of 4 x 10 Gbit/s services.
The TN55NPO2ES02 and TN55NPO2ES04 boards apply to transmissions over a distance shorter than or equal
to 40 km. The TN55NPO2EL02 and TN55NPO2EL04 boards apply to transmissions over a distance longer than
40 km but shorter than or equal to 80 km. The TN55NPO2L06 board must work with the TN55NPO2EL02
board, or the TN55NPO2L08 board must work with the TN55NPO2EL04 board. The TN55NPO2S06 board
must work with the TN55NPO2ES02 board, or the TN55NPO2S08 board must work with the TN55NPO2ES04
board.
When the TN55NPO2 board is used in a WDM system, whether OA boards are required or not depends on the
fiber distance. If the fiber distance is shorter than 40 km, do not configure an OA board at either the transmit
end or the receive end, or configure the TN12OBU1P1 board at the receive end; if the fiber distance ranges from
40 km to 80 km, do not configure an OA board at the transmit end but configure the TN12OBU1P1 board at the
receive end.
The ENQ2 supports functions and features such as OTN interfaces and ESC.
Table 16-36 provides the details about the functions and features of the ENQ2.
Table 16-36 Functions and features of the ENQ2
Function or
Feature
Description
Basic function ENQ2 converts signals as follows: 32 x ODU0/16 x ODU1/4 x ODU2/
ODU2e<->4 x OTU2/OTU2e
Supports hybrid transmission of the ODU0, ODU1, and ODU2/ODU2e
services.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1758
Function or
Feature
Description
Cross-connect
capabilities
Supports the cross-connection of 32 channels of ODU0 or 16 channels of
ODU1 or four channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals between the NPO2 board
to the ITU-T G.709.
WDM
specification
ESC function supported
PRBS test Supports the PRBS function on the WDM side.
WDM side.
NOTE
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
power of the laser.
Optical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Electrical-
layer ASON
Supported
Protection
scheme
NOTE
The TN54ENQ2 board supports
WDM-side loopbacks only when
working in compatible mode.
Outloop
Channel
Loopback
Inloop Supported
NOTE
The TN54ENQ2 board supports
ODU2 channel loopback only
when working in standard mode.
Outloop
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1759
Function or
Feature
Description
Client side -
Protocols or
standards
compliance
Protocols or
standards for
transparent
transmission
(non-
performance
monitoring)
IEEE 802.3u
IEEE 802.3z
IEEE 802.3ae
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
INTERFACES (FC-PI)
LS)
BB-3)
SW-3)
COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING
PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2)
Control (MAC)
Protocol (PHY)
Dependent (PDM)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1760
Function or
Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards for
service
processing
(performance
monitoring)
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.873.1
ITU-T G.694.1

The ENQ2 board consists of the signal processing module, the control and communication
module, and the power supply module.
Figure 16-29 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the ENQ2.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1761
Signal Flow
Figure 16-29 Functional modules and signal flow of the ENQ2
Cross-connect
module
32XODU0/16XODU1/
4XODU2/4XODU2e
4XOTU2/
4XOTU2e
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
Backplane
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)

In the signal flow of the ENQ2 board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the WDM side of the ENQ2 to the WDM side
of the NPO2/NPO2E, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
The ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e signals from the backplane are transmitted to the signal
processing module. Then, the encapsulation and mapping modules perform encapsulation,
mapping, and OTN framing for the signals. Finally, four channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals
are transmitted to the NPO2/NPO2E board through the backplane.
l Receive direction
The signal processing module receives four channels of OTU2/OTU2e electrical signals
from the NPO2/NPO2E board through the backplane, performs OTU2/OTU2e framing,
demapping, and decapsulation for the signals, and finally outputs 32 channels of ODU0
signals or 16 channels of ODU1 signals or four channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals.
The signals are cross-connected to other boards through the backplane.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1762
Module Function
The module consists of the cross-connect module and OTN processing module.
NOTE
The signal processing module on the ENQ2 board has fixed cross-connections to the NPO2/
NPO2E board.
Implements the grooming of electrical signals between the NPO2/NPO2E and the cross-
connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are ODU0/ODU1/
ODU2/ODU2e signals
Frames OTU2 signals and processes overheads in OTU2 signals.
the CPU.
detection of each functional module on the board.
Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
16.6.5 Front Panel
There are four indicators on the front panel of the ENQ2.
Figure 16-30 shows the front panel of the ENQ2.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1763
Figure 16-30 Front panel of the ENQ2
ENQ2
ENQ2
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV

Indicators
16.6.6 Valid Slots
The ENQ2 occupies one slot.
Table 16-37 shows the valid slots for the ENQ2 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1764
Table 16-37 Valid slots for the ENQ2 board
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
subrack
IU1, IU5, IU11, IU15, IU19, IU23, IU27, IU31, IU35, IU39,
IU45, IU49, IU53, IU57, IU61, IU65
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
subrack
IU1, IU5, IU12, IU16, IU20, IU24, IU29, IU33
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
subrack
IU1, IU5, IU11, IU15

Logical Ports
The TN54ENQ2 board can work in standard or compatible mode.
NOTE
For information about the standard and compatible modes, see 12.2.3 Standard Mode and Compatible
Mode.
l Figure 16-31 shows the port diagrams of the TN54ENQ2 board in compatible mode. Table
16-38 lists the descriptions of the ports on the board.
l Figure 16-32 shows the port diagrams of the TN54ENQ2 board in standard mode. Table
16-39 Lists the descriptions of the ports on the board.
NOTE
A TN54ENQ2 board can work in only one mode at a time.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1765
Figure 16-31 port diagrams for the TN54ENQ2 (compatible mode)
161
(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1
161
(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2
164
(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1
164
(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2
173
173
176
176
51
(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1
51
(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4
54
(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-1
54
(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-4
71
(ODU2LP1/
ODU2LP1)-1
4 x ODU2/ODU2e
74
(ODU2LP4/
ODU2LP4)-1
32 x ODU0 16 x ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
Other tributary board/
line board/PID board
ODU2
ODU2
Backplane
NOTE
There are cross-connections between ports 141 (OCHLP9/OCHLP9)-1 to 144 (OCHLP12/OCHLP12)-1 on the
NPO2 board and ports 71 (ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 to 74 (ODU2LP4/ODU2LP4)-1 on the ENQ2 board. You
do not need to configure these cross-connections on the U2000.
Cross-connect
module
ODU1 mapping path
Multiplexing
module
ODU2 mapping path
Service
processing
module
cross-connections from other boards to the ODU0LP
port on the board using the NMS. The board's
internal structure enables transmission of the
ODU0 mapping
path

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1766
Table 16-38 Description of ports on the TN54ENQ2 (compatible mode)
ODU0LP1-ODU0LP16 Internal logical ports. The optical paths are numbered 1
and 2.
2, 3 and 4.

Figure 16-32 port diagrams for the TN54ENQ2 (standard mode)
NPO2/
NPO2E
O
t
h
e
r

t
r
i
b
u
t
a
r
y

b
o
a
r
d
/
l
i
n
e

b
o
a
r
d
/
P
I
D

b
o
a
r
d
32xODU0
16xODU1
4xODU2/
4XODU2e
ODU2:1
ODU2:1
ODU1:1
ODU1:4
ODU1:1
ODU1:4
ODU2:1
ODU1:4
ODU1:1
ODU1:4
ODU0:2
ODU0:2
ODU0:2
ODU0:2
ODU0:1
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(9-12)-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2)
ODU0:1
ODU0:1
ODU0:1
ODU1:1
ODU2:1
ODU2:1
ODU2:1
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(9-12)-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(9-12)
Backplane
NOTE
Service cross-connections of the TN54ENQ2(standard mode) board are configured on the TN55NPO2 or
TN55NPO2E board (either in standard mode) using the NMS.
If an ODUk channel has been used, cross-connections cannot be configured on any other channels that
correspond to the ODUk channel, regardless of the rate level. For example, if channel 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9-
ODU2:1-ODU1:1 has been used, cross-connections cannot be configured on channel 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9-
ODU2:1 or 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1.
Cross-connect
module
ODU1 mapping path
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1767
Multiplexing
module
ODU2 mapping path
Service
processing
module
ODU0 mapping
path

Table 16-39 Description of ports on the TN54ENQ2 (standard mode)
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(912)-ODU2:1-ODU1:
(14)-ODU0:(12)
Indicates the mapping path for the ODU0
signals that are received through the backplane.
(14)
signals that are received through the backplane.
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(912) Indicates the mapping path for the ODU2/
ODU2e signals that are received through the
backplane.
1(IN/OUT) Indicates the WDM-side port.

side.
The ENQ2 board can work in standard or compatible mode. For details about the standard and
When the ENQ2 board works in standard mode, service cross-connections are configured on
the TN55NPO2 or TN55NPO2E board using the NMS. The ODUk services processed by the
ENQ2 board are mapped onto OCH9-OCH12 optical channels on the TN55NPO2 or
TN55NPO2E board in standard mode. For details, see Configuration of Cross-connection
(NPO2) and Configuration of Cross-connection (NPO2E).
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1768
Figure 16-33 Diagram of cross-connections of the ENQ2 (ODU0 level)
WDM side
Client side
1
Other board a
2
ENQ2
board
WDM side
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM
side of the ENQ2
The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM
side of the ENQ2
Other board b
(compatible mode)
Other board c
(standard mode)
Other board a TN54TEM28 / TN52TOG / TN52TOM / TN54THA / TN54TOA
Other board c TN52ND2T04 / TN53ND2 / TN55NO2 / TN52NS2T04 / TN52NS2T05 / TN52NS2T06 /

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1769
Client side
203(ClientLP3ClientLP3)-1
1
2
ENQ2
The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the ENQ2
ENQ2 board
WDM side
Other board b
(compatible mode)
Other board c
(standard mode)
Other board a
WDM side
Other board b TN52ND2 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 /
Other board c TN52ND2T04 / TN53ND2 / TN55NO2 / TN52NS2T04 / TN52NS2T05 / TN52NS2T06 / TN52NS201M01 /
TN54ENQ2

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1770
ENQ2
board
Client side
1
2
WDM side
WDM side
Other board b
(compatible mode)
Other board c
(standard mode)
Other board a
side of the ENQ2
side of the ENQ2
Other board a TN52TDX / TN54TEM28 / TN53TDX / TN55TQX / TN52TQX / TN53TQX / TN54TTX

Cross-Connections Between the NPO2/NPO2E and ENQ2
Figure 16-36 shows the cross-connections between the TN55NPO2 and TN54ENQ2.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1771
Figure 16-37 shows the cross-connections between the TN54NPO2 and TN54ENQ2.
Figure 16-38 shows the cross-connections between the TN55NPO2E and TN54ENQ2.
Figure 16-36 Diagram of cross-connections between the TN55NPO2 and TN54ENQ2
TN55NPO2
board
ENQ2
board
WDM side
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:8
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:10
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:11
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:12
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:10
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:11
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:12
standard mode
compatible mode
standard mode
compatible mode
WDM side
The cross-connections between the TN55NPO2 and
ENQ2, which does not need to be configured on the NMS

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1772
Figure 16-37 Diagram of cross-connections between the TN54NPO2 and TN54ENQ2
TN54NPO2
board
ENQ2 board
WDM side
WDM side
compatible
mode
compatible
mode

Figure 16-38 Diagram of cross-connections between the TN55NPO2E and TN54ENQ2
NPO2E board
ENQ2 board
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:8
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:12
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9
1(IN/OUT)--OCH:10
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:11
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:12
WDM side
(standard
mode)
WDM side
(standard
mode)
The cross-connections between the NPO2E and ENQ2,
which does not need to be configured on the NMS

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1773
Table 16-40 ENQ2 parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
Optical Interface
Name
name.
Outloop
ODU1, ODU2
Default: Automatic
Default: Enabled
FEC Mode FEC, AFEC
Default: FEC
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
to Disabled.
Speedup Mode
Default: Disabled
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1774
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
commissioning.

16.6.10 ENQ2 Specifications
The specifications include the dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
at 25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
(W)
TN54ENQ2 40 44

16.7 NPO2
NPO2: 12 x OTU2 PID Board
The available functional versions of the NPO2 board are TN54 and TN55.
Huawei office.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1775
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN5
4NP
O2
Y Y Y N N N
TN5
5NP
O2
Y Y Y N N N

l Function:
The TN54NPO2 board must work with a dispersion compensation module. The
TN55NPO2S board supports 40 km applications without working with a dispersion
compensation module. The TN55NPO2L board supports 80 km applications without
working with a dispersion compensation module.
l Appearance:
For the front panels of the TN54NPO2 and TN55NPO2, see 16.7.5 Front Panel.
l Specification:
For the specification of each version, see 16.7.11 NPO2 Specifications.
Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN54NPO2 TN55NPO2 The TN55NPO2 can be created as TN54NPO2 on the NMS.
The former can substitute for the latter, without any software
upgrade. After substitution, the TN55NPO2 functions as the
TN54NPO2.
NOTE
When you substitute a TN55NPO2 for a TN54NPO2 , configure a
TN54PQ2, otherwise, the latter four wavelengths cannot be processed.
TN55NPO2 None -

Type
Table 16-41 lists the wavelength numbers and the types of NPO2.
Table 16-41 Wavelength assignment table of NPO2
Type of NPO2 Wavelength No. of NPO2
TN54NPO201/TN55NPO2S01 1, 5, 9, 13, 17, 21, 25, 29
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1776
Type of NPO2 Wavelength No. of NPO2
TN54NPO202/TN55NPO2S02/
TN55NPO2L02/TN55NPO2S0A
2, 6, 10, 14, 18, 22, 26, 30
TN54NPO203/TN55NPO2S03 3, 7, 11, 15, 19, 23, 27, 31
TN55NPO2L04/TN55NPO2S0B
4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32
TN54NPO205 49, 53, 57, 61, 65, 69, 73, 77
TN55NPO2L06
50, 54, 58, 62, 66, 70, 74, 78
TN54NPO207 51, 55, 59, 63, 67, 71, 75, 79
TN55NPO2L08
52, 56, 60, 64, 68, 72, 76, 80

A PID group that consists of the TN54NPO2, TN55NPO2E, TN54ENQ2, and TN55NPO2
boards, as shown in Table 16-42, Table 16-43, Table 16-44. Table 16-45 lists the wavelength
numbers and the relations between the wavelengths and frequencies.
Table 16-42 Combinations of wavelengths for the PID group (NPO2E+ENQ2+NPO2) (200G
system)
Wavelengt
h
Combinati
on No.
Wavelength No. for
TN55NPO2E
Wavelength No.
for TN54ENQ2
Wavelength No. for
TN55NPO2
1 TN55NPO2ES02/
TN55NPO2EL02: 2, 6, 10,
14, 18, 22, 26, 30
34, 38, 42, 46 TN55NPO2S06/
TN55NPO2L06: 50, 54,
58, 62, 66, 70, 74, 78
2 TN55NPO2ES04/
TN55NPO2EL04: 4, 8, 12,
16, 20, 24, 28, 32
36, 40, 44, 48 TN55NPO2S08/
TN55NPO2L08: 52, 56,
60, 64, 68, 72, 76, 80

Table 16-43 Wavelength allocation table of a PID (NPO2+ENQ2) (120G system)
Wavelength
Combination
No.
Wavelength No. of TN54NPO2/
TN55NPO2
Wavelength No. of
TN54ENQ2
1 TN54NPO201/TN55NPO2S01: 1, 5, 9, 13,
17, 21, 25, 29
33, 37, 41, 45
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1777
Wavelength
Combination
No.
Wavelength No. of TN54NPO2/
TN55NPO2
Wavelength No. of
TN54ENQ2
2 TN54NPO202/TN55NPO2S02/
TN55NPO2L02/TN55NPO2S0A: 2, 6, 10,
14, 18, 22, 26, 30
34, 38, 42, 46
3 TN54NPO203/TN55NPO2S03: 3, 7, 11, 15,
19, 23, 27, 31
35, 39, 43, 47
4 TN54NPO204/TN55NPO2S04/
TN55NPO2L04/TN55NPO2S0B: 4, 8, 12,
16, 20, 24, 28, 32
36, 40, 44, 48

Table 16-44 Wavelength allocation table of a PID (NPO2) (80G system)
Wavelength
Combination
No.
Wavelength No. of TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2
1 TN54NPO201/TN55NPO2S01: 1, 5, 9, 13, 17, 21, 25, 29
2 TN54NPO202/TN55NPO2S02/TN55NPO2L02/TN55NPO2S0A: 2, 6,
10, 14, 18, 22, 26, 30
3 TN54NPO203/TN55NPO2S03: 3, 7, 11, 15, 19, 23, 27, 31
4 TN54NPO204/TN55NPO2S04/TN55NPO2L04/TN55NPO2S0B: 4, 8,
12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32
5 TN54NPO205: 49, 53, 57, 61, 65, 69, 73, 77
6 TN54NPO206/TN55NPO2S06/TN55NPO2L06: 50, 54, 58, 62, 66, 70, 74,
78
7 TN54NPO207: 51, 55, 59, 63, 67, 71, 75, 79
8 TN54NPO208/TN55NPO2S08/TN55NPO2L08: 52, 56, 60, 64, 68, 72, 76,
80

NOTE
The ENQ2 board must be installed in the left slot next to the slot holding the NPO2 board.
Unlike the TN54NPO2, the TN55NPO2S supports DCM-free transmission over short distance and the
TN55NPO2L supports DCM-free transmission over long distance.
The TN55NPO2 can process four wavelengths. After being equipped with the TN54PQ2 service processing
board, it can process four more wavelengths. For example, the TN55NPO2S01 can process only the 1st,
5th, 9th, and 13th wavelengths. However, when it is equipped with the TN54PQ2 service processing board,
it can also process the 17th, 21st, 25th, and 29th wavelengths. For the position where the TN54PQ2 should
be installed on the TN55NPO2, see 16.7.5 Front Panel.
Each type of PID boards must work with specific wavelengths. Therefore, select the required PID boards
according to the network planning principles.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1778
Wavelengt
h No.
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Wavelengt
h No.
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
1 196.05 1529.16 41 194.05 1544.92
2 196.00 1529.55 42 194.00 1545.32
3 195.95 1529.94 43 193.95 1545.72
4 195.90 1530.33 44 193.90 1546.12
5 195.85 1530.72 45 193.85 1546.52
6 195.80 1531.12 46 193.80 1546.92
7 195.75 1531.51 47 193.75 1547.32
8 195.70 1531.90 48 193.70 1547.72
9 195.65 1532.29 49 193.65 1548.11
10 195.60 1532.68 50 193.60 1548.51
11 195.55 1533.07 51 193.55 1548.91
12 195.50 1533.47 52 193.50 1549.32
13 195.45 1533.86 53 193.45 1549.72
14 195.40 1534.25 54 193.40 1550.12
15 195.35 1534.64 55 193.35 1550.52
16 195.30 1535.04 56 193.30 1550.92
17 195.25 1535.43 57 193.25 1551.32
18 195.20 1535.82 58 193.20 1551.72
19 195.15 1536.22 59 193.15 1552.12
20 195.10 1536.61 60 193.10 1552.52
21 195.05 1537.00 61 193.05 1552.93
22 195.00 1537.40 62 193.00 1553.33
23 194.95 1537.79 63 192.95 1553.73
24 194.90 1538.19 64 192.90 1554.13
25 194.85 1538.58 65 192.85 1554.54
26 194.80 1538.98 66 192.80 1554.94
27 194.75 1539.37 67 192.75 1555.34
28 194.70 1539.77 68 192.70 1555.75
29 194.65 1540.16 69 192.65 1556.15
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1779
Wavelengt
h No.
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Wavelengt
h No.
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
30 194.60 1540.56 70 192.60 1556.55
31 194.55 1540.95 71 192.55 1556.96
32 194.50 1541.35 72 192.50 1557.36
33 194.45 1541.75 73 192.45 1557.77
34 194.40 1542.14 74 192.40 1558.17
35 194.35 1542.54 75 192.35 1558.58
36 194.30 1542.94 76 192.30 1558.98
37 194.25 1543.33 77 192.25 1559.39
38 194.20 1543.73 78 192.20 1559.79
39 194.15 1544.13 79 192.15 1560.20
40 194.10 1544.53 80 192.10 1560.61

16.7.2 Application
The NPO2 board is a PID unit. The NPO2 board converts 64 channels of ODU0 signals, 32
channels of ODU1 signals, or 8 channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals into 8 channels of standard
WDM wavelength OTU2/OTU2e signals. In addition, the NPO2 board supports hybrid
transmission of ODU0, ODU1, and ODU2/ODU2e signals. The NPO2 board receives four
OTU2/OTU2e signals from the ENQ2 board through the backplane. Then the NPO2 board
multiplexes the four OTU2/OTU2e signals with its own eight OTU2/OTU2e signals into one
optical signal for output. The reverse process is similar.
Application Scenario 1: 200G system Built with the NPO2 Board
Figure 16-39 200G system built with the NPO2 board
TN55
NPO2E
4xOTU2/
OTU2e
64xODU0/
32xODU1/
8xODU2/
8xODU2e
OBU
1P1
OBU
1P1
8xOTU2/
OTU2e
32xODU0/
16xODU1/
4xODU2/
4xODU2e
64xODU0/
32xODU1/
8xODU2/
8xODU2e
TN55
NPO2E
4xOTU2/
OTU2e
64xODU0/
32xODU1/
8xODU2/
8xODU2e
TN54
ENQ2
TN55
NPO2
8xOTU2/
OTU2e
Client-side
service
Client-side
service
Tributary
board
TN54
ENQ2
TN55
NPO2
Tributary
board
Tributary
board
Tributary
board
Client-
side
service
Client-
side
service
32xODU0/
16xODU1/
4xODU2/
4xODU2e
64xODU0/
32xODU1/
8xODU2/
8xODU2e
Tributary
board
Tributary
board
Client-
side
service
Client-
side
service
TO
RI
RI
TO
IN
OUT
TO2
RO2
IN
OUT
TO2
RO2
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1780

Figure 16-40 120G system built with the TN55NPO2 board
TN55
NPO2
4xOTU2/
OTU2e
64xODU0/
32xODU1/
8xODU2/
8xODU2e
TN54
ENQ2
OBU
1P1
OBU
1P1
Client-
side
service
32xODU0/
16xODU1/
4xODU2/
4xODU2e
TN55
NPO2
4xOTU2/
OTU2e
64xODU0/
32xODU1/
8xODU2/
8xODU2e
32xODU0/
16xODU1/
4xODU2/
4xODU2e
Tributary
board
Client-
side
service
TN54
ENQ2
Tributary
board
Client-
side
service
Tributary
board
Client-
side
service
Tributary
board
OUT
IN
IN
OUT

TN54
NPO2
4xOTU2/
OTU2e
64xODU0/
32xODU1/
8xODU2/
8xODU2e
TN54
ENQ2
OA
32xODU0/
16xODU1/
4xODU2/
4xODU2e
TN54
NPO2
4xOTU2/
OTU2e
64xODU0/
32xODU1/
8xODU2/
8xODU2e
32xODU0/
16xODU1/
4xODU2/
4xODU2e
OA
OA OA
Client-
side
service
Tributary
board
TN54
ENQ2
Tributary
board
Client-
side
service
Tributary
board
Client-
side
service
Tributary
board
Client-
side
service OUT
IN
IN
OUT

TN55
NPO2
64xODU0/
32xODU1/
8xODU2/
8xODU2e
OBU
1P1
OBU
1P1
TN55
NPO2
64xODU0/
32xODU1/
8xODU2/
8xODU2e Client-
side
service
Tributary
board
Tributary
board
Client-
side
service
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1781

TN54
NPO2
64xODU0/
32xODU1/
8xODU2/
8xODU2e
TN54
NPO2
64xODU0/
32xODU1/
8xODU2/
8xODU2e
OA OA
OA OA
Client-side
service
Client-side
service
Tributary
board
Tributary
board
OUT
IN
IN
OUT

NOTE
In the preceding application scenarios, the TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E board is configured with the TN54PQ2
board.
If the TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E board is not configured with the TN54PQ2 board, the TN55NPO2/
TN55NPO2E board can process a maximum of 4 x 10 Gbit/s services.
board.
When the TN55NPO2 board is used in a WDM system, whether OA boards are required or not depends on the
fiber distance. If the fiber distance is shorter than 40 km, do not configure an OA board at either the transmit
receive end.
The NPO2 provides functions and features such as OTN interfaces and ESC.
Table 16-46 provides the details about the functions and features of the NPO2.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1782
Table 16-46 Functions and features of the NPO2
Functi
on
and
Featur
e
Description
Basic
functio
n
l 64 x ODU0/32 x ODU1/8 x ODU2<->8 x OTU2
l 8 x ODU2e<->8 x OTU2e
l Accesses four channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals from the ENQ2 board, and
converts the signals into the standard DWDM wavelengths compliant with ITU-
T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar.
l Integrates twelve channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals into one channel of optical
signals.
l Unlike the TN54NPO2, the TN55NPO2S supports DCM-free transmission over
short distance and the TN55NPO2L supports DCM-free transmission over long
distance.
Cross-
connec
t
capabil
ities
Supports the cross-connection of 64 channels of ODU0 or 32 channels of ODU1 or
eight channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals between the NPO2 board and the cross-
connect board.
OTN
functio
n
l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing as defined in the ITU-
T G.709.
WDM
specifi
cation
ESC
functio
n
Supported
PRBS
test
functio
n
LPT
functio
n
Not supported
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1783
Functi
on
and
Featur
e
Description
FEC
encodi
ng
side.
NOTE
Alarms
and
perfor
mance
events
monito
ring
l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of
the laser.
IEEE
1588v
2
The TN55NPO2 board supports one channel of IEEE 1588v2 signals.
NOTE
For the TN54NPO2 and TN55NPO2 boards (in compatible mode), the IEEE 1588v2 signal
can be transmitted through any of the eight optical ports on the board. For the TN55NPO2
board (in standard mode), the IEEE 1588v2 signal must be transmitted through optical port 1.
Physic
al
clock
The TN55NPO2 board supports this feature only when ODU0 or ODU1 signals are
cross-connected from the backplane.
Optical
-layer
ASON
Not supported
Electri
cal-
layer
ASON
Only the TN55NPO2 board supports this function.
Protect
ion
schem
e
Loopb
ack
Board WDM Side ODU0 Channel
Loopback
ODU1 Channel
Loopback
ODU2 Channel
Loopback
TN54N
P02
Supported Supported Supported Supported
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1784
Functi
on
and
Featur
e
Description
TN55N
PO2
Supports
WDM-side
loopbacks
only when
working in
compatible
mode.
Supported Supported Supports ODU2
channel
loopback only
when working
in standard
mode.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1785
Functi
on
and
Featur
e
Description
Protoc
ols or
standar
ds
compli
ance
Protocol
s or
standard
s for
transpar
ent
transmis
sion
(non-
perform
ance
monitori
ng)
IEEE 802.3u
IEEE 802.3z
IEEE 802.3ae
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-
FS-2)
INTERFACE (FC-PH)
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE
SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2)
Television Systems
implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface
(ASI)
SMPTE 259M 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc Composite Digital
Signals - Serial Digital Interface
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1786
Functi
on
and
Featur
e
Description
Protocol
s or
standard
s for
service
processi
ng
(perform
ance
monitori
ng)
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.873.1
ITU-T G.694.1

The NPO2 board consists of the signal processing module, PID module, control and
communication module, 1588 module, and power supply module.
Figure 16-44 and Figure 16-45 show the functional modules and signal flow of the NPO2.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1787
Figure 16-44 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN54NPO2
IN
OUT
8
8
OTN
processing
module
Cross-connect
module
64XODU0/32XODU1/
8XODU2/8XODU2e
4XOTU2/
4XOTU2e
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
PID
Module
Backplane
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
1588

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1788
Figure 16-45 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN55NPO2
IN
OUT
8
8
OTN
processing
module
Cross-connect
module
64XODU0/32XODU1
/8XODU2/8XODU2e
4XOTU2/4XOTU2e
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
PID
Module
Backplane
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
PQ2 service
processing
sub-board
1588

Signal Flow
In the signal flow of the NPO2 board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the backplane of the NPO2 to the WDM side
of the NPO2, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
The signal processing module receives 64 channels of ODU0 or 32 channels of ODU1 or
eight channels of ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals sent from the cross-connection board
encoding of FEC/AFEC. Then the module outputs eight channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals
to the PID module.
The eight channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals and the four channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals
sent from the ENQ2 board are integrated into one channel of optical signals, which are
finally output through the OUT optical interface.
l Receive direction
demultiplexes the signal into twelve channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals.
Four of the twelve channels OTU2/OTU2e signals are sent to the ENQ2 board, and the
remaining eight channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals are transmitted to the signal processing
module. Then, the signal processing module performs OTU2/OTU2e framing, and FEC/
AFEC decoding for the signals. Finally, the signal processing module outputs 64 channels
of ODU0 or 32 channels of ODU1 or eight channels of ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1789
The electrical signals are cross-connected to other boards through the backplane.
Module Function
l PID module
WDM-side receiver: demultiplexes the WDM-side multiplexed optical signals into
twelve channels of optical signals, and then converts the optical signals to electrical
signals.
signals, and integrates twelve channels of signals into one channel of multiplexed
signals.
Implements the grooming of electrical signals between the NPO2 and the cross-connect
board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/
ODU2e signals
PQ2 service processing board
Processes 4 x 10 Gbit/s signals that are carried by the last four wavelengths provided
on the TN55NPO2 board.
NOTE
After installing a PQ2 service processing sub-board onto the TN55NPO2 board that works in standard
mode, create the logical PQ2 sub-board on the U2000.
l 1588 module
The 1588 module sends the clock signal of the STG board to the next NE according to the
IEEE 1588v2 protocol, or extract the clock signal from the service signals that come from
a service board according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol and then send the clock signal to
the STG board.
the CPU.
on the board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1790
16.7.5 Front Panel
There are four indicators, optical interfaces, laser level label, and PQ2 sub-board on the front
panel of the NPO2.
Figure 16-46 shows the front panel of the TN54NPO2.
Figure 16-47 shows the front panel of the TN55NPO2.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1791
Figure 16-46 Front panel of the TN54NPO2
NPO2
NPO2
OUT IN
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
LASERRADIATION
CAUTION
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1792
Figure 16-47 Front panel of the TN55NPO2
PQ2 installed PQ2 not installed
NPO2
NPO2
OUT IN
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS1MLASER
PRODUCT
NPO2
NPO2
OUT IN
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
PQ2
STAT
LASERRADIATION
CAUTION
CLASS1MLASER
PRODUCT
LASERRADIATION
CAUTION
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION
DONOT VIEWDIRECTLY WITH
NON-ATTENUATINGOPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
NOTE
The TN55NPO2 can process four wavelengths. After being equipped with the TN54PQ2 service processing
board, it can process four more wavelengths. For example, the TN55NPO2S01 can process only the 1st, 5th,
9th, and 13th wavelengths. However, when it is equipped with the TN54PQ2 service processing board, it can
also process the 17th, 21st, 25th, and 29th wavelengths. For details, see 16.7.1 Version Description.

Indicators
There are four indicators on the NPO2 panel.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1793
There is one indicator on the TN54PQ2 panel.
For details about indicators on the board, see A.4 Board Indicators.
Interfaces
Table 16-47 Types and functions of the NPO2 interfaces
OUT LC Transmits the line signal.

Laser Hazard Level
16.7.6 Valid Slots
The NPO2 occupies two slots.
Table 16-48 shows the valid slots for the NPO2 board.
Table 16-48 Valid slots for the NPO2 board
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
subrack
IU47, IU51, IU55, IU59, IU63, IU67
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
subrack
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
subrack

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1794
NOTE
slot number of the NPO2 board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two occupied slots.
For example, if the NPO2 occupies slots IU2 and IU3, the slot number of the NPO2 displayed on the NM is
IU3.
16.7.7 Characteristic Code of the NPO2
The characteristic code for the NPO2 consists of six digits, respectively indicating the frequency
values of the first channel and the last channel of optical signals on the WDM side.
Table 16-49 Characteristic code for the NPO2
signal
WDM side.
signal
WDM side.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN54NPO2 is 605385.
is 193.85 THz.
Table 16-50 Serial numbers of the interfaces on the NPO2 displayed on the NMS
IN/OUT 1

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1795
NOTE
Logical Ports
The TN55NPO2 board can work in standard or compatible mode, and the TN54NPO2 board
can work only in compatible mode.
NOTE
Mode.
l Figure 16-48 shows the board model of the TN55NPO2/TN54NPO2 board in compatible
mode. Table 16-51 lists the descriptions of the ports on the board.
l Figure 16-49 shows the board model of the T55NPO2 board in standard mode. Table
16-52 Lists the descriptions of the ports on the board.
Figure 16-48 Diagram of ports on the TN55NPO2/TN54NPO2 (compatible mode)
161
(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1
IN/OUT
161
(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2
164
(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1
164
(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2
189
189
192
192
51
(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1
51
(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4
58
(ODU1LP8/ODU1LP8)-1
58
(ODU1LP8/ODU1LP8)-4
71
(ODU2LP1/
ODU2LP1)-1
8 x ODU2/ODU2e
78
(ODU2LP8/
ODU2LP8)-1
64 x ODU0 32 x ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
Other tributary board/line
board/PID board
ODU2
ODU2
133(OCHLP1
/OCHLP1)-1
140(OCHLP8
/OCHLP8)-1
141(OCHLP9
/OCHLP9)-1
144(OCHLP12
/OCHLP12)-1
board/PID board
board/PID board
Backplane
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1796
Service processing module Automatic cross-connection, which does not need to
cross-connections from other boards to the ODU0LP
port on the board using the NMS. The board's internal
structure enables transmission of the multiplexed
signal to the ODU2LP port. Users do not need to
configure a cross-connection for transmitting the
multiplexed signal.
ODU0 mapping path Cross-connection that must be configured on the

NOTE
There are cross-connections between ports 141 (OCHLP9/OCHLP9)-1 to 144 (OCHLP12/OCHLP12)-1 on the
NPO2 board and ports 71 (ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 to 74 (ODU2LP4/ODU2LP4)-1 on the ENQ2 board. You
do not need to configure these cross-connections on the U2000.
Table 16-51 Description of ports on the TN55NPO2/TN54NPO2 (compatible mode)
ODU0LP1-ODU0LP32 Internal logical ports. The optical paths are numbered 1
and 2.
2, 3 and 4.
OCHLP1-OCHLP12 Internal logical ports. The optical paths are numbered 1.
IN/OUT This port corresponds to the WDM-side optical interface.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1797
Figure 16-49 Diagram of ports on the TN55NPO2 (standard mode)
O
t
h
e
r

t
r
i
b
u
t
a
r
y

b
o
a
r
d
/
l
i
n
e

b
o
a
r
d
/
P
I
D

b
o
a
r
d
IN/OUT
96xODU0
48xODU1
12xODU2/
12XODU2e
OCH:1
ODU2:1
ODU2:1
ODU1:1
ODU1:4
ODU1:1
ODU1:4
ODU2:1
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(1-12)-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)
ODU1:4
ODU1:1
ODU1:4
ODU0:2
ODU0:2
ODU0:2
ODU0:2
ODU0:1
ODU0:1
ODU0:1
ODU0:1
ODU1:1
ODU2:1
OCH:12
OCH:1
OCH:12
OCH:1
OCH:12
ODU2:1
ODU2:1

NOTE
The OCH9 to OCH12 optical channels only receive the signals coming from the TN54ENQ2 board.
The TN55NPO2 board's OCH5 to OCH8 optical channels are available only when the board works with the
TN54PQ2 service processing board.
Cross-connect
module
ODU1 mapping path
Multiplexing
module
ODU2 mapping path
Service
processing
module
Cross-connection that must be configured on
the NMS to receive ODUk signals from other
boards
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1798
ODU0
mapping path
Table 16-52 Description of ports on the TN55NPO2 (standard mode)
(14)-ODU0:(12)
signals that are received through the
backplane.
(14)
backplane.
ODU2e signals that are received through the
backplane.

side.
The TN55NPO2 board can work in standard or compatible mode, the TN54NPO2 board can
work only in compatible mode. For details about the standard and compatible modes, see 12.2.3
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1799
Figure 16-50 Diagram of cross-connections of the TN55NPO2 (ODU0 level)
1
2
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1
TN55NPO2 board
Client side
Other board a
side of the TN55NPO2
(standard mode)
WDM side
standard mode
compatible mode
Other board b
Other board c
(compatible mode)
WDM side
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1800

1
2
TN54NPO2 board
Client side
Other board b
WDM side
Other board b
(compatible mode)
Other board c
(standard mode)
WDM side
(compatible mode)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1801
TN55NPO2
board
1
2
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1
Client side
Other board a
WDM side
standard mode
compatible mode
Other board b
(compatible mode)
Other board c
(standard mode)
WDM side
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1802

TN54NPO2
board
1
2
Client side
Other board a
WDM side
Other board b
(compatible mode)
Other board c
(standard mode)
WDM side
(compatible mode)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1803

TN55NPO2
board
1
2
WDM side
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1-ODU2:1
Client side
Other board a
standard mode
compatible mode
Other board b
(compatible mode)
Other board c
(standard mode)
WDM side
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1804

TN54NPO2
board
1
2
WDM side
Client side
Other board a
Other board b
(compatible mode)
Other board c
(standard mode)
WDM side
(compatible mode)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1805

Cross-Connections Between the NPO2 and ENQ2
Figure 16-56 and Figure 16-57 show the created cross-connections between the NPO2 and
ENQ2.
Figure 16-56 Diagram of cross-connections between the TN55NPO2 and ENQ2
TN55NPO2
board
ENQ2
board
WDM side
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:8
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:10
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:11
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:12
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:10
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:11
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:12
standard mode
compatible mode
standard mode
compatible mode
WDM side

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1806
Figure 16-57 Diagram of cross-connections between the TN54NPO2 and ENQ2
TN54NPO2
board
ENQ2 board
WDM side
WDM side
compatible
mode
compatible
mode

Example of Service Cross-Connections
Figure 16-58 shows an example of service cross-connections on the NPO2 board. One board
can transmit a hybrid of ODU0, ODU1, ODU2 and ODU2e signals.
Figure 16-58 Example of service cross-connections on the NPO2 board
NPO2
TOM
ODU0
ODU0
TOM
ODU1
NS2
ODU1
ODU1
IN/OUT
TDX/
ND2
ODU2/
ODU2e

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1807
For parameters of the NPO2, refer to Table 16-53.
Table 16-53 NPO2 parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
Optical Interface
Name
name.
Default: Used
channel of a board.
Optical Interface
Loopback
Outloop
Default: Non-
Loopback
Outloop
Default: Non-
Loopback
Queries or sets path Loopback.
ODU1, ODU2
Default: Automatic
Default: On
Default: Enabled
FEC Mode FEC, AFEC
Default: FEC
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1808
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
Tunable Wavelength
Range
Planned Wavelength
Frequency (THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.10
0
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.17
0 to
18/1611.00/188.78
0
Default: /
board.
NOTE
Only C band is supported.
information.
Default: C
wavelength.
NOTE
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
to Disabled.
Speedup Mode
Default: Standard
Mode
information.
Default: Disabled
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1809
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
commissioning.

16.7.11 NPO2 Specifications
consumption.
Optical Module
TN54NP
O2
200 ps/nm-PID-NRZ-PIN N/A
TN55NP
O2
800 ps/nm-PID-NRZ-PIN (40 km)
N/A

NOTE
point.
Optical
Module Type
800 ps/nm-PID-
NRZ-PIN (40 km)
1500 ps/nm-PID-
NRZ-PIN (80 km)
200 ps/nm-PID-
NRZ-PIN
Line code
format
- NRZ NRZ NRZ
Center
frequency
THz 192.10 to 196.05 192.10 to 196.05 192.10 to 196.05
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1810
Optical
Module Type
800 ps/nm-PID-
NRZ-PIN (40 km)
1500 ps/nm-PID-
NRZ-PIN (80 km)
200 ps/nm-PID-
NRZ-PIN
Maximum
mean launched
power (single
wavelength)
dBm +2 +2 +2
Minimum
mean launched
power (single
wavelength)
dBm -4 -6.5 -6.5
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB 6 6 6.5
Center
frequency
deviation
GHz 5 5 5
Maximum -20
dB spectral
width
nm 0.8 0.8 0.8
Minimum side
mode
suppression
ratio
dB 30 30 30
Dispersion
tolerance
ps/nm 800 1500 200
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1200 to 1650 1200 to 1650 1200 to 1650
Receiver
sensitivity
(FEC enabled)
EOL
dBm TN55NPO2S01 to
TN55NPO2S04:
-13.5
TN55NPO2S06,
TN55NPO2S08:
-15
TN55NPO2S0A,
TN55NPO2S0B:
-15
-12 -12
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm 3 3 0
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1811
Optical
Module Type
800 ps/nm-PID-
NRZ-PIN (40 km)
1500 ps/nm-PID-
NRZ-PIN (80 km)
200 ps/nm-PID-
NRZ-PIN
Maximum
reflectance
dB -27 -27 -27

TN54NPO2:
(8.7 in.)
TN55NPO2:
(8.7 in.)
TN54PQ2:
l Dimensions of front panel (H x W x D): 57 mm (2.24 in.) x 24.5 mm (0.96 in.) x 68 mm
(2.69 in.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN54NPO2 134 147
TN55NPO2 143 157.3
TN54PQ2 1.1 1.2

16.8 NPO2E
NPO2E: 10G PID line service processing board, 20channel extended
The available functional version of the NPO2E board is TN55.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1812
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN5
5NP
O2E
Y Y Y N N N

Type
The TN55NPO2E board has four types: TN55NPO2ES02, TN55NPO2ES04, TN55NPO2EL02,
and TN55NPO2EL04, which process different wavelengths.
l The TN55NPO2ES02/TN55NPO2EL02 board processes wavelengths 2, 6, 10, 14, 18, 22,
26, and 30.
l The TN55NPO2ES04/TN55NPO2EL04 board processes wavelengths 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24,
28, and 32.
A PID group that consists of the TN55NPO2E, TN54ENQ2, and TN55NPO2 boards, as shown
in Table 16-55, Table 16-56 and Table 16-57.
Table 16-58 lists the mappings between wavelength numbers, wavelengths, and frequencies.
Table 16-55 Combinations of wavelengths for the PID group (NPO2E+ENQ2+NPO2)(200G
system)
Wavelengt
h
Combinati
on No.
Wavelength No. for
TN55NPO2E
Wavelength No.
for TN54ENQ2
Wavelength No. for
TN55NPO2
1 TN55NPO2ES02/
TN55NPO2EL02: 2, 6, 10,
14, 18, 22, 26, 30
34, 38, 42, 46 TN55NPO2S06/
TN55NPO2L06: 50, 54,
58, 62, 66, 70, 74, 78
2 TN55NPO2ES04/
TN55NPO2EL04: 4, 8, 12,
16, 20, 24, 28, 32
36, 40, 44, 48 TN55NPO2S08/
TN55NPO2L08: 52, 56,
60, 64, 68, 72, 76, 80

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1813
Table 16-56 Combinations of wavelengths for the PID group (NPO2E+ENQ2)(120G system)
Waveleng
th
Combinat
ion No.
Wavelength No. for TN55NPO2E Wavelength No. for
TN54ENQ2
1 TN55NPO2ES02/TN55NPO2EL02: 2, 6,
10, 14, 18, 22, 26, 30
34, 38, 42, 46
2 TN55NPO2ES04/TN55NPO2EL04: 4, 8,
12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32
36, 40, 44, 48

Table 16-57 Combinations of wavelengths for the PID group (NPO2E+ENQ2)(80G system)
Wavelengt
h
Combinati
on No.
Wavelength No. for TN55NPO2E
1 TN55NPO2ES02/TN55NPO2EL02: 2, 6, 10, 14, 18, 22, 26, 30
2 TN55NPO2ES04/TN55NPO2EL04: 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32

NOTE
The TN55NPO2E can process four wavelengths. After being equipped with the TN54PQ2 service processing
board, it can process four more wavelengths. For example, the TN55NPO2EL04 can process only the 4st, 8th,
also process the 20th, 24st, 28th, and 32th wavelengths. For the position where the TN54PQ2 should be installed
on the TN55NPO2E, see 16.8.5 Front Panel.
The TN54ENQ2 board must be installed in the left slot next to the slot holding the TN55NPO2E board.
The TN55NPO2E board supports DCM-free transmission over long distance.
Each type of PID boards must work with specific wavelengths. Therefore, select the required PID boards
according to the network planning principles.
Wavelengt
h No.
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Wavelengt
h No.
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
1 196.05 1529.16 41 194.05 1544.92
2 196.00 1529.55 42 194.00 1545.32
3 195.95 1529.94 43 193.95 1545.72
4 195.90 1530.33 44 193.90 1546.12
5 195.85 1530.72 45 193.85 1546.52
6 195.80 1531.12 46 193.80 1546.92
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1814
Wavelengt
h No.
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Wavelengt
h No.
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
7 195.75 1531.51 47 193.75 1547.32
8 195.70 1531.90 48 193.70 1547.72
9 195.65 1532.29 49 193.65 1548.11
10 195.60 1532.68 50 193.60 1548.51
11 195.55 1533.07 51 193.55 1548.91
12 195.50 1533.47 52 193.50 1549.32
13 195.45 1533.86 53 193.45 1549.72
14 195.40 1534.25 54 193.40 1550.12
15 195.35 1534.64 55 193.35 1550.52
16 195.30 1535.04 56 193.30 1550.92
17 195.25 1535.43 57 193.25 1551.32
18 195.20 1535.82 58 193.20 1551.72
19 195.15 1536.22 59 193.15 1552.12
20 195.10 1536.61 60 193.10 1552.52
21 195.05 1537.00 61 193.05 1552.93
22 195.00 1537.40 62 193.00 1553.33
23 194.95 1537.79 63 192.95 1553.73
24 194.90 1538.19 64 192.90 1554.13
25 194.85 1538.58 65 192.85 1554.54
26 194.80 1538.98 66 192.80 1554.94
27 194.75 1539.37 67 192.75 1555.34
28 194.70 1539.77 68 192.70 1555.75
29 194.65 1540.16 69 192.65 1556.15
30 194.60 1540.56 70 192.60 1556.55
31 194.55 1540.95 71 192.55 1556.96
32 194.50 1541.35 72 192.50 1557.36
33 194.45 1541.75 73 192.45 1557.77
34 194.40 1542.14 74 192.40 1558.17
35 194.35 1542.54 75 192.35 1558.58
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1815
Wavelengt
h No.
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Wavelengt
h No.
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
36 194.30 1542.94 76 192.30 1558.98
37 194.25 1543.33 77 192.25 1559.39
38 194.20 1543.73 78 192.20 1559.79
39 194.15 1544.13 79 192.15 1560.20
40 194.10 1544.53 80 192.10 1560.61

16.8.2 Application
As a PID board, the NPO2E board performs conversion between 64 x ODU0, 32 x ODU1, or 8
x ODU2 signals that are cross-connected through the backplane and 8 x OTU2 optical signals
over standard wavelengths for a WDM system, between 8 x ODU2e signals and 8 x OTU2e
optical signals over standard wavelengths for a WDM system. In addition, the NPO2E board
receives four OTU2/OTU2e signals from the ENQ2 board through the backplane. Then the
NPO2E board multiplexes the four OTU2/OTU2e signals with its own eight OTU2/OTU2e
signals into one optical signal for output. Inside the NPO2E board, there is a red/blue band filter,
which converges 12 x OTU2/OTU2e signals output by the local NPO2E board and 8 x OTU2/
OTU2e signals output by another NPO2 board into one channel of optical signals for output. It
also performs the reverse conversion. In addition, the NPO2E board supports hybrid transmission
of ODU0, ODU1, and ODU2/ODU2e signals.
Application Scenario 1: 200G system Built with the TN55NPO2E Board
Figure 16-59 200G system built with the TN55NPO2E board
TN55
NPO2E
4xOTU2/
OTU2e
64xODU0/
32xODU1/
8xODU2/
8xODU2e
OBU
1P1
OBU
1P1
8xOTU2/
OTU2e
32xODU0/
16xODU1/
4xODU2/
4xODU2e
64xODU0/
32xODU1/
8xODU2/
8xODU2e
TN55
NPO2E
4xOTU2/
OTU2e
64xODU0/
32xODU1/
8xODU2/
8xODU2e
TN54
ENQ2
TN55
NPO2
8xOTU2/
OTU2e
Client-side
service
Client-side
service
Tributary
board
TN54
ENQ2
TN55
NPO2
Tributary
board
Tributary
board
Tributary
board
Client-
side
service
Client-
side
service
32xODU0/
16xODU1/
4xODU2/
4xODU2e
64xODU0/
32xODU1/
8xODU2/
8xODU2e
Tributary
board
Tributary
board
Client-
side
service
Client-
side
service
TO
RI
RI
TO
IN
OUT
TO2
RO2
TO2
RO2
IN
OUT

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1816
4xOTU2/
OTU2e
64xODU0/
32xODU1/
8xODU2/
8xODU2e
TN54
ENQ2
OBU
1P1
OBU
1P1
Client-
side
service
32xODU0/
16xODU1/
4xODU2/
4xODU2e
TN55
NPO2E
4xOTU2/
OTU2e
64xODU0/
32xODU1/
8xODU2/
8xODU2e
32xODU0/
16xODU1/
4xODU2/
4xODU2e
Tributary
board
Client-
side
service
TN54
ENQ2
Tributary
board
Client-
side
service
Tributary
board
Client-
side
service
Tributary
board
TN55
NPO2E
TO
RI
RI
TO

TN55
NPO2E
64xODU0/
32xODU1/
8xODU2/
8xODU2e
OBU
1P1
OBU
1P1
TN55
NPO2E
64xODU0/
32xODU1/
8xODU2/
8xODU2e
Tributary
board
Client-side
service
Tributary
board
Client-side
service
TO
RI
RI
TO

NOTE
In the preceding application scenarios, the TN55NPO2E/TN55NPO2 board is configured with the TN54PQ2
board.
If the TN55NPO2E/TN55NPO2 board is not configured with the TN54PQ2 board, the TN55NPO2E/
TN55NPO2 board can process a maximum of 4 x10 Gbit/s services.
board.
When the TN55NPO2E board is used in a WDM system, whether OA boards are required or not depends on
the fiber distance. If the fiber distance is shorter than 40 km, do not configure an OA board at either the transmit
receive end.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1817
The NPO2E provides functions and features such as OTN interfaces and ESC.
Table 16-59 provides the details about the functions and features of the NPO2E.
Table 16-59 Functions and features of the NPO2E
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function l 64 x ODU0/32 x ODU1/8 x ODU2<->8 x OTU2
l 8 x ODU2e<->8 x OTU2e
l Accesses four channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals from the ENQ2 board,
and converts the signals into the standard DWDM wavelengths
compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar.
l Integrates twelve channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals into one channel of
optical signals.
l Converges 12 x OTU2/OTU2e signals output by the local NPO2E board
and 8 x OTU2/OTU2e signals output by another NPO2 board into one
channel of optical signals for output.
Cross-connect
capabilities
Supports the cross-connection of 64 channels of ODU0 or 32 channels of
ODU1 or eight channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals between the NPO2E
board and the cross-connect board.
OTN function l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing as defined in
the ITU-T G.709.
l Supports the PM and TCM function for ODU1.
l Supports the PM and TCM function for ODU2.
l Supports the TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU1.
WDM
specification
PRBS test
function
WDM side.
NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1818
Function and
Feature
Description
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
power of the laser.
IEEE 1588v2 The NPO2E board supports one channel of IEEE 1588v2 signals.
NOTE
The IEEE 1588v2 signal must be transmitted through optical port 1.
Physical clock The NPO2E board supports this feature only when ODU0 or ODU1 signals
are cross-connected from the backplane.
Optical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Electrical-layer
ASON
Supported
Protection
scheme
Loopback Channel
Loopback
Inloop Supported
Outloop Supported
Client side -
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1819
Function and
Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards
compliance
Protocols or
standards for
transparent
transmission
(non-
performance
monitoring)
IEEE 802.3u
IEEE 802.3z
IEEE 802.3ae
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
INTERFACES (FC-PI)
LS)
BB-3)
SW-3)
(FC-SB-2)
Control (MAC)
Protocol (PHY)
Dependent (PDM)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1820
Function and
Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards for
service
processing
(performance
monitoring)
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.873.1
ITU-T G.694.1

The NPO2E board consists of the signal processing module, PID optical module, control and
communication module, IEEE 1588v2 module, red/blue band filter, and power supply module.
Figure 16-62 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the NPO2E.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1821
Figure 16-62 Functional modules and signal flow of the NPO2E
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Fuse
Required voltage
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Backplane
IN
OUT
PID
Module
8
8
Signal processing
module
OTN
Processing
module
Cross-
connection
module
4XOTU2/
4XOTU2e
64XODU0/32XODU1/8X
ODU2/8XODU2e
1588
Red/blue
band filter
T01
R01
TO
T02
R02
RI
PQ2 service
processing
sub-board

Signal Flow
In the signal flow of the NPO2E board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the backplane of the NPO2E to the WDM side
of the NPO2E, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
The signal processing module receives 64 channels of ODU0 or 32 channels of ODU1 or
eight channels of ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals sent from the cross-connection board
encoding of FEC/AFEC. Then the module outputs eight channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals
to the PID module.
The eight channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals and the four channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals
sent from the ENQ2 board are integrated into one channel of optical signals, which are
finally output through the OUT optical interface.
The red/blue band filter converges 12 x OTU2/OTU2e optical signals output through the
OUT port on the PID optical module and 8 x OTU2/OTU2e optical signals output through
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1822
the OUT port on another NPO2 board into one channel of optical signals and outputs the
signals through the TO port to the WDM side.
l Receive direction
The red/blue band filter receives one channel of multiplexed signals through the RI port
and demultiplexes the signals into two channels of optical signals. It outputs 12 x OTU2/
OTU2e optical signals through the TO1 port to the IN port on the PID optical module and
outputs 8 x OTU2/OTU2e optical signals through the TO2 port to the IN port on another
NPO2 board.
demultiplexes the signal into twelve channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals.
Four of the twelve channels OTU2/OTU2e signals are sent to the ENQ2 board, and the
remaining eight channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals are transmitted to the signal processing
module. Then, the signal processing module performs OTU2/OTU2e framing, and FEC/
AFEC decoding for the signals. Finally, the signal processing module outputs 64 channels
of ODU0 or 32 channels of ODU1 or eight channels of ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals.
The electrical signals are cross-connected to other boards through the backplane.
NOTE
The NPO2E board can directly output a multiplexed signal through its OUT port to the WDM side and receive
a multiplexed signal through its IN port from the WDM side.
Module Function
l Red/blue band filter
In the transmit direction, it multiplexes one channel of multiplexed optical signals (12
wavelengths are multiplexed) that are output by the NPO2E board and one channel of
multiplexed optical signals (8 wavelengths are multiplexed) that are output by another
NPO2 board.
In the receive direction, it demultiplexes one channel of multiplexed optical signals (20
wavelengths are multiplexed) from the WDM side and outputs one channel of
multiplexed optical signals (12 wavelengths are multiplexed) to the NPO2E board and
one channel of multiplexed optical signals (8 wavelengths are multiplexed) to another
NPO2 board.
l PID module
WDM-side receiver: demultiplexes the WDM-side multiplexed optical signals into
twelve channels of optical signals, and then converts the optical signals to electrical
signals.
signals, and integrates twelve channels of signals into one channel of multiplexed
signals.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1823
Implements the grooming of electrical signals between the NPO2E and the cross-
connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are ODU0/ODU1/
ODU2/ODU2e signals
PQ2 service processing board
Processes 4 x 10 Gbit/s signals that are carried by the last four wavelengths provided
on the TN55NPO2E board.
NOTE
After installing a PQ2 service processing sub-board onto the TN55NPO2E board that works in standard
mode, create the logical PQ2 sub-board on the U2000.
the CPU.
on the board.
16.8.5 Front Panel
There are four indicators, optical interfaces, laser level label, and PQ2 sub-board on the front
panel of the NPO2E.
Figure 16-63 shows the front panel of the TN55NPO2E.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1824
Figure 16-63 Front panel of the TN55NPO2E
NPO2E
NPO2E
OUT IN
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
NPO2E
NPO2E
OUT IN
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
PQ2
STAT
T
O
R
I
T
0
2
R
0
2
T
0
1
R
0
1
T
O
R
I
T
0
2
R
0
2
T
0
1
R
0
1
PQ2 installed PQ2 not installed
LASERRADIATION
CAUTION
LASERRADIATION
CAUTION
CAUTION
HAZARDLEVEL 1MINVISIBLE
LASERRADIATION
NOTE
The TN55NPO2E can process four wavelengths. After being equipped with the TN54PQ2 service processing
board, it can process four more wavelengths. For example, the TN55NPO2EL04 can process only the 4st, 8th,
also process the 20th, 24st, 28th, and 32th wavelengths. For details, see 16.8.1 Version Description.
Indicators
There are four indicators on the TN55NPO2E panel.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1825
There is one indicator on the TN54PQ2 panel.
Interfaces
Table 16-60 Types and functions of the TN55NPO2E interfaces
IN LC Receives 12 channels optical signals that are output by
the red/blue band filter or line-side multiplexed optical
signals.
OUT LC Transmits multiplexed optical signals to the line side
or the red/blue band filter.
R01 LC Receives one channel of multiplexed optical signals
from the OUT port (12 wavelengths are multiplexed).
T01 LC Transmits one channel of multiplexed optical signals
to the IN port (12 wavelengths are multiplexed).
R02 LC Receives optical signals that are output by the OUT port
on the NPO2 board.
T02 LC Sends one channel of multiplexed optical signals to the
IN port on the NPO2 board (eight wavelengths are
multiplexed).
RI LC Receives multiplexed optical signals from the line side.
TO LC Transmits multiplexed optical signals to the line side.

Laser Hazard Level
16.8.6 Valid Slots
The NPO2E occupies two slots.
Table 16-61 shows the valid slots for the NPO2E board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1826
Table 16-61 Valid slots for the NPO2E board
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
subrack
IU47, IU51, IU55, IU59, IU63, IU67
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
subrack
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
subrack

NOTE
slot number of the NPO2E board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two occupied slots.
For example, if the NPO2E occupies slots IU2 and IU3, the slot number of the NPO2E displayed on the NM is
IU3.
16.8.7 Characteristic Code of the NPO2E
The characteristic code for the NPO2E consists of six digits, respectively indicating the
frequency values of the first channel and the last channel of optical signals on the WDM side.
Table 16-62 Characteristic code for the NPO2E
signal
WDM side.
signal
WDM side.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN55NPO2E is 600380.
is 193.80 THz.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1827
Table 16-63 Mapping between the physical ports on the NPO2E board and the port numbers
IN/OUT 1
RI/TO 2
RO1/TO1 3
RO2/TO2 4

NOTE
Logical Ports
The NPO2E board can work only in standard mode. Figure 16-64 shows the port diagram.
NOTE
Mode.
NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1828
Figure 16-64 Diagram of ports on the NPO2E
O
t
h
e
r

t
r
i
b
u
t
a
r
y

b
o
a
r
d
/
l
i
n
e

b
o
a
r
d
/
P
I
D

b
o
a
r
d
IN/OUT
96xODU0
48xODU1
12xODU2/
12XODU2e
OCH:1
ODU2:1
ODU2:1
ODU1:1
ODU1:4
ODU1:1
ODU1:4
ODU2:1
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(1-12)-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)
ODU1:4
ODU1:1
ODU1:4
ODU0:2
ODU0:2
ODU0:2
ODU0:2
ODU0:1
ODU0:1
ODU0:1
ODU0:1
ODU1:1
ODU2:1
OCH:12
OCH:1
OCH:12
OCH:1
OCH:12
ODU2:1
ODU2:1
Service processing module Cross-connection that must be configured on the NMS to receive ODUk
signals from other boards
ODU0 mapping path

NOTE
The OCH9 to OCH12 optical channels only receive the signals coming from the TN54ENQ2 board.
The NPO2E board's OCH5 to OCH8 optical channels are available only when the board works with the
TN54PQ2 service processing board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1829
Table 16-64 Description of ports on the NPO2E
(14)-ODU0:(12)
backplane.
(14)
backplane.
ODU2E signals that are received through the
backplane.

side.
NOTE
The NPO2E board can work only in standard mode. For information about the standard and compatible modes,
see 12.2.3 Standard Mode and Compatible Mode.
standard mode.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1830
Figure 16-65 Diagram of cross-connections of the NPO2E (ODU0 level)
1
2
NPO2E board
Client side
Other board a
side of the NPO2E
side of the NPO2E
WDM side
Other board b
(compatible mode)
Other board c
(standard mode)
WDM side

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1831
NPO2E board
1
2
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1--ODU2:1-ODU1:2
Client side
Other board a
side of the NPO2E
side of the NPO2E
WDM side
Other board b
(compatible mode)
Other board c
(standard mode)
WDM side

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1832
NPO2E board
1
2
WDM side
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:2
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:7
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:8
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:12
Client side
Other board a
side of the NPO2E
side of the NPO2E
Other board b
(compatible mode)
Other board c
(standard mode)
WDM side

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1833
Cross-Connections Between the NPO2E and ENQ2
Figure 16-68 shows the created cross-connections between the NPO2E and ENQ2.
Figure 16-68 Diagram of cross-connections between the NPO2E and ENQ2
NPO2E board
ENQ2 board
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:8
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:12
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9
1(IN/OUT)--OCH:10
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:11
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:12
WDM side
(standard
mode)
WDM side
(standard
mode)
The cross-connections between the NPO2E and ENQ2,
which does not need to be configured on the NMS

Example of Service Cross-Connections
Figure 16-69 shows an example of service cross-connections on the NPO2E board. One board
can transmit a hybrid of ODU0, ODU1, and ODU2/ODU2e signals.
Figure 16-69 Example of service cross-connections on the NPO2E board
TN55
NPO2E
TOM
ODU0
ODU0
TOM
ODU1
NS2
ODU1
ODU1
IN/OUT
TDX/
ND2
ODU2/
ODU2e

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1834
For parameters of the NPO2E, refer to Table 16-65.
Table 16-65 NPO2E parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
Optical Interface
Name
name.
Default: Used
channel of a board.
Outloop
Default: Non-
Loopback
Queries or sets path Loopback.
Default: On
Default: Enabled
FEC Mode FEC, AFEC
Default: FEC
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1835
Tunable Wavelength
Range
Planned Wavelength
Frequency (THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.10
0
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.17
0 to
18/1611.00/188.78
0
Default: /
board.
NOTE
information.
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
to Disabled.
Speedup Mode
Default: Standard
Mode
information.
Default: Disabled
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
commissioning.

16.8.11 NPO2E Specifications
consumption.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1836
Optical Module
TN55NP
O2E
N/A

NOTE
point.
Specifications of Optical Modules on the DWDM Side
Optical Module
Type
800 ps/nm-PID-NRZ-
PIN (40 km)
1500 ps/nm-PID-NRZ-
PIN (80 km)
Maximum mean
launched power
(single wavelength)
dBm +2 +2
Minimum mean
launched power
(single wavelength)
dBm -4 -6.5
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB 6 6
Center frequency
deviation
GHz 5 5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm 0.8 0.8
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
dB 30 30
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1837
Optical Module
Type
800 ps/nm-PID-NRZ-
PIN (40 km)
1500 ps/nm-PID-NRZ-
PIN (80 km)
Operating
wavelength range
nm 1200 to 1650 1200 to 1650
(FEC enabled) EOL
dBm -15 -12
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm 3 3
Maximum
reflectance
dB -27 -27

Table 16-67 Specifications of the red and blue band filters on the TN55NPO2E board
Item Unit Value
Working wavelength in the C
band
nm 1528 to 1561
Working wavelength in the blue
band (T01/R01)
THz 196.0 to 193.8
Working wavelength in the red
band (T02/R02)
THz 193.6 to 191.4
Demultiplexing loss (RI->T01,
RI->T02)
dB 1
Multiplexing loss (R01>T0,
R02->T0)
dB 1
Isolation between red and blue
bands
dB 13

TN55NPO2E:
(8.7 in.)
TN54PQ2:
l Dimensions of front panel (H x W x D): 57 mm (2.24 in.) x 24.5 mm (0.96 in.) x 68 mm
(2.69 in.)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1838
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN55NPO2E 143 157.3
TN54PQ2 1.1 1.2
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1839
17 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexing
Board
About This Chapter
17.1 Overview
Optical multiplexer/demultiplexer boards multiplex/demultiplex optical signals over different
wavelengths.
17.2 M40
M40: 40-channel multiplexing board
17.3 M40V
M40V: 40-channel multiplexing board with VOA
17.4 D40
D40: 40-channel demultiplexing board
17.5 D40V
D40V: 40-channel demultiplexing board with VOA
17.6 DFIU
DFIU: bidirectional fiber interface board
17.7 FIU
FIU: fiber interface unit
17.8 ITL
ITL: interleaver board
17.9 SFIU
SFIU: fiber interface unit for sync timing
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Hardware Description 17 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexing Board
1840
17.1 Overview
Optical multiplexer/demultiplexer boards multiplex/demultiplex optical signals over different
wavelengths.
Positions of Optical Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Boards in a WDM System
Optical multiplexer boards multiplex multiple optical signals into one ITU-T G.694-compliant
optical signal. Optical demultiplexer boards demultiplex one multiplexed optical signal into
individual ITU-T G.694-compliant optical signals.
Figure 17-1 shows the positions of optical multiplexer/demultiplexer boards in a WDM system.
Figure 17-1 Positions of optical multiplexer/demultiplexer boards in a WDM system
OM
OA
OA
FIU/
SFIU OSC
OTU
OD
C
l
i
e
n
t
-
s
i
d
e

e
q
u
i
p
m
e
n
t
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OM
OTU
OD
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
ITL
(C-ODD)
(C-ODD)
(C-EVEN)
(C-EVEN)
Client-side
services
WDM-side
services
W
D
M
-
s
i
d
e

O
D
F
Main Functions
Table 17-1 lists the main functions of optical multiplexer/demultiplexer boards.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1841
Table 17-1 Main functions of optical multiplexer/demultiplexer boards
Board Function
M40 Multiplexes a maximum of 40 C-band wavelength signals into one multi-wavelength signal.
M40V Multiplexes a maximum of 40 C-band wavelength signals into one multi-wavelength signal
and adjusts the optical power for each wavelength.
D40 Demultiplexes one C-band multi-wavelength signal into a maximum of 40 wavelength
signals.
D40V Demultiplexes one C-band multi-wavelength signal into a maximum of 40 wavelength
signals and adjusts the optical power for each wavelength.
ITL Multiplexes and demultiplexes C-band optical signals with 100 GHz channel spacing and C-
band optical signals with 50 GHz channel spacing.
FIU Multiplexes the main channel signal and the OSC signal onto a single communications
channel in one optical direction, and performs the reverse process.
DFIU Multiplexes the main channel signal and the OSC signal onto a single communications
channel in two optical directions, and performs the reverse process.
SFIU Multiplexes the main channel signal and the OSC signal onto a single communications
channel in one optical direction, and performs the reverse process.
This board applies to IEEE 1588v2 scenarios.

17.2 M40
M40: 40-channel multiplexing board
The available functional versions of the M40 board are TN11 and TN12.
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
1M4
0
Y Y Y Y Y N
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1842
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
2M4
0
Y Y Y Y Y N

Type
Unit Type Description
TN11M4
0/
TN12M4
0
01 Multiplexes 40 C_EVEN channels into one main path.
02 Multiplexes 40 C_ODD channels into one main path.

Appearance:
l The TN11M40 board uses a front panel different from that of the TN12M40 board. The
TN11M40 board occupies three slots. The TN12M40 board occupies two slots. For details,
see 17.2.5 Front Panel.
Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11M40 TN12M40 The TN12M40 board can be created as TN11M40 on the NMS.
The former can substitute for the latter without any software
upgrade. After the substitution, the TN12M40 board functions
as the TN11M40 board. The TN12M40 board occupies two
physical slots and three logical slots while the TN11M40 board
occupies three physical slots. After the substitution, the
remaining one physical slot cannot be used to house any other
board.
TN12M40 None -

17.2.2 Application
As a type of optical multiplexing unit, the M40 board multiplexes a maximum of 40 channels
of signals into one channel of signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations.
For the position of the M40 board in the WDM system, see Figure 17-2.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1843
Figure 17-2 Position of the M40 board in the WDM system
OTU
OA
OA
OTU
M40
D40
OTU
OTU
OA
OA
D40
M40
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
1
40
1
40
1
40
1
40

The M40 board is mainly used to multiplex signals, monitor performance of optical signals, and
monitor alarms and performance events.
Table 17-2 Functions and features of the M40 board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Multiplexes a maximum of 40 channels of signals into one channel
of multiplexed signals.
l Multiplexes 40 C_EVEN channels into one main path.
l Multiplexes 40 C_ODD channels into one main path.
Online optical
performance
monitoring
Provides an in-service monitoring port (MON). This port connects to
an optical spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer unit to monitor the
spectrum and optical performance of the multiplexed signal without
affecting traffic.
Alarms and
performance events
monitoring
Detects the optical power and reports the alarms and performance

The M40 board consists of the optical module, detection and temperature control module, control
Figure 17-3 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the M40 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1844
Figure 17-3 Functional modules and signal flow of the M40 board
OUT
M01
Detection and temperature control module
Temperature
control
Temperature
detection
MON
PIN
Optical module
M02
M40
Multiplexer
SCC
Splitter
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(Controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse

Signal Flow
Each of the M01-M40 optical interfaces receives one channel of single-wavelength optical
signals, and sends the signals to the multiplexer. The multiplexer multiplexes the 40 channels
of single-wavelength optical signals into one channel of multiplexed optical signals, and then
outputs them through the OUT optical interface.
Module Function
l Optical module
Multiplexes the 40 channels of single-wavelength optical signals into one channel of
multiplexed optical signals.
l Detection and temperature control module
Monitors and controls in real time the multiplexer operating temperature.
Detects in real time the output optical power of service signals.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1845
17.2.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the M40 board.
Figure 17-4 and Figure 17-5 show the front panel of the M40 board.
Figure 17-4 Front panel of the TN11M40 board
M40
M40
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
M01
M02
M03
M04
M05
M06
M07
M08
M09
M10
M11
M12
M13
M14
M15
M16
M17
M18
M19
M20
M21
M22
M23
M24
M25
M26
M27
M28
M29
M30
M31
M32
M33
M34
M35
M36
M37
M38
M39
M40
196.00
195.90
195.80
195.70
195.60
195.50
195.40
195.30
195.20
195.10
195.00
194.90
194.80
194.70
194.60
194.50
194.20
194.10
194.40
194.30
194.00
193.90
193.80
193.70
193.60
193.50
193.20
193.10
193.40
193.30
193.00
192.90
192.80
192.70
192.60
192.50
192.20
192.10
192.40
192.30
M
1
5
M
1
6
M
1
7
M
1
8
M
1
9
M
2
0
M
2
1
M
2
2
M
2
3
M
2
4
M
1
3
M
2
5
M
2
6
M
1
4
M
0
1
M
0
2
M
0
3
M
0
4
M
0
5
M
0
6
M
0
7
M
0
8
M
0
9
M
1
0
M
O
N
M
1
1
M
1
2
O
U
T
M
2
9
M
3
0
M
3
1
M
3
2
M
3
3
M
3
4
M
3
5
M
3
6
M
3
7
M
3
8
M
2
8
M
3
9
M
4
0
M
2
7
M01 196.00
195.10
195.20
195.30
195.40
195.50
195.60
195.70
195.80
195.90
195.00
194.10
194.20
194.30
194.40
194.50
194.60
194.70
194.80
194.90
194.00
193.10
193.20
193.30
193.40
193.50
193.60
193.70
193.80
193.90
193.00
192.10
192.20
192.30
192.40
192.50
192.60
192.70
192.80
192.90
M09
M08
M07
M06
M05
M04
M03
M02
M10
M11
M19
M18
M17
M16
M15
M14
M13
M12
M20
M21
M29
M28
M27
M26
M25
M24
M23
M22
M30
M31
M39
M38
M37
M36
M35
M34
M33
M32
M40
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1846

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1847
Figure 17-5 Front panel of the TN12M40 board
M40
M40
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
M13
M26
196.00
195.90
195.80
195.70
195.60
195.50
195.40
195.30
195.20
195.10
195.00
194.90
194.80
194.70
194.60
194.50
194.20
194.10
194.40
194.30
194.00
193.90
193.80
193.70
193.60
193.50
193.20
193.10
193.40
193.30
193.00
192.90
192.80
192.70
192.60
192.50
192.20
192.10
192.40
192.30
MON
OUT
M31
M32
M33
M34
M35
M36
M37
M38
M39
M40
M27
M28
M29
M30
M03
M04
M05
M06
M07
M08
M01
M02
M09
M10
M12
M11
M13
OUT
193.20 194.60
193.10 194.50
196.00
195.90
193.00 194.40
192.90 194.30
195.80
195.70
192.80 194.20
192.70 194.10
195.60
195.50
192.60 194.00
192.50 193.90
195.40
195.30
192.40 193.80
192.30 193.70
195.20
195.10
192.20 193.60
192.10 193.50
195.00
194.90
193.40 194.80
193.30 194.70 OUT
MON
M26
M01
M02
M03
M04
M05
M06
M07
M08
M09
M10
M11
M12
M27
M29
M30
M31
M32
M33
M34
M35
M36
M37
M38
M39
M40
M28
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1848

NOTE
A table indicating the mapping relationship between interfaces and frequencies is located on the front panel.
Indicators
Interfaces
Table 17-3 Types and functions of the interfaces on the M40 board
M01-M40 LC Receives the signals to be multiplexed, when connected
to the "OUT" interface of the OTUs.
OUT LC Transmits multiplexed signals, when connected to an
optical amplifying board or ITL.
MON LC Accomplishes online monitoring of optical spectrum,
when connected to the input interface of the MCA4,
MCA8 or OPM8.
The MON port is a 10/90 tap of the total composite
signal at the OUT port (10dB lower than the actual
signal power, calculation formula: Pout(dBm) - Pmon
(dBm) = 10 x lg(90/10) = 10 dB).

Table 17-4 and Table 17-5 show the mapping between the interfaces, frequency and
wavelengths of the M40 board.
Table 17-4 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies, and wavelengths of the M4001
board (C_EVEN)
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
M01 196.00 1529.55 M21 194.00 1545.32
M02 195.90 1530.33 M22 193.90 1546.12
M03 195.80 1531.12 M23 193.80 1546.92
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1849
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
M04 195.70 1531.90 M24 193.70 1547.72
M05 195.60 1532.68 M25 193.60 1548.51
M06 195.50 1533.47 M26 193.50 1549.32
M07 195.40 1534.25 M27 193.40 1550.12
M08 195.30 1535.04 M28 193.30 1550.92
M09 195.20 1535.82 M29 193.20 1551.72
M10 195.10 1536.61 M30 193.10 1552.52
M11 195.00 1537.40 M31 193.00 1553.33
M12 194.90 1538.19 M32 192.90 1554.13
M13 194.80 1538.98 M33 192.80 1554.94
M14 194.70 1539.77 M34 192.70 1555.75
M15 194.60 1540.56 M35 192.60 1556.55
M16 194.50 1541.35 M36 192.50 1557.36
M17 194.40 1542.14 M37 192.40 1558.17
M18 194.30 1542.94 M38 192.30 1558.98
M19 194.20 1543.73 M39 192.20 1559.79
M20 194.10 1544.53 M40 192.10 1560.61

Table 17-5 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies, and wavelengths of the M4002
board (C_ODD)
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
M01 196.05 1529.16 M21 194.05 1544.92
M02 195.95 1529.94 M22 193.95 1545.72
M03 195.85 1530.72 M23 193.85 1546.52
M04 195.75 1531.51 M24 193.75 1547.32
M05 195.65 1532.29 M25 193.65 1548.11
M06 195.55 1533.07 M26 193.55 1548.91
M07 195.45 1533.86 M27 193.45 1549.72
M08 195.35 1534.64 M28 193.35 1550.52
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1850
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
M09 195.25 1535.43 M29 193.25 1551.32
M10 195.15 1536.22 M30 193.15 1552.12
M11 195.05 1537.00 M31 193.05 1552.93
M12 194.95 1537.79 M32 192.95 1553.73
M13 194.85 1538.58 M33 192.85 1554.54
M14 194.75 1539.37 M34 192.75 1555.34
M15 194.65 1540.16 M35 192.65 1556.15
M16 194.55 1540.95 M36 192.55 1556.96
M17 194.45 1541.75 M37 192.45 1557.77
M18 194.35 1542.54 M38 192.35 1558.58
M19 194.25 1543.33 M39 192.25 1559.39
M20 194.15 1544.13 M40 192.15 1560.20

Laser Hazard Level
17.2.6 Valid Slots
Three slots house one TN11M40 board and two slots house one TN12M40 board.
Table 17-6 shows the valid slots for the TN11M40 board and Table 17-7 shows the valid slots
for the TN12M40 board.
Table 17-6 Valid slots for the TN11M40 board
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack IU1-IU6, IU11-IU16, IU19-IU24, IU27-IU32, IU35-
IU40, IU45-IU50, IU53-IU58, IU61-IU66
OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack IU1-IU6, IU11-IU17, IU20-IU25, IU29-IU34

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1851
The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack.
Therefore, the slot number of the TN11M40 board displayed on the NM is the number of the
leftmost one of the three slots.
For example, if slots IU1, IU2, and IU3 house the TN11M40 board, the slot number of the
TN11M40 board displayed on the NM is IU1.
Table 17-7 Valid slots for the TN12M40 board
Product Valid Slots
IU41, IU45-IU51, IU53-IU59, IU61-IU67

Therefore, the slot number of the TN12M40 board displayed on the NM is the number of the
For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN12M40 board, the slot number of the TN12M40
17.2.7 Characteristic Code for the M40
The characteristic code for the M40 board contains two characters. One indicates the band and
the other indicates whether the wavelengths that carry the optical signals processed by the board
are odd or even.
Table 17-8 Characteristic code for the M40 board
Code Meaning Description
First character Band Indicates the band of the
optical signals processed by
the board. The value C
represents C band; the value
L represents L band.
Second character Odd/even wavelengths Indicates whether the
wavelengths that carry
signals are odd or even
wavelengths. The value E
represents even wavelengths;
the value O represents odd
wavelengths.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1852

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11M40 board is CE, indicating C band and even
wavelengths.
17.2.8 Optical Interfaces
This topic describes the interface information on the U2000.
Display of Optical Interfaces
The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM
are listed in Table 17-9.
Table 17-9 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the M40 board displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
OUT 1
M01-M40 2-41
MON 42

For M40 parameters, refer to Table 17-10.
Table 17-10 M40 parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
Optical Interface
Name
supported.
Configure Band C
Default: C
Sets the working band type of a board.
Actual Band - Queries the actual working band of the board.
Actual Working
Band Parity
- Queries the parity of the actual working band
of the board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1853
Configure
Working Band
Parity
All, Odd, Even
Default: All
Selects the desired parity of the working band.

17.2.10 M40 Specifications
Table 17-11 lists the optical specifications of the M40 board.
Table 17-11 Optical specifications of the M40 board
Item Unit Value
Adjacent channel spacing GHz 100
Insertion loss dB 6.5
Reflectance dB < -40
Operating wavelength range nm 1529-1561
Adjacent channel isolation dB > 22
Non-adjacent channel isolation dB > 25
Polarization dependence loss dB 0.5
Temperature characteristics nm/C 0.002
Maximum channel insertion loss difference dB 3

TN11M40 (H x W x D): 264.6 mm (10.4 in.) x 76.2 mm (3.0 in.) x 220 mm (8.7 in.)
TN12M40 (H x W x D): 264.6 mm (10.4 in.) x 50.8 mm (2.0 in.) x 220 mm (8.7 in.)
l Weight:
TN11M40: 2.2 kg ( 4.8 lb.)
TN12M40: 2.0 kg ( 4.4 lb.)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1854
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11M40 10.0 13.0
TN12M40 10.0 13.0

17.3 M40V
M40V: 40-channel multiplexing board with VOA
The available functional versions of the M40V board are TN11 and TN12.
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
1M4
0V
Y Y Y Y Y N
TN1
2M4
0V
Y Y Y Y Y N

Type
TN11M4
0V/
TN12M4
0V
01 Multiplexes 40 C_EVEN channels into one main path.
02 Multiplexes 40 C_ODD channels into one main path.

Appearance:
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1855
l The TN11M40V board uses a front panel different from that of the TN12M40V board. The
TN11M40V board occupies three slots. The TN12M40V board occupies two slots. For
details, see 17.3.5 Front Panel.
Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11M40V TN12M40
V
The TN12M40V can be created as TN11M40V on the NMS.
upgrade. After the substitution, the TN12M40V board
functions as the TN11M40V board. The TN12M40V board
occupies two physical slots and three logical slots while the
TN11M40V board occupies three physical slots. After the
substitution, the remaining one physical slot cannot be used to
house any other board.
TN12M40V None -

17.3.2 Application
As a type of optical multiplexing unit, the M40V board multiplexes a maximum of 40 channels
of signals into one channel of signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations, and adjusts
the input optical power of each channel.
For the position of the M40V board in the WDM system, see Figure 17-6.
Figure 17-6 Position of the M40V board in the WDM system
OTU
OA
OA
OTU
M40V
D40
OTU
OTU
OA
OA
D40
M40V
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
1
40
1
40
1
40
1
40

The M40V board is mainly used to multiplex signals, monitor performance of optical signals,
monitor alarms and performance events, and adjust optical power.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1856
Table 17-12 Functions and features of the M40V board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Multiplexes a maximum of 40 signals into one multiplexed signal and
adjusts the input optical power of each channel.
l Multiplexes 40 C_EVEN channels into one main path.
l Multiplexes 40 C_ODD channels into one main path.
Online optical
performance
monitoring
affecting traffic.
Alarms and
performance events
monitoring
Optical power
adjustment
Adjusts the optical power of each signal before multiplexing.

The M40V board consists of the optical module, detection and temperature control module,
control and communication module, and power supply module.
Figure 17-7 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the M40V board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1857
Figure 17-7 Functional modules and signal flow of the M40V board
OUT
M01
Temperature
control
Temperature
detection
MON
PIN
Optical module
M02
M40
Multiplexer
Splitter
VOA
VOA
VOA
VOA
control
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(Controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse

Signal Flow
Each of the M01-M40 optical interfaces receives one channel of single-wavelength optical
signals, and sends the signals to the multiplexer after the optical power adjustment by VOA. The
multiplexer multiplexes the 40 channels of single-wavelength optical signals into one channel
of multiplexed optical signals, and then outputs them through the OUT optical interface.
Module Function
l Optical module
Adjusts the optical power of the single-wavelength optical signals before multiplexing.
Multiplexes the 40 channels of single-wavelength optical signals into one channel of
multiplexed optical signals.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1858
17.3.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the M40V board.
Figure 17-8 and Figure 17-9 show the front panel of the M40V board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1859
Figure 17-8 Front panel of the TN11M40V board
M40V
M40V
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
M01
M02
M03
M04
M05
M06
M07
M08
M09
M10
M11
M12
M13
M14
M15
M16
M17
M18
M19
M20
M21
M22
M23
M24
M25
M26
M27
M28
M29
M30
M31
M32
M33
M34
M35
M36
M37
M38
M39
M40
196.00
195.90
195.80
195.70
195.60
195.50
195.40
195.30
195.20
195.10
195.00
194.90
194.80
194.70
194.60
194.50
194.20
194.10
194.40
194.30
194.00
193.90
193.80
193.70
193.60
193.50
193.20
193.10
193.40
193.30
193.00
192.90
192.80
192.70
192.60
192.50
192.20
192.10
192.40
192.30
M
1
5
M
1
6
M
1
7
M
1
8
M
1
9
M
2
0
M
2
1
M
2
2
M
2
3
M
2
4
M
1
3
M
2
5
M
2
6
M
1
4
M
0
1
M
0
2
M
0
3
M
0
4
M
0
5
M
0
6
M
0
7
M
0
8
M
0
9
M
1
0
M
O
N
M
1
1
M
1
2
O
U
T
M
2
9
M
3
0
M
3
1
M
3
2
M
3
3
M
3
4
M
3
5
M
3
6
M
3
7
M
3
8
M
2
8
M
3
9
M
4
0
M
2
7
M01 196.00
195.10
195.20
195.30
195.40
195.50
195.60
195.70
195.80
195.90
195.00
194.10
194.20
194.30
194.40
194.50
194.60
194.70
194.80
194.90
194.00
193.10
193.20
193.30
193.40
193.50
193.60
193.70
193.80
193.90
193.00
192.10
192.20
192.30
192.40
192.50
192.60
192.70
192.80
192.90
M09
M08
M07
M06
M05
M04
M03
M02
M10
M11
M19
M18
M17
M16
M15
M14
M13
M12
M20
M21
M29
M28
M27
M26
M25
M24
M23
M22
M30
M31
M39
M38
M37
M36
M35
M34
M33
M32
M40

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1860
Figure 17-9 Front panel of the TN12M40V board
M40V
M40V
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
M13
M26
196.00
195.90
195.80
195.70
195.60
195.50
195.40
195.30
195.20
195.10
195.00
194.90
194.80
194.70
194.60
194.50
194.20
194.10
194.40
194.30
194.00
193.90
193.80
193.70
193.60
193.50
193.20
193.10
193.40
193.30
193.00
192.90
192.80
192.70
192.60
192.50
192.20
192.10
192.40
192.30
MON
OUT
M31
M32
M33
M34
M35
M36
M37
M38
M39
M40
M27
M28
M29
M30
M03
M04
M05
M06
M07
M08
M01
M02
M09
M10
M12
M11
M13
OUT
193.20 194.60
193.10 194.50
196.00
195.90
193.00 194.40
192.90 194.30
195.80
195.70
192.80 194.20
192.70 194.10
195.60
195.50
192.60 194.00
192.50 193.90
195.40
195.30
192.40 193.80
192.30 193.70
195.20
195.10
192.20 193.60
192.10 193.50
195.00
194.90
193.40 194.80
193.30 194.70 OUT
MON
M26
M01
M02
M03
M04
M05
M06
M07
M08
M09
M10
M11
M12
M27
M29
M30
M31
M32
M33
M34
M35
M36
M37
M38
M39
M40
M28
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1861

NOTE
Indicators
Interfaces
Table 17-13 Types and functions of the interfaces on the M40V board
M01-M40 LC Receives the signals to be multiplexed, when connected
to the "OUT" interface of the OTUs.
OUT LC Transmits the multiplexed signals, when connected to
an optical amplifier or ITL.
MCA8 or OPM8 board.
signal at the OUT port (10dB lower than the actual
(dBm) = 10 x lg(90/10) = 10 dB).

Table 17-14 and Table 17-15 show the mapping between the interfaces, frequency, and
wavelengths of the M40V board.
Table 17-14 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies, and wavelengths of the M40V
board (even)
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
M01 196.00 1529.55 M21 194.00 1545.32
M02 195.90 1530.33 M22 193.90 1546.12
M03 195.80 1531.12 M23 193.80 1546.92
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1862
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
M04 195.70 1531.90 M24 193.70 1547.72
M05 195.60 1532.68 M25 193.60 1548.51
M06 195.50 1533.47 M26 193.50 1549.32
M07 195.40 1534.25 M27 193.40 1550.12
M08 195.30 1535.04 M28 193.30 1550.92
M09 195.20 1535.82 M29 193.20 1551.72
M10 195.10 1536.61 M30 193.10 1552.52
M11 195.00 1537.40 M31 193.00 1553.33
M12 194.90 1538.19 M32 192.90 1554.13
M13 194.80 1538.98 M33 192.80 1554.94
M14 194.70 1539.77 M34 192.70 1555.75
M15 194.60 1540.56 M35 192.60 1556.55
M16 194.50 1541.35 M36 192.50 1557.36
M17 194.40 1542.14 M37 192.40 1558.17
M18 194.30 1542.94 M38 192.30 1558.98
M19 194.20 1543.73 M39 192.20 1559.79
M20 194.10 1544.53 M40 192.10 1560.61

Table 17-15 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies, and wavelengths of the M40V
board (odd)
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
M01 196.05 1529.16 M21 194.05 1544.92
M02 195.95 1529.94 M22 193.95 1545.72
M03 195.85 1530.72 M23 193.85 1546.52
M04 195.75 1531.51 M24 193.75 1547.32
M05 195.65 1532.29 M25 193.65 1548.11
M06 195.55 1533.07 M26 193.55 1548.91
M07 195.45 1533.86 M27 193.45 1549.72
M08 195.35 1534.64 M28 193.35 1550.52
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1863
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
M09 195.25 1535.43 M29 193.25 1551.32
M10 195.15 1536.22 M30 193.15 1552.12
M11 195.05 1537.00 M31 193.05 1552.93
M12 194.95 1537.79 M32 192.95 1553.73
M13 194.85 1538.58 M33 192.85 1554.54
M14 194.75 1539.37 M34 192.75 1555.34
M15 194.65 1540.16 M35 192.65 1556.15
M16 194.55 1540.95 M36 192.55 1556.96
M17 194.45 1541.75 M37 192.45 1557.77
M18 194.35 1542.54 M38 192.35 1558.58
M19 194.25 1543.33 M39 192.25 1559.39
M20 194.15 1544.13 M40 192.15 1560.20

Laser Hazard Level
17.3.6 Valid Slots
Three slots house one TN11M40V board and two slots house one TN12M40V board.
Table 17-16 shows the valid slots for the TN11M40V board and Table 17-17 shows the valid
slots for the TN12M40V board.
Table 17-16 Valid slots for the TN11M40V board
Product Valid Slots
IU32, IU35-IU40, IU45-IU50, IU53-IU58,
IU61-IU66
IU34

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1864
Therefore, the slot number of the TN11M40V board displayed on the NM is the number of the
For example, if slots IU1, IU2, and IU3 house the TN11M40V board, the slot number of the
TN11M40V board displayed on the NM is IU1.
Table 17-17 Valid slots for the TN12M40V board
Product Valid Slots
IU41, IU45-IU51, IU53-IU59, IU61-IU67

Therefore, the slot number of the TN12M40V board displayed on the NM is the number of the
For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN12M40V board, the slot number of the
TN12M40V board displayed on the NM is IU1.
17.3.7 Characteristic Code for the M40V
The characteristic code for the M40V board contains two characters. One indicates the band and
are odd or even.
Table 17-18 Characteristic code for the M40V board
wavelengths.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1865

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11M40V board is CE, indicating C band and
even wavelengths.
Table 17-19 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the M40V board displayed on the NM
OUT 1
M01-M40 2-41
MON 42

For M40V parameters, refer to Table 17-20.
Table 17-20 M40V parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
Optical Interface
Name
supported.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1866
Optical Interface
Attenuation Ratio
(dB)
Value of Min.
Attenuation Rate
(dB) to Value of
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)
Default: Value of
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)
The Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio
(dB) parameter sets the optical power
attenuation of a board channel so that the
optical power of the output signals at the
transmit end is within the preset range.
You can obtain the value range of this
parameter by querying the corresponding
Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) and Max.
Attenuation Rate (dB) parameters.
See D.24 Optical Interface Attenuation
Ratio (dB)(WDM Interface) for more
information.
Attenuation
difference (dB)
-3 to 3, with a step of
0.1
Default: none
Sets the relative optical power attenuation of
a board channel. When using this parameter
with Attenuation (dB), you can adjust optical
power attenuation of a board channel more
accurately.
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)
- Displays the maximum attenuation allowed by
a board optical interface.
Min. Attenuation
Rate (dB)
- Displays the minimum attenuation allowed by
Configure Band C
Default: C
Actual Working
Band Parity
of the board.
Configure
Working Band
Parity
All, Odd, Even
Default: All

17.3.10 M40V Specifications
Table 17-21 lists the optical specifications of the M40V board.
Table 17-21 Optical specifications of the M40V board
Item Unit Value
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1867
Item Unit Value
Insertion loss dB
8
a
Attenuation range dB 0-15
Loss accuracy dB 1 (0 to 10 dB)
1.5 (>10 dB)
Maximum channel insertion loss difference dB
3
a
NOTE
a: This value can be reached when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB.

TN11M40V (H x W x D): 264.6 mm (10.4 in.) x 76.2 mm (3.0 in.) x 220 mm (8.7 in.)
TN12M40V (H x W x D): 264.6 mm (10.4 in.) x 50.8 mm (2.0 in.) x 220 mm (8.7 in.)
l Weight:
TN11M40V: 2.3 kg (5.1 lb.)
TN12M40V: 2.3 kg (5.1 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11M40V 20.0 25.0
TN12M40V 16.0 26.0

17.4 D40
D40: 40-channel demultiplexing board
The available functional versions of the D40 board are TN11 and TN12.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1868
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
1D4
0
Y Y Y Y Y N
TN1
2D4
0
Y Y Y Y Y N

Type
TN11D40/
TN12D40
01 Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_EVEN channels.
02 Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_ODD channels.

Appearance:
l The TN11D40 board uses a front panel different from that of the TN12D40 board. The
TN11D40 board occupies three slots. The TN12D40 board occupies two slots. For details,
Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11D40 TN12D40 The TN12D40 can be created as TN11D40 on the NMS. The
upgrade. After the substitution, the TN12D40 board functions
as the TN11D40 board. The TN12D40 board occupies two
physical slots and three logical slots while the TN11D40 board
occupies three physical slots. After the substitution, the
remaining one physical slot cannot be used to house any other
board.
TN12D40 None -

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1869
17.4.2 Application
The D40 is a type of optical demultiplexing unit. The D40 implements the demultiplexing of
one optical signal into a maximum of 40 ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals.
For the position of the D40 in the WDM system, see Figure 17-10.
Figure 17-10 Position of the D40 in the WDM system
OTU
OA
OA
OTU
M40
D40
OTU
OTU
OA
OA
D40
M40
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
1
40
1
40
1
40
1
40

The main functions and features supported by the D40 are demultiplexing, online optical
performance monitoring, alarms and performance events monitoring.
Table 17-22 Functions and features of the D40
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Demultiplexes main path signal to a maximum of 40 channels of
service.
l Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_EVEN channels.
l Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_ODD channels.
Online optical
performance
monitoring
affecting traffic.
Alarms and
performance events
monitoring

The D40 board consists of the optical module, detection and temperature control module, control
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1870
Figure 17-11 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the D40.
Figure 17-11 Functional modules and signal flow of the D40
SCC
IN
D01
Temperature
control
Temperature
detection
MON
PIN
Optical module
D02
D40
Demultiplexer
Splitter
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
CPU Memory
Control
Communication

Signal Flow
The IN optical interface receives one channel of multiplexed optical signals and sends the signals
to the demultiplexer. The demultiplexer demultiplexes the one channel of multiplexed optical
signals into 40 channels of single-wavelength optical signals, and then outputs them through the
D01-D40 optical interfaces.
Module Function
l Optical module
Demultiplexes the one channel of multiplexed optical signals into 40 channels of single-
wavelength optical signals.
Monitors and controls in real time the demultiplexer operating temperature.
Detects in real time the input optical power of service signals.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1871
17.4.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the D40 front panel.
Figure 17-12 and Figure 17-13 show the front panel of the D40 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1872
Figure 17-12 TN11D40 front panel
D40
D40
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
D01
D02
D03
D04
D05
D06
D07
D08
D09
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15
D16
D17
D18
D19
D20
D21
D22
D23
D24
D25
D26
D27
D28
D29
D30
D31
D32
D33
D34
D35
D36
D37
D38
D39
D40
196.00
195.90
195.80
195.70
195.60
195.50
195.40
195.30
195.20
195.10
195.00
194.90
194.80
194.70
194.60
194.50
194.20
194.10
194.40
194.30
194.00
193.90
193.80
193.70
193.60
193.50
193.20
193.10
193.40
193.30
193.00
192.90
192.80
192.70
192.60
192.50
192.20
192.10
192.40
192.30
D
1
5
D
1
6
D
1
7
D
1
8
D
1
9
D
2
0
D
2
1
D
2
2
D
2
3
D
2
4
D
1
3
D
2
5
D
2
6
D
1
4
D
0
1
D
0
2
D
0
3
D
0
4
D
0
5
D
0
6
D
0
7
D
0
8
D
0
9
D
1
0
M
O
N
D
1
1
D
1
2
I
N
D
2
9
D
3
0
D
3
1
D
3
2
D
3
3
D
3
4
D
3
5
D
3
6
D
3
7
D
3
8
D
2
8
D
3
9
D
4
0
D
2
7
D01
D10
D09
D08
D07
D06
D05
D04
D03
D02
196.00
195.10
195.20
195.30
195.40
195.50
195.60
195.70
195.80
195.90
D11
D20
D19
D18
D17
D16
D15
D14
D13
D12
195.00
194.10
194.20
194.30
194.40
194.50
194.60
194.70
194.80
194.90
D21
D30
D29
D28
D27
D26
D25
D24
D23
D22
194.00
193.10
193.20
193.30
193.40
193.50
193.60
193.70
193.80
193.90
D31
D40
D39
D38
D37
D36
D35
D34
D33
D32
193.00
192.10
192.20
192.30
192.40
192.50
192.60
192.70
192.80
192.90

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1873
Figure 17-13 Front panel of the TN12D40 board
D40
D40
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
D13
193.20 194.60
193.10 194.50
196.00
195.90
193.00 194.40
192.90 194.30
195.80
195.70
192.80 194.20
192.70 194.10
195.60
195.50
192.60 194.00
192.50 193.90
195.40
195.30
192.40 193.80
192.30 193.70
195.20
195.10
192.20 193.60
192.10 193.50
195.00
194.90
193.40 194.80
193.30 194.70 IN
MON
D26
D27
D29
D30
D31
D32
D33
D34
D35
D36
D37
D38
D39
D40
D01
D02
D03
D04
D05
D06
D07
D08
D09
D10
D11
D12
D28
D13
D26
196.00
195.90
195.80
195.70
195.60
195.50
195.40
195.30
195.20
195.10
195.00
194.90
194.80
194.70
194.60
194.50
194.20
194.10
194.40
194.30
194.00
193.90
193.80
193.70
193.60
193.50
193.20
193.10
193.40
193.30
193.00
192.90
192.80
192.70
192.60
192.50
192.20
192.10
192.40
192.30
MON
IN
D01
D02
D03
D04
D05
D06
D07
D08
D09
D10
D11
D12
D27
D28
D29
D30
D31
D32
D33
D34
D35
D36
D37
D38
D39
D40
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1874

NOTE
Indicators
Interfaces
Table 17-23 Types and functions of the D40 interfaces
IN LC Connected to an optical amplifier or ITL, receives the
signals to be demultiplexed.
D01-D40 LC Transmit demultiplexed signals to the connected "IN"
interface of the OTUs.
MON LC Connected to the input interface of the MCA4, MCA8
or OPM8, accomplishes online monitoring of optical
spectrum.
signal at the IN port (10 dB lower than the actual signal
power, calculation formula: Pin (dBm) - Pmon (dBm)
= 10 x lg(90/10) = 10 dB).

Table 17-24 and Table 17-25 show the mapping between the interfaces, frequency and
wavelengths of the D40 board.
Table 17-24 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the D4001
board (C_EVEN)
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
D01 196.00 1529.55 D21 194.00 1545.32
D02 195.90 1530.33 D22 193.90 1546.12
D03 195.80 1531.12 D23 193.80 1546.92
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1875
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
D04 195.70 1531.90 D24 193.70 1547.72
D05 195.60 1532.68 D25 193.60 1548.51
D06 195.50 1533.47 D26 193.50 1549.32
D07 195.40 1534.25 D27 193.40 1550.12
D08 195.30 1535.04 D28 193.30 1550.92
D09 195.20 1535.82 D29 193.20 1551.72
D10 195.10 1536.61 D30 193.10 1552.52
D11 195.00 1537.40 D31 193.00 1553.33
D12 194.90 1538.19 D32 192.90 1554.13
D13 194.80 1538.98 D33 192.80 1554.94
D14 194.70 1539.77 D34 192.70 1555.75
D15 194.60 1540.56 D35 192.60 1556.55
D16 194.50 1541.35 D36 192.50 1557.36
D17 194.40 1542.14 D37 192.40 1558.17
D18 194.30 1542.94 D38 192.30 1558.98
D19 194.20 1543.73 D39 192.20 1559.79
D20 194.10 1544.53 D40 192.10 1560.61

Table 17-25 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the D4002
board (C_ODD)
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
D01 196.05 1529.16 D21 194.05 1544.92
D02 195.95 1529.94 D22 193.95 1545.72
D03 195.85 1530.72 D23 193.85 1546.52
D04 195.75 1531.51 D24 193.75 1547.32
D05 195.65 1532.29 D25 193.65 1548.11
D06 195.55 1533.07 D26 193.55 1548.91
D07 195.45 1533.86 D27 193.45 1549.72
D08 195.35 1534.64 D28 193.35 1550.52
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1876
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
D09 195.25 1535.43 D29 193.25 1551.32
D10 195.15 1536.22 D30 193.15 1552.12
D11 195.05 1537.00 D31 193.05 1552.93
D12 194.95 1537.79 D32 192.95 1553.73
D13 194.85 1538.58 D33 192.85 1554.54
D14 194.75 1539.37 D34 192.75 1555.34
D15 194.65 1540.16 D35 192.65 1556.15
D16 194.55 1540.95 D36 192.55 1556.96
D17 194.45 1541.75 D37 192.45 1557.77
D18 194.35 1542.54 D38 192.35 1558.58
D19 194.25 1543.33 D39 192.25 1559.39
D20 194.15 1544.13 D40 192.15 1560.20

Laser Hazard Level
17.4.6 Valid Slots
Three slots house one TN11D40 board and two slots house one TN12D40 board.
Table 17-26 shows the valid slots for the TN11D40 board and Table 17-27 shows the valid slots
for the TN12D40 board.
Table 17-26 Valid slots for the TN11D40 board
Product Valid Slots
IU32, IU35-IU40, IU45-IU50, IU53-IU58,
IU61-IU66
IU34

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1877
Therefore, the slot number of the TN11D40 board displayed on the NM is the number of the
leftmost one of the three occupied slots.
For example, if the TN11D40 occupies slots IU1, IU2 and IU3, the slot number of the TN11D40
Table 17-27 Valid slots for the TN12D40 board
Product Valid Slots
IU41, IU45-IU51, IU53-IU59, IU61-IU67

Therefore, the slot number of the TN12D40 board displayed on the NM is the number of the
For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN12D40 board, the slot number of the TN12D40
17.4.7 Characteristic Code for the D40
The characteristic code for the D40 consists of two characters. One indicates the band. The other
indicates whether the wavelengths that carry the optical signals processed by the board are odd
or even wavelengths.
Table 17-28 Characteristic code for the D40
The first character Band Indicates the band of the
The second character Odd/even wavelengths Indicates whether the
wavelengths.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1878

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11D40 is CE, indicating C band and even
wavelengths.
Table 17-29 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the D40 displayed on the NM
IN 1
D01-D40 2-41
MON 42

For D40 parameters, refer to Table 17-30.
Table 17-30 D40 parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
Optical Interface
Name
supported.
Input Power Loss
Threshold (dBm)
- The Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm)
parameter queries the threshold value of the
input optical power, which can trigger a board
to generate an optical power loss (MUT_LOS)
alarm. When the actual input optical power is
lower than this threshold value, the board
reports the MUT_LOS alarm.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1879
Configure Band C
Default: C
Used to configure type of the working band of
a board.
Actual Working
Band Parity
of the board.
Configure
Working Band
Parity
All, Odd, Even
Default: All
Enable OAMS
Power Monitoring
Disable, Enable
Default: Disable
Enables or disables the OAMS function.
Standard Value of
OAMS Power
Monitoring (dBm)
-60.0 to 50.0
Default: /
Specifies the reference value for OAMS
power monitoring.
OAMS Power
Abnormity
Threshold (dB)
-0.5 to 1.0
Default:3
Specifies the OAMS power abnormity
threshold. The OAMS function is started if the
variation between the detected power value
and the specified Standard Value of OAMS
Power Monitoring exceeds this threshold.

17.4.10 D40 Specifications
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight and power consumption.
Table 17-31 lists the optical specifications of the D40.
Table 17-31 Optical specifications of the D40
Item Unit Value
Temperature characteristics nm/C < 0.002
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1880
Item Unit Value
Maximum channel insertion loss difference dB 3
-1 dB bandwidth nm 0.2
-20 dB bandwidth nm < 1.4

TN11D40 (H x W x D): 264.6 mm (10.4 in.) x 76.2 mm (3.0 in.) x 220 mm (10.4 in.)
TN12D40 (H x W x D): 264.6 mm (10.4 in.) x 50.8 mm (2.0 in.) x 220 mm (10.4 in.)
l Weight:
TN11D40: 2.2 kg ( 4.8 lb.)
TN12D40: 2.0 kg ( 4.4 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11D40 10.0 13.0
TN12D40 10.0 13.0

17.5 D40V
D40V: 40-channel demultiplexing board with VOA
The available functional version of the D40V board is TN11.
Huawei office.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1881
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
1D4
0V
Y Y N N Y N

Type
TN11D40V 01 Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_EVEN channels.
02 Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_ODD channels.

17.5.2 Application
As a type of optical demultiplexing unit, the D40V demultiplexes one channel of signals into a
maximum of 40 channels of signals that comply with the related ITU-T Recommendations and
adjusts the output optical power of each channel.
For the position of the D40V board in the WDM system, see Figure 17-14.
Figure 17-14 Position of the D40V board in the WDM system
OTU
OA
OA
OTU
M40
D40V
OTU
OTU
OA
OA
D40V
M40
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
1
40
1
40
1
40
1
40

The D40V board is mainly used to demultiplex signals, to monitor performance of optical
signals, to monitor alarms and performance events, and to adjust optical power.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1882
Table 17-32 Functions and features of the D40V board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Demultiplexes one channel of signals into a maximum of 40 channels
of signals and adjusts the input optical power of each channel.
l Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_EVEN channels.
l Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_ODD channels.
Online optical
performance
monitoring
affecting traffic.
Alarms and
performance events
monitoring
Optical power
adjustment
Adjusts the optical power of each channel of signals after
demultiplexing.

The D40V board consists of the optical module, detection and temperature control module,
Figure 17-15 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the D40V board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1883
Figure 17-15 Functional modules and signal flow of the D40V board
SCC
IN
D01
Temperature
control
Temperature
detection
MON
PIN
Optical module
D02
D40
Demultiplexer
Splitter
VOA
VOA
VOA
VOA
control
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse

Signal Flow
The IN optical interface receives one channel of multiplexed optical signals and sends the signals
to the demultiplexer. The demultiplexer demultiplexes the one channel of multiplexed optical
signals into 40 channels of single-wavelength optical signals, and then outputs them through the
D01-D40 optical interfaces after the optical power adjustment by VOA.
Module Function
l Optical module
Demultiplexes the one channel of multiplexed optical signals into 40 channels of single-
wavelength optical signals.
Adjusts the optical power of the single-wavelength optical signals after demultiplexing.
Monitors and controls in real time the demultiplexer operating temperature.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1884
17.5.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on front panel of the D40V board.
Figure 17-16 shows front panel of the D40V board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1885
Figure 17-16 Front panel of the D40V board
D40V
D40V
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
D01
D02
D03
D04
D05
D06
D07
D08
D09
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15
D16
D17
D18
D19
D20
D21
D22
D23
D24
D25
D26
D27
D28
D29
D30
D31
D32
D33
D34
D35
D36
D37
D38
D39
D40
196.00
195.90
195.80
195.70
195.60
195.50
195.40
195.30
195.20
195.10
195.00
194.90
194.80
194.70
194.60
194.50
194.20
194.10
194.40
194.30
194.00
193.90
193.80
193.70
193.60
193.50
193.20
193.10
193.40
193.30
193.00
192.90
192.80
192.70
192.60
192.50
192.20
192.10
192.40
192.30
D
1
5
D
1
6
D
1
7
D
1
8
D
1
9
D
2
0
D
2
1
D
2
2
D
2
3
D
2
4
D
1
3
D
2
5
D
2
6
D
1
4
D
0
1
D
0
2
D
0
3
D
0
4
D
0
5
D
0
6
D
0
7
D
0
8
D
0
9
D
1
0
M
O
N
D
1
1
D
1
2
I
N
D
2
9
D
3
0
D
3
1
D
3
2
D
3
3
D
3
4
D
3
5
D
3
6
D
3
7
D
3
8
D
2
8
D
3
9
D
4
0
D
2
7
D01
D10
D09
D08
D07
D06
D05
D04
D03
D02
196.00
195.10
195.20
195.30
195.40
195.50
195.60
195.70
195.80
195.90
D11
D20
D19
D18
D17
D16
D15
D14
D13
D12
195.00
194.10
194.20
194.30
194.40
194.50
194.60
194.70
194.80
194.90
D21
D30
D29
D28
D27
D26
D25
D24
D23
D22
194.00
193.10
193.20
193.30
193.40
193.50
193.60
193.70
193.80
193.90
D31
D40
D39
D38
D37
D36
D35
D34
D33
D32
193.00
192.10
192.20
192.30
192.40
192.50
192.60
192.70
192.80
192.90

NOTE
Indicators
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1886
Interfaces
Table 17-33 Types and functions of the interfaces on the D40V board
IN LC Receives signals to be demultiplexed when connected
to an optical amplifier or ITL.
D01-D40 LC Transmits demultiplexed signals when connected to the
"IN" interface of the OTUs.
MCA8 or OPM8 board.
power, calculation formula: Pin (dBm) - Pmon (dBm)
= 10 x lg (90/10) = 10 dB).

Table 17-34 and Table 17-35 show the mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and
wavelengths of the D40V board.
Table 17-34 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the
TN11D40V01 board (C_EVEN)
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
D01 196.00 1529.55 D21 194.00 1545.32
D02 195.90 1530.33 D22 193.90 1546.12
D03 195.80 1531.12 D23 193.80 1546.92
D04 195.70 1531.90 D24 193.70 1547.72
D05 195.60 1532.68 D25 193.60 1548.51
D06 195.50 1533.47 D26 193.50 1549.32
D07 195.40 1534.25 D27 193.40 1550.12
D08 195.30 1535.04 D28 193.30 1550.92
D09 195.20 1535.82 D29 193.20 1551.72
D10 195.10 1536.61 D30 193.10 1552.52
D11 195.00 1537.40 D31 193.00 1553.33
D12 194.90 1538.19 D32 192.90 1554.13
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1887
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
D13 194.80 1538.98 D33 192.80 1554.94
D14 194.70 1539.77 D34 192.70 1555.75
D15 194.60 1540.56 D35 192.60 1556.55
D16 194.50 1541.35 D36 192.50 1557.36
D17 194.40 1542.14 D37 192.40 1558.17
D18 194.30 1542.94 D38 192.30 1558.98
D19 194.20 1543.73 D39 192.20 1559.79
D20 194.10 1544.53 D40 192.10 1560.61

Table 17-35 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the
TN11D40V02 board (C_ODD)
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
D01 196.05 1529.16 D21 194.05 1544.92
D02 195.95 1529.94 D22 193.95 1545.72
D03 195.85 1530.72 D23 193.85 1546.52
D04 195.75 1531.51 D24 193.75 1547.32
D05 195.65 1532.29 D25 193.65 1548.11
D06 195.55 1533.07 D26 193.55 1548.91
D07 195.45 1533.86 D27 193.45 1549.72
D08 195.35 1534.64 D28 193.35 1550.52
D09 195.25 1535.43 D29 193.25 1551.32
D10 195.15 1536.22 D30 193.15 1552.12
D11 195.05 1537.00 D31 193.05 1552.93
D12 194.95 1537.79 D32 192.95 1553.73
D13 194.85 1538.58 D33 192.85 1554.54
D14 194.75 1539.37 D34 192.75 1555.34
D15 194.65 1540.16 D35 192.65 1556.15
D16 194.55 1540.95 D36 192.55 1556.96
D17 194.45 1541.75 D37 192.45 1557.77
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1888
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
D18 194.35 1542.54 D38 192.35 1558.58
D19 194.25 1543.33 D39 192.25 1559.39
D20 194.15 1544.13 D40 192.15 1560.20

Laser Hazard Level
17.5.6 Valid Slots
Three slots house one D40V board.
Table 17-36 shows the valid slots for the D40V board.
Table 17-36 Valid slots for the D40V board
Product Valid Slots
IU32, IU35-IU40, IU45-IU50, IU53-IU58,
IU61-IU66
IU34

Therefore, the slot number of the D40V board displayed on the NM is the number of the leftmost
one of the three slots.
For example, if slots IU1, IU2, and IU3 house the D40V board, the slot number of the D40 board
17.5.7 Characteristic Code for the D40V
The characteristic code for the D40V board contains two characters. One indicates the band and
are odd or even.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1889
Table 17-37 Characteristic code for the D40V board
wavelengths.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11D40V board is CE, indicating C band and even
wavelengths.
Table 17-38 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the D40V board displayed on the NM
IN 1
D01-D40 2-41
MON 42

For D40V parameters, refer to Table 17-39.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1890
Table 17-39 D40V parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
Optical Interface
Name
are supported.
Input Power Loss
Threshold (dBm)
to generate an optical power loss
(MUT_LOS) alarm. When the actual input
optical power is lower than this threshold
value, the board reports the MUT_LOS alarm.
Optical Interface
Attenuation Ratio
(dB)
Value of Min.
Attenuation Rate
(dB) to Value of
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)
Default: Value of
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)
information.
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)
- Displays the maximum attenuation allowed
by a board optical interface.
Min. Attenuation
Rate (dB)
Configure Band C
Default: C
Actual Working
Band Parity
of the board.
Configure Working
Band Parity
All, Odd, Even
Default: All

17.5.10 D40V Specifications
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1891
Table 17-40 lists the optical specifications of the D40V board.
Table 17-40 Optical specifications of the D40V board
Item Unit Value
Insertion loss dB
8
a
Loss accuracy dB 1 (0 to 10 dB)
1.5 (>10 dB)
Maximum channel insertion loss difference dB
3
a
NOTE

(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11D40V 38.5 42.3

17.6 DFIU
DFIU: bidirectional fiber interface board
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1892
The available functional version of the DFIU board is TN21.
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN2
1DF
IU
N N N N N Y

17.6.2 Application
As a type of optical multiplexing and demultiplexing unit, The DFIU board multiplexes and
demultiplexes signals in two directions transmitted along the main path and optical supervisory
channel.
For the position of the DFIU board in the WDM system, see Figure 17-17.
Figure 17-17 Position of the DFIU board in the WDM system
DFIU SC2
DFIU
OA
OA

NOTE
The DFIU board is able to process signals in two directions. In the figure, the two DFIU boards actually
refer to one physical board.
The DFIU board is mainly used to multiplex and demultiplex signals.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1893
Table 17-41 Functions and features of the DFIU board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Multiplexes and demultiplexes signals in two directions transmitted
along the main path and optical supervisory channel.

The DFIU board consists of the optical module, control and communication module, and power
supply module.
Figure 17-18 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the DFIU board.
Figure 17-18 Functional modules and signal flow of the DFIU board
Optical module
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
EIN Demultiplexer
ETC
ETM
Multiplexer EOUT
ERC
ERM
WN Demultiplexer
WTC
WTM
Multiplexer WOUT
WRC
WRM

Signal Flow
l The multiplexer multiplexes the main path optical signals received through the WRC
optical interface and the supervisory channel signals received through the WRM optical
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1894
interface into one channel of optical signals. The multiplexed signals are then output
through the WOUT optical interface.
l The WIN optical interface receives line optical signals, which are then sent to the
demultiplexer. The demultiplexer demultiplexes the line optical signals into the main path
optical signals and supervisory channel signals, and then outputs them through the WTC
and WTM optical interfaces
l The multiplexer multiplexes the main path optical signals received through the ERC optical
interface and the supervisory channel signals received through the ERM optical interface
into one channel of optical signals. The multiplexed signals are then output through the
EOUT optical interface.
l The EIN optical interface receives line optical signals, which are then sent to the
optical signals and supervisory channel signals, and then outputs them through the ETC
and ETM optical interfaces
Module Function
l Optical module
Performs the multiplexing and demultiplexing of main path signals and supervisory channel
signals.
17.6.5 Front Panel
There are interfaces on the front panel of the DFIU board.
Figure 17-19 shows the front panel of the DFIU board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1895
Figure 17-19 Front panel of the DFIU board
DFIU
E
T
M
E
R
M
E
T
C
E
R
C
E
I
N
E
O
U
T
W
T
M
W
R
M
W
T
C
W
R
C
W
I
N
W
O
U
T

Interfaces
Table 17-42 Types and functions of the interfaces on the DFIU board
WIN LC Receives the west line signal.
WOUT LC Transmits the west line signal.
WTC LC Transmits the west main path signal.
WRC LC Receives the west main path signal.
WTM LC Transmits the west optical supervisory channel signal.
WRM LC Receives the west optical supervisory channel signal.
EIN LC Receives the east line signal.
EOUT LC Transmits the east line signal.
ETC LC Transmits the east main path signal.
ERC LC Receives the east main path signal.
ETM LC Transmits the east optical supervisory channel signal.
ERM LC Receives the east optical supervisory channel signal.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1896
Laser Hazard Level
17.6.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one DFIU board.
Table 17-43 shows the valid slots for the DFIU board.
Table 17-43 Valid slots for DFIU board
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 3800 chassis IU1, IU8, IU11

17.6.7 Characteristic Code for the DFIU
The characteristic code for the DFIU board contains one character, indicating the band adopted
by the board.
Table 17-44 Characteristic code for the DFIU board
First character Band Indicates the multiplexing
solution adopted by the
board. The value C represents
C band; the value L
represents L band.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN21DFIU board is C, indicating that the optical
signals are in C band.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1897
Table 17-45 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the DFIU board displayed on the NM
WIN/WOUT 1
WRM/WTM 2
WRC/WTC 3
EIN/EOUT 4
ERM/ETM 5
ERC/ETC 6

NOTE
For DFIU parameters, refer to Table 17-46.
Table 17-46 DFIU parameters
Optical
Interface/
Channel
Optical Interface
Name
An optical interface name contains a maximum of
64 characters. Any characters are supported.
Configure Band C
Default: C
Channel Number
Mode
C80 Mode, C40
Mode, CWDM
Mode
Default: C80
Mode
Sets the number of wavelengths supported by the
DFIU board.
Actual Working
Band Parity
- Queries the parity of the actual working band of the
board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1898
Configure
Working Band
Parity
All, Odd, Even
Default: All
PMD Coefficient
(ps/SQRT(km))
0 to 1
Default: 0.05
This parameter is available only in the ASON
system. Set the parameter according to the fiber
type. Usually, take the nominal value of the fiber.
Chromatic
Dispersion
Coefficient(ps/
(nm*km))
-15 to 30
Default: 0

17.6.10 DFIU Specifications
Table 17-47 Optical specifications of the DFIU board
Interface Item Unit Value
- Operating wavelength
range
nm 1529-1561
range of optical
supervisory channel
nm 1500-1520
- Optical return loss dB > 40
EIN-ETM
ERM-EOUT
WIN-WTM
WRM-WOUT
EIN-ETC
ERC-EOUT
WIN-WTC
WRC-WOUT
Insertion loss dB 1
EIN-ETM
WIN-WTM
Isolation dB > 40
EIN-ETC
WIN-WTC
Isolation dB > 12
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1899
- Polarization dependent
loss
dB < 0.2

(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN21DFIU 0.2 0.3

17.7 FIU
FIU: fiber interface unit
The available functional versions of the FIU board are TN11, TN12, TN13, TN14, and TN21.
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
1FI
U
N N N N Y N
TN1
2FI
U
Y Y Y Y Y N
TN1
3FI
U
Y Y Y Y Y
Y
a
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1900
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
4FI
U
Y Y Y Y Y Y
TN2
1FI
U
N N N N N Y
a: OptiX OSN 3800 only supports the TN13FIU01.

l Function:
The TN13FIU02 board supports high power input and works with the HBA board. The
TN14FIU board works with the RAU1 board. The other versions of the FIU board do
not support high power input. For details, see 17.7.2 Application.
The TN11FIU and TN12FIU boards support reporting of input optical power, but the
TN13FIU, TN14FIU, and TN21FIU boards do not. The TN14FIU supports the OUT
optical interface power detection. The other versions of the FIU board do not support
high power input. For details, see 17.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.
l Appearance:
The TN11FIU, TN14FIU, TN12FIU, and TN13FIU01 versions use the same front
panel. The TN13FIU02 version uses a different front panel from the preceding versions.
The TN21 version uses a different front panel from the preceding versions and is
applicable to case-shaped equipment. For details, see 17.7.5 Front Panel and 17.7.10
FIU Specifications.
Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11FIU TN12FIU/
TN13FIU
l Upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 6800
V100R004C01 or a later version.
l After the substitution, the TN12FIU/TN13FIU board is
functionally different from the TN11FIU board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1901
Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN12FIU TN13FIU l When the ASON function is not required. upgrade the NE
software to OptiX OSN 6800 V100R004C01 or a later
version, or upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 8800
l When the ASON function is required, upgrade the NE
software to OptiX OSN 6800 V100R004C03 or a later
l After the substitution, the TN13FIU board is functionally
different from the TN12FIU board.
TN13FIU None -
TN14FIU None -
TN21FIU None -

17.7.2 Application
As an optical multiplexing and demultiplexing unit, the FIU board multiplexes and
demultiplexes signals transmitted along the main optical path and optical supervisory channel.
For the position of the FIU board in the WDM system, see Figure 17-20, Figure 17-21, and
Figure 17-22.
Figure 17-20 Position of the TN11FIU/TN12FIU/TN13FIU01/TN21FIU/TN14FIU board in
the WDM system (normal optical power)
OTU
OA
OA
OTU
MUX
DMUX
OTU
OTU
OA
OA
SC1
FIU FIU
SC1
DMUX
MUX
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1902
Figure 17-21 Position of the TN13FIU02 board in the WDM system (high optical power)
OTU
OA
HBA
OTU
MUX
DMUX
OTU
OTU
HBA
OA
SC1
FIU
FIU
SC1
DMUX
MUX
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU

Figure 17-22 Position of the TN14FIU board (used together with RAU1/RAU2) in the WDM
system
OTU
OBU1
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OBU1
M
U
X
D
M
U
X
D
M
U
X
LINE
SYS
IN
OUT
F
I
U
SC1
SC1
RC
RM
OUT
OUT
RM
IN
TM
TC
RC
RAU1/
RAU2
SYS
IN
IN
TC
RAU1/
RAU2
OUT
LINE
M
U
X
F
I
U
TM

The FIU board multiplexes and demultiplexes signals, and monitors performance of optical
signals.
Table 17-48 Functions and features of the FIU
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Multiplexes and demultiplexes signals transmitted along the main
path and optical supervisory channel.
Online optical
performance
monitoring
affecting traffic.
Optical-layer ASON Supported by the TN12FIU/TN13FIU/TN14FIU..

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1903
The FIU board consists of the optical module, optical power detection module, control and
Figure 17-23 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN11FIU board, TN12FIU
board, and TN14FIU board.
Figure 17-24 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN13FIU board, and the
TN21FIU board.
Figure 17-23 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11FIU board, TN12FIU board, and
TN14FIU board
Multiplexer OUT
IN
Optical power detection module
Demultiplexer
RC
PIN
Splitter
MON
Optical module
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
RM
TC
TM

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1904
Figure 17-24 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN13FIU board and the TN21FIU
board
Multiplexer OUT
IN Demultiplexer
RC
RM
TC
TM
Splitter
MON
Optical module
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse

Signal Flow
l The multiplexer multiplexes the main path optical signals received through the RC optical
interface and the supervisory channel signals received through the RM optical interface
into one channel of optical signals, and then outputs the multiplexed signals through the
OUT optical interface.
l The IN optical interface receives line optical signals, which are then sent to the
optical signals and supervisory channel signals, and then outputs them through the TC and
TM optical interfaces
Module Function
l Optical module
Multiplexes and demultiplexes the main path signals and supervisory channel signals.
The splitter splits some optical signals from the line optical signals and sends the signals
to the MON interface for detection.
l Optical power detection module
NOTE
Only the TN11FIU and TN12FIU support the input optical power detection.
Only the TN14FIU support the OUT optical interface power detection.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1905
17.7.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces, and a laser hazard level label on the front panel of the FIU board.
Figure 17-25 shows the front panel of the TN11FIU/TN12FIU/TN14FIU board.
Figure 17-26 and Figure 17-27 show the front panel of the TN13FIU board.
Figure 17-28 shows the front panel of the TN21FIU board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1906
Figure 17-25 Front panel of the TN11FIU/TN12FIU/TN14FIU board
FIU
FIU
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
M
O
N
O
U
T
I
N
T
C
R
C
T
M
R
M
LASERRADIATION
CAUTION
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1907
Figure 17-26 Front panel of the TN13FIU01 board
FIU
FIU
STAT
M
O
N
O
U
T
I
N
T
C
R
C
T
M
R
M
LASERRADIATION
CAUTION
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1908
Figure 17-27 Front panel of the TN13FIU02 board
FIU
FIU
STAT
T
M
R
M
I
N
T
C
M
O
N
R
C
O
U
T
LASERRADIATION
CAUTION
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1909
Figure 17-28 Front panel of the TN21FIU board
FIU
T
M
R
M
T
C
R
C
I
N
O
U
T
M
O
N

Indicators
The TN11FIU/TN12FIU/TN14FIU board has four indicators on the front panel.
The TN13FIU board has one indicator on the front panel.
The TN21FIU board has no indicator on the front panel.
Interfaces
Table 17-49 Types and functions of the interfaces on the FIU board
OUT
LC
a
Transmits the line signal.
TC LC Transmits the main path signal.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1910
RC
LC
a
Receives the main path signal.
TM LC Transmits the 1510 nm optical supervisory
channel signal.
RM LC Receives the 1510 nm optical supervisory
channel signal.
MON LC Accomplishes online monitoring of optical
spectrum when it is connected to the input
interface of the MCA4, MCA8 or OPM8 board.
l TN11FIU/TN12FIU/TN13FIU01/
TN14FIU/TN21FIU: the MON port is a
1/99 tap of the total composite signal at the
OUT port (20 dB lower than the actual
signal power, calculation formula: Pout
(dBm) - Pmon (dBm) = 10 x lg (99/1) = 20
dB).
l TN13FIU02: the MON port is a 0.1/99.9 tap
of the total composite signal at the OUT port
(30 dB lower than the actual signal power,
calculation formula: Pout (dBm) - Pmon
(dBm) = 10 x lg (99.9/0.1) = 30 dB).
a: the interface type of the "RC" and "OUT" of the TN13FIU02 are "LSH/APC".

Laser Hazard Level
The laser hazard level of the board is HAZARD LEVEL 1M, indicating that the maximum output
optical power of each optical interface ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 21.3 dBm (136 mW).
NOTE
TN13FIU02: After the IPA function is enabled, the laser hazard level of the board is HAZARD LEVEL
1M, which indicates that the maximum power output by the optical port on the board ranges 10 dBm (10
mW) to 21.3 dBm (136 mW).
17.7.6 Valid Slots
One slots house one FIU board.
Table 17-50 shows the valid slots for the TN11FIU board.
Table 17-50 Valid slots for the TN11FIU board
Product Valid Slots

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1911
Product Valid Slots

Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 3800 chassis IU2IU5, IU11

Product Valid Slots

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1912
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 3800 chassis IU1, IU8, IU11

17.7.7 Characteristic Code for the FIU
The characteristic code for the FIU board consists of one character. The character indicates the
band adopted by the board.
Detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 17-55.
Table 17-55 Characteristic code for the FIU board
C band; the value L
represents L band.

For example, the characteristic code for the board is C, indicating that the optical signals are in
C band.
Table 17-56 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the FIU board displayed on the NM
IN/OUT 1
RM/TM 2
RC/TC 3
MON 4

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1913
NOTE
For FIU parameters, refer to Table 17-57.
Table 17-57 FIU parameters
Optical
Interface/
Channel
Optical Interface
Name
Input Power Loss
Threshold (dBm)
parameter queries the threshold value of the input
optical power, which can trigger a board to
generate an optical power loss (MUT_LOS) alarm.
When the actual input optical power is lower than
this threshold value, the board reports the
MUT_LOS alarm.
NOTE
This parameter is supported only by TN11FIU and
TN12FIU .
Configure Band C
Default: C
Channel Number
Mode
C80 Mode, C40
Mode, CWDM
Mode
Default: C80
Mode
FIU board.
Actual Working
Band Parity
board.
Configure
Working Band
Parity
All
Default: All
PMD Coefficient
(ps/SQRT(km))
0 to 1
Default: 0.05
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1914
Fiber Type G652 Fiber, G653
Fiber, LEAF
Fiber, TWRS
Fiber, TWC Fiber,
TWPLUS Fiber,
SMFLS Fiber,
G654B Fiber
Default: /
Specifies the type of a fiber.
Chromatic
Dispersion
Coefficient(ps/
(nm*km))
0 to 429496729.4
Default: 0
Send DCM
Dispersion
Compensation
Value(ps/nm)
0.0 to 6553.5
Default: 0
Specifies the dispersion compensation value for
the DCM at the transmit end.
Receive DCM
Dispersion
Compensation
Value(ps/nm)
0.0 to 6553.5
Default: 0
Specifies the dispersion compensation value for
the DCM at the receive end.

17.7.10 FIU Specifications
Table 17-58 Optical specifications of the FIU board
range
nm 1529-1561
range of optical
supervisory channel
nm TN11FIU/TN12FIU/TN13FIU/
TN21FIU: 1500-1520
TN14FIU: 1480-1520
IN-TM
RM-OUT
IN-TC
RC-OUT
Insertion loss dB 1
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1915
IN-TM Isolation dB > 40
IN-TC Isolation dB > 12
- Polarization dependent
loss
dB < 0.2

TN11FIU/TN12FIU/TN13FIU/TN14FIU:
(8.7 in.)
TN21FIU:
l Dimensions of front panel (H x W x D): 118.9 mm (4.7 in.) x 25.4 mm (1.0 in.) x 220.0
mm (8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11FIU/TN12FIU/
TN14FIU
4.2 4.6
TN13FIU/TN21FIU 0.2 0.3

17.8 ITL
ITL: interleaver board
The available functional versions of the ITL board are TN11 and TN12.
Huawei office.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1916
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
1IT
L
Y Y Y Y Y N
TN1
2IT
L
Y Y Y Y Y N

Type
TN11ITL 01 The optical module of the ITL01 board consists of one
interleaver and one coupler. The interleaver is used for
demultiplexing, and the coupler is used for multiplexing. The
board is mainly used in systems where the bit rate of a single
wavelength is 10 Gbit/s.
04 The optical module of the ITL04 board consists of two
interleavers. The interleaver is used for both demultiplexing
and multiplexing. The board is mainly used in systems where
the bit rate of a single wavelength is 10 Gbit/s, 40 Gbit/s or 100
Gbit/s.
TN12ITL 01 The optical module of the ITL01 board consists of one
interleaver and one coupler. The interleaver is used for
demultiplexing, and the coupler is used for multiplexing. The
board is mainly used in systems where the bit rate of a single
wavelength is 10 Gbit/s.

l Function:
The optical module on the TN11ITL04 board consists of two interleavers which are
used to multiplex/demultiplex optical signals. This board is mainly used in a system in
which the rate of a single wavelength is 40 Gbit/s or 100 Gbit/s. The optical module on
the ITL board of other versions consists of an interleaver and a coupler. The interleaver
is used to demultiplex optical signals, and the coupler is used to multiplex optical
signals. For details, see 17.8.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.
The TN12ITL board supports the VOA mode, but the ITL board of other versions does
not. For details, see 17.7.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS.
l Appearance:
The TN11 and TN12 versions use different front panels. For details, see 17.8.5 Front
Panel.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1917
l Specification:
The specifications vary according to versions. For details, see 17.8.10 ITL
Specifications.
Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11ITL TN12ITL Upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 6800 V100R004C01
or a later version or update the NE software to OptiX OSN 8800
V100R002C00 or later version.
NOTE
When used in a 40 Gbit/s or 100 Gbit/s systems, the TN12ITL board
cannot replace the TN11ITL board.
TN12ITL TN11ITL The TN11ITL board can replace the TN12ITL board only in
one application scenario: multiplexing/demultiplexing
between the signals at a channel spacing of 100 GHz and the
signals at a channel spacing of 50 GHz.
NOTE
In VOA mode, the TN11ITL board cannot replace the TN12ITL board.

17.8.2 Application
As a type of optical multiplexing and demultiplexing unit, the ITL board implements
multiplexing/demultiplexing between the optical signals at a channel spacing of 100 GHz and
the signals at a channel spacing of 50 GHz. The TN11ITL04 board is mainly used in systems
where the bit rate of a single wavelength is 40 Gbit/s or 100 Gbit/s.
For the position of the ITL board in the WDM system, see Figure 17-29.
Figure 17-29 Position of the ITL board in the WDM system
OA
OA
1
40
1
40
1
40
1
40
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
D40
D40
M40
40
1
40
1
M40
40
1
40
1
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
D40
D40
OA
OA
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
M40
M40
C_EVEN
C_ODD
C_EVEN
C_ODD
C_EVEN
C_ODD
C_EVEN
C_ODD
ITL ITL
WMU
WMU

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1918
NOTE
The WMU board must be used when the 10G OTU with fixed wavelengths is used in the system. In other
cases, the WMU board is optional.
The ITL board is mainly used to multiplex and demultiplex signals, and to detect online optical
spectrum.
Table 17-59 Functions and features of the ITL board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Multiplexes/demultiplexes optical signals between C_ODD signals
and C_EVEN signals.
Detection and
monitoring of the
online spectrum
affecting traffic.
Optical-layer ASON Supported by TN11ITL.

The ITL board consists of the optical module, control and communication module, and power
supply module.
Figure 17-30 and Figure 17-31 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the ITL board.
Figure 17-30 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11ITL01/TN12ITL board
SCC
Interleaver IN
Coupler
TO
TE
RO
RE
Optical module
OUT
MON
Splitter
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1919

Figure 17-31 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11ITL04 board

Signal Flow
TN11ITL01:
l The multiplexed optical signals received through the IN optical interface are sent to the
interleaver that splits the signals into two channels of optical signals in equal spacing. Then,
the two channels of optical signals are output through the TO and TE optical interfaces
respectively.
l The coupler multiplexes the two channels of optical signals input from the RO and RE
optical interfaces into one channel of optical signals. The one channel of optical signals is
output through the OUT optical interface.
TN11ITL04:
interleaver that splits the signals into two channels of optical signals in equal spacing. Then,
the two channels of optical signals are output through the TO and TE optical interfaces
respectively.
l The interleaver multiplexes the two channels of optical signals input from the RO and RE
TN12ITL:
interleaver. Then according to the requirement, get the signals all passed through the TE
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1920
interface or split the signals into two channels of optical signals in equal spacing. Then, the
two channels of optical signals are output through the TO and TE optical interfaces
respectively.
l The coupler multiplexes the two channels of optical signals input from the RO and RE
Module Function
l Optical module
Performs the transformation between C band optical signals in 100 GHz spacing and C
band optical signals in 50 GHz spacing.
17.8.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces, and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the ITL board.
Figure 17-32 and Figure 17-33 show the front panel of the ITL board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1921
Figure 17-32 Front panel of the TN11ITL board
ITL
ITL
STAT
M
O
N
O
U
T
I
N
T
O
R
O
T
E
R
E
LASERRADIATION
CAUTION
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1922
Figure 17-33 Front panel of the TN12ITL board
ITL
ITL
M
O
N
O
U
T
I
N
T
O
R
O
T
E
R
E
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
LASERRADIATION
CAUTION
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION

Indicators
There is one indicator on the front panel of TN11ITL board.
There are four indicators on the front panel of TN12ITL board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1923
Interfaces
Table 17-60 Types and functions of the interfaces on the ITL board
IN LC Accesses the optical signals at 50 GHz channel spacing
TE LC Outputs the optical signals at 100 GHz channel spacing
(C_EVEN multiplexed signals).
RE LC Accesses the optical signals at 100 GHz channel
spacing (C_EVEN multiplexed signals).
TO LC Outputs the optical signals at 100 GHz channel spacing
(C_ODD multiplexed signals).
RO LC Accesses the optical signals at 100 GHz channel
spacing (C_ODD multiplexed signals).
MON LC Connects to the input port on the MCA4, MCA8 or
OPM8 board so that the MCA4, MCA8 or OPM8 board
can detect the optical spectrum in service.
The optical power at the MON interface is 10/90 of the
optical power at the OUT interface, that is, the optical
power at the MON interface is 10 dB lower than the
optical power at the OUT interface, calculation
formula: Pout (dBm) - Pmon (dBm) = 10 x lg (90/10)
= 10 dB.

Laser Hazard Level
17.8.6 Valid Slots
One slots house one ITL board.
Table 17-61 shows the valid slots for the ITL board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1924
Table 17-61 Valid slots for the ITL board
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack TN11ITL: IU1-IU8, IU11-IU27, IU29-IU36
TN12ITL: IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36

17.8.7 Characteristic Code for the ITL
The characteristic code for the ITL board contains one character, indicating the band adopted
by the board.
Table 17-62 Characteristic code for the ITL board
C band.

For example, the characteristic code for the ITL board is C, indicating that the optical signals
are in C band.
Table 17-63 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the ITL board displayed on the NM
IN/OUT 1
RE/TE 2
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1925
RO/TO 3
MON 4

NOTE
For ITL parameters, refer to Table 17-64.
Table 17-64 ITL parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
Optical Interface
Name
Board Mode ITL Mode, VOA
Mode
Default: ITL Mode
Sets the working mode of a board.
l ITL Mode: Split the multiplexed optical
signals received through the IN optical
interface into two channels of signals in equal
spacing. Then, the two channels of optical
signals are output through the TO and TE
optical interfaces respectively.
l VOA Mode: The multiplexed optical signals
received through the IN optical interface all
passed through the TE interface.
NOTE
VOA Mode can be configured only when the
services are less than 40 channels.
NOTE
Only for TN12ITL.
Configure Band C
Default: C
Actual Working
Band Parity
- Queries the parity of the actual working band of
the board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1926
Configure
Working Band
Parity
All, Odd, Even
Default: All

17.8.10 ITL Specifications
Table 17-65 Optical specifications of the TN11ITL01
Item Unit Value
Input channel spacing
a
GHz 100
Output channel spacing
a
GHz 50
Insertion loss RE-OUT
RO-OUT
dB < 4.5
IN-TE
IN-TO
dB < 2.5
Maximum channel insertion loss difference dB < 1
Isolation IN-TE
IN-TO
dB > 25
Directivity dB > 45
PMD ps < 0.5
Polarization dependent loss dB < 0.5
Input optical power range dBm 26
a: The input and output ends are defined based on the multiplexing process of the interleaver.

Table 17-66 Optical specifications of the TN11ITL04
Item Unit Value
a
GHz 100
a
GHz 50
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1927
Item Unit Value
RO-OUT
dB < 3
IN-TE
IN-TO
dB < 3
Isolation IN-TE
IN-TO
dB > 25
Directivity dB > 45
PMD ps < 0.5

Table 17-67 Optical specifications of the TN12ITL
Item Unit Value
a
GHz 100
a
GHz 50
RO-OUT
dB < 4.5
IN-TE
IN-TO
dB < 3.5
Isolation IN-TE
IN-TO
dB > 22
Directivity dB > 45
PMD ps < 0.5
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1928

(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical power
consumption at 25C (77
F) (W)
Maximum power
consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11ITL 0.2 0.3
TN12ITL 10.0 11.5

17.9 SFIU
SFIU: fiber interface unit for sync timing
Only one functional version of the SFIU board is available, that is, TN11.
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
1SFI
U
Y Y Y Y Y Y

17.9.2 Application
As a type of optical multiplexing and demultiplexing unit, the SFIU board multiplexes and
demultiplexes signals transmitted along the main optical path and optical supervisory channel
(OSC).
For the position of the SFIU board in the WDM system, see Figure 17-34.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1929
Figure 17-34 Position of the SFIU board in the WDM system
OA
OA
S
F
I
U
OA
OA
S
F
I
U
ST2
OA
S
F
I
U
OA
S
F
I
U
SCC
SCC
SCC
NE1 NE2 NE3
ST2 ST2
OSC2
OSC1
SYS1 LINE1 LINE1 SYS1 SYS1 LINE1 LINE1 SYS1
SYS2 LINE2 LINE2 SYS2 SYS2 LINE2 LINE2 SYS2
OSC2
OSC1
OSC2
OSC1
OSC2
OSC1
TM1
RM1
RM2
TM2
TM1
RM1
RM2
TM2

NOTE
Of all the OSC boards, only the ST2 board can work with the SFIU board.
A Raman board cannot be configured between two NEs that are interconnected through SFIU boards.
The OSC2 optical port supports the 1511 nm wavelength, and the OSC1 optical port supports the 1491 nm
wavelength.
The SFIU board cannot be used together with the DAS1 board.
The SFIU board is mainly used to multiplex and demultiplex signals.
Table 17-68 Functions and features of the SFIU
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Multiplexes and demultiplexes signals transmitted along the main
With this function, neither commissioning nor delay compensation is
required for IEEE 1588V2 clocks.

The SFIU board consists of an optical module, control and communication module, and power
supply module.
Figure 17-35 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the SFIU board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1930
Figure 17-35 Functional modules and signal flow of the SFIU board
Optical module
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
SYS1
OSC1
OSC2
SYS2
LINE1
LINE2

Signal Flow
The LINE1 optical interface receives or transmits the OSC signals and the signals of the main
optical path. It cannot receive and transmit these signals at the same time.
The SYS1, SYS2, and LINE2 optical interfaces receive or transmit the main channel signal.
They cannot be receivers and transmitters at the same time.
The OSC1 and OSC2 optical interfaces receive or transmit the OSC signal. They cannot be
receivers and transmitters at the same time. In other words, if the OSC1 optical interface receives
the OSC signal, the OSC2 optical interface must transmit the OSC signal.
The following describes the signal flow of the SFIU board when the OSC1 optical interface
receives the OSC signal and the OSC2 optical interface transmits the OSC signal:
l The SFIU board receives the OSC signal from the associated ST2 board through the OSC1
optical interface and directs the signal out the LINE1 optical interface.
l The SFIU board receives the line signal through the LINE1 optical interface and
demultiplexes the line signal into a main channel signal and an OSC signal. Then the board
sends the OSC signal to the associated ST2 board through the OSC2 optical interface and
the main channel signal to the associated OA board through the SYS1 optical interface.
l The board receives the main channel signal from the associated OA board through the SYS2
optical interface and directs the signal out the LINE2 optical interface.
The following describes the signal flow of the SFIU board when the OSC2 optical interface
receives the OSC signal and the OSC1 optical interface transmits the OSC signal:
l The SFIU board receives the OSC signal from the associated ST2 board through the LINE1
optical interface and directs the signal out the OSC1 optical interface.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1931
l The SFIU board receives the main channel signal through the SYS1 optical interface and
the OSC signal through the OSC2 optical interface and multiplexes the two signals into a
multiplexed signal. Then the board sends the multiplexed signal out the LINE1 optical
interface.
l The SFIU board receives the main channel signal from the associated OA board through
the LINE2 optical interface and directs the signal out the SYS2 optical interface.
The OSC2 optical interface supports the 1511 nm wavelength, and the OSC1 optical interface
supports the 1491 nm wavelength.
Module Functions
l Optical module
Multiplexes the OSC signal and main channel signal into a multiplexed signal, and vice
versa.
17.9.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces, and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the SFIU board.
Figure 17-36 shows the front panel of the TN11SFIU board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1932
Figure 17-36 Front panel of the TN11SFIU board
SFIU
SFIU
L
I
N
E
1
L
I
N
E
2
S
Y
S
1
S
Y
S
2
O
S
C
1
O
S
C
2
STAT
LASERRADIATION
CAUTION
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION

Indicators
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1933
Interfaces
Table 17-69 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SFIU board
LINE1 LC The LINE1 optical interface is located on the
line side. It sends and receives OSC signals in
addition to transmitting main optical path
signals.
LINE2 LC The LINE2 optical interface is located on the
line side. It transmits the signals of the main
optical path.
SYS1 LC The SYS1 optical interface transmits the
signals in the main optical path.
SYS2 LC The SYS2 optical interface transmits the
signals in the main optical path.
OSC1 LC The OSC1 optical interface transmits the OSC
signals.
OSC2 LC The OSC2 optical interface transmits the OSC
signals.

Laser Hazard Level
17.9.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one SFIU board.
Table 17-70 shows the valid slots for the SFIU board.
Table 17-70 Valid slots for the SFIU board
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1934
Product Valid Slots

17.9.7 Characteristic Code for the SFIU
The characteristic code for the SFIU board consists of one character, indicating the band adopted
by the board.
Table 17-71 Characteristic code for the SFIU board
C band; the value L
represents L band.

C band.
Table 17-72 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SFIU board displayed on the NM
LINE1/LINE2 1
OSC1/OSC2 2
SYS1/SYS2 3

NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1935
For SFIU parameters, refer to Table 17-73.
Table 17-73 SFIU parameters
Optical
Interface/
Channel
Optical Interface
Name
Input Power Loss
Threshold (dBm)
parameter queries the threshold value of the input
optical power, which can trigger a board to
generate an optical power loss (MUT_LOS) alarm.
When the actual input optical power is lower than
this threshold value, the board reports the
MUT_LOS alarm.
Configure Band C
Default: C
Channel Number
Mode
C80 Mode, C40
Mode, CWDM
Mode
Default: C80
Mode
board.
Actual Working
Band Parity
board.
Configure
Working Band
Parity
All, Odd, Even
Default: All
PMD Coefficient
(ps/SQRT(km))
0 to 1
Default: 0.05
Fiber, G655 Fiber
Default: /
Sets the fiber type of the board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1936
Chromatic
Dispersion
Coefficient(ps/
(nm*km))
-15 to 30
Default: 0
Send DCM
Dispersion
Compensation
Value(ps/nm)
- Sets the DCM dispersion compensation value of
the transmitting direction.
Receiving DCM
Dispersion
Compensation
Value(ps/nm)
- Sets the DCM dispersion compensation value of
the receiving direction.

17.9.10 SFIU Specifications
Table 17-74 Optical specifications of the SFIU board
Interface Item Uni
t
Value
- Operating wavelength range (C band) nm 1528-1561
- Operating wavelength range of optical
supervisory channel
nm 1480 to 1520
LINE1-
SYS1
LINE2-
SYS2
LINE1-
OSC1
LINE1-
OSC2
LINE1-
OSC1 @c
Isolation dB 65
LINE1-
OSC2 @c
Isolation dB 40
OSC1-
SYS1
Directivity dB 45
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1937
Interface Item Uni
t
Value
SYS1-
OSC1
OSC1-
OSC2
Directivity dB 55
OSC2-
OSC1
- Polarization
dependent loss
C band dB < 0.1
OSC channel dB < 0.15

(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F)(W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F)(W)
TN11SFIU 0.2 0.3
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1938
18 Fixed Optical Add and Drop
Multiplexing Board
About This Chapter
18.1 Overview
Fixed optical add/drop multiplexer (FOADM) boards drop individual ITU-T G.694-compliant
optical signals from a multiplexed signal and send these optical signals to associated OTU
boards. In addition, FOADM boards also add and multiplex individual ITU-T G.694-compliant
optical signals into one multiplexed signal.
18.2 CMR1
CMR1: CWDM 1-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit
18.3 CMR2
18.4 CMR4
18.5 DMR1
DMR1: CWDM 1-channel bidirectional optical add/drop multiplexing board
18.6 MR2
MR2: 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit
18.7 MR4
18.8 MR8
18.9 MR8V
MR8V: 8-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit with VOA
18.10 SBM2
SBM2: 2-channel CWDM single-fiber bi-directional add/drop board
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Hardware Description 18 Fixed Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Board
1939
18.1 Overview
Fixed optical add/drop multiplexer (FOADM) boards drop individual ITU-T G.694-compliant
optical signals from a multiplexed signal and send these optical signals to associated OTU
boards. In addition, FOADM boards also add and multiplex individual ITU-T G.694-compliant
optical signals into one multiplexed signal.
Positions of FOADM Boards in a WDM System
Figure 18-1 shows the positions of FOADM boards in a WDM system.
Figure 18-1 Positions of FOADM boards in a WDM system
FOADM FOADM
O
T
U
O
T
U
East client-side
West client-side
West signal East signal
Pass-through
signal
SC2
OA
OA
F
I
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
West
line-side
ODF
OA
OA
F
I
U
East
line-side
ODF
Main Functions
The function differences between different FOADM boards lie in the WDM specifications and
number of add/drop signals. Table 18-1 lists the functions of FOADM boards. The DMR1 and
SBM2 boards support applications different from other FOADM boards. For details, see 18.5
DMR1 and 18.10 SBM2.
Table 18-1 Main functions of FOADM boards
Board WDM Specifications Function
CMR1 CWDM Adds/Drops and multiplexes one wavelength to/
from a multiplexed signal.
CMR2 CWDM Adds/Drops and multiplexes two signals to/from
a multiplexed signal.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1940
Board WDM Specifications Function
CMR4 CWDM Adds/Drops and multiplexes four signals to/from
DMR1 CWDM Adds/Drops and multiplexes one channel of 1310
nm wavelength in east direction and one in west
direction.
MR2 DWDM Adds/Drops and multiplexes two signals to/from
MR4 DWDM Adds/Drops and multiplexes four signals to/from
MR8 DWDM Adds/Drops and multiplexes eight signals to/
from a multiplexed signal.
MR8V DWDM Adds/Drops and multiplexes eight signals to/
from a multiplexed signal. Adjusts the
multiplexed input optical power of WDM-side
signal and the input optical power of cascade
ports for pass-through wavelengths.
SBM2 CWDM Adds/Drops two wavelengths to/from one
multiplexed signal and multiplexes the other two
wavelengths into another multiplexed signal. The
optical signals that are added or dropped, and the
optical signals that are multiplexed must be
carried over different wavelengths. The SBM2
unit is applied to single-fiber bidirectional
system.

18.2 CMR1
The available functional version of the CMR1 board is TN21.
Huawei office.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1941
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN2
1C
MR
1
N N N N N Y

18.2.2 Application
As a type of optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the CMR1 board adds/drops and multiplexes
one channel of signals.
For the position of the CMR1 in the CWDM system, see Figure 18-2.
Figure 18-2 Position of the CMR1 in the CWDM system
CMR1 CMR1
OTU OTU
Client side
Client side
IN
OUT
MO MI
A D
IN
OUT
MO MI
A D

The CMR1 is mainly used to add/drop and multiplex signals, to query wavelengths, and to
provide a cascading interface.
Table 18-2 Functions and features of the CMR1
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Adds/Drops and multiplexes one channel of signals to/from the
multiplexed signals.
WDM specification Supports the CWDM specification.
Cascade interface Provides the interface to cascade another optical add and drop
multiplexing board to achieve expansion.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1942
Function and
Feature
Description
Wavelength query Queries the wavelengths for the added or dropped signals.

The CMR1 board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module,
Figure 18-3 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the CMR1 board.
Figure 18-3 Functional modules and signal flow of the CMR1 board
OADM optical module
IN
D A
Drop optical
module
Add optical
module
OUT
MO MI
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
CPU Memory
Control
Communication

Signal Flow
The IN interface receives the multiplexed signals sent from the upstream station. The drop optical
module separates one wavelength from the signals and this wavelength is transmitted to the OTU
board or integrated client-side equipment through the D interface. The remaining wavelengths
are transmitted to other OADM equipment through the MO interface.
The MI interface receives the signals transmitted by the main path. The signals are multiplexed
with one wavelength added through the A interface by the add optical module. Then, the
multiplexed signals are transmitted through the OUT interface.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1943
Module Function
l OADM optical module
Adds/drops and multiplexes one channel of signals.
Provides an intermediate cascade interface for cascading to other OADM boards, so
that the system can add/drop more wavelengths at the local station.
18.2.5 Front Panel
There are interfaces on the front panel of the CMR1 board.
Figure 18-4 shows the front panel of the CMR1 board.
Figure 18-4 Front panel of the CMR1 board
CMR1
I
N
D
M
O
M
I
A
O
U
T

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1944
Interfaces
Table 18-3 Types and functions of the interfaces on the CMR1 board
A LC Receives the signals sent from the OTU or the
integrated client-side equipment.
D LC Transmits the signals to the OTU or the integrated
client-side equipment.
IN LC Receives the multiplexed signals.
OUT LC Transmits the multiplexed signals.
MI LC Cascading input interface, connected to the output
interface of another OADM board.
MO LC Cascading output interface, connected to the input

Laser Hazard Level
18.2.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses on CMR1 board.
Table 18-4 shows the valid slots for the CMR1 board.
Table 18-4 Valid slots for CMR1 board
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 3800 chassis IU1, IU8, and IU11

18.2.7 Characteristic Code for the CMR1
The characteristic code for the CMR1 board contains four digits, indicating the wavelength that
carries the signals processed by the board.
Table 18-5 lists details on the characteristic code for the CMR1.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1945
Table 18-5 Characteristic code for the CMR1
First four digits Wavelength that carries
optical signals
Indicates the wavelength that
carries the optical signals
processed by the board.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN21CMR1 is 1471, indicating that the wavelength
that carries the signals is 1471 nm.
Table 18-6 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the CMR1 displayed on the NM
A/D 1
MI/MO 2
IN/OUT 3

NOTE
For CMR1 parameters, refer to Table 18-7.
Table 18-7 CMR1 parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1946
name.
Actual Wavelength No./
Add-Drop Wavelength
( nm ) / Frequency
( THz )
- Queries the operating wavelength at
the WDM-side optical interface of a
board.
Configure Wavelength
No./Add-Drop
Wavelength ( nm ) /
Frequency ( THz )
11/1471.00/208.170 to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default:/
Sets the operating wavelength at the
WDM-side optical interface of a
board.
Configure Band Type CWDM
Default: CWDM
Sets the band type.

18.2.10 CMR1 Specifications
Table 18-8 lists the optical specifications of the CMR1 board.
Table 18-8 Optical specifications of the CMR1 board
Correspondi
ng interfaces
Item Unit Value
- Operating wavelength range nm 1260-1360
IN-D Drop channel insertion loss dB 1
Isolation dB > 40
A-OUT Add channel insertion loss dB 1
IN-MO
MI-OUT
Isolation dB 25
- Reflectance dB -40

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1947
Rules for Adding/Dropping Wavelength
The CMR1 adds/drops and multiplexes one channel of signals to/from the multiplexed signals.
There are no rules for adding/dropping signals.
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN21CMR1 0.2 0.3

18.3 CMR2
The available functional versions of the CMR2 board are TN11 and TN21.
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
1C
MR
2
Y Y Y Y Y Y
TN2
1C
MR
2
N N N N N Y

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1948
l Appearance:
The TN11 and TN21 versions use different front panels with different dimensions. See
18.3.5 Front Panel and 18.3.10 CMR2 Specifications.
l Specification:
The mechanical specifications vary according to versions. For details, see 18.3.10
CMR2 Specifications.
The CMR2 boards of different versions cannot replace each other.
18.3.2 Application
two channels of signals.
For the position of the CMR2 board in the CWDM system, see Figure 18-5.
Figure 18-5 Position of the CMR2 board in the CWDM system
CMR2 CMR2
OTU OTU OTU OTU
Client side Client side
IN
A1
MI MO
D2 D1 A2
OUT IN
A1
MI MO
D2 D1 A2
OUT

The CMR2 board is mainly used to add/drop and multiplex two channels of signals, to query
wavelengths, and to provide a cascading interface.
Table 18-9 Functions and features of the CMR2 board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Adds/Drops and multiplexes two channels of signals to/from the
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1949
Function and
Feature
Description
WDM specification Supports the CWDM specifications.
Cascading interface Provides the interface to cascade another optical add and drop

OADM optical
module
IN
D1 D2 A1 A2
Drop optical
module
Add optical
module
OUT
MO MI
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse

Signal Flow
module separates two wavelengths from the signals and these two wavelengths are transmitted
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1950
to the OTU boards or integrated client-side equipment through the D1 and D2 interfaces. The
remaining wavelengths are transmitted to other OADM equipment through the MO interface.
with two wavelengths added through the A1 and A2 interfaces by the add optical module. Then,
the multiplexed signals are transmitted through the OUT interface.
Module Function
Performs the add/drop multiplexing of two wavelengths.
18.3.5 Front Panel
There are one indicator and eight interfaces on the front panel of the CMR2 board.
Figure 18-7 shows the front panel of the TN11CMR2 board.
Figure 18-8 shows the front panel of the TN21CMR2 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1951
Figure 18-7 Front panel of the TN11CMR2 board
CAUTION
HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE
LASER RADIATION
DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH
CMR2
CMR2
STAT
O
U
T
I
N
M
O
M
I
D
1
A
1
D
2
A
2
LASERRADIATION
CAUTION
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1952

CMR2
I
N
D
1
D
2
M
O
M
I
A
2
A
1
O
U
T

Indicators
There is one indicator on the front panel of the TN11CMR2 board. There is no indicator on the
front panel of the TN21CMR2 board.
Interfaces
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1953
A1-A2 LC Receives the signals sent from the OTU or the
D1-D2 LC Transmits the signals to the OTU or the integrated

Laser Hazard Level
18.3.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one CMR2 board.
Table 18-11 shows the valid slots for the TN11CMR2 board.
Table 18-11 Slots for the TN11CMR2
Product Slots

Product Slots
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1954

The characteristic code for the CMR2 board contains eight digits, indicating the two wavelengths
that carry the signals processed by the board.
Table 18-13 Characteristic code for the CMR2 board
First four digits First wavelength that carries
optical signals
Indicates the first wavelength
that carries the optical signals
Last four digits Second wavelength that
carries optical signals
Indicates the second
wavelength that carries the
the board.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11CMR2 is 14711571.
l "1471" indicates that the first wavelength is 1471 nm.
l "1571" indicates that the second wavelength is 1571 nm.
Table 18-14 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the CMR2 board displayed on the NM
A1/D1 1
A2/D2 2
MI/MO 3
IN/OUT 4

NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1955
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
name.
Add-Drop Wavelength
( nm ) / Frequency
( THz )
board.
No./Add-Drop
Wavelength ( nm ) /
Frequency ( THz )
11/1471.00/208.170 to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /
board.
Default: CWDM
Sets the band type.

Correspondin
g interfaces
Item Unit Value
range
nm 1271-1611
- Adjacent channel spacing nm 20
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1956
Correspondin
g interfaces
Item Unit Value
IN-D1
IN-D2
0.5 dB spectral width nm 6.5
Drop channel insertion
loss
dB 1.5
Adjacent channel
isolation
dB > 25
Non-adjacent channel
isolation
dB > 35
A1-OUT
A2-OUT
Add channel insertion
loss
dB 1.5
IN-MO
MI-OUT
Isolation dB 13
- Maximum reflectance dB -40

NOTE
The equipment can transmit the 1271 nm wavelength by connecting the CMR2 board to corresponding
third-party equipment, though the equipment does not provide the 1271 nm OTU board and line board.
The CMR2 adds/drops and multiplexes two random channels of signals to/from the multiplexed
signals. There are no rules for adding/dropping signals.
The mechanical specifications of TN11CMR2 are as follows.
(8.7 in.)
The mechanical specifications of TN21CMR2 are as follows.
(8.7 in.)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1957
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11CMR2/TN21CMR2 0.2 0.3

18.4 CMR4
The available functional versions of the CMR4 board are TN11 and TN21.
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
1C
MR
4
Y Y Y Y Y Y
TN2
1C
MR
4
N N N N N Y

l Appearance:
The TN11 and TN21 versions have different front panels that have different dimensions.
See 18.4.5 Front Panel and 18.4.10 CMR4 Specifications.
l Specification:
The mechanical specifications vary according to the version of the board that you use.
For details, see 18.4.10 CMR4 Specifications.
The CMR4 boards of different versions cannot replace each other.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1958
18.4.2 Application
four channels of signals.
For the position of the CMR4 board in the CWDM system, see Figure 18-9.
Figure 18-9 Position of the CMR4 board in the CWDM system
CMR4 CMR4
OTU
4 4
OTU OTU OTU
Client side
Client side
IN
OUT
D1 D4
MO
MI
A1 A4
IN
OUT
D1 D4
MO
MI
A1 A4

The CMR4 board adds/drops and multiplexes signals, queries wavelengths, and provides a
cascading interface.
Table 18-17 Functions and features of the CMR4 board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Adds/Drops and multiplexes four channels of signals to/from the

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1959
OADM optical module
IN
D1 D4 A1 A4
Drop optical
module
Add optical
module
OUT
MO MI
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse

Signal Flow
module separates four wavelengths from the signals and these four wavelengths are transmitted
to the OTU boards or integrated client-side equipment through the D1 to D4 interfaces. The
with four wavelengths added through the A1 to A4 interfaces by the add optical module. Then,
Module Function
Performs the add/drop multiplexing of four wavelengths.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1960
18.4.5 Front Panel
There are one indicator and 12 interfaces on the front panel of CMR4 board.
Figure 18-11 show the front panel of the TN11CMR4 board.
Figure 18-12 show the front panel of the TN21CMR4 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1961
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION
CMR4
CMR4
STAT
O
U
T
I
N
M
O
M
I
D
1
A
1
D
2
A
2
D
3
A
3
D
4
A
4
LASERRADIATION
CAUTION
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1962

CMR4
D
4
M
O
M
I
A
4
A
3
A
2
A
1
O
U
T
D
2
D
3
I
N
D
1

Indicators
There is one indicator on the front panel of the TN11CMR4 board. There is no indicator on the
front panel of the TN21CMR4 board.
Interfaces
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1963

Laser Hazard Level
18.4.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one CMR4 board.
Product Slots

Product Slots
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1964

The characteristic code for the CMR4 board contains eight digits, indicating the four
wavelengths that carry the signals processed by the board.
Table 18-21 Characteristic code for the CMR4 board
First and second digits First wavelength that carries
optical signals
Indicates the middle two
digits of the first wavelength
Third and fourth digits Second wavelength that
digits of the second
the board.
Fifth and sixth digits Third wavelength that carries
optical signals
digits of the third wavelength
Seventh and eighth digits Fourth wavelength that
digits of the fourth
the board.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11CMR4 board is 47495961.
l "59" indicates that the third wavelength is 1591 nm.
l "61" indicates that the fourth wavelength is 1611 nm.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1965
Table 18-22 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the CMR4 board displayed on the NM
A1/D1 1
A2/D2 2
A3/D3 3
A4/D4 4
MI/MO 5
IN/OUT 6

NOTE
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
name.
Add-Drop Wavelength
( nm ) / Frequency
( THz )
board.
No./Add-Drop
Wavelength ( nm ) /
Frequency ( THz )
11/1471.00/208.170 to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /
board.
Default: CWDM
Sets the band type.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1966
Correspondin
g interfaces
Item Unit Value
range
nm 1271-1611 (1371 nm excluded)
- Adjacent channel spacing nm 20
IN-D1
IN-D2
IN-D3
IN-D4
loss
dB 2
Adjacent channel
isolation
dB > 25
isolation
dB > 35
A1-OUT
A2-OUT
A3-OUT
A4-OUT
loss
dB 2
IN-MO
MI-OUT
Isolation dB 13

NOTE
The equipment can transmit the 1291 nm wavelength by connecting the CMR4 board to corresponding
third-party equipment, though the equipment does not provide the 1291 nm OTU board and line board.
Rules for Adding/Dropping Wavelengths
The CMR4 board adds/drops and multiplexes four channels of signals to/from the multiplexed
signals. There are four wavelength groups.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1967
Table 18-25 Rules for adding/dropping wavelengths on the CMR4 board
Group Wavelength (nm)
A1/D1 A2/D2 A3/D3 A4/D4
1 1291 1311 1331 1351
2 1391 1411 1431 1451
3 1471 1491 1591 1611
4 1511 1531 1551 1571

The mechanical specifications of TN11CMR4 board are as follows:
(8.7 in.)
The mechanical specifications of TN21CMR4 board are as follows:
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11CMR4/TN21CMR4 0.2 0.3

18.5 DMR1
DMR1: CWDM 1-channel bidirectional optical add/drop multiplexing board
The available functional versions of the DMR1 board are TN11 and TN21.
Huawei office.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1968
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
1D
MR
1
Y Y N N Y Y
TN2
1D
MR
1
N N N N N Y

l Appearance:
The TN11DMR1 and TN21DMR1 versions use different front panels with different
dimensions. See 18.5.5 Front Panel and 18.5.10 DMR1 Specifications.
l Specification:
The mechanical specifications vary according to versions. For details, see 18.5.10
DMR1 Specifications.
The DMR1 boards of different versions cannot replace each other.
18.5.2 Application
The DMR1 board is used to add/drop and multiplex a 1310 nm wavelength in the east and west
directions.
For the position of the DMR1 board in the CWDM system, see Figure 18-13.
Figure 18-13 Position of the DMR1 board in the CWDM system
OTU OTU
D
M
R
1
O
A
D
M
O
A
D
M
D
M
R
1
WA ED
WIN
WOUT
WD EA
WMO
WMI
EMO
EMI
1310nm
1310nm
1310nm
1310nm
EIN
EOUT

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1969
NOTE
The DMR1 board is able to process signals in two directions. In the figure, the two DMR1 boards are
actually one physical board.
In the figure, the OADM boards are actually the CMR2 or CMR4 boards.
The OADM board in the figure supports wavelengths ranging from 1471 nm to 1611 nm.
The DMR1 board is mainly used to add/drop and multiplex signals, to concatenate ports, and to
query wavelengths.
Table 18-26 provides the detailed features and functions of the DMR1 board.
Table 18-26 Functions and features of the DMR1 board
Functions and
Features
Description
Basic functions Adds/drops and multiplexes a 1310 nm wavelength in the east and
west directions.
Port concatenation Provides the interface to cascade another optical add and drop

The DMR1 board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module,
Figure 18-14 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the DMR1 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1970
Figure 18-14 Functional modules and signal flow of the DMR1 board
OADM optical module
WIN
Drop optical
module
Add optical
module
EOUT
WD ED WA EA
EIN
WOUT
WMO EMO WMI EMI
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
Required
voltage
Fuse

Signal Flow
WIN receives signals from the west main path. The Drop optical module extracts 1310 nm signals
from the received signals. The extracted signals are dropped through WD. The remaining signals
are connected to other OADM equipment through WMO. EIN receives signals from the east
main path. The Drop optical module extracts 1310 nm signals from the received signals. The
extracted signals are dropped through ED. The remaining signals are connected to other OADM
equipment through EMO.
Local 1310 nm signals are added through EA, and other signals are added through EMI. After
being multiplexed by the Add optical module, the signals are sent to east main path by EOUT.
Similarly, Local 1310 nm signals are added through WA, and other signals are added through
WMI. After being multiplexed by the Add optical module, the signals are sent to west main path
by WOUT.
Module Function
Performs the add/drop multiplexing of 1310nm signals and other signals.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1971
18.5.5 Front Panel
There are interfaces on the front panel of the board.
Figure 18-15 shows the front panel of the TN11DMR1 board.
Figure 18-16 shows the front panel of the TN21DMR1 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1972
Figure 18-15 Front panel of the TN11DMR1 board
DMR1
DMR1
STAT
W
O
U
T
W
M
O
W
M
I
E
M
O
E
M
I
W
D
W
A
E
D
E
A
E
O
U
T
W
I
N
E
I
N
LASERRADIATION
CAUTION
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1973

Figure 18-16 Front panel of the TN21DMR1 board
DMR1
W
I
N
W
D
W
M
O
W
M
I
W
A
W
O
U
T
E
I
N
E
O
U
T
E
D
E
M
O
E
M
I
E
A

Indicators
There is one indicator on the front panel of the TN11DMR1 board. There is no indicator on the
front panel of the TN21DMR1 board.
Interfaces
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1974
Table 18-27 Types and functions of the interfaces on the DMR1 board
EA/WA LC Receives the 1310 nm optical signals that west and east
client-side equipment transmits.
ED/WD LC Transmits 1310 nm optical signals to west and east
EIN/WIN LC Receives the multiplexed signals on west and east main
paths.
EOUT/WOUT LC Transmits multiplexed signals to west and east main
paths.
EMI/WMI LC Serves as concatenation input optical interface. It
connects to the output interfaces on other boards.
EMO/WMO LC Serves as concatenation output optical interface. It
connects to the input interfaces on other boards.

Laser Hazard Level
18.5.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one DMR1 board.
Table 18-28 shows the valid slots for the TN11DMR1 board.
Table 18-29 shows the valid slots for the TN21DMR1 board.
Table 18-28 Slots for the TN11DMR1
Product Slots

Table 18-29 Slots for the TN21DMR1
Product Slots

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1975
18.5.7 Characteristic Code for the DMR1
The characteristics code for the DMR1 board contains four digits, identifying the frequency of
the optical signals processed by the board.
Table 18-30 provides the details on the characteristics code.
Table 18-30 Characteristic code for the DMR1 board
Barcode Meaning Description
First to fourth digits Optical signal frequency Frequency of the optical
signals processed by the
board

For example, the characteristics code of the TN11DMR1 board is 9210. The code indicates that
the frequency of the optical signals is 192.1 THz.
Interface Display
Table 18-31 lists the number on the NM indicating each optical interface on the board.
Table 18-31 Number on the NM indicating each optical interface on the DMR1 board
Interface on Front Panel Number on the NM
WA/WD 1
EA/ED 2
WMI/WMO 3
WIN/WOUT 4
EMI/EMO 5
EIN/EOUT 6

NOTE
For parameters of the DMR1, refer to Table 18-32.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1976
Table 18-32 DMR1 parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
name.
Add-Drop Wavelength
( nm ) / Frequency
( THz )
No./Add-Drop
Wavelength ( nm ) /
Frequency ( THz )
- Used to configure the operating
wavelength at the WDM-side optical
interface of a board.
Configure Band Type C+L
Default: C+L
Used to configure the band type.

18.5.10 DMR1 Specifications
Table 18-33 Optical specifications of the DMR1 board
Correspondin
g interfaces
Item Unit Value
EA/ED/WA/
WD
range
nm 1260-1360
EIN-ED
WIN-WD
loss
dB 1
Isolation dB 40
EA-EOUT
WA-WOUT
loss
dB 1
Isolation dB 40
EIN-EMO Insertion loss dB 0.8
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1977
Correspondin
g interfaces
Item Unit Value
WIN-WMO
Isolation dB 25
EMI-EOUT
WMI-WOUT
Isolation dB 15

The DMR1 board adds/drops and multiplexes a 1310 nm wavelength in the east and west
directions from the multiplexed signals.
Mechanical specifications of the TN11DMR1 board:
(8.7 in.)
Mechanical specifications of the TN21DMR1 board:
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11DMR1/TN21DMR1 0.2 0.3

18.6 MR2
The available functional versions of the MR2 board are TN11 and TN21.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1978
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
1M
R2
Y Y Y Y Y Y
TN2
1M
R2
N N N N N Y

l Appearance:
The TN11MR2 and TN21MR2 versions use different front panels with different
dimensions. See 18.6.5 Front Panel and 18.6.10 MR2 Specifications.
l Specification:
The mechanical specifications vary according to versions. For details, see 18.6.10 MR2
Specifications.
The MR2 boards of different versions cannot replace each other.
18.6.2 Application
As a type of optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the MR2 board adds/drops and multiplexes
two channels of signals.
For the position of the MR2 board in the DWDM system, see Figure 18-17.
Figure 18-17 Position of the MR2 board in the DWDM system
MR2
OA OA
OA
OA
MR2
OTU OTU OTU OTU
IN OUT
D1 D2
MO MI
A1 A2
IN
OUT
D1 D2
MO MI
A1 A2
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1979

The MR2 board is mainly used to add/drop and multiplex signals, to query wavelengths, and to
Table 18-34 Functions and features of the MR2 board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Adds/drops and multiplexes two random channels of signals to/from
the multiplexed signals.
WDM specification Supports the DWDM specifications.
Optical-layer ASON Supported by the TN11MR2.

The MR2 board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module, and
Figure 18-18 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the MR2 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1980
Figure 18-18 Functional modules and signal flow of the MR2 board
OADM optical
module
IN
D1 D2 A1 A2
Drop optical
module
Add optical
module
OUT
MO MI
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse

Signal Flow
module separates two wavelengths from the signals and these two wavelengths are transmitted
to the OTU boards or integrated client-side equipment through the D1 and D2 interfaces. The
with two wavelengths added through the A1 and A2 interfaces by the add optical module. Then,
Module Function
Adds/drops and multiplexes two channels of signals.
Provides an intermediate cascading interface for cascading to other OADM boards, so
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1981
18.6.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the MR2 board.
Figure 18-19 shows the front panel of the TN11MR2 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1982
Figure 18-19 Front panel of the TN11MR2 board
MR2
MR2
STAT
O
U
T
I
N
M
O
M
I
D
1
A
1
D
2
A
2
LASERRADIATION
CAUTION
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1983

MR2
I
N
D
1
D
2
M
O
M
I
A
2
A
1
O
U
T

Indicators
There is one indicator on the front panel of the TN11MR2 board. There is no indicator on the
front panel of the TN21MR2 board.
Interfaces
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1984
Table 18-35 Types and functions of the interfaces on the MR2 board

Laser Hazard Level
18.6.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one MR2 board.
Table 18-36 and Table 18-37 shows the valid slots for the MR2 board.
Table 18-36 Valid slots for the TN11MR2 board
Product Slot

Product Slot

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1985
18.6.7 Characteristic Code for the MR2
The characteristic code for the MR2 board contains eight digits that indicate the frequencies of
the two signals processed by the board.
Table 18-38 Characteristic code for the MR2 board
First four digits Frequency of the first optical
signal
Indicates the last four digits
of the frequency that carries
the first optical signal.
Last four digits Frequency of the second
optical signal
the second optical signal.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MR2 board is 93609370.
l "9360" indicates that the frequency of the first optical signal is 193.60 THz.
l "9370" indicates that the frequency of the second optical signal is 193.70 THz.
Table 18-39 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the MR2 board displayed on the NM
A1/D1 1
A2/D2 2
MI/MO 3
IN/OUT 4

NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1986
For MR2 parameters, refer to Table 18-40.
Table 18-40 MR2 parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
name.
Add-Drop Wavelength
( nm ) / Frequency
( THz )
board.
No./Add-Drop
Wavelength ( nm ) /
Frequency ( THz )
1/1529.16/196.050 to
80/1560.61/192.100
Default: /
board.
Configure Band Type C
Default: C
Sets the band type.

18.6.10 MR2 Specifications
Table 18-41 lists the optical specifications of the MR2 board.
Table 18-41 Optical specifications of the MR2 board
Correspondin
g interfaces
Item Unit Value
range
nm 1529-1561
- Adjacent channel spacing GHz 100
IN-D1
IN-D2
-1dB spectral width nm 0.2
loss
dB 1.5
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1987
Correspondin
g interfaces
Item Unit Value
Adjacent channel
isolation
dB > 25
isolation
dB > 35
A1-OUT
A2-OUT
loss
dB 1.5
IN-MO
MI-OUT
Isolation dB > 13
- Polarization dependence
loss
dB < 0.2

The MR2 adds/drops and multiplexes random two channels of signals to/from the multiplexed
signals. There are no rules for adding/dropping wavelengths.
The mechanical specifications of TN11MR2 are as follows:
(8.7 in.)
The mechanical specifications of TN21MR2 are as follows:
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11MR2/TN21MR2 0.2 0.3

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1988
18.7 MR4
The available functional versions of the MR4 board are TN11 and TN21.
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
1M
R4
Y Y Y Y Y Y
TN2
1M
R4
N N N N N Y

l Appearance:
The TN11MR4 and TN21MR4 versions use different front panels with different
dimensions. See 18.7.5 Front Panel and 18.7.10 MR4 Specifications.
l Specification:
The mechanical specifications vary according to versions. For details, see 18.7.10 MR4
Specifications.
The MR4 boards of different versions cannot replace each other.
18.7.2 Application
As a type of optical add/drop multiplexing unit, the MR4 board adds/drops and multiplexes four
channels of signals.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1989
MR4
OA OA
OA
OA
MR4
OTU
4 4
OTU OTU OTU
IN
OUT
D1 D4
MO
MI
A1 A4
IN
OUT
D1 D4
MO
MI
A1 A4

Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Adds/drops and multiplexes four consecutive channels of signals to/
from the multiplexed signals.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1990
OADM optical module
IN
D1 D4 A1 A4
Drop optical
module
Add optical
module
OUT
MO MI
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse

Signal Flow
module separates four wavelengths from the signals and these four wavelengths are transmitted
with four wavelengths added through the A1 to A4 interfaces by the add optical module. Then,
Module Function
Adds/drops and multiplexes four channels of signals.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1991
18.7.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and a laser hazard level label on the front panel of the MR4 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1992
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION
MR4
MR4
STAT
O
U
T
I
N
M
O
M
I
D
1
A
1
D
2
A
2
D
3
A
3
D
4
A
4
LASERRADIATION
CAUTION
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1993

Figure 18-24 shows the front panels of the TN21MR4 boards respectively.
MR4
D
4
M
O
M
I
A
4
A
3
A
2
A
1
O
U
T
D
2
D
3
I
N
D
1

Indicators
There is one indicator on the front panel of the TN11MR4 board. There is no indicator on the
front panel of the TN21MR4 board.
Interfaces
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1994

Laser Hazard Level
18.7.6 Valid Slots
One slot house one MR4 board.
Table 18-44 and Table 18-45 shows the valid slots for the MR4 board.
Product Slot
OptiX OSN 6800 subrack IU1-U17

Product Slot

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1995
The characteristic code for the MR4 board contains eight digits. Each digit indicates the
frequencies of the first and the fourth signals processed by the board.
First four digits Frequency of first optical
signal
the first optical signal
Last four digits Frequency of forth optical
signal
the fourth optical signal

For example, the characteristic code for the MR4 board is 92109240.
l "9240" indicates that the frequency of the fourth optical signal is 192.40 THz.
Since the four channels of optical signals processed by the MR4 board are in sequence, it can
be inferred that:
l The frequency of the second channel of optical signals is 192.20 THz.
l The frequency of the third channel of optical signals is 192.30 THz.
For the mapping between the characteristic codes of the MR4 boards and signal frequencies, see
Table 18-50 in 18.7.10 MR4 Specifications.
A1/D1 1
A2/D2 2
A3/D3 3
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1996
A4/D4 4
MI/MO 5
IN/OUT 6

NOTE
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
name.
Add-Drop Wavelength
( nm ) / Frequency
( THz )
board.
No./Add-Drop
Wavelength ( nm ) /
Frequency ( THz )
1/1529.16/196.050 to
80/1560.61/192.100
Default: /
board.
Default: C
Sets the band type.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1997
range
nm 1529-1561
IN-D1
IN-D2
IN-D3
IN-D4
loss
dB 2.2
Adjacent channel
isolation
dB > 25
isolation
dB > 35
A1-OUT
A2-OUT
A3-OUT
A4-OUT
loss
dB 2.2
IN-MO
MI-OUT
Isolation dB > 13

Rules for Adding/Dropping Wavelengths
The MR4 board adds/drops and multiplexes four consecutive channels of signals to/from the
multiplexed signals. There are ten groups of wavelengths.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1998
Table 18-50 Rules for adding/dropping wavelengths of the MR4 board
G
r
o
u
p
C
h
ar
a
ct
er
is
ti
c
C
o
d
e
A1/D1 A2/D2 A3/D3 A4/D4
Wa
vel
en
gth
No
.
Wav
elen
gth
(nm)
Fre
que
ncy
(T
Hz)
W
a
v
el
e
n
gt
h
N
o.
Wa
vele
ngt
h
(nm
)
Fre
qu
enc
y
(T
Hz
)
W
av
el
en
gt
h
N
o.
Wa
vele
ngt
h
(nm
)
Fre
que
ncy
(TH
z)
W
av
el
en
gt
h
N
o.
Wave
lengt
h
(nm)
Freq
uenc
y
(THz
)
1 9
2
1
0
9
2
4
0
80 1560
.61
192.
10
7
8
155
9.79
192
.20
76 155
8.98
192.
30
74 1558.
17
192.4
0
2 9
2
5
0
9
2
8
0
72 1557
.36
192.
50
7
0
155
6.55
192
.60
68 155
5.75
192.
70
66 1554.
94
192.8
0
3 9
2
9
0
9
3
2
0
64 1554
.13
192.
90
6
2
155
3.33
193
.00
60 155
2.52
193.
10
58 1551.
72
193.2
0
4 9
3
3
0
9
3
6
0
56 1550
.92
193.
30
5
4
155
0.12
193
.40
52 154
9.32
193.
50
50 1548.
51
193.6
0
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1999
G
r
o
u
p
C
h
ar
a
ct
er
is
ti
c
C
o
d
e
A1/D1 A2/D2 A3/D3 A4/D4
Wa
vel
en
gth
No
.
Wav
elen
gth
(nm)
Fre
que
ncy
(T
Hz)
W
a
v
el
e
n
gt
h
N
o.
Wa
vele
ngt
h
(nm
)
Fre
qu
enc
y
(T
Hz
)
W
av
el
en
gt
h
N
o.
Wa
vele
ngt
h
(nm
)
Fre
que
ncy
(TH
z)
W
av
el
en
gt
h
N
o.
Wave
lengt
h
(nm)
Freq
uenc
y
(THz
)
5 9
3
7
0
9
4
0
0
48 1547
.72
193.
70
4
6
154
6.92
193
.80
44 154
6.12
193.
90
42 1545.
32
194.0
0
6 9
4
1
0
9
4
4
0
40 1544
.53
194.
10
3
8
154
3.73
194
.20
36 154
2.94
194.
30
34 1542.
14
194.4
0
7 9
4
5
0
9
4
8
0
32 1541
.35
194.
50
3
0
154
0.56
194
.60
28 153
9.77
194.
70
26 1538.
98
194.8
0
8 9
4
9
0
9
5
2
0
24 1538
.19
194.
90
2
2
153
7.40
195
.00
20 153
6.61
195.
10
18 1535.
82
195.2
0
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2000
G
r
o
u
p
C
h
ar
a
ct
er
is
ti
c
C
o
d
e
A1/D1 A2/D2 A3/D3 A4/D4
Wa
vel
en
gth
No
.
Wav
elen
gth
(nm)
Fre
que
ncy
(T
Hz)
W
a
v
el
e
n
gt
h
N
o.
Wa
vele
ngt
h
(nm
)
Fre
qu
enc
y
(T
Hz
)
W
av
el
en
gt
h
N
o.
Wa
vele
ngt
h
(nm
)
Fre
que
ncy
(TH
z)
W
av
el
en
gt
h
N
o.
Wave
lengt
h
(nm)
Freq
uenc
y
(THz
)
9 9
5
3
0
9
5
6
0
16 1535
.04
195.
30
1
4
153
4.25
195
.40
12 153
3.47
195.
50
10 1532.
68
195.6
0
1
0
9
5
7
0
9
6
0
0
8 1531
.90
195.
70
6 153
1.12
195
.80
4 153
0.33
195.
90
2 1529.
55
196.0
0

Mechanical specifications of TN11MR4 board are as follows:
(8.7 in.)
Mechanical specifications of TN21MR4 board are as follows:
(8.7 in.)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2001
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11MR4/TN21MR4 0.2 0.3

18.8 MR8
The available functional version of the MR8 board is TN11.
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
1M
R8
Y Y N Y Y N

18.8.2 Application
As a type of optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the MR8 boar adds/drops and multiplex
eight channels of signals.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2002
MR8
OA OA
OA
OA
MR8
OTU
8 8
OTU OTU OTU
Client side
Client side
IN
OUT
D1 D8
MO
MI
A1 A8
IN
OUT
D1 D8
MO
MI
A1 A8

Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Adds/drops and multiplexes eight channels of signals to/from the

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2003
OADM optical module
IN
D1 D8 A1 A8
Drop optical
module
Add optical
module
OUT
MO MI
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse

Signal Flow
module separates eight wavelengths from the signals and these eight wavelengths are transmitted
with eight wavelengths added through the A1 to A8 interfaces by the add optical module. Then,
Module Function
Adds/drops and multiplexes eight channels of wavelengths.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2004
18.8.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the MR8 board.
Figure 18-27 shows the front panel of the MR8 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2005
Figure 18-27 Front panel of the MR8 board
MR8
MR8
STAT
D
6
A
6
D
7
A
7
D
5
A
5
D
4
A
4
D
8
A
8
D
1
A
1
D
2
A
2
M
O
M
I
I
N
O
U
T
D
3
A
3
LASERRADIATION
CAUTION
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION

Indicators
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2006
Interfaces

Laser Hazard Level
18.8.6 Valid Slots
Two slots house one MR8 board.
Table 18-53 shows the valid slots for the MR8 board.
Table 18-53 Valid slots for the MR8 board
Product Slot
IU41, IU45-IU51, IU53-IU59, IU61-IU67

NOTE
The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack, so the slot
number of the MR8 board displayed on the NM is the number of the leftmost one of the two slots.
For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the MR8 board, the slot number of the MR8 board displayed on
the NM is IU1.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2007
the first and the eighth signals processed by the board.
signal
Last four digits Frequency of the eighth
optical signal
the eighth optical signal

l "9280" indicates that the frequency of the eighth optical signal is 192.80 THz.
Since the eight channels of optical signals processed by the MR8 board are consecutive, it can
be inferred that:
l The frequency of the second optical signal is 192.20 THz.
l The frequency of the third optical signal is 192.30 THz.
l The frequency of the seventh signal is 192.70 THz.
A1/D1 1
A2/D2 2
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2008
A3/D3 3
A4/D4 4
A5/D5 5
A6/D6 6
A7/D7 7
A8/D8 8
MI/MO 9
IN/OUT 10

NOTE
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
name.
Add-Drop Wavelength
( nm ) / Frequency
( THz )
board.
No./Add-Drop
Wavelength ( nm ) /
Frequency ( THz )
1/1529.16/196.050 to
80/1560.61/192.100
Default: /
board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2009
Default: C
Sets the band type.

range
nm 1529-1561
IN-D1
IN-D2
IN-D3
IN-D4
IN-D5
IN-D6
IN-D7
IN-D8
loss
dB 4
Adjacent channel
isolation
dB > 25
isolation
dB > 35
A1-OUT
A2-OUT
A3-OUT
A4-OUT
A5-OUT
A6-OUT
A7-OUT
A8-OUT
loss
dB 4
IN-MRO
MRI-OUT
Isolation dB > 13

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2010
The MR8 adds/drops and multiplexes eight channels of signals to/from the multiplexed signals.
There are five groups of wavelengths.
Table 18-58 Rules for adding/dropping wavelength of the MR8
Group 1 2 3 4 5
Characteristic Code 92109280 92909360 93709440 94509520 95309600
A1/D1 Waveleng
th No.
80 64 48 32 16
Waveleng
th (nm)
1560.61 1554.13 1547.72 1541.35 1535.04
Frequenc
y (THz)
192.10 192.90 193.70 194.50 195.30
A2/D2 Waveleng
th No.
78 62 46 30 14
Waveleng
th (nm)
1559.79 1553.33 1546.92 1540.56 1534.25
Frequenc
y (THz)
192.20 193.00 193.80 194.60 195.40
A3/D3 Waveleng
th No.
76 60 44 28 12
Waveleng
th (nm)
1558.98 1552.52 1546.12 1539.77 1533.47
Frequenc
y (THz)
192.30 193.10 193.90 194.70 195.50
A4/D4 Waveleng
th No.
74 58 42 26 10
Waveleng
th (nm)
1558.17 1551.72 1545.32 1538.98 1532.68
Frequenc
y (THz)
192.40 193.20 194.00 194.80 195.60
A5/D5 Waveleng
th No.
72 56 40 24 8
Waveleng
th (nm)
1557.36 1550.92 1544.53 1538.19 1531.90
Frequenc
y (THz)
192.50 193.30 194.10 194.90 195.70
A6/D6 Waveleng
th No.
70 54 38 22 6
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2011
Group 1 2 3 4 5
Characteristic Code 92109280 92909360 93709440 94509520 95309600
Waveleng
th (nm)
1556.55 1550.12 1543.73 1537.40 1531.12
Frequenc
y (THz)
192.60 193.40 194.20 195.00 195.80
A7/D7 Waveleng
th No.
68 52 36 20 4
Waveleng
th (nm)
1555.75 1549.32 1542.94 1536.61 1530.33
Frequenc
y (THz)
192.70 193.50 194.30 195.10 195.90
A8/D8 Waveleng
th No.
66 50 34 18 2
Waveleng
th (nm)
1554.94 1548.51 1542.14 1535.82 1529.55
Frequenc
y (THz)
192.80 193.60 194.40 195.20 196.00

(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11MR8 0.2 0.3

18.9 MR8V
MR8V: 8-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit with VOA
The available functional version of the MR8V board is TN11.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2012
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
1M
R8V
Y Y Y Y Y N

18.9.2 Application
The MR8V adds/drops and multiplexes eight channels of signals, and adjusts the multiplexed
input optical power of WDM-side signal and the input optical power of each adding channel.
For the position of the MR8V board in the DWDM system, see Figure 18-28.
Figure 18-28 Position of the MR8V board in the DWDM system
MR8V
OA OA
OA
OA
MR8V
OTU
8 8
Client side
OTU OTU OTU
Client side
IN
OUT
D1 D8
MO MI
A1 A8
IN
OUT
D1 D8
MO MI
A1 A8
The MR8V board is mainly used to add/drop signals, to query wavelengths, and to provide a
cascading interface.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2013
Table 18-59 Functions and features of the MR8V board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Adds/drops and multiplexes eight channels of signals to/from the
multiplexed signals and adjusts the multiplexed input optical power
of WDM-side signal and the input optical power of each adding
channel.

The MR8V board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module,
Figure 18-29 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the MR8V board.
Figure 18-29 Functional modules and signal flow of the MR8V board
OADM
optical module
IN
D1 D8 A1 A8
Drop optical
module
Add optical
module
OUT
MO MI
SCC
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Fuse
Required
voltage
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
A2
VOA VOA VOA
V
O
A
VO
VI
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2014

Signal Flow
module separates eight wavelengths from the signals and these eight wavelengths are transmitted
The VI interface receives the multiplexed signals. After the optical power adjustment by VOA,
the signals are transmitted through the VO interface. Then the IN or MI interface receives the
adjusted multiplexed signals.
The IN or MI interface receives the signals transmitted by the main path. The signals are
multiplexed with eight wavelengths added through the A1 to A8 interfaces by the add optical
module. Then, the multiplexed signals are transmitted through the OUT interface.
NOTE
l The OTM station receives the multiplexed signals through the IN interface and transmits the
multiplexed signals through the VO interface.
l The OADM station receives the multiplexed signals through the MI interface and transmits the
multiplexed signals through the VO interface.
By default, the VO interface is connected to the IN interface on the VOA. The connection on the VOA can
be changed manually.
Module Function
Adds/drops and multiplexes eight channels of signals.
Adjusts the input optical power of eight channels. Adjusts the input optical power of
pass-through wavelengths.
18.9.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the MR8V
board.
Figure 18-30 shows the front panel of the MR8V board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2015
Figure 18-30 Front panel of the MR8V board
MR8V
MR8V
D
6
A
6
D
7
A
7
D
5
A
5
D
4
A
4
D
8
A
8
D
1
A
1
D
2
A
2
M
O
M
I
O
U
T
I
N
D
3
A
3
ACT
PROG
SRV
STAT
V
O
V
I
LASERRADIATION
CAUTION
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION
Indicators
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2016
Interfaces
Table 18-60 Types and functions of the interfaces on the MR8V board
IN LC Receives the multiplexed signal from the WDM side
when the IN interface is not connected to the VO
interface on the same MR8V board.
Receives the adjusted multiplexed signal from the VO
interface when the IN interface is connected to the VO
interface on the same MR8V board by a fiber.
VI LC Receives the multiplexed signal from the WDM side.
VO LC Transmits the adjusted multiplexed signal to the IN
interface.

Laser Hazard Level
18.9.6 Valid Slots
Two slots house one MR8V board.
Table 18-61 shows the valid slots for the MR8V board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2017
Table 18-61 Valid slots for the MR8V board
Product Slot
IU41, IU45-IU51, IU53-IU59, IU61-IU67

NOTE
The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack, so the slot
number of the MR8V board displayed on the NM is the number of the leftmost one of the two slots.
For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the MR8 board, the slot number of the MR8V board displayed on
the NM is IU1.
18.9.7 Characteristic Code for the MR8V
The characteristic code for the MR8V board contains of eight digits that indicate the frequencies
of the first and the eighth signals processed by the board.
Table 18-62 Characteristic code for the MR8V board
signal
optical signal
"V" Adjustment of the input
optical power of each
channel
Indicates that the board
adjusts the input optical
power of each channel.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MR8V board is 92109280V.
l "V" indicates that adjusts the input optical power of each channel.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2018
Since the eight channels of optical signals processed by the MR8V board are consecutive, it can
be inferred that:
Table 18-63 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the MR8V board displayed on the NM
A1/D1 1
A2/D2 2
A3/D3 3
A4/D4 4
A5/D5 5
A6/D6 6
A7/D7 7
A8/D8 8
MI/MO 9
IN/OUT 10
VI 11
VO 12

NOTE
For MR8V parameters, refer to Table 18-64.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2019
Table 18-64 MR8V parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
name.
Add-Drop Wavelength
( nm ) / Frequency
( THz )
board.
No./Add-Drop
Wavelength ( nm ) /
Frequency ( THz )
1/1529.16/196.050 to
80/1560.61/192.100
Default: /
board.
Default: C
Sets the band type.
Optical Interface
Attenuation Ratio (dB)
Min. Attenuation Rate
(dB) to Max.
Attenuation Rate (dB)
Default:Max.
The Optical Interface Attenuation
Ratio (dB) parameter sets the optical
power attenuation of a board channel
so that the optical power of the
output signals at the transmit end is
within the preset range.
You can obtain the value range of
this parameter by querying the
corresponding Min. Attenuation
Rate (dB) and Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB) parameters.
See D.24 Optical Interface
Attenuation Ratio (dB)(WDM
Max. Attenuation Rate
(dB)
- Displays the maximum attenuation
allowed by a board optical interface.
(dB)
- Displays the minimum attenuation

18.9.10 MR8V Specifications
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2020
Table 18-65 lists the optical specifications of the MR8V board.
Table 18-65 Optical specifications of the MR8V board
Correspondin
g interfaces
Item Unit Value
range
nm 1529-1561
IN-D1
IN-D2
IN-D3
IN-D4
IN-D5
IN-D6
IN-D7
IN-D8
1 dB spectral width nm 0.2
loss
dB 4
Adjacent channel
isolation
dB > 25
isolation
dB > 35
A1-OUT
A2-OUT
A3-OUT
A4-OUT
A5-OUT
A6-OUT
A7-OUT
A8-OUT
VI-VO
1 dB spectral width nm 0.2
loss
dB 6
Adjustment accuracy dB 1 (attenuation 10 dB)
1.5 (attenuation 15 dB)
1.8 (attenuation >15 dB)
IN-MRO
MRI-OUT
Isolation dB > 13

The MR8V adds/drops and multiplexes eight channels of signals to/from the multiplexed signals.
There are five groups of wavelengths.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2021
Table 18-66 Rules for adding/dropping wavelength of the MR8V
Group 1 2 3 4 5
A1/D1 Waveleng
th No.
80 64 48 32 16
Waveleng
th (nm)
1560.61 1554.13 1547.72 1541.35 1535.04
Frequenc
y (THz)
192.10 192.90 193.70 194.50 195.30
A2/D2 Waveleng
th No.
78 62 46 30 14
Waveleng
th (nm)
1559.79 1553.33 1546.92 1540.56 1534.25
Frequenc
y (THz)
192.20 193.00 193.80 194.60 195.40
A3/D3 Waveleng
th No.
76 60 44 28 12
Waveleng
th (nm)
1558.98 1552.52 1546.12 1539.77 1533.47
Frequenc
y (THz)
192.30 193.10 193.90 194.70 195.50
A4/D4 Waveleng
th No.
74 58 42 26 10
Waveleng
th (nm)
1558.17 1551.72 1545.32 1538.98 1532.68
Frequenc
y (THz)
192.40 193.20 194.00 194.80 195.60
A5/D5 Waveleng
th No.
72 56 40 24 8
Waveleng
th (nm)
1557.36 1550.92 1544.53 1538.19 1531.90
Frequenc
y (THz)
192.50 193.30 194.10 194.90 195.70
A6/D6 Waveleng
th No.
70 54 38 22 6
Waveleng
th (nm)
1556.55 1550.12 1543.73 1537.40 1531.12
Frequenc
y (THz)
192.60 193.40 194.20 195.00 195.80
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2022
Group 1 2 3 4 5
A7/D7 Waveleng
th No.
68 52 36 20 4
Waveleng
th (nm)
1555.75 1549.32 1542.94 1536.61 1530.33
Frequenc
y (THz)
192.70 193.50 194.30 195.10 195.90
A8/D8 Waveleng
th No.
66 50 34 18 2
Waveleng
th (nm)
1554.94 1548.51 1542.14 1535.82 1529.55
Frequenc
y (THz)
192.80 193.60 194.40 195.20 196.00

(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11MR8V 7.7 8.6

18.10 SBM2
SBM2: 2-channel CWDM single-fiber bi-directional add/drop board
The available functional versions of the SBM2 board is TN11.
Huawei office.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2023
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
1SB
M2
Y Y N Y Y Y

18.10.2 Application
The SBM2 board adds/drops two channels of signals to/from the multiplexed signals.
For the position of the SBM2 board in the CWDM system, see Figure 18-31.
Figure 18-31 Position of the SBM2 board in the CWDM system
SBM2 SBM2
OTU
Client side
OTU OTU OTU
Client side
LINE EXT
A2 A1 D2 D1
LINE EXT
A2 A1 D2 D1

The SBM2 board is mainly used to add/drop and multiplex signals, and to provide a cascading
interface.
Table 18-67 Functions and features of the SBM2 board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Adds/drops two channels of signals to/from the multiplexed signals.
The added and dropped optical signals must be of different
wavelengths.
WDM specification Supports only the single-fiber dual fed CWDM system.
Cascading interface Provides a cascading optical interface to cascade other single-fiber
bi-directional OADM boards.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2024
Function and
Feature
Description

The SBM2 board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module,
Figure 18-32 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the SBM2 board.
Figure 18-32 Functional modules and signal flow of the SBM2 board
OADM optical module
EXT
D1 D2 A1 A2
Drop optical
module
Add optical
module
LINE
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
SCC
Power supply
module
Required
voltage
Fuse
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
DC power supply
from a backplane

Signal Flow
The board receives the multiplexed signals through the LINE interface. After the optical module
processes the multiplexed signals, the board separates the multiplexed signals into two
wavelengths of optical signals and outputs them through the D1 and D2 optical interfaces to the
OTU boards or integrated client-side equipment. The board also receives two wavelengths of
optical signals through the A1 and A2 interfaces, couples them to the multiplexed signals and
outputs the coupled signals through the LINE interface.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2025
The EXT interface is used as a cascade interface. It transmits the multiplexed signals to other
single-fiber bi-directional OADM boards to add/drop the remaining channels of the multiplexed
signals.
Module Function
Adds/drops and multiplexes two channels of signals.
18.10.5 Front Panel
There are interfaces on the front panel of the SBM2 board.
Figure 18-33 shows the front panel of the SBM2 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2026
Figure 18-33 Front panel of the SBM2 board
SBM2
SBM2
E
X
T
D
1
A
1
STAT
L
I
N
E
D
2
A
2
LASERRADIATION
CAUTION
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION

Indicators
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2027
Interfaces
Table 18-68 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SBM2 board
A1/A2 LC Receives the signals sent from the OTU or the
D1/D2 LC Transmits the signals to the OTU or the integrated
LINE LC Receives and transmits multiplexed signals.
EXT LC Cascading interface, transmits the multiplexed signals
to other single-fiber bi-directional OADM boards to
add/drop the remaining channels of the multiplexed
signals.

Laser Hazard Level
18.10.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one SBM2 board.
Table 18-69 shows the valid slots for the SBM2 board.
Table 18-69 Valid slots for the SBM2 board
Product Valid Slots

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2028
Table 18-70 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SBM2 board displayed on the NM
A1 1
D1 2
A2 3
D2 4
LINE 5
EXT 6

For SBM2 parameters, refer to Table 18-71.
Table 18-71 SBM2 parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
Optical Interface Name - Sets and displays the optical
interface name.
An optical interface name
contains a maximum of 64
characters. Any characters are
supported.
Wavelength ( nm ) /
Frequency ( THz )
- Queries the operating wavelength
at the WDM-side optical interface
of a board.
No./Wavelength ( nm ) /
Frequency ( THz )
11/1471.00/208.170 to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /
Sets the operating wavelength at
the WDM-side optical interface of
a board.
Default: CWDM
Sets the band type.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2029
18.10.9 SBM2 Specifications
Table 18-72 lists the optical specifications of the SBM2 board.
Table 18-72 Optical specifications of the SBM2 board
range
CWDM nm 1271 to 1611
LINE-D1
LINE-D2
Drop channel insertion loss dB 3
Isolation dB 30
A1-LINE
A2-LINE
Add channel insertion loss dB 3
Isolation dB 30
Optical return loss dB > 40
Pass-through loss dB 1.5

(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11SBM2 0.2 0.3
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2030
19 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop
Multiplexing Board
About This Chapter
19.1 Overview
Reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer (ROADM) boards add/drop any single or multi-
wavelength signals to/from a multiplexed signal, and route the signals to any port in any order,
achieving flexible wavelength grooming in multiple directions. These boards apply to DWDM
systems.
19.2 RDU9
RDU9: 9-port ROADM splitting board (C_Band)
19.3 RMU9
RMU9: 9-port ROADM multiplexing board
19.4 ROAM
ROAM: reconfigurable optical adding module board
19.5 TD20
TD20: 20-ports Tunable DeMultiplexing Board
19.6 TM20
TM20: 20-ports Tunable Multiplexing Board
19.7 WSD9
WSD9: 9-port wavelength selective switching demultiplexing board
19.8 WSM9
WSM9: 9-port wavelength selective switching multiplexing board
19.9 WSMD2
WSMD2: 2-port wavelength selective switching multiplexer and demultiplexer board
19.10 WSMD4
19.11 WSMD9
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Hardware Description 19 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Board
2031
WSMD9: 9-Port wavelength selective multiplexing and demultiplexing board
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2032
19.1 Overview
Reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer (ROADM) boards add/drop any single or multi-
wavelength signals to/from a multiplexed signal, and route the signals to any port in any order,
achieving flexible wavelength grooming in multiple directions. These boards apply to DWDM
systems.
Positions of ROADM Boards in a WDM System
Figure 19-1 shows the position of RAODM boards in a WDM system by using the WSMD4
board as an example.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2033
Figure 19-1 Positions of ROADM boards in a WDM system
OA
OA
OA
OA
OA
OA
OA
OA
North signal West signal East signal South signal
West
East
South
F
I
U
WSMD4
(east)
F
I
U
F
I
U
F
I
U
North
WSMD4
(south)
Pass-through
signal
WSMD4
(north)
WSMD4
(west)
OA
OA
OM
C-EVEN
OD
C-EVEN
OM
C-ODD
OD
C-ODD
ITL ITL
OA
OA
OM
C-EVEN
OD
C-EVEN
OM
C-ODD
OD
C-ODD
OA
OA
OM
C-EVEN
OD
C-EVEN
OM
C-ODD
OD
C-ODD
ITL
OM
C-EVEN
OD
C-EVEN
OM
C-ODD
OD
C-ODD
ITL
OA
OA
Client services Client services Client services Client services
Line units
Line units Line units Line units
Tributary
Units
Tributary
Units
Tributary
Units
Tributary
Units
Client services
Line units
Tributary
Units
Client services Client services Client services
Tributary
Units
Tributary
Units
Tributary
Units
Line units Line units Line units
Main Functions
Table 19-1 lists the main functions of ROADM boards.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2034
Table 19-1 Main functions of ROADM boards
Board Function Number of
Wavelengths
RDU9 Broadcasts service signals to nine directions. 80
RMU9 Adds eight optical signals. Each add port on the board can connect to a
tunable wavelength OTU board to flexibly receive eight optical signals.
80
ROAM Flexibly adds/drops, passes, and blocks 40 services to achieve dynamic
grooming of wavelengths on a WDM ring.
40
TD20 Broadcasts 20 coherent service signals in one multiplexed signal to 20
directions.
80
TM20 Adds 20 coherent optical signals carried over different wavelengths and
multiplexes the signals into one multi-wavelength signal.
80
WSD9 Demultiplexes wavelengths and routes any wavelength to any port. l TN11WSD9 and
TN12WSD9: 40
l TN13WSD9: 80
WSM9 Multiplexes wavelengths and routes any wavelength to any port. l TN11WSM9 and
TN12WSM9: 40
l TN13WSM9: 80
WSMD2 Broadcasts the main channel signal to two directions and adds any
wavelengths.
40
WSMD4 Broadcasts the main channel signal to four directions and adds any
wavelengths.
l TN11WSMD4: 40
l TN12WSMD4: 80
WSMD9 Broadcasts the main channel signal to nine directions and adds any
wavelengths.
80

19.2 RDU9
RDU9: 9-port ROADM splitting board (C_Band)
The available functional version of the RDU9 board is TN11.
Huawei office.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2035
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
1RD
U9
Y Y Y Y Y N

19.2.2 Application
As a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the RDU9 board is used with
the WSM9 board to implement the wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network.
For the position of the RDU9 board in the DWDM system, see Figure 19-2.
Figure 19-2 Position of the RDU9 board in the DWDM system
DCM
O A
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O A
O A
DCM
RDU9
WSM9
WSM9
RDU9 O A
8 8
8
O
T
U
O
T
U
DMUX
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
8
IN
DM1
DM8
DM1
DM8
EXPO
IN
EXPO
EXPI
EXPI
OUT
OUT
AM1
AM1
AM8
AM8
Client-side
Client-side
Client-side
Client-side
MUX
DMUX
DMUX DMUX
MUX

NOTE
An OTU is a transceiver that process signals propagated over the same wavelength at the same time.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2036
The RDU9 board is used to dynamically groom wavelengths, monitor online optical
performance, and monitor alarms and performance events.
Table 19-2 Functions and features of the RDU9 board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Broadcasts the signals received from the main optical path in nine
directions at the same time.
WDM specification Supports the DWDM specification.
Online optical
performance
monitoring
affecting traffic.
Alarm and
performance event
monitoring

The RDU9 board consists of the optical module, control and communication module, and power
supply module.
Figure 19-3 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the RDU9.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2037
Figure 19-3 Functional modules and signal flow of the RDU9 board
SCC
Optical demultiplexer module
ROA
TOA
IN
DM1 DM2 DM3 DM4 DM5 DM6 DM7 DM8
MONI
EXPO
MONO
Optical module
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Fuse
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Required
voltage

Signal Flow
The multiplexed signals that need to be dropped are input to the board through the IN interface.
The optical signals from the IN optical interface are divided into two channels of signals based
on the optical power by the optical splitter. The main path optical signals are output through the
EXPO interface and other signals are output through the TOA interface.
The RDU9 board can be cascaded to the optical amplifier unit (OAU) through the TOA interface.
If no cascade is required, the signals from the TOA interface should be input to the ROA interface
directly.
The optical wavelength signal from the ROA interface is split equally into different channels of
optical signals, and the signals are then output through the DM1-DM8 interfaces.
A few signals are extracted from the main path optical signals that are from the IN interface and
are then output through the MONO interface for performance detection. A few signals are
extracted from the optical signals that are from the ROA interface and are output through the
MONI interface for performance detection.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2038
Module Function
l Optical module
Broadcasts signals in nine directions.
the MONI/MONO interface for detection.
19.2.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the RDU9 board
Figure 19-4 shows the front panel of the RDU9 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2039
Figure 19-4 Front panel of the RDU9 board
RDU9
RDU9
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
M
O
N
O
M
O
N
I
E
X
P
O
I
N
T
O
A
R
O
A
D
M
1
D
M
2
D
M
3
D
M
4
D
M
5
D
M
6
D
M
7
D
M
8
LASERRADIATION
CAUTION
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION

Indicators
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2040
Interfaces
Table 19-3 Types and functions of the interfaces on the RDU9 board
DM1-DM8 LC Transmits the multiplexed signals to be output at the
local station to the optical demultiplexing unit or the
optical add/drop multiplexing unit.
IN LC Transmits the main path signal.
EXPO LC Receives the main path signal.
MONI LC Connected to the input interface of the spectrum
analyzer unit, accomplishes the online detection of the
optical spectrum for the input through the ROA
interface.
The MONI port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite
signal at the ROA port (15 dB lower than the actual
signal power, calculation formula: Proa (dBm) - Pmoni
(dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB).
MONO LC Connected to the input interface of the spectrum
analyzer unit, detects the optical spectrum online for
the signals output through the EXPO interface.
The MONO port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite
signal at the EXPO port (15 dB lower than the actual
signal power, calculation formula: Pexpo (dBm) -
Pmono (dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB).
TOA LC Used as the cascade output interface.
ROA LC Used as the cascade input interface.

NOTE
When cascading is not adopted, the TOA and ROA interfaces should be directly connected by a fiber
jumper.
Laser Hazard Level
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2041
19.2.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one RDU9 board.
Table 19-4 shows the valid slots for the RDU9 board.
Table 19-4 Valid slots for the RDU9 board
Product Valid Slots

Table 19-5 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the RDU9 board displayed on the NM
IN 1
EXPO 2
DM1-DM8 3-10
TOA/ROA 11
MONI 12
MONO 13

For RDU9 parameters, refer to Table 19-6.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2042
Table 19-6 RDU9 parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
Optical Interface
Name
- Sets and displays the optical interface name.
Configure Band C
Default: C
Input Power Loss
Threshold (dBm)
Actual Working
Band Parity
of the board.
Configure Working
Band Parity
All, Odd, Even
Default: All

19.2.9 RDU9 Specifications
Table 19-7 Optical specifications of the RDU9 board
Item Unit Value
Insertion loss IN-Drop (DM1-DM8) dB 12.5
ROA-Drop (DM1-DM8) dB 11.5
IN-EXPO dB 12.5
IN-TOA dB 1
Consistency of the insertion loss of each
channel
dB 1.2
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2043
Item Unit Value

(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11RDU9 6.0 6.6

19.3 RMU9
RMU9: 9-port ROADM multiplexing board
The available functional version of the RMU9 board is TN11.
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
1R
MU
9
Y Y Y Y Y N

Type
Table 19-8 lists the types of the RMU9 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2044
Table 19-8 Type description of the RMU9 board
TN11RMU
9
01 Processes the odd and even wavelengths in the C band.
02 Processes the odd and even wavelengths in the C band and
supports the port blocking function.

19.3.2 Application
As a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the RMU9 board is used
with the WSD9 board to implement wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network.
The RMU9 board can add eight single-wavelength signal or multi-channel signals to the main
path. Being multiplexed by the optical multiplexer unit or optical add and drop multiplexing
unit, the multiplexed channels enter the RMU9 board through the channel-adding port. As for
the single channels, they are directly sent to the RMU9 board through the channel-adding port
by the optical transponder units.
For the position of the RMU9 board in the DWDM system, see Figure 19-5.
Figure 19-5 Position of the RMU9 board in the DWDM system
DCM
Client-side
O A
RMU9
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O A
O A
O A
DCM
WSD9
DMUX
DMUX
WSD9
MUX
RMU9
MUX
Client-side
Client-side Client-side
8 8
8 8
AM1 AM8
EXPI
OUT
AM1 AM8
EXPI OUT
DM1 DM8
IN EXPO
DM1 DM8
IN EXPO
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2045
NOTE
The RMU9 board is mainly used to dynamically groom wavelengths, monitor online optical
Table 19-9 Functions and features of the RMU9 board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Adds eight single-wavelength signals or multi-wavelength signals to
the main path. When working with an OTU board supporting tunable
wavelengths, the RMU9 board can receive any wavelength through
any of the AM1-AM8 optical ports.
Online optical
performance
monitoring
affecting traffic.
Alarm and
performance event
monitoring
Port blocking Blocks all input wavelengths at one of the AM1 to AM8 optical
interfaces.
NOTE
Only the TN11RMU902 board supports this function.

The RMU9 board consists of the optical module, optical power detection module, control and
Figure 19-6 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the RMU9 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2046
Figure 19-6 Functional modules and signal flow of the RMU9 board
SCC
Optical multiplexer module
VOA VOA VOA VOA VOA VOA VOA VOA
TOA
ROA
EXPI
AM1 AM2 AM3 AM4 AM5 AM6 AM7 AM8
MONO
OUT
MONI
Optical module
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
optical power detection module
PIN

Signal Flow
The wavelengths to be added are input through the AM1-AM8 optical interfaces.
NOTE
l The channel corresponding to each interface (AM1-AM8) must use a unique wavelength. Otherwise,
the services in the two channels that use the same wavelength are interrupted.
l The wavelength used by the channel corresponding to each interface (AM1-AM8) cannot be the same
as the wavelength of the optical signals input through the EXPI optical interface. Otherwise, the services
in the two channels that use the same wavelength are interrupted.
After being multiplexed by the optical multiplexer module, the optical signals input through the
AMn optical interface are output through the TOA optical interface.
The optical signals output through the TOA optical interface can be cascaded with an optical
amplifier board. If no cascading is required, the optical signals are directly input to the ROA
optical interface.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2047
After the main optical path input through the EXPI optical interface is multiplexed with the
optical wavelength signals added on the board through the ROA optical interface, the
multiplexed signals are output through the OUT optical interface.
A small number of optical signals that are input through the EXPI interface are separated from
the main path and then output through the MONI interface. They are used for optical performance
detection.
A small number of optical signals are separated from those that are output through the TOA
interface and then sent to the MONO interface. These signals are used for optical performance
detection.
Module Function
l Optical module
Multiplexes eight wavelengths added on the board.
Eight VOAs achieve the in-service adjustment of input optical power.
the MONI/MONO interface for detection.
Detects in real time the optical power of TOA and EXPI interface.
19.3.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the RMU9 board.
Figure 19-7 shows the front panel of the RMU9 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2048
Figure 19-7 Front panel of the RMU9 board
RMU9
RMU9
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
M
O
N
O
M
O
N
I
O
U
T
E
X
P
I
T
O
A
R
O
A
A
M
1
A
M
2
A
M
3
A
M
4
A
M
5
A
M
6
A
M
7
A
M
8

Indicators
Interfaces
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2049
Table 19-10 Types and functions of the interfaces on the RMU9 board
AM1-AM8 LC Receives a single-wavelength signal that must be
multiplexed into the main optical path from an OTU or
line board, or receives a multi-wavelength signal that
must be multiplexed into the main optical path from an
optical multiplexer board.
OUT LC Transmits the main path signal.
EXPI LC Receives the main path signal.
analyzer unit, accomplishes the online detection of the
optical spectrum for the input signals transmitted by the
main optical path.
signal at the EXPI port (15 dB lower than the actual
signal power, calculation formula: Pexpi (dBm) -
Pmoni (dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB).
analyzer unit, detects the optical spectrum online for
the signals output through the TOA interface.
signal at the TOA port (15 dB lower than the actual
signal power, calculation formula: Ptoa (dBm) - Pmono
(dBm) = 10 x lg(97/3) = 15 dB).
TOA LC Used as the cascade output interface.
ROA LC Used as the cascade input interface.

NOTE
When cascading is not adopted, the TOA and ROA interfaces should be directly connected by a fiber
jumper.
Laser Hazard Level
19.3.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one RMU9 board.
Table 19-11 shows the valid slots for the RMU9 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2050
Table 19-11 Valid slots for the RMU9 board
Product Valid Slots

Table 19-12 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the RMU9 board displayed on the NM
EXPI 1
OUT 2
AM1-AM8 3-10
TOA/ROA 11
MONI 12
MONO 13

For RMU9 parameters, refer to Table 19-13.
Table 19-13 RMU9 parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2051
Optical Interface
Name
are supported.
Optical Interface
Attenuation Ratio
(dB)
Value of Min.
Attenuation Rate
(dB) to Value of
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)
Default: Value of
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)
information.
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)
Min. Attenuation
Rate (dB)
- Displays the minimum attenuation allowed
Configure Band C
Default: C
Actual Band - Queries the actual working band of the
board.
Input Power Loss
Threshold (dBm)
input optical power, which can trigger a
board to generate an optical power loss
value, the board reports the MUT_LOS
alarm.
Block Port Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
Before wavelengths are added to the AM
interface of the RMU9, set this parameter to
Enabled. After configurations of
wavelengths and services on the OTU are
complete, set this parameter to Disabled.
Before the OTU where wavelengths are
added is replaced, set this parameter to
Enabled. After the OTU is replaced, and
wavelengths and services are configured,
set this parameter to Disabled.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2052
Actual Working
Band Parity
- Queries the parity of the actual working
band of the board.
Configure Working
Band Parity
All, Odd, Even
Default: All
Selects the desired parity of the working
band.

19.3.9 RMU9 Specifications
Table 19-14 lists the optical specifications of the RMU9 board.
Table 19-14 Optical specifications of the RMU9 board
Item Unit Value
Insertion loss EXPI-OUT dB 8.5
AMx
a
-TOA
dB
12.5
b
ROA-OUT dB 1.5
Attenuation precision dB < 1 (0 to 10 dB)
< 1.5 (> 10 dB)
VOA attenuation under channel blocking
function
c
dB > 42
NOTE
a: AMx represents the AM1-AM8 interface.
b: This value can be reached when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB.
c: Only the TN11RMU902 supports the channel blocking function.

(8.7 in.)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2053
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11RMU901 7.7 8.6
TN11RMU902 8.2 9

19.4 ROAM
ROAM: reconfigurable optical adding module board
The available functional version of the ROAM board is TN11.
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
1RO
AM
Y Y N N Y N

Type
Table 19-15 lists the types of the ROAM board.
Table 19-15 Type description of the ROAM board
TN11ROAM 01 Processes the even
wavelengths in C band.
02 Processes the odd

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2054
19.4.2 Application
As a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the ROAM board is used
with the optical demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit to implement
wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network.
For the position of the ROAM board in the DWDM system, see Figure 19-8.
Figure 19-8 Position of the ROAM board in the DWDM system
O A
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O A
O A
DMUX
ROAM
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
DMUX
O
T
U
O
T
U
ROAM
O A
Client-side Client-side
40 40
IN
OUT
M01 M40
EXPI EXPO
DM
IN
OUT
M01 M40
EXPI EXPO
DM
NOTE
The ROAM board is mainly used to dynamically groom wavelengths, achieve built-in power
equilibrium, and monitor alarms and performance events.
Table 19-16 Functions and features of the ROAM board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Implements dynamic adding/dropping, pass-through, and blocking of
a maximum of 40 wavelengths with the demultiplexing board as well
as dynamic grooming of wavelengths for services on the ring network.
Power equilibrium Implements the wavelength-level equilibrium and control of optical
power to flatten the spectrum for the working signals.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2055
Function and
Feature
Description
Alarms and
performance events
monitoring

The ROAM board consists of the planar lightwave circuit (PLC) optical module, control and
Figure 19-9 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the ROAM.
Figure 19-9 Functions and features of the ROAM board
SCC
Optical multiplexer module
OUT
IN
M01 M02 M40
EXPI
EXPO
PLC optical module
DM
Splitter
VOA
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
VOA VOA

Signal Flow
The main path signals are received through the IN interface. The splitter divides the main path
signals into two channels of the same signals. One signal is output to the optical demultiplexer
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2056
unit through the DM interface and demultiplexed into single wavelengths dropped at the local
station. The other signal passes through and is output through the EXPO interface.
The signals to be added at the local station are received through the corresponding M01-M40
interfaces. These signals are multiplexed with the signal input through the EXPI interface and
then output through the OUT interface.
Module Function
l PLC optical module
Multiplexes forty wavelengths added on the board.
The PLC optical module contains the VOA modules that implement the power
adjustment at the wavelength level.
The PLC optical module blocks and terminates the signals dropped at the local station
and adjusts the optical power of other signals.
19.4.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the ROAM
board.
Figure 19-10 shows the front panel of the ROAM board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2057
Figure 19-10 Front panel of the ROAM board
ROAM
ROAM
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
M01
M02
M03
M04
M05
M06
M07
M08
M09
M10
M11
M12
M13
M14
M15
M16
M17
M18
M19
M20
M21
M22
M23
M24
M25
M26
M27
M28
M29
M30
M31
M32
M33
M34
M35
M36
M37
M38
M39
M40
196.00
195.90
195.80
195.70
195.60
195.50
195.40
195.30
195.20
195.10
195.00
194.90
194.80
194.70
194.60
194.50
194.20
194.10
194.40
194.30
194.00
193.90
193.80
193.70
193.60
193.50
193.20
193.10
193.40
193.30
193.00
192.90
192.80
192.70
192.60
192.50
192.20
192.10
192.40
192.30
I
N
O
U
T
M
0
1
M
0
2
M
0
3
M
0
4
M
0
5
M
0
6
M
0
7
M
0
8
M
0
9
M
1
0
M
1
1
M
1
2
M
1
3
M
1
4
M
1
5
M
1
6
M
1
7
M
1
8
M
1
9
M
2
0
E
X
P
O
M
2
1
M
2
2
M
2
3
M
2
4
M
2
5
M
2
6
M
2
7
M
2
8
M
2
9
M
3
0
E
X
P
I
M
3
1
M
3
2
M
3
4
M
3
5
M
3
6
M
3
7
M
3
8
M
3
9
M
4
0
D
M
M
3
3
CAUTION
LASERRADIATION
LASERRADIATION
NON-ATTENUATINGOPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS
CAUTION
M01 196.00
195.10
195.20
195.30
195.40
195.50
195.60
195.70
195.80
195.90
195.00
194.10
194.20
194.30
194.40
194.50
194.60
194.70
194.80
194.90
194.00
193.10
193.20
193.30
193.40
193.50
193.60
193.70
193.80
193.90
193.00
192.10
192.20
192.30
192.40
192.50
192.60
192.70
192.80
192.90
M09
M08
M07
M06
M05
M04
M03
M02
M10
M11
M19
M18
M17
M16
M15
M14
M13
M12
M20
M21
M29
M28
M27
M26
M25
M24
M23
M22
M30
M31
M39
M38
M37
M36
M35
M34
M33
M32
M40

Indicators
Interfaces
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2058
Table 19-17 Types and functions of the interfaces on the ROAM board
M01-M40 LC Receives a single-wavelength signal that must be
multiplexed into the main optical path from an OTU or
line board.
DM LC Drops channels to the local station.
IN LC Receives the main path signal.
EXPO LC Used as the cascade interface to transmit the pass-
through signal.
EXPI LC Used as the cascade interface to receive the pass-
through signal.

There are 40 output interfaces on the front panel of the ROAM board. Table 19-18 and Table
19-19 show the mapping between the interfaces, frequency and wavelengths of the ROAM
board.
Table 19-18 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the ROAM
board (even)
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
M01 196.00 1529.55 M21 194.00 1545.32
M02 195.90 1530.33 M22 193.90 1546.12
M03 195.80 1531.12 M23 193.80 1546.92
M04 195.70 1531.90 M24 193.70 1547.72
M05 195.60 1532.68 M25 193.60 1548.51
M06 195.50 1533.47 M26 193.50 1549.32
M07 195.40 1534.25 M27 193.40 1550.12
M08 195.30 1535.04 M28 193.30 1550.92
M09 195.20 1535.82 M29 193.20 1551.72
M10 195.10 1536.61 M30 193.10 1552.52
M11 195.00 1537.40 M31 193.00 1553.33
M12 194.90 1538.19 M32 192.90 1554.13
M13 194.80 1538.98 M33 192.80 1554.94
M14 194.70 1539.77 M34 192.70 1555.75
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2059
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
M15 194.60 1540.56 M35 192.60 1556.55
M16 194.50 1541.35 M36 192.50 1557.36
M17 194.40 1542.14 M37 192.40 1558.17
M18 194.30 1542.94 M38 192.30 1558.98
M19 194.20 1543.73 M39 192.20 1559.79
M20 194.10 1544.53 M40 192.10 1560.61

Table 19-19 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the ROAM
board (odd)
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
M01 196.05 1529.16 M21 194.05 1544.92
M02 195.95 1529.94 M22 193.95 1545.72
M03 195.85 1530.72 M23 193.85 1546.52
M04 195.75 1531.51 M24 193.75 1547.32
M05 195.65 1532.29 M25 193.65 1548.11
M06 195.55 1533.07 M26 193.55 1548.91
M07 195.45 1533.86 M27 193.45 1549.72
M08 195.35 1534.64 M28 193.35 1550.52
M09 195.25 1535.43 M29 193.25 1551.32
M10 195.15 1536.22 M30 193.15 1552.12
M11 195.05 1537.00 M31 193.05 1552.93
M12 194.95 1537.79 M32 192.95 1553.73
M13 194.85 1538.58 M33 192.85 1554.54
M14 194.75 1539.37 M34 192.75 1555.34
M15 194.65 1540.16 M35 192.65 1556.15
M16 194.55 1540.95 M36 192.55 1556.96
M17 194.45 1541.75 M37 192.45 1557.77
M18 194.35 1542.54 M38 192.35 1558.58
M19 194.25 1543.33 M39 192.25 1559.39
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2060
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
M20 194.15 1544.13 M40 192.15 1560.20

Laser Hazard Level
19.4.6 Valid Slots
Three slots house one ROAM board.
Table 19-20 shows the valid slots for the ROAM board.
Table 19-20 Valid slots for the ROAM board
Product Valid Slots
IU32, IU35-IU40, IU45-IU50, IU53-IU58,
IU61-IU66
IU34

NOTE
The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore,
the slot number of the ROAM board displayed on the NM is the number of the leftmost one of the three
slots.
For example, if slots IU1, IU2, and IU3 house the ROAM board, the slot number of the ROAM board
Table 19-21 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the ROAM board displayed on the NM
IN 1
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2061
EXPO 2
EXPI 3
OUT 4
DM 5
A01-A40
NOTE
The A01A40 interfaces correspond to the M01
M40 interfaces on the physical front panel.
6-45

For ROAM parameters, refer to Table 19-22.
Table 19-22 ROAM parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
Optical Interface
Name
are supported.
Configure Band C
Default: C
board.
Input Power Loss
Threshold (dBm)
alarm.
Actual Working
Band Parity
band of the board.
Configure Working
Band Parity
All, Odd, Even
Default: Even
band.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2062
Wavelength Target
Output Power (dBm)
-32 to 8
Default: /
Applies to the ROAM board only and is
used to set the single wavelength target
output optical power after add wavelengths
are multiplexed.

19.4.9 ROAM Specifications
Table 19-23 lists the optical specifications of the ROAM board.
Table 19-23 Optical specifications of the ROAM board
Item Unit Value
Insertion loss
Mx
a
-OUT
dB
9
b
IN-DM dB 7
EXPI-OUT dB
14
b
IN-EXPO dB 3
Attenuation range dB 0 to 20
Attenuation precision dB < 1 (0 to 10 dB)
< 1.5 (> 10 dB)
Module switch time ms 50
Extinction ratio dB 30
-0.5 dB bandwidth of adding wavelength nm > 0.3
-0.5 dB bandwidth of pass-through
wavelength
nm > 0.2
NOTE
a: Mx represents the M01-M40 interface.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2063
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11ROAM 66 72.6

19.5 TD20
TD20: 20-ports Tunable DeMultiplexing Board
The available functional version of the TD20 board is TN12.
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
2TD
20
Y Y Y Y Y N

19.5.2 Application
The TD20 board is a demultiplexer board and applies to ROADM sites. It is used to broadcast
a multi-wavelength signal that contains 20 coherent optical signals over different wavelengths.
The TD20 board must work with coherent OTU or line boards. It is intended for colorless
applications because coherent OTU or line board supports wavelength selection.
For the position of the TD20 board in the DWDM system, see Figure 19-11.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2064
Figure 19-11 Position of the TD20 board in the DWDM system
WSMD4
W
S
M
D
4
OA
OA
N
E
W
Directionless
IN OUT
DM1 AM4
W
S
M
D
4
WSMD4
S
S
N
W
E
NE4
NE1
NE2
NE3
NE5
NE6
NE7
IN OUT
DM1
DM1
AM1
AM1
DM2 DM3 DM4 AM3 AM2 AM1
AM1
DM1
IN
OUT
OUT
IN
OA
OA
WSMD4
IN OUT
DM1 AM1
Colorless
TM20 TM20 TD20 TD20
O
T
U
WSM9 WSD9
OA
OA
NE1
OA
OA
OA
OA
: Current path
: Other path (S direction)
: Other path (N direction)
: Other path (E direction)
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
: Coherent OTU OTU

IN IN
DM4 DM1
IN
OUT
AM1
OUT
AM4
OUT
AM1 AM20 AM1 AM20
DM1 DM20 DM1 DM20

The TD20 board performs the colorless drop function. It drops a maximum of 20 optical signals
that are carried over different wavelengths, compensates for broadcast loss, and supports online
monitoring of optical power, alarms, and performance.
Table 19-24 lists the functions and features of the TD20 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2065
Table 19-24 Functions and features of the TD20 board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Demultiplexes a multi-wavelength signal into 20 coherent optical
signals that are carried over different wavelengths and broadcasts the
signals. The board is intended for colorless applications.
Compensation for
broadcast loss
Uses a built-in EDFA module to compensate for broadcast loss.
l The EDFA module works in gain-locking mode.
Adding or dropping one or more channels of signals does not
affect the gain of signals on other channels.
The optical signal power jitter on some channels does not affect
the signal gain of other channels.
l The EDFA module has the transient control function. When
channels are added or dropped, the system can be upgraded or
expanded without interrupting services by using this function to
suppress channel optical power jitter.
Online optical
performance
monitoring
affecting traffic.
Alarms and
performance events
monitoring
l Monitors and reports optical power of the built-in EDFA module.
l Monitors the temperature of the pump laser.
l Detects the pump driving current, back facet current, pump
cooling current, temperature of the pump laser and the ambient
temperature of the board.

The TD20 board consists of the optical module, control and communication module, and power
supply module.
Figure 19-12 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TD20.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2066
Figure 19-12 Functional modules and signal flow of the TD20
IN
DM01
MON
DM02
DM20
CPU
VOA
PIN
EDFA optical module
Splitter
Driving and detection module
Memory
Control
Communication
Driving
current
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
Optical module
Detection for
pump current
and temperature
Optical
demultiplexer
module
AIN AOUT VO DMIN

Signal flow
1. The board receives the coherent multi-wavelength signal to be dropped through its IN port
and sends the signal to the VOA for power adjustment.
2. After the power adjustment by the VOA, the signal is sent to the EDFA module for power
amplification.
3. The power splitter splits the amplified optical power into two and sends the less optical
power to the MON port for performance monitoring.
4. The optical demultiplexer module equally splits the amplified multi-wavelength optical
signal into 20 light beams, each containing 20 single-wavelength signals, and transmits the
light beams through the DM1-DM20 ports.
Module function
l Optical module
The VOA adjusts the signal power to ensure that the signal power meets the system
requirement.
The EDFA module amplifies the optical power to compensate for the broadcast loss.
The power splitter splits the amplified optical power into two and sends the less optical
power to the MON port for performance monitoring.
The optical demultiplexer module equally splits the coherent multi-wavelength signal
into 20 light beams, each containing 20 single-wavelength signals, and broadcasts the
light beams to 20 directions.
l Driving and detection module
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2067
Detects in real time the optical power of service signals.
Detects in real time the drive current, back facet current, cooling current and operating
temperature of the pump laser inside the EDFA.
Drives the pump laser inside the EDFA optical module.
Reports alarms and performance events to the control and communication module.
19.5.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TD20 board.
Figure 19-13 shows the front panel of the TD20 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2068
Figure 19-13 Front panel of the TD20 board
TD20
TD20
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
D
M
0
1
D
M
0
2
D
M
0
3
D
M
0
4
D
M
0
5
D
M
0
6
D
M
0
7
D
M
0
8
D
M
0
9
D
M
1
0
D
M
1
1
D
M
1
2
D
M
1
3
D
M
1
4
D
M
1
5
D
M
1
6
I
N
D
M
1
7
D
M
1
8
D
M
1
9
D
M
2
0
M
O
N

Indicators
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2069
Interfaces
Table 19-25 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TD20 board
DM01DM20 LC Equally splits the multi-wavelength signal into 20 light
beams, each with 20 single-wavelength signals, and
broadcasts the light beams to the IN ports on coherent
OTU or line boards.
IN LC Receives a coherent multi-wavelength signal and sends
the signal to the DMx port on a WSD9 board.
MON LC Connects to an optical spectrum analysis board or an
optical spectrum analyzer for online spectrum
monitoring.
The MON port is a 1/99 of the total composite signal
at the EDFA OUT port (20 dB lower than the actual
(dBm) = 10 x lg(99/1) = 20 dB).

Laser Hazard Level
19.5.6 Valid Slots
Two slots house one TD20 board.
Table 19-26 shows the valid slots for the TD20 board.
Table 19-26 Valid slots for the TD20 board
Product Valid Slots
IU41, IU45-IU51, IU53-IU59, IU61-IU67
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2070
Product Valid Slots

Therefore, the slot number of the TD20 board displayed on the NM is the number of the leftmost
one of the two slots.
For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TD20 board, the slot number of the TD20 board
Table 19-27 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TD20 displayed on the NM
IN 1
AIN 2
AOUT 3
VO 4
DMIN 5
DM01 to DM20 6 to 25
MON 26

For TD20 Parameters, refer to Table 19-28.
Table 19-28 TD20 parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2071
Optical Interface
Value of Min.
Attenuation Rate
(dB) to Value of
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)
Default: Value of
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)
information.
Attenuation difference
(dB)
-3 to 3, with a step
of 0.1
Default: none
Specifies the difference between the
current attenuation and the required
attenuation.
(dB)
(dB)
Configure Band C
Default: C
Used to configure type of the working band
of a board.
board.
Actual Working Band
Parity
band of the board.
Configure Working
Band Parity
All
Default: All
band.
Input Power Loss
Threshold (dBm)
- The Input Power Loss Threshold
(dBm) parameter queries the threshold
value of the input optical power, which can
trigger a board to generate an optical power
loss (MUT_LOS) alarm. When the actual
input optical power is lower than this
threshold value, the board reports the
MUT_LOS alarm.
Gain (dB) - The Gain (dB) parameter queries the gain
of an optical amplifier board, namely, the
difference of the output power (dBm) to the
input power (dBm).
See D.13 Gain (dB) (WDM Interface) for
more information.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2072
Nominal Gain (dB) Value of Nominal
Gain Lower
Threshold (dB) to
Value of Nominal
Gain Upper
Threshold (dB)
Default: The
specific value is
related to the
module.
The Nominal Gain (dB) parameter
specifies the desired gain of the signal
optical power.
See D.22 Nominal Gain (dB) (WDM

19.5.9 TD20 Specifications
Table 19-29 Optical specifications of the TD20 board
Item Unit Value
Total input power range of IN port dBm -17.5 to 17
Input power range per channel of IN port dBm -17.5 to 4
Inherent insertion loss of internal VOA dB 1.5
Dynamic attenuation range of internal VOA dB 20
Adjustment accuracy of internal VOA dB 1
Nominal input power range of internal OA dBm -19 to -3
Input power range per channel of internal OA dBm -19 to -16
Nominal gain of internal OA dB 23
Noise figure (NF) of internal OA dB 6.0
Maximum total output optical power of
internal OA
dBm 20
Total output power range of DMx
a
ports
dBm -13 to 9
Single output power range of DMx
a
ports
dBm -13 to -4
Maximum channel insertion loss difference
(IN-DMx
a
)
dB 3
Maximum reflectance tolerance at input dB <-40
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2073
Item Unit Value
Maximum reflectance tolerance at output dB <-40
a: DMx represents the DM01-DM20 interface.

(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
at 25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN12TD20 13.0 15.0

19.6 TM20
TM20: 20-ports Tunable Multiplexing Board
The available functional version of the TM20 board is TN11.
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
1T
M20
Y Y Y Y Y N

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2074
19.6.2 Application
The TM20 board is a multiplexer board and is intended for colorless applications. It applies to
ROADM sites and is used to add 20 coherent optical signals over different wavelengths and
multiplex these signals into one multi-wavelength signal.
For the position of the TM20 board in the DWDM system, see Figure 19-14.
Figure 19-14 Position of the TM20 board in the DWDM system
WSMD4
W
S
M
D
4
OA
OA
N
E
W
Directionless
IN OUT
DM1 AM4
W
S
M
D
4
WSMD4
S
S
N
W
E
NE4
NE1
NE2
NE3
NE5
NE6
NE7
IN OUT
DM1
DM1
AM1
AM1
DM2 DM3 DM4 AM3 AM2 AM1
AM1
DM1
IN
OUT
OUT
IN
OA
OA
WSMD4
IN OUT
DM1 AM1
Colorless
TM20 TM20 TD20 TD20
O
T
U
WSM9 WSD9
OA
OA
NE1
OA
OA
OA
OA
: Current path
: Other path (S direction)
: Other path (N direction)
: Other path (E direction)
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
: Coherent OTU OTU

IN IN
DM4 DM1
IN
OUT
AM1
OUT
AM4
OUT
AM1 AM20 AM1 AM20 DM1 DM20 DM1 DM20

NOTE
Optical cross-connections must be created for the TM20 board on the U2000 and wavelengths must be specified
during the cross-connection creation.
The TM20 board performs the colorless add function. It adds a maximum of 20 coherent optical
signals and supports online monitoring of optical power, alarms, and performance.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2075
Table 19-30 Functions and features of the TM20 board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function l Adds a maximum of 20 coherent optical signals carried over
different wavelengths and multiplexes the signals into one multi-
wavelength signal. The board is intended for colorless
applications.
l Supports manual configuration of add wavelengths.
Online optical
performance
monitoring
affecting traffic.
Alarm and
performance event
monitoring
Detects optical power and reports alarms and performance events of
the board.

The TM20 board consists of the multiplexer, splitter, detection and temperature control module,
Figure 19-15 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TM20 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2076
Figure 19-15 Functional modules and signal flow of the TM20 board
OUT
AM01
MON
AM02
AM20
Temperature
control
Temperature
detection
PIN
Multiplexer
SCC
Splitter
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(Controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
Optical module

Signal Flow
1. Each of the AM01AM20 optical ports receives one single-wavelength coherent optical
signal and sends the signal to the interconnected multiplexer.
2. The multiplexer multiplexes the 20 single-wavelength optical signals into one multi-
wavelength optical signal, and then transmits the signal through its OUT optical port.
3. The power splitter splits the multi-wavelength signal power into two and sends the less
signal power to the MON port for performance monitoring.
NOTE
The AM01AM20 optical ports support tunable wavelengths but they must use different wavelengths.
Module Function
l Multiplexer
Multiplexes the 20 single-wavelength coherent optical signals into one multi-wavelength
optical signal.
l Splitter
Uses the power splitter to split the optical power on the main optical path into two and
sends the less optical power to the MON port for performance monitoring.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2077
19.6.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the TM20 board.
Figure 19-16 shows the front panel of the TM20 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2078
Figure 19-16 Front panel of the TM20 board
TM20
TM20
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
A
M
0
1
A
M
0
2
A
M
0
3
A
M
0
4
A
M
0
5
A
M
0
6
A
M
0
7
A
M
0
8
A
M
0
9
A
M
1
0
A
M
1
1
A
M
1
2
A
M
1
3
A
M
1
4
A
M
1
5
A
M
1
6
O
U
T
A
M
1
7
A
M
1
8
A
M
1
9
A
M
2
0
M
O
N
LASERRADIATION
CAUTION
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2079

Indicators
Interfaces
Table 19-31lists the type and function of each interface.
Table 19-31 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TM20 board
AM01 to AM20 LC Receives one single-wavelength coherent light signal
from an OTU or line board.
OUT LC Transmits a multi-wavelength signal to the AMx
optical port on a WSM9 board.
MON LC Connects to an optical spectrum analysis board or an
optical spectrum analyzer for online spectrum
monitoring.
The MON port power is 3/97 of the OUT port power.
That is, the MON port power is 15 dB lower than the
OUT port power. The calculation is: Pout(dBm) - Pmon
(dBm) = 10 x lg(97/3) = 15 dB.

Laser Hazard Level
19.6.6 Valid Slots
Three slots house one TM20 board.
Table 19-32 shows the valid slots for the TM20 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2080
Table 19-32 Valid slots for the TM20 board
Product Valid Slots
IU40, IU45-IU50, IU53-IU58, IU61-IU66

Therefore, the slot number of the TM20 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left
most one of three slots.
For example, if slots IU1, IU2, and IU3 house the TM20 board, the slot number of the TM20
Table 19-33 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TM20 displayed on the NM
OUT 1
AM01 to AM20 2 to 21
MON 22

For TM20 parameters, refer to Table 19-34.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2081
Table 19-34 TM20 parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
Actual Working
Band Parity
of the board.
Configure Band C
Default: C
Configure
Working Band
Parity
All
Default: All

19.6.9 TM20 Specifications
Table 19-35 Optical specifications of the TM20 board
Item Unit Value
Optical channels - 80
Insertion loss-AMx
a
-OUT
dB 8
Maximum channel insertion loss
difference
dB 1.5
-1 dB spectral width nm >0.16
Port isolation dB 20
Reconfiguration time Second 3
Maximum reflectance dB 40
Polarization dependence loss dB 1
a: AMx represents the AM01 to AM20 interface.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2082
(8.7 in.)
l Weight: 3.51 kg (7.74 lb.)
Power Consumption
at 25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11TM20 30.0 45.0

19.7 WSD9
WSD9: 9-port wavelength selective switching demultiplexing board
The available functional versions of the WSD9 board are TN11, TN12, and TN13.
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
1W
SD9
N N N N Y N
TN1
2W
SD9
Y Y Y Y Y N
TN1
3W
SD9
Y Y Y Y Y N

l Appearance:
The TN13WSD9 board uses a front panel different from that of the WSD9 board of
other versions. The TN13WSD9 board occupies three slots. The TN12WSD9 and
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2083
TN11WSD9 boards occupy two slots. For details, see 19.7.5 Front Panel and 19.7.9
WSD9 Specifications.
l Specification:
The wavelength of the TN13WSD9 board is separated at 50 GHz channel spacing. The
wavelength of the TN12WSD9 and TN11WSD9 boards are separated at 100 GHz
channel spacing. For details, see 19.7.9 WSD9 Specifications.
The mechanical specifications and power consumption vary according to the version of
the board that you use. For details, see 19.7.9 WSD9 Specifications.
Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11WSD
9
TN12WSD
9
Upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 6800 V100R003 or a
later version.
TN12WSD
9
None -
TN13WSD
9
None -

19.7.2 Application
As a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the WSD9 board is used with
the WSM9 or RMU9 board to implement wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM
network.
The single-wavelength or multi-channel signals to be dropped at the local station are output
through the interfaces of the WSD9 board based on the configuration.
l If the dropped signal is a multi-channel signal, it is sent to the optical demultiplexer unit
for demultiplexing. Then, the demultiplexed signals enter corresponding OTUs and are sent
to the client-side equipment at the local station.
l If the dropped signal is a single-wavelength signal, it is sent directly to the OTU at the local
station.
For the position of the WSD9 board in the DWDM system, see Figure 19-17.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2084
Figure 19-17 Position of the WSD9 board in the DWDM system
DCM
O A
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O A
O A
DCM
WSD9
DMUX
WSM9
WSM9
MUX
WSD9 O A
8
8
8
8
AM1 AM8
IN OUT
EXPI EXPO
DM1 DM8
EXPI EXPO
DM1 DM8
IN
AM1
AM8
OUT
Client-side
Client-side
DMUX MUX
NOTE
The WSD9 board is used to dynamically groom wavelengths, monitor online optical
Table 19-36 Functions and features of the WSD9 board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Configures any wavelengths to any interfaces. A node on the ring or
chain network can output any wavelength combination to any
interface to achieve the dynamic allocation of wavelengths.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2085
Function and
Feature
Description
Online optical
performance
monitoring
affecting traffic.
Alarm and
performance event
monitoring
Optical power
adjustment
Provides the function to adjust the optical power of each channel.

The WSD9 board consists of the optical module, temperature and optical power detection
Figure 19-18 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the WSD9 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2086
Figure 19-18 Functional modules and signal flow of the WSD9 board
EXPO
Temperature and optical power detection module
Temperature
detection
MONO
Optical module
SCC
Splitter 1
PIN
DM2 DM8
WSS module
IN
MONI
Splitter 2
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power from the
backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
DM1

Signal Flow
The main path signal is received through the IN interface. The single-wavelength or multi-
channel signals to be dropped at the local station are output through the DM1-DM8 interfaces
based on the configuration. Other channels pass through the station and are output through the
EXPO interface.
Module Function
l Optical module
The WSS module inside the optical module extracts any single wavelengths or
wavelength combinations from the multiplexed wavelength, and directs them out the
predefined ports of the DM1-DM8 ports. The optical module then sends the remaining
wavelengths to the EXPO port.
The WSS module supports wavelength-level power adjustments.
Splitters 1 and 2 provide a small amount of the IN and EXPO port power to the MONI
and MONO ports for in-service performance monitoring.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2087
l Temperature and optical power detection module
Monitors in real time the WSS optical module operating temperature.
19.7.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces, and a laser hazard level label on the front panel of the WSD9
board.
Figure 19-19 shows the front panel of the WSD9 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2088
Figure 19-19 Front panel of the WSD9 board
WSD9
WSD9
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
D
M
1
D
M
2
D
M
3
D
M
4
E
X
P
O
I
N
D
M
5
D
M
6
M
O
N
O
M
O
N
I
D
M
7
D
M
8
WSD9
WSD9
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TN13WSD9
TN11WSD9/
TN12WSD9
D
M
1
D
M
2
D
M
3
D
M
4
E
X
P
O
I
N
D
M
5
D
M
6
M
O
N
O
M
O
N
I
D
M
7
D
M
8
LASERRADIATION
CAUTION
LASERRADIATION
CAUTION
CAUTION
LASERRADIATION

Indicators
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2089
Interfaces
Table 19-37 Types and functions of the interfaces on the WSD9 board
DM1-DM8 LC Transmits the single-wavelength or multi-channel
signal separated from the main path. If the signal is a
multi-channel signal, it is sent to the optical
demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop
multiplexing unit. If the signal is a single-wavelength
signal, it is directly sent to the optical transponder unit.
EXPO LC Transmits the main path signal.
analyzer unit, accomplishes the online optical
performance monitoring for the received main path
signal.
power, calculation formula: Pin (dBm) - Pmoni (dBm)
= 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB).
performance monitoring for the transmitted main path
signal.
signal at the EXPO port (15 dB lower than the actual
signal power, calculation formula: Pexpo (dBm) -
Pmono (dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB).

Laser Hazard Level
19.7.6 Valid Slots
Two slots house one TN11WSD9 or TN12WSD9 board. Three slots house one TN13WSD9
board.
Table 19-38, Table 19-39 and Table 19-40 show the valid slots for the WSD9 boards.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2090
Table 19-38 Valid slots for the TN11WSD9 board
Product Valid Slots

Product Valid Slots
IU33, IU35-IU41, IU45-IU51, IU53-IU59,
IU61-IU67
IU35

Product Valid Slots
IU32, IU35-IU40, IU45-IU50, IU53-IU58,
IU61-IU66
IU34
OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack IU1-IU6, IU11-IU16,

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2091
NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800:The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the
subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN12WSD9 board displayed on the NM is the number of the
left one of the two slots, and the slot number of the TN13WSD9 board displayed on the NM is the number
of the left one of the three slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN12WSD9 board, the slot
number of the WSD9 board displayed on the NM is IU1. If slots IU1, IU2 and IU3 house the TN13WSD9
board, the slot number of the WSD9 board displayed on the NM is IU1.
subrack. Hence, the slot number of the TN11WSD9 or TN12WSD9 board displayed on the NM is the
number of the left one of the two slots, and the slot number of the TN13WSD9 board displayed on the NM
is the number of the left one of the three slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN12WSD9
board, the slot number of the WSD9 board displayed on the NM is IU1. If slots IU1, IU2 and IU3 house
the TN13WSD9 board, the slot number of the WSD9 board displayed on the NM is IU1.
Table 19-41 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the WSD9 board displayed on the NM
IN 1
EXPO 2
DM1-DM8 3-10
MONI 11
MONO 12

For parameters of the WSD9 board, refer to Table 19-42.
Table 19-42 WSD9 parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
Optical Interface
Name
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2092
Optical Interface
Attenuation Ratio
(dB)
Value of Min.
Attenuation Rate
(dB) to Value of
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB),
Blocking, /
l When no optical cross-connections are
present, the parameter value is displayed
as /.
l When NE-level optical cross-connections
are present or when the end-to-end
configuration function is used to configure
optical cross-connections and OPA Mode
is set to Manual, the parameter value is
displayed as Blocking after an OCh trail is
created. If you set the parameter at this time,
the specified value is then displayed.
l To obtain the value range of this parameter,
query the value of the Min. Attenuation
Rate (dB) and Max. Attenuation Rate
(dB) parameters.
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)
- Displays the maximum attenuation allowed by
Min. Attenuation
Rate (dB)
Configure Band C
Default: C
Input Power Loss
Threshold (dBm)
Actual Working
Band Parity
of the board.
Configure Working
Band Parity
All, Odd, Even
Default:
l TN11WSD9/
TN12WSD9:
Even
l TN13WSD9:
All
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2093

19.7.9 WSD9 Specifications
Table 19-43 Optical specifications of the WSD9 board
Item Unit Value
Type - TN11WSD9/
TN12WSD9
TN13WSD9
Optical channels - 40 80
Adjacent channel spacing GHz 100 50
Insertion loss
IN-DMx
a
IN-EXPO
dB
8
b
8
b
Maximum channel insertion loss
difference
dB 1.5 1.5
Operating wavelength range nm 1529-1561 1529-1561
-1dB spectral width nm > 0.32 > 0.16
Port isolation dB > 25 > 25
Adjacent channel isolation dB > 25 > 25
Non-adjacent channel isolation dB > 30 > 30
Extinction ratio dB 35 35
Reconfiguration time s 3 3
Directivity dB 35 35
Polarization dependence loss dB 1 1
Attenuation range of each of
dropping wavelengths
dB 0-15 0-15
Attenuation precision of each of
dropping wavelengths
dB 1 (0 to 10 dB)
1.5 (>10 dB)
1 (0 to 10 dB)
1.5 (>10 dB)
NOTE
a: DMx represents the DM1-DM8 interface.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2094
Dimensions of front panel:
l TN11WSD9 (H x W x D): 264.6 mm (10.4 in.) x 50.8 mm (2.0 in.) x 220 mm (8.7 in.)
Weight:
l TN11WSD9: 2.2 kg (4.9 lb.)
l TN12WSD9: 2.7 kg (5.94 lb.)
l TN13WSD9: 2.9 kg (6.38 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11WSD9 17.0 18.7
TN12WSD9 25.4 28.5
TN13WSD9 25.4 28.5

19.8 WSM9
WSM9: 9-port wavelength selective switching multiplexing board
The available functional versions of the WSM9 board are TN11, TN12, TN13.
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
1W
SM9
N N N N Y N
TN1
2W
SM9
Y Y Y Y Y N
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2095
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
3W
SM9
Y Y Y Y Y N

l Appearance:
The TN13WSM9 board uses a front panel different from that of the WSM9 board of
other versions. The TN13WSM9 board occupies three slots. The TN12WSM9 and
TN11WSM9 boards occupy two slots. For details, see 19.8.5 Front Panel and 19.8.9
WSM9 Specifications.
The laser safety class of TN13WSM9 board is different from that of the WSM9 board
of other versions. The laser safety class of TN13WSM9 board is HAZARD LEVEL 1.
The laser safety class of TN12WSM9 and TN11WSM9 boards is HAZARD LEVEL
1M. For details, see 19.8.5 Front Panel.
l Specification:
The wavelength of the TN13WSM9 board is separated at 50 GHz channel spacing. The
wavelength of the TN12WSM9 and TN11WSM9 boards are separated at 100 GHz
channel spacing. For details, see 19.8.9 WSM9 Specifications.
The mechanical specifications and power consumption vary according to versions. For
details, see19.8.9 WSM9 Specifications.
Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11WSM
9
TN12WSM
9
Upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 6800 V100R003 or a
later version.
TN12WSM
9
None -
TN13WSM
9
None -

19.8.2 Application
As a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the WSM9 board is used
with the WSD9 board to implement wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network.
For the position of the WSM9 board in the DWDM system, see Figure 19-20.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2096
Figure 19-20 Position of the WSM9 board in the DWDM system
DCM
O A
WSM9
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O A
O A
O A
DCM
WSD9
WSD9
WSM9
8 8
8 8
EXPI
DM1
DM8
IN OUT
OUT
IN
DM1
DM8
EXPI
EXPO
EXPO
AM1
AM1 AM8
AM8
Client-side
Client-side
Client-side
Client-side
DMUX
DMUX
MUX
MUX
NOTE
The WSM9 board is mainly used to dynamically groom wavelengths, monitor online optical
Table 19-44 Functions and features of the WSM9 board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Configures any wavelengths to any interfaces. A node on the ring or
chain network can receive any wavelengths at the local station through
any interfaces to achieve the dynamic wavelength allocation.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2097
Function and
Feature
Description
Online optical
performance
monitoring
affecting traffic.
Alarm and
performance event
monitoring
Optical power
adjustment
Provides the function to adjust the optical power of each channel.
Optical-layer ASON Supported by the TN12WSM9 and TN13WSM9.

The WSM9 board consists of four parts: the optical module, temperature and optical power
detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
Figure 19-21 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the WSM9 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2098
Figure 19-21 Functional modules and signal flow of the WSM9 board
OUT
Temperature and optical power detection module
Temperature
detection
MONO
Optical module
SCC
Splitter 1
PIN
AM1 AM2 AM8
WSS module
EXPI
MONI
Splitter 2
CPU
Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power from the
backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse

Signal Flow
The board receives the multiplexed optical signals of the main optical path through the EXPI
optical interface. The single-wavelength or multiplexed optical signals to be added are input
through the AM1-AM8 optical interfaces.
l If multiple wavelengths are to be added, the signals are first sent to the multiplexer unit for
processing and then input to the WSM9 board through the AMn optical interface.
l If single wavelength is to be added, the signal can be directly input to the WSM9 board
from the optical transponder unit through the AMn interface.
optical wavelength signals added through the AMn optical interface, the multiplexed signals are
Module Function
l Optical module
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2099
Receives any wavelengths (either single wavelengths or wavelength combinations)
through the EXPI port and any of AM1-AM8 ports.
The WSS module supports wavelength-level power adjustments.
Splitters 1 and 2 provide a small amount of the EXPI and OUT port power to the MONI
and MONO ports for in-service performance monitoring.
19.8.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces, and a laser hazard level label on the front panel of the WSM9
board.
Figure 19-22 shows the front panel of the WSM9 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2100
Figure 19-22 Front panel of the WSM9 board
TN13WSM9
WSM9
WSM9
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
WSM9
WSM9
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TN11WSM9/
TN12WSM9
A
M
1
A
M
2
A
M
3
A
M
4
O
U
T
E
X
P
I
A
M
5
A
M
6
M
O
N
O
M
O
N
I
A
M
7
A
M
8
A
M
1
A
M
2
A
M
3
A
M
4
O
U
T
E
X
P
I
A
M
5
A
M
6
M
O
N
O
M
O
N
I
A
M
7
A
M
8
CAUTION
LASERRADIATION
DONOT VIEWDIRECTLYWITH
LASERRADIATION
CAUTION

Indicators
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2101
Interfaces
Table 19-45 Types and functions of the interfaces on the WSM9 board
AM1-AM8 LC Receive the single-wavelength or multi-wavelength
signals that are to be multiplexed into the main path.
MONI LC Connects to the input interface of the spectrum analyzer
unit, accomplishes the online optical performance
monitoring for the received main path signal.
Pmoni (dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB).
MONO LC Connects to the input interface of the spectrum analyzer
unit, accomplishes the online optical performance
monitoring for the transmitted main path signal.
signal at the OUT port (15 dB lower than the actual
signal power, calculation formula: Pout (dBm) - Pmono
(dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB).

Laser Safety Level
TN11WSM9 and TN12WSM9:
The laser safety class of the optical interface is HAZARD LEVEL 1, indicating that the
maximum output optical power of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW).
TN13WSM9:
The laser safety class of the optical interface is HAZARD LEVEL 1M, indicating that the
maximum output optical power of each optical interface ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 21.3
dBm (136 mW).
19.8.6 Valid Slots
Two slots house one TN11WSM9/TN12WSM9 board. Three slots house one TN13WSM9
board.
Table 19-46, Table 19-47 and Table 19-48 show the valid slots for the WSM9 boards.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2102
Table 19-46 Valid slots for the TN11WSM9 board
Product Valid Slots

Product Valid Slots
IU33, IU35-IU41, IU45-IU51, IU53-IU59,
IU61-IU67
IU35

Product Valid Slots
IU32, IU35-IU40, IU45-IU50, IU53-IU58,
IU61-IU66
IU34

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2103
NOTE
subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN12WSM9 board displayed on the NM is the number of the
left one of the two slots, and the slot number of the TN13WSM9 board displayed on the NM is the number
of the left one of the three slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN12WSM9 board, the slot
number of the WSM9 board displayed on the NM is IU1. If slots IU1, IU2 and IU3 house the TN13WSM9
board, the slot number of the WSM9 board displayed on the NM is IU1.
subrack. Hence, the slot number of the TN11WSM9 or TN12WSM9 board displayed on the NM is the
number of the left one of the two slots, and the slot number of the TN13WSM9 board displayed on the NM
is the number of the left one of the three slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN12WSM9
board, the slot number of the WSM9 board displayed on the NM is IU1. If slots IU1, IU2 and IU3 house
the TN13WSM9 board, the slot number of the WSM9 board displayed on the NM is IU1.
Table 19-49 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the WSM9 board displayed on the NM
EXPI 1
OUT 2
AM1-AM8 3-10
MONI 11
MONO 12

For WSM9 parameters, refer to Table 19-50.
Table 19-50 WSM9 parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2104
Optical Interface Name - Sets and displays the optical interface
name.
are supported.
Optical Interface
Value of Min.
Attenuation Rate
(dB) to Value of
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB),
Blocking, /
present, the parameter value is
displayed as /.
l When NE-level optical cross-
connections are present or when the
end-to-end configuration function is
used to configure optical cross-
connections and OPA Mode is set to
Manual, the parameter value is
displayed as Blocking after an OCh
trail is created. If you set the parameter
at this time, the specified value is then
displayed.
l To obtain the value range of this
parameter, query the value of the Min.
Attenuation Rate (dB) and Max.
(dB)
(dB)
Configure Band C
Default: C
Sets the working band of a board.
board.
Actual Working Band
Parity
band of the board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2105
Configure Working
Band Parity
All, Odd, Even
Default:
l TN11WSM9/
TN12WSM9:
Even
l TN13WSM9:
All
band.

19.8.9 WSM9 Specifications
Table 19-51 Optical specifications of the WSM9 board
Item Unit Value
Type - TN11WSM9/
TN12WSM9
TN13WSM9
Insertion
loss
AMx
a
-OUT
EXPI-OUT
dB
8
b
8
b
Maximum channel insertion
loss difference
dB 1.5 1.5
-1 dB spectral width nm > 0.32 > 0.16
Adjacent channel isolation dB > 25 > 25
Non-adjacent channel isolation dB > 30 > 30
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2106
Item Unit Value
Type - TN11WSM9/
TN12WSM9
TN13WSM9
adding wavelengths
dB 0-15 0-15
adding wavelengths
dB 1 (0 to 10 dB)
1.5 (>10 dB)
1 (0 to 10 dB)
1.5 (>10 dB)
NOTE
a: AMx represents the AM1-AM8 interface.

l TN11WSM9 (H x W x D): 264.6 mm (10.4 in.) x 50.8 mm (2.0 in.) x 220 mm (8.7 in.)
Weight:
l TN11WSM9: 2.2 kg (4.84 lb.)
l TN12WSM9: 2.7 kg (5.94 lb.)
l TN13WSM9: 2.9 kg (6.38 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11WSM9 17.0 18.7
TN12WSM9 25.4 28.5
TN13WSM9 25.4 28.5

19.9 WSMD2
The available functional version of the WSMD2 board is TN11.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2107
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
1W
SM
D2
Y Y N Y Y N

19.9.2 Application
As a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the WSMD2 board is used
with the optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit and the optical add and drop multiplexing
unit to implement wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network.
For the position of the WSMD2 board in the DWDM system, see Figure 19-23.
Figure 19-23 Position of the WSMD2 board in the DWDM system
O A
O
T
U
O
T
U
O A
O A
DMUX
WSMD2
WSMD2
O A
Client-
side
Client-
side
DMUX MUX
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
DCM
DCM
O
T
U
O
T
U
MUX
IN OUT
DM
EXPO
AM
EXPI
IN OUT
DM
EXPO
AM
EXPI
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2108
The WSMD2 board is mainly used to broadcast services, dynamically groom wavelengths,
monitor online optical performance monitoring, and monitor alarms and performance events.
Table 19-52 Functions and features of the WSMD2 board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Provides service broadcasting function, and supports the function of
configurable multiplexing any wavelengths. Any node on a ring or
chain network can broadcast the signals received from the main
optical path as two channels of the same signals, and can input any
wavelengths added locally to the AM port.
Online optical
performance
monitoring
affecting traffic.
Alarm and
performance event
monitoring
Optical power
adjustment
Provides the function to adjust the optical power of any add
wavelengths at the local station.

The WSMD2 board consists of the WSS optical module, temperature and optical power detection
Figure 19-24 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the WSMD2.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2109
Figure 19-24 Functional modules and signal flow of the WSMD2
OUT
Temperature and optical power deteciton module
Temperature
detection
MONO
Optical module
SCC
Splitter
PIN
IN
MONI
Splitter
DM EXPO AM
WSS optical
module
PIN
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
Coupler
EXPI
Signal flow
The optical signals of the main path are accessed through the IN interface. The signals are
broadcast into two same optical signals through the coupler. Then, the board drops one channel
of optical signals at the local station through the DM optical interface. The other channel of
optical signals is output through the EXPO optical interface to other directions.
Optical signals (single-wavelength or multiplexed signals) added at the local station are input
to WSMD2 board through the AM optical interface. If multiple wavelengths are to be added,
the signals are first sent to the multiplexer unit for processing and then input to the WSMD2
board through the AM optical interface; if single wavelength is to be added, the signals can be
directly input to the WSMD2 board from the optical transponder unit through the AM interface.
Optical signals cross-connected from other directions are input to the WSMD2 board through
the EXPI optical interfaces. Then, they are multiplexed with the wavelengths added at the local
station. The multiplexed signals are finally output through the OUT optical interface.
Module function
l Optical module
The WSS optical module can access any combination of wavelengths through the
following optical interface: EXPI and AM.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2110
The WSS optical module implements the power adjustment at the wavelength level.
The Coupler optical module selects any combination of wavelengths and outputs it
through DM. It implements the broadcasting from wavelength signals to two ports.
The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and sends them to
MONI/MONO for detection.
Detects in real time the input and output optical power of service signals.
19.9.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the WSMD2
board.
Figure 19-25 shows the front panel of the WSMD2 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2111
Figure 19-25 Front panel of the WSMD2 board
WSMD2
WSMD2
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
D
M
A
M
E
X
P
O
E
X
P
I
O
U
T
I
N
M
O
N
O
M
O
N
I
LASERRADIATION
CAUTION
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION

Indicators
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2112
Interfaces
Table 19-53 Types and functions of the interfaces on the WSMD2 board
DM LC Transmits the multiplexed signals to be output at the
local station or other stations to the optical
demultiplexing unit or the optical add/drop
multiplexing unit.
AM LC Receives the single-wavelength signal or multiplexed
signal from the local station or other stations. Then, the
accessed signal is multiplexed into the main path.
EXPO LC Functions as a cascade output optical interface.
Multiple WSMD2 boards can be cascaded through
their EXPO optical interfaces.
EXPI LC Functions as a cascade input optical interface. Multiple
WSMD2 boards can be cascaded through their EXPI
optical interfaces.
signal.
Pmoni (dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB).
analyzer unit, monitors the optical performance of the
transmitted main path signal online.
(dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB).

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2113
Laser Hazard Level
19.9.6 Valid Slots
Two slots house one WSMD2 board.
Table 19-54 shows the valid slots for the WSMD2 board.
Table 19-54 Valid slots for the WSMD2 board
Product Valid Slots
IU33, IU35-IU41, IU45-IU51, IU53-IU59,
IU61-IU67
OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack IU1-IU7, IU12-IU18, IU20-IU26, and IU29-
IU35

NOTE
the slot number of the WSMD2 board displayed on the NM is the number of the leftmost one of the two
slots.
For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the WSMD2 board, the slot number of the WSMD2 board displayed
on the NM is IU1.
Table 19-55 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the WSMD2 board displayed on the NM
IN 1
DM 2
AM 3
OUT 4
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2114
EXPO 5
EXPI 6
MONO 7
MONI 8

For WSMD2 parameters, refer to Table 19-56.
Table 19-56 WSMD2 parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
Optical Interface
Name
- Sets and displays the optical interface
name.
are supported.
Optical Interface
Attenuation Ratio
(dB)
Value of Min.
Attenuation Rate
(dB) to Value of
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB),
Blocking, /
displayed as /.
displayed.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2115
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)
(dB)
Configure Band C
Default: C
board.
Input Power Loss
Threshold (dBm)
MUT_LOS alarm.
Actual Working Band
Parity
band of the board.
Configure Working
Band Parity
All, Odd, Even
Default: Even
band.

19.9.9 WSMD2 Specifications
Table 19-57 lists the optical specifications of the WSMD2 board.
Table 19-57 Optical specifications of the TN11WSMD2 board
Item Unit Value
-1 dB spectral width nm > 0.32
Insertion loss AM-OUT
EXPI-OUT
dB
8
a
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2116
Item Unit Value
IN-DM
IN-EXPO
4.5
a
Maximum channel insertion loss difference dB 1.5
Port isolation dB > 25
Reconfiguration time s 3
Directivity dB 35
Attenuation range of each of adding
wavelength
dB 0-15
Attenuation precision of each of adding
wavelength
dB 1 (0 dB to 10 dB)
1.5 (> 10 dB)

(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11WSMD2 17.0 18.7

19.10 WSMD4
The available functional versions of the WSMD4 board are TN11 and TN12.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2117
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
1W
SM
D4
Y Y N Y Y N
TN1
2W
SM
D4
Y Y Y Y Y N

Type
Table 19-58 lists the version description of the WSMD4 board.
Table 19-58 Version description of the WSMD4 board
TN11WSMD4 01 Processes the even wavelengths in C band.
02 Processes the odd wavelengths in C band.
TN12WSMD4 01 Processes the even wavelengths and odd

l Function:
The TN11WSMD4 processes 40 wavelengths in C band. The TN12WSMD4 processes
80 wavelengths in C band. For details, see Table 19-58.
l Specification:
see 19.10.9 WSMD4 Specifications.
The TN12WSMD4 board and TN11WSMD4 board are not interchangeable.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2118
19.10.2 Application
with the optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit and optical add and drop multiplexing unit
to implement wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network.
WSMD4
WSMD4
WSMD4
WSMD4
West client
side
North
ODF
South
ODF
West
ODF
East
ODF
F
I
U
F
I
U
F
I
U
F
I
U
IN
OUT
DM1
DM2
DM3
DM4
AM1
AM4
AM3
AM2
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
OUT
IN
DM1
DM2
DM3
DM4
AM1
AM4
AM3
AM2
DM1
DM2
DM3
DM4
AM1
AM4
AM3
AM2
DM1
DM2
DM3
DM4
AM1
AM4
AM3
AM2
RC
IN
TC
OUT
RC
IN
TC
OUT
RC
IN
TC
OUT
RC
IN
TC
OUT
East client
side
South client
side
North client
side
Function and
Feature
Description
optical path as four channels of the same signals, and can input any
wavelengths added locally to any port.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2119
Function and
Feature
Description
Online optical
performance
monitoring
affecting traffic.
Alarm and
performance event
monitoring
Optical power
adjustment
Optical-layer ASON Supported by the TN11WSMD401 and TN12WSMD4.

The WSMD4 board consists of the RDU optical module, WSS optical module, temperature and
optical power detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
Figure 19-27 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the WSMD4 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2120
Figure 19-27 Functional modules and signal flow of the WSMD4 board
OUT
Temperature and optical power deteciton module
Temperature
detection
MONO
Optical module
SCC
Splitter
PIN
IN
MONI
Splitter
D
M
1
D
M
2
D
M
4
RDU optical
module
A
M
1
A
M
2
A
M
4
WSS optical
module
D
M
3
A
M
3
PIN
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
Optical demultiplexer
module
Signal flow
The optical signals on the main path are accessed through the IN interface. It is broadcast into
four same optical signals through the RDU optical module. The four channels of optical signals
are output through the DM1-DM4 optical interfaces separately. According to the network
planning, the WSMD4 board drops one channel locally and outputs the other three channels to
other directions.
The optical signals (single-wavelength or multiplexed signals) added at the local station are input
to the WSMD4 board through one of the AM1-AM4 optical interfaces. Assume that the optical
signals are input through the AM1 optical interface. If multiple wavelengths are to be added, the
signals are first sent to the multiplexer unit for processing and then input to the WSMD4 board
through the AM1 optical interface; if single wavelength is to be added, the signals can be directly
input to the WSMD4 board from the optical transponder unit through the AM1 interface. Optical
signals cross-connected from other directions are input to the WSMD4 board through the AM2-
AM4 optical interfaces. Then, they are multiplexed with the added wavelengths at the local
station. The multiplexed signals are output through the OUT optical interface.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2121
Module function
l Optical module
The WSS optical module can access any combination of wavelengths through any of
the following optical interfaces: AM1, AM2, AM3 and AM4.
The RDU optical module locally drops optical signals and broadcasts wavelength
signals to its four ports.
19.10.5 Front Panel
board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2122
WSMD4
WSMD4
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
D
M
1
A
M
1
D
M
2
A
M
2
O
U
T
I
N
D
M
3
A
M
3
M
O
N
O
M
O
N
I
D
M
4
A
M
4
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION
LASERRADIATION
CAUTION

Indicators
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2123
Interfaces
AM1-AM4 LC Receives the single-wavelength signal or multiplexed
multiplexing unit.
signal.
Pmoni (dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB).
signal.
(dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB).

Laser Hazard Level
19.10.6 Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2124
Table 19-61 shows the valid slots for the TN11WSMD4 board.
Table 19-61 Valid slots for the TN11WSMD4 board
Product Valid Slots
IU33, IU35-IU41, IU45-IU51, IU53-IU59,
IU61-IU67
IU35

Table 19-62 shows the valid slots for the TN12WSMD4 board.
Table 19-62 Valid slots for the TN12WSMD4 board
Product Valid Slots
IU33, IU35-IU41, IU45-IU51, IU53-IU59,
IU61-IU67
IU35

NOTE
the slot number of the WSMD4 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the two slots.
on the NM is IU1.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2125
IN 1
DM1 2
AM1 3
OUT 4
DM2-DM4 5 to 7
AM2-AM4 8 to 10
MONO 11
MONI 12

For WSMD4 parameters, refer to Table 19-64.
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
Optical Interface
Name
name.
are supported.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2126
Optical Interface
Attenuation Ratio
(dB)
Value of Min.
Attenuation Rate
(dB) to Value of
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB),
Blocking, /
displayed as /.
displayed.
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)
Displays the maximum attenuation
(dB)
Configure Band C
Default: C
board.
Input Power Loss
Threshold (dBm)
MUT_LOS alarm.
Actual Working Band
Parity
band of the board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2127
Configure Working
Band Parity
All, Odd, Even
Default:
l TN11WSMD4:
Even
l TN12WSMD4:
All
band.

Table 19-65 Optical specifications of the WSMD4 board
Item Unit Value
TN11WSMD4 TN12WSMD4
-1dB spectral width nm > 0.32 > 0.16
Insertion loss
AMx
a
-OUT
dB
8
b
8
b
IN-DMx
a
8 8
Maximum channel insertion
loss difference
dB 1.5 1.5
adding wavelength
dB 0-15 0-15
adding wavelength
dB 1 (0 to 10 dB)
1.5 (> 10 dB)
1 (0 to 10 dB)
1.5 (> 10 dB)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2128
Item Unit Value
TN11WSMD4 TN12WSMD4
Dimension - 4 4
a: AMx represents the AM1-AM4 interface. DMx represents the DM1-DM4 interface.

(8.7 in.)
l Weight:
TN11WSMD4: 3.2 kg (7.1 lb.)
TN12WSMD4: 2.6 kg (5.7 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11WSMD4 17 18.7
TN12WSMD4 12 15

19.11 WSMD9
WSMD9: 9-Port wavelength selective multiplexing and demultiplexing board
The available functional version of the WSMD9 board is TN11.
Huawei office.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2129
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
1W
SM
D9
Y Y Y Y Y N

19.11.2 Application
with the optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit and optical add and drop multiplexing unit
to implement wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network.
DAS1
DAS1
MUX
MUX
Client side
O
T
U
O
T
U
DMUX
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
DMUX
O
T
U
O
T
U
Client side
DCM
DCM
WSMD9
WSMD9
DCM DCM
LIN
LOUT
SOUT
SIN
IN
OUT
AM1
DM1
DM1
AM1
EXPO
EXPI
EXPI
EXPO
OUT
IN
SIN
SOUT
LOUT
LIN

NOTE
Optical interfaces AM2AM8 and DM2DM8 on the WSMD9 board can be used to cross-connect boards
in other dimensions.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2130
Function and
Feature
Description
optical path as nine channels of the same signals, and can input any
wavelengths added locally to any port.
WDM specification Supports the DWDM specification. The wavelength of the
TN11WSMD9 board is separated at 50 GHz channel spacing.
Online optical
performance
monitoring
affecting traffic.
Alarm and
performance event
monitoring
Optical power
adjustment

The WSMD9 board consists of the RDU optical module, WSS optical module, temperature and
optical power detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
Figure 19-30 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the WSMD9 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2131
Figure 19-30 Functional modules and signal flow of the WSMD9 board
OUT
Optical power deteciton module
MONO
Optical module
SCC
PIN
IN
MONI
Splitter
D
M
1
RDU optical
module
WSS optical
module
PIN
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
D
M
2
D
M
3
D
M
4
D
M
5
D
M
6
D
M
7
D
M
8
A
M
1
A
M
2
A
M
3
A
M
4
A
M
5
A
M
6
A
M
7
A
M
8
EXPO EXPI
Optical demultiplexer
module
Temperature
detection
Splitter
Splitter
Signal flow
The multiplexed signals that need to be dropped are input to the board through the IN interface.
It is broadcast into nine same optical signals through the RDU optical module. The nine channels
of optical signals are output through the DM1-DM8 and EXPO optical interfaces separately.
One channel of the signals is dropped locally through the multiplexer board and the other eight
channels of signals are scheduled to other eight directions.
A few signals are extracted from the main path optical signals that are from the IN interface and
are then output through the MONI interface for performance detection.
The board receives the multiplexed optical signals of the main optical path through the EXPI
optical interface. The single-wavelength or multiplexed optical signals to be added are input
through the AM1-AM8 optical interfaces.
l If multiple wavelengths are to be added together, the wavelengths are first sent to the
multiplexer board for multiplexing. Then the multiplexed wavelength is sent to the WSMD9
board through one of the AM1-AM8 ports.
l If single wavelengths are to be added separately, the wavelengths are directly sent to the
WSMD9 board from associated OTUs through the AM1-AM8 ports.
optical wavelength signals added through the AMn optical interface, the multiplexed signals are
Module function
l Optical module
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2132
The RDU optical module broadcasts signals in nine directions. The nine channels of
optical signals are output through the DM1-DM8 and EXPO optical interfaces
separately.
The WSS optical module can access any combination of wavelengths through any of
the following optical interfaces: AM1 - AM8 and EXPI.
19.11.5 Front Panel
board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2133
WSMD9
WSMD9
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
O
U
T
I
N
M
O
N
O
M
O
N
I
E
X
P
O
E
X
P
I
D
M
5
A
M
5
D
M
6
A
M
6
D
M
7
A
M
7
D
M
8
A
M
8
D
M
1
A
M
1
D
M
2
A
M
2
D
M
3
A
M
3
D
M
4
A
M
4
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION
LASERRADIATION
CAUTION

Indicators
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2134
Interfaces
AM1-AM8 LC Receives the single-wavelength signal or multiplexed
multiplexing unit.
signal.
power, calculation formula: Pin (dBm) - Pmoni (dBm)
= 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB).
signal.
(dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB).
EXPO LC Transmits the main path signal.

Laser Hazard Level
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2135
19.11.6 Valid Slots
Table 19-68 shows the valid slots for the WSMD9 board.
Table 19-68 Valid slots for the WSMD9 board
Product Valid Slots
IU33, IU35-IU41, IU45-IU51, IU53-IU59,
IU61-IU67
IU35

NOTE
the slot number of the WSMD9 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the two slots.
on the NM is IU1.
IN 1
EXPO 2
EXPI 3
OUT 4
DM1-DM8 5-12
AM1-AM8 13-20

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2136
For WSMD9 Parameters, refer to Table 19-70.
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
Optical Interface Name - Sets and queries the optical interface name.
are supported.
Optical Interface
Value of Min.
Attenuation Rate
(dB) to Value of
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB),
Blocking, /
displayed as /.
displayed.
(dB)
(dB)
Configure Band C
Default: C
of a board.
board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2137
Actual Working Band
Parity
band of the board.
Configure Working
Band Parity
All, Odd, Even
Default: All
band.
Input Power Loss
Threshold (dBm)
MUT_LOS alarm.

Table 19-71 Optical specifications of the TN11WSMD9 board
Item Unit Value
Insertion loss
AMx
a
/EXPI-OUT
dB
8
b
IN-DMx
a
/EXPO
12
Maximum channel insertion loss difference dB 1.5
-1dB spectral width nm > 0.16
Port isolation dB > 25
Reconfiguration time s 3
Directivity dB 35
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2138
Item Unit Value
Attenuation range of each of adding
wavelength
dB 0 to 15
Attenuation precision of each of adding
wavelength
dB < 1 (0 to 10 dB)
< 1.5 (> 10 dB)
Dimension - 9
a: AMx represents the AM1-AM8 interface. DMx represents the DM1-DM8 interface.

(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11WSMD9 25 30
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2139
20 Optical Amplifier Board
About This Chapter
20.1 Overview
The optical amplifier board amplifies the power of the multiplexed optical signals to extend the
transmission distance.
20.2 CRPC
CRPC: case-shape raman pump amplifier unit for C band
20.3 DAS1
DAS1: optical amplifier unit
20.4 HBA
HBA: high-power booster amplifier board
20.5 OAU1
OAU1: optical amplifier unit
20.6 OBU1
OBU1: optical booster unit
20.7 OBU2
20.8 RAU1
RAU1: backward raman and erbium doped fiber hybrid optical amplifier unit
20.9 RAU2
RAU2: backward raman and erbium doped Fiber hybrid optical amplifier Unit
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Hardware Description 20 Optical Amplifier Board
2140
20.1 Overview
The optical amplifier board amplifies the power of the multiplexed optical signals to extend the
transmission distance.
Positions of Optical Amplifier Boards in a WDM System
Optical amplifier boards are used to compensate for power loss caused by long haul transmission
in fiber communication systems. They are classified into erbium-doped fiber amplifier (EDFA)
boards and Raman boards. Figure 20-1 shows the positions of optical amplifier boards at an
OTM site in a WDM system.
Figure 20-1 Positions of EDFA and Raman boards in a WDM system
O
M
E
D
F
A
F
I
U
SC1
OTU
O
D
OTU
OTU
OTU
R
a
m
a
n
E
D
F
A
The RAU board integrates the functions of both EDFA and Raman boards. Figure 20-2 shows
the positions of RAU boards in a WDM system.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2141
Figure 20-2 Positions of RAU boards in a WDM system
O
M
F
I
U
SC1
OTU
O
D
OTU
OTU
OTU
RAU
E
D
F
A
R
a
m
a
n
E
D
F
A
In Figure 20-1 and Figure 20-2:
l EDFA: HBA/OAU1/OBU1/OBU2
l Raman: CRPC01, RAU1, or RAU2. The WDM system in Figure 20-1 is a backward Raman
system where the CRPC01 board is used.
l RAU: RAU1/RAU2
NOTE
Different from the DAS1 board shown in Figure 20-1, the DAS1 board is mainly used at ROADM sites in a
WDM system. For the typical application scenario of the DAS1 board, see 20.3.2 Application.
Main Functions
Table 20-1 lists the main functions of optical amplifier boards. For the detailed specifications
of each board, see the relevant specification pages.
Table 20-1 Main functions of optical amplifier Boards
Board Function Gain
CRPC Case-shape Raman pump amplifier board for C band. It
generates multi-channel pump light of high power and must
be used with EDFA boards.
For the gain range, see 20.2.11 CRPC
Specifications.
DAS1 Double optical amplifier board with supervisory channel. It
amplifies optical signals using an EDFA optical module,
multiplexes and demultiplexes the optical supervisory
channel (OSC) signal and the main optical path signal, and
processes one OSC signal.
The board is equipped with VOAs to adjust the power of input
optical signals.
Gain range: 20 dB to 31 dB. For
details, see 20.3.9 DAS1
Specifications.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2142
Board Function Gain
HBA High-power booster amplifier board. It amplifies optical
signals in the C band using an EDFA optical module. The
board provides a high gain and is generally configured at the
transmit end of a long-span system.
Typical gain: 29 dB. For details, see
20.4.10 HBA Specifications.
OAU1 Optical amplifier board. It amplifies optical signals in the C
band using an EDFA optical module. The board is equipped
with VOAs to adjust the power of input optical signals.
The OAU1 board provides two amplifiers for power
amplification and a DCM module can be installed in between
for dispersion compensation.
Gain range: 16 dB to 25.5 dB. For
details, see 20.5.10 OAU1
Specifications.
OBU1 Optical amplifier board. It amplifies optical signals in the C
Gain range: 171.5 dB to 231.5 dB.
For details, see 20.6.10 OBU1
Specifications.
OBU2 Optical amplifier board. It amplifies optical signals in the C
Gain range: 231.5 dB. For details,
see 20.7.10 OBU2 Specifications.
RAU1 Raman and EDFA hybrid optical amplifier board. It is used
at the receive end to generate multi-channel pump light of
high power.
For the gain range, see 20.8.9 RAU1
Specifications.
RAU2 Raman and EDFA hybrid optical amplifier board. It is used
at the receive end to generate multi-channel pump light of
high power.
The board is equipped with VOAs to adjust the power of input
optical signals.
For the gain range, see 20.9.9 RAU2
Specifications.

20.2 CRPC
CRPC: case-shape raman pump amplifier unit for C band
The available functional version of the CRPC board is TN11.
Huawei office.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2143
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
1CR
PC
Y Y Y Y Y N

Type
Table 20-2 lists the types of the CRPC board.
Table 20-2 Type description of the CRPC board
CRPC 01 Adopts the backward pumping technology.
03 Adopts the forward pumping technology.

20.2.2 Application
As a type of optical amplifier unit, the CRPC board supports transmission over ultra-long
distance and application of the 40G OTU, and can generate multi-channel pump light of high
power. The CRPC board must be used with the EDFA.
CAUTION
Always turn off the pump laser of the CRPC board before removing or inserting the fiber to the
CRPC.
For the position of the CRPC board in the WDM system, see Figure 20-3 and Figure 20-4.
Figure 20-3 Position of the CRPC board in the WDM system (backward pump)
OTU
Client
side
OBU1
OAU1
M
U
X
D
M
U
X
OTU
OTU
OTU
D
M
U
X
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OAU1
OBU1
F
I
U
F
I
U
F
I
U
F
I
U
CRPC
01
CRPC
01
Client
side
Client
side
Client
side
M
U
X

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2144
Figure 20-4 Position of the CRPC board in the WDM system (forward pump)
OTU
Client
side
OBU1
OAU1
M
U
X
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OAU1
OBU1
F
I
U
F
I
U
F
I
U
F
I
U
CRPC
03
CRPC
03
Client
side
Client
side
Client
side
D
M
U
X
D
M
U
X
M
U
X

The main function and feature supported by the CRPC board is online optical performance
monitoring.
Table 20-3 Functions and features of the CRPC board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function l Generates multi-channel pump light of high power, providing
energy for the amplification of signals in the fiber.
l Implements the distributed online amplification of signals over
long distance with wide bandwidth and low noise.
Online optical
performance
monitoring
affecting traffic.
Alarms and
performance events
monitoring
Detects the optical power of the pump laser, temperature control
current, pump current, and back facet current.
Supports return loss detection.
Working mode Supports the gain locking modes.

The CRPC board consists of the Raman pump optical module, driving and detection module,
The CRPC board is used at the receive end and the transmit end of the system, making use of
the stimulated Raman scattering effect to amplify the optical signals during transmission.
The CRPC board is located before the receiver. The pump light travels in the reverse direction
of the signal light. Figure 20-5 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the CRPC.
The CRPC board is located after the transmit end. The pump light travels in the same direction
of the signal light. Figure 20-6 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the CRPC.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2145
Figure 20-5 Functional modules and signal flow of the CRPC board (backward pump)
SYS
Pumping
current and
temperature
control
Detection for
temperature
SCC
PIN
Raman pump optical module
Splitter
Pump source
Signal
Pump light
Signal
Detection for
pump light
power and
current
MON
LINE
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from PDU
Required
voltage
Fuse
CPU Memory
Control
Communication

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2146
Figure 20-6 Functional modules and signal flow of the CRPC board (forward pump)
SYS
Pumping
current and
temperature
control
Detection for
temperature
SCC
PIN
Raman pump optical module
Splitter
Pump source
Signal
Pump light
Signal
Detection for
pump light
power and
current
MON
LINE
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from PDU
Required
voltage
Fuse
CPU Memory
Control
Communication

Signal Flow
l Backward pump
The pump source of the CRPC board sends the pump light to the WDM side through the
LINE optical interface. On the line, the signals that are amplified through the distributed
amplification are input through the LINE interface. The splitter then splits them into two,
among which the service optical signals are output through the SYS interface. A few
supervisory signals are output to the multi-channel spectrum analyzer unit (MCA4, MCA8)
or test instrument through the MON interface for online optical performance monitoring.
l Forward pump
The signal light is input through the SYS interface and output to the optical line through
the LINE interface. A few supervisory signals are output to the multi-channel spectrum
analyzer unit (MCA4, MCA8) or test instrument through the MON interface for online
optical performance monitoring. The pump light that is generated by the CRPC board is
output to the optical line through the LINE interface in the same direction as the signal
light, to implement the distributed amplification of the optical signal.
For OptiX OSN 6800: The Ethernet interface of the CRPC is connected to the ETH1/ETH2
interface of the AUX or the ETH3 interface of the EFI board for communication with the SCC.
For OptiX OSN 8800 T64/OptiX OSN 8800 T32: The Ethernet interface of the CRPC board is
connected to the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 interface of the EFI2 board for the communication with
the SCC.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2147
For OptiX OSN 8800 T16: The Ethernet interface of the CRPC board is connected to the ETH1/
ETH2/ETH3 interface of the EFI board for the communication with the SCC.
For OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack: The Ethernet interface of the CRPC board is connected
to the ETH1/ETH2 or NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 interface of the AUX board for the communication
with the SCC.
NOTE
Only when OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack as a slave subrack, the Ethernet interface of the CRPC board can
be connected to the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 interface of the AUX board.
Module Function
l Raman pump optical module
The laser in the pump source generates the pump light and sends the light to the optical
line for transmission. The Raman pump optical module makes use of the stimulated
Raman scattering effect of the fiber to amplify the optical signals during transmission.
The splitter splits one channel of optical signals from the pump source module into two
channels of signals of different power. One of them is output through the SYS interface
and transmitted in the main optical path. The other channel of signals is output to the
MON interface for spectrum detection and supervising.
temperature of the pump laser inside the pump optical module.
Drives the pump laser inside the pump optical module.
Converts the DC power supplied by the PDU into the power required by each module
on the board.
20.2.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the CRPC board.
Figure 20-7 shows the front panel of the CRPC board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2148
Figure 20-7 Front panel of the CRPC board
:
BE CONNECTED BEFORE
POWER UP
!
ALM
CRPC
RUN
LINE SYS MON
RS232-1 RS232-2
LAN
LASERRADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
CAUTION
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION
:
BE CONNECTED BEFORE
POWER UP
!

Indicators
Two indicators are present on the front panel:
l Running status indicator (RUN) - green
l Service alarm indicator (ALM) - red
See Table 20-4 and Table 20-5 for details.
Table 20-4 Red alarm indicator
Flash State Description
Off There is no alarm.
Three times every other second There is a critical alarm.
Twice every other second There is a major alarm.
Once every other second There is a minor alarm.
On Hardware is faulty, or the self-check fails.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2149
Table 20-5 Green running indicator
Flash State Description
Flashes five times per second The board is not in service.
Flashes once every other second The board is in service (normal).
2 seconds on and 2 seconds off The communication with the SCC unit stops, and the
board is in off-line working state.

Interfaces
Table 20-6 Types and functions of the interfaces on the CRPC board
LINE LSH/APC l For backward pump: receives optical signals from
the line, which have been amplified in distributed
manner.
l For forward pump: transmits optical signals to the
line.
SYS LC l For backward pump: connects to an FIU board and
transmits amplified optical signals to the FIU board.
l For forward pump: receives optical signals from an
FIU board.
MON LC Connected to the MCA4, MCA8 or OPM8, monitors
performance online.
The MON port is a 1/99 tap of the total composite signal
at the SYS port (20 dB lower than the actual signal
power, calculation formula: Psys (dBm) - Pmon (dBm)
= 10 x lg (99/1) = 20 dB).
LAN RJ45 For OptiX OSN 6800: Connected to the ETH1/ETH2
of the AUX interface or the ETH3 interface of the EFI
board for the communications with the SCC.
For OptiX OSN 8800: Connected to the ETH1/ETH2/
ETH3 of the EFI2 board for the communications with
the SCC.
RS232-1/
RS232-2
- RS232 communication interface

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2150
Laser Hazard Level
After the IPA function is enabled, the laser hazard level of the board is HAZARD LEVEL 1M,
which indicates that the maximum power launched by the board rangesfrom10 dBm (10 mW)
to 21.3 dBm (136 mW).
20.2.6 Valid Slots
The CRPC board is a case-shaped Raman amplifier. It is installed outside the cabinet and not
inside the subrack.
The LAN interface on the CRPC board can be connected to the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 interface
on the master or a slave subrack to implement communication with the system control board in
the master subrack. The CRPC board is installed outside a cabinet, but a logical slot is designed
for a CRPC board for the management purpose. Table 20-7 lists the supported logical slots for
the CRPC board.
On the NMS, the logical slot of the CRPC board can be managed only by the master subrack.
Each NE supports a maximum of four CRPC boards.
Table 20-7 Valid slots for the CRPC board
Product Supported Logical Slots
OptiX OSN 6800 subrack Non-extended slot numbering mode: IU28-
IU31
Extended slot numbering mode: IU120-
IU123

20.2.7 Dip Switch and Jumper
There are two groups of jumpers on the CRPC boards. The two groups are identified as J3 and
J4.
Figure 20-8 shows the number of each jumper.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2151
Figure 20-8 Jumpers on the CRPC board
CPU
J3 J4
12
9
1
0
1
0
1 2
9
CRPC

Jumpers 9 to 10 in J3 and 1 to 6 in J4 are used for internal identification on the board. To ensure
the normal operation of the board, follow the requirements below to set the jumpers.
For OptiX OSN 6800:
l Do not connect jumpers 1 to 2 in J3.
l Do not connect jumpers 9 to 10 in J3. (Non-extended slot numbering mode)
l Connect jumpers 9 to 10 in J3. (Extended slot numbering mode)
l Connect jumpers 1 to 2 in J4.
l Jumpers 7-8 and 9-10 in J4 are used to set the slot of the CRPC board. The following are
jumper setting regulations in the non-extended slot numbering mode:
When jumpers 7-8 and 9-10 in J4 are not connected, the board slot is IU28.
When jumpers 7-8 in J4 are connected and jumpers 9-10 are not connected, the board
slot is IU29.
When jumpers 7-8 in J4 are not connected and jumpers 9-10 are connected, the board
slot is IU30.
When jumpers 7-8 and 9-10 in J4 are connected, the board slot is IU31.
The following are jumper setting regulations in the extended slot numbering mode:
slot is IU121.
slot is IU122.
For OptiX OSN 8800:
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2152
l Jumpers 7-8 and 9-10 in J4 are used to set the slot of the CRPC board. The following are
jumper setting regulations:
slot is IU121.
slot is IU122.
20.2.8 Characteristic Code for the CRPC
The characteristic code for the CRPC board contains one character and two digits, indicating
the gain of the optical signals processed by the board.
Table 20-8 Characteristic code for the CRPC board
First character - Is always G.
Two digits Gain Indicate the gain value.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11CRPC board is G10, indicating 10 dB gain.
Table 20-9 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the CRPC board displayed on the NM
LINE 1
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2153
SYS 2
MON 3

For CRPC parameters, refer to Table 20-10.
Table 20-10 CRPC parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
Optical Interface
Name
name.
are supported.
Board Work Type C, C + L, L
Default: C
Sets the working mode of a board.
According to the board working mode, you
can specify the type of the band from which
the optical signals are accessed.
board.
Actual Working
Band Parity
band of the board.
Configure Band C
Default: C
Configure Working
Band Parity
All, Odd, Even
Default: All
band.
Default: Off
status of a board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2154
Fixed Pump Optical
Power (dBm)
- The Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm)
parameter sets or queries the output optical
power of an optical amplifier board. If the
fixed pump optical power value is smaller
than the minimum value or larger than the
maximum value, the board might work
abnormally.
See D.12 Fixed Pump Optical Power
(dBm) (WDM Interface) for more
information.
Minmun Fixed
Pump Optical Power
(dBm)
- The Minmun Fixed Pump Optical Power
(dBm) parameter is used to query the
minimum pump optical power that an
optical amplifier board can fix.
See D.19 Minmun Fixed Pump Optical
Power (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more
information.
Maxmun Fixed
Pump Optical Power
(dBm)
- The Maxmun Fixed Pump Optical
Power (dBm) parameter is used to query
the maximum pump optical power that an
optical amplifier board can fix.
See D.18 Maxmun Fixed Pump Optical
Power (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more
information.
The Upper
Threshold of RL to
starting the pump
(dB)
- Displays the upper threshold of the return
loss to starting the pump.
The Lower
Threshold of RL to
starting the pump
(dB)
- Displays the lower threshold of the return
The Upper
Threshold of RL
alarm (dB)
loss alarm.
The Lower
Threshold of RL
alarm (dB)
loss alarm.
RL Flag Enable, Disable
Default: Enable
Determines whether to enable the return
loss check.

20.2.11 CRPC Specifications
Specifications include optical specifications, weight and power consumption.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2155
Table 20-11 Optical specifications of the CRPC board
Item Un
it
Value
CRPC01 CRPC03
Pump wavelength range nm 1400-1500 1400-1500
Maximum pump power dB
m
29 29.5
Channel gain on G.652 fiber dB > 10 > 10
Channel gain on G.653 fiber dB N/A > 16
Channel gain on LEAF fiber dB > 12 N/A
Channel gain on TWRS fiber dB > 13 N/A
Effective noise figure on G.652
fiber
dB 0 N/A
Effective noise figure on G.653
fiber
dB N/A N/A
Effective noise figure on LEAF
fiber
dB -1 N/A
Effective noise figure on
TWRS fiber
dB -1.5 N/A
Polarization dependence loss dB 0.5 0.5
Output connector type - LSH/APC, LC/PC LSH/APC, LC/PC

l Dimensions of board (H x W x D): 345.0 mm (13.8 in.) x 76.0 mm (3.0 in.) x 218.5 mm
(8.7 in.)
l Weight:
CRPC01: 4.0 kg (8.8 1b.)
CRPC03: 4.2 kg (9.2 1b.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11CRPC01 110.0 121.0
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2156
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11CRPC03 70.0 77.0

20.3 DAS1
DAS1: optical amplifier unit
The available functional version of the DAS1 board is TN11.
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
1DA
S1
Y Y Y Y Y Y

20.3.2 Application
The DAS1 board is used to amplify optical signals, multiplex and demultiplex the optical
supervisory channel and main optical channel, and process optical supervisory signals in one
direction. The DAS1 board can be used at either the transmit end or the receive end.
For the position of the DAS1 board in the WDM system, see Figure 20-9.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2157
Figure 20-9 Position of the DAS1 board in the WDM system
DAS1
DAS1
MUX
MUX
Client side
O
T
U
O
T
U
DMUX
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
DMUX
O
T
U
O
T
U
Client side
DCM
DCM
WSMD9
WSMD9
DCM
DCM
LIN
LOUT
SOUT
SIN
IN
OUT
AM1
DM1
DM1
AM1
EXPO
EXPI
EXPI
EXPO
OUT
IN
SIN
SOUT
LOUT
LIN

NOTE
Optical interfaces AM2AM8 and DM2DM8 on the WSMD9 board can be used to cross-connect boards
in other dimensions.
It is recommended that the DAS1 board be used at a ROADM station.
The DAS1 board cannot be used at an OLA station.
The DAS1 board cannot be used together with the SFIU board.
The DAS1 board integrates the functions of an optical amplifier unit, an FIU board (used to
multiplexes the main optical channel and supervisory channel or demultiplexes the supervisory
channel from the main channel signal), and an optical supervisory board. It supports gain
adjustment, in-service monitoring of optical performance, gain locking, and transient state
control.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2158
Table 20-12 Functions and features of the DAS1 board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function l Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. The total
wavelengths range from 1529 nm to 1561 nm.
l Supports the system to transmit services over different fiber spans
without electrical regeneration.
l Multiplexes and demultiplexes signals transmitted along the main
l Processes one channel of optical supervisory signals.
l Supports transparent transmission of one channel of FE electrical
signals.
Gain adjustment The DAS1 board continuously adjusts the gain from 20 dB to 31 dB
based on the input optical power.
Online optical
performance
monitoring
Provides the online monitoring interface. A small number of EDFA-
amplified optical signals is output through this interface to the optical
spectrum analysis board. In this manner, the spectrum and optical
performance of the multiplexed signal are monitored without
interrupting the services.
Gain lock function The EDFA inside the board has the gain lock function. Adding or
dropping one or more channels or optical signal fluctuation does not
affect the signal gain of other channels.
Working mode Supports the gain locking and power locking modes.
l In the gain locking mode, the gain of the board is tunable and users
can query the actual gain of the board. The gain locking mode is
enabled by default.
l The power locking mode applies to scenarios in which there is
only dummy light to lock the output power of the board.
Transient control
function
The EDFA inside the board has the transient control function. When
channels are added or dropped, the board can suppress the fluctuation
of the optical power in the path so as to implement the smooth
upgrading and expansion.
Alarms and
performance events
monitoring
l Detects and reports the optical power.
OSC signal
regeneration
The DAS1 board transmits signals from section to section. It also has
the 3R function. In each regenerating station that has optical
amplifiers, information can be correctly received and new supervisory
signals are added.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2159
Function and
Feature
Description
Operating
wavelength for OSC
signals
1511nm
eSFP The RX/TX optical port supports pluggable optical modules.

The DAS1 board consists of the multiplexer, VOA, EDFA module, demultiplexer, OSC optical
module, service processing module, driving and detection module, control and communication
Figure 20-10 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the DAS1 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2160
Figure 20-10 Functional modules and signal flow of the DAS1 board
LIN
SCC
Power supply
module
Fuse
Required voltage
Backplane
(controlledby SCC)
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
DC power supply
from a backplane
VOA
RRDC RTDC
EDFA module
Splitter
MONR
SOUT
TRDC
TTDC
MONT
TM
PIN
O/E
E/O
OSC optical
module Service processing module
LOUT VOA SIN
RM
RX
TX
WSC
Demultiplexer
Multiplexer
EDFA module
Splitter
PIN
FE signal
processing module
Supervisory signal
processing module
RVI RPAIN
TBA
OUT
TPA
IN

Signal Flow
Signal flow in the main optical channel
l In the transmit direction:
The board receives line optical signals through the LIN optical interfaces and sends the
signals to the demultiplexer module.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2161
The demultiplexer splits OSC signals from main optical channel signals. The
demultiplexer outputs OSC signals through the TM optical interface and sends the main
optical channel signals to the VOA.
The VOA adjusts optical power of the main optical channel signals and then sends the
signals to the EDFA optical module.
The EDFA optical module amplifies the optical power of the signal and locks the gain
of the signal. Then, the EDFA optical module outputs the signals to a DCM board
through the RTDC optical interface. After the DCM finishes compensating dispersion
for the signals, the EDFA optical module receives the signals through the RRDC optical
interface. Then, the EDFA module outputs the amplified signals through the SOUT
optical interface.
l In the receive direction:
The board receives multiplexed signals through the SIN optical interface and sends the
signals to the VOA.
The VOA adjusts optical power of the signals and then sends the signals to the EDFA
optical module.
The EDFA optical module amplifies the optical power of the signal and locks the gain
of the signal. Then, the EDFA optical module outputs the signals to a DCM board
through the TTDC optical interface. After the DCM finishes compensating dispersion
for the signals, the EDFA optical module receives the signals through the TRDC optical
interface. The EDFA optical module sends the amplified multiplexed signals to the
multiplexer module.
The multiplexer multiplexes the amplified multiplexed signals and OSC signals input
through the RM optical interface as line optical signals, and outputs the signals through
the LOUT optical interface.
Signal flow in the OSC
l The board receives OSC signals through the TM optical interface, and sends the OSC
signals to the optical receiver module through the RX optical interface.
l The optical receiver module converts the optical signals into electrical signals and sends
the electrical signals to the service processing module.
l The service processing module extracts overhead bytes from the electrical signals and sends
the overhead bytes to the SCC board. This module also processes FE electrical signals.
l The overhead bytes processed by the SCC board are sent to the optical receiver module
and then are converted into OSC signals by the optical receiver module.
l The optical receiver module sends the signals to the RM optical interface on the local board.
After multiplexing the signals, the multiplexer sends the OSC signals to other NEs.
Signal flow in the FE
l In the transmit direction: The DAS1 board receives a local FE electrical signal through its
WSC port and sends it to the FE signal processing module for encapsulation. Then, the
DAS1 board transmits it together with the optical supervisory signal through its TX port.
The optical receiver module sends the signals to the RM optical interface on the local board.
After multiplexing the signals, the multiplexer sends the OSC signals to other NEs.
l In the receive direction: The DAS1 board receives an optical signal from the upstream
board through its LIN port. The demultiplexer splits FE optical signal from main optical
channel signals. The demultiplexer outputs FE signal through the TM optical interface and
sends it to the FE signal processing module for decapsulation through the RX optical
interface. Then, the DAS1 board drops it through its WSC port.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2162
Module Function
l Multiplexer
Multiplexes main optical channel signals and OSC signals as line optical signals.
l Demultiplexer
Demultiplexes line optical signals into main optical channel signals and OSC signals.
l VOA
Adjusts optical power of optical signals according to system requirements.
l EDFA optical module
Multiplexed signal light and pump light enter the erbium-doped fiber for amplification.
The erbium-doped fiber that is excited by the pump laser can amplify the optical signal
to implement the optical power amplification function.
The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path for optical power
detection.
FE signal processing module: Encapsulates and decapsulates FE signals.
Supervisory signal processing module: Encapsulates electrical supervisory signals into
OTU frames, processes overheads, and performs encoding/decoding.
l OSC optical module
Performs O/E and E/O conversion for one channel of OSC signals.
20.3.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces, and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the DAS1 board.
Figure 20-11 shows the front panel of the DAS1 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2163
Figure 20-11 Front panel of the DAS1 board
DAS1
DAS1
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
WSC
T
X
R
X
T
M
R
M
M
O
N
T
M
O
N
R
L
O
U
T
L
I
N
S
O
U
T
S
I
N
T
T
D
C
T
R
D
C
R
T
D
C
R
R
D
C
LASERRADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
CAUTION
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION
NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS

Indicators
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2164
Interfaces
Table 20-13 Types and functions of the interfaces on the DAS1 board
WSC RJ45 Transmits/Receives the FE electrical signals.
NOTE
The FE electrical port works in 100M full-duplex mode and
can transmit or receive a packet consisting of a maximum of
1518 bytes.
TX LC Transmits the supervisory signal.
RX LC Receives the supervisory signal.
TM LC Transmits the supervisory signal.
RM LC Receives the supervisory signal.
MONT LC Connected to the MCA4, MCA8, OPM8 or WMU,
accomplishes the online performance monitoring.
The MONT port is a 1/99 tap of the total composite
signal at the LOUT port (20 dB lower than the actual
signal power, calculation formula: Plout (dBm) -
Pmont (dBm) = 10 x lg (99/1) = 20 dB).
The MONR port is a 1/99 tap of the total composite
signal at the SOUT port (20 dB lower than the actual
signal power, calculation formula: Psout (dBm) -
Pmonr (dBm) = 10 x lg (99/1) = 20 dB).
MONR LC
LOUT LC Transmits the amplified signal (including the
supervisory signal).
LIN LC Receives the multiplexed signal to be amplified
(including the supervisory signal).
SOUT LC Transmits the amplified signal(not including the
supervisory signal).
SIN LC Receives the multiplexed signal to be amplified (not
including the supervisory signal).
TTDC/TRDC LC Connected to the interface of the DCM for dispersion
compensation.
RTDC/RRDC LC
Connect a shielded network cable without protection boot to the WSC interface on the DAS1
board.

Laser Hazard Level
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2165
20.3.6 Valid Slots
One slot house one DAS1 board.
Table 20-14 shows the valid slots for the DAS1 board.
Table 20-14 Valid slots for the DAS1 board
Product Valid Slots

Table 20-15 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the DAS1 board displayed on the NM
LIN/LOUT 1
RM/TM 3
RX/TX 4
RVI
a
5
RPAIN
a
6
RRDC 8
SOUT 9
RTDC 10
MONR 11
SIN 12
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2166
TPAIN
a
13
TRDC 15
TBAOUT
a
16
TTDC 17
MONT 18
a: Virtual port

For parameters of the DAS1, refer to Table 20-16.
Table 20-16 DAS1 parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
Optical Interface
Name
are supported.
Optical Interface
Attenuation Ratio
(dB)
Value of Min.
Attenuation Rate
(dB) to Value of
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)
Default: Value of
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)
This parameter provides an option to set the
optical power attenuation of a board
channel so that the input signals power of
the board is within the preset range.
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)
Min. Attenuation
Rate (dB)
board.
Configure Band C
Default: C
of a board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2167
Actual Working
Band Parity
band of the board.
Configure Working
Band Parity
All, Odd, Even
Default: All
band.
Optical Interface
Loopback
Non-Loopback,
Inloop, Outloop
Default: Non-
Loopback
Input Power Loss
Threshold (dBm)
MUT_LOS alarm.
Default: On
status of a board.
input power (dBm).
more information.
Gain Lower
Threshold (dB) to
Value of Nominal
Gain Upper
Threshold (dB)
Default: The specific
value is related to the
module.
optical power. This parameter is used to
indicate the relative value between the
optical power of output signals and the
optical power of input signals, namely, the
amplifying multiple of the signal optical
power.
Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB)
and Nominal Gain Upper Threshold
(dB) parameters.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2168
Nominal Gain Upper
Threshold (dB)
- The Nominal Gain Upper Threshold
(dB) parameter provides an option to query
the maximum nominal gain of the optical
amplifier unit (OAU). This parameter
value cannot be set and depends on the
optical module type.
The value can be queried.
Nominal Gain Lower
Threshold (dB)
- The Nominal Gain Lower Threshold
the minimum nominal gain of the optical
amplifier unit. This parameter value cannot
be set and depends on the optical module
type.
Channel Number
Mode
C80 Mode, C40
Mode, CWDM Mode
Default: C80 Mode
Sets the number of wavelengths supported
by the FIU board.
DEG Threshold 0 to 10167
Default: 190
Sets signal deterioration thresholds. An
alarm is reported when error codes detected
in DEG Monitoring Time(s) are more
than the value of this parameter.
DEG Monitoring
Time(s)
2 to 10
Default: 7
Sets the signal monitoring time. If the
number of bit errors in the signal exceeds
DEG Threshold during this time, an alarm
is reported.
Degrade Threshold
Before FEC
1E-1, 1E-2, 1E-3,
1E-4, 1E-5, 1E-6,
1E-7, 1E-8, 1E-9,
1E-10, 1E-11, 1E-12,
Default: 1E-4
Sets error codes thresholds for signals
before FEC.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2169
Rated Optical Power
(dBm)
-30 to 30
Default: The default
value is determined
when the system is
provisioned with 80
wavelengths and
varies according to
boards.
The Rated Optical Power (dBm)
parameter provides an option to set and
query the per-channel rated optical power.
It is a reference value for automatic
adjustment of the optical power. When the
optical amplifier unit and ROADM unit are
used in a network, this parameter is
available for the optical amplifier unit.
The value can be set or queried.
NOTE
SIN/LIN port: The rated optical power is same
as Nominal single wavelength input optical
power, SOUT/LOUT port: The rated optical
power is same as Nominal single-wavelength
output optical power.
The default rated optical power is measured in
an 80-wavelength system. It needs to be
changed accordingly for a 40-wavelength
system.
See D.30 Rated Optical Power (dBm)
PMD Coefficient(ps/
SQRT(km))
0 to 1
Default: 0.05
This parameter is available only in the
ASON system. Set the parameter
according to the fiber type. Usually, take
the nominal value of the fiber.
Fiber, LEAF Fiber,
TWRS Fiber, TWC
Fiber, TWPLUS
Fiber, SMFLS Fiber,
G654B Fiber
Default: G652 Fiber
Specifies the type of a fiber.
Chromatic
Dispersion
Coefficient(ps/
(nm*km))
-15 to 30
Default: 0
ASON system. Set the parameter
according to the fiber type. Usually, take
the nominal value of the fiber.
Send DCM
Dispersion
Compensation Value
(ps/nm)
0.0 to 6553.5
Default: 0
Specifies the dispersion compensation
value for the DCM at the transmit end.
Receive DCM
Dispersion
Compensation Value
(ps/nm)
0.0 to 6553.5
Default: 0
Specifies the dispersion compensation
value for the DCM at the receive end.
Enable OAMS Power
Monitoring
Disable, Enable
Default: Disable
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2170
Standard Value of
OAMS Power
Monitoring (dBm)
-60.0 to 50.0
Default: /
power monitoring.
OAMS Power
Abnormity
Threshold (dB)
0.5 to 10.0
Default:3
threshold. The OAMS function is started if
the variation between the detected power
value and the specified Standard Value of
OAMS Power Monitoring exceeds this
threshold.
Working Mode l Gain locking,
Power locking
l Default: Gain
locking
Specifies the working mode of an optical
amplifier.
For more information on the working
mode, see 20.3.3 Functions and
Features.
Power Value -7 to 23
Default: 0
This parameter specifies the output optical
power when Working Mode is set to
Power Value.
Incident Optical
Power (dBm)
-60.0 to 60.0 In a coherent system, when the incident
optical power of the transmission fiber is
less than the nominal output power of the
transmitting OA board, set Incident
Optical Power for the transmitting OA
board to ensure desired ALC adjustment
effects.

20.3.9 DAS1 Specifications
Table 20-17 Optical specifications of the TN11DAS1 board
Item Uni
t
Value
Specifica
tions of
OA
Operating wavelength range nm 1529-1561 1529-1561 1529-1561
Nominal gain dB 20 26 31
Nominal input power range dB
m
-32 to 0 -32 to -6 -32 to -11
Input power range
per channel
40
channels
dB
m
-32 to -16 -32 to -22 -32 to -27
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2171
Item Uni
t
Value
80
channels
dB
m
-32 to -19 -32 to -25 -32 to -30
Nominal single-
wavelength input
optical power
40
channels
dB
m
-16 -22 -27
80
channels
dB
m
-19 -25 -30
Nominal single-
wavelength input
optical power
40
channels
dB
m
4 4 4
80
channels
dB
m
1 1 1
Noise figure (NF)
a
dB 8.5 5.5 5.5
Gain response time on adding/
dropping of channels
ms < 10 < 10 < 10
Channel gain dB 20 to 31
Gain flatness dB 2.0 2.0 2.0
Multi-channel gain slope dB/
dB
2.0 2.0 2.0
Input reflectance dB < -40 < -40 < -40
Output reflectance dB < -40 < -40 < -40
Pump leakage at input dB
m
< -30 < -30 < -30
Maximum reflectance tolerance
at input
dB -27 -27 -27
Maximum reflectance tolerance
at output
dB -27 -27 -27
Maximum total output optical
power
dB
m
20 20 20
Polarization dependent loss dB 0.5 0.5 0.5
Input VOA inherent insertion
loss
dB 1.5
Input VOA dynamic attenuation
range
dB 20
Input VOA adjustment accuracy dB 1
Specifica
tions of
Operating wavelength range of
optical supervisory channel
nm 1480 to 1520
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2172
Item Uni
t
Value
demultipl
exer and
multiplex
er
Optical return loss dB > 40
Insert loss of optical
supervisory
channel
LIN-TM dB 1.5
RM-
LOUT
Insert loss of C-band dB 1
Specifica
tions of
OSC
optical
module
Operating wavelength range nm 1504.5 to 1517.5
Signal rate Mbi
t/s
155.52
Launched optical power dB
m
0.5 to 5
Receiver sensitivity dB
m
-41
Receiver overload dB
m
-10
a: The gain can be adjusted continuously. The noise figure varies with the gain. The previous table lists the noise
figure when the noise figure uses the typical value.

(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F)
TN11DAS1 22 28.6

20.4 HBA
HBA: high-power booster amplifier board
The available functional version of the HBA board is TN11.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2173
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
1HB
A
Y Y Y Y Y N

20.4.2 Application
As a type of optical amplifier unit, the HBA board provides a high gain and therefore is generally
used in long-hop applications. It is configured at the transmit end.
For the position of the HBA board in the WDM system, see Figure 20-12.
Figure 20-12 Position of the HBA board in the WDM system
OTU
MUX
DMUX
OTU
OTU
OTU
HBA
OAU1
OTU
MUX
DMUX
OTU
OTU
OTU
HBA
OAU1
Client
side
Client
side
Client
side
Client
side
FIU FIU

NOTE
Only the TN13FIU02 board can work with the HBA board.
The HBA board is mainly used for online optical performance monitoring, gain lock, and
transient control.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2174
Table 20-18 Functions and features of the HBA board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function l Only applied on the transmit edge of the OTM station in the system
that covers a long fiber span transmission.
l The HBA can amplify the input optical signals in C band. The total
Typical gain The typical gain of the HBA is 29 dB.
Online optical
performance
monitoring
affecting traffic.
Transient control
function
of the optical power in the path to implement smooth upgrade and
expansion.
Alarms and
performance events
monitoring

The HBA board consists of the EDFA optical module, driving and detection module, control
Figure 20-13 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the HBA board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2175
Figure 20-13 Functional modules and signal flow of the HBA board
OUT IN
MON
Splitter
EDFA optical module
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
PIN
Driving
current
Detection for
pump current
and temperature
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse

Signal Flow
One channel of multiplexed optical signal received through the IN interface is input to the EDFA
optical module. The EDFA optical module amplifies the optical power of the signal and locks
the gain of the signal. Then, the amplified multiplexed signal is output through the OUT interface.
Module Function
detection.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2176
20.4.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the HBA board.
Figure 20-14 shows the front panel of the HBA board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2177
Figure 20-14 Front panel of the HBA board
HBA
HBA
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
M
O
N
I
N
O
U
T
LASERRADIATION
CAUTION CAUTION
LASER RADIATION

Indicators
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2178
Interfaces
Table 20-19 Types and functions of the interfaces on the HBA board
IN LC Receives the multiplexed signal to be amplified.
OUT LSH/APC Transmits the amplified signal.
MON LC Connected to the MCA4, MCA8, WMU or OPM8,
monitors performance online.
signal power, calculation formula: Pout (dBm) - Pmon
(dBm) = 10 x lg (999/1) = 30 dB).

Laser Hazard Level
which indicates that the maximum power launched by the board ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW)
to 21.3 dBm (136 mW).
20.4.6 Valid Slots
Three slots house one HBA board.
Table 20-20 shows the valid slots for the HBA board.
Table 20-20 Valid slots for the HBA board
Product Valid Slots
IU33, IU36-IU41, IU46-IU51, IU54-IU59,
IU62-IU67
IU35
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2179

NOTE
l The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the middle slot of the three occupied slots
in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the HBA board displayed on the NM is the number of the
middle slot.
l For example, if slots IU1, IU2, and IU3 house the HBA board, the slot number of the HBA board displayed
on the NM is IU2.
20.4.7 Characteristic Code for the HBA
The characteristic code for the HBA board contains seven characters and digits, indicating the
band, the gain range and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by
the board.
Table 20-21 Characteristic code for the HBA board
Second character - The second character is
always G.
Third to the fourth digits Gain The third to the fourth digits
indicate the gain value.
Fifth character - The fifth character is always
I.
Sixth and seventh digits Maximum nominal input
optical power
Indicate the maximum
nominal input optical power.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11HBA board is CG29I-8. The code indicates
that the HBA board is used in C band, the gain is 29 dB, and the maximum nominal input optical
power is -8 dBm.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2180
Table 20-22 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the HBA board displayed on the NM
IN 1
OUT 2
MON 3

For HBA parameters, refer to Table 20-23.
Table 20-23 HBA parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
Optical Interface
Name
supported.
Configure Band C
Default: C
Used to configure type of the working band of
a board.
Input Power Loss
Threshold (dBm)
See D.33 Input Power Loss Threshold
information.
Default: On
status of a board.
more information.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2181
Gain (dB) - The Gain (dB) parameter queries the gain of
an optical amplifier board, namely, the
input power (dBm).
more information.
Gain Lower
Threshold (dB) to
Value of Nominal
Gain Upper
Threshold (dB)
Default: 29
The Nominal Gain (dB) parameter specifies
the desired gain of the signal optical power.
This parameter is used to indicate the relative
value between the optical power of output
signals and the optical power of input signals,
namely, the amplifying multiple of the signal
optical power.
Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) and
Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB)
parameters.
Nominal Gain
Upper Threshold
(dB)
- The Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB)
parameter provides an option to query the
maximum nominal gain of the optical
amplifier unit (OAU). This parameter value
cannot be set and depends on the optical
module type.
Nominal Gain
Lower Threshold
(dB)
- The Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB)
minimum nominal gain of the optical
amplifier unit. This parameter value cannot be
set and depends on the optical module type.
Actual Working
Band Parity
of the board.
Configure Working
Band Parity
All, Odd, Even
Default: All
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2182
Rated Optical
Power (dBm)
-30 to 30
value is determined
when the system is
provisioned with 80
wavelengths and
varies according to
boards.
The Rated Optical Power (dBm) parameter
provides an option to set and query the per-
channel rated optical power. It is a reference
value for automatic adjustment of the optical
power. When the optical amplifier unit and
ROADM unit are used in a network, this
parameter is available for the optical amplifier
unit.
NOTE
IN port: The rated optical power is same as Nominal
single wavelength input optical power, OUT port:
The rated optical power is same as Nominal single
wavelength output optical power.
The default rated optical power is measured in an
80-wavelength system. It needs to be changed
accordingly for a 40-wavelength system.
Enable OAMS
Power Monitoring
Disable, Enable
Default: Disable
Standard Value of
OAMS Power
Monitoring (dBm)
-60.0 to 50.0
Default: /
power monitoring.
OAMS Power
Abnormity
Threshold (dB)
0.5 to 10.0
Default: 3
Incident Optical
Power (dBm)
-60.0 to 60.0 In a coherent system, when the incident optical
power of the transmission fiber is less than the
nominal output power of the transmitting OA
board, set Incident Optical Power for the
transmitting OA board to ensure desired ALC
adjustment effects.

20.4.10 HBA Specifications
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2183
Table 20-24 Optical specifications of the HBA board
Item Unit Value
Type - TN11HBA
Channel allocation nm 1529 - 1561
Nominal input power range dBm -25 to -3
Typical input power of a single
wavelength
dBm 80-channel system: -22
40-channel system: -19
10-channel system: -13
Noise figure (NF) dB < 8
Input reflectance dB < -45
Output reflectance dB < -45
Maximum total output power dBm 26
Gain response time on adding/dropping of
channels
ms < 10
Channel gain dB 291
Gain flatness dB 2.5

(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11HBA 47 75

20.5 OAU1
OAU1: optical amplifier unit
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2184
The available functional versions of the OAU1 board are TN11, TN12 and TN13.
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
1O
AU
1
Y Y N N Y Y
TN1
2O
AU
1
Y Y Y Y Y Y
TN1
3O
AU
1
Y Y Y Y Y Y

Type
Table 20-25 lists the types of the OAU1 board.
Table 20-25 Type description of the OAU1 board
Unit Type Description Gain Range
TN11OAU1 01 Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. 20 dB to 31 dB
02 Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. 20 dB to 31 dB
TN12OAU1 00 Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. 16 dB to 25.5 dB
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2185
TN13OAU1 01 Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. 20 dB to 31 dB

l Function:
The TN11OAU1 board does not support adjustment of input optical power, whereas
the TN12OAU1 and TN13OAU1 board supports. For details, see 20.5.4 Working
Principle and Signal Flow.
l Appearance:
The TN11, TN12 and TN13 versions have different front panels. For details, see 20.5.5
Front Panel.
l Specification:
For the power consumption of each version, see 20.5.10 OAU1 Specifications.
Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11OAU1 TN12OAU
1 ,
TN13OAU
1
The TN12OAU1 and TN13OAU1 can be created as
TN11OAU1 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the
latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the
TN12OAU1 and TN13OAU1 function as the TN11OAU1.
TN12OAU1 TN13OAU
1
The TN13OAU1 can be created as TN12OAU1 on the NMS.
The former can substitute for the latter at type 01,03,05, without
any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN13OAU1
functions as the TN12OAU1.
TN13OAU1 None -

20.5.2 Application
As a type of optical amplifier unit, the OAU1 board amplifies optical signals at the transmit end
or receive end.
For the position of the OAU1 board in the WDM system, see Figure 20-15.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2186
Figure 20-15 Position of the OAU1 board in the WDM system
OTU
OAU1
OBU1
MUX
DMUX
OTU
OTU
OTU
DMUX
MUX
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OBU1
OAU1
Client
side
Client
side
Client
side
Client
side
The OAU1 is mainly used for gain adjustment, online optical performance monitoring, gain
lock, and transient control.
Table 20-26 Functions and features of the OAU1 board
Function and
Feature
Description
Gain adjustment The OAU100 continuously adjusts the gain from 16 dB to 25.5 dB
based on the input optical power.
The OAU101/OAU102 continuously adjusts the gain from 20 dB to
31 dB based on the input optical power.
The OAU103 continuously adjusts the gain from 24 dB to 36 dB based
on the input optical power.
NOTE
20.5.10 OAU1 Specifications only provides the value of nominal gain. Actual
gain includes the noise, and the value is bigger than that of nominal gain.
Online optical
performance
monitoring
affecting traffic.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2187
Function and
Feature
Description
enabled by default.
Transient control
function
Alarms and
performance events
monitoring

The OAU1 board consists of the EDFA optical module, driving and detection module, control
Figure 20-16 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN11OAU1 board. Figure
20-17 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN12OAU1 and TN13OAU1.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2188
Figure 20-16 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11OAU1
OUT IN
MON RDC TDC
EDFA optical module Splitter
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
PIN
Driving
current
Detection for
pump current
and temperature
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
PAOUT
BAIN

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2189
Figure 20-17 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12OAU1 and TN13OAU1
OUT
IN
MON RDC TDC
EDFA optical module Splitter
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
PIN
Driving
current
Detection for
pump current
and temperature
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
V
O
A
VO
VI
PAOUT
BAIN

Signal Flow
the gain of the signal. Then the signal is sent to the DCM through the TDC interface for dispersion
compensation and returns to the EDFA optical module through the RDC interface. At last, the
amplified multiplexed signal is output through the OUT interface.
The VI interface receives the multiplexed signals sent from the upstream station. After the optical
power adjustment by VOA, the signals are transmitted through the VO interface. Then, the IN
interface receives the adjusted multiplexed signals.
Module Function
l VOA
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2190
detection.
20.5.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces, and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the OAU1
board.
Figure 20-18, Figure 20-19 and Figure 20-20 show the front panel of the OAU1 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2191
Figure 20-18 Front panel of the TN11OAU1 board
OAU1
OAU1
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
T
D
C
R
D
C
O
U
T
I
N
M
O
N
LASERRADIATION
CAUTION
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2192
OAU1
OAU1
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
T
D
C
R
D
C
O
U
T
I
N
M
O
N
V
O
V
I
LASERRADIATION
CAUTION
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2193
OAU1
OAU1
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
T
D
C
R
D
C
O
U
T
I
N
M
O
N
V
O
V
I
LASERRADIATION
CAUTION
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION

Indicators
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2194
Interfaces
Table 20-27 Types and functions of the interfaces on the OAU1 board
OUT LC Transmits the amplified signal.
TDC/RDC LC Connected to the interface of the DCM for dispersion
compensation.
MON LC Connected to the MCA4, MCA8, OPM8 or WMU,
at the OUT port (20 dB lower than the actual signal
power, calculation formula: Pout(dBm) - Pmon(dBm)
= 10 x lg(99/1) = 20 dB).
VI
a
LC Outputs a multi-wavelength signal. A VOA is attached
before the interface for adjusting the optical power of
the multi-wavelength signal.
VO
a
LC Receives a multi-wavelength signal. A VOA is
attached before the interface for adjusting the optical
power of the multi-wavelength signal.
a: Only the TN12OAU1 and TN13OAU1 boards support the interfaces.

Laser Hazard Level
OAU100, OAU101, OAU102, OAU103, OAU106:
OAU105:
which indicates that the maximum power output by the optical port on the board ranges 10 dBm
(10 mW) to 21.3 dBm (136 mW).
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2195
20.5.6 Valid Slots
Two slots house one TN11OAU1 board or TN12OAU1 board, and one slot houses one
TN13OAU1 board.
Table 20-28 shows the valid slots for the TN11OAU1 board.
Table 20-28 Valid slots for the TN11OAU1 board
Product Valid Slots
IU34, IU36-IU42, IU46-IU52, IU54-IU60,
IU62-IU68
IU36

Product Valid Slots
IU34, IU36-IU42, IU46-IU52, IU54-IU60,
IU62-IU68
IU36

Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2196
Product Valid Slots

NOTE
For OptiX OSN 8800:
l The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack. Therefore,
the slot number of the OAU1 board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two slots.
l For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the OAU1 board, the slot number of the OAU1 board displayed on
the NM is IU2.
For OptiX OSN 6800:
the slot number of the OAU1 board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two slots.
l For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the OAU1 board, the slot number of the OAU1 board displayed on
the NM is IU2.
For OptiX OSN 3800:
l The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the upper slot in the chassis. Therefore,
the slot number of the OAU1 board displayed on the NM is the number of the upper one of the two slots.
l For example, if slots IU2 and IU3 house the OAU1 board, the slot number of the OAU1 displayed on the
NM is IU2.
20.5.7 Characteristic Code for the OAU1
The characteristic code for the OAU1 board contains eight characters and digits, indicating the
gain range and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the board.
Table 20-31 Characteristic code for the OAU1 board
Second to fifth digits Gain range Indicates the range within
which the gain can be
continuously adjusted.
Sixth character - Is always I.
Seventh and eighth digits Maximum nominal input
optical power
Indicates the maximum

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2197
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11OAU1 board is G2031I0. The code indicates
that the gain can be continuously adjusted from 20 dB to 31 dB and the maximum nominal input
optical power is 0 dBm.
are listed in Table 20-32 and Table 20-33.
Table 20-32 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TN11OAU1 board displayed on the NM
IN 1
PAOUT
a
2
BAIN
a
3
OUT 4
RDC/TDC 5
MON 6
a: Virtual port

Table 20-33 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TN12OAU1/TN13OAU1 board displayed
on the NM
IN 1
PAOUT
a
2
BAIN
a
3
OUT 4
RDC/TDC 5
MON 6
VI 7
VO 8
a: Virtual port

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2198
For parameters of the OAU1, refer to Table 20-34.
Table 20-34 OAU1 parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
Optical Interface
Name
name.
are supported.
Optical Interface
Attenuation Ratio
(dB)
Value of Min.
Attenuation Rate
(dB) to Value of
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)
Default: Value of
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)
NOTE
Only the TN12OAU1/TN13OAU1 supports
this parameter.
Attenuation
difference (dB)
0.1
Default: none
attenuation.
NOTE
this parameter.
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)
NOTE
this parameter.
Min. Attenuation
Rate (dB)
NOTE
this parameter.
board.
Configure Band C
Default: C
of a board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2199
Input Power Loss
Threshold (dBm)
MUT_LOS alarm.
information.
Default: On
status of a board.
input power (dBm).
more information.
Gain Lower
Threshold (dB) to
Value of Nominal
Gain Upper
Threshold (dB)
module.
power.
(dB) parameters.
Nominal Gain Upper
Threshold (dB)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2200
Nominal Gain Lower
Threshold (dB)
type.
Actual Working
Band Parity
band of the board.
Configure Working
Band Parity
All, Odd, Even
Default: All
band.
Upper Threshold of
Actual Gain (dB)
- Displays the upper threshold of the actual
gain of the optical amplifier unit.
Lower Threshold of
Actual Gain (dB)
- Displays the lower threshold of the actual
Rated Optical Power
(dBm)
-30 to 30
value is determined
when the system is
provisioned with 80
wavelengths and
varies according to
boards.
NOTE
IN port: The rated optical power is same as
Nominal single wavelength input optical
power, OUT port: The rated optical power is
same as Nominal single wavelength output
optical power.
system.
Enable OAMS Power
Monitoring
Disable, Enable
Default: Disable
NOTE
this parameter.
Standard Value of
OAMS Power
Monitoring (dBm)
-60.0 to 50.0
Default: /
power monitoring.
NOTE
this parameter.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2201
OAMS Power
Abnormity
Threshold (dB)
0.5 to 10.0
Default:3
threshold.
NOTE
this parameter.
Power locking
l Default: Gain
locking
amplifier.
Features.
Default: 0
power when Working Mode is set to
Power Value.
Incident Optical
Power (dBm)
effects.

20.5.10 OAU1 Specifications
Table 20-35 Optical specifications of the TN12OAU100 board
Item Unit Value
Nominal gain dB 16 22 25.5
Nominal input power range dBm -20 to 2 -26 to -4 -32 to -7.5
Input power range per
channel
40 channels dBm -32 to -14 -32 to -20 -32 to -23.5
80 channels dBm -32 to -17 -32 to -23 -32 to -26.5
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2202
Item Unit Value
Nominal single-
wavelength input
optical power
40 channels dBm -14 -20 -23.5
80 channels dBm -17 -23 -26.5
Nominal single-
wavelength output
optical power
40 channels dBm 2 2 2
80 channels dBm -1 -1 -1
Noise figure (NF)
a
dB 8 5.5 5.5
ms < 10 < 10 < 10
Channel gain dB 16 to 25.5
Multi-channel gain slope dB/dB 2.0 2.0 2.0
Pump leakage at input dBm < -30 < -30 < -30
Maximum reflectance tolerance at
input
dB -27 -27 -27
output
dB -27 -27 -27
Maximum total output optical power dBm 18 18 18
VI-VO Inherent
insertion
loss
dB 1.5
Dynamic
attenuation
range
dB 20
Adjustment accuracy dB 1

Table 20-36 Optical specifications of the TN11OAU101/TN12OAU101/TN13OAU101 board
Item Unit Value
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2203
Item Unit Value
Nominal input power range dBm -32 to 0 -32 to -6 -32 to -11
channel
40 channels dBm -32 to -16 -32 to -22 -32 to -27
Nominal single-
wavelength input
optical power
Nominal single-
wavelength output
optical power
Noise figure (NF)
a
dB 8.5
(TN11OAU101,
TN12OAU101)
7.5
(TN13OAU101)
5.5 5.5
ms < 10 < 10 < 10
Multi-channel gain slope dB/dB 2.0 2.0 2.0
input
dB -27 -27 -27
output
dB -27 -27 -27
VI-VO
b
Inherent
insertion
loss
dB 1.5
Dynamic
attenuation
range
dB 20
Adjustment accuracy
b
dB 1
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2204
Item Unit Value
b: The items are supported on the TN12OAU1 and TN13OAU1.

Table 20-37 Optical specifications of the TN11OAU102/TN12OAU102 board
Item Unit Value
Nominal input power range dBm -32 to -3 -32 to -9 -32 to -14
channel
80 channels dBm -32 to -22 -32 to -28 -32
Nominal single-
wavelength input
optical power
Nominal single-
wavelength output
optical power
Noise figure (NF)
a
dB 7.5 5.5 5.5
ms < 10 < 10 < 10
Gain flatness dB 2 2 2
Multi-channel gain slope dB/dB 2 2 2
input
dB -27 -27 -27
output
dB -27 -27 -27
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2205
Item Unit Value
VI-VO
b
Inherent
insertion
loss
dB 1.5
Dynamic
attenuation
range
dB 20
Adjustment accuracy
b
dB 1
b: The items are supported on the TN12OAU1.

Item Unit Value
Input power range
per channel
40
channels
dBm -32 to -20 -32 to -25 -32
80
channels
dBm -32 to -23 -32 to -28 -32
Nominal single-
wavelength input
optical power
40
channels
dBm -20 -25 -32
80
channels
dBm -23 -28 -32
Nominal single-
wavelength output
optical power
40
channels
dBm 4 4 4
80
channels
dBm 1 1 1
Noise figure (NF)
a
dB 7.5
(TN11OAU103,
TN12OAU103)
6.5
(TN13OAU103)
5.5 5.5
ms < 10 < 10 < 10
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2206
Item Unit Value
input
dB -27 -27 -27
output
dB -27 -27 -27
power
dBm 20 20 20
VI-VO
b
Inherent
insertion
loss
dB 1.5
Dynamic
attenuation
range
dB 20
Adjustment accuracy
b
dB 1

Item Unit Value
Nominal input power range dBm -32 to 0 -32 to -7 -32 to -11
Input power range
per channel
40
channels
dBm -32 to -16 -32 to -23 -32 to -27
80
channels
dBm -32 to -19 -32 to -26 -32 to -30
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2207
Item Unit Value
Nominal single-
wavelength input
optical power
40
channels
dBm -16 -23 -27
80
channels
dBm -19 -26 -30
Nominal single-
wavelength output
optical power
40
channels
dBm 7 7 7
80
channels
dBm 4 4 4
Noise figure (NF)
a
dB < 8.5 < 6 < 6
ms < 10 < 10 < 10
Output reflectance dB < -40 < -40 <-40
input
dB -27 -27 -27
output
dB -27 -27 -27
power
dBm 23 23 23
VI-VO
b
Inherent
insertion
loss
dB 1.5
Dynamic
attenuation
range
dB 20
Adjustment accuracy
b
dB 1

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2208
Table 20-40 Optical specifications of the TN13OAU106 board
Item Unit Value
Nominal input power range dBm -24 to 4 -24 to 1 -24 to -3
Input power range
per channel
40
channels
dBm -24 to -12 -24 to -15 -24 to -19
80
channels
dBm -24 to -15 -24 to -18 -24 to -22
Nominal single-
wavelength input
optical power
40
channels
dBm -12 -15 -19
80
channels
dBm -15 -18 -22
Nominal single-
wavelength output
optical power
40
channels
dBm 4 4 4
80
channels
dBm 1 1 1
Noise figure (NF)
a
dB 7 6 5
ms < 10 < 10 < 10
Output reflectance dB < -40 < -40 <-40
input
dB -27 -27 -27
output
dB -27 -27 -27
power
dBm 20 20 20
VI-VO Inherent
insertion
loss
dB 1.5
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2209
Item Unit Value
Dynamic
attenuation
range
dB 20

TN11OAU1/TN12OAU1 (H x W x D): 264.6 mm (10.4 in.) x 50.8 mm (2.0 in.) x 220
mm (8.7 in.)
TN13OAU1 (H x W x D): 264.6 mm (10.4 in.) x 25.4 mm (1.0 in.) x 220 mm (8.7 in.)
l Weight:
TN11OAU1/TN12OAU1: 1.8 kg (4.0 lb.)
TN13OAU1: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F)
TN11OAU101 18.0 24.0
TN11OAU102 14.0 18.0
TN11OAU103 18.0 24.0
TN11OAU105 22.0 29.0
TN12OAU100 11.0 14.0
TN12OAU101 12.0 15.0
TN12OAU102 10.0 13.0
TN12OAU103 12.0 15.0
TN12OAU105 15.0 21.0
TN13OAU101 12.0 15.0
TN13OAU103 12.0 15.0
TN13OAU105 15.0 21.0
TN13OAU106 12.0 15.0

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2210
20.6 OBU1
The available functional versions of the OBU1 board are TN11, TN12.
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
1OB
U1
Y Y N N Y Y
TN1
2OB
U1
Y Y Y Y Y Y

Type
Table 20-41 lists the types of the TN11OBU1 board.
Table 20-41 Type description of the TN11OBU1 board
TN11OBU1 01 Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. 201.5 dB
03 Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. 231.5 dB

Table 20-42 lists the types of the TN12OBU1 board.
Table 20-42 Type description of the TN12OBU1 board
TN12OBU1 01 Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. 201.5 dB
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2211
P1 The TN12OBU1P1 board is an OA board
intended for PID
-

NOTE
The TN12BOU1P1 board, configured at the receive site, is an OA board intended for PID and is used together
with the TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E board.
l Function:
The TN11OBU1 board does not support adjustment of input optical power, whereas the
TN12OBU1 board supports. For details, see 20.6.4 Working Principle and Signal
Flow.
l Appearance:
Panel.
l Specification:
For the power consumption of each version, see 20.6.10 OBU1 Specifications.
Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11OBU1 TN12OBU
1
The TN12OBU1 can be created as TN11OBU1 on the NMS.
upgrade. After substitution, the TN12OBU1 functions as the
TN11OBU1.
TN12OBU1 None -

20.6.2 Application
As a type of optical amplifier unit, the OBU1 amplifies optical signals.
For the position of the OBU101/OBU103/OBU104 board in the WDM system, see Figure
20-21.
Figure 20-21 Position of the OBU101/OBU103/OBU104 board in the WDM system
OTU
OBU1
OBU1
MUX
DMUX
OTU
OTU
OTU
DMUX
MUX
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OBU1
OBU1
Client
side
Client
side
Client
side
Client
side
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2212
For the position of the OBU1P1 board in the WDM system, see Figure 20-22.
Figure 20-22 Position of the OBU1P1 board in the WDM system
Client side
Tributary
board
NPO2
+
ENQ2
NPO2
+
ENQ2
OBU1P1
OBU1P1
Client side
Tributary
board
NOTE
The TN12OBU1P1 board, configured at the receive site, is an OA board intended for PID and is used together
with the TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E board.
In a PID-featured NE with separated optical and electrical subracks, the TN12OBU1P1 board is configured on
the OptiX OSN 6800, and the TN55NPO2 and TN54ENQ2 boards are configured on the OptiX OSN 8800.
The OBU1 board is mainly used for online optical performance monitoring, gain lock, and
transient control.
Table 20-43 Functions and features of the OBU1 board
Function and
Feature
Description
Typical gain l The typical gain of the OBU101 is 20 dB.
l The typical gain of the OBU103 is 23 dB.
l The typical gain of the OBU104 is 17 dB.
NOTE
20.6.10 OBU1 Specifications only provides the value of nominal gain. Actual
Online optical
performance
monitoring
affecting traffic.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2213
Function and
Feature
Description
enabled by default.
Transient control
function
Alarms and
performance events
monitoring

The OBU1 board consists of the EDFA optical module, driving and detection module, control
Figure 20-23 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN11OBU1 board. Figure
20-24 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN12OBU1 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2214
Figure 20-23 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11OBU1 board
OUT IN
MON
PIN
Splitter
EDFA optical module
SCC
Driving
current
Detection for
pump current
and temperature
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(Controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse

OUT IN
Driving and detection
module
MON
PIN
Splitter
EDFA optical
module
SCC
Driving
current
Detection for
pump current
and temperature
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane (
Controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
V
O
A
VO
VI

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2215
Signal Flow
power adjustment by VOA, the signals are transmitted through the VO interface. Then the IN
interface receives the adjusted multiplexed signals too.
NOTE
On a network where PID boards are used, optical signals are input through the TN12OBU1P1 board's VI port
and are transmitted over the fiber connection between its VO and IN ports.
Module Function
l VOA
detection.
20.6.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces, and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the OBU1
board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2216
Figure 20-25 and Figure 20-26 show the front panel of the OBU1 board.
Figure 20-25 Front panel of the TN11OBU1 board
OBU1
OBU1
M
O
N
O
U
T
I
N
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
LASERRADIATION
CAUTION
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2217
OBU1
OBU1
M
O
N
O
U
T
I
N
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
V
O
V
I
LASERRADIATION
CAUTION
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION

Indicators
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2218
Interfaces
Table 20-44 Types and functions of the interfaces on the OBU1 board
power, calculation formula: Pout (dBm) - Pmon (dBm)
= 10 x lg (99/1) = 20 dB).
VI
a
LC Receives the multiplexed signal from the WDM side.
VO
a
LC Transmits the adjusted multiplexed signal to the IN
interface.
a: Only the TN12OBU1 board supports the interfaces.

Laser Hazard Level
20.6.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one OBU1 board.
Table 20-45 shows the valid slots for the TN11OBU1 board.
Table 20-45 Valid slots for the TN11OBU1 board
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2219
Product Valid Slots

Product Valid Slots

NOTE
The TN12OBU1P1 can be installed only in an OptiX OSN 8800 or OptiX OSN 6800 subrack.
20.6.7 Characteristic Code for the OBU1
The characteristic code for the OBU1 board contains six characters and digits, indicating the
gain and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the board.
Table 20-47 Characteristic code for the OBU1 board
First character - The first character is always
G.
Second and third digits Gain The second and the third
digits indicate the gain value.
Fourth character - The fourth character is
always I.
Fifth and sixth digits Maximum nominal input
optical power
The fifth and the sixth digits
indicate the maximum

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11OBU1 board is G23I-3. This code indicates
that the gain is 23 dB and the maximum nominal input optical power is -3 dBm.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2220
Table 20-48 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TN11OBU1 board displayed on the NM
IN 1
OUT 2
MON 3

IN 1
OUT 2
MON 3
VI 4
VO 5

For parameters of the OBU1, refer to Table 20-50.
Table 20-50 OBU1 parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
Optical Interface
Name
are supported.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2221
Optical Interface
Attenuation Ratio
(dB)
Value of Min.
Attenuation Rate
(dB) to Value of Max.
Attenuation Rate
(dB)
Default: Value of
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)
NOTE
Only the TN12OBU101/TN12OBU103/
TN12OBU104 support this parameter.
Attenuation
difference (dB)
0.1
Default: none
attenuation.
NOTE
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)
NOTE
Min. Attenuation
Rate (dB)
NOTE
board.
Configure Band C
Default: C
of a board.
Input Power Loss
Threshold (dBm)
alarm.
information.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2222
Default: On
status of a board.
input power (dBm).
more information.
Gain Lower
Threshold (dB) to
Value of Nominal
Gain Upper
Threshold (dB)
Default:
l OBU101: 20dB
l OBU103: 23dB
l OBU104: 17dB
power.
parameters.
Nominal Gain Upper
Threshold (dB)
module type.
Nominal Gain Lower
Threshold (dB)
type.
Actual Working
Band Parity
band of the board.
Configure Working
Band Parity
All, Odd, Even
Default: All
band.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2223
Rated Optical Power
(dBm)
-30 to 30
value is determined
when the system is
provisioned with 80
wavelengths and
varies according to
boards.
NOTE
Nominal single wavelength input optical power,
OUT port: The rated optical power is same as
Nominal single-wavelength output optical
power.
system.
Enable OAMS
Power Monitoring
Disable, Enable
Default: Disable
NOTE
Standard Value of
OAMS Power
Monitoring (dBm)
-60.0 to 50.0
Default: /
power monitoring.
NOTE
OAMS Power
Abnormity
Threshold (dB)
0.5 to 10.0
Default:3
threshold.
NOTE
Power locking
l Default: Gain
locking
amplifier.
Features.
Default: 0
power of the EDFA module when
Working Mode is set to Gain locking.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2224
Incident Optical
Power (dBm)
effects.

20.6.10 OBU1 Specifications
Table 20-51 Optical specifications of the OBU101/OBU103/OBU104 board
Item Unit Value
TN11OBU10
1/
TN12OBU10
1
TN11OBU10
3/
TN12OBU10
3
TN11OBU10
4/
TN12OBU10
4
Input power
range per
channel
40
channels
dBm -32 to -20 -32 to -19 -32 to -17
80
channels
-32 to -23 -32 to -22 -32 to -20
Nominal single-
wavelength
input optical
power
40
channels
dBm -20 -19 -17
80
channels
-23 -22 -20
Nominal single-
wavelength
output optical
power
40
channels
dBm 0 4 0
80
channels
-3 1 -3
Noise figure (NF) dB 5.5 6.0 5.5
ms < 10 < 10 < 10
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2225
Item Unit Value
TN11OBU10
1/
TN12OBU10
1
TN11OBU10
3/
TN12OBU10
3
TN11OBU10
4/
TN12OBU10
4
Channel gain dB 201.5 231.5 171.5
Maximum reflectance
tolerance at input
dB -27 -27 -27
Maximum reflectance
tolerance at output
dB -27 -27 -27
power
dBm 16 20 16
Multi-channel gain slope dB 2.0 2.0 2.0
VI-VO
a
Inherent
insertion
loss
dB 1.5
Dynamic
attenuatio
n range
dB 20
Adjustment accuracy
a
dB 1
a: The items are supported on the TN12OBU1.

Table 20-52 Optical specifications of the OBU1P1 board
Item Unit Value
Total input power range at
the VI optical port
dBm -30 to 7
Pump leakage at input dBm < -30
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2226
Item Unit Value
Maximum reflectance
tolerance at input
dB -27
Maximum reflectance
tolerance at output
dB -27
Maximum total output
optical power
dBm 9
Multi-channel gain slope dB/dB 2.0

(8.7 in.)
l Weight:
TN11OBU1: 1.3 kg (2.9 lb.)
TN12OBU1: 1.1 kg (2.4 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11OBU101 11.0 13.0
TN11OBU103 13.0 15.0
TN11OBU104 12.0 14.0
TN12OBU101 10.0 11.0
TN12OBU103 11.0 12.0
TN12OBU104 10.0 12.0
TN12OBU1P1 10.0 11.0

20.7 OBU2
The available functional versions of the OBU2 board are TN11 and TN12.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2227
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
1OB
U2
Y Y N N Y Y
TN1
2OB
U2
Y Y Y Y Y Y

Type
The OBU2 board is available only in one type, that is, OBU205.
l Function:
The TN11OBU2 board does not support adjustment of input optical power, whereas the
TN12OBU2 board supports. For details, see 20.7.4 Working Principle and Signal
Flow.
l Appearance:
Panel.
l Specification:
For the power consumption of each version, see 20.7.10 OBU2 Specifications.
Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11OBU2 TN12OBU
2
The TN12OBU2 can be created as TN11OBU2 on the NMS.
upgrade. After substitution, the TN12OBU2 functions as the
TN11OBU2.
TN12OBU2 None -

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2228
20.7.2 Application
As a type of optical amplifier unit, the OBU2 board amplifies optical signals at the transmit end
or receive end.
For the position of the OBU2 board in the WDM system, see Figure 20-27.
Figure 20-27 Position of the OBU2 board in the WDM system
OTU
OBU2
OBU2
MUX
DMUX
OTU
OTU
OTU
DMUX
MUX
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OBU2
OBU2
Client
side
Client
side
Client
side
Client
side

The OBU2 is mainly used for online optical performance monitoring, gain lock, and transient
control.
Table 20-53 Functions and features of the OBU2 board
Function and
Feature
Description
Typical gain The typical gain of the OBU205 is 23 dB.
NOTE
20.7.10 OBU2 Specifications only provides the value of nominal gain. Actual
Online optical
performance
monitoring
affecting traffic.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2229
Function and
Feature
Description
enabled by default.
Transient control
function
Alarms and
performance events
monitoring

The OBU2 board consists of the EDFA optical module, driving and detection module, control
Figure 20-28 and Figure 20-29 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the OBU2
board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2230
OUT IN
MON
Splitter
EDFA optical
module
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
PIN
Driving
current
Detection for
pump current
and temperature
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse

OUT IN
Driving and detection
module
MON
PIN
Splitter
EDFA optical
module
SCC
Driving
current
Detection for
pump current
and temperature
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane (
Controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
V
O
A
VO
VI

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2231
Signal Flow
power adjustment by VOA, the signals are transmitted through the VO interface. Then the IN
interface receives the adjusted multiplexed signals too.
Module Function
l VOA
detection.
20.7.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the OBU2 board.
Figure 20-30 and Figure 20-31 show the front panel of the OBU2 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2232
OBU2
OBU2
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
O
U
T
I
N
M
O
N
LASERRADIATION
CAUTION
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2233
OBU2
OBU2
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
O
U
T
I
N
M
O
N
V
O
V
I
LASERRADIATION
CAUTION
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION

Indicators
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2234
Interfaces
Table 20-54 Types and functions of the interfaces on the OBU2 board
power, calculation formula: Pout (dBm) - Pmon (dBm)
= 10 x lg (99/1) = 20 dB).
VO
a
LC Transmits the adjusted multiplexed signal to the IN
interface.
VI
a
LC Receives the multiplexed signal from the WDM side.
a: Only the TN12OBU2 board supports the interfaces.

Laser Hazard Level
which indicates that the maximum power launched by the board ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW)
to 21.3 dBm (136 mW).
20.7.6 Valid Slots
Two slots house one OBU2 board.
Product Valid Slots
IU34, IU36-IU42, IU46-IU52, IU54-IU60,
IU62-IU68
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2235
Product Valid Slots
IU36

Product Valid Slots
IU34, IU36-IU42, IU46-IU52, IU54-IU60,
IU62-IU68
IU36

NOTE
For OptiX OSN 8800:
the slot number of the OBU2 board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two slots.
l For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the OBU2 board, the slot number of the OBU2 board displayed on
the NM is IU2.
For OptiX OSN 6800:
the slot number of the OBU2 board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two slots.
l For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the OBU2 board, the slot number of the OBU2 board displayed on
the NM is IU2.
For OptiX OSN 3800:
the slot number of the OBU2 board displayed on the NM is the number of the upper one of the two slots.
l For example, if slots IU2 and IU3 house the OBU2 board, the slot number of the OBU2 displayed on the
NM is IU2.
20.7.7 Characteristic Code for the OBU2
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2236
Table 20-57 Characteristic code for the OBU2 board
G.
always I.
optical power

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11OBU2 board is G23I00. The code indicates
that the gain is 23 dB and the maximum nominal input optical power is 0 dBm.
IN 1
OUT 2
MON 3

IN 1
OUT 2
MON 3
VI 4
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2237
VO 5

For parameters of the OBU2, refer to Table 20-60.
Table 20-60 OBU2 parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
Optical Interface
Name
are supported.
Optical Interface
Attenuation Ratio
(dB)
Value of Min.
Attenuation Rate
(dB) to Value of
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)
Default: Value of
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)
optical power attenuation of a board channel
so that the input signals power of the board is
within the preset range.
NOTE
Only the TN12OBU2 supports this parameter.
Attenuation
difference (dB)
0.1
Default: none
Specifies the difference between the current
attenuation and the required attenuation.
NOTE
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)
NOTE
Min. Attenuation
Rate (dB)
NOTE
Configure Band C
Default: C
of a board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2238
Input Power Loss
Threshold (dBm)
value, the board reports the MUT_LOS alarm.
information.
Default: On
status of a board.
more information.
Gain (dB) - The Gain (dB) parameter queries the gain of
an optical amplifier board, namely, the
input power (dBm).
more information.
Gain Lower
Threshold (dB) to
Value of Nominal
Gain Upper
Threshold (dB)
Default: Nominal
Gain Upper
Threshold (dB)
The Nominal Gain (dB) parameter specifies
the desired gain of the signal optical power.
This parameter is used to indicate the relative
value between the optical power of output
signals and the optical power of input signals,
namely, the amplifying multiple of the signal
optical power.
parameters.
Nominal Gain
Upper Threshold
(dB)
- The Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB)
maximum nominal gain of the optical
module type.
Nominal Gain
Lower Threshold
(dB)
- The Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB)
minimum nominal gain of the optical
amplifier unit. This parameter value cannot be
set and depends on the optical module type.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2239
Actual Working
Band Parity
of the board.
Configure
Working Band
Parity
All, Odd, Even
Default: All
Rated Optical
Power (dBm)
-30 to 30
value is determined
when the system is
provisioned with 80
wavelengths and
varies according to
boards.
The Rated Optical Power (dBm) parameter
provides an option to set and query the per-
channel rated optical power. It is a reference
value for automatic adjustment of the optical
power. When the optical amplifier unit and
ROADM unit are used in a network, this
parameter is available for the optical amplifier
unit.
NOTE
Nominal single wavelength input optical power,
OUT port: The rated optical power is same as
Nominal single-wavelength output optical power.
The default rated optical power is measured in an
80-wavelength system. It needs to be changed
accordingly for a 40-wavelength system.
Enable OAMS
Power Monitoring
Disable, Enable
Default: Disable
NOTE
Standard Value of
OAMS Power
Monitoring (dBm)
-60.0 to 50.0
Default: /
power monitoring.
NOTE
OAMS Power
Abnormity
Threshold (dB)
-0.5 to 10.0
Default:3
NOTE
Power locking
l Default: Gain
locking
amplifier.
For more information on the working mode,
Default: 0
power when Working Mode is set to Power
Value.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2240
Incident Optical
Power (dBm)
optical power of the transmission fiber is less
than the nominal output power of the
transmitting OA board, set Incident Optical
Power for the transmitting OA board to
ensure desired ALC adjustment effects.

20.7.10 OBU2 Specifications
Table 20-61 Optical specifications of the OBU2 board
Item Unit Value
OBU205
Nominal input power range dBm -24 to 0
channel
40
Channels
dBm -24 to -16
80
Channels
-24 to -19
Nominal single-
wavelength input
optical power
40
Channels
dBm -16
80
Channels
-19
Nominal single-
wavelength output
optical power
40
Channels
dBm 7
80
Channels
4
Noise figure (NF) dB 7.0
Nominal gain dB 23
ms < 10
Channel gain dB 231.5
Gain flatness dB 2.0
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2241
Item Unit Value
OBU205
Pump leakage at input dBm < -30
input
dB -27
output
dB -27
power
dBm 23
Multi-channel gain slope dB/dB 2.0
VI-VO
a
Inherent
insertion
loss
dB 1.5
Dynamic
attenuatio
n range
dB 20
Adjustment accuracy
a
dB 1
a: The items are supported on the TN12OBU2.

(8.7 in.)
l Weight:
TN11OBU2: 1.9 kg (4.2 lb.)
TN12OBU2: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11OBU205 17 24
TN12OBU205 14 19

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2242
20.8 RAU1
RAU1: backward raman and erbium doped fiber hybrid optical amplifier unit
The available functional versions of the RAU1 board is TN11.
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
1RA
U1
Y Y Y Y Y Y

Type
Table 20-62 lists the types of the RAU1 board.
Table 20-62 Type description of the RAU1 board
RAU1 06 Adopts the backward pumping and optical amplification
technology.

20.8.2 Application
As a type of optical amplifier unit, the RAU1 board integrates a backward Raman unit, an EDFA
unit, Different from an EDFA, the RAU1 board is used to improve system performance. It
amplifies optical signals at the receive end.
CAUTION
Always turn off the pump Raman laser of the RAU1 board before removing or inserting the fiber
to the RAU1.
Figure 20-32 shows two applications of the RAU1 board in a WDM system.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2243
Figure 20-32 Application of the RAU1 board in a WDM system
OTU
OBU1
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OBU1
Client
Side
Client
Side
M
U
X
D
M
U
X
D
M
U
X
Client
Side
Client
Side
LINE
SYS
IN
OUT
F
I
U
SC1
SC1
RC
RM
OUT
OUT
RM
IN
TM
TC
RC
RAU1
SYS
IN
IN
TC
RAU1
OUT
LINE
M
U
X
F
I
U
TM

When the RAU1 board is used on the OptiX OSN 3800, the OptiX OSN 3800 must function as
an OLA site, as shown in Figure 20-33. The RAU1 board can be configured in only one direction.
In the other direction, the TN21FIU+OAU combination can be used.
Figure 20-33 Application of the RAU1 board in a WDM system (OptiX OSN 3800 as an OLA
site)
F
I
U
F
I
U
SC2
OAU
RAU1
LINE
IN
SYS
OUT
IN
TC
TM
RM
RC
OUT
RC OUT
RM
TM
IN TC
TM1
TM2
RM2
RM1
IN OUT
NOTE
When RAU1 works in gain mode, the FIU board connected to the SYS port and IN port on RAU1 must
be TN14FIU.

The RAU1 is mainly used for gain adjustment, online optical performance monitoring, gain lock,
and transient control.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2244
Table 20-63 Functions and features of the RAU1 board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function l Integrates a backward Raman unit and an EDFA unit and amplifies
the input optical signals in C band. The total wavelengths range
from 1529 nm to 1561 nm.
l Implements the distributed online amplification of signals over
long distance with wide bandwidth and low noise.
Gain adjustment The RAU1 continuously adjusts the gain continuously based on the
input optical power:
l G.652 fibers: 19dB to 33dB
l LEAF fibers: 19dB to 35dB
l TWRS fibers: 19dB to 35dB
l TW-C fibers: 19dB to 35dB
l TWPLUS fibers: 19dB to 35dB
l SMFLS fibers: 19dB to 35dB
l G.654A fibers: 19dB to 33dB
l TERA_LIGHT fibers: 19dB to 35dB
l G.654B fibers: 19dB to 29dB
NOTE
Users can separately configure the gain adjustment point for the Raman
amplifier and EDFA using the NMS.
The RAU1 board supports only the G.652, G.653, LEAF, TWRS, and TW-C
fibers supported. If other types of fiber must be used, the RAU1 board must
be upgraded. To perform the upgrade, contact Huawei engineers.
Online optical
performance
monitoring
affecting traffic.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2245
Function and
Feature
Description
Working mode The Raman amplifier module supports the gain locking, maximum
gain, and power locking modes.
l In gain locking mode. This mode applies to multi-span or single-
short-span systems that use G.652/G.653/LEAF/TWRS/TW-C/
TWPLUS/SMFLS/G.656/G.654A/TERA_LIGHT/G.654B
fibers. In addition, the gain of the Raman unit is tunable and users
can query the actual gain of the Raman unit.
l The maximum gain mode applies to single-UL-span systems that
use G.652/G.653/LEAF/TWRS/TW-C/TWPLUS/SMFLS/G.
656/G.654A/TERA_LIGHT/G.654B fibers. In this mode, the
Raman amplifier module automatically adjusts its pump power to
ensure that its gain reaches the maximum value. In addition, users
can query the actual gain of the Raman amplifier module.
l In the pump power mode, users can set the pump power for the
Raman amplifier module. This mode applies to systems that use
any fibers but the G.652/G.653/LEAF/TWRS/TW-C/TWPLUS/
SMFLS/G.656/G.654A/TERA_LIGHT/G.654B fibers or to
situations in which the pump power of the Raman amplifier
module must be adjusted manually.
The EDFA module supports the gain locking and power locking
modes.
l In the gain locking mode, the gain of the EDFA module is tunable
and users can query the actual gain of the EDFA module. The gain
locking mode is enabled by default.
l The power locking mode is used for the commissioning and fault
location purposes.
Transient control
function
Alarms and
performance events
monitoring
l The EDFA optical module can detect and report optical power.
l The Raman amplifier module supports return loss detection.

The RAU1 board consists of Raman optical module, EDFA optical module, driving and detection
Figure 20-34shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN11RAU1 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2246
Figure 20-34 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11RAU1
SCC
CPU
LINE
MONO RDC TDC IN MONS SYS
OUT
PIN
PAOUT
BAIN
EDFA optical module
Splitter
Driving
current
Detection for
pump current
and temperature
Control
Power supply
module
Required
voltage
Fuse
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Detection
for
temperature
Pumping
current and
temperature
control
Detection for
pump light
power and
current
Raman optical module
Splitter
Pump source
Pump light
Signal
Signal
PIN

Signal Flow
The pump source of the RAU1 board sends the pump light to the WDM side through the LINE
optical interface. On the line, the signals that are amplified through the distributed amplification
are input through the LINE interface. The splitter then splits them into two, among which the
service optical signals are output through the SYS interface. A few supervisory signals are output
to the multi-channel spectrum analyzer unit or test instrument through the MONS interface for
online optical performance monitoring. One service optical signal received through the SYS
interface is input to the EDFA optical module. The EDFA optical module amplifies the optical
power of the signal and locks the gain of the signal. Then the signal is sent to the DCM through
the TDC interface for dispersion compensation and returns to the EDFA optical module through
the RDC interface. At last, the amplified multiplexed signal is output through the OUT interface.
Module Function
l Raman optical module
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2247
MONS interface for spectrum detection and supervising.
The erbium-doped fiber that is excited by the pump light can amplify the optical signal
detection.
the MONO interface for detection.
temperature of the pump laser.
Drives the pump laser.
20.8.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces, and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the RAU1
board.
Figure 20-35shows the front panel of the RAU1 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2248
Figure 20-35 Front panel of the TN11RAU1 board
RAU1
RAU1
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
T
D
C
R
D
C
O
U
T
I
N
M
O
N
O
S
Y
S
M
O
N
S
LAS
L
I
N
E
LASERRADIATION
CAUTION
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION

Indicators
Five indicators are present on the front panel:
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2249
l Laser emission status indicator (LAS) green
Interfaces
Table 20-64 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TN11RAU1 board
compensation.
MONO LC Connected to the MCA4, MCA8, OPM8 or WMU,
signal power, calculation formula: Pout(dBm) - Pmono
(dBm) = 10 x lg(99/1) = 20 dB).
LINE LSH/APC Receives the line optical signal and sends the pump
light.
SYS LC Transmits the amplified signal to the FIU.
MONS LC Connected to the MCA4, MCA8 or OPM8, monitors
performance online.
The MONS port is a 1/99 tap of the total composite
signal at the SYS port (20 dB lower than the actual
signal power, calculation formula: Psys(dBm) - Pmons
(dBm) = 10 x lg (99/1) = 20 dB).

Laser Hazard Level
RAU1: After the IPA function is enabled, the laser hazard level of the board is HAZARD LEVEL
1M, which indicates that the maximum power output by the optical port on the board ranges 10
dBm (10 mW) to 21.3 dBm (136 mW).
20.8.6 Valid Slots
Two slots house one TN11RAU1.
Table 20-65shows the valid slots for the TN11RAU1.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2250
Table 20-65 Valid slots for the board
Product Valid Slots
IU34, IU36-IU42, IU46-IU52, IU54-IU60,
IU62-IU68
IU36

NOTE
For OptiX OSN 8800:
the slot number of the RAU1 board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two slots.
l For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the RAU1 board, the slot number of the RAU1 board displayed on
the NM is IU2.
For OptiX OSN 6800:
the NM is IU2.
For OptiX OSN 3800:
the slot number of the RAU1 board displayed on the NM is the number of the upper one of the two slots.
l For example, if slots IU2 and IU3 house the RAU1 board, the slot number of the RAU1 displayed on the
NM is IU2.
Display of Optical Interface
Table 20-66 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TN11RAU1 board displayed on the NM
IN 1
PAOUT 2
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2251
RDC 3
OUT 4
TDC 5
MONO 6
LINE 9
SYS 10
MONS 11

For parameters of the RAU1, refer to Table 20-67.
Table 20-67 RAU1 parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
- Displays the position of the optical port.
Optical Interface
Name
- Sets and displays the optical port name.
are supported.
board.
Configure Band C
Default: C
of a board.
Input Power Loss
Threshold (dBm)
MUT_LOS alarm.
information.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2252
Default:
l OUT port: On
l LINE port: Off
status of a board.
input power (dBm).
more information.
Gain Lower
Threshold (dB) to
Value of Nominal
Gain Upper
Threshold (dB)
module.
power.
(dB) parameters.
NOTE
When the insertion loss between the TDC and
RDC ports is larger than 9 dB, the Nominal
Gain (dB) parameter is unavailable.
Nominal Gain Upper
Threshold (dB)
Nominal Gain Lower
Threshold (dB)
type.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2253
Upper Threshold of
Actual Gain (dB)
NOTE
RDC ports is larger than 9 dB, the actual gain is
displayed as an invalid value.
Lower Threshold of
Actual Gain (dB)
NOTE
RDC ports is larger than 9 dB, the actual gain is
displayed as an invalid value.
Actual Working
Band Parity
band of the board.
Configure Working
Band Parity
All
Default: All
band.
Rated Optical Power
(dBm)
-30 to 30
value is determined
when the system is
provisioned with 80
wavelengths and
varies according to
boards.
NOTE
For the LINE port, the rated optical power is
same as Nominal single wavelength input
optical power. For the OUT port, the rated
optical power is same as Nominal single
system.
Fixed Pump Optical
Power (dBm)
/ This parameter is available only when the
Working Mode is set to Pump power for
the LINE port.
Minimum Fixed
Pump Optical Power
(dBm)
- Displays the minimum fixed pump optical
power that is queried
Maximum Fixed
Pump Optical Power
(dBm)
- Displays the maximum fixed pump optical
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2254
The Upper Threshold
of RL to starting the
pump (dB)
The Lower Threshold
pump (dB)
The Upper Threshold
of RL alarm (dB)
loss alarm.
The Lower Threshold
of RL alarm (dB)
loss alarm.
Fiber, LEAF Fiber,
TWRS Fiber, TWC
Fiber, TWPLUS
Fiber, SMFLS Fiber,
G654B Fiber, G656
Fiber, G654A Fiber,
TERA_LIGHT_Fibe
r
Default: G652 Fiber
Specifies the type of a fiber. The gain range
of the board varies according to the fiber
type.
NOTE
When the Raman amplifier module works in
gain locking or maximum gain mode, the fiber
type must be configured for the module. To
configure the fiber type, start the desired NE
Explorer, select the board and choose
Configuration > WDM Interface in the
navigation tree. The actual fiber type must be
the same as the fiber type specified in the Fiber/
Cable Management window.
Enable OAMS Power
Monitoring
Disable, Enable
Default: Disable
Standard Value of
OAMS Power
Monitoring (dBm)
-60.0 to 50.0
Default: /
power monitoring.
OAMS Power
Abnormity
Threshold (dB)
-0.5 to 10.0
Default:3
threshold.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2255
Working Mode l OUT port:
Gain locking,
Power locking
Default: Gain
locking
l LINE port:
Gain locking,
Maximum
power, Pump
power
Default: Gain
locking
Specifies the working mode for an optical
amplifier. For the OUT port, it specifies the
working mode of the EDFA module; for
the LINE port, it specifies the working
mode of the Raman amplifier module.
Features.
Default: 0
Working Mode is set to Power locking for
the OUT port

20.8.9 RAU1 Specifications
Table 20-68 Optical specifications of the TN11RAU1 board
Item Unit Value
RAU1
board
specific
ations
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1529 to 1561
Gain range dB G.652 fibers 19 to 33
LEAF fibers 19 to 35
G.653 fibers 19 to 35
TWRS fibers 19 to 35
TW-C fibers 19 to 35
TWPLUS fibers 19 to 35
SMFLS fibers 19 to 35
G.654A fibers 19 to 33
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2256
Item Unit Value
TERA_LIGHT fibers 19 to 35
G.654B fibers 19 to 29
Equivalent
noise figure
a
dB G.652 fibers < 5.5 (19 dB gain)
< 3.0 (22 dB gain)
< 1.5 (26 dB gain)
< 1.0 (30 dB gain)
LEAF fibers < 5.5 (19 dB gain)
< 3.0 (22 dB gain)
< 1.0 (26 dB gain)
< 0.5 (30 dB gain)
G.653 fibers < 5.5 (19 dB gain)
< 3.0 (22 dB gain)
< 1.0 (26 dB gain)
< 0.5 (30 dB gain)
TWRS fibers < 5.5 (19 dB gain)
< 3.0 (22 dB gain)
< 1.0 (26 dB gain)
< 0.5 (30 dB gain)
TW-C fibers < 5.5 (19 dB gain)
< 3.0 (22 dB gain)
< 1.0 (26 dB gain)
< 0.5 (30 dB gain)
TWPLUS fibers < 5.5 (19 dB gain)
< 3.0 (22 dB gain)
< 1.0 (26 dB gain)
< 0.5 (30 dB gain)
SMFLS fibers < 5.5 (19 dB gain)
< 3.0 (22 dB gain)
< 1.0 (26 dB gain)
< 0.5 (30 dB gain)
< 3.0 (22 dB gain)
< 1.0 (26 dB gain)
< 0.5 (30 dB gain)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2257
Item Unit Value
G.654A fibers < 5.5 (19 dB gain)
< 3.0 (22 dB gain)
< 1.0 (26 dB gain)
< 0.5 (30 dB gain)
TERA_LIGHT fibers < 5.5 (19 dB gain)
< 3.0 (22 dB gain)
< 1.0 (26 dB gain)
< 0.5 (30 dB gain)
G.654B fibers < 5.5 (19 dB gain)
< 3.0 (22 dB gain)
< 1.0 (26 dB gain)
< 0.5 (30 dB gain)
Gain flatness
(LINE port to
OUT port)
dB G.652 fibers < 3.0
LEAF fibers < 3.0
G.653 fibers < 3.0
TWRS fibers < 3.0
TW-C fibers < 3.0
TWPLUS fibers < 3.0
SMFLS fibers < 3.0
G.656 fibers < 3.0
G.654A fibers < 3.0
TERA_LIGHT fibers < 3.0
G.654B fibers < 3.0
LINE port
input optical
power
dBm -40 to 1
Max. OUT
port optical
power
dBm 20
Pump
wavelength
for the LINE
port
nm 1400 to 1500
Pump optical
power of the
LINE port
mW 700
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2258
Item Unit Value
PDG dB 0.7
PMD ps 0.7
Raman
module
specific
ations
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1529 to 1561
Input optical
power
dBm 1
Valid gain
b
dB G.652 fibers 5 to 10
LEAF fibers 5 to 12
TWRS fibers 5 to 12
TW-C fibers 5 to 12
SYS port
reflectance
dB < -40
LINE port
reflectance
dBm < -40
PDG dB 0.5
PMD ps 0.5
Pump
wavelength
nm 1400 to 1500
Max. pump
optical power
mW 700
EDFA
specific
ations
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1529 to 1561
Input optical
power
dBm -30 to 6
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2259
Item Unit Value
Output
optical power
dBm -7 to 20
Nominal
single-
wavelength
output optical
power
dBm 40 channels: 4
80 channels: 1
Gain flatness dB < 2.0
Multi-
channel gain
slope
dB/dB < 2.0
PDG dB 0.5
PMD ps 0.5
Input
reflectance
dB < -40
Output
reflectance
dB < -40
a: The gain can be adjusted continuously. The noise figure varies according to the gain. The previous table lists
the noise figure when the noise figure uses the typical value.
b: The gain of the Raman module can be set to the maximum value. The actual gain of the board is a variable and
depends on the fiber type and status.

(8.7 in.)
l Weight: 2.5 kg (5.5 Ib.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11RAU1 55 70

20.9 RAU2
RAU2: backward raman and erbium doped Fiber hybrid optical amplifier Unit
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2260
The available functional versions of the RAU2 board is TN11.
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
1RA
U2
Y Y Y Y Y Y

Type
Table 20-69 lists the types of the RAU2 board.
Table 20-69 Type description of the RAU2 board
RAU2 01 Adopts the backward pumping and optical amplification
technology.

20.9.2 Application
As a type of optical amplifier unit, the RAU2 board integrates a backward Raman unit, an EDFA
unit, and a VOA. Different from an EDFA, the RAU2 board improves system performance, and
amplifies optical signals at the receive end.
CAUTION
Always turn off the pump Raman laser of the RAU2 board before removing or inserting the fiber
to the RAU2.
Figure 20-36 shows two applications of the RAU2 board in a WDM system.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2261
Figure 20-36 Position of the RAU2 board in the WDM system (OTM site)
OTU
OBU1
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OBU1
M
U
X
D
M
U
X
D
M
U
X
LINE
OUT
F
I
U
SC1
SC1
RC
RM
OUT
OUT
RM
IN
TM
TC
RC
RAU2
SYS
M
U
X
F
I
U
TM
VI
IN
LINE
OUT
IN
TC
RAU2
SYS
VI
IN
VO
VO

When the RAU2 board is used on the OptiX OSN 3800, the OptiX OSN 3800 must function as
an OLA site, as shown in Figure 20-37. The RAU2 board can be configured in only one direction.
In the other direction, the TN21FIU+OAU combination can be used.
Figure 20-37 Position of the RAU2 board in the WDM system (OptiX OSN 3800 as an OLA
site)
F
I
U
F
I
U
SC2
OAU
TM
RM
RC
OUT
RC OUT
RM
TM
IN TC
TM1
TM2
RM2
RM1
IN OUT
LINE
OUT
IN
TC
RAU2
SYS
VI
IN
VO
NOTE
When the RAU2 board works in gain mode, the FIU board connected to the SYS and IN ports on the RAU2
board must be TN14FIU.

The RAU2 board is mainly used for gain adjustment, online optical performance monitoring,
gain lock, and transient control.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2262
Table 20-70 Functions and features of the RAU2 board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function l Integrates a backward Raman unit and an EDFA unit and amplifies
the input optical signals in C band. The total wavelengths range
from 1529 nm to 1561 nm.
l Generates multi-channel pump light of high power, providing
energy for the amplification of signals in the fiber.
Gain adjustment The RAU2 continuously adjusts the gain continuously based on the
input optical power:
NOTE
Users can separately configure the gain adjustment point for the Raman
amplifier and EDFA using the NMS.
Online optical
performance
monitoring
affecting traffic.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2263
Function and
Feature
Description
Working mode The Raman amplifier optical module supports the gain locking,
maximum gain, and power locking modes.
l In gain locking mode. This mode applies to multi-span or single-
short-span systems that use G.652/G.653/LEAF/TWRS/TW-C/
TWPLUS/SMFLS/G.656/G.654A/TERA_LIGHT/G.654B
fibers. In addition, the gain of the Raman unit is tunable and users
can query the actual gain of the Raman unit.
l The maximum gain mode applies to ultra-long-single-span
systems that use G.652/G.653/LEAF/TWRS/TW-C/TWPLUS/
SMFLS/G.656/G.654A/TERA_LIGHT/G.654B fibers. In this
mode, the Raman amplifier module automatically adjusts its pump
power to ensure that its gain reaches the maximum value. In
addition, users can query the actual gain of the Raman amplifier
module.
l In the pump power mode. This mode applies to systems that use
any fibers but the G.652/G.653/LEAF/TWRS/TW-C/TWPLUS/
SMFLS/G.656/G.654A/TERA_LIGHT/G.654B fibers or to
situations in which the pump power of the Raman amplifier
module must be adjusted manually.
The EDFA optical module supports the gain locking and power
locking modes.
l In the gain locking mode, the gain of the EDFA module is tunable
and users can query the actual gain of the EDFA module. The gain
locking mode is enabled by default.
l The power locking mode is used for the commissioning and fault
location purposes.
Transient control
function
Alarms and
performance events
monitoring
l The EDFA optical module can detect and report optical power.
l The Raman amplifier optical module supports return loss
detection.

The RAU2 board consists of Raman optical module, EDFA optical module, VOA, driving and
detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
Figure 20-38shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN11RAU2 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2264
Figure 20-38 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11RAU2
SCC
CPU
LINE
MONO RDC TDC VO MONS SYS
OUT
PIN
PAOUT
BAIN
EDFA optical module
Splitter
Driving
current
Detection for
pump current
and temperature
Control
Power supply
module
Required
voltage
Fuse
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Detection
for
temperature
Pumping
current and
temperature
control
Detection for
pump light
power and
current
Raman optical module
Splitter
Pump source
Pump light
Signal
Signal
PIN
VOA
VI IN

Signal Flow
The pump source of the RAU2 board transmits pump light to the WDM side through the LINE
optical port. In addition, the RAU2 board receives a line optical signal through the LINE optical
port after the optical signal is amplified by distributed amplifiers on the line. Then the splitter
inside the Raman amplifier of the board splits the signal into two: One is the service signal and
is output through the SYS optical port on the board and the other is sent to a multi-channel
spectrum analyzer or test instrument through the MONS optical port for real-time performance
monitoring. The board sends the service signal to the EDFA module through the IN optical port.
The EDFA module performs power amplification and gain locking for the signal. Then the EDFA
module outputs the signal to the DCM module through the TDC optical port for dispersion
compensation and receives the signal again through the RDC optical port. The splitter inside the
EDFA module then splits the signal in two: One is the service signal and is finally output through
the OUT optical port. The other is sent to a multi-channel spectrum analyzer or test instrument
through the MONO optical port for real-time performance monitoring.
Before the multi-channel signal is sent to the IN optical port, it can be first sent to a VOA through
the VI optical port on the VOA for power adjustment. After the power adjustment, the signal is
output through the VO optical port on the VOA and then sent to the IN optical port.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2265
Module Function
l Raman optical module
MONS interface for spectrum detection and supervising.
The erbium-doped fiber that is excited by the pump light can amplify the optical signal
detection.
the MONO interface for detection.
l VOA
temperature of the pump laser.
Drives the pump laser.
20.9.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces, and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the RAU2
board.
Figure 20-39shows the front panel of the TN11RAU2 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2266
Figure 20-39 Front panel of the TN11RAU2 board
RAU2
RAU2
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
T
D
C
R
D
C
O
U
T
I
N
M
O
N
O
S
Y
S
M
O
N
S
LAS
L
I
N
E
V
O
V
I
LASERRADIATION
CAUTION
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION

Indicators
Five indicators are present on the front panel:
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2267
l Laser emission status indicator (LAS) green
Interfaces
Table 20-71 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TN11RAU2 board
compensation.
MONO LC Connected to the MCA4, MCA8, OPM8 or WMU,
signal power, calculation formula: Pout(dBm) - Pmono
(dBm) = 10 x lg(99/1) = 20 dB).
LINE LSH/APC Receives the line optical signal and sends the pump
light.
SYS LC Transmits the amplified signal to the FIU.
MONS LC Connected to the MCA4, MCA8 or OPM8, monitors
performance online.
The MONS port is a 1/99 tap of the total composite
signal at the SYS port (20 dB lower than the actual
signal power, calculation formula: Psys(dBm) - Pmons
(dBm) = 10 x lg (99/1) = 20 dB).
VO LC Transmits the adjusted multiplexed signal.
VI LC Receives the multiplexed signal.

Laser Hazard Level
RAU2: After the IPA function is enabled, the laser hazard level of the board is HAZARD LEVEL
1M, which indicates that the maximum power output by the optical port on the board ranges 10
dBm (10 mW) to 21.3 dBm (136 mW).
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2268
20.9.6 Valid Slots
Two slots house one TN11RAU2.
Table 20-72shows the valid slots for the TN11RAU2.
Table 20-72 Valid slots for the board
Product Valid Slots
IU34, IU36-IU42, IU46-IU52, IU54-IU60,
IU62-IU68
IU36

NOTE
For OptiX OSN 8800:
the NM is IU2.
For OptiX OSN 6800:
the NM is IU2.
For OptiX OSN 3800:
the slot number of the RAU2 board displayed on the NM is the number of the upper one of the two slots.
l For example, if slots IU2 and IU3 house the RAU2 board, the slot number of the RAU2 displayed on the
NM is IU2.
Display of Optical Interface
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2269
Table 20-73 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TN11RAU2 board displayed on the NM
IN 1
PAOUT 2
RDC 3
OUT 4
TDC 5
MONO 6
VI 7
VO 8
LINE 9
SYS 10
MONS 11

For parameters of the RAU2, refer to Table 20-74.
Table 20-74 RAU2 parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
- Displays the position of the optical port.
Optical Interface
Name
- Sets and displays the optical port name.
are supported.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2270
Optical Interface
Attenuation Ratio
(dB)
Value of Min.
Attenuation Rate
(dB) to Value of
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)
Default: Value of
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)
information.
Attenuation
difference (dB)
0.1
Default: none
attenuation.
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)
Min. Attenuation
Rate (dB)
board.
Actual Working
Band Parity
band of the board.
Configure Band C
Default: C
of a board.
Configure Working
Band Parity
All
Default: All
band.
Input Power Loss
Threshold (dBm)
MUT_LOS alarm.
information.
Default:
l OUT port: On
l LINE port: Off
status of a board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2271
input power (dBm).
more information.
Gain Lower
Threshold (dB) to
Value of Nominal
Gain Upper
Threshold (dB)
module.
power.
(dB) parameters.
NOTE
RDC ports is larger than 11 dB, the Nominal
Gain (dB) parameter is unavailable.
Nominal Gain Upper
Threshold (dB)
Nominal Gain Lower
Threshold (dB)
type.
Upper Threshold of
Actual Gain (dB)
NOTE
RDC ports is larger than 11 dB, the actual gain
is displayed as an invalid value.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2272
Lower Threshold of
Actual Gain (dB)
NOTE
RDC ports is larger than 11 dB, the actual gain
is displayed as an invalid value.
Gain Slope Direction Up, Down
Default: /
Specifies the direction where gain slope is
generated on a board.
Gain Slope step 0 to 65535
Default: 1
Specifies the step length for setting gain
slope of a board.
Fixed Pump Optical
Power (dBm)
/ This parameter is available only when the
Working Mode is set to Pump power for
the LINE port.
Minimum Fixed
Pump Optical Power
(dBm)
- Displays the minimum fixed pump optical
Maximum Fixed
Pump Optical Power
(dBm)
- Displays the maximum fixed pump optical
The Upper Threshold
pump (dB)
The Lower Threshold
pump (dB)
The Upper Threshold
of RL alarm (dB)
loss alarm.
The Lower Threshold
of RL alarm (dB)
loss alarm.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2273
Rated Optical Power
(dBm)
-30 to 30
value is determined
when the system is
provisioned with 80
wavelengths and
varies according to
boards.
NOTE
For the LINE port, the rated optical power is
same as Nominal single wavelength input
optical power. For the OUT port, the rated
optical power is same as Nominal single
system.
Fiber, LEAF Fiber,
TWRS Fiber, TWC
Fiber, TWPLUS
Fiber, SMFLS Fiber,
G654B Fiber, G656
Fiber, , G654A Fiber,
TERA_LIGHT_Fibe
r
Default: G652 Fiber
Specifies the type of a fiber. The gain range
of the board varies according to the fiber
type.
NOTE
When the Raman amplifier module works in
gain locking or maximum gain mode, the fiber
type must be configured for the module. To
configure the fiber type, start the desired NE
Explorer, select the board and choose
Configuration > WDM Interface in the
navigation tree. The actual fiber type must be
the same as the fiber type specified in the Fiber/
Cable Management window.
Enable OAMS Power
Monitoring
Disable, Enable
Default: Disable
Standard Value of
OAMS Power
Monitoring (dBm)
-60.0 to 50.0
Default: /
power monitoring.
OAMS Power
Abnormity
Threshold (dB)
-0.5 to 10.0
Default:3
threshold.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2274
Working Mode l OUT port:
Gain locking,
Power locking
Default: Gain
locking
l LINE port:
Gain locking,
Maximum
power, Pump
power
Default: Gain
locking
Specifies the working mode for an optical
amplifier. For the OUT port, it specifies the
working mode of the EDFA module; for
the LINE port, it specifies the working
mode of the Raman amplifier module.
Features.
Default: 0
Working Mode is set to Power locking for
the OUT port
Chromatic
Dispersion
Coefficient(ps/
(nm*km))
-15 to 30
Default: 0
ASON system. Set the parameter based on
the fiber type. Usually, take the nominal
value of the fiber.
Incident Optical
Power (dBm)
effects.

20.9.9 RAU2 Specifications
Table 20-75 Optical specifications of the TN11RAU2 board
Item Unit Value
RAU2
board
specific
ations
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1529 to 1561
Gain range dB G.652 fibers 30 to 41
LEAF fibers 32 to 43
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2275
Item Unit Value
TWRS fibers 32 to 43
TW-C fibers 32 to 43
Equivalent
noise figure
a
dB G.652 fibers < 1.5 (30 dB gain)
LEAF fibers < 1.0 (32 dB gain)
TWRS fibers < 1.0 (32 dB gain)
TW-C fibers < 1.0 (32 dB gain)
TWPLUS fibers < 1.0 (32 dB gain)
SMFLS fibers < 1.0 (32 dB gain)
G.654A fibers < 1.5 (30 dB gain)
TERA_LIGHT fibers < 1.0 (32 dB gain)
G.654B fibers < 4.0 (27 dB gain)
Gain flatness
(LINE port to
OUT port)
dB G.652 fibers < 3.0
LEAF fibers < 3.0
G.653 fibers < 3.0
TWRS fibers < 3.0
TW-C fibers < 3.0
TWPLUS fibers < 3.0
SMFLS fibers < 3.0
G.656 fibers < 3.0
G.654A fibers < 3.0
TERA_LIGHT fibers < 3.0
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2276
Item Unit Value
G.654B fibers < 3.0
LINE port
input optical
power
dBm -42 to -2
Max. OUT
port optical
power
dBm 20
Pump
wavelength
for the LINE
port
nm 1400 to 1500
Pump optical
power of the
LINE port
nW 700
PDG dB 0.7
PMD ps 0.7
Raman
module
specific
ations
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1529 to 1561
Input optical
power
dBm 2
Valid gain
b
dB G.652 fibers 5 to 10
LEAF fibers 5 to 12
TWRS fibers 5 to 12
TW-C fibers 5 to 12
SYS port
reflectance
dB < -40
LINE port
reflectance
dBm < -40
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2277
Item Unit Value
PDG dB 0.5
PMD ps 0.5
Pump
wavelength
nm 1400 to 1500
Max. pump
optical power
mW 700
EDFA
specific
ations
Operating
wavelength
range
nm 1529 to 1561
Input optical
power
dBm -32 to 0
Output
optical power
dBm -1 to 20
Nominal
single-
wavelength
output optical
power
dBm 40 channels: 4
80 channels: 1
Gain flatness dB < 2.0
Multi-
channel gain
slope
dB/dB < 1.0 0.5
VI-VO
Inherent
insertion loss
dB 1.5
VI-VO
Dynamic
attenuation
range
dB 15
VI-VO
Adjustment
accuracy
dB 1
PDG dB 0.5
PMD ps 0.5
Input
reflectance
dB < -40
Output
reflectance
dB < -40
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2278
Item Unit Value
a: The gain can be adjusted continuously. The noise figure varies according to the gain. The previous table lists
the noise figure when the noise figure uses the typical value.
b: The gain of the Raman module can be set to the maximum value. The actual gain of the board is a variable and
depends on the fiber type and status.

(8.7 in.)
l Weight: 2.58 kg (5.69 Ib.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11RAU2 55 70
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2279
21 Cross-Connect Board and System and
Communication Board
About This Chapter
21.1 Overview
A cross-connect board establishes physical channels for electrical signals on service boards
inside a subrack, and grooms electrical signals by working with the service boards.
21.2 USXH
USXH: 6.4T Universal Cross Connect Board
21.3 UXCT
UXCT: 6.4T Universal Cross Connect Board
21.4 SXM
SXM: OptiX OSN 8800 T64 centralized cross connect board
21.5 SXH
SXH: OptiX OSN 8800 T64 centralized cross connect board
21.6 XCT
XCT: OptiX OSN 8800 T64 centralized cross connect board
21.7 TN52UXCM
TN52UXCM: 3.2T Universal Cross Connect Board
21.8 XCM
XCM: Cross & connect process board (Support high- cross and low-cross)
21.9 UXCH
UXCH: 3.2T Universal Cross Connect Board
21.10 TN52XCH
TN52XCH: OptiX OSN 8800 T32 centralized cross connect board
21.11 TN16XCH
TN16XCH: high cross-connection, system control and clock processing board
21.12 TN16UXCM
TN16UXCM: 1.6T Universal Cross Connect, System Control and Clock Processing Board
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
21 Cross-Connect Board and System and Communication
Board
2280
21.13 XCS
XCS: centralized cross connect board
21.14 SCC
SCC: system control and communication board
21.15 AUX
AUX: system auxiliary interface unit
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2281
21.1 Overview
A cross-connect board establishes physical channels for electrical signals on service boards
inside a subrack, and grooms electrical signals by working with the service boards.
Positions of Cross-Connect Boards in a WDM System
Figure 21-1 shows the positions of cross-connect boards in a WDM system.
Figure 21-1 Positions of cross-connect boards in a WDM system
Tributary
board
Line
board
Cross-connect board
ODUk
Line
board
Packet
Packet
service
board
OCS
board
OCS
board
VC-n
OCS
board
Client
side
Client
side
Client
side
WDM
side
Line
side
Client service add/dropped from the
WDM/line-side
Pass-through WDM service
Pass-through client service
Packet
service
board
Packet
service
board
Packet
service
board
WDM
side

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2282
Mapping Between Cross-Connect Boards and Subrack Types
Subrack Type Cross-Connect Board Cross-Connect Capacity
OptiX OSN 8800
T64
a
TNK2USXH, TNK2UXCT,
TNK4SXH, TNK2SXH,
TNK4SXM, TNK2SXM,
TNK4XCT, and TNK2XCT
OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Cross-
Connect Capacities
OptiX OSN 8800
T32
a
TN52UXCH, TN52UXCM,
TN52XCH, and TN52XCM
Connect Capacities
OptiX OSN 8800
T16
TN16XCH
b
, and TN16UXCM
b
Connect Capacities
OptiX OSN 6800 TN12XCS and TN11XCS OptiX OSN 6800 Cross-Connect
Capacities
a: An enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack supports the TNK2USXH and TNK2UXCT
boards, and an enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack supports the TN52UXCH and
TN52UXCM boards.
b: The TN16UXCM/TN16XCH has integrated with the functions of a cross-connect board,
system control board, and clock board.

21.2 USXH
USXH: 6.4T Universal Cross Connect Board
The available functional version of the USXH board is TNK2. The USXH board is only used
on the enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack.
Huawei office.
Boar
d
Enhanced
8800 T64
Subrack
General
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TNK
2US
XH
Y N N N N N N

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2283
21.2.2 Application
As a type of cross-connect unit, the USXH board cross-connects services. The USXH board
applies to enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subracks.
For the position of the USXH board in the system, see Figure 21-2 and Figure 21-3.
Independent use of the USXH board
Figure 21-2 Position of the USXH board in the OCS system
SLO16
USXH
SLD64
USXH
SLO16
1
8
1
8
STM-16 STM-16
SLD64
SLD64
SLD64

Joint use of the USXH board and the UXCT board
Figure 21-3 Position of the USXH board in the WDM system
MUX
DMUX
G.694.1 G.694.1
WDM side WDM side
MUX
DMUX
4 4
4 4
4
4
NS2
NS2
NS2
NS2
TOM
Client side
100Mbit/s-
2.5Gbit/s
TOM
Client side
100Mbit/s-
2.5Gbit/s
UXCT USXH UXCT USXH

NOTE
For a subrack with USXH boards but without UXCT boards, the UXCT boards must be installed if ODUk
transmission is required. When adding the UXCT boards, install the physical UXCT boards before creating their
logical boards; otherwise, the existing SDH services on the subrack will be interrupted.
The USXH board is mainly used to cross-connect services at the electrical layer.
Table 21-1 Functions and features of the USXH board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Grooms services.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2284
Function and
Feature
Description
Cross-connect
function
Supports a maximum of 1.28 Tbit/s VC-4 cross-connect grooming.
Supports a maximum of 6.4 Tbit/s ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 4 or flex)
cross-connect grooming when the USXH board is jointly used with
the UXCT board.
Supports hybrid transmission of the above-mentioned services with
the maximum cross-connect capacity of 6.4 Tbit/s.
Protection scheme l Supports cross-connection 1+1 protection.
l provides 1+1 hot backup.
l provides 1+1 warm backup.
Switching mode Supports manual switching and auto switching.
Supports non-revertive switching.
Electrical-layer
ASON
Supported

The USXH board consists of the cross-connect module, control and communication module,
Figure 21-4 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the USXH board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2285
Figure 21-4 Functional modules and signal flow of the USXH board
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
Backplane(service cross-connection) ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e/
ODU3/ODU4/ODUflex/VC-4

Module Function
The cross-connect module receives data of each service board through the backplane,
performs electrical grooming of the VC-4/ODUk (k=0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 4, or flex) service, and
then sends the service to each service board. In this manner, the cross-connect module
implements service cross-connection.
21.2.5 Front Panel
There are indicators on the front panel of the USXH board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2286
Figure 21-5 shows the front panel of the USXH board.
Figure 21-5 Front panel of the USXH board
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
USXH
USXH

CAUTION
: Indicates that the board surface temperature is high and it may cause bodily injuries.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2287
Indicators
Interfaces
The USXH board does not provide external interfaces.
21.2.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one USXH board.
Table 21-2 shows the valid slots for the USXH board.
Table 21-2 Valid slots for the USXH board
Product Valid Slots
Enhanced OptiX OSN
8800 T64 subrack
IU10, IU44

21.2.7 USXH Specifications
Specifications include dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
l Dimensions of front panel: 34.1 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 602.5 mm (H) or 1.4 in. (W) x
8.7 in. (D) x 23.7 in. (H)
Power Consumption
Board Power
Consumption
at Warm
Backup (25C,
77F) (W)
Power
Consumption
at Warm
Backup (55C,
131F) (W)
Typical Power
Consumption
at 25C (77F)
(W)
Maximum
Power
Consumption
at 55C (131F)
(W)
TNK2USXH
+TNK2UXCT
169 186 6307.4 x (64
n)
6938.1 x (64
n)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2288
Board Power
Consumption
at Warm
Backup (25C,
77F) (W)
Power
Consumption
at Warm
Backup (55C,
131F) (W)
Typical Power
Consumption
at 25C (77F)
(W)
Maximum
Power
Consumption
at 55C (131F)
(W)
NOTE
When the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack grooms electrical-layer signals through the backplane, the USXH
and UXCT must be configured.
"n" is equal to the total number of tributary, line, and PID boards housed in a subrack.

21.3 UXCT
UXCT: 6.4T Universal Cross Connect Board
The available functional version of the UXCT board is TNK2. The UXCT board is only used
on the enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Subrack.
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
Enhanced
8800 T64
Subrack
General
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TNK
2UX
CT
Y N N N N N N

21.3.2 Application
As a type of cross-connect unit, the UXCT board works with the USXH board to cross-connect
ODUk signals. The UXCT board applies to enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subracks.
For the position of the UXCT board in the WDM system, see Figure 21-6.
Figure 21-6 Position of the UXCT board in the WDM system
MUX
DMUX
G.694.1 G.694.1
MUX
DMUX
4 4
4 4
4
4
NS2
NS2
NS2
NS2
TOM
100Mbit/s-
2.5Gbit/s
TOM
100Mbit/s-
2.5Gbit/s
UXCT USXH UXCT USXH
WDM side WDM side Client side Client side
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2289

NOTE
For a subrack with USXH boards but without UXCT boards, the UXCT boards must be installed if ODUk
transmission is required. When adding the UXCT boards, install the physical UXCT boards before creating their
logical boards; otherwise, the existing SDH services on the subrack will be interrupted.
The UXCT board is mainly used to cross-connect services at the electrical layer.
Table 21-3 Functions and features of the UXCT board
Function and
Feature
Description
Cross-connect
function
Supports a maximum of 6.4 Tbit/s ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 4 or flex)
cross-connect grooming when the UXCT board is jointly used with
the USXH board.
Electrical-layer
ASON
Supported

The UXCT board consists of the cross-connect module, control and communication module,
Figure 21-7 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the UXCT board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2290
Figure 21-7 Functional modules and signal flow of the UXCT board
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e/
ODU3/ODU4/ODUflex

Module Function
performs electrical grooming of the ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 4 or flex) service, and then
sends the service to each service board. In this manner, the cross-connect module
21.3.5 Front Panel
There are indicators on the front panel of the UXCT board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2291
Figure 21-8 shows the front panel of the UXCT board.
Figure 21-8 Front panel of the UXCT board
UXCT
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
UXCT
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2292

CAUTION
Indicators
Interfaces
The UXCT board does not provide external interfaces.
21.3.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one UXCT board.
Table 21-4 shows the valid slots for the UXCT board.
Table 21-4 Valid slots for the UXCT board
Product Valid Slots
Enhanced OptiX OSN
8800 T64 subrack
IU9, IU43

21.3.7 UXCT Specifications
8.7 in. (D) x 23.7 in. (H)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2293
Power Consumption
Board Power
Consumption
at Warm
Backup (25C,
77F) (W)
Power
Consumption
at Warm
Backup (55C,
131F) (W)
Typical Power
Consumption
at 25C (77F)
(W)
Maximum
Power
Consumption
at 55C (131F)
(W)
TNK2USXH
+TNK2UXCT
169 186 6307.4 x (64
n)
6938.1 x (64
n)
NOTE
When the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack grooms electrical-layer signals through the backplane, the USXH
and UXCT must be configured.

21.4 SXM
SXM: OptiX OSN 8800 T64 centralized cross connect board
The available functional versions of the SXM board are TNK2 and TNK4. The SXM board is
only used on the OptiX OSN 8800 T64.
Huawei office.
Bo
ard
Enhanc
ed 8800
T64
Subrack
General
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN
K2
SX
M
N Y N N N N N
TN
K4
SX
M
Y Y N N N N N

The specifications vary according to versions. For details, see 21.4.7 SXM Specifications.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2294
Table 21-5 Substitution rules of the SXM board
Original
Board
Substitute Board Substitution Rules
TNK2SXM TNK4SXM The TNK4SXM can be created as TNK2SXM on
the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter,
without any software upgrade. After substitution,
the TNK4SXM functions as the TNK2SXM.
TNK4SXM None None

21.4.2 Application
As a type of cross-connect unit, the SXM board cross-connects services. The SXM board applies
to OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subracks.
For the position of the SXM board in the system, see Figure 21-9 and Figure 21-10.
Independent use of the SXM board
Figure 21-9 Position of the SXM board in the OCS system
SLO1
6
SXM
SLQ6
4
SXM
SLO1
6
1
8
1
8
STM-16 STM-16
SLQ6
4
SLQ6
4
SLQ6
4

Joint use of the SXM board and the XCT board
Figure 21-10 Position of the SXM board in the WDM system
MUX
DMUX
G.694.
1
G.694.
1
WDM side WDM side
MUX
DMUX
4 4
4 4
4
4
NS2
NS2
NS2
NS2
TOM
Client side
100Mbit/s
-
2.5Gbit/s
TOM
Client side
100Mbit/s
-
2.5Gbit/s
SXM
SXM
XCT
XCT

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2295
CAUTION
For a subrack with SXH/SXM boards but without XCT boards, the XCT boards must be installed
if ODUk transmission is required. When adding the XCT boards, install the physical XCT boards
before creating their logical boards; otherwise, the existing SDH services on the subrack will be
interrupted.
The SXM board is mainly used to cross-connect services at the electrical layer.
Table 21-6 Functions and features of the SXM board
Function and
Feature
Description
Cross-connect
function
Supports a maximum of 80 Gbit/s lower-order VC-12 and VC-3
cross-connect grooming.
Supports a maximum of 2.56 Tbit/s ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3 or flex)
cross-connect grooming when the SXM board is jointly used with the
XCT board.
Electrical-layer
ASON
Supported

The SXM board consists of the cross-connect module, control and communication module, and
Figure 21-11 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the SXM board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2296
Figure 21-11 Functional modules and signal flow of the SXM board
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
VC-12/VC-3/VC-4/ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/
ODU2e/ODU3/ODUflex

Module Function
performs electrical grooming of the VC-4/VC-3/VC-12/ODUk (k=0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, flex)
service, and then sends the service to each service board. In this manner, the cross-connect
module implements service cross-connection.
21.4.5 Front Panel
There are indicators on the front panel of the SXM board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2297
Figure 21-12 shows the front panel of the SXM board.
Figure 21-12 Front panel of the SXM board
SXM
SXM
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2298

CAUTION
Indicators
Interfaces
The SXM board does not provide external interfaces.
21.4.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one SXM board.
Table 21-7 shows the valid slots for the SXM board.
Table 21-7 Valid slots for the SXM board
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
subrack
IU10, IU44

NOTE
Enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack only supports the TNK4SXM.
21.4.7 SXM Specifications
TNK2SXM:
8.7 in. (D) x 23.7 in. (H)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2299
TNK4SXM:
8.7 in. (D) x 23.7 in. (H)
l Weight: 3.00 kg (6.59 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Power
Consumption
at Warm
Backup (25C,
77F) (W)
Power
Consumption
at Warm
Backup (55C,
131F) (W)
Typical Power
Consumption
at 25C (77F)
(W)
Maximum
Power
Consumption
at 55C (131F)
(W)
TNK2SXM
+TNK2XCT
190 209 5303.6 x (64
n)
5833.6 x (64
n)
TNK4SXM
+TNK4XCT
97 107 1881.2 x (64
n)
2071.32 x (64
n)
TNK2SXM
+TNK4XCT
173 190 3782.5 x (64
n)
4162.5 x (64
n)
TNK4SXM
+TNK2XCT
114 125 3242.5 x (64
n)
3562.5 x (64
n)
NOTE
When the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack grooms electrical-layer signals through the backplane, the SXM
and XCT must be configured.

21.5 SXH
SXH: OptiX OSN 8800 T64 centralized cross connect board
The available functional versions of the SXH board are TNK2 and TNK4. The SXH board is
only used on the OptiX OSN 8800 T64.The available functional version of the SXH board is
TNK4. The SXH board is only used on the OptiX OSN 8800 T64.
Huawei office.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2300
Bo
ard
Enhanc
ed 8800
T64
Subrack
General
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN
K2
SX
H
N Y N N N N N
TN
K4
SX
H
Y Y N N N N N

The specifications vary according to versions. For details, see 21.5.7 SXH Specifications.
Original
Board
TNK2SXH TNK4SXH The TNK4SXH can be created as TNK2SXH on
the TNK4SXH functions as the TNK2SXH.
TNK4SXH None None

21.5.2 Application
As a type of cross-connect unit, the SXH board cross-connects services. The SXH board applies
to OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subracks.
For the position of the SXH board in the system, see Figure 21-13 and Figure 21-14.
Independent use of the SXH board
Figure 21-13 Position of the SXH board in the OCS system
SLO16
SXH
SLQ64
SXH
SLO16
1
8
1
8
STM-16 STM-16
SLQ64
SLQ64
SLQ64

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2301
Joint use of the SXH board and the XCT board
Figure 21-14 Position of the SXH board in the WDM system
MUX
DMUX
G.694.1 G.694.1
WDM side WDM side
MUX
DMUX
4 4
4 4
4
4
NS2
NS2
NS2
NS2
TOM
Client side
100Mbit/s-
2.5Gbit/s
TOM
Client side
100Mbit/s-
2.5Gbit/s
SXH
SXH
XCT
XCT

CAUTION
interrupted.
The SXH board is mainly used to cross-connect services at the electrical layer.
Table 21-8 Functions and features of the SXH board
Function and
Feature
Description
Cross-connect
function
cross-connect grooming when the SXH board is jointly used with the
XCT board.
Electrical-layer
ASON
Supported

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2302
The SXH board consists of the cross-connect module, control and communication module, and
Figure 21-15 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the SXH board.
Figure 21-15 Functional modules and signal flow of the SXH board
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
Backplane(service cross-connection) VC-4/ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/
ODU2e/ODU3/ODUflex

Module Function
performs electrical grooming of the VC-4/ODUk (k=0, 1, 2, 2e, 3 or flex) service, and then
sends the service to each service board. In this manner, the cross-connect module
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2303
21.5.5 Front Panel
There are indicators on the front panel of the SXH board.
Figure 21-16 shows the front panel of the SXH board.
Figure 21-16 Front panel of the SXH board
SXH
SXH
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2304
CAUTION
Indicators
Interfaces
The SXH board does not provide external interfaces.
21.5.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one SXH board.
Table 21-9 shows the valid slots for the SXH board.
Table 21-9 Valid slots for the SXH board
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
subrack
IU10, IU44

NOTE
Enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 only supports the TNK4SXH.
21.5.7 SXH Specifications
TNK2SXH:
8.7 in. (D) x 23.7 in. (H)
l Weight: 3.74 kg (8.1lb.)
TNK4SXH:
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2305
8.7 in. (D) x 23.7 in. (H)
l Weight: 2.68 kg (5.8Ib.)
Power Consumption
Board Power
Consumption
at Warm
Backup (25C,
77F) (W)
Power
Consumption
at Warm
Backup (55C,
131F) (W)
Typical Power
Consumption
at 25C (77F)
(W)
Maximum
Power
Consumption
at 55C (131F)
(W)
TNK2SXH
+TNK2XCT
130 143 4703.6 x (64
n)
5173.6 x (64
n)
TNK4SXH
+TNK4XCT
95 105 1691.2 x (64
n)
1861.32 x (64
n)
TNK2SXH
+TNK4XCT
113 124 3182.5 x (64-
n)
3502.5 x (64-
n)
TNK4SXH
+TNK2XCT
112 123 3212.5 x (64-
n)
3532.5 x (64-
n)
NOTE
When the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack grooms electrical-layer signals through the backplane, the SXH
and XCT must be configured.

21.6 XCT
XCT: OptiX OSN 8800 T64 centralized cross connect board
The available functional versions of the XCT board are TNK2 and TNK4. The XCT board is
only used on the OptiX OSN 8800 T64.
Huawei office.
Boar
d
Enhanced
8800 T64
Subrack
General
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TNK
2XC
T
N Y N N N N N
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2306
Boar
d
Enhanced
8800 T64
Subrack
General
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TNK
4XC
T
Y Y N N N N N

The specifications vary according to versions. For details, see 21.6.7 XCT Specifications.
Original
Board
TNK2XCT TNK4XCT The TNK4XCT can be created as TNK2XCT on
the TNK4XCT functions as the TNK2XCT.
TNK4XCT None None

21.6.2 Application
As a type of cross-connect unit, the XCT board is used with the SXH/SXM board to implement
cross-connect grooming. The XCT board applies to OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subracks.
For the position of the XCT board in the WDM system, see Figure 21-17.
Figure 21-17 Position of the XCT board in the WDM system
MUX
DMUX
G.694.1 G.694.1
WDMside WDM side
MUX
DMUX
4 4
4 4
4
4
NS2
NS2
NS2
NS2
TOM
Client side
100Mbit/s-
2.5Gbit/s
TOM
Client side
100Mbit/s-
2.5Gbit/s
SXH
/
SXM
SXH
/
SXM
XCT
XCT

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2307
CAUTION
interrupted.
The XCT board is mainly used to cross-connect services at the electrical layer.
Table 21-10 Functions and features of the XCT board
Function and
Feature
Description
Cross-connect
function
cross-connect grooming when the XCT board is jointly used with the
SXM/SXH board.
Electrical-layer
ASON
Supported

The XCT board consists of the cross-connect module, control and communication module, and
Figure 21-18 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the XCT board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2308
Figure 21-18 Functional modules and signal flow of the XCT board
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e/ODU3/ODUflex

Module Function
performs electrical grooming of the ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, flex) service, and then sends
the service to each service board. In this manner, the cross-connect module implements
service cross-connection.
21.6.5 Front Panel
There are indicators on the front panel of the XCT board.
Figure 21-19 shows the front panel of the XCT board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2309
Figure 21-19 Front panel of the XCT board
XCT
XCT
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2310
CAUTION
Indicators
Interfaces
The XCT board does not provide external interfaces.
21.6.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one XCT board.
Table 21-11 shows the valid slots for the XCT board.
Table 21-11 Valid slots for the XCT board
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
subrack
IU9, IU43

NOTE
Enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack only supports the TNK4XCT.
21.6.7 XCT Specifications
TNK2XCT:
l Dimensions of front panel: 34.1 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 602.5 mm (H) (1.4 in. (W) x 8.7
in. (D) x 23.7 in. (H))
TNK4XCT:
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2311
l Dimensions of front panel: 34.1 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 602.5 mm (H) (1.4 in. (W) x 8.7
in. (D) x 23.7 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board Power
Consumption
at Warm
Backup (25C,
77F) (W)
Power
Consumption
at Warm
Backup (55C,
131F) (W)
Typical Power
Consumption
at 25C (77F)
(W)
Maximum
Power
Consumption
at 55C (131F)
(W)
TNK2SXM
+TNK2XCT
190 209 5303.6 x (64
n)
5833.6 x (64
n)
TNK2SXH
+TNK2XCT
130 143 4703.6 x (64
n)
5173.6 x (64
n)
TNK4SXM
+TNK4XCT
97 107 1881.2 x (64
n)
2071.32 x (64
n)
TNK4SXH
+TNK4XCT
95 105 1691.2 x (64
n)
1861.32 x (64
n)
TNK2SXM
+TNK4XCT
173 190 3782.5 x (64
n)
4162.5 x (64
n)
TNK4SXM
+TNK2XCT
114 125 3242.5 x (64
n)
3562.5 x (64
n)
TNK2SXH
+TNK4XCT
113 124 3182.5 x (64-
n)
3502.5 x (64-
n)
TNK4SXH
+TNK2XCT
112 123 3212.5 x (64-
n)
3532.5 x (64-
n)
NOTE
When the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack grooms electrical-layer signals through the backplane, the
SXM/SXH and XCT must be configured.

21.7 TN52UXCM
TN52UXCM: 3.2T Universal Cross Connect Board
Only one functional version of the TN52UXCM board is available, that is TN52.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2312
Huawei office.
Bo
ard
8800 T64
Subrack
Enhanc
ed 8800
T32
Subrack
General
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platfor
m
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN
52
UX
C
M
N Y N N N N N

21.7.2 Application
The TN52UXCM board is a cross-connect board. It implements cross-connections of ODUk
(k=0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 4, flex)/VC-4/VC-3/VC-12services and packet switching of Ethernet
services. The TN52UXCM board applies to enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subracks
For the position of the TN52UXCM in the OCS system, see Figure 21-20.
For the position of the TN52UXCM in the WDM system, see Figure 21-21 and Figure 21-22.
Figure 21-20 Position of the TN52UXCM in the OCS system
SLO16
UXCM
SLQ64
UXCM
SLO16
1
8
1
8
STM-16 STM-16
SLQ64
SLQ64
SLQ64

Figure 21-21 Position of the TN52UXCM in the WDM system (ODUk cross-connect)
MUX
DMUX
G.694.1 G.694.1
MUX
DMUX
4 4
4 4
4
4
NS2
NS2
NS2
NS2
TOM
100Mbit/s-
2.5Gbit/s
TOM
100Mbit/s-
2.5Gbit/s
UXCM
UXCM

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2313
Figure 21-22 Position of the TN52UXCM in the WDM system (Packet switch)
MUX
DMUX
G.694.1 G.694.1
MUX
DMUX
PND2 EG16
GE
EG16 GE
UXCM
UXCM PND2

The main function and feature of the UXCM is the cross-connection at the electrical layer.
Table 21-12 Functions and features of the TN52UXCM
Function and
Feature
Description
Cross-connect
functions
l Cross-connects a maximum of 3.2 Tbit/s ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e,
3, 4 or flex) signals.
l Performs packet switching of a maximum of 1.6 Tbit/s Ethernet
services.
l Cross-connects a maximum of 1.28 Tbit/s VC-4 signals.
l Cross-connects a maximum of 80 Gbit/s VC-3/VC-12 signals.
l Supports hybrid transmission of the above-mentioned services
with the maximum cross-connect capacity of 3.2 Tbit/s.
Switching mode Supports the manual switching and auto switching.
Supports the non-revertive switching.
Electrical-layer
ASON
Supported

The TN52UXCM board consists of the ODUk/VC cross-connect module, packet switch module,
Figure 21-23 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the UXCM.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2314
Figure 21-23 Functional modules and signal flow of the UXCM
SCC
ODUk/VC
cross-connect module
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e
/ODU3/ODU4/ODUflex/VC-
4/VC-3/VC-12
Packet switch module
Packets

Module Function
l ODUk/VC cross-connect module
The cross-connect module receives the data from each service board through the backplane
to implement the electrical-layer grooming of ODUk (k= 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 4 or flex) signals
or VC-4/VC-3/VC-12 signals. Then, the cross-connect module sends the signals to each
service board to complete service cross-connection.
l Packet switch module
The packet switch module receives packets from the packet processing boards through the
backplane and sends services to the packet processing boards. In this manner, the packet
switch module implements packet switching of Ethernet services.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2315
21.7.5 Front Panel
There are indicators on the TN52UXCM front panel.
Figure 21-24 shows the TN52UXCM front panel.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2316
Figure 21-24 TN52UXCM front panel
UXCM
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
UXCM

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2317
CAUTION
Indicators
Interfaces
The TN52UXCM does not provide external interfaces.
21.7.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one UXCM board.
Table 21-13 shows the valid slots for the TN52UXCM board.
Table 21-13 Valid slots for the UXCM board
Product Valid Slots
Enhanced OptiX OSN
8800 T32 subrack
IU9, IU10

21.7.7 TN52UXCM Specifications
l Dimensions of the front panel: 27.2 mm (W) x 220 mm x (D) 581.5 mm (H) or 1.1 in. (W)
x 8.7 in. (D) x 22.9 in. (H)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2318
Power Consumption
Board Power
Consumption
at Warm
Backup (25C,
77F) (W)
Power
Consumption
at Warm
Backup (55C,
131F) (W)
Typical Power
Consumption
at 25C (77F)
(W)
Maximum
Power
Consumption
at 55C (131F)
(W)
TN52UXCM 119 131 372 - 7.4 x (32 -
n) -24 x m
409 - 8.1 x (32 -
n) -26.4 x m
NOTE
l "n" is equal to the total number of tributary, line, and PID boards housed in a subrack.
l If a subrack is configured with VC-3 or VC-12 cross-connections, "m" is equal to 0.
l If a subrack is not configured with any VC-3 or VC-12 cross-connections, "m" is equal to 1.

21.8 XCM
XCM: Cross & connect process board (Support high- cross and low-cross)
Only one functional version of the XCM board is available, that is TN52.
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN5
2XC
M
N Y N N N N

21.8.2 Application
The XCM board is a cross-connect board. It supports 1.28 Tbit/s ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, or
flex)/VC-4/VC-3/VC-12 cross-connections. The XCM board applies to OptiX OSN 8800 T32
subracks
For the position of the XCM in the OCS system, see Figure 21-25.
For the position of the XCM in the WDM system, see Figure 21-26.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2319
Figure 21-25 Position of the XCM in the OCS system
SLO16
XCM
SLQ64
XCM
SLO16
1
8
1
8
STM-16 STM-16
SLQ64
SLQ64
SLQ64

Figure 21-26 Position of the XCM in the WDM system
MUX
DMUX
G.694.1 G.694.1
WDM side WDM side
MUX
DMUX
4 4
4 4
4
4
NS2
NS2
NS2
NS2
TOM
Client side
100Mbit/s-
2.5Gbit/s
TOM
Client side
100Mbit/s-
2.5Gbit/s
XCM
XCM

The main function and feature of the XCM is the cross-connection at the electrical layer.
Table 21-14 Functions and features of the XCM
Function and
Feature
Description
Cross-connect
functions
l Implements cross-connection of 1.28 Tbit/s ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e,
3 or flex)/VC-4 signals.
l Implements cross-connection of 80 Gbit/s VC-3/VC-12 signals.
Protection scheme Supports cross-connection 1+1 protection and provides 1+1 hot
backup.
Electrical-layer
ASON
Supported

The XCM board consists of the cross-connect module, control and communication module, and
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2320
Figure 21-27 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the XCM.
Figure 21-27 Functional modules and signal flow of the XCM
SCC
CPU Storage
Control
communication
Power module
DC power provided by the backplane
Fuse
Voltages for boards
Backplane (for service cross-connection)
Backplane (for
SCC control)
ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex/
ODU3/VC-4/VC-3/VC-12

Module Function
The cross-connect module receives the data from each service board through the backplane
to implement the electrical-layer grooming of ODUk (k= 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3 or flex) signals or
VC-4/VC-3/VC-12 signals. Then, the cross-connect module sends the signals to each
service board to complete service cross-connection.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2321
21.8.5 Front Panel
There are indicators on the XCM front panel.
Figure 21-28 shows the XCM front panel.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2322
Figure 21-28 XCM front panel
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
XCM
XCM

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2323
CAUTION
Indicators
Interfaces
The XCM does not provide external interfaces.
21.8.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one XCM board.
Table 21-15 shows the valid slots for the XCM board.
Table 21-15 Valid slots for the XCM board
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
subrack
IU9, IU10

21.8.7 XCM Board Specifications
l Dimensions of the front panel: 27.2 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 581.5 mm (H) or 1.1 in. (W)
x 8.7 in. (D) x 22.9 in. (H)
l Weight: 3.84 kg (8.45 lb.)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2324
Power Consumption
Board Power
Consumption
at Warm
Backup (25C,
77F) (W)
Power
Consumption
at Warm
Backup (55C,
131F) (W)
Typical Power
Consumption
at 25C (77F)
(W)
Maximum
Power
Consumption
at 55C (131F)
(W)
TN52XCM01 125 138 339 - 3.6 x (32 -
n) -80 x m
368 - 3.6 x (32 -
n) -80 x m
TN52XCM02 67 73.7 124 - 1.12 x (32
- n) -80 x m
136.4 - 1.12 x
(32 - n) -80 x m
NOTE
l "n" is equal to the total number of tributary, line, and PID boards housed in a subrack.
l If a subrack is configured with VC-3 or VC-12 cross-connections, "m" is equal to 0.
l If a subrack is not configured with any VC-3 or VC-12 cross-connections, "m" is equal to 1.

21.9 UXCH
UXCH: 3.2T Universal Cross Connect Board
The available functional version of the UXCH board is TN52. The UXCH board is only used
on the enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Subrack.
Huawei office.
Boar
d
8800 T64
Subrack
Enhanced
8800 T32
Subrack
General
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN5
2UX
CH
N Y N N N N N

21.9.2 Application
The UXCH board is a cross-connect board and applies to enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32
subracks. It can cross-connect ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 4, or flex) signals and VC-4 signals and
performs packet switching of Ethernet services.
For the position of the UXCH board in the WDM system, see Figure 21-29 and Figure 21-30.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2325
For the position of the UXCH in the OCS system, see Figure 21-31.
Figure 21-29 Position of the UXCH board in the WDM system (ODUk cross-connection)
MUX
DMUX
G.694.1 G.694.1
MUX
DMUX
4 4
4 4
4
4
NS2
NS2
NS2
NS2
TOM
100Mbit/s-
2.5Gbit/s
TOM
100Mbit/s-
2.5Gbit/s
UXCH
UXCH

Figure 21-30 Position of the UXCH board in the WDM system (Packet switch)
MUX
DMUX
G.694.1 G.694.1
MUX
DMUX
PND2 EG16
GE
EG16 GE
UXCH
UXCH PND2

Figure 21-31 Position of the UXCH in the OCS system
SLO16
UXCH
SLQ64
UXCH
SLO16
1
8
1
8
STM-16 STM-16
SLQ64
SLQ64
SLQ64

The UXCH board is mainly used to cross-connect services at the electrical layer.
Table 21-16 Functions and features of the UXCH board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Implements grooming of services.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2326
Function and
Feature
Description
Cross-connect
function
l Cross-connects a maximum of 3.2 Tbit/s ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e,
3, 4 or flex) signals.
l Performs packet switching of a maximum of 1.6 Tbit/s Ethernet
services.
l Cross-connects a maximum of 1.28 Tbit/s VC-4 signals.
l Supports hybrid transmission of the above-mentioned services
with the maximum cross-connect capacity of 3.2 Tbit/s.
l Provides 1+1 hot backup.
l Provides 1+1 warm backup.
Electrical-layer
ASON
Supported

The UXCH board consists of the ODUk/VC cross-connect module, packet switch module,
Figure 21-32 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the UXCH board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2327
Figure 21-32 Functional modules and signal flow of the UXCH board
SCC
ODUk/VC
cross-connect module
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
ODU3/ODU4/ODUflex/VC-4
Packets

Module Function
The cross-connect module receives data from each service board through the backplane,
performs electrical grooming of the ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 4 or flex) service and VC-4
service, and then sends the service to each service board. In this manner, the cross-connect
module implements service cross-connection.
The packet switch module receives packets from the packet processing boards through the
backplane and sends services to the packet processing boards. In this manner, the packet
switch module implements packet switching of Ethernet services.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2328
21.9.5 Front Panel
There are indicators on the front panel of the UXCH board.
Figure 21-33 shows the front panel of the UXCH board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2329
Figure 21-33 Front panel of the UXCH board
UXCH
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
UXCH

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2330
CAUTION
Indicators
Interfaces
The UXCH board does not provide external interfaces.
21.9.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one UXCH board.
Table 21-17 shows the valid slots for the UXCH board.
Table 21-17 Valid slots for the UXCH board
Product Valid Slots
Enhanced OptiX OSN
8800 T32 subrack
IU9, IU10

21.9.7 UXCH Specifications
x 8.7 in. (D) x 22.9 in. (H)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2331
Power Consumption
Board Power
Consumption
at Warm
Backup (25C,
77F) (W)
Power
Consumption
at Warm
Backup (55C,
131F) (W)
Typical Power
Consumption
at 25C (77F)
(W)
Maximum
Power
Consumption
at 55C (131F)
(W)
TN52UXCH 87 96 340 - 7.4 x (32 -
n)
374 - 8.1 x (32 -
n)
NOTE

21.10 TN52XCH
TN52XCH: OptiX OSN 8800 T32 centralized cross connect board
The available functional version of the XCH board is TN52.
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN5
2XC
H
N Y N N N N

NOTE
The TN52XCH board are available in two variants: TN52XCH01 and TN52XCH02. The two board variants
are interchangeable.
21.10.2 Application
The XCH board is a cross-connect board. It supports 1.28 Tbit/s ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, or
flex)/VC-4 cross-connections. The XCH board applies to OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subracks
For the position of the XCH board in the WDM system, see Figure 21-34.
For the position of the XCH board in the OCS system, see Figure 21-35
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2332
Figure 21-34 Position of the XCH board in the WDM system
MUX
DMUX
G.694.1 G.694.1
WDM side WDM side
MUX
DMUX
4 4
4 4
4
4
NS2
NS2
NS2
NS2
TOM
Client side
100Mbit/s-
2.5Gbit/s
TOM
Client side
100Mbit/s-
2.5Gbit/s
XCH
XCH

Figure 21-35 Position of the XCH board in the OCS system
SLO16 XCH
SLQ64
XCH SLO16
1
8
1
8
STM-16 STM-16
SLQ64
SLQ64
SLQ64

The XCH board is mainly used to cross-connect services at the electrical layer.
Table 21-18 Functions and features of the XCH board
Function and
Feature
Description
Cross-connect
function
Implements non-congestion full cross-connection of 1.28 Tbit/s
ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3 or flex)/VC-4 signals.
Protection scheme Supports cross-connection 1+1 protection and provides 1+1 hot
backup.
Supports warm backup.
Electrical-layer
ASON
Supported

The XCH board consists of the cross-connect module, control and communication module, and
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2333
Figure 21-36 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the XCH board.
Figure 21-36 Functional modules and signal flow of the XCH board
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
ODUflex/ODU3/VC-4

Module Function
performs electrical grooming of the ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, or flex)/VC-4 service, and
then sends the service to each service board. In this manner, the cross-connect module
21.10.5 Front Panel
There are indicators on the front panel of the XCH board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2334
Figure 21-37 shows the front panel of the XCH board.
Figure 21-37 Front panel of the XCH board
XCH
XCH
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2335

CAUTION
Indicators
Interfaces
The XCH board does not provide external interfaces.
21.10.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one XCH board.
Table 21-19 shows the valid slots for the XCH board.
Table 21-19 Valid slots for the XCH board
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
subrack
IU9, IU10

21.10.7 TN52XCH Specifications
x 8.7 in. (D) x 22.9 in. (H)
l Weight: 3.40 kg (7.49 lb.)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2336
Power Consumption
Board Power
Consumption
at Warm
Backup (25C,
77F) (W)
Power
Consumption
at Warm
Backup (55C,
131F) (W)
Typical Power
Consumption
at 25C (77F)
(W)
Maximum
Power
Consumption
at 55C (131F)
(W)
TN52XCH01 65 72 243 - 3.6 x (32 -
n)
267.3 - 3.6 x (32
- n)
TN52XCH02 43 47.3 101 - 1.12 x (32
- n)
111 - 1.12 x (32
- n)
NOTE

21.11 TN16XCH
TN16XCH: high cross-connection, system control and clock processing board
TThe available functional version of the XCH board is TN16.
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
6XC
H
N N Y N N N

21.11.2 Application
The TN16XCH, a cross-connect and system control board, implements communication between
equipment, synchronizes physical clocks and PTP clocks on the entire NE, implements service
cross-connections, and manages each board on the equipment with the U2000. The TN16XCH
board applies to OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subracks.
For the position of the TN16XCH board in the WDM system, see Figure 21-38.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2337
Figure 21-38 Position of the TN16XCH board in the WDM system
MUX
DMUX
G.694.1 G.694.1
WDM side WDM side
MUX
DMUX
4 4
4
4
NQ2 TQX
Client side
TQX
Client side
TN16
XCH
TN16
XCH
TN16ATE TN16ATE
External clock External clock
NQ2
4 4 4
4 4 4

l Principles for configuring main control boards in OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subracks:
Electrical subracks: The TN16XCH/TN16UXCM boards must be configured.
Optical subracks (master): The TN16SCC boards must be configured.
Optical subracks (slave): No main control boards are required.
l Principles for configuring main control boards in OptiX OSN 8800 platform subracks:
Master subracks: Main control boards must be configured.
Slave subracks: No main control boards are required.
l Principles for configuring main control boards in other types of subracks:
Main control boards must be configured in both master and slave subracks.
The TN16XCH board is mainly used to cross-connect services at the electrical layer, system
control function and clock function.
Table 21-20 Functions and features of the TN16XCH board
Function and
Feature
Description
Cross-connect
function
Implements non-congestion full cross-connection of 640 Gbit/s
ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, flex) signals.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2338
Function and
Feature
Description
System control
function
NOTE
The TN16XCH board
does not support the
system control
function when the
subrack housing the
board is a slave
subrack.
l Accomplishes the service grooming, configuration management
and alarm output of a subrack.
l Supports the backup of the NE data. When the NE data changes,
the real-time database backup function immediately saves the
changed configuration data into the storage medium to ensure that
no configuration data is lost after the NE is reset (cold) or powered
off. This improves the reliability of the NE.
l Supports the function of the CF card to back up database. The NE
date (except NE IP, NE ID, Gateway ID and Node ID) and the
board software are backed up to the CF card, so that the NE needs
not to be re-configured after the replacement of the TN16XCH.
l Supports interconnection and communication between NEs
through IP over DCC, OSI over DCC, or HWECC.
l Implements communication between NEs when used with the
TN16AUX by using DCC bytes.
l Supports subrack cascading. The TN16XCH board processes
subrack overheads and alarms and delivers configurations to slave
subracks. It connects to the U2000 so that the U2000 can manage
the entire NE.
Clock function l Basic function:
Locks the reference clock source.
Provides the system with ITU-T clock signals that comply with
G.813- and ITU-T G.823 and frame signals.
Synchronizes the time of an NE with the time of the upstream
system.
l Clock source selection function:
Traces the external clock source, service clock source, or local
clock source, to provide the synchronization clock source for itself
and the system.
l Time synchronization function:
Synchronizes the time of an NE with the time of the upstream NE.
Protection scheme Supports 1+1 protection.
Provides 1+1 hot backup.
Supports warm backup.
Electrical-layer
ASON
Supported

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2339
The TN16XCH board consists of the cross-connect module, control and communication module,
Figure 21-39 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN16XCH board.
Figure 21-39 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN16XCH board
Other boards
Backplane
Clock processing module
Power supply
module
Fuse Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
CPU and control module

Monitoring
module
Overhead
processing
module
Time signals/
Clock signals
Service cross-connection from backplane
(ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex/ODU3)
Communication
module

Module Function
performs electrical grooming of the ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3 or flex) service, and then sends
the service to each service board. In this manner, the cross-connect module implements
service cross-connection.
l Clock procession module
Provides a synchronous clock signal for the system. The system clock supports three modes:
free-run, holdover, and locked. When the system clock runs in lock mode, the it
synchronizes to the line/external clock, tributary clock, or OSC board clock. This module
also supports IEEE 1588v2 time and frequency synchronization.
l CPU and control module
Implements the control, monitoring and management of each functional module on the
board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2340
l Overhead processing module
Receives overhead signals from the TN16AUX board and processes the overhead bytes.
In the TN16XCH board, the 512 DCCs (D1-D3) are processed by the control module.
Sends the overhead signals to the TN16AUX board.
l Monitoring module
Detects whether the boards are in position and reports alarms to the U2000.
l Communication module
Communicates with each board, and reports the data of other boards to the U2000.
Transmits data with other boards through the Ethernet and reports to the U2000.
Transmits urgent data through the RS485.
21.11.5 Front Panel
There are indicators on the front panel of the TN16XCH board.
Figure 21-40 shows the front panel of the TN16XCH board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2341
Figure 21-40 Front panel of the TN16XCH board
XCH
XCH
RESET
STAT
ACT
SRV
PROG

Indicators
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2342
Buttons
Table 21-21 Functions of the buttons on the TN16XCH board
Button Function
RESET Used to perform a warm reset on the TN16XCH board.

Interfaces
The TN16XCH board does not provide external interfaces.
21.11.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one TN16XCH board.
Table 21-22 shows the valid slots for the TN16XCH board.
Table 21-22 Valid slots for the TN16XCH board
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
subrack
IU9, IU10

21.11.7 Switch and Jumper
Switches and jumpers that can be set on the TN16XCH board include battery jumpers and BIOS
switches.
The battery on the TN16XCH helps to ensure that the configuration is kept upon a power failure
of the TN16XCH. If the board is in use, place a jumper cap over the battery jumper to make a
short circuit, which allows the battery to supply power normally. If the board is not in use, use
a jumper cap to disconnect the battery jumper.
The BIOS switches helps clear the system parameter area and database in the flash memory on
the SCC board. Table 21-23 shows the function of the BIOS switches.
Figure 21-41 shows the position of switches on the TN16XCH board.
Table 21-23 Function of the BIOS Switch
BIOS
State
Description Binary value
A Clear the system parameter area. 1010
B Restores the system parameter area, database, and
NE software from the CF card.
1001
C Clear the database in the flash memory. 1011
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2343
BIOS
State
D Clear all the data in the flash memory except the
board manufacturing information. The data
includes the system data, system parameter areas,
and extended BIOS files. The upper layer part of
BIOS is not started.
1111

Figure 21-41 Position of the switches on the TN16XCH board
2
CF
Card
3 1 4 3 1 2
0 1 0 1
1 1 1 1
State A
State B
State C
State D
1 0 0 1
1 1 0 1
Battery is
used
Battery is
not used
Binary Value 1111
Binary Value 1011
Binary Value 1001
Binary Value 1010
DIP ON 2
J1
SW1
4 3 1 2
DIP ON
SW1
4 3 1 2
DIP ON
SW1
4 3 1 2
DIP
SW1
ON
4 3 1 2
DIP
SW1
ON
3 1
2
J1
3 1
2
J1
Battery
Jumper
BIOS DIP
Switch
Battery Jumper BIOS Switch

21.11.8 TN16XCH Specifications
l Dimensions of the front panel: 37.6 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 350.3 mm (H) (1.5 in. (W)
x 8.7 in. (D) x 13.8 in. (H))
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2344
Power Consumption
Board Power
Consumption
at Warm
Backup (25C,
77F) (W)
Power
Consumption
at Warm
Backup (55C,
131F) (W)
Typical Power
Consumption
at 25C (77F)
(W)
Maximum
Power
Consumption
at 55C (131F)
(W)
TN16XCH 40 48 731.4 x (16n) 88.81.4 x (16
n)
NOTE

21.12 TN16UXCM
TN16UXCM: 1.6T Universal Cross Connect, System Control and Clock Processing Board
The available functional version of the TN16UXCM board is TN16.
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
6UX
CM
N N Y N N N

21.12.2 Application
As a cross-connect board, the TN16UXCM board achieves cross-connections of ODUk (k = 0,
1, 2, 2e, 3, 4, and flex) signals and VC4/VC12/VC3 signals, and packet switching of Ethernet
services. It helps the NMS to manage boards, ensures that devices can communicate with each
other, and achieves physical-layer clock synchronization and Precision Time Protocol (PTP)
clock synchronization on the entire NE. The TN16UXCM board applies to OptiX OSN 8800
T16 subracks.
For the position of the TN16UXCM board in the WDM system, see Figure 21-42 and Figure
21-43.
For the position of the TN16UXCM board in the OCS system, see Figure 21-44.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2345
Figure 21-42 Position of the TN16UXCM board in the WDM system (ODUk cross-connect)
MUX
DMUX
G.694.1 G.694.1
WDM side
MUX
DMUX
4 4
4 4
4
4
NS2
NS2
NS2
NS2
TOM
Client side
100Mbit/s-
2.5Gbit/s
TOM 100Mbit/s-
2.5Gbit/s
TN16
UXCM
TN16
UXCM
TN16ATE
External colck
TN16ATE
External colck
Client side
WDM side

Figure 21-43 Position of the TN16UXCM board in the WDM system (Package switch)
MUX
DMUX
G.694.1 G.694.1
MUX
DMUX
PND2
EG16
GE EG16 GE
TN16
UXCM
TN16
UXCM
PND2
TN16ATE TN16ATE
EX2 EX2
10GE LAN
10GE LAN
External colck External colck
WDM side
Client side
WDM side
Client side

Figure 21-44 Position of the TN16UXCM board in the OCS system
SLO16
TN16
UXCM
SLQ64
TN16
UXCM
SLO16
1
8
1
8
STM-16 STM-16
SLQ64
SLQ64
SLQ64

The TN16UXCM board is mainly used to cross-connect services at the electrical layer, system
control function and clock function.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2346
Table 21-24 Functions and features of the TN16UXCM board
Function and
Feature
Description
Cross-connect
function
l Supports non-blocking full cross-connections of 1.6 Tbit/s ODUk
(k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 4, or flex).
l Supports cross-connections of 20 Gbit/s VC-12/VC-3 services.
l Supports cross-connections of 640 Gbit/s VC-4 services.
l Supports cross-connections of 800 Gbit/s packet services.
System control
function
NOTE
The TN16UXCM
board does not
support the system
control function when
the subrack housing
the board is a slave
subrack.
l Accomplishes the service grooming, configuration management
not to be re-configured after the replacement of the TN16UXCM.
l Supports interconnection and communication between NEs
through IP over DCC, OSI over DCC, or HWECC.
l Implements communication between NEs when used with the
TN16AUX by using DCC bytes.
l Supports subrack cascading. The TN16UXCM board processes
subrack overheads and alarms and delivers configurations to slave
subracks. It connects to the U2000 so that the U2000 can manage
the entire NE.
system.
and the system.
Protection scheme l Supports 1+1 protection.
l Provides 1+1 hot backup.
l Provides 1+1 warm backup.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2347
Function and
Feature
Description
Electrical-layer
ASON
Supported

TN16UXCM board consists of the cross-connect module, control and communication module,
Figure 21-45 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN16UXCM board.
Figure 21-45 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN16UXCM board
Other boards
Backplane
Power supply
module
Fuse Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane

Monitoring
module
Overhead
processing
module
ODUk/VC
Time signals/
Clock signals
Service cross-connection from backplane
Communication
module
Packets
ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e/ODU3/
ODU4/ODUflex/VC-12/VC-3/VC-4

Module Function
The cross-connect module receives data from each service board through the backplane to
realize the electrical-layer grooming of ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 4, or flex) signals or VC-4/
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2348
VC-3/VC-12 signals. Then, the cross-connect module sends the signals to each service
board to implement service cross-connections.
The packet switch module receives packets from each packet board through the backplane
to realize packet switching of Ethernet services, and then sends the signals to each packet
board.
l Clock procession module
Provides a synchronous clock signal for the system. The system clock supports three modes:
free-run, holdover, and locked. When the system clock runs in lock mode, the it
synchronizes to the line/external clock, tributary clock, or OSC board clock. This module
also supports IEEE 1588v2 time and frequency synchronization.
board.
Receives overhead signals from the TN16AUX board and processes the overhead bytes.
Sends the overhead signals to the TN16AUX board.
l Monitoring module
21.12.5 Front Panel
There are indicators on the front panel of the TN16UXCM board.
Figure 21-46 shows the front panel of the TN16UXCM board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2349
Figure 21-46 Front panel of the TN16UXCM board
UXCM
UXCM
RESET
STAT
ACT
SRV
PROG

Indicators
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2350
Buttons
Table 21-25 Functions of the buttons on the TN16UXCM board
Button Function
RESET Used to perform a warm reset on the TN16UXCM board.

Interfaces
The TN16UXCM board does not provide external interfaces.
21.12.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one TN16UXCM board.
Table 21-26 shows the valid slots for the TN16UXCM board.
Table 21-26 Valid slots for the TN16UXCM board
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T16 IU9, IU10

Switches and jumpers that can be set on the TN16UXCM board include battery jumpers and
BIOS switches.
The battery on the TN16UXCM helps to ensure that the configuration is kept upon a power
failure of the TN16UXCM. If the board is in use, place a jumper cap over the battery jumper to
make a short circuit, which allows the battery to supply power normally. If the board is not in
use, use a jumper cap to disconnect the battery jumper. Figure 21-47 shows the battery jumper.
The BIOS switch helps clear the system parameter area and database in the flash memory on
the SCC board. Table 21-27 shows the function of the BIOS switch.
Figure 21-48 shows the position of switches on the TN16UXCM board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2351
Figure 21-47 battery jumper
1 2 3
Used
Not
used

Table 21-27 Function of the BIOS switch
BIOS
State
B Restores the system parameter area, database, and
NE software from the CF card.
1001
D Clear all the data in the flash memory except the
board manufacturing information. The data
includes the system data, system parameter areas,
and extended BIOS files. The upper layer part of
BIOS is not started.
1111

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2352
Figure 21-48 Position of the switches on the TN16UXCM board
CF Card
CP
U
J39
1
2
3
0 1 0 1
1 1 1 1
1 0 0 1
1 1 0 1
Binary Value1111
Binary Value1011
Binary Value1001
Binary Value 1010
4 3 1 2
DIP ON
SW1
4 3 1 2
DIP ON
SW1
4 3 1 2
DIP
SW1
ON
4 3 1 2
DIP
SW1
ON
1
J39
SW1
4 3 1 2
ON DIP
2
3
1
J39
2
3
Battery
Jumper
BIOS DIP Switch
State A
Battery is
used
Battery is
not used
Battery Jumper BIOS DIP Switch
State B
State C
State D

21.12.8 TN16UXCM Specifications
l Dimensions of the front panel: 37.6 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 350.3 mm (H) (1.5 in. (W)
x 8.7 in. (D) x 13.8 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board Power
Consumption
at Warm
Backup (25C,
77F) (W)
Power
Consumption
at Warm
Backup (55C,
131F) (W)
Typical Power
Consumption
at 25C (77F)
(W)
Maximum
Power
Consumption
at 55C (131F)
(W)
TN16UXCM 841.7 x (16
n)2 x m
921.8 x (16
n)2.2 x m
1787.2 x (16
n)
1957.9 x (16
n)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2353
Board Power
Consumption
at Warm
Backup (25C,
77F) (W)
Power
Consumption
at Warm
Backup (55C,
131F) (W)
Typical Power
Consumption
at 25C (77F)
(W)
Maximum
Power
Consumption
at 55C (131F)
(W)
NOTE
"n" is equal to the total number of tributary, line, and PID boards housed in a subrack, and it is within 0-16
range.
l "m" represents the subrack lower-order cross-connection flag. It is either 0 or 1.
l If a subrack is configured with VC-3 or VC-12 cross-connections, "m" is 0.
l If a subrack is not configured with any VC-3 or VC-12 cross-connections, "m" is 1.

21.13 XCS
XCS: centralized cross connect board
The available functional versions of the XCS board are TN11 and TN12.
Huawei office.
Boar
d
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
TN11
XCS
N N N N Y N
TN12
XCS
N N N N Y N

l Function:
The cross-connection capacities vary according to versions. For details, see 21.13.3
l Specification:
The specifications vary according to versions. For details, see 21.13.7 XCS
Specifications.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2354
Table 21-28 Substitution rules of the XCS board
Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11XCS TN12XCS Upgrade NE software to OptiX OSN 6800 V100R004C01 or a
later version.
TN12XCS None

21.13.2 Application
The XCS board is a cross-connect board. The TN11XCS board supports 280 Gbit/s cross-
connections of ODU1/ODU2/10GE signals and 140 Gbit/s cross-connections of GE signals. The
TN12XCS board supports 360 Gbit/s cross-connections of ODU1/ODU2/10GE signals and 180
Gbit/s cross-connections of GE signals. The XCS board applies to OptiX OSN 6800 subracks.
For the position of the XCS board in the WDM system, see Figure 21-49.
Figure 21-49 Position of the XCS board in the WDM system
OTU
OA
OA
OTU
M40
D40
OTU
OTU
OA
OA
D40
M40
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
1
1
40
1
40
1
40
XCS
XCS
XCS
40
XCS

The XCS board cross-connect services at the electrical layer.
Table 21-29 Functions and features of the XCS board
Function and
Feature
Description
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2355
Function and
Feature
Description
Cross-connect
function
TN11XCS:
l Supports the integrated grooming of ODU1 signals or ODU2/
ODU2e signals or GE services or 10GE services.
l Supports a maximum cross-connect and grooming capacity of 280
Gbit/s for ODU1 signals or ODU2/ODU2e signals or 10GE
services. Supports a maximum cross-connect and grooming
capacity of 140 Gbit/s for GE services.
TN12XCS:
l Supports the integrated grooming of ODU1 signals or ODU2/
ODU2e signals or GE services or 10GE services.
l Supports a maximum cross-connect and grooming capacity of 360
Gbit/s for ODU1 signals or ODU2/ODU2e signals or 10GE
services. Supports a maximum cross-connect and grooming
capacity of 180 Gbit/s for GE services.
Active/standby
backup
Provides the 1+1 hot backup.
Protection scheme Supports cross-connect board 1+1 protection.
Electrical-layer
ASON
Supported by the TN12XCS02.

The XCS board consists of the cross-connect module, control and communication module, and
Figure 21-50 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the XCS board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2356
Figure 21-50 Functional modules and signal flow of the XCS board
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e/GE/10GE

Module Function
Receives the data from each service board from the backplane. It performs the grooming
of ODU1 signals or ODU2/ODU2e signals or GE services or 10GE services at the electrical
layer, then sends the signals to each service board and implements the cross-connection.
21.13.5 Front Panel
There are indicators on the front panel of the XCS board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2357
Figure 21-51 shows the front panel of the XCS board.
Figure 21-51 Front panel of the XCS board
XCS
XCS
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV

Indicators
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2358
Interfaces
The XCS board does not provide external interfaces.
21.13.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one XCS board.
Table 21-30 shows the valid slots for the XCS board.
Table 21-30 Valid slots for the XCS board
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800 subrack IU9, IU10

21.13.7 XCS Specifications
(8.7 in.)
Weight
l TN11XCS: 1.0 kg (2.20 lb.)
l TN12XCS: 1.2 kg (2.65 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11XCS 20.0 22.0
TN12XCS 25.0 27.5

21.14 SCC
SCC: system control and communication board
The available functional versions of the SCC board are TN11, TN16, TN21, TN22, TN23, TN51,
TN52, and TNK2.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2359
Huawei office.
Product Board
OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Subrack TNK2SCC
Enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Subrack TN52SCC
General OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Subrack TN51SCC and TN52SCC
OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Subrack TN16SCC
OptiX OSN 8800 Platform Subrack TN52SCC
OptiX OSN 6800 Subrack TN11SCC, TN51SCC and TN52SCC
OptiX OSN 3800 Chassis TN21SCC, TN22SCC and TN23SCC.
NOTE
Only the TN23SCC board supports V100R007 and
later versions together with their features. In other
words, the TN21SCC/TN22SCC board does not.
For example, the OptiX OSN 3800 supports the
LEM24 board feature in V100R007 and later
versions.

l Function:
Only the TN23SCC board supports OptiX OSN 3800 V100R007 and later versions
together with their features. In other words, the TN21SCC/TN22SCC board does not.
The TN21SCC, TN22SCC, and TN23SCC boards do not support SCC data backup, IP
over DCC, subrack cascading, and power supply backup. The other versions support
these functions. For details, see 21.14.3 Functions and Features.
l Appearance:
The TN11, TN51, and TN52 versions use the same front panel; the TN21SCC,
TN22SCC, and TN23SCC versions use the same front panel; The TNK2 and TN16
version use a front panel different from that of other versions. The TN21SCC,
TN22SCC, and TN23SCC versions are applicable to case-shaped equipment. There are
shelf ID LEDs on panels of TN11SCC, TN51SCC, TN52SCC, and TNK2SCC boards
of the TN21 and TN22 versions only. For details, see 21.14.5 Front Panel and 21.14.8
SCC Specifications.
l Specification:
see 21.14.8 SCC Specifications.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2360
Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11SCC TN51SCC When the TN51SCC board is installed in a master subrack with
ASON disabled, it can replace the TN11SCC board. But after
the replacement, the board software must be upgraded. When
it is installed in a master subrack with ASON disabled, it cannot
replace the TN11SCC board. When it is installed in a slave
subrack, it can directly replace the TN11SCC board.
TN52SCC
NOTE
It is
recommen
ded that the
TN11SCC
board be
replaced
with the
TN52SCC
board.
Software upgrade is required after the replacement.
TN16SCC None -
TN51SCC TN52SCC Software upgrade is required after the replacement.
TN52SCC None -
TNK2SCC None -
TN21SCC TN22SCC/
TN23SCC
Software upgrade is required after the replacement.
TN22SCC TN23SCC Software upgrade is required after the replacement.
TN23SCC None -
NOTE
If a subrack/chassis uses two SCC boards (one is active and the other is standby), the versions of the two
SCC boards must be the same.

21.14.2 Application
The SCC board is a system control and communication unit that works with the network
management system to manage each board and implements inter-equipment communication.
l Principles for configuring main control boards in OptiX OSN 8800 platform subracks:
Master subracks: Main control boards must be configured.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2361
Slave subracks: No main control boards are required.
l Principles for configuring main control boards in other types of subracks:
Main control boards must be configured in both master and slave subracks.
The SCC board is used for DCC communication, subrack cascading, power supply backup and
clock.
Table 21-31 shows the detailed functions and features of the TN11SCC/TN51SCC/TN52SCC/
TNK2SCC board.
Table 21-32 shows the detailed functions and features of the TN16SCC.
Table 21-33 shows the detailed functions and features of the TN21SCC/TN22SCC/TN23SCC
board.
Table 21-31 Functions and features of the TN11SCC/TN51SCC/TN52SCC/TNK2SCC board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function l Accomplishes the service grooming, configuration management
l Supports the function of the CF card to back up the database. The
NE data (except NE IP, NE ID, Gateway ID, and Node ID) and
the board software are backed up to the CF card. Backing up data
to the CF means that you do not need to reconfigure the NE after
replacing the SCC.
DCN
communication
Supports interconnection and communication between NEs through
IP over DCC, OSI over DCC, or HWECC.
Active/Standby
backup
Supports active/standby backup: There are two SCCs in the system
that can provide 1+1 hot backup. If the active board fails, the standby
board automatically becomes active.
Clock function Provides clock source for the system communications.
Subrack cascading Supports subrack cascading. The SCC accomplishes different
functions based on the mode (master or slave) of the subrack in which
it is installed. The SCC in a slave subrack processes the overhead
bytes, handles alarms and manages the configuration inside the
subrack. The SCC in a master subrack performs the same functions
as the SCC in the slave subrack, and also processes overhead bytes
and handles the alarms of all its slave subracks. The SCC in the master
subrack connects to the network management system (NM). The
configuration commands are issued to the SCC of a slave subrack
through the SCC in the master subrack.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2362
Function and
Feature
Description
Electrical-layer
ASON
Supported

Table 21-32 Functions and features of the TN16SCC board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function l Accomplishes the service grooming, configuration management
not to be re-configured after the replacement of the SCC.
DCN
communication
IP over DCC, OSI over DCC, or HWECCwhen used with the
TN16AUX.
Active/Standby
backup
Supports active/standby backup: There are two SCCs in the system
that can provide 1+1 hot backup. If the active board fails, the standby
board automatically becomes active.
system.
and the system.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2363
Function and
Feature
Description
Subrack cascading Supports subrack cascading.
The SCC accomplishes different functions based on the mode (master
or slave) of the subrack in which it is installed. The SCC in a slave
subrack processes the overhead bytes, handles alarms and manages
the configuration inside the subrack. The SCC in a master subrack
performs the same functions as the SCC in the slave subrack, and also
processes overhead bytes and handles the alarms of all its slave
subracks. The SCC in the master subrack connects to the network
management system (NM). The configuration commands are issued
to the SCC of a slave subrack through the SCC in the master subrack.

Table 21-33 Functions and features of the TN21SCC/TN22SCC/TN23SCC board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Accomplishes the service grooming, configuration management and
alarm output of a chassis.
DCN
communication
IP over DCC, OSI over DCC, or HWECC.
Active/standby
backup
Supported: In DC-powered systems, the two SCCs are used to provide
1+1 hot backup. If the active SCC fails, the standby SCC becomes
active automatically.
NOTE
Active/standby backup configuration is not supported in AC-powered systems.
Clock function Provides clock source for the system communications.
Electrical-layer
ASON
Not supported

NOTE
Only the TN23SCC board supports V100R007 and later versions together with their features. In other words,
the TN21SCC/TN22SCC board does not. For example, the OptiX OSN 3800 supports the LEM24 board feature
in V100R007 and later versions.
The SCC board consists of the overhead processing module, clock module, monitoring module,
communication module, CPU and control module, and power supply module.
Figure 21-52 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the SCC.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2364
Figure 21-52 Functional modules and signal flow of the SCC board
Other boards
Backplane
Power
supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply from
a backplane
Monitoring
module
Overhead
processing
module
Communication
module
Clock module

Module Function
board.
Sends the overhead signals to the service board.
l Monitoring module
l Clock module
Provides the clock source for the system.
TN11SCC/TN51SCC/TN52SCC/TNK2SCC/TN21SCC/TN22SCC/TN23SCC:
Receives the clock signals from the OSC board at the upstream station, and ensures that
the local clock of the local board is synchronized with the clock signals from the OSC
board at the upstream station.
Sends a local clock to the downstream station through the OSC board.
TN16SCC:
Traces the external clock source, line clock source, tributary clock source, and provides
the board and system with a synchronization clock source.
Provides a synchronization clock signal, which enables the system to satisfy the
requirements of data setup time and holdoff time.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2365
TN11SCC/TN51SCC/TN52SCC/TNK2SCC: The power supply module for the OptiX
OSN 6800/8800 provides the entire system with 3.3 V integrated power backup to protect
the 3.3 V power supply of any board in the system. In addition, it provides power backup
to the boards of which the total power consumption is less than 60W.
TN16SCC: Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by
each module on the board, and provides the system with 10W backup power.
TN21SCC/TN22SCC/TN23SCC: The power supply module for the OptiX OSN 3800
converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module
of the board.
21.14.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, buttons, and an LED indicator on the front panel.
Figure 21-53 shows the front panel of the TN11SCC/TN51SCC/TN52SCC board.
Figure 21-54 shows the front panel of the TN16SCC board.
Figure 21-55 shows the front panel of the TN21SCC/TN22SCC/TN23SCC board.
Figure 21-56 shows the front panel of the TNK2SCC board.
For the mapping between the values displayed in the shelf ID LED and the actual shelf IDs, see
Figure 21-57.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2366
Figure 21-53 Front panel of the TN11SCC/TN51SCC/TN52SCC board
SCC
SCC
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
PWRA
PWRB
PWRC
ALMC
RESET
LAMP TEST
ALM CUT
SubRACK_ID

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2367
Figure 21-54 Front panel of the TN16SCC board
SCC
SCC
RESET
STAT
ACT
SRV
PROG

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2368
Figure 21-55 Front panel of the TN21SCC/TN22SCC/TN23SCC board
SCC
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
PWRA
PWRB
PWRC
ALMC
RESET
LAMP
TEST
ALM
CUT
PWR
CRI
MAJ
MIN

Figure 21-56 Front panel of the TNK2SCC board
SCC
RESET
LAMP
TEST
ALM
CUT
SubRACK_ID
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
PWRC
ALMC

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2369
Indicators
There are eight indicators on the front panel.
l System power supply indicator (PWRA)- dual-colored (red, green)
l System power supply indicator (PWRB)- dual-colored (red, green)
l Protection power indicator (PWRC)- dual-colored (red, green)
l Alarm cut-off indicator (ALMC)- yellow
NOTE
The TN16SCC/TNK2SCC board does not have PWRA and PWRB.
The TN16SCC board does not have ALMC.
There are also four chassis indicators on the front panel of the TN21SCC/TN22SCC/
TN23SCC board.
l Chassis power supply indicator (PWR) - green
l Minor alarm indicator (MIN) - yellow
l Major alarm indicator (MAJ) - orange
l Critical alarm indicator (CRI) - red
Buttons
There are three buttons on the front panel. Table 21-34 lists the function of each button.
Table 21-34 Functions of the buttons on the SCC board
Button Function
RESET Used to perform a warm reset on the SCC board.
ALM CUT Used to clear an audible alarm.
LAMP TEST Used to test all of the indicators.

NOTE
The TN16SCC board does not have ALM CUT and LAMP TEST.
LED
There is an LED indicator on the front panel. Table 21-35 shows its function.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2370
Table 21-35 Function of the LED indicator on the SCC board
LED indicator Function
SubRack_ID The LED on the front panel is used to indicate whether the subrack is
a master or slave subrack when master/slave subrack mode is used.
l "0" indicates the master subrack.
l "EE" indicates that the subrack ID is incorrect or fails to be read.
l The other values indicate slave subracks.
For the values displayed on the LED, see Figure 21-57.
For details on the principle for configuring the master and slave
subracks, see "Master-Slave Subrack" in the Product Description.

Figure 21-57 LED
Decimal subrack ID
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Error
16 23 22 17 18 19 20 21
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
0

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2371
Interfaces
The SCC board does not provide external interfaces.
21.14.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one SCC board.
Table 21-36 shows the valid slots for the TN11SCC board.
Table 21-38 shows the valid slots for the TN21SCC/TN22SCC/TN23SCC board.
Table 21-41 shows the valid slots for the TNK2SCC board.
Table 21-36 Valid slots for the TN11SCC board
Product Valid Slots

Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack IU9, IU10

Table 21-38 Valid slots for the TN21SCC/TN22SCC/TN23SCC board
Product Slot
OptiX OSN 3800 chassis IU8, IU9

Product Valid Slots

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2372
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack IU17, IU18

NOTE
The Enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 only supports TN52SCC.
Table 21-41 Valid slots for the TNK2SCC board
Product Valid Slots

Switches and jumpers that can be set on the SCC board include battery jumpers and BIOS
switches or jumpers.
The battery on the SCC helps to ensure that the configuration is kept upon a power failure of
the SCC. If the board is in use, place a jumper cap over the battery jumper to make a short circuit,
which allows the battery to supply power normally.
The BIOS jumper or switch helps clear the system parameter area and database in the flash
memory on the SCC board. Table 21-42 shows the function of the BIOS jumper or switch.
Table 21-42 Function of the BIOS switch or jumper
BIOS State Description Binary value
B Restores the system parameter area, database, and NE
software from the CF card.
1001
D Clear all the data in the flash memory except the board
manufacturing information. The data includes the
system data, system parameter areas, and extended
BIOS files. The upper layer part of BIOS is not started.
1111

Figure 21-58 shows the position of jumpers on the TN11SCC board.
Figure 21-59 shows the position of swiches and jumpers on the TN16SCC board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2373
Figure 21-60 shows the position of jumpers on the TN21SCC board.
Figure 21-61 shows the position of jumpers on the TN22SCC/TN23SCC board.
Figure 21-62 shows the jumpers on the TN51SCC board.
Figure 21-63 shows jumpers on the TN52SCC board.
Figure 21-64 shows jumpers on the TNK2SCC board.
Figure 21-58 Position of the jumpers on the TN11SCC board
CPU
Battery Jumper
CF
Card
BIOS Jumper
Battery Jumper BIOS Jumper
1 0 1 0
1 1 1 1
State A
J
1
1
J6 J17
1
2 4
1
2 4
J6 J17
1
2 4
1
2 4
J6 J17
1
2 4
1
2 4
J6 J17
1
2 4
1
2 4
J6 J17
1
2 4
1
2 4
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 1
J
1
1
J
1
1
Battery is
used
Binary Value 1111
Binary Value 1011
Binary Value 1001
Binary Value 1010
State C
State D
Battery is
not used

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2374
Figure 21-59 Position of the switches and jumpers on the TN16SCC board
2
CF
Card
3 1 4 3 1 2
0 1 0 1
1 1 1 1
State A
State B
State C
State D
1 0 0 1
1 1 0 1
Battery is
used
Battery is
not used
Binary Value 1111
Binary Value 1011
Binary Value 1001
Binary Value 1010
DIP ON 2
J1
SW1
4 3 1 2
DIP ON
SW1
4 3 1 2
DIP ON
SW1
4 3 1 2
DIP
SW1
ON
4 3 1 2
DIP
SW1
ON
3 1
2
J1
3 1
2
J1
Battery
Jumper
BIOS DIP
Switch
Battery Jumper BIOS Switch

CPU
J13 J14 J1
1
2
4
2
4
1
State A
J1
1
J13 J14
1 2
4
4
1
1
1
4
4
1
1
1
4
1
2
2
22
4
1
1
4
1 22
4
J1
J13 J14
J13 J14
1
0
0
1
0
J13 J14
Binary Value
Binary Value
Binary Value
Binary Value
1010
1001
1011
1111
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Battery Jumper
BIOS
Jumper
Battery is
used
Battery is
not used
State B
State C
State D
BIOS Jumper
Battery
Jumper
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2375

Figure 21-61 Position of the jumpers on the TN22SCC/TN23SCC board
CPU
J11
J13
State A
J
1
1
J13
J11
1
1
0
1 2
4
2
4
1
J
1
2
4
1 2
4
J
1
1
0
Binary Value
1010
State B
1
J13
J11
1
0
1
2
4
1 2
4
1
0
Binary Value 1001
State C
1
J13
J11
1
1
1
2
4
1 2
4
1
0
Binary Value 1011
State D
1
J13
J11
1
1
1
2
4
1 2
4
1
1
Binary Value 1111
Battery is
used
Battery is
not used

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2376
Battery Jumper
BIOS Jumper
State A State B
Sate C State D
Battery is used Battery is not used
J12
J
4
2
1
J1
CF Card
Battery Jumper
BIOS Jumper
1 2
9
1
0
3
2
J
4
2
1 2
9
1
0
1
0
1
0
J
4
2
1 2
9
1
0
1
0
0
1
J
4
2
1 2
9
1
0
1 2
9
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
J
4
2
1 0 1 0
Binary
value
1 0 0 1
Binary
value
1 1 1 1
Binary
value
1 0 1 1
Binary
value
J1
1 3
2
J1
1 3
2

Battery Jumper
Battery Jumper
BIOS Jumper
State A State B
State C State D
Battery
is used
Battery is
not used
1 0 1 0
Binary
value
1 0 0 1
Binary
value
1 1 1 1
Binary
value
1 0 1 1
Binary
value
J1
1
3
2
J1
1
3
2
C
F
1
J1
J11
BIOS Jumper
CF Card
1
9
2
1
0
3
2
J11
1
0
9
2 1
1
0
1
0
J11
1
0
9
2 1
0
0
1
1
1
0
9
2 1
1
0
1
1
J11
1
0
9
2 1
1
1
1
1
J11
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2377

Figure 21-64 Position of the jumpers on the TNK2SCC board
J41
3

2
1
CF Card
The underlying PCB
J9
J9
2 10
1 9
J41
Binary Value 1010
1
Binary Value 1011
2
1
10
9
0 1 1
J9
2
1
10
9
0 0 1 0
J9
2
1
10
9
0 1 1 1
Binary Value 1111
J9
2
1
10
9
1 1 1 1
Binary Value 1001
J41
1
2
3
1
3
State A
Battery is
used
Battery is
not used
Battery Jumper
BIOS Jumper
State B
State D State C

21.14.8 SCC Specifications
l TN11SCC: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) or 1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4
in. (H)
l TN16SCC: 37.6 mm (W) x 220 mm x (D) 350.3 mm (H) or 2.1 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 13.8
in. (H)
in. (H)
l TN22SCC/TN23SCC: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) ox 118.9 mm (H) or 1.0 in. (W) x 8.7
in. (D) x 4.7 in. (H)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2378
in. (H)
in. (H)
l TNK2SCC: 76.2 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 110.0 mm (H) or 3.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 4.4
in. (H)
Weight:
l TN11SCC: 1.2 kg (2.6 lb.)
l TN16SCC: 1.3 kg (2.8 lb.)
l TN21SCC: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.)
l TN22SCC/TN23SCC: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.)
l TN51SCC: 1.2 kg (2.6 lb.)
l TN52SCC: 1.0 kg (2.2 lb.)
l TNK2SCC: 0.9 kg (2.0 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11SCC 27.0 30.0
TN16SCC 32.0 35.0
TN21SCC 14.0 16.0
TN22SCC 10.0 13.0
TN23SCC 10.0 13.0
TN51SCC 18.0 20.0
TN52SCC 23.0 25.1
TNK2SCC 26.7 29.3

21.15 AUX
AUX: system auxiliary interface unit
The available functional versions of the AUX board are TN11, TN15, TN16, TN21, TN22,
TN51, and TN52.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2379
Huawei office.
Product Board
OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Subrack TN51AUX/TN52AUX
OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Subrack TN51AUX/TN52AUX
OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Subrack TN16AUX
OptiX OSN 8800 Platform Subrack TN15AUX
OptiX OSN 6800 Subrack TN11AUX
OptiX OSN 3800 Chassis TN21AUX/TN22AUX

NOTE
The TN52AUX board supports 1+1 protection only when it is used in an enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 or an
enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack.
Type
The system provides two types of the TN11AUX. Table 21-43 lists the types of the TN11AUX.
Table 21-43 Type description of the TN11AUX
TN11AUX TN11AUX01 The TN11AUX01 board is
available in two types. One type
provides three jumpers and the
other type provides eight jumpers to
setting the subrack ID, which
ranges from 0 to 7.
TN11AUX02 Provides eight jumpers to set
subrack ID, which ranges from 0 to
31.

l Function:
The TN11AUX/TN15AUX board provides various auxiliary interfaces and
management interfaces. For detail, see 21.15.3 Functions and Features and 21.15.4
Working Principle and Signal Flow. The TN11AUX01 board is available in two types.
One type provides three jumpers and the other type provides eight jumpers for setting
the subrack ID. There are eight jumpers inside the TN11AUX02 board, which are used
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2380
to set the subrack ID. The TN15AUX board provides eight DIP switches for setting the
subrack ID. For detail, see 21.15.7 Jumper.
The TN16AUX does not provide external interfaces. It provides the inter-subrack
management function. For details, see 21.15.3 Functions and Features and 21.15.4
Working Principle and Signal Flow.
The TN21AUX and TN22AUX boards are mainly used to provide backup power
supply, various auxiliary interfaces, and management interfaces. For detail, see 21.15.3
Functions and Features and 21.15.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow. There are
three jumpers inside the TN21AUX board. There are eight jumpers inside the
TN22AUX board. For detail, see 21.15.7 Jumper.
The TN51AUX/TN52AUX board does not provide external interfaces. For detail, see
21.15.3 Functions and Features and 21.15.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.
The TN52AUX board supports 1+1 protection. For details, see 21.15.3 Functions and
Features.
l Appearance:
The board software status indicators of the TN21 and TN22 are different. For details,
Compared with other AUX boards, the TN51AUX/TN52AUX board uses a different
front panel. The front panel for the TN21AUX and TN22AUX boards uses a different
size from other AUX boards and applies to case-shaped equipment. For details, see
21.15.5 Front Panel and 21.15.8 AUX Specifications.
l Specification:
The power consumption of the boards of different versions is different. For details, see
21.15.8 AUX Specifications.
Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11AUX None -
TN15AUX None -
TN16AUX None -
TN21AUX TN22AUX If the SCC is the TN22SCC, upgrade the NE software to OptiX
OSN 3800 V100R004C01 or a later version.
TN22AUX None -
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2381
Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN51AUX TN52AUX When a TN51AUX board in a general OptiX OSN 8800 T64
or OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack is replaced with a TN52AUX
board, the logical board for the TN52AUX board can be created
as TN51AUX on the NMS. This substitution does not require
a board software upgrade. After the substitution, the
TN52AUX board provides only the functions of the TN51AUX
board.
When a TN51AUX board in an enhanced OptiX OSN 8800
T64 or OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack is replaced with a
TN52AUX board, the logical board for the TN52AUX board
must be created as TN52AUX on the NMS. This substitution
does not require a board software upgrade. After the
substitution, the TN52AUX board functions are available.
TN52AUX None -

21.15.2 Application
AUX board is a system control and communication unit.
This section describes the functions and features of AUX boards.
For detailed functions and features of the TN11AUX board, refer to Table 21-44.
Table 21-44 Functions and features of the TN11AUX board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Provides the system with various auxiliary interfaces and
management interfaces.
Interface Provides the Ethernet communications interface and management
interface.
Provides the common and the emergent inter-subrack
communications interfaces
Setting of subrack ID Supported.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2382
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Implements inter-board and inter-subrack communication, and intra-
subrack management.
The TN15AUX board collects overheads of other boards and sends
the overheads to the SCC board. Then the SCC board processes the
overheads and sends the processed overheads to the TN15AUX board.
Subsequently, the TN15AUX board sends the processed overheads
back to the other boards.
Interface Provides Ethernet and management interfaces.
Provides common and emergency interfaces for inter-subrack
communication.

Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Implements communication between boards or subracks and inter-
sburack management. Supports 1+1 protection.
The TN16AUX collects overhead information about other boards and
sends the information to the TN16XCH/TN16SCC/TN16UXCM.
After processing overhead information, the TN16XCH/TN16SCC/
TN16UXCM sends the processed information to the TN16AUX.
Then, the TN16AUX sends the information to the other boards.
NOTE
In an OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack, two TN16AUX boards must be
configured if the IEEE 1588v2 function is required.
Interface Does not provide external interfaces.

For detailed functions and features of the TN21/TN22AUX board, refer to Table 21-47.
Table 21-47 Functions and features of the TN21/TN22AUX board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Provides the system with backup power supplies as well as various
auxiliary and management interfaces.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2383
Function and
Feature
Description
Interface Provides the Ethernet communications interface and management
interface.
Provides the OAM interface for remote maintenance.
Provides the alarm channel for chassis indicators.
Power supply backup Provides the entire system with the 3.3 V integrated power supply
backup.
Alarm function Provides alarms on the failure of 3.3 V integrated backup power
supply, including over-voltage and under-voltage alarms.

Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Implements communications between boards or subracks.

Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Implements communications between boards or subracks, and
supports 1+1 protection.

The AUX board consists of the CPU and control module, communication module, and power
supply module.
Figure 21-65 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN11AUX/TN21AUX/
TN22AUX/TN51AUX/TN52AUX board.
Figure 21-66 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN15AUX/TN16AUX board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2384
Figure 21-65 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11AUX/TN21AUX/TN22AUX/
TN51AUX/TN52AUX board
CPU and control
module
Communication
module
Other boards
Backplane
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse

Figure 21-66 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN15AUX/TN16AUX board
Other boards
Backplane
Power supply
module
Fuse Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane

Monitoring
module
Overhead
processing
module
Communication
module

Module Function
The CPU module implements the control, monitoring and management of the
communication module and detects the power supply at the same time.
TN11AUX/TN15AUX/: The control module provides the subrack ID and collects the
alarms and performance events of each functional module as well as the clock information.
TN16AUX: The control module collects the alarms and performance events of each
functional module as well as the clock information.
TN21AUX/TN22AUX: The control module collects the alarms and performance events of
each functional module as well as the clock information.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2385
TN51AUX/TN52AUX: The control module collects the alarms and performance events of
each functional module as well as the clock information.
NOTE
The TN16AUX board is connected to the EFI board through the backplane. The interfaces as follows
are provided on the EFI board.
The TN51AUX/TN52AUX board is connected to the EFI1 and EFI2 boards through the backplane.
The interfaces as follows are provided on the EFI1 and EFI2 boards.
Provides the inter-board communication interface to connect the service boards and the
SCC. Implements the data communication between boards.
Provides the NM interface and the NM cascading interface that connect the AUX and
the NM terminal.
TN11AUX/TN15AUX: Provides the common and the emergent inter-subrack
communication network interfaces. TN21AUX/TN22AUX: Provides the OAM
interface for remote maintenance.
TN11AUX: Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by
each module on the board.
TN15AUX/TN16AUX/TN51AUX/TN52AUX: Converts the DC power supplied by the
backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
TN21AUX/TN22AUX: Supplies power for the AUX. It also provides the entire OptiX
OSN 3800 system with 3.3 V integrated power backup to protect the 3.3 V power supply
of any board in the system.
l Overhead Processing module
Collects overhead information about other boards and sends the information to the
TN16XCH/TN16SCC/TN16UXCM.
Receives the processed overhead information from TN16XCH/TN16SCC/
TN16UXCM and sends the information to the other boards.
l Monitoring module
21.15.5 Front Panel
There are indicators on the front panel of the AUX board.
Figure 21-67 shows the front panel of the TN11AUX/TN15AUX board.
Figure 21-68 shows the front panel of the TN16AUX board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2386
Figure 21-67 Front panel of the TN11AUX/TN15AUX board
AUX
STAT
PROG
N
M
_
E
T
H
1
N
M
_
E
T
H
2
E
T
H
1
E
T
H
2

Figure 21-68 Front panel of the TN16AUX board
SubRACK-ID
AUX
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
ALMC
RESET
LAMP TEST
ALM CUT

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2387
AUX
STAT
PROG
E
X
T
N
M
_
E
T
H
1
N
M
_
E
T
H
2

STAT
PROG
AUX
ACT
SRV

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the TN11AUX/TN15AUX/TN21AUX/TN22AUX
board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2388
There are five indicators on the front panel of the TN16AUX board.
There are four indicators on the front panel of the TN51AUX , and TN52AUX board.
l Service active status indicator (ACT) - dual-colored (green, orange)
l Alarm cut-off indicator (ALMC)- yellow
NOTE
Only the ACT indicator of TN51AUX board supports the orange color.
Interfaces
Table 21-50 lists the type and function of each interface of the TN11AUX board.
The TN16AUX/TN51AUX/TN52AUX board does not provide external interfaces.
Table 21-50 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TN11AUX board
NM_ETH1 RJ45 l Using a network cable, the port connects the
network interface on the equipment to the U2000
server to enable the management of the U2000 over
the equipment.
l Using a network cable, the port connects the
NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 network interface on one
NE to another NE for communication between NEs.
the equipment.
ETH1 RJ45 Using a network cable, the port connects the ETH1/
ETH2/ETH3 interface on one subrack to the other
subracks for communication between the master
subrack and slave subracks.
ETH2 RJ45 Using a network cable, the port connects the ETH1/
ETH2/ETH3 interface on one subrack to the other
subracks for communication between the master
subrack and slave subracks.

Table 21-51 lists the type and function of each interface of the TN15AUX board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2389
Table 21-51 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TN15AUX board
NM_ETH1 RJ45 l Connects the network interface on the OptiX OSN
8800 platform through a network cable to that on
the U2000 server to achieve the management of the
U2000 over the OptiX OSN 8800 platform.
l Connects to the external CRPC or ROP board of a
slave subrack using a network cable so that the slave
subrack can communicate with the CRPC or ROP
board.
NM_ETH2 RJ45
ETH1 RJ45 l Connects the ETH1/ETH2 interface on one subrack
through a network cable to such interfaces on the
other subracks to achieve the communication
between the master subrack and slave subracks.
board.
ETH2 RJ45

Table 21-52 lists the type and function of each interface of the TN21AUX/TN22AUX board.
Table 21-52 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TN21AUX/TN22AUX board
the equipment.
the equipment.
EXT DB64 Provides the alarm input/output interface, cascading
interface, commissioning network interface and
management serial interface.

Buttons
Buttons are present on only the TN16AUX. For details on the buttons, see Table 21-53.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2390
Table 21-53 Functions of the buttons on the TN16AUX board
Button Function
RESET Used to perform a warm reset on the TN16AUX board.
ALM CUT Used to clear an audible alarm.
LAMP TEST Used to test all of the indicators.

LED
LED indicators are present on only the TN16AUX. For details on the LED indicators, see Table
21-54.
Table 21-54 Function of the LED indicator on the TN16AUX board
LED indicator Function
SubRack-ID The LED on the front panel is used to indicate whether the subrack is
a master or slave subrack in the case of master/slave subrack mode.
"0" indicates the master subrack. "EE" indicates that the subrack ID
is incorrect or fails to be read. The other values indicate slave
subracks. For the values displayed on the LED, see Figure 21-71.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2391
Figure 21-71 LED
Decimal subrack ID
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Error
16 23 22 17 18 19 20 21
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
0

21.15.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one AUX board.
Table 21-55 shows the valid slots for the TN11AUX board.
Table 21-55 Valid slots for the TN11AUX board
Product Slot
OptiX OSN 6800 subrack IU21

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2392
Product Slot
OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack IU21

Product Slot

Table 21-58 shows the valid slots for the TN21AUX/TN22AUX board.
Table 21-58 Valid slots for the TN21AUX/TN22AUX board
Product Slot
OptiX OSN 3800 chassis IU10

Product Slot
General OSN 8800 T32 subrack IU41
Enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32
subrack
IU41
General OptiX OSN 8800 T64
subrack
IU72, IU83
subrack
IU72, IU83

Product Slot
subrack
IU41
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2393
Product Slot
subrack
IU41, IU43
subrack
IU72, IU83
subrack
IU72, IU73, IU83, IU84

21.15.7 Jumper
The TN11AUX01 board is available in two types. For one type there are three jumpers and for
the other type there are eight jumpers inside the board. There are eight jumpers inside the
TN11AUX02 board. There are eight DIP switches inside the TN15AUX board.The jumpers and
DIP switches are used to set the subrack ID. There is no jumper inside the TN16AUX/
TN51AUX/TN52AUX board.
Jumper of TN11AUX
The SCC detects the subrack ID and identifies whether the subrack is a primary or a secondary
one. The result is indicated by the LED indicator of the SCC front panel.
The TN11AUX01 board is available in two types. For one type there are three jumpers and for
the other type there are eight jumpers inside the board.
l For the TN11AUX01 board that has three jumpers inside, the jumpers can be set in eight
combinations, representing decimal values 0-7. The default setting of the three jumpers is
000. The value 0 indicates the master subrack, and the other values indicate slave subracks.
Figure 21-72 shows the position of the three jumpers. When the two pins on the right of
each jumper are capped, the setting is 1; when the two pins on the left of each jumper are
capped, the setting is 0. As shown in Figure 21-72, the jumper setting represents the decimal
value of 1, which means that the subrack ID is 1.
l For the TN11AUX01 board that has eight jumpers inside, the J14, J15, J16, J17, and J18,
jumpers are reserved and the two pins on the left of each reserved jumper must be capped.
The J4, J3, and J2 jumpers can be set in 8 combinations, representing decimal values 0-7.
The default setting of the three jumpers is 000. The value 0 indicates the master subrack
and the other values indicate slave subracks. Figure 21-73 shows the position of the
jumpers. When the two pins on the right of each of the three jumpers are capped, the setting
is 1; when the two pins on the left of each of the three jumpers are capped, the setting is 0.
As shown in Figure 21-73, the jumper setting represents the decimal value of 1, which
means that the subrack ID is 1.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2394
Figure 21-72 Position of the three jumpers on the TN11AUX01 board
3 2 1
CPU
1 2 3
Junper cap
Representing
0
Jumpers
Representing
0
Representing
1

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2395
Figure 21-73 Position of the eight jumpers on the TN11AUX01 board
J2 J3 J4
J15 J16 J17
J14 J18
CPU
0 0
J3 J2 J4
J15 J16
J14 J18
J17
Junper cap
Representing
Jumpers
Representing 1 Representing
0 0 Representing Representing 0 Representing
0 Representing 0 Representing
CAUTION
The J14, J15, J16, J17, and J18 jumpers must be set as specified in Figure 21-73 .
Exercise caution when modifying the subrack ID, because the modification may cause service
interruption.

The TN11AUX02 board has eight jumpers, which can be used to implement 32 states that
represent decimal values 0-31. Each jumper represents a binary value: 0 or 1. In the TN11AUX02
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2396
board, the J14, J17, and J18 jumpers are reserved. The default value of the five jumpers is 00000.
"0" indicates the master subrack. The other values indicate slave subracks. Figure 21-74 shows
the jumpers on the board.
Figure 21-74 Position of the jumper on the TN11AUX02 board
J2 J3 J4
J15 J16 J17
J14 J18
CPU
0 0
J3 J2 J4
J15 J16
J14 J18
J17
Junper cap
Representing
Jumpers
Representing 1 Representing
0 0 Representing Representing 0 Representing
0 Representing 0 Representing

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2397
CAUTION
The J14, J17, and J18 jumpers must be set as specified in Figure 21-74.
Exercise caution when modifying the subrack ID, because the modification may cause service
interruption.
DIP Switches of the TN15AUX Board
The TN15AUX board has two DIP switches. The value set by each switch can be 0 or 1 (in
binary code). ID1ID4 correspond to pins 14 on SW2 and ID5ID8 correspond to pins 14 on
SW1. Only ID1ID5 are valid. (ID6ID8 are reserved.) From higher bits to lower bits are ID5
ID1, which can be set to 32 combinations and the default value is 00000. The value 0 indicates
the master subrack, and the other values indicate slave subracks. Figure 21-75 shows the position
of the DIP switches on the TN15AUX board.
l When the DIP switch is toggled to ON, the value of the corresponding bit is set to 0.
l As shown in Figure 21-75, values ID5ID1 correspond to 00001 (in binary code), which
indicates that the subrack ID is 1 in decimal.
Figure 21-75 Positions of the DIP switches on the TN15AUX board
SW2 SW1
S
W
1
S
W
2
ON
ON
ON
ON
(ID5)
(ID6)
(ID7)
(ID8)
ON
ON
ON
ON
(ID1)
(ID2)
(ID3)
(ID4)

Jumper of TN21/TN22AUX
The TN21AUX has 3 jumpers. Figure 21-76 shows the jumpers.
The TN22AUX has 8 jumpers. Before the board is used, make sure that the setting of the J4
jumper is the same as that shown in Figure 21-77.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2398
Figure 21-76 Position of the jumper on the TN21AUX
CPU
Jumper

Figure 21-77 Position of the jumper on the TN22AUX
Jumper
Jumper cap
8(J4)
J4J11 J21J20J19J23J22 J10

21.15.8 AUX Specifications
l Dimensions of the front panel:
TN11AUX/TN15AUX: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 107.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7
in. (D) x 4.2 in. (H))
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2399
TN16AUX: 76.2 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 80 mm (H) (3.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 3.1
in. (H))
TN51AUX/TN52AUX: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 107.5 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7
in. (D) x 4.2 in. (H))
TN21AUX: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 118.9 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x
4.7 in. (H))
TN22AUX: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 118.9 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x
4.7 in. (H))
l Weight:
TN11AUX/TN15AUX: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.)
TN16AUX: 0.6 kg (1.32 lb.)
TN51AUX: 0.4 kg (0.88 lb.)
TN52AUX: 0.4 kg (0.88 lb.)
TN21AUX: 0.6 kg (1.32 lb.)
TN22AUX: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11AUX 12.0 17.0
TN15AUX 11.0 14.0
TN16AUX 16.5 19.2
TN21AUX 11.7 13.0
TN22AUX 15.0 17.0
TN51AUX 17.5 19.0
TN52AUX 15.0 20.0
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board
2400
22 Optical Supervisory Channel Board
About This Chapter
22.1 Overview
OSC boards transmit optical supervisory information between two NEs. OSC boards provide
high reliability of network monitoring because OSC boards transmit an OSC signal using a
wavelength different service wavelengths.
22.2 HSC1
HSC1: high power unidirectional optical supervisory channel board
22.3 SC1
SC1: unidirectional optical supervisory channel board
22.4 SC2
SC2: bi-directional optical supervisory channel unit
22.5 ST2
ST2: bidirectional optical supervisory channel and timing transmission unit
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Hardware Description 22 Optical Supervisory Channel Board
2401
22.1 Overview
OSC boards transmit optical supervisory information between two NEs. OSC boards provide
high reliability of network monitoring because OSC boards transmit an OSC signal using a
wavelength different service wavelengths.
Positions of OSC Boards in a WDM System
Figure 22-1 shows the positions of OSC boards in a WDM system.
Figure 22-1 Positions of OSC boards in a WDM system
OA
OA
S
F
I
U
/
F
I
U
OA
OA
S
F
I
U
/
F
I
U
OA
S
F
I
U
/
F
I
U
OA
S
F
I
U
/
F
I
U
SCC
SCC
SCC
NE 1 NE 2 NE 3
OSC
board
OSC board
OSC
board

NOTE
Among all the OSC boards, only the ST2 board can work with the SFIU board.
In the preceding figure, the SCC board on NE1 sends the local NMS monitored data to the OSC
board. Then the OSC board converts the NMS monitored data into an OSC signal and sends the
signal to the SFIU/FIU board. Lastly, the SFIU/FIU board multiplexes the signal with the main
channel signal onto the line for transmission. On NE2, the FIU/SFIU board extracts the OSC
signal from the line and sends it to the OSC board. Then the OSC board restores the monitoring
information from the OSC signal and sends the information to the SCC board for processing.
Main Functions
Board Dimen
sion
Span
Distance
Center Wavelength Signal Bandwidth
HSC1 1 53 dB 1510 nm 4.096 Mbit/s
SC1 1 48 dB 1510 nm 4.096 Mbit/s
16.896 Mbit/s
SC2 2 48 dB 1510nm 4.096 Mbit/s
16.896 Mbit/s
ST2
a
2 40 dB 1491 nm
1511 nm
155.52 Mbit/s
a: The ST2 board also supports clock signals and FE electrical signals.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2402
22.2 HSC1
HSC1: high power unidirectional optical supervisory channel board
The available functional version of the HSC1 board is TN11.
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
1HS
C1
Y Y Y Y Y Y

22.2.2 Application
As a type of optical supervisory channel unit, the HSC1 board processes one channel of
supervisory signals in one direction, transmits and extracts the overhead information about the
system, and processes and sends the overhead information to the SCC.
For the position of the HSC1 board in the WDM system, see Figure 22-2.
Figure 22-2 Position of the HSC1 board in the WDM system
NE1 NE2 NE3
OAU
OAU
F
I
U
OAU
OAU
F
I
U
OAU
F
I
U
OAU
F
I
U
SCC
SCC
SCC
HSC1
HSC1 HSC1
HSC1
In the WDM network that adopts the optical supervisory channel, the NEs can make use of the
supervisory channel to transmit supervisory and management data. As shown in Figure 22-2,
the user can use the Ethernet to log in to the NE1 to manage the NE1 directly. NE2 and NE3 are
remote equipment. They can be remotely managed through the supervisory channel when there
is no data line connected. In this way, the entire network is under management.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2403
The SCC of NE1 sends the network management (NM) data to the optical supervisory channel
(OSC) unit. The OSC unit converts the data into optical signals and sends the signals to the FIU.
The supervisory signals are multiplexed with the signals transmitted by the main path. Then, all
the signals are transmitted on line. The FIU of NE2 separates the supervisory signals from the
line and sends them to the OSC unit of NE2. The OSC unit converts the optical signals into
supervisory data and sends the data to the SCC for processing.
The HSC1 board is mainly used to process and regenerate optical supervisory signals.
Table 22-1 Functions and features of the HSC1 board
Function
and
Feature
Description
Basic
function
The HSC1 board is used to receive, process, and transmit one optical supervisory
signal. The HSC1 board supports a maximum of 53 dB span transmission.
Technical
features
The OSC has no limitation on the distance between two optical line amplifiers.
The failure of an optical line amplifier does not affect the performance of the
OSC.
The HSC1 is independent of the SCC. When the SCC is not in position, the
HSC1 can still ensure the pass-through of ECC with the two optical interfaces
and monitor other stations.
Regenerati
on
function
The HSC1 board transmits signals from section to section. It also has the 3R
function. In each regenerating station that has optical amplifiers, information
can be correctly received and new supervisory signals are added.
Operating
wavelengt
h
The signal wavelength of supervisory channel is 1510 nm.
Loopback Inloop Supported
Outloop Supported
Optical-
layer
ASON
Supported

The HSC1 board consists of the optical receiving module, optical transmitting module, CMI
encoding module, CMI decoding module, overhead processing module, control and
Figure 22-3 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the HSC1 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2404
Figure 22-3 Functional modules and signal flow of the HSC1 board
SCC
RM
Overhead
processing
module
CMI
module
CMI
decoding
module
TM
Optical
receiving
module
Optical
transmitting
module
O/E E/O
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
encoding

Signal Flow
The optical receiving module converts the optical supervisory signals from the FIU into electrical
signals. The electrical signals enter the overhead processing module after CMI decoding. The
overhead processing module extracts overhead bytes from the electrical signals, and sends them
to the SCC for processing. After the overhead bytes are processed by the SCC, this module sends
the electrical signals to be encoded in the CMI encoding module. Finally, the electrical
supervisory signals are converted into optical supervisory signals through the optical
transmitting module.
Frame Structure of the OSC Signals
Figure 22-4 shows the timeslots of the E1 frame adopted by the OSC signals. There are 32
timeslots in a frame, numbered 0 to 31.
Figure 22-4 Timeslot assignment diagram of the OSC overhead
0 1 2 3 14 15 16 31
... ...

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2405
For the definition and functions of the timeslots in the E1 frame of the OSC, refer to Table
22-2.
Table 22-2 Functions of the timeslots in the E1 frame of the OSC
Timeslot
Number
Name Function
1 E1 byte Provides the path for orderwire phone. Transmission of one
orderwire phone requires three bytes.
2 F1 byte Co-directional 64 kbit/s data interface.
3-13, 15 D1-D12
bytes
DCC channel
Used to transmit the OAM data information, such as the
issued commands and the data of the queried alarms and
performance events.
The OSC board extracts relevant bytes and sends them to the
SCC for processing.
14 ALC
byte
Provides the channel for the transmission of ALC protocol
byte.
17 F2 byte Reserved for the user (usually, the network provider) for the
temporary orderwire communication with the purpose of
specific maintenance.
19 E2 byte Provides the path for orderwire phone.
Transmission of one orderwire phone requires three bytes.
21-23 Optical
layer
overhea
d bytes
Used to transmit optical layer overhead information.
Other Reserve
d
-

Module Function
Performs O/E conversion of an optical supervisory signal.
Performs E/O conversion of an electrical supervisory signal.
l CMI encoding/decoding module
Performs mutual conversion between the 2 Mbit/s signal.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2406
Extracts overhead bytes from the electrical signals, and sends them to the SCC for
processing. After the overhead bytes are processed by the SCC, this module sends the
electrical signals to be encoded in the CMI encoding module.
22.2.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the HSC1 board.
Figure 22-5 shows the front panel of the HSC1 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2407
Figure 22-5 Front panel of the HSC1 board
HSC1
HSC1
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
T
M
R
M
EOW

Indicators
Interfaces
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2408
Table 22-3 Types and functions of the interfaces on the HSC1 board
EOW RJ45 Connects to an orderwire phone set through telephone
wires to implement orderwire communication between
NEs.

Laser Hazard Level
22.2.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one HSC1 board.
Table 22-4 shows the valid slots for the HSC1 board.
Table 22-4 Valid slots for the HSC1 board
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 3800 chassis IU2-IU5 and IU11

22.2.7 Characteristic Code for the HSC1
The characteristic code for the HSC1 board contains twelve characters and digits, indicating the
wavelength range and numbers of optical interface.
Table 22-5 Characteristic code for the HSC1 board
W.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2409
Second to tenth characters Optical signal wavelength
range
The optical signal
wavelength range is 1500 nm
to 1520 nm processed by the
board.
Eleventh character - The eleventh character is
always P.
Twelfth character Numbers of optical interface The number of the optical
interface is one.

For example, the characteristic code for the HSC1 board is W1500/1520P1. This code indicates
that the optical signal wavelength range is 1500 nm to 1520 nm, and the number of the optical
interface is one.
Table 22-6 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the HSC1 board displayed on the NM
RM/TM 1

NOTE
For HSC1 Parameters, refer to Table 22-7.
Table 22-7 HSC1 parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2410
Optical Interface
Name
are supported.
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
240/1510.00/198.540 This parameter is queriable only.
Band Type SMC This parameter is queriable only.
Optical Interface
Loopback
Non-Loopback,
Inloop, Outloop
Default: Non-
Loopback
NOTE
When setting this parameter, ensure that the
automatic loopback release function is enabled.
Default: On
status of a board.

22.2.10 HSC1 Specifications
NOTE
Table 22-8 lists the optical specifications of the HSC1 board.
Table 22-8 Optical specifications of the HSC1 board
Item Unit Value
Signal rate Mbit/s 4.096
Signal coding - CMI
Launched optical power dBm 5 to 10
Receiver overload dBm -3

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2411
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11HSC1 8.0 8.8

22.3 SC1
SC1: unidirectional optical supervisory channel board
The available functional versions of the SC1 board are TN11, TN12.
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
1SC
1
N N N N Y Y
TN1
2SC
1
Y Y Y Y Y Y

None
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2412
Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11SC1 TN12SC1 The TN12SC1 can be created as TN11SC1 on the NMS. The
upgrade. After substitution, the TN12SC1 functions as the
TN11SC1.
TN12SC1 None -

22.3.2 Application
Because it is a type of optical supervisory channel unit, the SC1 board processes one channel of
supervisory signals in one direction, transmits and extracts the overhead information about the
system, processes and sends the overhead information to the SCC.
For the position of the SC1 board in the WDM system, see Figure 22-6.
Figure 22-6 Position of the SC1 board in the WDM system
NE1 NE2 NE3
OA
OA
SC1
F
I
U
OA
OA
F
I
U
SC1
SC2
OA
F
I
U
OA
F
I
U
SCC
SCC
SCC
In the WDM network that adopts the optical supervisory channel, the NEs can use supervisory
channels to transmit supervisory and management data. As shown in Figure 22-6, the user can
use the Ethernet to log in to the NE1 to manage the NE1 directly. NE2 and NE3 can be remotely
managed through the supervisory channel when there is no data line connected. When configured
as described above, the entire network can be managed.
the signals are transmitted on the line. The FIU of NE2 separates the supervisory signals from
the line and sends them to the OSC unit of NE2. The OSC unit converts the optical signals into
The SC1 board processes and regenerates optical supervisory signals.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2413
Table 22-9 Functions and features of the SC1 board
Function
and
Feature
Description
Basic
function
The SC1 board receives, processes, and transmits one optical supervisory signal.
The SC1 supports a maximum of 42 dB span transmission.
Technical
features
The distance between two optical line amplifiers is not limited by the optical
supervisory channel (OSC). The failure of an optical line amplifier does not
affect the performance of the OSC.
The SC1 is independent of the SCC. When the SCC is not in position, the SC1
board can still ensure the pass-through of ECC with the two optical interfaces
and monitor other stations.
Regenerati
on
function
The SC1 board transmits signals from section to section. It also performs the
3R function. In each regenerating station that has optical amplifiers, information
can be received and new supervisory signals are added.
Operating
wavelengt
h
The supervisory channel signal wavelength is 1510 nm.
Outloop Supported
Optical-
layer
ASON
Supported

The SC1 board consists of the optical receiving module, CMI decoding module, overhead
processing module, CMI encoding module, optical transmitting module, control and
Figure 22-7 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the SC1 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2414
Figure 22-7 Functional modules and signal flow of the SC1 board
SCC
RM
Overhead
processing
module
CMI
module
CMI
decoding
module
TM
Optical
receiving
module
Optical
transmitting
module
O/E E/O
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
encoding

Signal Flow
0 1 2 3 14 15 16 31
... ...

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2415
22-10.
Timeslot
Number
Name Function
3-13, 15 D1-D12
bytes
DCC channel
performances.
SCC for processing.
14 ALC
byte
byte.
21-23 Optical
layer
overhea
d bytes
Other Reserve
d
-

Module Function
Performs O/E conversion of an optical supervisory signal.
Performs E/O conversion of an electrical supervisory signal.
Performs mutual conversion between the 8 Mbit/s CMI-coded signal and the 2 Mbit/s
signal.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2416
22.3.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the SC1 board.
Figure 22-9 shows the front panel of the SC1 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2417
Figure 22-9 Front panel of the SC1 board
SC1
SC1
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
T
M
R
M
EOW

Indicators
Interfaces
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2418
Table 22-11 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SC1 board
NEs.

Laser Hazard Level
22.3.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one SC1 board.
Table 22-12 shows the valid slots for the TN11SC1 board.
Table 22-12 Valid slots for the TN11SC1 board
Product Valid Slots

Product Valid Slots

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2419
22.3.7 Characteristic Code for the SC1
The characteristic code for the SC1 board contains twelve characters and digits, indicating the
wavelength range and optical interface number.
Table 22-14 Characteristic code for the SC1 board
W.
Second to the tenth
characters
Optical signal wavelength
range
The optical signal
board.
always P.
Twelfth character Numbers of optical interface The number of the optical
interface is one.

For example, the characteristic code for the SC1 board is W1500/1520P1. This code indicates
that the optical signal wavelength range is 1500 nm to 1520 nm, and the number of the optical
interface is one.
Table 22-15 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SC1 board displayed on the NM
RM/TM 1

NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2420
For parameters of the SC1, refer to Table 22-16.
Table 22-16 SC1 parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
Optical Interface
Name
are supported.
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
Optical Interface
Loopback
Non-Loopback,
Inloop, Outloop
Default: Non-
Loopback
NOTE
Default: On
status of a board.
Enable OAMS
Power Monitoring
Disable, Enable
Default: Disable
NOTE
Only the TN12SC1 support this parameter.
Standard Value of
OAMS Power
Monitoring (dBm)
-60.0 to 50.0
Default: /
power monitoring.
NOTE
AMS Power
Abnormity
Threshold (dB)
0.5 to 10.0
Default:3
threshold.
NOTE

22.3.10 SC1 Specifications
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2421
Table 22-17 lists the optical specifications of the SC1 board.
Table 22-17 Optical specifications of the SC1 board
Item Unit Value
Signal rate
a
Mbit/s 16.896 4.096
Signal coding - CMI
Launched optical power dBm -4 to 0
a: The SC1 board at the receive end can automatically determines the signal rate of the OSC
channel based on the OSC board configured at the transmit end. By default, the signal rate of
the OSC channel is 16 Mbit/s.

(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11SC1/TN12SC1 11.0 14.9

22.4 SC2
SC2: bi-directional optical supervisory channel unit
Two functional versions of the SC2 board are available: TN11 and TN12. There is no difference
between the two versions in terms of functionality.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2422
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
1SC
2
N N N N Y Y
TN1
2SC
2
Y Y Y Y Y Y

None
Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11SC2 TN12SC2 The TN12SC2 can be created as TN11SC2 on the NMS. The
upgrade. After substitution, the TN12SC2 functions as the
TN11SC2.
TN12SC2 None -

22.4.2 Application
Because it is a type of optical supervisory channel unit, the SC2 board processes two channels
of supervisory signals in opposite directions, transmits and extracts the overhead information
about the system, and processes and sends the overhead information to the SCC.
For the position of the SC2 board in the WDM system, see Figure 22-10.
Figure 22-10 Position of the SC2 board in the WDM system
NE1 NE2 NE3
OA
OA
SC1
F
I
U
OA
OA
F
I
U
SC1
SC2
OA
F
I
U
OA
F
I
U
SCC
SCC
SCC
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2423
In the WDM network that adopts the optical supervisory channel, the NEs can use supervisory
channels to transmit supervisory and management data. As shown in Figure 22-10, you can
manage NE1 directly by logging in to it through the Ethernet. NE2 and NE3 are remote
equipment that you can manage through the supervisory channel when there is no data line
connected. By logging in to NE1 and managing NE2 and NE3 through the supervisory channel,
the entire network can be managed.
the signals are transmitted on the line. The FIU of NE2 separates the supervisory signals from
the line and sends them to the OSC unit of NE2. The OSC unit converts the optical signals into
The SC2 board processes and regenerates optical supervisory signals.
Table 22-18 Functions and features of the SC2 board
Function
and
Feature
Description
Basic
function
The SC2 board receives, processes, and transmits two optical supervisory
signals. The SC2 board supports a maximum of 42 dB span transmission.
Technical
features
The distance between two optical line amplifiers is not limited by the OSC. The
failure of an optical line amplifier does not affect the performance of the OSC.
The SC2 board is independent of the SCC. When the SCC is not in position, the
SC2 board can still ensure the pass-through of ECC with the two optical
interfaces and monitor other stations.
Regenerati
on
function
The SC2 board transmits signals from section to section. It also provides the 3R
function. In each regenerating station that has optical amplifiers, information
can be received and new supervisory signals are added.
Operating
wavelengt
h
The supervisory channel signal wavelength is 1510 nm.
Outloop Supported
Optical-
layer
ASON
Supported

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2424
The SC2 board consists of the optical receiving module, optical transmitting module, CMI
encoding module, CMI decoding module, overhead processing module, control and
Figure 22-11 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the SC2 board.
Figure 22-11 Functional modules and signal flow of the SC2 board
SCC
RM2
RM1
Overhead
processing
module
TM1
CMI
module
O/E E/O
CMI
decoding
module
TM2 O/E E/O
Optical
receiving
module
Optical
transmitting
module
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
encoding

Signal Flow
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2425
0 1 2 3 14 15 16 31
... ...

22-19.
Timeslot
Number
Name Function
3-13, 15 D1-D12
bytes
DCC channel
performances.
SCC for processing.
14 ALC
byte
byte.
21-23 Optical
layer
overhea
d bytes
Other Reserve
d
-

Module Function
Performs O/E conversion of two optical supervisory signals.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2426
Performs E/O conversion of two electrical supervisory signals.
Performs mutual conversion between the 8 Mbit/s CMI-coded signal and the 2 Mbit/s
signal.
22.4.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the SC2 board.
Figure 22-13 shows the front panel of the SC2 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2427
Figure 22-13 Front panel of the SC2 board
SC2
SC2
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
T
M
1
R
M
1
T
M
2
R
M
2
EOW

Indicators
Interfaces
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2428
Table 22-20 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SC2 board
TM1/TM2 LC Transmits the first/second supervisory signal.
RM1/RM2 LC Receives the first/second supervisory signal.
wires to realize orderwire communication between
NEs.

Laser Hazard Level
22.4.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one SC2 board.
Product Valid Slots

Product Valid Slots

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2429
22.4.7 Characteristic Code for the SC2
The characteristic code for the SC2 board contains twelve characters and digits, indicating the
Table 22-23 Characteristic code for the SC2 board
W.
range
The optical signal
board.
always P.
Twelfth character Numbers of optical interface The numbers of optical
interface are two.

For example, the characteristic code for the SC2 board is W1500/1520P2. This code indicates
that the optical signal wavelength range is 1500 nm to 1520 nm, and the numbers of optical
interface are two.
Table 22-24 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SC2 board displayed on the NM
RM1/TM1 1
RM2/TM2 2

NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2430
For parameters of the SC2, refer to Table 22-25.
Table 22-25 SC2 parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
Optical Interface
Name
are supported.
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
Optical Interface
Loopback
Non-Loopback,
Inloop, Outloop
Default: Non-
Loopback
NOTE
Default: On
status of a board.
Enable OAMS
Power Monitoring
Disable, Enable
Default: Disable
NOTE
Standard Value of
OAMS Power
Monitoring (dBm)
-60.0 to 50.0
Default: /
power monitoring.
NOTE
OAMS Power
Abnormity
Threshold (dB)
0.5 to 10.0
Default:3
threshold.
NOTE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2431
22.4.10 SC2 Specifications
Table 22-26 lists the optical specifications of the SC2.
Table 22-26 Optical specifications of the SC2 board
Item Unit Value
Signal rate
a
Mbit/s 16.896 4.096
Signal coding - CMI
Launched optical power dBm -4 to 0
a: The SC2 board at the receive end can automatically determines the signal rate of the OSC
channel based on the OSC board configured at the transmit end. By default, the signal rate of
the OSC channel is 16 Mbit/s.

(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11SC2/TN12SC2 13.5 14.5

22.5 ST2
ST2: bidirectional optical supervisory channel and timing transmission unit
The available functional versions of the ST2 board is TN11.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2432
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
1ST
2
Y Y Y Y Y Y

22.5.2 Application
Because it is a type of optical supervisory channel unit, the ST2 board processes two channels
of supervisory signals in opposite directions, transmits and extracts the overhead information
about the system, processes and sends the overhead information to the SCC.In addition, the ST2
board can process the IEEE 1588v2 protocol for time synchronization. The ST2 board also
supports transparent transmission of two channels of FE electrical signals.
For the position of the ST2 board in the WDM system, see Figure 22-14.
Figure 22-14 Position of the ST2 board in the WDM system
OA
OA
S
F
I
U
/
F
I
U
OA
OA
S
F
I
U
/
F
I
U
ST2
OA
S
F
I
U
/
F
I
U
OA S
F
I
U
/
F
I
U
SCC
SCC
scc
NE1
NE2
NE3
ST2 ST2

l Transmits and receives two channels of optical supervisory signals in the west and east
directions.
In the WDM network that adopts the optical supervisory channel, the NEs can use the
supervisory channel to transmit supervisory and management data. You can use the
Ethernet to log in to the NE1 to manage it directly. NE2 and NE3 are remote equipment
that you can manage remotely through the supervisory channel if there is no data line
connected. In the scenario described above, you can manage the entire network.
The SCC of NE1 sends network management (NM) data to the optical supervisory channel
(OSC) unit. The OSC unit converts the data into optical signals and sends the signals to the
SFIU/FIU. The supervisory signals are multiplexed with the signals transmitted by the main
path. Then, all the signals are transmitted on the line. The SFIU/FIU of NE2 separates the
supervisory signals from the line and sends them to the OSC unit of NE2. The OSC unit
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2433
converts the optical signals into supervisory data and sends the data to the SCC for
processing.
l Performs IEEE 1588v2 clock synchronization.
Extracts clock signals and provides the clock signals for clock synchronization on an NE.
The extracted clock signals can also function as a clock source for the clock board on this
NE.
Sends clock signals of an NE to the downstream NE.
Passes through west and east IEEE 1588v2 packets and service clock signals.
Reports the time information to a clock board for time synchronization on an NE where
the clock board is located.
NOTE
When the ST2 board is used in an OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack, the board can transparently transmit
IEEE 1588v2 clock and physical clock signals, but the board cannot process IEEE 1588v2 clock and
physical clock signals.
l Transparently transmit two channels of FE electrical signals.
NE1:
In the transmit direction: The ST2 board receives a local FE electrical signal through
its WSC1 port and sends it to the downstream board through its TM1 port. Or the ST2
board receives a local FE electrical signal through its WSC2 port and sends it to the
downstream board through its TM2 port.
In the receive direction: The ST2 board receives an FE optical signal through its RM1
board and drops it through its WSC1 port. Or the ST2 board receives an FE optical
signal through its RM2 board and drops it through its WSC2 port.
NE2: FE optical signals are directly passed at this NE. The ST2 board receives the FE
optical signal through its RM1 board and send it to the downstream board through its TM2
port.
NE3:
In the receive direction: The ST2 board receives the FE optical signal through its RM1
board and drops it through its WSC1 port. Or the ST2 board receives the FE optical
signal through its RM2 board and drops it through its WSC2 port.
In the transmit direction: The ST2 board receives a local FE electrical signal through
its WSC1 port and sends it to the downstream board through its TM1 port. Or the ST2
board receives a local FE electrical signal through its WSC2 port and sends it to the
downstream board through its TM2 port.
The ST2 board is mainly used to process and regenerate optical supervisory signals. In addition,
the ST2 board supports the IEEE 1588v2 function.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2434
Table 22-27 Functions and features of the ST2 board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Receives, processes, and transmits two optical supervisory signals.
Supports transparent transmission of two channels of FE electrical
signals.
Supports IEEE 1588 V2 function.
Supports physical clock function.
Supports a maximum of 40.5 dB transmission.
NOTE
When the ST2 board is used in an OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack, the board
can transparently transmit IEEE 1588v2 clock and physical clock signals, but
the board cannot process IEEE 1588v2 clock and physical clock signals.
Technical features The OSC has no limitation on the distance between two optical line
amplifiers. The failure of an optical line amplifier does not affect the
performance of the OSC.
The ST2 board is independent of the SCC. When the SCC is not
properly installed, the ST2 board can still ensure the pass-through of
ECC with the two optical interfaces and monitor other stations.
Regeneration
function
The ST2 board transmits signals from section to section. It also has
the 3R function. In each regenerating station that has optical
amplifiers, information can be correctly received and new supervisory
signals are added.
Operating
wavelength
When the ST2 board works with the SFIU board, the signal
wavelengths of supervisory channel for RM1/TM1 is 1511 nm, and
the signal wavelengths of supervisory channel for RM2/TM2 is 1491
nm.
When the ST2 board works with the FIU board, the supervisory
channel signal wavelength is 1511 nm.
Loopback Supports outloops.
eSFP The board supports pluggable optical modules that use 1511 nm and
1491 nm wavelengths.

The ST2 board consists of the optical receiving module, service processing module, 1588
module, optical transmitting module, control and communication module, and power supply
module.
Figure 22-15 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the ST2 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2435
Figure 22-15 Functional modules and signal flow of the ST2 board
SCC

CPU
Fuse
RM1 TM1 O/E E/O
RM2
TM2
WSC1 WSC2
O/E
E/O
1588 module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Required
Voltage
Power supply
module
Memory
Control
Communication
Optical
receiving
module
Optical
transmitting
module Service processing module
FE signal
processing module
Supervisory signal
processing module

Signal Flow
l The optical supervisory signal from the FIU/SFIU board is converted into an electrical
signal by the O/E module. After the conversion, the electrical signal is sent to the service
processing module. The service processing module extracts the supervisory information
from the electrical signal and sends the supervisory information to the SCC board for
processing. In addition, the service processing module extracts a clock signal and sends the
clock signal to the STG board for processing. The overhead bytes processed by the SCC
board, and the clock signal and time information processed by the STG board are sent to
the E/O module, where they are converted into an optical supervisory signal.
The FE signals are processed separately in the transmit and receive directions.
l In the transmit direction: The ST2 board receives a local FE electrical signal through its
WSC1 port and sends it to the FE signal processing module for encapsulation. Then, the
ST2 board transmits it together with the optical supervisory signal to the downstream board
through its TM1 port. The ST2 board receives another local FE electrical signal through
its WSC2 port and sends it to the FE signal processing module for encapsulation. Then, the
ST2 board transmits it together with the optical supervisory signal to the downstream board
through its TM2 port.
l In the receive direction: The ST2 board receives the optical supervisory signal and an FE
optical signal from the upstream board through its RM1 board and sends the FE optical
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2436
signal to the FE signal processing module for decapsulation. Then, the ST2 board drops it
through its WSC1 port. In addition, the ST2 board receives the optical supervisory signal
and another FE optical signal from the upstream board through its RM2 board and sends
the FE optical signal to the FE signal processing module for decapsulation. Then, the ST2
board drops it through its WSC2 port.
Module Function
Performs O/E conversion of two optical supervisory signals.
Performs E/O conversion of two electrical supervisory signals.
FE signal processing module: Encapsulates and decapsulates FE signals.
Supervisory signal processing module: Encapsulates electrical supervisory signals into
OTU frames, processes overheads, and performs encoding/decoding.
1588 module
Sends the clock signal of the STG board to the next NE according to the IEEE 1588v2
protocol, or extracts the clock signal from the optical supervisory signals according to
the IEEE 1588v2 protocol and then sends the clock signal to the STG board.
22.5.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the ST2 board.
Figure 22-16 shows the front panel of the ST2 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2437
Figure 22-16 Front panel of the ST2 board
ST2
ST2
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
T
M
1
R
M
1
T
M
2
R
M
2
EOW
WSC1
WSC2

Indicators
Interfaces
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2438
Table 22-28 Types and functions of the interfaces on the ST2 board
TM1/TM2 LC Transmits the first/second supervisory signal.
RM1/RM2 LC Receives the first/second supervisory signal.
WSC1/WSC2
a
RJ45 Transmits/Receives the first/second channel of FE
electrical signals.
NOTE
The FE electrical port works in 100M full-duplex mode and
can transmit or receive a packet consisting of a maximum of
1518 bytes.
NEs.
a: Connect a shielded network cable without protection boot to the WSC1 or WSC2 interface
on the TN11ST2 board.

Laser Hazard Level
22.5.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one ST2 board.
Table 22-29 shows the valid slots for the ST2 board.
Table 22-29 Valid slots for the ST2 board
Product Valid Slots

NOTE
If the ST2 board uses the clock function, it must be installed in a subrack housing clock boards.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2439
22.5.7 Characteristic Code for the ST2
The characteristic code for the ST2 board contains twelve characters and digits, indicating the
Table 22-30 Characteristic code for the ST2 board
W.
range
The optical signal
wavelength range is 1484.5
nm to 1517.5 nm processed
by the board.
always P.
Twelfth character Numbers of optical interface The numbers of optical
interface are two.

For example, the characteristic code for the ST2 board is W1484.5/1517.5P2. This code indicates
that the optical signal wavelength range is 1484.5 nm to 1517.5 nm, and the numbers of optical
interface are two.
Table 22-31 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the ST2 board displayed on the NM
RM1/TM1 1
RM2/TM2 2

NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2440
For parameters of the ST2, refer to Table 22-32.
Table 22-32 ST2 parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
Optical Interface
Name
are supported.
Optical Interface
Loopback
Non-Loopback,
Inloop, Outloop
Default: Non-
Loopback
NOTE
Only support Non-Loopback and Outloop.
Default: On
status of a board.
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
- This parameter is queriable only.
Band Type - This parameter is queriable only.
DEG Threshold 0 to 10167
Default: 190
Sets signal deterioration thresholds. An
alarm is reported when error codes detected
in DEG Monitoring Time(s) are more than
the value of this parameter.
DEG Monitoring
Time(s)
2 to 10
Default: 7
Sets the signal monitoring time. If the
number of bit errors in the signal exceeds
DEG Threshold during this time, an alarm
is reported.
Degrade Threshold
Before FEC
1E-1, 1E-2, 1E-3,
1E-4, 1E-5, 1E-6,
1E-7, 1E-8, 1E-9,
1E-10, 1E-11, 1E-12,
Default: 1E-4
Sets error codes thresholds for signals
before FEC.
Enable OAMS
Power Monitoring
Disable, Enable
Default: Disable
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2441
Standard Value of
OAMS Power
Monitoring (dBm)
-60.0 to 50.0
Default: /
power monitoring.
OAMS Power
Abnormity
Threshold (dB)
0.5 to 10.0
Default:3
threshold.

22.5.10 ST2 Specifications
Table 22-33 lists the optical specifications of the ST2.
Table 22-33 Optical specifications of the ST2 board
Item Unit Value
150 km OSC
Module
80 km OSC
Module
Signal rate Mbit/s 155.52 155.52
Target distance - 150 km (62 mi.) 80 km (49.7 mi.)
Operating wavelength range nm 1504.5 to 1517.5
1484.5 to 1497.5
1504.5 to 1517.5
1484.5 to 1497.5
Launched optical power dBm 0.5 to 5 -4 to 1
Receiver overload dBm -10 -10

(8.7 in.)
l Weight: 0.95 kg (2.09 lb.)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2442
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11ST2 17.5 19.5
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2443
23 Optical Protection Board
About This Chapter
23.1 Overview
Optical protection boards provide 1+1 protection for services using their dual-fed and selective
receiving function.
23.2 DCP
DCP: 2-channel optical path protection unit
23.3 OLP
OLP: optical line protection unit
23.4 SCS
SCS: sync optical channel separator unit
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Hardware Description 23 Optical Protection Board
2444
23.1 Overview
Optical protection boards provide 1+1 protection for services using their dual-fed and selective
receiving function.
Positions of Optical Protection Boards in a WDM System
Different optical protection boards support different types of protection. Figure 23-1 shows the
position of DCP boards in a WDM system when it offers client 1+1 protection. For the positions
of the DCP, OLP, and SCS boards in other protection scenarios, see 23.2 DCP, 23.3 OLP, and
23.4 SCS.
Figure 23-1 Position of DCP boards in a WDM system (client 1+1 protection)
DCP
OTU
(W)
OTU
(P)
DMUX
MUX
DMUX
MUX
DCP
FIU
FIU
FIU
FIU
DMUX
MUX
DMUX
MUX
OTU
(W)
OTU
(P)
C
l
i
e
n
t
-
s
i
d
e

e
q
u
i
p
m
e
n
t
Working signal Protection signal
C
l
i
e
n
t
-
s
i
d
e

e
q
u
i
p
m
e
n
t
Main Functions
Table 23-1 lists the main functions of optical protection boards.
Table 23-1 Main functions of optical protection boards
Board Function Supported Protection Type
DCP l Protects two optical signals.
l For each protected signal, selects the better
signal from the working and protection
channels using its optical switch.
l Intra-board 1+1 protection
l Client 1+1 protection
l Optical wavelength shared protection
OLP l Protects one signal.
l Selects the better signal from the working and
protection channels using its optical switch.
l Optical line protection
l Intra-board 1+1 protection
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2445
Board Function Supported Protection Type
SCS l Protects two signals.
l For each protected signal, selects the better
signal from the working and protection
channels based on instructions sent by the
SCC board. The board receives and couples
the signals from both the working and
protection channels when it does not work
with an SCC board.

23.2 DCP
DCP: 2-channel optical path protection unit
The available functional versions of the DCP board are TN11 and TN12.
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
1DC
P
Y Y N Y Y Y
TN1
2DC
P
Y Y Y Y Y Y

Type
TN11DCP 01 Supports the single-mode optical module.
02 Supports the multi-mode optical module.
TN12DCP 01 Supports the single-mode optical module.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2446
l Function:
The TN11DCP supports single-mode and multi-mode optical modules.
The TN12DCP supports single-mode optical module.
l Specification:
The power consumption varies according to versions. For details, see 23.2.10 DCP
Specifications.
Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11DCP TN12DCP In the case of single mode, the TN12DCP can substitute for the
TN11DCP. For the substitution, upgrade the NE software to
OptiX OSN 6800 V100R004C01 or a later version, upgrade the
NE software to OptiX OSN 3800 V100R004C01 or a later
TN12DCP None -

23.2.2 Application
Because it is a type of optical protection unit, the DCP board implements intra-board 1+1
protection, optical wavelength shared protection (OWSP protection) and client-side 1+1
protection.
For the position of the DCP board in the WDM system, see Figure 23-2, Figure 23-3 and Figure
23-4.
Figure 23-2 Position of the DCP board in the WDM system (intra-board 1+1 protection)
MUX
DMUX
DMUX MUX
FIU
FIU
FIU
FIU
DCP
DMUX
MUX
DMUX
RI1 1
RI21
TO11
TO21
RI12
RI22
TO12
TO22
RO1
TI1
RO2
TI2
OTU
OTU
MUX
TO11
TO21
RI11
RI21
TO12
TO22
RI22
RI12
DCP
TI1
OTU
OTU
RO1
TI2
RO2
NOTE
When used for intra-board 1+1 protection, the DCP board does not support the 2.5 Gbit/s OTU.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2447
Figure 23-3 Position of the DCP board in the WDM system (OWSP protection)
OTU2 OTU1 OTU2 OTU1
2 x DCP
OTU1 OTU2 OTU1 OTU2
OADM
(West)
OADM
(East)
FIU
FIU
OADM
FIU
OADM
FIU
OADM
FIU
FIU
OADM
OADM
FIU
OADM
FIU
2/1
1/2
2/1

2
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
2/1
2/1
2
1
2
1
A
B C
D
1/2
1/2
2/1
2/1
2 x DCP
2 x DCP 2 x DCP
2/1
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2 2/1
1/2
1
2
1
2
: Working signal : Protection signal :
(West)
(West)
(West)
(West)
(East)
(East)
(East)
(East)
Optical signal

Figure 23-4 Position of the DCP board in the WDM system (client-side 1+1 protection)
MUX
DMUX
DMUX MUX
FIU
FIU
FIU
FIU
DMUX
MUX
DMUX
MUX
Client-side
OTU
(W)
OTU
(P)
DCP
TO11
RI11
TO21
RI21
TO12
RI12
TO22
RI22
TI1
RO1
TI2
RO2 OTU
(P)
OTU
(W)
RI11
TO11
RI21
TO21
RI12
TO12
RI22
TO22
RO1
TI1
RO2
TI2
DCP
Client-side
NOTE
When the working OTU and the protection OTU are installed in different subracks or chassis, the DCP
board can be used for client-side protection.
The DCP board provides intra-board 1+1 protection, OWSP protection and client-side 1+1
protection.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2448
Table 23-2 Functions and features of the DCP board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function l Provides intra-board 1+1 protection to protect the services of the
OTU, which has no dual-fed and selective receiving function.
Compared with the OLP, the DCP provides protection for two
signals to implement 1+1 protection.
l Provides client-side 1+1 protection, using a working OTU and a
protection OTU to protect the client-side services.
l Provides the OWSP protection, make use of two different channels
to achieve the protection of one channel of service between all
stations.
Protection scheme Dual-fed and selective receiving. (At the transmit end, the protected
signal is dually fed to the working and protection paths. At the receive
end, the working or protection signal is selected if it has the higher
power level.)
Optical-layer ASON The DCP board supports optical-layer ASON only through client 1
+1 protection.

The DCP board contains the optical module, control and communication module, and power
supply module.
Figure 23-5 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the DCP board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2449
Figure 23-5 Functional modules and signal flow of the DCP board
SCC
TI1
RO1
TI2
RO2
TO11
TO12
TO21
TO22
RI11
RI12
RI21
RI22
Optical module
Optical
power detecting
module
Optical switch
Optical switch
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse

Signal Flow
One DCP board supports the dual-fed and selective receiving of two channels of optical signals.
The DCP board processes the two channels of optical signals in the same way. This section
describes the service flow of only one channel of optical signals.
The TI1 optical interface receives one channel of optical signals. After passing through the
splitter, the signals are output to the working and the protection fibers (channels) through
the TO11 and TO12 optical interfaces.
l Receive direction
The signals in the working and the protection fibers (channels) are input through the RI11
and RI12 optical interfaces, and then are transmitted to the optical switch. The optical switch
selects one from the two channels of signals based on the optical power of the signals. In
this way, the selection of signals from the working and the protection channels is achieved.
The selected optical signals are output through the RO1 optical interface.
The optical power detecting module detects the detection signals that are extracted from
the working and protection signals, and reports the detection results to the control and
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2450
communication module. The control and communication module compares the optical
power of the two channels of optical signals, and controls the operation of the optical switch
based on the optical power. In this way, the selection of signals from the working and the
protection channels is achieved.
Module Function
l Optical module
The optical module consists of two signal dual-fed parts and two signal selection parts.
Signal dual-fed part
Divides the one channel of optical signals into two channels of the same power, and
outputs them to the working and protection channels.
Signal selection part
Receives the optical signals from the working and protection channels. The optical
power detecting module detects and compares the optical power of the two channels of
optical signals. Based on the results, the signal selection part selects one channel of
optical signals and outputs it.
23.2.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the DCP board.
Figure 23-6 shows the front panel of the DCP board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2451
Figure 23-6 Front panel of the DCP board
DCP
DCP
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
T
O
1
1
R
I
1
1
T
O
1
2
R
I
1
2
T
O
2
1
R
I
2
1
T
O
2
2
R
I
2
2
R
O
1
T
I
1
R
O
2
T
I
2

Indicators
Interfaces
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2452
Table 23-3 Types and functions of the interfaces on the DCP board
TI1 LC Receives the first channel of WDM-side signals. (intra-
board 1+1 protection)
Receives the first channel of client-side signals. (client-
side 1+1 protection)
Receives one channel of client-side signals. (OWSP
protection)
TI2 LC Receives the second channel of WDM-side signals.
(intra-board 1+1 protection)
Receives the second channel of client-side signals.
(client-side 1+1 protection)
Receives the optical signals from the adjacent stations.
(OWSP protection)
RO1 LC Transmits the first channel of WDM-side signals.
Transmits the first channel of client-side signals.
Transmits one WDM-side optical signal to the OTU
board. (OWSP protection)
RO2 LC Transmits the second channel of WDM-side signals.
Transmits the second channel of client-side signals.
Transmits one optical signal to the adjacent stations.
(OWSP protection)
TO11 LC Transmits the first channel of signals to the working
multiplexer unit. (intra-board 1+1 protection)
Transmits the first channel of signals to the working
OTU. (client-side 1+1 protection)
Serves as a dual-fed optical interface, transmitting one
optical signal to the working router. (OWSP protection)
TO12 LC Transmits the first channel of signals to the protection
Transmits the first channel of signals to the protection
Dual fed optical interface, transmitting one optical
signal to the protection router. (OWSP protection)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2453
TO21 LC Transmits the second channel of signals to the working
Transmits the second channel of signals to the working
Connects to the RI12 interface of another DCP board
in the same station by using a fiber. (OWSP protection)
TO22 LC Transmits the second channel of signals to the
protection multiplexer unit. (intra-board 1+1
protection)
Transmits the second channel of signals to the
protection OTU. (client-side 1+1 protection)
Connects to the RI22 interface on the same DCP board
by using a fiber. (OWSP protection)
RI11/RI12 LC Receives the first channel of signals from the working
and the protection multiplexer unit. (intra-board 1+1
protection)
Receives the first channel of signals from the working
and protection OTU. (client-side 1+1 protection)
Serve as selective receive interfaces, connecting to the
working route and protection route, respectively.
(OWSP protection)
RI21/RI22 LC Receives the second channel of signals from the
working and the protection multiplexer unit. (intra-
board 1+1 protection)
Receives the second channel of signals from the
working and protection OTU. (client-side 1+1
protection)
Connects to the TO12 and TO22 interfaces on the same
DCP board, respectively, by using a fiber. (OWSP
protection)

Laser Hazard Level
23.2.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one DCP board.
Table 23-4 shows the valid slots for the TN11DCP board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2454
Table 23-4 Valid slots for the TN11DCP board
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 3800 chassis IU11, IU2-IU5

Table 23-5 shows the valid slots for the TN12DCP board.
Table 23-5 Valid slots for the TN12DCP board
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800 subrack IIU1-IU17

23.2.7 Characteristic Code for the DCP
The characteristic code for the DCP board contains one character and two digits, indicating the
maximum protection switching time.
Table 23-6 Characteristic code for the DCP board
P.
Second and third digits Maximum protection
switching time
protection switching time.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN12DCP board is P50. This code indicates that
the maximum protection switching time is 50ms.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2455
Table 23-7 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the DCP board displayed on the NM
TO11/RI11 1
TO12/RI12 2
TO21/RI21 3
TO22/RI22 4
TI1/RO1 5
TI2/RO2 6

NOTE
For parameters of the DCP, refer to Table 23-8.
Table 23-8 DCP parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
Optical Interface Name - Sets and displays the optical interface name.
are supported.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2456
Input Power Loss
Threshold (dBm)
-35 to -10
Default: -35
The Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm)
alarm.
information.
Initial Variance Value
Between Primary and
Secondary Input Power
(dB)
-10 to 10
Default: 0
The Initial Variance Value Between
Primary and Secondary Input Power
(dB) parameter provides an option to set the
reference value of the optical power variance
between the primary and secondary input
optical interfaces of a board.
See D.14 Initial Variance Value Between
Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB)
Variance Threshold
Between Primary and
Secondary Input
Optical Power (dB)
3 to 8
Default: 5
The Variance Threshold Between Primary
and Secondary Input Optical Power (dB)
parameter provides an option to set the
optical power variance threshold of the
primary and secondary optical interfaces of a
board. When the threshold is reached, signal
fail (SF) occurs. When the variance between
the primary and secondary optical power
exceeds the threshold, the optical switch
switches services to the channel with better
optical power. The configured value can be
queried.
See D.34 Variance Threshold Between

23.2.10 DCP Specifications
NOTE
point.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2457
Table 23-9 Optical specifications of the DCP board
TN11DC
P01
TN11DC
P02
TN12DC
P01
TI1-TO11
TI1-TO12
TI2-TO21
TI2-TO22
Insertion
loss at the
transmit
end
Single-
mode
dB 4 - 4
Multi-
mode
dB - 4.5 -
RI11-RO1
RI12-RO1
RI21-RO2
RI22-RO2
Insertion
loss at the
receive
end
Single-
mode
dB 1.5 - 1.5
Multi-
mode
dB - 2 -
Range of the input
optical power
Single-
mode
dBm -35 to 7 - -35 to 7
Multi-
mode
dBm - -35 to 0 -
range
Single-
mode
nm 1270 to
1350,
1528 to
1567
- 1270 to
1350,
1528 to
1567
Multi-
mode
nm - 830 to 870 -
Switching threshold of optical power
difference
dB 5 5 5
Range of the alarm threshold for the
optical power difference
dB 3 to 8 3 to 8 3 to 8
NOTE
l The OptiX OSN 8800 only supports TN11DCP02 and TN12DCP01.
l The OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800 supports TN11DCP01, TN11DCP02, and TN12DCP01.

(8.7 in.)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2458
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11DCP/TN12DCP 6.8 7.5

23.3 OLP
OLP: optical line protection unit
The available functional versions of the OLP board are TN11 and TN12.
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
1OL
P
Y Y N Y Y Y
TN1
2OL
P
Y Y Y Y Y Y

Type
Table 23-10 lists the type description of the TN11OLP board.
Table 23-10 Type description of the TN11OLP board
TN11OLP 01 Supports single-mode optical module and is intended for normal
power application; supports client 1+1 protection, intra-board 1+1
protection, and optical line protection.
02 Supports multi-mode optical module and is intended for normal
power application; supports client 1+1 protection.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2459
Table 23-11 lists the type description of the TN12OLP board.
Table 23-11 Type description of the TN12OLP board
TN12OLP 01 Supports single-mode optical module and is intended for normal
03 Supports single-mode optical module and is intended for high
04 Supports single-mode optical module; supports optical line
protection.

l Function:
The TN11OLP supports single-mode and multi-mode optical modules. It supports only
normal power application.
The TN12OLP supports single mode optical modules. It supports not only normal power
application but also high power application.
l Specification:
The power consumption varies according to versions. For details, see 23.3.10 OLP
Specifications.
Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11OLP TN12OLP In single mode, the TN12OLP can substitute for the TN11OLP.
For the substitution, upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN
6800 V100R004C01 or a later version, upgrade the NE
software to OptiX OSN 3800 V100R004C01 or a later version,
or upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 8800 V100R002C00
or a later version.
TN12OLP None -

23.3.2 Application
Because it is a type of optical protection unit, the OLP board provides the optical line protection,
intra-board 1+1 protection, and client-side 1+1 protection.
For the position of the OLP board in the WDM system, see Figure 23-7, Figure 23-8, Figure
23-9, Figure 23-10 and Figure 23-11.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2460
Figure 23-7 Position of the TN11OLP01/TN12OLP01/TN12OLP03 board in the WDM system
(optical line protection, application 1)
OLP
OTU
OTU
MUX
DMUX
OTU
OTU
FIU
TI
RO
OLP
DMUX
MUX
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
FIU
RO
TI
TO1
RI1
TO2
RI2
RI1
TO1
RI2
TO2
NOTE
(optical line protection, application 2)
OLP
OTU
OTU
MUX
DMUX
OTU
OTU
OLP
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OA
OA
OA
OA
OA
OA
OA
OA
MUX
DMUX
FIU FIU
FIU FIU
TO1
TO2
RI1
RI2
TO1
TO2
RI1
RI2
TI RO
RO
TI
NOTE
MUX
DMUX
DMUX
MUX DMUX
MUX
DMUX
MUX
FIU
FIU
FIU
FIU
TO1
TO2
RI1
RI2
TO1
RI1
TO2
RI2
OLP
TI
OTU RO
OLP
RO
OTU TI
NOTE
When used for intra-board 1+1 protection, the OLP does not support the 2.5 Gbit/s OTU.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2461
Figure 23-10 Position of the TN11OLP01/TN11OLP02/TN12OLP01/TN12OLP03 board in the
WDM system (client-side 1+1 protection)
MUX
DMUX
DMUX
MUX
DMUX
MUX
DMUX
MUX
FIU
FIU
FIU
FIU
Client-side
OTU
(W)
OTU
(P)
OLP
TO1
RI1
TO2
RI2
TI
RO
RI1
TO1
RI2
TO2
OTU
(W)
OTU
(P)
RO
TI
OLP
Cient-side
NOTE
When the working OTU and the protection OTU are installed in different subracks or chassis, the OLP
board can be used for client-side protection.
Figure 23-11 Position of the TN12OLP04 board in the WDM system (optical line protection,
application)
SFIU
OTU
OTU
DMUX
OTU
OTU
SFIU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
RO
TI
T01
OLP
T02
RI1
RI2
OLP
T01
T02
RI1
RI2
TI
RO
MUX
MUX
DMUX
NOTE
The OLP board provides optical line protection, intra-board 1+1 protection and client-side 1+1
protection.
Table 23-12 Functions and features of the OLP board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Provides the optical line protection to ensure the normal receiving of
signals when the line fiber fails.
Provides intra-board 1+1 protection to protect the services of the OTU
that has no dual-fed and selective receiving function.
Provides client-side 1+1 protection, making use of a working OTU
and a protection OTU to protect the client-side services.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2462
Function and
Feature
Description
Protection scheme Dual-fed and selective receiving. (At the transmit end, the protected
signal is dually fed to the working and protection paths. At the receive
end, the working or protection signal is selected if it has the higher
power level.)
Optical-layer ASON The OLP board supports optical-layer ASON only through client 1+1
protection.

The OLP board consists of the optical module, control and communication module, and power
supply module.
Figure 23-12 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the OLP board.
Figure 23-12 Functional modules and signal flow of the OLP board
SCC
TI
RO
Optical power
detecting
module
TO1
TO2
RI1
RI2
Optical module
Optical switch
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse

Signal Flow
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2463
The TI optical interface receives one channel of optical signals. After passing through the
splitter, the signals are output to the working and the protection fibers (channels) through
the TO1 and TO2 optical interfaces.
l Receive direction
The signals in the working and the protection fibers (channels) are input through the RI1
and RI2 optical interfaces, and then are transmitted to the optical switch. The optical switch
selects one from the two channels of signals based on the optical power of the signals. In
this way, the selection of signals from the working and the protection channels is achieved.
The selected optical signals are output through the RO optical interface.
The optical power detecting module detects the detection signals that are extracted from
the working and protection signals, and reports the detection results to the control and
communication module. The control and communication module compares the optical
power of the two channels of optical signals, and controls the operation of the optical switch
based on the optical power. In this way, the selection of signals from the working and the
protection channels is achieved.
Module Function
l Optical module
The optical module consists of a signal dual-fed part and a signal selection part.
Signal dual-fed part
Signal selection part
Receives the optical signals from the working and protection channels. The optical
power detecting module detects and compares the optical power of the two channels of
optical signals. Based on the results, the signal selection part selects one channel of
optical signals and outputs it.
23.3.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the OLP board.
Figure 23-13 shows the front panel of the OLP board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2464
Figure 23-13 Front panel of the OLP board
OLP
OLP
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
T
O
1
R
I
1
T
O
2
R
I
2
R
O
T
I
LASERRADIATION
CAUTION
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION

Indicators
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2465
Interfaces
Table 23-13 Types and functions of the interfaces on the OLP board
TI LC Receives the line signal from the FIU board. (optical
line protection)
Receives one WDM-side signal. (intra-board 1+1
protection)
Receives one client-side signal. (client-side 1+1
protection)
RO LC Transmits the line signal to the FIU board. (optical line
protection)
Transmits one WDM-side signal. (intra-board 1+1
protection)
Transmits one client-side signal. (client-side 1+1
protection)
TO1/TO2 LC Transmits the working and the protection signals to the
line side. (optical line protection)
Transmits signals to the working and the protection
Transmits signals to the working and the protection
RI1/RI2 LC Receives the working or the protection signal from the
line side. (optical line protection)
Receives the signals from the working and the
protection multiplexer unit. (intra-board 1+1
protection)
Receives the signals from the working and protection

Laser Hazard Level
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2466
23.3.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one OLP board.
Table 23-14 shows the valid slots for the TN11OLP board.
Table 23-14 Valid slots for the TN11OLP board
Product Valid Slots

Table 23-15 shows the valid slots for the TN12OLP board.
Table 23-15 Valid slots for the TN12OLP board
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800 subrack IIU1-IU17

23.3.7 Characteristic Code for the OLP
The characteristic code for the OLP board contains one character and two digits, indicating the
Table 23-16 Characteristic code for the OLP board
P.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2467
switching time

For example, the characteristic code for the TN12OLP board is P50. This code indicates that the
maximum protection switching time is 50ms.
Table 23-17 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the OLP board displayed on the NM
TO1/RI1 1
TO2/RI2 2
TI/RO 3

NOTE
For parameters of the OLP, refer to Table 23-18.
Table 23-18 OLP parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
Optical Interface Name - Sets and displays the optical interface name.
are supported.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2468
Input Power Loss
Threshold (dBm)
-35 to -10
Default: -35
for more
information.
The Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm)
alarm.
information
Initial Variance Value
Between Primary and
Secondary Input Power
(dB)
-10 to 10
Default: 0
The Initial Variance Value Between
Primary and Secondary Input Power
(dB) parameter provides an option to set the
reference value of the optical power variance
between the primary and secondary input
optical interfaces of a board.
See D.14 Initial Variance Value Between
Variance Threshold
Between Primary and
Secondary Input
Optical Power (dB)
0, 3 to 8
Default: 5
The Variance Threshold Between Primary
and Secondary Input Optical Power (dB)
parameter provides an option to set the optical
power variance threshold of the primary and
secondary optical interfaces of a board. When
the threshold is reached, signal fail (SF)
occurs. When the variance between the
primary and secondary optical power exceeds
the threshold, the optical switch switches
services to the channel with better optical
power. The configured value can be queried.
See D.34 Variance Threshold Between

23.3.10 OLP Specifications
NOTE
point.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2469
Table 23-19 Optical specifications of the OLP board
Interf
ace
Item Unit Value
TN11OL
P
TN12OLP0
1
a
TN12OLP0
3
a
TN12OLP0
4
a
TI-
TO1
TI-
TO2
Inserti
on
loss at
the
trans
mit
end
single
mode
dB 4 4 4 4
multi
mode
dB 4.5 - - -
RI1-
RO
RI2-
RO
Inserti
on
loss at
the
receiv
e end
single
mode
dB 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
multi
mode
dB 2 - - -
Range of the
input optical
power
single
mode
dBm -35 to 7 -35 to 7 -30 to 23 -32 to 23
multi
mode
dBm -35 to 0 - - -
Operating
wavelength
range
single
mode
nm 1270 to
1350,
1528 to
1567
1270 to
1350,
1528 to
1567
1270 to
1350,
1528 to
1567
1528 to
1567
multi
mode
nm 830 to 870 - - -
Switching threshold of
optical power difference
dB 5 5 5 5
Range of the alarm
threshold for the optical
power difference
dB 3 to 8 3 to 8 3 to 8 3 to 8
NOTE
l OptiX OSN 8800 supports TN11OLP02, TN12OLP01, TN12OLP03 and TN12OLP04.
l OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800 supports TN11OLP01, TN11OLP02, TN12OLP01, TN12OLP03
and TN12OLP04.
l a: TN12OLP has no multimode optical module.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2470
(8.7 in.)
Weight
l TN11OLP: 0.9 kg (1.98 lb.)
l TN12OLP: 1.0 kg (2.20 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11OLP 6.0 6.6
TN12OLP 4.0 4.5

23.4 SCS
SCS: sync optical channel separator unit
The available functional versions of the SCS board is TN11.
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
1SC
S
Y Y Y Y Y Y

Type
SCS 01 Supports single-mode optical module.
02 Supports multi-mode optical module.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2471
23.4.2 Application
As a type of optical protection unit, the SCS board provides client-side 1+1 protection and board-
level protection (extended mode).
For the position of the SCS board in the WDM system, see Figure 23-14 and Figure 23-15.
Figure 23-14 Position of the SCS board in the WDM system (client-side 1+1 protection)
Client-side
MUX
DMUX
DMUX
MUX
FIU
FIU
FIU
FIU
OTU
(W)
OTU
(P)
SCS
TO11
RI11
TO21
RI21
TO12
RI12
TO22
RI22
TI1
RO1
TI2
RO2
RI11
TO11
RI21
TO21
RI12
TO12
RI22
TO22
OTU
(W)
OTU
(P)
RO1
TI1
RO2
TI2
SCS
Client-side
DMUX
MUX
DMUX
MUX
Figure 23-15 Position of the SCS in the WDM system (board-level protection with extended
mode)
F
I
U
F
I
U
L
4
G
TBE2
TBE1
TBE2
TBE1 TBE1
TBE2
TBE1
TBE2
L
4
G
S
C
S
R1
S
C
S
R1
O
A
D
M
O
A
D
M
The SCS board provides client-side 1+1 protection and board-level protection (extended mode).
Table 23-20 Functions and features of the SCS board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function l Receives signals from the working and the protection OTUs and
implements client-side 1+1 protection.
l Receives signals from the working and the protection TBE and
implements board-level protection (extended mode).
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2472
Function and
Feature
Description
Protection scheme The channel protection supported by the SCS board does not need
protocol support. Instead, the channel protection executes switching
by detecting SD and SF events of the channel.

The SCS board consists of the optical module, control and communication module, and power
supply module.
Figure 23-16 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the SCS board.
Figure 23-16 Functional modules and signal flow of the SCS board
Optical module
TI1
TI2
TO11
RO1
RO2
TO12
TO21
TO22
RI11
RI12
RI21
RI22
Splitter
Splitter
Coupler
Coupler
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse

Signal Flow
One SCS board supports the dual-fed and dual receiving of two channels of optical signals. The
SCS board processes the two channels of optical signals in the same way. This section describes
the service flow of only one channel of optical signals.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2473
The TI1 optical interface receives one channel of optical signals. After passing through the
splitter, the signals are output to the working and the protection channels through the TO11
and TO12 optical interfaces.
l Receive direction
The signals in the working and the protection channels are input through the RI1 and RI2
optical interfaces, and then are transmitted to the coupler. The system activates one of the
two channels of optical signals based on the service quality. In this way, the selection of
path optical signals is achieved. The selected optical signals are output through the RO1
optical interface. Normally, the working OTU at the receive end is active, and the protection
OTU is standby. Once a fault occurs in the services, an alarm triggers a protection switching.
The system shuts down the working OTU, and activates the protection OTU.
Module Function
l Optical module
The optical module consists of the splitters and couplers.
Splitter
Coupler
Receives the signals in the working and the protection channels. The system selects one
channel of optical signals based on the service quality.
23.4.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the SCS board.
Figure 23-17 shows the front panel of the SCS board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2474
Figure 23-17 Front panel of the SCS board
SCS
SCS
T
O
1
1
T
O
1
2
R
I
1
2
T
O
2
1
R
I
2
1
T
O
2
2
R
I
2
2
R
O
1
T
I
1
R
O
2
T
I
2
R
I
1
1
STAT

Indicators
Interfaces
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2475
Table 23-21 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SCS board
TI1/TI2 LC Receives the first/second channel of client-side signals.
RO1/RO2 LC Transmits the first/second channel of client-side
signals.
TO11/TO12 LC Transmits the first channel of signals to the working
and protection OTU.
TO21/TO22 LC Transmits the second channel of signals to the working
and the protection OTU.
RI11/RI12 LC Receives the first channel of signals from the working
and protection OTU.
RI21/RI22 LC Receives the second channel of signals from the
working and protection OTU.

Laser Hazard Level
23.4.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one SCS board.
Table 23-22 shows the valid slots for the TN11SCS board.
Table 23-22 Valid slots for the TN11SCS board
Product Valid Slots

23.4.7 Characteristic Code for the SCS
The characteristic code for the SCS board contains one character and two digits, indicating the
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2476
Table 23-23 Characteristic code for the SCS board
P.
switching time

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11SCS board is P50. This code indicates that the
maximum protection switching time is 50 ms.
Table 23-24 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SCS board displayed on the NM
TI1/RO1 1
TO11/RI11 2
TO12/RI12 3
TI2/RO2 4
TO21/RI21 5
TO22/RI22 6

NOTE
For parameters of the SCS, refer to Table 23-25.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2477
Table 23-25 SCS parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
default value.

23.4.10 SCS Specifications
Table 23-26 lists the optical specifications of the SCS board.
Table 23-26 Optical specifications of the SCS board
TI1-TO11
TI1-TO12
TI2-TO21
TI2-TO22
Splitting
insertion loss
Single-mode dB 4
Multi-mode dB 4.5
RI11-RO1
RI12-RO1
RI21-RO2
RI22-RO2
Coupling
insertion loss
Single-mode dB 4
Multi-mode dB 4.5
Operating wavelength range Single-mode nm 1270 to 1350, 1528 to
1567
Multi-mode nm 830 to 870

(8.7 in.)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2478
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11SCS 0.2 0.3
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2479
24 Spectrum Analyzer Board
About This Chapter
24.1 Overview
Spectrum analyzer boards support centralized monitoring of optical signals without impacting
the signal performance.
24.2 MCA4
MCA4: 4-channel spectrum analyzer unit
24.3 MCA8
24.4 OPM8
OPM8: 8-channel optical power monitor board
24.5 WMU
WMU: wavelength monitored unit
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Hardware Description 24 Spectrum Analyzer Board
2480
24.1 Overview
Spectrum analyzer boards support centralized monitoring of optical signals without impacting
the signal performance.
Positions of Spectrum Analyzer Boards in a WDM System
Figure 24-1 illustrates the position of spectrum analyzer boards in a WDM system by using the
OPM8 board as an example.
Figure 24-1 Positions of spectrum analyzer boards in a WDM system
OTU
OAU OAU
OAU OAU
OM
OD
OTU
OTU
OTU
OD
OM
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OPM8
OPM8
OAU
OPM8
OUT
MON
IN1
IN
Spectral
information can be
queried using the
U2000

Main Functions
Board Number of
Ports
Monitoring Capability
a
Remarks
Number of
Wavelength
s
Optical
Power
Center
Wavelength
OSNR
b
MCA4 4 Y Y Y Y It is
recommended
that these
boards be
configured at
MCA8 8 Y Y Y Y
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2481
Board Number of
Ports
Monitoring Capability
a
Remarks
Number of
Wavelength
s
Optical
Power
Center
Wavelength
OSNR
b
OPM8 8 Y Y N
Y
c
the receive
end.
WMU 2 Y Y Y N This board
must be
configured at
the transmit
end.
a: "Y" indicates that the board supports the function. "N" indicates that the board does not support the function.
b: Observe the following information when OSNR monitoring is required:
MCA4/MCA8:
l The Optical Doctor Management System Function Software is optional.
l When the Optical Doctor Management System Function Software is not used, there are the following
restrictions:
OSNR monitoring is not supported if adjacent channels have 50 GHz channel spacing spacing.
OSNR monitoring is supported only for 10 Gbit/s or lower rate wavelengths if the channel spacing is 100 GHz
l OSNR monitoring is supported for all signals if their rates are 10 Gbit/s or lower, regardless of whether the
Optical Doctor Management System Function Software is used.
TN12OPM8:
l The Optical Doctor Management System Function Software must be used.
l OSNR monitoring is supported for 10 Gbit/s, 40 Gbit/s, and 100 Gbit/s signals.
c: Only the TN12OPM8 can monitor OSNR.

24.2 MCA4
The available functional versions of the MCA4 board is TN11.
Huawei office.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2482
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
1M
CA4
Y Y Y Y Y Y

Type
Table 24-1 lists the types of the MCA4 board.
Table 24-1 Type description of the MCA4 board
TN11MCA
4
01 Detects optical power and OSNR of 10 Gbit/s or lower signals.
02 Detects optical power of 100 Gbit/s or lower signals.
Detects OSNR of 10 Gbit/s or lower signals.
Supports 10 Gbit/s, 40 Gbit/s, and 100 Gbit/s signal OSNR detection
when the OD (Optical Doctor) Management System Function
Software is installed and OD (Optical Doctor) functions have been
configured.
NOTE
l When the Optical Doctor Management System Function Software is not
used, and 40 Gbit/s or higher rate wavelengths are deployed in the system.
there are the following restrictions:
l OSNR monitoring is not supported if adjacent channels have 50 GHz
channel spacing spacing.
l OSNR monitoring is supported only for 10 Gbit/s or lower rate
wavelengths if the channel spacing is 100 GHz.
l OSNR monitoring is supported for all signals if their rates are 10 Gbit/s
or lower, regardless of whether the Optical Doctor Management System
Function Software is used.

24.2.2 Application
As a type of spectrum analyzer unit, the MCA4 board provides four ports and each of the ports
supports spectrum analysis of up to 80 wavelengths.
For the position of the MCA4 board in the WDM system, see Figure 24-2.
Figure 24-2 Position of the MCA4 board in the WDM system
OTU
OAU OAU
OAU OAU
MUX
DMUX
OTU
OTU
OTU
DMUX
MUX
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
MCA4
MCA4
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2483

NOTE
The MCA4 board is usually configured at the receive end. If supervision is required at both the receive and
transmit ends, you can configure the MCA4 boards at both ends for supervision.
The MCA4 board is mainly used for spectral analysis, APE and power detection.
Table 24-2 Functions and features of the MCA4 board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Provides four ports and each of the ports supports spectrum analysis
of up to 80 wavelengths.
Detection function Supports monitoring of the following information and reports to the
SCC board. The following information can be displayed on the
U2000.
l Optical power of each wavelength
l Central wavelength
l Number of wavelengths in the main optical path
l OSNR of 10 Gbit/s or lower rate signals
l Supports 10 Gbit/s, 40 Gbit/s, and 100 Gbit/s signal OSNR
detection when the OD (Optical Doctor) Management System
Function Software is installed and OD (Optical Doctor) functions
have been configured.
NOTE
l OSNR monitoring is supported for all signals if their rates are 10 Gbit/s or
lower, regardless of whether the Optical Doctor Management System
NOTE
If the power deviation between some wavelengths monitored by the MCA4
board exceeds 6 dB, then the wavelength with lower power may be regarded
as noise and cannot be scanned by the MCA4 board.
APE function Supported
Detects the optical power of each wavelength.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2484
The MCA4 board consists of the 1x4 optical switch, spectral analysis module, driving and control
Figure 24-3 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the MCA4 board.
Figure 24-3 Functional modules and signal flow of the MCA4 board
IN01
Driving and control module
14
optical switch
Spectrum analysis module
IN02
IN03
IN04
Control
signal
Driving
signal
Data
signal
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse

Signal Flow
The 1x4 optical switch selects one channel of optical signals and sends it to the spectral analysis
module for parameter analysis. After being analyzed and converted, each data parameter is sent
to the control and communication module through a data interface. The control and
communication module further reports the parameter to the SCC board and the U2000. The final
spectrum analysis results are displayed on the U2000.
Module Function
l 1x4 optical switch
Selects one channel of optical signals from the accessed four channels of optical signals
for spectrum analysis.
l Spectrum analysis module
Monitors parameters such as the central wavelength, optical power, OSNR, and number of
wavelengths.
l Driving and control module
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2485
Drives and controls spectrum.
Controls the 1x4 optical switch to select one channel of optical signals for spectrum
analysis.
24.2.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the MCA4 board.
Figure 24-4 shows the front panel of the MCA4 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2486
Figure 24-4 Front panel of the MCA4 board
MCA4
MCA4
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
I
N
1
I
N
2
I
N
3
I
N
4

Indicators
Interfaces
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2487
Table 24-3 Types and functions of the interfaces on the MCA4 board
IN1-IN4 LC Connected to the "MON" interfaces of other boards to
receive optical signals for analysis. The interfaces can
be connected to four "MON" interfaces at the same
time.

24.2.6 Valid Slots
Two slots house one MCA4 board.
Table 24-4 shows the valid slots for the MCA4 board.
Table 24-4 Valid slots for the MCA4 board
Product Valid Slots
IU33, IU35-IU41, IU45-IU51, IU53-IU59,
IU61-IU67
IU35

NOTE
For OptiX OSN 8800, the rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot of the
two slots in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the MCA4 board displayed on the NM is the number
of the left slot. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the MCA4 board, the slot number of the MCA4
For OptiX OSN 6800, the rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot of the
two slots in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the MCA4 board displayed on the NM is the number
For OptiX OSN 3800, the rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the bottom slot
of the two slots in the chassis. Therefore, the slot number of the MCA4 board displayed on the NM is the
number of the bottom slot. For example, if slots IU11 and IU2 house the MCA4 board, the slot number of
the MCA4 board displayed on the NM is IU2.
24.2.7 Characteristic Code for the MCA4
The characteristic code for the MCA4 board contains one character, indicating the band of the
optical signals processed by the board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2488
Table 24-5 Characteristic code for the MCA4 board
represents C band.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MCA4 board is C, indicating C band.
Table 24-6 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the MCA4 board displayed on the NM
IN1-IN4 1-4

For parameters of the MCA4, refer to Table 24-7.
Table 24-7 MCA4 parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
Optical Interface
Name
name.
are supported.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2489
Optical Monitoring Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
Sets the optical interface monitoring state.
When the monitoring of an optical interface
is set to Disabled, the spectrum analyzer
board does not analyze the wavelength at
this interface.
Configure Band C
Default: C
Sets the working band types of a board.
board.
Actual Working
Band Parity
band of the board.
Configure Working
Band Parity
All, Odd, Even
Default: All
band.
Port - Displays port name and wavelength
frequency.
Band - Displays the current band.
Wavelength Monitor
Status
No Monitor, Monitor
Default: No Monitor
Sets whether to monitor the current
wavelength. It is recommended to set the
monitor status of wavelengths that bear
services to Monitor.
Board - Displays the board name.
Optical Switch No. - The Optical Switch No. parameter
provides an option to query the current
working optical interface of the multi-
channel spectrum analyzer board.
Monitor Interval
(min.)
5 to 49995
Default: 10
supervisory channel for the current board
and to analyze the time interval of the
channel status.
WDM type Default, 100-GHz
Spacing with CRZ,
50-GHz Spacing with
CRZ, 100-GHz
Spacing with 40Gbps,
50-GHz Spacing with
40Gbps
Default: Default
Users do not need to set it.

24.2.10 MCA4 Specifications
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2490
Table 24-8 lists the optical specifications of the MCA4 board.
Table 24-8 Optical specifications of the MCA4 board
Item Unit Value
Channel spacing GHz 50/100
Detect range for single channel optical power dBm -30 to -10
Detect accuracy for optical power dB 1.5
OSNR detection accuracy A (The OSNR of
10 Gbit/s signals can be detected.)
dB 1.5 (OSNR: 13 to 19)
2 (OSNR: 19 to 23)
OSNR detection accuracy B
a
(The OSNR of
10, 40, and 100 Gbit/s signals can be
detected.)
dB 1.5 (OSNR detection range:
13-23)
Detect accuracy for central wavelength nm 0.1
Numbers of optical interface pcs 4
a: The OSNR detection function is available only when the board works with the OD (Optical
Doctor) Management System Function Software and the OD (Optical Doctor) function has
been configured on the NMS.

(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
MCA4 8.0 8.5

24.3 MCA8
The available functional versions of the MCA8 board is TN11.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2491
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
1M
CA8
Y Y Y Y Y Y

Type
Table 24-9 lists the types of the MCA8 board.
Table 24-9 Type description of the MCA8 board
TN11MCA
8
01 Detects optical power and OSNR of 10 Gbit/s or lower signals.
02 Detects optical power of 100 Gbit/s or lower signals.
Supports 10 Gbit/s, 40 Gbit/s, and 100 Gbit/s signal OSNR detection
when the OD (Optical Doctor) Management System Function
Software is installed and OD (Optical Doctor) functions have been
configured.
NOTE
l OSNR monitoring is supported for all signals if their rates are 10 Gbit/s
or lower, regardless of whether the Optical Doctor Management System

24.3.2 Application
As a type of spectrum analyzer unit, the MCA8 board provides eight ports and each of the ports
supports spectrum analysis of up to 80 wavelengths.
For the position of the MCA8 board in the WDM system, see Figure 24-5.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2492
Figure 24-5 Position of the MCA8 board in the WDM system
OTU
OAU OAU
OAU OAU
MUX
DMUX
OTU
OTU
OTU
DMUX
MUX
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
MCA8
MCA8

NOTE
The MCA8 board is usually configured at the receive end. If supervision is required at the receive and
transmit ends, you can configure one MCA8 board at each end to provide supervision.
The MCA8 board provides spectral analysis, automatic power equilibrium (APE) and detection.
Table 24-10 Functions and features of the MCA8
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Provides eight ports and each of the ports supports spectrum analysis
of up to 80 wavelengths.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2493
Function and
Feature
Description
Detection function Supports the following detection functions and reports to the SCC
board. The following information can be displayed on the U2000.
l Optical power of each wavelength
l Central wavelength
l Number of wavelengths in the main optical path
l OSNR of 10 Gbit/s or lower rate signals
l Supports 10 Gbit/s, 40 Gbit/s, and 100 Gbit/s signal OSNR
detection when the OD (Optical Doctor) Management System
Function Software is installed and OD (Optical Doctor) functions
have been configured.
NOTE
l OSNR monitoring is supported for all signals if their rates are 10 Gbit/s or
lower, regardless of whether the Optical Doctor Management System
NOTE
If the power deviation between some wavelengths monitored by the MCA8
board exceeds 6 dB, then the wavelength with lower power may be regarded
as noise and cannot be scanned by the MCA8 board.
APE function Supported
Detects the optical power of each wavelength.

The MCA8 board consists of the 1x8 optical switch, spectral analysis module, driving and control
Figure 24-6 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the MCA8 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2494
Figure 24-6 Functional modules and signal flow of the MCA8 board
IN01
optical switch
Spectrum analysis module
IN02
IN03
IN04
Control
signal
Driving
signal
Data
signal
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
18
IN05
IN06
IN07
IN08

Signal Flow
The 1x8 optical switch selects one channel of optical signals and transmits the channel to the
spectral analysis module for parameter analysis. After being analyzed and converted, each data
parameter is sent to the control and communication module through a data interface. The control
and communication module further reports the parameter to the SCC board and the U2000. The
U2000 reports the final spectrum analysis results.
Module Function
Selects one channel of optical signals from the accessed eight channels of optical signals
for spectrum analysis.
Monitors parameters such as the central wavelength, optical power, OSNR, and number of
wavelengths.
Drives and controls spectrum.
Controls the 1x8 optical switch to select one channel of optical signals for spectrum
analysis.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2495
24.3.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the MCA8 board.
Figure 24-7 shows the front panel of the MCA8 board.
Figure 24-7 Front panel of the MCA8 board
MCA8
MCA8
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
I
N
3
I
N
4
I
N
5
I
N
6
I
N
1
I
N
2
I
N
7
I
N
8

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2496
Indicators
Interfaces
Table 24-11 Types and functions of the interfaces on the MCA8 board
IN1-IN8 LC Connected to the "MON" interfaces of other boards to
be connected to eight "MON" interfaces at the same
time.

24.3.6 Valid Slots
Two slots house one MCA8 board.
Table 24-12 shows the valid slots for the MCA8 board.
Table 24-12 Valid slots for the MCA8 board
Product Valid Slots
IU33, IU35-IU41, IU45-IU51, IU53-IU59,
IU61-IU67
IU35

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2497
NOTE
For the OptiX OSN 8800, the rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot
of the two slots in the subrack. The slot number of the MCA8 board displayed on the NM is the number
For the OptiX OSN 6800, the rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot
of the two slots in the subrack. The slot number of the MCA8 board displayed on the NM is the number
For the OptiX OSN 3800, the rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the bottom
slot of the two slots in the chassis. The slot number of the MCA8 board displayed on the NM is the number
of the bottom slot. For example, if slots IU11 and IU2 house the MCA8 board, the slot number of the MCA8
24.3.7 Characteristic Code for the MCA8
The characteristic code for the MCA8 board consists of one character, indicating the band of
Table 24-13 Characteristic code for the MCA8 board
represents C band.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MCA8 board is C, indicating that the card
processes optical signals in the C band.
Table 24-14 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the MCA8 board displayed on the NM
IN1-IN8 1-8

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2498
For parameters of the MCA8, refer to Table 24-15.
Table 24-15 MCA8 parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
Optical Interface
Name
name.
Default: Enabled
Sets the optical interface monitoring
state. When the monitoring of an optical
interface is set to Disabled, the spectrum
analyzer board does not analyze the
wavelength at this interface.
Configure Band C
Default: C
board.
Actual Working Band
Parity
band of the board.
Configure Working
Band Parity
All, Odd, Even
Default: All
band.
frequency.
Wavelength Monitor
Status
No Monitor, Monitor
Default: No Monitor
Monitor Interval
(min.)
5 to 49995
Default: 10
supervisory channel for the current
board and to analyze the time interval of
the channel status.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2499
WDM type Default, 100-GHz
Spacing with CRZ, 50-
GHz Spacing with
CRZ, 100-GHz
Spacing with 40Gbps,
50-GHz Spacing with
40Gbps
Default: Default
Users do not need to set it.

24.3.10 MCA8 Specifications
Table 24-16 lists the optical specifications of the MCA8 board.
Table 24-16 Optical specifications of the MCA8 board
Item Unit Value
Detect accuracy for optical power dB 1.5
OSNR detection accuracy A (The OSNR of
10 Gbit/s signals can be detected.)
dB 1.5 (OSNR: 13 to 19)
2 (OSNR: 19 to 23)
OSNR detection accuracy B
a
(The OSNR of
10, 40, and 100 Gbit/s signals can be
detected.)
dB 1.5 (OSNR detection range:
13-23)
Detect accuracy for central wavelength nm 0.1
a: The OSNR detection function is available only when the board works with the OD (Optical
Doctor) Management System Function Software and the OD (Optical Doctor) function has
been configured on the NMS.

(8.7 in.)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2500
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
MCA8 12.0 13.0

24.4 OPM8
OPM8: 8-channel optical power monitor board
The available functional versions of the OPM8 board are TN11 and TN12.
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
1OP
M8
Y Y Y Y Y Y
TN1
2OP
M8
Y Y Y Y Y Y

Function:
l Only the TN12OPM8 supports detection of OSNR for 10 Gbit/s, 40 Gbit/s, and 100 Gbit/
s signals.
The OPM8 boards of different versions cannot replace each other.
24.4.2 Application
The OPM8 board provides eight ports and each of the ports supports optical power monitor of
up to 80 wavelengths.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2501
For the position of the OPM8 board in the WDM system, see Figure 24-8.
Figure 24-8 Position of the OPM8 board in the WDM system
OTU
OAU OAU
OAU OAU
MUX
DMUX
OTU
OTU
OTU
DMUX
MUX
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OPM8
OPM8

NOTE
The OPM8 board is usually configured at the receive end. If supervision is required at the receive and
transmit ends, you can configure the OPM8 boards at each end for supervision.
The OPM8 board is mainly used for optical power monitoring and APE.
Table 24-17 Functions and features of the OPM8
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Provides eight ports and each of the ports supports optical power
monitor of up to 80 wavelengths.
Monitoring function Detects optical power of each wavelength and reports the standard
wavelength and optical power to the SCC board.
NOTE
TN12OPM8 supports detection of OSNR for 10 Gbit/s, 40 Gbit/s, and 100
Gbit/s signals.
The results are reported to the SCC and can be displayed on the
U2000.
APE function Implements the APE function when the board is used with other
required boards.
Monitors the optical power of each channel.

The OPM8 board consists of the 1x8 optical switch, optical power monitor module, driving and
control module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2502
Figure 24-9 and Figure 24-10 show the functional modules and signal flow of the TN11OPM8
and TN12OPM8 boards.
Figure 24-9 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11OPM8 board
IN01
1 8
optical switch
Optical power monitor
module
IN02
IN03
IN05
IN04
IN06
IN07
IN08
Control
signal
Driving
signal
Data
signal
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2503
Figure 24-10 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12OPM8 board
IN01
1 8
optical switch
Spectrum analysis
module
IN02
IN03
IN05
IN04
IN06
IN07
IN08
Control
signal
Driving
signal
Data
signal
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse

Signal Flow
The 1x8 optical switch selects one channel of optical signals from the board it is connected to,
and sends the channel to the optical power monitor module. After being analyzed and converted,
the optical power value is sent to the control and communication module through a data interface.
The control and communication module reports the value to the SCC board and the U2000. The
final spectrum analysis results are displayed on the U2000.
Module Function
Selects one channel of optical signals from the accessed eight channels of optical signals
for optical.
l Optical power monitor module
Monitors channel optical power and wavelength information and reports the data to the
driving and control module.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2504
Monitors channel optical power, wavelength information and OSNR, then reports the data
to the driving and control module.
Drives and scans spectrum.
Instructs the 1x8 optical switch to select one channel of optical signals for spectrum
analysis.
24.4.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the OPM8 board.
Figure 24-11 shows the front panel of the OPM8 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2505
Figure 24-11 Front panel of the OPM8 board
OPM8
OPM8
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
I
N
3
I
N
4
I
N
5
I
N
6
I
N
1
I
N
2
I
N
7
I
N
8

Indicators
Interfaces
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2506
Table 24-18 Types and functions of the interfaces on the OPM8 board
IN1-IN8 LC Connects to the "MON" interfaces of other boards to
be connected to eight "MON" interfaces of other boards
at the same time.

24.4.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one OPM8 board.
Table 24-19 shows the valid slots for the OPM8 board.
Table 24-19 Valid slots for the OPM8 board
Product Valid Slots

24.4.7 Characteristic Code for the OPM8
The characteristic code for the OPM8 board consists of one character, indicating the band of the
Table 24-20 Characteristic code for the OPM8 board
represents C band.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11OPM8 board is C, indicating C band.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2507
For parameters of the OPM8, refer to Table 24-21.
Table 24-21 OPM8 parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
Optical Interface
Name
name.
are supported.
Default: Enabled
Sets the optical interface monitoring state.
When the monitoring of an optical interface
is set to Disabled, the MCA board does not
analyze the wavelength at this interface.
Configure Band C
Default: C
board.
Actual Working
Band Parity
band of the board.
Configure Working
Band Parity
All, Odd, Even
Default: All
band.
frequency.
Wavelength Monitor
Status
No Monitor, Monitor
Default: No Monitor
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2508
Monitor Interval
(min.)
5 to 49995
Default: 10
supervisory channel for the current board
and to analyze the time interval of the
channel status.

24.4.9 OPM8 Specifications
Table 24-22 lists the optical specifications of the OPM8 board.
Table 24-22 Optical specifications of the OPM8 board
Item Unit Value
Detected accuracy for optical power dB 1.5
Detect accuracy for OSNR
a
dB 1.5
NOTE
This item is valid only for TN12OPM8.
a: The OSNR detection function is available only the OD (Optical Doctor) functions have
been configured.

(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11OPM8/TN12OPM8 12 15

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2509
24.5 WMU
WMU: wavelength monitored unit
The available functional version of the WMU board is TN11.
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
1W
MU
Y Y Y Y Y N

24.5.2 Application
The WMU board monitors the wavelengths at a 50 GHz/100 GHz channel spacing in the system.
For the position of the WMU board in the WDM system, see Figure 24-12.
Figure 24-12 Position of the WMU board in the WDM system
ITL
DMUX
DMUX
MUX
OA
OA
O
T
U
T
U
O
T
U
T
U
O O
MUX
MUX
DMUX
DMUX
ITL
OA
FIU
OA
OSC
WMU
MUX
FIU
WMU
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2510

NOTE
One WMU board can implement the centralized wavelength monitoring in two directions. Figure 24-12 shows
the two WMU boards, which, however, refer to the same WMU board.
The WMU board supports the centralized monitoring of the wavelengths at a channel spacing
of 50 GHz/100 GHz on the OTU board at the transmit end in the system.
Table 24-23 Functions and features of the WMU board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function The board supports the centralized monitoring of the wavelengths on
the OTU board at the transmit end in the system with wavelengths at
50 GHz/100 GHz channel spacing, and performs centralized
monitoring of the fixed-wavelengths on the OTU at the transmit end
in a transmission system. In addition, the board can monitor the
wavelengths in two different optical transmit directions.
Optical switch The optical switch is used to select the optical signals from the desired
transmission direction to monitor.

The WMU board consists of the 1x2 optical switch, optical wavelength detection module, control
Figure 24-13 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the WMU board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2511
Figure 24-13 Functional block diagram of the WMU board
IN1
IN2
Optical wavelength
detection module 1X2
optical switch
Control
signal
Driving
signal
Data
signal
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse

Signal Flow
The 1x2 optical switch selects one channel of optical signals and sends it to the optical
wavelength detection module for parameter analysis. After being analyzed and converted, the
wavelength information is sent to the control and communication module through a data
interface. The control and communication module further reports the results to the SCC board
and the U2000. The final results are displayed on the U2000.
Module Function
Selects one channel of signals from the signals accessed through two optical interfaces for
optical wavelength detection.
l Optical wavelength detection module
Detects each single-wavelength optical signals from the optical channel selection module,
and reports the wavelength information to the SCC board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2512
24.5.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the WMU board.
Figure 24-14 shows the front panel of the WMU board.
Figure 24-14 Front panel of the WMU board
WMU
WMU
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
I
N
1
I
N
2

Indicators
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2513
Interfaces
Table 24-24 Types and functions of the interfaces on the WMU board
IN1/IN2 LC Each connect to the MON optical interface on an
optical amplifier in the transmit direction or an FIU
board for centralized wavelength monitoring.

24.5.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses on WMU board.
Table 24-25 shows the valid slots for the WMU board.
Table 24-25 Valid slots for the WMU board
Product Valid Slots

Table 24-26 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the WMU board displayed on the NM
IN1 1
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2514
IN2 2

For WMU parameters, refer to Table 24-27.
Table 24-27 WMU parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
interface name. It is recommended to
use the default value.

24.5.9 WMU Specifications
Table 24-28 Optical specifications of the WMU board
Item Unit Value
Adjacent channel spacing GHz 50/100
Per-channel input optical power range dBm -36 to -16
Detect accuracy for central wavelength GHz <2.5
Detect accuracy for single channel optical
power
dB <2
Detect range for Central wavelength offset GHz -10 to 10

(8.7 in.)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2515
Power Consumption
Type
Typical Power
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at
55C (131F) (W)
TN11WMU - 12 15
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2516
25 Variable Optical Attenuator Board
About This Chapter
25.1 Overview
Electrical variable optical attenuator (EVOA) boards are mainly configured at input ports on
optical amplifier (OA) boards, or wavelength-adding and pass-through ports on optical add/drop
multiplexer (OADM) boards to adjust optical power.
25.2 VA1
VA1: 1-channel variable optical attenuator unit
25.3 VA4
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Hardware Description 25 Variable Optical Attenuator Board
2517
25.1 Overview
Electrical variable optical attenuator (EVOA) boards are mainly configured at input ports on
optical amplifier (OA) boards, or wavelength-adding and pass-through ports on optical add/drop
multiplexer (OADM) boards to adjust optical power.
Application of EVOAs
EVOA boards adjust the optical power of optical signals as required by system control boards
in the following scenarios:
l EVOA boards are configured before the input ports of OA boards to adjust the input optical
power of OA boards to the OA nominal power or the target power specified in network
design. See Figure 25-1.
Figure 25-1 EVOA configured at the input port of an OA board
O
A
F
I
U
O
A
E
V
O
A
l EVOA boards are configured at the wavelength-adding ports and pass-through ports of
OADM boards to adjust the optical power of added signals and pass-through signals so that
the optical spectrum is flat at an OADM site. See Figure 25-2.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2518
Figure 25-2 EVOAs configured at the wavelength-adding ports and pass-through ports of an
OADM board
MRx MRx
E
V
O
A
OA
E
V
O
A
OA
OA
OA
EVOA EVOA
OTU OTU
EVOA EVOA
OTU OTU
Main Functions of EVOA Boards
The VA1 and VA4 boards provide the following functions:
l The VA1 board adjusts the optical power for one channel of optical signals and the VA4
board adjusts the optical power for four channels of optical signals.
l Supports power-off protection to avoid damage to the corresponding optical receiver caused
by too-high optical power when the power supply recovers.
l Supports the variable attenuation range of 1.5 dB to 21.5 dB. The resolution is 0.1 dB.
l Supports optical-layer ASON.
25.2 VA1
The available functional versions of the VA1 board are TN11 and TN12.
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
1VA
1
N N N N Y Y
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2519
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
2VA
1
Y Y Y Y Y Y

l Specification:
For the specification of each version, see 25.2.10 VA1 Specifications.
Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11VA1 TN12VA1 Upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 6800 V100R003 or a
later version, or upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 3800
V100R003 or a later version.
TN12VA1 None -

25.2.2 Application
As a type of variable optical attenuator unit, the VA1 board implements the power adjustment
for one signal.
For the position of the VA1 board in the WDM system, see Figure 25-3.
Figure 25-3 Position of the VA1 board in the WDM system
MR2
OA OA
OA
OA
MR2
OTU OTU
VA1
OTU OTU
VA1
VA1 VA1 VA1
VA1 VA1
VA1
VA1
VA1

The VA1 board adjusts optical power and provides power-off protection.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2520
Table 25-1 Functions and features of the VA1 board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Queries the attenuation and adjusts the optical power of one optical
signal according to the control command sent by the SCC.
Power-off protection Supports the power-off protection to avoid the damages to the
corresponding optical receiver due to high optical power when the
power supply recovers.
Attenuation range The variable attenuation range is between 1.5 dB and 21.5 dB. The
resolution is 0.1 dB.
NOTE
The maximum inherent insertion loss of the VA1 is 1.5 dB.

The VA1 board consists of the variable optical attenuator, driving and control module, control
Figure 25-4 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the VA1.
Figure 25-4 Functional modules and signal flow of the VA1
SCC
OUT IN Variable optical attenuator
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2521

Signal Flow
According to commands sent by the SCC board, the VA1 board adjusts the power of the input
optical signals by using a variable optical attenuator.
Module Function
l Variable optical attenuator
Adjusts the optical power of the input optical signals.
Detects the input and output optical power of the VA1 board.
Drives and controls the variable optical attenuator, and reports the detected attenuation
to the control and communication module.
25.2.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the VA1 board.
Figure 25-5 shows the front panel of the VA1 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2522
Figure 25-5 Front panel of the VA1 board
VA1
VA1
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
O
U
T
I
N
LASERRADIATION
CAUTION
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION

Indicators
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2523
Interfaces
Table 25-2 Types and functions of the interfaces on the VA1 board
IN LC Receives the optical signals to be adjusted.
OUT LC Transmits the adjusted optical signals.

Laser Hazard Level
25.2.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one VA1.
Table 25-3 shows the valid slots for the TN11VA1 board.
Table 25-3 Valid slots for the TN11VA1 board
Product Valid Slots

Table 25-4 Valid slots for the TN12VA1 board
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2524
Product Valid Slots

25.2.7 Characteristic Code for the VA1
The characteristic code for the VA1 board contains three digits, indicating the maximum
attenuation of the optical signals processed by the board.
Table 25-5 Characteristic code for the VA1 board
Digits 1 through 3 Attenuation value Indicate the maximum
attenuation.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11VA1 board is 21.5, indicating that the
maximum allowable attenuation value is 21.5 dB.
Table 25-6 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the VA1 displayed on the NM
IN/OUT 1

NOTE
For parameters of the VA1, refer to Table 25-7.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2525
Table 25-7 VA1 parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
Optical Interface
Name
name.
Optical Interface
Attenuation Ratio
(dB)
Value of Min.
Attenuation Rate
(dB) to Value of Max.
Attenuation Rate
(dB)
Default: Value of Max.
Attenuation Rate
(dB)
power attenuation of a board channel so
that the optical power of the output
signals at the transmit end is within the
preset range.
parameter by querying the
corresponding Min. Attenuation Rate
(dB) and Max. Attenuation Rate (dB)
parameters.
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)
(dB)
Configure Band C
Default: C
board.
Default: Used
channel of a board.
Actual Working Band
Parity
band of the board.
Configure Working
Band Parity
All, Odd, Even
Default: All
band.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2526
25.2.10 VA1 Specifications
TN11VA1 Optical Specifications
Table 25-8 lists the optical specifications of the TN11VA1 board.
Table 25-8 Optical specifications of the TN11VA1 board
Item Unit Value
IN-OUT Inherent insertion loss dB 1.5
Dynamic attenuation
range
dB 20

Item Unit Value
Dynamic attenuation
range
dB 20
Adjustment accuracy dB 1 (attenuation10dB)
1.5 (attenuation15dB)
1.8 (attenuation>15dB)

(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Type
Typical Power
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at
55C (131F) (W)
VA1 - 6.5 7.2

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2527
25.3 VA4
The available functional versions of the VA4 board areare TN11 and TN12.
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
1VA
4
N N N N Y Y
TN1
2VA
4
Y Y Y Y Y Y

l Specification:
For the specification of each version, see 25.3.10 VA4 Specifications.
Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11VA4 TN12VA4 Upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 6800 V100R003 or a
later version, or upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 3800
V100R003 or a later version.
TN12VA4 None -

25.3.2 Application
As a type of variable optical attenuator unit, the VA4 board adjusts optical power for four optical
signals.
For the position of the VA4 board in the WDM system, see Figure 25-6.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2528
Figure 25-6 Position of the VA4 board in the WDM system
MR2
OA OA
OA
OA
MR2
OTU OTU
VA4
OTU OTU
VA4
VA4
VA4
VA4
VA4
VA4

The VA4 board is mainly used to adjust optical power and provide power-off protection.
Table 25-10 Functions and features of the VA4 board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Queries the attenuation and adjust the optical power of four optical
signals respectively according to the control command sent by the
SCC.
Power-off protection Supports power-off protection to avoid damage to the corresponding
optical receiver caused by too-high optical power when the power
supply recovers.
Attenuation range The variable attenuation ranges between 1.5 dB and 21.5 dB. The
resolution is 0.1 dB.
NOTE
The maximum inherent insertion loss of the VA4 is 1.5 dB.

The VA4 board consists of the variable optical attenuator, driving and control module, control
Figure 25-7 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the VA4.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2529
Figure 25-7 Functional modules and signal flow of the VA4
SCC
OUT2 IN2
OUT4 IN4
Variable optical attenuator
OUT1 IN1
OUT3
IN3
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse

Signal Flow
According to the instructions from the SCC board, the VA4 board adjusts the power of four
channels of optical signals by using a variable optical attenuator.
Module Function
l Variable optical attenuator
Adjusts the optical power of the input optical signals.
Detects the input and output optical power of the VA4 board.
Drives and controls the variable optical attenuator, and reports the detected attenuation
to the control and communication module.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2530
25.3.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the VA4 board.
Figure 25-8 shows the front panel of the VA4 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2531
Figure 25-8 Front panel of the VA4 board
VA4
VA4
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
O
U
T
1
I
N
1
O
U
T
2
I
N
2
O
U
T
3
I
N
3
O
U
T
4
I
N
4
LASERRADIATION
CAUTION
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION

Indicators
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2532
Interfaces
Table 25-11 Types and functions of the interfaces on the VA4 board
IN1-IN4 LC Receives the optical signals to be adjusted.
OUT1-OUT4 LC Transmits the adjusted optical signals.

Laser Hazard Level
25.3.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one VA4 board.
Table 25-12 Valid slots for TN11VA4 board
Product Valid Slots

Table 25-13 Valid slots for TN12VA4 board
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2533
Product Valid Slots

25.3.7 Characteristic Code for the VA4
Table 25-14 Characteristic code for the VA4 board
First to third digits Attenuation value Indicate the maximum
attenuation.

maximum attenuation value is 21.5 dB.
Table 25-15 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the VA4 board displayed on the NM
IN1/OUT1 1
IN2/OUT2 2
IN3/OUT3 3
IN4/OUT4 4

NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2534
For VA4 Parameters, refer to Table 25-16.
Table 25-16 VA4 parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
Optical Interface
Name
name.
Optical Interface
Attenuation Ratio
(dB)
Value of Min.
to Value of Max.
Default: Value of Max.
power attenuation of a board channel so
that the optical power of the output
signals at the transmit end is within the
preset range.
parameter by querying the
corresponding Min. Attenuation Rate
(dB) and Max. Attenuation Rate (dB)
parameters.
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)
Min. Attenuation
Rate (dB)
Configure Band C
Default: C
board.
Default: Used
channel of a board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2535
Input Power Loss
Threshold (dBm)
value of the input optical power, which
can trigger a board to generate an optical
power loss (MUT_LOS) alarm. When
the actual input optical power is lower
than this threshold value, the board
information.
Actual Working Band
Parity
band of the board.
Configure Working
Band Parity
All, Odd, Even
Default: All
band.

25.3.10 VA4 Specifications
Item Unit Value
Dynamic attenuation
range
dB 20

Item Unit Value
IN-OUT Inherent insertion
loss
dB 1.5
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2536
Item Unit Value
Dynamic
attenuation range
dB 20
Adjustment accuracy dB 1 (attenuation10 dB)
1.5 (attenuation15 dB)
1.8 (attenuation>15 dB)

(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Type
Typical Power
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at
55C (131F) (W)
VA4 - 8.5 9.4
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2537
26 Dispersion Equalizing Board
About This Chapter
26.1 Overview
Dispersion equalization boards compensate for dispersion accumulated during fiber
transmission of optical signals and compress the pulses of the propagated optical signals. This
enables the propagated optical signals to be restored at the output end.
26.2 DCU
DCU: dispersion compensation unit
26.3 TDC
TDC: single-wavelength tunable-dispersion compensation board
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Hardware Description 26 Dispersion Equalizing Board
2538
26.1 Overview
Dispersion equalization boards compensate for dispersion accumulated during fiber
transmission of optical signals and compress the pulses of the propagated optical signals. This
enables the propagated optical signals to be restored at the output end.
Main Functions
Table 26-1 lists the main functions of dispersion equalization boards.
Table 26-1 Main functions of dispersion equalization boards
Device Type Description Function Application
M
o
d
ul
e
D
C
M
DCM
(DCF)
Uses a dispersion
compensation fiber
(DCF) and provides
fixed dispersion.
Provides span-based
dispersion
compensation,
enabling long-haul
optical transmission.
l Works with optical
amplifier boards at
the transmit and
receive ends of a
transmission line.
l Supports G.652,
G.653, and G.655
fiber applications.
DCM
(FBG)
Uses fiber Bragg
grating (FBG) and
provides fixed
compensation.
amplifier boards at
the transmit and
receive ends of a
transmission line.
l Supports G.652
and G.655 fiber
applications.
B
o
ar
d
DCU Uses a DCF and
provides fixed
dispersion.
amplifier boards at
the transmit and
receive ends of a
transmission line.
l Supports G.652
and G.655 fiber
applications.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2539
Device Type Description Function Application
TDC Provides tunable
dispersion to precisely
compensate for
dispersion inside a
channel.
Precisely
compensates for
residual dispersion
inside an OTU
channel that cannot be
compensated by DCM
modules.
l Works with an
OTU board at the
receive end of a
transmission line.
The TDC board
must precede the
OTU board.
l Applies to
scenarios that
allow for relatively
small dispersion,
such as, 40 Gbit/s
communication
systems.

NOTE
For details on the DCM, see 11.1 DCM Frame and DCM Module.
26.2 DCU
DCU: dispersion compensation unit
The available functional version of the DCU board is TN11.
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
1DC
U
Y Y Y Y Y Y

26.2.2 Application
As a kind of dispersion compensation board, the DCU board is used at the transmit or receive
end in the transmission system to compensate for the dispersion that is accumulated in an optical
transmission system.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2540
For the position of the DCU board in the WDM system, see Figure 26-1.
Figure 26-1 Position of the DCU board in the WDM system
OBU OAU
OBU OAU DMUX
OTU
OTU
DMUX
MUX
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
DCU
DCU
OTU
MUX
OTU
OBU OAU
OBU OAU DMUX
OTU
OTU
DMUX
MUX
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
DCU
DCU
OTU
MUX
OTU

The DCU board compensates for the dispersion that is accumulated in the fiber during
transmission and compresses optical signal pulse. This enables the transmitted optical signals
to be restored at the output end. In addition, when used together with an optical amplifier board,
the DCU board can implement long haul optical transmission.
Table 26-2 Functions and features of the DCU board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function Provides dispersion compensation for different transmission distance.
Dispersion
compensation
method
Compensates for the dispersion accumulated in an optical
transmission system, and compresses the optical signal pulse. This
enables the transmitted optical signals to be restored at the output end.
Long haul
transmission with
optical regeneration
Implements long haul transmission when used together with an
optical amplifier board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2541
The DCU board consists of the dispersion compensation module, control and communication
Figure 26-2 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the DCU board.
Figure 26-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the DCU board
OUT
IN
EDFA optical module
SCC
Dispersion compensation
module
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(Controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse

Signal Flow
The dispersion compensation module (DCM) performs the dispersion compensation with the
main path optical signals received through the IN optical interface. Then, the signals are output
through the OUT optical interface.
Module Function
l The dispersion compensation module
After the optical signal is transmitted for a certain distance, the optical signal pulse is
widened because of the positive dispersion accumulated in the system. This severely affects
the system transmission performance. The DCM employs the negative dispersion borne
with the dispersion compensating fiber (DCF) to offset the positive dispersion in the
transmission fiber, and compresses the input optical signal pulse. In this way, the optical
signals at the output end are restored back to the original signals.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2542
26.2.5 Front Panel
There are interfaces on the front panel of the DCU board.
Figure 26-3 shows the front panel of the DCU board.
Figure 26-3 Front panel of the DCU board
DCU
DCU
O
U
T
I
N

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2543
Interfaces
Table 26-3 Types and functions of the interfaces on the DCU board
IN LC Accesses the multiplexed signals to be compensated in
terms of dispersion.
OUT LC Outputs the multiplexed signals that have been
compensated in terms of dispersion.

Laser Hazard Level
26.2.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one DCU board.
Table 26-4 shows the valid slots for the DCU board.
Table 26-4 Valid slots for the DCU board
Product Valid Slots

26.2.7 Characteristic Code for the DCU
The characteristic code for the DCU board contains characters, indicating the type of the fiber
that the board works with and the dispersion compensation distance.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2544
Table 26-5 Characteristic code for the DCU board
Character before hyphen (-) Fiber type Type of the fiber that the
DCU board works with
Character after hyphen (-) Dispersion compensation
distance
The transmission distance
achieved through dispersion
compensation

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11DCU board is G.655LEAF-40. It indicates
that the DCU board works with G.655LEAF fibers, and the dispersion compensation distance
is 40 km.
NOTE
If the characteristic code contains various dispersion compensation distances, the symbol "&" is used to
separate each distance.
Table 26-6 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the DCU board displayed on the NM
IN 1
OUT 2

For parameters of the DCU, refer to Table 26-7.
Table 26-7 DCU parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
- Displays the position of the
optical interface.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2545
Optical Interface
Name
- Sets and displays the optical
interface name. It is
recommended to use the default
value.

26.2.10 DCU Specifications
Table 26-8 Optical specifications of the DCU board (1)
Item Unit Value
DC
U0
1
DC
U0
2
DC
U0
3
DC
U0
4
DC
U0
5
DC
U06
D
CU
07
DCU0
8
Typical dispersion
compensation distance
km 20 40 60 80 100 120 5 10
Maximum insertion loss dB 3.3 4.7 6.4 8 9 9.8 2.3 2.8
slope
- 90%-110%
Polarization mode
dispersion
ps 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.8 0.3 0.3
Polarization-dependent
loss
dB 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1
Maximum input power
a
dBm 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
range
nm 1528-1568
Dispersion compensating
fiber type
- G.652 fiber
a: The maximum input power refers to the maximum input optical power permitted by the
optical module on the condition that the optical module is not damaged.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2546
Table 26-9 Optical specifications of the DCU board (2)
Item Unit Value
DCU
11
DCU
12
DCU
13
DCU
14
DCU1
5
DCU1
6
Typical dispersion
compensation distance
km 20 40 60 80 100 120
Maximum insertion loss dB 4 5 5.9 6.9 7.8 8.8
slope
- 90%-110%
Polarization mode
dispersion
ps 0.4 0.5 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
Polarization-dependent
loss
dB 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
Maximum input power
a
dBm 20 20 20 20 20 20
range
nm 1528-1568
Dispersion compensating
fiber type
- G.655 fiber
a: The maximum input power refers to the maximum input optical power permitted by the
optical module on the condition that the optical module is not damaged.

(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Type
Typical Power
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at
55C (131F) (W)
TN11DCU 0.2 0.3

26.3 TDC
TDC: single-wavelength tunable-dispersion compensation board
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2547
The available hardware version of the TDC board is TN11.
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
1TD
C
Y Y Y Y Y N

Type
Table 26-10 lists the types of the TDC board.
Table 26-10 Type description of the TDC board
TN11TDC 01 Compensates for dispersion of DQPSK and ODB optical modules.
02 Compensates for dispersion of DRZ optical modules.

26.3.2 Application
The TDC board compensates for the dispersion in one channel.
If a 40 Gbit/s OTU board is configured with intra-board 1+1 protection, the TDC board must be
configured on the protection path at the receive end. For the application of the board in a WDM
system, see Figure 26-4.
Figure 26-4 Application of the TDC board in a WDM system
OA M40 OA D40
O
T
U
TDC
OA M40 OA D40
O
L
P
OA D40 OA M40 TDC
OA D40 OA M40
O
T
U
O
L
P
Working channel
Protection channel
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2548

The TDC board compensates for the dispersion in a single channel and reports information.
Table 26-11 Functions and features of the TDC board
Function and
Feature Description
Basic function The TDC board is used for C-band optical signals.
Compensates for the dispersion in the single channel. The dispersion
is adjustable.
Information report Reports the ambient temperature and alarm information about the
board.
Optical-layer ASON Supported by TN11TDC01.

The TDC board consists of the optical module, the driving and detection module, the control
and communication module, and the power supply module.
Figure 26-5 is the functional block diagram of the TDC board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2549
Figure 26-5 Functional block diagram of the TDC board
SCC
OUT
IN
Tunable dispersion
compensation module
Data
signal
Driving
signal
Optical module
Back plane
(Controlled by SCC)
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Power supply
module

Signal Flow
The TDC reports hardware information and alarm events to the SCC through the communication
module. One single wavelength optical signal is input through the IN interface. After the
dispersion is compensated for by the compensation module, the signal is output through the
OUT.
Module Function
l Optical module
The optical module of the TDC board contains a tunable dispersion compensation module.
The system can adjust for the dispersion of the compensation module.
Drives and controls the TDC module, and reports the detected dispersion to the control and
communication module.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2550
26.3.5 Front Panel
There are indicator and interfaces on the front panel of the TDC board.
Figure 26-6 shows the front panel of the TDC board.
Figure 26-6 Front panel of the TDC board
TDC
TDC
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
O
U
T
I
N

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2551
Indicators
Interfaces
Table 26-12 Types and functions of the TDC interfaces
Interface Connector Type Description
IN LC Connected to the optical demultiplexer to input a single
signal that is to be equalized.
OUT LC Connected to the OTU to output the equalized a single
signal.

Laser Hazard Level
26.3.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one TDC board.
Table 26-13 shows the valid slots for the TDC board.
Table 26-13 Valid slots for the TDC board
Product Valid Slots

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2552
26.3.7 Characteristic Code for the TDC
The characteristic code for the TDC board contains characters, indicating the type of the fiber
Table 26-14 Characteristic code for the TDC board
Character before hyphen (-) Fiber type Fiber type that the TDC
board is compatible with
distance
compensation

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11TDC board is G.655LEAF_T. It indicates that
the TDC board works with G.655LEAF fibers, and the dispersion compensation distance is
tunable.
This section introduces information such as slots, interfaces and parameters for the TDC
configuration in an NM system.
Table 26-15 shows the sequence number displayed in an NM system of the optical interface on
the panel of the board.
Table 26-15 Display of the optical interfaces on the TDC board
IN/OUT 1

NOTE
An optical interface displayed on the NM denotes a pair of actual optical interfaces, one of which serves
to receive signals and the other of which serves to transmit signals.
For parameters of the TDC, refer to Table 26-16.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2553
Table 26-16 TDC parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.
Receive Wavelength l C: 1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.100
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.170
to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /
Sets Receive Wavelength of a
board. The value of the Receive
Wavelength is as follows:
l When the receive wavelength of
the board is the same as the
transmit wavelength of the local
board, use the default value,
which indicates keeping the
receive wavelength the same as
the transmit wavelength of the
local board automatically.
l When the receive wavelength of
the board is different from the
transmit wavelength of the local
board, the value of this parameter
must be the same as the transmit
wavelength of the peer board;
otherwise, services are affected.
NOTE
For ASON services, this parameter must
Default: C
The Planned Band Type parameter
sets the band type of the current
working wavelength.
NOTE
See D.26 Planned Band Type
information.

26.3.10 TDC Specifications
Specifications include optical specifications, laser safety level, mechanical specifications and
power consumption.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2554
Table 26-17 lists the optical specifications of the TDC board.
Table 26-17 Optical specifications of the TDC board
Dispersion tuning range ps/nm 400
Dispersion tuning speed sec <15
Input power range dBm -13 to 0
Dispersion accuracy ps/nm 10
Output optical power dBm The output optical power should
be close to the input power, with
an error range of 1.5 dB.

The mechanical specifications of the board are as follows:
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11TDC 13 15
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2555
27 Clock Board
About This Chapter
27.1 STG
STG: Centralized Clock Board
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Hardware Description 27 Clock Board
2556
27.1 STG
STG: Centralized Clock Board
The available functional versions of the STG board are TN11, TN52, TNK2.
Huawei office.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
TN1
1ST
G
N N N N Y N
TN5
2ST
G
N Y N N N N
TN
K2S
TG
Y N N N N N

l Appearance:
The TN11, TN52 and TNK2 versions use different front panels with different
dimensions. See 27.1.5 Front Panel and 27.1.9 STG Specifications.
l Specification:
The specifications vary according to versions. For details, see 27.1.9 STG
Specifications.
The STG boards of different versions cannot replace each other.
27.1.2 Application
The STG board is a type of clock board, which locks the reference clock source and provides
clock signals and frame signals to the system. The clock signals comply with ITU-T G.813 and
ITU-T G.823.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2557
For the position of the STG in the OptiX OSN 8800 T64, see Figure 27-1.
For the position of the STG in the OptiX OSN 8800 T32, see Figure 27-2.
For the position of the STG in the OptiX OSN 6800, see Figure 27-3.
Figure 27-1 Position of the TNK2STG in OptiX OSN 8800 T64
MUX
DMUX
G.694.1 G.694.1
TOM TOM
Client side
WDM side
MUX
DMUX
4
NS2
NS2
NS2
NS2
100Mbit/s-
2.5Gbit/s
100Mbit/s-
2.5Gbit/s
STG
Clock signals &
Frame signals
STI
external clock
STG
STI
1
4
1
Clock signals &
Frame signals
external clock
NOTE
The STI is optional and it is configured when the 2M clock signals need to be transmitted, the IEEE 1588V2
function needs to be supported, and certain sites in the OCS system need to access the BITS clock.

Figure 27-2 Position of the TN52STG in OptiX 8800 T32
MUX
DMUX
G.694.1 G.694.1
TOM TOM
Client side
WDM side
MUX
DMUX
4
NS2
NS2
NS2
NS2
100Mbit/s-
2.5Gbit/s
100Mbit/s-
2.5Gbit/s
STG
Clock signals &
Frame signals
STI
external clock
STG
STI
1
4
1
Clock signals &
Frame signals
external clock
NOTE
The STI is optional and it is configured when the 2M clock signals need to be transmitted, the IEEE 1588V2
function needs to be supported, and certain sites in the OCS system need to access the BITS clock.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2558
Figure 27-3 Position of the TN11STG in OptiX OSN 6800
MU
X
DMU
X
G.694.1 G.694.1
TO
M
TO
M
Client side
WDM side
MU
X
DMU
X
4
NS
2
NS
2
NS2
NS2
100Mbit/s
-
2.5Gbit/s
100Mbit/s
-
2.5Gbit/s
STG
Clock signals &
Frame signals
external clock
STG
1
4
1
Clock signals &
Frame signals
external clock
NOTE
When the 2M clock signals need to be transmitted, the IEEE 1588V2 function needs to be supported, the
external clock is input on the STG board.

The STG board is mainly used to lock the reference clock source and provide signal signals and
frame signals to the system.
Table 27-1 Functions and features of the STG board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function l Locks the reference clock source.
l Provides the system with ITU-T clock signals that comply with G.
813 and G.823 and frame signals.
l Synchronizes the time of an NE with the time of the upstream
system.
Active/standby
switching function
In the OptiX OSN 8800, the STG board uses a 1+1 hot backup scheme.
The two STGs serve as mutual backups. When both of them are
normal, one of them functions as the active board, and the other
functions as the standby board. Service boards select the clock source
according to the status of the two STGs. When the active STG is
faulty, an active/standby switching occurs. Then, the standby STG
becomes active, and the services boards select the clock from the
current active STG according to the status of the two STGs.
Clock source
selection function
Traces the external clock source, service clock source, or local clock
source, to provide the synchronization clock source for itself and the
system.
Time
synchronization
function

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2559
The STG board consists of a control and communication module and a clock processing module.
Figure 27-4 shows the functional block diagram of the STG board.
Figure 27-4 Functional modules and signal flow of the STG board
SCC
CPU Memory
Control
Communication
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Power supply
module
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Fuse
Time signals/
Clock signals Clock signals/Frame signals

Module Function
l Clock processing module
The clock processing module consists of the clock signal receiver, clock signal transmitter,
clock signal trace sub-module, clock source selection sub-module, IEEE 1588 clock
synchronization sub-module, and active/standby STG board switching control sub-module.
Locks the external clock source, service clock source, or local clock source, to provide
the STG board and the system with the synchronization clock source.
Updates the clock signals periodically to ensure the time synchronization within an NE.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2560
27.1.5 Front Panel
There are indicators on the front panel of the STG board.
Figure 27-5 shows the front panel of the TNK2STG board.
Figure 27-6 shows the front panel of the TN52STG board.
Figure 27-7 shows the front panel of the TN11STG board.
Figure 27-5 Front panel of the TNK2STG board
STG
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV

Figure 27-6 Front panel of the TN52STG board
STG
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2561

Figure 27-7 Front panel of the TN11STG board
STG
STG
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TOD
CLK
IN
OUT

Indicators
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2562
Interfaces
Table 27-2 lists details on the interfaces of the TN11STG board.
Table 27-2 Interface description of the STG board
Interface Connector Function
IN SMB Clock signal input interface
OUT SMB Clock signal output interface
CLK RJ45 Clock signal input and output
interface
TOD RJ45 Time signal input and output
interface
NOTE
The CLK port and the IN/OUT port cannot be used as the input or output port at the same time. If the CLK
port is used to input or output clock signals, the IN/OUT port cannot be used to input/output clock signals.
If the IN/OUT port is used to input/output clock signals, the CLK port cannot be used to input or output
clock signals.

Pin Assignment of the CLK Interface
Table 27-3 Pin assignment of the CLK interface
Pin Signal Function
3 N C Not connected
6 N C Not connected
7 N C Not connected
8 N C Not connected

Pin Assignment of the TOD Interface
Table 27-4 Pin assignment of the TOD interface
Pin Signal Function
1 GND Ground
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2563
Pin Signal Function
2 GND Ground
4 GND Ground
5 GND Ground

27.1.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one STG board.
Table 27-5 shows the valid slots for the TN11STG board.
Table 27-5 Valid slots for the TN11STG board
Product Valid Slots

Table 27-6 shows the valid slots for the TN52STG board.
Table 27-6 Valid slots for the TN52STG board
Product Valid Slots

Table 27-7 shows the valid slots for the TNK2STG board.
Table 27-7 Valid slots for the TNK2STG board
Product Valid Slots

27.1.7 Characteristic Code for the STG
None
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2564
For STG Parameters, refer to Table 27-8.
Table 27-8 STG parameters
Optical Interface/
Channel
interface.

27.1.9 STG Specifications
l Dimensions of the front panel:
TNK2STG(H x W x D): 107.5 mm (4.2 in.) x 50.3mm (2.0 in.) x 220 mm (8.7 in.)
TN52STG(H x W x D): 107.5 mm (4.2 in.) x 28.8 mm (1.1 in.) x 220 mm (8.7 in.)
TN11STG(H x W x D): 264.6 mm (10.4 in.) x 25.4 mm (1.0 in.) x 220 mm (8.7 in.)
l Weight:
TN52STG/TNK2STG: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.)
TN11STG: 1.1 kg (2.4 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TNK2STG 14.0 16.0
TN52STG 13.0 14.1
TN11STG 8.7 9.57
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2565
28 OCS System Unit
About This Chapter
28.1 BPA
BPA: optical booster and pre-amplifier board
28.2 EAS2
EAS2: 2-port 10xGE switching and processing board
28.3 EGSH
EGSH: 16xGE Ethernet switching and processing board
28.4 SF64
SF64: 1xSTM-64 optical interface board with the FEC function
28.5 SF64A
SF64A: 1xSTM-64 optical interface board with the FEC function
28.6 SFD64
SFD64: 2xSTM-64 optical interface board with the FEC function
28.7 SL64
SL64: 1xSTM-64 optical interface board
28.8 SLD64
SLD64: 2xSTM-64 optical interface board
28.9 SLH41
SLH41: 16xSTM-4/STM-1 optical/electrical interface board
28.10 SLO16
SLO16: 8xSTM-16 optical interface board
28.11 SLQ16
SLQ16: 4xSTM-16 optical interface board
28.12 SLQ64
SLQ64: 4xSTM-64 line interface board
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Hardware Description 28 OCS System Unit
2566
28.1 BPA
BPA: optical booster and pre-amplifier board
Only one functional version of the BPA board is available, that is, N4.
This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the
boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of
your Huawei local office.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
N4B
PA
Y Y Y N N N

28.1.2 Application
The BPA is an optical booster and pre-amplifier board. The BPA board provides a BA and a
PA, which are respectively used at the transmit end and receive end of the OptiX OSN 8800.
Figure 28-1 shows the position of the BA and PA in an optical transmission system.
Figure 28-1 Position of the BA and PA in an optical transmission system
Tx Rx PA
Tx Rx BA

During the long-haul transmission of optical signals, the attenuation of the signals is high.
Therefore, the BA and PA are required to ensure that the optical receiver can receive normal
optical signals.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2567
Table 28-1 Functions and features of the BPA board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic functions Increases the launched optical power of the line board to 1315
dBm. As a result, when the G.652 optical fiber with a loss of 0.275
dB/km is used, the transmission distance can be 120 km or above.
Pre-amplification
function
Provides the PA module to pre-amplify the received optical signals.
Increases the power of the small-volume optical signals by 2233
dB so that the sensitivity of the receiver increases to 37 dBm.
EDFA l Supports the automatic control of the laser temperature and
optical power of the EDFA module.
l Supports the automatic monitoring of the input and output
optical power of the EDFA module and query of the optical
power of the EDFA module.
l Supports the protection function of the EDFA module. When
no optical signals are received, the laser is automatically turned
off. When optical signals are received, the laser is automatically
turned on.
Performance events
and alarms monitoring
Supports the reporting of the performance parameters of the laser.
Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates
the management and maintenance of the equipment.
Software upgrade Supports the software upgrade without interrupting services.

The BPA board consists of the optical part, driving and detecting part, and data processing and
communication part.
Figure 28-2 shows the function modules and signal flow of the BPA board.
Figure 28-2 Function modules and signal flow of the BPA board
A/Dor D/A conversion
Drive
module
Pump
current
check
Control
module
Communication
module
SCC
Data processing and
communication part
EDFA optical module
Drive
module
Pump current
check
Module
temperature
control
Input/output
power
check
Module
temperature
control
Optical output
Optical input Optical input Optical output
Optical
part
Driving
and
detecting
part
Input/output
power
check
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2568

Optical Part
The BPA board has one EDFA optical module. The EDFA optical module magnifies the optical
power.
Driving and Detecting Part
The driving and detecting part provides the EDFA optical module with the driving current. It
also checks the working status of each part in the EDFA optical module. In addition, it predicts
and handles possible faults.
The driving and detecting part performs the following functions: checking the pump current,
driving the optical module, controlling the temperature of the optical module, and checking the
input and output optical power.
Data Processing and Communication Part
The data processing and communication part consists of the CPU and peripheral chips. The data
processing and communication part analyzes the test result of the tested circuit. Then, it adjusts
the driving circuit based on the analysis result so that the gain or output optical power of the
EDFA optical module remains in the range of the rated value. It also classifies the abnormal
states represented by the measured values and reports the abnormal states to the NMS.
28.1.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces, and a laser safety class label on the front panel of the BPA board.
Figure 28-3 shows the front panel of the BPA board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2569
Figure 28-3 Front panel of the BPA board
BPA
BPA
ACT
PROG
STAT
SRV
B
O
U
T
B
I
N
P
O
U
T
P
I
N
LASER
RADIATION
DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY
WITH OPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 1M LASER
PRODUCT
LASER
RADIATION
DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY
WITH OPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 1M LASER
PRODUCT

Indicators
The following indicators are present on the panel of the board:
l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) two colors (red and green)
l Service activation status indicator (ACT) one color (green)
l Board software status indicator (PROG) two colors (red and green)
l Service alarm indicator (SRV) three colors (red, green, and yellow)
Interfaces
There are two LC optical interfaces on the front panel of the BPA board. Table 28-2 lists the
type and function of each optical interface.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2570
Table 28-2 Types and functions of the interfaces on the BPA board
BIN LC Receives one channel of optical signals for
amplification.
BOUT LC Transmits one channel of amplified optical signals.
PIN LC Receives one channel of optical signals for pre-
amplification.
POUT LC Transmits one channel of pre-amplified optical
signals.

28.1.6 Valid Slots
The BPA board occupies one slot and must be installed in the valid slot on the subrack.
Otherwise, the board does not function.
Table 28-3 shows the valid slots for the BPA board.
Table 28-3 Valid slots for the BPA board
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
subrack
IU1IU8, IU11IU42, and IU45IU68
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
subrack
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
subrack
IU1IU8, IU11IU18

28.1.7 Characteristic Code for the BPA
The number code that follows the board name in the bar code is the characteristic code for the
board. The characteristic code for the BPA board indicates the output optical power of the optical
interfaces.
Table 28-4 provides the relationship between the characteristic code for the BPA board and the
output optical power.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2571
Table 28-4 Relationship between the characteristic code for the BPA board and the output optical
power
Board Characteristic
Code
Description
N4BPA01 01 The receiver sensitivity of the PA module
is 37 dBm.
The output optical power of the BA
module is 14 dBm.

Display of Optical Interfaces on the NMS
Table 28-5 lists the displayed serial numbers of the optical interfaces of the board on the NMS.
Table 28-5 Displayed serial numbers of the optical interfaces of the BPA board on the NMS
Optical interface Displayed serial number on the NMS
BOUT 1
BIN 2
POUT 3
PIN 4

28.1.9 BPA Specifications
Specifications include optical specifications, laser safety class, mechanical specifications, and
power consumption.
Table 28-6 lists the optical specifications of the BPA board.
Table 28-6 Optical specifications of the BPA board
Item Value
Nominal bit rate 2488320 kbit/s or 9953280 kbit/s
Application code V-16.2, U-16.2, L-64.2, V-64.2, and U-64.2
Line code pattern NRZ
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2572
Item Value
Input wavelength (nm) BA: 1530 to 1565
PA: 1550.12
Input optical power
(dBm)
BA: -6 to +3
PA: -28 to -10 (when the BPA board works with the line board at
the rate of 10 Gbit/s)
PA: -38 to -10 (when the BPA board works with the line board at
the rate less than 10 Gbit/s)
(dBm)
13 to 15 (BA)
-16 to 14 (PA)
Sensitivity (dBm) PA: -37
Noise figure (dB) BA: < 6.5
PA: < 6
Minimum signal gain
(dB)
+22

NOTE
When you perform a loopback on the PA module of the BPA board, prevent the damage caused by high
input optical power to the optical module.
Laser Safety Class
The laser safety class of the optical interface is CLASS 1M, indicating that the maximum output
The mechanical specifications of the BPA board are as follows:
l Dimensions (mm): 25.4 (W) x 220 (D) x 262.05 (H)
Power Consumption
Typical power consumption at 25C (77F): 11 W
Maximum power consumption at 55C (131F): 12 W
28.2 EAS2
EAS2: 2-port 10xGE switching and processing board
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2573
The EAS2 is available in the following functional version: N3.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
N3E
AS2
Y Y Y N N N

28.2.2 Application
The EAS2 is used to access Ethernet services, manage bandwidths, and realize Layer 2 switching
of Ethernet services.
Figure 28-4 shows the typical networking and application of the Ethernet switching board.
The Ethernet switching board accesses and converges Ethernet services, and provides the
Ethernet data with the following data features: Layer 2 switching, port isolation, flow
classification, traffic control, VLAN management, and priority configuration. In addition, the
Ethernet switching board performs encapsulation/decapsulation, virtual concatenation, and SDH
mapping/demapping for data.
The Ethernet switching board can be interconnected with the bandwidth access equipment and
the data communication equipment at the same time, thus to provide a network-level solution.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2574
Figure 28-4 Networking and application of the Ethernet switching board
NE1
NE2 NE4
NE3
User A2
User B2
User B1
User A1
NMS
PORT 1
VLAN 100
PORT 2
VLAN 100
PORT 2
VLAN 100
PORT 1 VLAN 100
Service flow
Line board
Cross-connect and
timing board
Data board
MSP ring

The EAS2 supports the access of 10 GE Ethernet services, LCAS, and test frame functions.
Table 28-7 provides the functions and features of the EAS2.
Table 28-7 Functions and features of the EAS2
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
Basic
functi
ons
Receives/Transmits 2x10 GE Ethernet services.
Interfa
ce
types
The optical interfaces are 10GBASE-LR and 10GBASE-LW Ethernet optical
interfaces, which comply with IEEE 802.3ae.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2575
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
Functi
ons
when
being
used
with
an
interfa
ce
board
Provides interfaces on the front panel.
Interfa
ce
charac
teristic
s
Working
modes
10GE full-duplex
Flow
control at
ports
Auto-negotiation mode Not supported
Non-autonegotiation mode Supported
Query/
Setting of
port
status
Supported
Query of
interface
types
Supported
RMON
measure
ment
Supported
Setting of
optical
power
threshold
s
Not supported
Hot
optical
module
swapping
Supports hot swapping of SFP+ optical modules.
Servic
e
catego
ries
EPL
service
Supports the PORT-based transparent transmission.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2576
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
EVPL
service
l Supports EVPL services based on PORT+VLAN.
l Supports EVPL services based on VCTRUNK+VLAN.
l Supports QinQ-based EVPL services.
l Supports a maximum of 4096 links.
EPLAN
service
l Supports the creation, deletion, and query of the VB. The maximum
number of supported VBs is 1.
l Supports the blacklist that can contain 512 records and also the static
MAC address table that can contain 512 records.
l Supports the setting and query of the aging time of the MAC address
EVPLA
N service
l Supports EVPLAN services that use the stack VLAN encapsulation.
l Supports data isolation based on VB+VLAN.
Servic
e
specifi
cation
s
Formats
of
Ethernet
data
frames
IEEE 802.3 Supported
Ethernet II Supported
IEEE 802.1q TAG Supported
Maximu
m frame
length
l Supports the frame with a length ranging from 64 bytes to 9600
bytes.
l Supports the Jumbo frame with a length less than 9600 bytes.
MTU Supports the setting of the packet length, which ranges from 1518 bytes
to 9600 bytes. After the setting becomes valid, the length of the packets
that enter the IP ports is restricted by the pre-set MTU.
Bound
bandwidt
h
128xVC-4
Mapping
granularit
ies
Supports VC-4-Xv (X 64), and VC-4-4c/16c/64c contiguous
concatenation services.
Encapsul
ation
formats
HDLC Not supported
LAPS Not supported
GFP-F Supported
MPLS
technolo
gy
Supports tunnel-based MPLS.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2577
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
VLAN
technolo
gy
Supports a total number of 4094 VLANs, which comply with IEEE
802.1q/p.
Maximu
m uplink
bandwidt
h
20 Gbit/s
VCTRU
NK
specificat
ions
Number of VCTRUNKs: 34
Configuration principles are as follows:
l VCTRUNKs 1 and 18 can be bound with a maximum of 64 VC-4
paths. The other VCTRUNKs can be bound with a maximum of
eight VC-4 paths.
l VCTRUNK 1VCTRUNK 17 can be bound with VC-4s numbered
164 only. VCTRUNK 18VCTRUNK 34 can be bound with
VC-4s numbered 65128 only.
l Only VCTRUNKs 1-17 support the binding of VC-3 paths and the
maximum bandwidth is 10 Gbit/s.
Protec
tion
schem
es
DLAG Supported
LCAS Dynamically increases or decreases the bandwidth and protects the
bandwidth in compliance with ITU-T G.7042.
LPT Supports the P2P LPT and P2MP LPT.
STP/
RSTP
Supports the broadcast packet suppression and RSTP, which comply
with IEEE 802.1w.
MSTP Supports MSTP, which complies with IEEE 802.1s.
LAG Supports manual link aggregation and static link aggregation.
Supports the load sharing mode and load non-sharing mode.
ERPS Supports ERPS, which complies with ITU-T G.8032.
NOTE
ERPS cannot be used on the following bridges:
l IEEE 802.1d bridges
l IEEE 802.1ad bridges in SVL/Ingress filter disable mode
Clock
synchr
onizati
on
Synchron
ous
Ethernet
Supported
IEEE
1588v2
Not supported
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2578
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
Maint
enanc
e
featur
es
ETH-
OAM
l Supports multicast continuity check (CC), unicast loopback (LB),
link trace (LT), and associated alarms, and complies with IEEE
802.1ag.
l Supports OAM automatic discovery and loopback at the remote end,
and complies with IEEE 802.3ah.
Test
frame
Supports test frames in ETH and GFP bearer modes.
Response
to ping
Not supported
Port
mirroring
Supported
Loopbac
k
capabilit
y
PHY layer at Ethernet ports Inloops
MAC layer at Ethernet ports Inloops
VC-4 level Not supported
Ethernet
performa
nce
monitori
ng
(RMON)
l Supports the Ethernet performance monitoring at the port level.
l Supports the query of the rate of a port.
l Supports the detection of alarms indicating that the traffic at a port
exceeds the threshold.
Alarms
and
performa
nce
events
Provides various alarm and performance events, which facilitates the
management and maintenance of the equipment.
QoS l Supports traffic classification that is based on PORT, PORT+VLAN ID, PORT
+VLAN ID+VLAN PRI, MPLS label, or MPLS label+EXP.
l Supports CAR with a granularity of 64 kbit/s.
l Supports eight levels of priority queues at each port.
l Supports port- and queue-based traffic shaping.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2579
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
IGMP
snoopi
ng
l Supports the enabling of the IGMP snooping protocol. Supports a maximum of
1024 multicast groups.
l Supports the query of the enabling status of the IGMP snooping protocol.
l Supports the setting and query of the IGMP snooping protocol parameters.
l Supports a maximum of 1024 static multicast groups.
Flow
contro
l
functi
on
Supports the port-based flow control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x.
SDH
ASON
Supported

The EAS2 consists of the interface processing module, mapping module, interface converting
module, logic and control module, clock module, and power module.
Figure 28-5 shows the functional block diagram of the EAS2 by describing how to process 1x10
GE signals.
Figure 28-5 Functional block diagram of the EAS2
Interface
processing
module
Logic and
control module
SCC unit
10GE
Communication
Cross-connect unit
Clock reference and frame delimitation
Clock module
LOS
Interface
converting
module Digital encap-
sulation module
Mapping module
Virtual
concatenation
processing
module
Laser
shutdown
+3.3 V
-48 V/-60 V Power
module
Fuse
Power
module
Backplane
Service
processing
module
Encapsulation
module
-48 V/-60 V
Cross-connect unit
SCC unit

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2580
In the Transmit Direction
The encapsulation or conversion module demaps and decapsulates the signals received from the
cross-connect unit. Then, the interface converting module performs the interface converting
operations and transmits the signals to the service processing module. The service processing
module implements the functions of the Layer 2 switching and private line service. After the
interface processing module converts parallel signals to serial signals and encodes the serial
signals, the Ethernet interface module transmits the serial signals.
In the Receive Direction
The SFP+ optical module performs O/E conversion on the 10 GE Ethernet signals, and then
transmits the signals to the Ethernet interface module. The Ethernet interface module transmits
the parallel signals to the service processing module to realize the functions of the Layer 2
switching and private line service. The encapsulation module encapsulates and maps the Ethernet
GFP-F frames, and then transmits the signals to the cross-connect unit.
Logic and Control Module
The logic and control module provides the communication, control, and service configuration
functions of the board.
Clock Module
The clock module traces the system reference clock, and generates the required clock signals
when the board is working.
Power Module
It converts the 48 V/60 V power supply into the DC voltages that the modules of the board
require.
28.2.5 Front Panel
The front panel of the EAS2 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.
Diagram of the Front Panel
Figure 28-6 shows the appearance of the front panel of the EAS2.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2581
Figure 28-6 Front panel of the EAS2
EAS2
EAS2
O
U
T
1
I
N
1
O
U
T
2
I
N
2
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
LINK1
ACT1
LINK2
ACT2

Indicators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:
l Connection status indicator (LINK) one color (green)
l Data receiving and transmission indicator (ACT) one color (orange)
Interfaces
The front panel of the EAS2 has two 10 GE interfaces. Table 28-8 describes the types and usage
of the interfaces of the EAS2.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2582
Table 28-8 Interfaces of the EAS2
IN1IN2 LC Receives 10 GE signals.
OUT1OUT2 LC Transmits 10 GE signals.

28.2.6 Jumpers and DIP Switches
The EAS2 does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
28.2.7 Valid Slots
The EAS2 must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the EAS2 fails to work
properly. The EAS2 occupies one slot in the subrack.
Table 28-9 shows the valid slots for the EAS2 board.
Table 28-9 Valid slots for the EAS2 board
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
subrack
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
subrack
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
subrack
IU1 to IU8, and IU11 to IU18

28.2.8 Feature Code
The EAS2 does not have the feature code.
The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are
listed in Table 28-10.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2583
Table 28-10 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the EAS2 board displayed on the NM
IN1/OUT1 1
IN2/OUT2 2

NOTE
This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the EAS2 board.
On the NMS user interface, Ethernet Interface of the EAS2 board provides parameters
classified according to External Port and Internal Port. Regardless of an external port or
internal port, the parameter configuration window involves many tab pages. Table 28-11 lists
the tab pages in the parameter configuration window.
Table 28-11 Tabs of the parameter configuration windows for external port and internal port on
the EAS2 board
Port Tab
External Port Basic Attributes
Flow Control
TAG Attributes
Network Attributes
Advanced Attributes
Internal Port TAG Attributes
Network Attributes
Encapsulation/Mapping
LCAS
Bound Path
Advanced Attributes

Each parameter of the EAS2 on each tab page is described as follows.
l In the case of external ports, the parameters on the Basic Attributes tab page are listed in
Table 28-12.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2584
Table 28-12 Parameters on the Basic Attributes tab page (external port)
Port - Displays all ports available
on the Ethernet board.
Name For example, PORT-1 Specifies the name of a port.
The name can contain up to
32 characters in English or
16 characters in Chinese.
Default: Disabled
The Enabled/Disabled
whether to enable a port. A
port can receive services if
this parameter is set to
Enabled but cannot receive
services if this parameter is
set to Disabled.
Working Mode Auto-Negotiation, 10M
Half-Duplex, 10M Full-
Duplex, 100M Half-
Duplex, 100M Full-
Duplex, 1000M Half-
Duplex, 1000M Full-
Duplex, 10GE Full-Duplex
LAN, 10GE Full-Duplex
WAN, 10GE Full-Duplex
WAN(SONET mode)
Specifies the working mode
of the Ethernet port on a
board. This parameter
determines the maximum
transmission rate and
communication mode of the
Ethernet port.
When setting this
parameter, you must ensure
the working modes of the
interconnected ports are the
same. Otherwise, the
Default: 1522
frame length supported by
the Ethernet port.
Port Physical Parameters - Displays the actual working
state of a port.
MAC Loopback Non-Loopback, Inloop,
Outloop
The MAC Loopback
MAC loopback state at an
Ethernet port. With this
parameter, users can test
whether equipment runs
normally by creating a
looped path at the MAC
layer and then sending and
receiving signals over the
path.
See D.17 MAC Loopback
to obtain the details.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2585
PHY Loopback Non-Loopback, Inloop,
Outloop
The PHY Loopback
PHY loopback state at an
looped path at the PHY
path.
See D.25 PHY Loopback

l In the case of external ports, the parameters on the Flow Control tab page are listed in
Table 28-13.
Table 28-13 Parameters on the Flow Control tab page (external port)
Non-Autonegotiation
Flow Control Mode
Disabled, Enable
Symmetric Flow Control,
Send Only, Receive Only
Default: Disable
Non-Autonegotiation
Flow Control Mode is
selected when a port works
in non-autonegotiation
mode.
See D.23 Non-
Control Mode to obtain the
details.

l In the case of external ports, the parameters on the TAG Attributes tab page are listed in
Table 28-14.
Table 28-14 Parameters on the TAG tab page (external port)
Port - Displays the type of a
VCTRUNK port.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2586
Default: Tag Aware
Specifies the type of a data
packet that a port processes.
This parameter is available
only when the network
attribute of the port is PE or
UNI.
Default: 1
The Default VLAN ID
parameter specifies a
default VLAN ID for a port
that transmits untagged
packets.
Default: 0
The VLAN Priority
priority of the default
VLAN ID of a port.
Default: Enabled
The Entry Detection

l In the case of internal ports, the parameters on the TAG Attributes tab page are listed in
Table 28-15.
Table 28-15 Parameters on the TAG tab page (internal port)
Port - Displays the type of port,
either PORT or
VCTRUNk.
Name For example,
VCTRUNK-3
Specifies the name of a
VCTRUNK port. The name
can contain up to 32
characters in English or 16
characters in Chinese.
Default: Tag Aware
UNI.
Default: 1
The Default VLAN ID
packets.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2587
Default: 0
The VLAN Priority
VLAN ID of a port.
Default: Enabled
The Entry Detection

l The parameters on the Network Attributes tab page are listed in Table 28-16.
Table 28-16 Parameters on the Network Attributes tab page
either PORT or
VCTRUNk.
Port Attributes UNI, C-Aware, S-Aware,
NNI
Default: UNI
Specifies the position of the
port in the network.
Different port attributes
support different types of
packets.

l In the case of external ports, the parameters on the Advanced Attributes tab page are listed
in Table 28-17.
Table 28-17 Parameters on the Advanced Attributes tab page (external port)
Broadcast Packet
Suppression
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
The Broadcast Packet
Suppression parameter
suppress the traffic of
broadcast packets.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2588
Broadcast Packet
10% to 100% The Broadcast Packet
Suppression
Thresholdparameter
allocates the specified
bandwidth to the broadcast
packets. The bandwidth is
allocated on the basis of the
traffic proportion at the
port. If the bandwidth
allocated to the broadcast
packets reaches the
specified threshold, the port
discards the broadcast data
packets that are received.
Threshold of Port
Receiving Rates (Mbit/s)
0 to 10000
Default: 10000
The Threshold of Port
parameter specifies the data
flow threshold at external
physical ports.
Port Traffic Threshold
Time Window (Min)
0 to 30
Default: 0
Sets traffic threshold time
window for the external
port.
Loop Detection Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
check whether a loop exists
at the port.
Default: Enabled
which is used to set
blocking for a loop port.

l In the case of internal ports, the parameters on the Advanced Attributes tab page are listed
in Table 28-18.
Table 28-18 Parameters on the Advanced Attributes tab page (internal port)
Default: Disabled
at the port.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2589
Default: Enabled

l In the case of internal ports, the parameters on the Encapsulation/Mapping tab page are
Table 28-19 Parameters on the Encapsulation/Mapping tab page (internal port)
Port - Displays the VCTRUNK
ports.
Mapping Protocol GFP
Default: GFP
Specifies the mapping
protocol adopted by the
VCTRUNK port.
Scramble Unscrambled, Scrambling
mode[X43+1], Scrambling
mode[X48+1]
[X43+1]
Specifies whether to
scramble the payload area
of the encapsulation
protocol and which
scramble mode is adopted.
Set Inverse Value for CRC - Specifies whether to set an
inverse value for the CRC
field of the HDLC or LAPS
protocol.
You can set this parameter
only when the mapping
protocol is HDLC or LAPS.
Default: FCS32
Specifies the length of the
protocol.
FCS Calculated Bit
Sequence
Big endian, Little endian
Default: Big endian
Specifies the sequence of
mapping protocol.
Extension Header Option Yes, No
Default: No
Specifies whether the GFP
encapsulation protocol
supports the extension
header.

l In the case of internal ports, the parameters on the LCAS tab page are listed in Table
28-20.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2590
Table 28-20 Parameters on the LCAS tab page (internal port)
Port VCTRUNKn Indicates the VCTRUNK
port. The letter n indicates
the number of the
VCTRUNK port.
Enabling LCAS Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
The Enabling LCAS
parameter can increase or
decrease the SDH network
capacity without affecting
the service. The capacity is
automatically decreased if a
member fails, and is
automatically increased if
the member recovers.
LCAS Mode Huawei Mode, Standard
Mode
Default: Huawei Mode
The LCAS Mode
sequence for the sink end to
respond to the MST and
Rs_Ack messages received
from the source end.
Hold off Time(ms) 0 to 10000
Default: 2000
The Hold off Time(ms)
(LCAS) parameter is also
called HO Procedure
Timer Duration. It
specifies HO Procedure
Timer Duration of the
LCAS protocol. If the
LCAS coexists with
another network-level
protection scheme (for
example, MSP or SNCP),
you can set this parameter
to postpone the LCAS
switching.
WTR Time(s) 0 to 720
Default: 300
The WTR Time(s)
parameter is also called
WTR Procedure Timer
Duration. It specifies
WTR Procedure Timer
Duration of the LCAS
protocol. Set this parameter
to avoid impact caused by
the alarm jitter on the link
status.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2591
TSD Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
The TSD parameter
specifies the B3 or BIP
error status of a
VCTRUNK member. TSD
stands for trail signal
degrade. When this
parameter is set to
Enabled and if a
VCTRUNK member has
excessive B3 or BIP bit
errors, the LCAS protocol
regards that this member
fails and deletes it from the
available members. If this
parameter is set to
Disabled, the LCAS
protocol does not monitor
the status of the B3 or BIP
bit errors of a VCTRUNK
member.
Min. Members - Transmit
Direction
2 to 256
Default: 256
When the LCAS is enabled,
the LCAS_PLCT alarm is
reported if certain members
in the transmit direction fail
and the number of valid
members is smaller than a
certain value. The Min.
Members - Transmit
Direction parameter
specifies the certain
number of the valid
members in the transmit
direction.
Min. Members - Receive
Direction
2 to 256
Default: 256
Specifies the minimum
number of members in the
receive direction. If the
LCAS is enabled and the
number of valid members is
less than the specified
value, an alarm is reported.

l In the case of internal ports, the parameters on the Bound Path tab page are listed in Table
28-21.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2592
Table 28-21 Parameters on the Bound Path tab page (internal port)
VCTRUNCK Port - Displays the number of the
VCTRUNK port.
Level - Specifies the level of the
VCTRUNK bound path.
Service Direction - Specifies the direction of
the Ethernet service.
Bound Path - Specifies the number of the
bound path, including the
VC4 path number and VC3
path number.
Bound Path Count - Displays the number of the
bound VCTRUNK ports.
Used Channel - Displays the channels in
use.
Activation Status - Displays whether the path
is active.

28.2.11 EAS2 Specifications
The technical specifications of the EAS2 include the parameters specified for optical interfaces,
dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Parameters Specified for Optical Interfaces
Table 28-22 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the EAS2.
Table 28-22 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the EAS2
Parameter Value
Transmission rate 10.3125 Gbit/s or 9.953 Gbit/s
Processing capability 2x10GE signals
Type of optical interface 10GBASE-LR/LW
Type of fiber Single-mode LC
range (nm)
1290 to 1330
Transmission distance (km) 10
power (dBm)
0.5
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2593
Parameter Value
power (dBm)
-8.2
Receiver sensitivity (dBm) -12.6
Minimum extinction ratio
(dB)
3.5
Connector type LC

Laser Safety Class
The safety class of the laser on the board is Class 1. The maximum launched optical power of
the optical interfaces is less than 10 dBm (10 mW).
Ethernet Performance Specifications
Figure 28-7 shows the connection for testing the throughput specifications, packet loss ratio in
the case of overloading, latency specifications, and back-to-back specifications of the EAS2.
Figure 28-7 Connection for testing the throughput specifications, packet loss ratio in the case
of overloading and latency specifications
Port 1 Port 2
Tested
equipment 1
Tested
equipment 2
Data network
performance
analyzer

Table 28-23 lists the throughput specifications of the EAS2. Table 28-24 lists the packet loss
ratio in the case of overloading of the EAS2. Table 28-25 lists the latency specifications of the
EAS2.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2594
NOTE
l The specifications vary according to the configuration and networking of the test environment and
the VC services bound on the VCG side. The specifications that are obtained in the actual environment
are used.
l The specifications in the following tables are obtained in the following scenario: EPL services are
configured and 64 VC-4s are bound on the 10xGE port.
l The data network performance is measured by using the SmartBits. The specification values in the
following tables are obtained by using the SmartFlow software of the SmartBits analyzer.
l The specific test results depend on the settings on the SmartFlow. The values listed in the following
tables are the values displayed on the SmartBits analyzer.
l In the following tables, the value such as (01,01,01) indicates the equipment No., slot No., and port
No. "(01,01,01) to (01,01,02)" and "(01,01,02) to (01,01,01)", however, indicate the forward and
reverse tests values, respectively.
Table 28-23 Throughput specifications of the EAS2
Frame Size
(byte)
Passed Rate
(%)
Tx Frames (pks/
sec)
Rx Frames (pks/
sec)
Total (%)
64 100.00000 14880952 14880952 100.00000
128 98.00000 8278145 8278145 100.00000
256 98.00000 4432624 4432624 100.00000
512 98.00000 2302025 2286453 99.32000
1024 97.00000 1161710 1156436 99.55000
1280 97.00000 932835 927296 99.41000
1518 97.00000 788146 783050 99.35000

Table 28-24 Packet loss ratio in the case of overloading of the EAS2
Frame Size
(byte)
Rate Tested
(%)
Tx Frames (pks/
sec)
Rx Frames (pks/
sec)
Total (%)
64 100.00000 14880952 14880952 0.00
128 100.00000 8445945 8445945 0.00
256 99.00000 4480286 4470526 0.21
512 98.00000 2302025 2286453 0.67
1024 97.00000 1161710 1156469 0.45
1280 97.00000 932835 927323 0.59
1518 97.00000 788146 783073 0.64

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2595
Table 28-25 Latency specifications of the EAS2
Frame
Size
(byte)
Rate
Tested
(%)
Tx
Frames
(pks/sec)
Rx Frames
(pks/sec)
Min
Latency
(us)
Ave
Latency
(us)
Max
Latency
(us)
64 96.00000 14204544 14204544 24.4 25.681 27.9
128 96.00000 8116883 8116883 24.6 25.944 28.1
256 96.00000 4340277 4340277 25 26.322 28.5
512 96.00000 2256317 2256317 25.9 27.176 29.3
1024 96.00000 1148897 1148897 27.7 28.949 31.2
1280 96.00000 923190 923190 28.6 29.802 32
1518 96.00000 780274 780274 29.4 30.562 32.8

The mechanical specifications of the EAS2 board are as follows:
l Dimensions : 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 254.1 mm (H)
l Weight : 1.1 kg (2.4 lb.)
Power Consumption
28.3 EGSH
EGSH: 16xGE Ethernet switching and processing board
Only one functional version of the EGSH board is available, that is, N1.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2596
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Subrack
N1E
GS
H
Y Y Y N N N

28.3.2 Application
The EGSH board is used in telecommunication domains such as Ethernet service access,
bandwidth management, and Ethernet service L2 switching.
Figure 28-8 shows the typical networking of the EGSH board. The board provides the following
functions: receives and converges Ethernet services; performs L2 switching of Ethernet data;
isolates Ethernet data ports; classifies the traffic; controls the data traffic; manages the VLAN;
configures data attributes such as the priority; encapsulates and decapsulates data; forms virtual
concatenation; maps and demaps SDH signals. In addition, the board can be interconnected with
the broadband access equipment and data communication equipment to provide a networkwide
solution.
Figure 28-8 Networking and application of the EGSH board
NE1
NE2 NE4
NE3
MSP ring
User A2
User B2
User B1
User A1
U2000
PORT 1
VLAN 100
PORT 2
VLAN 100
PORT 2
VLAN 100
PORT 1 VLAN 100
Service flow
OCS line board
Cross-connect and timing board
OCS data board

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2597
The EGSH board accesses multiple types of Ethernet services and provides various functions
and features such as the MPLS function, VLAN multicast function, QinQ function, and inter-
board link aggregation function.
Table 28-26 provides the functions and features of the EGSH.
Table 28-26 Functions and features of the EGSH
Function
and Feature
Description
Basic
functions
The board processes 16xGE services. It provides functions such as O/E
conversion, Ethernet frame processing, mapping, Layer 2 (L2) switching,
and overhead and pointer processing of the service signals. The board is
connected to the active and standby cross-connect boards through the
backplane. In this manner, data is exchanged and services are groomed.
Interface
types
l Supports the 1000 BASE-LX and 1000 BASE-SX optical interface.
l Port 6 and port 8 can work as the 1000 BASE-T electrical interface at the
same time.
l All the sixteen interfaces comply with IEEE 802.3z.
Functions
when being
used with an
interface
board
Transmits/Receives 16 channels of Ethernet signals through the interfaces
on the front panel.
Interface
characteristic
s
Working
modes
Auto-negotiation, 1000M full-duplex (Port 2 and 4 support
1000M full-duplex only).
Traffic
control at
ports
Auto-
negotiation
mode
Supported.
Non-
autonegotiation
mode
Supported.
Query/
Setting of
port status
Supported.
Query of
interface
types
Supported.
RMON
measurement
Supported.
Setting of
optical power
thresholds
Supported.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2598
Function
and Feature
Description
Hot-
swapping
SFP optical
module
Supported.
Service
categories
EPL service Supports the PORT-based transparent transmission.
EVPL service Supports PORT+VLAN-based EVPL services that use the
frame encapsulation formats of MartinioE and stack VLAN.
EPLAN
service
l Supports the L2 convergence and point-to-multipoint
(P2MP) convergence.
l Supports the L2 forwarding function.
l Supports switching on the client and SDH sides.
l Supports the self-learning of the source MAC address.
The capacity of the MAC address table is 32k. The aging
time of the MAC address can be set and queried.
l Supports the configuration of the static MAC route.
l Supports the query of the dynamic MAC address.
l Supports the creation, deletion, and query of the VB.
Only one VB is supported. The maximum number of
logical ports for one VB is 40.
l Supports the data isolation based on VB+VLAN.
l Queries the number of actually learned MAC addresses
based on VB+VLAN or VB+LP.
l The services that are based on the IEEE 802.1d MAC
bridge are referred to as EPLAN services.
EVPLAN
service
l Supports the data isolation based on VB+VLAN.
l Supports the EVPLAN services that are based on IEEE
802.1Q Virtual Bridge or IEEE 802.1ad Provider
Bridge.
Service
specifications
Formats of
Ethernet data
frames
IEEE 802.3 Supported.
Ethernet II Supported.
IEEE 802.1 q/p Supported.
Frame length
range
l Supports the setting of the frame length to a value
ranging from 1518 bytes to 9600 bytes.
l Supports a jumbo frame with a maximum length of 9600
bytes.
Bound
bandwidth
64 x VC-4, or 192 x VC-3
Mapping
granularities
Supports VC-4, VC-3, VC-4-Xv (X8), and VC-3-Xv (X
24) granularities.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2599
Function
and Feature
Description
Encapsulatio
n formats
HDLC Not supported.
LAPS Not supported.
GFP-F Supported.
MPLS
technology
Supported.
VLAN
technology
Supports a maximum of 4094 VLANs. The VLAN
technology complies with IEEE 802.1q/p.
Maximum
uplink
bandwidth
The maximum uplink bandwidth of the EGSH is 10 Gbit/s.
VCTRUNK
specifications
l The number of supported VCTRUNKs is 24.
l One VCTRUNK can be bound with a maximum of eight
VC-4s or 24 VC-3s.
Protection
schemes
DLAG Supported.
LCAS Dynamically increases or decreases the bandwidth and
protects the bandwidth in compliance with ITU-T G.7042.
LPT Supports the point-to-point (P2P) LPT and point-to-
multipoint (P2MP) LPT.
STP/RSTP Supports the broadcast packet suppression function and
rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP) that comply with IEEE
802.1w.
MSTP Supported.
LAG Supports manual link aggregation and static link
aggregation.
Supports the load sharing mode and load non-sharing mode.
ERPS Supported.
NOTE
ERPS cannot be used on the following bridges:
l IEEE 802.1d bridges
l IEEE 802.1ad bridges in SVL/Ingress filter disable mode
Clock
synchronizati
on
Synchronous
Ethernet
Only ports 2 and 4 supports the Synchronous Ethernet.
IEEE 1588v2 Only ports 2 and 4 supports the IEEE 1588 V2.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2600
Function
and Feature
Description
Maintenance
features
ETH-OAM l Supports the multicast continuity check (CC), unicast
loopback (LB), link trace (LT), network loop detection
(LD), auto-negotiation, fault diagnosis, and link
performance check.
l The ETH-OAM function complies with IEEE 802.1ag
and 802.3ah.
Test frame Supports test frames in Ethernet bearer mode.
Response to
ping
Not supported.
Port
mirroring
Supported.
Loopback
capability
PHY layer at
Ethernet ports
Supports inloops.
MAC layer at
Ethernet ports
Supports inloops.
VC-4 level Not supported.
Ethernet
performance
monitoring
(RMON)
Supports Ethernet performance monitoring at the port level.
Alarms and
performance
events
Reports various alarms and performance events, which
facilitates the management and maintenance of the
equipment.
QoS Supports the flow classification based on PORT, PORT+VLAN ID, PORT
+VLAN ID+VLAN PRI, Label Flow, or Label Exp Flow.
IGMP
snooping
Supported.
Traffic
control
Supports the port-based traffic control function that complies with IEEE
802.3x.
Traffic
monitoring
Supports port-based and VCTRUNK-based traffic monitoring.
SDH ASON Supported.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2601
The EGSH board consists of the interface module, 1588 clock processing module, L2 service
processing module, SDH encapsulation and mapping module, active/standby interface
converting module, logic control module, clock module, and power module.
The processing of 1xGE signal is considered as an example to describe the working principle
and signal flow of the EGSH board.
Figure 28-9 shows the function modules and signal flow of the EGSH board.
Figure 28-9 Function modules and signal flow of the EGSH board
GE
25
MHz
155
MHz
LOS
+3.3V Fuse
125
MHz
66
MHz
GE
O/E
conversion
E/O
conversion
1588 clock
processing
module
L2 service
processing
module
SDH
encapsulation
and mapping
module
Active/
standby
interface
converting
module
Cross-connect
unit
Backplane
Cross-connect
unit
Laser
shutdown
Logic and
control module
Clock module
Power
module
Power
module
Communication
Reference clock and frame header
SCC unit
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
SCC unit
Interface module

NOTE
Among the 16 ports of the board, only ports 2 and 4 support the 1588 clock processing module.
In the Receive Direction
The interface module receives the series signals from an external Ethernet device (such as the
Ethernet switch or router), decodes the signals, and converts the signals into parallel signals.
Then, the service processing module delimits the frames, strips the preamble code, terminates
the cyclic redundancy check (CRC) code, and collects the statistics of Ethernet performance.
The service processing module also classifies the traffic according to the service type and
configuration requirements (the packets in the formats of MPLS, L2 MPLS VPN, and Ethernet/
VLAN are supported). In addition, the service processing module adds the tunnel and VC tags
to the services according to the service configuration for mapping and forwarding the services.
At last, the encapsulation module encapsulates the Ethernet frames in the GFP-F format, and
sends the frames to the mapping module where the frames are mapped and are sent to the cross-
connect unit on the backplane through the active/standby interface converting module.
In the Transmit Direction
The cross-connect unit sends parallel signals to the encapsulation and mapping module through
the active/standby interface converting module for demapping and decapsulation. Then, the
service processing module determines a route for the signals according to the level of the
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2602
equipment on the network, and performs L2 processing of the data services according to the
service type and configuration requirements. The service processing module also delimits the
frames, adds the preamble code, computes the CRC code, and collects the statistics of Ethernet
performance. At last, the interface module converts the parallel signals into serial signals,
encodes the serial signals, and outputs the serial signals through the Ethernet interface.
Interface Module
In the receive direction, the interface module converts the optical signals from an external
Ethernet device (such as the Ethernet switch or router) into electrical signals, and sends the
electrical signals to the L2 service processing module.
In the transmit direction, the interface module converts the electrical signals from the L2 service
processing module into optical signals.
1588 Clock Processing Module
The board supports the synchronization protocol for two 1588 clocks. On the uplink, the 1588
clock processing module extracts service packets from the Ethernet data signals that it receives,
processes the packets, and transparently transmits the Ethernet data signals to the L2 service
processing module. The signal flow on the downlink reverses that on the uplink.
L2 Service Processing Module
This module provides functions such as L2 switching of the received and transmitted Ethernet
data services, port isolation, traffic classification, data traffic control, VLAN management, and
priority configuration.
SDH Encapsulation and Mapping Module
This module encapsulates the received data services in the GFP format, decapsulates the
transmitted data services in the GFP format, and maps and demaps the VC-3/4 service granules
in the SDH format.
Active/Standby Interface Converting Module
The active/standby interface module sends the encapsulated SDH service at the VC-3/VC-4 level
to the active and standby cross-connect boards, and selects the SDH service at the VC-3/VC-4
level sent from the active and standby cross-connect boards.
Logic Control Module
The logic control module controls the modules on the board and configures services for these
modules. In addition, the logic control module selects and traces the clock and header signal
sent from the active and standby clock boards.
Clock Module
The clock module traces the system reference clock and generates the clock signals required for
each chip. The clock frequency can be 66 MHz, 25 MHz, 125 MHz, or 155 MHz.
Power Supply Module
The power supply module provides the DC voltage required by each module on the board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2603
28.3.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces, and a bar code on the front panel of the EGSH board.
Figure 28-10 shows the front panel of the EGSH board.
Figure 28-10 Front panel of the EGSH board
EGSH
SMSFP WORK WITH
G.657A2 FIBER ONLY
G.657A2
2 TX
16 RX
RX 1
TX 15
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
SM SFP WORK WITH
G.657A2 FIBER ONLY
G.657A2

Indicators
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2604
Interfaces
There are 16 interfaces on the front panel of the EGSH board, and "16 SFP" is silkscreened under
the silkscreening for the indicator on the front panel.
Figure 28-11 Silk-screen

Table 28-27 Types and functions of the interfaces on the EGSH board
RX1RX16 LC Receives GE signals.
TX1TX16 LC Transmits GE signals.

NOTE
When the 1000BASE-LX optical interface board is used, the G.657A2 fiber jumper rather than the G.652D
fiber jumper is used if an optical attenuator is inserted into the transmit port. Otherwise, the cabinet door
cannot be closed. Figure 28-12 shows the G.657A2 fiber jumper and G.652D fiber jumper.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2605
Figure 28-12 G.657A2 fiber jumper and G.652D fiber jumper
50.75
58.25
42.5
G.657A2 fiber jumper
G.652D fiber jumper

28.3.6 DIP Switches and Fiber Jumpers
No DIP switch or fiber jumper for setting the board is equipped on the EGSH board.
28.3.7 Valid Slots
The EGSH board must be installed in a valid slot on a subrack. Otherwise, the board cannot
work normally..
Table 28-28 shows the valid slots for the EGSH board.
Table 28-28 Valid slots for the EGSH board
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
subrack
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
subrack
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
subrack
IU1 to IU8, and IU11 to IU18

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2606
28.3.8 Characteristic Code for the EGSH
The characteristic code of a board is the code after the board name in the bar code on the board.
The characteristic code of the EGSH board indicates the optical interface type of the board.
Table 28-29 provides the relationship between the characteristic code and optical interface type
of the EGSH board.
Table 28-29 Relationship between the characteristic code and optical interface type of the EGSH
board
Board Characteristic
Code
Optical Interface Type
N1EGSH10 10 1000 BASE-SX (0.5 km)
N1EGSH11 11 1000 BASE-LX (10 km)
N1EGSH12 12
1000 BASE-T & 1000 BASE-SX (0.5 km)
a
N1EGSH13 13
1000 BASE-T & 1000 BASE-LX (10 km)
b
a: The port 6 and port 8 interfaces on the EGSH board are 1000 BASE-T electrical interfaces,
and the other interfaces on the board are 1000 BASE-SX optical interfaces.
b: The port 6 and port 8 interfaces on the EGSH board are 1000 BASE-T electrical interfaces,
and the other interfaces on the board are 1000 BASE-LX optical interfaces.
The G.657A2 fiber jumper is required because the single-mode optical module is used over
the 1000 BASE-LX optical interface.

Table 28-30 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the EGSH board displayed on the NM
TX1/RX1 1
TX2/RX2 2
TX3/RX3 3
TX4/RX4 4
TX5/RX5 5
TX6/RX6 6
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2607
TX7/RX7 7
TX8/RX8 8
TX9/RX9 9
TX10/RX10 10
TX11/RX11 11
TX12/RX12 12
TX13/RX13 13
TX14/RX14 14
TX15/RX15 15
TX16/RX16 16

NOTE
28.3.10 Board Protection
The EGSH board supports the distributed link aggregation group (DLAG) protection. The
DLAG protection is a board-level port protection technology.
Figure 28-13 shows the slot configuration for the working and protection EGSH boards in the
OptiX OSN 8800.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2608
Figure 28-13 Slot configuration for the working EGSH board of a DLAG protection group
(A): Active (B): Standby
FAN
Fiber routing Fiber routing
FAN
EFI2
EF
I1
PIU PIU
A
U
X
S
T
G
A
U
X
S
T
G
PIU PIU STI ATE
X
C
H
/
X
C
M
X
C
H
/
X
C
M
S
C
C
S
C
C
E
G
S
H
(A)
E
G
S
H
(A)
E
G
S
H
(B)
E
G
S
H
(B)
IU9 IU10
IU20 IU21 IU23 IU24 IU25 IU26 IU22 IU27 IU28 IU29 IU31 IU32 IU33 IU34 IU30 IU35 IU36

In Table 28-31, the board in slot 5 protects the board in slot 3, and the board in slot 17 protects
the board in slot 14. DLAG protection is of board level and protects the services between the
ports configured in a protection group on the working and protection boards.
Table 28-31 Slot assignment for the EGSH board
Board Protection Group 1 Protection Group 2
EGSH (protection board) Slot 5 Slot 17
EGSH (working board) Slot 3 Slot 14

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2609
This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the EGSH board.
On the NMS user interface, Ethernet Interface of the EGSH board provides parameters
classified according to External Port and Internal Port. Regardless of an external port or
internal port, the parameter configuration window involves many tab pages. Table 28-32 lists
the tab pages in the parameter configuration window.
Table 28-32 Tabs of the parameter configuration windows for external port and internal port on
the EGSH board
Port Tab
External Port Basic Attributes
Flow Control
TAG Attributes
Network Attributes
Advanced Attributes
Internal Port TAG Attributes
Network Attributes
Encapsulation/Mapping
LCAS
Bound Path
Advanced Attributes

Each parameter of the EGSH on each tab page is described as follows.
l In the case of external ports, the parameters on the Basic Attributes tab page are listed in
Table 28-33.
Table 28-33 Parameters on the Basic Attributes tab page (external port)
Name For example, PORT-1 Specifies the name of a port.
The name can contain up to
32 characters in English or
16 characters in Chinese.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2610
Default: Disabled
The Enabled/Disabled
whether to enable a port. A
port can receive services if
this parameter is set to
Enabled but cannot receive
services if this parameter is
set to Disabled.
Working Mode Auto-Negotiation, 10M
Half-Duplex, 10M Full-
Duplex, 100M Half-
Duplex, 100M Full-
Duplex, 1000M Half-
Duplex, 1000M Full-
Duplex, 10GE Full-Duplex
LAN, 10GE Full-Duplex
WAN, 10GE Full-Duplex
WAN(SONET mode)
Specifies the working mode
of the Ethernet port on a
board. This parameter
determines the maximum
transmission rate and
communication mode of the
Ethernet port.
When setting this
parameter, you must ensure
the working modes of the
interconnected ports are the
same. Otherwise, the
Default: 1522
frame length supported by
the Ethernet port.
Port Physical Parameters - Displays the actual working
state of a port.
MAC Loopback Non-Loopback, Inloop,
Outloop
The MAC Loopback
MAC loopback state at an
looped path at the MAC
path.
See D.17 MAC Loopback
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2611
PHY Loopback Non-Loopback, Inloop,
Outloop
The PHY Loopback
PHY loopback state at an
looped path at the PHY
path.
See D.25 PHY Loopback
Physical Type - Displays the physical type
of port.
Logic Type SDH-OPPORT, SDH-
EPORT
Displays the logic type of
port.

l In the case of external ports, the parameters on the Flow Control tab page are listed in
Table 28-34.
Table 28-34 Parameters on the Flow Control tab page (external port)
Non-Autonegotiation
Flow Control Mode
Disabled, Enable
Symmetric Flow Control,
Send Only, Receive Only
Default: Disable
Non-Autonegotiation
Flow Control Mode is
selected when a port works
in non-autonegotiation
mode.
See D.23 Non-
Control Mode to obtain the
details.
Control Mode
Disabled, Enable
Dissymmetric Flow
Control, Enable Symmetric
Flow Control, Enable
Symmetric/Dissymmetric
Flow Control
Default: Disabled
negotiation mode.

l The parameters on the TAG Attributes tab page are listed in Table 28-35.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2612
Table 28-35 Parameters on the TAG tab page (external port)
Port - Displays the type of a
VCTRUNK port.
Default: Tag Aware
UNI.
Default: 1
The Default VLAN ID
packets.
Default: 0
The VLAN Priority
VLAN ID of a port.
Default: Enabled
The Entry Detection

l In the case of internal ports, the parameters on the TAG Attributes tab page are listed in
Table 28-36.
Table 28-36 Parameters on the TAG tab page (internal port)
either PORT or
VCTRUNk.
Name For example,
VCTRUNK-3
Specifies the name of a
VCTRUNK port. The name
can contain up to 32
characters in English or 16
characters in Chinese.
Default: Tag Aware
UNI.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2613
Default: 1
The Default VLAN ID
packets.
Default: 0
The VLAN Priority
VLAN ID of a port.
Default: Enabled
The Entry Detection

l The parameters on the Network Attributes tab page are listed in Table 28-37.
Table 28-37 Parameters on the Network Attributes tab page
either PORT or
VCTRUNk.
Port Attributes UNI, C-Aware, S-Aware,
NNI
Default: UNI
Specifies the position of the
port in the network.
Different port attributes
support different types of
packets.

in Table 28-38.
Table 28-38 Parameters on the Advanced Attributes tab page (external port)
Broadcast Packet
Suppression
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
The Broadcast Packet
Suppression parameter
suppress the traffic of
broadcast packets.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2614
Broadcast Packet
10% to 100% The Broadcast Packet
Suppression
Thresholdparameter
allocates the specified
bandwidth to the broadcast
packets. The bandwidth is
allocated on the basis of the
traffic proportion at the
port. If the bandwidth
allocated to the broadcast
packets reaches the
specified threshold, the port
discards the broadcast data
packets that are received.
Threshold of Port
0 to 1000
Default: 1000
The Threshold of Port
parameter specifies the data
flow threshold at external
physical ports.
Port Traffic Threshold
Time Window (Min)
0 to 30
Default: 0
Sets traffic threshold time
window for the external
port.
Default: Disabled
at the port.
Default: Enabled
Zero-Flow Monitor Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
Sets whether to monitor the
zero flow.
Zero-Flow Monitor
Interval (min)
1 to 30
Default: 15
Sets the time interval for the
zero-flow monitoring.

in Table 28-39.
Table 28-39 Parameters on the Advanced Attributes tab page (internal port)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2615
Default: Disabled
at the port.
Default: Enabled
Zero-Flow Monitor Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
Sets whether to monitor the
zero flow.
Zero-Flow Monitor
Interval (min)
1 to 30
Default: 15
Sets the time interval for the
zero-flow monitoring.

l In the case of internal ports, the parameters on the Encapsulation/Mapping tab page are
Table 28-40 Parameters on the Encapsulation/Mapping tab page (internal port)
Port - Displays the VCTRUNK
ports.
Mapping Protocol GFP
Default: GFP
Specifies the mapping
protocol adopted by the
VCTRUNK port.
Scramble Unscrambled, Scrambling
mode[X43+1], Scrambling
mode[X48+1]
[X43+1]
Specifies whether to
scramble the payload area
of the encapsulation
protocol and which
scramble mode is adopted.
Set Inverse Value for CRC - Specifies whether to set an
inverse value for the CRC
field of the HDLC or LAPS
protocol.
You can set this parameter
only when the mapping
protocol is HDLC or LAPS.
Default: FCS32
Specifies the length of the
protocol.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2616
FCS Calculated Bit
Sequence
Big endian, Little endian
Default: Big endian
Specifies the sequence of
mapping protocol.
Extension Header Option Yes, No
Default: No
Specifies whether the GFP
encapsulation protocol
supports the extension
header.

l In the case of internal ports, the parameters on the LCAS tab page are listed in Table
28-41.
Table 28-41 Parameters on the LCAS tab page (internal port)
Port VCTRUNKn Indicates the VCTRUNK
port. The letter n indicates
the number of the
VCTRUNK port.
Enabling LCAS Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
The Enabling LCAS
parameter can increase or
decrease the SDH network
capacity without affecting
the service. The capacity is
automatically decreased if a
member fails, and is
automatically increased if
the member recovers.
LCAS Mode Huawei Mode, Standard
Mode
Default: Huawei Mode
The LCAS Mode
sequence for the sink end to
respond to the MST and
Rs_Ack messages received
from the source end.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2617
Hold off Time(ms) 0 to 10000
Default: 2000
The Hold off Time(ms)
(LCAS) parameter is also
called HO Procedure
Timer Duration. It
specifies HO Procedure
Timer Duration of the
LCAS protocol. If the
LCAS coexists with
another network-level
protection scheme (for
example, MSP or SNCP),
you can set this parameter
to postpone the LCAS
switching.
WTR Time(s) 0 to 720
Default: 300
The WTR Time(s)
parameter is also called
WTR Procedure Timer
Duration. It specifies
WTR Procedure Timer
Duration of the LCAS
protocol. Set this parameter
to avoid impact caused by
the alarm jitter on the link
status.
TSD Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
The TSD parameter
specifies the B3 or BIP
error status of a
VCTRUNK member. TSD
stands for trail signal
degrade. When this
parameter is set to
Enabled and if a
VCTRUNK member has
excessive B3 or BIP bit
errors, the LCAS protocol
regards that this member
fails and deletes it from the
available members. If this
parameter is set to
Disabled, the LCAS
protocol does not monitor
the status of the B3 or BIP
bit errors of a VCTRUNK
member.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2618
Min. Members - Transmit
Direction
2 to 256
Default: 256
When the LCAS is enabled,
the LCAS_PLCT alarm is
reported if certain members
in the transmit direction fail
and the number of valid
members is smaller than a
certain value. The Min.
Members - Transmit
Direction parameter
specifies the certain
number of the valid
members in the transmit
direction.
Min. Members - Receive
Direction
2 to 256
Default: 256
Specifies the minimum
number of members in the
receive direction. If the
LCAS is enabled and the
number of valid members is
less than the specified
value, an alarm is reported.

l In the case of internal ports, the parameters on the Bound Path tab page are listed in Table
28-42.
Table 28-42 Parameters on the Bound Path tab page (internal port)
VCTRUNCK Port - Displays the number of the
VCTRUNK port.
Level - Specifies the level of the
VCTRUNK bound path.
Service Direction - Specifies the direction of
the Ethernet service.
Bound Path - Specifies the number of the
bound path, including the
VC4 path number and VC3
path number.
Bound Path Count - Displays the number of the
bound VCTRUNK ports.
Used Channel - Displays the channels in
use.
Activation Status - Displays whether the path
is active.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2619
28.3.12 EGSH Specifications
Specifications include optical specifications, electrical specifications, laser safety class,
mechanical specifications, and power consumption.
Table 28-43 lists the optical specifications of the EGSH board.
Table 28-43 Optical specifications of the EGSH board
Item Value
Type of optical
interface
1000BASE-LX (10 km) 1000BASE-SX (0.5 km)
Type of fiber Single-mode LC Multi-mode LC
Operating
wavelength range
(nm)
1270 to 1355 770 to 860
Launched optical
power range (dBm)
9 to 3 9.5 to 3.5
(dBm)
20 18
Minimum overload
(dBm)
3 0
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
9 9

Electrical Specifications
Table 28-44 lists the electrical specifications of the EGSH board.
Table 28-44 Electrical specifications of the EGSH board
Type of Interface Code Pattern
1000BASE-T, RJ45 4D-PAM5

NOTE
Only port 6 and port 8 of the EGSH board can work as the GE electrical interface.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2620
Laser Safety Class
The laser safety class of the optical interface is CLASS 1, indicating that the maximum output
optical power of each optical interface is less than 10 dBm (10 mW).
The mechanical specifications of the EGSH board are as follows:
l Dimensions: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 266.7 mm (H)
Power Consumption
28.4 SF64
SF64: 1xSTM-64 optical interface board with the FEC function
Only one functional version of the SF64 board is available, that is, N4.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
N4S
F64
Y Y Y N N N

28.4.2 Application
The SF64 board is a line board. The SF64 board can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment to
transmit and receive STM-64 FEC optical signals. The SF64 board converts the received optical
signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In
addition, the SF64 board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into
optical signals and transmits the optical signals.
Figure 28-14 shows the application of the SF64 board. The SF64 boards can form a ring network
or a chain network in the system.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2621
Figure 28-14 Networking and application of the SF64 board
NE1
NE2 NE4
NE3
MSP ring
Service flow
OCS line board
Cross-connect board

The SF64 board receives and transmits 1xSTM-64 FEC optical signals and processes overhead
bytes.
Table 28-45 Functions and features of the SF64 board
Function
and Feature
Description
Basic
functions
l Transmits and receives 1xSTM-64 FEC optical signals.
l Supports configuration of the normal FEC or enhanced FEC function.
Specification
s of the
optical
interface
l Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the
Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, and Ue-64.2e. The characteristics of the optical
interfaces comply with the standards defined by Huawei.
l Supports the output of the standard DWDM wavelengths that comply with
ITU-T G.692 and can be directly connected to the WDM equipment.
Specification
s of the
optical
module
l Supports XFP pluggable optical modules.
l Supports the detection and query of information about the optical module.
l Provides the ALS function. The optical interface supports the setting of
the on/off state of a laser.
Service
processing
Supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, VC-4 services, VC-4-4c
concatenation services, VC-4-16c concatenation services, and VC-4-64c
Clock
synchronizati
on
SDH Clock
Synchronization
Supported.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2622
Function
and Feature
Description
IEEE 1588v2 Supports the IEEE 1588 V2 time synchronization
feature.
Overhead
processing
l Processes the section overheads of the STM-64 signals.
l Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path
overheads.
l Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes.
l Supports one channel of ECC communication.
l Supports HWECC (default), IP, or OSI protocol stacks.
l Supports the 1.5 Mbit/s DCN.
Alarms and
performance
events
Reports various alarms and performance events.
Protection
schemes
l Supports the two-fiber ring MSP.
l Supports the four-fiber ring MSP.
l Supports the linear MSP.
l Supports the SNCP.
l Supports the SNCTP.
l Supports the fiber-shared virtual trail protection.
l Supports the fiber-shared MSP.
NOTE
Supports processes two sets of K bytes. One SF64 board supports a maximum of two
MSP rings.
Maintenance
features
l Supports inloops and outloops at optical interfaces.
l Supports inloops and outloops on VC-4 paths.
l Supports the function of automatically releasing service loopbacks after
the specified time expires.
l Supports warm resets and cold resets. The warm reset does not affect
services.
l Supports the query of the manufacturing information of the board.
l Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA.
l Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services.
l Supports the PRBS function.
l Supports the press-to-collect function in fault data collection.
Protocols or
standards
compliance
for transparent
transmission (non-
performance
monitoring)
ITU-T G.774.7
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2623
Function
and Feature
Description
(performance
monitoring)
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.783
ITU-T G.774.1
ITU-T G.774.2
ITU-T G.774.3
ITU-T G.774.4
ITU-T G.774.5
ITU-T G.774.6
ITU-T G.774.9
ITU-T G.774.10
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.825
ITU-T G.829
SDH ASON Supported

The SF64 board consists of the O/E converting module, MUX/DEMUX module, SDH overhead
processing module, logic and control module, and power module.
Figure 28-15 shows the function modules and signal flow of the SF64 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2624
Figure 28-15 Function modules and signal flow of the SF64 board
Logic and
control module
Cross-connect
unit A
SDH overhead
processing module
DCC
SCC unit
Communication
High-speed
bus
+3.3 V
-48 V/-60 V
Power
module
Fuse
SCC unit
Cross-connect
unit B
High-speed
bus
622 MHz
PLL
Clock unit
622 MHz Reference clock
K1 and K2
insertion/extraction
MSA HPT MST RST
-48 V/-60 V
Frame header
K1 and K2
Power
module
SCC unit
Backplane
10.71
Gbit/s
LOS
Laser shutdown
DEMU
X
IIC
10.71
Gbit/s
10.71
Gbit/s
10.71
Gbit/s
MUX/
DEMUX
O/E
SPI
E/O
O/E
converting
module
FEC
622 MHz
PLL
669 MHz
PLL
MUX
Clock unit
4x2.67G
bit/s
4x2.67G
bit/s
4x2.5G
bit/s
4x2.5G
bit/s
PLL: phase-locked loop SPI: SDH physical interface SDH: synchronous digital hierarchy
RST: regenerator section
termination
MST: multiplex section termination MSA: multiplex section adaptation
HPT: higher order path termination - -

O/E Converting Module
l In the receive direction, the module converts the received optical signals into electrical
signals.
l In the transmit direction, the module converts the electrical signals into SDH optical signals
and sends the SDH optical signals to fibers for transmission.
l Detects the R_LOS alarm and provides the function of shutting down the laser.
MUX/DEMUX Module
l In the receive direction, the DEMUX part demultiplexes the high-rate electrical signals into
multiple parallel electrical signals and restores the clock signal at the same time.
l In the transmit direction, the MUX part multiplexes the parallel electrical signals received
from the SDH overhead processing module into high-rate electrical signals.
SDH Overhead Processing Module
This module includes the RST, MST, MSA, and HPT sub-modules. This module provides the
inloop and outloop functions.
l RST sub-module
In the receive direction, the RST sub-module terminates the RSOH. That is, the RST
sub-module detects the frame alignment bytes (A1 and A2), descrambles all the bytes
except the first line of the RSOH, restores and checks the J0 byte, and checks the B1
byte.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2625
In the transmit direction, the RST sub-module generates the RSOH. That is, the RST
sub-module writes bytes such as A1, A2, and J0, calculates and writes the B1 byte, and
scrambles all the bytes except the first line of the RSOH.
l MST sub-module
In the receive direction, the MST sub-module terminates the MSOH. That is, the MST
sub-module generates the MS_AIS alarm and detects the MS_RDI alarm after detecting
the K2 byte, and detects the MS_REI alarm and generates the B2_EXC alarm after
checking the B2 byte.
In the transmit direction, the MST sub-module generates the MSOH. That is, the MST
sub-module writes bytes such as E2, D4-D12, K1, K2, S1, and M1, and calculates and
writes the B2 byte.
l MSA sub-module
In the receive direction, the MSA sub-module de-interleaves the AUG, divides an AUG
into N AU-4s, detects the AU_LOP alarm and the AU_AIS alarm, and performs pointer
justifications.
In the transmit direction, the MSA sub-module assembles the AUG and generates the
AU-4. N AU-4s are multiplexed into an AUG through byte interleaving.
l HPT sub-module
In the receive direction, the HPT sub-module terminates the POH. That is, the HPT sub-
module detects the HP_REI alarm after checking the B3 byte, generates the HP_TIM
alarm and the HP_SLM alarm and detects the HP_RDI alarm after detecting the J1 and
C2 bytes, and generates the HP_UNEQ alarm after detecting the C2 byte.
In the transmit direction, the HPT sub-module generates the POH. That is, the HPT sub-
module writes bytes such as J1 and C2, and calculates and writes the B3 byte.
l Manages and configures the other modules of the board.
l Performs inter-board communication through the internal Ethernet interface.
l Traces the clock signal from the active and standby clock units.
l Controls the laser.
l Selects the clock signal and frame header signal from the active and standby clock units.
l Controls the indicators on the board.
Power Module
require.
28.4.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label on the front panel of
the SF64 board.
Figure 28-16 shows the front panel of the SF64 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2626
Figure 28-16 Front panel of the SF64 board
SF64
SF64
OUT
IN
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT

Indicators
Interfaces
There is one optical interface on the front panel of the SF64 board. Table 28-46 lists the type
and function of the optical interface.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2627
Table 28-46 Type and function of the interface on the SF64 board
IN LC Receives optical signals.
OUT LC Transmits optical signals.

The SF64 board does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
28.4.7 Valid Slots
The SF64 board must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the SF64 board cannot
work normally.
Table 28-47 shows the valid slots for the SF64 board.
Table 28-47 Valid slots for the SF64 board
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
subrack
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
subrack
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
subrack
IU1IU8, and IU11IU18

28.4.8 Characteristic Code for the SF64
board. The characteristic code for the SF64 board indicates the type of optical interface.
Table 28-48 provides the relationship between the characteristic code for the SF64 board and
the type of optical interface.
Table 28-48 Relationship between the characteristic code for the SF64 board and the type of
optical interface
Board Characteristic Code Type of Optical Interface
N4SF6401M01 01M01 Fixed-wavelength optical
interface
N4SF6401 01 Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, and
Ue-64.2e

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2628
Table 28-49 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SF64 board displayed on the NM
IN/OUT 1

NOTE
This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the SF64 board.
Table 28-50 lists all the parameters of the SF64 board.
Table 28-50 Parameters of the SF64 board
on the line board.
VC3 Path - Displays all available VC3
paths.
Optical Interface Name For example, SDH-1 Specifies the name of an
optical interface.
Overhead Transfer Mode DCC Mode, GCC Mode Sets overhead transfer mode
of the optical interface.
MSP Sharing Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
The MSP Sharing parameter
determines whether multiple
multiplex section (MS)
protection groups can be
configured at the same
optical interface.
Laser Switch Off, On
Default: On
Specifies the laser state of the
line board. In general, the
parameter is set to On.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2629
Laser Transmission Distance
(m)
/ The Laser Transmission
Distance (m) parameter
indicates the valid distance
over which the laser sends a
signal. A line board uses
pluggable optical module and
the transmission distance is
determined by the type of the
pluggable optical module.
Optical (Electrical) Interface
Loopback
Outloop
Specifies the loopback state
of an SDH interface. In
general, this parameter is set
to Non-Loopback.
paths.
VC4 Loopback Non-Loopback, Inloop,
Outloop
Specifies the VC4 loopback
state on the line board. In
to Non-Loopback.
VC12 Channel - Displays all available VC12
channels.

28.4.11 SF64 Specifications
power consumption.
Table 28-51 lists the optical specifications of the SF64 board.
Table 28-51 Optical specifications of the SF64 board
Item Value
Nominal bit
rate
10.709 Gbit/s
Application
code
a
Ue-64.2c Ue-64.2d Ue-64.2e
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2630
Item Value
OBU101 (-28
dBm to -31
dBm)+
OAU103
b
+
DCU03 (60) +
MR2
OBU101 (-31
dBm to -34 dBm)
+ CRPC +
OAU103 +
DCU03 (60) +
DCU03 (60) +
DCU08 (10) +
MR2
OBU101 (-34
dBm to -37 dBm)
+ CRPC +
OAU103 +
DCU03 (60) +
DCU04 (80) +
MR2
OBU101 (-37
dBm to -40 dBm)
+ CRPC +
OAU103 +
DCU03 (60) +
DCU04 (80) +
DCU08 (10) +
MR2
Operating
wavelength
range (nm)
1550.12
Launched
optical
power range
(dBm)
c
1 to +2
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-19
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
0
Minimum
extinction
ratio (dB)
10.5
a: The numbers in the brackets indicate the corresponding parameter values. For example,
"OBU101 (-28 dBm to -31 dBm)" indicates that the optical power amplified by the OBU101
is -28 dBm to -31 dBm.
b: "OBU101 + OAU103" indicates that the specifications of the optical interface are measured
when the OBU101 and OAU103 are used.
c: The parameters are only for the optical modules. The parameters of the amplifier are not
provided.

Table 28-52 lists the specifications of the tunable XFP optical interfaces of the SF64 board.
Table 28-52 Specifications of the tunable XFP optical interfaces of the SF64 board
Item Value
Type of optical
module
1600 ps/nm - NRZ - tunable
Line code format NRZ - 80 channels tunable
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2631
Item Value
Maximum mean
launched power
(dBm)
3
Minimum mean
launched power
(dBm)
-1
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
9
Central wavelength
(THz)
192.10 to 196.05
Central wavelength
deviation (GHz)
5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width (nm)
0.3
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
(dB)
35
Dispersion tolerance
(ps/nm)
1600
Receiver type APD
Operating
wavelength range
(nm)
1260 to 1600
(FEC on) EOL
(dBm)
-24
Minimum overload
(dBm)
-7
Maximum
reflectance (dB)
-27

Table 28-53 lists the specifications of the colored optical interfaces of the SF64 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2632
Table 28-53 Specifications of the colored optical interfaces that comply with ITU-T G.692
Item Value
Nominal bit rate 10.709 Gbit/s
Dispersion limit (km) 40
Mean launched optical power (dBm) -1 to 2
Receiver sensitivity (dBm) -19
Minimum overload (dBm) 0
Maximum allowed dispersion (ps/nm) 800
Minimum extinction ratio (dB) 10

Laser Safety Class
The mechanical specifications of the SF64 board are as follows:
Power Consumption
Maximum power consumption at 55C (131F): 27.3 W
28.5 SF64A
SF64A: 1xSTM-64 optical interface board with the FEC function
Only one functional version of the SF64A board is available, that is, N1.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2633
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
N1S
F64
A
Y Y Y N N N

28.5.2 Application
The SF64A optical interface board is an OCS line board. It can be used in the OptiX OSN 8800
to receive and transmit STM-64 FEC optical signals. The SF64A board converts the received
optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side.
In addition, the SF64A board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into
Figure 28-17 shows the application of the SF64A board. The board supports the ring and chain
networking modes.
Figure 28-17 Networking and application of the SF64A board
NE1
NE2 NE4
NE3
MSP ring
Service flow
OCS line board
Cross-connect board

The SF64A board receives and transmits 1xSTM-64 FEC optical signals and processes overhead
bytes.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2634
Table 28-54 Functions and features of the SF64A board
Function
and
Feature
Description
Basic
functions
Transmits and receives 1xSTM-64 FEC optical signals.
Specificatio
ns of the
optical
interface
l Supports the output of the DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with
l Supports adjustable wavelengths in DWDM applications.
Specificatio
ns of the
optical
module
l Supports fixed optical modules.
l Provides the ALS function. The optical interface supports the setting of the
on/off state of a laser.
Service
processing
Clock
synchroniza
tion
SDH Clock
Synchronization
Supported.
IEEE 1588v2 Not supported.
Overhead
processing
overheads.
Alarms and
performanc
e events
Reports various alarms and performance events to facilitate the management
and maintenance.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2635
Function
and
Feature
Description
Protection
schemes
l Supports the fiber-shared virtual trail protection
l Supports the optical-path-shared MSP.
NOTE
Supports processes two sets of K bytes. One SF64A supports a maximum of two MSP
protection rings.
Maintenanc
e features
services.
Protocols or
standards
compliance
transparent transmission
(non-performance
monitoring)
ITU-T G.774.7
service processing
(performance monitoring)
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.783
ITU-T G.774.1
ITU-T G.774.2
ITU-T G.774.3
ITU-T G.774.4
ITU-T G.774.5
ITU-T G.774.6
ITU-T G.774.9
ITU-T G.774.10
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.825
ITU-T G.829
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2636
Function
and
Feature
Description
SDH ASON Supported

The SF64A board consists of the O/E converting module, MUX/DEMUX module, SDH
overhead processing module, logic and control module, DC/DC converter, and other modules.
Figure 28-18 shows the function modules and signal flow of the SF64A board.
Figure 28-18 Function modules and signal flow of the SF64A board
DCC
LOS
+3.3V
-48V/-60V Fuse
MSA HPT MST RST
MUX
DE-
MUX
IIC
-48V/-60V
O/E
S
P
I
E/O
10.71
Gbit/s
FEC
622MHz
16x669
Mbit/s
10.71
Gbit/s
10.71
Gbit/s
10.71
Gbit/s
622MHz PLL
622MHz PLL
16x669
Mbit/s
16x622
Mbit/s
16x622
Mbit/s
669MHzPLL
MUX/
DEMUX
module
Logic and
control module
Cross-connect unit A
SDH overhead
processing module
K1 and K2 insertion/
extraction
SCC unit
Laser shutdown
SCC unit
High-
speed bus
Cross-connect unit B
Clock unit
Reference
clock
K1 and K2
High-
speed bus
O/E
converting
module
Backplane
Communication
Frame header
Power
module
Power
module
SCC unit
Clock unit
termination
HPT: higher order path termination IIC: inter-integrated circuit -

The function modules are described as follows:
signals.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2637
MUX/DEMUX Module
l RST sub-module
byte.
l MST sub-module
writes the B2 byte.
l MSA sub-module
justifications.
l HPT sub-module
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2638
Power Module
require.
28.5.5 Front Panel
the SF64A board.
Figure 28-19 shows the front panel of the SF64A board.
Figure 28-19 Front panel of the SF64A board
SF64A
SF64A
ACT
PROG
STAT
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT
IN
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2639
Indicators
Interfaces
There is one optical interface on the front panel of the SF64A board. Table 28-55 lists the type
Table 28-55 Type and function of the optical interface on the SF64A board

The SF64A board does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
28.5.7 Valid Slots
The SF64A board must be installed in a valid slot on a subrack. Otherwise, the board cannot
work normally.
Table 28-56 shows the valid slots for the SF64A board.
Table 28-56 Valid slots for the SF64A board
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
subrack
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
subrack
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
subrack

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2640
28.5.8 Characteristic Code for the SF64A
The characteristic code of the SF64A board indicates the optical interface type of the board.
of the SF64A board.
Table 28-57 Relationship between the characteristic code and optical interface type of the
SF64A board
Board Characteristic Code Optical Interface Type
N1SF64A01 01 Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d,
Ue-64.2e

Table 28-58 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SF64A board displayed on the NM
IN/OUT 1

NOTE
This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the SF64A board.
Table 28-59 lists all the parameters of the SF64A board.
Table 28-59 Parameters of the SF64A board
on the line board.
paths.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2641
optical interface.
Default: Disabled
optical interface.
Default: On
(m)
Loopback
Outloop
to Non-Loopback.
paths.
Outloop
to Non-Loopback.
channels.

28.5.11 SF64A Specifications
power consumption.
Table 28-60 lists the optical specifications of the SF64A board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2642
Table 28-60 Optical specifications of the SF64A board
Item Value
Nominal bit
rate
10.709 Gbit/s
Application
code
a
Ue-64.2c Ue-64.2d Ue-64.2e
OBU101 (-29
dBm to -26
dBm) +
OAU103
b
+
DCU03 (60) +
DCU04 (80) +
MR2
OBU103 (-28
dBm to -25 dBm)
+ OAU103 +
DCU03 (60) +
DCU04 (80) +
DCU08 (10) +
MR2
OBU101 (-34.6
dBm to -32 dBm)
+ CRPC +
OAU103 +
DCU04 (80) +
DCU04 (80) +
MR2
OBU101 (-37.9
dBm to -34.9
dBm) + CRPC +
OAU103 +
DCU04 (80) +
DCU04 (80) +
DCU08 (10) +
MR2
Operating
wavelength
range (nm)
1550.12
Launched
optical
power range
(dBm)
c
1 to +2
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-19
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
0
Minimum
extinction
ratio (dB)
10.5
provided.

Table 28-61 lists the specifications of the colored optical interfaces of the SF64A board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2643
Item Value
Mean launched optical power (dBm) 3 to 2
Receiver sensitivity (dBm) 19
Minimum extinction ratio (dB) 13.5

Laser Safety Class
The mechanical specifications of the SF64A board are as follows:
Power Consumption
28.6 SFD64
SFD64: 2xSTM-64 optical interface board with the FEC function
Only one functional version of the SFD64 board is available, that is, N4.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2644
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
N4S
FD6
4
Y Y Y N N N

28.6.2 Application
The SFD64 board is a line board. The SFD64 board can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment
to transmit and receive STM-64 FEC optical signals. The SFD64 board converts the received
In addition, the SFD64 board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into
Figure 28-20 shows the application of the SFD64 board. The SFD64 boards can form a ring
network or a chain network in the system.
Figure 28-20 Networking and application of the SFD64 board
NE1
NE2 NE4
NE3
MSP ring
Service flow
OCS line board
Cross-connect board

The SFD64 board receives and transmits 2xSTM-64 FEC optical signals and processes overhead
bytes.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2645
Table 28-62 Functions and features of the SFD64 board
Function
and
Feature
Description
Basic
functions
l Transmits and receives 2xSTM-64 FEC optical signals.
l Supports configuration of the normal FEC or enhanced FEC function.
Specificati
ons of the
optical
interface
l Supports the output of the standard DWDM wavelengths that comply with
Specificati
ons of the
optical
module
Service
processing
Clock
synchroniz
ation
SDH Clock Synchronization Supported.
IEEE 1588v2 Supports the IEEE 1588 V2 time
synchronization feature.
Overhead
processing
overheads.
l Supports two channels of ECC communication.
Alarms and
performanc
e events
Protection
schemes
NOTE
Supports processes four sets of K bytes. A single optical interface can process two sets of
K bytes. One SFD64 board supports a maximum of four MSP rings.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2646
Function
and
Feature
Description
Maintenan
ce features
l Supports the function of automatically releasing service loopbacks after the
specified time expires.
services.
Protocols
or
standards
compliance
ITU-T G.774.7
service processing
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.783
ITU-T G.774.1
ITU-T G.774.2
ITU-T G.774.3
ITU-T G.774.4
ITU-T G.774.5
ITU-T G.774.6
ITU-T G.774.9
ITU-T G.774.10
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.825
ITU-T G.829
SDH
ASON
Supported

The SFD64 board consists of the O/E converting module, MUX/DEMUX module, SDH
overhead processing module, logic and control module, and power module.
Figure 28-21 shows the function modules and signal flow of the SFD64 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2647
Figure 28-21 Function modules and signal flow of the SFD64 board
Logic and
control module
Cross-connect
unit A
SDH overhead
processing module
DCC
SCC unit
Communication
High-speed
bus
+3.3 V
-48 V/-60 V
Power
module
Fuse
SCC unit
Cross-connect
unit B
High-speed
bus
622 MHz
PLL
Clock unit
622 MHz Reference clock
K1 and K2
MSA HPT MST RST
-48 V/-60 V
Frame header
K1 and K2
Power
module
SCC unit
Backplane
10.71
Gbit/s
LOS
Laser shutdown
DEMU
X
IIC
10.71
Gbit/s
10.71
Gbit/s
10.71
Gbit/s
MUX/
DEMUX
O/E
SPI
E/O
O/E
converting
module
FEC
622 MHz
PLL
669 MHz
PLL
MUX
Clock unit
4x2.67G
bit/s
4x2.67G
bit/s
4x2.5G
bit/s
4x2.5G
bit/s
termination

signals.
MUX/DEMUX Module
l RST sub-module
byte.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2648
l MST sub-module
writes the B2 byte.
l MSA sub-module
justifications.
l HPT sub-module
Power Module
require.
28.6.5 Front Panel
the SFD64 board.
Figure 28-22 shows the front panel of the SFD64 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2649
Figure 28-22 Front panel of the SFD64 board
SFD64
SFD64
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
T
X
1
R
X
1
T
X
2
R
X
2
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT

Indicators
Interfaces
There is one optical interface on the front panel of the SFD64 board. Table 28-63 lists the type
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2650
Table 28-63 Type and function of the interface on the SFD64 board
RX1RX2 LC Receives optical signals.
TX1TX2 LC Transmits optical signals.

The SFD64 board does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
28.6.7 Valid Slots
The SFD64 board must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the SFD64 board
cannot work normally.
Table 28-64 shows the valid slots for the SFD64 board.
Table 28-64 Valid slots for the SFD64 board
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
subrack
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
subrack
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
subrack

28.6.8 Characteristic Code for the SFD64
board. The characteristic code for the SFD64 board indicates the type of optical interface.
Table 28-65 provides the relationship between the characteristic code for the SFD64 board and
Table 28-65 Relationship between the characteristic code for the SFD64 board and the type of
optical interface
N4SFD6401M01 01M01 Fixed-wavelength optical
interface
N4SFD6401 01 Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, and
Ue-64.2e

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2651
Table 28-66 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SFD64 board displayed on the NM
RX1/TX1 1
RX2/TX2 2

NOTE
This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the SFD64 board.
Table 28-67 lists all the parameters of the SFD64 board.
Table 28-67 Parameters of the SFD64 board
on the line board.
paths.
optical interface.
Default: On
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2652
(m)
Loopback
Outloop
to Non-Loopback.
paths.
Outloop
to Non-Loopback.
channels.

28.6.11 SFD64 Specifications
power consumption.
Table 28-68 lists the optical specifications of the SFD64 board.
Table 28-68 Optical specifications of the SFD64 board
Item Value
Nominal bit
rate
10.709Gbit/s
Application
code
a
Ue-64.2c Ue-64.2d Ue-64.2e
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2653
Item Value
OBU101 (-28
dBm to -31
dBm)+
OAU103
b
+
DCU03 (60) +
MR2
OBU101 (-31
dBm to -34 dBm)
+ CRPC +
OAU103 +
DCU03 (60) +
DCU03 (60) +
DCU08 (10) +
MR2
OBU101 (-34
dBm to -37 dBm)
+ CRPC +
OAU103 +
DCU03 (60) +
DCU04 (80) +
MR2
OBU101 (-37
dBm to -40 dBm)
+ CRPC +
OAU103 +
DCU03 (60) +
DCU04 (80) +
DCU08 (10) +
MR2
Operating
wavelength
range (nm)
1550.12
Launched
optical
power range
(dBm)
c
1 to +2
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-19
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
0
Minimum
extinction
ratio (dB)
10.5
provided.

Table 28-69 lists the specifications of the tunable XFP optical interfaces of the SFD64 board.
Table 28-69 Specifications of the tunable XFP optical interfaces of the SFD64 board
Item Value
Type of optical
module
1600 ps/nm - NRZ - tunable
Line code format NRZ - 80 channels tunable
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2654
Item Value
Maximum mean
launched power
(dBm)
3
Minimum mean
launched power
(dBm)
-1
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
9
Central wavelength
(THz)
192.10 to 196.05
Central wavelength
deviation (GHz)
5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width (nm)
0.3
Minimum side mode
suppression ratio
(dB)
35
Dispersion tolerance
(ps/nm)
1600
Receiver type APD
Operating
wavelength range
(nm)
1260 to 1600
(FEC on) EOL
(dBm)
-24
Minimum overload
(dBm)
-7
Maximum
reflectance (dB)
-27

Table 28-70 lists the specifications of the colored optical interfaces of the SFD64 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2655
Item Value
Minimum extinction ratio (dB) 10

Laser Safety Class
The mechanical specifications of the SFD64 board are as follows:
Power Consumption
Typical power consumption at 25C (77F): 36.4 W
28.7 SL64
SL64: 1xSTM-64 optical interface board
Only one functional version of the SL64 board is available, that is, N4.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2656
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
N4S
L64
Y Y Y N N N

28.7.2 Application
The SL64 board is a line board. The SL64 board can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment to
transmit and receive STM-64 optical signals. The SL64 board converts the received optical
addition, the SL64 board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into
Figure 28-23 shows the application of the SL64 board. The SL64 boards can form a ring network
or a chain network in the system.
Figure 28-23 Networking and application of the SL64 board
NE1
NE2 NE4
NE3
MSP ring
Service flow
OCS line board
Cross-connect board

The SL64 board receives and transmits 1xSTM-64 optical signals and processes overhead bytes.
Table 28-71 Functions and features of the SL64 board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic
functions
Transmits and receives 1xSTM-64 optical signals.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2657
Function and
Feature
Description
Specifications
of the optical
interface
l The N4SL64 board supports the I-64.1, S-64.2b, Le-64.2, P1L1-2D2,
and V-64.2b optical interfaces. The characteristics of the optical
interfaces of the I-64.1, S-64.2b, Le-64.2, and V-64.2b types comply
with ITU-T G.691. The characteristics of the optical interface of the
P1L1-2D2 type comply with ITU-T G.959.
l Supports the output of the DWDM standard wavelengths that comply
with ITU-T G.692 and can be directly connected to the WDM
equipment.
Specifications
of the optical
module
l Supports the detection and query of information about the optical
module.
Service
processing
Clock
synchronizatio
n
SDH Clock
Synchronization
Supported.
IEEE 1588v2 Supports the IEEE 1588 V2 time synchronization
feature.
Overhead
processing
overheads.
Alarms and
performance
events
Protection
schemes
NOTE
Supports processes two sets of K bytes. One SL64 supports a maximum of two MSP
rings.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2658
Function and
Feature
Description
Maintenance
features
services.
Protocols or
standards
compliance
Protocols or
standards for
transparent
transmission (non-
performance
monitoring)
ITU-T G.774.7
Protocols or
processing
(performance
monitoring)
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.783
ITU-T G.774.1
ITU-T G.774.2
ITU-T G.774.3
ITU-T G.774.4
ITU-T G.774.5
ITU-T G.774.6
ITU-T G.774.9
ITU-T G.774.10
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.825
ITU-T G.829
SDH ASON Supported

The SL64 board consists of the O/E converting module, MUX/DEMUX module, SDH overhead
processing module, logic and control module, DC/DC converter, and other modules.
Figure 28-24 shows the function modules and signal flow of the SL64 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2659
Figure 28-24 Function modules and signal flow of the SL64 board
Logic and
control module
Cross-connect
unit A
SDH overhead
processing module
DCC
SCC unit
Communication
High-speed
bus
+3.3 V
-48 V/-60 V
Power
module
Fuse
Cross-connect
unit B
High-speed
bus
Clock unit
622 MHz
Reference clock
K1 and K2
MSA HPT MST RST
-48 V/-60 V
Frame header
K1 and K2
Power
module
SCC unit
Backplane
9.953
Gbit/s
16x622
Mbit/s
LOS
Laser shutdown
DEMU
X
IIC
9.953
Gbit/s
9.953
Gbit/s
9.953
Gbit/s
16x622
Mbit/s
MUX/
DEMUX
O/E
SPI
E/O
O/E
converting
module
622 MHz
PLL
MUX
Clock unit
SCC unit
termination

signals.
MUX/DEMUX Module
l RST sub-module
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2660
byte.
l MST sub-module
writes the B2 byte.
l MSA sub-module
justifications.
l HPT sub-module
Power Module
require.
28.7.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces, a bar code, a laser safety class label, and an APD alarm label
on the front panel of the SL64 board.
Figure 28-25 shows the front panel of the SL64 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2661
Figure 28-25 Appearance of the front panel of the SL64 board
SL64
SL64
OUT
IN
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT

Indicators
Interfaces
There is one optical interface on the front panel of the SL64 board. Table 28-72 lists the type
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2662
Table 28-72 Type and function of the interface on the SL64 board

The SL64 board does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
28.7.7 Valid Slots
The SL64 board must be installed in a valid slot on a subrack. Otherwise, the board cannot work
normally.
Table 28-73 shows the valid slots for the SL64 board.
Table 28-73 Valid slots for the SL64 board
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
subrack
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
subrack
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
subrack

28.7.8 Characteristic Code for the SL64
board. The characteristic code for the SL64 board indicates the type of optical interface.
Table 28-74 provides the relationship between the characteristic code for the SL64 board and
Table 28-74 Relationship between the characteristic code for the SL64 board and the type of
optical interface
N4SL6401M01 01M01 Fixed-wavelength optical
interface
N4SL6401 01 I-64.1
N4SL6402 02 S-64.2b
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2663
N4SL6403 03 P1L1-2D2
N4SL6404 04 V-64.2b
N4SL6405 05 Le-64.2

Table 28-75 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SL64 board displayed on the NM
IN/OUT 1

NOTE
This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the SL64 board.
Table 28-76 lists all the parameters of the SL64 board.
Table 28-76 Parameters of the SL64 board
on the line board.
paths.
optical interface.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2664
Default: Disabled
optical interface.
Default: On
(m)
Loopback
Outloop
to Non-Loopback.
paths.
Outloop
to Non-Loopback.
channels.

28.7.11 SL64 Specifications
power consumption.
Table 28-77 lists the optical specifications of the SL64 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2665
Table 28-77 Optical specifications of the SL64 board
Item Value
Nominal bit
rate
9953280 kbit/s
Application
code
I-64.1 S-64.2b P1L1-2D2 Le-64.2 V-64.2b
(OBU101 +
OBU101 +
DCU +
MR2)
a
Transmissio
n distance
(km)
0 to 2 2 to 40 40 to 80 35 to 60 80 to 120
Type of fiber Single-mode
LC
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode
LC
Operating
wavelength
range (nm)
1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565 1550.12
Mean
launched
optical
power (dBm)
-6 to -1 -1 to +2 0 to +4 +2 to +4 -1 to 2
(without the
OBU, DCU,
or MR2)
16 (with the
OBU, DCU,
or MR2)
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-11 -14 -24 -21 -17 (without
the OBU,
DCU, or
MR2)
-26 (with the
OBU, DCU,
or MR2)
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
-1 -1 -7 -8 -1
Minimum
extinction
ratio (dB)
6 8.2 9 8.2 10.5
a: "OBU101 + OBU101 + DCU + MR2" indicates that the specifications of the V-64.2b optical
interface are measured when the OBU, DCU, and MR2 are used.

Table 28-78 lists the specifications of the colored optical interfaces of the SL64 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2666
Item Value
Nominal bit rate 9953280 kbit/s
Minimum overload (dBm) -1

Laser Safety Class
The mechanical specifications of the SL64 board are as follows:
Power Consumption
28.8 SLD64
SLD64: 2xSTM-64 optical interface board
Only one functional version of the SLD64 board is available, that is, N4.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2667
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
N4S
LD6
4
Y Y Y N N N

28.8.2 Application
The SLD64 board is a line board. The SLD64 board can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment
to transmit and receive STM-64 optical signals. The SLD64 board converts the received optical
addition, the SLD64 board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into
Figure 28-26 shows the application of the SLD64 board. The SLD64 boards can form a ring
Figure 28-26 Networking and application of the SLD64 board
NE1
NE2 NE4
NE3
MSP ring
Service flow
OCS line board
Cross-connect board

The SLD64 board receives and transmits 2xSTM-64 optical signals, processes overhead bytes,
and performs the MSP protection.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2668
Table 28-79 Functions and features of the SLD64 board
Function
and
Feature
Description
Basic
functions
Specificatio
ns of the
optical
interface
Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the I-64.1 and
S-64.2b. The characteristics of the optical interfaces comply with ITU-T G.
691.
Specificatio
ns of the
optical
module
Service
processing
Clock
synchroniza
tion
SDH Clock
Synchronization
Supported.
Overhead
processing
overheads.
l Supports two channels of ECC communication.
Alarms and
performance
events
Protection
schemes
NOTE
Supports processes four sets of K bytes. A single optical interface can process two sets
of K bytes. One SLD64 board supports a maximum of four MSP rings
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2669
Function
and
Feature
Description
Maintenanc
e features
services.
Protocols or
standards
compliance
transparent transmission
(non-performance
monitoring)
ITU-T G.774.7
service processing
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.783
ITU-T G.774.1
ITU-T G.774.2
ITU-T G.774.3
ITU-T G.774.4
ITU-T G.774.5
ITU-T G.774.6
ITU-T G.774.9
ITU-T G.774.10
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.825
ITU-T G.829
SDH ASON Supported

The SLD64 board consists of the O/E converting module, MUX/DEMUX module, SDH
Figure 28-27 shows the function modules and signal flow of the SLD64 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2670
Figure 28-27 Function modules and signal flow of the SLD64 board

Logic and
control module
Cross-connect
unit A
SDH overhead
processing module
DCC
SCC unit
Communication
High-speed
bus
+3.3 V
-48 V/-60 V
Power
module
Fuse
Cross-connect
unit B
High-speed
bus
622 MHz
Reference clock
K1 and K2
MSA HPT MST RST
-48 V/-60 V
Frame header
Clock unit
K1 and K2
Power
module
SCC unit
Backplane
9.953
Gbit/s
16x622
Mbit/s
LOS
Laser shutdown
DEMUX
IIC
9.953
Gbit/s
9.953
Gbit/s
9.953
Gbit/s
16x622
Mbit/s
MUX/DE
MUX
O/E
converting
module
.

.

.

.
O/E
E/O
SPI
O/E
SPI
E/O
622 MHz
PLL
MUX
Clock unit
SCC unit
termination

signals.
MUX/DEMUX Module
l RST sub-module
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2671
byte.
l MST sub-module
writes the B2 byte.
l MSA sub-module
justifications.
l HPT sub-module
Power Module
require.
28.8.5 Front Panel
the SLD64 board.
Figure 28-28 shows the front panel of the SLD64 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2672
Figure 28-28 Front panel of the SLD64 board
SLD64
SLD64
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
T
X
1
R
X
1
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
T
X
2
R
X
2
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT

Indicators
Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the front panel of the SLD64 board. Table 28-80 lists the
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2673
Table 28-80 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SLD64 board

The SLD64 board does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
28.8.7 Valid Slots
The SLD64 board must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the SLD64 board
cannot work normally.
Table 28-81 shows the valid slots for the SLD64 board.
Table 28-81 Valid slots for the SLD64 board
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
subrack
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
subrack
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
subrack

28.8.8 Characteristic Code for the SLD64
board. The characteristic code for the SLD64 board indicates the type of optical interface.
Table 28-82 provides the relationship between the characteristic code for the SLD64 board and
Table 28-82 Relationship between the characteristic code for the SLD64 board and the type of
optical interface
N4SLD6401 01 I-64.1
N4SLD6402 02 S-64.2b

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2674
Table 28-83 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SLD64 board displayed on the NM
RX1/TX1 1
RX2/TX2 2

NOTE
This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the SLD64 board.
Table 28-84 lists all the parameters of the SLD64 board.
Table 28-84 Parameters of the SLD64 board
on the line board.
paths.
optical interface.
Default: Disabled
optical interface.
Default: On
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2675
(m)
Loopback
Outloop
to Non-Loopback.
paths.
Outloop
to Non-Loopback.
channels.

28.8.11 SLD64 Specifications
power consumption.
Table 28-85 lists the optical specifications of the SLD64 board.
Table 28-85 Optical specifications of the SLD64 board
Item Value
Nominal bit
rate
9953280 kbit/s
Application
code
I-64.1 S-64.2b
Transmission
distance (km)
0 to 2 2 to 40
Type of fiber Single-mode LC Single-mode LC
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2676
Item Value
Operating
wavelength
range (nm)
1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565
Mean
launched
optical power
(dBm)
-6 to -1 -1 to +2
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-11 -14
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
-1 -1
Minimum
extinction
ratio (dB)
6 8.2

Laser Safety Class
The mechanical specifications of the SLD64 board are as follows:
Power Consumption
28.9 SLH41
SLH41: 16xSTM-4/STM-1 optical/electrical interface board
Only one functional version of the SLH41 board is available, that is, N3.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2677
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
N3S
LH4
1
Y Y Y N N N

28.9.2 Application
The SLH41 optical interface board is an OCS line board. It can be used in the OptiX OSN 8800
to receive and transmit STM-1/STM-4 optical signals. The SLH41 board converts the received
In addition, the SLH41 board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side
into optical signals and transmits the optical signals.
Figure 28-29 shows the application of the SLH41 board. The board supports the ring and chain
networking modes.
Figure 28-29 Networking and application of the SLH41 board
NE1
NE2 NE4
NE3
SNCP ring
Service flow
OCS line board
Cross-connect and timing board

The SLH41 board transmits and receives 16xSTM-1/STM-4 optical signals or 16xSTM-1
electrical signals, performs O/E conversion for the STM-1 or STM-4 optical signals, extracts
and inserts overhead bytes, and generates alarm signals on the line.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2678
Table 28-86 Functions and features of the SLH41 board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic functions Transmits and receives 16xSTM-1/STM-4 optical signals, or 16xSTM-1
electrical signals.
Specifications
of the optical
interface
l The 16xSTM-1/STM-4 optical module can be used.
When the STM-1 optical module is used, the SLH41 board supports
the optical interfaces of the S-1.1 type. The characteristics of the
optical interfaces of the S-1.1 type comply with ITU-T G.957.
When the STM-4 optical module is used, the SLH41 board supports
the optical interface of the S-4.1 type. The characteristics of the
optical interface of the S-4.1 type comply with ITU-T G.957.
The optical interfaces are adaptive. The SLH41 board supports
hybrid configuration of STM-1/STM-4 optical interfaces.
l The 16xSTM-1 electrical module can be used.
Specifications
of the optical
module
l Supports SFP pluggable optical/electrical module.
l Supports the detection and query of information about the optical
module.
Service
processing
l When the STM-1 optical/electrical module is used, the SLH41 board
supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, and VC-4 services.
l When the STM-4 optical module is used, the SLH41 board supports the
VC-12 services, VC-3 services, VC-4 services, and VC-4-4c
Clock
synchronizatio
n
SDH Clock
Synchronization
Supported.
IEEE 1588v2 Only interfaces 1-4 supports the IEEE 1588 V2 time
Overhead
processing
l Processes the section overheads of the STM-1 signals or STM-4 signals.
overheads.
l Supports sixteen channels of ECC communication. Port 1 to port 8
support the ECC communication by using bytes D1D12. Port 9 to port
16 support the ECC communication by using bytes D4D12.
Alarms and
performance
events
Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2679
Function and
Feature
Description
Protection
schemes
l Supports the two-fiber ring MSP in the case of STM-4 interfaces.
Maintenance
features
l Supports inloops and outloops at optical/electrical interfaces.
services.
Protocols or
standards
compliance
Protocols or
standards for
transparent
transmission (non-
performance
monitoring)
ITU-T G.774.7
Protocols or
standards for
service processing
(performance
monitoring)
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.783
ITU-T G.774.1
ITU-T G.774.2
ITU-T G.774.3
ITU-T G.774.4
ITU-T G.774.5
ITU-T G.774.6
ITU-T G.774.9
ITU-T G.774.10
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.825
ITU-T G.829
SDH ASON Supported

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2680
The SLH41 board consists of the O/E converting module, CDR module, SDH overhead
processing module, logic and control module, DC/DC converter, and other modules.
This topic describes the working principle and signal flow of the SLH41 board by describing
how to process STM-1/STM-4 signals.
Figure 28-30 shows the function modules and signal flow of the SLH41 board.
Figure 28-30 Function modules and signal flow of the SLH41 board
DCC
LOS
+3.3V
-48V/-60V
Fuse
155MHz PLL
MSA HPT MST RST
IIC
CDR
.

.
.

.
.

.
.

.
CDR
-48V/-60V
O/E
E/O
S
P
I
O/E S
P
I E/O
STM-1/
STM-4
STM-1/
STM-4
Laser shutdown
Reference
clock
K1 and K2
Backplane
SDH overhead
processing module
O/E
converting
module
Power
module
Power
module
Logic and
control module
extraction
SCC unit
SCC unit
High-
speed bus
Communication
Frame header
High-
speed bus
SCC unit
Clock unit
Clock unit
termination
HPT: higher order path termination IIC: inter-integrated circuit CDR: clock and data recovery

The function modules of the STM-1/STM-4 units are described as follows:
signals.
CDR Module
This module restores the data signal and the clock signal.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2681
l RST sub-module
byte.
l MST sub-module
writes the B2 byte.
l MSA sub-module
justifications.
l HPT sub-module
Power Module
require.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2682
28.9.5 Front Panel
the SLH41 board.
Figure 28-31 shows the front panel of the SLH41 board.
Figure 28-31 Front panel of the SLH41 board (considering optical interfaces as an example)
SLH41
SMSFP WORK WITH
G.657B FIBER ONLY
G.657B
2 TX
16 RX
RX 1
TX 15
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
SM SFP WORK WITH
G.657B FIBER ONLY
G.657B

Indicators
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2683
Interfaces
There are 16 optical/electrical interfaces on the front panel of the SLH41 board, and "16 SFP"
is silkscreened under the silkscreening for the indicator on the front panel.
Figure 28-32 Silk-screen

Table 28-87 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SLH41 board
RX1RX16 LC/SAA-75J4Y Receives optical/electrical signals.
TX1TX16 LC/SAA-75J4Y Transmits optical/electrical signals.

NOTE
The G.657A2 fiber jumper rather than the G.652D fiber jumper is used if an optical attenuator is inserted
into the transmit port. Otherwise, the cabinet door cannot be closed. Figure 28-33 shows the G.657A2
fiber jumper and G.652D fiber jumper.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2684
Figure 28-33 G.657A2 fiber jumper and G.652D fiber jumper
50.75
58.25
42.5
G.657A2 fiber jumper
G.652D fiber jumper

The SLH41 board does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
28.9.7 Valid Slots
The SLH41 board occupies one slot and must be installed in the valid slot on a subrack.
Otherwise, the board cannot work normally.
Table 28-88 shows the valid slots for the SLH41 board.
Table 28-88 Valid slots for the SLH41 board
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
subrack
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
subrack
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
subrack

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2685
28.9.8 Characteristic Code for the SLH41
The characteristic code of the SLH41 board indicates the optical interface type of the board.
of the SLH41 board.
SLH41 board
N3SLH4102 02 8S-1.1, 8S-4.1
N3SLH4103 03 16S-1.1
N3SLH4105 05 16S-4.1
The G.657A2 fiber jumper is required because the single-mode optical module is used over
the interface.

Table 28-90 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SLH41 board displayed on the NM
TX1/RX1 1
TX2/RX2 2
TX3/RX3 3
TX4/RX4 4
TX5/RX5 5
TX6/RX6 6
TX7/RX7 7
TX8/RX8 8
TX9/RX9 9
TX10/RX10 10
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2686
TX11/RX11 11
TX12/RX12 12
TX13/RX13 13
TX14/RX14 14
TX15/RX15 15
TX16/RX16 16

NOTE
This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the SLH41 board.
Table 28-91 lists all the parameters of the SLH41 board.
Table 28-91 Parameters of the SLH41 board
on the line board.
paths.
optical interface.
Default: On
(m)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2687
Loopback
Outloop
to Non-Loopback.
paths.
Outloop
to Non-Loopback.
channels.

28.9.11 SLH41 Specifications
power consumption.
Table 28-92 lists the optical specifications of the SLH41 board when the STM-1 optical module
is used.
Table 28-92 Optical specifications of the SLH41 board when the STM-1 optical module is used
Item Value
Application code S-1.1
Transmission distance (km) 0 to 15
Operating wavelength range (nm) 1261 to 1360
Launched optical power range (dBm) 15 to 8
Overload optical power (dBm) 8

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2688
Table 28-93 lists the optical specifications of the SLH41 board when the STM-4 optical module
is used.
Table 28-93 Optical specifications of the SLH41 board when the STM-4 optical module is used
Item Value
Application code S-4.1
Transmission distance (km) 0 to 15
Operating wavelength range (nm) 1274 to 1356
Launched optical power range (dBm) 15 to 8

Electrical Specifications
Table 28-94 lists the electrical specifications of the SLH41 board when the STM-1 electrical
module is used.
Table 28-94 Electrical specifications of the SLH41 board when the STM-1 electrical module is
used
Item Value
Type of interface 139264 kbit/s, 155520 kbit/s
Code pattern CMI
Bit rate of the output signal Compliant with G.703
Permitted frequency deviation on the input
interface
Permitted attenuation on the input interface

Laser Safety Class
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2689
The mechanical specifications of the SLH41 board are as follows:
Power Consumption
28.10 SLO16
SLO16: 8xSTM-16 optical interface board
Only one functional version of the SLO16 board is available, that is, N4.
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
N4S
LO1
6
Y Y Y N N N

28.10.2 Application
The SLO16 optical interface board is an OCS line board. It can be used in the OptiX OSN 8800
to receive and transmit STM-16 optical signals. The SLO16 board converts the received optical
addition, the SLO16 board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into
Figure 28-34 shows the application of the SLO16 board. The board supports the ring and chain
networking modes.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2690
Figure 28-34 Networking and application of the SLO16 board
NE1
NE2 NE4
NE3
MSP ring
Service flow
OCS line board
Cross-connect board

The SLO16 board receives and transmits 8xSTM-16 optical signals, processes overhead bytes,
Table 28-95 Functions and features of the SLO16 board
Function
and
Feature
Description
Basic
functions
Specificatio
ns of the
optical
interface
Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the I-16, S-16.1,
L-16.1, and L-16.2. The characteristics of the optical interfaces comply with
ITU-T G.957.
Specificatio
ns of the
optical
module
l Supports SFP pluggable optical module.
Service
processing
concatenation services, and VC-4-16c concatenation services.
Clock
synchroniz
ation
IEEE 1588v2 Support the IEEE 1588 V2 time
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2691
Function
and
Feature
Description
Overhead
processing
l Supports the configuration of the D1D12, E1, F1, and X1 bytes as
transparent transmission bytes or into other unused overheads bytes.
overheads.
l Supports eight channels of ECC communication.
Alarms and
performanc
e events
Protection
schemes
l Supports the SNCTP
NOTE
One SLO16 board supports a maximum of eight MSP protection rings.
Maintenanc
e features
services.
Protocols or
standards
compliance
ITU-T G.774.7
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2692
Function
and
Feature
Description
service processing
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.783
ITU-T G.774.1
ITU-T G.774.2
ITU-T G.774.3
ITU-T G.774.4
ITU-T G.774.5
ITU-T G.774.6
ITU-T G.774.9
ITU-T G.774.10
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.825
ITU-T G.829
SDH
ASON
Supported

The SLO16 board consists of the O/E converting module, MUX/DEMUX module, SDH
Figure 28-35 shows the function modules and signal flow of the SLO16 board by describing
how to process 1xSTM-16 signals.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2693
Figure 28-35 Function modules and signal flow of the SLO16 board
2.488
Gbit/s
DCC
LOS
+3.3V
-48V/-60V Fuse
155MHzPLL
155MHz
16x155
Mbit/s
MSA HPT MST RST
MUX
DE-
MUX
IIC
-48V/-60V
2.488
Gbit/s
2.488
Gbit/s
2.488
Gbit/s
16x155
Mbit/s
MUX/
DEMUX
module
Logic and
control module
SDH overhead
processing module
extraction
SCC unit
Laser shutdown
High-
speed bus
Backplane
Communication
Frame header
SCC unit
Reference
clock
K1 and K2
High-
speed bus
Power
module
Power
module
.

.
.

.
O/E
E/O
S
P
I
O/E S
P
I E/O
O/E
converting
module
Clock unit
SCC unit
Clock unit
termination

signals.
MUX/DEMUX Module
l RST sub-module
byte.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2694
l MST sub-module
writes the B2 byte.
l MSA sub-module
justifications.
l HPT sub-module
Power Module
require.
28.10.5 Front Panel
the SLO16 board.
Figure 28-36 shows the front panel of the SLO16 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2695
Figure 28-36 Front panel of the SLO16 board
SLO16
SLO16
ACT
PROG
STAT
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
R
X
1
T
X
2
R
X
2
T
X
3
R
X
3
T
X
4
R
X
4
T
X
5
R
X
5
T
X
6
R
X
6
T
X
7
R
X
7
T
X
8
R
X
8
T
X
1
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT

Indicators
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the SLO16 board. Table 28-96 lists the
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2696
Table 28-96 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SLO16 board

The SLO16 board does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
28.10.7 Valid Slots
The SLO16 board must be installed in a valid slot on a subrack. Otherwise, the board cannot
work normally.
Table 28-97 shows the valid slots for the SLO16 board.
Table 28-97 Valid slots for the SLO16 board
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
subrack
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
subrack
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
subrack

28.10.8 Characteristic Code for the SLO16
The characteristic code of the SLO16 board indicates the optical interface type of the board.
of the SLO16 board.
SLO16 board
N4SLO1601 01 I-16
N4SLO1602 02 S-16.1
N4SLO1603 03 L-16.1
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2697
N4SLO1604 04 L-16.2

Table 28-99 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SLO16 board displayed on the NM
RX1/TX1 1
RX2/TX2 2
RX3/TX3 3
RX4/TX4 4
RX5/TX5 5
RX6/TX6 6
RX7/TX7 7
RX8/TX8 8

NOTE
This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the SLO16 board.
Table 28-100 lists all the parameters of the SLO16 board.
Table 28-100 Parameters of the SLO16 board
on the line board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2698
paths.
optical interface.
Default: On
(m)
Loopback
Outloop
to Non-Loopback.
paths.
Outloop
to Non-Loopback.
channels.

28.10.11 SLO16 Specifications
power consumption.
Table 28-101 lists the optical specifications of the SLO16 board.
Table 28-101 Optical specifications of the SLO16 board
Item Value
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2699
Item Value
Application code I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
Transmission
distance (km)
0 to 2 2 to 15 25 to 40 50 to 80
LC
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode LC Single-mode
LC
Operating
wavelength range
(nm)
1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
Launched optical
power range (dBm)
10 to 3 5 to 0 2 to +3 2 to +3
(dBm)
18 18 27 28
Minimum overload
(dBm)
3 0 9 9
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2

Laser Safety Class
The mechanical specifications of the SLO16 board are as follows:
Power Consumption
28.11 SLQ16
SLQ16: 4xSTM-16 optical interface board
Only one functional version of the SLQ16 board is available, that is, N4.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2700
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
N4S
LQ1
6
Y Y Y N N N

28.11.2 Application
The SLQ16 optical interface board is an OCS line board. It can be used in the OptiX OSN 8800
to receive and transmit STM-16 optical signals. The SLQ16 board converts the received optical
addition, the SLQ16 board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into
Figure 28-37 shows the application of the SLQ16 board. The SLQ16 boards can form a ring
Figure 28-37 Networking and application of the SLQ16 board
NE1
NE2 NE4
NE3
MSP ring
Service flow
OCS line board
Cross-connect board

The SLQ16 board receives and transmits 4xSTM-16 optical signals, processes overhead bytes,
and performs the MSP.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2701
Table 28-102 Functions and features of the SLQ16 board
Functio
n and
Feature
Description
Basic
functions
Specifica
tions of
the
optical
interface
Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the I-16, S-16.1,
L-16.1, and L-16.2. The characteristics of the optical interfaces comply with ITU-
T G.957.
Specifica
tions of
the
optical
module
l Supports SFP pluggable optical module.
Service
processin
g
concatenation services, and VC-4-16c concatenation services.
Clock
synchroni
zation
Overhead
processin
g
l Supports the configuration of the D1D12, E1, F1, and X1 bytes as
transparent transmission bytes or into other unused overheads bytes.
l Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path overheads.
l Supports four channels of ECC communication.
Alarms
and
performa
nce
events
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2702
Functio
n and
Feature
Description
Protectio
n
schemes
NOTE
One SLQ16 board supports a maximum of four MSP protection rings.
Maintena
nce
features
l Supports warm resets and cold resets. The warm reset does not affect services.
Protocols
or
standards
complian
ce
monitoring)
ITU-T G.774.7
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.783
ITU-T G.774.1
ITU-T G.774.2
ITU-T G.774.3
ITU-T G.774.4
ITU-T G.774.5
ITU-T G.774.6
ITU-T G.774.9
ITU-T G.774.10
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.825
ITU-T G.829
SDH
ASON
Supported
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2703

The SLQ16 board consists of the O/E converting module, MUX/DEMUX module, SDH
Figure 28-38 shows the function modules and signal flow of the SLQ16 board by describing
how to process 1xSTM-16 signals.
Figure 28-38 Function modules and signal flow of the SLQ16 board
Logic and
control module
Cross-connect
unit A
SDH overhead
processing module
DCC
SCC unit
Communication
High-speed
bus
+3.3 V
-48 V/-60 V
Power
module
Fuse
Cross-connect
unit B
High-speed
bus
155 MHz
Reference clock
K1 and K2
MSA HPT MST RST
-48 V/-60 V
Frame header
Clock unit
K1 and K2
Power
module
SCC unit
Backplane
2.488
Gbit/s
16x155
Mbit/s
LOS
Laser shutdown
DEMU
X
IIC
2.488
Gbit/s
2.488
Gbit/s
2.488
Gbit/s
16x155
Mbit/s
MUX/
DEMUX
O/E
converting
module
.

.
.

.
E/O
SP
I
155 MHz
PLL
MUX
O/E
E/O
O/E
SP
I
Clock unit
SCC unit
termination

signals.
MUX/DEMUX Module
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2704
l RST sub-module
byte.
l MST sub-module
writes the B2 byte.
l MSA sub-module
justifications.
l HPT sub-module
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2705
Power Module
require.
28.11.5 Front Panel
the SLQ16 board.
Figure 28-39 shows the front panel of the N4SLQ16 board.
Figure 28-39 Front panel of the N4SLQ16 board
SLQ16
SLQ16
ACT
PROG
SRV
STAT
R
X
1
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
T
X
4
R
X
4
T
X
3
R
X
3
T
X
2
R
X
2
T
X
1
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT

Indicators
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2706
Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the front panel of the SLQ16 board. Table 28-103 lists the
Table 28-103 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SLQ16 board

The SLQ16 board does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
28.11.7 Valid Slots
The slots valid for the SLQ16 board vary with the cross-connect capacity of the subrack.
Table 28-104 shows the valid slots for the SLQ16 board.
Table 28-104 Valid slots for the SLQ16 board
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
subrack
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
subrack
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
subrack

28.11.8 Characteristic Code for the SLQ16
board. The characteristic code for the SLQ16 board indicates the type of optical interface.
Table 28-105 provides the relationship between the characteristic code for the SLQ16 board
and the type of optical interface.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2707
Table 28-105 Relationship between the characteristic code for the SLQ16 board and the type
of optical interface
N4SLQ1601 01 I-16
N4SLQ1602 02 S-16.1
N4SLQ1603 03 L-16.1
N4SLQ1604 04 L-16.2

Table 28-106 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SLQ16 board displayed on the NM
RX1/TX1 1
RX2/TX2 2
RX3/TX3 3
RX4/TX4 4

NOTE
This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the SLQ16 board.
Table 28-107 lists all the parameters of the SLQ16 board.
Table 28-107 Parameters of the SLQ16 board
on the line board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2708
paths.
optical interface.
Default: On
(m)
Loopback
Outloop
to Non-Loopback.
paths.
Outloop
to Non-Loopback.
channels.

28.11.11 SLQ16 Specifications
power consumption.
Table 28-108 lists the optical specifications of the SLQ16 board.
Table 28-108 Optical specifications of the SLQ16 board
Item Value
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2709
Item Value
Application code I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
Transmission
distance (km)
0 to 2 2 to 15 25 to 40 50 to 80
LC
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode LC Single-mode
LC
Operating
wavelength range
(nm)
1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
Launched optical
power range (dBm)
-10 to -3 -5 to 0 -2 to +3 -2 to +3
(dBm)
-18 -18 -27 -28
Minimum overload
(dBm)
-3 0 -9 -9
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2

Laser Safety Class
The mechanical specifications of the SLQ16 board are as follows:
Power Consumption
28.12 SLQ64
SLQ64: 4xSTM-64 line interface board
Only one functional version of the SLQ64 board is available, that is, N4.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2710
Boa
rd
8800 T64
Subrack
8800 T32
Subrack
8800 T16
Subrack
8800
Platform
Subrack
6800
Subrack
3800
Chassis
N4S
LQ6
4
N Y Y N N N

28.12.2 Application
The SLQ64 optical interface board is an OCS line board. It can be used in the OptiX OSN 8800
to receive and transmit STM-64 optical signals. The SLQ64 board converts the received optical
addition, the SLQ64 board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into
Figure 28-40 shows the application of the SLQ64 board. The board supports the ring and chain
networking modes.
Figure 28-40 Networking and application of the SLQ64 board
NE1
NE2 NE4
NE3
MSP ring
Service flow
OCS line board
Cross-connect board

The SLQ64 board receives and transmits 4xSTM-64 optical signals, processes overhead bytes,
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2711
Table 28-109 Functions and features of the SLQ64 board
Functio
n and
Feature
Description
Basic
functions
Specificat
ions of the
optical
interface
Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the I-64.1 and
S-64.2b. The characteristics of the optical interfaces comply with ITU-T G.691.
Specificat
ions of the
optical
module
l Supports XFP pluggable optical module.
Service
processin
g
Clock
synchroni
zation
Overhead
processin
g
l Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path overheads.
l Supports four channels of ECC communication.
Alarms
and
performa
nce
events
Reports various alarms and performance events to facilitate the management and
maintenance.
Protectio
n
schemes
l Supports the SNCP
l Supports the optical-path-shared MSP.
NOTE
A single optical interface supports processes two sets of K bytes. One SLQ64 board supports
a maximum of eight MSP protection rings.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2712
Functio
n and
Feature
Description
Maintena
nce
features
l Supports warm resets and cold resets. The warm reset does not affect services.
Protocols
or
standards
complian
ce
monitoring)
ITU-T G.774.7
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.783
ITU-T G.774.1
ITU-T G.774.2
ITU-T G.774.3
ITU-T G.774.4
ITU-T G.774.5
ITU-T G.774.6
ITU-T G.774.9
ITU-T G.774.10
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.825
ITU-T G.829
SDH
ASON
Supported

The SLQ64 board consists of the O/E converting module, MUX/DEMUX module, SDH
Figure 28-41 shows the function modules and signal flow of the SLQ64 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2713
Figure 28-41 Function modules and signal flow of the SLQ64 board
DCC
LOS
+3.3V
-48V/-60V Fuse
622MHzPLL
622MHz
16x622
Mbit/s
MSA HPT MST RST
MUX
DE-
MUX
IIC
-48V/-60V
O/E
S
P
I
E/O
16x622
Mbit/s
MUX/
DEMUX
module
Logic and
control module
SDH overhead
processing module
extraction
SCC unit
Laser shutdown
High-
speed bus
O/E
converting
module
Backplane
Communication
Frame header
SCC unit
Reference
clock
K1 and K2
High-
speed bus
Power
module
Power
module
9.953
Gbit/s
9.953
Gbit/s
9.953
Gbit/s
9.953
Gbit/s
Clock unit
SCC unit
Clock unit
termination

signals.
l The SPI detects the R_LOS alarm and provides the function of shutting down the laser.
MUX/DEMUX Module
l RST sub-module
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2714
byte.
l MST sub-module
writes the B2 byte.
l MSA sub-module
justifications.
l HPT sub-module
Power Module
require.
28.12.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces, the bar code, and the laser safety class label on the front panel
of the SLQ64 board.
Figure 28-42 shows the front panel of the SLQ64 board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2715
Figure 28-42 Front panel of the SLQ64 board
SLQ64
SLQ64
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
T
X
1
R
X
1
T
X
2
R
X
2
T
X
3
R
X
3
T
X
4
R
X
4
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT

Indicators
Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the front panel of the SLQ64 board. Table 28-110 lists the
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2716
Table 28-110 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SLQ64 board

The SLQ64 board does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
28.12.7 Valid Slots
The SLQ64 board must be installed in a valid slot on a subrack. Otherwise, the board cannot
work normally.
Table 28-111 shows the valid slots for the SLQ64 board.
Table 28-111 Valid slots for the SLQ64 board
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
subrack
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
subrack

28.12.8 Characteristic Code for the SLQ64
The characteristic code of the SLQ64 board indicates the optical interface type of the board.
Table 28-112 provides the relationship between the characteristic code and optical interface
type of the SLQ64 board.
SLQ64 board
N4SLQ6401 01 I-64.1
N4SLQ6402 02 S-64.2b

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2717
Table 28-113 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SLQ64 board displayed on the NM
RX1/TX1 1
RX2/TX2 2
RX3/TX3 3
RX4/TX4 4

NOTE
This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the SLQ64 board.
Table 28-114 lists all the parameters of the SLQ64 board.
Table 28-114 Parameters of the SLQ64 board
Port - Displays all ports available on
the line board.
paths.
optical interface.
Default: Disabled
configured at the same optical
interface.
Default: On
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2718
(m)
Loopback
Outloop
to Non-Loopback.
paths.
Outloop
to Non-Loopback.
channels.

28.12.11 SLQ64 Specifications
power consumption.
Table 28-115 lists the optical specifications of the SLQ64 board.
Table 28-115 Optical specifications of the SLQ64 board
Item Value
Application code I-64.1 S-64.2b
Transmission distance
(km)
0 to 10 10 to 40
Type of fiber Single-mode LC Single-mode LC
range (nm)
1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2719
Item Value
Launched optical
power range (dBm)
6 to 1 1 to +2
(dBm)
11 14
Minimum overload
(dBm)
1 1
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
6 8.2

Laser Safety Class
The mechanical specifications of the SLQ64 board are as follows:
Power Consumption
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2720
29 Cables
About This Chapter
29.1 PGND Cables
The equipment has cabinet PGND cables, subrack PGND cables, PDU PGND cables, cabinet
door PGND cables.
29.2 Power Cables
The equipment has cabinet -48 V/BGND cables and subrack power cables.
29.3 Optical Fibers
Optical fibers can be classified into the following types: LSH/APC-SC/APC, LC/PC-LC/PC,
LC/PC-FC/PC and LC/PC-SC/PC.
29.4 Alarm Cables
Alarm cables for the equipment include the cabinet indicator alarm cable, alarm concatenating/
inter-subrack concatenating cable, and alarm interface cable.
29.5 Management Cables
Management cables for the equipment include: OAM serial port cables, AUX signal cables and
straight-through network cables.
29.6 Clock/Time Cable
Clock/Time Cable includes cables for other equipment connections, cables for internal
connections, cables for testing equipment connections.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Hardware Description 29 Cables
2721
29.1 PGND Cables
The equipment has cabinet PGND cables, subrack PGND cables, PDU PGND cables, cabinet
door PGND cables.
29.1.1 Cabinet PGND Power Cables
One end of the cabinet PGND power cables is connected to ground bar in the equipment room.
The other end is connected to the protection ground screw on the top of the cabinet.
Structure
Figure 29-1 shows the structure of the cabinet PGND ground cable.
Figure 29-1 Structure of the cabinet PGND ground cable
L
1
2
3
4 5
1. OT single-hole naked crimping connector 2. Cable clip 3. JG two-hole naked crimping connector
4. Heat shrink tube 5. Cable

Pin Assignment
None
Technical Parameters
Table 29-1 Technical parameters of the cabinet PGND power cables
Item Description
Cabinet PGND ground cable Connector OT naked crimping
connector-35 mm
2
-M8
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2722
Item Description
Type of the cable Electric power cable-750V/
450V-227 IEC 02(RV)-35
mm
2
-Yellow and green-135
A

29.1.2 Subrack PGND Cables
One end of subrack PGND cables to the ground screw on the side column near the subrack. The
other end is connected to the ground screw on the subrack
Structure
Figure 29-2 shows the structure of the subrack PGND cable.
Figure 29-2 Structure of the subrack PGND cables
1 2
X1 X2
1. OT naked crimping connector 2. Heat-shrink tube

Pin Assignment
None
The technical parameters of subrack PGND cables are listed in Table 29-2.
Table 29-2 Technical parameters of the subrack PGND cables
Item Description
Connector X1/X2 Naked crimping terminal-OT-10-6
Type of the cable Electric power cable-450/750V-227IEC02
(RV)-10 mm
2
(0.02 in.
2
)-Yellow/Green-62 A

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2723
29.1.3 PDU PGND Cables
One end of the PDU PGND Cables is connected to a protection ground screw of the power
distribution box. The other end is connected to the protection ground screw on the top of the
cabinet. The PDU PGND Cables is correctly connected before delivery.
Structure
Figure 29-3 shows the structure of the PDU PGND Cables.
Figure 29-3 Structure of the PDU PGND Cables
1 2
X1 X2
1. OT naked crimping connector 2. Heat-shrink tube

Pin Assignment
None
The technical parameters of the PDU PGND Cables are listed in Table 29-3.
Table 29-3 Technical parameters of the PDU PGND Cables
Item Description
Connector X1/X2 Naked crimping terminal-OT-10-6
Type of the cable Electric power cable-450/750V-227IEC02
(RV)-10 mm
2
(0.02 in.
2
)-Yellow/Green-62 A

29.1.4 Cabinet Door Ground Cables
The cabinet door ground cables ground the front door, rear door, and side doors. The cabinet
door ground cables are correctly connected before delivery.
Structure
Figure 29-4 shows the structure of the cabinet door ground cables.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2724
Figure 29-4 Structure of the cabinet door ground cable
1
X1 X2
L
1. OT naked crimping connector

Pin Assignment
None
The technical parameters of the cabinet door ground cables are listed in Table 29-4.
Table 29-4 Technical parameters of the cabinet door ground cables
Item Description
Connector X1/X2
Naked crimping terminal-OT-6 mm
2
(0.01 in.
2
)-M6-Tin plating-Insulated ring
terminal-12-10AWG
Type of the cable Electric power cable-600V-UL1015-0
mm
2
-10AWG-Yellow/Green-50 A-105 core
strand

29.2 Power Cables
The equipment has cabinet -48 V/BGND cables and subrack power cables.
29.2.1 Cabinet -48 V/BGND Power Cables
The -48 V/BGND power cables supply power to devices inside the cabinet. One end of the power
cable is connected to the power distribution cabinet. The other end is connected to the DC power
distribution box at the cabinet top.
Structure And Technical Parameters
When the cabinet houses only the OptiX OSN 8800: Figure 29-5 shows the structure of the
cabinet -48 V power cable and the cabinet BGND ground cable.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2725
Figure 29-5 Structure of the cabinet -48 V power cable and cabinet BGND ground cable (when
the cabinet houses only the OptiX OSN 8800)
W1
W2
2
1
W
W1
W2
1m
X1
X2
0.8m
L
1. JG two-hole naked crimping connector 2. Heat-shrink tube

Table 29-5 Technical parameters of the PGND cables and the -48V/BGND power cables (when
Cable Usage Wire Used Connector
Cabin
et
power
cable
-48 V
power
cable
Accesses
-48 V DC
to the
cabinet.
-48 V DC power
cable (blue)
l If the required
length of the
power cable is
less than 20 m,
use the 16 mm
2
cable.
l If the required
length of the
power cable
ranges from 20 m
to 35 m, use the
25 mm
2
cable.
l If the required
length of the
power cable
ranges from 35 m
to 50 m, use the
35 mm
2
cable.
If copper fittings
have been installed
on the PDU, power
cables must be
shorter than 25 m and
have a cross-
sectional area of 35
mm
2
NOTE
JG two-hole
naked
crimping
connector
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2726
Cable Usage Wire Used Connector
BGND
cable
Accesses
the BGND
to a
cabinet.
Battery ground cable
(black)
l If the required
length of the
power cable is
less than 20 m,
use the 16 mm
2
cable.
l If the required
length of the
power cable
ranges from 20 m
to 35 m, use the
25mm
2
cable.
l If the required
length of the
power cable
ranges from 35 m
to 50 m, use the
35 mm
2
cable.
If copper fittings
have been installed
on the PDU, power
cables must be
shorter than 25 m and
have a cross-
sectional area of 35
mm
2
JG two-hole
naked
crimping
connector

When the cabinet houses only the OptiX OSN 6800: Figure 29-6 shows the structure of the
cabinet -48 V power cable and the cabinet BGND ground cable.
Figure 29-6 Structure of the cabinet -48 V power cable and cabinet BGND ground cable (when
1 2
3
1. Cord end terminal 2. OT single-hole naked crimping connector 3. Cable clip

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2727
Table 29-6 Technical parameters of the cabinet -48 V/BGND power cables (when the cabinet
houses only the OptiX OSN 6800)
Item Description
Cabinet -48 V power cable
(16 mm
2
)
Connector 1 Cord end terminal-16
mm
2
-0.024 mm-80 A-
Insertion depth 16 mm-Green
Connector 2 OT naked crimping
connector-16 mm
2
-M8
Type of the cable Electric power cable-450 V/
750 V-227 IEC 02(RV)-16
mm
2
-Blue-85 A
Cabinet BGND ground cable
(16 mm
2
)
mm
2
-0.024 mm-80A-
Insertion depth 16 mm-Green
connector-16 mm
2
-M8
750 V-227 IEC 02(RV)-16
mm
2
-Black-85 A
(25 mm
2
)
mm
2
-30 mm-75 A-Insertion
depth 16 mm-Brown
connector-25 mm
2
-M8
750 V-25 mm
2
-Blue-110 A
(25 mm
2
)
mm
2
-30 mm-75 A-Insertion
depth 16 mm-Brown
Connector 2 Naked crimping connector-
OT type-25 mm
2
-M8
750 V-25 mm
2
-Black-110 A
(35 mm
2
)
mm
2
-0.03 m-105 A-Insertion
depth 16 mm-Cream-colored
connector-35 mm
2
-M8
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2728
Item Description
450V-227 IEC 02(RV)-35
mm
2
-Blue-135 A
(35 mm
2
)
mm
2
-0.03 m-105 A-Insertion
depth 16 mm-Cream-colored
connector-35 mm
2
-M8
450V-227 IEC 02(RV)-35
mm
2
-Black-135 A

29.2.2 Subrack Power Cables
The subrack power cables connect the DC power distribution box at the cabinet top and the
power interface in the subrack interface area, and lead the -48 V power supply from the top of
the cabinet to the subracks. The subrack power cables are correctly connected before delivery.
OptiX OSN 8800
Figure 29-7 shows the subrack power cable.
Figure 29-7 Structure of the subrack power cable on the OptiX OSN 8800
1
X 1
X2
X3
X4
1 2
3
1
A
B
1. JG two-hole naked crimping connector 2. Cord end terminal 3. Cable
NOTE
When the DPD63-8-8 PDU is used, the B cable in Figure 29-7 must be configured. When any other PDU is
used, the A cable in Figure 29-7 must be configured.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2729
OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack/6800/3800
Figure 29-8 shows the subrack power cable.
Figure 29-8 Structure of the subrack power cable on the OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack/
6800/3800
X1
X3
X2
500
L
A
A
A1
A2
A3
1
W1
W2
2 3
1. Cable connector 2. Cable clip 3. Cord end terminal

For the pin assignment of subrack power cables, refer to Table 29-7.
Table 29-7 Pin assignment of the subrack power cables
Cable Cable
Connector
Cord End
Terminal
Mapping Core Color
W2 X1 connects to
A1
X2 A1 corresponds
to X2.
Blue (-48 V
power)
W1 X1 connects to
A3
X3 A3 corresponds
to X3.
Black (power
ground)

The technical parameters of subrack power cables are listed in Table 29-8.
Table 29-8 Technical parameters of subrack power cables
Item Description
Cable connector X1 Cable connector-D type-3PIN-Female-
Solder injection molding type-No middle
contact
Cord end terminals X2, X3 Common terminal-Conductor Cross
Section-6 mm
2
-Length 20 mm-30 A-
Insertion depth 12 mm-Black
Type of the cable W2
Power cable-450 V/750 V-H07Z-K-6 mm
2
-
Blue-Low Smoke Zero Halogen Cable
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2730
Item Description
Type of the cable W1
Power cable-450 V/750 V-H07Z-K-6 mm
2
-
Black-Low Smoke Zero Halogen Cable

29.3 Optical Fibers
Optical fibers can be classified into the following types: LSH/APC-SC/APC, LC/PC-LC/PC,
LC/PC-FC/PC and LC/PC-SC/PC.
29.3.1 Classification
The connectors and the length of the fibers are determined according to the site survey that is
conducted before installation.
The optical fibers used by the equipment are classified as shown in Table 29-9.
Table 29-9 Classification of optical fibers
Type of Connectors at
Both Ends
Optical Cable Type Fiber Type
LC/PC-LC/PC 2.0 mm (0.08 in.) single-
mode simplex optical cable
G.657A2
2.0 mm (0.08 in.) multi-mode
simplex optical cable
A1b
LC/PC-FC/PC 2.0 mm (0.08 in.) single-
G.657A2
A1b
LC/PC-SC/PC 2.0 mm (0.08 in.) single-
G.657A2
A1b
LSH/APC-FC/UPC 3.0 mm (0.12 in.) single-
G.652D
LSH/APC-LSH/APC 3.0 mm (0.12 in.) single-
G.652D
LSH/APC-LSH/APC 0.9mm (0.035 in.) single-
mode tight buffer
G.652D
LSH/APC-LSH/APC 3.0 mm (0.12 in.) single-
G.652D
LSH/APC-LC/UPC 2.0 mm (0.08 in.) single-
G.652D
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2731
Type of Connectors at
Both Ends
Optical Cable Type Fiber Type
LSH/APC-FC/UPC 3.0 mm (0.12 in.) single-
G.652D
LSH/APC-SC/UPC 3.0 mm (0.12 in.) single-
G.652D

NOTE
The G.657 optical fibers provided by Huawei are named G.657B optical fibers and G.657A2 optical fibers. The
G.657B optical fibers are short-jacket optical fibers defined in ITU-T G.657 (12/2006). According to ITU-T G.
657 (11/2009), these fibers are classified into G.657A1, G.657A2, G.657B2, and G.657B3 optical fibers. The
G.657B optical fibers provided by Huawei and the G.657A2 optical fibers are fully compatible and can be
interconnected. In addition, the G.657B and G.657A2 optical fibers are fully compatible with G.652D optical
fibers. However, the compatibility between customer-purchased G.657B optical fibers and G.657A2 and G.
652D optical fibers needs to be verified.
29.3.2 Connectors
Connectors of all optical interfaces on the front panel of the boards are of the LC/PC type. LC/
PC fiber connectors are used with these boards. The optical interfaces on the ODF in the
equipment room are generally of the FC/PC or SC/PC type. FC/PC or SC/PC fiber connectors
are used with them.
The optical interfaces on the ODF in the equipment room are generally of the FC/PC or SC/PC
type. FC/PC or SC/PC fiber connectors are used with them.
Table 29-10 lists details on classification of fiber connectors.
Table 29-10 Classification of fiber connectors
Type of Fiber Connectors Description
LC/PC Plug-in square fiber connector/protruding
polished
FC/PC Round fiber connector/protruding polished
SC/PC Square fiber connector/protruding polished
LSH/APC Fiber connector with a cap that provides
automatic protection against dust/eight-
degree radian surface/protruding polished

The appearances of the fiber connectors are shown in Figure 29-9, Figure 29-10, Figure
29-11 and Figure 29-12.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2732
Figure 29-9 LC/PC fiber connector

Figure 29-10 FC/PC fiber connector

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2733
Figure 29-11 SC/PC fiber connector

Figure 29-12 LSH/APC fiber connector

Cover the optical interfaces of the replaced boards with protective caps in time. Store them in
proper packages to keep the optical interfaces clean. The protective caps recommended are
shown in Figure 29-13, and the protective caps not recommended are shown in Figure 29-14.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2734
Figure 29-13 Protective caps recommended

Figure 29-14 Protective caps not recommended

NOTE
The air filter caps made of soft rubber are not recommended, which tends to collect dust and sundries. This type
of caps provides poor dustproof function.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2735
29.4 Alarm Cables
Alarm cables for the equipment include the cabinet indicator alarm cable, alarm concatenating/
inter-subrack concatenating cable, and alarm interface cable.
29.4.1 Cabinet Indicator Cable
One end of a cabinet alarm indicator cable is connected to the LAMP interface on an EFI board,
and the other end of the cable has four connectors, each of which is connected to the alarm
indicator interface at the top of a cabinet. When multiple subracks are cascaded, straight-through
network cables are used to connect the subracks through their LAMP1 or LAMP2 interfaces.
Structure
Figure 29-15 shows a cabinet alarm indicator cable together with the appearance of the EFI
front panel.
Figure 29-15 Structure of the cabinet alarm indicator cable
2
X1
L
X2
B
3 4
B
1
2
A
1
A
1
8
View
X3
X4
X5
View
1. Network interface connector 2. Heat-shrink tubing 3. Common plug 4. Ordinary connector

Pin Assignment
For the pin assignment of the cabinet indicator alarm cable, refer to Table 29-11.
Table 29-11 Pin assignment of the cabinet indicator alarm cable
Connector X1 Connectors X2, X3,
X4, X5
Color Relationship
X1.4 X2.2 White Pair
X1.5 X2.1 Green
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2736
Connector X1 Connectors X2, X3,
X4, X5
Color Relationship
X1.2 X3.1 Blue
X1.6 X4.1 Brown
X1.8 X5.1 Orange

The technical parameters of the cabinet indicator alarm cable are listed in Table 29-12.
Table 29-12 Technical parameters of the cabinet indicator alarm cable
Item Description
Connector X1 Network interface connector-8PIN-single
row-single port-8bit-shielded-crystal model
connector
Connector X2/X3/X4/X5 Common plug-2PIN-single row/2.5 mm (0.1
in.)
Type of the cable Twisted pair cable -100 -SEYPVPV-0.48
mm (0.02 in.)-26 AWG-4 pairs-black
Number of cores 8
Core diameter 0.5 mm (0.02 in.)

29.4.2 Alarm Output Interface Cable
An alarm output interface cable is used to output and concatenate alarm signals. There are RJ45
connectors at both ends of the cable. During alarm signal output concatenation, both ends of the
cable are connected to the ALMO alarm interfaces in different subracks. During alarm signal
output, one end of the cable is connected to the ALMO alarm interface, and the other end of the
cable is connected to a power distribution cabinet or another set of equipment. In this case, alarms
are displayed in a centralized manner.
Structure
Figure 29-16 shows the structure of the alarm interface cable.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2737
Figure 29-16 Alarm output interface cable
A
L
X1 X2
View A
8
6
3
1
1
1. Network interface connector

Pin Assignment
For the pin assignment of the alarm output interface cable, refer to Table 29-13.
Table 29-13 Pin assignment of X1/X2
Connector X1 Connector X2 Color Relationship
X1.2 X2.2 Orange Pair
X1.1 X2.1 White-orange
X1.6 X2.6 Green Pair
X1.3 X2.3 White-green
X1.4 X2.4 Blue Pair
X1.5 X2.5 White-blue
X1.8 X2.8 Brown Pair
X1.7 X2.7 White-brown

The technical parameters of the alarm interface cable are listed in Table 29-14.
Table 29-14 Technical parameters of the alarm output interface cable
Item Description
Connector X1/X2 Network interface connector-8PIN-8bit-
unshielded-RJ45 connector-uniconductor
flat cable
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2738
Item Description
Type of the cable W1 Symmetrical twisted pair cable-100 -
UTPCAT5E-0.5 mm (0.02 in.)-24 AWG-4
pairs-PANTONE 430U-low-smoke and
halogen-free cable
Number of cores 8

29.4.3 Alarm Input Interface Cable
An alarm input interface cable is used to input alarms of external equipment. One end of the
cable is connected to the ALMI interface in a subrack and the other end is connected to the
external equipment under monitoring.
Structure
Figure 29-17 shows the structure of the cable.
Figure 29-17 Structure of the alarm concatenating/inter-subrack concatenating cable
1
8
1
8
X1 X2
1
1. Network interface connector-RJ45

Pin Assignment
For the pin assignment of the alarm concatenating/inter-subrack concatenating cable, refer to
Table 29-15.
Table 29-15 Pin assignment of the alarm concatenating/inter-subrack concatenating cable
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2739
X1.4 X2.4 Blue Pair

For the technical parameters of the alarm concatenating/inter-subrack concatenating cable, refer
to Table 29-16.
Table 29-16 Technical parameters of the alarm concatenating/inter-subrack concatenating cable
Item Description
Connector X1/X2 Network interface connector-8PIN-8bit-
crystal model connector
Type of the cable Communication cable-8 cores category-5
twisted pair-24AWG
Number of cores 8

29.5 Management Cables
Management cables for the equipment include: OAM serial port cables, AUX signal cables and
straight-through network cables.
29.5.1 OAM Serial Port Cable
The OAM serial port cable is used to connect to the OAM interface in OptiX OSN 6800/8800.
Structure
Figure 29-18 shows the structure of the OAM serial port cable.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2740
Figure 29-18 Structure of the OAM serial port cable

1. DB9 connector

Pin Assignment
For the pin assignment of the OAM serial port cable, refer to Table 29-17.
Table 29-17 Pin assignment of the OAM serial port
Connector X1 Connector X2 Relationship
X1.1 X2.1 Pair
X1.5 X2.5
X1.2 X2.2 Pair
X1.3 X2.3
X1.6 X2.6 Pair
X1.7 X2.7
X1.8 X2.8 Pair
X1.9 X2.9

The technical parameters of the OAM serial port cable are listed in Table 29-18.
Table 29-18 Technical parameters of the OAM serial port cable
Item Description
Connector X1, X2 Cable connector-D type-9 PIN-Male-Cable
welding type
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2741
Item Description
Type Symmetrical twisted-pair cable-100 ohm-
SEYVP-0.48 mm (0.02 in.)-26AWG-4 pairs-
Black
Number of cores 4 pairs
Length 10.0 m (393.7 in.), 20.0 m (787.4 in.)

29.5.2 AUX Signal Cable
The AUX signal cable accesses external signals through the serial port used for NM
communications and the management port. The AUX signal cable does not process external
signals in the OptiX OSN 3800.
Structure
Figure 29-19 shows the structure of the AUX signal cable.
Figure 29-19 Structure of the AUX signal cable
B
C
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7
X8
W8
W7
W6
W5
W4
W3
W2
W1
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
1
View B
8
2
Pos.9
Pos.1
View C
3
Pos.64
Pos.1
View A
A
Delander
X1
1
1. DB64 cable connector 2. Network interface connector 3. DB9 cable connector

For the relationship between the connectors X2 to X8 and interface types, refer to Table
29-19.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2742
Table 29-19 Relationship between connectors and interface types
Connector Interface Type
X2 Serial
X3 ALMI1
X4 ALMI2
X5 ALMO
X6 LAMP1
X7 LAMP2
X8 ETH

Pin Assignment
For the pin assignment of the W2 to W8, refer to Table 29-20, Table 29-21, Table 29-22, Table
29-23, Table 29-24, Table 29-25 and Table 29-26.
Table 29-20 Pin assignment of the W2
X1.3 X2.2 Pair
X1.7 X2.3
X1.4 X2.4 Pair
X1.1 X2.5
X1.6 X2.6 Pair
X1.8 X2.7
X1.5 X2.8 Pair
X1.2 X2.9

X1.9 X3.1 Pair
X1.11 X3.2
X1.13 X3.3 Pair
X1.15 X3.6
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2743
X1.17 X3.4 Pair
X1.19 X3.5
X1.10 X3.7 Pair
X1.12 X3.8

X1.14 X4.1 Pair
X1.16 X4.2
X1.18 X4.3 Pair
X1.20 X4.6
- X4.4 -
- X4.5
- X4.7 -
- X4.8

X1.21 X5.1 Pair
X1.23 X5.2
X1.25 X5.3 Pair
X1.27 X5.6
X1.22 X5.4 Pair
X1.24 X5.5
X1.26 X5.7 Pair
X1.28 X5.8

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2744
X1.33 X6.1 Pair
X1.35 X6.2
X1.41 X6.3 Pair
X1.43 X6.6
X1.37 X6.4 Pair
X1.39 X6.5
X1.45 X6.7 Pair
X1.47 X6.8

X1.34 X7.1 Pair
X1.36 X7.2
X1.42 X7.3 Pair
X1.44 X7.6
X1.38 X7.4 Pair
X1.40 X7.5
X1.46 X7.7 Pair
X1.48 X7.8

X1.61 X8.1 Pair
X1.57 X8.2
X1.53 X8.3 Pair
X1.49 X8.6
- X8.4 -
- X8.5
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2745
- X8.7 -
- X8.8

The technical parameters of the AUX signal cable are listed in Table 29-27.
Table 29-27 Technical parameters of the AUX signal cable
Item Description
Connector X1 Cable connector-D type-64
PIN-8 bit-straight through
connector
Connector X2 Cable connector-D
type-9PIN
Connectors X3-X8 Network interface
connector-8 bit-8PIN-
Shielded
Type of the cable W1 Communication
cable-26AWG-
PANTONE430U-Sheilded
W2-W8 Communication
cable-24AWG-8 cores-
PANTONE445U
Number of cores 8

29.5.3 Straight-Through Network Cable
The straight-through network cable connects the equipment and the network management
computer. RJ45 connectors are used at both ends of the straight-through network cable,
connected to the equipment at two ends.
Structure
Figure 29-20 shows the structure of the straight-through network cable.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2746
Figure 29-20 Structure of the straight-through network cable
1
8
1
8
X1 X2
RJ-45

Pin Assignment
For the pin assignment of the straight-through network cable, refer to Table 29-28.
Table 29-28 Pin assignment of the straight-through network cable
X1.4 X2.4 Blue Pair

The technical parameters of the straight-through network cable are listed in Table 29-29.
Table 29-29 Technical parameters of the straight-through network cable
Item Description
Connector X1/X2 Network interface connector-8 PIN-8 bit-
Crystal model connector
Type of the cable Communication cable-8-core category-5
twisted pair-24AWG
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2747
Item Description
Number of cores 8

29.6 Clock/Time Cable
Clock/Time Cable includes cables for other equipment connections, cables for internal
connections, cables for testing equipment connections.
29.6.1 Cables for other equipment Connections
The cables for other equipment connections are used to connect to BITS/PTN or OptiX OSN
devices.
The cables applicable to these ports are available in four types, as listed in Table 29-30.
Table 29-30 Cables for connecting BITS/PTN device to OptiX OSN devices
External
interface of
board
Port Type
of OptiX
OSN
Device
Port Type
of BITS or
other
Device
Cable
Type
Description
TOD(time) RJ45(time) RJ45(time) Straight
-
through
network
cables
For details, see 29.6.1.1
Straight-Through Network
Cable.
CLK/IN /
OUT(clock)
RJ45 (clock) SMB (clock) Special
cables
Single Conversion Cable to
connect RJ45 port and SMB port
and coaxial cables use SMB
connectors at both ends.For
details, see 29.6.1.2 Special
Cables and 29.6.1.3 SMB-SMB
Coaxial Cables.
Cables made using coaxial
cables and straight-through
network cables together with
120ohm,75ohm Converter Box.
For details, see 29.6.1.2 Special
Cables.
SMB (clock) SMB (clock) SMB-
SMB
Coaxial
cables
Coaxial cables use SMB
connectors at both ends. For
details, see 29.6.1.3 SMB-SMB
Coaxial Cables.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2748
External
interface of
board
Port Type
of OptiX
OSN
Device
Port Type
of BITS or
other
Device
Cable
Type
Description
RJ45 (clock) RJ45 (clock) Cascadi
ng
network
cable
For details, see 29.6.2.1
Cascading Network Cables .

NOTE
The TN52STI board of an OptiX OSN 8800 device has four 120-ohm RJ45 ports: CLK1, CLK2, TOD1,
and TOD2. The CLK1 and CLK2 ports are used to receive or output clock signals. The TOD1 and TOD2
ports are used to receive or output time signals.
NOTE
The TN11STG board of an OptiX OSN 6800 device has two 120-ohm RJ45 (CLK and OUT) and two 75-
ohm SMB ports (IN and OUT). Users can use the CLK port or the IN and OUT ports to receive and transmit
clock signals. The CLK port can also be used to output clock signals.
29.6.1.1 Straight-Through Network Cable
The straight-through network cable connects the OptiX OSN equipment and the network
management computer. RJ45 connectors are used at both ends of the straight-through network
cable, connected to the equipment at two ends.
For details, see 29.5.3 Straight-Through Network Cable.
29.6.1.2 Special Cables
Special cables are used to connect BITS devices to OptiX OSN devices or OptiX PTN devices.
Each special cable has one SMB connector at one end and an RJ45 connector at the other end.
Structure
Single Cable, Conversion Cable
The single cable uses one RJ45 port at one end and an SMB port at the other end. The length of
such a cable is only 3 meters.
Figure 29-21 shows the structure of a Single Cable, Conversion Cable.
Figure 29-21 Structure of a Single Cable, Conversion Cable

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2749
1: Coaxial Connector,SMB Socket
2: 75 ohm<->120 ohm PCB
3: Network Interface Connector
X1: RJ45 port
X2: SMB port
X3: SMB port
Single Cable,120ohm,75ohm Converter Box
Cables can be made using coaxial cables and straight-through network cables together with
120ohm to 75ohm Converter Box. A convertor box is usually used in three scenarios:
l When an OptiX OSN device needs to connect to a BITS device for clock synchronization,
users need to connect the SMB connectors to the BITS device using two coaxial cables and
the RJ45 connector to the OptiX OSN device using a straight-through network cable.
l When the OptiX OSN device needs to connect to a OptiX PTN device, users need to connect
the SMB connectors to the OptiX OSN device using two coaxial cables and the RJ45
connector to the OptiX PTN device using a straight-through cable.
l If the OptiX OSN device needs to connect to an clock tester, users need to make two cables
at the field, each with one SMB connector at one end and a BNC connector at the other
end. Then connect the SMB connectors to the OptiX OSN device and the BNC connector
to the clock tester.
Figure 29-22 shows a converter box, which provides two SMB ports (IN and OUT) on one side
and an RJ45 port on the other side.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2750
Figure 29-22 Structure of Single Cable,120ohm,75ohm Converter Box

1: Standard Parts-Cross Recess Head Screw,Flat Washer
2: A8010 Refiner,AS21TCTA,A8010 Refiner Twisted Pair Cable,Coaxial Cable Impedance
Transforming Board
3: Box Body,Twisted Pair,Coaxial Cable Conversion Box
Pin Assignment
Table 29-31 provides the pin assignment of the 120ohm to 75ohm converter box.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2751
Table 29-31 Pin assignment when the 120ohm to 75ohm converter box is used
Cable Converter Box Port on OptiX OSN
Device
Straight-through network
cable
RJ45 RJ45
Coaxial cable SMB SMB

NOTE
The connectors on the converter box and on the OptiX OSN device are male and the connectors at the two
ends of the coaxial cable are female.
Table 29-32 provides the parameters of an Special Cables.
Table 29-32 Parameters of an Special Cables
Cable Description
Single Cable, Conversion Cable Single Cable, Conversion Cable, 3m,
2*SMB75SM-IV, 120CC2P0.4P430U(S)
+2*SYFVZ75-1/0.25, MP8-II, Expert 2.0
(BOM:04040582)
Single Cable,120ohm,75ohm Converter Box 1. Coaxial Connector, SMB Socket, 75ohm/
Angle/Male, PCB Welding Type,
Installation Hole D1.3mm, Installation
Holes Spacing 5.1mm
2. A8010 Refiner, AS21TCTA, A8010
Refiner Twisted Pair Cable, Coaxial
Cable Impedance Transforming Board,
3*3 Assembled Board
3. Box Body, Twisted Pair, Coaxial Cable
Conversion Box (SMB Angle Male)
4. For more information of the parameters of
SMB-BNC coaxial cable, see 29.6.1.3
SMB-SMB Coaxial Cables.
5. For more information of the parameters of
Straight-through network cable, see
29.6.1.1 Straight-Through Network
Cable.

29.6.1.3 SMB-SMB Coaxial Cables
The SMB-SMB Coaxial cables connect to SMB ports on BITS devices at one end and to SMB
ports on OptiX OSN devices at the other end. Each coaxial cable uses an SMB connector at each
end.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2752
Structure
Figure 29-23 shows the structure of an SMB-SMB coaxial cable.
Figure 29-23 Structure of an SMB-SMB coaxial cable

Pin Assignment
Table 29-33 provides the pin assignment of an SMB-SMB coaxial cable.
Table 29-33 Pin assignment of an SMB-SMB coaxial cable
One End Other End
SMB-core SMB-core
SMB-ground SMB-ground

Table 29-34 provides the parameters of an SMB-SMB coaxial cable.
Table 29-34 Parameters of an SMB-SMB coaxial cable
Cable Description
Cable type l Trunk Cable, 10.00 m, 75 ohm, 2.2 mm,
SMB75SF-V, SYFVZ75-1.2/0.25,
SMB75SF-V, HONET, DL4368
l Trunk Cable, 2.00 m, 75 ohm, 2.2 mm,
SMB75SF-V, SYFVZ75-1.2/0.25,
l Trunk Cable, 20.00 m, 75 ohm, 2.2 mm,
SMB75SF-V, SYFVZ75-1.2/0.25,
Cable length 2 m, 10 m, 20 m

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2753
29.6.2 Cables for Internal Connections
The type of cables for internal connections of OptiX OSN devices are mainly two scenarios:
connecting NEs on an OptiX OSN network and cascading master and slave subracks on an OptiX
OSN NE.
Table 29-35lists the type of cables for internal connections of OptiX OSN devices.
Table 29-35 Type of cables for internal connections
Connection
type
signal
Type
Cables
Type
Description
connecting
NEs
clock Cascading
network
cable
Cascading network cables must be used when
OptiX OSN NEs that use RJ45 clock ports need
to be connected or when master and slave
subracks on an OptiX OSN NE need to be
cascaded for clock synchronization. For more
information, see 29.6.2.1 Cascading Network
Cables .
time Straight-
through
network
cable
Straight-through network cables must be used
when OptiX OSN NEs that use RJ45 time ports
need to be connected for time synchronization.
For more information,see 29.6.1.1 Straight-
Through Network Cable.
cascading
master and
slave
subracks
clock Cascading
network
cable
ascading networks must be used when master
and slave subracks on an OptiX OSN NE needs
to be cascaded for clock synchronization. For
more information, see 29.6.2.1 Cascading
Network Cables .
time Cascading
network
cable
Cascading networks must be used when master
and slave subracks on an OptiX OSN NE needs
to be cascaded for time synchronization. For
more information, see 29.6.2.1 Cascading
Network Cables .

29.6.2.1 Cascading Network Cables
Cascading network cables must be used when OptiX OSN NEs that use RJ45 clock ports need
to be connected or when master and slave subracks on an OptiX OSN NE need to be cascaded
for clock synchronization. Cascading networks must be used when master and slave subracks
on an OptiX OSN NE needs to be cascaded for time synchronization.
Structure
Figure 29-24 shows the structure of a cascading network cable.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2754
Figure 29-24 Structure of a clock/time cascading network cable with RJ45 connectors at both
ends

Pin Assignment
Table 29-36 provides the pin assignment of a cascading network cable.
Table 29-36 Pin assignment of a cascading network cable
X1.1 (White-orange) X2.4 (Blue) Twisted
X1.2 (Orange) X2.5 (White-blue)
X1.3 (White-green) X2.7 (White-brown) Twisted
X1.4 (Blue) X2.1 (White-orange)
X1.5 (White-blue) X2.2 (Orange) Twisted
X1.6 (Green) X2.8 (Brown)
X1.7 (White-brown) X2.3 (White-green) Twisted
X1.8 (Brown) X2.6 (Green)

Table 29-37 provides the parameters of cascading network cables.
Table 29-37 Parameters of cascading network cables
Item Description
Connector X1/X2 l Network Interface Connector, 8-Bit
8PIN,Shielded,Crystal Model Connector,
24-26AWG,Leads Single Solid Cable,
For OEM Matching 25050057
l Network Interface Connector,8Bit
8Pin,Crystal Plug,Matching 25050014
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2755
Item Description
Cable type Communication cable-8-core class 5 twisted
pair-24 AWG
Number of wires 8

29.6.3 Cables for Testing equipment Connections
Clock signal testing cables are used to connect test instruments to OptiX OSN devices.
Table 29-38 lists the main clock signal testing cables.
Table 29-38 Cables for Testing equipment Connections
Connecti
on
relationsh
ip
Port Type of
Test
Instrument
Port Type
of OptiX
OSN
Device
Cable
Type
Description
Connection
to Clock
test
instrument
BNC(clock) SMB(clock) SMB-
BNCCoaxia
l cables
The coaxial cables use a
BNC port at one end and an
SMB port at the other end.
For more information, see
29.6.3.1 SMB-BNC
Coaxial Cables.
BNC (clock) RJ45 (clock) Clock signal
testing
cables
These testing cables can be
made using coaxial cables
and straight-through
network cables are together
with 120ohm to 75ohm
Converter Box. For more
information, see 29.6.1.2
Special Cables, 29.6.1.1
Straight-Through
Network Cable, 29.6.3.1
SMB-BNC Coaxial
Cables.
Connection
to Time test
instrument
BNC(time) RJ45(time) Time signal
testing
cables
For more information, see
29.6.3.2 Time Signal
Testing Cables.

29.6.3.1 SMB-BNC Coaxial Cables
The SMB-BNC Coaxial cables connect to SMB ports on clock test instrument at one end and
to BNC ports on OptiX OSN devices at the other end.The SMB-BNC coaxial cable use a BNC
port at one end and an SMB port at the other end.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2756
Structure
Figure 29-25 shows the structure of an SMB-BNC coaxial cable.
Figure 29-25 Structure of an SMB-BNC coaxial cable

Pin Assignment
Table 29-39 provides the pin assignment of an SMB-BNC coaxial cable.
Table 29-39 Pin assignment of an SMB-BNC coaxial cable
One End Other End
SMB-core BNC-core
SMB-ground BNC-ground

Table 29-40 provides the parameters of an SMB-BNC coaxial cable.
Table 29-40 Parameters of an SMB-BNC coaxial cable
Cable Description
Cable type Trunk Cable,10.00 m, 75 ohm, 2.2 mm,
SMB75SF-V, SYFVZ75-1.2/0.25,
BNC75AM-II, C, DL2521
Cable length 10 m

29.6.3.2 Time Signal Testing Cables
The time signal testing cables connect to BNC ports on clock test instrument at one end and to
RJ45 ports on OptiX OSN devices at the other end.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2757
Structure
Figure 29-26 shows the structure of a time signal testing cables.
Figure 29-26 Structures of the BNC coaxial cable and cable connector

Pin Assignment
Table 29-41 provides the pin assignment of the time signal testing cables.
Table 29-41 Pin assignment of a time signal testing cable
Connector X1 (BNC) Connector X2 (RJ45) Description
Core 6(green) Pin 6 on the RJ45 connector
on the OptiX OSN device
must be connected to the
BNC port on the time test
instrument.
Ground(Metal shielding) 1(blue) Pin 1 on the RJ45 connector
on the OptiX OSN device
must be connected to the
ground of the BNC connector
on the time test instrument.

Table 29-42provides the parameters of time signal testing cables.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2758
Table 29-42 Parameters of time signal testing cables
Cable Description
RJ45 l Network Interface Connector, 8-Bit
8PIN,Shielded,Crystal Model Connector,
24-26AWG,Leads Single Solide Cable,
For OEM Matching 25050057
l Network Interface Connector,8Bit
8Pin,Crystal Plug,Matching 25050014
BNC Coaxial Connector,BNC,75ohm,Straight
Plug, Male, Matching SYFVZ-75-1-1, With
Heat Shrink Tube With Itself-For Agintrust
Trunk Cable Trunk Cable,RSP0/PV4 Plate To DDF, 30m,
75ohm, 2E1, 2.2mm, DIN4X8,
4*SYFVZ75-1.2/0.25
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2759
30 Optical Attenuator
About This Chapter
Optical attenuators are classified into fixed optical attenuators and mechanical variable optical
attenuators (VOAs).
30.1 Fixed Optical Attenuator
A fixed optical attenuator can reduce the optical power on an optical path by a fixed value. The
common attenuation specifications of fixed optical attenuators are 2 dB, 3 dB, 5 dB, 7 dB, 10
dB, and 15 dB.
30.2 Mechanical Variable Optical Attenuator
A mechanical variable optical attenuator (MVOA) can adjust the optical power on an optical
path within a permitted range. The attenuation adjustment range of an MVOA is 2 dB to 30 dB.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Hardware Description 30 Optical Attenuator
2760
30.1 Fixed Optical Attenuator
A fixed optical attenuator can reduce the optical power on an optical path by a fixed value. The
common attenuation specifications of fixed optical attenuators are 2 dB, 3 dB, 5 dB, 7 dB, 10
dB, and 15 dB.
Figure 30-1 shows the appearance of a fixed optical attenuator.
Figure 30-1 Fixed optical attenuator

30.2 Mechanical Variable Optical Attenuator
A mechanical variable optical attenuator (MVOA) can adjust the optical power on an optical
path within a permitted range. The attenuation adjustment range of an MVOA is 2 dB to 30 dB.
Figure 30-2 shows the appearance of a common MVOA.
Figure 30-2 Appearance of an MVOA

NOTE
The attenuation increases when the VOA is adjusted clockwise while decreases when adjusted counterclockwise.
When adjusting the VOA counterclockwise, observe the optical power closely. When the attenuation stops
decreasing, stop the adjustment immediately to avoid damages to the VOA.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Hardware Description 30 Optical Attenuator
2761
31 Pluggable Optical Modules
The eSFP/SFP+/XFP/CFP is a hot-swappable, protocol-independent optical transceiver used in
optical communications for both telecommunication and data communications applications.
Figure 31-1 eSFP/SFP+ optical module

Figure 31-2 XFP optical module

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Hardware Description 31 Pluggable Optical Modules
2762
Figure 31-3 CFP optical module (40 Gbit/s)

Figure 31-4 CFP optical module (100 Gbit/s)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Hardware Description 31 Pluggable Optical Modules
2763
32 Filler Panels
About This Chapter
A filler panel is used to fill in a vacant slot.
32.1 Functions and Features
This chapter describes the functions and features of a filler panel.
32.2 Front Panel
There are no indicators and interfaces on the filler panel.
32.3 Valid Slots
This section describes the valid slots for a filler panel.
32.4 Technical Specifications
This section describes the technical specifications of a filler panel.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Hardware Description 32 Filler Panels
2764
32.1 Functions and Features
This chapter describes the functions and features of a filler panel.
A filler panel has the following functions:
l Prevents exposure of people to hazardous voltage and current in the subrack.
l Prevents foreign matter from entering the subrack.
l Maintains electromagnetic interference (EMI) compliance.
l Maintains proper air flow through the subrack.
32.2 Front Panel
There are no indicators and interfaces on the filler panel.
Figure 32-1 shows the appearance of a filler panel.
Figure 32-1 Appearance of a filler panel
21136047 21135823 21134882 21135716 21135491 21135492 21135493 21132664 21136046 21136389 21136680
PUSH
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2765
32.3 Valid Slots
This section describes the valid slots for a filler panel.
Table 32-1 lists the valid slots for a filler panel.
Table 32-1 Valid slots for a filler panel
Part Number Product Valid Slots
21132664,
21136680
OptiX OSN 8800 T64 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68
21132664,
21136680
OptiX OSN 8800 T32 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU36
21132664,
21136680
OptiX OSN 8800 T16 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18
21132664,
21136680
OptiX OSN 8800
platform subrack
IU1-IU18
21132664,
21136680
OptiX OSN 6800 IU1-IU18
21132664,
21136680
OptiX OSN 3800 IU11, IU2-IU5
21134882 OptiX OSN 3800 IU1, IU6-IU11
21135491 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 IU42, IU44
21135492 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 IU76, IU77
21135492 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 IU38
21135492,
21135493
OptiX OSN 8800 T16 IU22
NOTE
Slot IU22 must be filled by two filler panels.
21135493 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 IU69-IU71, IU78-IU82, IU87-IU89
21135493 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 IU37, IU39, IU40, IU45-IU48
21135716 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 IU41, IU43
21135716 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 IU72, IU73, IU83, IU84, IU75, IU86
NOTE
Either slot IU75 or IU86 must be filled by two
filler panels.
21135823 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 IU9, IU10
21136046 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 IU74, IU85
21136047 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 IU9, IU10, IU43, IU44
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2766
Part Number Product Valid Slots
21136389 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 IU9, IU10
NOTE
l When slot IU9 or IU10 is used to house a
board except the TN16XCH board, this filler
panel must be inserted before the board is
inserted.
l When slot IU9 or IU10 is empty, it must be
covered with this filler panel and then with a
filler panel identified as 21132664.

32.4 Technical Specifications
This section describes the technical specifications of a filler panel.
Table 32-2 lists the technical specifications of a filler panel.
Table 32-2 Technical specifications of a filler panel
Part Number Mechanical Specifications
21132664, 21136680 25.4 mm (W) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 10.4 in. (H))
21134882 25.4 mm (W) x 118.9 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 3.9 in. (H))
21135491 28.8 mm (W) x 107.5 mm (H) (1.1 in. (W) x 4.2 in. (H))
21135492 25.4 mm (W) x 80 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 3.1 in. (H))
21135493 50.8 mm (W) x 80 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 3.1 in. (H))
21135716 25.4 mm (W) x 107.5 mm (H) (1 in. (W) x 4.2 in. (H))
21135823 27.2 mm (W) x 581.5 mm (H) (1.1 in. (W) x 22.9 in. (H))
21136046 110.0 mm (H) x 76.2 mm (W) (4.4 in. (H) x 3.0 in. (W))
21136047 34.1 mm (W) x 602.5 mm (H) (1.4 in. (W) x 23.7 in. (H))
21136389 37.6 mm (W) x 350.3 mm (H) (1.5 in. (W) x 13.8 in. (H))
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2767
A Indicators
A.1 Cabinet Indicators
There are altogether four indicators in different colors on each cabinet: green, red, orange and
yellow.
A.2 Subrack Indicator
There are four subrack indicators for the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 8800. Indicators are
in the following colors: red, yellow and green.
A.3 Chassis Indicators
There are four chassis indicators in the following colors: green, yellow, orange and red.
A.4 Board Indicators
On the front panel of each board, there are indicators, indicating the alarm status and running
status of the board.
A.5 Fan Indicator
There is one indicator on the FAN, indicating the status of the FAN.
A.6 PIU Indicator
There is one indicator on the PIU, indicating power access status.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Hardware Description A Indicators
2768
A.1 Cabinet Indicators
There are altogether four indicators in different colors on each cabinet: green, red, orange and
yellow.
The corresponding messages of each indicator are listed in Table A-1.
Table A-1 Meanings of cabinet indicators
Indicator Name Status Meaning
power Power indicator On (green) The cabinet is powered
on.
Off The cabinet is not
powered on.
critical Critical alarm
indicator
On (red) There is a critical alarm.
Off There is no critical alarm.
major Major alarm
indicator
On (Orange) There is a major alarm.
Off There is no major alarm.
minor Minor alarm
indicator
On (Yellow) There is a minor alarm.
Off There is no minor alarm.

A.2 Subrack Indicator
There are four subrack indicators for the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 8800. Indicators are
in the following colors: red, yellow and green.
NOTE
The OptiX OSN 8800 subrack indicators are on the panel of the fan tray assembly.
Table A-2 Meanings of subrack indicators
PWR Power indicator On (Green) The subrack works
normally.
Off The subrack does not
work.
OptiX OSN
6800: CRI
Critical alarm
indicator
On (Red) There is a critical alarm.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2769
OptiX OSN
8800: CRIT
MAJ Major alarm
indicator
On (Red) There is a major alarm.
MIN Minor alarm
indicator
On (Yellow) There is a minor alarm.
Blinking slowly (Yellow) The MIN indicator is in
the maintenance blinking
mode.

A.3 Chassis Indicators
There are four chassis indicators in the following colors: green, yellow, orange and red.
Table A-3 Meanings of chassis indicators
PWR Chassis power supply
indicator
On (green) The chassis is powered
on.
Off The chassis is not
powered on.
MIN Minor alarm indicator On (yellow) There is a minor alarm.
MAJ Major alarm indicator On (orange) There is a major alarm.
CRI Critical alarm indicator On (red) There is a critical alarm.

A.4 Board Indicators
On the front panel of each board, there are indicators, indicating the alarm status and running
status of the board.
The meanings of the board indicators are listed in Table A-4, Table A-5, and Table A-6.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2770
Table A-4 Meanings of board indicators
Indicato
r
Name Status Meaning
STAT Board hardware
indicator
On (green) The board works normally.
Blinking slowly
(green)
a
The STAT indicator is in the
maintenance blinking mode.
On (red) A critical/major alarm occurs on
the board.
On (yellow) A minor alarm occurs on the
board.
Off The board is not powered on.
PROG Board software
indicator
On (red) The memory check fails.
Loading the board software fails.
The FPGA file is lost.
The board software is lost.
Blinking quickly
(red)
On for 100 ms and off for 100 ms:
The BOOTROM check fails.
Blinking quickly
(green)
Writing the flash memory is in
progress.
Blinking slowly
(green)
The BIOS booting is in progress.
On (green) The board software or FPGA is
uploaded successfully, or the
board software is initialized
successfully.
SRV Service alarm
indicator
On (green) The service is normal with any
service alarm.
On (red) A critical or major service alarm
occurs.
On (yellow) A minor or remote service alarm
occurs.
Off No service is configured.
ACT
b
Service activation
indicator
On (green) The board is in the working mode.
The board is in the active mode.
Off The board is not in the working
mode.
The board is in the standby mode.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2771
Indicato
r
Name Status Meaning
Blinking quickly
(green)
Backing up the system database in
batches is in progress.
LINK/
ACTn
Data port
connection/data
transceive indicator
On (green) The data port connection is
normal.
Off The data port connection is
abnormal.
Blinking quickly
(yellow)
Data ports are receiving and
transmitting data.
LAS Laser emission
status indicator
On (green) The Raman laser is in the working
mode.
Off The Raman laser is ont in the
working mode.
NOTE
a: When the STAT indicator on a board is in maintenance blinking mode, the board can be removed. Most
of the boards support this function except the following boards:
ACS, APIU, ATE, BMD4, BMD8, CMR1, CMR2, CMR4, CRPC, DCM, DCU, DMR1, DFIU, EFI, FAN,
TN21FIU, TN13FIU, GFU, TN11ITL, TN11L4G, MB2, MR2, MR4, MR8, PIU, SBM2, TN21SCC,
TN22SCC, TN23SCC, SCS, SFIU, STI, TBE, TN11XCS.
b: During the testing of the indicators on the TN51AUX board, the ACT indicator is lit orange.

Table A-5 Meanings of the indicators on the PQ2 sub-board
Indicato
r
Name Status Meaning
STAT Board hardware
indicator
On (green) The PQ2 sub-board works
normally.
On (red) The PQ2 sub-board is abnormal.
On (yellow) Logical sub-board is not
configured.
Off The PQ2 sub-board is not powered
on.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2772
Table A-6 Meanings of the indicators on the SCC board
Indicato
r
Name Status Meaning
STAT Board hardware
indicator
On (green) The board is working normally.
Blinking slowly
(green)
a
The STAT indicator is in the
maintenance blinking mode.
On (red) A critical alarm occurs on the
board.
On (yellow) A minor alarm occurs on the board.
Off The board is not powered on.
PROG Board software
indicator
On (red) The memory check fails.
Loading the board software fails.
The FPGA file is lost.
The NE software is lost.
Blinking quickly
(red)
The BOOTROM check fails.
Blinking quickly
(green)
Writing the flash memory is in
progress.
Blinking slowly
(green)
The BIOS booting is in progress.
On (green) The board software or FPGA is
uploaded successfully, or the
board software is initialized
successfully.
SRV Service alarm
indicator
On (green) The service is normal with any
service alarm.
On (red) A critical or major service alarm
occurs.
On (yellow) A minor alarm occurs.
ACT Service activation
indicator
On (green) The board is in the working mode.
The board is in the active mode.
Off The board is not in the working
mode.
The board is in the standby mode.
Blinking quickly
(green)
Backing up the system database in
batches is in progress.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2773
Indicato
r
Name Status Meaning
PWRA Indicator for system
power supply
On (green) -48 V power supply A is normal.
On (red) -48 V power supply A is faulty
(lost or failed).
Off No power is input.
PWRB Indicator for system
power supply
On (green) -48 V power supply B is normal.
On (red) -48 V power supply B is faulty (lost
or failed).
Off No power is input.
PWRC Indicator for
protection power
supply
On (green) The +3.3 V protection power is
normal.
On (red) The +3.3 V protection power is
lost.
ALMC Alarm cut-off
indicator
On (yellow) There is no audible or visual
warning in case of an alarm.
Off Audible warning is generated in
case of an alarm.
NOTE
a: When the STAT indicator on a board is in maintenance blinking mode, the board can be removed. The
boards that support this function include: TN11SCC, TN16SCC, TN51SCC, TN52SCC, and TNK2SCC.

A.5 Fan Indicator
There is one indicator on the FAN, indicating the status of the FAN.
The corresponding meanings of the Fan indicator are listed in Table A-7.
Table A-7 Meanings of the FAN indicator
OptiX OSN
6800/OptiX
OSN 3800:
STAT
OptiX OSN
8800: FAN
Fan indicator On (green) The fan is normal.
On (red) A major alarm occurs or two or
more fans are faulty.
On (yellow) A minor alarm occurs or one fan is
faulty.
Off The fan is not powered on, is
absent, or the software is not
loaded.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2774
A.6 PIU Indicator
There is one indicator on the PIU, indicating power access status.
Table A-8 Meanings of the PIU indicator
OptiX OSN
6800/OptiX
OSN 3800:
RUN
OptiX OSN
8800: PWR
Running status
indicator
On (green) Indicates that the power is
accessed normally.
Off Indicates that the power is
not accessed.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2775
B Bar Code for Boards
and board characteristic code.
B.1 Overview
B.2 Characteristic Code for OTUs
The characteristic code for OTUs indicates the frequency, type and wavelength of the optical
modules in DWDM OTUs, DWDM wavelength-tunable OTUs and CWDM OTUs.
B.3 Characteristic Code of a Line Unit
The characteristic code of a line unit indicates the frequency, type, and wavelength of the DWDM
optical modules and DWDM wavelength-tunable optical modules.
B.4 Characteristic Code of an FOADM
The characteristic code of an FOADM indicates the wavelength or frequency of the optical
signals processed by the board.
B.5 Characteristic Code of an MCA
The characteristic code of an MCA indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the
board.
B.6 Characteristic Code of an OAU
The characteristic code of an OAU indicates the gain, gain range, and the maximum nominal
input optical power of the optical signals processed by the board.
B.7 Characteristic Code of an Optical MUX/DMUX Unit
The characteristic code of an optical MUX/DMUX unit indicates the band of the optical signals
processed by the board, whether the wavelengths with signals are odd or even wavelengths, and
the multiplexing solution adopted by the board.
B.8 Characteristic Code of a Protection Unit
The characteristic code of an optical protection board indicates the maximum protection
switching time.
B.9 Characteristic Code of a VOA
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Hardware Description B Bar Code for Boards
2776
The characteristic code of a VOA indicates the maximum attenuation of the optical signals
B.10 Characteristic Code of a PDE Unit
The characteristic code of a PDE unit indicates the type of the fiber that the board works with,
the dispersion compensation distance, and the gradient of optical signals.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2777
B.1 Overview
NOTE
Such information as frequency of signals queried on the U2000 is a commissioning value, different from
that on the bar code.
Figure B-1 and Figure B-2 show the bar codes of boards installed with optical modules.
Figure B-3 and Figure B-4 show the bar codes of boards not installed with optical modules.
Figure B-1 Description of the bar code (example 1)
2102314840107A000090 19210AG
BOM
Delivery
information
Board version
(TN12)
Board
name
Characteristic
code
TN1M2
LSX
Y
01
Board model
number
Environmental
friendliness flag
(Y: Environmentally
friendly)
V
e
n
d
o
r
M
a
n
u
f
a
c
t
u
r
e

y
e
a
r
M
a
n
u
f
a
c
t
u
r
e

m
o
n
t
h
S
e
r
i
a
l

n
u
m
b
e
r

2102315653108A000199
BOM
Delivery
information
Board version
(TN12)
Board
name
Characteristic
code
TN1M2 LSX Y T01
Board model
number
Environmental
friendliness flag
(Y: Environmentally
friendly)
TPT
Tunable
V
e
n
d
o
r
M
a
n
u
f
a
c
t
u
r
e

y
e
a
r
M
a
n
u
f
a
c
t
u
r
e

m
o
n
t
h
S
e
r
i
a
l

n
u
m
b
e
r
T01

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2778
2103070768107A000090
BOM
TN1M2LSX Y
01
Delivery
information
Board version
(TN12)
Board model
number
Board
name
Environmental
friendliness flag
(Y: Environmentally
friendly)
V
e
n
d
o
r
M
a
n
u
f
a
c
t
u
r
e

y
e
a
r
M
a
n
u
f
a
c
t
u
r
e

m
o
n
t
h
S
e
r
i
a
l

n
u
m
b
e
r

030HFY 108A000199
Third and fourth
numbers of the BOM
TN12 LSX Y T01
Board model
number
Environmental
friendliness flag
(Y: Environmentally
friendly)
Delivery
information
Board version
(TN12)
Board
name
The complete BOM
should be 0303OHFY.
"03" are taken out in the
BOM above.
V
e
n
d
o
r
M
a
n
u
f
a
c
t
u
r
e

y
e
a
r
M
a
n
u
f
a
c
t
u
r
e

m
o
n
t
h
S
e
r
i
a
l

n
u
m
b
e
r

The first four numbers in the board BOM indicate whether the board is installed with an optical
module. Table B-1 provides the meanings of the first four numbers in the board BOM.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2779
Table B-1 Meanings of the first four numbers in the BOMs for OTN boards
Board
Configuration
First Four
Numbers in
the board
BOM
in the BOM of the
Required Optical
Module
Board not installed
with a wavelength
tunable optical module
on its WDM side.
Client-side optical
modules need to be
selected as required for
the board.
side)
installed with any
modules need to be
required.
and WDM side)
with a fixed optical
module on its WDM
side. Client-side optical
modules need to be
required.
side)
installed with any
modules need to be
required.
and WDM side)
optical modules
0231 Optical modules are
installed on the client
and WDM sides of the
board.
N/A

Of the OCS boards, the SSN1SF64A and SSN3SLH41 boards are delivered as follows:
l For the SSN1SF64A board, the first four numbers in the BOM are 0303, indicating that the
board is delivered with optical modules installed.
l For the SSN3SLH41 board,
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2780
The first four numbers are 0303 when the board is delivered with optical modules not
installed. The first four numbers in the BOMs of the optical modules required by the
board are 3406.
When the board is delivered with optical modules installed, the first four numbers in
the BOM are 0305.
Table B-2 provides the meanings of the first four numbers in the BOMs for of other OCS boards.
Table B-2 Meanings of the first four numbers in the BOM for an OCS board (excluding
SSN1SF64A and SSN3SLH41)
Board
Configuration
First Four
Numbers in
the board
BOM
in the BOM of the
Required Optical
Module
Board not installed
installed with any
optical module. Optical
modules need to be
required.
3406
optical modules
optical modules.
N/A

Table B-3 provides the description of the delivery information.
Table B-3 Description of the delivery information of a board
Item Description
Vendor Indicates the vendor of a board. "10" indicates Huawei.
Manufacture Year Indicates the last digit of the year when a board is manufactured.
For example, "4" indicates 2004. From 2010 onwards, a letter is
used to indicate the manufacture year. For example, the letter A
indicates 2010, the letter B indicates 2011, and so on.
Manufacture Month Indicates the month when a board is manufactured. The value is
expressed in hexadecimal format. For example, the letter B
indicates November.
Serial Number Indicates the production serial number of a board. The value ranges
from 000001 to 999999.

B.2 Characteristic Code for OTUs
The characteristic code for OTUs indicates the frequency, type and wavelength of the optical
modules in DWDM OTUs, DWDM wavelength-tunable OTUs and CWDM OTUs.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2781
B.2.1 Characteristic Code for DWDM OTUs
The characteristic code for a DWDM OTU consists of digits and characters, indicating the
frequency and type of the optical module in the OTU.
Detailed information about the characteristic code is listed in Table B-4.
Table B-4 Characteristic code for a DWDM OTU
The first five digit The frequency of the
DWDM-side optical
transmitter module
Indicate the frequency of the
DWDM-side optical
transmitter module.
The sixth character The type of the DWDM-side
receiving optical module
The value can be A or P. A
represents APD. P represents
PIN.
The seventh character The type of the DWDM-side
optical transmitter module
The detailed meaning of the
character is shown in Table
B-5.

NOTE
In the case of the OTU boards with dual fed optical interfaces, such as the LQMD board, the characteristic
code consists of eight digits. The frequency values of the two channels of optical signals on the WDM side
are indicated.
The types of DWDM-side transmitting optical modules are listed in Table B-5.
Table B-5 Types of DWDM-side transmitting optical modules
Character Dispersion (1550
nm)
Distance Rate
A 1600ps/nm 80km 2.5G
3200ps/nm 170km 2.5G
800ps/nm 40km 10.66G
3200ps/nm 160km 2.5G
B 1500ps/nm 80km 10.66G
1600ps/nm 80km 10.66G
3200ps/nm 170km 2.5G
C 800ps/nm 40km 10.66G
12800ps/nm 640km 2.5G
6500ps/nm 320km 2.5G
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2782
nm)
Distance Rate
D 12800ps/nm 640km 2.5G
E 6500ps/nm 320km 2.5G
G 800ps/nm 40km 10.71G
H >600ps/nm >30km 10.71G
>600ps/nm >30km 10.66G
K 800ps/nm 40km 10.66G
1800ps/nm 90km 2.66G
L 12800ps/nm 640km 2.66G
12800ps/nm 640km 2.5G
1500ps/nm 80km 10.66G
M >600ps/nm >30km 10.66G
>600ps/nm >30km 10.71G
6400ps/nm 320km 4.9-5.4G
6400ps/nm 320km 10.66G
1500ps/nm 80km 10.71G
3400ps/nm 170km 4.9-5.4G
Z 800ps/nm 40km 10.71G
U >600ps/nm >30km 10.71G

For example, the characteristic code for the TN12LSX is 19210AG. This code indicates the
following features: The frequency of the DWDM-side optical transmitter module is 192.10 THz;
APD is adopted by the DWDM-side receiving optical module; the code of the DWDM-side
optical transmitter module is G. For details, refer to Table B-5.
B.2.2 Characteristic Code for DWDM Wavelength-Tunable OTUs
The characteristic code for a DWDM wavelength-tunable OTU consists of characters, indicating
the frequency and type of the optical module in the OTU.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2783
Table B-6 Characteristic code for a DWDM wavelength-tunable OTU
The first character Wavelength-tunable T is the abbreviation for
Tunable, indicating that the
wavelength is tunable.
The second character The type of the DWDM-side
PIN.
The third character The type of the DWDM-side
optical transmitter module
The detailed meaning of the
character is shown in Table
B-7.

The types of DWDM-side optical transmitter modules are listed in Table B-7.
Table B-7 Types of DWDM-side optical transmitter modules
nm)
Distance Rate
T 1200ps/nm 60km 10.71G
12800ps/nm 640km 2.66G
12800ps/nm 640km 2.67G
3400ps/nm 170km 5.33G
-1000 to 1100ps/nm 60km 10.71G
4800ps/nm 240km 11.3G

For example, the characteristic code for the TN12LSX is TPT. This code indicates the following
features: This board is a wavelength-tunable OTU; PIN is adopted by the DWDM-side receiving
optical module; the code of the DWDM-side optical transmitter module is T. For details, refer
to Table B-7.
B.2.3 Characteristic Code for CWDM OTUs
The characteristic code for a CWDM OTU consists of characters, indicating the wavelength and
type of the optical module in the OTU.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2784
Table B-8 Characteristic code for a CWDM OTU
The first four digits The wavelength of the
CWDM-side transmitting
optical module
Indicate the wavelength of
the CWDM-side transmitting
optical module.
The fifth character The type of the CWDM-side
PIN.
The sixth character The type of the CWDM-side
transmitting optical module
The value can be L or S. L
represents long haul. S
represents short haul.

NOTE
As for the LWX2 board, only information about the first wavelength is indicated.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN13LQM is 1531AS. This code indicates the
following features: The wavelength is 1531 nm; APD is adopted by the CWDM-side receiving
optical module; the CWDM-side transmitting optical module is used for short-haul transmission
(80 km).
B.3 Characteristic Code of a Line Unit
The characteristic code of a line unit indicates the frequency, type, and wavelength of the DWDM
optical modules and DWDM wavelength-tunable optical modules.
The line unit shares the same characteristic code with the WDM-side DWDM optical module
of the wavelength tunable unit. For details, refer to B.2.1 Characteristic Code for DWDM
OTUs and B.2.2 Characteristic Code for DWDM Wavelength-Tunable OTUs.
B.4 Characteristic Code of an FOADM
The characteristic code of an FOADM indicates the wavelength or frequency of the optical
signals processed by the board.
B.4.1 Characteristic Code for the CMR1
The characteristic code for the CMR1 board contains four digits, indicating the wavelength that
carries the signals processed by the board.
Table B-9 lists details on the characteristic code for the CMR1.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2785
Table B-9 Characteristic code for the CMR1
First four digits Wavelength that carries
optical signals
Indicates the wavelength that
carries the optical signals

For example, the characteristic code for the TN21CMR1 is 1471, indicating that the wavelength
that carries the signals is 1471 nm.
The characteristic code for the CMR2 board contains eight digits, indicating the two wavelengths
that carry the signals processed by the board.
The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-10.
Table B-10 Characteristic code for the CMR2 board
First four digits First wavelength that carries
optical signals
Indicates the first wavelength
Last four digits Second wavelength that
Indicates the second
the board.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11CMR2 is 14711571.
The characteristic code for the CMR4 board contains eight digits, indicating the four
wavelengths that carry the signals processed by the board.
Detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-11.
Table B-11 Characteristic code for the CMR4 board
First and second digits First wavelength that carries
optical signals
digits of the first wavelength
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2786
Third and fourth digits Second wavelength that
digits of the second
the board.
Fifth and sixth digits Third wavelength that carries
optical signals
digits of the third wavelength
Seventh and eighth digits Fourth wavelength that
digits of the fourth
the board.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11CMR4 board is 47495961.
l "59" indicates that the third wavelength is 1591 nm.
l "61" indicates that the fourth wavelength is 1611 nm.
B.4.4 Characteristic Code for the DMR1
The characteristics code for the DMR1 board contains four digits, identifying the frequency of
Table B-12 provides the details on the characteristics code.
Table B-12 Characteristic code for the DMR1 board
Barcode Meaning Description
First to fourth digits Optical signal frequency Frequency of the optical
signals processed by the
board

For example, the characteristics code of the TN11DMR1 board is 9210. The code indicates that
the frequency of the optical signals is 192.1 THz.
B.4.5 Characteristic Code for the MR2
the two signals processed by the board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2787
Table B-13 Characteristic code for the MR2 board
signal
the first optical signal.
Last four digits Frequency of the second
optical signal
the second optical signal.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MR2 board is 93609370.
l "9370" indicates that the frequency of the second optical signal is 193.70 THz.
B.4.6 Characteristic Code for of MR4
The characteristic code for the MR4 board contains eight digits. Each digit indicates the
frequencies of the first and the fourth signals processed by the board.
First four digits Frequency of first optical
signal
Last four digits Frequency of forth optical
signal
the fourth optical signal

l "9240" indicates that the frequency of the fourth optical signal is 192.40 THz.
Since the four channels of optical signals processed by the MR4 board are in sequence, it can
be inferred that:
l The frequency of the second channel of optical signals is 192.20 THz.
l The frequency of the third channel of optical signals is 192.30 THz.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2788
B.4.7 Characteristic Code for the MR8
the first and the eighth signals processed by the board.
signal
optical signal

Since the eight channels of optical signals processed by the MR8 board are consecutive, it can
be inferred that:
B.4.8 Characteristic Code for the MR8V
The characteristic code for the MR8V board contains of eight digits that indicate the frequencies
of the first and the eighth signals processed by the board.
Table B-16 Characteristic code for the MR8V board
signal
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2789
optical signal
"V" Adjustment of the input
optical power of each
channel
Indicates that the board
adjusts the input optical
power of each channel.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MR8V board is 92109280V.
l "V" indicates that adjusts the input optical power of each channel.
Since the eight channels of optical signals processed by the MR8V board are consecutive, it can
be inferred that:
B.5 Characteristic Code of an MCA
The characteristic code of an MCA indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the
board.
B.5.1 Characteristic Code for the MCA4
The characteristic code for the MCA4 board contains one character, indicating the band of the
Table B-17 Characteristic code for the MCA4 board
represents C band.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MCA4 board is C, indicating C band.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2790
B.5.2 Characteristic Code for the MCA8
The characteristic code for the MCA8 board consists of one character, indicating the band of
Table B-18 Characteristic code for the MCA8 board
represents C band.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MCA8 board is C, indicating that the card
processes optical signals in the C band.
B.6 Characteristic Code of an OAU
The characteristic code of an OAU indicates the gain, gain range, and the maximum nominal
input optical power of the optical signals processed by the board.
B.6.1 Characteristic Code for the HBA
The characteristic code for the HBA board contains seven characters and digits, indicating the
band, the gain range and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by
the board.
Table B-19 Characteristic code for the HBA board
Second character - The second character is
always G.
Third to the fourth digits Gain The third to the fourth digits
indicate the gain value.
Fifth character - The fifth character is always
I.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2791
Sixth and seventh digits Maximum nominal input
optical power

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11HBA board is CG29I-8. The code indicates
that the HBA board is used in C band, the gain is 29 dB, and the maximum nominal input optical
power is -8 dBm.
B.6.2 Characteristic Code for the OAU1
The characteristic code for the OAU1 board contains eight characters and digits, indicating the
Table B-20 Characteristic code for the OAU1 board
Second to fifth digits Gain range Indicates the range within
which the gain can be
continuously adjusted.
Sixth character - Is always I.
Seventh and eighth digits Maximum nominal input
optical power
Indicates the maximum

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11OAU1 board is G2031I0. The code indicates
that the gain can be continuously adjusted from 20 dB to 31 dB and the maximum nominal input
optical power is 0 dBm.
B.6.3 Characteristic Code for the OBU1
gain and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the board.
Table B-21 Characteristic code for the OBU1 board
G.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2792
always I.
optical power

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11OBU1 board is G23I-3. This code indicates
that the gain is 23 dB and the maximum nominal input optical power is -3 dBm.
B.6.4 Characteristic Code for the OBU2
Table B-22 Characteristic code for the OBU2 board
G.
always I.
optical power

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11OBU2 board is G23I00. The code indicates
that the gain is 23 dB and the maximum nominal input optical power is 0 dBm.
B.6.5 Characteristic Code for of CRPC
The characteristic code for the CRPC board contains one character and two digits, indicating
the gain of the optical signals processed by the board.
Table B-23 Characteristic code for the CRPC board
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2793
Two digits Gain Indicate the gain value.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11CRPC board is G10, indicating 10 dB gain.
B.7 Characteristic Code of an Optical MUX/DMUX Unit
The characteristic code of an optical MUX/DMUX unit indicates the band of the optical signals
processed by the board, whether the wavelengths with signals are odd or even wavelengths, and
the multiplexing solution adopted by the board.
B.7.1 Characteristic Code for the D40
The characteristic code for the D40 consists of two characters. One indicates the band. The other
indicates whether the wavelengths that carry the optical signals processed by the board are odd
or even wavelengths.
Table B-24 Characteristic code for the D40
The first character Band Indicates the band of the
The second character Odd/even wavelengths Indicates whether the
wavelengths.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11D40 is CE, indicating C band and even
wavelengths.
B.7.2 Characteristic Code for the D40V
The characteristic code for the D40V board contains two characters. One indicates the band and
are odd or even.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2794
Table B-25 Characteristic code for the D40V board
wavelengths.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11D40V board is CE, indicating C band and even
wavelengths.
B.7.3 Characteristic Code for the DFIU
The characteristic code for the DFIU board contains one character, indicating the band adopted
by the board.
Table B-26 Characteristic code for the DFIU board
C band; the value L
represents L band.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN21DFIU board is C, indicating that the optical
signals are in C band.
B.7.4 Characteristic Code for the FIU
The characteristic code for the FIU board consists of one character. The character indicates the
band adopted by the board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2795
Table B-27 Characteristic code for the FIU board
C band; the value L
represents L band.

C band.
B.7.5 Characteristic Code for the ITL
The characteristic code for the ITL board contains one character, indicating the band adopted
by the board.
Table B-28 Characteristic code for the ITL board
C band.

For example, the characteristic code for the ITL board is C, indicating that the optical signals
are in C band.
B.7.6 Characteristic Code for the M40
The characteristic code for the M40 board contains two characters. One indicates the band and
are odd or even.
Table B-29 Characteristic code for the M40 board
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2796
wavelengths.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11M40 board is CE, indicating C band and even
wavelengths.
B.7.7 Characteristic Code for the M40V
The characteristic code for the M40V board contains two characters. One indicates the band and
are odd or even.
Table B-30 Characteristic code for the M40V board
wavelengths.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11M40V board is CE, indicating C band and
even wavelengths.
B.8 Characteristic Code of a Protection Unit
The characteristic code of an optical protection board indicates the maximum protection
switching time.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2797
B.8.1 Characteristic Code for the DCP
The characteristic code for the DCP board contains one character and two digits, indicating the
Table B-31 Characteristic code for the DCP board
P.
switching time

For example, the characteristic code for the TN12DCP board is P50. This code indicates that
the maximum protection switching time is 50ms.
B.8.2 Characteristic Code for the OLP
The characteristic code for the OLP board contains one character and two digits, indicating the
Table B-32 Characteristic code for the OLP board
P.
switching time

For example, the characteristic code for the TN12OLP board is P50. This code indicates that the
maximum protection switching time is 50ms.
B.8.3 Characteristic Code for the SCS
The characteristic code for the SCS board contains one character and two digits, indicating the
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2798
Table B-33 Characteristic code for the SCS board
P.
switching time

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11SCS board is P50. This code indicates that the
maximum protection switching time is 50 ms.
B.9 Characteristic Code of a VOA
The characteristic code of a VOA indicates the maximum attenuation of the optical signals
B.9.1 Characteristic Code for the VA1
Table B-34 Characteristic code for the VA1 board
Digits 1 through 3 Attenuation value Indicate the maximum
attenuation.

maximum allowable attenuation value is 21.5 dB.
B.9.2 Characteristic Code for the VA4
Table B-35 Characteristic code for the VA4 board
First to third digits Attenuation value Indicate the maximum
attenuation.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2799
maximum attenuation value is 21.5 dB.
B.10 Characteristic Code of a PDE Unit
The characteristic code of a PDE unit indicates the type of the fiber that the board works with,
the dispersion compensation distance, and the gradient of optical signals.
B.10.1 Characteristic Code for the DCU
The characteristic code for the DCU board contains characters, indicating the type of the fiber
Table B-36 Characteristic code for the DCU board
Character before hyphen (-) Fiber type Type of the fiber that the
DCU board works with
distance
compensation

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11DCU board is G.655LEAF-40. It indicates
that the DCU board works with G.655LEAF fibers, and the dispersion compensation distance
is 40 km.
NOTE
If the characteristic code contains various dispersion compensation distances, the symbol "&" is used to
separate each distance.
B.10.2 Characteristic Code for the GFU
The characteristic code for the GFU board contains two characters and two digits, indicating the
gradient of optical signals processed by the board.
Table B-37 Characteristic code for the GFU board
First and second characters - The first and second
characters are always GF.
Third and fourth digits Gradient Indicate the gradient of
optical signals.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2800
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11GFU board is GF10. This code indicates that
the gradient of optical signals processed by the board is 10.
B.10.3 Characteristic Code for the TDC
The characteristic code for the TDC board contains characters, indicating the type of the fiber
Table B-38 Characteristic code for the TDC board
Character before hyphen (-) Fiber type Fiber type that the TDC
board is compatible with
distance
compensation

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11TDC board is G.655LEAF_T. It indicates that
the TDC board works with G.655LEAF fibers, and the dispersion compensation distance is
tunable.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2801
C Quick Reference Table of the Units
Quick reference tables include those for specifications of optical transponder units, optical
amplifier units and other boards, and also the functions of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards.
C.1 Specification of OTUs, Tributary Boards, Line Boards and Packet Service Boards
The main specifications of the optical transponder units (OTUs), tributary boards, line boards,
and packet service boards include the access service type, optical module specifications and
C.2 Specification of Optical Amplifying Unit
The main specifications of the optical amplifier unit include the operating wavelength range,
channel gain, nominal input power range, nominal output power range and maximum output
power of a single wavelength.
C.3 Insertion Loss Specifications of Boards
This section provides the insertion loss specifications of boards.
C.4 MON Interface Optical Split Ratio
Certain boards of WDM equipment provide MON interfaces. A small number of supervisory
signals are split from the main-path signals and are output through MON for in-service
performance monitoring of the optical signals.
C.5 Basic Functions of OTUs, Tributary Boards, Line Boards and Packet Service Boards
The main functions and features supported by OTUs, Tributary Boards, Line Boards, and Packet
Service Boards are wavelength conversion, cross-connection at the electrical layer, OTN
interfaces and ESC.
C.6 Loopback Function of OTUs, Tributary Boards, Line Boards and Packet Service Boards
The OTUs, Tributary Boards, Line Boards, and Packet Service Boards support different types
of loopback.The OTUs, Tributary Boards, and Line Boards support different types of loopback.
C.7 Protection mode of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards
The OTUs, tributary boards, and line boards support protection function.
C.8 Electrical cross-connection of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards
The OTUs, tributary boards, and line boards support electrical cross-connection.
C.9 Common Parameters Specified for Optical Interfaces of OCS Boards
This topic describes common parameters specified for optical interfaces of OCS boards.
C.10 Quick Reference of OCS Board Functions
This section describes the functions supported by different types of boards.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Hardware Description C Quick Reference Table of the Units
2802
C.11 Loopback Capabilities of OCS Boards
The SDH boards and Ethernet boards on the OptiX OSN 9560 support various types of
loopbacks.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2803
C.1 Specification of OTUs, Tributary Boards, Line Boards
and Packet Service Boards
The main specifications of the optical transponder units (OTUs), tributary boards, line boards,
and packet service boards include the access service type, optical module specifications and
C.1.1 OTUs, Tributary Boards and Packet Service Boards
Specification on the Client Side
The main client-side specifications of the optical transponder unit (OTU), tributary boards, and
packet service boards include the access service type, optical module specifications and optical
module type.
Table C-1 Quick reference table for client-side specifications of OTUs, tributary boards and packet service boards
Board Name Access
Service Type
Optical Module Note
Optical
Interface
Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minim
um
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minim
um
(dBm)
TN11ECOM FE 100 BASE-
FX-10 km
-3 -11.5 -19 -3 eSFP
100 BASE-
FX-40 km
0 -4.5 -20 -3
100 BASE-
FX-80 km
5 -2 -22 -3
1.25 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-40 km
5 0 -19 -3 eSFP
CWDM
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
5 0 -28 -9
TN54EG16 GE 2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.5
km
-2.5 -9.5 -17 0 eSFP
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
-3 -9 -20 -3
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
0 -5 -20 -3
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2804
Board Name Access
Service Type
Optical Module Note
Optical
Interface
Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minim
um
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minim
um
(dBm)
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
5 -2 -23 -3
1.25 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-40 km
5 0 -19 -3 eSFP
CWDM
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
5 0 -28 -9
TN54EX2 10GE LAN 10 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.3
km
-1 -7.3 -11.1 -1 SFP+
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10
km
0.5 -8.2 -12.6 0.5
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40
km
4 -4.7 -14.1 -1
TN11L4G GE 2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.5
km
-2.5 -9.5 -17 0 eSFP
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
-3 -9 -20 -3
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
0 -5 -20 -3
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
5 -2 -23 -3
1.25 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-40 km
5 0 -19 -3 eSFP
CWDM
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
5 0 -28 -9
TN11LDGD GE 2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.5
km
-2.5 -9.5 -17 0 eSFP
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2805
Board Name Access
Service Type
Optical Module Note
Optical
Interface
Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minim
um
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minim
um
(dBm)
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
-3 -9 -20 -3
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
0 -5 -20 -3
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
5 -2 -23 -3
1.25 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-40 km
5 0 -19 -3 eSFP
CWDM
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
5 0 -28 -9
TN11LDGS GE 2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.5
km
-2.5 -9.5 -17 0 eSFP
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
-3 -9 -20 -3
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
0 -5 -20 -3
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
5 -2 -23 -3
1.25 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-40 km
5 0 -19 -3 eSFP
CWDM
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
5 0 -28 -9
TN12LDM FC200/GE/
FC100/ FE
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.5
km
-2.5 -9.5 -17 0 eSFP
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
-3 -9 -20 -3
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
0 -5 -20 -3
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2806
Board Name Access
Service Type
Optical Module Note
Optical
Interface
Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minim
um
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minim
um
(dBm)
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
5 -2 -23 -3
OTU1/
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/ GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVB-
ASI
I-16-2 km -3 -10 -18 -3
L-16.1-40 km 3 -2 -27 -9
L-16.2-80 km 3 -2 -28 -9
OTU1/
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/ GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVB-
ASI/ FE
S-16.1-15 km 0 -5 -18 0
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1.25 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-40 km
5 0 -19 -3 eSFP
CWDM
OTU1/
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVB-
ASI/ FE
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
5 0 -28 -9
OTU1/
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/ GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVB-
ASI/ FE
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
DWDM)-120
km
4 0 -28 -9 eSFP
DWDM
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2807
Board Name Access
Service Type
Optical Module Note
Optical
Interface
Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minim
um
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minim
um
(dBm)
TN11LDMD FC200/GE/
FC100/ FE
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.5
km
-2.5 -9.5 -17 0 eSFP
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
-3 -9 -20 -3
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
0 -5 -20 -3
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
5 -2 -23 -3
OTU1/
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/ GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVB-
ASI
I-16-2 km -3 -10 -18 -3
L-16.1-40 km 3 -2 -27 -9
L-16.2-80 km 3 -2 -28 -9
OTU1/
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/ GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVB-
ASI/ FE
S-16.1-15 km 0 -5 -18 0
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1.25 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-40 km
5 0 -19 -3 eSFP
CWDM
OTU1/
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVB-
ASI/ FE
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
5 0 -28 -9
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2808
Board Name Access
Service Type
Optical Module Note
Optical
Interface
Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minim
um
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minim
um
(dBm)
OTU1/
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/ GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVB-
ASI/ FE
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
DWDM)-120
km
4 0 -28 -9 eSFP
DWDM
TN11LDMS FC200/GE/
FC100/ FE
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.5
km
-2.5 -9.5 -17 0 eSFP
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
-3 -9 -20 -3
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
0 -5 -20 -3
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
5 -2 -23 -3
OTU1/
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/ GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVB-
ASI
I-16-2 km -3 -10 -18 -3
L-16.1-40 km 3 -2 -27 -9
L-16.2-80 km 3 -2 -28 -9
OTU1/
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/ GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVB-
ASI/ FE
S-16.1-15 km 0 -5 -18 0
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1.25 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-40 km
5 0 -19 -3 eSFP
CWDM
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2809
Board Name Access
Service Type
Optical Module Note
Optical
Interface
Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minim
um
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minim
um
(dBm)
OTU1/
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVB-
ASI/ FE
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
5 0 -28 -9
OTU1/
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/ GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVB-
ASI/ FE
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
DWDM)-120
km
4 0 -28 -9 eSFP
DWDM
TN12LDX OC-192/
STM-64/
10GE LAN/
10GE WAN/
OTU2/ OTU2e
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10
km
-1 -6 -11
(multirate
)/-12.6
(10GE
LAN)
-1
(STM64
)/0.5
(10GE
LAN)
XFP
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40
km
2 -4.7 -14
(multirate
)/-15.8
(10GE
LAN)
-1
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80
km
4 0 -24.0 -7
800 ps/nm-C
Band (Odd &
Even
Wavelengths)-
Fixed
Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
2 -3 16 0 XFP
DWDM
10GE LAN 10 Gbit/s Single
Rate -0.3 km
-1.3 -7.3 -7.5 -1 XFP
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2810
Board Name Access
Service Type
Optical Module Note
Optical
Interface
Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minim
um
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minim
um
(dBm)
TN11LEM24 FE/GE 1000 BASE-
SX-0.5 km
(I-850-LC)
-2.5 -9.5 -17 0 eSFP
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
(I-1310-LC)
-3 -9.5 -20 -3
10GE WAN/
10GE LAN
10G BASE-
SR-0.3 km (SFP
+)
-1 -7.3 -11.1 -1 SFP+
10G BASE-
LR-10 km (SFP
+)
0.5 -8.2 -12.6 0.5
TN11LEX4 10GE WAN/
10GE LAN
10G BASE-
SR-0.3 km (SFP
+)
-1 -7.3 -11.1 -1 SFP+
10G BASE-
LR-10 km (SFP
+)
0.5 -8.2 -12.6 0.5
TN11LOA FC200/GE/
FC100/FDDI/
FICON/
FICON
Express/FE
2.125Gbit/s
Multirate-0.5
km
-2.5 -9.5 -17 0 eSFP
FC400/
FICON4G
4.25Gbit/s
Multirate-0.3
km
-1.1 -9 -15 0 eSFP
4.25Gbit/s
Multirate-10
km
-1 -8.4 -18 0
10GE LAN/
FC800/
FICON8G/
FC1200/
FCCON10G
10G BASE-LR
(SFP+)
-1 -6 -14.4 0.5 SFP+
10G BASE-ER
(SFP+)
3 -2 -14
(11.1G)
-15.8
(10.3125
G)
-1
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2811
Board Name Access
Service Type
Optical Module Note
Optical
Interface
Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minim
um
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minim
um
(dBm)
10GE LAN 10GBASE-
SR-0.3km (SFP
+)
-1 -7.3 -11.1
(OMA)
-1 SFP+
10GBASE-
LR-10km (SFP
+)
0.5 -8.2 -12.6
(OMA)
0.5
GE/FC100/
STM-4/
OC-12/
ESCON/
STM-1/OC-3/
FDDI/FICON/
FE/DVB-ASI
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
-3 -9 -20 -3 eSFP
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
0 -5 -20 -3
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
5 -2 -23 -3
OTU1/
STM-16/
OC-48/FC200/
FC100/FDDI/
FICON/
FICON
Express/GE/
STM-4/
OC-12/
ESCON/
STM-1/OC-3/
DVB-ASI
I-16-2 km -3 -10 -18 -3 eSFP
L-16.1-40 km 3 -2 -27 -9
L-16.2-80 km 3 -2 -28 -9
OTU1/
STM-16/
OC-48/FC200/
FC100/FDDI/
FICON/
FICON
Express/GE/
STM-4/
OC-12/
ESCON/
STM-1/OC-3/
DVB-ASI/FE
S-16.1-15 km 0 -5 -18 0
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2812
Board Name Access
Service Type
Optical Module Note
Optical
Interface
Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minim
um
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minim
um
(dBm)
SDI/HD-SDI/
3G-SDI
270 Mbit/s - 3
Gbit/s Multirate
(Video
eSFP)-10 km
0 -7 -16 0 eSFP
GE/FC100/
STM-4/
OC-12/
ESCON/
STM-1/OC-3/
FDDI/FICON/
FE/DVB-ASI
1.25Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-40 km
5 0 -19 -3 eSFP
CWDM
OTU1/
STM-16/
OC-48/FC200/
FC100/FDDI/
FICON/
FICON
Express/GE/
STM-4/
OC-12/
ESCON/
STM-1/OC-3/
DVB-ASI/FE
2.67Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
5 0 -28 -9
OTU1/
STM-16/
OC-48/FC200/
FC100/FDDI/
FICON/
FICON
Express/GE/
STM-4/
OC-12/
ESCON/
STM-1/OC-3/
DVB-ASI/FE
2.67Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
DWDM)-120
km
4 0 -28 -9 eSFP
DWDM
FC800/
FICON8G
1600-M5E-SN-
I(SFP+)-0.3 km
-1 -7.3 -11.1 -3 SFP+
1600-SM-LC-L
(SFP+)-10 km
-0.5 -8.2 -12.6 0.5
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2813
Board Name Access
Service Type
Optical Module Note
Optical
Interface
Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minim
um
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minim
um
(dBm)
GE 1000BASE-
BX10-U
-3 -9 -19.5 -3 eSFP
1000BASE-
BX10-D
-3 -9 -19.5 -3
1000BASE-
BX-U
3 -2 -23 -3
1000BASE-
BX-D
3 -2 -23 -3
TN11LOG GE 2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.5
km
-2.5 -9.5 -17 0 eSFP
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
-3 -9 -20 -3
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
0 -5 -20 -3
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
5 -2 -23 -3
1.25 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-40 km
5 0 -19 -3 eSFP
CWDM
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
5 0 -28 -9
TN12LOG GE 2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.5
km
-2.5 -9.5 -17 0 eSFP
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
-3 -9 -20 -3
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
0 -5 -20 -3
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
5 -2 -23 -3
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2814
Board Name Access
Service Type
Optical Module Note
Optical
Interface
Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minim
um
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minim
um
(dBm)
1.25 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-40 km
5 0 -19 -3 eSFP
CWDM
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
5 0 -28 -9
1000 BASE-
BX10-U
-3 -9 -19.5 -3 eSFP
1000 BASE-
BX10-D
-3 -9 -19.5 -3
1000 BASE-
BX-U
3 -2 -23 -3
1000 BASE-
BX-D
3 -2 -23 -3
TN11LOM GE 2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.5
km
-2.5 -9.5 -17 0 eSFP
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
-3 -9 -20 -3
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
0 -5 -20 -3
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
5 -2 -23 -3
FC 100/FC
200/FC 400/
FICON/
FICON
Express
FC400/
FICON4G
Module-0.3 km
(Multimode)
-1 -9 -14 0
FC400/
FICON4G
Module-10 km
(Single mode)
-2 -8 -18 0
FC100/FC200/
FICON/FICON
Express
Module-0.5 km
(Multimode)
-2.5 -9.5 -17 0
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2815
Board Name Access
Service Type
Optical Module Note
Optical
Interface
Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minim
um
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minim
um
(dBm)
FC100/FC200/
FICON/FICON
Express
Module-2 km
(Single mode)
-3 -10 -18 0
GE/ FC 100/
FC 200
1.25 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-40 km
5 0 -19 -3 eSFP
CWDM
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
5 0 -28 -9
TN12LOM GE 2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.5
km
-2.5 -9.5 -17 0 eSFP
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
-3 -9 -20 -3
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
0 -5 -20 -3
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
5 -2 -23 -3
FC 100/FC
200/FC 400/
FICON/
FICON
Express
FC400/
FICON4G
Module-0.3 km
(Multimode)
-1 -9 -14 0
FC400/
FICON4G
Module-10 km
(Single mode)
-2 -8 -18 0
FC100/FC200/
FICON/FICON
Express
Module-0.5 km
(Multimode)
-2.5 -9.5 -17 0
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2816
Board Name Access
Service Type
Optical Module Note
Optical
Interface
Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minim
um
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minim
um
(dBm)
FC100/FC200/
FICON/FICON
Express
Module-2 km
(Single mode)
-3 -10 -18 0
GE/FC 100/FC
200
1.25 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-40 km
5 0 -19 -3 eSFP
CWDM
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
5 0 -28 -9
GE 1000 BASE-
BX10-U
-3 -9 -19.5 -3 eSFP
1000 BASE-
BX10-D
-3 -9 -19.5 -3
1000 BASE-
BX-U
3 -2 -23 -3
1000 BASE-
BX-D
3 -2 -23 -3
TN11LQG GE 2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.5
km
-2.5 -9.5 -17 0 eSFP
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
-3 -9 -20 -3
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
0 -5 -20 -3
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
5 -2 -23 -3
1.25 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-40 km
5 0 -19 -3 eSFP
CWDM
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
5 0 -28 -9
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2817
Board Name Access
Service Type
Optical Module Note
Optical
Interface
Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minim
um
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minim
um
(dBm)
TN13LQM FC200/GE/
FC100/FE
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.5
km
-2.5 -9.5 -17 0 eSFP
GE/FC100/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
-3 -9 -20 -3
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
0 -5 -20 -3
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
5 -2 -23 -3
OTU1/
STM-16/
FC200/FC100/
GE/ STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/DVB-
ASI
I-16-2 km -3 -10 -18 -3
L-16.1-40 km 3 -2 -27 -9
L-16.2-80 km 3 -2 -28 -9
OTU1/
STM-16/
FC200/FC100/
GE/ STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/DVB-
ASI/FE
S-16.1-15 km 0 -5 -18 0
GE/FC100/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/FE/
DVB-ASI
1.25 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-40 km
5 0 -19 -3 eSFP
CWDM
OTU1/
STM-16/
FC200/FC100/
GE/ STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/DVB-
ASI/FE
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
5 0 -28 -9
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2818
Board Name Access
Service Type
Optical Module Note
Optical
Interface
Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minim
um
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minim
um
(dBm)
OTU1/
STM-16/
FC200/FC100/
GE/STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/DVB-
ASI/FE
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
DWDM)-120
km
4 0 -28 -9 eSFP
DWDM
TN11LQMD FC200/GE/
FC100/FE
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.5
km
-2.5 -9.5 -17 0 eSFP
GE/FC100/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/FE/
DVB-ASI
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
-3 -9 -20 -3
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
0 -5 -20 -3
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
5 -2 -23 -3
OTU1
b
/
STM-16/
FC200/FC100/
GE/STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/DVB-
ASI
I-16-2 km -3 -10 -18 -3
L-16.1-40 km 3 -2 -27 -9
L-16.2-80 km 3 -2 -28 -9
OTU1
b
/
STM-16/
FC200/FC100/
GE/STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/DVB-
ASI/FE
S-16.1-15 km 0 -5 -18 0
FC100/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/FE/
DVB-ASI
1.25 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-40 km
5 0 -19 -3 eSFP
CWDM
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2819
Board Name Access
Service Type
Optical Module Note
Optical
Interface
Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minim
um
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minim
um
(dBm)
OTU1/
STM-16/
FC200/FC100/
GE/ STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/DVB-
ASI/FE
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
5 0 -28 -9
TN12LQMD FC200/GE/
FC100/FE
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.5
km
-2.5 -9.5 -17 0 eSFP
GE/FC100/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
-3 -9 -20 -3
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
0 -5 -20 -3
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
5 -2 -23 -3
OTU1
b
/
STM-16/
FC200/FC100/
GE/STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/DVB-
ASI
I-16-2 km -3 -10 -18 -3
L-16.1-40 km 3 -2 -27 -9
L-16.2-80 km 3 -2 -28 -9
OTU1
b
/
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/ GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVB-
ASI/ FE
S-16.1-15 km 0 -5 -18 0
FC100/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1.25 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-40 km
5 0 -19 -3 eSFP
CWDM
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2820
Board Name Access
Service Type
Optical Module Note
Optical
Interface
Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minim
um
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minim
um
(dBm)
OTU1/
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVB-
ASI/ FE
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
5 0 -28 -9
OTU1/
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/ GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVB-
ASI/ FE
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
DWDM)-120
km
4 0 -28 -9 eSFP
DWDM
TN11LQMS FC200/GE/
FC100/ FE
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.5
km
-2.5 -9.5 -17 0 eSFP
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
-3 -9 -20 -3
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
0 -5 -20 -3
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
5 -2 -23 -3
OTU1
b
/
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/ GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVB-
ASI
I-16-2 km -3 -10 -18 -3
L-16.1-40 km 3 -2 -27 -9
L-16.2-80 km 3 -2 -28 -9
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2821
Board Name Access
Service Type
Optical Module Note
Optical
Interface
Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minim
um
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minim
um
(dBm)
OTU1
b
/
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/ GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVB-
ASI/ FE
S-16.1-15 km 0 -5 -18 0
FC100/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1.25 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-40 km
5 0 -19 -3 eSFP
CWDM
OTU1/
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVB-
ASI/ FE
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
5 0 -28 -9
TN12LQMS FC200/GE/
FC100/ FE
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.5
km
-2.5 -9.5 -17 0 eSFP
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
-3 -9 -20 -3
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
0 -5 -20 -3
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
5 -2 -23 -3
OTU1
b
/
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/ GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVB-
ASI
I-16-2 km -3 -10 -18 -3
L-16.1-40 km 3 -2 -27 -9
L-16.2-80 km 3 -2 -28 -9
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2822
Board Name Access
Service Type
Optical Module Note
Optical
Interface
Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minim
um
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minim
um
(dBm)
OTU1
b
/
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/ GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVB-
ASI/ FE
S-16.1-15 km 0 -5 -18 0
FC100/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1.25 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-40 km
5 0 -19 -3 eSFP
CWDM
OTU1/
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVB-
ASI/ FE
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
5 0 -28 -9
OTU1/
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/ GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVB-
ASI/ FE
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
DWDM)-120
km
4 0 -28 -9 eSFP
DWDM
TN11LSQ STM-256/
OC-768/
OTU3
40G
Transponder
3 0 -6 3 -
TN11LSX
TN12LSX
OC-192/
STM-64/
10GE LAN/
10GE WAN/
OTU2/
FC1200
a
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10
km
-1 -6 -11
(multirate
)/-12.6
(10GE
LAN)
-1
(STM64
)/0.5
(10GE
LAN)
XFP
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2823
Board Name Access
Service Type
Optical Module Note
Optical
Interface
Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minim
um
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minim
um
(dBm)
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40
km
2 -4.7 -14
(multirate
)/-15.8
(10GE
LAN)
-1
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80
km
4 0 -24.0 -7
10GE LAN/
FC1200
a
10 Gbit/s Single
Rate -0.3 km
-1.3 -7.3 -7.5 -1
TN13LSX OC-192/
STM-64/
10GE LAN/
10GE WAN/
OTU2/
OTU2e/
FC1200
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10
km
-1 -6 -11
(multirate
)/-12.6
(10GE
LAN)
-1
(STM64
)/0.5
(10GE
LAN)
XFP
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40
km
2 -4.7 -14
(multirate
)/-15.8
(10GE
LAN)
-1
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80
km
4 0 -24.0 -7
800 ps/nm-C
Band (Odd &
Even
Wavelengths)-
Fixed
Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
2 -3 16 0 XFP
DWDM
10GE LAN/
FC1200
10 Gbit/s Single
Rate -0.3 km
-1.3 -7.3 -7.5 -1 XFP
TN14LSX OC-192/
STM-64/
10GE LAN/
10GE WAN/
OTU2/
10Gbit/s
Multirate
-10km
-1 -6 -14.4 -1
(STM64
)/0.5
(10GE
LAN)
XFP
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2824
Board Name Access
Service Type
Optical Module Note
Optical
Interface
Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minim
um
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minim
um
(dBm)
OTU2e/
FC1200
10Gbit/s
Multirate
-40km
2 -4.7 -15.8 -1
(STM64
)/-1
(10GE
LAN)
10Gbit/s
Multirate
-80km
4 0 -24 -7
(STM64
)/-7
(10GE
LAN)
10GE LAN/
FC1200
10Gbit/s Single
Rate -0.3km
-1.3 -7.3 -7.5 -1
(STM64
)/-1
(10GE
LAN)
TN11LSXL STM-256/
OC-768
40G
Transponder
3 0 -6 3 -
TN12LSXL/
TN15LSXL
STM-256/
OC-768/
OTU3
40G
Transponder
3 0 -6 3 -
TN11LTX 10GE LAN/
10GE WAN/
STM-64/
OC-192
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10
km
-1 -6 -11
(multirate
)/-12.6
(10GE
LAN)
-1
(STM64
)/0.5
(10GE
LAN)
XFP
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40
km
2 -4.7 -14
(multirate
)/-15.8
(10GE
LAN)
-1
10 Gbit/s Single
Rate -0.3 km
-1.3 -7.3 -7.5 -1
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80
km
4 0 -24.0 -7
TN11LWX2 FC200/GE/
FC100/ FE
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.5
km
-2.5 -9.5 -17 0 eSFP
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2825
Board Name Access
Service Type
Optical Module Note
Optical
Interface
Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minim
um
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minim
um
(dBm)
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVB-
ASI
I-16-2 km -3 -10 -18 -3
L-16.2-80 km 3 -2 -28 -9
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVB-
ASI/ FE
S-16.1-15 km 0 -5 -18 0
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1.25 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-40 km
5 0 -19 -3 eSFP
CWDM
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVB-
ASI/ FE
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
5 0 -28 -9
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVB-
ASI/ FE
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
DWDM)-120
km
4 0 -28 -9 eSFP
DWDM
TN11LWXD FC200/GE/
FC100/ FE
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.5
km
-2.5 -9.5 -17 0 eSFP
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/GE/
STM-4/
I-16-2 km -3 -10 -18 -3
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2826
Board Name Access
Service Type
Optical Module Note
Optical
Interface
Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minim
um
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minim
um
(dBm)
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVB-
ASI
L-16.2-80 km 3 -2 -28 -9
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVB-
ASI/ FE
S-16.1-15 km 0 -5 -18 0
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1.25 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-40 km
5 0 -19 -3 eSFP
CWDM
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVB-
ASI/ FE
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
5 0 -28 -9
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVB-
ASI/ FE
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
DWDM)-120
km
4 0 -28 -9 eSFP
DWDM
TN11LWXS
TN12LWXS
FC200/GE/
FC100/ FE
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.5
km
-2.5 -9.5 -17 0 eSFP
ETR/ CLO
c
/
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/GE/
STM-4/
I-16-2 km -3 -10 -18 -3
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2827
Board Name Access
Service Type
Optical Module Note
Optical
Interface
Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minim
um
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minim
um
(dBm)
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVB-
ASI
L-16.2-80 km 3 -2 -28 -9
ETR/ CLO
c
/
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVB-
ASI/ FE
S-16.1-15 km 0 -5 -18 0
ETR/ CLO/
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1.25 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-40 km
5 0 -19 -3 eSFP
CWDM
ETR/ CLO/
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVB-
ASI/ FE
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
5 0 -28 -9
ETR/ CLO/
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVB-
ASI/ FE
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
DWDM)-120
km
4 0 -28 -9 eSFP
DWDM
TN11TMX
TN12TMX
STM-16/
OC-48/ OTU1
(without FEC)
I-16-2 km -3 -10 -18 -3 eSFP
S-16.1-15 km 0 -5 -18 0
L-16.1-40 km 3 -2 -27 -9
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2828
Board Name Access
Service Type
Optical Module Note
Optical
Interface
Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minim
um
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minim
um
(dBm)
L-16.2-80 km 3 -2 -28 -9
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
5 0 -28 -9 eSFP
CWDM
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
DWDM)-120
km
4 0 -28 -9 eSFP
DWDM
TN11TBE FE 100 BASE-
FX-10 km
-3 -11.5 -19 -3 eSFP
100 BASE-
FX-80 km
5 -2 -22 -3
GE/ 10GE
LAN/ 10GE
WAN
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.5
km
-2.5 -9.5 -17 0
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
-3 -9 -20 -3
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
0 -5 -20 -3
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
5 -2 -23 -3
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10
km
-1 -6 -11
(multirate
)/-12.6
(10GE
LAN)
-1
(STM64
)/0.5
(10GE
LAN)
XFP
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40
km
2 -4.7 -14
(multirate
)/-15.8
(10GE
LAN)
-1
10 Gbit/s Single
Rate -0.3 km
-1.3 -7.3 -7.5 -1
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80
km
4 0 -24 -7
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2829
Board Name Access
Service Type
Optical Module Note
Optical
Interface
Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minim
um
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minim
um
(dBm)
FE/ GE/ 10GE
LAN/ 10GE
WAN
1.25 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-40 km
5 0 -19 -3 eSFP
CWDM
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
5 0 -28 -9
TN11TDG GE 2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.5
km
-2.5 -9.5 -17 0 eSFP
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
-3 -9 -20 -3
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
0 -5 -20 -3
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
5 -2 -23 -3
1.25 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-40 km
5 0 -19 -3 eSFP
CWDM
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
5 0 -28 -9
TN11TDX
TN12TDX
TN52TDX
10GE LAN/
10GE WAN/
STM-64/
OC-192/
OTU2/
OTU2e
d
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10
km
-1 -6 -11
(multirate
)/-12.6
(10GE
LAN)
-1
(STM64
)/0.5
(10GE
LAN)
XFP
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40
km
2 -4.7 -14
(multirate
)/-15.8
(10GE
LAN)
-1
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80
km
4 0 -24.0 -7
Rate -0.3 km
-1.3 -7.3 -7.5 -1
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2830
Board Name Access
Service Type
Optical Module Note
Optical
Interface
Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minim
um
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minim
um
(dBm)
TN53TDX 10GE LAN/
10GE WAN/
STM-64/
OC-192/
OTU2/
OTU2e/
FC800/
FC1200
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10
km
-1 -6 -11
(multirate
)/-12.6
(10GE
LAN)
-1
(Multirat
e)/0.5
(10GE
LAN)
XFP
10GE LAN/
10GE WAN/
STM-64/
OC-192/
OTU2/
OTU2e/
FC1200
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40
km
2 -4.7 -14
(multirate
)/-15.8
(10GE
LAN)
-1
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80
km
4 0 -24 -7
10GE LAN/
FC1200
10 Gbit/s Single
Rate -0.3 km
-1.3 -7.3 -7.5 -1 XFP
TN54TEM28 10GE LAN 10G BASE-
SR-0.3 km (SFP
+)
-1 -7.3 -11.1 -1 SFP+
10G BASE-
LR-10 km (SFP
+)
0.5 -8.2 -12.6 0.5
GE 1000 BASE-
SX-0.5 km
(I-850-LC)
-2.5 -9.5 -17 0 SFP+
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
(I-1310-LC)
-3 -9.5 -20 -3
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2831
Board Name Access
Service Type
Optical Module Note
Optical
Interface
Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minim
um
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minim
um
(dBm)
TN54THA OTU1/
STM-16/
OC-48/FC200/
FC100/GE/
STM-4/
OC-12/
ESCON/
STM-1/OC-3/
DVB-ASI/FE
S-16.1-15 km 0 -5 -18 0 eSFP
GE/FC100/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/FE/
DVB-ASI
1000 BASE-
LX-10km
(I-1310-LC)
-3 -9.5 -20 -3
GE 1000 BASE-
BX10-U
-3 -9 -19.5 -3
1000 BASE-
BX10-D
-3 -9 -19.5 -3
1000 BASE-
BX-U
3 -2 -23 -3
1000 BASE-
BX-D
3 -2 -23 -3
TN54TOA FC400/
FICON4G
4.25 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.3
km
-1.1 -9 -15 0 eSFP
4.25 Gbit/s
Multirate-10
km
-1 -8.4 -18 0
OTU1/
STM-16/
OC-48/FC200/
FC100/GE/
STM-4/
OC-12/
ESCON/
STM-1/OC-3/
DVB-ASI
I-16-2 km -3 -10 -18 -3
L-16.1-40 km 3 -2 -27 -9
L-16.2-80 km 3 -2 -28 -9
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2832
Board Name Access
Service Type
Optical Module Note
Optical
Interface
Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minim
um
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minim
um
(dBm)
OTU1/
STM-16/
OC-48/FC200/
FC100/GE/
STM-4/
OC-12/
ESCON/
STM-1/OC-3/
DVB-ASI/FE
S-16.1-15 km 0 -5 -18 0
FC200/FC100/
FE/GE
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.5
km
-2.5 -9.5 -17 0
GE/FC100/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/FE/
DVB-ASI
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
-3 -9 -20 -3
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
0 -5 -20 -3
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
5 -2 -23 -3
GE/FC100/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/FE/
DVB-ASI
1.25 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-40 km
5 0 -19 -3 eSFP
CWDM
OTU1/
STM-16/
FC200/FC100/
GE/STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/DVB-
ASI/FE
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
5 0 -28 -9
OTU1/
STM-16/
FC200/FC100/
GE/STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/DVB-
ASI/FE
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
DWDM)-120
km
4 0 -28 -9 eSFP
DWDM
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2833
Board Name Access
Service Type
Optical Module Note
Optical
Interface
Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minim
um
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minim
um
(dBm)
SDI/HD-SDI 270 Mbit/s to 3
Gbit/s multirate
(Video
eSFP)-10 km
0 -7 -16 0 Video
eSFP
GE 1000 BASE-
BX10-U
-3 -9 -19.5 -3 eSFP
1000 BASE-
BX10-D
-3 -9 -19.5 -3
1000 BASE-
BX-U
3 -2 -23 -3
1000 BASE-
BX-D
3 -2 -23 -3
TN52TOG GE 2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.5
km
-2.5 -9.5 -17 0 eSFP
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
-3 -9 -20 -3
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
0 -5 -20 -3
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
5 -2 -23 -3
1.25 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-40 km
5 0 -19 -3 eSFP
CWDM
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
5 0 -28 -9
TN11TOM FC200/GE/
FC100/ FE
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.5
km
-2.5 -9.5 -17 0 eSFP
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
-3 -9 -20 -3
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
0 -5 -20 -3
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2834
Board Name Access
Service Type
Optical Module Note
Optical
Interface
Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minim
um
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minim
um
(dBm)
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
5 -2 -23 -3
OTU1/
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/ GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVB-
ASI
I-16-2 km -3 -10 -18 -3
L-16.1-40 km 3 -2 -27 -9
L-16.2-80 km 3 -2 -28 -9
OTU1/
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/ GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVB-
ASI/ FE
S-16.1-15 km 0 -5 -18 0
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1.25 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-40 km
5 0 -19 -3 eSFP
CWDM
OTU1/
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVB-
ASI/ FE
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
5 0 -28 -9
OTU1/
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/ GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVB-
ASI/ FE
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
DWDM)-120
km
4 0 -28 -9 eSFP
DWDM
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2835
Board Name Access
Service Type
Optical Module Note
Optical
Interface
Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minim
um
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minim
um
(dBm)
SDI 1.5 Gbit/s
Multirate
(Video
eSFP)-20 km
0 -7 -22 0 eSFP
TN52TOM FC200/GE/
FC100/ FE
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.5
km
-2.5 -9.5 -17 0 eSFP
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
-3 -9 -20 -3
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
0 -5 -20 -3
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
5 -2 -23 -3
OTU1/
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/ GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVB-
ASI
I-16-2 km -3 -10 -18 -3
L-16.1-40 km 3 -2 -27 -9
L-16.2-80 km 3 -2 -28 -9
OTU1/
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/ GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVB-
ASI/ FE
S-16.1-15 km 0 -5 -18 0
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1.25 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-40 km
5 0 -19 -3 eSFP
CWDM
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2836
Board Name Access
Service Type
Optical Module Note
Optical
Interface
Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minim
um
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minim
um
(dBm)
OTU1/
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVB-
ASI/ FE
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
5 0 -28 -9
OTU1/
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/ GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVB-
ASI/ FE
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
DWDM)-120
km
4 0 -28 -9 eSFP
DWDM
SDI 1.5 Gbit/s
Multirate
(Video
eSFP)-20 km
0 -7 -22 0 eSFP
GE 1000 BASE-
BX10-U
-3 -9 -19.5 -3 eSFP
1000 BASE-
BX10-D
-3 -9 -19.5 -3
1000 BASE-
BX-U
3 -2 -23 -3
1000 BASE-
BX-D
3 -2 -23 -3
TN55TOX OC-192/
STM-64/
10GE WAN/
10GE LAN/
OTU2/
OTU2e/
FC800/
FC1200
10Gbit/s
Multirate-10km
(SFP+)
-1 -6 -14.4 0.5 SFP+
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2837
Board Name Access
Service Type
Optical Module Note
Optical
Interface
Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minim
um
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minim
um
(dBm)
10GE WAN/
10GE LAN
10G BASE-
ZR-80km (SFP
+)
4 0 -24 -7
10G BASE-ER/
EW-40km (SFP
+)
4 -4.7 -14.1
(OMA)
-1
10G BASE-
SR-0.3km (SFP
+)
-1 -7.3 -11.1
(OMA)
-1
10G BASE-
LR-10km (SFP
+)
0.5 -8.2 -12.6
(OMA)
0.5
TN11TQM FC200/GE/
FC100/ FE
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.5
km
-2.5 -9.5 -17 0 eSFP
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
-3 -9 -20 -3
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
0 -5 -20 -3
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
5 -2 -23 -3
OTU1
b
/
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/ GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVB-
ASI
I-16-2 km -3 -10 -18 -3
L-16.1-40 km 3 -2 -27 -9
L-16.2-80 km 3 -2 -28 -9
OTU1
b
/
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/ GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVB-
ASI/ FE
S-16.1-15 km 0 -5 -18 0
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2838
Board Name Access
Service Type
Optical Module Note
Optical
Interface
Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minim
um
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minim
um
(dBm)
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1.25 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-40 km
5 0 -19 -3 eSFP
CWDM
OTU1/
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVB-
ASI/ FE
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
5 0 -28 -9
TN12TQM FC200/GE/
FC100/ FE
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.5
km
-2.5 -9.5 -17 0 eSFP
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1000 BASE-
LX-10 km
-3 -9 -20 -3
1000 BASE-
LX-40 km
0 -5 -20 -3
1000 BASE-
ZX-80 km
5 -2 -23 -3
OTU1
b
/
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/ GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVB-
ASI
I-16-2 km -3 -10 -18 -3
L-16.1-40 km 3 -2 -27 -9
L-16.2-80 km 3 -2 -28 -9
OTU1
b
/
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/ GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVB-
ASI/ FE
S-16.1-15 km 0 -5 -18 0
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2839
Board Name Access
Service Type
Optical Module Note
Optical
Interface
Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minim
um
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minim
um
(dBm)
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1.25 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-40 km
5 0 -19 -3 eSFP
CWDM
OTU1/
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVB-
ASI/ FE
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
5 0 -28 -9
OTU1/
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/ GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVB-
ASI/ FE
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
DWDM)-120
km
4 0 -28 -9 eSFP
DWDM
TN11TQS STM-16/
OC-48/ OTU1
I-16-2 km -3 -10 -18 -3 eSFP
S-16.1-15 km 0 -5 -18 0
L-16.1-40 km 3 -2 -27 -9
L-16.2-80 km 3 -2 -28 -9
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
5 0 -28 -9 eSFP
CWDM
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
DWDM)-120
km
4 0 -28 -9 eSFP
DWDM
TN11TQX
TN52TQX
10GE LAN/
10GE WAN/
STM-64/
OC-192/
OTU2/
OTU2e
e
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10
km
-1 -6 -11
(multirate
)/-12.6
(10GE
LAN)
-1
(STM64
)/0.5
(10GE
LAN)
XFP
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2840
Board Name Access
Service Type
Optical Module Note
Optical
Interface
Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minim
um
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minim
um
(dBm)
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40
km
2 -4.7 -14
(multirate
)/-15.8
(10GE
LAN)
-1
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80
km
4 0 -24.0 -7
Rate -0.3 km
-1.3 -7.3 -7.5 -1
TN53TQX 10GE LAN/
10GE WAN/
STM-64/
OC-192/
OTU2/OTU2e
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10
km
-1 -6 -11
(multirate
)/-12.6
(10GE
LAN)
-1
(STM64
)/0.5
(10GE
LAN)
XFP
10GE LAN/
10GE WAN/
STM-64/
OC-192/
OTU2/OTU2e
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40
km
2 -4.7 -14
(multirate
)/-15.8
(10GE
LAN)
-1
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80
km
4 0 -24 -7
Rate -0.3 km
-1.3 -7.3 -7.5 -1
TN55TQX 10GE LAN/
10GE WAN/
STM-64/
OC-192/
OTU2/
OTU2e/
FC800/
FC1200
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10
km
-1 -6 -11
(multirate
)/-12.6
(10GE
LAN)
-1
(STM64
)/0.5
(10GE
LAN)
XFP
0GE LAN/
10GE WAN/
STM-64/
OC-192/
OTU2/
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40
km
2 -4.7 -14
(multirate
)/-15.8
(10GE
LAN)
-1
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2841
Board Name Access
Service Type
Optical Module Note
Optical
Interface
Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minim
um
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minim
um
(dBm)
OTU2e/
FC1200
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80
km
4 0 -24 -7
10GE LAN
/FC1200
10 Gbit/s Single
Rate -0.3 km
-1.3 -7.3 -7.5 -1
TN11TSXL STM-256/
OC-768
40G
Transponder
3 0 -6 3 -
TN53TSXL STM-256/
OC-768/
OTU3
40G
Transponder
3 0 -6 3 -
TN54TTX OC-192/
STM-64/10GE
WAN/10GE
LAN/OTU2/
OTU2e
10G BASE-LR
(SFP+)
-1 -6 -14.4 0.5 SFP+
10G BASE-ER
(SFP+)
3 -2 -14
(11.1G)
-15.8
(10.3125
G)
-1
10GE WAN/
10GE LAN
10G BASE-
ZR-80km (SFP
+)
4 0 -24 -7
10G BASE-ER/
EW-40km (SFP
+)
4 -4.7 -14.1
(OMA)
-1
10G BASE-
SR-0.3km(SFP
+)
-1 -7.3 -11.1
(OMA)
-1
10G BASE-
LR-10km(SFP
+)
0.5 -8.2 -12.6
(OMA)
0.5
a: Only TN12LSX/TN13LSX supports FC1200 service.
b: Only TN12LQMD/TN12LQMS/TN12TQM support OTU1 service.
c: Only TN12LWXS supports ETR/CLO services.
d: Only TN52TDX supports OTU2/OTU2e services.
e: Only TN52TQX supports OTU2/OTU2e services.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2842
Table C-2 Quick reference table for client-side specifications of TN12LSC/TN54TSXL
Board Name Access
Service
Type
Optical Module Opt
ical
Mo
dul
e
Typ
e
Optical
Interfac
e Type
Suppor
ted
Tra
nsm
it
OM
A
per
Lan
e
(Mi
n)
Tra
ns
mit
OM
A
per
Lan
e
(Ma
x)
Rev
eive
r
Sen
siti
vity
(O
MA
)
per
Lan
e
Min
imu
m
recei
ver
over
load
(OM
A)
per
Lan
e
Ave
rag
e
Lau
nch
Po
wer
per
Lan
e
(Mi
n)
Ave
rag
e
Lau
nch
Po
wer
per
Lan
e
(Ma
x)
Ave
rag
e
Rev
eive
r
Po
wer
per
Lan
e
(Mi
n)
Ave
rag
e
Rev
eive
r
Po
wer
per
Lan
e
(Ma
x)
Tot
al
Ave
rag
e
Lau
nch
Po
wer
(Ma
x)
TN12LSC 100GE 100G
BASE-
LR4-10
km
-1.3 4.5 -8.6 4.5 -4.3 4.5 -10.
6
4.5 10.5 CFP
100G
BASE-1
010
G-10 km
-2.8 3.5 -8.8 3.5 -5.8 3.5 -10.
8
3.5 13.5
TN54TSC 100GE 100GB
ASE-
LR4-10
km
(CFP)
-1.3 4.5 -8.6 4.5 -4.3 4.5 -10.
6
4.5 10.5
100GB
ASE-10
10G-1
0 km
(CFP)
-2.8 3.5 -8.8 3.5 -5.8 3.5 -10.
8
3.5 13.5
TN54TSXL 40GE 40GBA
SE-
LR4-10
km
-4 3.5 -11.
5
3.5 -7 2.3 -13.
7
2.3 8.3

C.1.2 OTUs, Line Boards and Packet Service Boards Specification
on the WDM Side
The main WDM-side specifications of the optical transponder units (OTUs), line boards, and
packet service boards include the access service type, optical module specifications and optical
module type.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2843
Table C-3 Quick reference table for DWDM-side specifications of OTU boards, line boards and packet service
boards
Board
Name
Access
Service
Type
Optical Module
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minimu
m
Receiver
Overloa
d (dBm)
Note
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimu
m (dBm)
TN11L4
G
OTU 5G 3400 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
2 -2 -25 -9 -
3400 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
2 -3 -25 -9 -
TN11LD
GD
STM-16/
OTU1
12800 ps/nm-C Band-
PIN
-4 -8 -18 0 -
12800 ps/nm-C Band-
APD
-4 -8 -28 -9 -
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
0 -5 -18 0 -
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
0 -5 -28 -9 -
12800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
0 -5 -28 -9 -
6400 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD (Four
Channels-Tunable)
0 -5 -28 -9 -
TN11LD
GS
STM-16/
OTU1
12800 ps/nm-C Band-
PIN
-1 -5 -18 0 -
12800 ps/nm-C Band-
APD
-1 -5 -28 -9 -
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
3 -2 -18 0 -
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
3 -2 -28 -9 -
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2844
Board
Name
Access
Service
Type
Optical Module
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minimu
m
Receiver
Overloa
d (dBm)
Note
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimu
m (dBm)
12800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
3 -2 -28 -9 -
6400 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD (Four
Channels-Tunable)
3 -2 -28 -9 -
TN12LD
M
OTU1 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate
(eSFP DWDM)-120 km
3 0 -28 -9 eSFP
DWD
M
TN11LD
MD
OTU1 12800 ps/nm-C Band-
APD
-4 -8 -28 -9 -
12800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
0 -5 -28 -9 -
6400 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD (Four
Channels-Tunable)
0 -5 -28 -9 -
TN11LD
MS
APD
-1 -5 -28 -9 -
12800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
3 -2 -28 -9 -
6400 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD (Four
Channels-Tunable)
3 -2 -28 -9 -
TN12LD
X
OTU2/
OTU2e
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd &
Even Wavelengths)-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-
XFP
2 -3 -16 0 XFP
DWD
M
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
2 -3 -16 0 XFP
DWD
M
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2845
Board
Name
Access
Service
Type
Optical Module
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minimu
m
Receiver
Overloa
d (dBm)
Note
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimu
m (dBm)
TN11LE
M24
OTU2 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd &
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-
XFP
2 -3 -16 0 XFP
DWD
M
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
2 -3 -16 0 XFP
DWD
M
TN11LE
X4
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-
XFP
2 -3 -16 0 XFP
DWD
M
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
2 -3 -16 0 XFP
DWD
M
TN11LO
A
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-
XFP
2 -3 -16 0 XFP
DWD
M
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
2 -3 -16 0 XFP
DWD
M
TN11LO
G
OTU2 800 ps/nm-C Band (odd &
even wavelengths)-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
2 -3 -16 0 -
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
2 -3 -16 0 -
1200 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
2 -3 -16 0 -
1200 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
2 -3 -26 -9 -
4800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
ODB-APD
2 -3 -26 -9 -
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2846
Board
Name
Access
Service
Type
Optical Module
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minimu
m
Receiver
Overloa
d (dBm)
Note
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimu
m (dBm)
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
DRZ-PIN
2 -3 -16 0 -
TN12LO
G
Tunable Wavelength-
DRZ-PIN
2 -3 -16 0 -
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
2 -3 -16 0 -
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-
XFP
2 -3 -16 0 XFP
DWD
M
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
2 -3 -16 0 XFP
DWD
M
TN11LO
M
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
2 -3 -16 0 -
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
2 -3 -16 0 -
1200 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
2 -3 -16 0 -
1200 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
2 -3 -26 -9 -
4800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
ODB-APD
2 -3 -26 -9 -
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
DRZ-PIN
2 -3 -16 0 -
TN12LO
M
Tunable Wavelength-
DRZ-PIN
2 -3 -16 0 -
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2847
Board
Name
Access
Service
Type
Optical Module
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minimu
m
Receiver
Overloa
d (dBm)
Note
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimu
m (dBm)
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
2 -3 -16 0 -
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-
XFP
2 -3 -16 0 XFP
DWD
M
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
2 -3 -16 0 XFP
DWD
M
TN11LQ
G
FEC 5G/
OTU5G
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
2 -2 -25 -9 -
3400 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
2 -3 -25 -9 -
TN13LQ
M
(eSFP DWDM)-120 km
3 0 -28 -9 eSFP
DWD
M
TN11LQ
MD
PIN
-4 -8 -18 0 -
12800 ps/nm-C Band-
APD
-4 -8 -28 -9 -
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
0 -5 -18 0 -
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
0 -5 -28 -9 -
12800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
0 -5 -28 -9 -
6400 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD (Four
Channels-Tunable)
0 -5 -28 -9 -
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2848
Board
Name
Access
Service
Type
Optical Module
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minimu
m
Receiver
Overloa
d (dBm)
Note
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimu
m (dBm)
TN12LQ
MD
APD
-4 -8 -28 -9 -
12800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
0 -5 -28 -9 -
6400 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD (Four
Channels-Tunable)
0 -5 -28 -9 -
TN11LQ
MS
PIN
-1 -5 -18 0 -
12800 ps/nm-C Band-
APD
-1 -5 -28 -9 -
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
3 -2 -18 0 -
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
3 -2 -28 -9 -
12800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
3 -2 -28 -9 -
6400 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD (Four
Channels-Tunable)
3 -2 -28 -9 -
TN12LQ
MS
APD
-1 -5 -28 -9 -
12800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
3 -2 -28 -9 -
6400 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD (Four
Channels-Tunable)
3 -2 -28 -9 -
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2849
Board
Name
Access
Service
Type
Optical Module
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minimu
m
Receiver
Overloa
d (dBm)
Note
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimu
m (dBm)
TN12LS
C
OTU4 40000ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK(HFEC,
RZ)-PIN
0 -5 -16 0 -
55000ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC,
RZ)-PIN
0 -5 -16 0 -
TN11LS
Q
Tunable Wavelength-
ODB-PIN
0 -5 -16 0 -
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
DQPSK-PIN
0 -5 -16 0 -
TN11LS
X
TN12LS
X
OTU2/
OTU2e
800 ps/nm-C Band (odd &
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
2 -3 -16 0 -
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
2 -3 -16 0 -
1200 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
2 -3 -16 0 -
1200 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
2 -3 -26 -9 -
4800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
ODB-APD
2 -3 -26 -9 -
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
DRZ-PIN
2 -3 -16 0 -
TN13LS
X
Tunable Wavelength-
DRZ-PIN
2 -3 -16 0 -
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
2 -3 -16 0 -
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2850
Board
Name
Access
Service
Type
Optical Module
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minimu
m
Receiver
Overloa
d (dBm)
Note
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimu
m (dBm)
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-
XFP
2 -3 -16 0 XFP
DWD
M
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
2 -3 -16 0 XFP
DWD
M
TN14LS
X
OTU2/
OTU2e
800ps/nm-C Band (Odd &
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
2 -3 -16 0 -
800ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-(D)
RZ-PIN
2 -3 -16 0
800ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
2 -3 -16 0
TN11LS
XL
Tunable Wavelength-
ODB-PIN
0 -5 -16 0 -
400 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
DRZ-PIN
0 -5 -16 0 -
TN12LS
XL
Tunable Wavelength-
ODB-PIN
0 -5 -16 0 -
500 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
DQPSK-PIN
0 -5 -16 0 -
TN15LS
XL
Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-BPSK-PIN
0 -5 -16 0 -
TN11LS
XLR
Tunable Wavelength-
ODB-PIN
0 -5 -16 0 -
400 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
DRZ-PIN
0 -5 -16 0 -
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2851
Board
Name
Access
Service
Type
Optical Module
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minimu
m
Receiver
Overloa
d (dBm)
Note
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimu
m (dBm)
TN12LS
XLR
OTU3/
OTU3e
500 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
ODB-PIN
0 -5 -16 0 -
500 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
DQPSK-PIN
0 -5 -16 0 -
TN11LS
XR
OTU2/
OTU2e
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
2 -3 -16 0 -
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
2 -3 -16 0 -
1200 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
2 -3 -16 0 -
1200 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
2 -3 -26 -9 -
4800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
ODB-APD
2 -3 -26 -9 -
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
DRZ-PIN
2 -3 -16 0 -
TN11LT
X
Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK(HFEC,
RZ)-PIN
0 -5 -16 0 -
55000ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC,
RZ)-PIN
0 -5 -16 0 -
TN11L
WX2
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/
GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/
12800 ps/nm-C Band-
PIN
a
-1 -5 -18 0 -
12800 ps/nm-C Band-
APD
a
-1 -5 -28 9 -
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2852
Board
Name
Access
Service
Type
Optical Module
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minimu
m
Receiver
Overloa
d (dBm)
Note
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimu
m (dBm)
DVB-
ASI/ FE
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
3 -2 -18 0 -
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
3 -2 -26 -10 -
6400 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD (Four
Channels-Tunable)
3 -2 -28 -9 -
TN11L
WXD
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/
GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/
DVB-
ASI/ FE
12800 ps/nm-C Band-
PIN
a
-4 -8 -18 0 -
12800 ps/nm-C Band-
APD
a
-4 -8 -28 -9 -
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
0 -5 -18 0 -
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
0 -5 -26 -10 -
12800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
0 -5 -28 -9 -
6400 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD (Four
Channels-Tunable)
0 -5 -28 -9 -
TN11L
WXS
TN12L
WXS
b
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/
GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/
DVB-
ASI/ FE/
ETR/
CLO
12800 ps/nm-C Band-
PIN
a
-1 -5 -18 0 -
12800 ps/nm-C Band-
APD
a
-1 -5 -28 -9 -
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
3 -2 -18 0 -
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
3 -2 -26 -10 -
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2853
Board
Name
Access
Service
Type
Optical Module
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minimu
m
Receiver
Overloa
d (dBm)
Note
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimu
m (dBm)
12800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
3 -2 -28 -9 -
6400 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD (Four
Channels-Tunable)
3 -2 -28 -9 -
TN11T
MX
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
2 -3 -16 0 -
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
2 -3 -16 0 -
1200 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
2 -3 -16 0 -
1200 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
2 -3 -26 -9 -
4800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
ODB-APD
2 -3 -26 -9 -
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
DRZ-PIN
2 -3 -16 0 -
TN12T
MX
Tunable Wavelength-
DRZ-PIN
2 -3 -16 0 -
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
2 -3 -16 0 -
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-
XFP
2 -3 -16 0 XFP
DWD
M
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
2 -3 -16 0 XFP
DWD
M
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2854
Board
Name
Access
Service
Type
Optical Module
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minimu
m
Receiver
Overloa
d (dBm)
Note
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimu
m (dBm)
TN11N
D2
OTU2/
OTU2e
Even Wavelength)-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
2 -3 -16 0 -
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
DRZ-PIN
2 -3 -16 0 -
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
2 -3 -16 0 -
TN12N
D2
OTU2/
OTU2e
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
DRZ-PIN
2 -3 -16 0 -
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
2 -3 -16 0 -
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-
XFP
2 -3 -16 0 XFP
DWD
M
TN52N
D2
OTU2/
OTU2e
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
DRZ-PIN
2 -3 -16 0 -
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
2 -3 -16 0 -
TN53N
D2
OTU2/
OTU2e
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-
XFP
2 -3 -16 0 XFP
DWD
M
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
2 -3 -16 0 XFP
DWD
M
TN55N
O2
OTU2/
OTU2e
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-
XFP
2 -3 -16 0 XFP
DWD
M
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2855
Board
Name
Access
Service
Type
Optical Module
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minimu
m
Receiver
Overloa
d (dBm)
Note
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimu
m (dBm)
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
2 -3 -16 0 XFP
DWD
M
TN51N
Q2/
TN52N
Q2/
TN53N
Q2/
TN54N
Q2
OTU2/
OTU2e
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-
XFP
2 -3 -16 0 XFP
DWD
M
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
2 -3 -16 0 XFP
DWD
M
TN11NS
2
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
2 -3 -16 0 -
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
2 -3 -16 0 -
1200 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
2 -3 -16 0 -
1200 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
2 -3 -26 -9 -
4800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
ODB-APD
2 -3 -26 -9 -
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
DRZ-PIN
2 -3 -16 0 -
TN12NS
2
OTU2/
OTU2e
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
2 -3 -16 0 -
1200 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
2 -3 -16 0 -
1200 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
2 -3 -26 -9 -
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2856
Board
Name
Access
Service
Type
Optical Module
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minimu
m
Receiver
Overloa
d (dBm)
Note
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimu
m (dBm)
4800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
ODB-APD
2 -3 -26 -9 -
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
DRZ-PIN
2 -3 -16 0 -
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
2 -3 -16 0 -
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-
XFP
2 -3 -16 0 XFP
DWD
M
TN52NS
2
OTU2/
OTU2e
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
DRZ-PIN
2 -3 -16 0 -
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
2 -3 -16 0 -
Even Wavelength)-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
2 -3 -16 0 -
TN53NS
2
OTU2/
OTU2e
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-
XFP
2 -3 -16 0 XFP
DWD
M
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
2 -3 -16 0 XFP
DWD
M
TN54PN
D2
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-
XFP
2 -3 -16 0 XFP
DWD
M
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
2 -3 -16 0 XFP
DWD
M
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2857
Board
Name
Access
Service
Type
Optical Module
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minimu
m
Receiver
Overloa
d (dBm)
Note
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimu
m (dBm)
TN11NS
3
OTU3/
OTU3e
500 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
ODB-PIN
0 -5 -16 0 -
500 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
DQPSK-PIN
0 -5 -16 0 -
TN52NS
3
OTU3/
OTU3e
500 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
ODB-PIN
0 -5 -16 0 -
500 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
DQPSK-PIN
0 -5 -16 0 -
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
DQPSK-PIN
0 -5 -16 0 -
TN54NS
3
OTU3/
OTU3e
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
ODB-PIN
0 -5 -16 0 -
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
DQPSK-PIN
0 -5 -16 0 -
TN55NS
3
OTU3/
OTU3e
60000ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-BPSK-PIN
0 -5 -16 0 -
TN54NS
4
Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK(HFEC,
RZ)-PIN
0 -5 -16 0 -
55000ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC,
RZ)-PIN
0 -5 -16 0 -
a: The 12800 ps/nm-PIN and 12800ps/nm-APD modules do not support pilot tone modulation mode.
b: Only TN12LWXS supports ETR/CLO services.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2858
Table C-4 Quick reference table for CWDM-side specifications of OTU boards
Board
Name
Access
Service
Type
Optical Module
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minimu
m
Overload
Point
(dBm)
Note
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimu
m (dBm)
TN11E
COM
GE 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate
(eSFP CWDM)-40 km
5 0 -19 -3 eSFP
CWD
M
(eSFP CWDM)-80 km
5 0 -28 -9 eSFP
CWD
M
TN11L
DGD
STM-16/
OTU1
1600 ps/nm-CWDM
NRZ-APD
2 -0.5 -28 -9 -
TN11L
DGS
STM-16/
OTU1
1600 ps/nm-CWDM
NRZ-APD
5 2.5 -28 -9 -
TN12L
DM
(eSFP CWDM)-80 km
5 0 -28 -9 eSFP
CWD
M
TN11L
QG
FEC 5G/
OTU5G
5 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-50 km
5 2 -18 0 eSFP
CWD
M
5 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-70 km
5 2 -28 -9 eSFP
CWD
M
TN13L
QM
(eSFP CWDM)-80 km
5 0 -28 -9 eSFP
CWD
M
TN11L
QMD
OTU1 1600 ps/nm-CWDM
NRZ-APD
2 -0.5 -28 -9 -
TN11L
QMS
OTU1 1600 ps/nm-CWDM
NRZ-APD
5 2.5 -28 -9 -
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2859
Board
Name
Access
Service
Type
Optical Module
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minimu
m
Overload
Point
(dBm)
Note
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimu
m (dBm)
TN11L
WX2
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/
GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/
SDI/ FE
1600 ps/nm-CWDM
NRZ-APD
5 2.5 -28 -9 -
TN11L
WXD
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/
GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/
SDI/ FE
1600 ps/nm-CWDM
NRZ-APD
2 -0.5 -28 -9 -
TN11L
WXS
TN12L
WXS
a
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/
GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/
SDI/ FE/
ETR/ CLO
1600 ps/nm-CWDM
NRZ-APD
5 2.5 -28 -9 -
a: Only TN12LWXS supports ETR/CLO services.

Table C-5 Quick reference table for specifications of WDM-side gray optical modules on OTU boards and line
boards
Board
Name
Access
Service
Type
Optical Module
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minimu
m
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Note
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimu
m (dBm)
TN11L
EM24
OTU2 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km -1 -6 -11 -1 XFP
OTU2/
OTU2e
10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 2 -1 -14 -1 XFP
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2860
Board
Name
Access
Service
Type
Optical Module
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minimu
m
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Note
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimu
m (dBm)
10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km 4 0 -24 -7 XFP
TN11L
EX4
OTU2/
OTU2e
TN11L
OA
OTU2/
OTU2e
TN12L
OG
OTU2/
OTU2e
TN12T
MX
OTU2/
OTU2e
TN12N
D2
OTU2/
OTU2e
TN53N
D2
OTU2/
OTU2e
TN55N
O2
OTU2/
OTU2e
TN51N
Q2
OTU2/
OTU2e
TN52N
Q2/
TN53N
Q2/
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2861
Board
Name
Access
Service
Type
Optical Module
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minimu
m
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Note
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimu
m (dBm)
TN54N
Q2
OTU2/
OTU2e
TN53N
S2
OTU2/
OTU2e
TN54P
ND2
TN54N
S3
OTU3/
OTU3e
40G Transponder 3 0 -6 3 -

C.2 Specification of Optical Amplifying Unit
The main specifications of the optical amplifier unit include the operating wavelength range,
channel gain, nominal input power range, nominal output power range and maximum output
power of a single wavelength.
Table C-6 Quick reference table for optical amplifier unit
Board
Name
Channel
Gain (dB)
Nomin
al
Chann
el Gain
(dB)
Input Power Range per Channel
(dBm)
Nominal single-
wavelength input optical
power (dBm)
40 channels 80 channels 40 channels 80 channels
OAU100 16 to 25.5 16 -32 to -14 -32 to -17 -14 -17
22 -32 to -20 -32 to -23 -20 -23
25.5 -32 to -23.5 -32 to -27.5 -23.5 -26.5
DAS1/
OAU101
20 to 31 20 -32 to -16 -32 to -19 -16 -19
26 -32 to -22 -32 to -25 -22 -25
31 -32 to -27 -32 to -30 -27 -30
OAU102 20 to 31 20 -32 to -19 -32 to -22 -19 -22
26 -32 to -25 -32 to -28 -25 -28
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2862
Board
Name
Channel
Gain (dB)
Nomin
al
Chann
el Gain
(dB)
Input Power Range per Channel
(dBm)
Nominal single-
wavelength input optical
power (dBm)
40 channels 80 channels 40 channels 80 channels
31 -32 to -30 -32 -30 -32
OAU103 24 to 36 24 -32 to -20 -32 to -23 -20 -23
29 -32 to -25 -32 to -28 -25 -28
36 -32 -32 -32 -32
OAU105 23 to 34 23 -32 to -16 -32 to -19 -16 -19
30 -32 to -23 -32 to -26 -23 -26
34 -32 to -27 -32 to -30 -27 -30
OAU106 16 to 23 16 -24 to -12 -24 to -15 -12 -15
19 -24 to -15 -24 to -18 -15 -18
23 -24 to -19 -24 to -22 -19 -22
OBU101 201.5 20 -32 to -20 -32 to -23 -20 -23
OBU103 231.5 23 -32 to -19 -32 to -22 -19 -22
OBU104 171.5 17 -32 to -17 -32 to -20 -17 -20
OBU205 231.5 23 -24 to -16 -24 to -19 -16 -19

Table C-7 Quick reference table for TN12OBU1P1
Board Name Total input power range at the
VI optical port(dBm)
power(dBm)
TN12OBU1P1 -30 to 7 9

Table C-8 Quick reference table for CRPC
Board Name Channel Gain (dB) Maximum Pump Power
(dBm)
G.652 fiber LEAF fiber
CRPC01 10 12 29
CRPC03 >10 N/A 29.5

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2863
Table C-9 Quick reference table for HBA
Board
Name
Channel
Gain (dB)
Typical Input Power of a Single
Wavelength (dBm)
Nominal
Input
Power
Range
(dBm)
Channel Allocation
(nm)
80
channels
40
channels
10
channels
HBA 291 -22 -19 -13 -25 to -3 1529 to 1561

Table C-10 Quick reference table for RAU1/RAU2
Board
Name
Gain range (dB) Max. OUT port optical
power (dBm)
G.652/G.
654A fiber
LEAF/G.653/
TWRS/TW-
C/TWPLUS/
SMFLS/G.
656/
TERA_LIGH
T fiber
G.654B fiber
RAU1 19 to 33 19 to 35 19 to 29 20
RAU2 30 to 41 32 to 43 27 to 37 20

C.3 Insertion Loss Specifications of Boards
This section provides the insertion loss specifications of boards.
Table C-11 Quick reference table for board insertion loss specifications
Board Name Insertion Loss (dB)
TN11MR2/TN21MR2 IN-MO
MI-OUT
1.0
Add/drop channel 1.5
TN11MR4/TN21MR4 IN-MO
MI-OUT
1.5
TN11MR8 IN-MO
MI-OUT
3.5
Add/drop channel 4
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2864
TN11MR8V IN-MO
MI-OUT
3
TN21CMR1 IN-MO
MI-OUT
0.8
Add/drop channel 1
TN11CMR2/TN21CMR2 IN-MO
MI-OUT
1.0
TN11CMR4/TN21CMR4 IN-MO
MI-OUT
1.0
Add/drop channel 2
TN11DMR1/
TN21DMR1
EIN-EMO
EMI-EOUT
WIN-WMO
WMI-WOUT
0.8
Add/drop channel 1
TN11SBM2 Add/drop channel 3
TN11D40/TN12D40 6.5
TN11D40V
8
a
TN21DFIU EIN-ETM
ERM-EOUT
WIN-WTM
WRM-WOUT
1.5
EIN-ETC
ERC-EOUT
WIN-WTC
WRC-WOUT
1
TN11FIU/TN12FIU/
TN13FIU/TN14FIU/
TN21FIU
IN-TM
RM-OUT
1.5
IN-TC
RC-OUT
1
TN11SFIU LINE1-SYS1 1.0
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2865
LINE2-SYS2
LINE1-OSC1 1.5
LINE1-OSC2
TN11ITL01 RE-OUT
RO-OUT
<4.5
IN-TE
IN-TO
<2.5
TN11ITL04 RE-OUT
RO-OUT
<3
IN-TE
IN-TO
<3
TN12ITL RE-OUT
RO-OUT
<4.5
IN-TE
IN-TO
<3.5
TN11M40/TN12M40 6.5
TN11M40V/TN12M40V
8
a
TN11DCP Transmit-end insertion
loss
Single mode 4
Multimode 4.5
Receive-end insertion loss Single mode 1.5
Multimode 2
TN12DCP Transmit-end insertion
loss
Single mode 4
TN11OLP Transmit-end insertion
loss
Single mode 4
Multimode 4.5
Multimode 2
TN12OLP Transmit-end insertion
loss
Single mode 4
Receive-end insertion loss Multimode 1.5
TN11SCS Wavelength dropping
insertion loss
Single mode 4
Multimode 4.5
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2866
Wavelength adding
insertion loss
Single mode 4
Multimode 4.5
TN11RDU9 IN-Drop(DM1-DM8) 12.5
ROA-Drop(DM1-DM8) 11.5
IN-EXPO 12.5
IN-TOA 1
TN11RMU9 EXPI-OUT 8.5
AMx
b
-TOA 12.5
a
ROA-OUT 1.5
TN11ROAM
Mx
c
-OUT 9
a
IN-DM 7
EXPI-OUT
14
a
IN-EXPO 3
TN12TD20
insertion loss difference IN-DMx
e
3
TN11TM20
AMx
f
-OUT 8
a
TN11WSD9/
TN12WSD9/TN13WSD9
IN-DMx
d
IN-EXPO
8
a
TN11WSM9/
TN12WSM9/
TN13WSM9
AMx
b
-OUT
EXPI-OUT
8
a
TN11WSMD2
AMx
b
-OUT 8
a
IN-DMx
d
4.5
TN11WSMD4/
TN12WSMD4
AMx
b
-OUT
IN-DMx
d
8
a
TN11WSMD9
AMx
b
/EXPI-OUT 8
a
IN-DMx
d
/EXPO
12
a: The value tested when the VOA attenuation is set to 0 dB.
b: AMx denotes AM1-AM8.
c: Mx denotes M1-M40.
d: DMx denotes DM1-DM8.
e: DMx denotes DM1-DM20.
f: AMx denotes AM1-AM20.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2867

C.4 MON Interface Optical Split Ratio
Certain boards of WDM equipment provide MON interfaces. A small number of supervisory
signals are split from the main-path signals and are output through MON for in-service
performance monitoring of the optical signals.
Table C-12 lists the ratio of the optical power of signals at MON to that of the main-path signals
of each type of board.
Table C-12 Ratio of the optical power of signals at MON to that of the main-path signals of each type of board
Board Name Ratio of MON Interface to Received
Signal in Main Path
Ratio of MON Interface to
Transmitting Signal in Main Path
CRPC - "MON"/"SYS" = 1/99 (20 dB)
D40 "MON"/"IN" = 10/90 (10 dB) -
D40V "MON"/"IN" = 10/90 (10 dB) -
DAS1 "MONR"/"SOUT" = 1/99 (20 dB) "MONT"/"LOUT"=1/99 (20 dB)
FIU - l TN11FIU/TN12FIU/TN13FIU01/
TN14FIU/TN21FIU: "MONT"/"LOUT"
= 1/99 (20 dB)
l TN13FIU02: "MONT"/"LOUT" =
0.1/99.9 (30 dB)
HBA - "MON"/"OUT" = 1/999 (30 dB)
ITL - "MON"/"OUT" = 10/90 (10 dB)
M40 - "MON"/"OUT" = 10/90 (10 dB)
M40V - "MON"/"OUT" = 10/90 (10 dB)
OAU1 - "MON"/"OUT" = 1/99 (20 dB)
OBU1 - "MON"/"OUT" = 1/99 (20 dB)
OBU2 - "MON"/"OUT" = 1/99 (20 dB)
RDU9 "MONI"/"EXPI" = 3/97 (15 dB) "MONO"/"EXPO" = 3/97 (15 dB)
RMU9 "MONI"/"EXPI" = 3/97 (15 dB) "MONO"/"TOA" = 3/97 (15 dB)
WSD9 "MONI"/"IN" = 3/97 (15 dB) "MONO"/"EXPO" = 3/97 (15 dB)
WSM9 "MONI"/"EXPI" = 3/97 (15 dB) "MONO"/"OUT" = 3/97 (15 dB)
WSMD2 "MONI"/"IN" = 3/97 (15 dB) "MONO"/"OUT" = 3/97 (15 dB)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2868
Board Name Ratio of MON Interface to Received
Signal in Main Path
Ratio of MON Interface to
Transmitting Signal in Main Path
TD20 - "MON"/"OUT"=1/99(20dB)
TM20 - "MONO"/"OUT"=3/97(15dB)
RAU1 - "MONO"/"OUT"=1/99(20dB)
"MONS"/"SYS"=1/99(20dB)
RAU2 - "MONO"/"OUT"=1/99(20dB)
"MONS"/"SYS"=1/99(20dB)

C.5 Basic Functions of OTUs, Tributary Boards, Line Boards
and Packet Service Boards
The main functions and features supported by OTUs, Tributary Boards, Line Boards, and Packet
Service Boards are wavelength conversion, cross-connection at the electrical layer, OTN
interfaces and ESC.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table C-13.
Table C-13 Basic functions of OTUs, Tributary Boards, Line Boards and Packet Service Boards
Board
Name
Tu
nab
le
Wa
vel
eng
th
Fu
ncti
on
ESC
Fun
ctio
n
AL
S
Fun
ctio
n
OT
N
Fun
ctio
n
FEC Encoding WDM
Specificati
on
Opt
ical
Mo
dul
e
PR
BS
on
the
Clie
nt
Sid
e
PR
BS
on
the
WD
M
Sid
e
FEC AF
EC
AF
EC-
2
HF
EC
SD
FEC
DW
DM
CW
DM
TN11E
COM
N N N N N N N N N N Y eSF
P
N N
TN54E
G16
N N N N N N N N N N N eSF
P
N -
TN54E
X2
N N N N N N N N N N N SFP
+
N -
TN11L4
G
Y Y Y Y Y N N N N Y N eSF
P
N N
TN11L
DGD
Y Y Y Y Y N N N N Y Y eSF
P
N N
TN11L
DGS
P
N N
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2869
Board
Name
Tu
nab
le
Wa
vel
eng
th
Fu
ncti
on
ESC
Fun
ctio
n
AL
S
Fun
ctio
n
OT
N
Fun
ctio
n
FEC Encoding WDM
Specificati
on
Opt
ical
Mo
dul
e
PR
BS
on
the
Clie
nt
Sid
e
PR
BS
on
the
WD
M
Sid
e
FEC AF
EC
AF
EC-
2
HF
EC
SD
FEC
DW
DM
CW
DM
TN11L
DM
N Y Y Y Y N N N N Y Y eSF
P
Y Y
TN11L
DMD
P
Y Y
TN11L
DMS
P
Y Y
TN12L
DX
Y Y Y Y Y N Y N N Y N XFP Y Y
TN11L
EM24
N Y Y Y Y N N N N Y N XFP
/SFP
+
N Y
TN11L
EX4
N Y Y Y Y N N N N Y N XFP
/SFP
+
N Y
TN11L
OA
Y Y Y Y Y N Y N N Y Y eSF
P/
SFP
+
Y Y
TN11L
OG
Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N Y N eSF
P
N Y
TN12L
OG
Y Y Y Y Y N Y N N Y N eSF
P
N Y
TN11L
OM
P
N Y
TN12L
OM
P
N Y
TN11L
QG
P
N Y
TN13L
QM
P
Y Y
TN11L
QMD
P
N Y
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2870
Board
Name
Tu
nab
le
Wa
vel
eng
th
Fu
ncti
on
ESC
Fun
ctio
n
AL
S
Fun
ctio
n
OT
N
Fun
ctio
n
FEC Encoding WDM
Specificati
on
Opt
ical
Mo
dul
e
PR
BS
on
the
Clie
nt
Sid
e
PR
BS
on
the
WD
M
Sid
e
FEC AF
EC
AF
EC-
2
HF
EC
SD
FEC
DW
DM
CW
DM
TN12L
QMD
P
Y Y
TN11L
QMS
P
N Y
TN12L
QMS
P
Y Y
TN12L
SC
Y Y Y Y N N N Y Y Y N CFP N Y
TN11L
SQ
Y Y Y Y Y N Y N N Y N N Y N
TN11L
SX
TN12L
SX
Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N Y N XFP Y Y
TN13L
SX
TN14L
SX
TN11L
SXL
Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N Y N N N N
TN12L
SXL
Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N Y N N Y N
TN15L
SXL
Y Y Y Y N N N Y N Y N N Y Y
TN11L
SXLR
TN12L
SXLR
Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N Y N N N N
TN11L
SXR
Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N Y N XFP N N
TN11L
TX
Y Y Y Y N N N Y Y Y N XFP Y Y
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2871
Board
Name
Tu
nab
le
Wa
vel
eng
th
Fu
ncti
on
ESC
Fun
ctio
n
AL
S
Fun
ctio
n
OT
N
Fun
ctio
n
FEC Encoding WDM
Specificati
on
Opt
ical
Mo
dul
e
PR
BS
on
the
Clie
nt
Sid
e
PR
BS
on
the
WD
M
Sid
e
FEC AF
EC
AF
EC-
2
HF
EC
SD
FEC
DW
DM
CW
DM
TN11L
WX2
Y Y Y N N N N N N Y Y eSF
P
N N
TN11L
WXD
P
N N
TN11L
WXS
TN12L
WXS
P
N N
TN11T
MX
P
Y Y
TN12T
MX
P
Y Y
TN11N
D2
Y Y N Y Y Y N N N Y N N - Y
TN12N
D2
Y Y N Y Y Y Y N N Y N XFP - Y
TN52N
D2
Y Y N Y Y Y Y N N Y N N - Y
TN53N
D2
Y Y N Y Y N Y N N Y N XFP - Y
TN55N
O2
N Y N Y Y N Y N N Y N XFP - Y
TN51N
Q2
N Y N Y Y N N N N Y N XFP - Y
TN52N
Q2
TN53N
Q2
TN54N
Q2
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2872
Board
Name
Tu
nab
le
Wa
vel
eng
th
Fu
ncti
on
ESC
Fun
ctio
n
AL
S
Fun
ctio
n
OT
N
Fun
ctio
n
FEC Encoding WDM
Specificati
on
Opt
ical
Mo
dul
e
PR
BS
on
the
Clie
nt
Sid
e
PR
BS
on
the
WD
M
Sid
e
FEC AF
EC
AF
EC-
2
HF
EC
SD
FEC
DW
DM
CW
DM
TN11N
S2
TN12N
S201M0
2
TN12N
S201M0
3
TN12N
S2T02
TN12N
S2T03
TN12N
S2T04
TN12N
S2T05
TN12N
S2A
TN12N
S2B
Y Y N Y Y N Y N N Y N N - Y
TN52N
S2T05
TN52N
S2T06
TN52N
S201M0
1
TN52N
S201M0
2
TN52N
S2T02
TN52N
S2T03
TN52N
S2T04
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2873
Board
Name
Tu
nab
le
Wa
vel
eng
th
Fu
ncti
on
ESC
Fun
ctio
n
AL
S
Fun
ctio
n
OT
N
Fun
ctio
n
FEC Encoding WDM
Specificati
on
Opt
ical
Mo
dul
e
PR
BS
on
the
Clie
nt
Sid
e
PR
BS
on
the
WD
M
Sid
e
FEC AF
EC
AF
EC-
2
HF
EC
SD
FEC
DW
DM
CW
DM
TN53N
S2
TN11N
S3
TN52N
S3
TN54N
S3
TN55N
S3
Y Y N Y N N N Y N Y N N - Y
TN54N
S4
Y Y N Y N N N Y Y Y N N - Y
TN54P
ND2
TN11T
BE
N N Y N N N N N N N N eSF
P
XFP
N -
TN11T
DG
N N Y Y N N N N N N N eSF
P
N -
TN11T
DX
TN12T
DX
N N Y Y N N N N N N N XFP Y -
TN52T
DX
N Y Y Y Y N N N N N N XFP Y -
TN53T
DX
TN54T
EM28
P/
SFP
+
N N
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2874
Board
Name
Tu
nab
le
Wa
vel
eng
th
Fu
ncti
on
ESC
Fun
ctio
n
AL
S
Fun
ctio
n
OT
N
Fun
ctio
n
FEC Encoding WDM
Specificati
on
Opt
ical
Mo
dul
e
PR
BS
on
the
Clie
nt
Sid
e
PR
BS
on
the
WD
M
Sid
e
FEC AF
EC
AF
EC-
2
HF
EC
SD
FEC
DW
DM
CW
DM
TN54T
HA
N Y Y Y Y N N N N N N eSF
P
Y -
TN54T
OA
P
Y -
TN11T
OM
TN52T
OM
P
Y Y
TN55T
OX
N Y Y Y Y N N N N N N SFP
+
Y -
TN11T
QM
P
N -
TN12T
QM
P
Y -
TN11T
QS
P
N -
TN11T
QX
N N Y Y N N N N N N N XFP Y -
TN52T
QX
TN53T
QX
TN55T
QX
TN54T
SC
N N Y Y Y N N N N N N CFP Y -
TN11T
SXL
N N Y Y N N N N N N N N N -
TN53T
SXL
N N Y Y N N N N N N N N Y -
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2875
Board
Name
Tu
nab
le
Wa
vel
eng
th
Fu
ncti
on
ESC
Fun
ctio
n
AL
S
Fun
ctio
n
OT
N
Fun
ctio
n
FEC Encoding WDM
Specificati
on
Opt
ical
Mo
dul
e
PR
BS
on
the
Clie
nt
Sid
e
PR
BS
on
the
WD
M
Sid
e
FEC AF
EC
AF
EC-
2
HF
EC
SD
FEC
DW
DM
CW
DM
TN54T
SXL
N N Y Y N N N N N N N CFP N -
TN54T
TX
N Y Y Y N N N N N N N SFP
+
Y -
TN52T
OG
P
N -
NOTE
l "Y" indicates that the OTU supports the function. "N" indicates that the OTU does not support the function
l The SCC board can automatically detect that the eSFP and XFP modules are installed and online. The following information
about the modules can be obtained through a query on the U2000: VendorName, BarCode, and type of optical interface.
l The boards using different FEC codes cannot interconnect with each other.

C.6 Loopback Function of OTUs, Tributary Boards, Line
Boards and Packet Service Boards
The OTUs, Tributary Boards, Line Boards, and Packet Service Boards support different types
of loopback.The OTUs, Tributary Boards, and Line Boards support different types of loopback.
Table C-14 Loopback function of OTUs, Tributary Boards, Line Boards and Packet Service Boards
Board Name Client-Side
Inloop
Client-Side
Outloop
WDM-Side
Inloop
WDM-Side
Outloop
Channel
loopback
ECOM Y Y Y N N
LDGD Y Y Y Y N
LDGS Y Y Y Y N
LDM Y Y Y Y N
LDMD Y Y Y Y N
LDMS Y Y Y Y N
LDX Y Y Y Y N
LOA Y Y N Y Y
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2876
Inloop
Client-Side
Outloop
WDM-Side
Inloop
WDM-Side
Outloop
Channel
loopback
LOG Y Y Y Y N
LOM Y Y Y Y N
LQG Y Y Y Y N
LQM Y Y Y Y N
LQMD Y Y Y Y N
LQMS Y Y Y Y N
LSQ Y Y Y Y N
LSC Y Y Y Y N
LSX Y Y Y Y N
TN11LSXL N N Y Y N
TN12LSXL/
TN15LSXL
Y Y Y Y N
LSXLR N N N N N
LSXR N N N N N
LTX Y Y Y Y N
LWX2 Y Y Y Y N
LWXD Y Y Y Y N
LWXS Y Y Y Y N
TMX Y Y Y Y N
ND2 N N Y Y Y
NO2 N N Y Y Y
NQ2 N N Y Y Y
NS2 N N Y Y Y
PND2 N N Y Y N
NS3 N N Y Y Y
NS4 N N Y Y Y
TDG Y Y N N N
TDX Y Y N N N
TEM28 Y Y N N N
THA Y Y N N Y
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2877
Inloop
Client-Side
Outloop
WDM-Side
Inloop
WDM-Side
Outloop
Channel
loopback
TOA Y Y N N Y
TOG Y Y N N N
TN11TOM Y Y Y Y N
TN52TOM Y Y Y Y Y
TOX Y Y N N N
TQM Y Y N N N
TQS Y Y N N N
TQX Y Y N N N
TSC Y Y N N N
TSXL Y Y N N N
TTX Y Y N N N
NOTE
"Y" indicates that the OTU supports the function. "N" indicates that the OTU does not support the function.

Table C-15 Loop function of the Ethernet boards
Board Name Interface Loop Mode
L4G Client side MAC inloop
PHY outloop
WDM side Inloop
Outloop
TBE 10GE optical interface MAC inloop
MAC outloop
PHY inloop
PHY outloop
GE optical interface MAC inloop
PHY inloop
GE electric interface MAC inloop
PHY inloop
PHY outloop
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2878
FE optical interface MAC inloop
PHY inloop
FE electric interface MAC inloop
PHY inloop
PHY outloop
TEM28 10GE optical interface MAC inloop
MAC outloop
PHY inloop
PHY outloop
PHY inloop
GE electric interface PHY inloop
PHY outloop
MAC inloop
FE electric interface PHY inloop
PHY outloop
MAC inloop
LEM24 10GE optical interface MAC inloop
MAC outloop
PHY inloop
PHY outloop
PHY inloop
PHY inloop
PHY outloop
FE optical interface MAC inloop
PHY inloop
FE electric interface MAC inloop
PHY inloop
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2879
PHY outloop
WDM side Inloop
Outloop
LEX4 10GE optical interface MAC inloop
MAC outloop
PHY inloop
PHY outloop
WDM side optical interface Inloop
Outloop
EG16 FE/GE optical interface MAC inloop
PHY inloop
PHY outloop
EX2 10GE optical interface MAC inloop
MAC outloop
PHY inloop
PHY outloop

C.7 Protection mode of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line
Boards
The OTUs, tributary boards, and line boards support protection function.
For detailed protection mode, refer to Table C-16.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2880
Table C-16 Protection mode of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards
Board
Name
Protection Mode
SW
SNC
P
VLA
N
SNC
P
OD
Uk
SNC
P
Clie
nt-
Side
1+1
Prote
ction
Intra-
Board
1+1
Protec
tion
OWS
P
Prote
ction
OD
Uk
SPRi
ng
Prot
ectio
n
Bo
ard
-
Le
vel
Pro
tect
ion
DB
PS
DL
AG
MS
SNCP
Tribut
ary
SNCP
ECOM N N N N N N N N N N N N
L4G Y Y N Y Y Y N N N N Y N
LDGD Y N N Y Y N N N N N N N
LDGS Y N N Y N Y N N N N N N
LDM N N N Y Y Y N N N N N N
LDMD N N N Y Y N N N N N N N
LDMS N N N Y N Y N N N N N N
LDX N N N Y Y Y N N N N N N
LEM24 N Y N Y Y N N N Y N N N
LEX4 N Y N Y Y N N N Y N N N
LOA N N N Y Y Y N N N N N N
LOG Y N N Y Y Y N N N N Y N
LOM N N N Y Y Y N N N N N N
LQG Y N N Y Y Y N N N N Y N
LQM Y N N Y Y Y N N N N Y N
LQMD Y N N Y Y N N N N N Y N
LQMS Y N Y Y N Y N N N N Y Y
LSC N N N Y Y N N N N N N N
LSQ N N N Y Y Y N N N N N N
LSX N N N Y Y Y N N N N N N
LSXL N N N Y
Y
a
Y
b
N N N N N N
LSXLR N N N N N N N N N N N N
LSXR N N N N N N N N N N N N
LTX N N N Y Y N N N N N N N
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2881
Board
Name
Protection Mode
SW
SNC
P
VLA
N
SNC
P
OD
Uk
SNC
P
Clie
nt-
Side
1+1
Prote
ction
Intra-
Board
1+1
Protec
tion
OWS
P
Prote
ction
OD
Uk
SPRi
ng
Prot
ectio
n
Bo
ard
-
Le
vel
Pro
tect
ion
DB
PS
DL
AG
MS
SNCP
Tribut
ary
SNCP
LWX2 N N N Y N Y N N N N N N
LWXD N N N Y Y N N N N N N N
LWXS N N N Y N Y N N N N N N
TMX N N N Y Y Y N N N N N N
ND2 N N Y N Y Y Y N N N N Y
NO2 N N Y N Y Y N N N N N Y
NQ2 N N Y N Y Y Y N N N N Y
NS2 N N Y N Y Y Y N N N N Y
NS3 N N Y N Y N Y N N N N Y
NS4 N N Y N Y N N N N N N Y
TBE Y Y N Y N N N Y Y Y Y N
TDG Y N Y Y N N N N N N Y N
TDX N N Y Y N N N N N N N Y
TEM28 N N Y N N N N N N Y Y N
THA N N Y Y N N N N N N N Y
TOA N N Y Y N N N N N N N Y
TOG N N Y Y N N N N N N N N
TOM Y N Y Y Y Y N N N N Y Y
TOX N N Y Y N N N N N N N Y
TQM Y N Y Y N N N N N N Y Y
TQS N N Y Y N N N N N N N Y
TQX N N Y Y N N N N N N N Y
TSC N N Y Y N N N N N N N N
TSXL N N Y Y N N N N N N N Y
TTX N N Y Y N N N N N N N Y
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2882
Board
Name
Protection Mode
SW
SNC
P
VLA
N
SNC
P
OD
Uk
SNC
P
Clie
nt-
Side
1+1
Prote
ction
Intra-
Board
1+1
Protec
tion
OWS
P
Prote
ction
OD
Uk
SPRi
ng
Prot
ectio
n
Bo
ard
-
Le
vel
Pro
tect
ion
DB
PS
DL
AG
MS
SNCP
Tribut
ary
SNCP
NOTE
a: The TN11LSXL does not support intra-board 1+1 protection.
b: TN54TSXL only supports client-side 1+1 protection and ODUk SNCP protection.
NOTE
"Y" indicates that the OTU supports the function. "N" indicates that the OTU does not support the function.

C.8 Electrical cross-connection of OTUs, Tributary Boards
and Line Boards
The OTUs, tributary boards, and line boards support electrical cross-connection.
For detailed electrical cross-connection functions, refer to Table C-17, Table C-18 and Table
C-19.
Table C-17 Electrical cross-connection of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards in OptiX OSN 8800
Board Name Electrical Cross-Connection
LDM N
LDMD N
LDMS N
LDX N
LEM24 N
LEX4 N
LOA N
LOG N
LOM N
LQM N
LQMD N
LQMS N
LSC N
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2883
LSQ N
LSX N
LSXL N
LSXLR N
LSXR N
LTX N
LWXS N
TMX N
ND2 16 x ODU0/8 x ODU1/4 x ODUflex/2 x ODU2/2 x ODU2e
NOTE
Only the TN53ND2 supports ODUflex.
NO2 64 x ODU0/32 x ODU1/8 x ODU2/8 x ODU2e
NQ2 32 x ODU0/16 x ODU1/8 x ODUflex//4 x ODU2/4 x ODU2e
NOTE
Only the TN53NQ2 supports ODUflex.
NS2 8 x ODU0/4 x ODU1/2 x ODUflex/1 x ODU2/1 x ODU2e
NOTE
Only the TN52NS2T04/TN52NS2T05/TN52NS2T06/TN52NS201M01/
TN52NS201M02/TN53NS2 support ODUflex.
NS3 32 x ODU0/16 x ODU1/4 x ODU2/4 x ODU2e/1 x ODU3
NOTE
Only the TN54NS3/TN55NS3 supports ODU3.
NS4 80 x ODU0/40 x ODU1/10 x ODU2/10 x ODU2e/2 x ODU3/1 x ODU4/80 x
ODUflex
TDX 2 x ODU2/2 x ODU2e/2x ODUflex
NOTE
Only the TN53TDX supports ODUflex.
TEM28 16 x ODU0/8 x ODU1/2 x ODU2/8 x ODUflex
THA 32 x ODU0/16 x ODU1
TOA 16 x ODU0/8 x ODU1/5 x ODUflex
TOM 8 x ODU0/4 x ODU1
TOX 8 x ODU2/8 x ODU2e
TQX 4 x ODU2/4 x ODU2e/4 x ODUflex
NOTE
Only the TN55TQX supports ODUflex.
TOG 8 x ODU0
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2884
TSC 1 x ODU4
TSXL 1 x ODU3
NOTE
Only the TN53TSXL/TN54TSXL supports ODU3
TTX 10 x ODU2/10 x ODU2e
"N" indicates that the OTU does not support the function.

Integrated Cross-Connection Distributed Cross-Connection
ECOM 1 x GE 1 x GE
L4G 4 x GE 4 x GE
LDGD 2 x GE 2 x GE
LDGS 2 x GE 2 x GE
LDM N N
LDMD N N
LDMS N N
LDX N N
LEM24 2 x 10GE N
LEX4 2 x 10GE N
LOA N N
LOG 8 x GE 8 x GE
LOM N N
LQG 4 x GE 4 x GE
LQM 4 x GE 4 x Any/ 4 x GE/1 x OTU1
LQMD 4 x GE 4 x Any/ 4 x GE/1 x OTU1
LQMS 4 x GE/1 x ODU1 4 x Any/ 4 x GE/1 x OTU1
LSC N N
LSQ N N
LSX N N
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2885
Integrated Cross-Connection Distributed Cross-Connection
LSXL N N
LSXLR N N
LSXR N N
LTX N N
LWX2 N N
LWXD N x
LWXS N N
TMX N N
ND2 8 x ODU1/2 x ODU2/2 x ODU2e N
NQ2 16 x ODU1/4 x ODU2/4 x ODU2e N
NS2 4 x ODU1/1 x ODU2/1 x ODU2e 4 x ODU1
NOTE
It is supported by TN11NS2.
NS3 4 x ODU2/4 x ODU2e N
TBE 16 x GE N
TDG 2 x GE/1 x ODU1 2 x GE/1 x ODU1
TDX 8 x ODU1/2 x ODU2/2 x ODU2e 8 x ODU1
TOG 4 x ODU1 4 x ODU1/
TN11TOM 8 x GE/4 x ODU1 8 x GE/1 x OTU1/8 x Any/4 x ODU1
TN52TOM 4 x ODU1 8 x GE/1 x OTU1/8 x Any
TQM 4 x GE/1 x ODU1 4 x GE/4 x Any/1 x ODU1/1 x OTU1
TQS 4 x ODU1 4 x ODU1
TQX 4 x ODU2/4 x ODU2e N
TSXL 4 x ODU2/4 x ODU2e
NOTE
Only the TN11TSXL supports ODU2/ ODU2e
N

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2886
ECOM 1 x GE
L4G 4 x GE
LDGD 2 x GE
LDGS 2 x GE
LDM N
LDMD N
LDMS N
LDX N
LOA N
LOG 8 x GE
LOM N
LQG 4 x GE
LQM 4 x Any/4 x GE
LQMD 4 x Any/4 x GE
LQMS 4 x Any/4 x GE
LSX N
LSXR N
LWX2 N
LWXD N
LWXS N
TMX N
NS2 4 x ODU1
TBE 16 x GE
TDG 2 x GE/1 x ODU1
TDX 8 x ODU1
TOG 4 x ODU1
TOM 8 x GE/8 x Any/4 x ODU1
TQM 4 x Any/1 x ODU1
TQS 4 x ODU1
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2887

C.9 Common Parameters Specified for Optical Interfaces of
OCS Boards
This topic describes common parameters specified for optical interfaces of OCS boards.
Table C-20 lists the common parameters specified for the white optical interfaces of the SDH
boards.
Table C-20 Common parameters specified for the white optical interfaces of the SDH boards
Board Name Optical Module Type
of
Fiber
Type of
Support
ed
Optical
Interfac
e
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivit
y (dBm)
Minimu
m
Overloa
d (dBm)
Minimu
m (dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
SLQ16 I-16 -10 -3 -18 -3 Single-
mode
LC
S-16.1 -5 0 -18 0 Single-
mode
LC
L-16.1 -2 3 -27 -9 Single-
mode
LC
L-16.2 -2 3 -28 -9 Single-
mode
LC
SLO16 I-16 -10 -3 -18 -3 Single-
mode
LC
S-16.1 -5 0 -18 0 Single-
mode
LC
L-16.1 -2 3 -27 -9 Single-
mode
LC
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2888
of
Fiber
Type of
Support
ed
Optical
Interfac
e
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivit
y (dBm)
Minimu
m
Overloa
d (dBm)
Minimu
m (dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
L-16.2 -2 3 -28 -9 Single-
mode
LC
SL64 I-64.1 -6 -1 -11 -1 Single-
mode
LC
S-64.2b -1 2 -14 -1 Single-
mode
LC
P1L1-2D
2
0 4 -24 -7 Single-
mode
LC
Le-64.2 2 4 -21 -8 Single-
mode
LC
V-64.2b
(OBU10
1 +
OBU101
+ DCU +
MR2)
-1
(without
the OBU,
DCU, or
MR2)
16 (with
the OBU,
DCU, or
MR2)
2 (without
the OBU,
DCU, or
MR2)
16 (with
the OBU,
DCU, or
MR2)
-17
(without
the OBU,
DCU, or
MR2)
-26 (with
the OBU,
DCU, or
MR2)
-1 Single-
mode
LC
SLD64 I-64.1 -6 -1 -11 -1 Single-
mode
LC
S-64.2b -1 2 -14 -1 Single-
mode
LC
SLH41 S-1.1 -15 -8 -28 -8 Single-
mode
LC
S-4.1 -15 -8 -28 -8 Single-
mode
LC
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2889
of
Fiber
Type of
Support
ed
Optical
Interfac
e
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivit
y (dBm)
Minimu
m
Overloa
d (dBm)
Minimu
m (dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
SF64 Ue-64.2c 1 2 -19 0 Single-
mode
LC
Ue-64.2d 1 2 -19 0 Single-
mode
LC
Ue-64.2e 1 2 -19 0 Single-
mode
LC
SF64A Ue-64.2c 1 2 -19 0 Single-
mode
LC
Ue-64.2d 1 2 -19 0 Single-
mode
LC
Ue-64.2e 1 2 -19 0 Single-
mode
LC
SLQ64 I-64.1 -6 -1 -11 -1 Single-
mode
LC
S-64.2b -1 2 14 -1 Single-
mode
LC
SFD64 Ue-64.2c 1 2 -19 0 Single-
mode
LC
Ue-64.2d 1 2 -19 0 Single-
mode
LC
Ue-64.2e 1 2 -19 0 Single-
mode
LC

Table C-21 lists the common parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the data boards.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2890
Table C-21 Common parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the data boards
of
Fiber
Type
of
Supp
orted
Optic
al
Interf
ace
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiv
er
Sensiti
vity
(dBm)
Mini
mum
Overl
oad
(dBm)
Minim
um
(dBm)
Maxim
um
(dBm)
N1EGSH 1000B
ase-LX
(10km)
9 3 20 3 Singl
e-
mode
LC
1000B
ase-SX
(0.5km
)
-9.5 3.5 18 0 Singl
e-
mode
LC
N3EAS2 10GB
ASE-
LR/
LW
-8.2 0.5 -12.6 -12.6 Singl
e-
mode
LC

C.10 Quick Reference of OCS Board Functions
This section describes the functions supported by different types of boards.
Table C-22 lists the functions supported by SDH boards.
Table C-22 Basic functions supported by SDH boards
Fun
ctio
n
ALS RE
G
Spe
cific
atio
ns
PRB
S
AU-
3
TC
M
FEC Enh
anc
ed
FEC
IEE
E
1588
v2
Fixe
d
Wa
vele
ngt
h
Col
ore
d
Wa
vele
ngt
h
Tun
able
Wa
vele
ngt
h
N4S
L64
Y N Y N N N N Y Y Y N
N4S
F64
Y N Y N N Y Y Y Y Y Y
N1S
F64
A
Y N N N N Y N N Y Y Y
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2891
Fun
ctio
n
ALS RE
G
Spe
cific
atio
ns
PRB
S
AU-
3
TC
M
FEC Enh
anc
ed
FEC
IEE
E
1588
v2
Fixe
d
Wa
vele
ngt
h
Col
ore
d
Wa
vele
ngt
h
Tun
able
Wa
vele
ngt
h
N4S
FD6
4
Y N Y N N Y Y Y Y Y Y
N4S
LD6
4
Y N Y N N N N Y N N N
N4S
LQ6
4
N4S
LQ1
6
N4S
LO1
6
N3S
LH4
1

Table C-23 lists the functions supported by Ethernet boards.
Table C-23 Basic functions supported by Ethernet boards
Fu
nc
tio
n
EP
L
E
V
PL
EP
L
A
N
E
V
PL
A
N
M
PL
S
L
A
G
D
L
A
G
Q
oS
ET
H-
O
A
M
(8
02.
1a
g)
ET
H-
O
A
M
(80
2.3
ah
)
Te
st
Fr
a
m
e
Qi
n
Q
R
M
O
N
IG
M
P
Sn
oo
pi
ng
IE
EE
15
88
v2
N1
E
GS
H
Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2892
Fu
nc
tio
n
EP
L
E
V
PL
EP
L
A
N
E
V
PL
A
N
M
PL
S
L
A
G
D
L
A
G
Q
oS
ET
H-
O
A
M
(8
02.
1a
g)
ET
H-
O
A
M
(80
2.3
ah
)
Te
st
Fr
a
m
e
Qi
n
Q
R
M
O
N
IG
M
P
Sn
oo
pi
ng
IE
EE
15
88
v2
N3
E
AS
2
Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N

C.11 Loopback Capabilities of OCS Boards
The SDH boards and Ethernet boards on the OptiX OSN 9560 support various types of
loopbacks.
Table C-24 lists the loopback capabilities of the SDH boards on the OptiX OSN 9560.
Table C-24 Loopback capabilities of the SDH boards
Board Port
Inloop
Port
Outloop
VC-4
Inloop
VC-4
Outloop
VC-3/VC-12
Outloop
N4SL64 Y Y Y Y N
N4SF64 Y Y Y Y N
N1SF64A Y Y Y Y N
N4SFD64 Y Y Y Y N
N4SLD64 Y Y Y Y N
N4SLQ64 Y Y Y Y N
N4SLQ16 Y Y Y Y N
N4SLO16 Y Y Y Y N
N3SLH41 Y Y Y Y N

Table C-25 provides the loopback capabilities of the Ethernet boards on the OptiX OSN 9560.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2893
Table C-25 Loopback capabilities of Ethernet boards
Board MAC-
layer
Outloo
p
MAC-
layer
Outloo
p
PHY-
layer
Outloo
p
PHY-
layer
Inloop
VC-4 Inloop/
Outloop
VC-3 Inloop/
Outloop
N1EGSH N Y N Y N N
N3EAS2 N Y N Y N N
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2894
D Parameter Reference
D.1 Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode
D.2 Board Mode (WDM Interface)
D.3 Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold
D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface)
D.5 Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s) (WDM Interface)
D.6 Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression
D.7 Ethernet Working Mode (WDM Interface)
D.8 FC Distance Extension (WDM Interface)
D.9 FEC Mode (WDM Interface)
D.10 FEC Working State (WDM Interface)
D.11 Flow Monitor (Ethernet Interface Attributes)
D.12 Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface)
D.13 Gain (dB) (WDM Interface)
D.14 Initial Variance Value Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) (WDM
Interface)
D.15 Laser Status (WDM Interface)
D.16 Line Rate
D.17 MAC Loopback
D.18 Maxmun Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface)
D.19 Minmun Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface)
D.20 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface)
D.21 Maximum Frame Length
D.22 Nominal Gain (dB) (WDM Interface)
D.23 Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Hardware Description D Parameter Reference
2895
D.24 Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)(WDM Interface)
D.25 PHY Loopback
D.26 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface)
D.27 Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface)
D.28 Port Mapping (WDM Interface)
D.29 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface)
D.30 Rated Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface)
D.31 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface)
D.32 Service Mode (WDM Interface)
D.33 Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) (WDM Interface)
D.34 Variance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) (WDM Interface)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2896
D.1 Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode
Description
Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode is selected when a port works in auto-negotiation mode.
Impact on the System
Auto-negotiation flow control cannot take effect if this parameter is set incorrectly.
Values
Board Name Value Range Default Value
TN11LEM24
TN11LEX4
TN54TEM28
l Disabled
l Enable Dissymmetric Flow
Control
l Enable Symmetric Flow
Control
l Enable Symmetric/
Dissymmetric Flow
Disabled

The following table lists the description of each value.
Value Description
Disabled Disables port flow control at both the transmit and receive
ends. (None)
Enable Dissymmetric Flow
Control
Enables dissymmetric flow control. (Asymmetric > Link
Partner)
Control
Enables symmetric flow control. (Symmetric)
Enable Symmetric/
Dissymmetric Flow
Enables either symmetric or dissymmetric flow control,
which is determined in the autonegotiation process.
(Asymmetric->Local Device)

Configuration Guidelines
Set this parameter properly based on actual service configurations.
Relationship with Other Parameters
This parameter is available only when the working mode of an Ethernet port is Auto-
negotiation mode.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2897
D.2 Board Mode (WDM Interface)
Description
Board Mode: Specifies the board mode depending on the service application scenario.
The board mode determines how a signal is transmitted inside the board, what functions the
board provides, and how the board works. Therefore, switching between different board modes
interrupts the running services on the board.
Values
The following table provides the parameter values of the ECOM board.
Value Range Default Value
Service Mode, HUB Mode HUB Mode

The following table describes the parameter values of the ECOM board.
Parameter Value Description
Service Mode In this mode, the ECOM board can aggregate eight FE
services into one GE service.
HUB Mode In this mode, the ECOM board can aggregate eight FE
services into one FE service.

The following table provides the parameter values of the TN12LQMS board.
NS1 Mode, LQM Mode LQM Mode

The following table describes the parameter values of the TN12LQMS board.
NS1 Mode In this mode, the TN12LQMS board serves as a line board
and adds/drops OTU1 signals in conjunction with a tributary
board.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2898
LQM Mode In this mode, the TN12LQMS board serves as an OTU board
and can aggregate four Any-rate signals into one OTU1
signal.

NOTE
The NS1 Mode value is valid only when the TN12LQMS board is deployed in an OptiX OSN 6800 subrack
or OptiX OSN 3800 subrack.
The following table provides the parameter values of the TN11TOM board.
Cascading Mode, Non-cascading Mode Non-cascading Mode

The following table describes the parameter values of the TN11TOM board.
Cascading Mode In this mode, only the RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 port pairs on
the board can be used as WDM side optical port pairs. The
board can multiplex up to six Any-rate signals into one OTU1
signal.
Non-cascading Mode In this mode, the RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8 port pairs on the board
can be used as WDM-side optical port pairs. The board can
multiplex up to four Any-rate signals into two OTU1 signals.

The following table provides the parameter values of the TN11LSXR/TN11LSXLR/
TN12LSXLR board.
Electrical Relay Mode, Optical Relay Mode Electrical Relay Mode

The following table describes the parameter values of the TN11LSXR/TN11LSXLR/
TN12LSXLR board.
Electrical Relay Mode When optical-layer and electrical-layer ASON are enabled, it
does not matter whether the Board Mode parameter is set to
Optical Relay Mode or Electrical Relay mode. The
parameter must be set to Optical Relay Mode for the line
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2899
Optical Relay Mode board in a non-ASON system; otherwise, end-to-end
management of ASON services is not available.

The following table provides the parameter values of the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN55NO2/
TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN54NS3/TN55NS3/TN54NS4 board.
Line Mode, Electrical Relay Mode, Optical
Relay Mode
Line Mode

The following table describes the parameter values of the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN55NO2/
TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN54NS3/TN55NS3/TN54NS4 board.
Line Mode The board serves as a line board.
Electrical Relay Mode The board serves as a regeneration unit.
When optical-layer and electrical-layer ASON are enabled, it
does not matter whether the Board Mode parameter is set to
Optical Relay Mode or Electrical Relay mode. The
parameter must be set to Optical Relay Mode for the line
board in a non-ASON system; otherwise, end-to-end
management of ASON services is not available.
Optical Relay Mode

Set the board mode depending on the actual service application scenario.
None.
D.3 Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold
Description
The Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold parameter specifies the percentage of broadcast
traffic in the bandwidth of a port. The broadcast packets beyond this percentage will be discarded.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2900
After suppression of broadcast packets is enabled, the flow of broadcast packets will be limited
according to the specified threshold. If the traffic of the broadcast packets exceeds the specified
threshold, the excess broadcast packets will be discarded.
Values
10%-100% 30%

Value Description
10% Indicates that the broadcast packets can
account for a maximum of 10% of the
bandwidth of a port.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2901
Value Description

This parameter is available only when Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression is set to
Enabled.
D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface)
Description
The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board.
The value can be set.
Applicable to the WDM side and client side of the optical transponder board.
When this parameter is set to Unused for a port, service alarms reported for this port will be
masked and the function for automatically disabling service-affecting settings is invalid for the
port.
Values
Used, Unused Used

Value Description
Used Indicates that the current channel is used.
Unused Indicates that the current channel is not used.

l This parameter is set to Used by default.
l Set this parameter to Unused when the current channel is not used for the moment.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2902
D.5 Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s) (WDM Interface)
Description
The Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s)sets the rate of the accessed service at the optical
interface on the client side of a board.
This parameter applies to the client side of the optical transponder board.
A SPEED_OVER alarm is reported when the rate of actually accessed services exceeds the set
value.
Values
Value Range Default Value Unit
The specific value range is
related to the board.
The specific value is related
to the board.
Mbit/s

The bearer rate of client-side services can be set only when the type of the client-side services
is set to Any/CBR_10G. The set value should be consistent with the rate of the actually accessed
services.
None.
D.6 Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression
Description
The Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression parameter determines whether to suppress the
traffic of broadcast packets.
After suppression of broadcast packets is enabled, the traffic of broadcast packets will be limited
according to the specified threshold. If the traffic of the broadcast packets exceeds the specified
threshold, the excess broadcast packets will be discarded.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2903
Values
Disabled, Enabled Disabled

Value Description
Enabled Indicates that the traffic of broadcast packets
is not limited.
Disabled Indicates that excess broadcast packets will
be discarded if the traffic of broadcast packets
exceeds the specified threshold.

Set this parameter only when you need to limit the traffic of broadcast services.
Suppression of broadcast packets is implemented only when this parameter is set to Enabled.
D.7 Ethernet Working Mode (WDM Interface)
Description
The Ethernet Working Mode parameter sets and queries the working mode of the Ethernet.
None.
Values
Auto-Negotiation, 1000M Full-Duplex Vary with different boards

l This parameter is valid only when the Service Type parameter is set to Ethernet service.
l The Ethernet working mode must be consistent with the mode set for the upstream services
of the customer.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2904
l If two ports are mutually protected, the Ethernet working mode must be consistent on the
active and standby ports.
None.
D.8 FC Distance Extension (WDM Interface)
Description
A flow control mechanism is applied between FC service client-side equipment and between
two FCE boards to provide the far-reaching function of FC services, which ensures that the
bandwidth does not decrease during long haul transmission of FC services. The FC Distance
Extension parameter indicates whether the FC distance extension function is enabled.
None.
Values
Enabled, Disabled -

Parameter Value Remarks
Enabled Indicates the FC distance extension function is enabled.
Disabled Indicates the FC distance extension function is disabled.

If the distance between the transmit and receive ends of FC services exceeds the maximum
transmission distance that the FC switch supports, the value of the parameter must be set to
Enabled.
This parameter is valid only when the Service Type parameter is set to FC services.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2905
D.9 FEC Mode (WDM Interface)
Description
The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface.
Different FEC modes have different capabilities of enhancing the SNR of the optical signal at
the receive end and support different extended distances of the repeater section.
Values
FEC, AFEC, HFEC, SDFEC Vary with different boards

FEC Mode of two interconnected boards must be the same.
According to the network design, set FEC Mode to a proper value.
In the case of expansion of an existing network or proper OSNR, FEC is recommended; in the
case of comparatively poor network performance and high OSNR requirement, AFEC is
recommended.
This parameter is available only when you set FEC Working State to Enabled.
For OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800, this parameter is automatically set to AFEC when you set
Service Type to 10GE LAN and Port Mapping to Bit Transparent Mapping(10.7G).
D.10 FEC Working State (WDM Interface)
Description
FEC Working State: Determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction
(FEC) function for an optical interface.
Disabling the FEC function affects the transmission distance.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2906
Values
Enabled, Disabled Varies according to boards.

The following table describes the parameter values.
Value Description
Enabled Indicates that the FEC function has been enabled for the board
optical interface.
Disabled Indicates that the FEC function has been disabled for the board
optical interface

The FEC Working State parameter at the transmit end must be consistent with that at the receive
end. Otherwise, this parameter is invalid.
D.11 Flow Monitor (Ethernet Interface Attributes)
Description
The Zero-Flow Monitor parameter specifies whether the traffic on a port is monitored.
After the zero traffic monitoring function is enabled, the port can report the zero traffic alarm
after the state of zero traffic lasts for a certain period. Hence, the user can check whether the
service is interrupted due to the fault on the equipment side.
Values
Enabled, Disabled Disabled

The following table provides the description of each value.
Value Description
Enabled The zero traffic monitoring function is enabled on the port.
Disabled The zero traffic monitoring function is disabled on the port.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2907
Set this parameter according to the actual requirement of the user. Set this parameter to
Enabled if the traffic on a port needs to be monitored.
D.12 Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface)
Description
The Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) parameter sets or queries the output optical power of
an optical amplifier board. If the fixed pump optical power value is smaller than the minimum
value or larger than the maximum value, the board might work abnormally.
Changing the value of Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) directly influences the optical power
of each wavelength on the line.
Values
5 dBm-30 dBm (continuously tunable) None.

Normally, the fixed pump optical power of the CRPC and ROP board should be larger than 23
dBm. The value is related to the system specifications.
Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) must be set within a range between Min. Fixed Pump
Optical Power (dBm) and Max. Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm). If the fixed pump optical
power value is beyond the range, the board might work abnormally.
D.13 Gain (dB) (WDM Interface)
Description
The Gain (dB) parameter queries the gain of an optical amplifier board, namely, the difference
of the output power (dBm) to the input power (dBm).
None.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2908
Values
20.0-40.0 None dB

None.
This parameter is different from the Nominal Gain parameter. The Nominal Gain parameter
indicates the gain of the signal optical power, excluding the noise power. The Gain parameter,
however, is only related to the power and includes the noise power. Therefore, if the noise power
occupies a large ratio and the input optical power is low, the gain queried exceeds the nominal
gain of the board.
D.14 Initial Variance Value Between Primary and
Secondary Input Power (dB) (WDM Interface)
Description
The Initial Variance Value Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) parameter
provides an option to set the reference value of the optical power variance between the primary
and secondary input optical interfaces of a board.
The value can be set.
During the judgment of switching conditions, if the absolute value of the variance between the
primary and secondary input power reaches the SF switching threshold, SF switching occurs.
The initial variance value is an important factor in calculating the optical power variance and
affects the service switching.
Values
-10.0 to 10.0 0 dB

After the optical power of the system is commissioned and is normal, set this parameter according
to the primary and secondary input optical power and the following formula:
Initial variance between primary and secondary input optical power = Initial input optical power
of the primary optical interface - Initial input optical power of the secondary optical interface
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2909
l The setting of the initial variance affects the calculation of the variance between current
primary and secondary input optical power. The formula for calculating the variance
between current primary and secondary input optical power is as follows:
l Variance between current primary and secondary input optical power = current input power
of the primary optical interface - current input power of the secondary optical interface -
initial variance between primary and secondary input optical power
If the variance between current primary and secondary input optical power exceeds the
value of the Variance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB)
parameter, the protection switching occurs.
D.15 Laser Status (WDM Interface)
Description
The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board.
This parameter directly determines whether the corresponding optical interface outputs optical
signals. If this parameter is set to Off, services are interrupted.
Values
For OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
On, Off For OTU boards:
l WDM side: On
l Client side: Off
For amplifier board: On

Value Description
On Indicates enabling the laser.
Off Indicates disabling the laser.

l Optical wavelength conversion unit
The normal service requires that the lasers on both WDM side and client side should
be opened.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2910
When installing and commissioning OTUs, you must set the Laser Status parameter
to Off to protect the downstream boards.
In the case of the OTUs configured with intra-board 1 + 1 optical channel protection or
client-side 1 + 1 protection, whether to enable or disable the laser on the board client
side is controlled by the NE software automatically. No manual setting is required.
l Optical amplifier board
In the case of the Raman board, you can set optical interface parameters only when the
laser is disabled.
NOTE
After the commissioning, you must set the Laser Status parameter to On.
NOTE
In the case of the inter-board 1+1 protection and client-side protection realized by the SCS board, the lasers
on the active and standby OTUs on the client side are open and closed respectively in the case of normal
operation. You must not enable the disabled laser manually. Otherwise, services will be interrupted.
NOTE
The parameter value of Laser Status is not restored automatically by the U2000. That is, after the board
is replaced, the parameter value is set to the default value.
To forcibly enable the laser on the U2000 during commissioning, you need to set the Automatic
Laser Shutdown parameter to Disabled.
D.16 Line Rate
Description
The Line Rate parameter provides an option to set the OTN line rate.
If the values of the Line Rate parameter for the transmit and receive boards are different, services
are unavailable.
Values
Standard Mode, Speedup Mode Vary with different boards

Value Description
Speedup Mode Corresponds to OTU2e or OTU3e for the WDM side.
Standard Mode Corresponds to OTU2 or OTU3 for the WDM side.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2911

l This parameter should be set according to the actual service mapping mode and the optical
signal rate on the network.
l When the WDM-side signal is OTU2e or OTU3e, or when the client-side signal is 10GE
LAN and Port Mapping is set to Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G) for the client-side
port, set this parameter to Speedup Mode. In any other cases, set this parameter to
Standard Mode.
l This parameter must be set to the same value at the transmit and receive ends.
l The values of the Line Rate parameter for the upstream and downstream boards must be
the same.
l In the case of the LSXLR, LSXR, TN12ND2(Relay Mode), TN52ND2(Relay Mode),
TN53ND2(Relay Mode), TN54NQ2(Relay Mode), TN53NQ2(Relay Mode), TN54NS3
(Relay Mode), TN55NS3(Relay Mode) boards, it is recommended that you set Enable
Auto-Sensing to Enabled. In this case, the system supports the FEC Type and Line
Rate of the received signals in auto-sensing mode, and thus no manual setting is required.
Configuration examples:
l Example 1:
As shown in Figure D-1, the 52ND2 works as a regeneration board.
When the 12LSX transmits/receives 10GE LAN services on the client side and Port
Mapping for the 12LSX is set to Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G). In this case,
Line Rate for the 52ND2 must be set to Speedup Mode.
In other cases, Line Rate for the 52ND2 must be set to Standard Mode.
Figure D-1 Example 1
M
U
X
D
M
U
X
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
12LSX 52ND2 12LSX
M
U
X
D
M
U
X
D
M
U
X
M
U
X

l Example 2:
As shown in Figure D-2, the 52ND2(1) and 52ND2(3) work as line boards, and the 52ND2
(2) works as a regeneration board.
When the 52TDX transmits/receives 10GE LAN services on the client side and Port
Line Rate for all the 52ND2 must be set to Speedup Mode.
In other cases, Line Rate for all the 52ND2 must be set to Standard Mode.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2912
52TDX
52ND2
(1)
52TDX
52ND2
(2)
52ND2
(3)
M
U
X
D
M
U
X
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
M
U
X
D
M
U
X
D
M
U
X
M
U
X

l Example 3:
As shown in Figure D-3, the 54NS3(1) and 54NS3(3) work as line boards, and the 54NS3
(2) works as a regeneration board.
When the 52TQX transmits/receives 10GE LAN services on the client side and Port
Line Rate for all the 54NS3 must be set to Speedup Mode.
In other cases, Line Rate for all the 54NS3 must be set to Standard Mode.
52TQX
54NS3
(1)
52TQX
54NS3
(2)
54NS3
(3)
M
U
X
D
M
U
X
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
M
U
X
D
M
U
X
D
M
U
X
M
U
X

l LSXLR and LSXR: This parameter can be set only when Enable Auto-Sensing is set to
Enabled.
l TN12ND2, TN52ND2, TN53ND2(Relay Mode), TN54NQ2(Relay Mode), TN53NQ2
(Relay Mode), TN54NS3(Relay Mode), TN55NS3(Relay Mode): This parameter can be
set only when Board Mode is set to Relay Mode and Enable Auto-Sensing is set to
Disabled.
D.17 MAC Loopback
Description
The MAC Loopback parameter specifies the MAC loopback state at an Ethernet port. With this
parameter, users can test whether equipment runs normally by creating a looped path at the MAC
layer and then sending and receiving signals over the path.
A MAC loopback is used for fault locating but can interrupt services.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2913
Values
Board Value Range Default Value
TN11LEM24
TN11LEX4
TN54TEM28
Inloop, Outloop, Non-
Loopback
Non-Loopback

Value Description
Non-Loopback Indicates that no loopback is configured.
Inloop Indicates that an internal loopback is configured for a port. In
this case, the port receives packets sent by itself.
Outloop Indicates that an internal loopback is configured for a port. In
this case, the port receives packets sent by itself.

l For a GE optical port, GE electrical port, FE optical port, and FE electrical port, an MAC
loopback can be set to only inloop.
l For a 10GE optical port, an MAC loopback can be set to either inloop or outloop.
l An inloop and an outloop cannot be configured at the same time at a port.
l By default a loopback is released automatically after it is configured at a port for five
minutes.
This parameter is available only when the Enable Port parameter is set to Enabled.
D.18 Maxmun Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) (WDM
Interface)
Description
The Maxmun Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) parameter is used to query the maximum
pump optical power that an optical amplifier board can fix.
None.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2914
Values
5 dBm-30 dBm l ROP: 28 dBm
l CRPC: 26 dBm

None.
If the configured value of Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) is larger than the value of Max.
Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm), the board might work abnormally.
D.19 Minmun Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) (WDM
Interface)
Description
The Minmun Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) parameter is used to query the minimum
pump optical power that an optical amplifier board can fix.
None.
Values
5 dBm-30 dBm 20 dBm

None.
If the configured value of Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) is smaller than the value of Min.
Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm), the board might work abnormally.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2915
D.20 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface)
Description
The Max. Packet Length parameter sets and queries the maximum packet length supported by
a board and is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet services.
Applicable to the client side of the optical transponder board.
For OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l A board may transparently transmit FE, GE, or 10GE services by encapsulating them in
GFP-T format. when the length of a data packet is greater than the preset Max. Packet
Length, this data packet will still be transparently transmitted.
l In case of transmission of GE or 10GE services in the GFP-F format, when the length of a
data packet is greater than the preset Max. Packet Length, the data packet is discarded.
Values
For OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1518-9600 9600

None.
When Service Type is GE or Port Mapping is MAC Transparent Mapping(10.7G) and the
length of a data packet is greater than the preset Max. Packet Length, the data packet is
discarded.
When Service Type is GE(GFP-T) or Port Mapping is Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G),
and the length of a data packet is greater than the preset Max. Packet Length, this data packet
will still be transparently transmitted.
D.21 Maximum Frame Length
Description
Maximum Frame Length (Ethernet Port Attribute) parameter specifies the maximum
transmission unit (MTU).
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2916
This parameter specifies the maximum length of a frame traversing a port. When the length of
a frame exceeds the specified maximum frame length, the frame will be discarded or the service
will be interrupted.
Values
Board Name Value Range Default
Value
Unit
TN11LEM24
TN11LEX4
TN54TEM28
1518-9600 1522 Byte

Set this parameter based on the actual service configurations.
It is recommended to set this parameter to a value that is equal to or greater than the maximum
length of a frame that users want to transmit.
This parameter is available only when the Enabled/Disabled parameter is set to Enabled.
D.22 Nominal Gain (dB) (WDM Interface)
Description
The Nominal Gain (dB) parameter specifies the desired gain of the signal optical power. This
parameter is used to indicate the relative value between the optical power of output signals and
the optical power of input signals, namely, the amplifying multiple of the signal optical power.
Modifying this parameter directly affects the output power of all wavelengths passing through
the amplifier board.
Values
l OptiX OSN 6800, OptiX OSN 3800 and OptiX OSN 8800
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2917
HBA: 29dB
OAU101: 20dB to 31dB, continuously
tunable
tunable
tunable
tunable
OBU101: 20dB
OBU103: 23dB
OBU104: 17dB
OBU205: 23dB
RAU1:
RAU2:
TD20: 23dB
The specific value is related to the module.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2918
l Huawei provides many types of OAU boards. The different gain ranges of an OAU board
of the same type are applicable to different application scenarios. For example, the gain
range of the OAU101/02 is 20 dB to 31 dB. The gain range from 20 dB to 26 dB is applicable
to the application scenarios with the dispersion compensation module (DCM). The gain
range from 26 dB to 31 dB is applicable to the application scenarios without the DCM.
l The gain range of the OAU103 is 24 dB to 36 dB and is mainly used in long-span links.
The gain range from 24 dB to 30 dB is used when the DCM is accessed. The gain range
from 31 dB to 36 dB is not recommended when the DCM is accessed.
l Nominal gain of a board = Maximum gain of a board - Insertion loss between the TDC and
RDC. The range of the nominal gain is related to the input optical power.
l If the intermediate insertion loss exceeds the maximum intermediate insertion loss of a
board, the board gain may not reach the nominal gain. In this case, the board locks the gain
according to the intermediate insertion loss.
The gain queried on the U2000 namely, the actually amplified signal optical power by the optical
amplifier board, or the actual gain measured through a meter may be different from the
configured nominal gain, because it is affected by device performance. This is because the optical
amplifier board actually locks the per-channel power instead of the total power. Noises are
generated when the power is amplified by the EDFA and the noise power is at a certain level.
In the case of high input power, the impact from the noise is small and the gain of the total power
is close to the per-channel gain. In the case of low input power, however, the impact from the
noise cannot be neglected. The total output power equals the sum of the signal optical power
and the noise power. The noise power and signal optical power can be assimilated because of
an increase in total gain. This is normal.
In the case of the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800, you can obtain the value range of the
Nominal Gain parameter of a board by querying the corresponding Upper Nominal Gain
Threshold (dB) and Lower Nominal Gain Threshold (dB) parameters.
D.23 Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode
Description
Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode is selected when a port works in non-
autonegotiation mode.
Non-autonegotiation flow control cannot take effect if this parameter is set incorrectly.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2919
Values
TN11LEM24
TN11LEX4
TN54TEM28
Receive Only
Disable

Value Description
Disabled Disables port flow control at both the transmit and receive
ends.
Control
Enables symmetric flow control frames (allows transmission
and receiving) in non-autonegotiation mode.
Send Only Enables only transmission of flow control frames in non-
Receive Only Enables only receiving of flow control frames in non-

Set this parameter properly according to actual service configurations.
This parameter is available only when the working mode of an Ethernet port is Non-
D.24 Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)(WDM
Interface)
Description
The Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) parameter sets the optical power attenuation of
a board channel so that the optical power of the output signals at the transmit end is within the
preset range.
None.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2920
Values
For OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Min. Attenuation Ratio -
Max. Attenuation Ratio
Max. Attenuation Ratio dB

l Optical multiplexer unit and optical demultiplexer unit
Before the commissioning, the attenuation ratio of each channel must be preset.
l Other board
The attenuation adjustment amplitude should not be very large.
It should be controlled within 2 dB compared with the original attenuation every time
the attenuation is adjusted in a new project.
During the expansion of a project or during maintenance, however, the attenuation
adjustment amplitude should be controlled within 0.5 dB compared with the original
attenuation when the attenuation is adjusted.
You can obtain the value range of this parameter of a board by querying the corresponding Max.
Attenuation Rate (dB) and Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameters.
D.25 PHY Loopback
Description
The PHY Loopback parameter specifies the PHY loopback state at an Ethernet port. With this
parameter, users can test whether equipment runs normally by creating a looped path at the PHY
layer and then sending and receiving signals over the path.
A PHY loopback is used for fault locating but interrupts services. When this parameter is set to
Inloop, the MAC Loopback parameter is automatically set to Non-Loopback. When the MAC
Loopback parameter is set to Inloop, this parameter is automatically set to Non-Loopback.
Values
TN11LEM24
TN11LEX4
TN54TEM28
Non-Loopback, Inloop Non-Loopback

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2921
Value Description
Non-Loopback Indicates that no loopback is configured.
Inloop Indicates that an internal loopback is configured for a
port. In this case, the port receives packets sent by itself.

l For a GE optical port, a PHY loopback can be set to only inloop; for a GE electrical port,
a PHY loopback can be set to either inloop or outloop.
l For a 10GE optical port, a PHY loopback can be set to either inloop or outloop.
l For an FE optical port, a PHY loopback can be set to only inloop; for an FE electrical port,
a PHY loopback can be set to either inloop or outloop.
l An inloop and an outloop cannot be configured at the same time at a port.
l By default, a loopback is released automatically after it is configured at a port for five
minutes.
This parameter is available only when the Enable Port parameter is set to Enabled.
D.26 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface)
Description
The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength.
The configured logical band must be consistent with the actual physical band. Otherwise, a
WAVEDATA_MIS alarm is reported.
Values
C, CWDM -

Value Description
C Indicates that the current working band is C band.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2922
Value Description
CWDM Indicates that the current working band is CWDM band.

None.
None.
D.27 Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency
(THz) (WDM Interface)
Description
The Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) parameter sets the
wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side
of a board.
If the wavelength is incorrectly set, the downstream services may not be normally received.
Values
C band
192.10 to 1196.05
(wavelength spacing: 50
GHz)
- THz

CWDM band
1271 to 1611(wavelength
spacing: 20 nm)
- nm

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2923
l In the case of the OTUs with a fixed wavelength, set the actual wavelength of the
wavelength conversion board.
l In the case of the OTUs with a variable wavelength, set the wavelength according to network
wavelength planning.
l The same wavelength must be used for a service in the receive and the transmit directions.
l If a service travels through multiple regeneration stations, it is recommended that these
regeneration sections use the same wavelength.
l It is recommended that the active and standby channels use the same wavelength when the
inter-board channel protection or client-side path protection is configured.
l The configured logical wavelength must be consistent with the actual physical wavelength.
Otherwise, a WAVEDATA_MIS alarm is reported.
l In the case of the optical tunable transponders, this parameter directly changes the physical
wavelength but cannot change the band.
l In the case of the optical untunable transponders, this parameter can change the logical
wavelength only.
l For the OptiX OSN 8800, OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800: Table D-1 lists the
wavelengths available for the CWDM system.
Table D-1 Nominal central wavelengths of the CWDM system
Wavelengt
h No.
Wavelength (nm) Wavelength
No.
Wavelength (nm)
11 1471 15 1551
12 1491 16 1571
13 1511 17 1591
14 1531 18 1611

None.
D.28 Port Mapping (WDM Interface)
Description
The Port Mapping parameter sets and queries the mapping mode of a port service.
None.
Values
For OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2924
Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G), MAC
Transparent Mapping (10.7 G)
Vary with different boards

Value Description
Bit Transparent Mapping
(11.1 G)
10GE LAN client signals are mapped into OTU2e signals by
increasing the OTU frame frequency. This mapping method
guarantees a desired FEC coding gain and correction
capability. However, this method generates a line rate of 11.1
Gbit/s, which is higher than the standard rate of OTU2 signals.
MAC Transparent Mapping
(10.7 G)
10GE LAN client signals are encapsulated using the GFP-F
method and are mapped into OTU2 signals using 10GE MAC
frames. This mapping method guarantees a desired FEC
coding gain and correction capability and generates a line rate
of 10.71 Gbit/s.
Bit Transparent Mapping
(10.7 G)
10GE LAN client signals are mapped into OTU2 signals using
certain FEC fields of standard OTU frames. In this mapping
method, some FEC fields are used to transmit signals.
Therefore, the FEC or AFEC coding gain of the signals and
FEC correction capability are somewhat reduced. This
method generates a line rate of 10.71 Gbit/s.

For OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l Services other than 10GE LAN do not require configuring the port mapping mode.
l "Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G)" and "Bit Transparent Mapping (10.7 G)" meet
customer requirement for transparent bit transport of 10GE LAN signals. If a 10GE LAN
signal is directly mapped into an OTU frame by means of bit transparent mapping, the
10GE LAN signal will overflow the OTU frame. Thus, to solve this problem, certain AFEC
fields are occupied by the 10GE LAN signal. This is why the AFEC encoding gain is low
and AFEC correction capability is comparatively poor for the signals in the AFEC field.
In the "Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G)" mode, transmission of signals are achieved by
increasing the OTU frame frequency. This ensures the encoding gain and correction
capability of FEC. In this mode, however, the bit rate is higher than the standard bit rate of
OTU2 signals.
l "MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7G)" is specific to transparent transmission of 10GE MAC
frames as required by customers. In this port mapping mode, a 10GE LAN signal is
encapsulated in the GFP-F format and then mapped into a standard OTU frame. This mode
supports transparent transmission of only client 10GE MAC frames. In this mode, the
signals are in standard OTU2 frames. In addition, the FEC/AFEC code pattern is applicable
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2925
to 10GE LAN services in this mode. Originally, the FEC/AFEC code pattern is intended
for 10G SDH services.
l The port mapping modes of the upstream and downstream board must be the same.
For OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l Relationship with the Line Rate parameter:
Set the parameter to Standard Mode when the value of this parameter is MAC
Transparent Mapping (10.7 G), or Bit Transparent Mapping (10.7 G).
Set the Line Rate parameter to Speedup Mode when the value of this parameter is Bit
l Relationship with the FEC Mode parameter:
When the parameter value is changed from MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G) or
Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G) to Bit Transparent Mapping (10.7 G), FEC
Mode automatically changes to AFEC.
NOTE
Users can also manually set the FEC Mode parameter based on the actual network requirements.
When the parameter value is changed from Bit Transparent Mapping (10.7 G) to Bit
Transparent Mapping (11.1 G) or MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G), FEC
Mode remains unchanged.
D.29 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface)
Description
The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status
of a board.
Applicable to the WDM side and client side of the optical transponder board.
The PRBS test belongs to the fault diagnosis function and affects channel services. After the
PRBS test is started, the services on the corresponding port are interrupted.
Values
Enabled, Disabled Disabled

Value Description
Enabled Indicates enabling the PRBS test.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2926
Value Description
Disabled Indicates disabling the PRBS test.

The PRBS test is only used for deployment commissioning. Set this parameter to Enabled during
network-wide commissioning and to Disabled after the deployment.
Different boards support different optical interface channels. After the command of enabling the
PRBS test is issued, an error is returned in case the optical interface channels do not support the
PRBS test.
D.30 Rated Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface)
Description
The Rated Optical Power (dBm) parameter provides an option to set and query the per-channel
rated optical power. It is a reference value for automatic adjustment of the optical power. When
the optical amplifier unit and ROADM unit are used in a network, this parameter is available
for the optical amplifier unit.
When the automatic adjustment of the optical power is enabled, this parameter affects the budget
of the optical power on the optical channel of the system.
Values
-30.0-30.0 The specific value is related
to the board
dBm

l The rated input and output optical power should be configured according to the actual
configurable input and output range of the optical amplifier unit and should be the same as
the input and output values measured when the optical amplifier unit runs normally.
None.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2927
D.31 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface)
Description
The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or
channels of a board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this
OTU board resides.
Applicable to the client side of the optical transponder board.
After this parameter is set, set SD Trigger Condition of the protection group in which the board
resides to Enabled. When the board receives alarms such as B1_SD, the system regards the
received alarms of the board as the switching trigger condition of the protection group. As a
result, switching occurs in the protection group.
Values
For OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG, None
None

Parameter Value Remarks
B1_SD Regeneration section (B1) signal degrade.
OTUk_DEG OTUk signal degrade.
ODUk_PM_DEG ODUk_PM signal degrade.
None No condition is configured for SD switching.

When SD switching is used against a small number of bit errors, the switching is rapidly
performed. Select the proper alarms as the switching trigger conditions depending on the service
status. The alarms, which can be selected as switching trigger conditions, at certain optical
interfaces and channels of a board vary with the board type. If one optical interface supports
various services, all the three alarms can be set as the SD switching conditions. When the service
type is changed, the board automatically counts the corresponding bit errors and reports an SD
alarm according to the actual service type.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2928
None.
D.32 Service Mode (WDM Interface)
Description
Service Mode: Specifies the service mode for a board.
None.
Values
For the L4G, LDGS, LDGD, and LQG boards:
OTN, SDH OTN

For the ND2, NQ2, and NS2 boards:
ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, Automatic Automatic

For the NS3 board:
ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, Mix, Automatic Automatic

For the LQM, TN12LQMD, TN12LQMS, TOM, THA, TOA, LOA, TTX and TQM boards:
Client Mode, OTN Mode Client Mode

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2929
l For the L4G, LDGS, LDGD, and LQG boards: Set the line-side service modes of the local
and remote boards to the same value. When the local board is connected to an SDH service
board on non-WDM equipment, set the line-side service mode to SDH.
l For the LQM, LQMD, LQMS, TOM, THA, TOA, LOA, TTX and TQM boards: When the
board is enabled to receive an OTN service on the client side, set this parameter to OTN
Mode. For any other client service types, set this parameter to Client Mode.
None.
D.33 Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) (WDM Interface)
Description
The Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) parameter queries the threshold value of the input
optical power, which can trigger a board to generate an optical power loss (MUT_LOS) alarm.
When the actual input optical power is lower than this threshold value, the board reports the
MUT_LOS alarm.
The alarm can be queried.
This parameter is used to determine whether the input optical power is lost for the protection
board, optical multiplexer unit and optical demultiplexer unit. If the optical power is lost, the
relevant alarm is reported. This facilitates fault diagnosis.
When the optical amplifier boards work in the gain locking mode, this parameter triggers the
boards to report the MUT_LOS alarm if the optical power is lost.
Values
Optical protection unit
-35.0 to -10.0 - dBm

Optical supervisory channel unit
-46.0 to -23.0 - dBm

For optical multiplexer unit, optical demultiplexer unit and amplifier board, the value can be
queried through the system.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2930
l Protection board
The default value is usually recommended, namely, -35 dB.
In special cases, you can set this parameter to any value within the allowed range
according to the actual situation.
None.
D.34 Variance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary
Input Power (dB) (WDM Interface)
Description
The Variance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Optical Power (dB)
parameter provides an option to set the optical power variance threshold of the primary and
secondary optical interfaces of a board. When the threshold is reached, signal fail (SF) occurs.
When the variance between the primary and secondary optical power exceeds the threshold, the
optical switch switches services to the channel with better optical power. The configured value
can be queried.
l In the OptiX OSN 8800, OptiX OSN 6800, OptiX OSN 3800, this parameter functions as
the SF switching threshold reference value for optical line protection (OLP), OTU + OLP/
DCP intra-board 1+1 protection and OLP/DCP client-side 1+1 protection.
l During the judgment of switching conditions, if the absolute value of the variance between
primary and secondary input power reaches the SF switching threshold, the SF switching
occurs. This parameter is used to ensure the service quality and enable services to work in
the channels with better signals.
l If the variance between the primary and secondary optical power exceeds the value of this
parameter, the POWER_DIFF_OVER alarm is generated. After the threshold is modified,
the corresponding alarm threshold also changes.
Values
0, 3.0 - 8.0 5 dB

l When the parameter value is 0, only LOS alarms are used as switching trigger conditions.
The input power difference between the working and protection channels does not trigger
a switching event.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2931
l It is recommended to set the threshold to 5 dB.
l In special cases, the threshold can be adjusted according to the actual situation.
l When the variance between the primary and secondary optical power reaches 5 dB, you
can properly increase the threshold if the services in the channel with lower optical power
are still normal. When the variance between the primary and secondary optical power is
far lower than 5 dB, you need to decrease the threshold properly if SF occurs.
None.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2932
E Glossary
Numerics
1+1 backup A backup method in which two components mirror each other. If the active component
goes down, the standby component takes over services from the active component to
ensure that the system service is not interrupted.
1000BASE-T An Ethernet specification that uses the twisted pair cable with the transmission speed as
1000 Mbit/s and the transmission distance as 100 meters.
3R reshaping, retiming, regenerating
A
AC alternating current
ACL See access control list.
ADM add/drop multiplexer
ADSL See asymmetric digital subscriber line.
AGC automatic gain control
AIS alarm indication signal
ALC link A piece of end-to-end configuration information, which exists in the equipment (single
station) as an ALC link node. Through the ALC function of each node, it fulfills optical
power control on the line that contains the link.
ALS See automatic laser shutdown.
ANSI See American National Standards Institute.
APE See automatic power equilibrium.
APS automatic protection switching
ASE amplified spontaneous emission
ASIC See application-specific integrated circuit.
ATM asynchronous transfer mode
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Hardware Description E Glossary
2933
American National
Standards Institute
(ANSI)
An organization that defines U.S standards for the information processing industry.
access control list
(ACL)
A list of entities, together with their access rights, which are authorized to access a
resource.
access layer A layer that connects the end users (or last mile) to the ISP network. The access layer
devices are cost-effective and have high-density interfaces. In an actual network, the
access layer includes the devices and cables between the access points and the UPEs.
active/standby
switchover
A troubleshooting technology. When an active device becomes faulty, services and
control functions are automatically switched over to the standby device to ensure the
normal running of the services and functions.
alarm cable A cable used to transmit visual or audio alarms.
alarm cascading The method of cascading alarm signals from several subracks or cabinets.
alarm output Node or other signals that are sent by an alarm controller to peripheral devices when an
alarm is reported.
alarm suppression A method to suppress alarms for the alarm management purpose. Alarms that are
suppressed are no longer reported from NEs.
application-specific
integrated circuit
(ASIC)
A special type of chip that starts out as a nonspecific collection of logic gates. Late in
the manufacturing process, a layer is added to connect the gates for a specific function.
By changing the pattern of connections, the manufacturer can make the chip suitable for
many needs.
asymmetric digital
subscriber line (ADSL)
A technology for transmitting digital information at a high bandwidth on existing phone
lines to homes and businesses. Unlike regular dialup phone service, ADSL provides
continuously-available, "always on" connection. ADSL is asymmetric in that it uses most
of the channel to transmit downstream to the user and only a small part to receive
information from the user. ADSL simultaneously accommodates analog (voice)
information on the same line. ADSL is generally offered at downstream data rates from
512 kbit/s to about 6 Mbit/s.
attenuation Reduction of signal magnitude or signal loss, usually expressed in decibels.
attenuator A device used to increase the attenuation of an Optical Fiber Link. Generally used to
ensure that the signal at the receive end is not too strong.
automatic laser
shutdown (ALS)
A technique (procedure) to automatically shutdown the output power of laser transmitters
and optical amplifiers to avoid exposure to hazardous levels.
automatic power
equilibrium (APE)
A function to automatically equalize channel optical power at the transmitter end,
ensuring a required optical power flatness and OSNR at the receiver end.
B
B/S browser/server
BBER background block error ratio
BC boundary clock
BDI See backward defect indication.
BGP Border Gateway Protocol
BIOS See basic input/output system.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2934
BIP See bit interleaved parity.
BIP-8 See bit interleaved parity-8.
BITS See building integrated timing supply.
BOM bill of materials
BPDU See bridge protocol data unit.
BPSK See binary phase shift keying.
BRAS See broadband remote access server.
BWS backbone wavelength division multiplexing system
backbone network A network that forms the central interconnection for a connected network. The
communication backbone for a country is WAN. The backbone network is an important
architectural element for building enterprise networks. It provides a path for the exchange
of information between different LANs or subnetworks. A backbone can tie together
diverse networks in the same building, in different buildings in a campus environment,
or over wide areas. Generally, the backbone network's capacity is greater than the
networks connected to it.
backplane An electronic circuit board containing circuits and sockets into which additional
electronic devices on other circuit boards or cards can be plugged.
backward defect
indication (BDI)
A function that the sink node of a LSP, when detecting a defect, uses to inform the
upstream end of the LSP of a downstream defect along the return path.
bandwidth A range of transmission frequencies a transmission line or channel can carry in a network.
In fact, the bandwidth is the difference between the highest and lowest frequencies in
the transmission line or channel. The greater the bandwidth, the faster the data transfer
rate.
basic input/output
system (BIOS)
Firmware stored on the computer motherboard that contains basic input/output control
programs, power-on self test (POST) programs, bootstraps, and system setting
information. The BIOS provides hardware setting and control functions for the computer.
binary phase shift
keying (BPSK)
2-phase modulation for carrier based on binary baseband signal. In this modulation mode,
the binary character 0 represents phase 0 of the carrier, and character 1 represents the
phase 180. The phase of character 0 is 0, and the phase of character 1 needs to be
specified. This is an absolute phase shift mode that uses different phases to represent
digital information.
bit The smallest unit of information handled by a hardware component. One bit expresses
a 1 or a 0 in a binary numeral, or a true or a false logical condition, and is represented
physically by an element such as a high or low voltage at one point in a circuit or a small
spot on a disk magnetized one way or the other. A single bit conveys little information
a human would consider meaningful. A group of eight bits, however, makes up a byte,
which can be used to represent many types of information, such as a letter of the alphabet,
a decimal digit, or other character.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2935
bit interleaved parity
(BIP)
A method of error monitoring. With even parity, the transmitting equipment generates
an X-bit code over a specified portion of the signal in such a manner that the first bit of
the code provides even parity over the first bit of all X-bit sequences in the covered
portion of the signal, the second bit provides even parity over the second bit of all X-bit
sequences within the specified portion, and so forth. Even parity is generated by setting
the BIP-X bits so that an even number of 1s exist in each monitored partition of the
signal. A monitored partition comprises all bits in the same bit position within the X-bit
sequences in the covered portion of the signal. The covered portion includes the BIP-X.
bit interleaved parity-8
(BIP-8)
Consists of a parity byte calculated bit-wise across a large number of bytes in a
transmission transport frame. Divide a frame is into several blocks with 8 bits (one byte)
in a parity unit and then arrange the blocks in matrix. Compute the number of "1" or "0"
over each column. Then fill a 1 in the corresponding bit for the result if the number is
odd, otherwise fill a 0.
bit/s See bits per second.
bits per second (bit/s) A rate at which the individual bits are transmitted through a communication link or
circuit. Its unit can be bit/s, kbit/s, and Mbit/s.
bridge A device that connects two or more networks and forwards packets among them. Bridges
operate at the physical network level. Bridges differ from repeaters because bridges store
and forward complete packets, while repeaters forward all electrical signals. Bridges
differ from routers because bridges use physical addresses, while routers use IP
addresses.
bridge protocol data
unit (BPDU)
Data messages exchanged across switches within an extended LAN that uses a spanning
tree protocol (STP) topology. BPDU packets contain information on ports, addresses,
priorities, and costs, and they ensure that the data reaches its intended destination. BPDU
messages are exchanged across bridges to detect loops in a network topology. These
loops are then removed by shutting down selected bridge interfaces and placing
redundant switch ports in a backup, or blocked, state.
broadband remote
access server (BRAS)
A new type of access gateway for broadband networks. As a bridge between backbone
networks and broadband access networks, BRAS provides methods for fundamental
access and manages the broadband access network. It is deployed at the edge of network
to provide broadband access services, convergence, and forwarding of multiple services,
meeting the demands for transmission capacity and bandwidth utilization of different
users. BRAS is a core device for the broadband users' access to a broadband network.
broadcast A means of delivering information to all members in a network. The broadcast range is
determined by the broadcast address.
broadcast address A network address in computer networking that allows information to be sent to all nodes
on a network, rather than to a specific network host.
building integrated
timing supply (BITS)
In the situation of multiple synchronous nodes or communication devices, one can use
a device to set up a clock system on the hinge of telecom network to connect the
synchronous network as a whole, and provide satisfactory synchronous base signals to
the building integrated device. This device is called BITS.
bus A path or channel for signal transmission. The typical case is that, the bus is an electrical
connection that connects one or more conductors. All devices that are connected to a
bus, can receive all transmission contents simultaneously.
byte A unit of computer information equal to eight bits.
C
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2936
CAR committed access rate
CBR See constant bit rate.
CE See customer edge.
CES See circuit emulation service.
CPRI See common public radio interface.
CPU See central processing unit.
CRC See cyclic redundancy check.
CSF Client Signal Fail
CSMA/CD See carrier sense multiple access with collision detection.
CV connectivity verification
CWDM See coarse wavelength division multiplexing.
cabinet Free-standing and self-supporting enclosure for housing electrical and/or electronic
equipment. It is usually fitted with doors and/or side panels which may or may not be
removable.
carrier sense multiple
access with collision
detection (CSMA/CD)
Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) is a computer
networking access method in which:
l A carrier sensing scheme is used.
l A transmitting data station that detects another signal while transmitting a frame,
stops transmitting that frame, transmits a jam signal, and then waits for a random
time interval before trying to send that frame again.
central processing unit
(CPU)
The computational and control unit of a computer. The CPU is the device that interprets
and executes instructions. The CPU has the ability to fetch, decode, and execute
instructions and to transfer information to and from other resources over the computer's
main data-transfer path, the bus.
chain network One type of network that all network nodes are connected one after one to be in series.
circuit emulation
service (CES)
A function with which the E1/T1 data can be transmitted through ATM networks. At the
transmission end, the interface module packs timeslot data into ATM cells. These ATM
cells are sent to the reception end through the ATM network. At the reception end, the
interface module re-assigns the data in these ATM cells to E1/T1 timeslots. The CES
technology guarantees that the data in E1/T1 timeslots can be recovered to the original
sequence at the reception end.
client trail A lower level trail in a structure where trails of different levels have an inclusion relation.
For example, a trail of a certain level contains multiple trails of lower levels.
clock source A device that provides standard time for the NTP configuration.
clock synchronization A process of synchronizing clocks, in which the signal frequency traces the reference
frequency, but the start points do not need to be consistent. This process is (also known
as frequency synchronization).
clock tracing The method of keeping the time on each node synchronized with a clock source in the
network.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2937
coarse wavelength
division multiplexing
(CWDM)
A signal transmission technology that multiplexes widely-spaced optical channels into
the same fiber. CWDM spaces wavelengths at a distance of several nm. CWDM does
not support optical amplifiers and is applied in short-distance chain networking.
collection A process of prompting a customer to pay outstanding bills.
common public radio
interface (CPRI)
A common standard of the key internal interface between the REC and the RE of the
wireless base station. This standard was established by Huawei, Ericsson, NEC, Siemens,
and Nortel in June 2003. It aims at standardizing the baseband and RF interface. The
CPRI has a set of mature standards, which advance the standard and equipment. The
major feature of the CPRI is that baseband is separated from RF to reduce the cost of
engineering, equipment room, and equipment.
configuration data A command file defining hardware configurations of an NE. With this file, an NE can
collaborate with other NEs in a network. Therefore, configuration data is the key factor
that determines the operation of an entire network.
connection point A reference point where the output of a trail termination source or a connection is bound
to the input of another connection, or where the output of a connection is bound to the
input of a trail termination sink or another connection. The connection point is
characterized by the information which passes across it. A bidirectional connection point
is formed by the association of a contradirectional pair.
consistency check A function that is used to check the consistency of service data and resource data between
two softswitches that have the dual homing relation. This ensures the consistency of
service data and resource data between the softswitches.
constant bit rate (CBR) A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. CBR transfers cells based on
the constant bandwidth. It is applicable to service connections that depend on precise
clocking to ensure undistorted transmission.
control VLAN A VLAN that transmits only protocol packets.
convergence layer A "bridge" between the access layer and the core layer. The convergence layer provides
the convergence and forwarding functions for the access layer. It processes all the traffic
from the access layer devices, and provides the uplinks to the core layer. Compared with
the access layer, the convergence layer devices should have higher performance, fewer
interfaces and higher switching rate. In the real network, the convergence layer refers to
the network between UPEs and PE-AGGs.
cross-connection The connection of channels between the tributary board and the line board, or between
line boards inside the NE. Network services are realized through the cross-connections
of NEs.
customer edge (CE) A part of the BGP/MPLS IP VPN model that provides interfaces for directly connecting
to the Service Provider (SP) network. A CE can be a router, switch, or host.
cyclic redundancy
check (CRC)
A procedure used to check for errors in data transmission. CRC error checking uses a
complex calculation to generate a number based on the data transmitted. The sending
device performs the calculation before performing the transmission and includes the
generated number in the packet it sends to the receiving device. The receiving device
then repeats the same calculation. If both devices obtain the same result, the transmission
is considered to be error free. This procedure is known as a redundancy check because
each transmission includes not only data but extra (redundant) error-checking values.
D
DAPI destination access point identifier
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2938
DBPS distributed board protect system
DC direct current
DC-C See DC-return common (with ground).
DC-I See DC-return isolate (with ground).
DC-return common
(with ground) (DC-C)
A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with
the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and also on the line between
the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.
DC-return isolate (with
ground) (DC-I)
A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with
the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and is isolated from the PGND
on the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.
DCC See data communications channel.
DCM See dispersion compensation module.
DCN See data communication network.
DGD differential group delay
DLAG See distributed link aggregation group.
DRDB dynamic random database
DRZ differential phase return to zero
DSLAM See digital subscriber line access multiplexer.
DSP See digital signal processor.
DVB-ASI digital video broadcast-asynchronous serial interface
DWDM See dense wavelength division multiplexing.
data communication
network (DCN)
A communication network used in a TMN or between TMNs to support the data
communication function.
data communications
channel (DCC)
The data channel that uses the D1-D12 bytes in the overhead of an STM-N signal to
transmit information on the operation, management, maintenance, and provisioning
(OAM&P) between NEs. The DCC channel composed of bytes D1-D3 is referred to as
the 192 kbit/s DCC-R channel. The other DCC channel composed of bytes D4-D12 is
referred to as the 576 kbit/s DCC-M channel.
dense wavelength
division multiplexing
(DWDM)
The technology that utilizes the characteristics of broad bandwidth and low attenuation
of single mode optical fiber, employs multiple wavelengths with specific frequency
spacing as carriers, and allows multiple channels to transmit simultaneously in the same
fiber.
digital signal processor
(DSP)
A microprocessor designed specifically for digital signal processing, generally in real
time.
digital subscriber line
access multiplexer
(DSLAM)
A network device, usually situated in the main office of a telephone company, that
receives signals from multiple customer Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) connections and
uses multiplexing techniques to put these signals on a high-speed backbone line.
discrete service The cross-connection that exists on an NE but cannot form trails on the network
management system.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2939
dispersion
compensation module
(DCM)
A type of module that contains dispersion compensation fibers to compensate for the
dispersion of the transmitting fiber.
distributed link
aggregation group
(DLAG)
A board-level port protection technology that detects unidirectional fiber cuts and
negotiates with the opposite port. In the case of a link down failure on a port or hardware
failure on a board, services are automatically switched to the slave board, thereby
achieving 1+1 protection for the inter-board ports.
dual feed and selective
receiving
A channel used to transmit monitoring data on an optical transmission network. The
monitoring data is transmitted on the data communications channel as part of the
overhead of the service signal.
dual-ended switching A protection method in which switching is performed at both ends of a protected entity,
such as a connection or path, even if a unidirectional failure occurs.
E
E-LAN See Ethernet local area network.
E-Line See Ethernet line.
E1 An European standard for high-speed data transmission at 2.048 Mbit/s. It provides
thirty-two 64 kbit/s channels. A time division multiplexing frame is divided in to 32
timeslots numbered from 0 to 31. Timeslot 0 is reserved for frame synchronization, and
timeslot 16 is reserved for signaling transmission. The rest 30 timeslots are use as speech
channels. Each timeslot sends or receives an 8-bit data per second. Each frame sends or
receives 256-bit data per second. 8000 frames will be sent or received per second.
Therefore the line data rate is 2.048 Mbit/s.
ECC See embedded control channel.
EDFA See erbium-doped fiber amplifier.
EEPROM See electrically erasable programable read-only memory.
EMI See electromagnetic interference.
EPL See Ethernet private line.
EPLAN See Ethernet private LAN service.
EPLD See erasable programmable logical device.
EPON See Ethernet passive optical network.
ERPS Ethernet ring protection switching
ES edge server
ESC See electric supervisory channel.
ESCON See enterprise system connection.
ESD electrostatic discharge
ESN See equipment serial number.
ETS European Telecommunication Standards
ETSI See European Telecommunications Standards Institute.
EVOA electrical variable optical attenuator
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2940
EVPL See Ethernet virtual private line.
EVPLAN See Ethernet virtual private LAN service.
EXP See experimental bits.
Ethernet A LAN technology that uses the carrier sense multiple access with collision detection
(CSMA/CD) media access control method. The Ethernet network is highly reliable and
easy to maintain. The speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000
Mbit/s, or 10,000 Mbit/s.
Ethernet line (E-Line) A type of Ethernet service that is based on a point-to-point EVC (Ethernet virtual
connection).
Ethernet local area
network (E-LAN)
A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-multipoint EVC (Ethernet
virtual connection).
Ethernet passive
optical network
(EPON)
A passive optical network based on Ethernet. It is a new generation broadband access
technology that uses a point-to-multipoint structure and passive fiber transmission. It
supports upstream/downstream symmetrical rates of 1.25 Gbit/s and a reach distance of
up to 20 km. In the downstream direction, the bandwidth is shared based on encrypted
broadcast transmission for different users. In the upstream direction, the bandwidth is
shared based on TDM. EPON meets the requirements for high bandwidth.
Ethernet private LAN
service (EPLAN)
A type of Ethernet service provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer
networks. This service is carried over dedicated bandwidth between multipoint-to-
multipoint connections.
Ethernet private line
(EPL)
networks. This service is carried over dedicated bandwidth between point-to-point
connections.
Ethernet virtual
private LAN service
(EVPLAN)
networks. This service is carried over shared bandwidth between multipoint-to-
multipoint connections.
Ethernet virtual
private line (EVPL)
networks. This service is carried over shared bandwidth between point-to-point
connections.
European
Telecommunications
Standards Institute
(ETSI)
A standards-setting body in Europe. Also the standards body responsible for GSM.
eDQPSK enhanced differential quadrature phase shift keying
eSFP enhanced small form-factor pluggable
egress The egress LER. The group is transferred along the LSP consisting of a series of LSRs
after the group is labeled.
electric supervisory
channel (ESC)
A technology that implements communication among all the nodes and transmission of
monitoring data in an optical transmission network. The monitoring data of ESC is
introduced into DCC service overhead and is transmitted with service signals.
electrically erasable
programable read-only
memory (EEPROM)
A type of EPROM that can be erased with an electrical signal. It is useful for stable
storage for long periods without electricity while still allowing reprograming. EEPROMs
contain less memory than RAM, take longer to reprogram, and can be reprogramed only
a limited number of times before wearing out.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2941
electromagnetic
interference (EMI)
Any electromagnetic disturbance that interrupts, obstructs, or otherwise degrades or
limits the performance of electronics/electrical equipment.
embedded control
channel (ECC)
A logical channel that uses a data communications channel (DCC) as its physical layer
to enable the transmission of operation, administration, and maintenance (OAM)
information between NEs.
encapsulation A technology for layered protocols, in which a lower-level protocol accepts a message
from a higher-level protocol and places it in the data portion of the lower-level frame.
Protocol A's packets have complete header information, and are carried by protocol B
as data. Packets that encapsulate protocol A have a B header, an A header, followed by
the information that protocol A is carrying. Note that A could equal to B, as in IP inside
IP.
encryption A function used to transform data so as to hide its information content to prevent it's
unauthorized use.
enterprise system
connection (ESCON)
A path protocol that connects the host to various control units in a storage system.
Enterprise system connection is a serial bit stream transmission protocol that operates a
rate of 200 Mbit/s.
equalization A method of avoiding selective fading of frequencies. Equalization can compensate for
the changes of amplitude frequency caused by frequency selective fading.
equipment serial
number (ESN)
A string of characters that identify a piece of equipment and ensures correct allocation
of a license file to the specified equipment. It is also called "equipment fingerprint".
erasable
programmable logical
device (EPLD)
A logical array device which can be used to implement the required functions by
programming the array. In addition, a user can modify and program the array repeatedly
until the program meets the requirement.
erbium-doped fiber
amplifier (EDFA)
An optical device that amplifies optical signals. This device uses a short optical fiber
doped with the rare-earth element, Erbium. The signal to be amplified and a pump laser
are multiplexed into the doped fiber, and the signal is amplified by interacting with
doping ions. When the amplifier passes an external light source pump, it amplifies the
optical signals in a specific wavelength range.
experimental bits
(EXP)
A field in the MPLS packet header, three bits long. This field is always used to identify
the CoS of the MPLS packet.
extended ID The number of the subnet to which an NE belongs, used to identify different network
segments in a wide area network (WAN). Together, the ID and extended ID form the
physical ID of the NE.
eye pattern An oscilloscope display in which a digital data signal from a receiver is repetitively
sampled and applied to the vertical input, while the data rate is used to trigger the
horizontal sweep. It is so called because, for several types of coding, the pattern looks
like a series of eyes between a pair of rails.
F
FC See fiber channel.
FCS free cooling system
FDB See forwarding database.
FDDI See fiber distributed data interface.
FE fast Ethernet
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2942
FEC See forward error correction.
FICON See Fiber Connect.
FOADM fixed optical add/drop multiplexer
FPGA See field programmable gate array.
FTP File Transfer Protocol
Fiber Connect
(FICON)
A new generation connection protocol that connects the host to various control units. It
carries a single byte command protocol through the physical path of fiber channel, and
provides a higher transmission rate and better performance than ESCON.
fault alarm A type of alarm caused by hardware and/or software faults, for example, board failure,
or by the exception that occurs in major functions. After handling, a fault alarm can be
cleared, upon which the NE reports a recovery alarm. Fault alarms are of higher severity
than event alarms.
fiber channel (FC) A high-speed transport technology used to build SANs. FC is primarily used for
transporting SCSI traffic from servers to disk arrays, but it can also be used on networks
carrying ATM and IP traffic. FC supports single-mode and multi-mode fiber
connections, and can run on twisted-pair copper wires and coaxial cables. FC provides
both connection-oriented and connectionless services.
fiber distributed data
interface (FDDI)
A standard developed by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) for high-
speed fiber-optic LANs. FDDI provides specifications for transmission rates of 100
megabits per second on token ring networks.
field programmable
gate array (FPGA)
A semi-customized circuit that is used in the Application Specific Integrated Circuit
(ASIC) field and developed based on programmable components. FPGA remedies many
of the deficiencies of customized circuits, and allows the use of many more gate arrays.
forced switching The action of switching traffic signals between a working channel and protection
channel. The switching occurs even if the channel to which traffic is being switched is
faulty or an equal or higher priority switching command is in effect.
forward error
correction (FEC)
A bit error correction technology that adds correction information to the payload at the
transmit end. Based on the correction information, the bit errors generated during
transmission can be corrected at the receive end.
forwarding database
(FDB)
A type of database that Includes entries for guiding multicast data forwarding. There are
Layer 2 FDB and Layer 3 FDB. The Layer 2 FDB refers to the MAC table, which provides
information about the MAC address and outbound interface and guides Layer 2
forwarding. The Layer 3 FDB refers to the ARP table, which provides information about
the IP address and outbound interface and guides Layer 3 forwarding.
G
GCC general communication channel
GE Gigabit Ethernet
GFP See Generic Framing Procedure.
GMP Group Map Protocol
GMPLS generalized multiprotocol label switching
GNE See gateway network element.
GPON gigabit-capable passive optical network
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2943
GPS See Global Positioning System.
Generic Framing
Procedure (GFP)
A framing and encapsulated method that can be applied to any data type. GFP is defined
by ITU-T G.7041.
Global Positioning
System (GPS)
A global navigation satellite system that provides reliable positioning, navigation, and
timing services to users worldwide.
gain The difference between the optical power from the input optical interface of the optical
amplifier and the optical power from the output optical interface of the jumper fiber,
which expressed in dB.
gateway A device that connects two network segments using different protocols. It is used to
translate the data in the two network segments.
gateway network
element (GNE)
An NE that serves as a gateway for other NEs to communicate with a network
management system.
H
HD-SDI high definition serial digital interface
HSDPA See High Speed Downlink Packet Access.
High Speed Downlink
Packet Access
(HSDPA)
A modulating-demodulating algorithm put forward in 3GPP R5 to meet the requirement
for asymmetric uplink and downlink transmission of data services. It enables the
maximum downlink data service rate to reach 14.4 Mbit/s without changing the
WCDMA network topology.
handle A component of the panel. It is used to insert or remove boards in and out of slots.
hardware loopback A connection mode in which a fiber jumper is used to connect the input optical interface
of a board to the output optical interface of the board to achieve signal loopback.
hop A network connection between two distant nodes. For Internet operation a hop represents
a small step on the route from one main computer to another.
hot patch A patch that is used to repair a deficiency in the software or add a new feature to a program
without restarting the software and interrupting the service. For the equipment using the
built-in system, a hot patch can be loaded, activated, confirmed, deactivated, deleted, or
queried.
I
IANA See Internet Assigned Numbers Authority.
IC See integrated circuit.
ICMP See Internet Control Message Protocol.
ID See identity.
IEEE See Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers.
IETF Internet Engineering Task Force
IGMP See Internet Group Management Protocol.
IMA See inverse multiplexing over ATM.
IP Internet Protocol
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2944
IP address A 32-bit (4-byte) binary number that uniquely identifies a host connected to the Internet.
An IP address is expressed in dotted decimal notation, consisting of the decimal values
of its 4 bytes, separated with periods; for example, 127.0.0.1. The first three bytes of the
IP address identify the network to which the host is connected, and the last byte identifies
the host itself.
IP subnet A special submap used to identify an IP network segment. It is displayed as the submap
icon in the topological view.
IPA See intelligent power adjustment.
IPv4 See Internet Protocol version 4.
IPv6 See Internet Protocol version 6.
IS-IS See Intermediate System to Intermediate System.
ISDN integrated services digital network
ISO International Organization for Standardization
ITU-T International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication Standardization Sector
Institute of Electrical
and Electronics
Engineers (IEEE)
A professional association of electrical and electronics engineers based in the United
States, but with membership from numerous other countries. The IEEE focuses on
electrical, electronics, and computer engineering, and produces many important
technology standards.
Intermediate System to
Intermediate System
(IS-IS)
A protocol used by network devices (routers) to determine the best way to forward
datagram or packets through a packet-based network.
Internet Assigned
Numbers Authority
(IANA)
A department operated by the IAB. IANA delegates authority for IP address-space
allocation and domain-name assignment to the NIC and other organizations. IANA also
maintains a database of assigned protocol identifiers used in the TCP/IP suite, including
autonomous system numbers.
Internet Control
Message Protocol
(ICMP)
A network layer protocol that provides message control and error reporting between a
host server and an Internet gateway.
Internet Group
Management Protocol
(IGMP)
One of the TCP/IP protocols for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast
groups. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish and maintain
multicast group memberships.
Internet Protocol
version 4 (IPv4)
The current version of the Internet Protocol (IP). IPv4 utilizes a 32bit address which is
assigned to hosts. An address belongs to one of five classes (A, B, C, D, or E) and is
written as 4 octets separated by periods and may range from 0.0.0.0 through to
255.255.255.255. Each IPv4 address consists of a network number, an optional
subnetwork number, and a host number. The network and subnetwork numbers together
are used for routing, and the host number is used to address an individual host within the
network or subnetwork.
Internet Protocol
version 6 (IPv6)
An update version of IPv4, which is designed by the Internet Engineering Task Force
(IETF) and is also called IP Next Generation (IPng). It is a new version of the Internet
Protocol. The difference between IPv6 and IPv4 is that an IPv4 address has 32 bits while
an IPv6 address has 128 bits.
identity (ID) The collective aspect of the set of characteristics by which a thing is definitively
recognizable or known.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2945
indicator Description of a performance feature collected from the managed devices by the
performance collector.
integrated circuit (IC) A combination of inseparable associated circuit elements that are formed in place and
interconnected on or within a single base material to perform a microcircuit function.
intelligent power
adjustment (IPA)
A technology that reduces the optical power of all the amplifiers in an adjacent
regeneration section in the upstream to a safe level if the system detects the loss of optical
signals on the link. IPA helps ensure that maintenance engineers are not injured by the
laser escaping from a broken fiber or a connector that is not plugged in properly.
intersecting ring More than two public nodes between two ring networks. The network is more complex
if there are many intersecting nodes. Most devices support that two rings are intersected
at two nodes.
inverse multiplexing
over ATM (IMA)
A technique that involves inverse multiplexing and de-multiplexing of ATM cells in a
cyclical fashion among links grouped to form a higher bandwidth logical link whose rate
is approximately the sum of the link rates.
J
jitter The measure of short waveform variations caused by vibration, voltage fluctuations, and
control system instability.
jumper A connection wire for connecting two pins.
L
L2 switching The switching based on the data link layer.
L2VPN Layer 2 virtual private network
L3VPN Layer 3 virtual private network
LACP See Link Aggregation Control Protocol.
LAG See link aggregation group.
LAN See local area network.
LAPD link access procedure on the D channel
LB See loopback.
LC Lucent connector
LCAS See link capacity adjustment scheme.
LCT local craft terminal
LDP Label Distribution Protocol
LED See light emitting diode.
LMP link management protocol
LOS See loss of signal.
LP logical port
LPT link-state pass through
LSP See label switched path.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2946
LSR See label switching router.
LTC loss of tandem connection
Layer 2 switching A data forwarding method. In a LAN, a network bridge or 802.3 Ethernet switch
transmits and distributes packet data based on the MAC address. Since the MAC address
is at the second layer of the OSI model, this data forwarding method is called Layer 2
switching.
Link Aggregation
Control Protocol
(LACP)
A dynamic link aggregation protocol that improves the transmission speed and
reliability. The two ends of the link send LACP packets to inform each other of their
parameters and form a logical aggregation link. After the aggregation link is formed,
LACP maintains the link status in real time and dynamically adjusts the ports on the
aggregation link upon detecting the failure of a physical port.
label A short identifier that is of fixed length and local significance. It is used to uniquely
identify the FEC to which a packet belongs. It does not contain topology information. It
is carried in the header of a packet and does not contain topology information.
label switched path
(LSP)
A sequence of hops (R0...Rn) in which a packet travels from R0 to Rn through label
switching mechanisms. A label-switched path can be chosen dynamically, based on
common routing mechanisms or through configuration.
label switching router
(LSR)
Basic element of an MPLS network. All LSRs support the MPLS protocol. The LSR is
composed of two parts: control unit and forwarding unit. The former is responsible for
allocating the label, selecting the route, creating the label forwarding table, creating and
removing the label switch path; the latter forwards the labels according to groups
received in the label forwarding table.
light emitting diode
(LED)
A display and lighting technology used in almost every electrical and electronic product
on the market, from a tiny on/off light to digital readouts, flashlights, traffic lights, and
perimeter lighting. LEDs are also used as the light source in multimode fibers, optical
mice, and laser printers.
line rate The maximum packet forwarding capacity on a cable. The value of line rate equals the
maximum transmission rate capable on a given type of media.
linear MSP linear multiplex section protection
link aggregation group
(LAG)
An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a link
aggregation group so that a MAC client can treat the link aggregation group as if it were
a single link.
link capacity
adjustment scheme
(LCAS)
LCAS in the virtual concatenation source and sink adaptation functions provides a
control mechanism to hitless increase or decrease the capacity of a link to meet the
bandwidth needs of the application. It also provides a means of removing member links
that have experienced failure. The LCAS assumes that in cases of capacity initiation,
increases or decreases, the construction or destruction of the end-to-end path is the
responsibility of the network and element management systems.
link group According to some principles, links are divided into the set in the logical term. A set of
links is called the link group. The division makes management more convenient.
link protection Protection provided by the bypass tunnel for the link on the working tunnel. The link is
a downstream link adjacent to the point of local repair (PLR). When the PLR fails to
provide node protection, the link protection should be provided.
link status The running status of a link, which can be Up, Down, backup, or unknown.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2947
loading A process of importing information from the storage device to the memory to facilitate
processing (when the information is data) or execution (when the information is
program).
local area network
(LAN)
A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few square
kilometers or within a single building, featuring high speed and low error rate. Current
LANs are generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and run at 1,000
Mbit/s (that is, 1 Gbit/s).
loopback (LB) A troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to its source so that the
signal or message can be analyzed for errors. The loopback can be a inloop or outloop.
loopback test Self-test of chips, including internal and external loopback. Loopback test is used to test
whether interfaces work normally.
loss of signal (LOS) No transitions occurring in the received signal.
M
MAC mandatory access control
MAC address A link layer address or physical address. It is six bytes long.
MADM multiple add/drop multiplexer
MCA multi-channel spectrum analyzer unit
MD5 See message digest algorithm 5.
MFAS See multiframe alignment signal.
MIP maintenance association intermediate point
MPLS See Multiprotocol Label Switching.
MPLS TE multiprotocol label switching traffic engineering
MPLS VPN See multiprotocol label switching virtual private network.
MPLS-TP See multiprotocol label switching transport profile.
MS multiplex section
MSOH multiplex section overhead
MSP See multiplex section protection.
MSTP See Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol.
MTU See maximum transmission unit.
MUX See multiplexer.
Multiple Spanning
Tree Protocol (MSTP)
A protocol that can be used in a loop network. Using an algorithm, the MSTP blocks
redundant paths so that the loop network can be trimmed as a tree network. In this case,
the proliferation and endless cycling of packets is avoided in the loop network. The
protocol that introduces the mapping between VLANs and multiple spanning trees. This
solves the problem that data cannot be normally forwarded in a VLAN because in STP/
RSTP, only one spanning tree corresponds to all the VLANs.
Multiprotocol Label
Switching (MPLS)
A technology that uses short tags of fixed length to encapsulate packets in different link
layers, and provides connection-oriented switching for the network layer on the basis of
IP routing and control protocols.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2948
main topology A basic component of a human-machine interface. It is the default client interface of the
NMS and intuitively displays the structure of a network, NEs on the network, subnets in
the network as well as the NE communication and running status, reflecting the overall
network running status.
management node A management node consists of multiple document security management(DSM) servers
(four at most) in an area. Management nodes are created so that the DSM management
center can synchronize the department and account information of areas from each node
and then deliver all information to all nodes, thus realizing across-system authorization
and roaming access of security documents.
maximum transmission
unit (MTU)
The largest packet of data that can be transmitted on a network. MTU size varies,
depending on the network576 bytes on X.25 networks, for example, 1500 bytes on
Ethernet, and 17,914 bytes on 16 Mbit/s token ring. Responsibility for determining the
size of the MTU lies with the link layer of the network. When packets are transmitted
across networks, the path MTU, or PMTU, represents the smallest packet size (the one
that all networks can transmit without breaking up the packet) among the networks
involved.
member A basic element for forming a dimension according to the hierarchy of each level. Each
member represents a data element in a dimension. For example, January 1997 is a typical
member of the time dimension.
mesh group A group comprised of multiple MSDP peers, helping reducing the number of SA
messages transmitted between these MSDP peers.
message digest
algorithm 5 (MD5)
A hash function that is used in a variety of security applications to check message
integrity. MD5 processes a variable-length message into a fixed-length output of 128
bits. It breaks up an input message into 512-bit blocks (sixteen 32-bit little-endian
integers). After a series of processing, the output consists of four 32-bit words, which
are then cascaded into a 128-bit hash number.
monitoring A method that an inspector uses to inspect a service agent. By monitoring a service agent,
an inspector can check each detailed operation performed by the service agent during
the conversation and operate the GUI used by the service agent. The inspector helps the
service agent to provide better service.
mounting ear A piece of angle plate on a rack. The mounting ear has holes that can be used to fix
network elements or components.
multicast A process of transmitting data packets from one source to many destinations. The
destination address of the multicast packet uses Class D address, that is, the IP address
ranges from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. Each multicast address represents a multicast
group rather than a host.
multiframe alignment
signal (MFAS)
A distinctive signal inserted into every multiframe or once into every n multiframes,
always occupying the same relative position within the multiframe, and used to establish
and maintain multiframe alignment.
multiplex section
protection (MSP)
A function, which is performed to provide capability for switching a signal between and
including two multiplex section termination (MST) functions, from a "working" to a
"protection" channel.
multiplexer (MUX) Equipment that combines a number of tributary channels onto a fewer number of
aggregate bearer channels, the relationship between the tributary and aggregate channels
being fixed.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2949
multiplexing A procedure by which multiple lower order path layer signals are adapted into a higher
order path or the multiple higher order path layer signals are adapted into a multiplex
section.
multiprotocol label
switching transport
profile (MPLS-TP)
An extension to MPLS in terms of forwarding, OAM, reliability, NMS and control plane
protocol standardized by IETF to provide sufficient transport functionality.
multiprotocol label
switching virtual
private network
(MPLS VPN)
An Internet Protocol (IP) virtual private network (VPN) based on the multiprotocol label
switching (MPLS) technology. It applies the MPLS technology for network routers and
switches, simplifies the routing mode of core routers, and combines traditional routing
technology and label switching technology. It can be used to construct the broadband
Intranet and Extranet to meet various service requirements.
N
NE Explorer The main operation interface of the NMS, which is used to manage the
telecommunication equipment. In the NE Explorer, a user can query, manage, and
maintain NEs, boards, and ports.
NE ID An ID that indicates a managed device in the network. In the network, each NE has a
unique NE ID.
NE Panel A graphical user interface, of the network management system, which displays subracks,
boards, and ports on an NE. On the NE Panel, the user can complete most of the
configuration, management and maintenance functions for an NE.
NNI network node interface
NRZ non-return to zero
NSAP See network service access point.
NTP Network Time Protocol
network layer Layer 3 of the seven-layer OSI model of computer networking. The network layer
provides routing and addressing so that two terminal systems are interconnected. In
addition, the network layer provides congestion control and traffic control. In the TCP/
IP protocol suite, the functions of the network layer are specified and implemented by
IP protocols. Therefore, the network layer is also called IP layer.
network segment Part of a network on which all message traffic is common to all nodes; that is, a message
broadcast from one node on the segment is received by all other nodes on the segment.
network service A service that needs to be enabled at the network layer and maintained as a basic service.
network service access
point (NSAP)
A network address defined by ISO, at which the OSI Network Service is made available
to a Network service user by the Network service provider.
network storm A phenomenon that occurs during data communication. To be specific, mass broadcast
packets are transmitted in a short time; the network is congested; transmission quality
and availability of the network decrease rapidly. The network storm is caused by network
connection or configuration problems.
O
O&M operation and maintenance
OA optical amplifier
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2950
OADM See optical add/drop multiplexer.
OAM See operation, administration and maintenance.
OAMS Optical fiber line Automatic Monitoring System
OAU See optical amplifier unit.
OC ordinary clock
OC-3 optical carrier level 3
OCP optical channel protection
OCS optical core switching
OD optical demultiplexing
ODB optical duobinary
ODF optical distribution frame
ODUk optical channel data unit - k
OEQ optical equalizer
OLA optical line amplifier
OLP See optical line protection.
OM optical multiplexing
OMS optical multiplexing section
ONT See optical network terminal.
ONU See optical network unit.
OPA optical power adjust
OPU See optical channel payload unit.
OPUk optical channel payload unit - k
OSC See optical supervisory channel.
OSI open systems interconnection
OSN optical switch node
OSNR See optical signal-to-noise ratio.
OSPF See Open Shortest Path First.
OTM optical terminal multiplexer
OTN optical transport network
OTS See optical transmission section.
OTU See optical transponder unit.
OTUk optical channel transport unit - k
OWSP optical wavelength shared protection
Open Shortest Path
First (OSPF)
A link-state, hierarchical interior gateway protocol (IGP) for network routing that uses
cost as its routing metric. A link state database is constructed of the network topology,
which is identical on all routers in the area.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2951
operation,
administration and
maintenance (OAM)
A set of network management functions that cover fault detection, notification, location,
and repair.
optical add/drop
multiplexer (OADM)
A device that can be used to add the optical signals of various wavelengths to one channel
and drop the optical signals of various wavelengths from one channel.
optical amplifier unit
(OAU)
A board that is mainly responsible for amplifying optical signals. The OAU can be used
in both the transmitting direction and the receiving direction.
optical channel payload
unit (OPU)
A protection architecture that allows one wavelength to provide protection for multiple
services between different stations, saving wavelength resources and lowering costs.
optical interface A component that connects several transmit or receive units.
optical line protection
(OLP)
A mechanism that protects line signals using the dual feeding and selective receiving
principle, featuring single-ended switching.
optical network
terminal (ONT)
A device that terminates the fiber optical network at the customer premises.
optical network unit
(ONU)
A form of Access Node that converts optical signals transmitted via fiber to electrical
signals that can be transmitted via coaxial cable or twisted pair copper wiring to
individual subscribers.
optical signal-to-noise
ratio (OSNR)
The ratio of signal power to noise power in a transmission link. OSNR is the most
important index for measuring the performance of a DWDM system.
optical supervisory
channel (OSC)
A technology that uses specific optical wavelengths to realize communication among
nodes in optical transmission network and transmit the monitoring data in a certain
channel.
optical switch A passive component possessing two or more ports that selectively transmits, redirects,
or blocks optical power in an optical fiber transmission line.
optical transmission
section (OTS)
A section in the logical structure of an optical transport network (OTN). The OTS allows
the network operator to perform monitoring and maintenance tasks between NEs.
optical transponder
unit (OTU)
A device or subsystem that converts accessed client signals into a G.694.1/G.694.2-
compliant WDM wavelength.
orderwire A channel that provides voice communication between operation engineers or
maintenance engineers of different stations.
P
P2MP point-to-multipoint
P2P See point-to-point service.
PC personal computer
PCB See printed circuit board.
PDH See plesiochronous digital hierarchy.
PDL See polarization-dependent loss.
PDU See power distribution unit.
PE See provider edge.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2952
PGND cable A cable which connects the equipment and the protection grounding bar. Usually, one
half of the cable is yellow, whereas the other half is green.
PHB See per-hop behavior.
PID photonics integrated device
PIN See personal identification number.
PM performance monitoring
PMD polarization mode dispersion
PMU power monitoring unit
POS See packet over SDH/SONET.
POTS See plain old telephone service.
PPP Point-to-Point Protocol
PRBS See pseudo random binary sequence.
PSI payload structure identifier
PSN See packet switched network.
PT payload type
PTN packet transport network
PTP Precision Time Protocol
PTP clock See Precision Time Protocol clock.
PVC permanent virtual channel
PW See pseudo wire.
PWE3 See pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge.
Precision Time
Protocol clock (PTP
clock)
A type of high-decision clock defined by the IEEE 1588 V2 standard. The IEEE 1588
V2 standard specifies the precision time protocol (PTP) in a measurement and control
system. The PTP protocol ensures clock synchronization precise to sub-microseconds.
packet loss The discarding of data packets in a network when a device is overloaded and cannot
accept any incoming data at a given moment.
packet over SDH/
SONET (POS)
A MAN and WAN technology that provides point-to-point data connections. The POS
interface uses SDH/SONET as the physical layer protocol, and supports the transport of
packet data (such as IP packets) in MAN and WAN.
packet switched
network (PSN)
A telecommunications network that works in packet switching mode.
packet switching A network technology in which information is transmitted by means of exchanging
packets and the bandwidth of a channel can be shared by multiple connections.
paired slots Two slots of which the overheads can be passed through by using the bus on the
backplane.
per-hop behavior
(PHB)
IETF Diff-Serv workgroup defines forwarding behaviors of network nodes as per-hop
behaviors (PHB), such as, traffic scheduling and policing. A device in the network should
select the proper PHB behaviors, based on the value of DSCP. At present, the IETF
defines four types of PHB. They are class selector (CS), expedited forwarding (EF),
assured forwarding (AF), and best-effort (BE).
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2953
personal identification
number (PIN)
A code used by a mobile user in conjunction with a SIM card to complete a call.
phase The relative position in time within a single period of a signal.
physical layer Layer 1 in the Open System Interconnection (OSI) architecture; the layer that provides
services to transmit bits or groups of bits over a transmission link between open systems
and which entails electrical, mechanical and handshaking.
physical link The link between two physical network elements (NEs). When the user creates NEs or
refreshes the device status, the system automatically creates the physical link according
to the topology structure information on the device. The remark information of a physical
link can be modified, but the physical link cannot be deleted.
plain old telephone
service (POTS)
The basic telephone service provided through the traditional cabling such as twisted pair
cables.
plesiochronous digital
hierarchy (PDH)
A multiplexing scheme of bit stuffing and byte interleaving. It multiplexes the minimum
rate 64 kit/s into rates of 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, and 565 Mbit/s.
point-to-point service
(P2P)
A service between two terminal users. In P2P services, senders and recipients are
terminal users.
polarization-dependent
loss (PDL)
A measure of the peak-to-peak insertion loss or gain variation caused by a component
when stimulated by all possible polarization states. PDL is specified in dB.
policy A set of rules that are applied when the conditions for triggering an event are met.
port priority The priority that is used when a port attaches tags to Layer 2 packets. Packets received
on ports with higher priorities are forwarded preferentially.
power box A direct current power distribution box at the upper part of a cabinet, which supplies
power for the subracks in the cabinet.
power distribution unit
(PDU)
A unit that performs AC or DC power distribution.
power module The module that converts the external power input into the power supply for internal
use. Power modules are classified into AC power modules and DC power modules.
power on To start up a computer; to begin a cold boot procedure; to turn on the power
printed circuit board
(PCB)
A board used to mechanically support and electrically connect electronic components
using conductive pathways, tracks, or traces, etched from copper sheets laminated onto
a non-conductive substrate.
private line A line, such as a subscriber cable and trunk cable, which are leased by the
telecommunication carrier and are used to meet the special user requirements.
protection path A path in a protection group that transports services when a fault occurs on the working
path.
protection service A specific service that is part of a protection group and is labeled protection.
provider edge (PE) A device that is located in the backbone network of the MPLS VPN structure. A PE is
responsible for managing VPN users, establishing LSPs between PEs, and exchanging
routing information between sites of the same VPN. A PE performs the mapping and
forwarding of packets between the private network and the public channel. A PE can be
a UPE, an SPE, or an NPE.
pseudo random binary
sequence (PRBS)
A sequence that is random in the sense that the value of each element is independent of
the values of any of the other elements, similar to a real random sequence.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2954
pseudo wire (PW) An emulated connection between two PEs for transmitting frames. The PW is established
and maintained by PEs through signaling protocols. The status information of a PW is
maintained by the two end PEs of a PW.
pseudo wire emulation
edge-to-edge (PWE3)
An end-to-end Layer 2 transmission technology. It emulates the essential attributes of a
telecommunication service such as ATM, FR or Ethernet in a packet switched network
(PSN). PWE3 also emulates the essential attributes of low speed time division
multiplexing (TDM) circuit and SONET/SDH. The simulation approximates to the real
situation.
pulse A variation above or below a normal level and a given duration in electrical energy.
Q
QinQ A layer 2 tunnel protocol based on IEEE 802.1Q encapsulation. It add a public VLAN
tag to a frame with a private VLAN tag to allow the frame with double VLAN tags to
be transmitted over the service provider's backbone network based on the public VLAN
tag. This provides a layer 2 VPN tunnel for customers and enables transparent
transmission of packets over private VLANs.
QoS See quality of service.
quality of service (QoS) A commonly-used performance indicator of a telecommunication system or channel.
Depending on the specific system and service, it may relate to jitter, delay, packet loss
ratio, bit error ratio, and signal-to-noise ratio. It functions to measure the quality of the
transmission system and the effectiveness of the services, as well as the capability of a
service provider to meet the demands of users.
R
RADIUS See Remote Authentication Dial In User Service.
RADIUS
authentication
An authentication mode in which the BRAS sends the user name and the password to
the RADIUS server by using the RADIUS protocol. The RADIUS server authenticates
the user, and then returns the result to the BRAS.
RB See radio bearer.
RDI remote defect indication
RFC See Request For Comments.
RJ registered jack
RMON See remote monitor.
ROADM reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer
RSTP See Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol.
RSVP See Resource Reservation Protocol.
RTN radio transmission node
RX receive
RZ return to zero
Rapid Spanning Tree
Protocol (RSTP)
An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) that provides faster spanning tree
convergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward compatible with
the STP protocol.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2955
Remote Authentication
Dial In User Service
(RADIUS)
A security service that authenticates and authorizes dial-up users and is a centralized
access control mechanism. RADIUS uses the User Datagram Protocol (UDP) as its
transmission protocol to ensure real-time quality. RADIUS also supports the
retransmission and multi-server mechanisms to ensure good reliability.
Request For Comments
(RFC)
A document in which a standard, a protocol, or other information pertaining to the
operation of the Internet is published. The RFC is actually issued, under the control of
the IAB, after discussion and serves as the standard. RFCs can be obtained from sources
such as InterNIC.
Resource Reservation
Protocol (RSVP)
A protocol that reserves resources on every node along a path. RSVP is designed for an
integrated services Internet.
radio bearer (RB) The service provided by the Layer 2 for the transfer of user data between UE (User
Equipment) and UTRAN (UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network).
reboot To start the system again. Programs or data will be reloaded to all boards.
receiver sensitivity The minimum acceptable value of mean received power at point Rn (a reference point
at an input to a receiver optical connector) to achieve a 1x10-12 BER when the FEC is
enabled.
regeneration The process of receiving and reconstructing a digital signal so that the amplitudes,
waveforms and timing of its signal elements are constrained within specified limits.
remote monitor
(RMON)
A widely used network management standard defined by the IETF, and it enhances the
MIB II standard greatly. It is mainly used to monitor the data traffic over a network
segment or the entire network. RMON is completely based on the SNMP architecture,
including the NMS and the Agent running on each network device.
report A tool that displays data in a specific format to intuitively present service information.
resistance The ability to impede (resist) the flow of electric current. With the exception of
superconductors, all substances have a greater or lesser degree of resistance. Substances
with very low resistance, such as metals, conduct electricity well and are called
conductors. Substances with very high resistance, such as glass and rubber, conduct
electricity poorly and are called nonconductors or insulators.
response A message that is returned to the requester to notify the requester of the status of the
request packet.
ring network A network topology in which each node connects to exactly two other nodes, forming a
circular pathway for signals.
router A device on the network layer that selects routes in the network. The router selects the
optimal route according to the destination address of the received packet through a
network and forwards the packet to the next router. The last router is responsible for
sending the packet to the destination host. Can be used to connect a LAN to a LAN, a
WAN to a WAN, or a LAN to the Internet.
routing The determination of a path that a data unit (frame, packet, message) traverses from
source to destination.
routing table A table that stores and updates the locations (addresses) of network devices. Routers
regularly share routing table information to be up to date. A router relies on the
destination address and on the information in the table that gives the possible routes--in
hops or in number of jumps--between itself, intervening routers, and the destination.
Routing tables are updated frequently as new information is available.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2956
rule Rules define automatic management services or applications. Rules include triggering
conditions and execution logic. Triggering conditions refer to the conditions for
executing a rule and execution logic refers to a set of actions executed based on the rule.
S
S-VLAN service virtual local area network
SAN storage area network
SAPI source access point identifier
SD See signal degrade.
SD-SDI See standard definition-serial digital interface signal.
SDH See synchronous digital hierarchy.
SDI See serial digital interface.
SES severely errored second
SESR severely errored second ratio
SETS SDH equipment timing source
SF See signal fail.
SFP small form-factor pluggable
SFTP See Secure File Transfer Protocol.
SHDSL See single-pair high-speed digital subscriber line.
SLA See service level agreement.
SLM signaling link management
SM section monitoring
SMF See single-mode fiber.
SNC subnetwork connection
SNCP subnetwork connection protection
SNCTP subnetwork connection tunnel protection
SNMP See Simple Network Management Protocol.
SONET See synchronous optical network.
SPC soft permanent connection
SRG See shared risk group.
SRLG shared risk link group
SSL See Secure Sockets Layer.
SSM See Synchronization Status Message.
STI service trigger information
STM synchronous transfer mode
STM-1 See Synchronous Transport Module level 1.
STM-16 Synchronous Transport Module level 16
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2957
STM-4 Synchronous Transport Module level 4
STM-N Synchronous Transport Module level N
STP Spanning Tree Protocol
STS synchronous transport signal
Secure File Transfer
Protocol (SFTP)
A network protocol designed to provide secure file transfer over SSH.
Secure Sockets Layer
(SSL)
A security protocol that works at a socket level. This layer exists between the TCP layer
and the application layer to encrypt/decode data and authenticate concerned entities.
Simple Network
Management Protocol
(SNMP)
A network management protocol of TCP/IP. It enables remote users to view and modify
the management information of a network element. This protocol ensures the
transmission of management information between any two points. The polling
mechanism is adopted to provide basic function sets. According to SNMP, agents, which
can be hardware as well as software, can monitor the activities of various devices on the
network and report these activities to the network console workstation. Control
information about each device is maintained by a management information block.
Synchronization Status
Message (SSM)
A message that carries the quality levels of timing signals on a synchronous timing link.
SSM messages provide upstream clock information to nodes on an SDH network or
synchronization network.
Synchronous
Transport Module level
1 (STM-1)
Synchronous transfer mode at 155 Mbit/s.
security Protection of a computer system and its data from harm or loss. A major focus of
computer security, especially on systems accessed by many people or through
communication lines, is preventing system access by unauthorized individuals.
serial digital interface
(SDI)
An interface that transmits data in a single channel in sequence.
serial port An input/output location (channel) that sends and receives data to and from a computer's
CPU or a communications device one bit at a time. Serial ports are used for serial data
communication and as interfaces with some peripheral devices, such as mice and printers.
service data The user and/or network information required for the normal functioning of services.
service level The level of service quality of an evaluated party in a specified period, determined by
an evaluating party.
service level agreement
(SLA)
A service agreement between a customer and a service provider. SLA specifies the
service level for a customer. The customer can be a user organization (source domain)
or another differentiated services domain (upstream domain). An SLA may include
traffic conditioning rules which constitute a traffic conditioning agreement as a whole
or partially.
service protection A measure that ensures that services can be received at the receive end.
shared risk group
(SRG)
A group of resources that share a common risk component whose failure can cause the
failure of all the resources in the group.
signal degrade (SD) A signal indicating that associated data has degraded in the sense that a degraded defect
condition is active.
signal fail (SF) A signal indicating that associated data has failed in the sense that a near-end defect
condition (non-degrade defect) is active.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2958
single-ended switching A protection mechanism that takes switching action only at the affected end of the
protected entity in the case of a unidirectional failure.
single-mode fiber
(SMF)
A type of optical fiber through which only one type of optical signal with a fixed wave
length can travel at a time. The inner diameter of the single-mode fiber is less than 10
microns. This type of fiber can transmit data over a long distance.
single-pair high-speed
digital subscriber line
(SHDSL)
A symmetric digital subscriber line technology developed from HDSL, SDSL, and
HDSL2, which is defined in ITU-T G.991.2. The SHDSL port is connected to the user
terminal through the plain telephone subscriber line and uses trellis coded pulse
amplitude modulation (TC-PAM) technology to transmit high-speed data and provide
the broadband access service.
smooth upgrade Process of upgrading the system files without service interruption
span The physical reach between two pieces of WDM equipment.
standard definition-
serial digital interface
signal (SD-SDI)
Standard definition video signal transported by serial digital interface.
static route A route that cannot adapt to the change of network topology. Operators must configure
it manually. When a network topology is simple, the network can work in the normal
state if only the static route is configured. It can improve network performance and ensure
bandwidth for important applications. Its disadvantage is as follows: When a network is
faulty or the topology changes, the static route does not change automatically. It must
be changed by the operators.
steady on Pertaining to a state in which an indicator light is always illuminated and no flicker.
subnet A type of smaller networks that form a larger network according to a rule, for example,
according to different districts. This facilitates the management of the large network.
subnet mask The technique used by the IP protocol to determine which network segment packets are
destined for. The subnet mask is a binary pattern that is stored in the device and is matched
with the IP address.
synchronous digital
hierarchy (SDH)
A transmission scheme that follows ITU-T G.707, G.708, and G.709. SDH defines the
transmission features of digital signals, such as frame structure, multiplexing mode,
transmission rate level, and interface code. SDH is an important part of ISDN and B-
ISDN.
synchronous optical
network (SONET)
A high-speed network that provides a standard interface for communications carriers to
connect networks based on fiber optical cable. SONET is designed to handle multiple
data types (voice, video, and so on). It transmits at a base rate of 51.84 Mbit/s, but
multiples of this base rate go as high as 2.488 Gbit/s.
T
TCM tandem connection monitor
TCP See Transmission Control Protocol.
TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
TD transmit degrade
TDC tunable dispersion compensator
TDM See time division multiplexing.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2959
TF transport format
TFTP See Trivial File Transfer Protocol.
TIM trail trace identifier mismatch
TL1 Transaction Language 1
TM See terminal multiplexer.
TMN See telecommunications management network.
TPS protection The equipment level protection that uses one standby tributary board to protect N
tributary boards. When a fault occurs on the working board, the SCC issues the switching
command, and the payload of the working board can be automatically switched over to
the specified protection board and the protection board takes over as the working board.
After the fault is rectified, the service is automatically switched to the original board.
TSC test system controller
TTI trail trace identifier
TX transmit
Transmission Control
Protocol (TCP)
The protocol within TCP/IP that governs the breakup of data messages into packets to
be sent using Internet Protocol (IP), and the reassembly and verification of the complete
messages from packets received by IP. A connection-oriented, reliable protocol (reliable
in the sense of ensuring error-free delivery), TCP corresponds to the transport layer in
the ISO/OSI reference model.
Trivial File Transfer
Protocol (TFTP)
A small and simple alternative to FTP for transferring files. TFTP is intended for
applications that do not need complex interactions between the client and server. TFTP
restricts operations to simple file transfers and does not provide authentication.
tangent ring A concept borrowed from geometry. Two tangent rings have a common node between
them. The common node often leads to single-point failures.
telecommunications
management network
(TMN)
A protocol model defined by ITU-T for managing open systems in a communications
network. TMN manages the planning, provisioning, installation, and OAM of
equipment, networks, and services.
terminal multiplexer
(TM)
A device used at a network terminal either to multiplex multiple channels of low rate
signals into one channel of high rate signals, or to demultiplex one channel of high rate
signals into multiple channels of low rate signals.
threshold A limitation on an amount, scale, or level. Changes will occur when a threshold is
reached.
time division
multiplexing (TDM)
A multiplexing technology. TDM divides the sampling cycle of a channel into time slots
(TSn, n=0, 1, 2, 3), and the sampling value codes of multiple signals engross time slots
in a certain order, forming multiple multiplexing digital signals to be transmitted over
one channel.
tolerance Permissible degree of variation from a pre-set standard.
topology view A basic component for the man-machine interface. The topology view directly displays
the networking of a network as well as the alarm and communication status of each
network element and subnet. The topology view reflects the basic running conditions of
the network.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2960
traffic classification A function that enables you to classify traffic into different classes with different
priorities according to some criteria. Each class of traffic has a specified QoS in the entire
network. In this way, different traffic packets can be treated differently.
transmission delay The period from the time when a site starts to transmit a data frame to the time when the
site finishes the data frame transmission. It consists of the transmission latency and the
equipment forwarding latency.
transparent
transmission
A process during which the signaling protocol or data is not processed in the content but
encapsulated in the format for the processing of the next phase.
tunnel A channel on the packet switching network that transmits service traffic between PEs.
In VPN, a tunnel is an information transmission channel between two entities. The tunnel
ensures secure and transparent transmission of VPN information. In most cases, a tunnel
is an MPLS tunnel.
U
UAT See unavailable time event.
UNI See user-to-network interface.
UPI user payload identifier
UPM uninterruptible power module
unavailable time event
(UAT)
An event that is reported when the monitored object generates 10 consecutive severely
errored seconds.
unicast The process of sending data from a source to a single recipient.
unprotected Pertaining to the transmission of services that are not protected. Unprotected services
cannot be switched to the protection channel if the working channel is faulty or the service
is interrupted, because protection is not configured.
user-to-network
interface (UNI)
The interface between user equipment and private or public network equipment (for
example, ATM switches).
V
V-UNI See virtual user-network interface.
VB virtual bridge
VBR See variable bit rate.
VC See virtual container.
VCTRUNK A virtual concatenation group applied in data service mapping, also called the internal
port of a data service processing board.
VDSL2 See very-high-speed digital subscriber line 2.
VLAN virtual local area network
VOA variable optical attenuator
VPLS See virtual private LAN service.
VPN virtual private network
VPWS See virtual private wire service.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2961
VRRP See Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol.
VSI See virtual switch instance.
Virtual Router
Redundancy Protocol
(VRRP)
A protocol designed for multicast or broadcast LANs such as an Ethernet. A group of
routers (including an active router and several backup routers) in a LAN is regarded as
a virtual router, which is called a backup group. The virtual router has its own IP address.
The host in the network communicates with other networks through this virtual router.
If the active router in the backup group fails, one of the backup routers in this backup
group becomes active and provides routing service for the host in the network.
variable bit rate (VBR) One of the traffic classes used by ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode). Unlike a
permanent CBR (Constant Bit Rate) channel, a VBR data stream varies in bandwidth
and is better suited to non real time transfers than to real-time streams such as voice calls.
very-high-speed digital
subscriber line 2
(VDSL2)
An extension of the VDSL technology, which complies with ITU G.993.2, supports
multiple spectrum profiles and encapsulation modes, and provides short-distance and
high-speed access solutions to the next-generation FTTx access service.
view The topological view that is presented in some rules. Customize the view according to
requirements of every product and organize the data in the view displayed by the topology
module. By default, the platform provides the physical view. The topology view can be
planned according to the domain, maintenance relationship and so on.
virtual container (VC) An information structure used to support path layer connections in the SDH. A VC
consists of a payload and path overhead (POH), which are organized in a block frame
structure that repeats every 125 s or 500 s.
virtual private LAN
service (VPLS)
A type of point-to-multipoint L2VPN service provided over the public network. VPLS
enables geographically isolated user sites to communicate with each other through the
MAN/WAN as if they are on the same LAN.
virtual private wire
service (VPWS)
A technology that bears Layer 2 services. VPWS emulates services such as ATM, FR,
Ethernet, low-speed TDM circuit, and SONET/SDH in a PSN.
virtual switch instance
(VSI)
An instance through which the physical access links of VPLS can be mapped to the
virtual links. Each VSI provides independent VPLS service. VSI has Ethernet bridge
function and can terminate PW.
virtual user-network
interface (V-UNI)
A virtual user-network interface, works as an action point to perform service
classification and traffic control in HQoS.
W
WAN wide area network
WDM wavelength division multiplexing
WLAN See wireless local area network.
WSS wavelength selective switching
Web LCT The local maintenance terminal of a transport network, which is located at the NE
management layer of the transport network.
wireless local area
network (WLAN)
A hybrid of the computer network and the wireless communication technology. It uses
wireless multiple address channels as transmission media and carriers out data interaction
through electromagnetic wave to implement the functions of the traditional LAN.
working service A specific service that is part of a protection group and is labeled working.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2962
X
XCS cross-connect and synchronous timing board
Y
Y.1731 The OAM protocol introduced by the ITU-T. Besides the contents defined by
IEEE802.1ag, ITU-T Recommendation Y.173 also defines the following combined
OAM messages: Alarm Indication Signal (AIS), Remote Defect Indication (RDI),
Locked Signal (LCK), Test Signal, Automatic Protection Switching (APS), Maintenance
Communication Channel (MCC), Experimental (EXP), and Vendor Specific (VSP) for
fault management and performance monitoring, such as frame loss measurement (LM),
and delay measurement (DM).
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2963

OSN 8800 6800 3800 V100R007C02 Hardware Description 03

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

OSN 8800 6800 3800 V100R007C02 Hardware Description 03

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

G.657A2 FIBER ONLY

G.657A2 FIBER ONLY

Você também pode gostar